Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
2019.11.22-Lakeview-West End Heights-PERMIT DRAWINGS
2019.11.22-Lakeview-West End Heights-PERMIT DRAWINGS.pdf plan ARCHITECTURALSTUDIO plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 t001 TITLE SHEET 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 ABBREVIATIONS LOCATION MAP PROJECT SITE 701 WEST COURT STREET ITHACA, N.Y. 14850 ARCHITECT PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, P.C. 250 SOUTH AVENUE, SUITE 100 ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 phone| 585.454.4230 contact| MARK A. PANDOLF, AIA, LEED AP MEP & FP ENGINEER TURNER ENGINEERING, P.C. 1 WOODBURY BOULEVARD ROCHESTER, NY 14604 phone| 585.381.3360 contact| TROY McCLURE OWNER LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES, INC. 600 W. WASHINGTON STREET GENEVA, NEW YORK 14456 phone| 315.789.5501 contact| HARRY M. MERRYMAN, PH.D. STRUCTURAL & GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER ELWYN & PULMER CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 E SENECA STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 phone| 607.272.5060 contact| DAVID ELWYN, P.E. LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT TROWBRIDGE WOLF MICHAELS LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS, LLP 1001 W SENECA STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 phone| 607.277.1400 contact| PETER TROWBRIDGE CIVIL ENGINEER T.G. MILLER, P.C. ENGINEERS & SURVEYORS 203 N AURORA STREET ITHACA, NY 14850 phone| 607.272.6477 contact| ANDREW SCIARABBA, P.E. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER LECESSE CONSTRUCTION 15 CIRCLE STREET ROCHESTER, NY 14607 phone| 585.334.4490 contact| JASON SOCOLA SYMBOLS a000 1 a000 1 a000 1 a000 1 a000 BUILDING SECTION WALL SECTION SECTION DETAIL INTERIOR ELEVATION PLAN DETAIL WALL/PARTITION TYPE SPOT ELEVATION ABATEMENT KEYNOTE DEMOLITION KEYNOTE RENOVATION KEYNOTE ALTERNATE KEYNOTE DOOR REFERENCE WINDOW REFERENCE MATERIAL FINISH TAG TOILET ROOM FIXTURE/ ACCESSORY TAG FURNITURE / EQUIPMENT TAG REVISION TAG ROOM IDENTITY NORTH ARROW 1 a000 1 1 1 1 ALT 00 000.01 W1 000 1 N 01 ROOM NAME 101 000SF AB ANCHOR BOLT AC AIR CONDITIONING, ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR ACTACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADAAMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ADJADJACENT AFFABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ALUMALUMINUM AMAIR MONITOR CONTRACTOR ALUMALUMINUM ANODANODIZED ARCHARCHITECTURAL BDBOARD BOBOTTOM OF CBUCEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT CIRCCIRCUMFERENCE C.LCENTER LINE CLGCEILING CMUCONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COCLEAN OUT/CONC. OPENINGS CONTCONTINUOUS COLCOLUMN CONCCONCRETE CPTCARPET CTCERAMIC TILE DFDRINKING FOUNTAIN DIADIAMETER DIMDIMENSION DWGDRAWING EAEACH EIFSEXTERIOR INSULATION ELECELECTRICAL ELEVELEVATION EVPENGINEERED VINYL PLANK ETCETCETERA EWCELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXSTEXISTING EXTEXTERIOR FEFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FFFINISHED FLOOR FLRFLOOR FNDFOUNDATION FOFRAMED OPENING FOICFURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR GAGAUGE GALVGALVANIZED GBGRAB BAR GCGENERAL CONTRACTOR GYPGYPSUM BOARD HHIGH HBHOUSE BIB HCHOLLOW CORE HDRHEADER HDWRHARDWARE HMHOLLOW METAL HORIZHORIZONTAL HVACHEAT, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING HWHHOT WATER HEATER IDINSIDE DIAMETER INSULINSULATION INTINTERIOR JCJANITOR'S CLOSET LANGLE LAMLAMINATE LAVLAVATORY LBLLABEL LTLLINTEL LVRLOUVER MAXMAXIMUM MECHMECHANICAL MEMBMEMBRANE MINMINIMUM MANFMANUFACTURER MOMASONRY OPENING MTLMETAL NICNOT IN CONTRACT NTSNOT TO SCALE OC PCFPER CUBIC FOOT PFLPER LINEAR FOOT PLPROPERTY LINE PLAMPLASTIC LAMINATE PSFPER SQUARE FOOT PSIPOUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PTPAINT PTPRESSURE TREATED PLYWDPLYWOOD QTQUARRY TILE RRISER RCROOFING CONTRACTOR REINFREINFORCING REFREFER/REFERENCE RFGROOFING RFHROOF HATCH RLRAILING RMROOM ROROUGH OPENING SCWDSOLID CORE WOOD SCHSCHEDULE SIMSIMILAR SSSTAINLESS STEEL STDSTANDARD STLSTEEL STRUCTSTRUCTURAL SUSPSUSPENDED SYSSYSTEM TELTELEPHONE TTREAD TOTOP OF TYPTYPICAL UNFUNFINISHED UNOUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VBVINYL BASE VCTVINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERTVERTICAL VIFVERIFY IN FIELD VINVINYL VWCVINYL WALL COVERING VTVINYL TILE W/WITH WWIDE WBWOOD BASE WDWOOD ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS a101GROUND FLOOR PLAN a102SECOND FLOOR PLAN a103THIRD FLOOR PLAN a104FOURTH FLOOR PLAN a105FIFTH FLOOR PLAN a106ROOF PLAN a201GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN a202SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN a203THIRD FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN a204FOURTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN a205FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN a301EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS a302EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS a303EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS a400BUILDING SECTIONS a501WALL SECTIONS a502WALL SECTIONS a503DETAILS a504DETAILS a600ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS a601ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 1) a602ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 2) a603ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 3) a604ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 4) a605ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS a606ENLARGED STAIR PLANS a610SECTION DETAILS a701GROUND FLOOR FINISH PLAN AND MATERIAL LEGEND a702SECOND THROUGH FIFTH FLOOR FINISH PLAN AND MATERIAL LEGEND a800DOOR SCHEDULE a801STOREFRONT AND WINDOW SCHEDULE a802CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE DRAWING INDEXDRAWING INDEXDRAWING INDEX GENERAL DRAWINGS t001TITLE SHEET t002BUILDING CODE INFORMATION t003FIRE - RATING PLANS DRAWING INDEX SHEET #TITLESHEET #TITLESHEET #TITLESHEET #TITLE CIVIL DRAWINGS C101EXISTING CONDITIONS C102EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN C103UTILITY PLAN C104BUILDING LOCATION PLAN C201DETAILS C301MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC PLAN C302MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC PLAN C303MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC PLAN C304MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC PLAN LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS L100STAGING PLAN L101DEMOLITION L201LAYOUT PLAN L301GRADING PLAN L401PLANTING PLAN L402SOILS PLAN L501SITE DETAILS L502SITE DETAILS L503SITE DETAILS STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S-001GENERAL NOTES AND SCHEDULES S-100FOUNDATION PLAN S-101SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S-102THIRD, FOURTH, AND FIFTH FLOOR FRAMING PLANS S-103ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-104ENLARGE STAIR FRAMING PLANS S-300FOUNDATION DETAILS S-301FOUNDATION DETAILS S-302FOUNDATION DETAILS S-400MASONRY DETAILS S-500STEEL FRAMING DETAILS S-501COLUMN SCHEDULE AND DETAILS S-502BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS S-503BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS S-504BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS S-505FRAMING DETAILS S-506FRAMING DETAILS S-600SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE, ELEVATIONS & DETAILS S-601STRUCTURAL DETAILS S-602FRAMING DETAILS S-603FRAMING DETAILS HVAC DRAWINGS h01HVAC GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES h101GROUND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC h102TYPICAL FLOORS 2-5 - HVAC h103ROOF PLAN - HVAC h601ENLARGED PLANS - HVAC h602ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED HOMES REQUIREMENTS h701HVAC VRF SYSTEM DIAGRAMS h702HVAC DETAILS h703HVAC DETAILS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS e001ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS e100SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL e101GROUND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING e102GROUND FLOOR PLAN - POWER AND SYSTEMS e103TYPICAL FLOORS 2 - 5 - ELECTRICAL e104ROOF PLAN - ELECTRICAL e601ENLARGED PLANS - ELECTRICAL e701ELECTRICAL DETAILS e702ELECTRICAL DETAILS e703ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS e704ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS e801ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES e802ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES PLUMBING DRAWINGS p001PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, SCHEDULES p002RPZ & RPDA p1001/16" FLOOR PLANS - PLUMBING p101FOUNDATION PLAN - PLUMBING p102GROUND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING p103FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING p104ROOF PLAN - PLUMBING p601ENLARGED PLANS - PLUMBING p602PLUMBING - RISER DIAGRAMS p701PLUMBING DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS fp001FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, DETAILS fp1011/16" FLOOR PLANS - FIRE PROTECTION N ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION (ASSD) DRAWINGS R-1FOUNDATION ASSD SYSTEM R-2FIRST FLOOR ASSD SYSTEM R-3SECOND FLOOR ASSD SYSTEM R-4THIRD FLOOR ASSD SYSTEM R-5FOURTH FLOOR ASSD SYSTEM R-6FIFTH FLOOR ASSD SYSTEM R-7ROOF ASSD SYSTEM ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 A2 2015 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE WITH NEW YORK STATE SUPPLEMENTS Chapter 3 –General Requirements Climate Zone –Tomkins County, New York is Climate Zone 6A The proposed building is 5 stories in height, and not defined as a “Residential Building.”Therefore, the building is required to comply with the Commercial provisions of the IECC (Energy Code). Chapter 4 –Commercial Energy Efficiency Table C402.1.3 Opaque Thermal Envelope Insulation Component Minimum Requirements, R-Value Method Climate Zone 6, Group A, B & R Occupancies Insulation entirely above roof deck:R-30ci Mass Walls (north façade of Stair-B):R-15.2ci Metal Framed Walls:R-13 cavity + R-7.5ci Wood Framed Walls:R-13 cavity + R-7.5 ci OR R-20 cavity + R-3.8 ci Below-Grade Wall:R-7.5ci Unheated Slabs:R-15 for 24-inches below Table 402.1.4 Opaque Thermal Envelope Insulation Component Minimum Requirements, U-Factor Method Climate Zone 6, Group A, B & R Occupancies Opaque Swinging DoorsU-0.37 Table C402.4 Building Envelope Fenestration Maximum U-Factor and SHGC Requirements U-FactorClimate Zone 6 –Vertical Fenestration Fixed Fenestration0.36 Operable Fenestration0.43 Entrance Doors0.77 OrientationSEWN SHGC (PF<0.2)0.400.53 SHGC (PF>0.5 under canopies)0.640.64 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CODE Proposed Existing Building Statistics ProposedAllowable Bldg. Height (Stories)5 stories5 stories (Type IA Construction podium ground floor level with four stories of Type VA Construction above) Bldg. Height (Feet)60’-8”70 feet (For Type VA Construction) (plus Stair & Elevator Penthouses) First Floor Area: 10,894 gsf36,000 gsf Second Floor Area:12,990 gsf36,000 gsf Third Floor Area:12,990 gsf36,000 gsf Fourth Floor Area:12,990 gsf36,000 gsf Fifth Floor Area:12,990 gsf36,000 gsf Total Area: 62,854 gsf 180,000 gsf (above grade plane) 2015 International Building Code (IBC) Chapter 3 –Use and Occupancy Classification Group R-2 (Apartment House) Portion of 1stFloor, and all of Floors 2 through 5 Group B (Business) Portion of 1stFloor Accessory Use Group A-3 (Community Room & Associated Kitchen) Total Area = 960 gsf Chapter 4 –Special Detailed Requirements Based on Use and Occupancy Section 420 –Groups I-1, R-1, R-2, R-3 and R-4 420.1 General. Occupancies in Group R-2 shall comply with the provisions of Sections 420.1 through 420.10 and other applicable provisions of this code. 420.2 Separation walls. Walls separating dwelling units in the same building, walls separating dwelling units from other occupancies contiguous to them in the same building shall be constructed as fire partitions in accordance with Section 708. 420.3 Horizontal Separation. Floor assemblies separating dwelling units in the same buildings, and floor assemblies separating dwelling units from other occupancies contiguous to them in the same building shall be constructed as horizontal assemblies in accordance with Section 711. 420.4 Automatic Sprinkler System. Group R occupancies shall be equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.2.8. Quick response or residential automatic sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with Section 903.3.2. 420.5 Fire alarm systems and smoke alarms. Fire alarm systems and smoke alarms shall be provided in Group R-2 occupancies in accordance with Sections 907.2.6, 907.2.8 and 907.2.9, respectively. Single-or multiple-station smoke alarms shall be provided in Groups R-2 in accordance with Section 907.2.10. 420.9 Group R cooking facilities. In Group R occupancies, cooking appliances used for domestic cooking operations shall be in accordance with Section 917.2 of the International Mechanical Code. Chapter 5 –General Building Heights and Areas Table 504.3 –Allowable Building Height in Feet Above Grade Plane Group R Occupancy, Type VA Construction: 70 Feet Maximum height. Exception: Other roof structures shall be constructed of materials consistent with the required type of construction of the building except where other construction is permitted by Section 1510.2.4. Such structures shall not be used for habitation or storage. Table 504.4 –Allowable Number of Stories Above Grade Plane Group R-2 Occupancy, fully sprinklered building per NFPA-13, Type VA Construction: 4 stories. (Note: This building is a Type IA podium with four stories of Type VA Construction above.) Section 506 –Building Area Table 506.2 –Allowable Area Factor in Square Feet Group R-2 Occupancy, Type VA Construction, Fully Sprinklered Building per NFPA-13: 36,000 sf maximum per floor allowable. Section 508 –Mixed Use and Occupancy 508.1 General. Each portion of a building shall be individually classified in accordance with Section 302.1. Where a building contains more than one occupancy group, the building or portion thereof shall comply with the applicable provisions of Section 508.2, 508.3, or 508.4, or a combination of these sections. 508.2 Accessory Occupancies. Accessory occupancies are those occupancies that are ancillary to the main occupancy of the building or portion thereof. Accessory occupancies shall comply with the provisions of Sections 508.2.1 through 508.2.4. 508.2.1 Occupancy classification. Accessory occupancies shall be individually classified in accordance with Section 302.1. The requirements of this code shall apply to each portion of the building based on the occupancy classification of that space. 508.2.3 Allowable Building Area. The allowable area of the building shall be based on the applicable provisions of Section 506 for the main occupancy o the building. Aggregate accessory occupancies shall not occupy more than 10 percent of the floor area of the story in which they are located and shall not exceed the tabular values for non-sprinklered buildings in Table 506.2 for each such accessory occupancy. 508.2.4 Separation of occupancies. No separation is required between accessory occupancies and the main occupancy. Exceptions: 2) Group R-2 dwelling units shall be separated from other dwelling units and from accessory occupancies contiguous to them in accordance with the requirements of Section 420. Chapter 6 –Types of Construction Table 601 –Fire-resistant Rating Requirements for Building Elements This building is 4 stories of Construction Type VA over a one-story podium of Construction Type IA. For Construction Type IA (First Floor Podium): Primary Structural Frame:3-hours Bearing Walls –Exterior:3-hours Bearing Walls –Interior:3-hours Non-Bearing Interior Walls and Partitions: 0-hours Floor Construction and Associated Secondary Members:2-hours Roof Construction and Associated Secondary Members: 1-1/2 hours (except that the separation between the podium ceiling and second floor is required to be 3 hours.) For Construction Type VA (4 floors of wood-frame perimeter walls with wood framed floors and roof): Primary Structural Frame:1-hour Bearing Walls –Exterior:1-hour Bearing Walls –Interior:1-hour Non-Bearing Interior Walls and Partitions: 0-hours Floor Construction and Associated Secondary Members:1-hour Roof Construction and Associated Secondary Members: 1-hour Table 602 –Fire resistance Rating Requirements for Exterior Walls Based on Fire Separation Distance (for Construction Types IA and VA) Less than 5 feet1-hour for Groups A, B and R Greater than 5 feet but less than 10 feet1-hour for Groups A, B and R Greater than or equal to 10 feet but less than 30 feet1-hour for Groups A, B and R Greater than or Equal to 30 feet0-hours Chapter 7 –Fire and Smoke Protection Features Section 703 –Fire-Resistance Ratings and Fire Tests 703.6 Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing. Fire-resistance-rated glazing, when tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263 and complying with the requirements of Section 707, shall be permitted. Fire-resistance-rated glazing shall bear a label marked in accordance with Table 716.1(1) issued by an agency and shall be acceptable as noncombustible materials. 703.7 Marking and Identification. Where there is an accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic space, fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling in the concealed space. Such identifications shall: 1. Be located within 15 feet of the end of each wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partition. 2. Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8-inch stroke in a contrasting color incorporating the suggested wording, “FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER –PROTECT ALL OPENINGS,”or other wording. Section 704 –Fire-Resistance-Rating of Structural Members 704.1 Requirements. The fire-resistance ratings of structural members and assemblies shall comply with this section and the requirements for the type of construction as specified in Table 601. The fire-resistance ratings shall be not less than the ratings required for the fire-resistance-rated assemblies supported by the structural members. Exception: Fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and horizontal assemblies as provided in Sections 707.5, 708.4, 709.4 and 711.2, respectively. 704.2 Column Protection. Where columns are required to have protection to achieve a fire-resistance rating, the entire column shall be provided individual encasement protection by protecting it on all sides for the full column height, including connections to other structural members, with materials having the required fire-resistance rating. Where the column extends through a ceiling, the encasement protection shall be continuous from the top of the foundation or floor/ceiling assembly below through the ceiling space to the top of the column. Exception: Columns that meet the limitations of Section 704.4.1. 704.3 Protection of the primary structural frame other than columns. Members of the primary structural frame other than columns that are required to have protection to achieve a fire-resistance rating and support more than two floors or one floor and roof, or support a load-bearing wall or a non-load-bearing wall more than two stories high, shall be provided individual encasement protection by protecting them on all sides for the full length, including connections to other structural members,with materials having the required fire-resistance rating. 704.4 Protection of Secondary Members. Secondary members that are required to have protection to achieve a fire-resistance rating shall be protected by individual encasement protection. 704.4.1 Light-Frame Construction. Studs, columns and boundary elements that are integral elements in walls of light-frame construction and are located entirely between the top and bottom plates or tracks shall be permitted to have required fireresistance ratings provided by the membrane protection provided by the wall. 704.10 Exterior Structural Members. Load-bearing structural members located within the exterior walls or on the outside of a building or structure shall be provided with the highest fire-resistance rating as determined in accordance with the following: 1. As required by Table 601 for the type of building element based on the type of construction of the building. 2. As required by Table 601 for exterior bearing walls based on the type of construction. 3. As required by Table 602 for exterior walls based on the fire-separation distance. 704.11 Bottom Flange Protection. Fire protection is not required at the bottom flange of lintels, shelf angles and plates, spanning not more than 6 feet 4 inches whether part of the primary structural frame or not, and from the bottom flange of lintels, shelf angles and plates not part of the structural frame, regardless of span. 704.13 Sprayed Fire-resistant Materials (SFRM). Sprayed fire-resistant materials (SFRM) shall comply with Sections 704.13.1 through 704.13.5. 704.13.1 Fire-resistance Rating. The application of SFRM shall be consistent with the Fire-resistance rating and the listing, including, but not limited to, minimum thickness and dry density of the applied SFRM, method of application, substrate surface conditions and the use of bonding, adhesives, sealants, reinforcing or other materials. Section 705 –Exterior Walls 705.1 General. Exterior walls shall comply with this section. 705.2 Projections. Cornices, eave overhangs, exterior balconies and similar projections extending beyond the exterior wall shall conform to the requirements of this section and Section 1405. Projections shall not extend any closer to the line used to determine the fire separation distance than shown in Table 705.2. Table 705.2 –Minimum Distance of Projection Fire Separation Distance (FSD) in feetMinimum Distance from Line Used to Determine FSD 0 to less than 2 feetProjections not permitted 2 to less than 3 feet24 inches 3 to less than 5 feet24 inches plus 8 inches for every Foot of FSD beyond 3 feet or fraction Thereof 5 feet or greater40 inches (Note: On the South façade at the southeast corner of the building, and on the west façade, since the exterior wall is 10 feet 8 inches from the property line, the minimum distance from the lot line to the building projections, which are composite metal panel framed openings, is 40 inches. Since the composite metal panels project 8 inches into the setback, the distance from the projections to the lot lines are 10 feet 0 inches, which is well beyond the minimum 40 inches allowed.) 705.2.2 Type III, IV, or V Construction. Projections from walls of Type III, IV or V construction shall be of any approved material. NFPA 101 LIFE SAFETY CODE -2012 EDITION Building Statistics Facility Type: Large Facility (More than 16 Residents) –Residential Board & Care Facility(note:as interpreted by OMH) Building Stories/ Height: 5-stories plus (4 stories (Type VA) above a 1-story podium (Type IA)) (+/-60’-8”in height to top of primary roof coping, (+/-71’-4”in height to top of roof access stair penthouse coping) Construction Type Conversion:IBC: Type IA = NFPA Type I(332) (Per Table 8.1)IBC: Type VA = NFPA Type V(111) First Floor Area: 10,894 gsf Second Floor Area:12,990 gsf Third Floor Area:12,990 gsf Fourth Floor Area:12,990 gsf Fifth Floor Area:12,990 gsf Total Area: 62,854 gsf Assumptions: • NFPA 13 Automatic Fire Sprinkler System References: • NYS Building Code • NFPA 101A –2013 –Fire Evaluation Worksheet Chapter 3 –Definitions 3.3.188.12 Residential Board & Care Occupancy: An occupancy used for lodging and boarding of four or more residents, not related by blood or marriage to the owners or operators, for the purpose of providing personal care services. Chapter 4 –General 4.4.2 Prescriptive-Base Option: Shall be in accordance with Chapters 1–4., 6-11, 43, and the applicable occupancy chapter (12-42). 4.2.2.2: Prescriptive-based designs meeting Chapters 1-3, 4.5-4.8, and 6-43 of this code shall be deemed to satisfy the provisions of Sections 4.1 and 4.2. 4.2.2.3: Where requirements in Chapters 11-43 differ from Chapters 1-4, and 6-10, Chapters 11-43 shall govern. 4.5.3 Means of Egress: 4.5.3.1 Number: Two means of egress shall be provided (minimum) where size, occupancy and arrangement endanger occupants attempting to use a single means of egress that is blocked by fire or smoke. 4.5.3.2 Unobstructed: Means of egress must be unobstructed. 4.5.3.3 Awareness: Every exit shall be clearly visible, or route must be conspicuously indicated. 4.5.3.4 Lighting: Where artificial lighting is needed, it shall be included. 4.5.4 Occupant Notification: In every building of such size, arrangement, or occupancy that a fire itself might not provide adequate occupant warning, fire alarm systems shall be provided. 4.5.6 Vertical Openings: Every vertical opening between floors shall be suitably enclosed or protected, as necessary, to afford reasonable safety to occupants while using means of egress and to prevent fire, smoke or fumes through vertical openings from floor to floor before occupants have exited. 4.5.7 System Design/Installation: Any fire protection system provided to meet this code shall be in accordance with applicable NFPA standards. 4.6 General Requirements: 4.6.3 Stories in Height: 1) Counted starting with the level of exit discharge. 2) Stories below the level of exit discharge shall not be counted as stories. Chapter 6 –Classification of Occupancy and Hazard of Contents 6.1.9 Residential Board and Care 6.1.9.1 Definition –Residential Board and Care. An occupancy used for lodging and boarding of four or more residents, not related by blood or marriage to the owners or operators, for the purposed of providing personal care services. Chapter 7 –Means of Egress 7.1.3 Separation of Means of Egress: 7.1.3.1 Exit access corridors: used as exit access and serving an area having an occupant load exceeding 30 shall be 1-hour rated. 7.1.3.2 Exits 7.1.3.2.1 Where this code requires an exit to be separated, the separating construction shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2 and the following: (1)Min. 1-hour fire resistance rating where the exit connects 3 or fewer stories. 8.6.5: Min. fire resistance rating for enclosures connecting four or more stories: 2-hours. A.7.1.3.2.1(6) (9)Openings in exit enclosures shall be limited to door assemblies from normally occupied spaces and corridors and door assemblies for egress from the enclosure. A.7.1.3.2.1(9) Means of egress from the level of discharge is permitted to pass through an exit stair enclosure or exit passageway serving other floors. It is also the intent of this provision to prohibit exit enclosure windows (other than approved vision panels in doors) that are not mounted in an exterior wall. (10)Penetrations into, and opening through, an exit enclosure assembly shall be limited to: (a) Door assemblies permitted by 7.1.3.2.1(9) (b) Electrical conduit serving the exit enclosure (c) Required exit door openings (d) Ductwork and equipment necessary for stair pressurization (e) Water or steam piping for heating or cooling (f) Sprinkler piping (g) Standpipes (i) Penetrations for fire alarm circuits (in metal conduit) and protected per 8.3.5 (11)Penetrations or communicating openings shall be prohibited between adjacent exit enclosures. (12)Membrane penetrations shall be protected per 8.3.5.6. 7.1.8 Guards: in accordance with 7.2.2.4 shall be provided at the open sides of means of egress that exceeds 30”. 7.2 Means of Egress Components: 7.2.1 Door Openings: 7.2.1.2.3 Minimum Door Leaf Width: door openings in means of egress shall not be less than 32”clear. 7.2.1.5.8 Every door assembly in a stair enclosure serving four or more stories, unless permitted by 7.2.1.5.8.2, shall meet one of the following conditions: (1)Re-entry from the stair enclosure to the interior of the building shall be provided. (2)An automatic release that is actuated with the initiation of the building fire alarm system shall be provided to unlock all stair enclosure doors to allow re-entry. (3)Select 7.2.1.5.9 If a stair enclosure allows access to the roof of the building, the door assembly shall be kept locker or shall allow re-entry from the roof. 7.2.2 Stairs. 7.2.2.2 Dimensional Criteria. (1) New stairs shall be in accordance with Table 7.2.2.2.1.1(a) and 7.2.2.2.1.2. Min. width: <2,000 persons total cumulative occupant load assigned to stair = 44 inches min. Maximum riser height: 7 in. Minimum riser height: 4 in. Minimum tread depth: 11 in. Minimum headroom: 6’-8” Maximum height between landings: 12 ft. Landing: (per 7.2.2.3.2): min. dimension, measured in the direction of travel, that is not less than the width of the stair. 7.2.2.4.1 Handrails: 7.2.2.4.1.1 Stairs and ramps shall have handrails on both sides, unless permitted in 7.2.2.4.1.5 or 7.2.2.4.1.6. 7.2.2.4.4.6 Handrails must include one of the following features: 1) circular cross section with o.d. of not less than 1 ¼”and not more than 2”. 2) shape other than circular with a perimeter dimension of not less than 4”and not more than 6 ¼”. 7.2.5.3.4 Guards and Handrails: 7.2.5.4.1 Guards complying with 7.2.2.4 shall be provided for ramps, unless otherwise provided in 7.2.5.4.4. 7.2.5.4.2 Handrails complying with 7.2.2.4 shall be provided along both sides of ramp run with a rise greater than 6”, unless otherwise provided in 7.2.5.4.4. 7.3 Capacity of Means of Egress Table 7.3.1.2 Occupation Load Factor Residential Use (Board & Care, Large): 200 sf / person (+/-58,862 gsf / 200 = 294.31 = 295 occupants) Business Use: 100 sf / person (+/-3,012 gsf / 100 = 30.12 = 31 occupants) Total Occupants: +/-326 occ. 7.3.1.4 Exists serving more than one story: Only the occupant load of each story considered individually shall be used in computing the required capacity of the exit at that story, provided that the required egress capacity of the exit is not decreased in the direction of travel. Table 7.3.3.1 Capacity Factors Board & Care:Stairways (width/person)Level Components & Ramps 0.4 in.0.2 in. All Others:Stairways (width/person)Level Components & Ramps 0.3 in.0.2 in. Stair Calcs: • Stair A (1/2 of occupant load -second through fifth floor): +/-99 persons x 0.4 inches per occupant = 39.60 inches min. -44 inches minimum width proposed) • Stair B (1/2 of occupant load -second through fifth floor): +/-99 persons x 0.4 inches per occupant = 39.60 inches min. -44 inches minimum width proposed) Corridor Calcs: • First Floor (1/2 of occupant load) = 36 occupants x 0.2 inches per occupant = 7.20 inches min. -44 inches minimum width proposed) • Second through Fifth Floors (1/2 of occupant load) = 33 occupants x 0.2 inches per occupant = 6.60 inches min. -44 inches minimum width proposed) 7.3.3.3 The required capacity of a corridor shall be the occupant load that utilizes that corridor for exit access divided by the required number of exits to which the corridor connects, but shall not be less than the required capacity of the exit to which the corridor leads. 7.4 Number of Means of Egress 7.4.1 General 7.4.1.1 The number of means of egress from any story or portion thereof shall not be less than two, except under one of the following conditions: (1) A single means of egress shall be permitted where permitted in Chapters 11 through 43. 7.4.1.6.1 Each elevator landing shall have access to at least one exit. 7.5 Arrangement of Means of Egress: 7.5.1.1 Exits shall be located, and exit access shall be arranged, so that exits are readily accessible at all times. 7.5.1.1.2 Exit access corridors shall provide access to not less than two approved exists. 7.5.1.2 Corridors shall provide exit access without passing through any intervening rooms other than corridors, lobbies, and other spaces permitted to be open to the corridor, unless otherwise provided in 7.5.1.2.1 and 7.5.1.2.2. 7.5.1.2.2 Corridors that are not required to be fire resistance rated shall be permitted to discharge into open floor plan areas. 7.5.1.3 Remoteness shall be provided in accordance with 7.5.1.3.1 through 7.5.1.3.7. 7.5.1.6 Exit access from rooms or spaces shall be permitted to be through adjoining or intervening rooms or areas, provided they are accessory to the area served. Foyers, lobbies, and reception rooms constructed as required for corridors shall not be construed as intervening rooms. 7.5.4.1 Areas accessible to people with sever mobility impairment shall have not less than two accessible means of egress, unless other wise provided in 7.5.4.1.2 through 7.5.4.1.4. Table A.7.6 Common path, Dead-End, and Travel Distance Limits (by occupancy) Type of OccupancyCommon Path LimitDead-End LimitTravel Distance Limit SprinkleredSprinkleredSprinklered Residential Board & Care Large, New125’30’325’ Business, New100’50’300’ 705.2.3 Combustible projections. Combustible projections extending to within 5 feet of the line used to determine fire separation distance shall be of not les than 1-hour fire-resistance-rated construction, fire-retardant-treated wood, or as permitted by Section 705.2.3.1. 705.4 Materials. Exterior walls shall be of materials permitted by the building type of construction. 705.5 Fire-resistance Ratings. Exterior walls shall be fire-resistance rated in accordance with Tables 601 and 602 and this section. The required fire-resistance rating of exterior walls with a fire separation distance of greater than 10 feet shall be rated for exposure to fire from the inside. The required fire-resistance rating of exterior walls with a fire separation distance of less than or equal to 10 feet shall be rated for exposure to fire from both sides. (Note: All exterior walls have a fire separation distance of greater than 10 feet. Therefore, the exterior walls shall be fireresistance rated for exposure from the inside.) 705.6 Structural stability. Exterior walls shall extend to the height required by 705.11. Interior structural elements that brace the exterior wall but that are not located within the plane of the exterior wall shall have the minimum fire-resistance rating required in Tables 601 and 602 for the exterior wall. 705.8 Openings. Openings in exterior walls shall comply with Sections 705.8.1 through 705.8.6. 705.8.1 Allowable area of openings. The maximum area of unprotected and protected openings permitted in an exterior wall in any story of a building shall not exceed the percentages specified in Table 705.8 based on the fire-separation distance of each individual story. 705.8.2 Protected openings. Where openings are required to be protected, opening protectives shall comply with Section 716. Exception: opening protectives are not required where the building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 and the exterior openings are protected by a water curtain using automatic sprinklers approved for that use. 705.8.3 Unprotected openings. Where unprotected openings are permitted, windows and doors shall be constructed of any approved materials. Glazing shall conform to the requirements of Chapters 24 and 26. 705.8.5 Vertical separation of openings. Openings in exterior walls in adjacent stories shall be separated vertically to protect against fire spread on the exterior of the buildings where the openings are within 5 feet of each other horizontally and the opening in the lower story is not a protected opening with a fire protection rating of not less than ¾-hour. Exceptions: 2. This section shall not apply to buildings equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2. Table 705.8 Maximum Area of Exterior Wall Openings Based on Fire Separation Distance and Degree of Opening Protection. Fire Separation Distance (Feet)Degree of Opening ProtectionAllowable Area 10 to less than 15 feet Unprotected, Sprinklered bldg.45 percent 30 feet or greaterUnprotected, Sprinklered bldg.No Limit West Façade +/-10’-8”from property line: 2,567 square feet total area Percentage of Exterior Wall Openings: 496 s.f. = 19.3% South Façade portion +/-10-8”from property line: square feet total area: 3,435 square feet Percentage of Exterior Wall Openings: 421 s.f. = 12.2% 705.10 ducts and Air Transfer Openings. Penetrations by air ducts and air transfer openings in fire-resistance-rated exterior walls required to have protected openings shall comply with Section 717. (Note: The fire-resistance-ra ted exterior walls on this project are not required to have protected openings.) 705.11 Parapets. Parapets shall be provided on exterior walls of buildings. Exceptions: A parapet need not be provided on an exterior wall where any of the following conditions exist: 6. Where the wall is permitted to have not less than 25 percent of the exterior wall areas containing unprotected openings based on fire separation distance as determined in accordance with Section 705.8. (Note: In order for the building to not be required to have a parapet, Exception 6 requires the wall to have not less than 25 percent of the exterior wall areas containing unprotected openings based on fire separation distance as determined in accordance with Section 705.8. All of our exterior walls have either a 45 percent maximum allowable area of unprotected openings, or an unlimited area of unprotected openings, therefore in compliance with Exception 6). Section 708 –Fire Partitions 708.1 General. The following wall assemblies shall comply with this section. 1. Separation walls as required by Section 420.2 for Group R occupancies. 3. Corridor walls as required by Section 1020.1 708.2 Materials. The walls shall be of materials permitted by the building type of construction. 708.3 Fire-resistance rating. Fire partitions shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than one hour. Exceptions: 1. Corridor walls permitted to have a ½-hour fire-resistance rating by Table 1020.1 (Table 1020.1, for Group R occupancies with greater than 10 occupant load, a ½-hour fire-resistance rating is allowed in sprinklered buildings). 708.4 Continuity. Fire partitions shall extend from the top of the foundation or floor/ceiling assembly below and be surely attached to one of the following: 1. The underside of the floor or roof sheathing, deck, or slab above. 2. The underside of a floor/ceiling or roof/ceiling assembly having a fire-resistance rating that is not less than the fire-resistance rating of the partition. (There are 4 exceptions to these requirements above.) 708.4.1 Supporting construction. The supporting construction for a fire partition shall have a fire-resistance rating that is equal to or greater than the required fire-resistance rating of the supported fire partition. 708.4.2 Fireblocks and draftstops in combustible construction. In combustible construction where fire partitions do not extend to the underside of the floor or roof sheathing, deck or slab above, the space above and along the line of the fire partition shall be provided with one of the following: 1. Fireblocking up to the underside of the floor or roof sheathing, deck or slab above using materials complying with Section 718.2.1. 2. Draftstopping up to the underside of the floor or roof sheathing, deck or slab above using materials complying with Section 718.3.1 for floors or Section 718.4.1 for attics. (There are 5 exceptions to these requirements above.) 708.5 Exterior walls. Where exterior walls serve as part of a required fire-resistance-rated separation, such walls shall comply with the requirements of Section 705 for exterior walls, and the fire-resistance-rated separation requirements shall not apply. 708.6 openings. Openings in a fire partition shall be protected in accordance with Section 716. 708.7 Penetrations. Penetrations of fire partitions shall comply with Section 714. 708.8 Joints. Joints made in or between fire partitions shall comply with Section 715. 708.9 Ducts and air transfer openings. Penetrations in a fire partition by ducts and air transfer openings shall comply with Section 717. Section 711 –Floor and Roof Assemblies 711.1 General. Horizontal assemblies shall comply with Section 711.12. Nonfire-resistance-rated floor and roof assemblies shall comply with Section 711.3. 711.2 Horizontal Assemblies. Horizontal assemblies shall comply with Sections 711.2.1 through 711.2.6. 711.2.1 Materials. Assemblies shall be of materials permitted by the building type of construction. 711.2.2 Continuity. Assemblies shall be continuous without vertical openings, except as permitted by this section and Section 712. 711.2.3 Supporting construction. The supporting construction shall be protected to afford the required fire-resistance rating of the horizontal assembly supported. 711.2.4 Fire-resistance Rating. The fire-resistance rating of horizontal assemblies shall comply with Sections 711.2.4.1 through 711.2.4.6 but shall not be less than required by the building type of construction. 711.2.4.1 Separating mixed occupancies. Where the horizontal assembly separates mixed occupancies, the assembly shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than that required by Section 508.4 based on the occupancies being separated. 711.2.4.3 Dwelling and Sleeping Units. Horizontal assemblies serving as dwelling or sleeping unit separations in accordance with Section 420.3 shall be not less than 1-hour fire-resistance-rated construction. Exception: (Note the exception is only for Construction Types IIB, IIB, and VB, and does not apply to this project.) Section 712 –Vertical Openings 712.1 General. Each vertical opening shall comply in accordance with one of the protection methods in Sections 712.1.1 through 712.1.16. 712.1.1 Shaft Enclosures. Vertical openings contained entirely within a shaft enclosure complying with Section 713 shall be permitted. 712.1.4 Penetrations. Penetrations, concealed and unconcealed, shall be permitted where protected in accordance with Section 714. 712.1.6 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings. Penetrations by ducts and air transfer openings shall be protected in accordance with Section 717. Section 713 –Shaft Enclosures 713.1 General. The provisions of this section shall apply to shafts required to protect openings and penetrations through floor/ceiling assemblies and roof/ceiling assemblies. Interior exit stairways and ramps shall be enclosed in accordance with Section 1023. 713.2 Construction. Shaft enclosures shall be constructed as fire barriers in accordance with Section 707 or horizontal assemblies in accordance with 711, or both. 713.3 Materials. The shaft enclosure shall be of materials permitted by the building type of construction. 713.4 Fire-resistance Rating. Shaft enclosures shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than 2 hours where connecting four stories or more, and not les than 1 hour where connecting less than 4 stories. Shaft enclosures shall have a fire-resistance rating not less than the flor assembly penetrated, but need not exceed 2 hours. Shaft enclosures shall meet the requirements of Section 703.2.1. 713.5 Continuity. Shaft enclosures shall be constructed as fire barriers in accordance with Section 707 or horizontal assemblies constructed in accordance with Section 711, or both, and shall have continuity in accordance with Section 707.5 for fire barriers or Section 711.2.2 for horizontal assemblies, as applicable. 713.6 Exterior Walls. Where exterior walls serve as a pert of a required shaft enclosure, such walls shall comply with the requirements of Section 705 for exterior walls and the fire-resistance-rated enclosure requirements shall not apply. 713.7 Openings. Openings in a shaft enclosure shall be protected in accordance with Section 716 as required for fire barriers. Doors shall be self-or automatic-closing by smoke detection in accordance with Section 716.2.6.6. 713.8 Penetrations. Penetrations in a shaft enclosure shall be protected in accordance with Section 714 as required for fire barriers. Structural elements, such as beams or joists, where protected in accordance with Section 714 shall be permitted to penetrate a shaft enclosure. 713.14 Elevator and other hoistways. Elevator and other hoistway enclosures shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 712 and 713, and Chapter 30. Section 716 –Opening Protectives 716.1.2 Glazing. Glazing used in fire door assemblies and fire window assemblies shall comply with this section in addition to the requirements of Sections 716.2 and 716.3, respectively. 716.1.2.1 Safety Glazing. Fire-protection-rated glazing and fire-resistance-rated glazing installed in fire door assemblies and fire window assemblies shall comply with the safety glazing requirements of Chapter 24 where applicable. 716.1.2.2 Marking fire-rated glazing assemblies. Fire-rated glazing assemblies shall be marked in accordance with Tables 716.1(1) and 716.1(2), 716.1(3). 716.1.2.3 Fire-resistance-rated Glazing. Fire-resistance-rated glazing tested as part of a fire-resistance-rated wall or floor/ceiling assembly in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263 and labeled in accordance with Section 703.6 shall not otherwise be required to comply with this section where used as part of a wall or floor/ceiling assembly. 716.1.2.3.1 Glazing in fire door and fire window assemblies. Fire-resistance-rated glazing shall be permitted in fire door and fire window assemblies where tested and installed in accordance with their listings and where in compliance with the requirements of this section. 716.2.3 Fire Doors. Fire doors installed within a fire door assembly shall meet the fire rating indicated in Table 716.1(2). 716.2.4 Fire door frames. Fire door frames installed as part of a fire door assembly shall meet the fire rating indicated in Table 716.1(2) Table 716.1(2) –Opening Fire Protection Assemblies, Ratings and Markings. Fire Walls and fire barriers having a required fire-resistance rating greater than 1 Hour Wall Assembly Rating2 Hours[120 Minutes] Fire Door Assembly Rating1 1/2 Hours[90 Minutes] Door Vision Panel Size100 sq. in.[20in. high x 5in wide] Enclosures for shafts, interior exit stairways and interior exit ramps Wall Assembly Rating2 Hours[120 Minutes] Fire Door Assembly Rating1 1/2 Hours[90 Minutes] Door Vision Panel Size100 sq. in.[20-inch high x 5-inch wide] Fire partitions: Corridor Walls Required Wall Assembly Rating1 Hour[60 Minutes] Fire Door Assembly Rating1/3 Hours[20 Minutes] Door Vision Panel SizeMax. Size Tested 716.3 Fire Window Assemblies. Fire window assemblies required by other sections of this code shall comply with the provisions of this section. 716.3.1 Testing Requirements. Fire window assemblies shall be constructed of any material or assembly of component materials that conforms to the test requirements of Sections 716.3.1.1 and 716.3.1.2 and the fire protection rating indicatedin Table 716.1(3) 716.3.3 Fire Window Frames. Fire window frames installed with a fire window assembly shall meet the fire-protection rating indicated in Table 716.1(3). 716.3.4 Fire-protection-rated Glazing. Glazing in fire window assemblies shall be fire protection rated in accordance with this section and Table 716.1(3). 716.3.5 Labeled protective assemblies. Glazing in fire window assemblies shall be labeled by an approved agency. The labels shall comply with NFPA 80 and Section 716.3.5.2. Table 716.1(3) Fire Window Assembly Fire Protection Ratings Type of Assembly Interior Walls –Fire Partitions (Corridor Walls) Required Wall Assembly Fire Partitions –1 hour Minimum Fire Window Assembly Rating In Fire Partitions rated for 1-hour, fire window assembly rating shall be ¾-hour minimum. Fire-Rated Glazing Marking OH-45 or W-60 Chapter 8 –Interior Finishes Table 803.13 –Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Requirements by Occupancy Chapter 9 –Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems Sections 903 –Automatic Sprinkler Systems 903.2 Where Required. Approved automatic sprinkler systems in new buildings and structures shall be provided in the locations described in Sections 903.2.1 through 903.2.12. 903.2.1.8 Group R. An automatic sprinkler system installed in accordance with Section 903.2 shall be provided throughout all buildings with a Group R fire area. 903.3.1.1 NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems. Where the provisions of this code require that a building or portion thereof be equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with this section, sprinklers shall be installed throughout in accordance with NFPA 13 except as provided in Sections 903.3.1.1.1 and 903.3.1.1.2. 903.3.2 Quick-response and residential sprinklers. Where automatic sprinkler systems are required by this code, quickresponse or residential automatic sprinklers shall be installed in all of the following areas in accordance with Section 903.3.1 and their listings: 3. Dwelling units and sleeping units in Group I-1 and R occupancies. 4. Light-hazard occupancies as defined in NFPA 13. Section 905 –Standpipe Systems 905.1 General. Standpipe systems shall be provided in new buildings and structures in accordance with Sections 905.2 through 905.11. 905.3 Required installations. Standpipe systems shall be installed where required by Sections 905.3.1 through 905.3.8. Standpipe systems are allowed to be combined with automatic sprinkler systems. 905.3.1 Height. Class III standpipe systems shall be installed throughout buildings where any of the following conditions exist: 1. Four or more stories above or below grade plane. 2. The floor level of the highest story is located more than 30 feet above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access. Exceptions: 1. Class I standpipes are allowed in buildings equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2. Section 906 –Portable Fire Extinguishers 906.1 Where required. Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in all of the following locations: 1. In Group A, B, and R-2 Occupancies. Exceptions: 1. In Group R-2 occupancies, portable fire extinguishers shall be required only in locations specified in Items 2 through 6 where each dwelling unit is provided with a portable fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 1-A: 10-B:C. 3. In areas where flammable or combustible liquids are stored, used or dispensed. 5. Where required in the International Fire Code sections indicated in Table 906.1. 906.2 General Requirements. Portable fire extinguishers shall be selected and installed in accordance with this section and NFPA 10. 906.3 Size and distribution. The size and distribution of portable fire extinguishers shall be in accordance with Sections 906.3.1 through 906.3.4. Table 906.3(1) Fire Extinguishers for Class A Fire Hazards Light (Low) Hazard Occupancy Maximum Distance of Travel to Extinguisher: 75 Feet. 906.8 Cabinets. Cabinets used to house portable fire extinguishers shall not be locked. Exceptions: 1. Where portable fire extinguishers subject to malicious use or damage are provided with a means of ready access. Section 907 –Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 907.2 Where Required –New Buildings and Structures 907.2.9 Group R-2. Fire alarm systems and smoke alarms shall be installed in Group R-2 occupancies as required in Sections 907.2.9.1 through 907.2.9.3. 907.2.9.1 Manual fire alarm system. A manual fire alarm system that activates the occupant notification system in accordance with Section 907.3 shall be installed in Group R-2 occupancies where any of the following conditions apply: 1. Any dwelling unit is located three or more stories above the lowest level of exit discharge. 3. The building contains more than 16 dwelling units. Exceptions: 2. Manual fire alarm boxes are not required where the building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system installed in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2 and the occupant notification appliances will automatically activate throughout the notification zones upon a sprinkler water flow. 907.2.9.2 Smoke Alarms 7.7 Discharge from Exits 7.7.2 Exit Discharge Through Interior Building Areas Exits shall be permitted to discharge through interior building areas, provided that all of the following are met: • (1) Not more than 50 percent of the required number of exits, and not more than 50 percent of the required egress capacity, shall discharge through areas on any level of discharge. • (2) Each level of discharge shall discharge directly outside at the finished ground level or discharge directly outside and provide access to the finished ground level by outside stairs or outside ramps. • (3) The interior exit discharge shall lead to a free and unobstructed way to the exterior of the building, and such way shall be readily visible and identifiable from the point of discharge from the exit. • (4) The interior exit discharge shall be protected by oneof the following methods: • (a) The level of discharge shall be protected throughout by and approved automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 9.7. • (5) [NOT APPLICABLE] The entire area on the level of discharge shall be separated from areas below by construction having a fire resistance rating not less than that required for the exit enclosure, unless otherwise provided in 7.7.2(6) • (6) [NOT APPLICABLE] Levels below the level of discharge in an atrium shall be permitted to be open to the level of discharge where such level of discharge is protected in accordance with 8.6.7. Chapter 8 –Construction and Compartmentation Table 8.1 Cross-Reference of Building Types Construction Type Conversion:IBC: Type IA = NFPA Type I(332) IBC: Type VA = NFPA Type V(111) 8.1.2 Automatic Sprinkler System: shall be installed in accordance with the subparts of 9.7.1.1, as permitted by the applicable occupancy chapter. 8.2.1.1 Buildings or structures occupied in accordance with the individual occupancy chapters, Chapter 11 through 43, shall meet the minimum requirements of those chapters. Chapter 9 –Elevators, Escalators & Conveyors 9.4.2.1 New elevators shall be in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. Chapter 10 –Interior Finish, Contents and Furnishings Table A.10.2.2 Interior Finish Classification Limitations ExitsExist Access CorridorsOther Spaces Residential Board & Care:See Chapters 32 & 33) Business, NewA or B, I or IIA or BA, B or C Note: Refer to Section 32.3.3.3.2 for more stringent requirements. Chapter 32/33 –New & Existing Board & Care Occupancies 32.3 Large Facilities (New) 32.3.1.1.1 Section 32.3 shall apply to residential board & care occupancies providing sleeping accommodations for more than 16 residents. 32.3.1.3 Minimum Construction Requirements: Table 32.3.1.3 Stories in Height:4-12, SprinkleredConstruction Type: II (222) Permitted Note: The proposed Construction Type is Type II(222) for the First Floor and Type V(111) for Floors Two through Five. Therefore, Worksheet 7.1.1 in NFPA 101A (2013) was performed. 32.3.1.4 Occupant Load: shall be determined per 7.3.1.2 32.3.2.6 Travel Distance to Exits: shall not exceed 250 ft. (Note: Table 7.6 allows for 325 ft. in a sprinklered building for Large Board & Care). 32.3.3.3.2 Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish: (1) Exit Enclosures: Class A (2) Lobbies and Corridors: Class B (3) Rooms and Enclosed Spaces: Class B 32.3.3.3.3.2 Interior floor finishes shall comply with 10.2. 32.3.3.3.3.2 Interior floor finishes in exit enclosures and exit access corridors and spaces not separated from them by walls complying with 32.3.3.6 shall comply with 32.3.3.6 and shall not be less than Class II. 32.3.3.6 Corridors and Separating Sleeping Rooms A.32.3.3.6 It is not the intent to prohibit furniture in corridors and spaces open to corridors, provided minimum width is maintained. Storage is not permitted in corridors or spaces open to corridors. 32.3.3.6.3 Walls shall be smoke partitions and have a minimum ½ hour fire resistance rating. 32.3.3.6.4 Doors protecting corridor opening shall not be required to have a fire protection rating, but shall resist the passage of smoke. 32.3.3.6.6 No louvers, transfer grilles, operable transoms, or other air passages, other than properly installed heating and utility installations shall penetrate walls or doors. 32.3.3.7 Subdivision of building space: shall be in accordance with 32.3.3.7.1 through 32.3.3.7.21. 32.3.3.7.1 Every story shall be divided into not less than 2 smoke compartments, unless it meets 32.3.3.7.4, 32/3/3/7/5, or 32.3.3.7.7: 32.3.3.7.2 Each smoke compartment shall have an area not exceeding 22,500 sf. 32.3.3.7.3 The travel distance from any point to reach a door in the required smoke barrier shall be limited to 200 ft. 32.3.3.8 Cooking Facilities: Other than those within individual residential units shall be protected in accordance with 9.2.3. 9.2.3: Commercial cooking equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA 96. Note: the “community kitchen”shall be configured similar to a typical residential-style kitchen and will be used to teach residents cooking and how to better use their own kitchens. Therefore, it should not be considered to be a commercial kitchen. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 t002 BUILDING CODE INFORMATION 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 010 PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 006A ELMSHADE OFFICES 006 SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002E HORIZON PROGRAM 002A ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 007STAFF TOILET 005 SHARED COPY / FILES 004 DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002D PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002C HORIZON MED. ROOM 002B RECEPTION OFFICE 003 CONFERENCE ROOM 018 HORIZON WAITING AREA 002 VESTIBULE 001 COMMON LAUNDRY 017 WOMEN'S TOILET 015 MEN'S TOILET 016 STAFF BREAK ROOM 014 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 013 COMMUNITY ROOM 012 VESTIBULE 100D TRASH / RECYCLE 011 CORRIDOR 100C EXIT EXIT EXIT EXIT MAX. EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE: 113 FEET FE FE FE 1 1 2 2 4 FLOORS ABOVE (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 ELEVATOR FE FE EXITMAX. EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE: 108 FEET EXIT TYP. 3 RECEPTION LOUNGE 200A (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 214 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 202 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 CORRIDOR 200 STAIR A A02 TRASH / RECYCLE 215 CUST. 217 I.T. CLOSET 216 STAIR B B02 CHASE C02 ELEVATOR (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 32'-4" (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 19'-3" ( 5 0 F E E T M A X . ) DEAD END 18'-2" FE FE FE TYP. 3 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 314 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 312 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 310 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 308 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 306 RECEPTION LOUNGE 300A (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 304 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 303 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 302 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 301 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 305 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 307 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 313 STAIR B B03 CHASE C03 CUST. 317 I.T. CLOSET 316 TRASH / RECYCLE 315 STAIR A A03 CORRIDOR 300 ELEVATOR EXITMAX. EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE: 108 FEET EXIT (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 19'-3" ( 5 0 F E E T M A X . ) DEAD END 18'-2" (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 32'-4" FE FE FE TYP. 3 RECEPTION LOUNGE 400A ELEVATOR (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 414 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 412 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 410 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 408 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 406 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 404 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 403 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 402 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 401 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 405 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 407 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 413 STAIR B B04 CHASE C04 CUST. 417 I.T. CLOSET 416 STAIR A A04 TRASH / RECYCLE 415 CORRIDOR 400 EXITMAX. EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE: 108 FEET EXIT (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 19'-3" ( 5 0 F E E T M A X . ) DEAD END 18'-2" (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 32'-4" FE FE FE TYP. 3 ELEVATOR (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 513 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 507 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 505 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 501 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 502 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 503 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 504 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 506 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 508 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 510 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 512 STAIR B B05 I.T. CLOSET 516 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 514 CUST. 517 TRASH / RECYCLE 515 CORRIDOR 500 STAIR A A05 RECEPTION LOUNGE 500A CHASE C05 EXITMAX. EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE: 108 FEET EXIT (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 19'-3" ( 5 0 F E E T M A X . ) DEAD END 18'-2" FE FE FE (50-FEET MAX.) DEAD END 32'-4" LEGEND[FIRE RATING PLANS] 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED CORRIDOR WALLS AT ALL APARTMENTS. SEE WALL TYPES SCHEDULE. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED EXTERIOR NONBEARING WALL ASSEMBLY, RATED FROM THE INTERIOR SIDE, FIRST FLOOR, THIS WALL, PER U.L. U404 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED EXTERIOR BEARING WALL ASSEMBLY, RATED FROM THE INTERIOR SIDE, ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ABOVE FIRST FLOOR, PER 2018 ICC IBC 722.6.2 AS FOLLOWS: • 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING (40-MINUTES) • 2x6 SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING AT 16INCHES O.C., MAX. (20-MINUTES) • KRAFT-FACED FIBER GLASS BATT, FILL ENTIRE STUD CAVITY. • THE EXTERIOR SHEATING & CLADDING AT THE UNEXPOSED (EXTERIOR) SIDE OF WALL SHALL NOT BE INCLUDED IN DETERMINING THE FIRE RESISTANCE OF THE ASSEMBLY. • TOTAL: 60-MINUTE FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED EXTERIOR BEARING WALL FROM INTERIOR 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED APARTMENT DWELLING UNIT DEMISING WALLS AND RESIDENTIAL COMMON SPACE DEMISING WALLS. SEE WALL TYPES SCHEDULE. 2-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STAIR OR ELEVATOR SHAFT ENCLOSURE. SEE WALL TYPES SCHEDULE. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STAIR OR ELEVATOR SHAFT ENCLOSURE. SEE WALL TYPES SCHEDULE. FIRE-EXTINGUISHER, SEE FLOOR PLANS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTINGUISHER MODEL AND LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. NOTE: RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS SHALL BE FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED TO MATCH FIRERESISTANCE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL ASSEMBLY. FE GENERAL NOTES[FIRE RATING PLANS] 1. AT ALL GROUND FLOOR STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS AND SECOND FLOOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BEAM AND MISCELLANOUS FRAMING [INCLUDING EXTERIOR CANOPIES AND DRIVE UNDER] PROVIDE SPRAY APPLIED FIRE-PROOFING EQUAL TO A 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATING. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 2. FIRESTOP ALL FLOOR / CEILING OPENINGS, PENETRATIONS, JOINTS, ETC., TO MATCH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATING OF FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY TO MAINTAIN A CONTIGUOUS FIRE-RATING PER CODE.ALL NEW WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENT NYS BUILDING CODE, SEE 2017 NYS BUILDING CODE REVIEW FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3. FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED GLAZING SHALL BEAR A LABEL PER THE REQUIRED FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATING ISSUED BY AN AGENCY AND SHALL BE PREMANENTLY IDENTIFIED ON THE GLAZING. 4. WHERE THE IS AN ACCESSIBLE CONCEALED FLOOR, FLOORCEILING OR ATTIC SPACE, FIRE WALLS, FIRE BARRIERS, FIRE PARTITIONS, SMOKE BARRIERS AND SMOKE PARTITIONS SHALL BE EFFECTIVELY AND PERMANENTLY IDENTIFIED WITH SIGNS OR STENCILING IN THE CONCEALED SPACE. SUCH IDENTIFICATIONS SHALL: A. BE LOCATED WITHIN 15-FEET OF THE END OF EACH WALL AND AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 30-FEET MEASURED HORIZONTALLY ALONG THE WALL OR PARTITION. B. INCLUDE LETTERING NOT LESS THAN 3-INCHES IN HEIGHT WITH A MINIMUM 3/8-INCH STROKE IN A CONTRASTING COLOR INCORPORATING THE SUGGESTED WORDING, "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER -PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," OR OTHER WORDING. KEYNOTES[FIRE RATING PLANS] PROVIDE 60-MINUTE FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT GLAZING AND FRAMES IN 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLY. PROVIDE 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED PARTITION WALL TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR AT LOWEST LEVEL, TO PREVENT ACCESS TO OR ANY STORAGE BENEATH THE STAIR. PROVIDE AREA OF REFUGE PER NFPA 101 LIFE-SAFETY CODE REVIEW AT STAIR B. 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SPEAKER IN FIRE-RATED STOREFRONT GLAZING. 1 2 3 4 FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE UL ASSEMBLY COMPOSITE SLAB:UL D935 OR D902 UL ASSEMBLY FIRE PROOFING:UL P732 FIRE-RATING:3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STC RATING:56 IIC RATING:50 LOCATION:GROUND LEVEL CEILING / SECOND LEVEL FLOOR TOP OF FLOOR • FLOOR FINISH • 6 1/2" COMPOSITE DECK [5" CONCRETE, 1 1/2" METAL DECK] SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING WITH 3-HOUR FIRE-RESITANCE RATED FIRE PROOFING, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLY -NON COMBUSITBLE F1 UL ASSEMBLY: UL L570 FIRE-RATING:1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STC RATING:60+ IIC RATING:54 LOCATION:SECOND LEVEL CEILING / THIRD LEVEL FLOOR THIRD LEVEL CEILING / FOURTH LEVEL FLOOR FOURTH LEVEL CEILING / FIFTH LEVEL FLOOR TOP OF FLOOR • FLOOR FINISH • 3/4-INCH FLOOR TOPPING • 23/32-INCH T&G ADVANTECH FLOOR DECKING • TJI FLOOR FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • 3 1/2-INCH ACOUSTIACAL BATT INSULATION BETWEEN TJIs PER U.L. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS • 1/2-INCH RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 • TWO (2) LAYERS 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD OVER RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 BOTTOM OF CEILING TYPICAL WOOD FRAMED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY F2 TYPICAL WOOD FRAMED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY AT CORRIDORS F3 ASSEMBLY: ICC IBC 722.6.2 FIRE-RATING:1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STC RATING:60+ IIC RATING:54 LOCATION:SECOND LEVEL CEILING / THIRD LEVEL FLOOR THIRD LEVEL CEILING / FOURTH LEVEL FLOOR FOURTH LEVEL CEILING / FIFTH LEVEL FLOOR TOP OF FLOOR • FLOOR FINISH • 3/4-INCH FLOOR TOPPING • 23/32-INCH T&G ADVANTECH FLOOR DECKING • 2x8 WOOD FLOOR/CEILING FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • 3 1/2-INCH ACOUSTIACAL BATT INSULATION BETWEEN 2x8s • 1/2-INCH RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 • TWO (2) LAYERS 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD OVER RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 BOTTOM OF CEILING ASSEMBLY:ICC-ES ESR-1153, ASSEMBLY "F" FIRE-RATING:1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STC RATING:N/A IIC RATING:N/A LOCATION:FIFTH LEVEL CEILING TOP OF ROOF • ROOF MEMBRANE • 3/8" GYPSUM OVERLAYMENT BOARD • ROOF INSULATION • 1/2" GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT BOARD • 23/32-INCH T&G ADVANTECH FLOOR DECKING • TJI ROOF FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • 1 1/2-INCH THICK MIN. (2 1/2 PCF) THERMAFIBER FIRE BLANKETS OR SAFB MINERAL WOOL FIRE BLANKETS • 1/2-INCH RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 • TWO (2) LAYERS 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD OVER RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 BOTTOM OF CEILING TYPICAL CEILING / ROOF ASSEMBLY F4 ASSEMBLY:ICC IBC 722.6.2 FIRE-RATING:1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STC RATING: LOCATION:FIFTH LEVEL CEILING TOP OF ROOF • ROOF MEMBRANE • 3/8" GYPSUM OVERLAYMENT BOARD • ROOF INSULATION • 1/2" GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT BOARD • 23/32-INCH T&G ADVANTECH FLOOR DECKING • 2x WOOD ROOF FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • 1 1/2-INCH THICK MIN. (2 1/2 PCF) THERMAFIBER FIRE BLANKETS OR SAFB MINERAL WOOL FIRE BLANKETS • 1/2-INCH RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 • TWO (2) LAYERS 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD OVER RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 BOTTOM OF CEILING TYPICAL CEILING / ROOF ASSEMBLY -AT CORRIDORS F5 UL ASSEMBLY:UL P518 FIRE-RATING:1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED STC RATING:N/A IIC RATING:N/A LOCATION:CEILING AT TOP OF STAIR & ELEVATOR SHAFT ROOF • ROOF MEMBRANE • 3/8" GYPSUM OVERLAYMENT BOARD • ROOF INSULATION • 1/2" GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT BOARD • CORRUGATED METAL ROOF DECK, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • LIGHT GAUGE METAL STUD ROOF FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS • 8-INCH GLASS FIBER INSULATION, MIN. • 1/2-INCH RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 • TWO (2) LAYERS 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD OVER RESILIENT CHANNEL RC-1 BOTTOM OF CEILING TYPICAL CEILING / ROOF ASSEMBLY -AT STAIRS F6 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 t003 FIRE -RATING PLANS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0" GROUND FLOOR FIRE-RATING PLAN 1 SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0" SECOND FLOOR FIRE-RATING PLAN 2 SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0" THIRD FLOOR FIRE-RATING PLAN 3 SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0" FOURTH FLOOR FIRE-RATING PLAN 4 SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0" FIFTH FLOOR FIRE-RATING PLAN 5 N N N N N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 32' - 3 5/8" 12' - 3 1/16" 4' - 10 9/16" 11' - 1 1/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 13' - 4 1/8" 14' - 9 7/8" 9' - 7 7/16" 1' - 11 3/8"4' - 11 9/16" 23' - 9 11/16" 17' - 6 3/16"5' - 3 5/16"3' - 10 9/16"12' - 5 1/8"11' - 8 3/16"6' - 10 3/8"24' - 5 1/2" 82' - 1 1/4" 202' - 5 7/16" 32' - 3 5/8" 114' - 11 7/8" 55' - 1 15/16" VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL STORAGE ROOM 102 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL STORAGE ROOM 101 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL TRASH/RECYCLE ROOM ROOM 011 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL COMMON LAUNDRY ROOM WALL ROOM 017 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL SHARED COPY/FILES PIPE CHASE ROOM 004 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ROOM PIPE CHASE ROOM 010 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION VAPOR BARRIER PENETRATION AND RISER THROUGH TO FIRST LEVEL STORAGE ROOM 104 SEE DRAWING R2 FOR LOCATION Seeler Engineering, P.C. RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION UP THROUGH SECOND LEVEL FLOOR SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIRST LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION UP THROUGH SECOND LEVEL FLOOR SEE DRAWING R3 FOR LOCATION Seeler Engineering, P.C. C2 C1 RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R4 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R4 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R4 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R4 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R4 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R4 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO SECOND LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWINGS R4 FOR LOCATION Seeler Engineering, P.C. C2 C1 RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R5 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R5 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R5 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R5 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R5 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R5 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO THIRD LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWINGS R5 FOR LOCATION Seeler Engineering, P.C. C2 C1 RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R6 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R6 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R6 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R6 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R6 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R6 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FOURTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWINGS R6 FOR LOCATION Seeler Engineering, P.C. C2 C1 RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R7 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R7 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R7 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R7 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R7 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWING R7 FOR LOCATION RISER LOCATION THROUGH FLOOR UP TO FIFTH LEVEL CEILING SEE DRAWINGS R7 FOR LOCATION Seeler Engineering, P.C. S RISER FAN LOCATION RISER FAN LOCATION RISER FAN LOCATION RISER FAN LOCATION RISER FAN LOCATION RISER FAN LOCATION RISER FAN LOCATION RISER LOCATIONS THROUGH ROOF Seeler Engineering, P.C. CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS BREAKLINE 387.0 387.0 386.0 387.0 387.5 386.0 387.0 386.5 386.5 386.5 387.0 386.5 387.0 387.0 387.0 387.0 386.5 386.5 386.5 387.0 386.5 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS BREAKLINE 387.0 387.0 386.0 387.0 387.5 386.0 387.0 386.5 386.5 386.5 387.0 386.5 387.0 387.0 387.0 387.0 386.5 386.5 386.5 387.0 386.5 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS x x x CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS ŝ Ş ŝ Ş CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS 10' REAR YARD SETBACK WEST COURT STREET NORTH MEADOW STREET CONTRACT LIMIT LINE CONSTRUCTION STAGING AREA TREE PROTECTION FENCE, TYP CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE GATE CONTRACT LIMIT LINE CONSTRUCTION FENCE, TYP FUTURE BUILDING SIDEWALK TO REMAIN OPEN TILL CURB REPLACEMENT AND SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION SEE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN FOR RE-ROUTING SIDEWALK TO REMAIN OPEN TILL CURB REPLACEMENT AND SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION SEE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN FOR RE-ROUTING TRACKING PAD, SEE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN 0 0 10' 20' CONTRACT LIMIT LINE GENERAL SHEET NOTES - STAGING 1. CONSTRUCTION FENCING TO BE INSTALLED AS NECESSARY TO PROTECT PEDESTRIANS, CONTROL VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AND PROTECT ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS. 2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY WALKWAYS AND TRAFFIC SIGNS TO PROTECT PEDESTRIANS AND MAINTAIN SAFE PASSAGE ALONG PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY. 3. PROVIDE SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS AT ALL EXISTING CATCH BASINS AFFECTED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION. SEE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN. 4. DO NOT STORE EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS WITHIN THE DRIPLINE OF TREES. 5. PROTECT ALL SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE UTILITIES TO REMAIN DURING DEMOLITION WORK. 6. ALL REMOVED/DEMOLISHED MATERIAL SHALL BECOME CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY AND REMOVED FROM SITE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OWNER TO RESERVE RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL ON ALL DEMOLISHED MATERIAL. 7. ALL TREE STUMPS ARE TO BE REMOVED COMPLETELY, ALONG WITH ALL ROOTS 6" AND LARGER. 8. PROTECT EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN. TREE PROTECTION FENCE TO BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. 9. PROTECT BENCHMARKS. 10. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ALL UTILITY OWNERS HAVING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ON SITE PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. 11. AS PER N.Y.S. INDUSTRIAL CODE 753: CONTRACTOR TO CALL DIG SAFELY NEW YORK (1-800-962-7962) TO LOCATE BURIED CABLES OR OTHER UNDERGROUND UTILITIES NO LESS THAN TWO OR MORE THAN TEN WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO DIGGING, DRILLING, EXCAVATING, DIVING POSTS, ETC. TRACKING PAD CONSTRUCTION STAGING AREA LEGEND TREE PROTECTION FENCE CONSTRUCTION FENCE © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 10' REAR YARD SETBACK WEST COURT STREET NORTH MEADOW STREET CONTRACT LIMIT LINE BUILDING TO BE REMOVED (SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS) BUILDING TO BE REMOVED (SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS) BUILDING TO BE REMOVED (SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS) BUILDING TO BE REMOVED (SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS) BUILDING TO BE REMOVED REMOVE SHED SAWCUT ASPHALT SAWCUT ASPHALT - ITEM 520.09000010 SAWCUT CONCRETE AT NEAREST SCORE JOINT REMOVE CONCRETE PAVERS - TYP (SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION) ITEM 608.03010005 REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT INCLUDED IN ITEM 203.02 REMOVE VEGETATION - INCLUDED IN ITEM 203.02 REMOVE TREE - ITEM 614.060104 SAWCUT ASPHALT - ITEM 520.09000010 SAWCUT CONCRETE AT NEAREST SCORE JOINT - ITEM 520.09000010 REMOVE VEGETATION - INCLUDED IN ITEM 203.02 REMOVE GRAVEL DRIVE REMOVE ASPHALT PAVEMENT REMOVE TREE - TYP REMOVE FENCE REMOVE FENCE REMOVE FENCE REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVE GRAVEL DRIVE REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVE SIGN REMOVE BOLLARD - TYP SIGNS TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED SIGNS TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED SEE CIVIL PLANS FOR UTILITY REMOVALS AND / OR ADJUSTMENTS CONTRACT LIMIT LINE UTILITY POLE TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED UTILITY POLE TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED UTILITY POLE TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED UTILITY POLE TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED PEDESTRIAN CROSSING LIGHT TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED REMOVE TREE - ITEM 614.060104 REMOVE TREE - ITEM 614.060104 REMOVE TREE - ITEM 614.060104 0 0 10' 20' CONTRACT LIMIT LINE GENERAL SHEET NOTES - DEMOLITION SAWCUT PAVEMENT - ITEM 520.09000010 BUILDING SIGN AND FOOTINGS TO BE REMOVED TREE TO BE REMOVED CURB TO BE REMOVED - ITEM 609.06000008 FENCE TO BE REMOVED BOLLARD TO BE REMOVED 1. CONSTRUCTION FENCING TO BE INSTALLED AS NECESSARY TO PROTECT PEDESTRIANS, CONTROL VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AND PROTECT ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS. 2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY WALKWAYS AND TRAFFIC SIGNS TO PROTECT PEDESTRIANS AND MAINTAIN SAFE PASSAGE ALONG PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY. 3. WALL AND STAIR FOOTINGS TO BE REMOVED COMPLETELY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLAN. 4. PROVIDE SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS AT ALL EXISTING CATCH BASINS AFFECTED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION. SEE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN. 5. SEE CIVIL PLAN FOR UTILITY REMOVALS AND / OR ADJUSTMENTS. 6. PLANTING BEDS TO BE EXCAVATED TO A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 24". 7. PROTECT ALL SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE UTILITIES TO REMAIN DURING DEMOLITION WORK. 8. ALL REMOVED/DEMOLISHED MATERIAL SHALL BECOME CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY AND REMOVED FROM SITE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OWNER TO RESERVE RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL ON ALL DEMOLISHED MATERIAL. 9. ALL TREE STUMPS ARE TO BE REMOVED COMPLETELY, ALONG WITH ALL ROOTS 6" AND LARGER. 10. PROTECT EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN. TREE PROTECTION FENCE TO BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. 11. PROTECT BENCHMARKS. 12. SEE SOIL MANAGEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REMOVALS OF CONTAMINATED SOILS. 11. AS PER N.Y.S. INDUSTRIAL CODE 753: CONTRACTOR TO CALL DIG SAFELY NEW YORK (1-800-962-7962) TO LOCATE BURIED CABLES OR OTHER UNDERGROUND UTILITIES NO LESS THAN TWO OR MORE THAN TEN WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO DIGGING, DRILLING, EXCAVATING, DIVING POSTS, ETC. 12. SITE DRAWINGS BASED ON SURVEY BY: T.G. MILLER PC 203 North Aurora Street Ithaca, NY 14850 (607) 272-6477 CONCRETE PAVEMENT OR PAVERS TO BE REMOVED - INCLUDED IN ITEM 203.02 ASPHALT PAVING AND SUBBASE TO BE REMOVED - INCLUDED IN ITEM 203.02 CONCRETE PAVERS TO BE REMOVED (SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION) - ITEM 608.03010005 VEGETATION TO BE REMOVED INCLUDED IN ITEM 203.02 GRAVEL TO BE REMOVED LEGEND TREE PROTECTION FENCE © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 MIXED-USE BUILDING SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS NORTH MEADOW STREET SIDE YARD SETBACK - NONE SIDE YARD SETBACK - NONE CONTRACT LIMIT LINE PROPERTY LINE CONTRACT LIMIT LINE CONTRACT LIMIT LINE FRONT YARD SETBACK - NONE WEST COURT STREET 22.00' +/-5.00' MATCH EXISTING WALK WIDTH B A A A B 10' REAR YARD SETBACK C REAR YARD SETBACK - 10'-0" 8.50' TYP 18.00' TYP.24.00'18.00' TYP. 5.50' 7.00' R14' 22.00' +/-5.00' MATCH EXISTING WALK WIDTH 5.50'TYP. 9.50' 6.00' B2 L-501 GRANITE CURB A5 L-501 PIN AT BUILDING THRESHOLD A5 L-501 PIN AT BUILDING THRESHOLD B1 L-503 PERGOLA STRUCTURE D3 L-501 ADA CURB RAMP - TYPE B ITEM 608.21000003 C4 L-501 BIKE RACK B5 L-502 TREE PITS WITH POROUS BOUND AGGREGATE ITEM 420.98000004 GAS METER B3 L-501 MOUNTABLE GRANITE CURB D4 L-501 ADA PAVEMENT MARKINGS B1 L-501 FLUSH GRANITE CURB BUILDING OVERHANG - SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS 7.00' 7.00' 5.58' B2 L-502 A1 L-502 C1 L-501 WHEEL STOP, TYP. B2 L-501 GRANITE CURB B1 L-501 FLUSH GRANITE CURB TACTILE WARNING, TYP. 8.50' TYP. A5 L-501 PIN AT BUILDING THRESHOLD A5 L-501 PIN AT BUILDING THRESHOLD 29.00' 20.00' 2.00' 5.00'6.50' 8.00' 1.50' 2.00' 16.00'20.00' 2.00' 6.50' 8.00' 10.25' 18.75' 20.00' 9.00' 11.00' 9.00' 13.00' 11.00' 8.50'1.50' 1.50' 1.50' 5.00' 5.00' TYP. 7.50' 1.50' 51.00' 15.00' 6.00' 6.00' 7.50' 7.37' 15.44' 9.00' 14.00' R5' R5' 20.00' MOUNTABLE CURB 29.00' MOUNTABLE CURB REAR YARD SETBACK - 10'-0" R2' 5.00' 38.50' FLUSH CURB 5.00' 12.00' 11.00' B4 L-503 SMOKING STRUCTURE C1 L-502 TRASH ENCLOSURE R33' B2 L-501 GRANITE CURBTRANSFORMER LOCATION SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 7.50' R43' R5' B2 L-501 GRANITE CURB R5' R5' R40' B5 L-502 BENCH, TYP. ITEM 615.08010005 B2 L-501 GRANITE CURB ITEM 609.0203 C3 L-501 BOLLARD, TYP. 8.50' 1.50' 1.00' TREE PLANTING, TYP. ITEM 611.0111 KEY MATERIAL DETAIL ASPHALT PAVEMENT - ITEMS 402.098303 AND 402.198903 MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENT- ITEM 608.0101 MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENT - DARK GRAY COLORED HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENT STONE MULCH RESET EXISTING PERMEABLE PAVERS - ITEM 608.0301000005 OVER STRUCTURAL SOIL ITEM 610.14000011 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS ITEM 608.03000001OVER CONCRETE BASE ASPHALT PATCH - ITEMS 402.098303 AND 402.198903 0 0 10' 20' B5 L501 A2 L501 A1 L501 D2 L501 C5 L501 D1 L501 B4 L501 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ALL UTILITY OWNERS HAVING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ON SITE PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT UTILITY LOCATING COMPANY AND LOCATE ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO ANY EXCAVATION. 2. SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR LAYOUT OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. 3. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LAYOUT OF UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING. 4. INSTALL EXPANSION JOINTS EVERY 30' IN CONCRETE AND IN AREAS WHERE CONCRETE ABUTS CURBS AND OTHER FIXED OBJECTS. 5. VERIFY DIMENSIONS AND ACCEPT CONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. REPORT DISCREPANCIES TO LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT BEFORE PROCEEDING. 6. DO NOT SCALE FROM MEASURING DRAWINGS. 7. WALKS, DRIVES, CURBS, PARKING, & BUILDING LOCATIONS TO BE LAID OUT IN THE FIELD BY A LICENSED SURVEYOR. 8. DIMENSIONS TO CURBS ARE TO EXPOSED FACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 9. SITE DRAWINGS BASED ON SURVEY BY: T.G. MILLER PC 203 North Aurora Street Ithaca, NY 14850 (607) 272-6477 GENERAL SHEET NOTES - LAYOUT CONTRACT LIMIT LINE SAWCUT PAVEMENT ITEM 627.50140008 TRAFFIC SIGN - D5 / L-501A LEGEND FURNISHING SCHEDULE TYPE QUANTITY MODEL / TYPE FINISH BICYCLE RACK 7 DERO - HOOP RACK S.S. BRUSHED SYMBOL PARKING LOT POLE LIGHT WITH LIGHT SPILLAGE CUT-OFF SHIELD (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) CONCRETE JOINT TREE PROTECTION FENCE BOLLARD - C3 / L5-01 A2 L501 © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 BOLLARD LIGHT (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) MIXED-USE BUILDING WEST COURT STREET NORTH MEADOW STREET PROPERTY LINE FFE: 387.25 FFE: 387.50 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.8% 1.8% 1.5% 1.0% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.8% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 10' REAR YARD SETBACK 387.48 TC: 387.40 BC: 386.90 TC: 387.50 BC: 387.00 TC: 387.50 BC: 387.00 TC: 387.50 BC: 387.00 TC: 387.50 BC: 387.00 TC: 387.00 BC: 386.50 TC: 386.75 BC: 386.25 EE: 387.48 MAX 1/4" BELOW FFE EE: 387.48 MAX 1/4" BELOW FFE TR: 386.65 TR: 386.68 386.77 TIE INTO EXISTING +/-387.02 387.35 386.87 386.96 386.98 387.26 387.73 387.12387.02 386.93 386.95 387.09 386.99 EE: 387.48 MAX 1/4" BELOW FFE EE: 387.48 MAX 1/4" BELOW FFE TC: 387.65 BC: 387.15 TC: 386.82 BC: 386.32 386.87 387.42 TIE INTO EXISTING +/-386.50 TIE INTO EXISTING +/-386.95 387.00 387.48 387.48 387.27 RIM 386.80 RIM 386.55 CATCH BASIN RIM 386.00 CATCH BASIN RIM 386.00 386.84 387.18 387.48 BR: 386.31 BR: 386.15 BR: 386.42 TS: 387.38 BS: 386.80 387.38 387.48 387.00 387.48 387.48 387.00386.66 386.50 386.84 386.57 386.57 386.91 387.00 386.91 386.66 387.40 386.94 386.50 387.03387.03 386.97 387.05 387.17 387.12 387.42 387.42 387.00 386.94 386.83 387.18 387.18 387.03386.94386.94 386.94 386.90 386.93 387.00 CATCH BASIN RIM 386.50 HP TC: 387.20 BC: 386.70 TC: 387.50 BC: 387.00 TC/BC: 387.00 TR: 386.92 1.3% BREAKLINE 2.0% 1.5% TC: 387.00 BC: 386.50 TC: 387.00 BC: 386.50 TC: 386.75 BC: 386.25 TIE INTO EXISTING +/- 385.50 TIE INTO EXISTING +/- 385.60 1.5% TIE INTO EXISTING TC: +/- 386.00 BC: +/- 385.50 1.5% TC: 387.03 BC: 386.53 TS: 387.48 BS: 386.90 385.66385.55 386.16 386.07 386.30 386.21 386.14 386.80 TC: 386.71 BC: 386.21 TC: 387.63 BC: 387.13 387.10 387.10 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: +/- 386.10 BC: +/- 385.60 386.76 HP: 387.47 RIM 387.10 TC/BC: 386.50 BR: 386.92 TR: 387.42 387.00 386.92 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 1.6% 386.65 386.67 BR: 386.20 TR: 386.60 TC: 386.62 BC: 386.12 TC: 386.23 BC: 386.23 TC: 386.75 BC: 386.25 TC: 386.85 BC: 386.35 TIE INTO EXISTING: +/-386.37 TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 386.15 TR: 386.68 BR: 386.34 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: 386.25 BC: 385.75 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: 386.27 BC: 385.77 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: 386.35 BC: 385.85 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: 386.43 BC: 385.93 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: 386.23 BC: 385.73 TIE INTO EXISTING TC: 386.13 BC: 385.63 TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 385.95TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 385.87TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 385.79TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 385.77TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 385.75TIE INTO EXISTING: +/- 385.65 387.0 387.0 386.0 387.0 387.5 386.0 TIE INTO EXISTING +/-386.57 387.0 386.5 386.5 386.5 387.0 386.5 387.0 TC: 387.38 BC: 386.88 387.0 387.0 387.0 386.5 386.5 386.5 387.0 386.5 0 0 10' 20' 1. ALL EXISTING STRUCTURES, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED TO REMAIN, FENCING, TREES, ETC., WITHIN CONSTRUCTION AREA SHALL BE REMOVED & DISPOSED OF OFF SITE. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ALL UTILITY COMPANIES HAVING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ON SITE OR IN RIGHT-OF-WAY PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT UTILITY LOCATING COMPANY AND LOCATE ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO GRADING START. 3. SITE GRADING SHALL NOT PROCEED UNTIL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. 4. GRADING AROUND EXISTING TREES TO BE MINIMIZED. 5. MINIMIZE IMPACT TO EXISTING, REMAINING LANDSCAPE WHILE EXCAVATING. GREAT CARE IS TO BE TAKEN TO AVOID DISTURBING ROOTS OF EXISTING TREES. HAND EXCAVATION WILL BE REQUIRED WHERE EXISTING TREE ROOTS ARE PRESENT. 6. ALL EXISTING UTILITY COVERS AND GRATES WITHIN THE AREA OF DISTURBANCE ARE TO BE ADJUSTED TO MEET PROPOSED GRADES. 7. MATCH EXISTING GRADE AT ALL EDGES WHERE PROJECT WORK MEETS EXISTING SITE. 8. SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR PROPOSED UTILITIES. GENERAL SHEET NOTES - GRADING LEGEND EXISTING CONTOUR PROPOSED CONTOUR PROPOSED SPOT ELEVATION+846.00 BC = BOTTOM OF CURB TC = TOP OF CURB FFE = FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION PROPOSED CATCH BASIN / DRAINAGE INLET EXISTING SPOT ELEVATION PROPOSED HALF CONTOUR CONTRACT LIMIT LINE TC 389.30 BC 388.80 © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 A1 WEST COURT STREET NORTH MEADOW STREET 10' REAR YARD SETBACK 1 CCa 2 CCa 2 ACm 2 CCa 6 HYa 6 VIp 8 SPl 7 BUs 7 PAi 5 CAa 5 VIp 5 HYa 17 CAa 4 VIp 5 BUs 5 COs 7 BUs 7 BUs 5 COs 5 BUs 4 VIp 6 CAa 11 SPg 9 JUv 11 SPg 8 SPg 12 VIp 12 JUv 5 NEr 9 SPl 10 JUv 16 COs 11 JUv 11 DRf 9 HYa 5 COs 11 EEv 12 DRf 21 DRf 12 EEv 15 HYa 10 SPg 8 EEv 9 HYa 6 VIp 9 HYa 3 VIp 11 DRf 9 EEv12 SPg 8 HYa 4 COs 3 VIp 3 COs 8 WEf 12 SPl 8 NEr 12 SPl 8 NEr 2 HAp 10 COs 2 ACm 12 COs 16 SPl 2 PQu 2 HAp 2 PQu 2 HAp 2 PQu 2 HAp 2 PQu 2 HAp 2 PQu 4 HAp 4 PQu 2 HAp 2 PQu EXISTING STRUCTURAL SOIL BENEATH EXISTING STRUCTURAL SOIL BENEATH 15 NEr 10 PAi 12 PAi 10 SPl 5 VIp 13 PAi 10 SPl 10 PAi 4 CKo 9 CAa 4 DRf 5 NEr 9 JUv 7 DRf 4 MAd 0 0 10' 20' GENERAL SHEET NOTES - PLANTING 1. ALL PLANTING BEDS TO BE PREPARED AS SPECIFIED: SHRUB BEDS TO BE PREPARED IN THEIR ENTIRETY WITH 24" OF PLANTING SOIL MIX. TREE PITS TO BE DUG TO DEPTH OF ROOTBALL BY 3X THE DIAMETER. 2. AFTER BEDS ARE PREPARED, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR IS TO LOCATE TREES, SHRUBS AND PERENNIALS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. TREE, SHRUB AND PERENNIAL LOCATIONS ARE TO BE APPROVED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT BEFORE THEY ARE PLANTED. 3. NO PLANTS ARE TO BE PLANTED UNDER ROOF OVERHANGS OR CANOPIES. 4. ALL TREES AND PLANTS TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF ANSI 260.1 "AMERICAN STANDARD FOR NURSERY STOCK". 5. MAINTAIN AND WARRANTY ALL LIVING PLANT MATERIAL AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. 6. HAND DIG AND PLANT SHRUBS AND PERENNIALS WITHIN CANOPY OF EXISTING TREES. PROTECT ROOTS OF EXISTING TREES DURING INSTALLATION. LEGEND SHRUBS / GRASSES / PERENNIALS CONTRACT LIMIT LINE PROPOSED TREE F7 L501 F9 L501 SELECTED PLANTS QT KE Y BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME SIZE ROOT COMMENTS DECIDUOUS TREES 4 ACm Acer miyabei 'Morton' State Street Miyabe Maple 1 3/4" TO 2 1/4" B&B ORNAMENTAL TREES 4 CKo Cornus kousa Korean Dogwood 8 - 10' B&B 5 CCa Cercis Canadensis Eastern Redbud 6-8' B&B 4 MAd Malus 'Donald Wyman' Crabapple 8'-10' B&B BRANCHED TO 5.5' (ABOVE HEAD HEIGHT) SHRUBS 31 BUs Buxus sempervirens 'North Star' North Star Boxwood #5 CONT 55 COs Cornus sericea 'Cardinal' Cardinal Red Twig Dogwood #5 CONT 66 HYa Hydrangea arborescens 'Annabelle' Annabelle Hydrangea #5 CONT 51 JUv Juniperus virginiana 'Grey Owl' Grey Owl Juniper #5 CONT 69 SPl Spiraea japonica 'Lemon Princess' Lemon Princess Spirea #3 CONT 52 SPg Spiraea japonica 'Goldflame' Goldflame Japanese Spirea #3 CONT 48 VIp Viburnum plicatum tomentosum 'Shasta' Shasta Doublefile Viburnum #5 CONT. PERENNIALS 37 CAa Calamagrostis x acutiflora 'Karl Foerster' Feather Reed Grass #2 CONT 59 DRf Dryopteris filix-mas Male Fern #2 CONT 40 EEv Echinacea x 'Evan Saul' Sundown Big Sky Coneflower #2 CONT 39 NEr Nepeta racemosa 'Walkers Low' Catmint #2 CONT 52 PAl Pennisetum alopecuroides 'Hameln' Fountain Grass #2 CONT VINES 16 HAp Hydrangea anomala ssp. petiolaris Climbing Hydrangea #3 CONT 16 PQu Parthenocissus quinquefolia Virginia Creeper #3 CONT TURF LAWN F3 L501 EXISTING TREE TO REMAIN © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 A1 A1 A1 WEST COURT STREET NORTH MEADOW STREET 10' REAR YARD SETBACK 0 0 10' 20' GENERAL SHEET NOTES - SOILS 1. ALL PLANTING BEDS TO BE PREPARED AS SPECIFIED: SHRUB BEDS TO BE PREPARED IN THEIR ENTIRETY WITH 24" DEPTH PLANTING SOIL MIX. TREE PITS TO BE DUG TO DEPTH OF ROOTBALL BY 3X THE DIAMETER. 2. AFTER BEDS ARE PREPARED, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR IS TO LOCATE TREES, SHRUBS AND PERENNIALS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. TREE, SHRUB AND PERENNIAL LOCATIONS ARE TO BE APPROVED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT BEFORE THEY ARE PLANTED. 3. ALL DISTURBED AREAS THAT ARE NOT SHOWN AS PAVED OR PLANTED BED ARE TO BE SEEDED AS LAWN. PREPARE AND SEED LAWN AS PER SPECIFICATIONS, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. LEGEND CONTRACT LIMIT LINE LAWN ESTABLISHMENT 4" PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE B4 L503 24" PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE, WITH 4" WOOD MULCH A4 / A5 L503 STRUCTURAL SOIL B5 L503 © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 A1 NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS FOR TOOL JOINTS, EXPANSION JOINTS (EJ), LAYOUT WIDTHS AND RADII. 2. 2" MINIMUM CONCRETE COVERAGE ON MESH AND TIES WIDTH AS SHOWN ON PLAN 6"1'-0" Scale: 1"=1'-0" HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENTA1 3" CONCRETE WALK #4 REBAR @ 18" O.C. BOTH WAYS INCLUDED IN COMPACTED SUB-BASE COMPACTED SUBGRADE CROSS SLOPE AS SHOWN ON GRADING PLAN NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS FOR TOOL JOINTS, EXPANSION JOINTS (EJ), LAYOUT WIDTHS AND RADII. 2. 2" MINIMUM CONCRETE COVERAGE ON MESH AND TIES WIDTH AS SHOWN ON PLAN CROSS SLOPE AS SHOWN ON GRADING PLAN 8" Scale: 1"=1'-0" MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENTA2 6" 5" WELDED WIRE FABRIC 6" X 6" - W2.9 x W2.9 FLAT SHEETS SET ON CHAIRS INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.0101 COMPACTED SUBBASE OR STRUCTURAL SOIL. SEE L401 FOR LOCATIONS. - ITEM 304.12 COMPACTED SUBGRADE CONCRETE PAVEMENT MIX (4500PSI AT 28 DAYS) - ITEM 608.0101 NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION AND TYPE OF JOINTS. 2. OVERLAP MESH SHEETS 1'-0" MIN. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS TO BE LOCATED EVERY 30' O.C. MIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS TJ EJ Scale: 1"=1'-0" CONCRETE JOINTSA3 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT (EJ)/ CONSTRUCTION JOINT (CJ) AND CLOSED-CELL FOAM FILLER AND JOINT SEALANT INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.0101 1/2" EPOXY COATED SMOOTH DOWEL x 18" W/ PLASTIC SLEEVE AT 18" O.C. INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.0101 1" DEEP TOOL JOINT (TJ) W/ 1 4" RADIUS INCLUDED IN ITEM 608.0101 Scale: 1"=1'-0" RESET EXISTING UNIT PAVERS OVER STRUCTURAL SOILC5 EXISTING PERMEABLE UNIT PAVERS - ITEM 608.03010005 UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE WIDTH AS SHOWN ON PLAN CROSS SLOPE AS SHOWN ON GRADING PLAN COMPACTED STRUCTURAL SOIL - ITEM 601.14000011 OPEN GRADED STONE SETTING BED AASHTO #8/#9 INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.03010005 POLYMERIC SAND JOINTS INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.03010005 2" NOTE: 1. 1/4" RECESS AT BUILDING THRESHOLD 4" 1'-6" Scale: 1"=1'-0" PIN AT BUILDING THRESHOLDA5 6" CONCRETE PAVEMENT AT BUILDING THRESHOLDS BUILDING FACE #4 EPOXY-COATED SMOOTH DOWEL AT 16" O.C. GREASE AND CAST INTO FOUNDATION WALL. BUILDING FOUNDATION EXPANSION JOINT Scale: 1"=1'-0" FLUSH GRANITE CURB B1 1'-2" 5" 3" 2'-0" ADJACENT PAVING CONCRETE DRY MIX BEDDING UNIFORM PILES AT EACH END AND ON 3-FOOT CENTERS BENEATH CURB FOR FULL LENGTH OF CURB INCLUDED IN - ITEM 609.0203 FLUSH GRANITE CURB W/ SAWN & THERMAL TOP AND SAWN FACES - ITEM 609.0203 3000 PSI CONCRETE BACKING FULL LENGTH OF CURB. FORCE CONCRETE THROUGH BACK OF JOINTS. GROUT FRONT AND TOP OF JOINTS FLUSH WITH 1:2 MORTAR MIX INCLUDED IN ITEM 609.0203 ADJACENT PAVING 1'=1'-0" ASPHALT PATCHB4 1'-6" 3" SAWCUT RESURFACE LIMIT LOCATION AS SHOWN ON PLANS - ITEM 627.50140008 BITUMINOUS SEALER - ITEM 418.7603 EXISTING ASPHALT EXISTING SUB-BASE 2" TOP COURSE - ITEM 402.098303 COMPACTED SUB-BASE COURSE MIN 8" DEEP - ITEM 304.12 3" BINDER COURSE - ITEM 402.198903 Scale: 1"=1'-0" ASPHALT PAVEMENTB5 11 2"1'-0" 3" 2'-0" WRAP TOP COURSE - ITEM 402.098303 BINDER COURSE - ITEM 402.198903 COMPACTED SUBGRADE SEPARATION FABRIC TO WRAP UNDER ASPHALT - ITEM 207.21 TAMP EDGES COMPACTED SUBBASE, SHOULDER TO EXTEND 12" BEYOND EDGE OF PAVEMENT - ITEM 304.12 1'-4" NOTES: 1. RADIUS CURBING SHALL BE USED ON ALL RADII LESS THAN 100 FEET. 6" Scale: 1"=1'-0" GRANITE CURBB2 3" 5" ADJACENT PAVING ADJACENT PAVEMENT OR PLANTING GRANITE CURB 1/2" BATTERED FACE, 6" DOWN FROM SAWN TOP - ITEM 609.0203 3000 PSI CONCRETE BACKING FULL LENGTH OF CURB. FORCE CONCRETE THROUGH BACK OF JOINTS. GROUT FRONT AND TOP OF JOINTS FLUSH WITH MORTAR MIX INCLUDED IN - ITEM 609.0203 VARIES PER GRADING PLAN, 6" TYPICAL 1:3:6 DRY MIX UNIFORM PILES AT EACH END AND ON 3-FOOT CENTERS BENEATH CURB FOR FULL LENGTH OF CURB INCLUDED IN - ITEM 609.0203 1 2" EXPANSION JOINT AND JOINT SEALANT BETWEEN GRANITE AND CONCRETE INCLUDED IN - ITEM 609.0203 IN DOT ROW ONLY - REPLACE DRAINAGE STONE AND ANY EXISTING UNDERDRAIN THAT IS DISTURBED WITH 4" HEAVY DUTY PERFORATED HDPE UNDERDRAIN PIPE WITH GEOTEXTILE FILTER SOCK OFF APPROVED DOT MATERIAL LIST. SEE CIVIL COMPACTED SUBGRADE 1'-4" NOTES: 1. RADIUS CURBING SHALL BE USED ON ALL RADII LESS THAN 100 FEET. 6" Scale: 1"=1'-0" MOUNTABLE GRANITE CURBB3 3" 5" ADJACENT PAVING ADJACENT PAVEMENT OR PLANTING MOUNTABLE GRANITE CURB, 4" CHAMBERED CORNER, 6" DOWN FROM SAWN TOP - ITEM 609.0106 3000 PSI CONCRETE BACKING FULL LENGTH OF CURB. FORCE CONCRETE THROUGH BACK OF JOINTS. GROUT FRONT AND TOP OF JOINTS FLUSH WITH MORTAR MIX INCLUDED IN - ITEM 602.0203 VARIES PER GRADING PLAN, 6" TYPICAL 1:3:6 DRY MIX UNIFORM PILES AT EACH END AND ON 3-FOOT CENTERS BENEATH CURB FOR FULL LENGTH OF CURB INCLUDED IN - ITEM 602.0203 1 2" EXPANSION JOINT AND JOINT SEALANT BETWEEN GRANITE AND CONCRETE INCLUDED IN - ITEM 609.0106 COMPACTED SUBGRADE NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION AND TYPE OF SCORE JOINTS. 2. BROOM PERPENDICULAR TO LINE OF TRAFFIC. 3. 2" WINDOW PANE EDGE FINISH. WIDTH AS SHOWN ON PLAN WIDTH AS SHOWN ON PLAN Scale: 3/4"=1'-0" CONCRETE BROOM FINISH DETAILA4 MEDIUM BROOM FINISH. BROOM PERPENDICULAR TO LINE OF TRAFFIC INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.0101 TOOLED CONTROL JOINTS INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.0101 2" WINDOW PANE EDGE FINISH INCLUDED IN - ITEM 608.0101 Scale: 1"=1'-0" STONE MULCHD2 COMPACTED SUBGRADE 1 8" THICK x 51 2" HIGH ALUMINUM EDGING WITH 12" LONG STAKES ADJACENT LAWN OR PLANTING BED STONE MULCH BUILDING FACE SEPARATION FABRIC, WRAP 5" ON BOTH SIDES VARIES SEE PLAN 8" Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" BOLLARDC3 3'-0" 4'-0" 1'-0" 3'-0" 4" 4" 4" ADJACENT PAVING, MULCH, OR CURB SUBBASE COMPACTED SUBGRADE 12" SONOTUBE CONCRETE SCHEDULE 80 STAINLESS STEEL 4" O.D. PIPE BOLLARD. 4" O.D. DIA X 5/8"H CONVEX STAINLESS STEEL ENDCAP, WELDED TO PIPE Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" BICYCLE RACKC4 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL MOUNTING HARDWARE 2. MOUNT AS PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 3. FOR BICYCLE RACK PRODUCT, SEE SPECIFICATIONS STAINLESS STEEL BIKE RACK MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENT SURFACE MOUNT Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" BENCHC2 NOTES: 1. BASIS OF DESIGN IS ROUGH AND READY BACKLESS BENCH BY STREETLIFE SEE SPECIFICATIONS ITEM 615.08010005 (4) SURFACE MOUNT TABS WITH 1 2" Ø HOLE FOR ANCHORING. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL MOUNTING HARDWARE. MOUNT AS PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE MOUNTING DETAIL - NTS BENCH BASE FINISHED GRADE CONCRETE PAVEMENT - ITEM 608.0101 Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" ADA CURB RAMP - TYPE BD3 6'-0" TYP 6'-0" TYP 2'-0" PITCH 1:12 PITCH 1:12 NOTES: 1. SEE LAYOUT PLAN FOR LOCATION AND DIMENSION OF CURB RAMPS 2. GRADE CHANGES TO BE SMOOTH AND EVENLY PITCHED. 6'-0" TYP WALK WHERE SHOWN PITCH 1:20 PLAN 6" TYP LANDSCAPE WHERE SHOWN CAST IRON DETECTABLE WARNING TILES - ITEM 608.21000003 HANDICAP PAVEMENT MARKING NOTES: 1. REMOVED AND STOCKPILED SIGNS TO BE REINSTALLED. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ANY NEW OR ADDITIONAL SIGNS NEEDED TO MEET ADA PARKING CODE REQUIREMENTS. 2. POSTS AND MOUNTING HARDWARE SHALL BE GALVANIZED TAMPER RESISTANT BOLTS, LENGTH AS NECESSARY. Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" ADA PAVEMENT MARKINGS D4 4'-0" TRAFFIC WHITE 4" WIDE PAINT LINE, TYP. CURB FACE TRAFFIC WHITE 4" WIDE PAINT LINE, TYP. TRAFFIC BLUE PAINT TRAFFIC WHITE PAINT NEW YORK STATE ACCESSIBLE ICON 3'-0" TYP. 12" 5'-0" CLEAR MIN., TYP. RESERVED PARKING TYPE A TYPE B IN AISLE TYPE C Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" TRAFFIC SIGNSD5 STOP PEDESTRIAN CROSSING STOP PEDESTRIAN CROSSING 2" GALVANIZED U-CHANNEL POST WITH BREAKAWAY BASE ADJACENT PAVEMENT 2500 PSI CONC. SONO TUBE Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" WHEEL STOPC1 END VIEW WHEEL STOP 3 4" REINF. ROD SHALL BE PLACED PRIOR TO SURFACING, OR IN A HOLE DRILLED IN THE FINISHED SURFACE WITH A TIGHT FIT OBTAINED BY AN APPROVED METHOD, OR DRIVEN INTO THE SURFACING 7'-0" MIN 8'-0" MAX 1'-0" 2'-0" MIN DRAINAGE OPENING 1'-0" 2'-0" MIN DRAINAGE OPENING 1'-0" 61 2" 61 2"2'-7 1 2" 8" 21 2" 4" 2" 2 - #3 8" HOLE FOR 3 4" Ø ROD. GROUT HOLE FULL. INSTALLATION PLAN ELEVATION PARKING STALL C L SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" CONCRETE PAVERS ON CONCRETE BASED1 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE WEEPS 12" IN DIA. IN CONCRETE EVERY 24" ALONG LINE OF LOW POINT. PLACE 12" SQUARE OF FILTER FABRIC OVER WEEPS BEFORE PLACEMENT OF SETTING BED. 8" 5" 1" CONCRETE PAVERS SAND CEMENT SETTING BED POLYMERIC SAND SWEPT JOINTS COMPACTED SUBBASE OR STRUCTURAL SOIL. SEE L401 FOR LOCATIONS - ITEM 304.12 CONCRETE PAVEMENT BASE COMPACTED SUBGRADE PROVIDE 1 2" WEEP HOLES AT 24"O.C. ALONG LINE OF LOW POINT © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" TRASH ENCLOSUREC3 2X4 BEVELED CAP 2X6 TOP RAIL 1X6 FENCE BOARDS 6X6 FENCE POST HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAD 5'-4" SECTION DETAIL 4" NOTES: 1. POSTS TO BE 6X6 CLEAR P.T., ALL OTHER LUMBER TO BE CLEAR CEDAR LUMBER S4S. 2. SOLID STAIN ALL EXPOSED AND CUT SURFACES, COLOR TO BE SUPERDECK TRANSPARENT STAIN OR APPROVED EQIVALENT. PROVIDE THREE (3) COATS. 3. DOOR HARDWARE TO BE 1-1/2" POWDER COATED BLACK, GALVANIZED STEEL FRAME, MIN. 0.045" WALL THICKNESS W/ HINGES RATED FOR 3000 POUNDS. COLOR TO BE CLEAR. 4. ALL OTHER NAILS, SCREWS, AND HARDWARE TO BE GALVANIZED. 5. GATE LATCH TO BE: POWDER COATED LOCKABLE DURA GATE GH101BIG AS PROVIDED BY GATEDEPOT.COM OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 6. HINGE TO BE: POWDER COATED 4.5" HEAVY DUTY SPRING HINGE, FULL MORTISE 892056 AS PROVIDED BY HARDWARESOURCE.COM OR APPROVED EQUIVAL 7. CANE BOLT TO BE: DURA GATE DGT-CB MECHANICAL CANE BOLT AS PROVIDED BY GATEDEPOT.COM OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 8. GATE LATCH, HINGE, AND CANE BOLT TO BE POWDER COATED BLACK. 9. INSTALL GATE LATCH, HINGE, AND CANE BOLT PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS. 2X6 BEVELED BOTTOM RAIL 6'-11" 2" SIDE ELEVATION FRONT ELEVATION 8'-0" 5'-4" SECTION DUMPSTER 6'-11" NON-SAG STEEL FRAME ADJUSTABLE GATE KIT W/ DIAGONAL BRACING SIMPSON CPS6 STRONG-TIE STANDOFF BASE OR APPROVED EQUAL W/ 5/8" THREADED ROD SET IN CONCRETE FOOTING AND EPOXY ANCHORED TO WOOD POST PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 8'-0" 1'-2" 1'-0" MIN. THICKEN SLAB TO 14" AT POST LOCATIONS A1 L501 1'-0" MIN. 2" 4" 61 2" 10'-6" 4" (MAX) 8'-0" EDGE OF CONCRETE PAD 4'-0" 6" HEAVY DUTY SPRING HINGE (SEE NOTES) GATE LATCH (SEE NOTES) MECHANICAL CANE BOLT (SEE NOTES) FINISH GRADE Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" FENCE / GREENSCREEN ELEVATION FROM NORTHA1 NOTES: 1. SEE DETAIL A4/L502 FOR FENCE AND GREEN SCREEN PANEL CONSTRUCTION 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN CEDAR FENCE PANEL, TYP GREENSCREEN PANEL, TYP 6X6 PT FENCE POST, TYP FINISH GRADE Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" FENCE / GREENSCREEN ELEVATION FROM WESTB2 NOTES: 1. SEE DETAIL A4/L502 FOR FENCE AND GREEN SCREEN PANEL CONSTRUCTION 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 8'-0" CEDAR FENCE PANEL 4'-0" GREEN SCREEN GREEN SCREEN PANEL IMAGE WOOD PANEL FENCE IMAGE Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" 6' TIGHT BOARD FENCE / GREENSCREENB1 6'-0" 6" SECTION NOTES: 1. COAT W (2) COATS SUPERDECK 2600 SERIES CLEAR WOOD FINISH PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION 3'-0" 1'-4" 3" 8'-0" O.C. 1X4 CEDAR FENCE BOARDS 6X6 PT FENCE POST COAT SURFACE OF POST W/ TAMKO PLASTIC ROOF CEMENT (LEAVE END GRAIN UNCOVERED CONCRETE FOOTING 1X6 CEDAR FENCE BOARDS 2X2 NAILER 5/4X6 CEDAR CAP 1" SPACING 2X2 NAILER DRAINAGE STONE 6' X 3.25' GREENSCREEN PANEL 4'-0" O.C. © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" TREE PLANTINGA5 3X WIDTH OF ROOT BALL 6" MIN PLANT SHALL BE SET AT OR SLIGHTLY ABOVE THE STABLISHED FINISH GRADE - ITEM 611.0111 4" SPECIFIED SHREDDED BARK MULCH INCLUDED IN - ITEM 611.0111 UNTIE AND ROLL BACK BURLAP FROM MIN. 1/3 OF ROOT BALL. SYNTHETIC WRAP IS UNACCEPTABLE. CUT WIRE BASKETS AND REMOVE. SPECIFIED PLANTING MIX - ITEM 610.1404 GRADE TO FORM SAUCER IN LAWN AREAS ONLY SCARIFY SIDES AND BOTTOM OF TREE PIT TO PREVENT GLAZING OF SUBGRADE. SET TREE DIRECTLY ON SUBGRADE TO PREVENT SETTLING. ORANGE SNOW FENCE APPLIED IN SELECT AREAS AS INDICATED IN SOIL MANAGEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS 4" Scale: 1"=1'-0" LAWN RESTORATION B4 SOD OR HYDROSEED - ITEM 610.1602 SPECIFIED TURF SOIL I TEM 610.1403 SCARIFY 6" OF SUB-GRADE AND RECOMPACT TO 85% PRIOR TO BACKFILLING - ITEM 610.15 UNDISTURBED AND/OR COMPACTED SUBGRADE Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" TREE PITS WITH POROUS BOUND AGGREGATE PAVEMENTB5 3'-0" AS PER PLANS NOTES: 1. POROUS BOUND AGGREGATE TO BE ADAPAVE BY CHAMEMELEON WAYS OR APPROVED EQUAL. 3" #57 STONE - ITEM 304.12 3" POROUS BOUND AGGREGATE PAVEMENT - ITEM 420.98000004 ADJACENT RESET UNIT PAVERS - ITEM 608.03010005 ON STRUCTURAL SOIL ITEM 610.14000011 OR CONCRETE ITEM 608.1010 SEE LAYOUT PLAN L201 SPECIFIED PLANTING MIX ITEM 610.1404 Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" PERENNIAL AND SHRUB PLANTINGA4 NOTES: 1. PLANT AT SAME DEPTH AS PREVIOUSLY PLANTED IN NURSERY OR CONTAINER 2. PROVIDE COMPACTED BASE UNDER ROOT BALL ONLY TO PREVENT SETTLING 24" MIN SHREDDED BARK MULCH, EXTENT OF BEDLINE: x 4" (100mm) FOR SHRUBS x3" (75mm) FOR PERENNIALS AND BULBS UNTIE AND ROLL BACK BURLAP FROM MIN. 1/3 OF ROOT BALL. SYNTHETIC WRAP IS UNACCEPTABLE. CUT WIRE BASKETS AND REMOVE. SPECIFIED PLANTING MIX SPADED BED EDGE UNDISTURBED SUBBASE ORANGE SNOW APPLIED IN SELECT AREAS AS INDICATED IN SOIL MANAGEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS 7'-101 2" 16'-51 4" 9'-41 4" SPACING 7" O.C. Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" SMOKING SHELTERC4 NOTES: 1. INSTALL STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 2. ALL HARDWARE TO BE STAINLESS STEEL 3. WOOD PERLINS AND POST TO BE EUROPEAN FSC® PINE 4. ALL POSTS AND SUPPORTS TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL 5. BASIS OF DESIGN : ROUGH&READY SHADES BY STREETLIFE 4'-0" 2'-0" 10" X 10" SURFACE MOUNT PLATE, ANCHOR BOLTS BY CONTRACTOR CONCRETE FOOTER BY CONTRACTOR 3X6 EUROPEAN FSC® PINE BEAMS GALVANIZED GRIDER GALVANIZED POST 10" X 10" SURFACE MOUNT PLATE, ANCHOR BOLTS BY CONTRACTOR 3X6 EUROPEAN FSC® PINE BEAMS GALVANIZED GRIDER GALVANIZED SUPPORT BEAM CLEAR ACRYLIC ROOF 8'-11" 52'-2" 7'-61 4" Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" PERGOLA STRUCTUREB1 7'-101 2" 15'-05 8" 16'-55 16" 7'-79 16" 7" O.C. SPACING 9'-10"4'-0" 2'-0" 10" X 10" SURFACE MOUNT PLATE, ANCHOR BOLTS BY CONTRACTOR NOTES: 1. INSTALL STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 2. ALL HARDWARE TO BE STAINLESS STEEL 3. WOOD PERLINS AND POST TO BE EUROPEAN FSC® PINE 4. POSTS AND SUPPORTS TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL 5. BASIS OF DESIGN : ROUGH&READY SHADES BY STREETLIFE CONCRETE FOOTER 3X6 EUROPEAN FSC® PINE BEAMS GALVANIZED GRIDER GALVANIZED POST 10" X 10" SURFACE MOUNT PLATE, ANCHOR BOLTS BY CONTRACTOR 3X6 EUROPEAN FSC® PINE BEAMS GALVANIZED GRIDER GALVANIZED SUPPORT BEAM © NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1001 W. Seneca St., Ste. 201 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-277-1400 1. STEEL PIPE PILES SHALL CONSIST OF 12"Ø (12.75" OD) MINIMUM AND .25" MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS STEEL PIPE PILES DRIVEN TO THE BEARING STRATA AND THEN AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE THE REQUIRED CAPACITY. REFER TO THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT IN THE PROJECT MANUAL FOR EXPECTED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS. NOTE THAT THE GEOTECH REPORT INDICATES A RELATIVELY THIN BEARING LAYER BETWEEN 70' AND 80'. PILES WILL BE DRIVEN TO THAT LAYER BUT NOT THROUGH IT. 2. PILES SHALL BE MIN ASTM A252 GRADE 2 OR 3 (45 KSI) STEEL. 3. PILES TO HAVE A 1/2" THICK WELDED TOP CLOSURE PLATE. 4. PILES SHALL HAVE A 3/4" WELDED STEEL BOTTOM PLATE. 5. THE UPPER 20' OF EACH PILE IS TO BE EPOXY COATED FOR CORROSION PROTECTION. 6. PROVIDE ALL SURVEYING REQUIRED FOR FIELD STAKE-OUT AND DOCUMENTATION OF AS-BUILT CONDITIONS OF PILES. 7. COMPLY WITH THE CITY NOISE ORDINANCE. PILE DRIVING OPERATIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY BETWEEN THE HOURS OF 8:00 AMD AND 4:00 PM. 8. PILES SHALL DEVELOP AN ULTIMATE CAPACITY OF TWO TIMES THE REQUIRED DESIGN WORKING LOAD CAPACITY PROVIDED IN THE DRAWINGS. 9. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND COMPUTATIONS INCLUDING DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES FOR PILE INSTALLATION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE TYPE, SIZE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE PILE DRIVING EQUIPMENT, PILE IDENTIFICATION PLAN SHOWING THE PILE TYPE, PILE NUMBERING AND PROPOSED SEQUENCE OF PILE INSTALLATION, AND PILE DESIGN CALCULATIONS INCLUDING A FULL WEAP ANALYSIS. PILE DESIGN TO BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED NYS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER. 10. SUBMIT PROPOSED METHOD FOR SPLICING PILES, SHOULD A SPLICE BE REQUIRED. 11.. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WILL MAINTAIN A PILE DRIVING LOG TO INCLUDE AS A MINIMUM a. SIZES, LENGTHS AND LOCATIONS OF PILES b. LOCATIONS AND TEST RESULTS FOR EACH TEST PILE (SEE BELOW) c. FINAL BASE AND TOP ELEVATIONS d. BLOW COUNTS 12. DO NOT DRIVE PILES UNTIL EXCAVATION OF AREA SURROUNDING PILES IS COMPLETED TO THE DESIGN GRADES INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. PLACE PILES FROM THE EXCAVATED WORKING ELEVATION. 13. NO CONCRETE SHALL BE PLACED UNTIL ALL PILE DRIVING HAS BEEN COMPLETED WITHIN A RADIUS OF 15'. 14. DO NOT COMMENCE PILE DRIVING OPERATIONS WITHOUT VERIFYING THAT THE VIBRATION MONITORING EQUIPMENT IS OPERATIONAL. REFER TO THE SPECIFICATION SECTION ON VIBRATION MONITORING IN THE PROJECT MANUAL. IF EXCESSIVE VIBRATION LEVELS ARE REACHED, IMMEDIATELY DISCONTIUE PILE DRIVING OPERATIONS. MODIFICATIONS TO PILE DRIVING PROCEDURES MAY BE REQUIRED. 15. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM VERTICAL: 1 IN 48. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM CUT-OFF ELEVATION: 1", MAXIMUM OUT-OF-POSITION: 2". 16. PILES SHALL BE DYNAMICALLY LOAD TESTED TO VERIFY THAT THE REQUIRED PILE CAPACITY HAS BEEN ACHIEVED. • SUBMIT NAME AND QUALIFICATIONS OF THIRD PARTY TESTING COMPANY FOR APPROVAL. • TEST METHOD -ASTM D4945 - STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR HIGH-STRAIN DYNAMIC TESTING OF PILES. • TEST FREQUENCY. TEST A MINIMUM OF 8 PILES, AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS; SOUTHWEST CORNER, SOUTHEAST CORNER, NORTHWEST CORNER, NORTHEAST CORNER, AND APPROXIMATE MIDDLE OF BUILDING. • SUBJECT PILES TO 2 TIMES THE UNFACTORED DESIGN LOAD PROVIDED IN THE DRAWINGS. • NOTIFY ENGINEER WITH MINIMUM 3 DAYS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE FIRST PILE TESTING TO BE DONE. • PROVIDE A WRITTEN REPORT OF TEST RESULTS DOCUMENTING TEST EQUIPMENT USED, METHOD OF CALIBRATION AND RECORDING, LOCATIONS OF PILES TESTED, AND TEST RESULTS WITHIN TWO WEEKS FOLLOWING THE COMPLETION OF THE PILE TEST ACTIVITIES PILE AND PILE LOAD TEST NOTES (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN ON PLAN, THE FOLLOWING NOTES SHALL APPLY) 1. CONCRETE SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: STRENGTH MAX AGG AIR MAX W/C FOOTINGS 3000 PSI 1.5" NONE 0.5 INTERIOR SLABS 3500 PSI 1.5" NONE 0.5 INTERIOR ELEVATED COMPOSITE SLAB 3500 PSI 1.5" NONE 0.5 (LIGHTWEIGHT - 110 PCF) EXTERIOR SLABS 5000 PSI 1.5" 6%±1.5% 0.40 PROTECTED FOUNDATION WALLS 4000 PSI 3/4" NONE 0.45 UNPROTECTED FOUNDATION WALLS 5000 PSI 3/4" 6%±1.5% 0.40 PIERS 4500 PSI 3/4" 6%±1.5% 0.40 GRADE BEAMS & PILE CAPS 4000 PSI 3/4" NONE 0.45 2. ALL CONCRETE TO CONTAIN WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE. 3. CEMENT TO BE TYPE 1 PORTLAND CEMENT. FLY ASH OR BLAST FURNACE SLAG SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION WITH PORTLAND. 4. FINE AND COURSE AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE SHALL BE FROM AN APPROVED NYSDOT SOURCE AS LISTED ON THE NYSDOT WEBSITE WWW.DOT.NY.GOV. IF THE AGGREGATE HAS THE POTENTIAL FOR ALKALI SILICATE REACTION (ASR) AS INDICATED ON THE DOT WEBSITE, THE PORTLAND CEMENT USED IN THE MIX MUST BE LOW-ALKALI (TOTAL ALKALI < 0.7%) OR THE MIX MUST INCLUDE MIN 20% FLY ASH OR GGBFS. 5. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 6. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-615-60 GRADE. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-185. 7. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL HAVE CONCRETE COVER AS FOLLOWS: -CONCRETE CAST AGAINST FORMS 2" -CONCRETE CAST AGAINST EARTH 3" - SLABS - 1.5" MIN 8. SEE REBAR LAP LENGTH SCHEDULE FOR BAR LAP LENGTHS. 9. CURE ALL EXPOSED CONCRETE USING SUPERVISED WET CURE OR AN APPROVED CURING COMPOUND. IF A CURING COMPOUND IS USED, PROVIDE CERTIFICATION THAT THE CURING COMPOUND IS COMPATIBLE WITH FLOOR COVERINGS AND ADHESIVES. 10. ALL ELEVATED CONCRETE SLABS ON METAL DECK ARE TO BE SPRAYED WITH LATTICRETE E-CON BY L&M CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS IMMEDIATELY AFTER BULL FLOATING AND DURING FINISHING OPERATIONS TO REDUCE PLASTIC SHRINKAGE CRACKS CAUSED BY EVAPORATION. APPLY PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. THIS IS IN ADDITION TO NORMAL CURING PROCEDURES. 11. EXTERIOR ENTRY SLABS TO RECEIVE A LIGHT BROOM FINISH. TEXTURE TO BE APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 12. PROVIDE ALL TIE BARS, SPACER BARS, CHAIRS AND ACCESSORIES. 13. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL OPENINGS IN CONCRETE FOUNDATION WALLS AND FOOTINGS. 14. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH STRUCTURAL SLABS, WALLS, AND FOOTINGS SHALL BE SLEEVED OR CHASED. CORE-DRILLING OF SLABS, WALLS, AND FOOTINGS IS NOT PERMITTED. 15. INTERIOR SLAB FINISH TO BE HARDENED STEEL TROWEL FINISH. SEE ARCH DRAWINGS FOR FLOOR FINISHES 16. PROVIDE CONTRACTION JOINTS IN SLABS ON GRADE AS SHOWN . SEE SLAB ON GRADE DETAIL FOR JOINTING INSTRUCTIONS. SAW-CUT CONTRACTION-JOINTS WITHIN 4 HRS Of FINAL FINISH USING THE EARLY ENTRY DRY-CUT SAW METHOD. 17. ALL SAW-CUT & FORMED JOINTS IN SLAB ARE TO BE FILLED WITH A POLY-UREA BASED JOINT FILLER. ALLOW SLABS TO CURE 30 DAYS MIN BEFORE FILLING JOINTS. REINFORCED CONCRETE NOTES OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION......................R ESIDENTIAL OCCUPANCY CATEGORY............................... II MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS PER BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE (NYSBC) 2015. LOAD COMBINATIONS............NYSBC 1605.2 OR 1605.3 MIN FLOOR LIVE LOADS (1607): UNIFORM CONCENTRATED PRIVATE ROOMS AND CORRIDORS SERVING THEM. . . . . . PUBLIC ROOMS AND CORRIDORS SERVING THEM. . . . . . . STAIRS AND EXITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROOF LIVE LOADS (1607.11.2): MIN ROOF LIVE LOAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROOF SNOW LOAD (1608): GROUND SNOW LOAD Pg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLAT-ROOF SNOW LOAD Pf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLOPED ROOF FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNOW EXOSURE FACTOR Ce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNOW IMPORTANCE FACTOR Is. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THERMAL FACTOR Ct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNOW DRIFT LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNBALANCED SNOW LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WIND LOAD (1609): BASIC DESIGN WIND SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR Iw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUILDING CATEGORY (ASCE 1-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WIND EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT COMP & CLADDING PRESSURE (1609.1.1 & ASCE 7-10) BUILDING DESIGN LOADS AREA 10 SF 50 SF 100 SF NEGATIVE ZONE 1 NEGATIVE ZONE 2 NEGATIVE ZONE 3 POSITIVE ALL ZONES OVERHANG ZONE 1&2 OVERHANG ZONE 3 -27.5 -46.2 -69.5 16.0 -39.7 -65.3 -25.9 -34.8 -41.8 16.0 -38.0 -32.7 -25.2 -29.9 -29.9 16.0 -37.3 -18.7 SURFACE PRESSURE (PSF)ROOF AREA 10 SF 100 SF 500 SF NEGATIVE ZONE 4 NEGATIVE ZONE 5 POSITIVE ZONES 4 & 5 -27.3 -33.6 25.2 -23.6 -26.2 21.5 -21.0 -21.0 18.9 SURFACE PRESSURE (PSF)WALL 40 PSF 100 PSF 100 PSF 300# 20 PSF 40 PSF 31 PSF 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 PER ASCE 7-10 PER ASCE 7-10 115 MPH (2015 CODE BASIS) 1.0 II B +/-0.18 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN DATA (1613): SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCCUPANCY CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATION, Ss . . . . . . . SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATION, SI . . . . . . SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEF SDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECTRAL RESPONCE COEF SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SITE CLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEISMIC DESIGN CETEGORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASIC SEISMIC - FORCE -RESISTING SYSTEM FLR 1: STRUCTURAL STEEL SYSTEMS NOT SPECIFICALLY DETAILED FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE. FLR 2 TO 4: LIGHT FRAME WOOD WALLS WITH STRUCTURAL WOOD SHEAR PANNELS. DESIGN BASE SHEAR PER ASCE 7 V = .045W SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT Cs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANALYSIS PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 II 12.6 %g 5.6 %g 0.209 0.131 E B 0.045 3 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE (ASCE) FLOOR JOIST DEFLECTION CRITERIA LIMIT DEFLECTION TO SATISFY THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: LIVE LOAD (L) = SPAN /480 DEAD + LIVE LOAD (D+L) = SPAN/240 L = LIVE LOAD D = DEAD LOAD SPAN (INCHES) ROOF JOIST DEFLECTION CRITERIA LIMIT DEFLECTION TO SATISFY THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: SNOW LOAD (S) = SPAN/360 DEAD + LIVE LOAD (D+L) = SPAN/240 L = LIVE LOAD S = SNOW LOAD D = DEAD LOAD SPAN (INCHES) DEAD LOADS FLOOR SYSTEM CARPET & PAD 3/4" GYPCRETE TOPPING 3/4'' SHEATHING TJI JOIST @ 16'' OC FLOOR INSULATION 5/8'' GYP SPRINKLERS MECH & MISC APARTMENT BUILDING 1.0 PSF 7.5 PSF 2.7 PSF 3.0 PSF 1.0 PSF 5.4 PSF (2 LAYERS) 2.0 PSF 4.4 PSF 27.0 PSF (TYP) ROOF SYSTEM SINGLE PLY ROOF MEMBRANE 1/2" GFRB 3/4 SHEATHING TJI JOIST @ 16" OC INSULATION 5/8 GYP SPRINKLERS MECH & MISC ACOUSTIC INSUL 1.0 PSF 1.9 PSF 2.7 PSF 3.0 PSF 2.0 PSF 5.4 PSF (2 LAYERS) 2.0 PSF 4.5 PSF 0.5 PSF 23 PSF (TYP) TOTAL TOTAL FOUNDATION DESIGN NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE (PSF) GRADE BEAMS ON PILES PILE FOUNDATION SYSTEM FROST PROTECTION-42'' MIN GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATIONS SHOWN AND IMMEDIATELY REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS TO THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR FABRICATION. 2. SECTIONS AND DETAILS ARE CONTINUOUS AND TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE EXACT LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE COMMENCING WORK. CONTRACTOR AGREES TO BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES WHICH MIGHT BE OCCASIONED BY FAILURE TO EXACTLY LOCATE AND PRESERVE EXISTING UTILITIES. 4. PROVIDE BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNALS, WARNING LIGHTS AND SIMILAR ITEMS AS REQUIRED AND MAINTAIN THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR JOB SITE SAFETY AND PROTECTION. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL CONCRETE, EARTHWORK, AND CONCRETE MASONRY WORK WITH THE INSPECTION AND TESTING AGENCY RETAINED BY THE OWNER. 1. ALL PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION (APA) SPECIFICATIONS 2. ALL ROOF PANEL SHEATHING SHALL BE 3/4" (NOM.) SQUARE-EDGE ADVANTECH ROOF SHEATHING INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SUITABLE EDGE SUPPORT SHALL BE PROVIDED BY BLOCKING BETWEEN FRAMING. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, CONNECT ROOF SHEATHING WITH 10D COMMON NAILS AT 6" O/C AT SUPPORTED PANEL EDGES AND 12" O/C AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. SEE SPECIFICATION 061736 FOR WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. 3. ALL FLOOR SHEATHING SHALL BE 3/4" (NOM.) ADVANTECH FLOOR SHEATING WITH TONGUE & GROOVE EDGE OR APPROVED EQUAL. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, CONNECT FLOOR SHEATHING WITH 10D COMMON NAILS AND ADHESIVES MEETING APA SPECIFICATION AFT-01. APPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. BLOCK ALL UNSUPPORTED PANEL EDGES. GAP PANEL FOR EXPANSION PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SEE SPECIFICATION 061736 FOR WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. 4. EXTERIOR WALL PANEL SHEATHING ABOVE THE SECOND FLOOR DECK SHALL BE 5/8" (NOM.) ZIP SYSTEM STRUCTURAL 1 RATED SHEATHING. INTERIOR WALL PANEL SHEATHING AT DESIGNATED SHEAR WALLS TO BE 1/2" (NOM) APA RATED STRUCTURAL 1 CDX PLYWOOD OR 7/16'' OSB STRUCTURAL 1 RATED SHEATHING. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, CONNECT WALL SHEATHING WITH 8D COMMON NAILS SPACED 6" O/C AT SUPPORTED PANEL EDGES AND 12" O/C AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. REFER TO THE SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AT SHEAR PANELS. SEE ARCH FOR FIRST FLOOR EXT. WALL SHEATHING. 5. INSTALL ALL SHEATHING WITH THE LONG DIMENSION OF THE PANEL ACROSS SUPPORTS AND WITH PANEL CONTINUOUS OVER TWO OR MORE SPANS. STAGGER PANEL END JOINTS. ALLOW 1/8" SPACING AT PANEL ENDS AND EDGES UNLESS OTHERWISE RECOMMENDED BY THE SHEATHING MANUFACTURER. 6. ALL NAILING SHALL BE CAREFULLY DRIVEN AND NOT OVERDRIVEN. THE USE OF STAPLES IS PROHIBITED FROM USE. 7. PROVIDE 2X BLOCKING AT UNSUPPORTED PANEL EDGES FOR ALL ROOFS, FLOORS AND WALLS. STRUCTURAL WALL, FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHING NOTES (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN ON PLAN, THE FOLLOWING NOTES SHALL APPLY) 1. PREFABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND FURNISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A CURRENT CODE-ACCEPTED EVALUATION REPORT. ACCEPTABLE EVALUATION REPORTS ARE ICCESR-1405 PERFORMANCE RATED I-JOISTS, OR ICC-ESR-1153, TJI PREFABRICATED I-JOISTS. STRUCTURAL CAPACITIES AND DESIGN PROVISIONS SHALL BE ESTABLISHED AND MONITORED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D 5055. 2. WOOD JOISTS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER TO SUPPORT THE FOLLOWING APPLIED LOADS, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: EXPECTED JOIST SIZES FOR WEYERHAUSER TRUS JOIST PRODUCTS ARE SHOWN ON FRAMING PLANS. FLOOR LIVE LOAD - REFER TO DESIGN LOADS + PARITIION LOAD DEAD LOAD -REFER TO DESIGN LOADS 3. WOOD I-JOISTS SHALL BE ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT BRACING AS REQUIRED FOR SAFE ERECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE JOISTS. 4. WOOD I -JOISTS SHALL NOT BE CUT, NOTCHED, COPED, DRILLED NOR OTHERWISE ALTERED IN ANY WAY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY CONDUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN REQUIREMENTS. DO NOT CUT FLANGES. 5. WOOD I -JOISTS SHALL BE PRODUCED BY A CODE ACCEPTED FABRICATOR WITH A MINIMUM OF FIVE (5) YEARS EXPERIENCE PRODUCING PREFABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS. QUALITY CONTROL SHALL BE AUDITED BY AN AGENCY ACCEPTED BY THE IBC 2006. 6. WEB PANELS MUST BE JOINED WITH A MACHINED AND GLUED VEE JOINT TO FORM A CONTINUOUS MEMBER. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE GLUED USING AN EXTERIOR TYPE ADHESIVE PER ASTM D 2559. 7. WOOD I -JOISTS SHALL BE STORED IN BUNDLES IN AN UPRIGHT POSITION AND AWAY FROM GROUND CONTACT. ANY DAMAGE TO JOISTS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE JOIST SUPPLIER. FIELD REPAIR OR MODIFICATION OF JOISTS MUST NOT BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL BY THE SUPPLIER, EXCEPT FOR TRIMMING TO CORRECT LENGTH. 8. WOOD I -JOISTS SHALL BE CAREFULLY HANDLED TO PREVENT DAMAGE AND DISTORTION. EACH JOIST SHALL BE ANCHORED AND BRACED, AS IT IS ERECTED, USING BLOCKING PANELS AND ANCHORAGE INDICATED (AND PER THE SUPPLIER'S REQUIREMENTS). ERECTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUPPLEMENTAL LATERAL 9. BRACING OF THE TOP FLANGE UNTIL SHEATHING IS PROPERLY NAILED. 10. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF OPENINGS IN JOIST WEBS WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. ADHERE TO GUIDELINES FOR HOLE ALLOWABLE SIZE AND PLACEMENT. 11. SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL WOOD FLOOR JOISTS SHOWING MEMBER SIZES, SPECIES, GRADE, MOISTURE CONTENT, SPAN, CAMBER, DIMENSIONS, CHORD PITCH, BRACING REQUIREMENTS AND LOADINGS. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER AND SHALL BEAR THE SEAL OF A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN NEW YORK STATE. PRE-FABRICATED WOOD I-JOIST (TJI) NOTES (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN ON PLAN, THE FOLLOWING NOTES SHALL APPLY) 1. ALL WOOD FRAMING MATERIAL SHALL BE SURFACED DRY AND USED AT 19% MAXIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT. 2. ALL STRUCTURAL BEARING WALL AND SHEAR WALL STUD AND WALL FRAMING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: A. 2ND & 3RD FLOOR & WALL FRAMING: • MIN NO. 2 GRADE SOUTHERN YELLOW PINE (SYP), OR • MIN NO. 2 DOUG FIR -LARCH • ALL WALL TOP AND BOTTOM SILL PLATES TO BE 1 1/2" x 5 1/2" LSL ENGINEERED LUMBER. (REFERENCE SPECIFICATION 061100). B. ABOVE THE 4TH FLOOR DECK: • MIN NO. 2 GRADE SPRUCE-PINE-FIR (SPF) • WALL TOP AND BOTTOM SILL PLATES TO BE 1 1/2" x 5 1/2" LSL ENGINEERED LUMBER. "STUD" GRADE MATERIAL IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED FROM USE 3. ALL DIMENSION LUMBER JOISTS, HEADERS, RAFTER & MISC. FRAMING SHALL BE NO. 2 GRADE, SOUTHERN PINE OR NO. 2 GRADE DOUG FIR -LARCH. PROVIDE FULL-DEPTH BRIDGING AT MIDSPAN AND AT A MAXIMUM SPACING OF 8'-0' O/C IN BETWEEN. 4. ALL FRAMING EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER OR IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY OR CONCRETE SHALL BE PRESSURE-TREATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS ASSOCIATION SPECIFICATIONS. WHERE POSSIBLE, ALL CUTS AND HOLES SHOULD BE COMPLETED BEFORE TREATMENT. CUTS AND HOLES DUE TO ON-SITE FABRICATION SHALL BE BRUSHED WITH 2 COATS OF COPPER NAPHTHENATE SOLUTION CONTAINING A MINIMUM OF 2% METALLIC COPPER IN SOLUTION (PER AWPA STD. M4). 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY SELECT LUMBER TO BE USED IN LOAD BEARING APPLICATIONS. THE LENGTH OF A SPLIT ON THE WIDE FACE OF 3" (NOMINAL) AND THICKER LUMBER SHALL BE LIMITED TO 1/2 OF THE NARROW FACE DIMENSION. 6. PROVIDE DOUBLE JOISTS UNDER ALL PARTITIONS WHICH RUN PARALLEL WITH JOISTS AND UNDER ALL CONCENTRATED LOADS FROM FRAMING ABOVE 7. PROVIDE HEADER BEAMS OF THE SAME SIZE AS JOISTS OR RAFTERS TO FRAME AROUND OPENINGS IN THE PLYWOOD DECK UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 8. BOLT HOLES SHALL BE CAREFULLY CENTERED AND DRILLED NOT MORE THAN 1/16" LARGER THAN THE BOLT DIAMETER. BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SNUGGED TIGHT BUT NOT TO THE EXTENT OF CRUSHING WOOD UNDER WASHERS. 9. PREFABRICATED METAL JOIST HANGERS, HURRICANE CLIPS, HOLD-DOWN ANCHORS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY "SIMPSON STRONG-TIE COMPANY", TEL. 800-999-5099 OR APPROVED EQUAL. INSTALL ALL ACCESSORIES PER THE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. ALL STEEL SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 0.04 INCHES (PER ASTM A446, GRADE A) AND BE GALVANIZED (COATING G60 FOR INTERIOR FRAMING). 10. HOLES AND NOTCHES DRILLED OR CUT INTO WOOD FRAMING SHALL NOT EXCEED THE ALLOWANCES OF THE 2015 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE AND SHALL CONFORM TO MANUFACTURE'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 11. ALL PLATES, ANCHORS, NAILS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE USED WITH PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER SHALL BE CORROSION PROTECTED FOR USE WITH PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD. 12. MIN. SILL PLATE ANCHORAGE: CONCRETE/MASONRY FOUNDATION: -PROVIDE 1/2" X 16" ANCHOR BOLTS @ 24" O.C. AND WITHIN 12" OF ALL PLATE ENDS. PROVIDE MIN. OF 2 BOLTS OR ANCHOR STRAPS PER PIECE. -CONTRACTORS OPTION TO USE 1/2'' DIA SIMPSON TITEN HD HEAVY DUTY SCREW ANCHOR FOR CONCRETE AND MASONRY W/ 5 3/4'' EMBEDMENT. -AT CONC SLAB ON DECK: (2) ROWS 1/4' x 5" CORROSION RESISTANT TAPCON ANCHORS @ 16" O.C. 13. FASTENING SHALL CONFORM TO NEW YORK STATE BUILDING CODE TABLE 2304.9.1 FASTENING SCHEDULE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. GENERAL WOOD FRAMING NOTES (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN ON PLAN, THE FOLLOWING NOTES SHALL APPLY) 1. PREFABRICATED LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) HEADERS AND BEAMS SHALL BE MICROLLAM AS MANUFACTURED BY WEYERHAEUSER BOISE, IDAHO OR APPROVED EQUAL. MICROLLAM MATERIAL SHALL BE 1.9E SOUTHERN PINE. 2. PREFABRICATED PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL) BEAMS SHALL BE PARALLAM BY WEYERHAEUSER BOISE IDAHO OR APPROVED EQUAL. PARALLAM SHALL BE 2.0E. 3. UNLESS OTHERWISE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER, FASTEN LVL PIECES LESS THAN 14 INCHES IN DEPTH (BUILT-UP BEAMS) USING THREE ROWS OF 10d NAILS SPACED AT 12”ON CENTER. BEAMS 14 INCHES OR GREATER SHALL BE FASTENED WITH FOUR ROWS OF 10d NAILS. 4. DO NOT CUT OR NOTCH LVL OR PSL MATERIAL WITHOUT THE MANUFACTURER'S APPROVAL. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, EACH LVL AND PSL SHALL BEAR DIRECTLY ON SUPPORTING COLUMN OR POST. 5. BEARING LENGTH SHALL CONFORM TO MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. UNLESS OTHERWISE PROVIDED, BEARING LENGTH FOR A SPECIFIC BEAM / HEADER SHALL BE BASED ON REACTION RESULTING FROM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE UNIFORM LOAD FOR A GIVEN SPAN. 6. SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL PRE-ENGINEERED LUMBER. SHOW MEMBER SIZE, LOADING, SPAN, CONNECTIONS, HANGER AND LOAD CAPACITY. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER AND SHALL BEAR THE SEAL OF A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN NEW YORK STATE. PRE-ENGINEERED LUMBER (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN ON PLAN, THE FOLLOWING NOTES SHALL APPLY) TYPICAL POURSTOP SCHEDULE (6 1/2" SLAB) OVERHANG (INCHES) TYP (GAGE) 0 1 2,3 4,5 6-9 10, 11 20 18 16 14 12 10 * PROVIDE BENT PLATE FOR OVERHANG EXCEEDING 11" -SEE PLANS AND DETAILS GENERAL COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING NOTES INSTALLATION: 1. INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE W/ STEELSTUD MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SSMA) ICBO ER-4943P PRINTED INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. 2. TEMPORARY BRACING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. DO NOT REMOVE BRACING UNTIL WORK IS PERMANENTLY STABILIZED. 3. PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY SSMA MEMBERS ARE FORMED FROM STEEL WITH A MINIMUM YIELD STRESS OF 33 OR 50 KIPS PER SQUARE INCH (KSI). DESIGN 4. PROVIDE COLD FORMED STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN ENGINEER'S CALCULATIONS DEMONSTRATING THAT THE COLD FORMED FRAMING SYSTEM WILL COMPLY WITH THE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION AND THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS. MATERIALS: 5. ALL LIGHT GAGE FRAMING MEMBERS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED FROM STEEL THAT MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF AISI SPECIFICATIONS. LATEST EDITION. 6. ALL STUDS AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE FORMED FROM STEEL HAVING A HOT-DIPPED. GALVANIZED COATING PER ASTM A653 AND C955. MINIMUM G60 COATING. CONNECTIONS: 7. FASTENER PENETRATION THROUGH JOINED MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THREE EXPOSED THREADS. MINIMUM SPACING AND EDGE DISTANCE OF SCREW FASTENERS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3/8". 8. ALL CLIP ANGLES SHALL MATCH STUD GAGE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. LOAD BEARING MEMBERS: (JOIST, RAFTERS AND AXIALLY LOADED STUDS) 9. BOTH FLANGES OF STUDS MUST BE ATTACHED TO TRACK MEMBERS @ TOP & BOTTOM. 10. ALL AXIALLY LOADED MEMBERS SHALL BE ALIGNED VERTICALLY TO ALLOW FOR FULL TRANSFER OF LOADS DOWN TO THE FOUNDATION. 11. LOAD BEARING MEMBERS SHALL BEAR SQUARELY AND TIGHTLY IN "THEIR TRACKS. PROVIDE AT LEAST 10 INCHES OF UNPUNCHED STEEL AT BEARING POINTS. 12. STUD LATERAL BRIDGING REQUIREMENTS FOR WALLS SUBJECT TO AXIAL LOADING -BRIDGING MAY BE PROVIDED BY ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: A. 1 1/2” COLD ROLLED U-CHANNEL ATTACHED W/ CLIPS AND NO. 6 SCREWS {SPACING AS REQUIRED) (6" WIDE STUDS. MAX.) B. 2" X 20 GAGE FLAT STRAPPING APPLIED TO BOTH STUD FACES WITH ONE BAY OF SOLID BLOCKING EVERY 10' (SPACING AS REQUIRED). C. SPAZZER BAR 5400 BRIDGING RUNNING THROUGH STUDS THEN TWIST LOCKING (SPACING AS REQUIRED) (6" WIDE STUDS. MAX.) NON-LOAD BEARING STUD MEMBERS: (CURTAINWALL.) 1. STUD LATERAL BRIDGING REQUIREMENTS FOR WALLS SUBJECT TO WIND LOADING ONLY: A. SHEATH WALLS ON BOTH SIDES OR, USE SPAZZER BAR AT 4'-0" O.C. VERTICALLY. B. PROVIDE SPAZZER BAR WITHIN 12" OF TOP OF STUDS WHERE DEFLECTION TRACK IS USED. C. 1 1/2" COLD ROLLED U-CHANNEL ATTACHED W/ CLIPS AND NO. 6 SCREWS (SPACING AS REQUIRED) (6" WIDE STUDS. MAX.) D. 2" X 20 GAGE FLAT STRAPPING APPLIED TO BOTH STUD FACES WITH ONE BAY OF SOUD BLOCKING EVERY 10' (SPACING AS REQUIRED). 1. THE STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME AS DESIGNED IS A NON-SELF-SUPPORTING STEEL FRAME. COORDINATE THE ERECTION WITH THE INSTALLATION OF OTHER BUILDING ELEMENTS REQUIRED FOR THE STRUCTURE'S STABILITY. THESE ELEMENTS INCLUDE SLABS, METAL DECK, MASONRY WALLS, AND CONCRETE WALLS. PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING UNTIL THESE OTHER BUILDING ELEMENTS ARE COMPLETELY INSTALLED AND CURED. 2. STRUCTURAL STEEL WIDE-FLANGE SECTIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM A572 OR ASTM A992 (Fy=50 KSI). 3. STRUCTURAL STEEL TUBE SECTIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM A500, (Fy= 46 KSI). 4. ALL OTHER STRUCTURAL SHAPES SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM A 36 (Fy=36 KSI). 5. SHOP CONNECTIONS SHALL BE 3/4" DIAMETER A325 OR A490 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTED OR WELDED. (UNLESS OTHERWISED NOTED) 6. FIELD CONNECTIONS SHALL BE 3/4" DIAMETER A325 OR A490 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTED OR WELDED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FIELD BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SHEAR/BEARING CONNECTIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. SHEAR BEARING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE INSTALLED TO THE SNUG TIGHT CONDITION. 7. PROVIDE ANGLE FRAMES AROUND ALL FLOOR AND ROOF OPENINGS WITH A DIMENSION OF 1'-0" IN ANY DIRECTION ON ROOF AREAS FRAMED IN STEEL. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 8. STEEL FLOOR AND ROOF DECK SHALL BE MANUFACTURED TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE STEEL DECK INSTITUTE. SEE THE PROJECT MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE A COMPLETE STEEL DECK SYSTEM WITH ALL POUR STOPS, END CLOSURE STRIPS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES. DO NOT SUBMIT STEEL ROOF AND FLOOR DECK DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW UNTIL STEEL ERECTION PLANS HAVE BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. 9. THE ANCHOR BOLT PLANS AND STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND REVIEWED PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FABRICATION DETAIL DRAWINGS, JOIST DRAWINGS OR DECK DRAWINGS. 10. SEE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL FINISH REQUIREMENTS. ALL STEEL TO BE PRIMED EXCEPT STEEL TO BE FIREPROOFED. STEEL TO BE FIREPROOFED TO BE UNFINISHED. 11. SEE SPEC FOR EXTERIOR EXPOSED PRE-FABRICATED FIRE-PROOFED STEEL COLUMNS STRUCTURAL STEEL NOTES NOTES APPLY TO ELEVATOR SHAFT AND STAIRWELLS. SEE ARCH FOR EXTERIOR 4" CONCRETE MASONRY VENEER. 1. CONCRETE MASONRY CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF"BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES" (ACI 530-13) AND "SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES (ACI 530.1-13)" PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 2. MATERIALS: a. CONCRETE BLOCK: ASTM C90. LIGHTWEIGHT UNITS. MINIMUM NEW AREA COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CMU = 2800 PSI. b. MORTAR: ASTM C270, TYPE S c. BOND BEAM AND CORE FILL: ASTM C476, COURSE OR FINE FILL, PLACED PER ACI 530.1 TABLE 7. MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH = 3000 PSI. d. JOINT REINFORCING: HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED FINISH, 9 GAGE MINIMUM SIDE WIRES AND CROSS WIRES, LADDER TYPE. e. BAR REINFORCING: ASTM A615 GRADE 60. f. WIRE, TIES AND ANCHORS: AS INDICATED. 3. VERTICAL REINFORCING: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE VERTICAL REINFORCING IN ALL CONCRETE MASONRY WALLS AS FOLLOWS: -(2) #5 WITHIN 16" OF EACH SIDE OF OPENINGS. -(1) #5 WITHIN 8" OF EACH SIDE OF CONTRACTION JOINTS -(1) #5 @ 10' O.C. HORIZONTAL SPACING. 4. REINFORCED MASONRY: WHERE VERTICAL BARS ARE TO BE GROUTED INTO CORES, THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS APPLY: a. PROVIDE DOWELS FROM FOOTING, SAME SIZE AND SPACING AS WALL BARS, EMBEDDED INTO FOOTING 9 INCHES MIN. b. PROVIDE A CONTINUOUS VERTICAL CAVITY, AT LEAST 3"x4" IN SIZE, FREE OF MORTAR DROPPING. c. PROVIDE REBAR ALIGNMENT DEVICES AT A MAXIMUM SPACING OF 96 BAR DIAMETERS (MIN OF 2 PER BAR). d. AT SPLICES IN VERTICAL BARS, PROVIDE 48 DIAMETER LAP (24" LAP FOR #4 BAR; 30" LAP FOR #5 BAR). e. ALL REINFORCEMENT MUST BE INSTALLED AND SECURELY ANCHORED IN PLACE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF GROUT. f. MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF GROUT LIFT = 5'-0". g. ALL CMU's USED IN REINFORCED MASONRY SHALL BE TWO CELL UNITS. 6. PROVIDE 100% SOLID BEARING, MINIMUM 3 COURSES UNDER BEAMS, 2 COURSES UNDER LINTELS, AND ONE COURSE UNDER JOISTS, UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE. 7. FILL CORE SOLID AROUND ANCHOR BOLTS. 8. PROVIDE 100% SOLID BLOCKS OR SOLIDLY FILLED HOLLOW BLOCKS FOR AT LEAST 4" AROUND ALL EXPANSION BOLTS. 9. SET WELD PLATES IN BOND BEAMS AFTER THE GROUT IS PLACED, BUT WHILE IT IS STILL PLASTIC. 10. HOLLOW MASONRY UNITS TO BE LAID WITH FULL MORTAR COVERAGE ON HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL FACE SHELLS. WEBS SHALL ALSO BE BEDDED IN ALL COURSES OF PIERS, COLUMNS, PILASTERS, AND IN THE STARTING COURSE ON FOOTINGS, AND WHEN ADJACENT TO CELLS OR CAVITIES TO BE REINFORCED OR FILLED WITH CONCRETE OR GROUT. SOLID UNITS TO BE LAID WITH FULL HEAD AND BED JOINTS. 11. PROVIDE JOINT REINFORCING AT 16" VERTICAL SPACING. 12. LAP JOINT REINFORCING 6" MIN. 13. WHERE MASONRY UNITS ARE USED ABOVE HOLLOW UNITS OF A DIFFERENT THICKNESS, PROVIDE A CONTINUOUS COURSE OF 100% SOLID MASONRY AT LEAST 8" HIGH BELOW TRANSITION. 14. CONSTRUCTED WALLS ARE LATERALLY UNSTABLE AND MUST BE SHORED OR BRACED UNTIL THEY ARE COMPLETELY CONSTRUCTED AND THE MORTAR HAS CURED. 15. SITE TOLERANCES -ERECT MASONRY WITHIN THE TOLERANCES PROVIDED IN ACI 530.1.3.3 G AND THE PROJECT SPECIFICATION. 16. WINDOW AND DOOR OPENING HEADERS TO BE REINFORCED MASONRY LINTEL BLOCK HEADERS. SEE HEADER SCHEDULE. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE MASONRY NOTES plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-001 GENERAL NOTES AND SCHEDULES 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 101.6mm [4"] 6.4mm [1/4"] 13 S-300 6 S-300 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB ON GRADE. #5'S @ 12" O.C. SW #4'S @ 16" OC LW T/SLAB = 387'-6" SEE 1/S-300 (TYP) 2'-6" WIDE X2'-0 DEEP EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM TYPE GB1. (TYP) T/GRADE BEAM = -2'-0" 6 S-300 13 S-300 6 S-300 13 S-300 6 S-300 13 S-300 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 14 14 13 13 15 15 16 16 AA CC DD EE FF GG HH II A.5A.5 BB B.1B.1 15.5 15.5 15.6 15.6 H.3H.3 2' - 7 1/2" 2' - 10 3/4" 6' - 4 3/4" 3 7/16" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 4 3/4" 5' - 2 7/8" 2 1/4" 3 3/4" 6 1/2" 1' - 0 1/4" 2 7/8" 7 3/8" 3" 4 1/4"0"7 3/8" 3"2' - 11 13/16" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 5/8" 2 1/4" 2 5/8" 2 5/8" 6 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2' - 1 3/16" 1 3/4"3 7/16" 6' - 4 13/16"2' - 10 13/16" 2' - 1 5/16" 2 1/4" 3' - 9 11/16" 2' - 0 5/16" 3' - 5 3/16" 9 7/8" 2 1/2" 3" 3" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 5' - 2 7/8" 2' - 1 3/16" 3 3/4" 3 3/4" 4 9/16" 3 3/4" 1 3/4" 3/16" 2' - 10 13/16" 3 3/8" 3 3/4" 3 3/4" 3 3/4" 2' - 9 7/16" 3 3/4" 3 7/16" 3 3/4" 3 7/16" 4 5/16" 4 1/4" 1' - 11 13/16" 4 3/8" 3' - 9 11/16" 4 3/8" 4 1/4" 4 1/4" 6 1/2" 4 5/8" 1' - 0 1/4" 8 7/8" 4 1/4" 2' - 9 15/16" 2' - 11 13/16" 3' - 5 13/16"2' - 0 5/16" 5" 3' - 9 11/16" 2' - 1 5/16" 1 S-500 202' - 5 7/16" 32' - 3 5/8" 114' - 11 7/8" 55' - 1 15/16" 12' - 3 1/16" 4' - 10 9/16" 11' - 0 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 13' - 4 5/8" 14' - 9 7/8" 9' - 7 7/16" 1' - 11 3/8"4' - 11 9/16" 8' - 8 3/8" 3' - 4 1/8" 11' - 9 3/16" 81' - 9 3/8" 26' - 8"55' - 1 3/8" 13' - 1 11/16"3' - 10 1/16"5' - 9 11/16"3' - 10 9/16"12' - 0 7/8"12' - 0 1/2"6' - 10 3/8"10' - 5 1/16"1' - 7 5/8"4' - 10 11/16"7' - 2 1/4" 15.3 15.8 PC3 [-2'-0"] 215K P2 (-8") PC1 [-2'-0"] 30K PC2 [-2'-0"] 163K P2 (-8") PC1 [-2'-0"] 30K PC2 [-2'-0"] 161K P2 (-8") PC1 [-2'-0"] 30K PC2 [-2'-0"] 171K P2 (-8") PC1 [-2'-0"] 40K PC2 [-2'-0"] 166K P2 (-8") PC2 [-2'-0"] 131K PC3 [-2'-0"] 222K PC2 [-2'-0"] 163K PC1 [-2'-0"] 72K 23' - 9 15/16" 15' - 3 1/16" 14' - 10 3/16" 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB ON GRADE W/ #5'S@12"OC SW AND #4'S@16"OC LW 2' WIDE X 2' DEEP INTERIOR GRADE BEAM TYPE GB2. (TYP) T/GRADE BEAM = -8" PC2 [-2'-0"] 122K PC2 [-2'-0"] 103K PC1 [-2'-0"] 80K PC2 [-2'-0"] 47K PC2 [-2'-0"] 173K PC4 [-2'-0"]PC3 [-2'-0"] PC1 [-2'-0"] 90K PC2 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-2'-0"] PC1 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-2'-0"] PC1 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-2'-0"] PC3 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-2'-0"] 116K PC2 [-2'-0"] 162K PC2 [-2'-0"] 172K PC3 [-2'-0"] 215K PC2 [-2'-0"] PC2 [-8"] 125K PC2 [-8"] 156K PC2 [-8"] 129K PC2 [-8"] 170K PC2 [-8"] 130K PC2 [-8"] 165K PC2 [-8"] 136K PC2 [-8"] 150K PC2 [-8"] 124K PC2 [-8"] 144K PC2 [-8"] 145K PC2 [-8"] 168K PC2 [-8"] 90K PC2 [-8"] 163K PC2 [-8"] 163K PC2 [-8"] 153K PC2 [-8"] 146K PC2 [-8"] 106K PC2 [-8"] 142K PC2 [-8"] 118K PC2 [-8"] 99K PC2 [-8"] 145K PC2 [-8"] 139K PC2 [-8"] 128K PC2 [-8"] 116K PC2 [-8"] 120K PC2 [-8"] 162K PC2 [-8"] 142K PC2 [-8"] 123k PC2 [-8"] 120K PC2 [-8"] 120K PC2 [-8"] 165K PC2 [-8"] 163K PC2 [-8"] 98K PC1 [-5'-0"] 30K PC1 [-5'-0"] 79K PC1 [-5'-0"] 48K PC1 [-5'-0"] 48K PC1 [-8"] 100K PC1 [-8"] 60K PC1 [-8"] 77K PC2 [-8"] 96K PC1 [-8"] 79K PC2 [-8"] 125K PC2 [-8"] 134K PC2 [-8"] PC2 [-8"] 144K PC2 [-8"] 170K PC3 [-8"] 247K 4" PERFORATED PVC PIPE UNDER-SLAB ASSD SYSTEM. SEE FOUNDATION SYSTEM ASSD DRAWINGS. (TYP) 5 S-301 13 S-300 2 S-302 280K 8 S-300 95K 8 S-300236K 134K125K84K 131K121K144K 30K137K110K 178K PC5 [-2'-0"] 450K PC5 [-2'-0"] 450K 4 S-301 10 S-300 TYP P7 (-8) P5 (-8) P3 (-8")P2 (-8") P2 (-8") P2 (-8") P2 (-8") P2 (-8") P2 (-8") S-500 2 COL OFFSET 1' - 4 11/16" P3 (-8") P3 (-8") P3 (-8") 10 S-300 P1 (-8") P3 (-8") P6 (-8") P1 (-8") P1 (-8") P1 (-8") P4 (-8") P2 (-8")P2 (-8") P4 (-8") 4 S-301 4" UNDER-SLAB ASSD SYSTEM PIPING 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB ON GRADE #5'S@12"O.C. S.W. #4'S@16" O.C. L.W. (TYP) 5' - 9 1/2" 8 S-500 28' - 4 9/16" FOUNDATION SYMBOLS KEY: PX PCX (XXX'-XX") (XXX'-X") INDICATES PIER TYPE. IF NOT SHOWN, COLUMN BEARS ON PILE CAP. INDICATES TOP OF PIER ELEVATION. INDICATES PILE CAP TYPE. SEE 1/S301 FOR ADDITIONAL REINFORCING @ PILES INDICATES TOP OF PILE CAP ELELVATION. INDICATES GRADE BEAM. SEE PLAN & S-301. INDICATES ELEVATION plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-100 FOUNDATION PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/8" = 1'-0"1 FOUNDATION PLAN FOUNDATION NOTES 1. DATUM ELEVATION = TOP OF GROUND FLOOR SLAB = 387'-6" 2. SEE FOUNDATION ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS FOR UNDER-SLAB RADON MITIGATION SYSTEM. 3. ALL INTERIOR GRADE BEAMS TO BE TYPE GB2 UNO. T/INTERIOR GRADE BEAMS = (-8"). SEE S-301. 4. ALL EXTERIOR GRADE BEAMS TO BE TYPE GB1 UNO. T/ EXTERIOR GRADE BEAMS = (-2'-0"). SEE S-301. 5. SEE S-S301 FOR PILE CAP SIZE AND REINFORCEMENT. 6. SEE TIMBER PILE NOTES SHEET S-001. 7. SEE S-301 FOR PIER DETAILS. NOTE THAT INTERIOR COLUMNS BEAR DIRECTLY ON PILE CAP WITH NO PIER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. SEE S-301 FOR GRADE BEAM SCHEDULES & DETAILS. 9. PROVIDE SAW-CUT CONTROL JOINTS AT 12' O.C. EACH WAY. ARCH & ENG WILL PROVIDE FINAL JOINT LOCATIONS. SEE 1/S-300. 10. SEE S-501 FOR COLUMN SCHEDULE. 1. FOUNDATION DESIGN CRITERIA IS BASED ON A SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION BY ELWYN & PALMER CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC, ITHACA N.Y., OCTOBER 2017. 2. FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE INSPECTED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO FILL OR CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 3. CLEAR, GRUB, AND STRIP TOPSOIL AND REMOVE SIGNIFICANT ROOT STRUCTURES WITHIN NEW BUILDING AREAS. AT DESIGNATED FOUNDATION DEMOLITION AREAS, REMOVE ANY REMNANTS OF ANY EXISTING STRUCTURES ENCOUNTERED FROM WITHIN THE NEW BUILDING FOOTPRINT. 4. ALL EXCAVATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL OSHA AND OTHER APPLICABLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. ALL BACKFILL TO BE PLACED IN 8" MAX. LAYERS AND COMPACTED TO AT LEAST 95% OF ITS MAX. MODIFIED PROCTOR DRY DENSITY FOR FILL BENEATH FOOTINGS AND FLOOR SLABS, ADJACENT TO FOUNDATIONS AND OVER FOUNDATIONS. 6. USE VIBRATORY COMPACTION EQUIPMENT W/ STATIC WEIGHT NOT GREATER THAN 12 TONS. 7. FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE CUT TO FINAL GRADE AND FOUNDATIONS CONSTRUCTED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO MINIMIZE POTENTIAL DAMAGE TO BEARING SOILS. ALL EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE KEPT DRY BY PUMPS, IF NECESSARY UNTIL ALL UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE. 8. LOOSENED BEARING SOILS SHALL BE RECOMPACTED WITH A SMALL VIBRATORY PLATE COMPACTOR PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING BARS. 9. ALL BACKFILL SHALL BE BROUGHT UP EQUALLY ON BOTH SIDES OF FOUNDATION WALLS UNTIL THE FINAL ELEVATION IS ACHIEVED. VARIATIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED 2'-0" BETWEEN BACKFILL ELEVATIONS ON EITHER SIDE WITHOUT ENGINEER'S APPROVAL. 10. ALL EXTERIOR FOUNDATIONS SHALL BEAR A MINIMUM OF 42 INCHES BELOW FINISH GRADE FOR FROST PROTECTION. 11. SUBMIT SIEVE ANALYSIS AND PROCTOR OF PROPOSED STRUCTURAL FILL AND SLAB SUBBASE MATERIAL TO GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL BEFORE COMMENCING EARTHWORK. 12. SEE S001 FOR PILE AND PILE LOAD TEST NOTES. GEOTECHNICAL/FOUNDATION NOTES NOTE: ALL PILE GROUP LOADS ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL (UNFACTORED). 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATIONS SHOWN AND IMMEDIATELY REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS TO THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR FABRICATION. 2. SECTIONS AND DETAILS ARE CONTINUOUS AND TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE EXACT LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE COMMENCING WORK. CONTRACTOR AGREES TO BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES WHICH MIGHT BE OCCASIONED BY FAILURE TO EXACTLY LOCATED AND PRESERVE EXISTING UTILITIES. 4. PROVIDE BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNALS, WARNING LIGHTS AND SIMILAR ITEMS AS REQUIRED AND MAINTAIN THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR JOB SITE SAFETY AND PROTECTION. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL CONCRETE, EARTHWORK, PILE DRILLING, CONCRETE MASONRY & STRUCTURAL STEEL, WORK WITH THE INSPECTION AND TESTING AGENCY RETAINED BY THE OWNER. GENERAL NOTES 1. PILE TYPE = STEEL PIPE PILE 2. PILE CAPACITY = 45 TONS (90 KIPS) [BASIS OF DESIGN] 3. FINAL PILE CAPACITY/LENGTH TO BE DETERMINED BY LOAD TEST PROGRAM 4. EXPECTED PILE LENGTH IS TO A LAYER OF DENSE SAND & GRAVEL WHICH OCCURS BETWEEN 70' & 80'. REFER TO GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT. 5. SEE ADDITIONAL PILE & PILE LOAD TEST NOTES ON SHEET S-001 & SPEC 316216 STEEL PILES. 6. FILL PILES WITH WATER AFTER INSTALLATION TO RESIST HYDROSTATIC UP LIFT. PILE NOTES 101.6mm [4"] 6.4mm [1/4"] 2 S-506 1 S-504 BEAM OFFSET 8 S-505 1 S-506 1 S-503 12' - 1 15/16" 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 14 14 13 13 15 15 16 16 AA CC DD EE FF GG HH II A.5A.5 BB 6' - 0 1/16"5' - 7 7/16"7' - 2 1/4"4' - 4 1/2"7' - 9 7/8"4' - 5 3/16"7' - 1 3/4"5' - 7 7/16"6' - 0 1/8" 26' - 8"55' - 1 3/8" 4 S-500 1 1/2" WR 18 GA GALV ROOF DECK (-2'-10") (-2'-10") (-2'-10") (-2'-10") (-2'-10") (-2'-10") (-2'-10") (-2'-10") 8" 6' - 2" 6K 36'-K 4K 24'-K 4K4K 13' - 1 11/16" 3' - 10 1/16" 5' - 9 11/16" 3' - 10 9/16" 12' - 0 7/8"12' - 0 1/2"6' - 10 3/8"10' - 5 1/16" 1' - 7 5/8" 4' - 10 11/16"7' - 2 1/4" BF1 BF2 2 S-502 BF3 BF4 BF 5 2 S-503 B.1B.1 BF6 3 S-503 BF7 15.5 15.5 15.6 15.6 H.3H.3 12' - 10 7/8"12' - 8 15/16"12' - 6 5/8"12' - 3 1/4"7' - 5 3/8"11' - 9 7/16"11' - 9 3/16" 3 3/4" 8 1/8" 7' - 0 11/16" 260k-ft 260k-ft 3 1/4" OFFSET 3 3/4" BEAM 1 S-500 PIL1 PIL1 PIL1 PIL2 PIL1 PIL1 PIL1 PIL2 PIL2 HM1 HM1 PIL2 PIL1 PIL2 PIL1 PIL2 PIL2 PIL1 PIL2 PIL1 PIL2 HM1 81' - 9 3/8" 202' - 5 7/16" 147' - 3 1/2" 55' - 1 15/16" 32' - 3 5/8" 12' - 3 1/16" 4' - 10 9/16" 11' - 0 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 13' - 4 5/8" 14' - 9 7/8" 9' - 7 7/16" 1' - 11 3/8" 4' - 11 9/16" 8' - 8 3/8" 3' - 4 1/8" 11' - 9 3/16" 15.3 15.8 5 3/8" BEAM OFFSET 5 3/8" BEAM OFFSET 2 1/4" COL OFFSET 2 3/4" BEAM OFFSET 2 1/2" BEAM OFFSET 38k W18X55 45k 31k W18X55 22k 29k W18X55 24k 13kW12X1913k25kW12X2234k18kW12X1918k3kW12X193k 29k W14X34 [14] 78k 13k W12X19 13k 4k W21X44 23k 138k W24X103 24k 24k W24X103 48k 6kW12X19 [10]6k 26k W21X62 55k 28k W12X26 [18] 28k 5kW12X195k35kW18X35 [26]35k 5kW12X195k 22k W12X19 [10] 25k 10kW12X26 [14]13k 46kW21X44 [38]98k36kW12X26 [10]24k 8k W12X26 [14] 8k 10k W12X19 10k 4k W12X19 4k 33kW21X44 [24]53k 30kW18X40 [18]76k 4k W12X19 4k 10k W12X26 [14] 10k 12k W12X19 [10] 7k 7k W12X19 [10] 7k 66k W24X55 [32] 66k 44k W14X22 [14] 36k 35k W14X22 [12] 35k 12kW12X19 [8]12k25kW12X19 [8]25k 5kW12X195k23kW12X30 [22]23k 5kW12X195k5k W12X19 5k 21k W12X19 [10] 21k17k W12X19 [10] 17k20k W12X2220k46kW24X55 [28] 49k 6kW12X19 [10]6k7kW12X1911k14kW18X40 [22]20k 35kW14X3013k28kW12X2632k38kW12X26 [22]37k28kW14X30 [22]46k 38k W18X35 [14] 34k 30k W12X26 [14] 30k 26k W12X26 26k 41k W18X35 [22] 41k 23k W12X19 [10] 23k 32k W12X26 [14] 35k 38k W14X30 [14] 35k 31k W12X26 [14] 34k 30k W12X19 [12] 30k 30k W12X19 [12] 30k 28k W12X19 [10] 28k 30k W14X34 30k 36k W16X26 [14] 36k W12X19 [10] 23k 30k W12X19 [12] 30k 44k W14X30 [26] 52k 21k W12X19 [10] 21k 34k W12X26 34k 32k W12X19 [10] 32k 33k W12X26 [16] 53k 14k W14X34 36k 36k W14X34 36k 32k W12X19 [10] 32k 33k W12X19 [14] 33k 40k W14X38 40k 40k W21X44 [22] 40k 41k W24X55 [28] 41k 41k W24X55 [28] 41k 43k W24X55 [28] 43k 10kW12X1910k 8k W12X19 [8] 39k 47k W16X31 20k 19k W12X19 [10] 22k 14k W14X30 74k 8k W12X22 8k 68k W16X31 [10] 87k 21k W12X19 [8] 21k 19k W16X31 76k 10k W16X31 69k 60k W18X35 12k 21k W12X19 [10] 21k 22kW16X4522k17kW16X4517k 27k W12X19 3k 6kW12X196k4kW12X194k8kW14X22 [12]8k6kW12X19 11k 13kW18X40 [20]19k 12k W14X34 [18] 12k 12k W14X34 [18] 12k 8k W14X22 [20] 8k 12k W14X34 [18] 12k 12k W14X34 [18] 12k 12k W14X34 [18] 12k 13k W14X38 [20] 13k 50kW21X101 [31] 67k 144kW21X132144k 67k W21X101 [62] 60k 67k W21X101 [62] 60k 67k W21X101 [31] 50k 71kW21X101 [62]71k 71k W21X101 [62] 71k 13k W16X45 [22] 13k 12k W16X45 [22] 12k 12kW16X45 [22]12k 13k W16X45 [22]13k 10k W12X26 [14] 10k 10k W12X22 [12] 10k W12X19 4k 5k W12X19 5k 24k W12X30 [18] 29k 15k W14X22 [14] 15k 29k W12X19 [10] 29k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 30kW21X44 [18]30k 9k W12X19 28k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 58kW14X53 18kW12X19 [10]18k 5kW12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 75kW24X146 175k 15k W16X26 [14] 15k 12k W12X19 48k 16k W16X31 85k 31k W18X35 [20] 33k 10kW16X3110k 11kW12X26 [20]14k 30k W16X31 [16] 30k 2k W12X26 2k 53k W18X40 [26] 50k 17k W16X31 85k 8k W14X22 [12] 8k 4k W12X19 4k 14k W12X26 [20] 11k 36k W16X31 85k 46k W18X35 [34] 46k 31k W12X26 13k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 25k W14X30 31k 14k W16X31 23k 5k W12X19 5k 27k W12X19 [10] 27k 33k W14X22 10k 34k W24X103 58k 7k W12X19 7k 5k W12X19 5k 4k W12X19 4k 4k W12X19 4k 5k W12X19 5k 10k W12X19 10k 10k W12X22 10k 5k 5k 17k W12X19 [10] 17k W10X19 W10X19 W10X19 W10X19 W10X19 W10X19 W10X19 W10X19 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 5k W12X19 5k 4k W12X19 4k 4k W12X19 4k 4k W12X19 4k 8k W12X19 8k 24k W12X19 [10] 21k 33k W18X353k 21k W12X22 26k 10k W12X19 [10] 10k 10k W16X31 10k 6k W12X19 [10] 6k 5k W12X19 5k 5kW12X195k 20k W18X35 20k 78k W16X3117k 34kW12X2234k 5k W12X19 5k BEAM OFFSET 2 3/4" 14k W14X22 [14] 15k W12X19 4 1/4" 1 S-502 3 S-502 102 k-ft 191 k-ft 127 k-ft 66 k-ft 73 k-ft 43 k-ft COLUMN OFFSET 3" BEAM AND OFFSET 1 1/4" BEAM OFFSET 3 3/4" BEAM OFFSET 2 1/2" BEAMOFFSET 4 9/16" BEAM OFFSET 2 9/16" BEAM 1 S-400 2 S-400 1 S-400 10' - 7 7/8" 6' - 4 3/4"2' - 10 3/4" 3' - 9 11/16" 1' - 7 5/8" 1 S-400 PROVIDE FRAMED OPENINGS FOR DUCT PENETRATIONS 2' - 10 3/4" W14X22 W14X22 MOMENT CONN. MOMENT CONN. 7 S-505 7 S-505 7 S-505 1 S-5063 7/16" S-104 1 S-104 3 2 1/2"OFFSET 4 9/16" BM 1 S-506 1' - 7 5/8" L1 OFFSET 2 1/4" COL L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 OFFSET 2 7/8" COL OFFSET 7 3/8" COL 4 1/4" L1L1L1L1 OFFSET 7 3/8" COL OFFSET 2 3/4" BM OFFSET 2 1/4" COL L1 L1 L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1L1 & BM OFFSET 2 5/8" COL COL OFFSET 1' - 4 11/16" BM & N=2 N=2 W21x132 L1 HM1 L1 BM OFFSET 2' - 0 1/16" COL & 13' - 2 15/16" 6' - 1 5/8"5' - 11 1/4"6' - 0 1/4"6' - 0 1/4" 6' - 10 3/8"6' - 0 1/16"6' - 0 5/8"5' - 10"6' - 0 11/16" COL OFFSET 2 1/4" BM & L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 6' - 1 5/8" 6' - 3 5/16" 2' - 10 5/16" 2' - 9 15/16" 2' - 11 13/16" 7 7/8" 6 1/2" 1' - 0 1/4" 6' - 5 9/16"3' - 10 1/16" 5' - 7 3/16"5' - 10"5' - 3 9/16" 2' - 11 13/16" 6' - 8 7/16" 2 3/4" 11' - 1 9/16" 2' - 0 5/16" 20 k-ft 20 k-ft 150k 150k 23k 3 1/4" 20k W21x50 (14) 20k NUMBER OF STUDS. IF NOT SHOWN BEAM IS NON-COMPOSITE. BEAM END REACTION (SERVICE LOAD). IF NOT SHOWN, DESIGN CONNECTION FOR 1/2" THE BEAM ALLOWABLE LOAD (-2 1/2) (-2 1/2) BEAM END T.O.S. ELEVATION. IF NOT SHOWN BEAM IS AT DATUM ELEV. MOMENT CONNECTION BEAM FRAMES OVER COLUMN LEGEND CMU STEEL EMBED PLATES 1.5 EXPECTED MAXIMUM BEAM DEFLECTION DUE TO THE WEIGHT OF WET CONCRETE WHEN PLACING COMPOSITE SLAB. IF NOT SHOWN, EXPECTED DEFLECTION IS < 1/2". BEAM SIZE N=2 NUMBER OF SHEAR STUD ROWS. IF NOT SHOWN EVENLY DISTRIBUTE STUDS IN ONE ROW. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-101 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/8" = 1'-0"1 2'ND FL FRAMING PLAN FRAMING NOTES: 1. DATUM ELEVATION FOR TOP OF STEEL IS SECOND FLOOR FF ELEV LESS 6 1/2" COMPOSITE SLAB. (404'-10" -6 1/2" = 404'-3 1/2"). 2. SECOND FLOOR DECK TO BE A LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE COMPOSITE SLAB; 2" 20 GA COMPOSITE STEEL DECK, 6 1/2" TOTAL SLAB THICKNESS. DECK TO PROVIDE A 3 HR FIRE RATING WITHOUT ADDITIONAL APPLIED FIREPROOFING. 3. SECOND FLOOR BEAMS AND GIRDERS, AND FIRST TO SECOND FLOOR COLUMNS, TO BE FIRE-PROTECTED FOR A 3 HR RATING. 4. REFER TO S-501 FOR COLUMN SCHEDULE. 5. REFER TO S-400 FOR MASONRY PILASTER AND WALL REINFORCING. 6. EDGE OF COMPOSITE SLAB IS 2 3/4" OUTSIDE OF PERIMETER GRIDLINES. (TYP). 7. SEE S-001 FOR COMPITE SLAB POURSTOPS. 8. FOR TYPICAL FLOOR OPENING FRAMING SEE DETAIL 3/S-500. 9. FOR TYPICAL MOMENT CONNECTION SEE 6/S-505. 10. FOR TYPICAL BEAM BEARING ON MASONRY DETAIL SEE 5/S-500. 11. SEE 7/S500 FOR LINTEL SCHEDULE. H1 TYPICAL ALL EXT. WINDOW OPENINGS THIS FLOOR H3 H3 H2 HM1 H4 H2 H2 H2 H2H2H2H2 OR H2A (TYP) SEE 1/S-601 H2 H2 OR H2A H2 H2 HM1 H2 TYP @ H2 HEADERS 1 S-601 5 S-602 2 S-602 8 S-602 6 S-602 6 S-602 2 S-602 2 S-602 8 S-602 2 S-602 5 S-602 5 S-601 6 S-601 5 1/2" 5 1/2" H3 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 14 14 13 13 15 15 16 16 AA CC DD EE FF GG HH II A.5A.5 BB B.1B.1 15.5 15.5 15.6 15.6 H.3H.3 PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA H5 H6 CANT SWC SWC SWC PSWA SWC HM1 2x8 @ 16" OC SWC SWB PSWAPSWA PSWA SWB SWB SWB SWB SWCSWC (TYP)SWC PSWA PSWA 2x8 @ 16" OC SWC SWC SWC (TYP) SWB SWB SWB SWB PSWA PSWA PSWA 81' - 9 3/8" 26' - 8"55' - 1 3/8" 13' - 1 11/16" 3' - 10 1/16" 5' - 9 11/16"3' - 10 9/16"12' - 0 7/8"12' - 0 1/2"6' - 10 3/8"10' - 5 1/16" 1' - 7 5/8" 4' - 10 11/16"7' - 2 1/4" 15.3 15.8 10 S-602 S-104 4 TIE-DOWN SWC H3 14" TJI 230 5 S-601 6 S-601 14" TJI 230 3 S-602 3 S-602 PROVIDE FRAMED OPENINGS FOR DUCT PENETRATIONS. SEE 4/S-603. 5 S-601 OR H2A TIE-DOWN H3 3 S-602 H3 10 S-602 147' - 3 1/2" 55' - 1 15/16" 32' - 3 5/8" 12' - 3 1/16" 4' - 10 9/16" 11' - 0 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 13' - 4 5/8" 14' - 9 7/8" 9' - 7 7/16" 1' - 11 3/8" 4' - 11 9/16" 8' - 8 3/8" 3' - 4 1/8" 11' - 9 3/16" 10 S-603 8 S-602 SIM H3A S-104 5 H3 8 S-601 3 3/8" OFFSET HEADER FOR RECESSED CORNER WINDOW. TYP. AT FLOORS 3,4,5 NOTE: 2x10 WALL STUDS FROM 15.5 TO CORNER WINDOW 4 7/8" HEADER OFFSET (HEADER CL TO GRID 16) FOR RECESSED WINDOWS 1. SEE DWG S001 FOR NOTES 2. H# REFERS TO HEADER MARK, SEE DWG S602 FOR SCHEDULES AND DETAILS. HEADER SCHEDULE INCLUDES SUPPORT POST REQUIREMENTS. 3. SEE S600 FOR SHEARWALL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS. 4. GRID LINES ARE AT CENTER OF STUD WALL. SEE ARCH FOR ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS. 5. FLOOR DECK TO BE 3/4" STURD-1-FLOOR EXP-1 OR EQUAL. SEE NOTES ON S-001. 6. FLOOR JOISTS TO BE EQUAL TO 14" TJI 110 BY WEYERHAUSER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 7. SEE S-400 FOR MASONRY WALL REINFORCING & DETAILS. 8. SHEAR-WALL TIE-DOWNS NOT REQUIRED ABOVE THE FOURTH FLOOR. 9. SEE S-001 FOR FRAMING LUMBER SPECIES AND GRADES. NOTE: FRAMING PLAN SHOWS FLOOR PLAN AND WALLS BELOW UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. HEADERS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE FOR SUPPORT OF THAT FLOORS FRAMING OR FOR WINDOW OR DOOR OPENINGS IN THE WALL BELOW. FRAMING NOTES FRAMING SYMBOL KEY: SHADING INDICATES WOOD FRAME INTERIOR BEARING WALL. MAX STUD SPACING = 16" O.C. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BEARING WALLS. INTERIOR BEARING/SHEARWALL SWC H# INDICATES SHEAR WALL TYPE. SEE S600 FOR SHEAR WALL SCHED & DETAILS INDICATES HEADER. SEE S602 FOR HEADER SCHEDULE. IF NO HEADER TYPE IS SHOWN USE H1. REQUIRED HEADER END SUPPORT IS PROVIDED IN THE HEADER SCHEDULE EXTERIOR WOOD FRAME BEARING/SHEAR WALL. 2x6 STUDS @ 16" O.C. WITH 7/16" OSB STRUCTURAL 1 PANEL SHEATHING ON EXT FACE OF STUD UNO. EXTERIOR BEARING /SHEARWALL H1 H# INDICATES HEADER. SEE S602 FOR HEADER SCHEDULE. IF NO HEADER TYPE IS SHOWN USE H1. INDICATES PLYWOOD OR OSB WEB "I-JOISTS". JOISTS TO BE EQUAL TO 14" TJI 110 BY WEYERHAUSER @ 16" OC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. INDICATES SHEARWALL TIE-DOWN ANCHOR POINTS SEE S-600. INDICATES SOLID SAWN WOOD JOIST. JOIST TO BE 2x8 @ 16" UNO plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-102 THIRD, FOURTH, AND FIFTH FLOOR FRAMING PLANS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/8" = 1'-0"1 THIRD, FOURTH, AND FIFTH FLOOR FRAMING PLANS DATUM ELEVATION: THIRD FLOOR TOP OF 3/4" GYPCRETE = 415'-6" FOURTH FLOOR TOP OF 3/4" GYPCRETE = 426'-2" FIFTH FLOOR TOP OF 3/4" GYPCRETE = 436'-10" H1 TYPICAL ALL EXT. WINDOW OPENINGS THIS FLOOR HM1 H3 H3 H2 HM1 H4 H2 H2 H2 H2H2H2H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 HM1 H2 TYP @ H2 HEADERS 5 1/2" 5 1/2" 7 S-603 5 S-603 6 S-603 5 S-603 9 S-603 8 S-603 5 S-603 6 S-603 5 S-603 S-103 2 6 S-601 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 14 14 13 13 15 15 16 16 AA CC DD EE FF GG HH II A.5A.5 BB B.1B.1 15.5 15.5 15.6 15.6 H.3H.3 SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS SLOPE JOISTS 1 S-603 1 S-603 2 S-603 2 S-603 3 S-506 W8X18 W8X18 W8X18 W8X18 W8X18 4' - 6" 4' - 6" 6' - 10 3/8" EMER GEN 2,600# 15.3 15.8 S-104 2 S-104 4 2x8 @ 16" OC 2x8 @ 16" OC 14" TJI 230 14" TJI 230 H3 H3 H5 CANT H6 H3 H3 SWC SWB SWB SWB SWB SWC (TYP) SWC 1 S-601 147' - 3 1/2" 55' - 1 15/16" 32' - 3 5/8" 12' - 3 1/16" 4' - 10 9/16" 11' - 0 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 11' - 1 9/16" 17' - 0 5/8" 13' - 4 5/8" 14' - 9 7/8" 9' - 7 7/16" 1' - 11 3/8"4' - 11 9/16" 8' - 8 3/8" 3' - 4 1/8" 11' - 9 3/16" PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWAPSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA PSWA 9 S-603 6 S-603 SWC SWC SWB SWC SWB SWB 1 S-601 TYP @ H2 HEADERS 26' - 8"55' - 1 3/8" 13' - 1 11/16"3' - 10 1/16" 5' - 9 11/16" 3' - 10 9/16"12' - 0 7/8"12' - 0 1/2"6' - 10 3/8"10' - 5 1/16" 1' - 7 5/8" 4' - 10 11/16"7' - 2 1/4" SWC SWCSWCSWC SWB H7 ODU-1 700#'S DOAS-1 2,600#'S PROVIDE (2) 14" LVL UNDER ROOF CURB THIS SIDE 8 S-601 H3 2x10 HEADER JACK STUDS THIS END 2x10 WALL STUDS THIS AREA 11 S-602 FRAMING SYMBOL KEY: INDICATES 7/16" OSB STRUCTURAL 1 PANEL SHEATHING THIS SIDE OF WALL (UNDER 5/8" GYP) SEE WALL TYP. SHADING INDICATES WOOD FRAME INTERIOR BEARING WALL. MAX STUD SPACING = 16" O.C. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BEARING WALLS. INTERIOR BEARING/SHEARWALL SWC H# INDICATES SHEAR WALL TYPE. SEE S600 FOR SHEAR WALL SCHED & DETAILS INDICATES HEADER. SEE S602 FOR HEADER SCHEDULE. IF NO HEADER TYPE IS SHOWN USE H1. REQUIRED HEADER END SUPPORT IS PROVIDED IN THE HEADER SCHEDULE INDICATES PLYWOOD OR OSB WEB "I-JOISTS". JOISTS TO BE EQUAL TO 14" TJI 110 BY WEYERHAUSER @ 16" OC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. INDICATES SOLID SAWN WOOD JOIST. JOIST TO BE 2x10 @ 16" UNO W8X18 HOIST BEAM STAIR ELEV 7 S-603 7 S-603 11 12 14 13 D E 2x8 JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 2x8 JOISTS @ 16" O.C. HM-1 SIM 1. SEE DWG S001 FOR NOTES 2. H# REFERS TO HEADER MARK, SEE DWG S602 FOR SCHEDULES AND DETAILS. HEADER SCHEDULE INCLUDES SUPPORT POST REQUIREMENTS. 3. SEE S600 FOR SHEARWALL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS. 4. GRID LINES ARE AT CENTER OF STUD WALL. SEE ARCH FOR ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS. 5. ROOF DECK TO BE 3/4" STURD-1-FLOOR EXP-1 OR EQUAL. SEE NOTES ON S-001. 6. ROOF JOISTS TO BE EQUAL TO 14" TJI 110 BY WEYERHAUSER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 7. SEE S-400 FOR MASONRY WALL REINFORCING & DETAILS. 8. SHEAR-WALL TIE-DOWNS NOT REQUIRED ABOVE THE FOURTH FLOOR. 9. SEE S-001 FOR FRAMING LUMBER SPECIES AND GRADES. NOTE: FRAMING PLAN SHOWS FLOOR PLAN AND WALLS BELOW UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. HEADERS SHOWN ON THE FLOOR PLAN ARE FOR SUPPORT OF THAT FLOORS FRAMING OR FOR WINDOW OR DOOR OPENINGS IN THE WALL BELOW. ROOF FRAMING NOTES plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-103 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/8" = 1'-0"1 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"2 T/RF STAIR PENT DATUM ELEVATION: TOP OF ROOF SHEATHING @ EXTERIOR WALL = 447'-4 1/2" TOP OF ROOF SHEATHING @ CORRIDOR (LOW POINT) = 446'-10 1/2" SWCSWC 2 3 A C A.5 B B.1 4' - 10 1/2" 10' - 2" (2) 2x10 W8X18 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 4" LW CONC LANDING SLAB W/ 2" 20 GA. GALV. COMP. STEEL DECK. REINF W/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWR. TOP/SLAB: 2ND FLR LANDING = +11'-6 5/8" L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 7' - 8" L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" 4" LW CONC LANDING SLAB W/ 2" 20 GA. GALV. COMP. STEEL DECK. REINF W/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWR. SEE PLANS FOR T/SLAB ELEVATIONS. TOP/SLAB: 2ND FLR = +17'-4" 11' - 4 7/16" 22' - 8 1/2" UP UP 2 3 A C A.5 B B.1 4' - 4" C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" C12x20.7 4" LW CONC LANDING SLAB W/ 2" 20 GA. GALV. COMP. STEEL DECK. REINF W/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWR. SEE PLANS FOR T/SLAB ELEVATIONS. TOP/SLAB: 1ST FLR LANDING = +8'-8" W8X18 11' - 4 7/16" 22' - 8 1/2" UP UP FOR BEAM BEARING SEE TYPICAL DETAIL 5/S-500. TYPICAL AT ALL STAIRS. 11 12 13 E C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 4" LW CONC LANDING SLAB W/ 2" 20 GA. GALV. COMP. STEEL DECK. REINF W/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWR. TOP/SLAB: 2ND FLR = 17'-4"L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" C12x20.7 C12x20.7 C12x20.7 L4X4X1/4" L4X4X1/4" 4" LW CONC LANDING SLAB W/ 2" 20 GA. GALV. COMP. STEEL DECK. REINF W/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWR. SEE PLANS FOR T/SLAB ELEVATIONS. TOP/SLAB: 2ND FLR LANDING = +9'-3" UP UP C12x20.7 8' - 8 3/8" 5' - 8" W8X18 W8X18 11 12 13 E FLOOR LEVEL LANDING 3/4" FLOOR SHEATING TOP/SLAB: 3RD FLR = +28'-0" 4TH FLR = +38'-8" 5TH FLR = +49'-4" ROOF = 60'-8" 2x10 @ 16" O.C. PRE-ENGINEERED & FABRICATED WOOD STAIRS. SEE WOOD STAIR NOTE BELOW. 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING @ STAIR LANDINGS TOP/SLAB: 3RD FLR LANDING = +22'-8" 4TH FLR LANDING = +33'-4" 5TH FLR LANDING = +44'-0" ROOF LANDING = +55'-0" UP UP 4' - 6" 19' - 6" (2) 2x10 (2) 2x10 9' - 4" 8' - 8 3/8" PRE-ENGINEERED & FABRICATED WOOD STAIRS. SEE WOOD STAIR NOTE BELOW. LANDING LEVEL 2x10 @ 16" O.C. 6 S-601 5 S-601 2x10 LEDGER 2x10 LEDGER 2x10 LEDGER 2x10 LEDGER 5 S-601 6 S-601 2 3 A C A.5 B B.1 FLOOR LEVEL LANDING 3/4" FLOOR SHEATING TOP/SLAB: 3RD FLR LANDING = +22'-8" 4TH FLR LANDING = +33'-4" 5TH FLR LANDING = +44'-0" 2x10 @ 16" O.C. PRE-ENGINEERED & FABRICATED WOOD STAIRS. SEE WOOD STAIR NOTE BELOW. 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING @ STAIR LANDINGS TOP/SLAB: 3RD FLR = +28'-0" 4TH FLR = +38'-8" 5TH FLR = +49'-4" UP UP PRE-ENGINEERED & FABRICATED WOOD STAIRS. SEE WOOD STAIR NOTE BELOW. LANDING LEVEL 2x10 @ 16" O.C. (2) 2x10 2x10 2x10 2x10 2x10 6 S-601 5 S-601 5 S-601 6 S-601 12' - 3 1/16" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-104 ENLARGE STAIR FRAMING PLANS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/4" = 1'-0"2 NORTHWEST ENLARGED STAIR FRAMING PLAN 2ND FLOOR 1/4" = 1'-0"1 NORTHWEST ENLARGED STAIR FRAMING PLAN 1ST FLOOR 1/4" = 1'-0"3 SOUTHEAST ENLARGED STAIR FRAMING PLAN 2ND FLOOR 1/4" = 1'-0"4 SOUTHEAST ENLARGED STAIR FRAMING PLAN 3RD THROUGH 5TH 1/4" = 1'-0"5 NORTHWEST ENLARGED STAIR FRAMING PLAN THIRD, FOURTH, AND FIFTH FLOOR A1 - ADDENDUM #A1 2019.10.01 NOTE ON PRE-ENGINEERED AND PRE-FABROICATED WOOD STAIRS: DETAILED DESIGN OF THE WOOD STAIRS IS DESIGN-DELEGATED TO THE PRE-FABRICATED WOOD STAIR MANUFACTURER. STAIRS ARE TO BE DESIGNED FOR A UNIFORM LIVE LOAD OF 100 PSF OR A CONCENTRATED LIVE LOAD OF 300 LBS. PER NYSBC 1607.1. SUBMIT DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS OF WOOD STAIRS TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL WHICH INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: - DIMENSIONED STAIR LAYOUT DRAWINGS - DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION SHOWING ALL JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS - ALL STAIR COMPONENT WOOD SIZES,GRADES AND SPECIES TAPERED PLATE DOWELS @ 18" O.C. EQUAL TO DIAMOND DOWEL SYSTEM BY PNA CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGIES. SET BULK-HEAD @ REQ'D ELEV & STAKE SECURELY TO SUBGRADE. 10" CRUSED STONE USE CONSTRUCTION (COLD) JOINTS WHERE REQUIRED FOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING OR INTERRUPTION DURING POUR. LOCATE JOINTS TO COINCIDE WITH CONTRACTION JOINTS INDICATED ON FOUNDATION PLAN. NOTES: 1. DEPRESS OR RECESS SLAB FOR FLOOR FINISH WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN 2. COORDINATE DEPTH AND BOUNDS WITH ARCH DWGS MIN 1' - 6" SLAB DEPRESS SLAB RECESS TYP SLAB DEPTH TYP SLAB DEPTH TYP CORNER TYP INTERSECTION EXTEND ALL HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT INTO INTERSECTING WALL MATCH HORIZONTAL BAR SIZE AND SPACING MATCH HORIZONTAL BAR SIZE AND SPACING CONTROL JOINT (CJ) -SEE PLAN ISOLATION JOINT. APPLY BOND BREAKER BETWEEN POURS. SIZE TO ALLOW 2" MIN CLEARANCE AT COLUMN BASE PLATE (24" SQUARE MIN) (CJ) -SEE PLAN STEEL COLUMN AND BASE PLATE (BELOW) (CJ) -SEE PLAN ISOLATION JOINT. APPLY BOND BREAKER BETWEEN POURS. SIZE TO ALLOW 2" MIN CLEARANCE AT COLUMN BASE PLATE (24" SQUARE MIN) SLAB EDGE (CJ) -SEE PLAN STEEL COLUMN AND BASE PLATE (BELOW) (CJ) -SEE PLAN TYP 2" MINIMUM TYP. 2" MINIMUM 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB W/ #5's @ 12" SW & #4's @ 16" LW. SUPPORT BARS 1 1/2" TO 2" FROM BOTTOM OF SLAB. 10 MIL POLY VAPOR RETARDER LAP JOINTS 12". TAPE EDGES SEE SPEC FOR CURING AND FINISH REQUIREMENT 10" CRUSHED STONE* * 10" SLAB SUB-BASE TO BE AN AIR-PERMIABLE LAYER THAT WILL PASS THROUGH A 2" SIEVE AND BE RETAINED ON A 1/4" SIEVE. SEE FOUNDATION SYSTEM ASSD DRAWINGS. SAW-CUT CONTROL JOINTS WITHIN 4 HOURS OF FINAL FINISH USING THE EARLY ENTRY DRY CUT SAW METHOD. LOCATE JOINTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN OR AT 12' O.C. IF NOT SHOWN. ALL SAW-CUT CONTROL JOINTS TO BE FILLED WITH A POLYUREA JOINT FILLER (SEE NOTES). ALLOW SLAB TO CURE MIN 30 DAYS BEFORE FILLING JOINTS. D/4 12" STEEL PILES SEE PLAN SLAB ON GRADE SEE PLAN T/SLAB SEE PLAN 2' - 0"2' - 0" 1' - 3" 1' - 3" FF ELEV SEE PILE CAP DETAIL FOR REINF. @ PILE CAPS 8" 1' - 4" 6 1/2" 5 1/2" PIER @ COL SEE PIER SCH. FOR REINF. STEEL COL SEE PLAN FACE OF STUD FACE OF 4" CMU 6 3/8" FACE OF STUD TO TO GRIDLINE 2 3/4" FACE OF STUD (TYP) SEE PLAN 2 1/4" COL OFFSET 8 1/2" 1' - 0" 9 1/2" COL 1/2" STEEL PILE CLOSURE 8" #4 HORZ CONT FOR WIDTH OF DOOR OPENINGS EXT CONCRETE TYP FLR SLAB SEE DETAIL SEE PLAN T/WALL = (-1') AT DOORWAY #5 @ 2' O.C. 16" 16" 2'x2" SLAB ISOLATION "DIAMOND" AT COL'S SEE COLUMN BASE PLATE DETAIL COL KEYWAY VAPOR BARRIER COLUMN SEE SCHED PILE CAP SEE PLAN 8" NOTES: 1. THE ABOVE TABLE APPLIES TO GRADE 60 DEFORMED BARS. 2. CLEAR SPACING BETWEEN BARS SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 2 BAR DIAMETERS. IF CLEAR BAR SPACING IS LESS THAN 2 BAR DIAMETERS, MULTIPLY THE ABOVE LAP LENGTHS BY 1.5. 3. FOR EPOXY COATED BARS, MULTIPLY THE ABOVE LAP LENGTHS BY 1.2 FOR CLEAR SPACING BETWEEN BARS GREATER THAN 6 BAR DIAMETERS, OR 1.5 IF CLEAR SPACING IS LESS THAN 6 BAR DIAMETERS. FOR WALLS, SLABS, FOOTINGS & BEAMS CONCRETE STRENGTH, PSI BAR SIZE #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 FOR PIERS & COLUMNS 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 ALL CONCRETE 1'-11" 2'-4" 2'-10" 4'-1" 4'-8" 5'-3" 6'-11" 1'-5" 1'-9" 2'-2" 2'-7" 3'-9" 4'-4" 4'-10" 5'-6" 1'-4" 1'-8" 2'-0" 2'-5" 3'-7" 4'-1" 4'-7" 5'-2" 1'-3" 1'-7" 1'-11" 2'-4" 3'-4" 3'-10" 4'-4" 4'-10" 1'-2" 1'-6" 1'-10" 2'-2" 3'-2" 3'-7" 4'-1" 4'-7" 1'-1" 1'-3" 1'-7" 1'-11" 2'-2" 2'-6" 2'-10" 3'-2" 1'-0" CONCRETE REINFORCING SPLICE SCHEDULE 12" STEEL PILES (BEYOND) SEE PLAN SLAB ON GRADE SEE PLAN T/SLAB SEE PLAN GRADE BEAM 2'-6" WIDE x 2'-0" 2' - 0"2' - 0" FF ELEV OFFSET (TYP) 2 1/4" COL 8" 12" CONT. WALL OVER GRADE BEAM 6" CFMF 1ST FLOOR EXT WALL FACE OF STUD TO GRIDLINE 2 3/4" FACE OF STUD FACE OF 4" CMU 6 3/8" FACE OF STUD TO COL 1' - 3" 1' - 3" INTERIOR GRADE BEAM SLEEVE GRADE BEAM FOR 4"Ø PERF PVC PIPE CONT. THROUGH GRADE BEAM. SEE FOUNDATION SYSTEM ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. #5 DOWEL @ 2'-0" 16" 16" (2) #5"S T&B (2) #5'S x 2'-6" VERTS @ 1'-0" O.C. 1' - 3" 1' - 3" 12" STEEL PILES (BEYOND) SEE PLAN SLAB ON GRADE SEE PLAN T/SLAB SEE PLAN GRADE BEAM 2'-6" WIDE x 2'-0" 8" 12" CONT. WALL OVER GRADE BEAM CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH #5 DOWEL @ 2'-0" 16" 16" (2) #5"S T&B (2) #5'S x 2'-6" VERTS @ 1'-0" O.C. 2'-0 13/16" @ 15.8 1' - 10 3/4" @ A.5 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-300 FOUNDATION DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 SLAB COLD JOINT 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 SLAB RECESS/DEPRESS DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"5 REINFORCING @ CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS 3/4" = 1'-0"12 TYPICAL COLUMN BLOCKOUTS 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1 SLAB ON GRADE 3/4" = 1'-0"6 TYP FOUNDATION DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"9 FND DETAIL @ DOORWAY 1/2" = 1'-0"10 TYP INT COL FOUNDATION 1 1/2" = 1'-0"11 REBAR LAP LENGTH SCHEDULE 3/4" = 1'-0"13 EXT FOUNDATION DETAIL (TYP) 3/4" = 1'-0"8 EXT FOUNDATION DETAIL @ CURTAIN WALL 6' - 6" 6' - 6" 3' - 6" (TYP) 1' - 6"3' - 6" PC3 2' - 1"2' - 2 1/2" 4' - 3" 2' - 3" PC2 6' - 6" EXTERIOR 2' - 6" @ 1' - 6 7/8"11 1/8" 1' - 6" BOTTOM BARS PC1 1' - 3" 1' - 3" 2' - 6" "B" BARS "A" BARS 2' - 6" 1' - 3"1' - 3" STEEL PIPE PILE PILE PILE PILE EQ EQ PILE STEEL PIPE PILE PILE PILE STEEL PIPE PILE PILE PILE INTERIOR 2'-0" @ PC4 6' - 6" STEEL PIPE PILE 6' - 6" PILE PILE 3' - 6" PILE PILE 3' - 6" PC5 8' - 0" STEEL PIPE PILE PILE PILE 5' - 0" PILE PILE 5' - 0" 8' - 0" PILE PILE CAP REINFORCING SEE SCHEDULE STEEL PIPE PILE TYP. PILE DEPTH TYP 8" CVR 3" CLR 1' - 4" 3' - 6" 1' - 4" 180 DEGREE HOOK. FOLLOW ACI BEND REQUIREMENTS. STEEL CAP PLATE TYP CONTINUE GRADE BEAM REINFORCING THROUGH PILE CAP PILE TOP BAR REINFORCING STEEL PIPE PILE TYP. PILE SEE SCHEDULE GRADE BEAM SEE SCHEDULE PILE CAP "SIDE" REINFORCING BOTTOM BAR REINFORCING @ PILE 3' - 0" TYP GRADE BEAM GRADE BEAM TYP 3" CVR 141.00° TYP 8" CVR 3" CLR PILE I.D. PC2 BOTTOM (4) PC3 PILE CAP SCHEDULE NO. PILES PER CAP 2 3 2'-0" 2'-6" DEPTH REINFORCING TOP (4) #8 EW (4) #6 (3 WAYS) AS SHOWN (12) TOTAL NOTE 1 TIES NOTES: 1. CONTINUE GRADE BEAM REINFORCING THROUGH PILE CAP. 2. PROVIDE 90 DEG STANDARD HOOK AT EACH END OF REINF. BAR. 3. SEE 2/S301 FOR TYPICAL PILE CAP SECTION. 4. BOTTOM REINFORCING IS IN ADDITION TO GRADE BEAM REINFORCING . PC1 1 2'-0" (4) #5 EW NOTE 1 #4@10" (4) #5 (3 WAYS) AS SHOWN (12) TOTAL PC4 4 2'-6" 10 (#6) (2) WAYS (20) TOTAL 10 #5 (2) WAYS (20) TOTAL PC5 5 2'-6" 13 (#6) (2) WAYS (26) TOTAL 13 #5 (2) WAYS (26) TOTAL COL 3 1/4"2 1/4" PIER P3 BASE PLATE BP3 1"x10"x10" BASE PLATE (8) #5 VERT. EXTERIOR COLUMN PIER P3 5 1/2" 6 1/2" 3" 5 1/2"6 1/2"3" #3 TIES @ 10" O.C. COL COL BASE PLATE BP2 TYPICAL INTERIOR COLUMN. NO PIER. COL BEARS ON GRADE BEAM/ PILE CAP. SEE PILE CAP DETAILS FOR REINF. @ PILES. 1' - 0" 1' - 0" T/PILE CAP / GRADE BEAM = -8" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" GRADE BEAM BELOW COL 8 1/2" 6 1/2" 5 1/2" 9 1/2" 3 1/4"2 1/4" BASE PLATE BP1 1"x10"x12" BASE PLATE 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 2" 1" (10) #5 VERT. #3 CLOSED TIES @ 10" O.C. VERT EXTERIOR COLUMN PIER P2 INTERIOR GRADE BEAM WALL 1' - 0" FND 2" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" GRADE BEAM BELOW PIER 8 1/2" 6 1/2" 5 1/2" 9 1/2" 3 1/4"2 1/4" BASE PLATE BP1 1"x10"x12" BASE PLATE 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 2" 1" (10) #5 VERT. #3 CLOSED TIES @ 10" O.C. VERT EXTERIOR COLUMN PIER P1 COL 3 1/4"2 1/4" BASE PLATE BP8 1"x10"x10" BASE PLATE EXTERIOR COLUMN PIER P4 5 1/2" 6 1/2" 1' - 3" 5 1/2"6 1/2"3" #3 TIES @ 10" O.C. COL (10) #5 VERT. WIDTH DEPTH TOP BARS BOTTOM BARS STIRRUPS TYPE GB1 30" WIDTH DEPTH TOP BAR 24" (2) #6 GB2 GRADE BEAM SCHEDULE BOT. BAR (5) #6 STIRRUPS #4 @ 12" GRADE BEAM TYPE GB-1 24" 24" (2) #6 (4) #6 #4 @ 12" 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB ON GRADE VAPOR BARRIER T/SLAB 8" TYP INTERIOR GRADE BEAM TYPE GB2 10" AIR PERMIABLE FILL. SEE SLAB ON GRADE DETAIL SEE PLAN #4 BENT DOWELS @ 2' O.C. 16" 16" 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB ON GRADE VAPOR BARRIER SLEEVE GRADE BEAM FOR 4"Ø PERF PVC PIPE CONT. THROUGH GRADE BEAM. SEE FOUNDATION SYSTEM ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. T/SLAB 8" 5" TYP INTERIOR GRADE BEAM TYPE GB2 10" AIR PERMIABLE FILL. SEE SLAB ON GRADE DETAIL SEE PLAN D 15.8 BASE PLATE BP2 OFFSET 3 3/4" COL 8 3/4" 1' - 5 1/4" 1' - 1" 1' - 0 13/16" 2' - 2" (12) #5 VERT. #3 TIES @ 10" O.C. COLUMN PIER P6 A.5 15.8 1 1/4"x14"x14" BASE PLATE BP10 #3 TIES @ 10" O.C. (10) #5 VERT 10" 2' - 0 13/16" 1' - 10 13/16" 1' - 0" 1' - 8 3/4"1' - 0" 10" COLUMN PIER P5 14 A.5 #3 TIES @ 10" O.C. (12) #5 VERT 1 1/4"x14"x14" BASEPLATE BP10 7 1/4" OFFSET 4 3/4" COL 2' - 0" COLUMN PIER P4 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-301 FOUNDATION DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/2" = 1'-0"1 PILE CAP DETAILS 3/4" = 1'-0"2 TYPICAL PILE CAP SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"10 TYPICAL GRADE BEAM AT PILE CAP DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"3 COLUMN PIER DETAILS 3/4" = 1'-0"4 TYPICAL GRADE BEAM SECTIONS & SCHEDULE 3/4" = 1'-0"5 GRADE BEAM DETAIL @ ASSD PIPE 1'-6" SQ x 1'-6" DEEP SUMP PIT SEE FND PLAN FOR LOCATION (5) #4 TIES @ 3" O.C. GRATING GALV L2x2x1/8" ANCHORED TO CONC. WITH 1/2"Ø x 4" SHEAR STUD ON 4 SIDES PROVIDE STD. 90° HOOKS FOR TOP BARS AROUND SUMP PIT 6"6" 4' - 0"4' - 0" (6) -3/8x2 1/2 BENT BAR WITH 3/4"Ø HOLE FOR 5/8"Ø WEDGE ANCHOR (GALV) (5) -3/4"Ø NON-SLIP BAR x 1'-5 3/4" INSERT IN SIDERAILS & PLUG WELD 3/8x2 1/2" BAR SIDERAILS 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4"1 1/4" 2" 1' - 6" 2" 3" 4" NOTE: 1. PAINT ALL SURFACES OF LADDER AND BRACKETS 1' - 0" 4 3/4" 1' - 5 1/4" 6" 4' - 0" 6" TYP 1' - 0" 6 4BEND LADDER TO COMPLY W/ ASME 17.1 1/4 1/4 TYP 1/4 TYP COORD WITH ELEVATOR MFR #5 DOWELS @ 2' OC VAPOR BARRIER WATERSTOP GB2 (BEYOND) 8" ELEVATOR PIT SLAB WITH #5'S @ 12" 0.C. EW TOP LOCATE 1'-4" x 1'-4" SUMP PIT ON NORTH WALL T/SLAB ELEV SHAFT 8" CMU WATER PROOFING SEE ARCH #4'S @ 12 EW 8" CONC WALL GB2 (PERIMETER) PC1 @ CORNERS OF SHAFT STEEL PILE (BEYOND) 8"2' - 0" 8" GB2 2' - 0" 1' - 1" WATERSTOP W/ MFG 4' - 0" COORD #5 DOWELS @ 2' OC INTO GRADE BEAM 2' 2' SCHED (TYP) SEE LAP SCHED (TYP) SEE LAP SEE PLAN COORD WITH ELEVATOR MFR #5 DOWELS @ 2' OC VAPOR BARRIER WATERSTOP GB2 (BEYOND) 8" ELEVATOR PIT SLAB WITH #5'S @ 12" 0.C. EW TOP LOCATE 1'-4" x 1'-4" SUMP PIT ON NORTH WALL ELEV/STAIR SHAFT 8" CMU WATER PROOFING SEE ARCH #4'S @ 12 EW 8" CONC WALL GB2 (PERIMETER) PC1 @ CORNERS OF SHAFT STEEL PILE (BEYOND) 8"2' - 0" 8" GB2 2' - 0" 1' - 1" WATERSTOP W/ MFG 4' - 0" COORD #5 DOWELS @ 2' OC INTO GRADE BEAM 2' 2' SCHED (TYP) SEE LAP SCHED (TYP) SEE LAP #5 DOWELS @ 2' OC VAPOR BARRIER T/SLAB STAIR SHAFT 8" CMU GB2 STEEL PILE (BEYOND) SEE PLAN 3 S-302 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-302 FOUNDATION DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 SUMP PIT DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"8 ELEVATOR PIT LADDER 1/2" = 1'-0"2 ELEV SECTION 1/2" = 1'-0"1 ELEVATOR SECTION T/SLAB SEE PLAN REINFORCED SLAB ON DECK. SEE PLAN FOR DECK SPAN DIRECTION STEEL ANGLE WITH 3/4" HILTI HY-70 ADHESIVE ANCHORS AT 1'-4" O.C. EMBED 4" 16" DEEP BOND BEAM WITH (1) #5 CONTINUOUS AROUND CMU WALL CLOSURE ANGLE VERTICAL REINFORCING SEE MASONRY WALL ELEVATIONS. CMU WALL REINFORCED ELEVATOR SHAFT T/SLAB SEE PLAN REINFORCED SLAB ON DECK. SEE PLAN FOR SPAN DIRECTION STEEL ANGLE WITH 3/4" HILTI HY-70 ADHESIVE ANCHORS AT 1'-4" O.C. EMBED 4" 16" DEEP BOND BEAM WITH (1) #5 CONTINUOUS AROUND CMU WALL 3/8" BENT PLATE W/ POURSTOP AT ENDS OF OPENING (1) #4 CONT. EXTEND 2'-0”BEYOND EACH END OF OPENING AT 45° ANGLE CLOSURE ANGLE 1/4 2-12 1 1/2" #5 VERT. @ 4'-0" O.C. (TYP) 8" BOND BEAM W/ (1) #5 . CONTINUE 2'-0" BEYOND EACH END OF LINTEL 8" 16" BOND BEAM W/ (1) #5 (TYP AT EACH FLOOR) (1) #5 VERTICAL AT CORNERS. TYPICAL EXCEPT AT PILASTERS. (FIRST FLOOR ONLY) (2) #5 VERT AT EACH SIDE OF OPENING OPENING (TYP) 2' - 0" FIRST FLOOR EXTEND HOOKS TO REST OF GRADE BEAM BOTTOM REINFORCING BAR. T/SLAB T/GRADE BEAM SEE PLAN GRADE BEAM 4 S-400 8" (2) #5 VERT AT EACH SIDE OF OPENING OPENING (TYP) 2' - 0" T/FLOOR @ 2ND, 3RD, 4TH, 5TH 4 S-400 4' - 0" 2' - 6" 8" BOND BEAM W/ (1) #5 . CONTINUOUS EXCEPT AT OPENINGS. 2' - 6" (1) #5 VERTICAL AT CORNERS. (FLOORS 2 THROUGH 6) T/HIGH ROOF 7 S-603 TYP AT EAST STAIR AND ELEVATOR T/LOW ROOF #5 HOOK . @ 4'-0" O.C. (TYP) 6 S-400 FULLY GROUT FIRST FLOOR CMU (ALL CORES) TO ACHIEVE A 3 HOUR FIRE RATING. REQUIRED AT ELEVATOR SHAFT AND TWO STAIRWELLS. REQUIRED AT FIRST FLOOR ONLY. 1' - 4" BEAM (4) #8 EQ EQ #3 CLOSED TIES @ 8" O.C. LOCATE REINFORCING IN MORTAR JOINT 1' - 0" (4) #8 8" #3 CLOSED TIES @ 8" O.C. LOCATE REINFORCING IN MORTAR JOINT BEAM PIL2 PIL1 SEE PLAN CMU WALL SEE PLAN CMU WALL VERTICAL REINFORCING BARS -SEE SHEAR WALL REINFORCING FOR SIZE AND QUANTITY - PLACE ONE BAR PER CORE IN END CORES OF WALL GROUT SOLID AROUND BARS NO 9 WIRE TIE @ 16" OC PLACE IN ALTERNATE COURSE WITH JOINT REINFORCEMENT MAXIMUM TWO BARS PER TIE VAPOR BARRIER SEE FOUNDATION PLAN NOTES GRADE BEAM SEE SCHEDULE 8" CMU STAIRWELL WALL UNDER-SLAB STRUCT FILL 8" CMU BOND BEAM W/ #5 CONT. 2' EXT. 8" INT. 2' - 0" HAUNCHED SLAB TO BEAR ON GRADE BEAM 6" STRUCTURAL SLAB ON GRADE SEE PLAN AND SLAB DETAIL FOR REINF PILE (BEYOND) #5 BENT DOWELS @ 2' O.C. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-400 MASONRY DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1" = 1'-0"1 SLAB EDGE DETAIL @ MASONRY WALL 1" = 1'-0"2 SLAB EDGE AT ELEVATOR SILL 1/4" = 1'-0"5 TYPICAL MASONRY WALL REINFORCING 1" = 1'-0"3 TYPICAL MASONRY PILASTER DETAILS 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 TYPICAL MASONRY WALL @ OPENINGS 1" = 1'-0"6 FOUNDATION DETAIL @ STAIRWELL TOP OF STEEL SEE PLAN FILL BEAM POCKET WITH SOLID OR SOLID GROUTED MASONRY CUT BLOCK COURSE BELOW STEEL BEAM BEARING GROUT SOLID STEEL BEAM SEE PLAN STEEL BEARING PL W/ 2- 3/4"Ø x 12" LG HEADED CONCRETE ANCHORS SET PLATE 1/2" FROM FACE OF CMU. SEE BEARING PLATE SCHEDULE. BOND BEAM NEW MASONRY WALL. SEE PLAN, SECT, OR ELEV. CMU 3 1/4 2" LOCATE ANCHORS 1" FROM EACH END OF PLATE BEAM SIZE W12x16 W8x15 W12x26 W16x26 W16x31 W12x19 W12x22 W18x35 W18x40 W21x44 W12x30 W24x55 W24x68 W24x76 W27x84 W30x90 LENGTH (IN.) 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0" 8" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0" WIDTH (IN.) 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" THICKNESS 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" BEAM BEARING PLATE SCHEDULE WIDE FLANGE BEAM SEE FRAMING PLAN PL 5/16" STIFFENER OVER COLUMN CENTERLINE STEEL COLUMN OR OTHER BEARING CONDITIONS PROVIDE 3/4 HEIGHT STIFFENERS WHERE BEAM FRAMES OVER TOP OF COLUMN OR WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED. WHERE BEAMS INTERSECT OVER COLUMN, DESIGN STIFFENER AS A SHEAR CONNECTION. BEAM WIDE FLANGE BEAM SEE FRAMING PLAN FULL HEIGHT PL 5/16" STIFFENER OVER COLUMN CENTERLINE STEEL COLUMN OR OTHER BEARING CONDITIONS BEAM STEEL COLUMN OR OTHER BEARING CONDITIONS PL 5/16" STIFFENER OVER COLUMN CENTERLINE PROVIDE 3/4 HEIGHT STIFFENERS WHERE BEAM FRAMES OVER TOP OF COLUMN OR WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED. BEAM STEEL COLUMN OR OTHER BEARING CONDITIONS WIDE FLANGE BEAM SEE FRAMING PLAN 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/16 D 3/4 D D 3/4 D COMP SLAB OPNG COORD SIZE AND LOCATION POUR STOP CLOSURE C8x11.5 POUR STOP FLUSH SECTION A SECTION B FLOOR BMS CHANNEL FRAME C8x11.5 -TYP SECT A SECT B PLAN DETAIL PROVIDE ALL ROOF AND FLOOR OPENING FRAMES PER SPEC SECTION 05120. COORDINATE QUANTITIES, LOCATION, AND SIZE OF OPENINGS WITH OTHERS AND H-SERIES, P-SERIES, AND A-SERIES DWGS. 2'ND FL FRAMING PLAN 17' - 4" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" 8' - 0" FIRETROL COLUMN HSS 7x7x1/2" COLUMN; CONCRETE FILLED. 12 3/4" OD. STEEL JACKET; EPOXY PAINTED. FIREPROOF FOR 3 HR RATING 2 S-500 W21x132 CONTINUOUS FROM GRID "A" TO GRID "F" ENCASE BOTTOM OF COLUMNS IN CONCRETE CURB. REINF CURB W/ (5) #5'S T&B W/#4 TIES @ 10" O.C. DOWEL INTO PIER W/(8) #4x20" DOWELS E.F. COAT BOTTOM OF COLUMNS, INCLUDING BASE PLATES AND ANCHOR BOLTS, WITH TNEMEC TNEME-TAR 7' - 6" 7' - 6" 1' - 6" 1' - 0" 6" 6" 1' - 0" 2' - 6" 8 S-500 GROUND FLR T/SLAB = 387.5' T/PILE CAP = 385.5' B/PILE CAP = 383' T/CURB = 387' T/DRIVE = 386.5' T/ENCASEMENT = 390' 3' - 0" 1" CHAMFER 1" x 10"x 20"CAP PLATE WITH (8) 1" DIA BOLTS REINF PIER W/ (5) #6'S T&B & #4 TIES @ 10" O.C. DOWEL #5'S VERT INTO PILE CAP -(8)x4' (12" EMBEDMENT) E.F. SEE PILE CAP SCHEDULE FOR PILE CAP REINFORCING. PIER & CURB TO BE 5,000 PSI CONCRETE W/ 6% AIR. 1" x 10"x 20"CAP PLATE WITH (8) 1" DIA BOLTS 3' - 6" 8' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 9" 9" 2"x16"x20" BASE PLATE W/(4) 1 1/2"Ø x 36" ANCHOR BOLTS. COLCOL PIER PIER 3" 3" 2" 2" 1 OFFSET 1' - 4 11/16" COL EQ EQ PIER F G 10 3/8" OFFSET 2 3/4" BEAM W24x55 (4) 3/4" BOLTS T&B HANG CANOPY BEAM FROM W24x55 W/2" SCH 40 PIPE WELDED TO 1/2" CAP PLATES W12x19 2ND FLR T/SLAB 17'-4" CANOPY T/STEEL 13'-11 1/2" 3/4" HEIGHT STIFFENERS. SEE 6/S-500. NOTES: 1. ALL OPENINGS 1'-0" AND OVER IN MASONRY CONSTRUCTION REQUIRE LINTELS 2. ALL LINTELS SHALL BEAR A MINIMUM OF 8" ON SOLID OR SOLID GROUTED MASONRY AT EACH END. 3. ALL LINTELS SHALL BE PREPARED, PRIMED AND/OR FINISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROJECT MANUAL. EXTERIOR LINTELS ARE TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED. 4" MASONRY (1) LOOSE ANGLE 4" MASONRY COMPONENTS USE ONE LOOSE ANGLE LINTEL TYPE ANGLE SIZE L1 L4x4x1/4" (LLV) S-506 2 1 1 S-500 1' - 6" 1' - 0" 6" 6" 1' - 0" 2' - 6" 3' - 6" OFFSET 1' - 4 11/16" COL FIRETROL COLUMN HSS 7x7x1/2" COLUMN; CONCRETE FILLED. 12 3/4" OD. STEEL JACKET; EPOXY PAINTED. FIREPROOF FOR 3 HR RATING ENCASE BOTTOM OF COLUMNS IN CONCRETE CURB. COAT BOTTOM OF COLUMNS, INCLUDING BASE PLATES AND ANCHOR BOLTS, WITH TNEMEC TNEME-TAR 8' - 0" 3' - 6" GROUND FLR T/SLAB = 387.5' T/PILE CAP = 385.5' B/PILE CAP = 383' T/CURB = 387' T/DRIVE = 386.5' T/ENCASEMENT = 390' 3' - 0" 1" CHAMFER 2ND FLR SEE PLAN plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-500 STEEL FRAMING DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5 TYP BEAM BEARING ON MAS DET 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 TYPICAL BEAM STIFFENER DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"3 TYP FLOOR OPENING FRAME 3/8" = 1'-0"1 WEST END V COLUMN ELEVATION 1" = 1'-0"2 V COLUMN BASE DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"4 CANOPY HANGER GRID F @ 10.5 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 TYP LINTEL SCHEDULE 3/8" = 1'-0"8 WEST END V COLUMN SECTION BOTTOM OF BASE PLATE OFFSET BASE PLATE CAP PLATE TYPE TYPE LENGTH WIDTH THICKNESS ANCHOR BOLTS ELEV = 404'-10" 2ND FLOOR TOS ELEV = 387'-6" GROUND FLR HSS 7x7x1/2" CONCRETE FILLED W/ 12 3/4" OD WIDTH LENGTH THICKNESS 1' - 1" HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" JACKET. FIRETROL COLS. SEE 1/S500 W21x132 A.5/1.2 B.1/1.2 D.5/1.2 E.5/1.2 F/2 W21x44 D/2 W21x101 BP9 +13" SEE DETAIL 1/S-500 2/S-501 SEE 1/S-500 1 1/2"Ø HSS 6x6x5/8" 7" E/2 W21x101 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" G.5/11 W18x40 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" A/5.8 F/5 F/7 F/9 F/11 W24x55 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" A/6.7 A/8 W16x31 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" A/11 A/9.7 W18x35 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" A/12 W14x34 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" C/6.7 C/8 W12X22 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" D/15.8 W24x146 W8x58 7" A.5/15.8 W24x146 W8x48 7" A.5/14 W24x103 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" W12x26 E/3.5 HSS 6x6x5/8" 7" W21x44 G.5/13 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" W21x62 D/15.3 W18x55 7" I/13 MOMENT FRAME W16x50 7" I/11 I/16 MOMENT FRAME HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" A/9 E/16 W12x19 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" E/9.7 W14x38 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" B/5 B.1/6.7 W14x30 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" E/5.7 W14x22 E/7 D/7 D/9 E/9 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" W16x31 BRACED FRAME HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" C/12 W12x19 BRACED FRAME HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" B.1/12 W14x34 BP6BP6 BP6 BRACED FRAME HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" E/5 W18x35 BRACED FRAME BP6 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" D/5 W18x35 BRACED FRAME BP5 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" D/3.2 W12x26 BRACED FRAME BP4 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" W18x35 BRACED FRAME C/9.8 E/15.6 BP4 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" C/11 W16x31 BP4 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" F.2/15.6 W12x30 BP6 -7" 1 1/2"Ø SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø CP1 3/S-501 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø 2/S-501 -7" 1 1/2"Ø CP1 3/S-501 2/S-501 BP7 -7" 1"Ø x 2'-0" CP1 3/S-501 2/S-501 W16x50 7" I/15.5 MOMENT FRAME BP7 -7" 1"Ø x 2'-0" CP1 3/S-501 2/S-501 BP8 -7" 1"Ø x 2'-0" CP1 3/S-501 2/S-501 INDICATES BEAM FRAMES OVER COLUMN. PROVIDE STIFFENERS PER DETAIL 6/S-500. (TYP) HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" G.5/15.5 W21x44 BP3 BP2 BP3 BP1 BP1 BP1 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" B.1/8 B.1/5.8 B.1/9.7 B.1/11 C/5.8 C/9 D/5.7 D/8 D/11 W16x31 BP1 BP2 7" C/5 D/9.8 W18x35 HSS 6x6x3/8" BP1 BP2 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" E/7.8 W14x34 BP3 BP2 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" F/16 H.3/16 W12X22 BP2 BP1 BP2 BP10 BP10 BP2 BP2 BP2 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" B.1/9 B.1/15.3 W12x19 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" D/16 W12x19 BP1 BP2 BP3 BP2 BP2 BP2 -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø -7" 2/S-501 3/4"Ø SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV SEE BRACE FRAME ELEV CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 CP1 3/S-501 HSS 6x6x3/8" 7" C/14 W24x103 BP2 -7" 3/4"Ø CP1 3/S-501 2/S-501 BRACED FRAME COL (TYP) 1 1/2" (TYP) 1 1/2" 1 1/2"1 1/2" GAGE BEAM WORKABLE BEAM AND COL 13/16"Ø HOLES FOR 3/4"Ø HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS CP1 COLUMN 1/2" CAP PLATE WIDE FLANGE BEAM NOTES: 1. REFER TO COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR BASE PLATE DIMENSIONS. 2. HOLES MAY BE OVERSIZED 5/16" AND PROVIDE 1/4" PLATE WASHER. 3. ALL ANCHOR BOLTS TO BE 3/4" DIA UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. COLUMN REFER TO COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR COLUMN SIZE BASE PLATE-REFER TO COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND TYPE 1/4" LEVELING PLATE EXTEND 1/4" BEYOND ALL BASE PLATE EDGES 3/4" NON-SHRINK GROUT -MINIMUM MILL OR SAW COLUMN END. MILL TOP OF BASE PLATE (TYP) UNO '12" HEAVY HEX NUT ASTM F1554 ANCHOR RODS (36 KSI) -REFER TO COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND BASE PLATE DETAIL FOR QUANTITY COL COL 1"x10"x10" BASE PLATE COL 6" 6" 6"6" COL 1"x12"x12" BASE PLATE 1 1/2" 4 1/2" 4 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 4 1/2" 4 1/2" 1 1/2" COL 1"x10"x12" BASE PLATE COL 1' - 3" 1' - 0" EQEQ 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 6" 9" BP6 COL COL 3/16" 4 SIDE PLATE THICKNESS = 1 1/2" BP1 BP2 BP3 6" 6" 5 1/2" 4 1/2" 1 1/2" 4 1/2" 4 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 4" 2 1/2" 2" 3/16" 4 SIDE 3/16" 4 SIDE COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE 4" 6" 2" 2" 3" 3" 2"2"3"3" 4"6" 3/16" 4 SIDE COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE 1 1/2" 1 1/2" COL 8 1/2" 7 1/2" 2" 6 1/2" 5 1/2" 2" COL 2" 6"6" 2" 11 1/2"4 1/2" BP4 1 1/2"x16"x16" BASE PLATE 3/16" 4 SIDE COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE COL COL 8 1/2" 7 1/2" 11 1/2"4 1/2" 2" 6 1/2" 5 1/2" 2" 2"9 1/2"2 1/2"2" 4 1/2" 4 3/8" 7 1/8" 6" BP5 1 1/2"x16"x16" BASE PLATE 3/16" 4 SIDE TYP COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE 10" EQEQ 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 2" 2" 1' - 1" 1' - 1" BP7 COL COL 3/16" 1 1/2"x10"x26" BASE PLATE COLUMN SEE PLAN 10" EQEQ 3" 1 3/4" 2" 2" 9 1/8" 10 7/8" BP8 COL COL 3/16" 1 1/2"x10"x20" BASE PLATE COLUMN SEE PLAN 1" COL 11" 9" 8"8" COL 2"x16"x20" BASE PLATE 2" 9" 6" 3" 2" 6" 6" 2" BP9 3/16" 4 SIDE COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE COL 7" 7" 7"7" COL 1 1/4"x14"x14" BASE PLATE 1 1/2" 5 1/2" 5 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 5 1/2" 5 1/2" 1 1/2" BP10 3/16" 4 SIDE COLUMN SEE SCHEDULE plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-501 COLUMN SCHEDULE AND DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/4" = 1'-0"1 COLUMN SCHEDULE 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 CAP PLATE DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 STEEL COLUMN BASE PLATE GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" DE S-505 1 S-505 2 S-505 2 S-505 4 S-505 4 5" 12' - 0 1/2" 4 1/4" 12' - 9 3/4" HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 T=38k T=38k GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" DE 3 S-502 S-505 1 S-505 4 S-505 4 S-505 2 S-505 2 12' - 0 1/2" 4 3/8" 12' - 4 7/8" HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 T=38k T=38k GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" 4 5 S-505 3 S-505 3 S-505 1 S-505 5 S-505 5 HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 11' - 0 9/16"1' - 11 13/16" 13' - 0 7/16" T=36k T=36k plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-502 BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/2" = 1'-0"1 BRACED FRAME BF3 1/2" = 1'-0"2 BRACED FRAME BF2 1/2" = 1'-0"3 BRACED FRAME BF1 GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" 10 11 S-505 1 S-505 4 S-505 2 S-505 4 S-505 2 HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 3 7/16"13' - 4 5/8"2' - 9 7/16" 16' - 5 9/16" T=32k T=32k GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" C B.1 S-505 1 S-505 2 S-505 2 S-505 4 S-505 4 HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 3 3/4" 10' - 1 5/16" 7/16" 10' - 1 11/16" T=34k T=34k GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" DE S-505 1 S-505 2 S-505 2 S-505 4 S-505 4 12' - 0 1/2" HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 T=40k T=40k plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-503 BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/2" = 1'-0"2 BRACED FRAME BF5 1/2" = 1'-0"3 BRACED FRAME BF6 1/2" = 1'-0"1 BRACED FRAME BF4 GROUND FL T/O SLAB 0' - 0" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" EF S-505 1 S-505 4 S-505 2 S-505 3 S-505 5 1' - 0 1/4" 11' - 6 3/8" 6 1/2" 13' - 1 1/8" HSS4X4X5/16 HSS4X4X5/16 T=35k T=35k plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-504 BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/2" = 1'-0"1 BRACED FRAME BF7 1/16" SLOT HSS BRACE DIAGONAL EQEQ TYP 1" MIN TYP 6" 1/2" PLATE HSS BRACE DIAGONAL 1/4" 4 SIDES TYP 1" TYP NOTES: 1. CONNECTIONS TO BE DESIGN BY A PE LICENSED IN NEW YORK STATE. 2. DESIGN LOADS GIVEN ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL. 3. ALTERNATE CONNECTION TYPES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW T/PILE CAP CONCRETE PILE CAP OR PIER 1" NON-SHRINK GROUT STEEL BASE PLATE GUSSET PLATE ERECTION BOLT HSS BRACE DIAGONAL SLOT END FOR GUSSET PLATE HSS COLUMN W.P. 1" TYP TYP 1" MIN 4 SIDES 4 SIDES NOTES: 1. CONNECTIONS TO BE DESIGN BY A PE LICENSED IN NEW YORK STATE. 2. DESIGN LOADS GIVEN ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL. 3. ALTERNATE CONNECTION TYPES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. 4. DESIGN CONNECTION TO ALLOW FOR CONCRETE PLACEMENT PRIOR TO DIAGONAL MEMBER INSTALLATION. STRUCTURAL SLAB WITH ISOLATION JOINT AROUND COLUMN. HSS COLUMN WP WF BEAM BEAM HSS BRACE DIAGONAL SLOT END FOR GUSSET PLATE ERECTION BOLT TYP 1" EQ GUSSET PLATE 4 SIDES TYP 1" MIN NOTES: 1. CONNECTIONS TO BE DESIGN BY A PE LICENSED IN NEW YORK STATE. 2. DESIGN LOADS GIVEN ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL. 3. ALTERNATE CONNECTION TYPES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW EQ EQ COLUMN CAP PLATE SHEAR CONNECTION (TYP) COL HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS - TYP TOP AND BOTTOM PL3/4"x8"x9 1/2" LONG TYP SHEAR CONNECTIONSHEAR CONNECTION PLATE AT EACH SIDE OF COL WF COLUMN WF BEAM TOP & BOTTOM STEEL PLATE TYP AT STIFFENER PLATE TYP PROVIDE DOUBLER PLATES AS REQUIRED PER DESIGN COLWF COLUMN WF BEAM SHEAR CONNECTION PLATE AT EACH SIDE OF COL SHEAR CONNECTION TOP & BOTTOM STEEL PLATE CAP PLATE TYP @ STIFFENER PLATE TYP PROVIDE DOUBLER PLATES AS REQUIRED PER DESIGN NOTES: 1. CONNECTIONS TO BE DESIGN BY A PE LICENSED IN NEW YORK STATE. 2. DESIGN LOADS GIVEN ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL. 3. ALTERNATE CONNECTION TYPES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW NOTES: 1. CONNECTIONS TO BE DESIGN BY A PE LICENSED IN NEW YORK STATE. 2. DESIGN LOADS GIVEN ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL. 3. ALTERNATE CONNECTION TYPES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW HSS COLUMN WP WF BEAM BEAM HSS BRACE DIAGONAL SLOT END FOR GUSSET PLATE ERECTION BOLT TYP 1" EQ EQ GUSSET PLATE 4 SIDES TYP 1" MIN EQ EQ COLUMN CAP PLATE SHEAR CONNECTION (TYP) T/PILE CAP CONCRETE PILE CAP OR PIER 1" NON-SHRINK GROUT STEEL BASE PLATE GUSSET PLATE ERECTION BOLT HSS BRACE DIAGONAL SLOT END FOR GUSSET PLATE HSS COLUMN (BEYOND) W.P. 1" TYP TYP 1" MIN 4 SIDES 4 SIDES NOTES: 1. CONNECTIONS TO BE DESIGN BY A PE LICENSED IN NEW YORK STATE. 2. DESIGN LOADS GIVEN ARE AT SERVICE LEVEL. 3. ALTERNATE CONNECTION TYPES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. 4. DESIGN CONNECTION TO ALLOW FOR CONCRETE PLACEMENT PRIOR TO DIAGONAL MEMBER INSTALLATION. STRUCTURAL SLAB WITH ISOLATION JOINT AROUND COLUMN. 2'ND FL FRAMING PLAN 17' - 4" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" 11 FASTEN WOOD FRAMING TO COMPOSITE SLAB W/ 1/4"x5" TAPCONS @16"O.C. (2 ROWS) SEE S-001 FOR POURSTOP SCHEDULE. ATTACH CFMF Z-CLIPS TO BEAM PRIOR TO FIRE PROOFING FOR CONNECTION OF CFMF TO STEEL. FIREPROOF ALL STEEL FOR 3-HR RATING. 6 1/2" COMPOSITE SLAB. 2' - 10" GALVANIZED STEEL ROOF DECK STEEL CANOPY ROOF BEAM. SEE PLAN. MOMENT CONNECTION TO COLUMN. SEE 6/S-505. SEE PLAN FOR DESIGN LOADS. 6' - 10" HSS6x6x3/8" COLUMN WOOD FRAMING ABOVE SECOND FLOOR DECK. INSULATED BEAM W/SPRAY FOAM ICYNENE INSUL. (2") 2'ND FL FRAMING PLAN 17' - 4" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" 16 FASTEN WOOD FRAMING TO COMPOSITE SLAB W/ 1/4"x5" TAPCONS @16"O.C. (2 ROWS) SEE PLAN BEAM OFFSET SEE S-001 FOR POURSTOP SCHEDULE. ATTACH CFMF Z-CLIPS TO BEAM PRIOR TO FIRE PROOFING FOR CONNECTION OF CFMF TO STEEL. USE DEFLECTION TRACK WHEN ATTACHING CFMF WALL SYSTEM TO STEEL FRAMING FIREPROOF STEEL FOR 3-HR RATING. 6 1/2" COMPOSITE SLAB. WOOD FRAMING ABOVE SECOND FLOOR DECK. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-505 FRAMING DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1" = 1'-0"1 TYPICAL BRACED FRAME DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"2 BRACED FRAME CONN DETAIL @ FNDN 1" = 1'-0"4 BRACED FRAME CONNECTION DETAIL @ TOP 1" = 1'-0"6 MOMENT CONNECTION 1" = 1'-0"5 BRACED FRAME OFFSET CONNECTION DETAIL @ TOP 1" = 1'-0"3 BRACED FRAME OFFSET CONNECTION DETAIL @ FNDN 1" = 1'-0"8 CANOPY ROOF EDGE DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"7 SLAB EDGE DETAIL 2'ND FL FRAMING PLAN 17' - 4" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" F FASTEN WOOD FRAMING TO COMPOSITE SLAB W/ 1/4"x5" TAPCONS @16"O.C. (2 ROWS) SEE PLAN BEAM OFFSET SEE S-001 FOR POURSTOP SCHEDULE. ATTACH CFMF Z-CLIPS TO BEAM PRIOR TO FIRE PROOFING FOR CONNECTION OF CFMF TO STEEL. FIREPROOF STEEL FOR 3-HR RATING. 6 1/2" COMPOSITE SLAB. WOOD FRAMING ABOVE SECOND FLOOR DECK. SIM @ NORTHEAST CORNER OVERHANG 2'ND FL FRAMING PLAN 17' - 4" T/STL 2nd Flr 16' - 9 1/2" 1 FASTEN WOOD FRAMING TO COMPOSITE SLAB W/ 1/4"x5" TAPCONS @16"O.C. (2 ROWS) SEE S-001 FOR POURSTOP SCHEDULE. ATTACH CFMF Z-CLIPS TO BEAM PRIOR TO FIRE PROOFING FOR CONNECTION OF CFMF TO STEEL. FIREPROOF STEEL FOR 3-HR RATING. 6 1/2" COMPOSITE SLAB. WOOD FRAMING ABOVE SECOND FLOOR DECK. OFFSET 1 3/16" BEAM OFFSET 1' - 4 11/16" BEAM SUPPORT EXTERIOR BEAM FROM 21" STEEL GIRDERS AT EACH END. (GIRDERS NOT SHOWN) TOP OF ROOF DECK 59' - 8 1/2" CD EMER GEN 2,600# 3"Ø PIPE COLUMN W8x18 W8x18 W8x18 3"Ø PIPE COLUMN 6' - 10 3/8" 1/2"x8x8 PLATE STIFFENERS PROVIDE (3) 2X6 JACK STUDS @ SUPPORT POST LOCATIONS. CONTINUE AT EACH FLOOR LEVEL TO SECOND FLOOR DECK. PROVIDE FULL DEPTH LVL BLOCKING @ SUPPORT LEGS 1/2"x8x8 BASE PLATE w/ (4) 5/8" DIA x 5" LAG BOLTS 3/16" ALL EXPOSED EXTERIOR STEEL TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED. 2' - 8" 1/2"x8"x8" FABREEKA THERMAL/VIBRATION ISOLATION PAD @ EACH LEG plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-506 FRAMING DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1" = 1'-0"1 SOUTHWEST SLAB EDGE DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"2 WEST SLAB EDGE DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR FRAMING SECTION STEEL BEAM -SEE PLAN 5/8"Ø x 7" EXPANSION BOLT HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 OR EQUAL 3 1/8" EMBEDMENT IN CONCRETE. SIMPSON TIE-DOWN HTT4 COAT THREADS W/ LOCTITE RED AFTER TIGHTENING (TYP) 6 1/2" LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE COMPOSITE SLAB 7/16" STRUCT 1 SHEATHING ONE SIDE OF WALL. EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK DOUBLE STUDS @ END OF PANEL. 2x6 CORRIDOR WALL T/SUBFLOOR STRAPS ON PLATES @ PLUMBING STACK STUDS @ 16" O.C. EXTEND TO DECK @ SHEAR WALLS (2) 1/4" LAG SCREWS x 5" @ 16" OC PLUMBING STACK WHERE REQ'D SIMPSON LSTA 12 20 GAUGE STRAP TIE 1 1/4" x 12" WITH (10) 10D NAILS, BOTH SIDES REQUIRED FOR PLATE PENETRATIONS> 2 1/2". 2x6 EXT. WALL 8D @ 6" OR 4" @ PANEL EDGES SEE SCH. T/SUBFLOOR DOUBLE TOP PLATE STUDWALL @ 16" O.C. EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK @ SHEAR WALLS 7/16" STRUCT 1 SHEATHING ONE SIDE OF WALL. EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. SEE SHEARWALL SCHEDULE FOR NAILING. 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING STUD PLATE (2) 1/4" LAG SCREWS x5" @ 16" O.C. 5/8"Ø A325 THREADED ROD COAT THREADS W/ LOCTITE RED AFTER TIGHTENING. (TYP) SIMPSON HTT4 (WHERE REQ'D. SEE SHEARWALL SCHEDULE) SIMPSON HTT4 (2) 1/4" LAG SCREWS @ 16" O.C. 2x6 EXT. WALL STRUCT 1 SHEATHING GYP STUD WALL -PARTY WALL. SEE ARCH FOR WALL TYPE. DOUBLE STUD @ END OF PANEL 5 1/2" 8d @ 6" OR 4" SEE SCHEDULE SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE SHEAR WALL TYPE TYPE PSWA (7.) SHEATHING TYPE SHEATHING THICKNESS MINIMUM NAIL PENTRATION NAIL SIZE NAIL SPACING AT PANEL EDGES (IN) 5/8" 1 3/8" 8d 6" TYPE SWC (9) 7/16" 1 3/8" 6" NAIL SPACING INTERMEDIATE STUDS (IN) 4" (6.) SHEATHING PANEL ORIENTATION MAX STUD SPACING 16" 8d VERT OR HOR 16" TIE-DOWNS TOP PLATE (2) 2x6 STRUCTURAL1 ZIP SYTEM STRUCTURAL 1 SIMPSON HTT4. SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION (8) (2) 2x6 VERT OR HOR TYPE SWB 1 3/8" 6" 8d 16" (2) 2x6 VERT OR HORSTRUCTURAL 1 1. BLOCKING IS REQUIRED AT ALL UNSUPPORTED EDGES. 2. STAGGER JOINTS IN TOP PLATES, MIN 4' LAP. NAIL PLATES TOGETHER W/ (2) 16D @ 12" O.C. 3. IF WALLS ARE PANELIZED, EXTEND/HOLD BACK SHEATHING SO SIDE JOINTS SHARE A STUD. ALTERNATE: NAIL SIDE STUDS AT ADJACENT PANELS TOGETHER WITH (2) 16d @ 8" O.C. PANELS THAT DO NOT ADJOIN TIGHTLY AT SIDE JOINTS ARE TO BE SHIMMED PRIOR TO NAILING. 4. IF WALLS ARE PANELIZED, FIELD INSTALL SECOND TOP PLATE AND STAGGER BUTT JOINTS. 5. DO NOT BREAK SHEATHING AT SILL PLATES. LAP SHEATHING OVER RIM JOIST AS PER DETAILS. 6. PER NDS TABLE 4.4.1 FOR COMBINED SHEAR AND LIFT. ALT: USE DOUBLE ROW @ 6" O.C. TOP & BOTTOM PLATE EDGES. 7. PSWA TYPICAL ALL EXTERIOR WALLS. 8. NOTE TIE-DOWNS NOT REQUIRED ABOVE THE 4TH FLOOR. 9. ALL CORRIDOR WALLS ARE TYPE SWC. NOTES: NOT REQ'D 7/16" NAIL SPACING PANEL TOP & BOTTOM 12" 12" 12" 4" (6.) 4" (6.) SIMPSON HTT4. SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION (8) plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-600 SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE, ELEVATIONS & DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 3/4" = 1'-0"2 TYP SHEARWALL TIE-DOWN CONNECTOR @ SECOND FLOOR 3/4" = 1'-0"3 SECTION @ INT. SHEARWALL 3/4" = 1'-0"1 TYP SHEARWALL CONNECTOR 3RD, 4TH FLOORS 3/4" = 1'-0"5 PLAN @ INT. SHEAR PANEL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 SHEARWALL SCHEDULE 3/4" GYPCRETE 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) HEADER H2A 4TH FLOOR PLAN SEE 3/4" GYPCRETE HEADER H2 BUILT-UP 2x6 JACK STUD POSTS @ END SUPPORTS SEE HEADER SCHEDULE PLAN SEE 3/4" GYPCRETE 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) 5TH FLOOR 3/4" ROOF SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) HEADER H2 ROOF ELEV BUILT-UP 2x6 JACK STUD POSTS @ END SUPPORTS SEE HEADER SCHEDULE 3RD FLOOR ELEV +49'-4" ELEV +38'-8" ELEV +28'-0" +59'-8 1/2" HEADER H2A PLAN SEE 6 1/2" CONC COMPOSITE SLAB STEEL BEAM SEE PLAN 2ND FLOOR ELEV +17'-4" 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) PARALAM POST SEE HEADER SCHEDULE DATUM ELEVATION FIRST FLOOR T/SLAB = 387.5' COLUMN CAP @ SUPPORTSIMPSON CC66 PARALAM POST SEE HEADER SCHEDULE COLUMN CAP @ SUPPORTSIMPSON CC66 POST BASE. SEE 2/S601 NO WALL PLATE BEAR POST ON PLYWOOD POST BASE. SEE 2/S601 NO WALL PLATE BEAR POST ON PLYWOOD COLUMN CAP @ SUPPORTSIMPSON CC66 COLUMN CAP @ SUPPORTSIMPSON CC66 PARALAM POST SEE HEADER SCHEDULE PARALAM POST SEE HEADER SCHEDULE POST BASE. SEE 2/S601 POST BASE. SEE 2/S601 STEEL BEAM -PRE-DRILL TOP FLANGE FOR WALL SILL ATTACHMENT SIMPSON LBV JOIST HANGER SEE PLAN 2X6 SILL BOLT TO BEAM WITH 1/2"Ø BOLTS @ 32" O.C. (REQ'D) @ SHEARWALLS) 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING INTERIOR WALL WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN SEE PLAN BEARING/SHEARWALL 2x NAILER ON BEAM. ADJUST FOR FLANGE WIDTH. 2x12 FOR 10" FLANGE (W27x84) , 2x8 FOR 7" FLANGE (W24x55), 2x8 FOR 6 1/2" FLANGE (W12x26). SECURE PLATE TO BEAM W/PAF'S & THROUGH BOLT @ SHEAR WALL LOCATIONS. NOTE: STEEL BEAM TO BE FIRE PROTECTED FOR A 1 HR RATING. 3/4" GYPCRETE FIN FLOOR ELEV 7/16" STRUCT 1 SHEATHING ONE SIDE OF WALL (SEE PLAN) SHEARWALLS ONLY TOE-NAIL BLOCKING TO SILL (2) 16d @ 12" O.C. 2x6 @ 16" BEARING OR SHEARWALL FLOOR JOIST @ 16" OC (SEE PLAN) 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING FIN FLR (1) 8D EA SIDE OF JOIST (3) 16d @ 16" O.C. PROVIDE FULL DEPTH BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS 2x6 PARTITION WALL 5/8"Ø x 2 1/2" LAG BOLT (2) 5/8"Øx5" LAG BOLTS 3 1/4" 11" 6" 5/8"x6"x11" BASE PLATE "LET-IN" THROUGH PLYWOOD SUB-FLOOR A A 2x6 PARTION ONE SIDE ONLY 6" 5/8"x 5" WEDGE BOLTS. B B PARALLAM HEADER 6 1/2" COMP SLAB OVER STEEL BEAM BELOW 3/4" GYPCRETE (2) 5/8"Øx5" LAG BOLT 5/8"x6"x11" BASE PLATE 3/16"x3"x4" SIDE EARS 5 1/4"x5 1/4" PARALLAM COLUMN 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING HEADER H2 5/8"x6"x9" BASE PLATE DIRECTLY ON COMPOSIT SLAB 3/16"x3"x4" SIDE EARS 5 1/4"x5 1/4" PARALLAM COLUMN STEEL BEAM @ SECOND FLOOR A-A B-B SECOND FLOORTHIRD FLOOR WALL OPENING THIS SIDE 9" 5/8"x 2 1/2" LAG BOLT CMU ELEVATOR OR STAIR SHAFT CMU BOND BEAM 14" TJI 14" RIM JOIST. BOLT TO CMU BOND BEAM WITH (2) 1/2"Ø HILTI KWIK BOLTS @ 2' O.C. CMU BOND BEAM 2x@16" FIN FLR SIMPSON HANGER 2x10 LEDGER BOLT TO CMU BOND BEAM W/ (2) 1/2"Ø HILTI KWIK BOLTS @ 2' O.C. CMU ELEVATOR OR STAIR SHAFT FIN FLR CMU ELEVATOR OR STAIR SHAFT CMU BOND BEAM 14" TJI 14" RIM JOIST. BOLT TO CMU BOND BEAM W/ (2) 1/2"Ø HILTI KWIK BOLTS @ 2' O.C. CMU BOND BEAM 2x@16" FIN FLR 2x10 LEDGER BOLT TO CMU BOND BEAM W/ (2) 1/2"Ø HILTI KWIK BOLTS @ 2' O.C. (TYP 3 SIDES) CMU ELEVATOR OR STAIR SHAFT FIN FLR 3/4" GYPCRETE 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) HEADER H5 4TH FLOOR PARALLAM POST SEE HEADER SCHEDULE 3/4" GYPCRETE HEADER H5 BUILT-UP 2x6 JACK STUD POSTS SEE HEADER SCHEDULE 3/4" GYPCRETE 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) 5TH FLOOR 3/4" ROOF SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) SUPPORT FROM H5 W/ HANGERS HEADER H5 ROOF ELEV BUILT-UP 2x6 JACK STUD POSTS SEE HEADER SCHEDULE 3RD FLOOR ELEV +38'-8" ELEV +28'-0" HEADER H5 PARALLAM POST SEE HEADER SCHEDULE 6 1/2" CONC COMPOSITE SLAB STEEL BEAM 2ND FLOOR ELEV +17'-4" 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC (TYP) ELEV +49'-4" +59'-8 1/2" DATUM ELEVATION FIRST FLOOR T/SLAB = 387.5' CONNECT END OF HEADER H6 TO H5 W/ SIMPSON HUCQ 612-SDS 5 1/2"x11" (TYP ALL LEVELS) COLUMN CAP @ SUPPORT -SIMPSON CC66 POST BASE SEE 2/S601 HEADER H6 & RIM JOIST 2 1/4" 4 7/8" HEADER H6 & RIM JOIST. TYP FLOORS 3,4,5 HEADER OFFSET FROM GRID 16 FOR RECESSED WINDOWS THIS AREA 16 RECESSED 2x6 WINDOW WALL 3 3/4" 2x10 STUDS @ BASE OF 2'nd FLOOR 2 3/4" MIN 11' HEADER BACKSPAN 2x10 STUDS THIS AREA plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-601 STRUCTURAL DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 1/2" = 1'-0"1 TYP STACKED HEADER DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0"3 TYP FLOOR DETAIL @ STEEL FLOOR BEAM 3/4" = 1'-0"4 BEARING/ BLOCKING DETAIL @ INT BEARING OR SHEARWALLS 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 PARALLAM POST BASE DET 1/2" = 1'-0"5 FLOOR DETAIL @ CMU SHAFTS 1/2" = 1'-0"6 FLOOR DETAIL @ CMU SHAFTS PARALLEL 1/2" = 1'-0"8 TYP STACKED HEADER DETAIL AT NORTHEAST CORNER NAIL TO SILL PLATE (1) 8d TOE-NAIL EA SIDE OF JOIST BOTTOM CHORD (2) 2x6 SILL PLATE. FIN FLR CONTINUOUS 1 1/4" RIM BOARD 3/4" T&G FLR SHEATHING(1) 10d T&B DO NOT JOINT AT SILL PLATES 8d @ 6" O.C. TYP EXT WALL 2x6 @ 16" WITH 5/8" ZIP STRUCTURAL 1 SHEATHING NOTE: SEE STRUCTURAL NOTES, SHEET S001, FOR MATERIAL NOTES & ADDITIONAL INFO. TJI FLOOR JOIST @ 16" O.C. SEE PLAN 3/4" GYPCRETE SQUASH BLOCK WHERE REQUIRED BY JOIST MFG. 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING STRUCTURAL SHEATING (SEE NOTES S001) 14" TJI SEE PLAN 8" SEE WALL TYPE (2) LAYERS 5/8" GYP 2x4 LEDGER FOR CEILING GYP 3/4" GYPCRETE 5/8" GYP 1/2" STRUCTURAL SHEATHING 3/4" GYPCRETE WALL TYPE CONT. TO DECK ABOVE (2) ¼”LAG SCREWS X 5”@ 16”O.C SEE PLAN AT S-600 FOR TIE-DOWNS PARTION WALL USED AS INTERIOR PLUMBING CHASE WALL TYPICAL AT CONTINUOUS INTERNAL PLUMBING CHASE WALL. PARTITION WALL CONTINUOUS TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR DECK ABOVE. PLUMBING OR SPRINKLER PENETRATIONS 1' - 4" 1' - 4" FIN FLOOR 3/4" GYPCRETE 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 14" TJI @ 16" OC FLOOR JOIST 1-8d EACH SIDE OF JOIST CONT. 11/4 TJI RIMBOARD 2x CORRIDOR FLOOR JOIST (SEE PLAN) DOUBLE TOP PLATE 2x6 STUD BEARING WALL FACE MOUNTED JOIST HANGER STRUCT 1 SHEATHING SQUASH BLOCKS WHERE REQUIRED BY JOIST MFG 2 1/2" 6" 6" 1" 1" TWO 2"x4" LAMINATIONS WITH ONE ROW OF STAGGERED 10d COMMON WIRE NAILS (D=0.148", L=3") 3 1/2" 8" 8" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" THREE 2"x4" LAMINATIONS WITH ONE ROW OF STAGGERED 30d COMMON WIRE NAILS (D=0.207", L=4-1/2") 3 1/2" 8" 8" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" THREE 2"x6" LAMINATIONS WITH TWO ROWS OF 30d COMMON WIRE NAILS (D=0.207", L= 4-1/2") 2 1/2" 15.3.3. NAILED BUILT-UP COLUMNS 15.3.3.1 THE PROVISIONS IN 15.3.1 AND 15.3.2 APPLY TO NAILED BUILT-UP COLUMNS (SEE FIGURE 15C) IN WHICH: (a) ADJACENT NAILS ARE DRIVEN FROM OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE COLUMN (b) ALL NAILS PENETRATE ALL LAMINATIONS AND AT LEAST 3/4 OF THE THICKNESS OF THE OUTERMOST LAMINATION (c) 15D < END DISTANCE < 18D (d) 20D < SPACING BETWEEN ADJACENT NAILS IN A ROW < 6tmin (e) 10D < SPACING BETWEEN ROWS OF NAILS < 20D (f) 5D < EDGE DISTANCE < 20D (g) 2 OR MORE LONGITUDINAL ROWS OF NAILS ARE PROVIDED WHERE d>3tmin WHERE: D = NAIL DIAMETER d = DEPTH (FACE WIDTH) OF INDIVIDUAL LAMINATION tmin = THICKNESS OF THINNEST LAMINATION WHERE ONLY ONE LONGITUDINAL ROW OF NAILS IS REQUIRED, ADJACENT NAILS SHALL BE STAGGERED (SEE FIGURE 15C). WHERE THREE OR MORE LONGITUDINAL ROWS OF NAILS ARE USED, NAILS IN ADJACENT ROWS SHALL BE STAGGERED. (1) 10d INTO FLANGE TOP & BOTTOM (SQUASH BLOCK TO JOIST) (2) 10D TOE-NAIL INTO SILL 2x6 @ 16" BEARING WALL 14" OC FLOOR JOIST (SEE PLAN) 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING FIN FLR 3/4" GYPCRETE 2x6 SQUASH BLOCKS REQ'D BOTH SIDES OF JOIST AT INT. BEARING WALLS. (2) ¼”LAG SCREWS X 5”@ 16”O.C HEADER SCHEDULE HEADER TYPE H1 SIZE T/BEAM ELEV END SUPPORTS NOTES (2) 2x8 WINDOW HEADER (1) JACK STUD REF SECTION C H2 (1) JACK STUD 4 1/2" 2" 2" EQEQ SECTION A (SAWN) 5 1/4" 2" 2" EQEQ SECTION B (LVL) (2) ROWS 16d@12" O.C. EA. SIDE (2x6 & 2x8) (3) ROWS 16d @ 12" O.C. EA. SIDE (2x10) (3) ROWS 16d@12" O.C. EA. SIDE SEE SCHEDULE 2 1/2" EXT. STRUCT. SHEATHING (2) 16d @ 12" T&B HEADER. SEE PLAN & HEADER SCHEDULE 2x8 CONT TOP & BOTTOM ROUGH OPENING SEE ARCH FOR WINDOW/ DOOR HEAD DETAILS AND FOR FLASHING, SEALING, AND INSULATION @ HEADERS SECTION C (EXTERIOR) FLUSH W/ JOISTS (3) 2x6 JACK STUD (3) 2x6 JACK STUD H2A FLUSH W/ JOISTS 5 1/4 x 5 1/4 PARALLAM POST NOTE: INTERIOR 3' WIDE DOORWAY HEADERS TO BE (2) 2x8 MIN. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL ELEVATOR AND STAIRWAY CMU SHAFT WINDOW AND DOOR OPENING HEADERS TO BE TYPE HM1 REINFORCED MASONRY LINTELS. (3) 1 3/4"x14" LVL OR 5 1/4"x14" PARALLAM 5 1/4 x 5 1/4 PARALLAM POST (2) 1 3/4x14" LVLH3 FLUSH W/ JOISTS (2) 2x6 JACK STUD (2) 2x6 JACK STUD SEE 1/S601 SEE 1/S601 SEE 1/S601 8"x8"x16" CMUHM1 DOOR/WINDOW HEADER CMU WALL CMU WALL 8" CMU 8" CMU LINTEL BLOCK (2) #5'S TYPE HM1 (3) 1 3/4"x14" LVL OR 5 1/4"x14" PARALLAM REINFORCE W/ (2) #5'S (3) 1 3/4x14" LVLH4 (3) 2x6 JACK STUD (3) 2x6 JACK STUD (3) 1 3/4"x14" LVL OR 5 1/4"x14" PARALLAM H5 H6 (3) 1 3/4"x14" LVL OR 5 1/4"x14" PARALLAM FLUSH W/ JOISTS FLUSH W/ JOISTS SEE 8/S-601 SEE 8/S-601 CANTILEVER H5 (SIMPSON HUCQ612-SDS) PROVIDE MINIMUM 11' BACKSPAN. 16' TOTAL LENGTH PROVIDE MINIMUM 8' BACKSPAN. 12' TOTAL LENGTH (2) 1 3/4x14" LVLH3A 8" CMU WALL (3) 2x6 JACK STUD FLUSH W/ JOISTS CHASE @ WEST STAIRS H7 (3) 1 3/4"x14" LVL FLUSH W/ JOISTS 8" CMU WALL 8" CMU WALL @ WEST STAIR ROOF (3) 2x6 JACK STUDS I-JOISTS @ 16" OC TYP EXT WALL 2x6 @ 16 W/ EXT SHEATHING. SEE NOTES AND SHEARWALL SCHEDULE FOR SHEATHING NAILING REQUIREMENTS. 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING GLUED & NAILED EXTEND STUD WALL TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK SEE PLAN EXT FINISH SYSTEM SEE ARCH 3/4" GYPCRETE (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS @ 16" O.C. HEADER H3 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING GLUED & NAILED 2x8 FLOOR JOISTS @ 16" O.C. 3/4" GYPCRETE CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH SEE PLAN 3'RD FL T/O GYPCRETE 28' - 0" SUPPORT CURTAINWALL FROM HEADER AS PER MFG DETAILS. 3/4" GYPCRETE 3/4" FLOOR SHEATHING 2X8 JOISTS @ 16" O.C. HEADER H3 (2) 1 3/4"x14"LVL CEILING ASSEMBLY. SEEE ARCH SLOPE TOP PLATE 2x6 @ 16" BEARING WALL SLOPED ROOF RAFTERS NORTH & SOUTH FILL GAP IN W/ 2X BLOCKING SLOPED RAFTERS EAST/WEST 7/16" OSB SHEATHING CORRIDOR SIDE OF WALL VARIES TAPERED INSUL. CORRIDOR BEARING ELEV plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-602 FRAMING DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 3/4" = 1'-0"2 FLOOR JOISTS BEARING @ EXT WALL 3/4" = 1'-0"5 FLOOR DETAIL @ DEMISING WALL SHEARWALL 1/2" = 1'-0"4 PARTITION PLUMBING CHASE WALL DET 3/4" = 1'-0"6 TYP DETAIL @ CORRIDOR BEARING WALL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 TYPICAL NAILING SCHEDULES FOR BUILT-UP COLUMNS 3/4" = 1'-0"8 JOIST BEARING DET @ INT. BEARING WALL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1 HEADER SCHEDULE 3/4" = 1'-0"3 FLOOR JOIST PARRALEL TO EXT WALL 3/4" = 1'-0"9 FLOOR DETAIL @ END OF CORRIDOR 1" = 1'-0"10 EAST FLOOR EDGE DETAIL AT CURTAINWALL 3/4" = 1'-0"11 ROOF FRAMING DETAIL @ SLOPED JOISTS BEAM -SEE PLAN FOR SIZE 14" TJI WITH JOIST HANGERS SEE ARCH FOR FINISH SYSTEM14" TJI AT 16" 0.C. 3/4" PLYWOOD 3/4" GYPCRETE FILL "TOP MOUNT" BACKER BLOCK SHALL BE TIGHT TO BOTTOM OF TOP FLANGE WITH 1/4" TO 2" GAP AT TOP OF BOTTOM FLANGE. " FACE MOUNT" BACKER BLOCK SHALL BE TIGHT TO BOTTOM OF TOP FLANGE WITH 1/4" TO 2" GAP AT TOP OF BOTTOM FLANGE. BACKER BLOCK 1/4" TO 2" GAP 1/4" TO 2" GAP • BACKER BLOCKS SHALL BE AT LEAST 12" LONG PER HANGER. • NAILS SHALL BE CLINCHED WHEN POSSIBLE. • VERIFY CAPACITY AND FASTENING REQUIREMENTS OF HANGERS AND CONNECTORS. " FACE MOUNT" TO LVL LVL HEADER BETWEEN JOISTS LVL HEADER BETWEEN JOISTS HEADERED-OFF JOISTS LVL HEADER 1/2" EXT SHEATHING METAL COPING SEE ARCH (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS @ 16" OC (@ JOISTS) 1 1/4" x 14" RIM JOIST (3) LVL HEADER H5 @ CORNER WINDOW EXT WALL RAISED ROOF EDGE - SEE ARCH 2 3/4" SLOPE TOP PLATE @ 1/4" : 1' JOIST BEARING ROOF JOIST SLOPES @ 1/4"/FT (2) 3/4" PT PLYWOOD (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS FRAMING 2x6 STUDS @ 16" OC. EDGE @ NORTHEAST GRID A, 14 TO 16. MIDWALL 362 MW 24" HIGH PARAPET BRACE @ 48" O.C. SCREW TO SIDE OF STUD. ANCHOR TO ROOF DECK W/ (2) 3/8" x 7" LAG SCREWS INTO BLOCKING. (2) 3/4" PT PLYWOOD (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS 1/2" EXT SHEATHING BOTH SIDES FRAMING 2x6 STUDS @ 16" OC. METAL COPING - SEE ARCH (2) 1/4" x 3" LAG SCREWS @ 16" OC 2x 8 LEDGER. BOLT TO CMU WALL 2/ (2) 1/4" TAPCONS @ 24" T/WALL ELEV = SEE ARCH T/COPING - SEE ARCH T/O ROOF DECK 2x8 AT 16" OC INSULATION AND ROOFING -SEE ARCH. SEE 5/S400 FOR REINFORCING. EAST STAIR CONTINUES TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO ROOF. SEE S-106 FOR STAIR AND LANDING FRAMING AND DECK. GROUT SOLID . BOND BEAM WITH (2) #5'S AT ROOF LEVEL. PT 2x8 TOP PLATE. BOLT TO BOND BEAM W/ (2) 1/4" X 5" TAPCONS @ 16" O.C. 451'-4 1/4" I-JOIST OR LVL BLOCKING AT 2'-0" OC 1 3/4"X14" LVL LEDGER. BOLT TO CMU WALL W/ (2) ROWS OF 1/4"x7" TAPCONS AT 16" O.C. SEE ARCH INSULATION & ROOF SYSTEM -SEE ARCH EXT. WALL SYSTEM. SEE ARCH BOND BEAM WITH (1) #5 AT TOP OF WALL (2) 3/4" PT PLYWOOD 1/2" EXT SHEATHING 2x6 @ 16" PARAPET FRAMING (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS @ 2' OC (@ BLOCKING) 8d @ 12" OC EXT WALL JOIST BEARING 2 3/4" METAL COPING SEE ARCH T/COPING - SEE ARCH EXTEND WALL FRAMING TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. NOTE T/WALL SLOPES @ 1/4"/FT TO CORRIDOR. SLOPE TOP PLATE 2x6 @ 16" BEARING WALL ROOF JOIST, SLOPED 3/4" ROOF SHEATHING 2x8 LEDGER OVER OSB SHEATHING 2x8 CORRIDOR ROOF JOIST 7/16" OSB SHEATHING CORRIDOR SIDE OF WALL 1 1/4" x 14" LSL RIM JOIST SLOPE TOP PLATE @ 1/4"/12 2x6 @ 16" BEARING WALL 14" ROOF JOIST SLOPE @ 1/4"/12 3/4" ROOF SHEATHING ROOF SYSTEM SEE ARCH (1) #8 EA SIDE OF JOIST BLOCKING NOT REQUIRED (2) 3/4" PT PLYWOOD (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS 1/2" EXT SHEATHING FRAMING 2x6 STUDS @ 16" OC. METAL COPING SEE ARCH (2) 1/4" x 3" LAG SCREWS @ 16" OC (@ JOISTS) 1 1/4" x 14" RIM JOIST I JOIST OR RIM JOIST BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS 8d @ INTO END OF JOISTS, T&B. +8d TOENAIL RIM JOIST TO WALL SILL @ 16" O.C. EXT WALL T/COPING - SEE ARCH 2 3/4" SLOPE TOP PLATE @ 1/4" : 1' JOIST BEARING ROOF JOIST SLOPES @ 1/4"/FT 1/2" EXT SHEATHING 2x6 @ 16" PARAPET FRAMING (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS @ 2' OC (@ BLOCKING) 8d @ 12" OC EXT WALL JOIST BEARING (3) LVL HEADER H6 @ CORNER WINDOW (2) 3/4" PT PLYWOOD METAL COPING SEE ARCH RAISED ROOF EDGE SEE ARCH (2) 1/4" x 5" LAG SCREWS GRID 16, A TO C MIDWALL 362 MW 24" HIGH PARAPET BRACE @ 48" O.C. SCREW TO SIDE OF STUD. ANCHOR TO ROOF DECK W/ (2) 3/8" x 7" LAG SCREWS INTO BLOCKING. 14" I-JOIST OR RIM JOIST BLOCKING @ 2' O.C. EXTEND WALL STUD FRAMING TO UNDERSIDE OF HEADER. SEE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MAY FIELD CUT AN OPENING UP TO 7"Ø, CENTERED ON THE JOIST AND LOCATED WITHIN 1'-6" OF THE END OF JOIST. IF TOILET HUB CONFLICTS WITH JOIST. HEADER-OFF THE INTERFERING JOIST ON EACH SIDE OF HUB. SEE 4/S603. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Elwyn Palmer & CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PLLC 213 East Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 www.ElwynPalmer.com 607.272.5060 S-603 FRAMING DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 3/4" = 1'-0"3 FLOOR DETAIL AT INT BEAM 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 HEADER AT "I"JOIST 1" = 1'-0"8 ROOF EDGE DETAIL @ BEARING EXT WALLS - NORTHEAST CORNER 1" = 1'-0"7 ROOF EDGE DETAIL @ EAST STAIR 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 ROOF TYP @ END WALLS 3/4" = 1'-0"1 ROOF JOIST @ CORRIDOR WALL 3/4" = 1'-0"2 ROOF JOIST DET @ INT. BEARING WALL SIM @ ELEVATOR 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5 ROOF EDGE DETAIL @ BEARING EXT WALLS 1" = 1'-0"9 ROOF EDGE @ NORTHEAST @ END WALLS 3/4" = 1'-0"10 TYPICAL FRAMING DETAIL @ TOILETS A1 - ADDENDUM #A1 2019.10.01 W W W W W W D D D D D D UP UP 3 a400 3 a400 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 599 SF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 010 CORRIDOR 100C 104 SF ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 007 136 SF PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 006A 430 SF ELMSHADE OFFICES 006 51 SF STAFF TOILET 005 233 SF SHARED COPY / FILES 004 141 SF SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002E 472 SF HORIZON PROGRAM 002A 92 SF HORIZON MED. ROOM 002B 120 SF RECEPTION OFFICE 003 100 SF HORIZON WAITING AREA 002123 SF VESTIBULE 001 341 SF CONFERENCE ROOM 018 313 SF COMMON LAUNDRY 017 53 SF MEN'S TOILET 016 57 SF WOMEN'S TOILET 015 193 SF STAFF BREAK ROOM 014 206 SF COMMUNITY KITCHEN 013 811 SF COMMUNITY ROOM 012 123 SF VESTIBULE 100D 60 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 011 a600 2 a600 1 104 SF PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002C 107 SF DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002D A/V a606 1B a606 1A C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" 016.01 017.01 002A.01 002B.01 002C.01 002D.01 004.01 004.02 006.01 007.02 009.01 015.01 014.01 006A.01002E.01 013.01 C2 C1 S2 FS3 S4 C3 FS6 FS1 S5 FS7 A01.01 011.01 101.01 102.01 B01.01 010.01 007.01 101.03 101.02 101.07 101.06 101.08 102.06 102.08 102.04101.04 102.03 005.01 B01.02 102.07 102.02 661 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 668 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 668 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 711 SF (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 104.01 104.04 104.08 104.06 104.03 104.02 104.07 KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY 269 SF STAIR B B01 234 SF STAIR A A01 ELEVATOR 101.05 102.05 104.05 2A 3 a503 103.04 103.06 103.08 103.01 103.02103.03 103.07 103.05 2A 2A 2A2A 2A 2A 2A 008.01 48 SF SERVER 008 100 SF BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 009 1 a501 2A 2A 2A 2A 5A 5 5A 5 5 2A 2A 1 1 2A 1 2 2A 2A 2A 1A 2A 1 2A2A 2A2A2A 12345677.68910111213141516 A A.5 B B.1 C D E F G H I 10'-0"10'-0"8'-7" 22'-6" 6'-0 3/4" 5'-11 1/2" 6'-0" 11'-0" FS2 2 a501 2 a502 002.01 018.01 018.02 012.01 012.02 100D.02 100C.01 001.02 1B 1A 2A 1A 23 4 4 TYP. 5 TYP. 5 TYP. 5 ALIGN TYP. TYP. 5 TYP. 5 TYP. 5 6 7 8 9 9 2A 9 9 16 ALIGN 13A 13A CLEAR 9'-6 1/2" ALIGN 39'-10" 2A TYP. 5 S3 FS5 ALIGN 34'-3 1/2" 9'-10 1/4" 31'-1" 10'-2 1/2" 29'-4 1/4" 11'-4 1/2" ALIGN ALIGN 19'-3 3/4"5'-4 3/4" C L E A R 10'-0" 2A 2A 2A ALIGN ALIGN 11 2A FS4 4'-5" ALIGN 5'-4 1/2"12'-4 1/4" 22'-5 1/4" 8'-9 1/2"13'-4 1/2" ALIGN 13'-10 1/2" 8'-0" T Y P . 8 1/2" a605 1 a605 3 a605 2 11" 003.01 11'-3 3/4"9'-5 1/4"12'-8" 24'-6 1/2" 17 17 7'-11" 10 10 9'-6" 10 10 10 001.01 5'-3 1/2" 4'-8 3/4" 3'-4" 6'-8" 3'-4" 3'-4" 3'-4" 2'-11 1/2" 3'-4" 3'-4" 3'-4" 6'-8" 3'-4" 4'-8 3/4" 4'-0"3'-4"6'-8"3'-4"3'-4"3'-4"6'-8"3'-4"14'-8"3'-4"4'-8 3/4" 2'-0"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4"6'-0"3'-4"7'-4"3'-4"8'-8"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"1' -4"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4"8'-8"3'-4"6'-0"3'-4"8'-0"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4"1'-4"3'-4" 1'-9 3/4" 25'-4 1/2"6'-0 1/2"25'-4 1/2" 2'-0"4'-0"14'-7 3/4"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"5'-4"3'-4"6'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8" 3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"14'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"2'-8"3'-4"4'-8 3/4" MAILBOXES 19 20 100D.01 TYP. 14TYP. 14 TYP. 15 TYP. 15 2A 2A1A 1A 2A 2A 2A 24 2A 2A 12 4'-9" 1 6'-2 1/4"6'-9 1/2" 18 SF CUST. 020 2A3'-0" 1 1 1 11 2A 2A2A 1 2A 1 2 1B 1B 1 1B 1B 11 1 1 1A 1A 21A 1 1 1 1 1B1B 2A 1 1 11 1 1B 1A 1 1 1B 22 1 1 8 3'-2" 22 2B23 1A 1A 2B 020.01 3 a501 1 a502 a503 5 10 6 GENERAL NOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1. ALL DIMENSION STRINGS FOR WOOD FRAMED ROUGH OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS ARE TAKEN FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF WOOD STUD AT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, U.N.O.. 2. REFER TO ENLARGED PLANS FOR APARTMENT UNIT DIMENSIONS U.N.O. KEYNOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED, SEMI-RECESSED, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTINGUISHER TYPE & LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT CABINET AT 5-1/2" A.F.F. MEASURED TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. WALL-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE WITH THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT FIRE EXTINGUISHER AT 48" A.F.F. MEASURED TO TOP OF EXTINGUISHER. PROVIDE 1/2-INCH PLYWOOD AT ELECTRICAL ROOM TO ACCOMMODATE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, THIS WALL. PROVIDE FIRE-RATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SPEAKER AT RECEPTION AREA. 16-INCH HIGH (ALIGN WITH TOP OF BOTTOM MOST CURTAIN WALL MULLION), 2 1/2-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD LOW WALL WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUDS OFF FROM CURTAIN WALL 1-INCH AND PROVIDE CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSUALTION FULL CAVITY OF STUDS. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. COLUMN ENCLOSURE: PROVIDE 2 1/2-INCH, 16-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUD FRAMING OFF STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN 2INCHES TO CLEAR FIRE-PROOFING. WHERE APPLICABLE, ALIGN GYPSUM BOARD WITH ADJACENT GYPSUM WALL BOARD FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. PROVIDE & INSTALL UTILITY OR MOP SINK THIS LOCATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. PROVIDE & INSTALL WASHER & DRYER EQUIPMENT THIS ROOM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS, & SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FOUR (4) BENCHES EQUAL TO WADDELLS METAL BENCH (SIZE: 54"L x 14"D x 17"H). BLACK STEEL FRAME WITH SOLID WOOD CLEAR MAPLE TOP. SKU: W000437032. PROVIDE & INSTALL AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR AND ASSOCIATED POWER, CABLING, ETC., THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & DOOR HARDWARE. DOOR ACTUATOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PIPE CHASE: PROVIDE & INSTALL 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING OVER STUD FRAMING (METAL STUDS AT GROUND FLOOR, WOOD STUDS FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5) (FLAT STUD) TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING, SEE PLUMBING AND ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES. SEMI-RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED INTERCOM SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MAINTAIN FIRE-RATING OF WALL. FULLY INSULATED AND GASKETED EXTERIOR DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. COORDINATE EXACT ELEVATION OF DOOR WITH FLOOR / ROOF ELEVATION, SEE DETAIL. PROVIDE STEEL PAN STAIR WITH CONCRETE TREADS FROM GROUND FLOOR UP TO SECOND FLOOR, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 36-INCH HIGH STEEL HANDRAIL ANCHORED TO WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE WOOD FRAMED STAIR WITH JOHNSONITE RUBBER STAIR TREADS, INTEGRAL NOSING AND LANDINGS TO MATCH. WOOD FRAMING SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS VAPOR SEPERATION MEMBRANE FROM CMU SHAFT RAISED PLATFORM AT APARTMENT UNIT MECHANICAL ROOMS FOR VRP UNIT. PROVIDE 3-5/8" 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE MINERAL WOOD BATT INSULATION IN CAVITY FOR SOUND ISOLATION. RAISED PLATFORM SHALL PROVIDE PROPER ELEVATION TO MECHANICAL UNIT AS TO ALIGN WALL PENETRATION WITH EXTERIOR CLADDING SYSTEM. PROVIDE AND INSTALL CLOSET SHELVING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD CORRIDOR SIDE UP TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. ALIGN GYPSUM WALL BOARD TO ALIGN WITH ADJACENT FURRING AT PILASTER. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. WALL AND WINDOWS ARE RECESSED AT THIS LOCATION, 3-5/8-INCH CLEAR FROM FRAME OF WINDOW TO EXTERIOR CLADDING, SEE DETAILS. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL. PROVIDE ONE (1)MAILBOX FOR EACH APARTMENT UNIT (SIXTY (60) MAILBOXES TOTAL), TWO (2) ADDITIONAL MAILBOXES (ONE (1) FOR EACH COMMERCIAL TENANT), AND FOUR (4) PARCEL BOXES. FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED, HIGH / LOW ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND BOTTLE FILLING STATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. WATER COOLERS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PROVIDE 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED PARTITION WALL TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR AT LOWEST LEVEL, TO PREVENT ACCESS TO OR ANY STORAGE BENEATH THE STAIR. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 42-INCH HIGH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (WALL TYPE 1) WITH 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 32-INCH DEEP HPL WORKSURFACE AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. PROVIDE GUSSET SUPPORT AT 3 POINTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL HPL CLOTHES FOLDING COUNTERTOP AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. SECOND FLOOR AND ABOVE SHALL BE WOOD STUDS TO MATCH WIDTH OF METAL STUD WALL BELOW. PROVIDE 5/8-INCH GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING BOTH SIDES, PREP, PRIME AND PAINT FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13A 13B 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CMU WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WINDOW / STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL, SEE ASSOCIATED SCHEDULES. NEW DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. ACCESSIBLE APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO MOBILITY IMPAIRED, SEE ENLARGED PLANS. AUDIBLE / VISUAL APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO HEARING OR VISUALLY IMPAIRED, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LEGEND[REFLECTED CEILING PLANS] 000.01 S10 A/V INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY SCHEDULENOTE:PROVIDE CONTINUOUS FIREBLOCKING ABOVE ALL DIMISING WALLS THAT DO NOT EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE. WALL TYPE 20-GAUGE, 3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 4 7/8" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 1A 1 WALL TYPE2 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 1/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPE3 2x4 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 3A WALL TYPE4 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. ROOM SIDE SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 0' - 6 3/4" 0' - 4 3/4" WALL TYPE4AUL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U311 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 51 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE 0' - 7 3/4" 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL. 7/16" THICK ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB) SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPE5 8" CMU, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U904 3-HR / 2-HR FIRE-RATED 50 FULL HEIGHT OF SHAFT SHAFT SIDE 20-GAUGE, 7/8" METAL FURRING @ 24" O.C., TYPICAL 0' - 9 5/32" WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., BEDROOM SIDE. 1B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C. 3B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 2, EXCEPT: LOCATED AT STAIR. 2BWALL TYPE SAME AS WALL TYPE 5, EXCEPT WITH: 20-GAUGE, 2-1/2" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 24" O.C. (IN LIEU OF 7/8" METAL FURRING) 5A WALL TYPE2A 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 3/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL, CORRIDOR SIDE. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U419 -NON-COMBUSTIBLE 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 53 FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE WALL / CEILING ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1. ALL PENETRATIONS THRU FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES (WALL OR CEILING) MUST BE FIRESTOPPED TO THE RATING LEVEL OF THE ASSEMBLY. 2. ALL TRADES TO SUBMIT FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE FOR ALL PENETRATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK PER SPECIFICATIONS 078400 FIRESTOPPING. 3. PROVIDE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION AT ALL ACCESSIBLE CONCEALED FLOOR, OR FLOOR/CEILINGS TO IDENTIFY FIRE BARRIERS, FIRE PARTITIONS, SMOKE BARRIERS OR SMOKE PARTITIONS PER SECTIONS 703.7 OF THE 2015 IBC. 4. ALL BOTTOM PLATES IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WITH SILL SEALER. 5. FOR ALL METAL STUD FRAMING ASSUME 20-GAUGE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ACTUAL GAUGE SHALL BE ENGINEERED BY CONTRACTOR. NOTE:ALL WALL PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE A DOUBLE TOP PLATE, ENTIRE BUILDING, TYPICAL. STEEL COLUMN STAND-OFF METAL STUDS 2" FROM FACE OF FIRE-PROOFING ON STEEL COLUMN SEE STRUCTURAL plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a101 GROUND FLOOR PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" GROUND FLOOR PLAN 1 N SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" COLUMN ENCLOSURE DETAIL 2 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 DN UP DN UP 3 a400 3 a400 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 a606 2B a606 2A 202.07 202.08 202.06 202.04 202.02202.01 202.03 201.06 201.08 201.07 201.03 201.01 201.04 201.02 C4 C6 C5 C2 C1 715 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 CUST. 217 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 214 280 SF STAIR B B02 116 SF CHASE C02673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 202 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 234 SF STAIR A A02 62 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 215 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 200A 1623 SF CORRIDOR 200 KITCHEN LIVING ROOMBEDROOM BATH ENTRY LIN. STORAGE COATSCLOSET MECH. KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY BEDROOM CLOSET LIN. COATS MECH. LIVING ROOM KITCHEN ENTRY STOR. BATH LIVING ROOM BEDROOM MECH. KITCHEN STOR. ENTRY BATH COATS CLOSET KITCHEN COATS STOR. CLOSET MECH. LIVING ROOM BEDROOM BATH ENTRY 205.01 205.03 205.02 205.07 205.04 205.06 205.08 207.04 207.06 207.08 207.03 207.02 207.07 209.07 209.02209.03 209.04 209.06 209.08 211.08 211.06 211.04 211.03 211.02 211.07 213.07 213.03 213.01 213.02 213.04 213.06 213.08 214.06 214.08 214.04 214.07 214.01 214.03214.02 212.03 212.07 212.02 212.04 212.06 212.08 210.06 210.08 210.04 210.07 210.02 210.03 208.03208.02 208.07 208.06 208.08 208.04206.04 206.06 206.08 206.07 206.02 206.03 204.07 204.02 204.01 204.06 204.08 204.04 204.03 203.06 203.08 203.04 203.01 203.02 203.03 203.05 203.07 205.05 207.05 209.05 211.05 213.05 214.05 212.05 210.05 208.05 206.05 204.05 STOR. BATH CLOSET ENTRY KITCHEN BEDROOM LIVING ROOM MECH. LIN. COATS I.T. CLOSET 216 216.01 217.01 B02.01 215.01 A02.01 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 ELEVATOR 2 a503 3 a503 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 211.01 209.01 207.01 206.01 208.01 210.01 212.01 1 a501 4A4A4A4A 4A 4A 5 5A 4A 4A 4A 4A4A4A4A 3B 5 4A 4A 4A4A 4A 3B 3B 3B 3B 12345677.68910111213141516 A A.5 B B.1 C D E F G H I A/V 2 a501 2 a502 202.05 LIN. LIN. 201.05 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"28'-2 1/4"2'-4"6'-0 1/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"8'-1 3/4"2'-4"1'-6" 3'-0"2'-1 3/4" 1'-11 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-5"2'-4"3'-5 3/4"3'-0"8'-2 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2" 2'-4"3'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-11 1/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"15'-0 1/2"6'-5"15'-0 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 11 1/2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'- 0"1'-7"2'-4"3'-7"3'-0" 2'-11 1/2" 3'-0"19'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-2"2'-4"2'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-8"2'-4"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0 1/2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0" 8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 1'-7 1/2" 11'-0 3/4"4'-1 3/4"3'-0"3'-4"2'-4"3'-4"3'-0"6'-0"4'-2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2"2'-4"1'- 6"3'-0"5'-8 1/2"6'-4 1/4"13'-0 1/4"3'-0"4'-5 3/4"4'-2" 5'-6 1/4" 4'-8 1/4" 10 10 10 10 13B 13B TYP. 14 TYP. 14 TYP.14 TYP.15 TYP.15 TYP. 15 5'-0 1/4" 2'-10 1/2" CLEAR 6'-2 1/4" CLEAR 6'-0 1/2" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" CLEAR 10'-10" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" 14'-1 3/4"17'-3 1/2" 9'-6" 3'-0" 4'-0" 14'-10 3/4"16'-5 1/2" 9'-0" 5'-0" 8'-8" 3'-0" 4'-0" 3'-9 1/2" 9'-0" 4'-0" 18 18 4A 4A 1A 1A 1A a503 6 25 25 3 a501 1 a502 10 10 10 6 1 a503 a503 4 GENERAL NOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1. ALL DIMENSION STRINGS FOR WOOD FRAMED ROUGH OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS ARE TAKEN FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF WOOD STUD AT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, U.N.O.. 2. REFER TO ENLARGED PLANS FOR APARTMENT UNIT DIMENSIONS U.N.O. KEYNOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED, SEMI-RECESSED, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTINGUISHER TYPE & LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT CABINET AT 5-1/2" A.F.F. MEASURED TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. WALL-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE WITH THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT FIRE EXTINGUISHER AT 48" A.F.F. MEASURED TO TOP OF EXTINGUISHER. PROVIDE 1/2-INCH PLYWOOD AT ELECTRICAL ROOM TO ACCOMMODATE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, THIS WALL. PROVIDE FIRE-RATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SPEAKER AT RECEPTION AREA. 16-INCH HIGH (ALIGN WITH TOP OF BOTTOM MOST CURTAIN WALL MULLION), 2 1/2-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD LOW WALL WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUDS OFF FROM CURTAIN WALL 1-INCH AND PROVIDE CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSUALTION FULL CAVITY OF STUDS. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. COLUMN ENCLOSURE: PROVIDE 2 1/2-INCH, 16-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUD FRAMING OFF STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN 2INCHES TO CLEAR FIRE-PROOFING. WHERE APPLICABLE, ALIGN GYPSUM BOARD WITH ADJACENT GYPSUM WALL BOARD FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. PROVIDE & INSTALL UTILITY OR MOP SINK THIS LOCATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. PROVIDE & INSTALL WASHER & DRYER EQUIPMENT THIS ROOM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS, & SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FOUR (4) BENCHES EQUAL TO WADDELLS METAL BENCH (SIZE: 54"L x 14"D x 17"H). BLACK STEEL FRAME WITH SOLID WOOD CLEAR MAPLE TOP. SKU: W000437032. PROVIDE & INSTALL AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR AND ASSOCIATED POWER, CABLING, ETC., THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & DOOR HARDWARE. DOOR ACTUATOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PIPE CHASE: PROVIDE & INSTALL 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING OVER STUD FRAMING (METAL STUDS AT GROUND FLOOR, WOOD STUDS FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5) (FLAT STUD) TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING, SEE PLUMBING AND ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES. SEMI-RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED INTERCOM SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MAINTAIN FIRE-RATING OF WALL. FULLY INSULATED AND GASKETED EXTERIOR DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. COORDINATE EXACT ELEVATION OF DOOR WITH FLOOR / ROOF ELEVATION, SEE DETAIL. PROVIDE STEEL PAN STAIR WITH CONCRETE TREADS FROM GROUND FLOOR UP TO SECOND FLOOR, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 36-INCH HIGH STEEL HANDRAIL ANCHORED TO WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE WOOD FRAMED STAIR WITH JOHNSONITE RUBBER STAIR TREADS, INTEGRAL NOSING AND LANDINGS TO MATCH. WOOD FRAMING SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS VAPOR SEPERATION MEMBRANE FROM CMU SHAFT RAISED PLATFORM AT APARTMENT UNIT MECHANICAL ROOMS FOR VRP UNIT. PROVIDE 3-5/8" 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE MINERAL WOOD BATT INSULATION IN CAVITY FOR SOUND ISOLATION. RAISED PLATFORM SHALL PROVIDE PROPER ELEVATION TO MECHANICAL UNIT AS TO ALIGN WALL PENETRATION WITH EXTERIOR CLADDING SYSTEM. PROVIDE AND INSTALL CLOSET SHELVING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD CORRIDOR SIDE UP TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. ALIGN GYPSUM WALL BOARD TO ALIGN WITH ADJACENT FURRING AT PILASTER. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. WALL AND WINDOWS ARE RECESSED AT THIS LOCATION, 3-5/8-INCH CLEAR FROM FRAME OF WINDOW TO EXTERIOR CLADDING, SEE DETAILS. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL. PROVIDE ONE (1)MAILBOX FOR EACH APARTMENT UNIT (SIXTY (60) MAILBOXES TOTAL), TWO (2) ADDITIONAL MAILBOXES (ONE (1) FOR EACH COMMERCIAL TENANT), AND FOUR (4) PARCEL BOXES. FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED, HIGH / LOW ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND BOTTLE FILLING STATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. WATER COOLERS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PROVIDE 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED PARTITION WALL TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR AT LOWEST LEVEL, TO PREVENT ACCESS TO OR ANY STORAGE BENEATH THE STAIR. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 42-INCH HIGH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (WALL TYPE 1) WITH 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 32-INCH DEEP HPL WORKSURFACE AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. PROVIDE GUSSET SUPPORT AT 3 POINTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL HPL CLOTHES FOLDING COUNTERTOP AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. SECOND FLOOR AND ABOVE SHALL BE WOOD STUDS TO MATCH WIDTH OF METAL STUD WALL BELOW. PROVIDE 5/8-INCH GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING BOTH SIDES, PREP, PRIME AND PAINT FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13A 13B 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CMU WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WINDOW / STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL, SEE ASSOCIATED SCHEDULES. NEW DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. ACCESSIBLE APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO MOBILITY IMPAIRED, SEE ENLARGED PLANS. AUDIBLE / VISUAL APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO HEARING OR VISUALLY IMPAIRED, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LEGEND[REFLECTED CEILING PLANS] 000.01 S10 A/V INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY SCHEDULENOTE:PROVIDE CONTINUOUS FIREBLOCKING ABOVE ALL DIMISING WALLS THAT DO NOT EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE. WALL TYPE 20-GAUGE, 3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 4 7/8" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 1A 1 WALL TYPE2 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 1/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPE3 2x4 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 3A WALL TYPE4 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. ROOM SIDE SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 0' - 6 3/4" 0' - 4 3/4" WALL TYPE4AUL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U311 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 51 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE 0' - 7 3/4" 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL. 7/16" THICK ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB) SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPE5 8" CMU, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U904 3-HR / 2-HR FIRE-RATED 50 FULL HEIGHT OF SHAFT SHAFT SIDE 20-GAUGE, 7/8" METAL FURRING @ 24" O.C., TYPICAL 0' - 9 5/32" WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., BEDROOM SIDE. 1B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C. 3B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 2, EXCEPT: LOCATED AT STAIR. 2BWALL TYPE SAME AS WALL TYPE 5, EXCEPT WITH: 20-GAUGE, 2-1/2" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 24" O.C. (IN LIEU OF 7/8" METAL FURRING) 5A WALL TYPE2A 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 3/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL, CORRIDOR SIDE. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U419 -NON-COMBUSTIBLE 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 53 FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE WALL / CEILING ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1. ALL PENETRATIONS THRU FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES (WALL OR CEILING) MUST BE FIRESTOPPED TO THE RATING LEVEL OF THE ASSEMBLY. 2. ALL TRADES TO SUBMIT FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE FOR ALL PENETRATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK PER SPECIFICATIONS 078400 FIRESTOPPING. 3. PROVIDE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION AT ALL ACCESSIBLE CONCEALED FLOOR, OR FLOOR/CEILINGS TO IDENTIFY FIRE BARRIERS, FIRE PARTITIONS, SMOKE BARRIERS OR SMOKE PARTITIONS PER SECTIONS 703.7 OF THE 2015 IBC. 4. ALL BOTTOM PLATES IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WITH SILL SEALER. 5. FOR ALL METAL STUD FRAMING ASSUME 20-GAUGE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ACTUAL GAUGE SHALL BE ENGINEERED BY CONTRACTOR. NOTE:ALL WALL PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE A DOUBLE TOP PLATE, ENTIRE BUILDING, TYPICAL. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a102 SECOND FLOOR PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" SECOND FLOOR PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 DN UP DN UP 3 a400 3 a400 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 a601 1 a602 1 a604 1 a603 1 A/V a606 3A a606 3B C4 C6 C5 715 SF (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 305 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 307 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 KITCHEN LIVING ROOMBEDROOM BATH ENTRY LIN. STORAGE COATSCLOSET MECH. KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY BEDROOM CLOSET LIN. COATS MECH. LIVING ROOM KITCHEN ENTRY STOR. BATH LIVING ROOM BEDROOM MECH. KITCHEN STOR. ENTRY BATH COATS CLOSET KITCHEN COATS STOR. CLOSET MECH. LIVING ROOM BEDROOM BATH ENTRY STOR. BATH CLOSET ENTRY KITCHEN BEDROOM LIVING ROOM MECH. LIN. COATS 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 313 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 314 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 312 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 310 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 308 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 306 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 304 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 303 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 302 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 301 301.08 301.06 301.04 301.01 301.07 301.02 301.03 302.01 302.02 302.04 302.06 302.07 302.08 302.03 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 316 CUST. 317 314.01 314.03314.02 314.05 314.07 314.06 314.08 314.04 312.06 312.08 312.04 312.07 312.05 312.02 312.03 310.07 310.05 310.02 310.03 310.04 310.06 310.08 308.06 308.08 308.04 308.07 308.05 308.03 308.02 306.07 306.02 306.03 306.05 306.04 306.06 306.08304.08 304.06 304.04 304.07 304.02 304.05 304.01 304.03 303.06 303.08 303.04 303.07 303.05 303.02 303.01 303.03 61 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 315 1623 SF CORRIDOR 300 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 300A 315.01 317.01 316.01 279 SF STAIR B B03 234 SF STAIR A A03 A03.01 B03.01 C2 C1 ELEVATOR 305.03 305.02 305.04 305.05A 305.07 305.08 305.06 307.03 307.04 307.08 307.06 307.02 307.07 307.05 309.03 309.02 309.04 309.05 309.07 309.06 309.08 311.03 311.02 311.04 311.05 311.07 311.06 311.08 313.01 313.04 313.05 313.02 313.07 313.08 313.06 313.03 2'-11" 311.01 309.01 307.01 305.01A 306.01 308.01 310.01 312.01 1 a501 4A4A4A4A 4A 4A 5 5A 4A 4A 4A 4A4A4A4A 4 5 4A 4A 4A4A 4A 3B 3B 3B 3B 12345677.68910111213141516 A A.5 B B.1 C D E F G H I 2 a501 C7 302.05 301.05 LIN. LIN. 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"15'-0 1/2"6'-5"15'-0 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 1'-11 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-5"2'-4"3'-5 3/4"3'-0"8'-2 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'- 11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2"2'-4"3'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-11 1/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"8'-1 3/4"2'-4"1'-6" 3'-0"2'-1 3/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"28'-2 1/4"2'-4"6'-0 1/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2"2'-4"1'-6"3'-0"5'-8 1/2"6'-4 1/4"13'-0 1/4"3'-0"4'-5 3/4"4'-1 3/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-7"2'-4"3'-7"3'-0" 2'-11 1/2" 3'-0"19'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-2"2'-4"2'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-8"2'-4"1'- 6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0 1/2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 1'-7 1/2" 11'-0 3/4"4'-1 3/4"3'-0"3'-4"2'-4"3'-4"3'-0"6'-0"3'- 10" 11 1/2" 5'-6 1/4" 4'-8 1/4" 10 13B 13B TYP. 14 TYP. 14 TYP.14 TYP.15 TYP.15 TYP. 15 116 SF CHASE C03 CLEAR 6'-2 1/4" CLEAR 6'-0 1/2" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" CLEAR 10'-10" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" 2'-10 1/2" 14'-1 3/4"17'-3 1/2" 9'-8 1/2" 3'-0" 4'-0" 14'-10 3/4"16'-5 1/2" 9'-0" 5'-0" 8'-8" 3'-0" 4'-0" 3'-9 1/2" 9'-0" 4'-0" 14'-8 1/2" 12'-9 1/2" 11'-2 1/2" 12'-7 1/2" 14'-4" 11'-2 1/4" 11'-6" 15'-5 3/4" 13'-5 1/2" 1A 1A 1A 25 25 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 3 a501 1 a502 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 GENERAL NOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1. ALL DIMENSION STRINGS FOR WOOD FRAMED ROUGH OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS ARE TAKEN FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF WOOD STUD AT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, U.N.O.. 2. REFER TO ENLARGED PLANS FOR APARTMENT UNIT DIMENSIONS U.N.O. KEYNOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED, SEMI-RECESSED, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTINGUISHER TYPE & LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT CABINET AT 5-1/2" A.F.F. MEASURED TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. WALL-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE WITH THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT FIRE EXTINGUISHER AT 48" A.F.F. MEASURED TO TOP OF EXTINGUISHER. PROVIDE 1/2-INCH PLYWOOD AT ELECTRICAL ROOM TO ACCOMMODATE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, THIS WALL. PROVIDE FIRE-RATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SPEAKER AT RECEPTION AREA. 16-INCH HIGH (ALIGN WITH TOP OF BOTTOM MOST CURTAIN WALL MULLION), 2 1/2-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD LOW WALL WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUDS OFF FROM CURTAIN WALL 1-INCH AND PROVIDE CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSUALTION FULL CAVITY OF STUDS. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. COLUMN ENCLOSURE: PROVIDE 2 1/2-INCH, 16-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUD FRAMING OFF STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN 2INCHES TO CLEAR FIRE-PROOFING. WHERE APPLICABLE, ALIGN GYPSUM BOARD WITH ADJACENT GYPSUM WALL BOARD FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. PROVIDE & INSTALL UTILITY OR MOP SINK THIS LOCATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. PROVIDE & INSTALL WASHER & DRYER EQUIPMENT THIS ROOM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS, & SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FOUR (4) BENCHES EQUAL TO WADDELLS METAL BENCH (SIZE: 54"L x 14"D x 17"H). BLACK STEEL FRAME WITH SOLID WOOD CLEAR MAPLE TOP. SKU: W000437032. PROVIDE & INSTALL AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR AND ASSOCIATED POWER, CABLING, ETC., THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & DOOR HARDWARE. DOOR ACTUATOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PIPE CHASE: PROVIDE & INSTALL 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING OVER STUD FRAMING (METAL STUDS AT GROUND FLOOR, WOOD STUDS FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5) (FLAT STUD) TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING, SEE PLUMBING AND ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES. SEMI-RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED INTERCOM SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MAINTAIN FIRE-RATING OF WALL. FULLY INSULATED AND GASKETED EXTERIOR DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. COORDINATE EXACT ELEVATION OF DOOR WITH FLOOR / ROOF ELEVATION, SEE DETAIL. PROVIDE STEEL PAN STAIR WITH CONCRETE TREADS FROM GROUND FLOOR UP TO SECOND FLOOR, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 36-INCH HIGH STEEL HANDRAIL ANCHORED TO WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE WOOD FRAMED STAIR WITH JOHNSONITE RUBBER STAIR TREADS, INTEGRAL NOSING AND LANDINGS TO MATCH. WOOD FRAMING SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS VAPOR SEPERATION MEMBRANE FROM CMU SHAFT RAISED PLATFORM AT APARTMENT UNIT MECHANICAL ROOMS FOR VRP UNIT. PROVIDE 3-5/8" 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE MINERAL WOOD BATT INSULATION IN CAVITY FOR SOUND ISOLATION. RAISED PLATFORM SHALL PROVIDE PROPER ELEVATION TO MECHANICAL UNIT AS TO ALIGN WALL PENETRATION WITH EXTERIOR CLADDING SYSTEM. PROVIDE AND INSTALL CLOSET SHELVING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD CORRIDOR SIDE UP TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. ALIGN GYPSUM WALL BOARD TO ALIGN WITH ADJACENT FURRING AT PILASTER. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. WALL AND WINDOWS ARE RECESSED AT THIS LOCATION, 3-5/8-INCH CLEAR FROM FRAME OF WINDOW TO EXTERIOR CLADDING, SEE DETAILS. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL. PROVIDE ONE (1)MAILBOX FOR EACH APARTMENT UNIT (SIXTY (60) MAILBOXES TOTAL), TWO (2) ADDITIONAL MAILBOXES (ONE (1) FOR EACH COMMERCIAL TENANT), AND FOUR (4) PARCEL BOXES. FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED, HIGH / LOW ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND BOTTLE FILLING STATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. WATER COOLERS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PROVIDE 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RAT ED PARTITION WALL TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR AT LOWEST LEVEL, TO PREVENT ACCESS TO OR ANY STORAGE BENEATH THE STAIR. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 42-INCH HIGH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (WALL TYPE 1) WITH 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 32-INCH DEEP HPL WORKSURFACE AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. PROVIDE GUSSET SUPPORT AT 3 POINTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL HPL CLOTHES FOLDING COUNTERTOP AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. SECOND FLOOR AND ABOVE SHALL BE WOOD STUDS TO MATCH WIDTH OF METAL STUD WALL BELOW. PROVIDE 5/8-INCH GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING BOTH SIDES, PREP, PRIME AND PAINT FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13A 13B 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CMU WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WINDOW / STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL, SEE ASSOCIATED SCHEDULES. NEW DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. ACCESSIBLE APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO MOBILITY IMPAIRED, SEE ENLARGED PLANS. AUDIBLE / VISUAL APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO HEARING OR VISUALLY IMPAIRED, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LEGEND[REFLECTED CEILING PLANS] 000.01 S10 A/V INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY SCHEDULENOTE:PROVIDE CONTINUOUS FIREBLOCKING ABOVE ALL DIMISING WALLS THAT DO NOT EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE. WALL TYPE 20-GAUGE, 3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 4 7/8" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 1A 1 WALL TYPE2 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 1/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPE3 2x4 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 3A WALL TYPE4 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. ROOM SIDE SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 0' - 6 3/4" 0' - 4 3/4" WALL TYPE4AUL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U311 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 51 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE 0' - 7 3/4" 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL. 7/16" THICK ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB) SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPE5 8" CMU, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U904 3-HR / 2-HR FIRE-RATED 50 FULL HEIGHT OF SHAFT SHAFT SIDE 20-GAUGE, 7/8" METAL FURRING @ 24" O.C., TYPICAL 0' - 9 5/32" WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., BEDROOM SIDE. 1B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C. 3B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 2, EXCEPT: LOCATED AT STAIR. 2BWALL TYPE SAME AS WALL TYPE 5, EXCEPT WITH: 20-GAUGE, 2-1/2" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 24" O.C. (IN LIEU OF 7/8" METAL FURRING) 5A WALL TYPE2A 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 3/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL, CORRIDOR SIDE. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U419 -NON-COMBUSTIBLE 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 53 FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE WALL / CEILING ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1. ALL PENETRATIONS THRU FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES (WALL OR CEILING) MUST BE FIRESTOPPED TO THE RATING LEVEL OF THE ASSEMBLY. 2. ALL TRADES TO SUBMIT FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE FOR ALL PENETRATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK PER SPECIFICATIONS 078400 FIRESTOPPING. 3. PROVIDE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION AT ALL ACCESSIBLE CONCEALED FLOOR, OR FLOOR/CEILINGS TO IDENTIFY FIRE BARRIERS, FIRE PARTITIONS, SMOKE BARRIERS OR SMOKE PARTITIONS PER SECTIONS 703.7 OF THE 2015 IBC. 4. ALL BOTTOM PLATES IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WITH SILL SEALER. 5. FOR ALL METAL STUD FRAMING ASSUME 20-GAUGE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ACTUAL GAUGE SHALL BE ENGINEERED BY CONTRACTOR. NOTE:ALL WALL PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE A DOUBLE TOP PLATE, ENTIRE BUILDING, TYPICAL. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a103 THIRD FLOOR PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" THIRD FLOOR PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 DN UP DN UP 3 a400 3 a400 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 a606 4A a606 4B C4 C6 C5 KITCHEN LIVING ROOMBEDROOM BATH ENTRY LIN. STORAGE COATSCLOSET MECH. KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY BEDROOM CLOSET LIN. COATS MECH. LIVING ROOM KITCHEN ENTRY STOR. BATH LIVING ROOM BEDROOM MECH. KITCHEN STOR. ENTRY BATH COATS CLOSET KITCHEN COATS STOR. CLOSET MECH. LIVING ROOM BEDROOM BATH ENTRY STOR. BATH CLOSET ENTRY KITCHEN BEDROOM LIVING ROOM MECH. LIN. COATS 716 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 405 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 407 Not Enclosed (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 413 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 414 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 412 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 410 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 408 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 406 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 404 402.01 402.02 402.04 402.06 402.07 402.08 402.03 401.01 401.03 401.04 401.08 401.06 401.07 401.02 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 403 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 402 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 401 1623 SF CORRIDOR 400 61 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 415 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 416 CUST. 417 403.01 403.03403.02 403.07 403.05 403.06 403.08 403.04 404.01 404.03 404.02 404.07 404.08 404.06 404.04 404.05 406.03406.02 406.07 406.05 406.06 406.08 406.04 408.06 408.08 408.04 408.07 408.05 408.03408.02 410.02 410.07 410.05 410.06 410.04 410.08 410.03 412.03412.02 412.07 412.05 412.06 412.08 412.04 414.06 414.08 414.04 414.07 414.05 414.01 414.03414.02 413.01 413.03 413.02 413.05 413.07 413.04 413.06 413.08 411.06 411.04 411.03 411.05 411.07 411.02 409.03 409.02 409.05 409.04 409.08 409.06 409.07 407.03 407.02 407.05 407.04 407.06 407.08 407.07 405.07 405.02 405.01 405.03 405.05 405.04 405.06 405.08 411.08 415.01 B04.01 416.01 417.01 STAIR B B04 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 400A 234 SF STAIR A A04 C2 C1 ELEVATOR A04.01 411.01 409.01 407.01 406.01 408.01 410.01 412.01 1 a501 4A4A4A4A 4A 4A 5 5A 4A 4A 4A 4A4A4A4A 4 5 4A 4A 4A4A 4A 3B 3B 3B 3B 12345677.68910111213141516 A A.5 B B.1 C D E F G H I A/V 2 a501 C7 402.05 LIN. LIN. 401.05 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"28'-2 1/4"2'-4"6'-0 1/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2"2'-4"1'-6"3'-0"5'-8 1/2"6'-4 1/4"13'-0 1/4"3'-0"4'-5 3/4"4'-1 3/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-7"2'-4"3'-7"3'-0" 2'-11 1/2" 3'-0"5'-10 1/4"3'-4"10'-3 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-2"2'-4"2'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-8"2'-4"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3 '-0 1/2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 1'-7 1/2" 11'-0 3/4"4'-1 3/4"3'-0"3'-4"2'-4"3'-4"3'-0"6'-0"3'-10" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"15'-0 1/2"6'-5"15'-0 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 1'-11 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-5"2'-4"3'-5 3/4"3'-0"8'-2 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0"3'-0"1'-6"2'-2"2'-4"3'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-8 1/2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"8'-1 3/4"2'-4"1'-6" 3'-0"2'-8" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 11 1/2" 5'-6 1/4" 4'-8 1/4" 10 13B 13B TYP. 14 TYP. 14 TYP.14 TYP.15 TYP.15 TYP. 15 116 SF CHASE C04 CLEAR 6'-2 1/4" CLEAR 6'-0 1/2" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" CLEAR 10'-10" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" 2'-10 1/2" 14'-1 3/4"17'-3 1/2" 9'-8 1/2" 3'-0" 4'-0" 14'-10 3/4"16'-5 1/2" 9'-0" 5'-0" 8'-8" 3'-0" 4'-0" 3'-9 1/2" 9'-0" 4'-0" 1A 1A 1A 25 25 3 a501 1 a502 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY SCHEDULENOTE:PROVIDE CONTINUOUS FIREBLOCKING ABOVE ALL DIMISING WALLS THAT DO NOT EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE. WALL TYPE 20-GAUGE, 3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 4 7/8" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 1A 1 WALL TYPE2 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 1/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPE3 2x4 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 3A WALL TYPE4 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. ROOM SIDE SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 0' - 6 3/4" 0' - 4 3/4" WALL TYPE4AUL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U311 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 51 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE 0' - 7 3/4" 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL. 7/16" THICK ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB) SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPE5 8" CMU, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U904 3-HR / 2-HR FIRE-RATED 50 FULL HEIGHT OF SHAFT SHAFT SIDE 20-GAUGE, 7/8" METAL FURRING @ 24" O.C., TYPICAL 0' - 9 5/32" WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., BEDROOM SIDE. 1B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C. 3B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 2, EXCEPT: LOCATED AT STAIR. 2BWALL TYPE SAME AS WALL TYPE 5, EXCEPT WITH: 20-GAUGE, 2-1/2" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 24" O.C. (IN LIEU OF 7/8" METAL FURRING) 5A WALL TYPE2A 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 3/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL, CORRIDOR SIDE. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U419 -NON-COMBUSTIBLE 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 53 FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE WALL / CEILING ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1. ALL PENETRATIONS THRU FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES (WALL OR CEILING) MUST BE FIRESTOPPED TO THE RATING LEVEL OF THE ASSEMBLY. 2. ALL TRADES TO SUBMIT FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE FOR ALL PENETRATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK PER SPECIFICATIONS 078400 FIRESTOPPING. 3. PROVIDE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION AT ALL ACCESSIBLE CONCEALED FLOOR, OR FLOOR/CEILINGS TO IDENTIFY FIRE BARRIERS, FIRE PARTITIONS, SMOKE BARRIERS OR SMOKE PARTITIONS PER SECTIONS 703.7 OF THE 2015 IBC. 4. ALL BOTTOM PLATES IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WITH SILL SEALER. 5. FOR ALL METAL STUD FRAMING ASSUME 20-GAUGE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ACTUAL GAUGE SHALL BE ENGINEERED BY CONTRACTOR. NOTE:ALL WALL PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE A DOUBLE TOP PLATE, ENTIRE BUILDING, TYPICAL.GENERAL NOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1. ALL DIMENSION STRINGS FOR WOOD FRAMED ROUGH OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS ARE TAKEN FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF WOOD STUD AT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, U.N.O.. 2. REFER TO ENLARGED PLANS FOR APARTMENT UNIT DIMENSIONS U.N.O. KEYNOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED, SEMI-RECESSED, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTINGUISHER TYPE & LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT CABINET AT 5-1/2" A.F.F. MEASURED TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. WALL-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE WITH THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT FIRE EXTINGUISHER AT 48" A.F.F. MEASURED TO TOP OF EXTINGUISHER. PROVIDE 1/2-INCH PLYWOOD AT ELECTRICAL ROOM TO ACCOMMODATE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, THIS WALL. PROVIDE FIRE-RATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SPEAKER AT RECEPTION AREA. 16-INCH HIGH (ALIGN WITH TOP OF BOTTOM MOST CURTAIN WALL MULLION), 2 1/2-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD LOW WALL WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUDS OFF FROM CURTAIN WALL 1-INCH AND PROVIDE CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSUALTION FULL CAVITY OF STUDS. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. COLUMN ENCLOSURE: PROVIDE 2 1/2-INCH, 16-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUD FRAMING OFF STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN 2INCHES TO CLEAR FIRE-PROOFING. WHERE APPLICABLE, ALIGN GYPSUM BOARD WITH ADJACENT GYPSUM WALL BOARD FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. PROVIDE & INSTALL UTILITY OR MOP SINK THIS LOCATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. PROVIDE & INSTALL WASHER & DRYER EQUIPMENT THIS ROOM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS, & SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FOUR (4) BENCHES EQUAL TO WADDELLS METAL BENCH (SIZE: 54"L x 14"D x 17"H). BLACK STEEL FRAME WITH SOLID WOOD CLEAR MAPLE TOP. SKU: W000437032. PROVIDE & INSTALL AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR AND ASSOCIATED POWER, CABLING, ETC., THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & DOOR HARDWARE. DOOR ACTUATOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PIPE CHASE: PROVIDE & INSTALL 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING OVER STUD FRAMING (METAL STUDS AT GROUND FLOOR, WOOD STUDS FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5) (FLAT STUD) TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING, SEE PLUMBING AND ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES. SEMI-RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED INTERCOM SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MAINTAIN FIRE-RATING OF WALL. FULLY INSULATED AND GASKETED EXTERIOR DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. COORDINATE EXACT ELEVATION OF DOOR WITH FLOOR / ROOF ELEVATION, SEE DETAIL. PROVIDE STEEL PAN STAIR WITH CONCRETE TREADS FROM GROUND FLOOR UP TO SECOND FLOOR, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 36-INCH HIGH STEEL HANDRAIL ANCHORED TO WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE WOOD FRAMED STAIR WITH JOHNSONITE RUBBER STAIR TREADS, INTEGRAL NOSING AND LANDINGS TO MATCH. WOOD FRAMING SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS VAPOR SEPERATION MEMBRANE FROM CMU SHAFT RAISED PLATFORM AT APARTMENT UNIT MECHANICAL ROOMS FOR VRP UNIT. PROVIDE 3-5/8" 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE MINERAL WOOD BATT INSULATION IN CAVITY FOR SOUND ISOLATION. RAISED PLATFORM SHALL PROVIDE PROPER ELEVATION TO MECHANICAL UNIT AS TO ALIGN WALL PENETRATION WITH EXTERIOR CLADDING SYSTEM. PROVIDE AND INSTALL CLOSET SHELVING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD CORRIDOR SIDE UP TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. ALIGN GYPSUM WALL BOARD TO ALIGN WITH ADJACENT FURRING AT PILASTER. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. WALL AND WINDOWS ARE RECESSED AT THIS LOCATION, 3-5/8-INCH CLEAR FROM FRAME OF WINDOW TO EXTERIOR CLADDING, SEE DETAILS. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL. PROVIDE ONE (1)MAILBOX FOR EACH APARTMENT UNIT (SIXTY (60) MAILBOXES TOTAL), TWO (2) ADDITIONAL MAILBOXES (ONE (1) FOR EACH COMMERCIAL TENANT), AND FOUR (4) PARCEL BOXES. FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED, HIGH / LOW ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND BOTTLE FILLING STATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. WATER COOLERS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PROVIDE 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RAT ED PARTITION WALL TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR AT LOWEST LEVEL, TO PREVENT ACCESS TO OR ANY STORAGE BENEATH THE STAIR. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 42-INCH HIGH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (WALL TYPE 1) WITH 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 32-INCH DEEP HPL WORKSURFACE AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. PROVIDE GUSSET SUPPORT AT 3 POINTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL HPL CLOTHES FOLDING COUNTERTOP AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. SECOND FLOOR AND ABOVE SHALL BE WOOD STUDS TO MATCH WIDTH OF METAL STUD WALL BELOW. PROVIDE 5/8-INCH GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING BOTH SIDES, PREP, PRIME AND PAINT FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13A 13B 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CMU WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WINDOW / STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL, SEE ASSOCIATED SCHEDULES. NEW DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. ACCESSIBLE APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO MOBILITY IMPAIRED, SEE ENLARGED PLANS. AUDIBLE / VISUAL APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO HEARING OR VISUALLY IMPAIRED, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LEGEND[REFLECTED CEILING PLANS] 000.01 S10 A/V plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a104 FOURTH FLOOR PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" FOURTH FLOOR PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 DN UP DN 3 a400 3 a400 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 A/V a606 5A a606 5B C4 C6 C5 KITCHEN LIVING ROOMBEDROOM BATH ENTRY LIN. STORAGE COATSCLOSET MECH. KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN.CLOSET COATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY KITCHEN STOR. LIN. CLOSETCOATS BATH LIVING ROOM MECH. BEDROOM ENTRY BEDROOM CLOSET LIN. COATS MECH. LIVING ROOM KITCHEN ENTRY STOR. BATH LIVING ROOM BEDROOM MECH. KITCHEN STOR. ENTRY BATH COATS CLOSET KITCHEN COATS STOR. CLOSET MECH. LIVING ROOM BEDROOM BATH ENTRY STOR. BATH CLOSET ENTRY KITCHEN BEDROOM LIVING ROOM MECH. LIN. COATS 279 SF STAIR B B05 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 516 CUST. 517 501.08 501.06 501.04 501.07 501.03 501.01 501.02 502.06 502.08 502.04 502.07 502.02502.01 502.03 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 501 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 502 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 503 C2 C1 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 504 716 SF (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 505 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 506 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 507 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 508 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 510 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 512 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 513 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 514 61 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 515 1623 SF CORRIDOR 500 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 500A 234 SF STAIR A A05 ELEVATOR 503.04 503.06 503.08 503.01 503.02 503.05 503.07 503.03 504.04 504.06 504.08 504.07 504.02 504.05 504.01 504.03 506.03506.02 506.05 506.07 506.08 506.06 506.04 508.04 508.06 508.08 508.03508.02 508.05 508.07 510.02 510.05 510.07 510.03 510.04 510.08 510.06 512.06 512.08 512.04 512.03512.02 512.05 512.07 B05.01 516.01 517.01 515.01 514.01 514.03514.02 514.05 514.07 514.04 514.08 514.06 513.04 513.06 513.08 513.07 513.05 513.02 513.01 513.03 511.03 511.02 511.05 511.07 511.06 511.08 511.04509.04 509.07 509.08 509.02 509.05 509.06 509.03 507.03 507.02 507.05 507.07 507.04 507.06 507.08 A05.01 505.06 505.08 505.04 505.01 505.03 505.02 505.05 505.07 511.01 512.01 509.01 507.01 510.01 508.01 506.01 1 a501 4A4A4A4A 4A 4A 5 5A 4A 4A 4A 4A4A4A4A 4 5 4A 4A 4A4A 4A 3B 3B 3B 3B 12345677.68910111213141516 A A.5 B B.1 C D E F G H I 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 2 a501 C7 LIN. LIN. 502.05 501.05 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"28'-2 1/4"2'-4"6'-0 1/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"6'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2"2'-4"1'-6"3'-0" 5'-8 1/2"6'-4 1/4"13'-0 1/4"3'-0"4'-5 3/4"4'-1 3/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-7"2'-4"3'-7"3'-0" 2'-11 1/2" 3'-0"5'-10 1/4"3'-4"10'-3 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-2"2'-4"2'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-8"2'-4"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0 1/2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 1'-7 1/2" 11'-0 3/4"4'-1 3/4"3'-0"3'-4"2'-4"3'-4"3'-0"6'-0"3'-10" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"15'-0 1/2"6'-5"15'-0 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0" 2'-0 1/2" 1'-11 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-5"2'-4"3'-5 3/4"3'-0"8'-2 3/4"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-7"2'-4"2'-7"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"3'-0"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"2'-2"2'-4"3'-0"3'-0"8'-11 1/2"3'-0"3'-0"2'-4"2'-2"3'-0"1'-6"3'-0 "1'-6"3'-0" 2'-11 1/4" 2'-0 1/2" 3'-0"1'-6"3'-0"8'-1 3/4"2'-4"1'-6" 3'-0"2'-1 3/4" 11 1/2" 5'-6 1/4" 4'-8 1/4" 10 13B 13B TYP. 14 TYP. 14 TYP.14 TYP.15 TYP.15 TYP. 15 116 SF CHASE C05 CLEAR 6'-2 1/4" CLEAR 6'-0 1/2" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" CLEAR 10'-10" C L E A R 6'-1 3/4" 2'-10 1/2" 2'-10 1/2" 14'-1 3/4"17'-3 1/2" 9'-8 1/2" 3'-0" 4'-0" 14'-10 3/4"16'-5 1/2" 9'-0" 5'-0" 8'-8" 3'-0" 4'-0" 3'-9 1/2" 9'-0" 4'-0" 1A 1A 1A 25 25 3 a501 1 a502 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 3 a502 INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY SCHEDULENOTE:PROVIDE CONTINUOUS FIREBLOCKING ABOVE ALL DIMISING WALLS THAT DO NOT EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE. WALL TYPE 20-GAUGE, 3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 4 7/8" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 1A 1 WALL TYPE2 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 1/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: NON-COMBUSTIBLE 40 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPE3 2x4 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 FLOOR TO DECK WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT: GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, ROOM SIDE. 3A WALL TYPE4 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U305 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 36 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. ROOM SIDE SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 0' - 6 3/4" 0' - 4 3/4" WALL TYPE4AUL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U311 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 51 OR GREATER FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE 0' - 7 3/4" 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL. 7/16" THICK ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB) SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL TYPE5 8" CMU, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U904 3-HR / 2-HR FIRE-RATED 50 FULL HEIGHT OF SHAFT SHAFT SIDE 20-GAUGE, 7/8" METAL FURRING @ 24" O.C., TYPICAL 0' - 9 5/32" WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 1, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., BEDROOM SIDE. 1B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 3, EXCEPT WITH: 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C. 3B WALL TYPESAME AS WALL TYPE 2, EXCEPT: LOCATED AT STAIR. 2BWALL TYPE SAME AS WALL TYPE 5, EXCEPT WITH: 20-GAUGE, 2-1/2" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 24" O.C. (IN LIEU OF 7/8" METAL FURRING) 5A WALL TYPE2A 20-GAUGE, 6" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C., TYPICAL. 0' - 7 3/4" 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES, PREP., PRIME AND PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS. SOUND-ABSORBENT, BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 20-GAUGE, 1/2" RC-1 RESILIENT CHANNELS AT 24" O.C., TYPICAL, CORRIDOR SIDE. UL ASSEMBLY: FIRE-RATING: STC RATING: EXTENT: UL U419 -NON-COMBUSTIBLE 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED 53 FLOOR TO DECK ROOM SIDE WALL / CEILING ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1. ALL PENETRATIONS THRU FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES (WALL OR CEILING) MUST BE FIRESTOPPED TO THE RATING LEVEL OF THE ASSEMBLY. 2. ALL TRADES TO SUBMIT FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE FOR ALL PENETRATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK PER SPECIFICATIONS 078400 FIRESTOPPING. 3. PROVIDE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION AT ALL ACCESSIBLE CONCEALED FLOOR, OR FLOOR/CEILINGS TO IDENTIFY FIRE BARRIERS, FIRE PARTITIONS, SMOKE BARRIERS OR SMOKE PARTITIONS PER SECTIONS 703.7 OF THE 2015 IBC. 4. ALL BOTTOM PLATES IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WITH SILL SEALER. 5. FOR ALL METAL STUD FRAMING ASSUME 20-GAUGE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ACTUAL GAUGE SHALL BE ENGINEERED BY CONTRACTOR. NOTE:ALL WALL PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE A DOUBLE TOP PLATE, ENTIRE BUILDING, TYPICAL.GENERAL NOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1. ALL DIMENSION STRINGS FOR WOOD FRAMED ROUGH OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS ARE TAKEN FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF WOOD STUD AT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, U.N.O.. 2. REFER TO ENLARGED PLANS FOR APARTMENT UNIT DIMENSIONS U.N.O. KEYNOTES[FLOOR PLANS] 1-HOUR FIRE-RATED, SEMI-RECESSED, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTINGUISHER TYPE & LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT CABINET AT 5-1/2" A.F.F. MEASURED TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. WALL-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET AND ASSOCIATED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPE WITH THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. MOUNT FIRE EXTINGUISHER AT 48" A.F.F. MEASURED TO TOP OF EXTINGUISHER. PROVIDE 1/2-INCH PLYWOOD AT ELECTRICAL ROOM TO ACCOMMODATE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, THIS WALL. PROVIDE FIRE-RATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SPEAKER AT RECEPTION AREA. 16-INCH HIGH (ALIGN WITH TOP OF BOTTOM MOST CURTAIN WALL MULLION), 2 1/2-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD LOW WALL WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUDS OFF FROM CURTAIN WALL 1-INCH AND PROVIDE CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSUALTION FULL CAVITY OF STUDS. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. COLUMN ENCLOSURE: PROVIDE 2 1/2-INCH, 16-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD ROOM SIDE. STAND METAL STUD FRAMING OFF STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN 2INCHES TO CLEAR FIRE-PROOFING. WHERE APPLICABLE, ALIGN GYPSUM BOARD WITH ADJACENT GYPSUM WALL BOARD FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. PROVIDE & INSTALL UTILITY OR MOP SINK THIS LOCATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. PROVIDE & INSTALL WASHER & DRYER EQUIPMENT THIS ROOM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS, & SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FOUR (4) BENCHES EQUAL TO WADDELLS METAL BENCH (SIZE: 54"L x 14"D x 17"H). BLACK STEEL FRAME WITH SOLID WOOD CLEAR MAPLE TOP. SKU: W000437032. PROVIDE & INSTALL AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR AND ASSOCIATED POWER, CABLING, ETC., THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & DOOR HARDWARE. DOOR ACTUATOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PIPE CHASE: PROVIDE & INSTALL 5/8" TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING OVER STUD FRAMING (METAL STUDS AT GROUND FLOOR, WOOD STUDS FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5) (FLAT STUD) TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING, SEE PLUMBING AND ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES. SEMI-RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED INTERCOM SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MAINTAIN FIRE-RATING OF WALL. FULLY INSULATED AND GASKETED EXTERIOR DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. COORDINATE EXACT ELEVATION OF DOOR WITH FLOOR / ROOF ELEVATION, SEE DETAIL. PROVIDE STEEL PAN STAIR WITH CONCRETE TREADS FROM GROUND FLOOR UP TO SECOND FLOOR, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 36-INCH HIGH STEEL HANDRAIL ANCHORED TO WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE WOOD FRAMED STAIR WITH JOHNSONITE RUBBER STAIR TREADS, INTEGRAL NOSING AND LANDINGS TO MATCH. WOOD FRAMING SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS VAPOR SEPERATION MEMBRANE FROM CMU SHAFT RAISED PLATFORM AT APARTMENT UNIT MECHANICAL ROOMS FOR VRP UNIT. PROVIDE 3-5/8" 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE MINERAL WOOD BATT INSULATION IN CAVITY FOR SOUND ISOLATION. RAISED PLATFORM SHALL PROVIDE PROPER ELEVATION TO MECHANICAL UNIT AS TO ALIGN WALL PENETRATION WITH EXTERIOR CLADDING SYSTEM. PROVIDE AND INSTALL CLOSET SHELVING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH METAL STUDS WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD CORRIDOR SIDE UP TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. ALIGN GYPSUM WALL BOARD TO ALIGN WITH ADJACENT FURRING AT PILASTER. PROVIDE 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. WALL AND WINDOWS ARE RECESSED AT THIS LOCATION, 3-5/8-INCH CLEAR FROM FRAME OF WINDOW TO EXTERIOR CLADDING, SEE DETAILS. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL. PROVIDE ONE (1)MAILBOX FOR EACH APARTMENT UNIT (SIXTY (60) MAILBOXES TOTAL), TWO (2) ADDITIONAL MAILBOXES (ONE (1) FOR EACH COMMERCIAL TENANT), AND FOUR (4) PARCEL BOXES. FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED, HIGH / LOW ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS AND BOTTLE FILLING STATION, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. WATER COOLERS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1. PROVIDE 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED PARTITION WALL TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF STAIR AT LOWEST LEVEL, TO PREVENT ACCESS TO OR ANY STORAGE BENEATH THE STAIR. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 42-INCH HIGH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL (WALL TYPE 1) WITH 3 CM THICK QUARTZ SILL WITH 1-INCH OVERHANG AND 1/8-INCH EASED EDGES. PROVIDE AND INSTALL 32-INCH DEEP HPL WORKSURFACE AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. PROVIDE GUSSET SUPPORT AT 3 POINTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL HPL CLOTHES FOLDING COUNTERTOP AT 30-INCH A.F.F.. SECOND FLOOR AND ABOVE SHALL BE WOOD STUDS TO MATCH WIDTH OF METAL STUD WALL BELOW. PROVIDE 5/8-INCH GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING BOTH SIDES, PREP, PRIME AND PAINT FOR AN EVEN AND CONTIGUOUS FINISH. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13A 13B 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CMU WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WINDOW / STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL, SEE ASSOCIATED SCHEDULES. NEW DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. ACCESSIBLE APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO MOBILITY IMPAIRED, SEE ENLARGED PLANS. AUDIBLE / VISUAL APARTMENT: ACCESSIBLE TO HEARING OR VISUALLY IMPAIRED, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LEGEND[REFLECTED CEILING PLANS] 000.01 S10 A/V plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a105 FIFTH FLOOR PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" FIFTH FLOOR PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 H M S S M 3 a400 3 a400 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 a606 6A 1 a501 2 a501 CANOPY ROOF (BELOW) MAIN ROOF STAIR PENTHOUSE ROOF ELEVATOR OVERTRAVEL MAIN ROOF 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 4 TYP.5 TYP.5 TYP.5 7 7 8 STAIR PLAN 9 3 a501 1 a502 +/- 14'-9" V.I.F. +/- 18'-7" V.I.F. 3 a502 7 1'-4"5'-0" +/- 26'-5" V.I.F.+/- 26'-4" V.I.F. 2 OVERFLOWA2 GENERAL NOTES[ROOF PLAN] 1. ROOFING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ROOF INSULATION SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW. 2. ROOF STRUCTURE IS SLOPED THROUGHOUT TO MINIMIZE TAPERED ROOF INSULATION, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. KEYNOTES[ROOF PLAN] CONTINUOUS, FULLY ADHERED, 60 MIL EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING OVER MINIMUM R-30 CONTINUOUS POLIYSO RIGID INSULATION (SLOPE TOWARDS ROOF DRAIN), TYPICAL, U.N.O., SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND WALL SECTIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PRIMARY & SECONDARY ROOF DRAIN, TYPICAL, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. MEHCANICAL EQUIPMENT, SEE HVAC DRAWINGS. MOUNT EQUIPMENT ON NON-PENETRATING SUPPORT SYSTEM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT SIZE AND LOAD CAPACITY OF SUPPORT SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE EQUIPMENT. GENERATOR, SEE ELECTRICAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. EXHAUST VENT, SEE HVAC AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS. [NOT USED] PROVIDE ROOF SCUPPER WITH DOWNSPOUT, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS. FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDER WITH WALK-THROUGH EQUAL TO PRECISION LADDERS FOR PENTHOUSE ROOF ACCESS. GALVAZINED MOBILE DEADWEIGHT ANCHOR SYSTEM EQUAL TO KEE ANCHOR DEADWEIGHT ANCHOR SYSTEM. PROVIDE PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a106 ROOF PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ROOF PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 10'-8" 11'-5" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 9'-0" 11'-5"11'-5"11'-5"11'-5" 9'-0" 11'-5" 11'-5" 11'-5" 11'-5" 661 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 668 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 668 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 711 SF (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 269 SF STAIR B B01 599 SF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 010 1832 SF CORRIDOR 100C 104 SF ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 007 430 SF ELMSHADE OFFICES 006 51 SF STAFF TOILET 005 472 SF HORIZON PROGRAM 002A 141 SF SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002E 233 SF SHARED COPY / FILES 004 107 SF DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002D 104 SF PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002C92 SF HORIZON MED. ROOM 002B 60 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 011 71 SF ELEVATOR E01 234 SF STAIR A A01 120 SF RECEPTION OFFICE 003 1832 SF CORRIDOR 100C 341 SF CONFERENCE ROOM 018 100 SF HORIZON WAITING AREA 002 123 SF VESTIBULE 001 1832 SF CORRIDOR 100C 313 SF COMMON LAUNDRY 017 53 SF MEN'S TOILET 016 57 SF WOMEN'S TOILET 015 193 SF STAFF BREAK ROOM 014 206 SF COMMUNITY KITCHEN 013 811 SF COMMUNITY ROOM 012 123 SF VESTIBULE 100D 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 136 SF PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 006A 11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 1'-8"1'-8"1'-8"1'-8" 48 SF SERVER 008 100 SF BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 009 10'-8"10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" +/- 16'-9 1/2" B.O. COMPOSITE DECK 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 12'-10" 11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD I N S I D E C L E A R 1'-6" INSIDE CLEAR 1'-6" 12'-8" B.O. CEILING 11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD 12'-8" B.O. CEILING 11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD 11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD 12'-8" B.O. CEILING 12'-8" 12'-8" 11'-3" 11'-3" 12'-8" 12'-8" 11'-3" 14'-8" 1A ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN 11'-5" 11'-5" ALIGN TYP.ALIGN TYP. 10'-8" TYP.10'-8" TYP. 11'-5" 2 2 2 TYP. 3 2 2 2 22 TYP.3 2 2 2 2 1A 4 4 4 4 4 45 5 55 5 4 4 4 4 TYP.3 8'-0" B.O. SOFFIT 11'-3" B.O. BULKHEAD 7 TYP. 3 1'-2"1'-2" 10'-8" 7'-2" 7'-2" 9'-0" 8 1'-6" ALIGN 9'-0" 18 SF CUST. 020 9'-0" 7'-0" # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. HEADER, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEM, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. WALL-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LINEAR WOOD CEILING METAL SOFFIT CEILING. LEGEND[FLOOR PLANS] GENERAL NOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] 1. PREP, PRIME, & PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS, SOFFITS, & BULKHEADS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN TO THE CENTERLINE OF ALL CEILINGMOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES. ALIGN ALL CENTERLINES OF ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CENTER ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES AT ALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. KEYNOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] PREP, PRIME AND PAINT UNDERSIDE OF STAIRS AND ALL ASSOCIATED STAIR FRAMING, DECKING GUARDRAILS, HANDRAILS, FASTENERS, ETC., COMPLETE, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING AT UNDERSIDE OF WOOD STAIR, TYPICAL, FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5; PREP, PRIME AND PAINT, COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM SHOWN HATCHED (SEE LEGEND), BELOW FIRE-RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY. INSTALL TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT ALL BATHROOMS. PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE & INSTALL TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT (PAINT) & ASSOCIATED FRAMING, BLOCKING, ETC., COMPLETE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS. COORDINATE WITH HVAC DRAWINGS. PROVIDE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE & INSTALL BULK HEAD. AT GROUND FLOOR, PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD (PAINT) COMPLETE. AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5, PROVIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED LINEAR WOOD CEILING SYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE WITH METAL STUD FURRING AND OR SUSPENSION SYSTEM, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. FIRE-RATED STAIR ENCLOSURE LID, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. 8-INCH WIDE, SUSPENDED METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE SPECIFICAITONS AND DETAILS. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a201 GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" GROUND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 214 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 280 SF STAIR B B02 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 202 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 234 SF STAIR A A02 71 SF ELEVATOR E01 62 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 215 1623 SF CORRIDOR 200 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 715 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 200A 116 SF CHASE C02 32 SF CUST. 217 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 216 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8"1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 6'-1 5/8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 9'-2 3/4" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 9'-2 3/4" TYP. 9'-2 3/4" TYP. TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP.3 TYP. 3 9'-2 3/4" TYP. TYP.3 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 1B 1B 5 9'-2 3/4" TYP. 4 4 4 4 TYP. 3 TYP.3TYP. 3 TYP.3 TYP. 3 TYP.3 7 TYP.3 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD TYP.3 ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP.ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGNALIGN ALIGN ALIGN 7'-2" 7'-2" 7'-2" 7'-2" 7'-2" 7'-2"7'-2"7'-2"7'-2"7'-2"7'-2" 7'-2" 7'-2" 7'-2" # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. HEADER, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEM, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. WALL-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LINEAR WOOD CEILING METAL SOFFIT CEILING. LEGEND[FLOOR PLANS] GENERAL NOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] 1. PREP, PRIME, & PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS, SOFFITS, & BULKHEADS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN TO THE CENTERLINE OF ALL CEILINGMOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES. ALIGN ALL CENTERLINES OF ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CENTER ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES AT ALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. KEYNOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] PREP, PRIME AND PAINT UNDERSIDE OF STAIRS AND ALL ASSOCIATED STAIR FRAMING, DECKING GUARDRAILS, HANDRAILS, FASTENERS, ETC., COMPLETE, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING AT UNDERSIDE OF WOOD STAIR, TYPICAL, FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5; PREP, PRIME AND PAINT, COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM SHOWN HATCHED (SEE LEGEND), BELOW FIRE-RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY. INSTALL TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT ALL BATHROOMS. PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE & INSTALL TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT (PAINT) & ASSOCIATED FRAMING, BLOCKING, ETC., COMPLETE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS. COORDINATE WITH HVAC DRAWINGS. PROVIDE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE & INSTALL BULK HEAD. AT GROUND FLOOR, PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD (PAINT) COMPLETE. AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5, PROVIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED LINEAR WOOD CEILING SYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE WITH METAL STUD FURRING AND OR SUSPENSION SYSTEM, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. FIRE-RATED STAIR ENCLOSURE LID, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. 8-INCH WIDE, SUSPENDED METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE SPECIFICAITONS AND DETAILS. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a202 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 314 279 SF STAIR B B03 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 312 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 310 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 308 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 306 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 300A 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 304 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 303 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 302 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 301 234 SF STAIR A A03 71 SF ELEVATOR E01 61 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 315 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 313 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 307 715 SF (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 305 1623 SF CORRIDOR 300 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 316 32 SF CUST. 317 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8"1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 6'-1 5/8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 9'-2 3/4" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 5 1B 1B TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP.3 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 9'-2 3/4" 4 4 4 4 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 9'-2 3/4" TYP.9'-2 3/4" TYP. 9'-2 3/4" TYP.9'-2 3/4" TYP. TYP.3 TYP. 3 TYP.3 ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP.ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. 7 TYP.3TYP.3 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD ALIGNALIGN ALIGN ALIGN TYP.3TYP.3 TYP. 3 # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. HEADER, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEM, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. WALL-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LINEAR WOOD CEILING METAL SOFFIT CEILING. LEGEND[FLOOR PLANS] GENERAL NOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] 1. PREP, PRIME, & PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS, SOFFITS, & BULKHEADS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN TO THE CENTERLINE OF ALL CEILINGMOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES. ALIGN ALL CENTERLINES OF ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CENTER ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES AT ALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. KEYNOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] PREP, PRIME AND PAINT UNDERSIDE OF STAIRS AND ALL ASSOCIATED STAIR FRAMING, DECKING GUARDRAILS, HANDRAILS, FASTENERS, ETC., COMPLETE, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING AT UNDERSIDE OF WOOD STAIR, TYPICAL, FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5; PREP, PRIME AND PAINT, COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM SHOWN HATCHED (SEE LEGEND), BELOW FIRE-RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY. INSTALL TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT ALL BATHROOMS. PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE & INSTALL TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT (PAINT) & ASSOCIATED FRAMING, BLOCKING, ETC., COMPLETE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS. COORDINATE WITH HVAC DRAWINGS. PROVIDE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE & INSTALL BULK HEAD. AT GROUND FLOOR, PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD (PAINT) COMPLETE. AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5, PROVIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED LINEAR WOOD CEILING SYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE WITH METAL STUD FURRING AND OR SUSPENSION SYSTEM, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. FIRE-RATED STAIR ENCLOSURE LID, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. 8-INCH WIDE, SUSPENDED METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE SPECIFICAITONS AND DETAILS. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a203 THIRD FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" THIRD FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 414 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 412 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 410 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 408 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 406 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 404 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 413 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 407 716 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 405 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 403 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 402 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 401 234 SF STAIR A A04 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 400A 1623 SF CORRIDOR 400 71 SF ELEVATOR E01 61 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 415 279 SF STAIR B B04 32 SF CUST. 417 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 416 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8 1/4"1'-8"1'-8"1'-8" 1'-8"1'-8"1'-8"1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4"9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 9'-2 3/4" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 9'-2 3/4" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" B.O. SOFFIT, TYP. 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 5 1B 1B TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP.3 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 1'-8" 4 4 4 4 TYP. 3 TYP. 3 9'-2 3/4" TYP.9'-2 3/4" TYP. 9'-2 3/4" TYP.9'-2 3/4" TYP. TYP.3 TYP. 3 TYP.3 7 TYP.3TYP.3 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD TYP.3TYP.3 TYP. 3 ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP.ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGNALIGN ALIGN ALIGN # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. HEADER, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEM, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. WALL-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LINEAR WOOD CEILING METAL SOFFIT CEILING. LEGEND[FLOOR PLANS] GENERAL NOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] 1. PREP, PRIME, & PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS, SOFFITS, & BULKHEADS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN TO THE CENTERLINE OF ALL CEILINGMOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES. ALIGN ALL CENTERLINES OF ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CENTER ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES AT ALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. KEYNOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] PREP, PRIME AND PAINT UNDERSIDE OF STAIRS AND ALL ASSOCIATED STAIR FRAMING, DECKING GUARDRAILS, HANDRAILS, FASTENERS, ETC., COMPLETE, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING AT UNDERSIDE OF WOOD STAIR, TYPICAL, FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5; PREP, PRIME AND PAINT, COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM SHOWN HATCHED (SEE LEGEND), BELOW FIRE-RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY. INSTALL TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT ALL BATHROOMS. PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE & INSTALL TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT (PAINT) & ASSOCIATED FRAMING, BLOCKING, ETC., COMPLETE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS. COORDINATE WITH HVAC DRAWINGS. PROVIDE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE & INSTALL BULK HEAD. AT GROUND FLOOR, PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD (PAINT) COMPLETE. AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5, PROVIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED LINEAR WOOD CEILING SYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE WITH METAL STUD FURRING AND OR SUSPENSION SYSTEM, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. FIRE-RATED STAIR ENCLOSURE LID, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. 8-INCH WIDE, SUSPENDED METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE SPECIFICAITONS AND DETAILS. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a204 FOURTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" FOURTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 514 279 SF STAIR B B05 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 516 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 512 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 510 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 508 1623 SF CORRIDOR 500 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 506 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 500A 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 504 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 503 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 502 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 501 61 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 515 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 513 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 507 32 SF CUST. 517 716 SF (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 505 1'-8" 1'-8"1'-8"1'-8" 1'-8"1'-8"1'-8"1'-8" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 1'-8" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-0" B.O. BULKHEAD 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-6" 8'-6"8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6"8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6"8'-6"8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6"8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6"8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-6" 8'-2" 8'-2" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0"8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" F6 F6 5 6 6 TYP. 2 TYP. 2 TYP. 2 TYP.2 TYP. 2 TYP. 2 1'-8" 4 4 4 4 TYP. 2 TYP. 2 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 8'-6" TYP.8'-6" TYP. 8'-6" TYP.8'-6" TYP. 8'-0" TYP.2 TYP. 2 TYP.2 7 TYP.2TYP.2 TYP.2TYP.2 TYP. 2 ELEVATOR ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP.ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. ALIGNALIGN ALIGN ALIGN # WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. HEADER, SEE WALL SCHEDULE. TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, PAINT, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEM, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. WALL-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. LINEAR WOOD CEILING METAL SOFFIT CEILING. LEGEND[FLOOR PLANS] GENERAL NOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] 1. PREP, PRIME, & PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS, SOFFITS, & BULKHEADS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN TO THE CENTERLINE OF ALL CEILINGMOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES. ALIGN ALL CENTERLINES OF ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CENTER ALL CEILING-MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES & DEVICES AT ALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. KEYNOTES[REFLECTED CEILING PLAN] PREP, PRIME AND PAINT UNDERSIDE OF STAIRS AND ALL ASSOCIATED STAIR FRAMING, DECKING GUARDRAILS, HANDRAILS, FASTENERS, ETC., COMPLETE, TYPICAL, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING AT UNDERSIDE OF WOOD STAIR, TYPICAL, FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5; PREP, PRIME AND PAINT, COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM SHOWN HATCHED (SEE LEGEND), BELOW FIRE-RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY. INSTALL TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT ALL BATHROOMS. PAINT ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS, COMPLETE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. PROVIDE & INSTALL TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT (PAINT) & ASSOCIATED FRAMING, BLOCKING, ETC., COMPLETE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS. COORDINATE WITH HVAC DRAWINGS. PROVIDE METAL STUD FRAMING AT GROUND FLOOR AND WOOD STUD FRAMING AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5. PROVIDE & INSTALL BULK HEAD. AT GROUND FLOOR, PROVIDE 3 5/8-INCH, 20-GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD (PAINT) COMPLETE. AT FLOORS 2 THROUGH 5, PROVIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT COMPLETE. PROVIDE & INSTALL SUSPENDED LINEAR WOOD CEILING SYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE WITH METAL STUD FURRING AND OR SUSPENSION SYSTEM, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. FIRE-RATED STAIR ENCLOSURE LID, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/ CEILING/ ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE, FOR FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY ABOVE. 8-INCH WIDE, SUSPENDED METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE SPECIFICAITONS AND DETAILS. 1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a205 FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 KEYNOTES[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL -SMOOTH, FACTORY FINISHED, SEE LEGEND, MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000. COLOR FINISH EQUAL TO REYNOBOND COLORWELD "CHARCOAL," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000. COLOR FINISH EQUAL TO REYNOBOND COLORWELD 500 "TERRA DI SIENNA," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 4" x 8" x 16" GROUND-FACE CMU VENEER BASE EQUAL TO BARNES & CONE, COLOR/MIX: 'GALWAY GRAVEL' TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PRE-CAST CONCRETE WINDOW SILL (GREY LIMESTONE), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-1), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-A), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-B), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-2), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD DOUBLEHUNG WINDOW, COLOR: CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL WITH GLASS, SOLID PANELS, OPERABLE EXTERIOR DOORS, ETC. COLOR: COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE AND SPECIFCATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM AND GLASS EXTERIOR STOREFRONT WITH THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM AND GLASS FIXED / AWNING WINDOWS. COLOR: CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE STOREFRONT SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. CONTINUOUS VERTICAL MASONRY CONTROL JOINT, "C.J." ,TYPICAL. CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL FIBER CEMENT CONTROL JOINT, "C.J." , TYPICAL AT EACH FLOOR LEVEL. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION MANUAL. 1 2A 2B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5A 5B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 RPZ DRAIN AND FDC LOCATION, SEE FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FIRE ALARM BELL LOCATION, SEE FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS. CANOPY, SEE SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. GAS METER AND REGULATOR, PAINT PIPING TO MATCH WALL, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 0.040" KYNAR FINISH ALUMINUM CONTINOUS BRAKE METAL FLASHING AND DRIP EDGE. TYPICAL AT TOP OF ALL BRICK MASONRY TERMINATIONS, SEE DETAILS. FIRE-RATED STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS, PAINT; AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE COLUMN BASE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL LINTEL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT FIBER CEMENT PANEL BWALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT ALUMINUM PANEL 1WALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT ALUMINUM PANEL 2WALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. 0.040" KYNAR FINISH ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH COLOR FINISH OF CURTAIN WALL WHERE BUILDING STEPS BACK. PROVIDE ROOF LEADER WITH POWDER COAT FINISH TO MATCH COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL, SEE ROOF PLAN. TIE INTO FOUNDATION DRAIN. FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDER WITH WALK-THROUGH EQUAL TO PRECISION LADDERS FOR PENTHOUSE ROOF ACCESS. 18A 19 18B 18C 20 21 5C A2 A2 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" T.O ELEVATOR PENTHOUSE 64' -0" T.O ROOF STAIR PENTHOUSE 71' -4" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" 2 a400 1 a400 2 a503 1 a501 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VEHICLE ACCESS DRIVE 15'-6" CLEAR - EMERGENCY S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1W1 W1 W1W1W1 W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1 W1W1 W1W1W1 W1W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1 17'-4"10'-8"10'-8"10'-8"11'-4" 2B 2A TYP. 2B TYP. 1 333 TYP. 17 TYP. 8 TYP. 4 5 TYP. 6 TYP.6 7 77 16 TYP. 18A 7 7 15 TYP. 10 14'-8" 21'-4" 15'-4" 16'-8" 16'-8" 14'-8" 21'-4" 4'-8 3/4"6'-0" TYP. 18B C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. ALIGN (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 1'-4" TYPICAL EQ.EQ.EQ.EQ. ALIGN W/ C.L. OF CURTAIN WALL ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 1'-6" TYPICAL ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN TYP. ALIGN 19 19 TYP. 2B 2A TYP.1 ALIGN ALIGN TYP. 9 (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 6'-0" TYPICAL, U.N.O. TYP. 18C 5A TYP. 1 TYP. 18A 14 1 a502 21 3 a502 5C GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" T.O ELEVATOR PENTHOUSE 64' -0" T.O ROOF STAIR PENTHOUSE 71' -4" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" 3 a400 A A.5 B B.1 C D E F G H I 2 a501 S1S1S1S1S1S1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W3 TYP.1 TYP.1 2A TYP. 2B 3 TYP.17 TYP.8 TYP.4 5A 5 TYP. 6TYP. 6 2B 7 15 TYP.10 3 7 7 4' - 8 3/4"13' - 4"16'-4"13' - 4"4'-8" 19 19 ALIGN ALIGN TYP. 2A 2A ALIGN TYP. ALIGN TYP. EQ.EQ. EQ.EQ. (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 1'-6" TYPICAL 5B ALIGN (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 6'-0" TYPICAL, U.N.O. ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 1'-4" TYPICAL C.J.C.J.C.J.C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. TYP.9 5A 3 a501 21 5C a301 2 a301 1 PANEL A -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (EIDER WHITE). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL B -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (REPOSE GRAY). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL C -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (MINDFUL GRAY). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL D -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (IRON ORE). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL 1 -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (CHARCOAL). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL 2 -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (TERRA DI SIENNA) LEGEND[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] A2 GENERAL NOTES[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] 1. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS FOR ALL EXTERIOR WALL PENETRACTIONS AND WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT WITH ARCHITECT. REFER TO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. ALL WALL PENETRACTIONS (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: PIPING, CONDUIT, LOUVERS, HVAC UNIT GRILLS, COVERS, ETC.) SHALL BE SHOP PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT EXTERIOR WALL FINISH, TYPICAL. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a301 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR NORTH ELEVATION 1 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR EAST ELEVATION 2 KEY PLAN (NORTH AND EAST) ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 6.4mm [1/4"] GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" T.O ELEVATOR PENTHOUSE 64' -0" T.O ROOF STAIR PENTHOUSE 71' -4" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" 3 a400 3 a503 AA.5BB.1CDEFGHI 2 a502 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 6'-0" TYPICAL, U.N.O. TYP. 1 2A TYP.2B TYP.1 TYP.6 TYP. 3 TYP. 2B TYP. 3 TYP.5B 7 7 15 16 16 17 13 2A 10 10 10 10 TYP. 18A 4'-9"20'-8"6'-0"20'-0"5'-5" TYP. 6 C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN WITH C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 6'-0"TYPICAL, U.N.O. (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 16" TYPICAL 5TYP.1 TYP. 1 2A 20 21 a3022 a302 1 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" T.O ROOF STAIR PENTHOUSE 71' -4" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" 2 a400 1 a400 12345677.689101112131 41516 S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1S1 W1 W1W1W1 W1W1W1 W1W1W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1W1W1W1W1 W1W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1W1 W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1 W1W1W1W1 W1W1 W1 W1 W1W1 TYP. 1 TYP. 2B TYP. 1 3333 TYP. 4 TYP. 8 TYP. 17 TYP.5B 5B TYP.15TYP. 15 TYP. 6 TYP. 6 2B TYP. 1 16 TYP.4 TYP.8 TYP.17 2A 10 10 10 10 4'-9" 14'-0" 14'-0" 20'-0" 4'-0" 5'-0" 20'-8" 18'-0" 14'-0" 14'-0" 19'-4" 18'-8" 5'-5" (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 16" TYPICAL 18A C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. 11'-4" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 17'-4" C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. TYP.18A ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 6'-0" TYPICAL, U.N.O. ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN EQ.EQ. EQ. EQ.EQ. EQ.EQ. EQ. ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN ALIGN W/ C.L. OF WINDOW ALIGN 6'-7" 6'-7" 6'-7" 6'-7" 6'-7" 6'-7" TYP. 1 EQ. EQ. 10'-8" 21 3 a502 1 a503 TYP. 5B TYP. 5C A2 20 PANEL A -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (EIDER WHITE). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL B -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (REPOSE GRAY). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL C -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (MINDFUL GRAY). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL D -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (IRON ORE). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL 1 -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (CHARCOAL). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL 2 -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (TERRA DI SIENNA) LEGEND[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] A2 KEYNOTES[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL -SMOOTH, FACTORY FINISHED, SEE LEGEND, MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000. COLOR FINISH EQUAL TO REYNOBOND COLORWELD "CHARCOAL," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000. COLOR FINISH EQUAL TO REYNOBOND COLORWELD 500 "TERRA DI SIENNA," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 4" x 8" x 16" GROUND-FACE CMU VENEER BASE EQUAL TO BARNES & CONE, COLOR/MIX: 'GALWAY GRAVEL' TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PRE-CAST CONCRETE WINDOW SILL (GREY LIMESTONE), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-1), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-A), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-B), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-2), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD DOUBLEHUNG WINDOW, COLOR: CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL WITH GLASS, SOLID PANELS, OPERABLE EXTERIOR DOORS, ETC. COLOR: COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE AND SPECIFCATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM AND GLASS EXTERIOR STOREFRONT WITH THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM AND GLASS FIXED / AWNING WINDOWS. COLOR: CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE STOREFRONT SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. CONTINUOUS VERTICAL MASONRY CONTROL JOINT, "C.J." ,TYPICAL. CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL FIBER CEMENT CONTROL JOINT, "C.J." , TYPICAL AT EACH FLOOR LEVEL. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION MANUAL. 1 2A 2B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5A 5B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 RPZ DRAIN AND FDC LOCATION, SEE FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FIRE ALARM BELL LOCATION, SEE FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS. CANOPY, SEE SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. GAS METER AND REGULATOR, PAINT PIPING TO MATCH WALL, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 0.040" KYNAR FINISH ALUMINUM CONTINOUS BRAKE METAL FLASHING AND DRIP EDGE. TYPICAL AT TOP OF ALL BRICK MASONRY TERMINATIONS, SEE DETAILS. FIRE-RATED STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS, PAINT; AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE COLUMN BASE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL LINTEL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT FIBER CEMENT PANEL BWALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT ALUMINUM PANEL 1WALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT ALUMINUM PANEL 2WALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. 0.040" KYNAR FINISH ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH COLOR FINISH OF CURTAIN WALL WHERE BUILDING STEPS BACK. PROVIDE ROOF LEADER WITH POWDER COAT FINISH TO MATCH COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL, SEE ROOF PLAN. TIE INTO FOUNDATION DRAIN. FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDER WITH WALK-THROUGH EQUAL TO PRECISION LADDERS FOR PENTHOUSE ROOF ACCESS. 18A 19 18B 18C 20 21 5C A2 A2 GENERAL NOTES[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] 1. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS FOR ALL EXTERIOR WALL PENETRACTIONS AND WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT WITH ARCHITECT. REFER TO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. ALL WALL PENETRACTIONS (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: PIPING, CONDUIT, LOUVERS, HVAC UNIT GRILLS, COVERS, ETC.) SHALL BE SHOP PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT EXTERIOR WALL FINISH, TYPICAL. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a302 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR WEST ELEVATION 2 KEY PLAN (WEST AND SOUTH) SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR SOUTH ELEVATION 1 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" 1 16 17'-4"10'-8"10'-8"10'-8"11'-4" TYP.1 2A 3 5B 10 C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 16" TYPICAL 15 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" 113141516 2'-0" 11'-4" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 17'-4" TYP.1 5B 10 C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 16" TYPICAL (BEYOND) 16 TYP. 2B ROOF CURB CUT-BACK, SEE ROOF PLAN (HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 1'-6" TYPICAL ALIGN JOINTS WITH WINDOW HEAD AND SILL, SEE EAST ELEVATION, TYPICAL 5C a303 2 a303 1 a303 4 a3033 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" A A.5 B 11'-4" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 17'-4" (VERTICAL) PANEL SPACING 1'-4" TYPICAL C.J. C.J. C.J. C.J. 3 15 2A TYP. 1 TYP. 5B GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" AA.5BB.1C 2 a501 TYP. 2B(HORIZONTAL) PANEL SPACING 18" TYPICAL PANEL SPACING, ALIGN WITH WINDOW HEAD / SILL, SEE NORTH ELEVATION 2'-0" 11'-4" 10'-8" 10'-8" 10'-8" 17'-4" 5C KEYNOTES[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL -SMOOTH, FACTORY FINISHED, SEE LEGEND, MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000. COLOR FINISH EQUAL TO REYNOBOND COLORWELD "CHARCOAL," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANELS EQUAL TO KINGSPAN BENCHMARK DESIGNWALL 1000. COLOR FINISH EQUAL TO REYNOBOND COLORWELD 500 "TERRA DI SIENNA," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 4" x 8" x 16" GROUND-FACE CMU VENEER BASE EQUAL TO BARNES & CONE, COLOR/MIX: 'GALWAY GRAVEL' TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PRE-CAST CONCRETE WINDOW SILL (GREY LIMESTONE), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-1), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-A), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-B), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8-INCH ALUMINUM COPING (COLOR FINISH TO MATCH PANEL-2), TYPICAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD DOUBLEHUNG WINDOW, COLOR: CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL WITH GLASS, SOLID PANELS, OPERABLE EXTERIOR DOORS, ETC. COLOR: COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE AND SPECIFCATIONS. THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM AND GLASS EXTERIOR STOREFRONT WITH THERMALLY-BROKEN ALUMINUM AND GLASS FIXED / AWNING WINDOWS. COLOR: CHARCOAL, TYPICAL, SEE STOREFRONT SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. CONTINUOUS VERTICAL MASONRY CONTROL JOINT, "C.J." ,TYPICAL. CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL FIBER CEMENT CONTROL JOINT, "C.J." , TYPICAL AT EACH FLOOR LEVEL. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION MANUAL. 1 2A 2B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5A 5B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 RPZ DRAIN AND FDC LOCATION, SEE FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FIRE ALARM BELL LOCATION, SEE FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS. CANOPY, SEE SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. GAS METER AND REGULATOR, PAINT PIPING TO MATCH WALL, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 0.040" KYNAR FINISH ALUMINUM CONTINOUS BRAKE METAL FLASHING AND DRIP EDGE. TYPICAL AT TOP OF ALL BRICK MASONRY TERMINATIONS, SEE DETAILS. FIRE-RATED STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS, PAINT; AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE COLUMN BASE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL LINTEL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT FIBER CEMENT PANEL BWALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT ALUMINUM PANEL 1WALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. "COMPACT SIZE" (28 1/8" WIDE x 32 1/4" HIGH) EXTERIOR WALL OPENING AND SHOP PAINTEDOUTSIDE GRILL (TO MATCH ADJACENT ALUMINUM PANEL 2WALL SURFACE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND COLORS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TYPICAL. 0.040" KYNAR FINISH ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH COLOR FINISH OF CURTAIN WALL WHERE BUILDING STEPS BACK. PROVIDE ROOF LEADER WITH POWDER COAT FINISH TO MATCH COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL, SEE ROOF PLAN. TIE INTO FOUNDATION DRAIN. FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDER WITH WALK-THROUGH EQUAL TO PRECISION LADDERS FOR PENTHOUSE ROOF ACCESS. 18A 19 18B 18C 20 21 5C A2 A2 PANEL A -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (EIDER WHITE). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL B -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (REPOSE GRAY). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL C -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (MINDFUL GRAY). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL D -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (IRON ORE). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL 1 -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (CHARCOAL). SEE SPECIFICATIONS PANEL 2 -KINGSPAN DESIGNWALL 1000 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANEL (TERRA DI SIENNA) LEGEND[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] A2 GENERAL NOTES[EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS] 1. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS FOR ALL EXTERIOR WALL PENETRACTIONS AND WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT WITH ARCHITECT. REFER TO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. ALL WALL PENETRACTIONS (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: PIPING, CONDUIT, LOUVERS, HVAC UNIT GRILLS, COVERS, ETC.) SHALL BE SHOP PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT EXTERIOR WALL FINISH, TYPICAL. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a303 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR ELEVATION 2 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR ELEVATION 1 KEY PLAN (MISCELLANEOUS) SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR ELEVATION 4 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXTERIOR ELEVATION 3 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 2 a400 2 a400 1 a400 1 a400 12345677.68910111213141516 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 313 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 413 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 513 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 507 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 407 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 307 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 305 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 405 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 505 STAIR A A01 STAIR A A02 STAIR A A03 STAIR A A04 STAIR A A05 STAIR A A06 CORRIDOR 100C MEN'S TOILET 016 COMMON LAUNDRY 017 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 303 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 403 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 503 CORRIDOR 200 CORRIDOR 300 CORRIDOR 400 CORRIDOR 500 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-8" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0"3'-0"3'-0"3'-0" 3 a502 1 a503 3 a400 3 a400 AA.5BB.1CDEF STAIR B B01 STAIR B B02 STAIR B B03 STAIR B B04 STAIR B B05 CORRIDOR 500 CORRIDOR 400 CORRIDOR 300 CORRIDOR 200 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-8" 3 a400 3 a400 AA.5BB.1CDEFG (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 CORRIDOR 100C CORRIDOR 500 CORRIDOR 400 CORRIDOR 300 CORRIDOR 200 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 310 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 410 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 510 BUILDING THERMAL ENVELOPE. LEGEND[BUILDING SECTIONS] plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a400 BUILDING SECTIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" BUILDING SECTION 3 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" BUILDING SECTION 2 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" BUILDING SECTION 1 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' -0" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" B.O RATED ASSEMBLY (GROUND FLOOR) 15' -5" B.O CEILING (2ND FLOOR) 26' -6 3/4" B.O CEILING (5TH FLOOR) 57' -10" T.O STRUCTURE (2ND FLOOR) 16' -9 1/2" T.O STRUCTURE (3RD FLOOR) 27' -10 1/2" T.O ROOF STRUCTURE 59' -10 1/2" B.O CEILING (GROUND FLOOR) 11' -5" 8" GROUND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 10' -8" GROUND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 2' -8" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 30' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" 1" 2'-0" HVAC HVAC | | (CHAMFERED SILL BLOCK) 8" 1 2 3 4 5 66 7 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 27 30 31 32 30 33 35 16 36 21 23 37 38 39 1" 40 41 42 43 44 45 51 52 52 52 53 55 13 23 37 38 39 41 56 20 20 42 43 31 42 27 COMBUSTIBLE NON-COMBUSTIBLE 34 54 18 36 21 21 464850 49 47 22 3/4" AIR SPACE 1 1/2" AIR SPACE 62 62 2'-0 1/2" 2'-8" 8" [WALL SECTIONS] 1DEEP FOUNDATION (STEEL PILES), SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS & GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. REINFORCED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE CAPS, GRADE BEAMS AND FOUNDATIONS, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTINUOUS, REINFORCED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB-ON-GRADE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTINUOUS, 10-MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER WITH JOINTS LAPPED 6-INCHES MINIMUM AT UNDERSIDE OF ENTIRE SLAB. MINIMUM 10-INCHES COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS, AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. SUITABLE GRANULAR FILL-OR-SUITABLE NATIVE SOIL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. FINISHED GRADE, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS, LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS, AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. 1/2-INCH POLYURETHANE EXPANSION JOINT. UNDERDRAIN FOR STONE MULCH IN SELECT LOCATIONS AT BUILDING PERIMETER, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS. 3 5/8-INCH STANDARD CMU VENEER (BELOW GRADE), GROUT CAVITY SOLID UP TO UNDERSIDE OF WEEP FLASHING. 3-INCH (R-15 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION. 3 5/8-INCH THICK, GROUND FACE CMU VENEER (ABOVE GRADE) WITH EXTERIORAPPLIED CLEAR SEALANT (ABOVE GRADE). INSTALL CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT AT 16-INCHES, O.C., VERTICALLY. INSTALL HB 2-SEAL THERMAL WING-NUT ANCHORS AT 16" O.C., VERTICALLY & 16-INCHES O.C., HORIZONTALLY. 8-INCH HIGH, CONTINUOUS, MASONRY MORTAR NET. MASONRY WEEP HOLES AT 24-INCHES, O.C., MAXIMUM AT VERTICAL JOINTS. INSTALL CONTINUOUS ASPHALT COATED COPPER THROUGH-WALL FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE BELOW WEEPS AND EXTEND UP SHEATHING, 12-INCHES. 1 1/2-INCH (R-7.5 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION. 3-1/2-INCH (R-15.2 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION (ABOVE GRADE MASS WALLS -STAIR B, NORTH AND WEST WALLS). 5/8-INCH DENS ELEMENT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. COLD-FORM METAL STUD FRAMING (CFMF) DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FILL ENTIRE STUD CAVITY WITH R-13 MINIMUM, MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION. R-19 MINIMUM, KRAFT-FACED FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. R-19 MINIMUM, RIGID MINERAL WOOL INSULATION BOARD EQUAL TO ROXUL: CAVITYROCK. FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. 5/8-INCH THICK TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP. PRIME, & PAINT, REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PRE-CAST CONCRETE SILL WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE. SLOPE TOP SURFACE 1/4-INCH PER FOOT, MINIMUM. 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD SILL/JAMB/HEAD BLOCKING, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING. INSTALL FLASHING TAPE AT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING AND OVERLAP SEAMS BETWEEN BLOCKING AND SHEATHING. STEEL LINTEL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. INSTALL ASPHALT-COATED COPPER FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE OVER TOP OF LINTEL AND EXTEND UP SHEATHING, 12-INCHES. COLD-FORM METAL BOX HEADER, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. R-13 MINIMUM, CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE HEADER CAVITY. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM, SEE FINISH PLANS. CONTINUOUS, 0.040-INCH THICK ALUMINUM COPING/FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE, SLOPE AT 1/4" PER FOOT. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANEL RAINSCREEN SYSTEM WITH (DRY-JOINT, ROUT AND RETURN), INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. [NOT USED] [NOT USED] COLD-FORM METAL DEFLECTION TOP TRACK, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TRACK TO STEEL BEAMS WITH COLD-FORM METAL ZFURRING, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. R-13 MINIMUM AT FRAMED WALL LOCATIONS. R-30 MINUMUM AT ENTIRE UNDERSIDE OF EXTERIOR EXPOSED CONCRETE COMPOSITE SLAB. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED, SPRAY APPLIED FIRE PROOFING EQUAL TO "UL P732", SP RE BEAM, TYPICAL AT ALL STEEL BEAMS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTINUOUS, 16-GAUGE MINIMUM, POUR STOP ENTIRE PERIMETER OF SLAB. 2x6 (NOMINAL) PRESSURE-TREATED SOLE PLATE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. RAIN SCREEN CAVITY. 1x4 (NOMINAL) PRESSURE-TREATED SOLID WOOD FURRING/STRAPPING AT 16-INCHES, O.C., VERTICALLY (BEYOND). 5/8-INCH THICK, APA-RATED, STRUCTURE I, EXPOSURE I, SHEATHING PANEL WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER. TAPE ALL SEAMS AND FASTEN PANELS TO STUD FRAMING PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2x2 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD NAILER, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING. ALUMINUM CLAD-WOOD, DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOW ASSEMBLY WITH FIXED TOP SASH, H-50/CW-50 RATED, SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. REPLACE ALL VENT LATCHES WITH MANUFACTURER'S WINDOW OPENING CONTROL DEVICE COMPLYING WITH ASTM F-2090-10. DISABLE TILT-RELEASE FUNCTION AT ALL WINDOWS. WRAP INTERIOR PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, & PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 5/4-INCH (NOMINAL) MDF SILL AND 1x3 (NOMINAL) MDF APRON WITH EASED EDGES, FACTORY PRIMED AND FIELD PAINTED, REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. WINDOW HEADER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. R-13 MINIMUM, CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. SOFFIT WITH 2x SOLID WOOD FLAT STUD FRAMING AND TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING TO ACCOMMODATE HVAC DUCTWORK, SEE CEILING PLANS AND REFER TO HVAC DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTINUOUS, 2x (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD DOUBLE TOP PLATE, SEE STRUCTURAL. CONTINUOUS RIM JOIST / HEADER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 3-INCHES (R-13 MINIMUM) CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION ENTIRE PERIMETER OF BUILDING. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLY, SEE FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY, SEE FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. CONTINUOUS FULLY SELF-ADHERED 40-MIL AIR/VAPOR BARRIER AT ENTIRE ROOF, WRAP OVER PERIMETER WALL FRAMING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2-INCH GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT BOARD. R-30 MINIMUM, POLYISO ROOF INSULATION, SEE ROOF PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3/8-INCH GYPSUM OVERLAYMENT BOARD. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CONTINUOUS FULLY ADHERED, 60-MIL EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING, ENTIRE ROOF, WRAP OVER PERIMETER WALL FRAMING / ROOF CURB. SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM, PREP., PRIME, AND PAINT, SEE FINISHES. FINISH FLOORING, SEE FINISH PLANS. 3-CENTIMETER THICK, NATURAL QUARTZ SILL WITH EASED EDGES, SEE FINISHES. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED, LIGHT WEIGHT COMPOSITE SLAB, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SECHEDULE AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WALL BASE, SEE FINISHES. ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS SEE WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULE. WRAP INTERIOR PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING WITH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, & PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 5/8-INCH TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT, GLAS MAT REINFORCED GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING. LINEAR SOLID WOOD CEILING, SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 20 GA. 3-5/8-INCH METAL STUD KICKERS AT 24-INCHES O.C. MAX. CONTINUOUS EPS CANT STRIP. THERMALLY-BROKEN, ALUMINUM AND GLASS CURTAIN WALL. SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. VENT STRIP. FLUID APPLIED WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (WRB), SEE SPECIFICATIONS. KEYNOTES 50 51 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 28A 59 60 61 20A 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 39 40 38 47 49 17 62 63 A2 A2 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' -0" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O TOWER ROOF COPING 62' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" B.O CEILING (2ND FLOOR) 26' -6 3/4" B.O CEILING (5TH FLOOR) 57' -10" T.O STRUCTURE (2ND FLOOR) 16' -9 1/2" T.O ROOF STRUCTURE 59' -10 1/2" B.O CEILING (GROUND FLOOR) 11' -5" 16 SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 30' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" 1" 3 1/2" +/- 3 5/8" RECESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 12 16 18 37 18 19 2" 16 21 21 25 23 39 52 52 38 44 36COMBUSTIBLE NON-COMBUSTIBLE 77 20 33 30 32 31 35 31 25 25 30 58 58 18 32 40 20 42 27 16 43 39 20 23 37 27 38 27 40 51 | 45 20 42 43 34 SAME EXCEPT 2x10 IN LIEU OF 2x6 SAME EXCEPT 2x10 IN LIEU OF 2x6 27 SAME EXCEPT 2x10 IN LIEU OF 2x6 31 46485036 36 28 SOFFIT TRANSITION WEEP & BAFFLE EQ.EQ. 28 42 28 WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH CURTAIN WALL COLOR 49 47 1'-6" 59 60 8" 27 62 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' -0" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" B.O CEILING (5TH FLOOR) 57' -10" T.O CURTAIN WALL 57' -10" T.O STRUCTURE (2ND FLOOR) 16' -9 1/2" B.O CEILING (GROUND FLOOR) 11' -5" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 30' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" 1'-6" 2" 1 2 3 7 7 7 7 10 12 4 5 698 6 16 20 23 25 21 58 30 32 30 59 52 26 26 27 28 27 31 33 35 36 52 464850 49 4736 45 60 39 39 42 44 44 55 55 55 STAND STUDS OFF CURTAIN WALL 1-INCH TO PREVENT THERMAL BRIDGING TYP. 61 20A 20A TYP. 61 8" COMBUSTIBLE NON-COMBUSTIBLE 62 A2 plan ARCHITECTURAL 2 5 0 S o u t h A v e n u e , S u i t e 1 0 0 R o c h e s t e r , N e w Y o r k 1 4 6 0 4 A r c h i t e c t u r a l S t u d i o , P C p l a n t . 5 8 5 . 4 5 4 . 4 2 3 0 f . 5 8 5 . 4 5 4 . 4 2 3 7 w w w . p l a n p c . c o m STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a501 WALL SECTIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 1SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 2SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 3 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 [WALL SECTIONS] 1DEEP FOUNDATION (STEEL PILES), SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS & GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. REINFORCED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE CAPS, GRADE BEAMS AND FOUNDATIONS, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTINUOUS, REINFORCED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB-ON-GRADE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTINUOUS, 10-MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER WITH JOINTS LAPPED 6-INCHES MINIMUM AT UNDERSIDE OF ENTIRE SLAB. MINIMUM 10-INCHES COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS, AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. SUITABLE GRANULAR FILL-OR-SUITABLE NATIVE SOIL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. FINISHED GRADE, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS, LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS, AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. 1/2-INCH POLYURETHANE EXPANSION JOINT. UNDERDRAIN FOR STONE MULCH IN SELECT LOCATIONS AT BUILDING PERIMETER, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS. 3 5/8-INCH STANDARD CMU VENEER (BELOW GRADE), GROUT CAVITY SOLID UP TO UNDERSIDE OF WEEP FLASHING. 3-INCH (R-15 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION. 3 5/8-INCH THICK, GROUND FACE CMU VENEER (ABOVE GRADE) WITH EXTERIORAPPLIED CLEAR SEALANT (ABOVE GRADE). INSTALL CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT AT 16-INCHES, O.C., VERTICALLY. INSTALL HB 2-SEAL THERMAL WING-NUT ANCHORS AT 16" O.C., VERTICALLY & 16-INCHES O.C., HORIZONTALLY. 8-INCH HIGH, CONTINUOUS, MASONRY MORTAR NET. MASONRY WEEP HOLES AT 24-INCHES, O.C., MAXIMUM AT VERTICAL JOINTS. INSTALL CONTINUOUS ASPHALT COATED COPPER THROUGH-WALL FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE BELOW WEEPS AND EXTEND UP SHEATHING, 12-INCHES. 1 1/2-INCH (R-7.5 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION. 3-1/2-INCH (R-15.2 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION (ABOVE GRADE MASS WALLS -STAIR B, NORTH AND WEST WALLS). 5/8-INCH DENS ELEMENT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. COLD-FORM METAL STUD FRAMING (CFMF) DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FILL ENTIRE STUD CAVITY WITH R-13 MINIMUM, MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION. R-19 MINIMUM, KRAFT-FACED FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. R-19 MINIMUM, RIGID MINERAL WOOL INSULATION BOARD EQUAL TO ROXUL: CAVITYROCK. FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. 5/8-INCH THICK TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP. PRIME, & PAINT, REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PRE-CAST CONCRETE SILL WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE. SLOPE TOP SURFACE 1/4-INCH PER FOOT, MINIMUM. 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD SILL/JAMB/HEAD BLOCKING, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING. INSTALL FLASHING TAPE AT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING AND OVERLAP SEAMS BETWEEN BLOCKING AND SHEATHING. STEEL LINTEL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. INSTALL ASPHALT-COATED COPPER FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE OVER TOP OF LINTEL AND EXTEND UP SHEATHING, 12-INCHES. COLD-FORM METAL BOX HEADER, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. R-13 MINIMUM, CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE HEADER CAVITY. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM, SEE FINISH PLANS. CONTINUOUS, 0.040-INCH THICK ALUMINUM COPING/FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE, SLOPE AT 1/4" PER FOOT. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANEL RAINSCREEN SYSTEM WITH (DRY-JOINT, ROUT AND RETURN), INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. [NOT USED] [NOT USED] COLD-FORM METAL DEFLECTION TOP TRACK, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TRACK TO STEEL BEAMS WITH COLD-FORM METAL ZFURRING, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. R-13 MINIMUM AT FRAMED WALL LOCATIONS. R-30 MINUMUM AT ENTIRE UNDERSIDE OF EXTERIOR EXPOSED CONCRETE COMPOSITE SLAB. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED, SPRAY APPLIED FIRE PROOFING EQUAL TO "UL P732", SP RE BEAM, TYPICAL AT ALL STEEL BEAMS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTINUOUS, 16-GAUGE MINIMUM, POUR STOP ENTIRE PERIMETER OF SLAB. 2x6 (NOMINAL) PRESSURE-TREATED SOLE PLATE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. RAIN SCREEN CAVITY. 1x4 (NOMINAL) PRESSURE-TREATED SOLID WOOD FURRING/STRAPPING AT 16-INCHES, O.C., VERTICALLY (BEYOND). 5/8-INCH THICK, APA-RATED, STRUCTURE I, EXPOSURE I, SHEATHING PANEL WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER. TAPE ALL SEAMS AND FASTEN PANELS TO STUD FRAMING PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2x2 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD NAILER, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING. ALUMINUM CLAD-WOOD, DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOW ASSEMBLY WITH FIXED TOP SASH, H-50/CW-50 RATED, SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. REPLACE ALL VENT LATCHES WITH MANUFACTURER'S WINDOW OPENING CONTROL DEVICE COMPLYING WITH ASTM F-2090-10. DISABLE TILT-RELEASE FUNCTION AT ALL WINDOWS. WRAP INTERIOR PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, & PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 5/4-INCH (NOMINAL) MDF SILL AND 1x3 (NOMINAL) MDF APRON WITH EASED EDGES, FACTORY PRIMED AND FIELD PAINTED, REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. WINDOW HEADER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. R-13 MINIMUM, CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. SOFFIT WITH 2x SOLID WOOD FLAT STUD FRAMING AND TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING TO ACCOMMODATE HVAC DUCTWORK, SEE CEILING PLANS AND REFER TO HVAC DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTINUOUS, 2x (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD DOUBLE TOP PLATE, SEE STRUCTURAL. CONTINUOUS RIM JOIST / HEADER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 3-INCHES (R-13 MINIMUM) CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION ENTIRE PERIMETER OF BUILDING. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLY, SEE FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY, SEE FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. CONTINUOUS FULLY SELF-ADHERED 40-MIL AIR/VAPOR BARRIER AT ENTIRE ROOF, WRAP OVER PERIMETER WALL FRAMING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2-INCH GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT BOARD. R-30 MINIMUM, POLYISO ROOF INSULATION, SEE ROOF PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3/8-INCH GYPSUM OVERLAYMENT BOARD. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CONTINUOUS FULLY ADHERED, 60-MIL EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING, ENTIRE ROOF, WRAP OVER PERIMETER WALL FRAMING / ROOF CURB. SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM, PREP., PRIME, AND PAINT, SEE FINISHES. FINISH FLOORING, SEE FINISH PLANS. 3-CENTIMETER THICK, NATURAL QUARTZ SILL WITH EASED EDGES, SEE FINISHES. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED, LIGHT WEIGHT COMPOSITE SLAB, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SECHEDULE AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WALL BASE, SEE FINISHES. ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS SEE WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULE. WRAP INTERIOR PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING WITH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, & PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 5/8-INCH TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT, GLAS MAT REINFORCED GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING. LINEAR SOLID WOOD CEILING, SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 20 GA. 3-5/8-INCH METAL STUD KICKERS AT 24-INCHES O.C. MAX. CONTINUOUS EPS CANT STRIP. THERMALLY-BROKEN, ALUMINUM AND GLASS CURTAIN WALL. SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. VENT STRIP. FLUID APPLIED WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (WRB), SEE SPECIFICATIONS. KEYNOTES 50 51 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 28A 59 60 61 20A 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 39 40 38 47 49 17 62 63 A2 A2 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' -0" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" B.O CEILING (5TH FLOOR) 57' -10" A FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 41' -4" FACE OF BLOCK 10 1/2" 8" 1 77 7 7 10 2 2 2'-0"8" 6 6 12 11 8 9 45 52 15 13 14 13 (CHAMFERED SILL BLOCK) 27 28 27 28 a503 2 SIM. a503 2 SIM. 35 17 1 5/8" AIR SPACE 100% SOLID CMU SILL BLOCK CMU LINTEL BLOCK. SEE STRUCTURAL STANDARD CMU STAIR SHAFT, SEE STRUCTURAL WOOD STAIR STRUCTURE ABOVE SECOND FLOOR, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE VAPOR SEPERATION BETWEEN CMU AND WOOD FRAMING 61 28 31 27 62 4647484950 43 45 51 52 31 31 42 63 GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' -0" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" T.O STRUCTURE (2ND FLOOR) 16' -9 1/2" B.O CEILING (GROUND FLOOR) 11' -5" 11 20 GA. 3-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. 16 GA. 1-5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. 18 35 14 GA. 1-7/8" x 4-7/8" x 6" EXTENDED UNI-CLIP (UXRC) RIGID CONNECTION CLIP @ 16" O.C. 28 27 WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH ALUMINUM PANEL COLOR. 27 46 TAPERED ROOF INSULATION, SLOPE TOWARD ROOF DRAIN. 50 EXTEND ROOFING MEMBRANE (OVER TOP OF WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, TAPE SEAM) UP WALL MIN. 6" AND TERMINATE INTO STAINLESS STEEL TERMINATION BAR. ROOF DRAIN, TIE INTO FOUNDATION DRAIN, SEE ROOF PLAN, PLUMBING PLAN, EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 18 WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH CURTAIN WALL COLOR 25 25 61 1 77 77 66 8 4 5 12 3 2 9 52 59 58 31 30 33 18 36 35 28 20 34 52 COMBUSTIBLE NON-COMBUSTIBLE 32 21 1'-6" 58 8" 2" 7'-0" T.O. ROOF COPING 60' -8" T.O ROOF STAIR PENTHOUSE 71' -4" B.O CEILING (5TH FLOOR) 57' -10" +/- 6 1/2" V.I.F. 1 3/4" RETURN EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE UP WALL AND TERMINATE MECHANICALLY. SEE CARLISLE DETAIL 9D 28 35 17 17 63 STANDARD CMU SHAFT, SEE STRUCTURAL 27 62 ROOF SCUPPER, SEE ROOF PLAN AND CARLISLE TYPICAL DETAILS 272x6 WOOD STUD 42 31 43 62 2x4 WOOD STUDS WITH 1/2" PLYWOOD BETWEEN (MATCH THICKNESS OF INSULATION 45 4647484950 45 DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR FRAME, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE 2x SOLID WOOD BLOCKING, CONTINOUS AT ENTIRE OPENING CMU LINTEL BLOCK, SEE STRUCTURAL STAIR STRUCTURE, SEE STRUCTURAL DOOR THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS 2x SOLID WOOD BLOCKING 27 TAPERED ROOF INSULATION WHERE REQUIRED. SLOPE ROOF AWAY FROM STAIR SHAFT AT 1/4" PER 12". SEE ROOF PLAN 241 SF STAIR A A06 234 SF STAIR A A05 8" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a502 WALL SECTIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 2 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 3 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 A2 SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" ARCHITECTURAL METAL PANELS, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS SLOPE SURFACE AT 1/4" PER 12" SLOPE SURFACE AT 1/4" PER 12" WOOD SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER 2x4 WOOD STUDS FACE OF SHEATHING +/- 10 1/2" DOUBLE HUNG WINDOW, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND WINDOW SCHEDULE CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. R-13 MINIMUM CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. R-13 MINIMUM WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH ALUMINUM PANEL COLOR. TAPE SEAM AT WRB TO FLASHING WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH ALUMINUM PANEL COLOR. TAPE SEAM AT WRB TO FLASHING WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH ALUMINUM PANEL COLOR. TAPE SEAM AT WRB TO FLASHING 1'-4" 1'-4" GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' -0" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" T.O STRUCTURE (2ND FLOOR) 16' -9 1/2" 1 15'-6" 6" 3'-0" 3'-6" 17 2 7 6 6 CURBING, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY, SEE LANDSCAPE AND CIVIL DRAWINGS 2 CONCRETE COLUMN BASE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS STRUCTURAL STEEL VCOLUMN WITH 3-HOUR FIREPROOFING, AND EPOXY PAINTED STEEL JACKET, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 32 27 WRAP WITH 0.040 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO MATCH CEILING COLOR 31 30 30 31 28 35 16 25 34 33 COMBUSTIBLE NON-COMBUSTIBLE METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND SPECIFICAITONS. 54 52 36 18 18 6" B 2 a501 INTERIOR PARTITION, SEE INTERIOR PARTITION ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE 2x10 WOOD STUDS 2x6 WOOD STUDS ALIGN EXTERIOR FACE ALIGN INTERIOR FACE 2x6 WOOD STUDS 2x6 WOOD STUDS 2x10 WOOD STUDS ALIGN EXTERIOR FACE 16 A CURTAIN WALL, SEE CURTIAN WALL SCHEDULE CONTINUOUS 0.040-INCH THICK ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE TO MATCH ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS [WALL SECTIONS] 1DEEP FOUNDATION (STEEL PILES), SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS & GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. REINFORCED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE CAPS, GRADE BEAMS AND FOUNDATIONS, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTINUOUS, REINFORCED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB-ON-GRADE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTINUOUS, 10-MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER WITH JOINTS LAPPED 6-INCHES MINIMUM AT UNDERSIDE OF ENTIRE SLAB. MINIMUM 10-INCHES COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, ASSD SYSTEM DRAWINGS, AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. SUITABLE GRANULAR FILL-OR-SUITABLE NATIVE SOIL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. FINISHED GRADE, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS, LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS, AND GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. 1/2-INCH POLYURETHANE EXPANSION JOINT. UNDERDRAIN FOR STONE MULCH IN SELECT LOCATIONS AT BUILDING PERIMETER, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS. 3 5/8-INCH STANDARD CMU VENEER (BELOW GRADE), GROUT CAVITY SOLID UP TO UNDERSIDE OF WEEP FLASHING. 3-INCH (R-15 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION. 3 5/8-INCH THICK, GROUND FACE CMU VENEER (ABOVE GRADE) WITH EXTERIORAPPLIED CLEAR SEALANT (ABOVE GRADE). INSTALL CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT AT 16-INCHES, O.C., VERTICALLY. INSTALL HB 2-SEAL THERMAL WING-NUT ANCHORS AT 16" O.C., VERTICALLY & 16-INCHES O.C., HORIZONTALLY. 8-INCH HIGH, CONTINUOUS, MASONRY MORTAR NET. MASONRY WEEP HOLES AT 24-INCHES, O.C., MAXIMUM AT VERTICAL JOINTS. INSTALL CONTINUOUS ASPHALT COATED COPPER THROUGH-WALL FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE BELOW WEEPS AND EXTEND UP SHEATHING, 12-INCHES. 1 1/2-INCH (R-7.5 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION. 3-1/2-INCH (R-15.2 MINIMUM) CONTINUOUS XPS RIGID INSULATION (ABOVE GRADE MASS WALLS -STAIR B, NORTH AND WEST WALLS). 5/8-INCH DENS ELEMENT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. COLD-FORM METAL STUD FRAMING (CFMF) DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FILL ENTIRE STUD CAVITY WITH R-13 MINIMUM, MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION. R-19 MINIMUM, KRAFT-FACED FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. R-19 MINIMUM, RIGID MINERAL WOOL INSULATION BOARD EQUAL TO ROXUL: CAVITYROCK. FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. 5/8-INCH THICK TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP. PRIME, & PAINT, REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PRE-CAST CONCRETE SILL WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE. SLOPE TOP SURFACE 1/4-INCH PER FOOT, MINIMUM. 2x6 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD SILL/JAMB/HEAD BLOCKING, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING. INSTALL FLASHING TAPE AT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING AND OVERLAP SEAMS BETWEEN BLOCKING AND SHEATHING. STEEL LINTEL, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. INSTALL ASPHALT-COATED COPPER FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE OVER TOP OF LINTEL AND EXTEND UP SHEATHING, 12-INCHES. COLD-FORM METAL BOX HEADER, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. R-13 MINIMUM, CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE HEADER CAVITY. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM, SEE FINISH PLANS. CONTINUOUS, 0.040-INCH THICK ALUMINUM COPING/FLASHING WITH INTEGRAL DRIP EDGE, SLOPE AT 1/4" PER FOOT. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WALL PANEL RAINSCREEN SYSTEM WITH (DRY-JOINT, ROUT AND RETURN), INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. [NOT USED] [NOT USED] COLD-FORM METAL DEFLECTION TOP TRACK, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ATTACH TRACK TO STEEL BEAMS WITH COLD-FORM METAL ZFURRING, DESIGNED BY A NYS LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY METAL STUD MANUFACTUER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. R-13 MINIMUM AT FRAMED WALL LOCATIONS. R-30 MINUMUM AT ENTIRE UNDERSIDE OF EXTERIOR EXPOSED CONCRETE COMPOSITE SLAB. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED, SPRAY APPLIED FIRE PROOFING EQUAL TO "UL P732", SP RE BEAM, TYPICAL AT ALL STEEL BEAMS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTINUOUS, 16-GAUGE MINIMUM, POUR STOP ENTIRE PERIMETER OF SLAB. 2x6 (NOMINAL) PRESSURE-TREATED SOLE PLATE, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. RAIN SCREEN CAVITY. 1x4 (NOMINAL) PRESSURE-TREATED SOLID WOOD FURRING/STRAPPING AT 16-INCHES, O.C., VERTICALLY (BEYOND). 5/8-INCH THICK, APA-RATED, STRUCTURE I, EXPOSURE I, SHEATHING PANEL WITH INTEGRAL WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER. TAPE ALL SEAMS AND FASTEN PANELS TO STUD FRAMING PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2x2 (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD NAILER, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING. ALUMINUM CLAD-WOOD, DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOW ASSEMBLY WITH FIXED TOP SASH, H-50/CW-50 RATED, SEE WINDOW SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. REPLACE ALL VENT LATCHES WITH MANUFACTURER'S WINDOW OPENING CONTROL DEVICE COMPLYING WITH ASTM F-2090-10. DISABLE TILT-RELEASE FUNCTION AT ALL WINDOWS. WRAP INTERIOR PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING WITH 5/8-INCH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, & PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 5/4-INCH (NOMINAL) MDF SILL AND 1x3 (NOMINAL) MDF APRON WITH EASED EDGES, FACTORY PRIMED AND FIELD PAINTED, REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. WINDOW HEADER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. R-13 MINIMUM, CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION, FILL ENTIRE CAVITY. SOFFIT WITH 2x SOLID WOOD FLAT STUD FRAMING AND TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING TO ACCOMMODATE HVAC DUCTWORK, SEE CEILING PLANS AND REFER TO HVAC DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONTINUOUS, 2x (NOMINAL) SOLID WOOD DOUBLE TOP PLATE, SEE STRUCTURAL. CONTINUOUS RIM JOIST / HEADER, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE 3-INCHES (R-13 MINIMUM) CLOSED CELL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION ENTIRE PERIMETER OF BUILDING. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLY, SEE FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. 1-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY, SEE FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE. CONTINUOUS FULLY SELF-ADHERED 40-MIL AIR/VAPOR BARRIER AT ENTIRE ROOF, WRAP OVER PERIMETER WALL FRAMING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2-INCH GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT BOARD. R-30 MINIMUM, POLYISO ROOF INSULATION, SEE ROOF PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3/8-INCH GYPSUM OVERLAYMENT BOARD. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CONTINUOUS FULLY ADHERED, 60-MIL EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING, ENTIRE ROOF, WRAP OVER PERIMETER WALL FRAMING / ROOF CURB. SUSPENDED TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM, PREP., PRIME, AND PAINT, SEE FINISHES. FINISH FLOORING, SEE FINISH PLANS. 3-CENTIMETER THICK, NATURAL QUARTZ SILL WITH EASED EDGES, SEE FINISHES. 3-HOUR FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED, LIGHT WEIGHT COMPOSITE SLAB, SEE FIRE-RATED FLOOR/CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLY SECHEDULE AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. WALL BASE, SEE FINISHES. ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS SEE WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULE. WRAP INTERIOR PERIMETER OF ROUGH OPENING WITH TYPE-X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, & PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 5/8-INCH TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD RESISTANT, GLAS MAT REINFORCED GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING. LINEAR SOLID WOOD CEILING, SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 20 GA. 3-5/8-INCH METAL STUD KICKERS AT 24-INCHES O.C. MAX. CONTINUOUS EPS CANT STRIP. THERMALLY-BROKEN, ALUMINUM AND GLASS CURTAIN WALL. SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS. VENT STRIP. FLUID APPLIED WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (WRB), SEE SPECIFICATIONS. KEYNOTES 50 51 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 28A 59 60 61 20A 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 39 40 38 47 49 17 62 63 A2 A2 1 1/2"AIR SPACE 1 5/8" AIR SPACE 3-1/2-INCH (R-15.2 MINIMUM) RIGID INSULATION ALIGN CMU VENEER BLOCK AT CMU WALL ASSEMBLY AND METAL STUD WALL ASSEMBLY, AIR SPACE VARIES, SEE DETAILS 1-1/2-INCH (R-7.5 MINIMUM) RIGID INSULATION CMU PILASTER, SEE STRUCTURAL CMU ENCLOSURE, SEE STRUCTURAL, PAINT, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FLUID APPLIED WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (WRB), SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WRAP WRB AROUND METAL STUDS FOR SEAMLESS INTEGRATION TO GYPUSM BOARD SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WRB. GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING WITH INTEGRAL WRB, SEE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 a503 2'-4" 2'-2" 2X6 WOOD STUD 3/4" PLYWOOD 5 1/2" ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATION 2X6 WOOD STUD SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" F SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" FRAMED OPENING 2'-8" 2'-5" 1" 3" 2x6 WOOD STUDS 5 1/2" ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATION 3/4" PLYWOOD 2x6 WOOD STUDS plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a503 DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 2SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 3 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" PLAN DETAIL 6 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" PLAN DETAIL 5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" PLAN DETAIL 4 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 1 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a504 DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 W W W W W W D D D D D D 313 SF COMMON LAUNDRY 017 53 SF MEN'S TOILET 016 57 SF WOMEN'S TOILET 015 a600 2A 2B 2C a600 2G 2F 2E 2H 2D 3'-0" 7'-9 1/4"7'-2 3/4" 7'-2 1/2" 7'-2 1/2" 24'-1 1/2" 11'-10 1/4" MAILBOXES 4'-0 1/4"10'-9 1/4"1'-4" 7'-10" 17 ALIGN WATER CLOSET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS WALL-MOUNTED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL [SAFETY] GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED MIRROR / RECESSED MEDICINE CABINET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. LAVATORY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROLS, SEE PLUMBING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2" MAX. THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CONTROL LOCATION AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER & WALL-MOUNTED CONTROLS [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [BACK WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL HOOK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL BAR, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED ELECTRIC HAND DRYER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIXED SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. REMOVABLE SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CORNER GUARD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. HIGH & LOW COAT HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 12C 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 FIXTURE / ACCESSORY LEGEND 3' - 0" MIN. 3' - 0" MAX. MIN. 1' - 5" 1 2 3 3 2' - 0"1' - 0" MAX. 1' - 6" 3' - 5" MAX. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 1' - 0" MIN. 3' - 6" 33" MAX. MIN. 1 1/2" 1' - 6" MIN. 3' - 6" MAX. 2' - 0" MIN. 2 1 5 4 2' - 10" MAX. 3' - 4" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. 7 8 66 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE SHOWN, FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES AND APPARATUSES, ETC., SHALL BE MOUNTED PER THE CURRENT ICC A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USEABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES. 2. INSTALL SOILD BLOCKING THROUGH ALL WALLS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, APPARATUSES, ETC., COMPLETE. 3. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLIES AND FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH FIRE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL AND / OR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY. MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM MIN. DEPTH 1' - 5" 2' - 6" MIN. 2' - 10" MAX. KNEE CLEARACE 8" MIN. MIN. 9" TOE CLEARANCE 6" MAX. 8 2' - 6" MIN. MAX. 2' - 0" MAX. 6" 10 2 9 12A 6' - 8" 9 4' - 0" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. MAX. 6" SEAT 1' - 7" MAX. 5' - 0" MIN. MAX. 1' - 4" 3' - 1" MIN. MIN. 1' - 4" 2' - 3" MAX. 12B12C SEAT MAX. 1' - 7" 2' - 6" MIN. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" FOR EXACT WIDTH SEE FLOOR PLANS 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" [HIGH] [LOW] 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 18 19 4" MAX. 3 3'-0" MAX. 6" MAX. 3'-0" MAX. KEYNOTES[ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION] 1INSTALL PVC THERMAL PIPE WRAP AT ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP.. BASE CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE TYP., SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. FINISH ALL EXPOSED CABINETRY END PANELS, TOE-KICKS, VALENCES/APRONS, TO MATCH FINISH OF CABINETRY. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL. 45 DEGREE COUNTERTOP GUSSET SUPPORT AT ROLL UNDER COUNTERTOP. GUSSET SHALL MATCH CABINETRY FINSH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. CABINETRY END PANEL; MATCH CABINETRY FINISH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. LAZY SUSAN TURNTABLE CORNER BASE CABINET. 45-DEGREE ANGLED CORNER UPPER CABINET. FULL HEIGHT CABINET TO ACCOMMODATE RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE & ASSOCIATED TRIM KIT, SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRAL BACK-SPLASH (EXCEPT AT COMMUNITY KITCHEN), TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE WITH INTEGRAL TRIM KIT, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. SLIDE-IN RANGE, THIS LOCATION, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED RANGE HOOD, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICES AT UNDERSIDE OF RANGE HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SINK FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE, AND SPECS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. WALL BASE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CERAMIC WALL TILE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. INSTALL ALL CERAMIC TILE TRIM INCLUDING: BULLNOSE TOP COURSE, BULLNOSE OUTSIDE CORNERS, & COVE BASE. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL #D20P2 (TYP. OF (2)) AND MODEL #S9P1 (TYP. OF (1)). FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. FREE-STANDING TRASH RECEPTACLE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE & INSTALL PREFABRICATED ROLL-IN SHOWER, WITH REMOVABLE SHOWER SEAT, SEE TOILET ROOM MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INSTALL FIXED SHOWER HEAD ABOVE SHOWER/BATHTUB ASSEMBLY, THIS WALL. GRAB BARS, PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL FOR FUTURE GRAB BARS INSTALLATION. PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH/LOW SHELVES (PAINT) AND CLOSET RODS, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH SHELF (PAINT) AND CLOSET ROD, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE VINYL-COATED WIRE SHELVING, MIN. 3 SHELVES PER CLOSET. PROVIDE & INSTALL REMOTE SWITCHES FOR RANGE HOOD FAN & LIGHT, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SWITCH COVER PLATE COLOR FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. INSIDE CABINET ABOVE KITCHEN RANGE HOOD, PROVIDE 'BOXED-OUT' ENCLOSURE AT RANGE HOOD DUCT. REMAINDER OF CABINET SHALL BE USABLE. DUCT ENCLOSURE SHALL MATCH THE CABINET BOX WOOD SPECIES AND FINISH. CERAMIC WALL TILE (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES). SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN IN 38 APARTMENTS, COMMUNITY KITCHEN AND STAFF BREAK ROOM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT (8-FEET HIGH) FIBER REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) EQUAL TO MARLITE STANDARD FRP PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED FROM MANUFACTURERS FULL RANGE BY ARCHITECT. PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS, SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21B 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 7A 21A 27 28 29 2A 2B +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 13 18 16 27 (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES) +/- 5'-3 3/4" +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 3 2 4 1 13 21A 27 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 1 8 6 2 3 4 7 13 1 21A 27 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 8 6 15 13 1 27 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 1 8 6 2 3 4 7 15 13 1 21A 27 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 3 2 4 1 5 16 13 21A 27 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 16 13 18 27 8 6 15 13 1 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 27 (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES) +/- 5'-3 3/4" 206 SF COMMUNITY KITCHEN 013a600 1B 14'-5 1/4" 193 SF STAFF BREAK ROOM 014 a600 1A 12'-1 1/4" 14'-5 1/4" 1'-0" 9'-6"+/- 1'-11" 28 12'-7 1/4" 29 2A 1 2 2 2 15 14 25 10 MIN. 2'-4" 2'-0" 5'-10 3/4" 2'-6" 2'-6" 9" +/-2" V.I.F. +/-2" V.I.F.9"2'-6"2'-6"2'-6"3'-6" 2'-6" 1'-10" MAX. 2'-10" 1'-3" 5'-11" 5'-6" HOLD 7'-2" DW 8 a610 2829 2B +/-1'-11" V.I.F. 12 2 2 16 7 15 14 5'-11"1'-3" MAX. 2'-10"1'-10"2'-6" 1'-6"3'-0"2'-6"2'-6"3'-0" 4" MIN. 2'-4" 4'-6"2'-6"2'-6"3'-0" 7'-2" 1 a610 28 2A plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a600 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ENLARGED COMMUNITY LAUNDRY AND BATHROOMS 2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2BSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2CSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2D SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2ESCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2FSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2GSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2H N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ENLARGED COMMUNITY KITCHEN PLAN 1SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1B N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1A SIM. ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 A2 1 a610 2 a610 MAX. 2'-10"1'-10"2'-6" 5'-11" 7'-2" 1'-3" 1'-0"1'-0"2'-6" 3'-0" 3'-0" 2'-6" 1'-0" 3 2 7 25 14 26 11 613 10 4 15 5'-5" HOLD 4" MIN. 2'-4" 2B 4'-8" 2'-0"3'-6"1'-0" 3 a610 2'-6" MAX 2'-10"1'-10"2'-6" 1'-0" 2'-0" 1'-0" DW 1 224 11 14 3 12 613 15 4" MIN. 2'-4" 2B a6011A 1B a601 1F 1E 1D 1C 4 3 3 4 3A 3 3 33 3 3B 4 9'-1" 4'-8"6'-5" 2'-0" 9'-6 1/4"3'-6" 2'-0"5'-8 1/4" 3'-0" 2'-6" 8'-11"5'-0" 5'-8"3'-0"4'-0"15'-5 3/4" 8"2'-1" 3'-5 1/4" 2'-0" 11'-6 1/4" 11'-6"11'-6" 14'-4 1/2" 22 24 24 8'-6" 6'-5" 5'-3" LIVING ROOM BEDROOM KITCHEN COATS LIN. CLOSET STORAGE BATH MECH. ENTRY6'-5" 3B 28 1 2 3 4 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 15 21A 2 9 12A 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 14 20 19 15 14 14 3 12B 9 11 4 a610 8 6 13 20 13 19 1 14 15 3 MAX. 2'-10" 1 3 2 12C 4 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 19 10 15 21A WATER CLOSET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS WALL-MOUNTED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL [SAFETY] GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED MIRROR / RECESSED MEDICINE CABINET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. LAVATORY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROLS, SEE PLUMBING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2" MAX. THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CONTROL LOCATION AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER & WALL-MOUNTED CONTROLS [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [BACK WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL HOOK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL BAR, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED ELECTRIC HAND DRYER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIXED SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. REMOVABLE SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CORNER GUARD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. HIGH & LOW COAT HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 12C 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 FIXTURE / ACCESSORY LEGEND 3' - 0" MIN. 3' - 0" MAX. MIN. 1' - 5" 1 2 3 3 2' - 0"1' - 0" MAX. 1' - 6" 3' - 5" MAX. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 1' - 0" MIN. 3' - 6" 33" MAX. MIN. 1 1/2" 1' - 6" MIN. 3' - 6" MAX. 2' - 0" MIN. 2 1 5 4 2' - 10" MAX. 3' - 4" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. 7 8 66 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE SHOWN, FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES AND APPARATUSES, ETC., SHALL BE MOUNTED PER THE CURRENT ICC A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USEABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES. 2. INSTALL SOILD BLOCKING THROUGH ALL WALLS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, APPARATUSES, ETC., COMPLETE. 3. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLIES AND FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH FIRE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL AND / OR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY. MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM MIN. DEPTH 1' - 5" 2' - 6" MIN. 2' - 10" MAX. KNEE CLEARACE 8" MIN. MIN. 9" TOE CLEARANCE 6" MAX. 8 2' - 6" MIN. MAX. 2' - 0" MAX. 6" 10 2 9 12A 6' - 8" 9 4' - 0" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. MAX. 6" SEAT 1' - 7" MAX. 5' - 0" MIN. MAX. 1' - 4" 3' - 1" MIN. MIN. 1' - 4" 2' - 3" MAX. 12B12C SEAT MAX. 1' - 7" 2' - 6" MIN. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" FOR EXACT WIDTH SEE FLOOR PLANS 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" [HIGH] [LOW] 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 18 19 4" MAX. 3 3'-0" MAX. 6" MAX. 3'-0" MAX. KEYNOTES[ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION] 1INSTALL PVC THERMAL PIPE WRAP AT ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP.. BASE CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE TYP., SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. FINISH ALL EXPOSED CABINETRY END PANELS, TOE-KICKS, VALENCES/APRONS, TO MATCH FINISH OF CABINETRY. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL. 45 DEGREE COUNTERTOP GUSSET SUPPORT AT ROLL UNDER COUNTERTOP. GUSSET SHALL MATCH CABINETRY FINSH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. CABINETRY END PANEL; MATCH CABINETRY FINISH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. LAZY SUSAN TURNTABLE CORNER BASE CABINET. 45-DEGREE ANGLED CORNER UPPER CABINET. FULL HEIGHT CABINET TO ACCOMMODATE RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE & ASSOCIATED TRIM KIT, SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRAL BACK-SPLASH (EXCEPT AT COMMUNITY KITCHEN), TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE WITH INTEGRAL TRIM KIT, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. SLIDE-IN RANGE, THIS LOCATION, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED RANGE HOOD, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICES AT UNDERSIDE OF RANGE HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SINK FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE, AND SPECS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. WALL BASE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CERAMIC WALL TILE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. INSTALL ALL CERAMIC TILE TRIM INCLUDING: BULLNOSE TOP COURSE, BULLNOSE OUTSIDE CORNERS, & COVE BASE. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL #D20P2 (TYP. OF (2)) AND MODEL #S9P1 (TYP. OF (1)). FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. FREE-STANDING TRASH RECEPTACLE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE & INSTALL PREFABRICATED ROLL-IN SHOWER, WITH REMOVABLE SHOWER SEAT, SEE TOILET ROOM MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INSTALL FIXED SHOWER HEAD ABOVE SHOWER/BATHTUB ASSEMBLY, THIS WALL. GRAB BARS, PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL FOR FUTURE GRAB BARS INSTALLATION. PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH/LOW SHELVES (PAINT) AND CLOSET RODS, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH SHELF (PAINT) AND CLOSET ROD, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE VINYL-COATED WIRE SHELVING, MIN. 3 SHELVES PER CLOSET. PROVIDE & INSTALL REMOTE SWITCHES FOR RANGE HOOD FAN & LIGHT, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SWITCH COVER PLATE COLOR FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. INSIDE CABINET ABOVE KITCHEN RANGE HOOD, PROVIDE 'BOXED-OUT' ENCLOSURE AT RANGE HOOD DUCT. REMAINDER OF CABINET SHALL BE USABLE. DUCT ENCLOSURE SHALL MATCH THE CABINET BOX WOOD SPECIES AND FINISH. CERAMIC WALL TILE (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES). SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN IN 38 APARTMENTS, COMMUNITY KITCHEN AND STAFF BREAK ROOM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT (8-FEET HIGH) FIBER REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) EQUAL TO MARLITE STANDARD FRP PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED FROM MANUFACTURERS FULL RANGE BY ARCHITECT. PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS, SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21B 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 7A 21A 27 28 29 2A 2B plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a601 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 1) 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1B SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" UNIT TYPE 1 -ENLARGED PLAN 1SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1F SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1E SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1D SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1C N NOTE: TYPE 1A UNITS ON GROUND FLOOR SHALL BE NON COMBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION. ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A/V A2 a602 1F 1E 1C 1D a602 1A 1B 3 3 4 3A 3 4 3 3 3B 3B 4 33 3 11'-6 1/4"2'-0"5'-3" 3'-5 1/4" 9'-0" 4'-0" 13'-7" 11'-6" 11'-6" 14'-4 1/4"3'-6"8'-10 1/4" 4'-8"6'-5"2'-0" 2'-0" 8" 2'-1" 4'-0"3'-0"5'-0" 9'-1" 2324 8'-6" 6'-5" 23 6'-5" LIVING ROOM KITCHEN ENTRY BEDROOM STORAGE COATSLIN.CLOSET BATH MECH. 28 WATER CLOSET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS WALL-MOUNTED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL [SAFETY] GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED MIRROR / RECESSED MEDICINE CABINET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. LAVATORY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROLS, SEE PLUMBING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2" MAX. THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CONTROL LOCATION AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER & WALL-MOUNTED CONTROLS [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [BACK WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL HOOK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL BAR, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED ELECTRIC HAND DRYER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIXED SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. REMOVABLE SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CORNER GUARD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. HIGH & LOW COAT HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 12C 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 FIXTURE / ACCESSORY LEGEND 3' - 0" MIN. 3' - 0" MAX. MIN. 1' - 5" 1 2 3 3 2' - 0"1' - 0" MAX. 1' - 6" 3' - 5" MAX. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 1' - 0" MIN. 3' - 6" 33" MAX. MIN. 1 1/2" 1' - 6" MIN. 3' - 6" MAX. 2' - 0" MIN. 2 1 5 4 2' - 10" MAX. 3' - 4" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. 7 8 66 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE SHOWN, FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES AND APPARATUSES, ETC., SHALL BE MOUNTED PER THE CURRENT ICC A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USEABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES. 2. INSTALL SOILD BLOCKING THROUGH ALL WALLS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, APPARATUSES, ETC., COMPLETE. 3. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLIES AND FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH FIRE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL AND / OR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY. MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM MIN. DEPTH 1' - 5" 2' - 6" MIN. 2' - 10" MAX. KNEE CLEARACE 8" MIN. MIN. 9" TOE CLEARANCE 6" MAX. 8 2' - 6" MIN. MAX. 2' - 0" MAX. 6" 10 2 9 12A 6' - 8" 9 4' - 0" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. MAX. 6" SEAT 1' - 7" MAX. 5' - 0" MIN. MAX. 1' - 4" 3' - 1" MIN. MIN. 1' - 4" 2' - 3" MAX. 12B12C SEAT MAX. 1' - 7" 2' - 6" MIN. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" FOR EXACT WIDTH SEE FLOOR PLANS 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" [HIGH] [LOW] 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 18 19 4" MAX. 3 3'-0" MAX. 6" MAX. 3'-0" MAX. KEYNOTES[ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION] 1INSTALL PVC THERMAL PIPE WRAP AT ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP.. BASE CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE TYP., SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. FINISH ALL EXPOSED CABINETRY END PANELS, TOE-KICKS, VALENCES/APRONS, TO MATCH FINISH OF CABINETRY. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL. 45 DEGREE COUNTERTOP GUSSET SUPPORT AT ROLL UNDER COUNTERTOP. GUSSET SHALL MATCH CABINETRY FINSH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. CABINETRY END PANEL; MATCH CABINETRY FINISH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. LAZY SUSAN TURNTABLE CORNER BASE CABINET. 45-DEGREE ANGLED CORNER UPPER CABINET. FULL HEIGHT CABINET TO ACCOMMODATE RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE & ASSOCIATED TRIM KIT, SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRAL BACK-SPLASH (EXCEPT AT COMMUNITY KITCHEN), TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE WITH INTEGRAL TRIM KIT, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. SLIDE-IN RANGE, THIS LOCATION, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED RANGE HOOD, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICES AT UNDERSIDE OF RANGE HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SINK FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE, AND SPECS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. WALL BASE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CERAMIC WALL TILE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. INSTALL ALL CERAMIC TILE TRIM INCLUDING: BULLNOSE TOP COURSE, BULLNOSE OUTSIDE CORNERS, & COVE BASE. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL #D20P2 (TYP. OF (2)) AND MODEL #S9P1 (TYP. OF (1)). FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. FREE-STANDING TRASH RECEPTACLE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE & INSTALL PREFABRICATED ROLL-IN SHOWER, WITH REMOVABLE SHOWER SEAT, SEE TOILET ROOM MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INSTALL FIXED SHOWER HEAD ABOVE SHOWER/BATHTUB ASSEMBLY, THIS WALL. GRAB BARS, PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL FOR FUTURE GRAB BARS INSTALLATION. PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH/LOW SHELVES (PAINT) AND CLOSET RODS, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH SHELF (PAINT) AND CLOSET ROD, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE VINYL-COATED WIRE SHELVING, MIN. 3 SHELVES PER CLOSET. PROVIDE & INSTALL REMOTE SWITCHES FOR RANGE HOOD FAN & LIGHT, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SWITCH COVER PLATE COLOR FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. INSIDE CABINET ABOVE KITCHEN RANGE HOOD, PROVIDE 'BOXED-OUT' ENCLOSURE AT RANGE HOOD DUCT. REMAINDER OF CABINET SHALL BE USABLE. DUCT ENCLOSURE SHALL MATCH THE CABINET BOX WOOD SPECIES AND FINISH. CERAMIC WALL TILE (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES). SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN IN 38 APARTMENTS, COMMUNITY KITCHEN AND STAFF BREAK ROOM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT (8-FEET HIGH) FIBER REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) EQUAL TO MARLITE STANDARD FRP PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED FROM MANUFACTURERS FULL RANGE BY ARCHITECT. PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS, SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21B 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 7A 21A 27 28 29 2A 2B 1 4 12C 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 21B19 14 13 10 2'-9 3/4" V.I.F. 15 9 12A 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 14 20 13 13 19 15 14 14 3 14 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 15 21B 9 12B 11 4 a610 6 8 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 14 19 20 1 13 13 15 3 MAX. 2'-10" 3'-0"3'-0"2'-6"1'-0" 3'-0"3'-0"2'-6"1'-0"1'-0" 5'-11"1'-3" 3'-0"1'-8"2'-6" 7'-2" 6 a610 5 a610 7 224 3 10 2 14 11 13 26 6 15 5'-5" HOLD 4" 3'-6"2'-0" 1'-0" 3'-0" 1'-8"2'-6" + / - 3" V.I.F. 1'-0"2'-0" + / - 3" V.I.F. 7 a610 7'-2" DW 14 13 6 22 4 32 12 4" 3'-0" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a602 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 2) 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" UNIT TYPE 2 -ENLARGED PLAN 1SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1CSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1ESCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1F SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1D SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1B N SIM. NOTE: TYPE 2A UNITS ON GROUND FLOOR SHALL BE NON COMBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION. ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 WATER CLOSET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS WALL-MOUNTED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL [SAFETY] GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED MIRROR / RECESSED MEDICINE CABINET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. LAVATORY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROLS, SEE PLUMBING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2" MAX. THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CONTROL LOCATION AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER & WALL-MOUNTED CONTROLS [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [BACK WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL HOOK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL BAR, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED ELECTRIC HAND DRYER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIXED SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. REMOVABLE SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CORNER GUARD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. HIGH & LOW COAT HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 12C 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 FIXTURE / ACCESSORY LEGEND 3' - 0" MIN. 3' - 0" MAX. MIN. 1' - 5" 1 2 3 3 2' - 0"1' - 0" MAX. 1' - 6" 3' - 5" MAX. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 1' - 0" MIN. 3' - 6" 33" MAX. MIN. 1 1/2" 1' - 6" MIN. 3' - 6" MAX. 2' - 0" MIN. 2 1 5 4 2' - 10" MAX. 3' - 4" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. 7 8 66 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE SHOWN, FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES AND APPARATUSES, ETC., SHALL BE MOUNTED PER THE CURRENT ICC A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USEABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES. 2. INSTALL SOILD BLOCKING THROUGH ALL WALLS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, APPARATUSES, ETC., COMPLETE. 3. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLIES AND FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH FIRE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL AND / OR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY. MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM MIN. DEPTH 1' - 5" 2' - 6" MIN. 2' - 10" MAX. KNEE CLEARACE 8" MIN. MIN. 9" TOE CLEARANCE 6" MAX. 8 2' - 6" MIN. MAX. 2' - 0" MAX. 6" 10 2 9 12A 6' - 8" 9 4' - 0" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. MAX. 6" SEAT 1' - 7" MAX. 5' - 0" MIN. MAX. 1' - 4" 3' - 1" MIN. MIN. 1' - 4" 2' - 3" MAX. 12B12C SEAT MAX. 1' - 7" 2' - 6" MIN. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" FOR EXACT WIDTH SEE FLOOR PLANS 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" [HIGH] [LOW] 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 18 19 4" MAX. 3 3'-0" MAX. 6" MAX. 3'-0" MAX. KEYNOTES[ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION] 1INSTALL PVC THERMAL PIPE WRAP AT ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP.. BASE CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE TYP., SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. FINISH ALL EXPOSED CABINETRY END PANELS, TOE-KICKS, VALENCES/APRONS, TO MATCH FINISH OF CABINETRY. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL. 45 DEGREE COUNTERTOP GUSSET SUPPORT AT ROLL UNDER COUNTERTOP. GUSSET SHALL MATCH CABINETRY FINSH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. CABINETRY END PANEL; MATCH CABINETRY FINISH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. LAZY SUSAN TURNTABLE CORNER BASE CABINET. 45-DEGREE ANGLED CORNER UPPER CABINET. FULL HEIGHT CABINET TO ACCOMMODATE RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE & ASSOCIATED TRIM KIT, SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRAL BACK-SPLASH (EXCEPT AT COMMUNITY KITCHEN), TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE WITH INTEGRAL TRIM KIT, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. SLIDE-IN RANGE, THIS LOCATION, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED RANGE HOOD, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICES AT UNDERSIDE OF RANGE HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SINK FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE, AND SPECS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. WALL BASE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CERAMIC WALL TILE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. INSTALL ALL CERAMIC TILE TRIM INCLUDING: BULLNOSE TOP COURSE, BULLNOSE OUTSIDE CORNERS, & COVE BASE. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL #D20P2 (TYP. OF (2)) AND MODEL #S9P1 (TYP. OF (1)). FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. FREE-STANDING TRASH RECEPTACLE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE & INSTALL PREFABRICATED ROLL-IN SHOWER, WITH REMOVABLE SHOWER SEAT, SEE TOILET ROOM MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INSTALL FIXED SHOWER HEAD ABOVE SHOWER/BATHTUB ASSEMBLY, THIS WALL. GRAB BARS, PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL FOR FUTURE GRAB BARS INSTALLATION. PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH/LOW SHELVES (PAINT) AND CLOSET RODS, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH SHELF (PAINT) AND CLOSET ROD, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE VINYL-COATED WIRE SHELVING, MIN. 3 SHELVES PER CLOSET. PROVIDE & INSTALL REMOTE SWITCHES FOR RANGE HOOD FAN & LIGHT, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SWITCH COVER PLATE COLOR FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. INSIDE CABINET ABOVE KITCHEN RANGE HOOD, PROVIDE 'BOXED-OUT' ENCLOSURE AT RANGE HOOD DUCT. REMAINDER OF CABINET SHALL BE USABLE. DUCT ENCLOSURE SHALL MATCH THE CABINET BOX WOOD SPECIES AND FINISH. CERAMIC WALL TILE (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES). SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN IN 38 APARTMENTS, COMMUNITY KITCHEN AND STAFF BREAK ROOM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT (8-FEET HIGH) FIBER REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) EQUAL TO MARLITE STANDARD FRP PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED FROM MANUFACTURERS FULL RANGE BY ARCHITECT. PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS, SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21B 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 7A 21A 27 28 29 2A 2B a603 1A 1B a603 1C 1F 1E 1D HOLD 11'-6" 2'-0" 4 4 3A 3 3B 3B 3 3 3 3 3 2'-0" 3'-0" CLEAR 2'-0" CLEAR 2'-0" 8'-9" 9'-0" 3 3 3 4'-0" H O L D 8'-6" 5'-3" 8"2'-1" 4'-4 3/4" 4'-8" 3'-6" 10'-3 1/2" 4'-8" CLEAR 4'-10" 16'-1 3/4" 3'-4 1/4"4'-8" 9 1/2" 9'-6" 4'-10 1/4" 2'-6" 11'-11 3/4" 23 24 23 6'-5" 6'-5" KITCHEN LIVING ROOM BATH STORAGE ENTRY BEDROOM MECH. LIN. COATS CLOSET 28 3'-0" 3'-0" 2'-6" 1'-0" 1'-3" 7'-2" 3'-0"1'-8"2'-6" 5'-11" 1'-0"1'-0"2'-6"3'-0"3'-0" 5 a610 6 a610 14 13 6 4 3102 11 262 2 7 15 5'-5" HOLD 4" DW 1'-0" +/- 3" V.I.F. 3'-0" 2'-0" 7'-2" 3'-0"1'-8"2'-6" 2'-0"3'-6"1'-0"1'-0" 7 a610 13 6 3 2 12 4 2 2 14 4" 1 12C 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 10 14 13 19 15 21B 1 4 9'-2 3/4"V.I.F. 21B 13 15 9 12A 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 14 20 19 13 15 14 14 3A2 8 6 9 4 a610 13 12B 11 20 13 14 1 19 15 3 M A X . 2'-10" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a603 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 3) 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" UNIT TYPE 3 -ENLARGED PLAN 1 N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1B SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1CSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1F SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1E SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1D SIM. ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 WATER CLOSET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS WALL-MOUNTED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL [SAFETY] GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED MIRROR / RECESSED MEDICINE CABINET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. LAVATORY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROLS, SEE PLUMBING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2" MAX. THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CONTROL LOCATION AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER & WALL-MOUNTED CONTROLS [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [BACK WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL HOOK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL BAR, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED ELECTRIC HAND DRYER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIXED SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. REMOVABLE SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CORNER GUARD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. HIGH & LOW COAT HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 12C 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 FIXTURE / ACCESSORY LEGEND 3' - 0" MIN. 3' - 0" MAX. MIN. 1' - 5" 1 2 3 3 2' - 0"1' - 0" MAX. 1' - 6" 3' - 5" MAX. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 1' - 0" MIN. 3' - 6" 33" MAX. MIN. 1 1/2" 1' - 6" MIN. 3' - 6" MAX. 2' - 0" MIN. 2 1 5 4 2' - 10" MAX. 3' - 4" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. 7 8 66 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE SHOWN, FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES AND APPARATUSES, ETC., SHALL BE MOUNTED PER THE CURRENT ICC A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USEABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES. 2. INSTALL SOILD BLOCKING THROUGH ALL WALLS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, APPARATUSES, ETC., COMPLETE. 3. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLIES AND FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH FIRE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL AND / OR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY. MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM MIN. DEPTH 1' - 5" 2' - 6" MIN. 2' - 10" MAX. KNEE CLEARACE 8" MIN. MIN. 9" TOE CLEARANCE 6" MAX. 8 2' - 6" MIN. MAX. 2' - 0" MAX. 6" 10 2 9 12A 6' - 8" 9 4' - 0" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. MAX. 6" SEAT 1' - 7" MAX. 5' - 0" MIN. MAX. 1' - 4" 3' - 1" MIN. MIN. 1' - 4" 2' - 3" MAX. 12B12C SEAT MAX. 1' - 7" 2' - 6" MIN. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" FOR EXACT WIDTH SEE FLOOR PLANS 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" [HIGH] [LOW] 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 18 19 4" MAX. 3 3'-0" MAX. 6" MAX. 3'-0" MAX. KEYNOTES[ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION] 1INSTALL PVC THERMAL PIPE WRAP AT ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP.. BASE CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE TYP., SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. FINISH ALL EXPOSED CABINETRY END PANELS, TOE-KICKS, VALENCES/APRONS, TO MATCH FINISH OF CABINETRY. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL. 45 DEGREE COUNTERTOP GUSSET SUPPORT AT ROLL UNDER COUNTERTOP. GUSSET SHALL MATCH CABINETRY FINSH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. CABINETRY END PANEL; MATCH CABINETRY FINISH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. LAZY SUSAN TURNTABLE CORNER BASE CABINET. 45-DEGREE ANGLED CORNER UPPER CABINET. FULL HEIGHT CABINET TO ACCOMMODATE RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE & ASSOCIATED TRIM KIT, SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRAL BACK-SPLASH (EXCEPT AT COMMUNITY KITCHEN), TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE WITH INTEGRAL TRIM KIT, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. SLIDE-IN RANGE, THIS LOCATION, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED RANGE HOOD, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICES AT UNDERSIDE OF RANGE HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SINK FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE, AND SPECS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. WALL BASE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CERAMIC WALL TILE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. INSTALL ALL CERAMIC TILE TRIM INCLUDING: BULLNOSE TOP COURSE, BULLNOSE OUTSIDE CORNERS, & COVE BASE. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL #D20P2 (TYP. OF (2)) AND MODEL #S9P1 (TYP. OF (1)). FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. FREE-STANDING TRASH RECEPTACLE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE & INSTALL PREFABRICATED ROLL-IN SHOWER, WITH REMOVABLE SHOWER SEAT, SEE TOILET ROOM MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INSTALL FIXED SHOWER HEAD ABOVE SHOWER/BATHTUB ASSEMBLY, THIS WALL. GRAB BARS, PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL FOR FUTURE GRAB BARS INSTALLATION. PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH/LOW SHELVES (PAINT) AND CLOSET RODS, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH SHELF (PAINT) AND CLOSET ROD, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE VINYL-COATED WIRE SHELVING, MIN. 3 SHELVES PER CLOSET. PROVIDE & INSTALL REMOTE SWITCHES FOR RANGE HOOD FAN & LIGHT, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SWITCH COVER PLATE COLOR FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. INSIDE CABINET ABOVE KITCHEN RANGE HOOD, PROVIDE 'BOXED-OUT' ENCLOSURE AT RANGE HOOD DUCT. REMAINDER OF CABINET SHALL BE USABLE. DUCT ENCLOSURE SHALL MATCH THE CABINET BOX WOOD SPECIES AND FINISH. CERAMIC WALL TILE (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES). SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN IN 38 APARTMENTS, COMMUNITY KITCHEN AND STAFF BREAK ROOM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT (8-FEET HIGH) FIBER REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) EQUAL TO MARLITE STANDARD FRP PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED FROM MANUFACTURERS FULL RANGE BY ARCHITECT. PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS, SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21B 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 7A 21A 27 28 29 2A 2B a604 1A 1B a604 1C 1D 1E 1F 2'-2 3/8"6'-6 1/2" 11'-6" 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3A 33 4 3 3 4'-0" 8'-6" 4'-8"13'-1 1/2" 3'-6" 3'-6"3'-0" 3'-5 1/4"4'-7" 10'-0" 11'-8" 12'-5 3/4" 8" 2'-1" 9'-0" 9'-1" 2'-0" 7'-7 3/4" 3'-9" 3'-6"24 23 23 6'-5" 6'-5" MECH. ENTRY COATS STORAGE LIN. BATHBEDROOM LIVING ROOM KITCHEN 28 7'-2" 5'-11"1'-3" 3'-0"1'-8"2'-6" 3'-0"3'-0"2'-6"1'-0" 3'-0"3'-0"2'-6"1'-0" 1'-0" 6 a610 5 a610 7 224 3 10 2 14 11 13 26 6 15 5'-5" HOLD 4" 1'-0" + / - 3" V.I.F. 3'-0"2'-0" + / - 3" V.I.F. 7'-2" 3'-0"1'-8"2'-6" 1'-0"1'-0"3'-6"2'-0" DW 7 a610 14 13 6 22 4 32 12 4" 1 4 12C 9'-2 3/4"V.I.F. 10 2'-9 3/4" V.I.F. 21B19 14 13 15 6 8 9 4 a610 SIM. 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 12B 11 14 19 20 1 13 13 15 3 M A X . 2'-10" 9 12A 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 14 20 13 1915 14 14 3 1 4 9'-2 3/4" V.I.F. 13 15 21B plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a604 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (UNIT TYPE 4) 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" UNIT TYPE 4 -ENLARGED PLAN 1 N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1B SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1CSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1DSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1ESCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1F ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 WATER CLOSET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS WALL-MOUNTED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL [SAFETY] GRAB BAR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED MIRROR / RECESSED MEDICINE CABINET, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. LAVATORY, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROLS, SEE PLUMBING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 1/2" MAX. THRESHOLD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CONTROL LOCATION AREA, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER & WALL-MOUNTED CONTROLS [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [BACK WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STANDARD ROLL-IN SHOWER [END WALL], SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL HOOK, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED TOWEL BAR, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. SURFACE-MOUNTED ELECTRIC HAND DRYER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FIXED SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. REMOVABLE SHELF AND CLOSET ROD, SEE SPECIFICAITONS. CORNER GUARD, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. HIGH & LOW COAT HOOKS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 12C 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 FIXTURE / ACCESSORY LEGEND 3' - 0" MIN. 3' - 0" MAX. MIN. 1' - 5" 1 2 3 3 2' - 0"1' - 0" MAX. 1' - 6" 3' - 5" MAX. 4' - 6" MIN. MAX. 1' - 0" MIN. 3' - 6" 33" MAX. MIN. 1 1/2" 1' - 6" MIN. 3' - 6" MAX. 2' - 0" MIN. 2 1 5 4 2' - 10" MAX. 3' - 4" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. 7 8 66 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE SHOWN, FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES AND APPARATUSES, ETC., SHALL BE MOUNTED PER THE CURRENT ICC A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USEABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES. 2. INSTALL SOILD BLOCKING THROUGH ALL WALLS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, APPARATUSES, ETC., COMPLETE. 3. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALL ASSEMBLIES AND FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH FIRE-RATING OF ASSOCIATED WALL AND / OR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLY. MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM MIN. DEPTH 1' - 5" 2' - 6" MIN. 2' - 10" MAX. KNEE CLEARACE 8" MIN. MIN. 9" TOE CLEARANCE 6" MAX. 8 2' - 6" MIN. MAX. 2' - 0" MAX. 6" 10 2 9 12A 6' - 8" 9 4' - 0" MAX. 4' - 0" MAX. MAX. 6" SEAT 1' - 7" MAX. 5' - 0" MIN. MAX. 1' - 4" 3' - 1" MIN. MIN. 1' - 4" 2' - 3" MAX. 12B12C SEAT MAX. 1' - 7" 2' - 6" MIN. 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" FOR EXACT WIDTH SEE FLOOR PLANS 4' - 0" MAX. 6' - 0" [HIGH] [LOW] 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 1X PERIMETER BLOCKING, PAINT 18 19 4" MAX. 3 3'-0" MAX. 6" MAX. 3'-0" MAX. a605 1A 104 SF ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 007 9'-6" 9'-10 1/4" 5'-2 1/2" +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 7 15 12 17A MIN. 2'-4 1/4" 13 14 4" MAX. 2'-10"1'-8"2'-6" 3'-0"1'-6" 2 2B a6053B 3A 3D 3C 51 SF STAFF TOILET 005 6'-0 3/4" 9'-6" 2'-6 3/4" 2'-1" 3'-1 3/4" +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 15 7 6 8 2 14 3 9 a610 13 1 15 27 +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 7 8 6 3 2 4 5 13 1 15 27 ( 1 5 F U L L H E I G H T T I L E S ) +/- 5'-3 3/4" +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. 16 3 13 15 27 9'-0" V.I.F. 7 15 6 8 13 1 1827 a605 92 SF HORIZON MED. ROOM 002B 9'-6" 8'-7" a3033 2A 3'-0" 11'-3 3/4" 120 SF RECEPTION OFFICE 003 7 15 12 1 13 7A 14 +/-9'-0" V.I.F. 2'-10"1'-8"2'-6" 4" MAX. 2'-4 1/4" 2'-6"2'-6" 2B KEYNOTES[ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION] 1INSTALL PVC THERMAL PIPE WRAP AT ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP.. BASE CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE TYP., SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. FINISH ALL EXPOSED CABINETRY END PANELS, TOE-KICKS, VALENCES/APRONS, TO MATCH FINISH OF CABINETRY. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL. 45 DEGREE COUNTERTOP GUSSET SUPPORT AT ROLL UNDER COUNTERTOP. GUSSET SHALL MATCH CABINETRY FINSH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. CABINETRY END PANEL; MATCH CABINETRY FINISH. ANCHOR TO WALL WITH SOLID BLOCKING. LAZY SUSAN TURNTABLE CORNER BASE CABINET. 45-DEGREE ANGLED CORNER UPPER CABINET. FULL HEIGHT CABINET TO ACCOMMODATE RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE & ASSOCIATED TRIM KIT, SEE DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE, & SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRAL BACK-SPLASH (EXCEPT AT COMMUNITY KITCHEN), TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. RECESSED CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE WITH INTEGRAL TRIM KIT, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED MICROWAVE, THIS LOCATION, SEE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS. SLIDE-IN RANGE, THIS LOCATION, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CABINET-MOUNTED RANGE HOOD, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, HVAC DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICES AT UNDERSIDE OF RANGE HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. STAINLESS STEEL SINK FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE, AND SPECS. TYPE-X MOISTURE/MOLD-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, PAINT, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. WALL BASE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CERAMIC WALL TILE, TYP., SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. INSTALL ALL CERAMIC TILE TRIM INCLUDING: BULLNOSE TOP COURSE, BULLNOSE OUTSIDE CORNERS, & COVE BASE. RECESSED, WALL-MOUNTED VERTICAL MAILBOXES EQUAL TO 2B GLOBAL, INC.: USPS COLLECTION MODEL #D20P2 (TYP. OF (2)) AND MODEL #S9P1 (TYP. OF (1)). FINISH SHALL BE NATURAL ANODIZED WITH ENGRAVED DOOR I.D., COORDINATE LABELING WITH OWNER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MAILBOXES. INSTALL ALL FRAMING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF MAILBOXES. INSTALL MAILBOXES TO COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1 FOR ACCESSIBILITY. FREE-STANDING TRASH RECEPTACLE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE & INSTALL PREFABRICATED ROLL-IN SHOWER, WITH REMOVABLE SHOWER SEAT, SEE TOILET ROOM MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INSTALL FIXED SHOWER HEAD ABOVE SHOWER/BATHTUB ASSEMBLY, THIS WALL. GRAB BARS, PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL FOR FUTURE GRAB BARS INSTALLATION. PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH/LOW SHELVES (PAINT) AND CLOSET RODS, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE & INSTALL 12" DEEP, HIGH SHELF (PAINT) AND CLOSET ROD, SEE MOUNTING HEIGHT DIAGRAM & SPECIFICATIONS. INSTALL 1x PERIMETER BLOCKING (PAINT). PROVIDE VINYL-COATED WIRE SHELVING, MIN. 3 SHELVES PER CLOSET. PROVIDE & INSTALL REMOTE SWITCHES FOR RANGE HOOD FAN & LIGHT, THIS LOCATION, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SWITCH COVER PLATE COLOR FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. INSIDE CABINET ABOVE KITCHEN RANGE HOOD, PROVIDE 'BOXED-OUT' ENCLOSURE AT RANGE HOOD DUCT. REMAINDER OF CABINET SHALL BE USABLE. DUCT ENCLOSURE SHALL MATCH THE CABINET BOX WOOD SPECIES AND FINISH. CERAMIC WALL TILE (15 FULL HEIGHT TILES). SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERTOP MICROWAVE OVEN IN 38 APARTMENTS, COMMUNITY KITCHEN AND STAFF BREAK ROOM, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT (8-FEET HIGH) FIBER REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) EQUAL TO MARLITE STANDARD FRP PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED FROM MANUFACTURERS FULL RANGE BY ARCHITECT. PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS, SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21B 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 7A 21A 27 28 29 2A 2B plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a605 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ENLARGED ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 1SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 1A SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ENLARGED STAFF TOILET 3SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 3ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 3BSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"INTERIOR ELEVATION 3CSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 3D SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ENLARGED HORIZON MED. RM. 2 N N N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATION 2A ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 UP DN UP DN UP DN UP DN UP DN UP DN UP UP DNDN UP DN UP DN 5'-0"13'-9" =5'-3" 5'-11" 8'-8" T @11" EA. 15 R @6.93" EA. 16 9'-2 7/8" 0" 12" 12" 12" 2 ELEVATOR H O L D I N S I D E C L E A R 8'-6" 6'-11" 3'-6" W I N D O W M A N U F . VERIFY WITH M.O. 3'-4"8" 3 5'-11"11'-11" =6'-2" 8'-8" 5'-0"8'-3" =10'-9" 4'-0" 8" 4'-0" 17'-4" 9'-2 7/8" R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.93" EA. 14 T @11" EA. 13 T @11" EA. 9 12" 12" 12" 2 ELEVATOR H O L D I N S I D E C L E A R 8'-6" 6'-11" 3'-6" W I N D O W M A N U F . VERIFY WITH M.O. 3'-4"1'-4" 3 10'-9" 5'-11"8'-3" =9'-10" 8'-8" 4'-0" 8" 4'-0" 28'-0" 22'-8" 5'-0"8'-3" = R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.40" EA. 10 T @11" EA. 9 T @11" EA. 9 12" 12" 12" 12" 2 ELEVATOR H O L D I N S I D E C L E A R 8'-6" 6'-11" 3'-6" W I N D O W M A N U F . VERIFY WITH M.O. 3'-4"1'-4" 3 8'-8" 4'-0" 8" 4'-0" 5'-0"8'-3" =10'-9" 5'-11"8'-3" =9'-10" 38'-8" 33'-4" T @11" EA. 9 T @11" EA. 9 R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.40" EA. 10 2 ELEVATOR H O L D I N S I D E C L E A R 8'-6" 6'-11" 3'-6" W I N D O W M A N U F . VERIFY WITH M.O. 3'-4"1'-4" 3 5'-11"8'-3" =9'-10" 8'-8" 4'-0" 8" 4'-0" 5'-0"8'-3" =10'-9" 49'-4" 44'-0" T @11" EA. 9 T @11" EA. 9 R @6.80" EA. 10 R @6.80" EA. 10 12" 12" 12" 2 ELEVATOR H O L D I N S I D E C L E A R 8'-6" 6'-11" 3'-6" W I N D O W M A N U F . VERIFY WITH M.O. 3'-4"1'-4" 3 GENEARL NOTES[ENLARGED STAIR PLANS] 1. FROM GROUND FLOOR TO SECOND FLOOR, PROVIDE STEEL PAN STAIRS AND LANDINGS WITH CONCRETE INFILL, TYP. PROVIDE LIQUID DENSIFIER SEALER FINISH TO ALL CONCRETE, EQUAL TO "EUCO DIAMOND HARD," SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 2. FROM SECOND FLOOR UP TO TOP OF STAIR, PROVIDE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD FRAMED STAIR WITH JOHNSONITE RUBBER STAIR TREADS, INTEGRAL NOSING AND LANDINGS TO MATCH, SEE MATERIAL LEGEND, FINISH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. KEYNOTES[ENLARGED STAIR PLANS] 1-1/2" DIAMETER PIPE HANDRAIL ANCHORED TO WALL. PROVIDE & INSTALL ELEVATOR AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACTURE'S REQUIREMENTS. SEE ELEVATOR SPECIFICATIONS, ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD WALL FULL HEIGHT OF STAIR. AT TOP-MOST LEVEL OF STAIR, WALL HEIGHT SHALL BE 44-INCHES A.F.F. SEE WALL SCHEDULE. PROVIDE 5/4" MDF CAP WITH EASED EDGES AND 1x4 MDF APRON WITH EASED EDGES AT TOP OF WALL. (PAINT) PROVIDE AREA OF REFUGE AND ASSOCIATED TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAGE PER THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 1 2 3 4 5 5'-11"8'-3" =9'-10" 8'-8" 4'-0"8"4'-0" 5'-0"8'-3" = 55'-0"60'-8" T @11" EA. 9 T @11" EA. 9 R @6.80" EA. 10 R @6.80" EA. 10 ELEVATOR ROOF SEE ROOF PLAN 12" 12" 12" M.O. 3'-4"1'-8" 3 4 RAILING TO EXTEND 1'-0" BEYOND TOP RISER, AND 1'-0" PLUS ONE TREAD LENGTH BEYOND BOTTOM RISER MAINTAIN MAX. DISTANCE OF BRACKETS AT 1'-0" FROM END OF RAILING CAP END OF PIPE RAIL. WELD AND GRIND SMOOTH. 1 1/2" DIA. PIPE RAIL (PAINT) GROUND THROUGH SECOND FLOOR 1 1/2" DIA. OAK RAIL (STAIN) SECOND THROUGH FIFTH FLOOR STEEL HANDRAIL SUPPORT 3'-0" O.C. MAX. EVENLY SPACED. MIN. 1 1/2" 12'-10"5'-0" T @11" EA. 14 R @6.93" EA. 15 22'-8" 12" 11'-4" 0" 12" 1 3 5'-4"8"5'-4" M.O. 3'-4"1'-4" 1'-4" M.O. 4'-0" 13'-10" R @6.93" EA. 5 T @11" EA. 4 8'-8" 11'-6 5/8" 12" 3'-8" = 5'-0" 4'-10" 6'-1" 11'-4" 5'-4"8"5'-4" 1 3 12" 12" 12" 5'-4"8"5'-4" T @11" EA. 9 5'-4"8"5'-4" 8'-2"8'-3" =5'-11" 9'-1"8'-3" =5'-0" R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.40" EA. 10 T @11" EA. 9 -5'-9 3/8" 17'-4" 12"12" 11'-4" 1 3 5 1'-4" M.O. 3'-4" 11'-4" HOLD 5'-0" 8'-3" = 9'-3" 5'-11" 8'-3" = 8'-4" T @11" EA. 9 T @11" EA. 9 5'-4"5'-4" 8" R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.40" EA. 10 22'-8" 28'-0" 12"12" CLEAR 4'-0" 12"12" 1 3 5 1'-4" M.O. 3'-4" 9'-3"8'-3" =5'-0" 5'-11" 8'-3" = 8'-4" T @11" EA. 9 T @11" EA. 9 R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.40" EA. 10 5'-4"8"5'-4" 11'-4" 33'-4" 38'-8" 12"12" CLEAR 4'-0" 12" 1 3 5 1'-4" M.O. 3'-4" 3'-11" M.O. 3'-4"5'-5" 5'-11" 8'-3" = 8'-4" 5'-4"5'-4" 8" T @11" EA. 9 8'-3" =5'-0" T @11" EA. 9 49'-4" 44'-0" R @6.40" EA. 10 R @6.40" EA. 10 11'-4" 12"12" C L E A R 4'-0" 12" 1 3 4 5 1'-4" M.O. 3'-4" 3'-11" M.O. 3'-4"5'-5" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a606 ENLARGED STAIR PLANS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR A -GROUND FLOOR 1ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR A -SECOND FLOOR 2ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR A -THIRD FLOOR 3A SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR A -FOURTH FLOOR 4ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR A -FIFTH FLOOR 5ASCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR A -ROOF 6A SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" PLAN DETAIL AT WALL HANDRAIL 10 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR B-GROUND FLOOR 1BSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR B-LANDING 1CSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR B -SECOND FLOOR 2BSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR B-THIRD FLOOR 3BSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR B-FOURTH FLOOR 4BSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" STAIR B-FIFTH FLOOR 5B ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 2'-4" MIN. 2'-10" MAX.4" 2'-1" 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS ADJUSTABLE SHELVING, TYP. CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS INTEGRAL BACKSPLASH COUNTERTOP WITH DOUBLE ROUND -OVER FRONT EDGE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 1'-0" 1'-8" B.O. RATED ASSEMBLY FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS ADJUSTABLE SHELVING, TYP. TOE -KICK FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY QUARTER -ROUND, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY 2'-10" 4" 1'-0" 8" 4" 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS ADJUSTABLE SHELVING, TYP. CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS INTEGRAL BACKSPLASH COUNTERTOP WITH DOUBLE ROUND -OVER FRONT EDGE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 2'-0" 1" 2'-1" 3" COUNTERTOP WITH DOUBLE ROUND -OVER FRONT EDGE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE CABINET HARDWARE (BEYOND), TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS SINK FIXTURE COMPLYING WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS APRON, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY PVC THERMAL PIPE INSULATION AT ALL EXPOSED PLUMBING CABINETRY (BEYOND), TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 8" 1'-0" 2'-10" MAX.4" 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS INTEGRAL BACKSPLASH CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 2'-4" MIN. 4 1/2" 1" 2'-10" MAX. 2'-4" MIN. VANITY MIRROR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS UNDER -MOUNT SINK FIXTURE COMPLYING WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOP WITH 1/8" RADIUS EASED OUTSIDE EDGES, SEE SPECIFICATIONS APRON, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY PVC THERMAL PIPE INSULATION AT ALL EXPOSED PLUMBING PROVIDE & INSTALL SOLID THROUGH -WALL BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMODATE INSTALLATION OF CABINETRY, COUNTERTOPS, AND APPLIANCES, TYPICAL 5/8" TYPE -X MOLD / MOISTURE -RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PREP., PRIME, AND PAINT, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. 0.060" THICK OVC WALL PROTECTION, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. RETURN SHEET VINYL FLOORING UP WALL, SEE MATERIAL LEGEND. FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE 2'-1" 1'-0" 8" COUNTERTOP (BEYOND). RANGE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS INTEGRAL BACKSPLASH COUNTERTOP WITH DOUBLE ROUND -OVER FRONT EDGE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS QUARTER -ROUND, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY SINK FIXTURE COMPLYING WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS PVC THERMAL PIPE INSULATION AT ALL EXPOSED PLUMBING CABINET, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 1'-0" 8" 4" 2'-1" 3'-0" 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 4" 3" 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS ADJUSTABLE SHELVING, TYP. CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS INTEGRAL BACKSPLASH COUNTERTOP WITH DOUBLE ROUND -OVER FRONT EDGE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS ADJUSTABLE SHELVING, TYP. TOE -KICK FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY QUARTER -ROUND, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 1'-0" 3'-0"4" 8" 4" 1" 2'-1" 3" QUARTZ COUNTERTOP, SEE SPECIFICATIONS 1'-0" 2" 2'-4" MIN. 2'-10" MAX. FINISH FLOOR, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SINK FIXTURE COMPLYING WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS APRON, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY PVC THERMAL PIPE INSULATION AT ALL EXPOSED PLUMBING CABINETRY (BEYOND), TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS 5 / 8" TYPE -X GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING, PAINT 2X WOOD FRAMING AT 16" O.C, TYP. (EXCEPT FIRST FLOOR, WHICH IS METAL FRAMING) CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL AT ALL INSIDE & OUTSIDE CORNERS CABINET HARDWARE, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS CABINETRY, TYP., SEE SPECIFICATIONS VANITY MIRROR, SEE SPECIFICATIONS UNDER -MOUNT SINK FIXTURE COMPLYING WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS QUARTZ COUNTERTOP, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. APRON, FINISH TO MATCH CABINETRY PVC THERMAL PIPE INSULATION AT ALL EXPOSED PLUMBING PROVIDE & INSTALL SOLID THROUGH -WALL BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMODATE INSTALLATION OF CABINETRY, COUNTERTOPS, AND APPLIANCES, TYPICAL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 0.060" THICK OVC WALL PROTECTION, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. RETURN SHEET VINYL FLOORING UP WALL, SEE MATERIAL LEGEND. 2'-10" 4 1/2" 1" 2'-4" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a610 SECTION DETAILS 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 1SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 2SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 3SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 4 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 6SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 7 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 5SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 8SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SECTION DETAIL 9 W W W W W W D D D D D D UP UP 599 SF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 010 1832 SF CORRIDOR 100C 104 SF ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 007 136 SF PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 006A430 SF ELMSHADE OFFICES 006 51 SF STAFF TOILET 005 233 SF SHARED COPY / FILES 004 141 SF SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002E 472 SF HORIZON PROGRAM 002A 107 SF DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002D 104 SF PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002C 92 SF HORIZON MED. ROOM 002B 120 SF RECEPTION OFFICE 003 HORIZON WAITING AREA 002 123 SF VESTIBULE 001 341 SF CONFERENCE ROOM 018 313 SF COMMON LAUNDRY 017 53 SF MEN'S TOILET 016 57 SF WOMEN'S TOILET 015 193 SF STAFF BREAK ROOM 014 206 SF COMMUNITY KITCHEN 013 811 SF COMMUNITY ROOM 012 123 SF VESTIBULE 100D 60 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 011 FLT1 3'-0" 661 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 668 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 668 SF (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 711 SF (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 LVT1 FLT1 FLT1 FLT1 FLT1 LVT1 SVP1 LVT1 VCT1 SVP1 CONCCRP1 CONC CRP1 CRP1CRP1CRP1 CRP1 CRP1 VCT1CONC CRP1 LVT1 FLT1 VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 SVP1SVP1 VCT1 VCT1 48 SF SERVER 008 100 SF BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 009 TS1 TS2 TS2TS2 TS2 TS1 TS1 TS2 TS2 TS1 TS1 TS1 TS1 TS1 TH1 TS2 TH1 TH1 TS1TS1TS1TS1 CRP1 CONC CONC LVT1 LVT1 TS1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 VCT1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 VCT1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT3 PT3 ACT2 ACT2 ACT2 CTR2 CTR1 CTR1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 WB1 WDC1 PT3 ACT2 CAB1 CTR2 ACT2 CAB1 WDC1 ACT3ACT3 WDC1 ACT3 WDC1 WDC1 CAB1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 CTR1 CAB1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 TB1 CAB1 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 ACT1 LVT1 ACT2 ACT2 PT4 71 SF ELEVATOR E01 WB1 WB1 TH1 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 FRP1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 CWT1 RCW1 RCW1 CWT1 CWT1 CWT1 FRP2 CRP1 VCT1 LEGEND[FINISH PLANS] FINISH TAG LVT1 SVP1 CRP1 FLT1 CONC VCT1 #plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a701 GROUND FLOOR FINISH PLAN AND MATERIAL LEGEND 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" GROUND FLOOR-FINISH PLAN 1 RUBBER STAIR TREADSST1JOHNSONITE---PROVIDE LANDINGS TO MATCH, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WINDOW TREATMENTWT2GRABER/ HORIZONTAL BLINDS-WHITE2" HORIZONTAL PVC BLINDSVALENCE NOT REQUIRED. SEE SPECIFICATIONS, SEE WINDOW/ STOREFRONT SCHEDULE FOR DIMENSIONS. WINDOW TREATMENTWT1[NOT USED]---WOOD CABINETRYCAB1KOUNTRY WOOD PRODUCTS-VINTAGE MAPLECABINETRYALL CABINATE HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOPCTR3----WITH INTEGRAL BOWL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. QUARTZ COUNTERTOPCTR2DUPONT/ ZODIAQ--1 1/4" THICK COUNTERTOP1/8" RADIUS EDGES HPL COUNTERTOPCTR1WILSONART/HPL--1- 1/4" THICK COUNTERTOP1/2" RADIUS DOUBLE ROUND-OVER FRONT EDGE FLOOR THRESHOLDTH1PEMKO-STAINLESS STEELTHERMALLY-BROKEN SADLESHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A.117.1 FLOOR TRANSITION STRIPTS2SCHLUTER/ SCHIENEAE-80SATIN ANODIZED-TRANSITION (V.I.F.): FLT1 TO CRP1, LVT1 TO CRP1. FLOOR TRANSITION STRIPTS1SCHLUTER/ RENO-UAEU-80SATIN ANODIZED-TRANSITION (V.I.F.): FLT1 TO LVT1, FLT1 TO CONC, LVT1 TO CONC1, LVT1 TO SVP1. GROUTGRT3LATRICE/ CEMENTITOUS GROUT1500 SANDED GROUT--GROUT WIDTH SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS GROUTGRT2LATRICE/ CEMENTITOUS GROUT1500 SANDED GROUT--GROUT WIDTH SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS GROUTGRT1LATRICE/ CEMENTITOUS GROUT1500 SANDED GROUT--GROUT WIDTH SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS PAINTPT4SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-EXPOSED STEELPAINTPT3SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-CEILINGS, SOFFITSPAINTPT2SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-DOORS, TRIM, SILLSPAINTPT1SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-WALLSANCILLARY FINISH SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGWDC1NORTON INDUSTRIES/ LINEAR WOOD PLANKPLANKSOLID MAPLE1" X 6" WOOD PLANKSMANUFACTURER'S SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: SATIN SILVER) SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGACT3ARMSTRO NG/ CIRRUS534WHITE24" X 24" TILEANGLED TEGULAR WITH PRELUDE 15/16 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: WHITE) SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGACT2ARMSTRONG/ ARMATUFF861WHITE24" X 24" TILESQUARE LAY-IN WITH PRE;UDE 15/16 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: WHITE) SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGACT1ARMSTRONG/ CORTEGA770WHITE24" X 24" TILESQUARE LAY-IN & TEGULAR WITH PRELUDE 15/16 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: WHITE) CEILING FINISH FIBER REINFORCED PANELFRP2MARLITESTANDARD FRPTBD4' x 4' PANELSPROVIDE FULL HEIGHT PANELS. SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY MATERIAL. FIBER REINFORCED PANELFRP1MARLITESTANDARD FRPTBD4' x 8' PANELSPROVIDE FULL HEIGHT PANELS. SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY MATERIAL. CERAMIC WALL TILECWT1AMERICAN OLEAN/ URBAN CANVAS--4- 1/4" X 12- 3/4"1/2 RUNNING BOND, TOP COURSE SHALL HAVE BULLNOSE TOP EDGE WALL FINISH CERAMIC TILE WALL BASETB1AMERICAN OLEAN/ URBAN CANVASCOVE BASE-4- 1/4" X 12- 3/4"1/2 RUNNING BOND PATTERN RUBBER WALL BASEWB1JOHNSONITE/ TRADITIONALTRADITIONAL WITH TOE-4" HIGHWALL BASE VINYL COMPOSITE TILEVCT1ARMSTRONG---CARPET TILECPT1INTERFACEUR501VARIES PER ROOM9.845" x 39.38"COORD. COLOR FINISH WITH ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE OF COLOR FINISHES SHEET VINYLSVP1JOHNSONITE / TRADITIONALTRADITIONAL WITH TOETO BE SELECTED FROM MANUF. FULL RANGEROLLHEAT WELDED SEAMS (FINISH TO MATCH FLOORING) RETURN FLOORING UP WALL 4-INCHES. PROVIDE ALUMINUM SCHLUTER EDGE PROFILE AT TOP OF WALL RETURN. RECESSED WALK-OFF MATRCW1BABCOCK-DAVIS/ ALUM. GRID MAT---RECESSED, TOP OF MAT SHALL BE FLUSH WITH TOP OF FINISHED FLOOR ENGINEERED VINYL PLANKLVT1USF CONTRACT/ LVT PLANKS--7-1/8" X 48"1/3 RUNNING BOND PATTERN PORCELAIN FLOOR TILEFLT1STONEPEAK/ MATERIA 3D--6" X 24"1/3 RUNNING BOND PATTERN LIQUID DENSIFIERCONC1EUCLID/ EUCO DIAMOND HARD---FLOOR FINISH MATERI...SPEC ITEM FINISH CODE MANUFACTURER/ SERIESMODEL NUMBERCOLORFORMATNOTES MATERIAL LEGEND N ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 A2 UP UP 732 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 715 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 729 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 214 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 673 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 672 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 670 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 755 SF (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 685 SF (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 202 658 SF (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 32 SF CUST. 217 40 SF I.T. CLOSET 216 280 SF STAIR B B02 116 SF CHASE C02 234 SF STAIR A A02 62 SF TRASH / RECYCLE 215 71 SF ELEVATOR E01 1623 SF CORRIDOR 200 215 SF RECEPTION LOUNGE 200A VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 SVP1SVP1 VCT1 VCT1 VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 SVP1 VCT1VCT1 SVP1 VCT1VCT1 SVP1 VCT1VCT1 SVP1 VCT1VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 CRP1 VCT1 LVT1 SVP1 LVT1 SVP1 VCT1 ? VCT1 VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 VCT1 SVP1 VCT1 TS1TS1 TS1 TS1 TS1 TS1TS1TS1TS1TS1TS1 TS1 TS1 TS1 TS2 TS1 TS1 LVT1 LVT1 LVT1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 VCT1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 VCT1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 VCT1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 PT1 PT3 PT2 WT2WB1 ACT1 PT1 WDC1 PT3 PT3 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3CTR3CTR3CTR3CTR3CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 CTR3 WT2 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 CAB1 CTR1 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 PT1 PT2 ST1 ST1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 FRP2 FRP2 PT1 PT2 ACT2 ACT2 LEGEND[FINISH PLANS] FINISH TAG LVT1 SVP1 CRP1 FLT1 CONC VCT1 #plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a702 SECOND THROUGH FIFTH FLOOR FINISH PLAN AND MATERIAL LEGEND 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" TYPICAL SECOND THROUGH FIFTH FLOOR FINISH PLAN 1 N RUBBER STAIR TREADSST1JOHNSONITE---PROVIDE LANDINGS TO MATCH, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. WINDOW TREATMENTWT2GRABER/ HORIZONTAL BLINDS-WHITE2" HORIZONTAL PVC BLINDSVALENCE NOT REQUIRED. SEE SPECIFICATIONS, SEE WINDOW/ STOREFRONT SCHEDULE FOR DIMENSIONS. WINDOW TREATMENTWT1[NOT USED]---WOOD CABINETRYCAB1KOUNTRY WOOD PRODUCTS-VINTAGE MAPLECABINETRYALL CABINATE HARDWARE SHALL BE SATIN NICKEL CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOPCTR3----WITH INTEGRAL BOWL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. QUARTZ COUNTERTOPCTR2DUPONT/ ZODIAQ--1 1/4" THICK COUNTERTOP1/8" RADIUS EDGES HPL COUNTERTOPCTR1WILSONART/HPL--1- 1/4" THICK COUNTERTOP1/2" RADIUS DOUBLE ROUND-OVER FRONT EDGE FLOOR THRESHOLDTH1PEMKO-STAINLESS STEELTHERMALLY-BROKEN SADLESHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A.117.1 FLOOR TRANSITION STRIPTS2SCHLUTER/ SCHIENEAE-80SATIN ANODIZED-TRANSITION (V.I.F.): FLT1 TO CRP1, LVT1 TO CRP1. FLOOR TRANSITION STRIPTS1SCHLUTER/ RENO-UAEU-80SATIN ANODIZED-TRANSITION (V.I.F.): FLT1 TO LVT1, FLT1 TO CONC, LVT1 TO CONC1, LVT1 TO SVP1. GROUTGRT3LATRICE/ CEMENTITOUS GROUT1500 SANDED GROUT--GROUT WIDTH SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS GROUTGRT2LATRICE/ CEMENTITOUS GROUT1500 SANDED GROUT--GROUT WIDTH SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS GROUTGRT1LATRICE/ CEMENTITOUS GROUT1500 SANDED GROUT--GROUT WIDTH SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS PAINTPT4SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-EXPOSED STEELPAINTPT3SHERWIN-WILLIAMSP ROMAR ZERO VOC-CEILINGS, SOFFITSPAINTPT2SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-DOORS, TRIM, SILLSPAINTPT1SHERWIN-WILLIAMSPROMAR ZERO VOC-WALLSANCILLARY FINISH SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGWDC1NORTON INDUSTRIES/ LINEAR WOOD PLANKPLANKSOLID MAPLE1" X 6" WOOD PLANKSMANUFACTURER'S SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: SATIN SILVER) SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGACT3ARMSTRONG/ CIRRUS534WHITE24" X 24" TILEANGLED TEGULAR WITH PRELUDE 15/16 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: WHITE) SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGACT2ARMSTRONG/ ARMATUFF861WHITE24" X 24" TILESQUARE LAY-IN WITH PRE;UDE 15/16 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: WHITE) SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGACT1ARMSTRONG/ CORTEGA770WHITE24" X 24" TILESQUARE LAY-IN & TEGULAR WITH PRELUDE 15/16 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (COLOR FINISH: WHITE) CEILING FINISH FIBER REINFORCED PANELFRP2MARLITESTANDARD FRPTBD4' x 4' PANELSPROVIDE FULL HEIGHT PANELS. SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY MATERIAL. FIBER REINFORCED PANELFRP1MARLITESTANDARD FRPTBD4' x 8' PANELSPROVIDE FULL HEIGHT PANELS. SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY MATERIAL. CERAMIC WALL TILECWT1AMERICAN OLEAN/ URBAN CANVAS--4- 1/4" X 12- 3/4"1/2 RUNNING BOND, TOP COURSE SHALL HAVE BULLNOSE TOP EDGE WALL FINISH CERAMIC TILE WALL BASETB1AMERICAN OLEAN/ URBAN CANVASCOVE BASE-4- 1/4" X 12- 3/4"1/2 RUNNING BOND PATTERN RUBBER WALL BASEWB1JOHNSONITE/ TRADITIONALTRADITIONAL WITH TOE-4" HIGHWALL BASE VINYL COMPOSITE TILEVCT1ARMSTRONG---CARPET TILECPT1INTERFACEUR501VARIES PER ROOM9.845" x 39.38"COORD. COLOR FINISH WITH ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE OF COLOR FINISHES SHEET VINYLSVP1JOHNSONITE / TRADITIONALTRADITIONAL WITH TOETO BE SELECTED FROM MANUF. FULL RANGEROLLHEAT WELDED SEAMS (FINISH TO MATCH FLOORING) RETURN FLOORING UP WALL 4-INCHES. PROVIDE ALUMINUM SCHLUTER EDGE PROFILE AT TOP OF WALL RETURN. RECESSED WALK-OFF MATRCW1BABCOCK-DAVIS/ ALUM. GRID MAT---RECESSED, TOP OF MAT SHALL BE FLUSH WITH TOP OF FINISHED FLOOR ENGINEERED VINYL PLANKLVT1USF CONTRACT/ LVT PLANKS--7-1/8" X 48"1/3 RUNNING BOND PATTERN PORCELAIN FLOOR TILEFLT1STONEPEAK/ MATERIA 3D--6" X 24"1/3 RUNNING BOND PATTERN LIQUID DENSIFIERCONC1EUCLID/ EUCO DIAMOND HARD---FLOOR FINISH MATERI...SPEC ITEM FINISH CODE MANUFACTURER/ SERIESMODEL NUMBERCOLORFORMATNOTES MATERIAL LEGEND ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 [TYPE 1][TYPE 2] 7" 12" 20" 5" DOOR TYPES [TYPE 3] 10" HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH WIDTH HEIGHT [TYPE 1][TYPE 2] MASONRY FRAME FRAME TYPES [DOOR] WIDTH [DOOR] HEIGHT [DOOR] WIDTH [DOOR] HEIGHT [TYPE 3] 4" FRAME 2" FRAME 2" FRAME GLAZING, SEE GLAZING SCHEDULE ALUMINUM AND GLASS ENTRY DOOR, SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE, STOREFRONT SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS [TYPE 4] SEE CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE [TYPE 5] SEE ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SCHEDULE SEE HOLLOW METAL STOREFRONT SCHEDULE [TYPE 1P] POCKET DOOR [DOOR] WIDTH [DOOR] HEIGHT 2" FRAME WIDTH HEIGHT [TYPE 1A] GENERAL NOTES THRESHOLD / TRANSITION TYPESGLASS TYPES HARDWARE TYPES REMARKS 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR HARDWARE TYPES. 1. SEE GLAZING SCHEDULE 1. SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE FINISH PLANS. 1. AT ALL MOBILITY IMPAIRED (ADA) AND HEARING / VISUAL APARTMENTS, PROVIDE AND INSTALL DOORBELL AND ALL ASSOCIATED POWER AND CABELING COMPLYING WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 2. PROVIDE AND INSTALL DOOR VIEWER AT 60INCHES A.F.F. MEASURED TO CENTER OF VIEWER. AT ACCESSIBLE APARTMENTS, INSTALL ADDITIONAL DOOR VIEWER AT 44-INCHES A.F.F. MEASURED TO CENTER OF VIEWER. 3. POCKET DOOR. INSTALL ALL SOLID BLOCKING & FRAMING REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION. ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND SC SOLID CORE HMHOLLOW METAL HPLHIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE PTPAINT STSTAIN 4. PROVIDE AND INSTALL DOOR ACTUATOR AND ALL ASSOCIATED POWER AND CABELING THAT COMLIES WITH ANSI A117.1, SEE FLOOR PALNS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 5. STEEL STIFFENED HOLLOW METAL DOOR, FULLY INSULATED AND WEATHER-STRIPPED. U-VALUE SHALL BE 0.32 OR BETTER. 6. DOUBLE LEAF DOOR. PROVIDE TWO EQUAL LEAFS, SEE FLOOR PLANS. DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE (TYPE-1) METAL FRAME, PAINT CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF FRAME (BOTH SIDES) DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE (TYPE-3) METAL FRAME, PAINT CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF FRAME (BOTH SIDES) LAMINATE GYPSUM BOARD TO MASONRY DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE (TYPE-4) EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SECTIONSMETAL FRAME, PAINT CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF FRAME (BOTH SIDES) (STAIR SIDE) (EXTERIOR SIDE) (STAIR SIDE) CMU VENEER BLOCK, SEE ELEVATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS (TYPE-5) ALUM. AND GLASS DOOR SEE CURTAIN WALL / STOREFRONT SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS ALUMINUM FRAME, SEE STOREFRONT/CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE CONTINUOUS BACKER ROD & SEALANT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF STOREFRONT (BOTH SIDES) DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE 1" THICK (ACTUAL) WOOD FRAME AND DOOR STOP, PAINT. 3/4" THICK X 2" WIDE (ACTUAL) MDF TRIM, PAINT (BOTH SIDES). EASE ALL OUTSIDE EDGES DOUBLE STUD FRAMING AT JAMB STUD FRAMING, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING. SEE WALL SCHEDULE 2x SOLID WOOD FRAMING, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING FRAME THROAT OPENING TO WRAP AROUND WALL, SEE WALL SCHEDULE FOR TYPE AND THICKNESS FRAME THROAT OPENING FLUSH WITH WALL, SEE WALL SCHEDULE FOR TYPE AND THICKNESS (JAMB) (HEAD) POCKET DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE 1" THICK (ACTUAL) SOLID WOOD FRAME, PAINT. 3/4" THICK X 2" WIDE (ACTUAL) MDF TRIM, PAINT (BOTH SIDES). EASE ALL OUTSIDE EDGES DOUBLE STUD FRAMING AT JAMB 1" THICK (ACTUAL) WOLID WOOD FRAME, PAINT. 3/4" THICK X 2" WIDE (ACTUAL) MDF TRIM, PAINT (BOTH SIDES). EASE ALL OUTSIDE EDGES POCKET DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE POCKET DOOR HARDWARE KIT, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS DOUBLE STUD FRAMING AT HEAD SEE WALL SCHEDULE (TYPE-2) SEE WALL SCHEDULE SEE WALL SCHEDULE (TYPE-2A) DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE (TYPE-4A) EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLY, SEE WALL SECTIONSMETAL FRAME, PAINT CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT ENTIRE PERIMETER OF FRAME (BOTH SIDES) (EXTERIOR SIDE) (STAIR SIDE) FIBER CEMENT PANEL SYSTEM, SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS 2x SOLID WOOD FRAMING, ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING JAMB TYPES plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a800 DOOR SCHEDULE 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TYPICAL APARTMENT DOORS DOOR SCHEDULE TYPICAL MARKROOM NAME DOORFRAME HEAD/ JAMB TYPE THRESHOLD GLASS TYPE HARDWARE REMARKS SIZE TYPE MATERIALFINISHLABELTY PEMATERIALFINISH WIDTHHEIGHTTHICKNESS TYPICAL.01APARTMENT ENTRY3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--U012 TYPICAL.01AAPARTMENT ENTRY3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--U01A1/2 TYPICAL.02APARTMENT COATS2' - 6"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U02TYPICAL.03APARTMENT STORAGE2' - 6"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U02TYPICAL.04APARTMENT BATH3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U 03TYPICAL.05APARTMENT LINEN2' - 8"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1PWOODPAINT2A--U06A3 TYPICAL.05AAPARTMENT LINEN2' - 8"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1PWOODPAINT2A--U06A3 TYPICAL.06APARTMENT BEDROOM3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U03TYPICAL.07APARTMENT CLOSET3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U02TYPICAL.08APARTMENT MECHANICAL3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U04FIRST FLOOR DOOR SCHEDULE MarkROOM NAME DOORFRAMES HEAD/ JAMB TYPE THRESHOLD GLASS TYPE HARDWARE REMARK SIZE TYPE MATERIALFINISHLABEL TYPE MATERIALFINISH WIDTHHEIGHTTHICKNESS 001.01VESTIBULE3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-4ALUMINUMALUMINUM513014 001.02VESTIBULE3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-1024 002.01HORIZON WAITING AREA3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-103002A.01HORIZON WAITING AREA3' - 4"7' - 0"1 3/4"2SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1-104002B.01HORIZON MED. ROOM3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--05002C.01HORIZON PROGRAM3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--06002D.01DIRECTOR'S OFFICE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--06002E.01SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--06003.01CORRIDOR3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-104B004.01SHARED COPY / FILES3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07004.02SHARED COPY / FILES3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07005.01STAFF TOILET3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--08006.01ELMSHADE OFFICES3' - 4"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--04A006A.01PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--06007.01ELMSHADE MED. ROOM3' - 4"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12A007.02ELMSHADE MED. ROOM3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--05008.01SERVER6' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--106 009.01BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--06010.01MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL3' - 8"7' - 0"1 3/4"HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT1--05A011.01TRASH / RECYCLE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07D012.01COMMUNITY ROOM3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-107B012.02COMMUNITY ROOM3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-107C013.01COMMUNITY KITCHEN3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1-105014.01STAFF BREAK ROOM3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--04B015.01WOMEN'S TOILET3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--11016.01MEN'S TOILET3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1SOLID COREWOOD / STAIN-1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--11017.01COMMON LAUNDRY3' - 4"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT1-F07A018.01CONFERENCE ROOM3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-103A018.02CONFERENCE ROOM3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMI NUM5-103B020.01CUST.2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12100C.01CORRIDOR3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM51102B100D.01VESTIBULE3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-4ALUMINUMALUMINUM51302A4 100D.02VESTIBULE3' - 4"8' - 0"1 3/4"3ALUMINUMALUMINUM-5ALUMINUMALUMINUM5-101A4 SECOND FLOOR 215.01TRASH / RECYCLE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07D 216.01I.T. CLOSET2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 217.01CUST.2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 THIRD FLOOR 315.01TRASH / RECYCLE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07D 316.01I.T. CLOSET2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 317.01CUST.2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 FOURTH FLOOR 415.01TRASH / RECYCLE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07D 416.01I.T. CLOSET2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 417.01CUST.2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 FIFTH FLOOR 515.01TRASH / RECYCLE3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--07D 516.01I.T. CLOSET2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 517.01CUST.2' - 6"7' - 0"1 3/4"1HOLLOW METALPAINT20-MINUTE1HOLLOW METALPAINT1--12 STAIR A A01.01STAIR A3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT180 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13 A02.01STAIR A3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A A03.01STAIR A3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A A04.01STAIR A3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A A05.01STAIR A3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A A06.01STAIR A3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT4A1F13A5 STAIR B B01.01STAIR B3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT180 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A B01.02STAIR B3' - 8"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT-2HOLLOW METALPAINT41-13A5 B02.01STAIR B3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A B03.01STAIR B3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A B04.01STAIR B3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A B05.01STAIR B3' - 0"7' - 0"1 3/4"2HOLLOW METALPAINT90 MINUTE2HOLLOW METALPAINT3-F13A BEDROOM CLOSET DOORS AT APARTMENT 14 214.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 314.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 414.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 514.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 BEDROOM CLOSET DOORS AT APARTMENT 13 213.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 313.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 413.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 513.07BEDROOM CLOSET6' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1ASOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U056 APARTMENT STORAGE AT APARTMENT 101, 305, 505 101.03APARTMENT STORAGE3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U05305.03APARTMENT STORAGE3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U05505.03APART MENT STORAGE3' - 0"6' - 8"1 3/8"1SOLID COREPAINT-1WOODPAINT2--U05ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 3'-4"GLASS +/-1'-6 1/2" FRAMED OPENING +/-5'-9" V.I.F. 8'-0" DOOR GLASS 1'-8" FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. GLASS 6'-8" 4 1/2" CORNER POST DOOR 3'-4" ALIGN F F F FP 16" 6" 6" 6" 0' - 0" F FRAMED OPENING +/- 9'-5 1/4" V.I.F. GLASS +/- 1'-8 3/4" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" 8'-0" DOOR DOOR 3'-4" GLASS 1'-8" GLASS 6'-8" 12" SOLID PANEL FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. 4 1/2" CORNER POST ALIGN 11 1 1 P P 1 6" 6" 6" 16" FRAMED OPENING +/- 6'-0" V.I.F. GLASS 1'-9 1/2" GLASS 3'-4" 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8"1'-8" 8'-0" DOOR FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. ALIGN FF F FP 4 1/2" CORNER POST 16" 6" 6" 6" DOOR 3'-4" F FRAMED OPENING +/- 6'-0" V.I.F. FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. 8'-0" DOOR 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 1'-8" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 1'-9 1/2" DOOR 3'-4" ALIGN 4 1/2" CORNER POST FF F FP 6" 6" 6" 16" F FRAMED OPENING +/- 9'-0" V.I.F. GLASS 2'-6" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 2'-6" 8'-0" DOOR FRAMED OPENING +/-10'-0" V.I.F. 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 1'-8" ALIGN DOOR 3'-4" FFF F F FPFP 6" 6" 6" 16" F FRAMED OPENING +/- 7'-6 1/2" V.I.F. GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. 8'-0" DOOR 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 1'-8" ALIGN 4 1/2" CORNER POST DOOR 3'-4" FF F FP 6" 6" 6" 16" F FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-3 3/4" V.I.F. 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 3'-4" GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. 4 1/2" CORNER POST GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 1'-8" 8'-0" DOOR FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. DOOR 3'-4" ALIGN 111 1 1 P P 6" 6" 6" 16" 3 3/4" CORNER POST 12" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 1'-8" FRAMED OPENING +/- 5'-11" V.I.F. GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 1'-9 1/4" FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-0" V.I.F. 8'-0" DOOR DOOR 3'-4" 11 1 P 6" 6" 16"6" SILL 3'-0" F FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-9" V.I.F. GLASS EQ. FRAMED OPENING +/- 8'-2" V.I.F. GLASS EQ. DOOR 3'-4" 16" 6" 6" 6" GLASS 4'-10" FRAMED OPENING +/- 5'-2" V.I.F. 4 1/2" CORNER POST F F FRAMED OPENING +/- 2'-2" V.I.F. FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-11 1/2" V.I.F. GLASS EQ. 1 GLASS 1'-10" GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. 11 SILL 6'-0" MASONRY OPENING +/- 8'-0" V.I.F. SILL, TYP. 2'-8" MASONRY OPENING +/- 3'-4" V.I.F. GLASS 5'-8" WINDOW 1'-10" GLASS 3'-0" 3 3 2'-8" 0" 10'-8" FRAMED OPENING 5'-4" FRAMED OPENING 3'-0" SILL, TYP. 2'-8" 2 2 8'-0" 2'-8" 0" FRAMED OPENING +/- 8'-9 1/2" V.I.F. FRAMED OPENING +/- 5'-2" V.I.F. SILL 3'-0" GLASS 4'-10" GLASS +/- 3'-4" V.I.F. GLASS +/- 4'-9" V.I.F 4 1/2" CORNER POST ALIGN CORNER POST WITH ADJACENT PERPENDICULAR STOREFRONT FF plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a801 STOREFRONT AND WINDOW SCHEDULE 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS FS1 S2 FS2FS3FS6FS7 S4S5 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SCHEDULE TYPEDESCRIPTION / OPERATIONMATERIALFINISHNOTES THROUGH 4 1/2" x 2" CENTER-GLAZED THERMALLY-BROKEN, FIRE-RATED STOREFRONT WITH SWING DOORS OR WITHOUT SWING DOORS (INTERIOR FIRE-RATED) ALUMINUM & GLASS: FIREFRAMES ALUMINUM SERIES CENTER-GLAZED POWDER-COAT FINISH TO MATCH KAWNEER PERMACOAT COATINGS OR OTHER CUSTOM COLOR TO MATCH ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS (REYNOBOND COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL), SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS, GLAZING SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION UPPER FIXED CASEMENT WINDOW LOWER PROJECTION WINDOWS WEATHERSHIELD PREMIUM SERIES ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD FIXED CASEMENT ABOVE AND AWNING BELOW POWDER-COAT FINISH TO MATCH KAWNEER PERMACOAT COATINGS OR OTHER CUSTOM COLOR TO MATCH ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS (REYNOBOND COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL), SEE SPECIFICATIONS THROUGH 4 1/2" x 2" CENTER-GLAZED THERMALLY-BROKEN STOREFRONT WITH SWING DOORS OR WITHOUT SWING DOORS (INTERIOR NON FIRE-RATED) ALUMINUM & GLASS: KAWNEER TRIFAB VERSAGLAZE 451T FRAMING CENTER-GLAZED POWDER-COAT FINISH TO MATCH KAWNEER PERMACOAT COATINGS OR OTHER CUSTOM COLOR TO MATCH ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS (REYNOBOND COLORWELD 500 CHARCOAL), SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS, GLAZING SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION GLAZING SCHDULE TYPEGLAZINGLITE TYPESSHGCU-FACTORSTC OR OITCNOTES 11/4" THICK CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS PANELSLAMINATED GLASSN/AN/ASTC => 33 MININUMFOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SEE SCHEDULE AND SEE SPECIFICATIONS 2 3/4" THICK [TOTAL] INSULATED, ARGON GAS FILLED CLEAR GLASS PANELS CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE, ARGON SPACE, CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE [ZO-E-SHIELD 5 EXTREME WITH ARGON] 0.200.27 MAX.OITC => 24 MIN. STC => 28 MIN. FOR USE IN ALL ALUMINUM-GLAD WOOD WINDOWS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, SEE WINDOW SCHEUDLE AND SPECIFICATIONS 3 1" THICK [TOTAL] INSULATED LOW-E W/ ARGON CLEAR GLASS PANELS 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE, 1/2" ARGON SPACE, 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE [LOW-E2 COATING APPLIED TO #4 SURFACE] 0.380.23OITC => 33 MIN. STC => 42 MIN. FOR USE IN ALL EXTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL SEE SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS F 7/8" THICK [TOTAL] FIRE-RATED, SAFETY-RATED CLEAR GLASS PANELS 45-MINUTE FIRE-RATED 7/8" GLASS LITEN/AN/ASTC => 38 MIN. FOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PER SCHEDULE WHERE FIRE-RATED GLAZING IS REQUIRED, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FP +/- 4" THICK (INSIDE FIRE-RATED 4 1/2" FRAME) INSULATED FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM SANDWICH PANEL (PAINTED FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT)N/AN/AN/A FOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PER SCHEDULE WHERE FIRE-RATED GLAZING IS REQUIRED, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. P+/- 4" THICK (INSIDE 4 1/2" FRAME) INSULATED ALUMINUM SANDWICH PANEL (PAINTED FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT)N/AN/AN/AFOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SEE SCHEDULE AND SEE SPECIFICATIONS FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT WINDOWS FS5 S3 S1 W1 FS4 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FS1 FS7 S1 S5 WINDOW SCHEDULE TYPEDESCRIPTION / OPERATIONMATERIALFINISHNOTES W1 DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOW (WITH FIXED UPPER SASH) ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS WEATHER SHEILD PREMIUM SERIES 8109 EXTERIOR: ALUMINUM FINISH TO MATCH KAWNEER PERMACOAT COATINGS 'ATLANTIC GRAY' OR OTHER CUSTOM COLOR TO MATCH THE ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS (REYNOBOND - COLORWELD 500 - CHARCOAL) INTERIOR: PRIMED (WHITE) AND PREFINISHED (WHTE) TO MATCH INTERIOR WALLS. SEE WINDOW ELEVATIONS, GLAZING SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S2 W1 ADDENDUM #A22019.11.22 A2 A2 A2 GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" INFILL PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" INFILL PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" INFILL PANEL 5'-9 1/2" GLASS 6'-8" 11" SOLID PANEL GLASS 3'-4" FRAMED OPENING +/- 10'-3" V.I.F. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. DOOR 8'-0" GLASS 4'-3" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 2'-0" ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 1'-0" V.I.F. GLASS 2'-0" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 1'-0" V.I.F. 11" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 4'-3" 6"x 6" CORNER POST ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 3 3/4" V.I.F. 333 3 3 3 3 3 3 33 3 3 3 3 3333 3 3 3 333 3 3 3 333 3 3 3 333 3 3 3 333 P P P P P P P P P P P P PPP P P P P P P DOOR 3'-4" +/- 9'-6" V.I.F. +/- 13'-4" V.I.F. ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 2" V.I.F. FRAMED OPENING +/- 12'-8" V.I.F. 3 6" 6" 6" 16" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" B.O CEILING (2ND FLOOR) 26' -6 3/4" B.O CEILING (3RD FLOOR) 37' -2 3/4" B.O CEILING (4TH FLOOR) 47' -10 3/4" +/- 18'-2 1/2" V.I.F. +/- 57'-4" V.I.F. SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 30' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" FRAMED OPENING +/- 5'-6 1/2" V.I.F. ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 2 1/2" V.I.F. GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" GLASS 3'-4" 33333 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 PPPPP P ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 1'-2 1/2" V.I.F. 6"x 6" CORNER POST 11" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 4'-3" 11" SOLID PANEL GLASS 6'-8" GLASS 4'-3" SOLID PANEL 5'-9 1/2" GLASS 1'-4" GLASS 4'-11" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 1'-4" GLASS 4'-11" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 1'-4" GLASS 4'-11" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 1'-4" GLASS 4'-11" 3 3 P 3 3 P 3 3 P 3 3 P +/- 24'-11 1/2" V.I.F. ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 2" V.I.F. THIRD FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 36' -0" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 41' -4" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 46' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 52' -0" GROUND FLOOR 0' -0" T.O. MASONRY 12' -8" B.O CEILING (GROUND FLOOR) 11' -5" FRAMED OPENING +/- 12'-8" V.I.F. FRAMED OPENING +/- 17'-6" V.I.F. 11" INFILL PANEL GLASS 6'-8" 4 1/2"x 6" END POST GLASS 3'-4" GLASS +/- 11" V.I.F. ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 1'-5" V.I.F. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. GLASS 4'-3" +/- 5'-3" V.I.F. ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 1'-5" V.I.F. GLASS 4'-3" PPPPPP 3 3 3 3 3 33333 3 3 3 ALUM. BRAKE MTL. +/- 2" V.I.F. DOOR 8'-0" DOOR 3'-4" 3 16" 6" 6" 6" +/- 40'-0" V.I.F. GLASS EQ. GLASS EQ. +/- 5'-10" V.I.F. GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" INFILL PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" INFILL PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" INFILL PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" INFILL PANEL 11" GLASS 1'-4" 33 3 3 P 3 3 33 P 3 3 33 P 3 3 33 P P P P P SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" SECOND FLOOR 17' -4" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" THIRD FLOOR 28' -0" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FOURTH FLOOR 38' -8" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" FIFTH FLOOR 49' -4" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" B.O. FIBER CEMENT 14' -8" B.O CEILING (2ND FLOOR) 26' -6 3/4" B.O CEILING (2ND FLOOR) 26' -6 3/4" B.O CEILING (3RD FLOOR) 37' -2 3/4" B.O CEILING (3RD FLOOR) 37' -2 3/4" B.O CEILING (4TH FLOOR) 47' -10 3/4" B.O CEILING (4TH FLOOR) 47' -10 3/4" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0"SECOND FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 20' -0" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" SECOND FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 25' -4" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 30' -8" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 30' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 57' -4" FRAMED OPENING +/- 37'-4" V.I.F. +/- 4'-2" V.I.F. GLASS 3'-3" 6"x 6" CORNER POST THIRD FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 36' -0" THIRD FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 36' -0" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 41' -4" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 41' -4" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 46' -8" FOURTH FLOOR WINDOW HEAD R.O. 46' -8" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 52' -0" FIFTH FLOOR WINDOW SILL R.O. 52' -0" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" 3 3 P 3 3 P 3 3 P 3 +/- 4'-2" V.I.F. GLASS 3'-3" 6"x 6" CORNER POST FRAMED OPENING +/- 37'-4" V.I.F. 3 3 P 3 3 P 3 3 P 3 GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" SOLID PANEL 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 1'-4" S O L I D P A N E L 3'-9 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" 1'-4" GLASS 1'-1 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" GLASS 4'-0"GLASS 1'-1 1/2" GLASS 4'-11" 3 3 3 3 3 MASONRY OPENING +/- 17'-4" V.I.F. MASONRY OPENING +/- 3'-4" V.I.F. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. PLAN PROJECT No. DATE ©PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC SHARS I.D. # 20186081 a802 CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE 001.16.01.02 11.22.2019 LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS C2 C1 C3 C4 C6 C5 C7 GLAZING SCHDULE TYPEGLAZINGLITE TYPESSHGCU-FACTORSTC OR OITCNOTES 11/4" THICK CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS PANELSLAMINATED GLASSN/AN/ASTC => 33 MININUMFOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SEE SCHEDULE AND SEE SPECIFICATIONS 2 3/4" THICK [TOTAL] INSULATED, ARGON GAS FILLED CLEAR GLASS PANELS CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE, ARGON SPACE, CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE [ZO-E-SHIELD 5 EXTREME WITH ARGON] 0.200.27 MAX.OITC => 24 MIN. STC => 28 MIN. FOR USE IN ALL ALUMINUM-GLAD WOOD WINDOWS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, SEE WINDOW SCHEUDLE AND SPECIFICATIONS 3 1" THICK [TOTAL] INSULATED LOW-E W/ ARGON CLEAR GLASS PANELS 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE, 1/2" ARGON SPACE, 1/4" CLEAR LAMINATED GLASS LITE [LOW-E2 COATING APPLIED TO #4 SURFACE] 0.380.23OITC => 33 MIN. STC => 42 MIN. FOR USE IN ALL EXTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT / CURTAIN WALL SEE SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS F 7/8" THICK [TOTAL] FIRE-RATED, SAFETY-RATED CLEAR GLASS PANELS 45-MINUTE FIRE-RATED 7/8" GLASS LITEN/AN/ASTC => 38 MIN. FOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PER SCHEDULE WHERE FIRE-RATED GLAZING IS REQUIRED, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FP +/- 4" THICK (INSIDE FIRE-RATED 4 1/2" FRAME) INSULATED FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM SANDWICH PANEL (PAINTED FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT)N/AN/AN/A FOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PER SCHEDULE WHERE FIRE-RATED GLAZING IS REQUIRED, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. P+/- 4" THICK (INSIDE 4 1/2" FRAME) INSULATED ALUMINUM SANDWICH PANEL (PAINTED FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT)N/AN/AN/AFOR USE IN ALL INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SEE SCHEDULE AND SEE SPECIFICATIONS ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL SCHEDULE TYPEDESCRIPTION / OPERATIONWALL MATERIALFINISHNOTES THROUGH 6" x 2 1/2" OUTSIDE-GLAZED THERMALLY-BROKEN CURTAIN WALL WITH SWING DOORS OR WITHOUT SWING DOORS (EXTERIOR ONLY) ALUMINUM & GLASS: KAWNEER - 1600UT SYSTEM 1 CURTAIN WALL OUTSIDE GLAZED PAINTED ALUMINUM: KAWNEER - PERMACOAT ORSL 71870 'ATLANTIC GRAY' OR OTHER CUSTOM COLOR TO MATCH THE ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS PER ARCHITECT'S SELECTION SEE CURTAIN WALL ELEVATIONS, GLAZING SCHEDULE & SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION C1 C7 ADDENDUM #A12019.10.24 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATIONS AND TAGS CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE FEET PER MINUTE ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR GENERAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ACCESS DOOR THOUSAND BTU/HOUR NOT TO SCALE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR NORMALLY CLOSED NORMALLY OPEN INSTALLATION KEYNOTE CONNECTION TO EXISTING REMOVE TO THIS POINT NC NO EC PC GC NTS AFF AD FPM CFM MBH OED OPEN ENDED DUCT SUPPLY AIRSA RA RETURN AIR OA OUTDOOR AIR EA EXHAUST AIR FC FLEXIBLE CONNECTION PKGD PACKAGED (L) LINED EXISTING TO REMAINETR EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSUREESP AIRFOILAF SINGLE-WIDTH SINGLE INLETSWSI REMOVAL KEYNOTE DRY BULBDB WET BULBWB SENSIBLE MBHSMBH TOTAL MBHTMBH EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE DIRECT EXPANSIONDX EXISTING(E) ADJUSTABLEADJ. CONSTRUCTION MANAGERCM CONTROL/SYMBOLS LEGEND DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL TEMPERATURE SENSOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR THERMOSTAT STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR S DSD T SP SYMBOL DESCRIPTION DUCT SECTION - SUPPLY DUCT SECTION - RETURN RECTANGULAR DUCT WIDTH x DEPTH ROUND DUCT DIAMETER FLAT OVAL DUCT WIDTH / DEPTH FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK DUCTWORK LEGEND A"ø A B A"/B"ø 20"x12" DUCT TURNING DOWN (LEFT) OR UP (RIGHT) SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE OR RETURN REGISTER OR GRILLE EXHAUST REGISTER OR GRILLE A"xB" OR 20"x12" DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL DUCTWORK SYMBOLS AND TAGS FLEX CONNECTOR SD FD AAD T _NECK _CFM AIRFLOW DIRECTION AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER FIRE DAMPER SMOKE DAMPER VOLUME DAMPER BACKDRAFT DAMPER FC REGISTER,GRILLE,DIFFUSER T = TYPE NECK = NECK SIZE BDD plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h01 HVAC GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 DESIGN TEMPERATURE CRITERIA WINTER SUMMER OAT DB OAT WB INDOOR SETPOINT RETURN AIR MIN TEMP OAT DB OAT WB INDOOR SETPOINT RETURN AIR MAX TEMP 2.8 0 72 70 88.5 71.0 75 77 1. OUTDOOR SEASONAL DESIGN CRITERIA BASED ON HISTORIC DATA FROM THE 2017 ASHRAE HANDBOOK FUNDAMENTALS: CHAPTER 14 "CLIMATE DESIGN INFORMATION" FOR THE GREATER ROCHESTER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT (99.6% HEATING DB, 0.4% COOLING DB/MCWB). 2. INDOOR SETPOINTS BASED ON THE NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE: 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE, SECTION C302.1 "INTERIOR DESIGN CONDITIONS". HVAC GENERAL NOTES A ALL NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SYMBOLS ON THIS DRAWING APPLY TO ALL HVAC DRAWINGS FOR THIS PROJECT. B THE HVAC CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHIING OF HVAC RELATED WORK. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY WORKERS SKILLED IN THE MATERIAL BEING CUT AND PATCHED. C FIELD VERIFY ALL DUCTWORK AND PIPE SIZES AS WELL AS EXACT LOCATIONS. D HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND REINSTALL ALL CEILING SYSTEMS, NOT INCLUDING CEILING SYSTEMS REMOVED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR, TO PERFORM ALL WORK. CEILING SYSTEMS SHALL BE REINSTALLED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE DAMAGED CEILING TILES AND GRID. MATERIALS SHALL BE EQUAL TO EXISTING. E PROVIDE ALL WORK IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL CODES. OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED PERMITS. F DO NOT SHUT DOWN ANY HVAC OR RELATED SYSTEM WITHOUT THE BUILDING OWNER'S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL. FOLLOW ALL OWNER REQUIREMENTS AND SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURES AS WELL AS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS PROJECT. G FIRESTOP ALL RATED FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH SMOKE PARTITIONS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY, VOLUME 2. SUBMIT FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY PENETRATION AND SMOKE RATED ASSEMBLY PENETRATION DETAILS TO THE ENGINEER FOR REVIEW. H PROVIDE BALANCING DAMPERS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE CONDITIONS INDICATED. I WHERE BRANCH DUCT SIZES ARE NOT SHOWN, THEY SHALL BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE DIFFUSER NECK. J PROVIDE MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER AT EACH BRANCH TAKE-OFF TO A REGISTER, GRILLE, OR DIFFUSER. K INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT IN STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. MAINTAIN MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SERVICE CLEARANCES. L THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT WITH THE WORK OF ALL OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO THE FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION OF ANY WORK. M THE DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL OFFSETS, FITTINGS, HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS, WIRING, AND ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE AND FULLY FUNCTIONING INSTALLATION. ALTERNATE DUCT SIZES WITH EQUIVALENT FRICTION LOSS CHARACTERISTICS ARE ACCEPTABLE. N ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE FABRICATED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, AND NFPA STANDARD 90A AND 101. O HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TESTING AND BALANCING FOR THIS PROJECT. REPORT SHALL BE TYPED AND SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. P THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING TEMPORARY WORK SURFACES IN ATTIC, CRAWL, AND INTERSTITIAL SPACES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CREATE ACCESS LOCATIONS TO WORK AREAS FOR THIS PROJECT AS REQUIRED. AFTER WORK IS COMPLETE REPAIR/PATCH ALL ASSEMBLIES TO MATCH EXISTING. Q ALL NEW DUCTWORK SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURE. R ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 1613 OF THE BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. S THERMOSTATIC CONTROLS: WHERE USED TO CONTROL BOTH HEATING AND COOLING, ZONE THERMOSTATIC CONTROLS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A TEMPERATURE RANGE OR DEADBAND OF AT LEAST 5°F WITHIN WHICH THE SUPPLY OF HEATING AND COOLING ENERGY TO THE ZONE IS CAPABLE OF BEING SHUT OFF OR REDUCED TO A MINIMUM. WHERE A ZONE HAS A SEPARATE HEATING AND A SEPARATE COOLING THERMOSTATIC CONTROL LOCATED WITHIN THE ZONE, A LIMIT SWITCH, MECHANICAL STOP OR DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM WITH SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE CAPABILITY TO PREVENT THE HEATING SET POINT FROM EXCEEDING THE COOLING SETPOINT AND TO MAINTAIN THE DEADBAND. MOUNT TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND THERMOSTATS WITH OCCUPANT INTERFACE AT 48" AFF WITH ACCESS CLEARANCE PER UFAS STANDARDS. T OFF HOURS CONTROLS: EACH ZONE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THERMOSTATIC SETBACK CONTROLS THAT ARE CONTROLLED BY EITHER AN AUTOMATIC TIME CLOCK OR PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL SYSTEM. THERMOSTATIC SETBACK CONTROLS SHALL HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO SET BACK OR TEMPORARILY OPERATE THE SYSTEM TO MAINTAIN ZONE TEMPERATURES DOWN TO 55°F OR UP TO 85°F. AUTOMATIC TIME CLOCK OR PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF STARTING AND STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR SEVEN DIFFERENT DAILY SCHEDULES PER WEEK AND RETAINING THEIR PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST 10 HOURS. ADDITIONALLY, THE CONTROLS SHALL HAVE A MANUAL OVERRIDE THAT ALLOWS TEMPORARY OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM FOR UP TO 2 HOURS; A MANUALLY OPERATED TIMER CAPABLE OF BEING ADJUSTED TO OPERATE THE SYSTEM FOR UP TO 2 HOURS; OR AN OCCUPANCY SENSOR. AUTOMATIC START CONTROLS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH HVAC SYSTEM. THE CONTROLS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTING THE DAILY START TIME OF THE HVAC SYSTEM IN ORDER TO BRING EACH SPACE TO THE DESIRED TEMPERATURE PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY. VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HIGH STATIC HORIZONTAL DUCTED INDOOR HEAT PUMP UNIT SCHEDULE TAG ROOMS SERVED BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER INDOOR EVAPORATOR UNIT OUTDOOR HEAT RECOVERY UNIT REQURED ACCESSORIES NOTE MODEL RATED COOLING CAPACITY (MBH) HEATING CAPACITY (MBH) VENTILATION (CFM) SUPPLY FAN AIRFLOW (CFM) MCA POWER SUPPLY (V/PH/HZ) FCU-1 006A, 006 LG ARNU073M2A4 7.5 8.5 55.0 250 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-2 002, 002A, 002E LG ARNU123M2A4 12.3 13.6 85.0 320 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-3 002B, 002C, 002D, 003, 004, 007, 009 LG ARNU073M2A4 7.5 8.5 90.0 465 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-4 100A, 100B, 100C LG ARNU183M2A4 19.1 21.5 175.0 465 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-5 018 LG ARNU423M2A4 42 47 125.0 660 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-6 017 LG ARNU243M2A4 24.2 27.3 85.0 600 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-7 012, 014 LG ARNU183M2A4 19.1 21.5 100.0 465 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-8 100D, 012 LG ARNU543M3A4 54 61 265.0 1200 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-9 200A, 200B, 200C LG ARNU183M2A4 19.1 21.5 175.0 400 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-10 500A, 500B, 500C LG ARNU243M2A4 24.2 27.3 175.0 465 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-11 300A, 300B, 300C LG ARNU183M2A4 19.1 21.5 175.0 400 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 FCU-12 400A, 400B, 400C LG ARNU183M2A4 19.1 21.5 175.0 400 2.3 208/1/60 ODU-1 1-4 1 1. PROVIDE WIRED, WALL MOUNTED REMOTE CONTROLLER. 2. PROVIDE REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM BETWEEN INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNITS INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY BRANCHBOXES. VENDOR SHALL SIZE AND SELECT LINES. 3. PROVIDE INTEGRAL CONDENSATE PUMP, WITH CHECK VALVE. COORDINATE WITH PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR DRAIN PIPE ROUTING. 4. PROVIDE MERV-8 FILTER BOX ACCESSORIES: NOTES: 1. SYSTEM SHALL BE CAPABLE OF 24-HOUR CONTINUOUS OPERATION, WITH SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING PER ZONE, VARIABLE SPEED INVERTER DRIVEN COMPRESSOR, HIGH PRESSURE PROTECTION. LG MULTIV5 LGRED VRF OUTDOOR UNIT SCHEDULE TAG MODEL NOMINAL COOLING CAPACITY (MBH) NOMINAL HEATING (MBH) CONNECTED COOLING (MBH) IEER/EER COP INVERTER DRIVEN COMPRESSOR TYPE/QUANTITY ELECTRICAL-PER MODULE NOTESVOLTAGE PHZ MCA ODU-1 ARUM241BTE5 233.1 243 234.4 22.7/10.4 3.2 SCROLL/2 208 3 63.2 1-6 1. EFFICIENCY VALUES FOR EER, IEER, COP ARE BASED ON AHRI 1230 TEST METHOD FOR MIXTURE OF DUCTED & NON-DUCTED INDOOR UNITS. 2. PROVIDE MIN 18" NONINVASIVE ROOF STANDS WITH OPEN BASE. 3. PROVIDE LOW AMBIENT OUTDOOR UNITS WITH FULL CAPACITY AT -9.9 DEG. F 4. PROVIDE SNOW AND HAIL GUARDS WITH SNOW HOOD. 5. PROVIDE WIND BAFFLES FOR LOW AMBIENT COOLING. 6. PROVIDE AC SMART INTEGRATION CONTROLLER. NOTES: SINGLE PACKAGED VERTICAL HEAT PUMP SCHEDULE TAG LOCATION SUPPLY AIR (CFM) OUTDOOR AIR (CFM) ESP (IN.WG) COOLING - 95°F DB/75°F WB OUTDOOR, 80°F DB/67°F WB INDOOR HEAT PUMP - 47°F DB OUTDOOR COIL KW ELECTRICAL WEIGHT (LBS) COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENT TMBH (MIN-MAX) SMBH (MIN-MAX) SEER EER OUTDOOR OPERATING RANGE (°F) TMBH (MIN-MAX) COP HSPF VOLT MCA MOP/MOCP VRP-12KA 1 BEDROOM APARTMENTS 560 35 0.1 4.0 - 16.0 2.8 - 11.4 20.0 13.0 65 - 115 4.0 - 14.0 3.4 10.0 2.78 208 18.9 20 215 1-11 FRIEDRICH VRP12 VRP-12KB 1 BEDROOM APARTMENTS 560 35 0.1 4.0 - 16.0 2.8 - 11.4 20.0 13.0 65 - 115 4.0 - 14.0 3.4 10.0 4.1 208 27.5 30 215 1-11 FRIEDRICH VRP12 1. PROVIDE UNIT WITH SUPPLEMENTAL ELECTRIC HEATER. 2. PROVIDE UNIT WITH SINGLE OA FAN POWERED SYSTEM. 3. PROVIDE UNIT WITH MERV 8 OUTDOOR AIR AND RETURN AIR FILTERS. 4. PROVIDE UNIT WITH REHEAT COIL. 5. PROVIDE UNIT CONFIGURED FOR RETURN AIR DUCT CONNECTION WITH FILTER REMOVAL SLOT. 6. PROVIDE UNIT WITH WALL PLENUM AND ARCHITECTURAL EXTERIOR LOUVER. CUSTOM COLOR AND FINISH SHALL BE SELECTED AND APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. 7. PROVIDE UNIT WITH STANDARD WALL CONTROLLER. 8. PROVIDE UNIT WITH EC FAN MOTOR. 9. PROVIDE UNIT WITH MODULATING HEATING AND COOLING CAPABILITY. 10. PROVIDE UNIT WITH CAULKING AND/OR SPRAY FOAM ON ALL CASING AND SLEEVE JOINTS AS REQUIRED TO PASS ROOM AND BLOWER DOOR TESTING 11. COORDINATE ELEVATED UNIT PLATFORM WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO ALIGN BOTTOM OF OUTDOOR LOUVER WITH LOWER WINDOW SASH DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM SCHEDULE - DX/NATURAL GAS TAG LOCATION SERVICE SUPPLY FAN STAINLESS STEEL INDIRECT HEAT EXCHANGER R-410A DX REFRIGERANT COOLING ELECTRICAL COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENTAIRFLOW (CFM) ESP (IN WC) HP BHP CONTROL INPUT MBH OUTLET MBH MIN GAS PRESSURE EFF. EAT LAT TMBH SMBH EAT DB/WB LAT DB/WB EER VOLT PHZ MCA DOAS-1 ROOFTOP VENTILATION 1780 1.5 3 1.92 ECM 200 160 7" 80% 4.1 78 112 80 88/70 52.6/52.5 11.58 208 3 60 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 MAMMOTH YMDA-120 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE SUITABLE FOR 100% OUTSIDE AIR OPERATION AND BAROMETRIC RELIEF 2. PROVIDE WITH 4" PLEATED MERV 8 FILTER SECTION 3. PROVIDE WITH 5-1 TURNDOWN INDIRECT FIRED NATURAL GAS STAINLESS STEEL HEAT EXCHANGER AND MODULATING COOLING 4. PROVIDE WITH ECM OR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SUPPLY FAN 5. PROVIDE WITH HOT GAS REHEAT FOR DEHUMIDIFICATION CYCLE 6. PROVIDE WITH UNITARY CONTROLLER CAPABLE OF INDEPENDENT DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL AS WELL AS REHEAT FOR MAXIMUM HUMIDITY CONTROL BASED ON INDOOR ROOM HUMIDITY SENSOR 7. PROVIDE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSULATED ROOF CURB SUITABLE FOR DOWNBLAST APPLICATION AND FLAT ROOF NOTES: REGISTER, GRILLE, AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE TAG TYPE STYLE MATERIAL FINISH/COLOR COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENT 1 SUPPLY SQUARE CEILING STEEL WHITE 1 TITUS TMS 2 SUPPLY LOUVERED GRILLE STEEL WHITE 4 TITUS 300RL 3 SUPPLY LINEAR STEEL WHITE 2 TITUS TBD-80 4 SUPPLY LINEAR STEEL WHITE 3 TITUS TBD-80 A RETURN/EXH LOUVERED GRILLE STEEL WHITE 4 TITUS 350 RL B RETURN/EXH LOUVERED GRILLE ALUMINUM WHITE TITUS 350 FL 1. PROVIDE WITH ROUND NECK COLLAR PER DRAWING NOTES. 2. PROVIDE WITH 11" HIGH PLENUM BOX, (3) 1" SLOTS, 4' LENGTH. 3. PROVIDE WITH 11" HIGH PLENUM BOX, (2) 1" SLOTS, 4' LENGTH. 4. PROVIDE WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER WHERE REQUIRED FOR BALANCING NOTES: ELECTRIC BASEBOARD SCHEDULE TAG ENCLOSURE ELECTRICAL COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENTHEIGHT DEPTH LENGTH W/LIN. FT. TOTAL KW VOLT PH EBB-4 6.75" 3" 4' 250/188 1 208 1 1,2,3 QMARK AWH 3150F EBB-4T 6.75" 3" 4' 250/188 1 208 1 1,2,3 QMARK AWH 3150F 1. PROVIDE WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR REMOTE CONTROL OF BASEBOARD BY SECOND BY SECOND STAGE VRF SYSTEM TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER FOR THE ASSOCIATION ZONE. 2. MOUNT AT MINIMUM HEIGHT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PER MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS. 3. PROVIDE WITH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT NOTES: FAN SCHEDULE TAG LOCATION SERVICE HIGH/LOW CFM SP (IN WC) FAN RPM ELECTRICAL COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENT VOLT PH MAX. AMPS EF-1 EXHAUST 0.25 1113 120 1 0.2 EF-2 SHARED TOILET ROOMS EXHAUST 75 0.25 1113 120 1 0.2 1,2,3,4,8,9 PANASONIC FV-0511VK2 EF-3 EXHAUST 0.25 1113 120 1 0.2 1. UNIT SHALL BE ENERGY STAR RATED. 2. PROVIDE UNIT WITH MOUNTING HARDWARE. 3. PROVIDE UNIT WITH INTEGRAL DISCONNECT. 4. PROVIDE UNIT WITH HOODED WALL CAP WITH INTEGRAL BACKDRAFT DAMPER. 5. UNIT SHALL BE COMBINATION FAN/LIGHT TYPE. 6. PROVIDE UNIT WITH MULTI-SPEED CONTROLS. 7. PROVIDE UNIT WITH MOTION SENSOR SUCH THAT FAN OPERATES AT LOW SPEED CONTINUOUSLY AND HIGH SPEED DURING ROOM OCCUPANCY. 8. PROVIDE UNIT WITH CEILING RADIATION DAMPER MODEL PC-RD05C5, AS MANUFACTURED BY PANASONIC, FOR FANS/DUCTS INSTALLED IN RATED HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLIES. 9. UNIT SHALL BE FAN ONLY TYPE. ELECTRIC WALL HEATER SCHEDULE TAG MOUNT TYPE CFM ELECTRIC COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENT KW VOLT PH ECUH-1 RECESSED 100 2 120 1 1,2,3 QMARK AWH 4408F 1. PROVIDE UNIT WITH MOUNTING HARDWARE AND METAL BACKBOX SUITABLE FOR SURFACE OF RECESSED MOUNTING AS INDICATED 2. PROVIDE UNIT WITH FAN DELAY, THERMAL CUTOUT, AND DISCONNECT SWTICH. 3. .UNIT SHALL BE FIELD CONVERTED FOR VOLTAGE AND PHASE DEPENDING ON ACTUAL SHIPPED CONFIGURATION UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE - ELECTRIC TAG LOCATION TYPE CFM HEATING ELEMENT MOTOR COMMENTS DESIGN EQUIPMENTMBH KW VOLT PH RPM HP UH-1 MECH AND ELECTRICAL ROOM VERTICAL DOWNBLAST 700 17 5 208 3 1550 1/30 1 RENZOR EGHB-5 1. PROVIDE UNIT WITH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT, DISCONNECT SWITCH, AND ANY TRANSFORMERS, CONTACTORS, OR RELAYS REQUIRED FOR STAND-ALONE OPERATION. LAKEVIEW HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS GENERAL: 1. CONTROLS FOR THIS PROJECT APPLY TO THE VERTICAL SINGLE PACKAGE HEAT PUMPS (VRP), VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM (VRF), VENTILATION AIR SYSTEMS (DOAS), AND EXHAUST FANS. 2. THE CONTROLS SYSTEM IS COMPOSED OF DISTRIBUTED UNITARY CONTROLLERS, PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS AND OCCUPANCY SENSORS. THE FACILITY DOES NOT INCLUDE A CENTRAL BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS). 3. ALARMS: ANY ALARMS GENERATED BY EQUIPMENT SHALL APPEAR ON THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT UNITARY CONTROLLER. 4. VRP AND VRF SYSTEM UNITS SHALL OPERATE UNDER PACKAGED FACTORY CONTROLS TO MAINTAIN THE ASSOCIATED ZONE WALL THERMOSTAT HEATING AND COOLING SET POINTS. UNIT FANS SHALL BE ALLOWED TO CYCLE WITH LOAD. 5. THE DEDICATED OUTSIDE AIR UNIT (DOAS-1) SERVING NON-APARTMENT SPACE VENTILATION SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY DURING OCCUPIED HOURS AND BE OFF DURING UNOCCUPIED HOURS. THIS UNIT SHALL DISCHARGE AIR AT ROOM NEUTRAL CONDITIONS WHENEVER IT IS OPERATING. PACKAGED VERTICAL HEAT PUMPS: · CONTROLS: PACKAGED VERTICAL HEAT PUMPS SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY THE MANUFACTURER'S SUPPLIED WALL MOUNTED CONTROLLER. · VENTILATION MODE: OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER SHALL BE OPEN (SWITCH ACTIVATED) AND FAN SHALL BE ENERGIZED CONTINUOUSLY DURING OCCUPIED PERIODS. · COOLING MODE: THE SUPPLY FAN SHALL BE ENERGIZED. UPON CALL FOR COOLING, THE UNIT SHALL MODULATE COMPRESSOR CAPACITY AND FAN SPEED TO OPTIMALLY MEET THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT OF 75°F (ADJ.). · HEATING MODE: THE SUPPLY FAN SHALL BE ENERGIZED. UPON CALL FOR HEATING, THE UNIT SHALL MODULATE COMPRESSOR CAPACITY AND FAN SPEED TO OPTIMALLY MEET THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT OF 72°F (ADJ.). AS OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE DECREASES AND THE HEAT PUMP FAILS TO MEET SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE SUPPLEMENTAL ELECTRIC HEATING COIL SHALL ENERGIZE AND STAGE/SEQUENCE TO MEET SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. · DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE: THE SUPPLY FAN SHALL BE ENERGIZED. THE UNIT SHALL MODULATE COMPRESSOR CAPACITY AND FAN SPEED TO OPTIMALLY MEET THE SPACE HUMIDITY SETPOINT. THE SUPPLE ELECTRIC HEATING COIL SHALL REHEAT THE SUPPLY AIR TO NOT IMPART ADDITIONAL LOAD TO THE SPACE. · SAFETIES: IN THE EVENT OF WALL CONTROL FAILURE, UNIT SHALL OPERATE AUTONOMOUSLY TO FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS. IN THE EVENT OF A CONDENSATE OVERFLOW FROM A CLOGGED PRIMARY DRAIN, SECONDARY OVERFLOW IS DIRECTED TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE BUILDING. EMERGENCY HEAT OVERRIDE SHALL ENABLE THE RESISTANCE STRIP HEATERS IN CASE OF HEAT PUMP FAILURE (SWITCH ACTIVATED). VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM (VRF): · DESIGN INTENT FOR THE CONTROL SYSTEM IS TO PROVIDE A FACTORY PROGRAMMED AND INSTALLED, PACKAGED CONTROL SYSTEM SUITABLE FOR COMPLETE VRF SYSTEM CONTROL. THE HVAC VAV SYSTEM SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH A CENTRAL CONTROLLER AND INCLUDE ZONE LEVEL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER. THE CENTRAL CONTROLLER SHALL PROVIDE A GRAPHIC BASED OPERATOR INTERFACE. PROVIDE ALL ACCOMMODATIONS TO ALLOW REMOTE ACCESS TO CONTROL SYSTEMS BY THE TENANT'S BUILDING MAINTENANCE FIRM. THE ZONE LEVEL WALL SENSORS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF ALLOWING AN OCCUPANT OVERRIDE OF +/-3°F. · THE CENTRAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF EXPANSION FOR COMMUNICATION WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE DI/DO BOARDS FOR START/STOP AND ALARM COMMUNICATION WITH DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEMS SERVING THE FACILITY. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED SENSORS AND HARDWARE. THE OVERALL AIRSIDE SYSTEM SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE FOR PROGRAMING AND SET POINT MODIFICATION VIA THE MANUFACTURES WEB BASED INTERFACE. THIS INTERFACE SHALL BE CONFIGURED AND SUPPLIED TO THE OWNER/FACILITY OPERATOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. THE MANUFACTURE’S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL TEST, COMMISSION AND TRAIN THE OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE IN THE USE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM AS APART OF THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLY PACKAGE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INTER-CONNECTING CONTROL WIRING. WIRING SHALL BE PER THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. · THE SYSTEM SHALL HAVE 55°F (ADJ.) HEATING SETBACK, 85°F (ADJ.) COOLING SETBACK, 7-DAY CLOCK, AND 2HOUR OCCUPANT OVERRIDE. SETBACK CONTROLS TO SWITCH TO OCCUPIED MODE A MINIMUM OF 2 HOURS PRIOR TO TENANT ARRIVAL. · VRF OUTDOOR UNITS (ODU) AND BC CONTROLLERS (BCC): o OUTDOOR UNITS AND BC CONTROLLERS SHALL OPERATE ACCORDING TO THE PACKAGED VRF SYSTEM CONTROLLER SEQUENCE TO ACHIEVE SPACE SETPOINTS. · VRF FAN COIL UNITS (FCU): o FAN COIL UNITS SHALL OPERATE ACCORDING TO THE PACKAGED VRF SYSTEM CONTROLLER SEQUENCE TO MAINTAIN HEATING SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT OF 70°F (ADJUSTABLE) AND COOLING SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT OF 75°F (ADJUSTABLE), AS SENSED BY WALL MOUNTED ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS. SUPPLY FANS SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY DURING OCCUPIED TIMES TO ACHIEVE SPACE VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS. o FCU CONTROLLERS SHALL HAVE 7-DAY PROGRAMMABLE AND AUTOMATIC TIME CLOCK SETBACK CONTROLS. CONTROLLERS SHALL PERMIT SETBACK TO 55°F IN HEATING MODE AND 85°F IN COOLING MODE. DEDICATED OUTSIDE AIR UNIT (DOAS-1) · UNIT WILL BE CONTROLLED BY INTEGRAL FACTORY CONTROLS FOR HEATING, COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFICATION, AS REQUIRED TO DISCHARGE AIR AT ROOM NEUTRAL CONDITIONS (70 DEG. F, ADJUSTABLE). · DUCT MOUNTED TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER SHALL BE INCLUDED TO CONTROL UNIT DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE BY MODULATING OR CYCLING HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS, AS REQUIRED, PER MANUFACTURER’S PACKAGED CONTROL ROUTINES. · A DUCT MOUNTED RELIEF AIR HUMIDITY SENSOR SHALL PUT THE UNIT INTO DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE IF THE RELIEF AIR HUMIDITY RISES ABOVE 60% RH (ADJ.). IN DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE THE UNIT SHALL ENABLE COOLING AND HOT GAS REHEAT SIMULTANEOUSLY TO PROVIDE DEHUMIDIFICATION WHILE MAINTAINING DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. EXHAUST FANS (EF-1, EF-2, EF-3) APARTMENT BATHROOM EXHAUST FANS (EF-1) SHALL OPERATE AT SLOW SPEED (40 CFM) AT ALL TIMES. IF INTEGRAL OCCUPANCY SENSOR, OR FAN/LIGHT SWITCH, IS TRIGGERED FAN SHIFTS TO HIGH SPEED OPERATION (80 CFM). ONCE OCCUPANCY SENSOR REVERTS TO UNOCCUPIED MODE, AND FAN/LIGHT SWITCH IS DE ENERGIZED, FAN RETURNS TO SLOW SPEED OPERATION. SHARED TOILET ROOM EXHAUST FANS (EF-2) SHALL OPERATE IN TANDEM WITH TOILET ROOM LIGHT. JANITOR’S CLOSET EXHAUST FAN (EF-3) SHALL RUN CONTINUOUSLY. ELECTRIC BASEBOARD (EBB-4 AND EBB-4T) SUPPLEMENTAL HEATING BASEBOARD IN THE CONFERENCE ROOM (EBB-4) SHALL BE WIRED TO OPERATE AS THE SECOND STAGE OF VRF SYSTEM HEATING FOR THIS ZONE (WITH UNIT FCU-5) EMERGENCY HEATING BASEBOARD IN THE COMMUNITY ROOM (EBB-4T) SHALL OPERATE WITH INDEPENDENT, UNIT MOUNTED, THERMOSTATS AS A STAND-ALONE SYSTEM FOR THIS REFUGE SPACE. SET INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT TO PROVIDE HEAT OUTSIDE THE COOLING RANGE OF THE VRF FAN COIL UNIT FCU-5. W W W W W W D D D D D D 004 SHARED COPY / FILES 006 ELMSHADE OFFICES 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100C CORRIDOR 002E SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002A HORIZON PROGRAM 005 STAFF TOILET 007 ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002D DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002C PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002B HORIZON MED. ROOM 002 HORIZON WAITING AREA 003 RECEPTION OFFICE 001 VESTIBULE 018 CONFERENCE ROOM 017 COMMON LAUNDRY 011 TRASH / RECYCLE 100D VESTIBULE 014 STAFF BREAK ROOM 013 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 012 COMMUNITY ROOM FCU-1 FCU-2 FCU-4 FCU-6 FCU-5 FCU-7 FCU-8 VRP-12KB EF-1 6"ø 1 125 6"ø 1 105 8"ø 1 200 22"x10" A 575 22"x10" A 290 6"ø 1 606"ø 1 100 8"ø 1 100 6"ø 1 50 6"ø 1 50 6"ø 1 75 6"ø 1 90 6"ø 1 50 FCU-3 16"x8" 6"ø 10"x8" 10"x6" 6"ø 6"ø 6"ø 18"x10" 6"ø 1 100 100 6"/5"ø 4 40 6"/5"ø 4 90 6"/5"ø 4 008 SERVER 20"x12" 12"ø 10"x8" 12"x10" 8"ø 10"ø12"x10" 8"ø 10"ø 145 8"/5"ø 4 6"ø 1 40 22"x10" EBB-4 EBB-4 EBB-4 EBB-4T EBB-4T EBB-4T BCC-2 BCC-1 12"x14" 22"x22" B 20"x16" 10"x22" A 235 10"ø 10"ø 8"ø 6"ø 8"ø10"ø 10"ø 10"ø 8"ø 10"x22" A 195 6"ø EF-3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T FCU-5 FD FD5 T FCU-6 4 4 8 EF-2 EF-2 FD 5 FD 5 FD5 T FCU-7 FD 5 T FCU-8 7 4 FD 5 ECUH-1 FD5 TFCU -3 8 ECUH-1 8 10"ø 6"ø 1 90 h101 2 FD5 FD5 FD 5 FD 5 4 4 4 TFCU -2 4 FD 5 T FCU-4 FD/SD 9 3ECUH-1 UH-1 6"ø 1 90 6"ø 1 50 6"ø 1 50 6"ø 1 50 6"ø 1 65 22"x10" A 60 22"x10" A 70 6"ø 1 75 22"x10" 6"ø 12"x8" 10"x22" A 195 (TYP.3) 2 h101 2 h101 2 h101 22"x8" 22"x8" A 22"x8" A 14"x8" 8"ø 16"x10" 10"x10"8"ø 10"ø 8"ø 10"ø 8"ø 22"x10" A 70 13 14 8"x6" 10"ø 6"ø 6"ø EF-2 6"ø 6"ø 1 50 22"x10" A 95 22"x10" A 40 22"x10" A 40 15 100 6"/5"ø 4 (TYP.6) (TYP.3) (TYP.2) (TYP.2)(TYP.8) 7 8 D E F 7.6 9 8"ø 210 8"/5"ø 3 10"x10" 22"x6" VRP-12KB 210 8"/5"ø 3 140 6"/5"ø 3 22"x6" A 400 EF-1 6"ø 8"x6" A 125 12 11 10 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h101 GROUND FLOOR PLAN -HVACLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC h101 DRAWING NOTES 8 HANG EXHAUST FAN FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS. PROVIDE EXHAUST DUCT BETWEEN FAN AND EXTERIOR WALL CAP. TERMINAL WALL CAP TO INCLUDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ALL WALL CAPS AT SIMILAR ELEVATION ON SAME EXPOSURE WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 9 PROVIDE COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER AT DUCT PENETRATION OF RATED WALL SYSTEM PER DETAIL ON DRAWING h703 10 PROVIDE DOMESTIC KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT IN CEILING ARCHITECTURAL SOFFIT. OFFSET AS REQUIRED. TERMINATE WITH 10 X 4 WALL CAP WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR HOOKUP TO KITCHEN HOOD 11 HANG EXHAUST FAN FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE EXHAUST DUCT IN JOIST SPACE BETWEEN FAN AND EXTERIOR WALL CAP. OFFSET AS REQUIRED TO COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL DESIGN. TERMINAL WALL CAP TO INCLUDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ALL WALL CAPS AT SIMILAR ELEVATION ON SAME EXPOSURE WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 12 PROVIDE SINGLE PACKAGE VERTICAL HEAT PUMP (VRP) AS SCHEDULED. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATION AND UNIT STAND. BOTTOM OF EXTERNAL LOUVER MUST ALIGN WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF APARTMENT WINDOW FRAME. CONNECT SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK WITH APPROVED FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE MERV 8 FILTER FRAME AT RETURN DUCT CONNECTION AND ENSURE SERVICE ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER AND ASSOCIATED CONTROL WIRING. INSTALL UNIT WITH MANUFACTURER'S REQUIRED CLEARANCE FOR MAINTENANCE. 13 BALANCE OED WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER TO 535 CFM RA 14 BALANCE OED WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER TO 935 CFM RA 15 HANG UNIT HEATER FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AT A MINIMUM OF 8.5' AFF. PROVIDE LINE VOLTAGE RATED WALL HUNG THERMOSTAT WIRED AND MOUNTED TO ADJACENT WALL. h101 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE 18 X 10 VENTILATION DUCT IN MECHANICAL CHASE UP TO SECOND FLOOR. INCLUDE FIRE DAMPER AT PENETRATION OF RATED CHASE ENVELOPE 2 PROVIDE 20 X 16 RELIEF AIR DUCT IN MECHANICAL CHASE UP TO SECOND FLOOR. INCLUDE FIRE DAMPER AT PENETRATION OF RATED CHASE ENVELOPE 3 HANG VRF SYSTEM BRANCH CONNECTION BOX FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AT A MINIMUM OF 8.5' AFF. PROVIDE INSULATED REFRIGERANT LINES BETWEEN BRANCH CONNECTION BOXES AND ROOFTOP OUTDOOR UNIT (ODU-1) PER REFRIGERANT PIPING DRAWING (MULTIV5 DIAGRAM) ON DRAWING h701. COORDINATE PIPING OF CONDENSATE DRAIN TO INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE CONTROL WIRING NETWORK BETWEEN BCC BOXES AND ODU PER WIRING DIAGRAM ON DRAWING h701 4 HANG VRF SYSTEM FAN COIL UNIT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE INSULATED REFRIGERANT LINES BETWEEN BRANCH CONNECTION BOXES (BCC) AND INDOOR FAN COIL UNITS (FCU) PER REFRIGERANT PIPING DRAWING (MULTIV5 DIAGRAM) ON DRAWING h701. COORDINATE PIPING OF CONDENSATE DRAIN TO INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE CONTROL WIRING NETWORK BETWEEN BCC BOXES, WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT AND FCU PER WIRING DIAGRAM ON DRAWING h701. PROVIDE SUPPLY DUCT FROM INDOOR FCU TO CEILING DIFFUSERS. PROVIDE FIELD FABRICATED RETURN AIR PLENUM WITH FILTER ACCESS SECTION AND VENTILATION AIR CONNECTION. BALANCE VENTILATION AIRFLOW PER FAN COIL UNIT SCHEDULE. 5 PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER AT DUCT PENETRATION OF RATED WALL SYSTEM PER DETAIL ON DRAWING h703 6 PROVIDE SEPARATE DRYER EXHAUST DUCT FOR EACH OF (6) DRIERS PER DETAIL ON DRAWING h702. INCLUDE TERMINAL WALL CAP WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER AT BUILDING FASCIA, MOUNTED JUST BELOW WINDOW LEDGE. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT FOR ELEVATION OF WALL CAP AT BUILDING EXTERIOR. 7 PROVIDE OPEN END DUCT (OED) WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER AND 1/2" MESH BIRDSCREEN FOR RETURN AIR TO ASSOCIATED FCU FROM PLENUM ABOVE WOOD SLAT CEILING # 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 ENLARGED TYPE 1 - HVAC T N h601 1 h601 3 h601 2 VRP-12KA EF-1 EF-1 VRP-12KA VRP-12KA 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 1 h601 FCU-9 10"ø 8"ø 6"ø 6"ø 1 70 6"ø 1 80 6"ø 1 70 6"ø 6"ø 1 90 h601 4 4 h601 90 6"/5"ø 4 215 TRASH / RECYCLE 216 I.T. CLOSET 217 CUST. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 1 4 EF-3 FD/SD FD/SD 3 3 2 8"x8" A 4 EF-3 7"ø 20"x14" 22"x10" A 225 20"x16" 5 6 4"ø 4"ø 7 7 8"ø plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h102 TYPICAL FLOORS 2-5 -HVACLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC h102 DRAWING NOTES 1 HANG VRF SYSTEM FAN COIL UNIT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS. PROVIDE INSULATED REFRIGERANT LINES BETWEEN BRANCH CONNECTION BOXES (BCC) AND INDOOR FAN COIL UNITS (FCU) PER REFRIGERANT PIPING DRAWING (MULTIV5 DIAGRAM) ON DRAWING h701. COORDINATE PIPING OF CONDENSATE DRAIN TO INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE CONTROL WIRING NETWORK BETWEEN BCC BOXES, WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT AND FCU PER WIRING DIAGRAM ON DRAWING h701. PROVIDE SUPPLY DUCT FROM INDOOR FCU TO CEILING DIFFUSERS. PROVIDE FIELD FABRICATED RETURN AIR PLENUM WITH FILTER ACCESS SECTION AND VENTILATION AIR CONNECTION. BALANCE VENTILATION AIRFLOW PER FAN COIL UNIT SCHEDULE. NOTE: FCU-9 IS SHOWN ON THIS TYPICAL FLOOR PLAN. UNITS FCU-10, FCU-11, AND FCU-12 WILL BE PLACED IN SIMILAR LOCATION ON FLOORS 3, 4 AND 5 2 PROVIDE VRF SYSTEM BRANCH CONNECTION BOX ON THIRD AND FIFTH FLOORS AT THIS LOCATION TO SERVE CORRIDOR FCU UNITS ON FLOORS 2-5. HANG VRF SYSTEM BRANCH CONNECTION BOX FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE INSULATED REFRIGERANT LINES BETWEEN BRANCH CONNECTION BOXES AND ROOFTOP OUTDOOR UNIT (ODU-1) PER REFRIGERANT PIPING DRAWING (MULTIV5 DIAGRAM) ON DRAWING h701. COORDINATE PIPING OF CONDENSATE DRAIN TO INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE CONTROL WIRING NETWORK BETWEEN BCC BOXES AND ODU PER WIRING DIAGRAM ON DRAWING h701 3 PROVIDE COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER AT DUCT PENETRATION OF RATED WALL SYSTEM PER DETAIL ON DRAWING h703 4 HANG EXHAUST FAN FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE EXHAUST DUCT BETWEEN FAN AND EXTERIOR WALL CAP. TERMINAL WALL CAP TO INCLUDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ALL WALL CAPS AT SIMILAR ELEVATION ON SAME EXPOSURE WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 5 CONTINUE DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR 18 X 10 VENTILATION DUCT CONNECTION AND UP TO 20 X 14 VENTILATION DUCT RISER FROM ROOFTOP DOAS UNIT SUPPLY. PROVIDE 7" DIA. BRANCH DUCTS TO FCU RETURN BOOT ON SIMILAR FLOORS 3, 4 AND 5 6 CONTINUE 20 X 16 RELIEF AIR DUCT DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR AND UP TO DOAS UNIT BAROMETRIC RELIEF CONNECTION. PROVIDE RELIEF AIR GRILLE IN CORRIDOR 2" BELOW CORRIDOR CEILING. 7 PROVIDE CEILING RADIATION DAMPER AT PENETRATION OF FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLY. # N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 ODU-1 DOAS-1 1 2 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h103 ROOF PLAN -HVACLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 ROOF PLAN - HVAC # h103 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE DEDICATED OUTSIDE AIR UNIT (DOAS-1) ON MANUFACTURER'S CUSTOM ROOF CURB. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR ROOF PENETRATION, FLASHING AND MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL SUPPORT. FILL OPEN SPACES IN ROOF CURB WITH INSULATION. MAKE DUCT CONNECTIONS FOR VENTILATION AND RELIEF AIR WITH APPROVED FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK. COORDINATE WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FOR NATURAL GAS HOOKUP. 2 PROVIDE OUTDOOR VRF SYSTEM HEAT RECOVERY UNIT (ODU-1) ON MANUFACTURER'S NON-INTRUSIVE ELEVATED STAND. PIPE REFRIGERANT LINES BETWEEN UNIT AND BRANCH BOXES (BCC) VIA THE MAIN MECHANICAL CHASE PER PIPING DIAGRAM ON h701. MAKE PIPING ROOF PENETRATIONS AND SUPPORT ROOF PIPING PER DETAILS ON h703. PROVIDE CONTROL WIRING PER WIRING DIAGRAM ON h701 N 8"ø 14"x8" 22"x6" 6"ø EF-1 22"x6" A 400 8"x6" A 125 14"x6" 2 210 14"x6" 2 140 14"x6" 2 210 7 8 D E F 7.6 9 2 3 13 3 3 10"x4" 4 T 22"x6" VRP-12KA 14"x6" 2 140 22"x8" A 525 14"x6" 2 140 14"x6" 2 140 14"x6" 2 140 14"x8" 14"x8" 14"x3" 8"x6" A 140 8"x6" A 140 1413 16 G H I 15.5 15.6 H.3 EF-12 3 3 3 3 33 3 1 T 4 6 h703 VRP-12KA EF-1 6"ø 22"x6" A 400 14"x6" 2 110 14"x6" 2 100 14"x6" 2 100 14"x6" 1 140 14"x6" 2 110 22"x6" 14"x8" 14"x8" 11 12 13 F G H I H.3 2 T3 3 3 3 3 1 8"ø 10"x4" 4 VRP-12KA 8"x6" A 125 EF-1 6"ø 8"ø10"x4" 14"x6" 2 140 14"x6" 2 140 14"x6" 2 140 14"x6" 2 140 22"x6" A 400 8"x6" A 125 22"x8" 14"x8" 14"x8"14"x8" 1 2 D E F EF-32 4"ø 2 4 3 3 3 3 1 3 T VRP-12KA EF-1 VRP-12KA EF-1 VRP-12KA EF-1 VRP-12KA EF-1 VRP-12KA plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h601 ENLARGED PLANS -HVACLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ENLARGED TYPE 2 - HVAC 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 ENLARGED TYPE 4 - HVAC 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 ENLARGED TYPE 3 - HVAC 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 ENLARGED TYPE 5 - HVAC # h601 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE SINGLE PACKAGE VERTICAL HEAT PUMP (VRP) AS SCHEDULED. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATION AND UNIT STAND. BOTTOM OF EXTERNAL LOUVER MUST ALIGN WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF APARTMENT WINDOW FRAME. CONNECT SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK WITH APPROVED FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE MERV 8 FILTER FRAME AT RETURN DUCT CONNECTION AND ENSURE SERVICE ACCESSIBILITY. PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER AND ASSOCIATED CONTROL WIRING. INSTALL UNIT WITH MANUFACTURER'S REQUIRED CLEARANCE FOR MAINTENANCE. 2 HANG EXHAUST FAN FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS. PROVIDE EXHAUST DUCT IN JOIST SPACE BETWEEN FAN AND EXTERIOR WALL CAP. OFFSET AS REQUIRED TO COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL DESIGN. TERMINAL WALL CAP TO INCLUDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ALL WALL CAPS AT SIMILAR ELEVATION ON SAME EXPOSURE WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 3 PROVIDE SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK IN ARCHITECTURAL SOFFITS. FRAME SOFFIT PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED TO CLEANLY MOUNT REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS (RGD) TO STRUCTURE OR SHEET METAL SLEEVES. RGD TO BE MOUNTED WITH TOP EDGE OF FRAME AT CEILING PLANE. 4 PROVIDE DOMESTIC KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT IN CEILING ARCHITECTURAL SOFFIT. OFFSET AS REQUIRED. TERMINATE WITH 10 X 4 WALL CAP WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR HOOKUP TO KITCHEN HOOD 5 TYPICAL TYPE 2 HVAC ISOMETRIC 6 TYPICAL TYPE 4 HVAC ISOMETRIC 7 TYPICAL TYPE 3 HVAC ISOMETRIC 8 TYPICAL TYPE 5 HVAC ISOMETRIC plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h602 ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED HOMES REQUIREMENTSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED HOMES, REQUIREMENTS: 1. CONTRACTORS SHALL BE ACCA-QUALIFIED AND COMPLY WITH ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED HOMES, VERSION 3.1 (REV. 9), HVAC SYSTEM QUALITY INSTALLATION RATER CHECKLIST AND REQUIREMENTS NOTED BELOW. SECTION 1: REVIEW OF HVAC SYSTEM QUALITY INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST 1. COMPLETE AND COLLECT FOR RECORDS HVAC SYSTEM QUALITY INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST IN ITS ENTIRETY, ALONG WITH DOCUMENTATION ON VENTILATION SYSTEM, FULL LOAD CALCULATIONS, AHRI CERTIFICATE AND BALANCING REPORT. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S EXCLUSIVE RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THE SYSTEM DESIGN AND INSTALLATION COMPLY WITH THE CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST SPECIFICATIONS. THE RATER IS ONLY RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS COMPLETED THE CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST IN ITS ENTIRETY AND VERIFYING THE DISCRETE OBJECTIVE PARAMETERS REFERENCED IN THE CHECKLIST, NOT FOR ASSESSING THE ACCURACY OF THE LOAD CALCULATIONS OR FIELD VERIFICATIONS INCLUDED, NOR TO VERIFY THE ACCURACY OF EVERY INPUT ON THE CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST. 2. REVIEW THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS RELATED TO SYSTEM COOLING DESIGN, SELECTION, AND INSTALLATION FROM HVAC CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST: A. OUTDOOR DESIGN TEMPERATURES ARE EQUAL TO 1% AND 99% ACCA MANUAL J DESIGN TEMPERATURES FOR CONTRACTOR-DESIGNATED DESIGN LOCATION. B. HOME ORIENTATION MATCHES ORIENTATION OF RATED HOME. C. NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS EQUALS NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS IN RATED HOME. THE NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS AMONG ALL HVAC SYSTEMS IN THE HOME SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE NUMBER OF RESNET-DEFINED BEDROOMS PLUS ONE. OCCUPANTS LISTED FOR SYSTEMS FOR WHICH THE HEADER OF THE CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST INDICATES THAT IT IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE TEMPORARY OCCUPANT LOADS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO EXCEED THIS LIMIT. D. CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA IS WITHIN +/-10% OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA OF RATED HOME. E. WINDOW AREA IS WITHIN +/-10% OF CALCULATED WINDOW AREA OF RATED HOME. F. PREDOMINANT WINDOW SHGC IS WITHIN 0.1 OF PREDOMINANT VALUE IN RATED HOME. PREDOMINANT IS DEFINED AS THE SHGC VALUE USED IN THE GREATEST AMOUNT OF WINDOW AREA IN THE HOME. G. LISTED LATENT COOLING CAPACITY EXCEEDS DESIGN LATENT HEAT GAIN. H. LISTED SENSIBLE COOLING CAPACITY EXCEEDS DESIGN SENSIBLE HEAT GAIN. I. LISTED TOTAL COOLING CAPACITY IS 95-115% (OR 95-125% FOR HEAT PUMPS IN CLIMATE ZONES 4-8) OF DESIGN TOTAL HEAT GAIN, OR HEAT NOMINAL SIZE. FOR COOLING SYSTEMS THE NEXT LARGEST NOMINAL PIECE OF EQUIPMENT MAY BE USED THAT IS AVAILABLE TO SATISFY THE LATENT AND SENSIBLE REQUIREMENTS. SINGLE-SPEED SYSTEMS GENERALLY HAVE OEM NOMINAL SIZE INCREMENTS OF 1/2 TON. MULTI-SPEED OR MULTI-STAGE EQUIPMENT MAY HAVE OEM NOMINAL SIZE INCREMENTS OF ONE TON. THEREFORE, THE USE OF THESE ADVANCED SYSTEM TYPES CAN PROVIDE EXTRA FLEXIBILITY TO MEET THE EQUIPMENT SIZING REQUIREMENTS. J. HVAC MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBERS ON INSTALLED EQUIPMENT, CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST, AND AHRI CERTIFICATE OR OEM CATALOG DATA ALL MATCH. IN CASES WHERE THE CONDENSER UNIT IS INSTALLED AFTER THE TIME OF INSPECTION BY THE RATER, THE HVAC MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBERS ON INSTALLED EQUIPMENT CAN BE DOCUMENTED THROUGH THE USE OF PHOTOGRAPHS PROVIDED BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR AFTER INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE. K. USING REPORTED LIQUID LINE OR SUCTION LINE PRESSURE, CORRESPONDING TEMPERATURE (AS DETERMINED USING PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CHART FOR REFRIGERANT TYPE) MATCHES REPORTED CONDENSER OR EVAPORATOR SATURATION TEMPERATURE (PLUS OR MINUS 3°). IF CONTRACTOR HAS INDICATED THAT AN OEM TEST PROCEDURE HAS BEEN USED IN PLACE OF A SUB-COOLING OR SUPER-HEAT PROCESS AND DOCUMENTATION HAS BEEN ATTACHED THAT DEFINES THIS PROCEDURE, THEN THE BOX FOR "N/A" SHALL BE CHECKED FOR THIS ITEM. L. CALCULATED SUB-COOLING OR SUPERHEAT VALUE IS WITHIN +/-3°F OF REPORTED TARGET SUB-COOLING OR +/-5°F OF REPORTED TARGET SUPERHEAT TEMPERATURE. IF CONTRACTOR HAS INDICATED THAT AN OEM TEST PROCEDURE HAS BEEN USED IN PLACE OF A SUB-COOLING OR SUPER-HEAT PROCESS AND DOCUMENTATION HAS BEEN ATTACHED THAT DEFINES THIS PROCEDURE, THEN THE BOX FOR "N/A" SHALL BE CHECKED FOR THIS ITEM. 3. RATER-VERIFIED SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT STATIC PRESSURE SHALL BE LESS THAN 110% OF CONTRACTOR RECORD VALUES. 4. SUBMIT CONTRACTOR PREPARED REPORT INDICATING THE ROOM NAME AND DESIGN AIRFLOW FOR EACH SUPPLY AND RETURN REGISTER TO RATER FOR RECORD. IN ADDITION, FINAL BALANCING REPORT INDICATING ROOM AIRFLOWS MEASURED AND DOCUMENTED ON BALANCING REPORT: MEASURED AND DOCUMENTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. 5. HVAC CONTRACTOR HOLDS CREDENTIALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE HVAC SYSTEM QI CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST. THE RATER MUST CONFIRM THE CONTRACTOR HOLDS THE CREDENTIALS. SECTION 2: DUCT QUALITY INSTALLATION 1. INSTALL DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS AND ROUTING WITHOUT KINKS OR SHARP BENDS. COORDINATE WITH THE FRAMER, PLUMBER, AND ELECTRICIAN FOR EFFECTIVE DUCT INSTALLATION. SEAL ALL HVAC PENETRATIONS TO UNCONDITIONED SPACES OR THRU DEMISING WALLS WITH BLOCKING OR FLASHING AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN BUILDING PRESSURIZATION REQUIREMENTS. 2. INSTALL FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK WITHOUT EXCESSIVE COILS OR LOOPS UNLESS NEEDED FOR ACOUSTICAL CONTROL. COORDINATE WITH THE FRAMER, PLUMBER, AND ELECTRICIAN FOR EFFECTIVE DUCT INSTALLATION. BALANCING DAMPERS OR PROPER DUCT SIZING SHALL BE USED INSTEAD OF LOOPS TO LIMIT FLOW TO DIFFUSERS. WHEN BALANCING DAMPERS ARE USED, THEY SHALL BE LOCATED AT THE TRUNK TO LIMIT NOISE UNLESS THE TRUNK WILL NOT BE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE BALANCING PROCESS IS CONDUCTED. IN SUCH CASES, OPPOSED BLADE DAMPERS OR DAMPERS THAT ARE LOCATED IN THE DUCT BOOT ARE PERMITTED. 3. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN UNCONDITIONED CAVITIES SMALLER THAN THE OUTER DUCTWORK DIAMETER. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN CONDITIONED CAVITIES SMALLER THAN THE INNER DUCTWORK DIAMETER. INSTALL DUCTS TO PREVENT COMPRESSION OF DUCT OR DUCT INSULATION. 4. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDED INTERVALS BUT AT A DISTANCE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 5 FT. TO PREVENT SAGGING. INSTALL SUPPORTS AT LEAST ONE INCH WIDE. INSTALL SUPPORTS WITHOUT COMPRESSING THE DUCT AND THE DUCT INSULATION. 5. BUILDING CAVITIES SHALL NOT BE USED AS SUPPLY OR RETURN DUCTS UNLESS THEY MEET ITEMS 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, AND 4.2 OF THE HVAC SYSTEM QUALITY INSTALLATION RATER CHECKLIST. AVOID USING BUILDING CAVITIES AS DUCTS DUE TO THE DIFFICULTY OF PROPER AIR SEALING AND INSULATING THEM. IF BUILDING CAVITIES ARE USED, INSTALL INSULATION WITHOUT MISALIGNMENTS, COMPRESSIONS, GAPS, OR VOIDS IN ALL CAVITIES USED FOR DUCTS. IF NON-RIGID INSULATION IS USED, INSTALL A RIGID AIR BARRIER OR OTHER SUPPORTING MATERIAL TO HOLD INSULATION IN PLACE. SEAL ALL SEAMS, GAPS, AND HOLES OF THE AIR BARRIER WITH CAULK OR FOAM. 6. HVAC DUCTS, CAVITIES USED AS DUCTS, AND COMBUSTION AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS MAY PASS PERPENDICULARLY THROUGH EXTERIOR WALLS BUT SHALL NOT BE RUN WITHIN EXTERIOR WALLS UNLESS PROVIDED WITH AT LEAST R-6 CONTINUOUS INSULATION ON EXTERIOR SIDE OF THE CAVITY, ALONG WITH AN INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR AIR BARRIER WHERE REQUIRED BY THE THERMAL ENCLOSURE SYSTEM CHECKLIST. INSTALL INSULATION WITHOUT MISALIGNMENT, COMPRESSIONS, GAPS, OR VOIDS IN ALL BUILDING CAVITIES WITH DUCTS OR CAVITIES USED AS DUCTS. IF NON-RIGID INSULATION IS USED, INSTALL A RIGID AIR BARRIER OR OTHER SUPPORTING MATERIAL TO HOLD INSULATION IN PLACE. SEAL ALL SEAMS, GAPS, AND HOLES OF THE AIR BARRIER WITH CAULK OR FOAM. 7. QUANTITY AND LOCATION OF SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT TERMINALS SHALL MATCH CONTRACTOR BALANCING REPORT. 8. BEDROOMS SHALL BE PRESSURE-BALANCED USING ANY COMBINATION OF TRANSFER GRILLES, JUMPER DUCTS, DEDICATED RETURN DUCTS, AND/OR UNDERCUT DOORS TO EITHER: A) PROVIDE ONE SQUARE INCH OF FREE AREA OPENING PER 1 CFM OF SUPPLY AIR, AS REPORTED ON THE CONTRACTOR-PROVIDED BALANCING REPORT: OR B) ACHIEVE A RATER-MEASURED PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 3 PA (0.012 IN. W.C.) WITH RESPECT TO THE MAIN BODY OF THE HOUSE WHEN BEDROOM DOORS ARE CLOSED AND THE AIR HANDLER IS OPERATING. FOR PROVIDING FREE AREA, REFER TO THE BALANCING REPORT PROVIDED BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR FOR THE BEDROOM AIR FLOWS TO SIZE THE TRANSFER GRILLES AND/OR JUMPER DUCTS. INSTALL AND SEAL PROPERLY SIZED TRANSFER GRILLES DURING FRAMING. BOTH OPENINGS OF THE TRANSFER GRILLE MUST HAVE THE REQUIRED FREE AREA. IF TRANSFER GRILLES ARE NOT USED, INSTALL AND SEAL JUMPER DUCTS DURING FRAMING. BOTH OPENINGS AND DUCTS MUST HAVE THE REQUIRED FREE AREA. FOR ACHIEVING A RATER-MEASURED PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL, EPA RECOMMENDS THAT TRANSFER GRILLES, JUMPER DUCTS, OR DEDICATED RETURNS BE INSTALLED. TEST THE PRESSURES OF EACH BEDROOM. FOR HVAC SYSTEM WITH MULTI-SPEED FANS, THE HIGHEST DESIGN FAN SPEED SHALL BE USED WHEN VERIFYING THIS REQUIREMENT. SECTION 3: DUCT INSULATION 1. ALL TRUNK DUCTS IN UNCONDITIONED SPACE SHALL BE INSULATED. SEAL ALL SEAMS, GAPS, AND HOLES OF ALL TRUNK DUCT CONNECTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING INSULATION, PREFERABLY WITH MASTIC. INSTALL INSULATION WITHOUT MISALIGNMENT, COMPRESSION, GAPS, OR VOIDS AROUND ALL CONNECTIONS AND EXPOSED DUCTWORK. SEAL DUCTINSULATION TO BOOT TO PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF CONDENSATION. 2. INSTALL INSULATED DUCTWORK, BOXES, AND BOOTS IN ALL UNCONDITIONED SPACES TO MEET THE PRESCRIPTIVE PATH. INSTALL ALL DUCTS IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES WITHOUT COMPRESSING THE INSULATION. PRESCRIPTIVE PATH: SUPPLY DUCTS IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES SHALL HAVE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO R-8 INSULATION. 3. ALL OTHER SUPPLY DUCTS AND ALL RETURN DUCTS IN UNCONDITIONED SPACE SHALL HAVE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO R-6 INSULATION. INSTALL INSULATED DUCTWORK, BOXES, AND BOOTS IN ALL UNCONDITIONED SPACES. INSTALL ALL DUCTS IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES WITHOUT COMPRESSING THE INSULATION. SECTION 4: DUCT LEAKAGE DUCT LEAKAGE SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: 1. TOTAL RATER-MEASURED DUCT LEAKAGE = 8 CFM25 (CFM25 = CFM @ 25 PASCALS AIR PRESSURE) PER 100 SQ. FT. OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA (CFA). A. SEAL ALL SEAMS, GAPS, AND HOLES OF ALL TRUNK DUCT CONNECTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING INSULATION, PREFERABLY WITH MASTIC. B. INSTALL INSULATION WITHOUT MISALIGNMENTS, COMPRESSIONS, GAPS, OR VOIDS AROUND ALL CONNECTIONS AND EXPOSED DUCT WORK C. SEAL DUCT INSULATION IN PLACE. D. EPA RECOMMENDS TESTING DUCTS ONLY AFTER COMPLETING A VISUAL INSPECTION OF PROPER DUCT SEALING. ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED HOMES, REQUIREMENTS (CONT.) 2. RATER-MEASURED DUCT LEAKAGE TO OUTDOORS = 4 CFM25 PER 100 SQ. FT. OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA. A. SEAL ALL SEAMS, GAPS, AND HOLES OF ALL TRUNK DUCT CONNECTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING INSULATION. MASTIC IS RECOMMENDED FOR SEALING B. INSTALL INSULATION WITHOUT MISALIGNMENT, COMPRESSION, GAPS, OR VOIDS AROUND ALL CONNECTIONS AND EXPOSED DUCTWORK. C. SEAL DUCT INSULATION IN PLACE. D. EPA RECOMMENDS TESTING DUCTS ONLY AFTER COMPLETING A VISUAL INSPECTION OF PROPER DUCT SEALING. 3. ADDITIONAL TESTING, QUALIFICATION AND INSTALLATION GUIDELINES TO MEET FOR LEAKAGE CRITERIA A. DUCT LEAKAGE SHALL BE DETERMINED AND DOCUMENTED BY A RATER USING A RESNET-APPROVED TESTING PROTOCOL ONLY AFTER ALL COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM HAVE BEEN INSTALLED (E.G., AIR HANDLER AND REGISTER GRILLES). LEAKAGE LIMITS SHALL BE ASSESSED ON A PER-SYSTEM BASIS, RATHER THAN PER RESIDENT UNIT, WHERE COMMON SYSTEMS ARE USED. TESTING OF DUCT LEAKAGE TO THE OUTSIDE CAN BE WAIVED, HOWEVER THIS MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE RATER FOR EACH PROJECT IF ALL DUCTS AND AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT ARE LOCATED WITHIN THE HOME'S AIR AND THERMAL BARRIERS, AND ENVELOPE LEAKAGE HAS BEEN TESTED TO BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO HALF OF THE PRESCRIPTIVE PATH INFILTRATION LIMIT FOR THE CLIMATE ZONE WHERE THE HOME IS TO BE BUILT. B. FOR ALL HOMES OR UNITS THAT SERVE LESS THAN 1,200 SQ. FT. OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA (CFA), TOTAL MEASURED DUCT LEAKAGE SHALL BE = 8 CFM25 PER 100 SQ. FT. OF CFA AND MEASURED DUCT LEAKAGE TO OUTDOORS SHALL BE = 5 CFM25 PER 100 SQ. FT. OF CFA. C. IF TOTAL DUCT LEAKAGE IS = 4 CFM25 PER 100 SQ. FT. OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA, OR = 5 CFM25 PER 100 SQ. FT. OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA FOR HOMES OR UNITS THAT HAVE LESS THAN 1,200 SQ. FT. OF CONDITIONED FLOOR AREA, THEN LEAKAGE TO OUTDOORS NEED NOT BE TESTED. D. WHERE DUCTWORK, DUCT BOOTS, PLENUMS AND OTHER DEVICES PENETRATE ANY BUILDING ELEMENT THE OPENINGS SHALL BE CUT NEATLY AND CLOSE TO THE ACTUAL SIZE OF THE DUCT, BOOT OR PLENUM TO MINIMIZE GAPS AND THE EXTENT OF SEALANT MATERIAL. WORK SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED IN A NEAT AND WORKMAN LIKE MANNER. DUCT BOOTS SEALED TO FLOOR, WALL, OR CEILING USING CAULK, FOAM, MASTIC TAPE, OR MASTIC PASTE. THIS SHALL BE COORDINATED BY ALL APPROPRIATE TRADES. POOR INSTALLATIONS WITH TOO MUCH TOLERANCE CAUSING EXCESSIVE SEALANT MATERIAL SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTIVE ACTION TO BE TAKEN. E. DUCT CONNECTIONS, PARTIAL AND FULL CASED SECTIONS OF THE FAN COIL UNIT-FURNACE-HEAT PUMP UNIT, OR AIR HANDLING UNIT AND SERVICE DOORS OR ACCESS PANELS SHALL BE SEALED WITH PERMANENT MASTIC, HIGH QUALITY NON PERMEABLE FOAM, NEOPRENE, CORK GASKET OR HIGH QUALITY AIR TIGHT SEALING CAULK AT FIXED POINTS AND / OR UL RATED TAPE WHEN ACCESS IS REQUIRED. WHERE TAPE IS UTILIZED A SUFFICIENT AMOUNT OF ROLLS OF TAPE SHALL BE PROVIDED TO BE KEPT AT THE PROJECT AND TURNED OVER TO THE BUILDING OWNER TO RESEAL THE SERVICE POINTS AFTER CUTTING OR REMOVING THE TAPE PROVIDED TO MEET THE LEAKAGE TESTS. SECTION 5 - WHOLE BUILDING, HOME OR RESIDENT UNIT DELIVERED VENTILATION OR DEDICATED VENTILATION SYSTEM SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE RATER-MEASURED VENTILATION RATE TO BE WITHIN 100-120% OF HVAC DESIGN VALUE PER THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: 1. RATER-MEASURED VENTILATION RATE IS SCHEDULED TO BE WITHIN 100-120% OF HVAC DESIGN VALUE. THE VENTILATION SYSTEM MUST BE COMPLIANT WITH ASHRAE 62.2-2010 (FOR REQUIRED VENTILATION QUANTITIES AND SEALING ALL HOLES, GAPS, AND SEAMS OF DUCTS AND THEIR CONNECTIONS) INCLUDING AS FOLLOWS: A. SUPPLY (SUCH AS AN INTAKE DUCT TO THE RETURN SIDE OF THE HVAC SYSTEM COUPLED WITH A MOTORIZED DAMPER AND CONTROL SYSTEM). B. EXHAUST (SUCH AS A CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING EXHAUST FAN). WILL BE TESTED TO +/- 15 CFM OR 15% OF DESIGN AIRFLOW. C. BALANCED (SUCH AS AN ERV OR HRV). 2. THE VENTILATION AIR FLOW AND LOCAL EXHAUST AIR FLOWS WILL BE MEASURED BY THE RATER USING A FLOW HOOD, FLOW GRID, ANEMOMETER (IN ACCORDANCE WITH AABC, NEBB OR ASHRAE PROCEDURES), OR SUBSTANTIALLY EQUIVALENT METHOD. ALL SYSTEMS SHOULD BE CONSTRUCTED ACCORDINGLY. SECTION 6 - THERMOSTAT AND HVAC UNIT CONTROLS: 1. THERMOSTAT: AIR FLOW IS PRODUCED WHEN THE CENTRAL HVAC INDOOR FURNACE OR FAN COIL EVAPORATOR FAN IS ENERGIZED. THIS IS ACCOMPLISHED BY SETTING THE THERMOSTAT TO "FAN" AND SELECTING THE COOLING OR HEATING MODE WILL INDEX THE COOLING OR HEATING PORTIONS OF THE SYSTEM TO PROVIDE EITHER COOLED OR HEATED AIR TO MEET THE ROOM OR UNIT THERMOSTAT SETPOINT. THE RATER, AS PART OF THE TESTING WILL TURN THE SYSTEM ON TO COOL AND CHANGE THE SET POINT TEMPERATURE TO 3°F BELOW THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE. THE RATER WILL THEN RETURN THE THERMOSTAT TO THE ORIGINAL SETTING. THE RATER WILL WAIT FOR A PERIOD OF TIME AS RECOMMENDED BY THE UNIT MANUFACTURER OR WAIT FOR THE SYSTEM PREPROGRAMMED CYCLE BETWEEN COOLING AND HEATING MODE AND SET THE SYSTEM ON TO HEATING AND CHANGE THE SET POINT TO 3°F ABOVE THE AMBIENT. THE RATER WILL THEN RETURN THE THERMOSTAT TO THE ORIGINAL SETTING. THE RATER WILL VERIFY THAT THE HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS ARE WORKING PROPERLY BY MEASURING THE OUTPUT TEMPERATURE OF THE SYSTEMS DURING THE APPROPRIATE CYCLES. IN CASES WHERE THE CONDENSER UNIT OR OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP SECTION CAN ABSOLUTELY ONLY BE INSTALLED AFTER THE TIME OF INSPECTION BY THE RATER, THE RATER IS EXEMPT FROM VERIFYING THE COOLING MODE OR HEATING IF IT IS A HEAT PUMP UNIT. 2. ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES OR CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING FANS, OTHER THAN BATHROOM OR TOILET ROOM FANS: IT IS IMPORTANT FOR HVAC CONTRACTORS AND ELECTRICIANS TO LOCATE THE OVERRIDE CONTROLS FOR CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FANS IN A LOCATION EASILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE OCCUPANT. IT IS ALSO IMPORTANT TO PROPERLY LABEL THESE CONTROLS. IF CONTROLS ARE NOT PROPERLY LABELED, FANS MAY BE MISTAKENLY TURNED OFF. OVERRIDE CONTROL LOCATION RECOMMENDATIONS: LOCATION OF THE LABELED CONTROL NEAR THE THERMOSTAT CREATES A TYPE OF CONTROL CENTER FOR THE OCCUPANT. THIS ALLOWS ACCESS THE MAJORITY OF THE HVAC SYSTEM CONTROLS IN ONE LOCATION. THIS SETUP IS IDEAL FOR VENTILATION SYSTEMS, SUCH AS ERV'S AND HRV'S THAT MAY BE LOCATED IN INACCESSIBLE PLACES. LOCATING A SWITCH OR SWITCHING BREAKER AT AN ELECTRICAL PANEL WITH A LABEL WOULD BE SUITABLE WHERE THERE ARE MULTIPLE CONTINUOUSLY RUNNING EXHAUST FANS. BATHROOM OR TOILET EXHAUST FANS MAY BE SPECIFIED FOR THIS PROJECT TO HAVE INTERNAL OVERRIDE SYSTEMS, EITHER ON THE ELECTRICAL SWITCH PLATE OR DEFINED IN THE MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL. THESE EXHAUST FANS MEET THE REQUIREMENTS AS LONG AS THE OVERRIDE IS ACCESSIBLE AND THE DOCUMENTATION IS REVIEWED BY THE RATER. THE SWITCHES OR CONTROL DEVICES SHOULD CLEARLY, PERMANENTLY AND PROFESSIONALLY LABELED FOR THE EQUIPMENT SERVED AND THE FUNCTIONS. IF REQUIRED ON PLANS OR ELSEWHERE IN THE SPECIFICATIONS THERE SHALL ALSO BE A PILOT LIGHT TO INDICATE EQUIPMENT IS ENERGIZED. 3. CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FANS MUST INCLUDE READILY ACCESSIBLE OVERRIDE CONTROLS. 4. FUNCTION OF VENTILATION CONTROLS IS OBVIOUS (E.G. BATHROOM EXHAUST FAN) OR, IF NOT, CONTROLS HAVE BEEN LABELED. SECTION 7 - VENTILATION AIR INLETS AND SOURCES THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATIONS OF ALL CONTAMINATION SOURCE TERMINATIONS AND INSTALL AIR INLETS AT LEAST 10 FT. AWAY FROM ALL CONTAMINATION SOURCE TERMINATIONS AT VERTICAL WALL LOCATIONS AND INSTALL AIR INLETS AT LEAST 3 FT. AWAY FROM DRYER EXHAUSTS AND CONTAMINATION SOURCES EXITING THROUGH THE ROOF UNLESS MORE STRINGENT CRITERIA IS REQUIRED BY CODE OR INDICATED ON THE DESIGN DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL AIR INLETS AT LEAST 4 FEET ABOVE GRADE OR ROOF DECK FOR THIS PROJECT. THE INLET SHALL HAVE RODENT AND INSECT SCREEN WITH A MAXIMUM OF 0.5" MESH SPACING. SCREENS SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE FOR CLEANING. THE VENTILATION AIR MUST COME DIRECTLY FROM OUTDOORS AND NOT FROM ATTICS, CRAWL SPACES, GARAGES OR OTHER DWELLINGS. DUCTWORK, HOODS, LOUVERS AND GRILLES USED FOR INTAKE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER AND BE SIZES THAT MAINTAIN THE PROPER FREE AREA FOR AIRFLOW AND LIMITING MOISTURE, SNOW AND DEBRIS CARRYOVER. ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED HOMES, REQUIREMENTS (CONT.) SECTION 8: LOCAL MECHANICAL EXHAUST 1. THE KITCHEN SHALL HAVE AN EXHAUST SYSTEM THAT EXHAUSTS DIRECTLY TO THE OUTDOORS AND SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY AT A RATE OF GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 5 AIR CHANGES PER HOUR BASED ON KITCHEN VOLUME OR OPERATE INTERMITTENTLY AT A RATE GREATER THAN 100 CFM. FANS THAT ARE USED AT A CONTINUOUS RATE SHALL BE RATED FOR CONTINUOUS USE. RECIRCULATING FANS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. 2. KITCHEN VOLUME SHALL BE DETERMINED BY DRAWING THE SMALLEST POSSIBLE RECTANGLE ON THE FLOOR PLAN THAT ENCOMPASSES ALL CABINETS, PANTRIES, ISLANDS, AND PENINSULAS AND MULTIPLYING BY THE AVERAGE CEILING HEIGHT FOR THIS AREA. CABINET VOLUME SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE KITCHEN VOLUME CALCULATION. 3. EACH BATHROOM SHALL HAVE AN EXHAUST SYSTEM THAT EXHAUSTS DIRECTLY TO THE OUTDOORS AND SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY AT A RATE OF GREATER THAN OR EQUAL 20 CFM OR OPERATE INTERMITTENTLY AT A RATE GREATER THAN 50 CFM. FANS THAT ARE USED AT A CONTINUOUS RATE SHALL BE RATED FOR CONTINUOUS USE. 4. AN INTERMITTENT EXHAUST SYSTEM, WHERE PROVIDED, SHALL BE DESIGNED TO OPERATE AS NEEDED BY THE OCCUPANT. CONTROL DEVICES SHALL NOT IMPEDE OCCUPANT CONTROL IN INTERMITTENT SYSTEMS. 5. ALL FANS THAT SHARE A COMMON EXHAUST DUCT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. REMOVE ALL PACKING TAPE FROM BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS UPON INSTALLATION. 6. COMMON EXHAUST DUCTS SHALL NOT BE SHARED BY FANS IN SEPARATE DWELLINGS. 7. CLOTHES DRYERS SHALL BE VENTED DIRECTLY TO THE OUTDOORS, EXCEPT FOR VENT-LESS DRYERS EQUIPPED WITH A CONDENSATE DRAIN. VENT CLOTHES DRYERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. 8. DO NOT USE DEVICES THAT REMOVE LINT AND/OR BRING THE HEAT BACK INTO THE SPACE. 9. DO NOT EXHAUST DRYERS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT. 10. ALL EXHAUST FANS SHALL BE DIRECTLY DUCTED TO THE EXTERIOR WITH LITTLE OR NO RESTRICTION. 11. SEAL ALL SEAMS, GAPS, HOLES, AND CONNECTIONS TO THE EXTERIOR OF ALL EXHAUST DUCTS WITH MASTIC. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE A PROPER QUALITY INSTALLATION. THE EXHAUST DUCTWORK WILL BE TESTED FOR LEAKS AT THE END OF THE PROJECT AND THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE RESULTS OF THE TEST. SECTION 9: VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FAN RATINGS 1. ALL INTERMITTENT SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS SHALL BE RATED BY THE MANUFACTURER TO OPERATE AT LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 3.0 SONES. EXCEPTION: FANS GREATER THAN 400 CFM. 2. ALL CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS SHALL BE RATED BY THE MANUFACTURER TO OPERATE AT LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 1.0 SONES. 3. BATHROOM FANS USED AS PART OF A WHOLE-HOUSE MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM SHALL BE ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED, UNLESS SPECIFIED FLOW RATE IS GREATER THAN 500 CFM. 4. ALL FANS REQUIRED TO BE ENERGY STAR QUALIFIED SHALL HAVE ENERGY STAR LOGO ON THE ASSOCIATED SUBMITTALS. HAND WRITTEN NOTATIONS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. 5. ALL FAN SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE MANUFACTURER'S RATED SONES LEVEL AND SCHEDULED PERFORMANCE VALVES. SECTION 10: COMBUSTION APPLIANCES 1. ALL COMBUSTION APPLIANCES SHALL BE MECHANICALLY DRAFTED OR DIRECT VENTED TO THE OUTDOORS. 2. FOR ATMOSPHERICALLY VENTED FIREPLACES, THE TOTAL NET RATED EXHAUST FLOW OF THE LARGEST EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 15 CFM PER 100 SQUARE FEET OF OCCUPIABLE SPACE. THE NET-EXHAUST FLOW IS DEFINED AS FLOW THROUGH AN EXHAUST SYSTEM MINUS THE COMPENSATING OUTDOOR AIRFLOW THROUGH ANY SUPPLY SYSTEM THAT IS INTERLOCKED WITH THE EXHAUST SYSTEM. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL UNVENTED COMBUSTION APPLIANCES WITH THE ENERGY STAR RATER. THE RATER IS REQUIRED TO PERFORM TESTS AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSIST AS REQUIRED. SECTION 11: FILTRATION 1. PROVIDE MINIMUM MERV 6 FILTERS IN ALL DUCTED MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. EXHAUST SYSTEMS DUCTED DIRECTLY TO THE OUTSIDE ARE NOT REQUIRED TO BE FILTERED. 2. FILTERS SHALL BE LOCATED SUCH THAT ALL RETURN AIR AND OUTSIDE AIR IS FILTERED UPSTREAM OF THE SUPPLY FAN. 3. LOCATE FILTERS TO FACILITATE ACCESS AND SERVICE. MAINTAIN CLEARANCES FOR FILTER PULL. 4. PROVIDE PRE-FABRICATED FILTER HOUSING WITH GASKETS AND SEALS. HOUSING ACCESS DOOR MUST COMPLETE SEAL TO PREVENT BYPASS. SEAL DUCT CONNECTIONS TO PREVENT AIR LEAKAGE. FILTER HOUSING SHALL BE TRION AIR BEAR SUPREME OR APPROVED EQUAL. APPROVED EQUALS SHALL BE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-2007 STANDARD TEST PROCEDURES AND BE UL LISTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT FILTERS AND HOUSING FOR REVIEW BY ENGINEER. /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// // Communication Line // // // // // // // // // // // // // // // # Note : Power wiring, breaker size, and disconnects should follow local code and NEC. Multi-frame outdoor units require a separate power connection for each frame. Refer to the most up-to-date submittal sheets for applicable electrical data. ARUM241BTE5 63.2MCA : 80MOP : 3Phase/208~230V/60HzV,Hz : Combi. : ARUM241BTE5 Additional Refrigerant : 42.43 lbs PRHR023A RLA : 0.06 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-12) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU243M2A4 (#FCU-10) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 PRHR023A RLA : 0.06 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-09) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-11) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 ARNU073M2A4 (#FCU-01) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU123M2A4 (#FCU-02) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU073M2A4 (#FCU-03) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU423M2A4 (#FCU-05) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 PRHR043A RLA : 0.06 ARNU243M2A4 (#FCU-06) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-04) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-07) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU543M3A4 (#FCU-08) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.50 Total RLA : 28.28 BY EC BY MC (209.41 kBtu/h) (22.21 kBtu/h) (28.20 kBtu/h) (22.21 kBtu/h) (22.21 kBtu/h) (8.78 kBtu/h) (14.05 kBtu/h) (8.78 kBtu/h) (48.55 kBtu/h) (28.20 kBtu/h) (22.21 kBtu/h) (22.21 kBtu/h) (63.42 kBtu/h) (243.78 kBtu/h) (19.12 / 18.00 kBtu/h) (24.22 / 19.40 kBtu/h) (19.12 / 18.00 kBtu/h) (19.12 / 18.00 kBtu/h) (7.51 / 7.40 kBtu/h) (12.31 / 11.80 kBtu/h) (7.51 / 7.40 kBtu/h) (42.04 / 31.10 kBtu/h) (24.22 / 19.40 kBtu/h) (19.12 / 18.00 kBtu/h) (19.12 / 18.00 kBtu/h) (54.06 / 42.10 kBtu/h) ARUM241BTE5 Additional Refrigerant : 42.43 lbs ARBLB07121 5/8:1+1/8:1+3/8 12.0 ft(4) ARBLB033213/8:3/4:7/8 5.0 ft(4) PRHR023A3/8:1/2:5/8 5.0 ft(4) 2 1 ARNU183M2A4 #FCU-121/4:1/2 70.0 ft(3) T ARNU243M2A4 #FCU-103/8:5/8 82.0 ft(3) T PRHR023A3/8:1/2:5/8 41.0 ft(4) 2 1 ARNU183M2A4 #FCU-091/4:1/2 70.0 ft(3) T ARNU183M2A4 #FCU-111/4:1/2 82.0 ft(3) T ARBLB071215/8:7/8:1+1/8 44.0 ft(4) PRHR043A3/8:5/8:3/4 5.0 ft(4) 4 1 ARNU073M2A4 #FCU-011/4:1/2 20.0 ft(3) T ARNU123M2A4 #FCU-021/4:1/2 40.0 ft(3) T ARNU073M2A4 #FCU-031/4:1/2 27.0 ft(3) T ARNU423M2A4 #FCU-053/8:5/8 62.0 ft(3) T PRHR043A3/8:3/4:7/8 5.0 ft(4) 4 1 ARNU243M2A4 #FCU-063/8:5/8 75.0 ft(3) T ARNU183M2A4 #FCU-041/4:1/2 68.0 ft(3) T ARNU183M2A4 #FCU-071/4:1/2 80.0 ft(3) T ARNU543M3A4 #FCU-083/8:5/8 75.0 ft(3) T (BCC-4) (BCC-3) (BCC-2) (BCC-1) (ODU-1) (ODU-1) BCC-3 (3RD FLOOR) BCC-4 (5TH FLOOR) BCC-2 BCC-1 VRF SYSTEM PIPING DIAGRAM VRF SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h701 HVAC VRF SYSTEM DIAGRAMSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 DUCTWORK PER PLANS FLEXIBLE CONNECTION FAN FACTORY SUPPLIED ADJUSTABLE BRACKET ISOLATOR ROD NUT AND LOCKNUT 3/8" DIAMETER (UNLESS OTHERWISE RECOMMENDED TO MATCH FAN) ALL THREADED STEEL RODS SUPPORT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE LENGTH OF RODS TO SUIT SPACE AVAILABLE VIBRATION ISOLATORVIBRATION ISOLATOR 1 NO SCALE TYPICAL CEILING FAN DETAIL CEILING BY OTHERS DECORATIVE CEILING GRILLE, SECURE GRILLE TO FAN PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. SEAL ANNULAR SPACE AROUND FAN AND CEILING AIRTIGHT 6 NO SCALE SUPPLY BRANCH TAKEOFF MAIN SUPPLY FLOW 45° LEAD-IN RIGID DUCT TO AIR TERMINAL UNIT. FLOW PLAN VIEW PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPER FOR EACH TERMINAL BRANCH GRILLE CEILING 12" MINIMUM 2 NO SCALE ROUND OR RECTANGULAR AS SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS PLENUM BOX LENGTH AND WIDTH EQUAL TO DUCT CONNECTION SIZE DUCT-MOUNTED VOLUME DAMPER: ONE PER BRANCH TYPICAL CEILING GRILLE INSTALLATION DETAIL TOP OR SIDE CONNECTION PER FIELD CONDITIONS VD 3 NO SCALE DECK, BEAM, OR JOIST FLEX SHALL BE 4'-0" MAXIMUM WITH (1) 90° BEND TYPICAL DIFFUSER INSTALLATION DETAIL TYPICAL DUCT SUPPORT ATTACHMENT DETAIL 8 NO SCALE NOTES: 1. SIZE AND RATING OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SHALL BE PER LATEST "SMACNA" STANDARDS. 2. ATTACH DUCT SUPPORTS DIRECTLY TO BUILDING STRUCTRE. ATTACHMENTS TO OTHER DUCTS OR PIPING IS NOT ACCAPTABE. UNISTRUT THREADED HANGER ROD HANGER STRAP 1" MINIMUM 60" MAX. DUCT DUCT OVER 60" 7 NO SCALE EXHAUST OR RETURN BRANCH DUCTWORK AIR FLOW AIR FLOW MAIN EXHAUST OR RETURN PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPER AT EACH BRANCH DUCT BRANCH DUCT PLAN VIEW W 45° 45° 45° 45° B A 5 NO SCALE VANED ELBOW DETAIL 3" MINIMUM DIM. 2" R 1" R OVER A B C D E 'W' 19" D UNDER 2 14" R 4 14" R 638" 214" 314" 278" 118" 218" RUNNER MINIMUM 24 GA. MINIMUM 24 GA. VANE RUNNER VANES MINIMUM 24 GA. VANE RUNNER ASSEMBLY UP TO 2000 FPM BOLT VANE ASSEMBLY TO ELBOW CHECK VANES WELDED TO RUNNER VANES WELDED TO CHANNEL 18 GA. FORMED CHANNEL FOR HIGH VELOCITY DUCTS VANE RUNNER ASSEMBLY UP TO 2000 FPM BOLT VANE ASSEMBLY TO ELBOW CHECK MINIMUM 24 GA. VANE RUNNER VANES WELDED TO RUNNER ' W ' E Q U A L VANE RUNNER ASSEMBLY C E D D ' W ' E Q U A L 3" MINIMUM 9 VOLUME DAMPER DETAIL NO SCALE SIDE ELEVATION SECTION 1/8" [6mm] CLEARANCE ALL AROUND INSIDE END BEARING HANDLE WITH LOCKING QUADRANT DAMPER BLADE INSULATION STAND-OFF DUCT INSULATION SEE SPECIFICATION NOTE: 1. DELETE INSULATION STAND-OFF ON DUCTWORK WITHOUT EXTERIOR INSULATION. 2. DETAIL SHOWS SINGLE BLADE DAMPER. DAMPER INSTALLATION SHALL BE SIMILAR FOR MULTI-BLADE DAMPERS & ROUND DAMPERS. 4 NO SCALE CUSTOM FLOW LINEAR SLOT DETAIL ALIGNMENT STRIPS CONCEALED MOUNTING BRACKET HANGER WIRE T-BAR GRID BY OTHERS CEILING TILES BY OTHERS MOUNTING ANGLES BY OTHERS BUTTERFLY TYPE VOLUME DAMPER FIELD FABRICATED PLENUM OPERATOR SCREW VERTICAL DISCHARGE PATTERN STEP PLENUM OUT AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE INSULATION AND MAINTAIN INSIDE CLEARANCES 1" FIBER FREE INSULATION 4" PROVIDE SHEET METAL TRANSITION PIECE THROUGH DRYER BOX OUTLET, THEN BACK TO 4" DIAMETER DRYER PROVIDE DRYER BOX MODEL 425, AS MANUFACTURED BY INO-VATE TECHNOLOGIES, INC. 10 NO SCALE DRYER VENT DETAIL 11 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS NO SCALE ROUND FLEXIBLE CONNECTION RECTANGULAR FLEXIBLE CONNECTION FLANGED CONNECTION ON FAN SIDE WASHER 1-1/2" MIN. TO 3" MAX. INSTALLED. 6" NOMINAL WITH MATERIAL TAUT FLEXIBLE MATERIAL AS SPECIFIED 1"x1/8" DRAW BAND 1"x1/8" BAND IRON BOLT ON 4" CENTERS 5/16" [8mm] FLANGE DUCT SHEET METAL SCREWS ON 12" CENTERS RIVET ON 4" CENTERS SHEET METAL AS SPECIFIED FOR DUCTWORK. 1"x1/8" BAND IRON BOLT ON 4" CENTERS 1" FLANGE AND HEM ALTERNATE POSITION OF BOLT 1 1/2" POCKET SLIP SHEET METAL AS SPECIFIED FOR DUCTWORK. 1 1/2" MIN. TO 3" MAX. INSTALLED. 6" NOMINAL WITH MATERIAL TAUT FLANGED CONNECTION ON FAN SIDE WASHER FLEXIBLE MATERIAL AS SPECIFIED 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/2" DUCT 1. NOTES: LINE ROOF UNDER CURB AND SIDES OF CURB WITH 4" THICK (TWO 2" LAYERS) ACOUSTICAL BOARD. ROOF ROOFTOP UNIT (SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION) FLEX CONNECTION CANT STRIP ROOFING FELT SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT (SEE PLANS) ACOUSTICAL BOARD OR NON DRYING CAULK AROUND DUCT RIGID INSULATION 2x4 NAILER STRIP COUNTERFLASHING 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED CURB ROOFING MATERIAL RUBBER AND SHEAR ISOLATORS DUCT INSULATION 12 NO SCALE ROOFTOP UNIT MOUNTING WITH CURB DETAIL 2. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR ALL ROOFING WORK INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: PENETRATIONS, STRUCTURAL FRAMING, ROOFING MATERIAL INSTALLATION AND FLASHING plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h702 HVAC DETAILSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1 NO SCALE TYPICAL FAN COIL UNIT DETAIL FIELD FABRICATED RETURN PLENUM AND FILTER BOX, PROVIDE MERV 8 FILTERS. PROVIDE SIDE OR BOTTOM ACCESS PANEL FOR FILTER REPLACEMENT MAINTAIN ACCESS CLEARANCES FOR FILTER PULL DRAIN CONNECTION TO INTERNAL CONDENSATE PUMP SUPPORT UNIT FROM STRUCTURE WITH THREADED ROD (TYP.) FLEXIBLE CONNECTION REFRIGERANT CONNECTIONS CONTROL BOX MAINTAIN MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SERVICE CLEARANCES FLEX CONNECTION PIPE MOUNTING PEDESTAL DETAIL 2 NO SCALE ROOFING LAG BOLT FLASHING ROOF DECK NOTES: SCREW CLAMP 1. HVAC CONTRACTOR TO CUT BACK INSULATION, PROVIDE FLASHING, SETTING AND SECURING OF CURB. 2. PROVIDE SHIMS WHERE REQUIRED TO LEVEL SUPPORT. 3. LENGTH AND HEIGHT OF SUPPORTS AS REQUIRED FOR A LEVEL INSTALLATION. 4. ALL EXTERIOR SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE GALVANIZED. 5. PIPES SHALL BE SUPPORTED MINIMUM 5'-0" ON CENTER. 6. ALL WORK SHALL BE MODIFIED/COORDINATED WITH ACTUAL ROOFING FOR THIS PROJECT. INSULATION BLOCK AND SADDLE PIPE WITH INSULATION C-STRUT CHANNEL KINDORF OR B-LINE SUPPORT BRACKET (WELDED TO CHANNEL) ROOF INSULATION 1. 2. 3. 4. SLIP JOINT (TYP.) FIRE DAMPER, TYPE B OR C NOTES: 3 NO SCALE FIRE DAMPER INSTALLATION DETAIL CONTINUOUS ANGLE 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" 12 GA. (UP TO 48" WIDE DUCT), 2"x2", 12 GA. (49" AND LARGER), FASTEN TO SLEEVE ONLY FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION DO NOT BOLT ANGLE TO WALL ROUND/FLAT OVAL OR RECTANGULAR DUCT HORIZONTAL AND 80% FREE AREA DAMPER INSTALLATION SIMILAR. FOR DOUBLE WALL DUCT, USE INSULATION END CAP AND INSULATE SLEEVE. WHERE REQUIRED, 1 1/2 HOUR DAMPER FOR ONE- AND TWO-HOUR WALLS. REFER TO ARCHTECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR WALL RATINGS. STATIC TYPE DAMPER FOR SYSTEMS WITH INTEGRATED FAN SHUTDOWN UPON DETECTION OF SMOKE. DYNAMIC TYPE DAMPER FOR SYSTEMS WITHOUT FAN SHUTDOWN. ACCESS DOOR: MINIMUM SIZE 16" x 12". IF DUCT IS LESS THAN 14" WIDE, PROVIDE 24" LONG REMOVABLE DUCT SECTION, FLANGED, GASKETED AND SECURED WITH WING NUTS IN LIEU OF DOOR 14 GAUGE SLEEVE THROUGH WALL 6" LONGER THAN THICKNESS OF WALL DAMPER SIZE TO MATCH DUCT SIZE 5 NO SCALE PIPE CURB ASSEMBLY DETAIL MEMBRANE CURB CAP METAL DECK FLASHING INSULATION BALLAST ROOF DECK HVAC CONTRACTOR TO CUT BACK INSULATION, PROVIDE ROOF OPENING, FRAMING, FLASHING, SETTING AND SECURING OF CURB. ROOF INSULATION CAULK AND SEAL WEATHERTIGHT PIPE PORTAL- VARIES ACCORDING TO NUMBER OF AND SIZE OF PIPES. STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP FOR EACH PIPE OR CONDUIT OPENING. ROOFING NOTE: 4 NO SCALE VRP UNIT INSTALLATION DETAIL RETURN AIR SUPPLY AIR DUCT VRP FLEX CONNECTIONS OUTDOOR AIR CONDENSER EXHAUST AIR LOUVER COORDINATE STAND HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SUCH THAT LOUVER IS AT ELEVATION INDICATED REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS 1. CAULK, SPRAY FOAM, AND PROVIDE ALUMINUM FOIL DUCT TAPE AS NECESSARY TO PASS ROOM AND BLOWER DOOR TESTING. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL READ AND UNDERSTAND MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. THIS DETAIL IS A GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF A GENERIC UNIT INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE A FULLY FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION PER THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. NOTES PROVIDE MERV 8 PLEATED FILTER, RACK AND ACCESS DOOR PROVIDE PAINTED ANGLE MOUNTING FLANGE FOR FULL PERIMETER OF OPENING. SEAL FLANGE TO WALL WITH BEAD OF SILICON CAULK. 6 NO SCALE TYPICAL WALL CAP INSTALLATION DETAIL TYPICAL EXTERIOR WALL BY OTHERS CAULK AND SEAL PENETRATION WEATHERTIGHT TYPICAL EXTERIOR HOODED, ALUMINUM, WALL CAP. CAP SHALL BE PROVIDED AS AN ACCESSORY TO THE ASSOCIATED FAN. COORDINATE CAP COLOR AND FINISH WITH ARCHITECT. ARCHITECT SHALL SELECT AND APPROVE FINAL FINISH AND COLOR SELECTION. COORDINTAE WALL FINISH FLASHING WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR DUCTWORK PER PLANS COORDINATE WALL PENETRACTION WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDE WALL CAP WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER AND BIRD SCREEN. 1. 2. SLIP JOINT (TYP.) NOTES: 7 NO SCALE CONTINUOUS ANGLE 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", 12 GA. (UP TO 48" WIDE DUCT), 2x2, 12 GA. (49" AND LARGER), FASTEN TO SLEEVE ONLY DO NOT BOLT ANGLE TO WALL FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION 14 GAUGE SLEEVE THROUGH WALL 12" LONGER THAN THICKNESS OF WALL ROUND/FLAT OVAL OR RECTANGULAR DUCT ACCESS DOOR: MINIMUM SIZE 16" x 12". IF DUCT IS LESS THAN 14" WIDE, PROVIDE 24" LONG REMOVABLE DUCT SECTION, FLANGED, GASKETED AND SECURED WITH WING NUTS IN LIEU OF DOOR SMOKE DAMPER FIRE DAMPER HORIZONTAL DAMPER AND 80% FREE AREA INSTALLATION SIMILAR. FOR DOUBLE WALL DUCT, USE INSULATION END CAP AND INSULATE SLEEVE. FIRE DAMPER/SMOKE DAMPER DETAIL 8 NO SCALE CEILING RADIATION DAMPER DETAIL RATED CEILING ASSEMBLY ROUND DUCT STEEL BLADES WITH FUSIBLE LINK DAMPER FRAME CONNECTION TO ROUND DUCT plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 h703 HVAC DETAILSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATIONS AND TAGSLINETYPE LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MV MIXING VALVE PD PUMP DISCHARGE ESS EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWER BACKFLOW PREVENTERBFP RPZ REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE FDC FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTORFPC VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FS FLOOR SINK WPCO WALL PLATE CLEANOUT WMF WASHING MACHINE FITTING TF TRUCK FILL HR HOSE REEL ERL EXISTING TO RELOCATE EXISTING TO REMAINETR PLUMBING CONTRACTORPC (E) EXISTING EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR NC NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR NTS NOT TO SCALE POINT OF CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION REMOVAL KEYNOTE INSTALLATION KEYNOTE EEW EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION WH WALL HYDRANT HB HOSE BIBB BT BATHTUB EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER FD FLOOR DRAIN DCDA DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASB LAV LAVATORY MSS MOP SERVICE SINK PUMPP SHR SHOWER SK SINK UR URINAL WC WATER CLOSET COLD WATER PIPING (C) PIPING SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION * NOTE : THIS IS A STANDARD SYMBOLS LIST AND ALL ITEMS SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED. RPDA REDUCED PRESSURE DETECTOR ASB DCVA DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASB DPCO DECK PLATE CLEANOUT CO CLEANOUT DWH DOMESTIC WATER HEATER COTG CLEANOUT TO GRADE HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PIPING - 140° (HWR 140) HOT WATER PIPING - 140° (HWS 140) SANITARY OR WASTE PIPING (SAN OR W) HOT WATER PIPING (H) HW RECIRCULATION PIPING (HWR) STORM PIPING (ST) IW INDIRECT WASTE PIPING (IW) DIRECTION OF FLOW EXISTING PIPING PIPING TO BE REMOVED 140 140 W WATER MAIN (EXTERIOR) TW TEMPERED WATER PIPING (TW) VENT PIPING (V) DECK PLATE CLEANOUT (DPCO) RUNNING TRAP ROOF DRAIN (RD) SHOWER HEAD WH WALL HYDRANT SA-_ SHOCK ABSORBER (SA) ROLL DOWN NEEDLE VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE PLUG VALVE RELIEF VALVE REGULATOR ANGLE VALVE BALANCE VALVE DROP CONNECTION STRAINER CLEANOUT (CO) CAP OR PLUG UNION P-TRAP THERMOMETER PRESSURE GAGE AQUASTAT HB HOSE BIBB FIRE HYDRANT SHUT OFF VALVE CHECK VALVE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE TS VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH FS FLOW SWITCH ELBOW UP, ELBOW DOWN FLOOR DRAIN (FD) PUMP MANUAL AIR VENT TEE - BOTTOM CONNECTION TEE - TOP CONNECTION SPOOL PIECE REDUCER GATE VALVE GLOBE VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE FLEXIBLE CONNECTION MV FC TEMPERATURE SWITCHTS PRESSURE SWITCHPS AUTOMATIC AIR VENTAV NO. PDI SYMBOL SHOCK ABSORBER SCHEDULE SIZE IN INCHES FIX. UNIT RATING F1"155 -330SA -F E1"114 -154SA -E D1"61 -113SA -D C1"33 -60SA -C B1"12 -32SA -B A1 -11SA -A 3/4" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p001 PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, SCHEDULESLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES A PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A COMPLETE SET OF BID DOCUMENTS (DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS) INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, CIVIL, FIRE PROTECTION, ETC. FOR BIDDING AND COORDINATION PURPOSES. B INCLUDE IN PLUMBING BID ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, TOOLS, PLANT, TRANSPORTATION, EXCAVATION, EQUIPMENT, INSURANCE, TEMPORARY PROTECTION, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, TAXES AND ALL NECESSARY AND RELATED ITEMS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL PLUMBING SYSTEMS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED. PROVIDE ALL SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING AND SERVICES NECESSARY FOR ERECTION AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS FURNISHED INTO THE PREMISES. THESE ITEMS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM PREMISES WHEN NO LONGER REQUIRED. C REFERENCES TO CODES AND STANDARDS CALLED FOR IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS MEAN THE LATEST EDITION, AMENDMENT AND REVISIONS TO THE CODES AND STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. D THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. DRAWINGS SHOW APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS OF EQUIPMENT, AND FIXTURES. COORDINATE ALL PLUMBING AND SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS INSTALLATION WITH ALL OTHER BUILDING COMPONENTS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY CHANGES IN OPENINGS AND LOCATIONS NECESSITATED BY THE EQUIPMENT INSTALLED. THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL INDICATE THE PLACEMENT OF ALL WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES IN ALL ROOMS WITH THE EXCEPTION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS. EXACT LOCATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER AND OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. E DUE TO SMALL SCALE OF THE DRAWINGS, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO INDICATE ALL OFFSETS, FITTINGS, CHANGES IN ELEVATION, ETC. VERIFY FINAL LOCATIONS FOR ROUGH-INS WITH FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND WITH THE EQUIPMENT BEING CONNECTED. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND ELEVATIONS AT WORK SITE PRIOR TO ANY ROUGH IN WORK. DO NOT SCALE PLANS. IF FIELD CONDITIONS, DETAILS, CHANGES IN EQUIPMENT OR SUBMITTAL INFORMATION REQUIRE A SIGNIFICANT CHANGE TO THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS, CONTACT THE ENGINEER AND OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR APPROVAL BEFORE PROCEEDING. COORDINATE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES AND DETERMINE EXACT ROUTING OF ALL DUCT, PIPE, CONDUIT, ETC., BEFORE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION. ARRANGE FOR ALL CHASES, SLOTS AND OPENINGS IN OTHER BUILDING COMPONENTS THAT ARE NOT INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, TO ALLOW FOR PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. VERIFY WITH ENGINEER AND OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL EQUIPMENT IN FINISHED AREAS, SUCH AS THERMOSTATS, FIXTURE AND SWITCH MOUNTING HEIGHTS, AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS. F PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY PIPING, CONNECTIONS, ACCESSORIES, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ANCHORS, WIRING AND CONTROLS FOR COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION OF ALL THE ITEMS PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. G PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION FOR UNDERGROUND AND UNDERSLAB WORK. H SLEEVE ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH OUTSIDE OR FOUNDATION WALLS WATERTIGHT. I UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, PITCH ALL SANITARY PIPING AT 1/4” PER FOOT. J FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. REFER TO ARCHITECTRUAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND RATING OF ALL FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. K CEILING HEIGHTS WILL NOT BE ADJUSTED DUE TO LACK OF COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. L FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION, COMPOSITION AND CONDITION OF ALL SITE PIPING, VALVES AND SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED FOR WORK OF THE CONTRACT. M ALL WATER CLOSETS SUPPLY LINES TO BE ROUGHED AT 8" A.F.F. WHERE 6" FLOORING BASE IS USED. WATER CLOSET FLUSH LEVERS SHALL FACE THE OPEN SIDE OF THE ROOM AT ALL LOCATIONS. N PROVIDE SUBMITTALS FOR ALL ITEMS SPECIFIED ON THIS DRAWING. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TAG ITEM WASTE VENT CW HW FITTINGS/ACCESSORIES ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER & MODEL # WC-A WATER CLOSET FLOOR MOUNT 3" 2" 1" NA CHURCH 380 SLOWT SEAT FLOOR MOUNT TANK TOILET FIXTURE, VITREOUS CHINA; 1.28 GPM AMERICAN STANDARD CADET - 215AA.104 LAV-A LAV - FAUCET 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" MOEN L64621 ADA COMPLIANT; 1.5 GPM INTEGRAL SINK BY OTHERS LAV-B LAV - WALL-HUNG - PUBLIC TOILET 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" MOEN 8884 SINGLE-HANDLE ADA METERING FAUCET WALL HUNG; VITREOUS CHINA; ADA COMPLIANT; 0.5 GPM AMERICAN STANDARD LUCERNE - 0356.421 SK-A SINK - KITCHEN RESIDENT UNIT 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" MOEN 67430 22 GA; 300 SERIES; NICKEL-BEARING STAINLESS STEEL; 4" CENTERS; TOP MOUNT; 2.2 GPM DAYTON - D12522 SK-B SINK - KITCHEN RESIDENT ADA UNIT 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" MOEN 67430 22 GA; 300 SERIES; NICKEL-BEARING STAINLESS STEEL; 4" CENTERS; TOP MOUNT; 2.2 GPM DAYTON - D12522 SK-C LAUNDRY/UTILITY TUBS 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" CENTRAL BRASS COMPANAY 0094-H FLOOR MOUNT, MUSTEE MODEL - 18F SHR-A SHOWER 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" MOEN 8342EP15 U-GRAB BAR; SOAP DISH; BRASS DRAIN; CR-59 1/4" CURTAIN ROD, CURTAIN; COLLAPSIBLE THERSHOLD KIT 2.5A.; 1.5 GPM. CLARION INDEPENDENCE LINE - MP6333UBF34 SHR-B ADA SHOWER 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" MOEN 8342EP15 SDL FOLDING SEAT; U-GRAB BAR; SOAP DISH; BRASS DRAIN; CR-59 1/4" CURTAIN ROD, CURTAIN; COLLAPSIBLE THERSHOLD KIT 2.5A.; 1.5 GPM CLARION INDEPENDENCE LINE - MP6333LBF34; MP6333RBF34 MSS-A MOP SERVICE SINK 2" 2" 1/2" 1/2" CHICAGO MODEL 897-MPRCF MUSTEE MODEL 63M EWC-A ELECTRIC WATER COOLER 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" NA ADA COMPLIANT; BI-LEVEL FILTERED LZ COOLER ELKAY - LZSTL8WS(VR)K WMB-A WASHING MACHINE OUTLET BOX 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" OATEY - 38982 LI-A LINT INTERCEPTOR 6" 2" NA NA JAY R SMITH - 8910-100 RD-A ROOF DRAIN - PRIMARY SEE PLANS NA NA NA ZURN MODEL Z100-C-EA RD-B ROOF DRAIN - SECONDARY SEE PLANS NA NA NA ZURN DOWNSPOUT COVER Z199-DC ZURN MODEL Z100-C-EA-W3 FD-A FLOOR DRAIN 3" SEE PLANS NA NA JAY R SMITH QUAD CLOSE TRAP SEAL - 2692 JAY R SMITH - 2005C DCPO DECK PLATE CLEANOUT SEE PLANS NA NA NA -- JAY R SMITH - 4023 WPCO WALL PLATE CLEANOUT SEE PLANS NA NA NA ZURN MODEL - Z-1441-BP-VP EEW-A WALL MOUNTED 1 1/2" SEE PLANS 1/2" NA POWERS ES15011 MIXING VALVE WALL MOUNTED GUARDIAN - G5026BP PLUMBING HOT WATER RECIRC PUMP SCHEDULE NO LOCATION SERVICE GPM HEAD FT WATER MOTOR PUMP TYPE NOTESHP VOLT PHASE RPM HWRP-1 MECH/ELE/RM HWR 30 22 1 208 1 --- IN-LINE BELL & GOSSETT ECOCIRC XL N 65-130 (STAINLESS STEEL BODY) PLUMBING EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE TAG SERVICE CAPACITY (GAL) DIAMETER (IN) HEIGHT (IN) MANUFACTURER & MODEL # NOTES PET-1 HW 23 15 33 AMTROL ST-42VC-DD PLUMBING GAS WATER HEATER SCHEDULE TAG SERVICE TYPE INPUT (BTUH) RECOVERY (GPH) TEMP RISE (°F) FUEL TYPE CAPACITY (GAL) VENT (IN) MANUFACTURER & MODEL # NOTES HW-1 HW STORAGE 150,000 175 100 NG 250 4 AO SMITH BTHL-150A 1, 2 HW-2 HW STORAGE 150,000 175 100 NG 250 4 AO SMITH BTHL-150A 1, 2 HW-3 HW STORAGE 150,000 175 100 NG 250 4 AO SMITH BTHL-150A 1, 2 PLUMBING SUMP PUMP SCHEDULE TAG LOCATION SERVICE GPM HEAD (FT WATER) MOTOR TYPE MANUFACTURER & MODEL #VOLTAGE SP-1 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP 50 10 115 SUBMERSIBLE LIBERTY #291-2 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE NEUTRALIZATION KIT. 2. WATER HEATER SHALL HAVE ADJUSTABLE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS. NOTES: 1. PROVIDE AQUASTAT PER 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. 2. AUTOMATIC TIME SWITHES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. WWWWWW DDDDDD p002 2 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 100C CORRIDOR 3 p002 4 p002 HW-3HW-2HW-1 MASTER MIXING VALVE & EXPANSION TANK 4"C, 3"H, 2" HWR UP IN CHASE FDC SPLASH BLOCK SPLASH BLOCK 6"IW 6" 8"IW 8" 3 4 5 6 A C A.5 B B.1 PROVIDE CHECK VALVE IN VERTICAL 2"C 2" 22""H 1"HWR 1" GROUND FLOOR 0' - 0" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' - 0" T.O STRUCTURE (2ND FLOOR) 16' - 9 1/2" 5 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 4 p002 FP TO FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION 4" C TO BUILDING 44""C 66""C 2" STRAINER (TYP) 4" IW 2" WATTS 009-M2-QT-S (TPY) 6" COMBINED SERVICE 6" FP TO RPDA 4" WATER METER 4" BUTTERFLY VALVE (TYP) 6"OS&Y GATE VALVE (W/ TAMPER SWITCH) 5 CHECK VALVE 2' - 8" 4" AIR GAP (TPY) 4" IW 4' - 8" GROUND FLOOR 0' - 0" T.O GRADE BEAM -2' - 0" B.O RATED ASSEMBLY (GROUND FLOOR) 15' - 5" A A.5 B B.1 3 p002 4" AIR GAP 8" IW 6" COMBINED SERVICE 4' - 0" 2' - 5 7/8" 6"OS&Y GATE VALVE (W/ TAMPER SWITCH) 8"IW 8" 6"FP 6" A A.5 B B.1 6" WATTS 909RPDA/OSY FP TO FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION E.10 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p002 RPZ & RPDALAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 3/64" = 1'-0" 1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING RPZ & RPDA GENERAL RPZ INSTALLATION NOTES A BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL HAVE NO LESS THAN 30” FRONT CLEARANCE TO ACCESS DEVICE. B BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL HAVE NO LESS THAN 8” BETWEEN BACK OF DEVICE AND WALL OR NEAREST OBSTRUCTION. C INSTALLED CENTERLINE OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL BE NO LESS THAN 30” A.F.F. AND NO GREATER THAN 60” A.F.F. D BACKFLOW PREVENTERS SHALL HAVE NO LESS THAN 18” CLEAR BETWEEN BOTTOM OF RELIEF VALVE AND FLOOR TO PREVENT SUBMERSION AND FACILITATE VALVE SERVICING. E NO LESS THAN 12” SHALL REMAIN CLEAR ABOVE DEVICES TO FACILITATE VALVE SERVICE AND TESTING. F 6” WATER SERVICE SHALL BE TYPE K COPPER PIPING WITH MECHANICAL JOINTS APPROVED FOR WATER SERVICE USE. G COORDINATE ALL WATER SERVICE WORK WITH THE WATER PURVEYOR H SOLDERED JOINTS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED FROM THE CURB VALUE TO THE INSIDE SHUT-OFF VALVE. I ALL MATERIAL BEFORE THE BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL BE BRASS, COPPER, OR CEMENT LINED DUCTILE IRON AND BE MECHANICALLY JOINED. J BACKFLOW PREVENTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED SO ALL TESTING PORTS WILL BE TOP OR FRONT SIDE OF DEVICE. K ALL MATERIAL BEFORE THE BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL BE NO LESS THAN 18” A.F.F. AND NO GREATER THAN 40” A.F.F. L ALL EXPOSED PIPING UPSTREAM OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER GREATER THAN 10’ IN LENGTH MUST BE LABELED “FEED LINE TO BACKFLOW PREVENTER – DO NOT TAP” AT 5’ INTERVALS. M PROVIDE INSECT SCREEN ON ALL INDIRECT WASTE (IW) LINES TERMINATED ABOVE GROUND. N THE OWNER SHALL KEEP SIDEWALK CLEAR OF SNOW AND ICE BY SHOVELING OR USE OF THE RADIANT SIDEWALK SNOWMELT SYSTEM. O ALL PIPING SHALL BE ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED FROM THE SIDEWALL USING 1/4” THREADED ROD AND ANCHORS. P THOROUGHLY FLUSH ALL WATER LINES PRIOR TO PUTTING THE DEVICE IN. Q DESIGN BASED ON ASSUMPTION THAT EXISTING SUPPLY FROM STREET IS 6” COPPER OR OTHER APPROVED MATERIAL. R EXTERIOR 6” RPZ INDIRECT WASTE DRAIN MUST BE KEPT FREE OF SNOW AND ICE DURING THE WINTER. S AIR GAP FITTINGS ARE NOT ALLOWED. T VICTAULIC FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED UPSTREAM OF THE BACKFLOW PREVENTER. 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 ENLARGED RPZ & RPDA ROOM 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 RPZ ELEVATION 709 WEST COURT STREET ITHACA, NEW YORK 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 RPDA ELEVATION N W W W W W W D D D D D D p101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 p102 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 012 COMMUNITY ROOM 100D VESTIBULE 014 STAFF BREAK ROOM 013 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 017 COMMON LAUNDRY 018 CONFERENCE ROOM 100C CORRIDOR 001 VESTIBULE 002 HORIZON WAITING AREA 003 RECEPTION OFFICE 002B HORIZON MED. ROOM 002C PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002D DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 004 SHARED COPY / FILES 002A HORIZON PROGRAM002E SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 006 ELMSHADE OFFICES 007 ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 005 STAFF TOILET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM 213 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 214 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 202 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 2 p601SIM 1 p103 SIM GENERAL NOTE: 1: SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH FLOOR CORRIDORS ARE SIMULAR TO THE FITH FLOOR CORRIDOR. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM 314 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 312 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 310 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 308 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 306 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 304 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 303 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 305 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 307 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 313 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 301 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 302 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 2 p601SIM 1 p103 SIM GENERAL NOTE: 1: SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH FLOOR CORRIDORS ARE SIMULAR TO THE FITH FLOOR CORRIDOR. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIMSIM SIM 414 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 412 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 410 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 408 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 406 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 404 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 403 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 402 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 401 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 2 p601SIM 413 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 407 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 405 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 1 p103 SIM GENERAL NOTE: 1: SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH FLOOR CORRIDORS ARE SIMULAR TO THE FITH FLOOR CORRIDOR. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM SIM p103 1 2 p601SIM 514 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 513 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 507 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 505 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 501 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 502 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 503 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 504 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 506 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 508 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 510 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 512 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p100 1/16" FLOOR PLANS -PLUMBINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/16" = 1'-0" 1 1/16" FOUNDATION PLAN - PLUMBING 1/16" = 1'-0" 2 1/16" GROUND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 1/16" = 1'-0" 3 1/16" SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 1/16" = 1'-0" 4 1/16" THIRD FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 1/16" = 1'-0" 5 1/16" FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING 1/16" = 1'-0" 6 1/16" FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING N N N N N N N 1 15 5 11 7 5 8 15 3 333 3 44 4 4 7 6 7 5 7 5 5 5 13 97 9 10 10 10 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3 7 12 12 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 6"SAN 6" 6"SAN 6" 6"SAN 6" 10 4"SAN 4" LI-A 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 4"SAN 4" 6"SAN 6" 6"SAN 6" 6"SAN 6" 3"SAN 3" 7 7 7 7 4"SAN 4" 3"SAN 3"3"SAN 3"4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 2"SAN 2"2"SAN 2" 4"SAN 4" 7 7 7 11 9 11 9 11 9 6" COMBINED SERVICE 6"SAN 6" 7 3"SAN 3" 4"SAN 4" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 6"SAN 6" 3"SAN 3" 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 3"SAN 3" 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 3"SAN 3" 7 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3 14 6"SAN 6" 4"SAN 4" 2"SAN 2" 3"SAN 3" 4"ST 4" 4"ST 4" 3"SAN 3" 1616 1515 6"ST 6" 4"ST 4" 4"ST 4" 4"ST 4" 6"ST 6" 7 12 12 712 7 15 12 77 17 10 10 7 17 7 17 17 3"SAN 3" 6"SAN 6"3"SAN 3" 4"ST 4" 7 10 18 7 ELEVATOR PIT 19 SAN INVERT -2'-0" SAN INVERT: -3'-0" STORM INVERT: -3-7" SAN INVERT: -4'-2.816" STORM INVERT: -3-4.700" SAN INVERT: -5'-4.286" STORM INVERT: -2-3.625" SAN INVERT: -5'-8.078" STORM INVERT: -2-2.156" 4"ST 4" 4"ST 4" 4"ST 4" 6"ST 6" 10 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p101 FOUNDATION PLAN -PLUMBINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 FOUNDATION PLAN - PLUMBING N p101 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE 1 1/2" SAN DOWN. 3 PROVIDE 2” SAN WITH P-TRAP UP TO FD-A ABOVE. ROUTE 2” SAN TO 4” SAN/VENT STACK LOCATED IN CHASE WALL BEHIND LAV-A. 4 PROVIDE 2” SAN WITH P-TRAP UP TO SHR-A ABOVE. ROUTE 2” SAN TO 4” SAN/VENT STACK LOCATED IN CHASE WALL BEHIND LAV-A. 5 PROVIDE 4" SAN DOWN. 6 PROVIDE 1 1/2" SAN UP TO SK-B 7 PROVIDE 3" SAN/VENT DOWN. 8 PROVIDE 2" SAN UP TO BACK TO BACK LAV-B'S. 9 PROVIDE 2” SAN UP TO FD-A. 10 UP TO DPCO. DPCO SIZE SHALL MATCH CONNECTED PIPE SIZE. 11 PROVIDE 1 1/2" V UP. 12 PROVIDE 3" SAN UP TO WC-A. 13 PROVIDE 6" SAN DOWN. 14 PROVIDE 4" SAN DOWN FROM LAUNDRY ROOM. 15 PROVIDE 4" STORM UP. 16 PROVIDE 4" SAN/VENT FROM FLOORS ABOVE. 17 PROVIDE 2” SAN UP TO SK-A 18 PROVIDE 3" V UP. 19 PROVIDE 3” SAN FROM ELEVATOR PIT SUMP PUMP. W W W W W W D D D D D D 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 006 ELMSHADE OFFICES 007 ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 005 STAFF TOILET 004 SHARED COPY / FILES 002E SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002A HORIZON PROGRAM 100C CORRIDOR 002D DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002C PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002B HORIZON MED. ROOM 002 HORIZON WAITING AREA 003 RECEPTION OFFICE 018 CONFERENCE ROOM 011 TRASH / RECYCLE 100D VESTIBULE 012 COMMUNITY ROOM 013 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 017 COMMON LAUNDRY 016 MEN'S TOILET 015 WOMEN'S TOILET 001 VESTIBULE SK-A WC-A SHR-A LAV-A FD-A p601 2 p601 3 p601 1 4 p601 CO FD-A FD-A FD-A LAV-A FD-A 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT DPCODPCO WC-A 12 SK-B SK-B SHR-A 2 CO CO CO 4"ST 4" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 3"SAN 3" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 3"SAN 3" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 4"SAN 4" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"HWR 1/2" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 4 4 4 6 7 8 9 15 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 1112 FD-A 12 12 9 13 014 STAFF BREAK ROOM A01 STAIR A E01 ELEVATOR 101 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 18 6 7 66666 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 77777 7 77 7 7 8 11 10 SK-B 11 9 12 11 9 9 9 7 88 4"SAN 4"2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 3"SAN 3" 12 12 16 8 8 4"SAN 4" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 6"SAN 6" DPCO 19 14 11 FD-A 17 17 17 1717 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 3"SAN 3" 22 FD-A FD-A FD-A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 12 17 12 17 12 17 12 17 121212 17 21 3"SAN 3" 9 21 21 12 HW-1 HW-2 HW-3 2121 12 17 20 20 21 20 21 20 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 4 4 4 SK-A SK-A SK-A LAV-B LAV-B FD-A 14 14 14 14 14 CO 2"SAN 2" 3"SAN 3"3"SAN 3"2"SAN 2" CO 2"SAN 2"11 22 22 22 22 23 14 14 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" FD-A FD-A DPCO 1/2"HWR 1/2" 11""H 22""C 8 8 12 11 3"SAN 3" 12 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"HWR 1/2" CO CO 24 1 1/2"C 1 1/2" 3/4"H 3/4"WC -A SHR-A LAV-A FD-A FD-A LAV-A WC-A SHR-A 1 1/2"IW 1 1/2" DPCO 2 p601 SIM. 2 p601 SIM. 25 25 2525 25 25 LAV-A WC-A FD-A EWC-A 26 11 4"ST 4" FD-A plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p102 GROUND FLOOR PLAN -PLUMBINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING p102 DRAWING NOTES 20 PROVIDE 1 1/2" V DOWN TO SK-A. OFFSET 1 1/2" V AROUND STEEL AND BACK. 1 1/2" SAN UP FROM BELOW. 21 PROVIDE 3" SAN FROM FLOORS ABOVE. OFFSET AROUND STEEL IN CEILING SPACE THEN OFFSET BACK DOWN WALL. 22 PROVIDE 2” V UP. 23 PROVIDE 3” V UP. 24 PROVIDE 1 1/2" IW TO HVAC EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR. RUN IW TO FD-A LOCATED BEHIND HOT WATER HEATERS. 25 CONNECT 1/2" C TO PEX MANIFOLD TO SERVE NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANY. COORDINATE FINAL MOUNTING HIGHT OF WALL HYDRANT WITH ARCHITECT AND OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. 26 PROVIDE 3/4" C, 1 1/2" V UP, CONNECT THE 2” SAN FROM EWC-A TO THE 3” SAN DROP DOWN WALL BEHIND EWC-A. p102 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE 1” C, 1 1/2" V DOWN TO WC-A. PROVIDE 1/2" H&C, 1 1/2" V DOWN TO LAV-A. PROVIDE 1/2" HWR DOWN WALL TO WITHIN 18” OF 1/2" H PENETRATION OF WALL AND CONNECT TO HOT WATER SUPPLY IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. 2 PROVIDE 1/2" H&C, 1 1/2" V DOWN TO SK-B. 4 PROVIDE 4" STORM DOWN FROM FLOORS ABOVE. 6 PROVIDE 2” SAN WITH P-TRAP UP TO FD-A ABOVE. ROUTE 2” SAN TO 4” SAN/VENT STACK LOCATED IN CHASE WALL BEHIND LAV-A. 7 PROVIDE 2” SAN WITH P-TRAP UP TO SHR-A ABOVE. ROUTE 2” SAN TO 4” SAN/VENT STACK LOCATED IN CHASE WALL BEHIND LAV-A. 8 PROVIDE 4" SAN FROM FLOORS ABOVE. 9 PROVIDE 4" SAN DOWN. 10 PROVIDE 1/2" H&C, 1 1/2" V DOWN TO SK-A. 11 PROVIDE 3" SAN DOWN. 12 PROVIDE 3" SAN FROM FLOORS ABOVE. 13 PROVIDE 1” C DOWN TO WC-A. PROVIDE 1/2” H & C DOWN TO LAV-B. PROVIDE 1/2" HWR DOWN WALL TO WITHIN 18” OF 1/2” H PENETRATION OF WALL AND CONNECT TO HOT WATER SUPPLY IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. 14 PROVIDE 2” SAN UP TO FD-A ABOVE. ROUTE 2” SAN TO 3” SAN/VENT STACK LOCATED IN WALL. 15 PROVIDE 1 1/2" V UP. 16 PROVIDE 3" SAN FROM FLOORS ABOVE. 17 PROVIDE 3" SAN UP TO WC-A. 18 PROVIDE 4" STORM DOWN. 19 PROVIDE 6" SAN DOWN. N CO WC-A SHR-A FD-A LAV-A SK-A 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 7 2 1 7 5 6 44""V 33""V 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 44""V 33""V 4"ST (OVERFLOW) 4" 33""V 33""V 33""V 7 7 77 7 33""V 33""V33""V33""V33""V33""V33""V 22""V 4"ST 4" 4"ST (OVERFLOW) 4" 4"ST (OVERFLOW) 4" 4"ST (OVERFLOW) 4" 2 1/2"H 2 1/2"7 8 33""V 33""V 33""V 33""V 44""V FD-A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 2 p601 9 1 1/4"C 1 1/4" 11""H 3/4"HWR 3/4" 1"HWR 1" 2 1/2"H 2 1/2" 2 1/2"C 2 1/2" 1 1/2"H 1 1/2" 3/4"HWR 3/4" 22""C 7 10 44""V 33""V 33""V 33""V44""V 33""V 33""V 33""V 33""V 33""V 33""V 33""V33""V33""V 33""V 33""V 2 1/2"G 2 1/2" SIM. SIM.SIM.SIM.SIM. SIM. SIM. SIM. SIM. SIM. SIM. SIM. SIM. 11 GENERAL NOTE: 1: SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH FLOOR CORRIDORS ARE SIMULAR TO THE FITH FLOOR CORRIDOR. 500A RECEPTION LOUNGE 500 CORRIDOR 12 MSS-A plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p103 FIFTH FLOOR PLAN -PLUMBINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING N p103 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE 4” STORM UP TO RD-A. 2 PROVIDE 4” STORM (OVERFLOW) UP TO RD-B. TERMINATE WITH DOWNSPOUT WITH HINGED COVER. 5 PROVIDE 3" V UP FROM LI-A ON GROUND FLOOR LAUNDRY. 6 PROVIDE 1 1/2" V UP FROM SK-B LOCATED ON GROUND FLOOR IN COMMUNITY KITCHEN 013. 7 PROVIDE 4” V, 4" VTR. 8 ROUTE THE (3) 4” GAS-FIRED WATER HEATERS INTAKE AND EXHAUST DUCTS UP THE CHASE THROUGH ROOF. 9 PROVIDE 4” STORM DOWN. 10 ROUTE 2 1/2" GAS UP TO GENERATOR AND 2" GAS UP TO DOAS UNIT ON ROOF. 11 PROVIDE 1 1/2" V UP FROM EWC-A ON GROUND FLOOR. 12 PROVIDE 1/2" HOT AND COLD WATER AND 2” SAN TO MSS-A. CONNECT 2” SAN TO 3” SAN/V RISER IN WALL AS INDICATED. # M NATURAL GAS GENERATOR RD-B RD-A RD-B RD-A RD-A RD-B RD-A RD-B RD-B RD-A 4" VTR 4" VTR DOAS-1 ODU-1 1 2 5 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 4 2 1/2"G 2 1/2" 2 1/2"G 2 1/2" 2 1/2"G 2 1/2" 4" VTR 4" VTR 4" VTR 4" VTR 4" VTR 22""G 22""G 2 1/2"G 2 1/2" 4" VTR E.10 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p104 ROOF PLAN -PLUMBINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 ROOF PLAN - PLUMBING N p104 DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE 2" G TO GAS-FIRED DOAS-1. PROVIDE FULL PORT BALL VALVE AND 6” DIRT LEG. 2 PROVIDE 2 1/2" G TO GAS-FIRED GENERATOR. PROVIDE FULL PORT BALL VALVE AND 6” DIRT LEG. 3 PROVIDE 2 1/2" G UP (ELEVATED PRESSURE). 4 PROVIDE 2" G UP. 5 TERMINATE (3) 4” GAS-FIRED WATER HEATER INTAKE AND EXHAUST PER MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. VENTS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH ROOFING COLOR. COORDINATE COLOR WITH ARCHITECT. W W W W W W D D D D D D 017 COMMON LAUNDRY FD-A FD-A 7 LI-ASK -C WMB-A WMB-A WMB-A WMB-A WMB-A WMB-A 16 D E F 15.6 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1 1/2"C 1 1/2" 3/4"H 3/4" 8 9 9 3/4"H 3/4" 1 1/2"C 1 1/2" PEX MANIFOLD 10 11 11 12 13 WC-A SHR-A LAV-A LAV-A SHR-A WC-A FD-AFD -A PEX MANIFOLD10 SK-A 11 SK-A 13 11 12 DPCODPCO 14 HVAC EQUIPMENT FD-A 2 3 4 5 6 7 D E F 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 21 21 16 16 14 HVAC EQUIPMENT FD-A 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100C CORRIDOR 3 p002 4 p601 B01 STAIR B 100C CORRIDOR 008 SERVER 4 p002 MASTER MIXING VALVE/EXPANSION TANK 15 19 3 4 5 A C A.5 B B.1 CO 17 6"SAN 6" 6"SAN 6" 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 1919 HW-3HW-2HW-1 44""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 18 4"ø 4"ø 4"ø 4"ø 4"ø 4"ø 4"ø 1 1/2"G 1 1/2"1 1/2"G 1 1/2" 1 1/2"G 1 1/2" 1 1/2"G 1 1/2" 1 1/2"G 1 1/2" 6"FP 6" 1 1/2"IW 1 1/2" BCC-2 BCC-1 FP PIPE TO STANDPIPE MAIN. WET PIPIE RISERS. 20 20 22""G 2 1/2"G 2 1/2" GROUND FLOOR 0' - 0" B.O CEILING (GROUND FLOOR) 11' - 5" 34 1 2 3 4 6 GAS 2" GAS 2 1/2" GAS 3' - 0" 34 5 4' - 6" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p601 ENLARGED PLANS -PLUMBINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ENLARGED COMMON LAUNDRY ROOM - PLUMBING 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 ENLARGED ONE BED ROOM UNIT - PLUMING 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 ENLARGED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ROOM - PLUMBING 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 NATURAL GAS ELEVATION p601 PLUMBING DRAWING NOTES 1 NATURAL GAS SERVICE. 2 PRESSURE REGULATING SPRING TO ALLOW MAX 14” W.C. NATURAL GAS PRESSURE. 3 PRESSURE REGULATING SPRING TO ALLOW MAX 7” W.C. NATURAL GAS PRESSURE. 4 PROVIDE NATURAL GAS METER WITH 1573 CFH CAPACITY. 5 FOR FUTURE GAS METER. 6 GAS PIPING INTO BUILDING. 7 PROVIDE 1/2" H&C, 1 1/2" V DOWN TO SK-C. 8 PROVIDE 1/2” H & C TO WASHING MACHINE BOXES. REFER TO DETAIL #9 ON DRAWING p701. 9 PROVIDE 2" SAN DOWN FROM WASHING MACHINE BOXES TO 4” SANITARY HEADER. PROVIDE 4” SANITARY HEADER LOCATED WITHIN WALL. PROVIDE 6” SAN DOWN TO LI-A. REFER TO DETAIL #9 & #10 ON DRAWING p701. 10 COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION OF PEX MANIFOLD IN THE FIELD WITH ARCHITECT, OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DETAIL #4 ON DRAWING p701. 11 PROVIDE 1/2" HOT AND COLD WATER AND 1-1/2” SAN TO SK-A. CONNECT 2” SAN TO 3” SAN/V RISER IN WALL AS INDICATED. 12 PROVIDE 1/2" HOT AND COLD WATER AND 1-1/2” SAN TO LAV-A. CONNECT 1-1/2” SAN TO 4” SAN/V RISER IN WALL AS INDICATED. 13 PROVIDE 1/2" COLD WATER AND 3” SAN TO WC-A. CONNECT 3” SAN TO 4” SAN/V RISER IN WALL AS INDICATED. 14 PROVIDE 1-1/2” IW FROM HVAC EQUIPMENT AS INDICATED. CONNECT TO 1-1/2” IW RISER AS INDICATED. 1-1/2” IW RISER SHALL TERMINATE ABOVE FLOOR DRAIN ON FIRST FLOOR WITH A 4” AIR GAP. 15 ROUTE 4” GAS-FIRED WATER HEATER INTAKE AND EXHAUST THROUGH ROOF. TERMINATE PER MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. VENTS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH ROOFING COLOR. COORDINATE COLOR WITH ARCHITECT. 16 PROVIDE 3” SAN/V RISER IN WALL AS INDICATED. 17 PROVIDE 6” SAN DOWN TO UNDERSLAB. 18 PROVIDE 4” C, 3” H AND 2” HWR UP TO FLOOR ABOVE. 19 PROVIDE 1” G TO EACH HOT WATER HEATER (HW-1, HW-2 & WH-3). PROVIDE FULL PORT BALL VALVE. SEE DETAILS #1 AND #2 ON DRAWING P701. 20 PROVIDE 1-1/2” IW FROM BBC-1 & BBC-2 AS INDICATED. TERMINATE ABOVE FLOOR DRAIN BEHIND THE HOT WATER HEATERS WITH A 4” AIR GAP. 21 PROVIDE 4" STORM UP TO RD-A 11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" PEX MANIFOLD 22""C 1 1/2"H 1 1/2" 3/4"HWR 3/4" 1"HWR 1" 2 1/2"H 2 1/2" 2 1/2"C 2 1/2" 1 1/2"HWR 1 1/2" 33""H 33""C 2 1/2"C 2 1/2" 22""H 1"HWR 1" 2 1/2"C 2 1/2" 2 1/2"H 2 1/2" 1"HWR 1" 2 1/2"C 2 1/2" 1"HWR 1" 2 1/2"H 2 1/2" 5TH FLOOR DOMESTIC PIPING 4TH FLOOR DOMESTIC PIPING 3RD FLOOR DOMESTIC PIPING 2ND FLOOR DOMESTIC PIPING GROUND FLOOR DOMESTIC PIPING PEX MANIFOLD PEX MANIFOLD PEX MANIFOLD PEX MANIFOLD WC LAV-A SHR/BT SK WC LAV-A SHR SK 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" H, C & HWR UP CHASE 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2"1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2"11""C 1/2"H 1/2" 1/2"C 1/2" 11""C 2"HWR 2" 33""H 44""C 22""C 1"HWR 1" 1 1/2"H 1 1/2" 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" LAV-A SHR WC LAV-A SHR 11""C 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" SK H, C & HWR FROM HOT WATER PLANT 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 22""C 22""H 1"HWR 1" 22""H 22""C 1"HWR 1" 22""H 22""C SK SK LAV-A SHR WC WC SK SK SK SK SK WC WC WC WC WC FD SHR WC LAV LAV FD WC WC WC WC DPCO FD SHR LAV LAV FD FD SHR LAV LAV FD FD SHR LAV LAV FD FD SHR LAV LAV FD TO MAIN SAN TO MAIN SAN TO MAIN SAN FROM FD'S IN HVAC EQUIPMENT CLOSET 1 1/2"SAN 1 1/2" 3"SAN 3" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 3"SAN 3" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 3"SAN 3" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 3"SAN 3" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 33""V 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 3"SAN 3" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 3"SAN 3" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 4"SAN 4" 4"SAN 4" 3"SAN 3" 4"SAN 4" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 2"SAN 2" 4"SAN 4" 33""V 33""V 33""V 1 1/2"V 1 1/2" 33""V 33""V TO VTR FD plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p602 PLUMBING -RISER DIAGRAMSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1 PARTIAL PLUMBING - DOMESTIC WATER RISER 2 PARTIAL PLUMBING - SAN &VENT RISER COLD WATER HOT WATER 1/2" TEMPERATURE MIXING VALVE (TMV), INSTALL SECURE TO STRUCTURE. WALL HUNG COMBINATION EYEWASH & DRENCH HOSE GUARDIAN G5026BP SHUT OFF VALVE BALL TYPE (TYP) NOTES: 1. INSTALLATION OF EYEWASH / DRENCH HOSE TO BE COMPLIANT WITH ANSI Z358.1 (LATEST). TOTAL LENGTH. 2. TEMPERED WATER LINE NOT TO EXCEED 5 FT. 3. HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF VALVES TO BE PLACED IN LOCATION TO PREVENT UNAUTHORIZED TAMPERING. VALVE HANDLES TO BE REMOVED OR VALVE TO BE SUPPLIED LOCKABLE AND LOCKED OPEN. TEMPERED WATER FINISHED FLOOR 1/2" 1/2" 8 COMB. EYEWASH/DRENCH HOSE DETAIL NO SCALE MSS INSTALL BETWEEN 33" & 45" ABOVE FLOOR. DEVICE MUST BE 8" FROM WALL AND/OR NEAREST OBSTRUCTION 3 NO SCALE HOT WATER RECIRCULATION BALANCE VALVE BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE FLOW SIZE AS NOTED ON FLOOR PLANS NOTES: BALANCE VALVE 1. PROVIDE THIS ARRANGEMENT ON ALL HOT WATER RE-CIRCULATION BRANCHES AND WHERE NOTED ON PLANS. 2. LOCATE THE VALVE 5 PIPE DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM FROM A FITTING. 3. IF A BALANCING VALVE IS LOCATED DOWNSTREAM FROM A CIRCULATION PUMP, ALLOW A DISTANCE OF 10 PIPE DIAMETERS BETWEEN THE PUMP AND BALANCING VALVES. 4. FOR VALVE SIZING, REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S RANGE CHART, WHICH SHOWS THE RECOMMENDED OPERATION RANGE FOR EACH VALVE SIZE. 5. ALL VALVES SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH PROBE METERING PORTS. 6. INSTALL VALVE SUCH THAT PORTS DO NOT FACE DOWN. P-TRAP (SIZE PER PLANS) 6 NO SCALE FLOOR DRAIN DETAIL FLOOR DRAIN TO SANITARY SET TOP OF GRATE FLUSH WITH FIN. FLOOR DRAIN, GRATE AND BODY AS INDICATED IN SPECIFICATIONS CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB AND FLOOR FINISH BY OTHERS (SLOPED TO DRAIN). TRAP GUARD GRADE STORM/SANITARY SEWER PIPING CLEAN OUT "T" BRANCH WITH THREADED PLUG STORM/SANITARY RISER BASE CLEANOUT DETAIL 7 NO SCALE NOTES: 1. PAD SIZE TO BE 6" LARGER THAN "FOOTPRINT" OF HEATER AND TANK. 2. EXHAUST AIR OUTLET SHALL BE LOCATED A MINIMUM OF 25' FROM ANY AIR INTAKES OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. FIN. FLOOR4" CONC. PAD (TYP.) UNION (TYP.) THERMOMETER (TYP.) 1 1/2" 4" PVC 4" PVC POWER VENT MOTOR(TYP.) DRAIN VALVE (TYP.) G 1 NO SCALE DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (HW-1) EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL UP THRU ROOF 6" DIRT LEG W/ CAP (TYP.) WATER HEATER DETAIL - POWER VENTED AIR INTAKE UP THRU ROOF 2" HWR HWRP-1 STRAINER WITH BLOWDOWN VALVE AQUASTAT BALANCING VALVE SET AT 30 GPM 2 1/2" H TO MASTER MIXING VALVE 3/4" PIPE TO FLOOR DRAIN 1 1/2" 4" PVC 4" PVC G DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (HW-2) 1 1/2" G 3/4" EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL UP THRU ROOF AIR INTAKE UP THRU ROOF 1 1/2" G 4" PVC 4" PVC SHUT-OFF VALVE (TYP.) G DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (HW-3) PROVIDE DI-ELECTRIC FITTING AT TANK INLET AND OUTLET AND AT ALL HEATER CONNECTIONS. 3" C SUPPLY 1" AMTROL EXPANSION TANK (PET-1) CHECK VALVE (TYP.) 3/4" PIPE TO FLOOR DRAIN EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL UP THRU ROOF AIR INTAKE UP THRU ROOF 1 1/2" G 1 1/2" T & P RELIEF VALVE (TYP.) PIPE TO FLOOR DRAIN MASTER PLUMBING MANIFOLD DETAIL 4 NO SCALE UPONOR MODEL LF2500400 1"C 1"H1/2"HWR 1/2"HW 1/2"HW 1/2"HW 1/2"C 1/2"C 1/2"C 1/2"C SET CIRCUIT SETTER TO 0.5 GPM BACK TO MAINS NOTES: 1. PROVIDE UNIONS ON ALL THREE CONNECTIONS TO MIXING VALVE. THERMOMETER (TYP. 3) SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVE (TYP. 3) BALL VALVE (TYP. 3) 105°F H TO BLDG. FIXTURES C 140°F H FROM HEATER TO MASTER MIXING VALVE MIXING VALVE POWERS LFSH1432 (BASIS OF DESIGN) 24" DEEP SEAL HEAT TRAP STRAINER (TYP.) 2 NO SCALE MASTER MIXING VALVE DETAIL SLEEVE AND LINK-SEAL 3" TO SANITARY 5 NO SCALE ELEVATOR SUMP PUMP DETAIL UNION LIFT CHECK VALVE SHUT OFF VALVE (GATE VALVE) ELEVATOR PIT FLOOR C.O. TURN ON LEVEL 1" BELOW ELEVATOR PIT FLOOR STEEL COVER COORDINATE PLACEMENT OF SUMP CROCK WITH STRUCTURAL GRADE BEAMS, PILES, ETC. GFCI RECEPTACLES BY ELECTRIC CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE EACH LOCATION WITH E.C. 1 1/2" PUMP DISCHARGE 1 1/2" BY 3" T-Y FITTING KEEP PIPING AS TIGHT TO WALL AS POSSIBLE NOTE: PROVIDE STEEL COVER OVER SUMP CROCK FLUSH WITH FIN. FLOOR OF EACH ELEVATOR PIT. PROVIDE SUMP PUMP IN EACH ELEVATOR PIT. 12" ABOVE LEVEL OF FIN. FLOOR SLEEVE WIRING THROUGH WALL AND FIRESTOP. FIN. FLOOR INLET FD PROVIDE WATTS SERIES CU7 BACKFLOW PREVENTER IN WATER PIPING ABOVE CEILING 1/2" CW SUPPY 1/2" HW SUPPY RECEPTACLE STACK VENT CABINET FINISHED WALL DRAIN HOSE PROVIDE BLOCKIING BETWEEN STUDS FOR ENCLOSURE SUPPORT SHOCK ABSORBER TYPE 'A' (TYP. OF 2) WASTE STACK 2" DRAIN DEEP SEAL TRAP LOCK NUTS FINISHED FLOOR SUPPLIES FOR UNITS ON SECOND FLOOR ARE FED FROM BELOW.A. 3'-6" WASHING MACHINE SUPPLY AND DRAIN DETAIL NOTES: FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 9 NO SCALE 6" 6" OUTLET 3" VENT 6" INLET FINISHED FLOOR ANCHOR FLANGE 10 NO SCALE LINT INTERCEPTOR DETAIL DIAMOND PLATE COVER FLUSH W/ FIN. FLOOR A. PROVIDE EXTENSION ABOVE LINT INTERCEPTOR AS REQUIRED BASED ON FF ELEVATION. NOTES: 12 NO SCALE CONDENSATE PUMP DRAIN CONNECTION DETAIL HVAC EQUIPMENT FLEXIBLE TUBING FURNISHED HVAC UNIT. CLAMP ONE END TO UNIT NIPPLE, CLAMP THE OTHER END TO 1/2" CONDENSATE WASTE PIPING (DWV COPPER). PROVIDE CLAMPS. CONDENSATE DRAIN NIPPLE - VERIFY SIZE AND COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR 1/2" CONDENSATE WASTE ROUTE AS SHOWN ON PLANS AND SIZE NOTED FITTINGS AS REQUIRED NOTES: 1. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT CONDENSATE PIPING TO EACH HVAC UNIT AND PROVIDE HARD PIPED, FITTINGS AND UNION, AS WELL AS ALL CONDENSATE PIPING. 2. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPING AND INSULATION REQUIREMENTS. 3. ALL CONDENSATE WASTE PIPING SHALL BE TYPE DWV COPPER. PVC PIPING IS PROHIBITED WHERE NOTED OR NO RETURN AIR PLENUMS ARE USED. 4. PROVIDE CHECK VALVE AT EACH CONDENSATE PUMP DISCHARGE. 5. CONDENSATE PUMP INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING IS BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR. 11 NO SCALE CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION DETAIL HVAC EQUIPMENT FLEXIBLE TUBING FURNISHED WITH HEAT PUMP OR HVAC UNIT. CLAMP ONE END TO UNIT NIPPLE, CLAMP THE OTHER END TO 1" CONDENSATE WASTE PIPING (DWV COPPER). PROVIDE CLAMPS. CONDENSATE DRAIN NIPPLE - VERIFY SIZE AND COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR SLOPE AT 1/4" PER FOOT 1", 1 1/4", OR 1 1/2" CONDENSATE WASTE ROUTE AS SHOWN ON PLANS AND SIZE NOTED 1"x1", 1"x1 1/2" OR 1 3/4"X 1 1/4" INCREASER AS REQUIRED NOTES: 1. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT CONDENSATE PIPING TO EACH HVAC UNIT AND PROVIDE HARD PIPED, FITTINGS AND UNION, AS WELL AS ALL CONDENSATE PIPING. 2. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPING AND INSULATION REQUIREMENTS. 3. ALL CONDENSATE WASTE PIPING SHALL BE TYPE DWV COPPER. PVC PIPING IS PROHIBITED WHERE NOTED OR NO RETURN AIR PLENUMS ARE USED. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 p701 PLUMBING DETAILSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1 NO SCALE FIRE PROTECTION CRITERIA AREAS SPRINKLED HAZARD CLASSIFICATION LOCATION DESCRIPTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM TYPE SPRINKLER DENSITY APPLICATION AREA (MOST. HYD. REMOTE) SPRINKLER HEAD TEMP. RATING REMARKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 1 RESIDENTIAL UNITS OFFICE/TOILET RM/ COMMUNITY RM/ FACILITY/LAUNDRY RM ELEVATOR WET SYSTEM WET SYSTEM WET SYSTEM 0.10 GPM/SF 0.10 GPM/SF N/A TOP OF SHAFT AND 12" ABOVE BOTTOM OF PIT 1500 SF 1500 SF 1500 SF 165° F 165° F 165° F 165° F PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS PER NFPA 10. 100 GPM INTERIOR HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE. PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS PER NFPA 10. 100 GPM INTERIOR HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE. PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS PER NFPA 10. 100 GPM INTERIOR HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE. FIRE PROTECTION CRITERIA TYPE OF SPRINKLER LIGHT HAZARD ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 1 MECH RM/TRASH RM /STORAGE/JANITORS CLOSET/RPZ RM WET SYSTEM 0.15 GPM/SF LIGHT HAZARD QUICK RESPONSE STANDARD COVERAGE PENDANT OR SIDEWALL QUICK RESPONSE STANDARD COVERAGE PENDANT OR SIDEWALL QUICK RESPONSE STANDARD COVERAGE PENDANT OR UPRIGHT QUICK RESPONSE STANDARD COVERAGE UPRIGHT OR SIDEWALL CORRIDOR/LOBBY/ VESTIBULE/ STAIRWELL WET SYSTEM 0.10 GPM/SF 1500 SF 165° F QUICK RESPONSE STANDARD COVERAGE PENDANT OR UPRIGHT PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS PER NFPA 10. 100 GPM INTERIOR HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE. LIGHT HAZARD ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 1 UTILITY CHASE WET SYSTEM N/A TOP OF SHAFT 165° F QUICK RESPONSE STANDARD COVERAGE UPRIGHT OR SIDEWALL EXTERIOR PROJECTION WET SYSTEM 0.10 GPM/SF 1500 SF 165° F QUICK RESPONSE DRY BARREL STYLE SIDEWALL OR PENDANT 100 GPM INTERIOR HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE. LIGHT HAZARD7 SOFFIT NOTE: SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS HEAD TO BE RATED FOR DEFLECTOR TO CEILING DISTANCE REQUIRED. SIDEWALL SPRINKLER HEAD TO BE INSTALLED SO THAT DEFLECTOR TO BOTTOM OF SOFFIT IS NO GREATER THAN 4”. SOFFITS GREATER THAN 8” WIDE REQUIRES ADDITIONAL SPRINKLER PROTECTION. SIDEWALL STYLE SPRINKLER HEAD BRANCH (WET SYSTEM) INSTALL PIPE HANGERS AT EVERY SPRINKLER LOCATION AND ATTACH HANGER ASSEMBLIES DIRECTLY TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13 SPRINKLER PIPING (TYPICAL) 5 NO SCALE SIDEWALL SPRINKLER HEAD DETAIL CLG. TILE OR GYP. BD. 1" x 1" OR 1" x 1/2" OR 1" x 3/4" REDUCING COUPLING 4" MIN 8" MODEL # A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) 2024 24 3 4.0 2036 36 3 4.0 2048 48 3 4.0 2060 60 3 4.0 2072 72 3 4.0 NO SCALE FLEXHEAD SPRINKLER HOSE CONNECTION DETAIL B A C xxxxxxxx TYPICAL 304 STAINLESS STEEL OUTLET SPUD 1/2 AND 3/4 FEMALE NPT WELD WELD TYPICAL 304 STAINLESS STEEL SCHEDULE 40 PIPE TYPICAL 304 STAINLESS STEEL BRAID TYPICAL 304 STAINLESS STEEL BRAID SLEEVE TYPICAL OF 2 WELD TYPICAL 304 STAINLESS STEEL SCHEDULE 40 PIPE TYPICAL 304 STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE 4 CLG. TILE OR GYP. BD. NOTE: SPRINKLER IN FINISHED CEILINGS SHALL BE CHROME FINISH WITH CHROME ESCUTCHEONS, 165°F LISTED. SPRINKLERS IN UNFINISHED SPACES SHALL BE SAME ONLY BRASS, UPRIGHT STYLE. PROVIDE ALL SPRINKLERS, PIPING, FITTINGS, ETC. REQUIRED TO PROTECT ALL AREAS OF THIS PROJECT. PENDANT STYLE SPRINKLER HEAD RECESSED WITH ESCUTCHEON (QUICK RESPONSE TYPE) BRANCH (WET SYSTEM) INSTALL PIPE HANGERS AT EVERY SPRINKLER LOCATION AND ATTACH HANGER ASSEMBLIES DIRECTLY TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13 1" BLACK STEEL PIPING (TYPICAL) 1" ELBOW (TYP.) FIELD VERIFY LENGTH OF ALL PIPING SUPPLYING SPRINKLERS. 3 NO SCALE TYPICAL SPRINKLER HEAD DETAIL 1" 45° ELBOW CAULKING SEALANT 1" SIGHT GLASS BRANCH LINE EXTERIOR BLDG. WALL 24" C PIPE L 2 NO SCALE INSPECTOR TEST DETAIL (WET SYSTEM) GRADE/ROOF 1" THICK 24"x24" CONC. SPLASH BLOCK 1" VALVE NOT OVER 7'-0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR SMOOTH BORE, CORROSION RESISTANT OUTLET GIVING FLOW EQUIVALENT TO ONE SPRINKLER 1" BALL VALVE TEMPORARY CONN. PLUG VALVE END WHEN NOT IN USE DRY OR PREACTION SYSTEM FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOLS LIST SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ELBOW UP, ELBOW DOWN DROP CONNECTION STRAINER CLEANOUT (CO) CAP OR PLUG UNION P-TRAP ROLL DOWN SHOWER HEAD THERMOMETER PRESSURE GAGE SA- SHOCK ABSORBER (SA) WH WALL HYDRANT HB HOSE BIBB PUMP FIRE HYDRANT SHUT OFF VALVE CHECK VALVE BALANCE VALVE ANGLE VALVE PLUG VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE NEEDLE VALVE TS VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH FS FLOW SWITCH CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD SEMI-RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD ON SPRIG PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD EXISTING EXTENDED COVERAGE SIDEWALL SPRINKLER HEAD ITC INSPECTOR'S TEST STATION FDC FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTORFPC PLUMBING CONTRACTORPC AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ACV ALARM CHECK VALVE DIRECTION OF FLOW WATER MAIN (EXTERIOR) FP FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYMBOL DESCRIPTION FDV FIRE DEPT. VALVE PIPE CONTINUES POINT OF CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION (E) * NOTE : THIS IS A STANDARD SYMBOLS LIST AND ALL ITEMS SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED. EXTERIOR BLDG. WALL FINISHED GRADE CHECK VALVE FIRE PROTECTION FEED MAIN CAULK SEALANT 7 NO SCALE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION DETAIL CAULK AROUND WALL ESCUTCHEON FDC APPROX. 3'-0" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ANCHOR PIPE TO WALL 3/4" BALL DRIP VALVE w/ 3/4" COPPER DRAIN TO EXTERIOR OR FLOOR DRAIN FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION GRAPHIC SIGN 6 NO SCALE VALVE ASSEMBLY SCHEMATIC - RPZ ROOM FS TS FS T&DSG D TO FDC WATER PRESSURE GAUGES CONTROL VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH, LOCK AND CHAIN 2" MAIN DRAIN ALARM CHECK WITH VARIABLE PRESSURE TRIM 2" x 24" x 24" SPLASH BLOCK FINISHED FLOOR FROM RPDA DEVICE EXTERIOR BUILDING WALL 2" DRAIN w/ 45° GALVANIZED ELBOW AND PIPE TURNED DOWN, MOUNT 24" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ELECTRIC BELL DRAIN WET SPRINKLER LINE TO BUILDING 4" CHECK VALVE RUN 2 1/2" DRAIN TO GROUND FLOOR TERMINATE AT EXTERIOR, 24" ABOVE GRADE WITH 45 DEG. ELBOW 1" UNION WITH RESTRICTING ORIFICE FEED MAIN TO SPRINKLER ZONE WATER FLOW SWITCH PRESSURE GUAGE 1" SIGHT GLASS CAP 2 1/2" DRAIN FOR FUTURE INSPECTOR TEST VALVE AUX. DRAIN VLAVE FS 8 NO SCALE STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER RISER plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 fp001 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, DETAILS LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES A SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A COMPLETE SET OF BID DOCUMENTS (DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS) INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL, HVAC AND PLUMBING, ETC. FOR BIDDING AND COORDINATION PURPOSE. B PROVIDE ALL WORK IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL CODES. OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED PERMITS. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL. C WITHIN THE WORK ZONE DEFINED, THE DESIGN DOCUMENTS FOR THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO BE INSTALLED ARE INTENDED TO IDENTIFY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DESIGN INTENT ONLY. THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNING AND INSTALLING A COMPLETE AND CODE COMPLIANT SYSTEM. IT IS NOT THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS TO SHOW EVERY PIPE, FITTING, VALVE, ETC., NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM. THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. FINAL DESIGN SHALL INCORPORATE ALL NECESSARY MODIFICATIONS FOR COORDINATION PURPOSE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. D IF CALCULATIONS AND CRITERIA REQUIRE, INCREASE SIZE OF FP PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION AND PROTECTION. E PROVIDE FULL SPRINKLER COVERAGE FOR ALL SPACES WITHIN THE BUILDING IN COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL CODES, NFPA-13, NFPA 14 AND OWNER'S INSURANCE CARRIER/UNDERWRITER. F ALL SPRINKLER PIPING SHALL BE LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING (WHERE THEY EXIST) UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. W W W W W W D D D D D D 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE 006 ELMSHADE OFFICES 007 ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 005 STAFF TOILET 004 SHARED COPY / FILES 002E SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 002A HORIZON PROGRAM 100C CORRIDOR 002D DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002C PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002B HORIZON MED. ROOM 002 HORIZON WAITING AREA 003 RECEPTION OFFICE 018 CONFERENCE ROOM 100D VESTIBULE 012 COMMUNITY ROOM 013 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 014 STAFF BREAK ROOM 017 COMMON LAUNDRY016 MEN'S TOILET 015 WOMEN'S TOILET 001 VESTIBULE 1 5 4 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 3 47 4 3 p002 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 RECOMMENDED STAND PIPE FP MAIN ROUTING 7 7 104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 101 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 751.65 SF 1 4 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 5 6 4 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 202 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT A02 STAIR A 205 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 209 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 211 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 214 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 1 4 4 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 5 6 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 301 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 302 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 303 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 300 CORRIDOR 305 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 307 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 309 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 311 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 313 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 314 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT B03 STAIR B 312 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 310 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 308 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 306 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 304 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT A03 STAIR A 1 4 4 1 1 1 3 4 1 1 1 4 6 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 414 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 413 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 411 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 409 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 407 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 405 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 412 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 410 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 408 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 406 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 404 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 403 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 401 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 402 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 400 CORRIDOR B04 STAIR B A04 STAIR A 1 4 4 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 5 6 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 PROPOSED STANDPIPE LOCATION (TYP.) PROPOSED STANDPIPE LOCATION (TYP.) A05 STAIR A B05 STAIR B 512 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 510 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 514 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 508 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 506 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 505 (TYPE 1) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 507 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 509 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 511 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 513 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 501 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 503 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 502 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 504 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 500 CORRIDOR plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 fp101 1/16" FLOOR PLANS -FIRE PROTECTIONLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/16" = 1'-0" 1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION 1/16" = 1'-0" 2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION 1/16" = 1'-0" 3 THIRD FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION 1/16" = 1'-0" 4 FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION 1/16" = 1'-0" 5 FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES: A. REFER TO DRAWING FP-001 FOR FIRE PROTECTION CRITERIA SCHEDULE. B. DUE TO ELEVATION CONSTRAINTS COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT TO RESOLVE CONFLICTS. C. REFER TO p002 FOR SERVICE DETAIL. D. STAND PIPE IN STAIR TOWER "B" SHALL BE LOCATED AS TIGHT AS POSIBLE TO THE CORNER AS SHOWN. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION POWER DISTRIBUTION SURFACE/FLUSH MOUNTED BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD. 208Y/120V OR 240/120V. REFER TO PANELBOARD SCHEDULE MANUAL MOTOR STARTER OR MOTOR RATED SWITCH. DESIGNATION REFERS TO ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH. DESIGNATION REFERS TO ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL SYMBOL DESCRIPTION DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, SUBSCRIPTS AS FOLLOWS: AFI CR EP GFI H IG SS WP TR WR USB ARC FAULT INTERRUPTER CORROSION RESISTANT EXPLOSION PROOF GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER HOSPITAL GRADE ISOLATED GROUND SURGE SUPPRESSION WEATHER PROOF TAMPER RESISTANT WEATHER RESISTANT UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION LIGHTING SINGLE POLE SWITCH WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCH CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR. SUBSCRIPT INDICATES TYPE 2'X4' RECESSED LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE EMERGENCY REMOTE BATTERY PACK. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE SINGLE FACE UNIVERSAL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE LA EM2 X1 LA SYMBOL LIST OS-A DECORATIVE SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE THREE-WAY POLE SWITCH SUBSCRIPT INDICATES QUANTITY OF SWITCHES. REFER TO LUMINAIRES FOR SWITCHING DESIGNATIONS a,b LA 2'X2' RECESSED LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE LA WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE LA JUNCTION BOX BELL OR BUZZER DOORBELL OR PUSHBUTTON 12 E-3 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MISCELLANEOUS REFERENCE TO DRAWING NOTE REFERENCE TO EQUIPMENT OR FEEDER NUMBER DETAIL REFERENCE SYMBOL 2 2 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION COMMUNICATIONS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATION SMOKE DETECTOR VISUAL ONLY FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AUDIO-VISUAL FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE SYMBOL DESCRIPTION LINE STYLES INDICATES UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE HEAT DETECTOR SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE SECURITY KEYPAD LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR LCP RAP PHOTOCELL MOTOR FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL EMERGENCY DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FACP EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE EM1 DUAL FACE UNIVERSAL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE X2 LA DECORATIVE LINEAR PENDANT. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE LA DOWNLIGHT. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE INDICATES UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC INDICATES NEW DEVICE OR EQUIPMENT INDICATES UNDERGROUND CATV E T CATV LA POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 1'X4' SURFACE LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE LA M MS J DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE EMERGENCY DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE B EMERGENCY POWER OFF PUSHBUTTONEPO AREA OF REFUGE TV 120 VOLT CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT TS S SD S/CO F H F F DH DSD DTS CO COMBINATION SMOKE/CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR TEST STATION SMOKE DAMPER DOOR HOLD OPEN TAMPER SWITCH FLOW SWITCHFS CARD READER DOOR STRIKE DOOR CONTACT ACCESS CONTROL PANELACP DS DC CR KP PC OS 3 EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE. DESIGNATION REFERS TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE REFERENCE TO DEMOLITION NOTE2 INDICATES EXISTING DEVICE OR EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN INDICATES DEVICE OR EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED VOICE/DATA OUTLET. PROVIDE 2-GANG OUTLET BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING AND 1" CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVE. PROVIDE (2) CATEGORY 6 CABLES BACK TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. CATV OUTLET. PROVIDE 2-GANG OUTLET BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING AND 1" CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVE. PROVIDE (1) RG6/UCABLE BACK TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. TELEPHONE ONLY OUTLET. PROVIDE 2-GANG OUTLET BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING AND 1" CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVE. PROVIDE (1) CATEGORY 6 CABLE BACK TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION DIMMING SWITCHD AOR WALL MOUNTED VACANCY SENSOR SWITCH VS INTERCOM MASTER STATION INTERCOM SUB STATION IC IC S M CATV SPLITTER PATCH PANEL S PP GENERAL SITE NOTES APPLY TO ALL SITE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. COORDINATE NEW ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE WITH NYSEG NEW TELEPHONE SERVICE WITH VERIZON AND NEW CATV SERVICE WITH SPECTRUM CABLE. OBTAIN ALL SPECIFICATIONS AND PAY ALL ASSOCIATED FEES. OBTAIN ALL PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE CITY OF ITHACA. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL ENGAGE THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED SUBCONTRACTOR FOR EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND CONCRETE WORK. A MINIMUM OF TWO DAYS PRIOR TO EXCAVATION, CONTACT DIG SAFELY NEW YORK, INC (1-800-962-7962) AND OBTAIN A STAKEOUT OF ALL PUBLIC AND PRIVATE UTILITIES LOCATED IN THE AREA OF EXCAVATION. COORDINATE PRIVATE UTILITIES WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. HAND EXCAVATE ADJACENT EXISTING UTILITIES INCLUDING STORM AND SANITARY SYSTEMS TO AVOID DAMAGE. REPORT ANY DAMAGED UTILITIES TO THE OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY. PROVIDE BRACING, SHORING, SHEATHING AND OTHER WORK FOR PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL, THE CONTRACT WORK, EXCAVATIONS, TREES, SHRUBS, EXISTING STRUCTURES, AND SURROUNDING PROPERTIES. PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, FLAGS, AND LIGHTS TO PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR WORK, WORKMEN, PUBLIC, AND PROPERTY. COORDINATE PARKING LOT AND/OR PARKING GARAGE DISRUPTIONS WITH THE OWNER IN ADVANCE. PROVIDE PUMPS, HOSES, PIPE, LABOR AND FUEL NECESSARY TO KEEP EXCAVATIONS FREE OF WATER ACCUMULATION. OPERATE AND MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT. DISCHARGE WATER IN MANNER NOT TO UNDERMINE OR DISTURB EXISTING OR ADJACENT STRUCTURES OR LAND. DO NOT DISCHARGE DIRT, BACKFILL, DEBRIS, INTO SANITARY OR STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS. INSTALL TELEPHONE, CABLE AND ELECTRIC CONDUITS AS STRAIGHT AS POSSIBLE. INSTALL CONDUITS BELOW SITE LIGHTING CONDUITS AND GAS LINES AND ABOVE WATER, STORM, AND SANITARY PIPING. TRANSITION ALL CONDUITS TO GRS PRIOR TO RISING ABOVE GRADE. MAINTAIN ROAD ACCESS AT ALL TIMES. PROVIDE STEEL PLATES OVER TRENCH AS REQUIRED. PROTECT UTILITIES, SIDEWALKS, STRUCTURES, PAVEMENTS AND OTHER FACILITIES FROM DAMAGE CAUSED BY SETTLING, LATERAL MOVEMENTS, UNDERMINING, WASHOUTS AND OTHER HAZARDS CREATED BY EXCAVATION WORK. COMPLETELY RESTORE THE AREA TO THE CONDITION PRIOR TO THE START OF EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING WORK. GENERAL SITE NOTES: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. CATV SCOPE OF WORK: PROVIDE RG11/U COAXIAL CABLE FROM THE CATV SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATION TO EACH SPLITTER IN SERVER/IT ROOM. PROVIDE TERMINATIONS AT EACH END. IN EACH APARTMENT, PROVIDE A CATV SPLITTER IN THE APARTMENT MECHANICAL CLOSET. PROVIDE RG6/U COAXIAL CABLE FROM THE SPLITTER IN THE MECHANICAL CLOSET TO EACH CATV OUTLET IN THE APARTMENT. PROVIDE TERMINATIONS AT EACH END. 1. 2. 3. DATA WIRING SCOPE OF WORK: PROVIDE (2) 48 PORT, CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANELS IN EACH OF (5) IT ROOMS. PATCH PANEL SHALL BE WALL MOUNTED IN SERVER ROOM 008A. PROVIDE ALL CATEGORY 6 DATA CABLES. PROVIDE ALL TERMINATIONS AT EACH END. PROVIDE ALL LABELING AND TESTING. PROVIDE ALL COVER PLATES. COORDINATE COVER PLATE MANUFACTURER WITH THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. VOICE WIRING SCOPE OF WORK: 1. 2. 3. 4. ALL CABLING SHALL BE CATEGORY 6, WITH RJ45 CONNECTORS AND A COVER PLATE. TEST AND LABEL EACH CABLE. THERE IS ONE SERVER ROOM ON THE GROUND FLOOR. PROVIDE A WALL MOUNTED RACK WITH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEMENT IN EACH CER. PROVIDE RACK MOUNTED CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANELS AS REQUIRED. AT EACH COMMON AREA VOICE/DATA OUTLET, PROVIDE (2) CATEGORY 6 CABLES BACK TO THE SERVER ROOM. TERMINATE EACH CABLE AT A PATCH PANEL. IN EACH APARTMENT, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: PROVIDE A WALL MOUNTED, 12-PORT CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL. PROVIDE (1) CATEGORY 6 CABLE FROM THE APARTMENT PATCH PANEL BACK TO THE SERVER ROOM AND TERMINATE AT A PATCH PANEL. FROM EACH APARTMENT VOICE/DATA OUTLET, PROVIDE (2) CATEGORY 6 CABLES FROM THE OUTLET TO THE APARTMENT PATCH PANEL. FROM EACH APARTMENT TV DATA OUTLET, PROVIDE (1) CATEGORY 6 CABLE FROM THE OUTLET TO THE APARTMENT PATCH PANEL. NO SCALE 1 POWER ONE-LINE WIRING DIAGRAM METER CENTER UTILITY TRANSFORMER SECONDARY 208Y/120V, 3 PHASE M SPD 35 LOAD CENTERS REQUIRED 200A/3P LVPH1 (SEC 1) TWO CHANNEL METER SECTION WITH (2) 200A/3P OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR HOUSE AND HORIZON METER CENTER 1600A/3P M 200A/3P LVPHZ 3/C #2, 1-#4EG ALUMINUM TYPE SE CABLE M 100A/2P M 100A/2P M 100A/2P LCP**LCP**LCP** M 100A/2P M 100A/2P LCP**LCP** M 100A/2P M 100A/2P M 100A/2P LCP**LCP**LCP** M 100A/2P M 100A/2P LCP**LCP** METER CENTER FIVE-CHANNEL METER SECTION WITH 100A/2P OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (TYP OF 5) 1600A/3P MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER 208Y/120 VOLTS 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE INPUT SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED FIVE-CHANNEL METER SECTION WITH 100A/2P OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (TYP OF 7) LVPH4 5 SETS OF 4-500KCM IN (6) 4" PVC-80, DB ST 60A/3P ELEV-1 NF 60AS 3-#6, 1-#10EG IN 1”C 60AF 60AS LVPEM G 60A/3P 200A/3P EG-1 60KW/75KVA 208Y/120V 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE NATURAL GAS 4-#3/0, 1-#6EG IN 2½"C 4-#4/0, 1-#4EG IN 4" C ATS-EM 208Y/120V 200A/3P 25 LOAD CENTERS REQUIRED ATS-LS 208Y/120V 60A/3P 4-#6, 1-#10EG IN 1"C 200A/3P 60A/3P LVPLS 4-#4, 1-#8EG IN 4" C 4-#6, 1-#10EG IN 1"C 4-#3/0, 1-#6EG IN 2½"C PROVIDE FEED THRU LUGS LVPH1 (SEC 2) 4-#3/0, 1-#6EG IN 2½"C 4-#3/0, 1-#6EG IN 2½"C RANGE/COOKTOP BY OTHERS LIGHT SWITCH FAN SPEED KNOB LED STATUS LIGHT RESET SWITCH 7" DIAM. EXHAUST DUCT BY HVAC CONTRACTOR BACK SUPPORT MOUNTING BRACKET BY HVAC CONTRACTOR JUNCTION BOX BY HVAC CONTRACTOR FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY OTHERS COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF MANUAL PULL STATION WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE LEGEND: JUNCTION BOX BY OTHERS MANUAL POWER SWITCH EXTINGUISHER PRESSURE GAUGE POWER SUPPLY BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT BY HVAC CONTRACTOR 208 VOLT WIRING BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MANUAL PULL STATION CABLE BY HVAC CONTRACTOR 50A CONTACTOR/SHUNT TRIP BREAKER FURNISHED BY HVAC CONTRACTOR, INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 120 VOLT WIRING BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MOUNT HOOD 24"-36" ABOVE COOKING SURFACE MANUAL PULL STATION AND CABLE BY HVAC CONTRACTOR DUCT ACCESS DOOR DUCT ACCESS DOOR ROUTE DUCT TO EXTERIOR AS DIRECTLY AS POSSIBLE DUCT MOUNTED INLINE FAN FURNISHED WITH HOOD SYSTEM. LOCATE IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. SEE CUT FOR FAN DIMENSIONS REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 233110 - GREASE DUCT SYSTEMS FOR DUCT CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS PROVIDE CURRENT SENSING RELAY ON POWER LINE AND CONNECT TO BUILDING DDC SYSTEM FOR HOOD FAN STATUS MONITORING AND VAV BOX CONTROL. PROVIDE INTER-CONNECTING CONTROL WIRING ½" CONDUIT PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PULL NO SCALE 2 TYPICAL RESIDENTIAL KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD DETAIL - INLINE FAN plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e001 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES A. GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. B. PROVIDE UPDATED TYPE WRITTEN PANELBOARD SCHEDULES FOR ALL PANELS USED IN THIS PROJECT. C. INSTALL ALL DEVICES FLUSH IN WALL CONSTRUCTION. D. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATES ON ALL EXISTING AND NEW UNUSED OUTLET BOXES. E. COORDINATE ALL CONDUIT RUNS WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. RELOCATE ANY CONDUITS AS NECESSARY TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK, PIPING OR ANY SUPPORTS. F. PROVIDE CUTTING, PATCHING TO MATCH, AND FIRE SEAL AS REQUIRED WHERE EXISTING COMMUNICATION OR ELECTRICAL WORK HAS BEEN REMOVED AND WHERE NEW WORK IS INSTALLED. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. G. REMOVE AND REINSTALL EXISTING CEILING TILES AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING AND CONDUIT. REPLACE ALL DAMAGED TILES WITH MATCHING TILES. H. RUN ALL WIRING CONCEALED IN WALL. CUT AND PATCH TO MATCH DRYWALL AS REQUIRED. MINIMIZE USE OF SURFACE METAL RACEWAY. I. COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF DEVICES WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS AND OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. J. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR PHASING. K. PROVIDE "J" HOOKS ON 5' CENTERS TO SUPPORT VOICE/DATA CABLING. L. PROVIDE TAMPER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES IN ALL APARTMENT. M. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN. 1 HR FIRE PARTITIONS: A. DEMISING WALLS BETWEEN APARTMENT UNITS AND CORRIDORS B. WALLS BETWEEN APARTMENT UNITS C. FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES IN RESIDENTIAL AND CORE D. CEILING/ROOF ASSEMBLIES IN RESIDENTIAL AND CORE E. STAIRS 1 HR. FIRE BARRIER WALLS: A. ELEVATOR ROOM B. STAIR WALLS 2 HR. FIRE BARRIER WALLS: - SEE ARCHITECTURAL CODE COMPLIANCE PLANS N. ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS IN APARTMENTS SHALL BE FED FROM A 15A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL 15A/1P BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE FED WITH #14 AWG WIRE. O. ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS IN COMMON AREAS SHALL BE FED FROM A 20A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL 20A/1P BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE FED WITH #12 AWG WIRE. T G G G G G 10' REAR YARD SETBACK 10' SIDE YARD SETBACK 28.48' 7.92 WEST COURT STREET NORTH MEADOW STREET SLAGHT (R.O.) 615/906 TAX MAP PARCEL No. 59-2-8 CIASCHI (R.O.) 482211-001 TAX MAP PARCEL No. 59-2-16.1 TOMPKINS COMMUNITY ACTION (R.O.) 2500/1900 TAX MAP PARCEL No. 59-2-14 PARCEL B CURB CUT C.O. C.O. C.O. C.O. C.O. C.O. W W W W W W D D D D D D CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV 1" PVC-80, DB (TYP) (2) 4" PVC-80, DB FOR ELECTRIC (2) 4" PVC-80, DB FOR TELEPHONE AND CATV 5 SETS OF 4-500KCM IN (6) 4" PVC-80, DB 4 e701 3 e701 1 e702 5 e701 3 e701 3 e701 8 e701 UTILITY TRANSFORMER BOLLARD (TYP) 11 e701 2 e701 2 e701 1 e701 2 e701 WP WP WP WP WP UNDER CANOPY LU LU LU LU LT LTLTLTLTLT LVPH1/6,8 12 e701 3 e702 #10#10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10 PROVIDE 1" PVC-80, DIRCT BURIED FOR POWER AND LIGHTING TO FUTURE UTILITY SHED, TO PANEL LVPH1. TERMINATE CONDUIT AT PANEL AND PROVIDE PULL STRING. 2 e701 #10 1" PVC-80, DB (TYP FOR BOLLARD LIGHTING) 4 e701 3 e701 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e100 SITE PLAN -ELECTRICALLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/16" = 1'-0" 1 SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL N W W W W W W D D D D D D OS OS OS VSDVSD VSD VSD VSD VS VS VSVS D D OS 3 D VSD VSD D OS-A OS-A OS-A OS-A OS-A OS-B OS-B OS-A OS-A OS-A OS-A OS OS D 3D OS-A OS-A PC VS 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 006 ELMSHADE OFFICES 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE B01 STAIR B 100C CORRIDOR 008 SERVER 007 ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 005 STAFF TOILET 002E SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 004 SHARED COPY / FILES 002A HORIZON PROGRAM 002D DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002C PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002B HORIZON MED. ROOM E01 ELEVATOR 011 TRASH / RECYCLE 002 HORIZON WAITING AREA 003 RECEPTION OFFICE 100C CORRIDOR 001 VESTIBULE 018 CONFERENCE ROOM 017 COMMON LAUNDRY 016 MEN'S TOILET 015 WOMEN'S TOILET A01 STAIR A 100D VESTIBULE 014 STAFF BREAK ROOM 013 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 012 COMMUNITY ROOM 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 LVPHZ LK LK LK LK LK LK LJ X1 X1 LH LH LI LI LI LI LI LI LH LG LH X2 X1 LL LL LL X1 X2 X1 LG LG LL X1 LG LG LL LL LL LN LN LN LMLMLMLMLM LM LM LM LN LL LL LM LM X1 LG LG LG LG LG LGLGLGLGLGLG 101 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT LN LN LVPLS LVPEM LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LP LP LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK LK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LO LQ LQ LQLQ LQ LQLQLQ LQLQ LQ LQLQ LQ LQ LQ LQ LQ EQ EQ LN 1 LQ LQ LQ 2 LVPLS/3 2 2 2 2 2 2 LVPLS/8 LVPLS/8 2 2 a,b b a a aa aa a,b a,b LVPLS/8 7'-8"AFF C 6'-5" AFF C L L 7'-8"AFF C L 7'-8"AFF C L 7'-8"AFF C L LP LP LP LP LPLP LP LPLPLPLP LVPHZ/1LVPLS/6 LVPH1/2 2 2 2 LVPLS/8 LVPH1/4 LP LP LQLQLQ 3 e703 3 e703 3 e703 3 e703 LCP LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 3 e703 9 22 LVPLS/7 1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 LVPH1 (2 SECTION) 3 e703 E.10 020 CUST. LC plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e101 GROUND FLOOR PLAN -LIGHTINGLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING e101 LIGHTING DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE EXIT SIGN AND CONNECT TO A 20A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL LVPLS/2 USING 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN 1/2" CONDUIT. LOCK CIRCUIT BREAKER IN ON POSITION. 2 CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT IN PANEL LVPLS, CIRCUIT 4. N # W W W W W W D D D D D D F F F F F F F FF F F F FF F S H H S S H S SSSS S F F F F F H S H S TV TV DC DC DC CR CR CR CR CR DS DS DS DS CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTVCCTV CR DC PB PB DS DC PB PB DC DC CO CO CO M MM MS M SMS F A DS DC M M M M S MS MS M M M M M M M M M CO M MS MS MS M S MS MS MS MS MS MS M M S M M M M M M FSFSFS TSTSTS TS FS MS M M M F SD SD S D S D DTSDTS KP HD HD HD CR DS DC DS CR HD HD MS M M MS F IC CR CR CR DS DS CCTV DC DCDS DC J T 010 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 006A PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 006 ELMSHADE OFFICES 009 BUILDING MAINTENANCE OFFICE B01 STAIR B 100C CORRIDOR 008 SERVER 007 ELMSHADE MED. ROOM 005 STAFF TOILET 002E SUPPORTIVE HOUSING OFFICE 004 SHARED COPY / FILES 002A HORIZON PROGRAM 002D DIRECTOR'S OFFICE 002C PROGRAM MANAGER'S OFFICE 002B HORIZON MED. ROOM E01 ELEVATOR 011 TRASH / RECYCLE 002 HORIZON WAITING AREA 003 RECEPTION OFFICE 100C CORRIDOR 001 VESTIBULE 018 CONFERENCE ROOM 017 COMMON LAUNDRY016 MEN'S TOILET 015 WOMEN'S TOILET A01 STAIR A 100D VESTIBULE 014 STAFF BREAK ROOM 013 COMMUNITY KITCHEN 012 COMMUNITY ROOM 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 44" GFI TR TR WP GFI WP GFI WP GFI WP GFI GFI e704 4 LVPEM LVPH1 ATS-E LVPHZ 46" 46" TR 46" GFI TR 101 (TYPE 1A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 102 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 103 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 104 (TYPE 2A) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT ATS-LS LVPLS AUX BOTTOM OF SHAFT ¼" X 4" X 12" GROUND BAR AT 7'-0"AFF 4 e702 5 e702 2 3 4 BCC-1 44" GFI GFI 44" GFI GFI SUMP PUMP LVPEM/1 FCU-8 FCU-7 FCU-6 FCU-5 FCU-2 FCU-4 FCU-1 FCU-3 PANIC PUSHBUTTON REPEATER ADA - TYPE 1 (TYP FOR 1ST, 3RD AND 5TH FLOOR ONLY) SIM. GENERATOR RAP 48" 48" 48" 48" LVPEM/6 LVPEM/8 LVPH1/3 LVPH1/5 LVPH1/12 LVPH1/7 LVPHZ/2 LVPHZ/3 LVPHZ/4 LVPHZ/5 LVPHZ/7 LVPH1/10 LVPH1/28,30 LVPH1/21,23 LVPH1/32,34 LVPH1/25,27 LVPH1/36,38 LVPH1/29,31 LVPH1/26 LVPH1/15 LVPH1/19 LVPH1/24 LVPH1/17 LVPH1/22 LVPLS/3 LVPH1/9 LVPH1/14 LVPHZ/6 TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TRTRTR 46" TR 46" TR 46" TR 46" TR46" TR TR LVPEM/12 LVPEM/3 LVPH1/11 HW-3 HWRP-1 23 5 WP 1 5 6 48" LCP 30 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 EF-3 EF-2 EF-2 41 40 42 PANIC ALARM BY OWNER 7 8 HW-2HW-1 4 EBB-4 EBB-4 EBB-4 EBB-4TEBB-4T EBB-4T 31 BCC-2 50 51 52 53 54 55 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 MCB 99 ECUH-1 ECUH-1 UH-1 60 61 63 10 10 LVPEM/14 LVPLS/9 (2 SECTION) ACCESS CONTROL KEYPAD GFI WINDOW SPEAKER LVPH1/53 LVPH1/55 LVPH1/57 020 CUST. LVPLS/10 LVPH1/1 LVPEM/2 LVPEM/4 LVPHZ/8 LVPH1/58 e102 2 E.10 LVPH1/16 46" GFI 46" GFI LVPLS/1 48" FACP LVPEM/24 LVPH1/18 LVPH1/60 e102 3 VRP-12KB LC***/9,11 30A/2P TYPICAL FOR FIRST FLOOR APARTMENTS ONLY FD/SD LVPEM/13 EF-2 47 14 A.5 B B.1 48" AOR M ECUH-1 62 E.10 LVPEM/10 FARAP 001 VESTIBULE 1615.5 15.6 H.3 10 LVPH1/61,63 2 e001 46" GFI TR 46" GFI TR 46" GFI TR LVPH1/13 LVPH1/59 MICROWAVE 11 12 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e102 GROUND FLOOR PLAN -POWER AND SYSTEMSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN - POWER AND SYSTEMS e102 ELECTRICAL DRAWING NOTES 1 SPRINKLER ALARM PROVIDED BY OTHERS. CONNECT TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. 2 PROVIDE 4'x8'X3/4" PLYWOOD BACKBOARD AT 6" A.F.F. PAINT WITH 2 COATS FIREPROOF GRAY PAINT. 3 PROVIDE 4" SLEEVE ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. FIRE STOP AS REQUIRED. 4 PROVIDE 4" CONDUIT UP TO SECOND FLOOR ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE FOR TEL/DATA CABLING. 5 PROVIDE AMBER STROBE FOR CO DETECTION. 6 PROVIDE TRIPLE SERVICE RECESSED FLOOR BOX. SAW CUT FLOOR AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE (3) 1"C FROM THE FLOOR BOX TO THE CEILING SPACE. 7 LOCATION OF CAMERA IN ELEVATOR CAB. COORDINATE WITH ELEVATOR INSTALLER. 8 PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED DATA EQUIPMENT CABINET. 9 PROVIDE METER CENTER BUS TRANSITION SECTION TO TURN CORNER WITH THE METER CENTER. 10 PROVIDE NEMA 14-50R RECEPTACLE FOR RANGE. PROVIDE 3/C #6+ #10EG TYPE NM CABLE FROM A 50A/2P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL. PROVIDE POWER TO THE KITCHEN HOOD POWER DISCONNECT BOX (PDB). THE PDB IS PROVIDED WITH THE KITCHEN HOOD. INSTALL AT FLOOR LEVEL. CONTROL PDB UTILIZING A 120 MINUTE DIGITAL INTERVAL TIMER SWITCH. REFER TO THE DETAILS AND KITCHEN HOOD INSTALLATION MANUAL. 11 PROVIDE TWO SWITCHES TO CONTROL THE HOOD LIGHT AND THE OTHER TO CONTROL THE HOOD EXHAUST FAN. CONNECT TO KITCHEN RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. INSTALL IN CABINET VALANCE FACE. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE AND BLACK SWITCHES. 12 PROVIDE 120 MINUTE DIGITAL INTERVAL TIMER SWITCH TO POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX (PDB) FOR SHUTDOWN OF POWER TO THE RANGE. REFER TO DETAILS AND KITCHEN HOOD INSTALLATION MANUAL. N # 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 VESTIBULE PLAN - POWER AND SYSTEMS 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 PARTIALCOMMUNITY KITCHEN PLAN - POWER AND SYSTEMS F F F F F F F S S S SS VS S OS-A OS-A OS-B OS-B OS-B OS-B OS-B SSSS VS H TV CCTV CCTV CCTV CCTV S S/CO S S S CCTVCCTVCO CO CO CO COM M M S DTS MS FS S D S D SD SD DTS DTS VS MS M M MS 200 CORRIDOR A02 STAIR A 215 TRASH / RECYCLE E01 ELEVATOR 200A RECEPTION LOUNGE e601 3 e601 2 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 1 e601 e601 1 48" AOR AUX 202 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 201 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 203 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 204 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 206 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 205 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 207 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT209 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 208 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 210 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 212 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 213 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 200 CORRIDOR TR TR TR TR TR TRTR TR 8'-0" AFF C L 8'-0" AFF C L 8'-0" AFF C L 8'-0" AFF C L LG LG LHLH LG X2 X1 LG LG X2 LG LG LGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLG LH LH LG LG LG 216 I.T. CLOSET 217 CUST. LK LK LK LK 7 1 1 1 1 X1 LI 214 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT B02 STAIR B C02 CHASE 211 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT H/VI PANIC PUSHBUTTON REPEATER FCU-9 e601 4 (TYP FOR 2ND AND 4TH FLOOR ONLY) A/VB A/VB 9 9 2 2 9 99 2 2 9 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 e801 5 LVPH1/20 LVPH1/4 6 18 EF-3 LVPEM/5 8 TOP OF 5TH FLOOR STAIRWELL ONLY PROVIDE (1) DUCT TEST STATION ON 5TH FLOOR ONLY FOR DOAS UNIT 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 5TH FLR ONLY 10 PROVIDE (2) DUCT TEST STATIONS ON EACH FLOOR FOR SMOKE DAMPER DUCT DETECTORS E.10 LVPLS/9 8'-0" AFF C L LI EF-3 48 48" AOR 1 e801 300 CORRIDOR 2 3 4 A C D A.5 B B.1 B03 STAIR B 316 I.T. CLOSET BCC-332 E.10 317 CUST. plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e103 TYPICAL FLOORS 2 -5 -ELECTRICALLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 TYPICAL SECOND THRU FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL e103 ELECTRICAL DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE EXIT SIGN AND CONNECT TO A 20A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL LVPLS/2 USING 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN 1/2" CONDUIT. LOCK CIRCUIT BREAKER IN ON POSITION. 2 CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT IN PANEL LVPLS, CIRCUIT 4. 3 ON SECOND AND FOURTH FLOORS ONLY, PROVIDE 120VAC, SMOKE DETECTOR IN BEDROOM AND COMBINATION SMOKE AND CO DETECTOR OUTSIDE BEDROOM, WITH AUDIBLE AND VISUAL BASE AND BATTERY BACK-UP. CONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT TO THE LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF ALL SWITCHING. PROVIDE WIRING BETWEEN THE DEVICES SUCH THAT IF ONE DEVICES GOES INTO ALARM, ALL AUDIBLE AND VISUAL BASES WILL SOUND. 4 ON SECOND AND FOURTH FLOORS ONLY, MOUNT DOORBELL WITH STROBE AT 80" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO BOTTOM OF BOX. CONNECT TO DOORBELL PUSHBUTTON. 5 CONNECT TO LVP4/ CIRCUIT 1 FOR 3RD FLOOR, CIRCUIT 3 FOR 4TH FLOOR, AND CIRCUIT 5 FOR 5TH FLOOR RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. 6 CONNECT TO LVP4 CIRCUIT 2 FOR 3RD, 4TH, AND 5TH FLOORS LIGHTING CIRCUIT. 7 PROVIDE 4" SLEEVE ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. FIRE STOP AS REQUIRED. 8 CONNECT TO LVPEM/ CIRCUIT 7 FOR 3RD FLOOR, CIRCUIT 9 FOR 4TH FLOOR, AND CIRCUIT 11 FOR 5TH FLOOR RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. 9 CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT IN PANEL LVPLS, CIRCUIT 6. 10 LOCATION OF SMOKE DAMPER PROVIDED BY DIVISION 23. PROVIDE120 VOLT BRANCH CIRCUIT FROM LVPLS1/35 AND CONNECT THE SMOKE DAMPER. PROVIDE A FIRE ALARM CONTROL MODULE TO CONTROL THE DAMPER. WIRE THE DAMPER SUCH THAT IT IS POWERED ON. FURNISH DUCT DETECTOR AND PROVIDE DUCT TEST STATION. WIRE TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. N 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 PARTIAL THIRD FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL # H M M M S S S D EG-1 LH GFI LS X3 WP TOP OF SHAFT LH LH ODU-1 WP GFI LS 8'-0" AFF C L 8'-0" AFF C L 22 DOAS-1 1 LVPLS/3 LVPLS/26,28,30 1 LVPLS/5 30AF 30AS60AF 60AS 10 e701 6 7 WP 6 e702 GFI WP 3 2 2 BLOCK HEATER AND BATTERY CHARGER LVPH4/5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 13 16 A C D E F G H I A.5 B 7.6 B.1 15.5 15.6 H.3 9 RADON FAN. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT (TYP) RADON FAN. RADON FAN. RADON FAN. RADON FAN. LVPH4/6 LVPH4/6 LVPH4/6 LVPH4/6 LVPH4/8 LVPH4/8 LVPH4/8 E.10 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e104 ROOF PLAN -ELECTRICALLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 ROOF PLAN - ELECTRICAL e104 ELECTRICAL DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE EXIT SIGN AND CONNECT TO A 20A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL LVPLS/2 USING 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN 1/2" CONDUIT. LOCK CIRCUIT BREAKER IN ON POSITION. 2 CONNECT LUMINAIRE TO LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT IN PANEL LVPLS, CIRCUIT 4. 3 CONNECT TO FIFTH FLOOR CORRIDOR RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. # N TV TV IC 3D 3D F F S D PP S S MM S M MS F S 3 3D F F TV TV D S S PP MS M 3D3 IC F M MS TV TV S 3 3D S S F PP F 3D 3D IC F MS M M MS VS S 207 (TYPE 2) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT 44" GFI TR 48" 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR 44" TR GFI A 44" TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR LC202 LC LC LC LA LC LA LA LC LA LB 1 2 2 3 3 EF-1 VRP-12KA 4 5 7AB AB 8 8 9 10 LC202/1LC202/3 LC202/4 LC202/7 LC202/6 LC202/8,10 a,b a 7 15 LF d e d e f f d LA EQEQ EQEQ EQ EQ EQ EQ S LC202/2 F/L b LE LC202/5 2 3 6 LF LC202/9,11 7 8 D E F 7.6 9 A 48" 44" TR 44" TR GFI 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR LA LBLC LC LC LA LA LA LC LC213 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 AB 8 AB 3 2 VRP-12KA LC213/4 LC213/5 LC213/6 LC213/8,10 202 (TYPE 4) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT b,c b LF 6 15 LA EQ EQ EQEQ e e EQ EQ EQEQ EQEQ EQ EQ a a e a LC213/3 LC213/2 f f c LC213/7 LE S EF-1 2 3 LF 7 F/L LC213/1 LC213/9,11 1413 16 G H I 15.5 15.6 H.3 48" TR 44" GFI TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR 44" GFI TR A 44" TR LA LC LA LB LC LC LA LC LC214 LA 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 AB AB 8 2 3 LC214/2 LC214/3 LC214/4 LC214/5 LC214/6 LC214/7 LC214/8,10 LC214/9 201 (TYPE 3) 1-BEDROOM APARTMENT LF 7 15 c,d c 44" GFI TR LA 5' - 8 3/32"8' - 0"5' - 9 21/32" 6' - 11 1/2"6' - 8 1/4" EF-1 VRP-12KA LC214/1 a a a b f b f d LE b F/L S 6 LF 2 3 LC214/11,13 LA 11 12 13 F G H I H.3 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" LI ¼" X 2" X 12" GROUND BAR AT 7'-0" AFF 4 e702 5 e702 11 216 I.T. CLOSET 12 LVPH4 13 LVPLS/6 14 PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED DATA EQUIPMENT CABINET ON EACH FLOOR LVPEM/15 LVPEM/16 2 C plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e601 ENLARGED PLANS -ELECTRICALLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ENLARGED UNIT 2 - ELECTRICAL 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 ENLARGED UNIT 3 - ELECTRICAL 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 ENLARGED UNIT 4 - ELECTRICAL e601 ELECTRICAL DRAWING NOTES 1 PROVIDE LOAD CENTER. MOUNT AT 48" AFF TO THE TOP OF THE LOAD CENTER. 2 AT EACH APARTMENT VOICE/DATA OUTLET, PROVIDE (2) CATEGORY 6 VOICE CABLES BACK TO THE APARTMENT MECHANICAL ROOM FOR VOICE/DATA. TERMINATE ON THE WALL MOUNTED PATCH PANEL. PROVIDE ALL TESTING, AND LABELING. PROVIDE COVER PLATE. 3 AT EACH TELEVISION OUTLET, PROVIDE (1) RG6/U CABLE FROM THE OUTLET BOX BACK TO THE SPLITTER LOCATED IN APARTMENT MECHANICAL ROOM. LABEL CABLE. PROVIDE ALL SPLITTERS, TERMINATIONS, AND TESTING. REFER TO CATV RISER DIAGRAM FOR MORE INFORMATION 4 IN EACH APARTMENT MECHANICAL ROOM, PROVIDE 12 PORT PATCH PANEL. PROVIDE (1) CATEGORY 6 CABLE FROM PATCH PANEL, BACK TO ** ROOM 125. TERMINATE THE CABLE AT THE 48 PORT WALL MOUNTED PATCH PANEL FOR VOICE CABLES. PROVIDE ALL TERMINATIONS, TESTING AND LABELING. 5 LOCATION OF SPLITTER IN THE APARTMENT MECHANICAL ROOM, PROVIDED BY SPECTRUM CABLE. PROVIDE RG6/U (MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 150') OR RG11/U (OVER 150' LENGTH) COAXIAL CABLE BACK TO ELECTRIC ROOM 125. LABEL CABLE AT EACH END. TIME WARNER TO PROVIDE ALL TERMINATIONS AND TESTING. 6 PROVIDE 15 CANDELA FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE. PREWIRE FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT FROM AOM IN THE CORRIDOR TO JUNCTION BOX FOR FUTURE ADA ADAPTABILITY. REFER TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM RISER FOR WIRING DETAILS. 7 PROVIDE LOW FREQUENCY, 110 CANDELA FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE. PREWIRE FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT FROM AOM IN THE CORRIDOR TO JUNCTION BOX FOR FUTURE ADA ADAPTABILITY. REFER TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM RISER FOR WIRING DETAILS. 8 PROVIDE 120VAC, MULTIPLE STATION COMBINATION SMOKE DETECTOR, WITH AUDIBLE BASE. CONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT TO THE LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF ALL SWITCHING. PROVIDE WIRING BETWEEN THE DEVICES SUCH THAT IF ONE DEVICE GOES INTO ALARM, ALL AUDIBLE BASES WILL SOUND. 9 PROVIDE TWO SWITCHES TO CONTROL THE HOOD LIGHT AND THE OTHER TO CONTROL THE HOOD EXHAUST FAN. CONNECT THE RANGE HOOD VIA THE KITCHEN RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. INSTALL IN CABINET VALANCE FACE. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE AND BLACK SWITCHES. IN ADA UNIT, PROVIDE WIRING IN CONDUIT. 10 PROVIDE NEMA 14-50R RECEPTACLE FOR RANGE. PROVIDE 3/C #6 + #10EG TYPE NM CABLE FROM A 50A/2P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE APARTMENT PANEL. 11 PROVIDE (2) 4" SLEEVES ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. FIRE STOP AS REQUIRED. 12 PROVIDE 4'x8'X3/4" PLYWOOD BACKBOARD AT 6" A.F.F. PAINT WITH 2 COATS FIREPROOF GRAY PAINT. 13 PROVIDE PANEL LVP4 ON FOURTH FLOOR ONLY. 14 PROVIDE 4" CONDUIT BETWEEN EACH FLOOR. 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 ENLARGED IT CLOSET - ELECTRICAL N # PVC CONDUIT THREADED CAP ON ALL SPARES TO COUPLING, PULLBOX, PANEL ECT. PVC TO RIGID ADAPTER PROVIDE ENGRAVED NAMEPLATE ON CONDUITFINISHED FLOOR WRAP ALL JOINTS 100% WATERTIGHT SEAL VAPOR BARRIER TO CONDUIT RIGID HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED CONDUIT BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT SAND BED ENVELOPE AS CALLED FOR ON PLANS. WHERE CONDUIT STUBS UP UNDER FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT SUCH AS SWITCHGEAR, PROVIDE PVC ELBOWS IN LIEU OF RIGID SHOWN. AT EACH CONDUIT STUB-UP, AFFIX ENGRAVED PLASTIC NAMEPLATE INDICATING CONDUIT NO. OR CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION. ATTACH WITH NYLON CABLE TIE. NOTES: 2 NO SCALE CONDUIT STUB-UP INSIDE BUILDING DETAIL 1. 2. 1 NO SCALE 12" 6'-0" 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CONDUIT RISER AT UTILITY POLE DETAIL NOTES: POLE BY UTILITY COMPANY. TERMINATE RACEWAY AT HEIGHT DICTATED BY UTILITY COMPANY. TERMINATE AND CAP SPARE RACEWAY. MINIMUM 3'-0" BELOW GRADE. (2) 4" PVC, SCHEDULE 40 CONDUITS. SANDBED ENVELOPE, MINIMUM 3" COVER ON ALL SIDES. ENCASEMENT SHALL RUN FROM 6'-0" OFF OF POLE TO RACEWAY TERMINATION AT TRANSFORMER PAD. PVC TO RIGID STEEL CONDUIT ADAPTER. (2) 4" GALVANIZED, RIGID STEEL CONDUITS. 90 x 36" RADIUS SWEEP ELBOWS. NO SCALE 3 GENERAL NOTES: 2' VERTICAL COMMON TRENCH SEPERATION DETAIL COMMON TRENCH 600V SERVICE CABLE IN CONDUIT OR DIRECT BURIED OTHER UTILITIES COMMUNICATIONCATV GAS MIN. 8'12" A. B, NO SEWER/WATER/DRAINAGE/BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING OR CUSTOMER FUEL LINE IN COMMON TRENCH. IF OTHER UTILITIES, SUCH AS CUSTOMER SEWER, WATER, DRAINAGE, BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING, OR CUSTOMER FUEL LINE, CROSS THE ELECTRIC OR COMMON TRENCH, A MINIMUM 2' OF VERTICAL SEPARATION MUST BE MAINTAINED. 12" 4 NO SCALE DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT DETAIL ONE DUCT 40" MIN. GRASS AREAS BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. PAVEMENT AREAS BACKFILL WITH #2 CRUSHED STONE IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. 3" SCREENED TOP SOIL AROUND CONDUIT 4" SCREENED TOP SOIL FOR GRASS AREAS. PAVEMENT AS REQUIRED6" WIDE, RED PLASTIC TAPE WITH WORDING "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." TAPE SHALL BE LOCATED 6" BELOW FINISHED GRADE FINISH GRADE 5 NO SCALE DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT DETAIL TWO DUCTS 40" MIN. 7 1/2" GRASS AREAS BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. PAVEMENT AREAS BACKFILL WITH #2 CRUSHED STONE IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. 3" SCREENED TOP SOIL AROUND CONDUIT 4" SCREENED TOP SOIL FOR GRASS AREAS. PAVEMENT AS REQUIRED6" WIDE, RED PLASTIC TAPE WITH WORDING "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." TAPE SHALL BE LOCATED 6" BELOW FINISHED GRADE FINISH GRADE 7 1/2" 40" MIN. 7 1/2" 6 NO SCALE DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT DETAIL THREE DUCTS GRASS AREAS BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. PAVEMENT AREAS BACKFILL WITH #2 CRUSHED STONE IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. 3" SCREENED TOP SOIL AROUND CONDUIT 4" SCREENED TOP SOIL FOR GRASS AREAS. PAVEMENT AS REQUIRED6" WIDE, RED PLASTIC TAPE WITH WORDING "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." TAPE SHALL BE LOCATED 6" BELOW FINISHED GRADE FINISH GRADE 7 NO SCALE DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT DETAIL FOUR DUCTS 7 1/2" 40" MIN. 7 1/2" GRASS AREAS BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. PAVEMENT AREAS BACKFILL WITH #2 CRUSHED STONE IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. 3" SCREENED TOP SOIL AROUND CONDUIT PROVIDE SPACERS TO ENSURE EVENINSTALLATION. 4" SCREENED TOP SOIL FOR GRASS AREAS. PAVEMENT AS REQUIRED6" WIDE, RED PLASTIC TAPE WITH WORDING "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." TAPE SHALL BE LOCATED 6" BELOW FINISHED GRADE FINISH GRADE 11 PROTECTIVE BOLLARD DETAIL SUBGRADE PAINT YELLOW PAVEMENT OR GRADE NO SCALE 3,000 PSI CONCRETE CONCRETE CAP - ROUND OFF TOP 6" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 GALVANIZED PIPE FILLED WITH 3,000 PSI CONCRETE 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT FILLER WITH SEAL 4'-0" MIN. 4'-0" MIN. 6" 6"6" 6"2' -0" 2'-0" WP GFI PROVIDE RECEPTACLE AT GENERATOR 4-#10, 1-#10EG, 1" C 28 26 30 TO LVPEM 200A/3P (3) 20A/1P 10 NO SCALE EMERGENCY GENERATOR SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAM JJ DIGITAL CONTROL PANEL (FURNISHED WITH GENERATOR) CONNECT BATTERY CHARGER 2-#12, 1-#12EG, 1/2"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG, 1/2"C (10) #18 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR IN 1"C OR AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER LVPLS/26 (20A/1P C.B., BLOCK HEATER) LVPLS/28 (20A/1P C.B., BATTERY CHARGER) LVPLS/30 (20A/1P C.B., GFI RECEPTACLE) INSTALL ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FURNISHED WITH GENERATOR. INSTALL IN RECEPTION OFFICE 003 ATS-EM 208Y/120V 200A/3P TO TELEPHONE TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECT BLOCK HEATER (1) #18 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR IN 1/2 "C FOR GENERATOR START SIGNAL (2) #22 AWG TWISTED PAIR, 3/4 "C (2) ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN GENERATOR ENCLOSURE EMERGENCY GENERATOR 60KW/75KVA 208Y/120V NATURAL GAS LOCATED ON ROOF PROVIDE EMERGENCY STOP BREAKGLASS PUSHBUTTON. INSTALL OUTSIDE OF GENERATOR ROOM OR EXTERNAL TO THE WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE 2-#14, 1/2"C TO LVPLS ATS-LS 208Y/120V 60A/3P 60A/3P 4-#4/0, 1-#4EG IN 4" C 4-#4, 1-#8EG IN 4"C TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW 9 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD DETAIL 6" x 6" 10/10 WIRE MESH FINISH GRADE NO SCALE PAD SHOULD BE A MINIMUM OF 6" LARGER THAN THE EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE ON ALL SIDES 6" x 6" 10/10 WELDED WIRE MESH PROVIDE 1", 45 DEGREE CHAMFER ON ALL SIDES 3000 PSI CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD 4" 6" 12 NO SCALE 6" 42" 2" 30" 36" CHAMFER ALL EDGES ELECTRICAL CONDUIT PER SITE PLAN #4 REBARS AT EACH CORNER VERTICAL #3 TIES AT 12" O.C. HORIZONTAL 12" ROUND CONCRETE BASE BY E.C. VERIFY WITH BOLLARD MFGR. FINISHED GRADE BOLLARD WITH LIGHT BASE DETAIL 8 NO SCALE DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT DETAIL SIX DUCTS 40" MIN. 7 1/2" 7 1/2" 7 1/2" GRASS AREAS BACKFILL WITH NATIVE MATERIAL IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. PAVEMENT AREAS BACKFILL WITH #2 CRUSHED STONE IN 6" LIFTS. COMPACT AFTER EACH LIFT. 3" SCREENED TOP SOIL AROUND CONDUIT PROVIDE SPACERS TO ENSURE EVENINSTALLATION. 4" SCREENED TOP SOIL FOR GRASS AREAS. PAVEMENT AS REQUIRED6" WIDE, RED PLASTIC TAPE WITH WORDING "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." TAPE SHALL BE LOCATED 6" BELOW FINISHED GRADE FINISH GRADE plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e701 ELECTRICAL DETAILSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1 NO SCALE VAULT TYPE TRANSFORMER PAD DETAIL #2 CRUSHED STONE, 8" DEEP 10'-0" MINIMUM TO BUILDING TRANSFORMER PAD (72"x72") 20"x40" OPENING 5/8"x8' LONG GROUND ROD (TYP OF 4) 2-250 KCM BARE COPPER GROUND WIRE AT 36" BELOW GRADE STANDARD COVER RG&E STANDARD MC-101M OR EQUAL BY QUAZITE RG&E STANDARD MC-100 OR EQUAL BY QUAZITE 5/8"x8' GROUND ROD 6" 6" 9" 4'-0" 2'-2" 6'-0" 6'-0" 6" 1'-4" 3'-4" 1'-8" 1'-0" 18" NOTES: VAULT TYPE PADS SHALL BE PRE-CAST CONCRETE OR PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE, AS PERMITTED BY THE UTILITY. PROVIDE (1) 5/8 " X 8' COPPER GROUND ROD IN CORNER OF VAULT.PROVIDE #2 BARE COPPER GROUND RING TO BE INSTALLED 3' FROM THE VAULT AND BURIED A MINIMUM OF 36" DEEP. ATTACH BOTH ENDS OF THE GROUND RING TO THE GROUND ROD. PROVIDE A MINUMUM OF 3" OF #2 CRUSHED STONE BASE. INSTALL PER UTILITY SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH UTILITY. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. N L1 L2 L3 GROUND BUS NEUTRAL BUS 2 NO SCALE SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING DETAIL GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM NOTES: SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECTING MEANS GROUNDED CONDUCTOR SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUCTORS PROVIDE ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR. PROVIDE INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTOR PER SPECIFICATIONS. IF NO SIZE SPECIFIED, PROVIDE INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTOR SIZED PER N.E.C. TABLE 250-94. INSTALL IN RIGID, SCHEDULE 40, PVC RACEWAY. METAL UNDERGROUND WATER PIPE IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH FOR 10 FEET OR MORE. SHALL BE SUPPLEMENTED BY ITEMS 3 AND 4. BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL. MADE GROUNDING ELECTRODE. REFER TO "MADE GROUNDING ELECTRODE-GROUND GRID" DETAIL AND SPECIFICATIONS. MAIN BONDING CONDUCTOR. PROVIDE INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTOR SIZED PER N.E.C. ARTICLE 250-94. BOND GROUND BUS TO EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE WITH BARE COPPER BONDING JUMPER SIZED PER N.E.C. ARTICLE 250-79. WATER MAIN FOOTER STEEL GROUND STEEL BUILDING STEEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 6 5 4 NO SCALE GROUND BAR ON WALL TWO HOLE COMPRESSION LUG GROUND WIRES BY EQUIPMENT VENDOR GROUND BAR CONNECTION DETAIL DRAWING NOTES: 5 NO SCALE GROUND BAR DETAIL 2" 2" 1" 7/16" DIA. COPPER GROUND BAR, 1/4"x4"x12" (MAIN SERVER RM) OR 1/4"x2"x12" (IT RMS), NEWTON INSTRUMENT CO. OR EQUAL. HOLE CENTERS TO MATCH NEMA DOUBLE LUG CONFIGURATION. INSULATORS, NEWTON INSTRUMENT CO. CAT. NO. 3061-4 OR EQUAL. 5/8" LOCKWASHERS, NEWTON INSTRUMENT CO. CAT. NO. 3015-8 OR EQUAL. WALL MOUNTING BRACKET, NEWTON INSTRUMENT CO. CAT. NO. A-6056 OR EQUAL. 5/8-11 x 1" H.H.C.S. BOLTS, NEWTON INSTRUMENT CO. CAT. NO. 3012-1 OR EQUAL. LONG BARREL DOUBLE HOLE COMPRESSION LUG 3 4 5 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 GENERAL NOTES: 6 NO SCALE ROOF RECEPTACLE STUB-UP DETAIL GALVANIZED CONDUIT (SIZE AS REQUIRED) WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WITH SPRING-LOADED CAP. KEY LOCKABLE, WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE SHALL BE MARKED "SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS WHILE IN-USE." SEALTIGHT CONNECTOR FLASH AND SEAL ROOF PENETRATION AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN ANY ROOF WARRANTEE. PROVIDE THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED ROOFING CONTRACTOR. FINISHED FLOOR CEILING AAB12 AAB13 4" MINIMUM 7 NO SCALE FLUSH VOICE/DATA OUTLET INSTALLATION DETAIL PROVIDE 1/2" CONDUIT INSIDE NEW WALL PROVIDE 4 11/16" SQUARE x 2 1/8" DEEP BACKBOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING PROVIDE 2-GANG BACKBOX WITH DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, FLUSH MOUNTED PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRING TO CEILING SPACE WALL CAT 5 SPARE SPARECAT 5 CASE A CASE B CASE C NO SCALE 8 TYPICAL CABLE HANGER DETAIL BACKBONE UTP COAX AND FIBER COAX AND FIBER BACKBONE UTP OPTICAL FIBER AND COAX BACKBONE UTP (WHERE APPLICABLE) CAT 5 CABLES (PROVIDE HANGER SIZE AND QUANTITY AS REQUIRED) SPARE HANGER (PROVIDE ONE PER RUN) NOTE: PROVIDE HANGERS IN CONFIGURATIONS OR COMBINATIONS OF CONFIGURATIONS SHOWN AS REQUIRED TO SUIT SITE CONDITIONS IN ALL CASES PROVIDE A SPARE HANGER RUN FOR FUTURE CABLING. 1. FT PANELBOARD DISCONNECT THERMOSTAT LIGHT SWITCH CARD ACCESS VOICE/DATA OUTLET DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 6'-8" 6'-0" 5'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 1'-6" 1'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" NO SCALE 9 TYPICAL DEVICE MOUNTING ELEVATIONS NOTES: FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL AND VISUAL DEVICE IN LOCATIONS WHERE SIMILAR DEVICES ARE MOUNTED AT THE SAME HEIGHT, DEVICES SHALL BE PROPERLY "GANGED" AND SHALL HAVE A SINGLE COVER PLATE. IN LOCATIONS WHERE DIFFERENT DEVICES ARE MOUNTED AT DIFFERENT HEIGHTS WITHIN FOUR FEET OF ONE ANOTHER, DEVICES SHALL BE MOUNTED SUCH THAT THEY HAVE A COMMON CENTERLINE. IF THERE ARE THREE OR MORE DEVICES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A DETAIL FROM THE ARCHITECT. 1. 2. FIRE ALARM PULL STATION WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MECH. ROOM, GARAGES DESK TOP TELEPHONE/ CATV OUTLET FINISHED FLOOR 4'-0" APARTMENT LOAD CENTER 3 NO SCALE GASKETED HAND HOLE 1" x 45° CHAMFER #3 TIES 12" ON CENTER #6 BARE COPPER GRD. WIRE MECH. COMPR. CONNECTION PVC SCHEDULE 80 CONDUIT GALVANIZED CONDUIT "ELL." (4) #8 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT BAR 4000 P.S.I. CONCRETE 5'-0" MIN. DOWN TO SOLID BEARING 1. 2. FINISHED GRADE (PAVEMENT) BOLT OR MECH. COMPR. GROUND WIRE TO POLE PROVIDE IN-LINE BALLAST FUSES. PROVIDE (2) BUSSMANN "TRON" WEATHERPROOF FUSE HOLDERS, CAT# HEB-AB WITH (2) 10A "KTK" FUSES FOR EACH LUMINAIRE. (4)-36" x 1" DIA. ANCHOR BOLTS GALVANIZED STEEL TO PVC CONDUIT CONNECTOR ROUND FORMED CONCRETE BASE 24" DIA. CONCRETE BASE TOP OF POLE BASE TO BE MEASURED FROM ADJACENT PAVEMENT GRADE. CENTER LIGHT POLES IN ISLANDS. OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS OF ISLANDS ARE 9'-0" X 36'-0". NOTES: 5/8" DIA. x 8' COPPERWELD GROUND ROD (LIGHTNING PROTECTION) LIGHT POLE BASE DETAIL POLE BASE SCHEDULE POLE HEIGHT BASE DIAMETER 39' AND UP 30" DIAMETER 30' - 38' 24" DIAMETER 20' - 29' 18" DIAMETER 15" DIAMETER19' AND BELOW 6" IN LAWN 2' IN PAVEMENT 16'-0" plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e702 ELECTRICAL DETAILSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 F F F F FFFF S H EC H F TS S H EC S F TS F F H AOM AOM F F COMMON AREA DEVICES ELEV. LOBBY 120V ELEV. LOBBY FACP/ FARPS DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR COMMON AREA DEVICES TWO TELEPHONE LINES S ST AUX AUX AUX 24 VOLT DC GROUND FLOOR SLC RESIDENT UNITS TYP 2ND - 5TH FLOORS SLC RESIDENT ROOMS TYP 2ND - 5TH FLOORS SLC COMMON AREAS GROUND FLOOR SLC COMMON AREAS TYP 2ND - 5TH FLOORS NAC COMMON AREAS GROUND FLOOR NAC COMMON AREAS TO NEXT APT. CO SENSOR, ICP OR END OF LINE 24 VOLT DC TO NEXT APT. CO SENSOR, ICP OR END OF LINE TO NEXT NOTIFICATION DEVICE OR END OF LINE TO NEXT NOTIFICATION DEVICE OR END OF LINE TYPICAL ACCESSABLE APARTMENT CONFIGURATION TYPICAL ACCESSABLE APARTMENT CONFIGURATION 120V ST AUX ELEV. MECH RM SHUNT TRIP ELEV. PIT SHUNT TRIP TO NEXT ADDRESSSABLE DEVICE/MODULE TO NEXT ADDRESSSABLE DEVICE/MODULE LVPLS/1 NO SCALE 1 FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM DRAWING NOTES: INSTALL ICP AND AUDIO/VISUAL FIRE ALARM DEVICES IN ACCESSIBLE UNIT ONLY. ALL OTHER UNITS SHALL BE PREWIRED AS INDICATED SUCH THAT FUTURE ADDITION OF REQUIRED DEVICES FOR ACCESSIBLE UNITS IS AVAILABLE. THIS DRAWING IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. FUNCTIONS SHOWN AS HARDWIRED MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED THROUGH THE USE OF INTELLIGENT DEVICES AND SOFTWARE. 1. NOTES: 1 11 1 11 1 F F LOW FREQUENCY LOW FREQUENCY REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR S TV TV T A T TV TV TV T T TV NO SCALE CATV SYSTEM RISER DIAGRAM 5 RG6/U DROP CABLE (TYPICAL) 8-PORT DIRECTIONAL TAP (TYPICAL) RG11/U BACKBONE CABLE (TYPICAL) WALL MOUNT TAPS IN APARTMENT MECHANICAL CLOSET 2ND FLOOR CATV SPLITTER BY CATV COMPANY RG11/U BACKBONE CABLE GROUND FLOOR WALL MOUNTED BROADBAND AMPLIFIER BY CATV COMPANY 4" PVC-80, DIRECT BURIED FOR CATV. REFER TO SITE PLAN FOR MORE INFORMATION RG6/U DROP CABLE (TYPICAL) RG11/U BACKBONE CABLE (TYPICAL) TELE/DATA LOCATED IN SERVER 008 TYPICAL APARTMENT TYPICAL APARTMENT COMMUNITY ROOM LOUNGE BR1LR BR1LR S S TV TV T T TV WALL MOUNT TAPS IN APARTMENT MECHANICAL CLOSET RG6/U DROP CABLE (TYPICAL) RG11/U BACKBONE CABLE (TYPICAL) TYPICAL APARTMENT LOUNGEBR1LR S S 3RD FLOOR TV TV T T TV WALL MOUNT TAPS IN APARTMENT MECHANICAL CLOSET RG6/U DROP CABLE (TYPICAL) RG11/U BACKBONE CABLE (TYPICAL) TYPICAL APARTMENT LOUNGEBR1LR 4TH FLOOR TV TV T T TV WALL MOUNT TAPS IN APARTMENT MECHANICAL CLOSET RG6/U DROP CABLE (TYPICAL) RG11/U BACKBONE CABLE (TYPICAL) TYPICAL APARTMENT LOUNGEBR1LR 5TH FLOOR NO SCALE 2 INTERCOM WIRING DIAGRAM 120 VOLTS ENTRY PANEL AUDIO LINE, 485 BUS AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER TRANSFORMER TWISTED PAIR MASTER STATION LOCATED IN RECEPTION/SECURITY OFFICE ENTRY PANEL LOCATED AT FRONT DOOR DOOR STRIKE SUITE STATION SUITE STATION SUITE STATION MASTER STATION NO SCALE 3 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM CATEGORY 5 CABLE (TYPICAL) BLDG MTD SIGN LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL ANALOG PHONE LINE LVPLS/10 SITE POLE LTG LCD BLUE BOX LT PANEL WITH INTEGRAL TIME CLOCK LCD PHOTOCELL CONTROL OUTPUT COMMON +24V dc POWER PACK LINE NEUTRAL 120V CONTROL OUTPUT COMMON +24V dc CONTROL OUTPUT COMMON +24V dc LOAD-a LOAD-b NO SCALE OCCUPANCY SENSOR DETAIL 4 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR ADDITIONAL CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR AS REQUIRED 3-WAY SWITCH a WALL SWITCH b PROVIDE 3-WAY AND/OR DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING AS CALLED FOR ON PLANS 3-WAY SWITCH WALL SWITCH ADDITIONAL CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR AS REQUIRED plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e703 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 NO SCALE ELEVATOR POWER WIRING DIAGRAM 3 S S SH SS M N ELEVATOR SHAFT SMOKE HATCH TO ELEVATOR CONTROLLER GROUND FLOOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR ELEVATOR CONTROLLER ELEVATOR WIRING BY ELEVATOR SUPPLIER TO NEAREST 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT ST HH ELEVATOR SHAFT HEAT DETECTOR (BOTTOM) ELEVATOR SHAFT HEAT DETECTOR (TOP) ST 60A/3P 2ND FLOOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR ELEVATOR SHAFT SMOKE DETECTOR LVPHP 20A/1P NOTES: 1. THIS DRAWING IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. FUNCTIONS SHOWN AS HARDWIRED MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED THROUGH THE USE OF INTELLIGENT DEVICES AND SOFTWARE. TO ELEVATOR CONTROLLER TO ELEVATOR CONTROLLER S 3RD FLOOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR GROUND FLOOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR ELEVATOR CONTROLLER SHUNT TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT 60A/3P FUSED SWITCH WITH 60 AMP FUSES AND ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK KIT. LOCATE AS SHOWN ON PLANS. PROVIDE 2-#12 IN ½"C TO ELEVATOR CONTROLLER 60A FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCH ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK KIT 60A NON-FUSIBLE ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK KIT 2-#12 IN ½"C 3-#4, 1-#4EG IN 1 ¼"C 60A NON FUSED SWITCH WITH ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK KIT. LOCATE AT TOP OF ELEVATOR SHAFT. PROVIDE 2-#12 IN ½"C TO ELEVATOR CONTROLLER 60A/3P SHUNT TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH AUXILIARY CONTACT. PROVIDE 2-#12 IN ½"C TO ELEVATOR CONTROLLER S 4TH FLOOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR S 5TH FLOOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR 13 14 15 16121110987654321 24 1917 18 21 20 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 353231 33 34 37 36 38 39 44 41 42 43 46 45 47 48 13 14 15 16121110987654321 24 1917 18 21 20 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 353231 33 34 37 36 38 39 44 41 42 43 46 45 47 48 2 4 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 3 4 5 5 WALL CABINET 48 PORT FIBER HORIZONTAL WIRE MANAGEMENT WALL EQUIPMENT RACK 48 PORT CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL 48 PORT OPTICAL FIBER PATCH PANEL DATA A DATA B NO SCALE TELE/DATA RACK ELEVATION 1 (6) OUTLET SURGE PROTECTED POWER STRIP RACK/CABINET ELEVATIONS EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE SERVER ROOM 13 14 15 16121110987654321 24 1917 18 21 20 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 353231 33 34 37 36 38 39 44 41 42 43 46 45 47 48 13 14 15 16121110987654321 24 1917 18 21 20 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 353231 33 34 37 36 38 39 44 41 42 43 46 45 47 48 2 6 1 1 1 3 3 5 WALL CABINET 12 PORT FIBER DATA A DATA B TYP 2 - 5 IT ROOM 6 12 PORT OPTICAL FIBER PATCH PANEL GROUND FLOOR 0' - 0" HOUSE AND HORIZON METERS 200A METER CHANNEL, 3 PH, 4 WIRE 1600A/3P MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER 208Y/120 VOLTS, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE INPUT, SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED PROVIDE 100 AMPERE RATED ALUMINUM TYPE SE CABLE FROM EACH METER CHANNEL TO THE RESPECTIVE APARTMENT LOAD CENTER. VERIFY CABLE ROUTING IN THE FIELD. COORDINATE SERVICE ENTRANCE WITH NYSEG FIVE-CHANNEL METER SECTION WITH 100A/2P MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS (25 METERS TOTAL) FIVE-CHANNEL METER SECTION WITH 100A/2P MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS (35 METERS TOTAL) 5 2 NO SCALE FIBER OPTIC WIRING DIAGRAM 6 STRAND MULTIMODE FIBER 13141516 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 124 19 17 1821 202223 25262728293040 35 32 31 333437 36383944 41424346 454748 48 PORT FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL 13141516 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 124 19 17 1821 202223 25262728293040 35 32 31 333437 36383944 41424346 454748 12 PORT FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL 2ND FLOOR IT RM 1ST FLOOR SERVER RM 008 13141516 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 124 19 17 1821 202223 25262728293040 35 32 31 333437 36383944 41424346 454748 12 PORT FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL 13141516 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 124 19 17 1821 202223 25262728293040 35 32 31 333437 36383944 41424346 454748 12 PORT FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL 13141516 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 124 19 17 1821 202223 25262728293040 35 32 31 333437 36383944 41424346 454748 12 PORT FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL 3RD FLOOR IT RM 4TH FLOOR IT RM 5TH FLOOR IT RM /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// /// // Communication Line // // // // // // // // // // // // // // // # Note : Power wiring, breaker size, and disconnects should follow local code and NEC. Multi-frame outdoor units require a separate power connection for each frame. Refer to the most up-to-date submittal sheets for applicable electrical data. MCA : 63.2 MOP : 80 V,Hz : 3Phase/208~230V/60Hz ARUM241BTE5 Combi. : ARUM241BTE5 Additional Refrigerant : 42.43 lbs PRHR023A (BCC-4) RLA : 0.06 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-12) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU243M2A4 (#FCU-10) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 PRHR023A (BCC-3) RLA : 0.06 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-09) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-11) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 PRHR043A (BCC-2) RLA : 0.06 ARNU073M2A4 (#FCU-01) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU123M2A4 (#FCU-02) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU073M2A4 (#FCU-03) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU423M2A4 (#FCU-05) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 PRHR043A (BCC-1) RLA : 0.06 ARNU243M2A4 (#FCU-06) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-04) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU183M2A4 (#FCU-07) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.30 ARNU543M3A4 (#FCU-08) PREMTBVC0 RLA : 2.50 Total RLA : 28.28 BY EC BY MC plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e704 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMSLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 ELECTRIC SERVICE ELEVATION 1/8" = 1'-0" 5 MULTI V5_DIAGRAM - ELECTRICAL MOTOR RATED SWITCH MANUAL MOTOR STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RELAY MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE COMBINATION TWO SPEED MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION REDUCED VOLTAGE MAGNETIC STARTER DUPLEX CONTROLLER WITH ALTERNATION CIRCUIT PACKAGED CONTROL UNIT H-O-A SELECTOR SWITCH IN COVER PILOT LIGHT IN COVER REMOTE START-STOP PUSHBUTTONS FIRE ALARM FAN SHUTDOWN LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT MOTOR STARTER/CONTROLLER NOTES: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. PROVIDE 120 VOLT CIRCUIT FROM LVPH1 AND CONNECT AQUASTAT AND TIME SWITCH. CONNECT VIA WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SUCH THAT WHEN OCCUPANCY IS SENSED, FAN TURNS ON. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR TO BE FURNISHED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR, INSTALLED BY HVAC CONTRACTOR AND WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IS NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. 2ND FLOOR LOCATION IS TYPICAL FOR FLOORS 3 THROUGH 5. REFER TO PARTIAL THIRD FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BCC-4 ON FIFTH FLOOR. REFER TO DETAIL 3/e704. NOTES: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. NO SCALE AREA OF RESCUE RISER DIAGRAM 1 plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e801 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULESLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION LUMENS LAMP VOLTAGE DESIGN MAKE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERMANUFACTURER MODEL NO. LA 16" DIAMETER SURFACE MOUNTED DECORATIVE LED LUMINAIRE WITH FROSTED ACRYLIC GLASS LENS AND FINISH COLOR BY ARCHITECT. 2000 28 WATT LED, 3000K 120 ROYAL PACIFIC LIGHTING 4327D-30-BN-3K APPROVED EQUAL LB 26" X 5" OVER MIRROR LED LUMINAIRE WITH MATTE WHITE DIFFUSER AND SATIN NICKEL FINISH 1625 13 WATT LED, 3000K 120 OXYGEN LIGHTING 3-5134-24 APPROVED EQUAL LC 2' SURFACE MOUNTED LED LUMINAIRE WITH ACRYLIC LENS AND WHITE HOUSING. 2200 18 WATT LED, 3000K 120 METALUX LIGHTING 2SNLED LED5 LN22 UNV LP830 CD1 APPROVED EQUAL LE 24" LONG UNDER CABINET LED LUMINAIRE WITH ACRYLIC LENS, WHITE HOUSING AND SELECTABLE COLOR TEMPERATURE. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE. 627 11.1 WATT LED, 120 HALO LIGHTING HU30 SCT 24 P APPROVED EQUAL LG 2' X 2', RECESSED VOLUMETRIC LED TROFFER WITH 3400 LUMENS, SMOOTH ACRYLIC DIFFUSER, SUITABLE FOR GRID INSTALLATION 3400 25.8 WATT LED, 3500K 120 METALUX LIGHTING 22CZ2-34HE-S-UNV-L835-C D1 APPROVED EQUAL LH 4', WALL MOUNTED LED LUMINAIRE WITH FROSTED ACRYLIC LENS, WHITE HOUSING, BI LEVEL DIMMING, AND INTEGRAL OCCUPANCY SENSOR. 3696 30 WATT LED, 3500K 120 INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING PRODUCTS CV4 30WLED UNIV 35 FRAL WHP USBD/HL APPROVED EQUAL LI 4', WALL MOUNTED LED LUMINAIRE WITH SQUARE SEMI FROST ACRYLIC LENS AND WHITE HOUSING 4600 35 WATT LED, 3500K 120 METALUX LIGHTING 4SNLED LED5 SLN46SL UNV L835 CD1 APPROVED EQUAL LJ 12' LINEAR PENDANT LED LUMINAIRE WITH LOW PROFILE, MICROGLOW LENS, AND COLOR BY ARCHITECT. VERIFY HEIGHT ABOVE FLOOR WITH ARCHITECT. 1000LM/FT 108 WATT LED, 3500K 120 FOCAL POINT LIGHTING FTWLS-MG-1000LF-35K-1C -UNV-LD1-J48-DC-**-12' APPROVED EQUAL LK 4" X 4' LINEAR RECESSED LED LUMINAIRE WITH FLUSH SATIN LENS AND SUITABLE FOR INSTALLATION IN WOOD CEILING. COORDINATE TRIM WITH ARCHITECT. 3500 43 WATT LED, 3500K 120 FOCAL POINT LIGHTING FSM4L-FL-875LF-35K-1C-U NV-LD1-TFW-XX-4' APPROVED EQUAL LL 2' X 4', RECESSED VOLUMETRIC LED TROFFER WITH 5500 LUMENS, SMOOTH ACRYLIC DIFFUSER, SUITABLE FOR GRID INSTALLATION 5500 43.5 WATT LED, 3500K 120 METALUX LIGHTING 24CZ2-55HE-S-UNV-L835-C D-1 APPROVED EQUAL LM 2' X 4', RECESSED VOLUMETRIC LED TROFFER WITH 6500 LUMENS, SMOOTH ACRYLIC DIFFUSER, SUITABLE FOR GRID INSTALLATION 6500 48.9 WATT LED, 3500K 120 METALUX LIGHTING 24CZ2-65HE-S-UNV-L835-C D-1 APPROVED EQUAL LN 2' X 4', RECESSED VOLUMETRIC LED TROFFER WITH 7000 LUMENS, SMOOTH ACRYLIC DIFFUSER, SUITABLE FOR GRID INSTALLATION 7000 51 WATT LED, 3500K 120 METALUX LIGHTING 24CZ2-70HE-S-UNV-L835-C D-1 APPROVED EQUAL LO EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED LED LUMINAIRE WITH UP AND DOWNLIGHT DISTRIBUTION, GLASS DIFFUSER, AND COLOR BY ARCHITECT 2280 22 WATT LED, 4000K 120 PERFORMANCE IN LIGHTING USA QUASAR 20 DOUBLE TECH 22W 4000K 0-10V ** APPROVED EQUAL LP 4IN SQUARE LED DOWNLIGHT WITH 1500 LUMENS, HAZE REFLECTOR AND SUITABLE FOR GRID OR DRYWALL INSTALLATION. 1500 13.4 WALL LED, 3500K 120 HALO LIGHTING PRS4FS15D010-SM4128FS44SMDHTIR4SMD APPROVED EQUAL LQ 6IN SQUARE LED DOWNLIGHT WITH 1500 LUMENS, HAZE REFLECTOR, IC RATED, AND 1500 13.4 WATT LED, 4000K 120 HALO LIGHTING PRS615-D010-SM6128FS-6 1SMDHTIR6SMD APPROVED EQUAL LS EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED LED LUMINAIRE WITH SLIM, LOW PROFILE, AND INTEGRAL PHOTOCELL 4000 38 WATT LED, 4000K 120 LUMARK LIGHTING XTOR4B-W-**-PC1 APPROVED EQUAL LT 39 3/8" HIGH LED BOLLARD WITH SYMMETRICAL, 360 DEGREE DISTRIBUTION, AND FINISH COLOR BY ARCHITECT. 627 18.4 WATT LED, 4000K 208 BEGA LIGHTING 99570-K4-** APPROVED EQUAL LU SINGLE HEAD LED POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE WITH TYPE III DISTRIBUTION ON 16' SQUARE STEEL POLE. FINISH COLOR BY ARCHITECT. 5610 55 WATT LED, 4000K 208 BEACON LIGHTING VPS/24NB-55/4K/T3/UNV/ RA/** APPROVED EQUAL X1 SINGLE FACED UNIVERSAL MOUNT LED EXIT SIGN WITH WHITE THERMOPLASTIC HOUSING, GREEN LETTERS, AND REMOVABLE CHEVRONS - 2 WATT LED 120 EVENLIGHT LIGHTING TLX AC GU W APPROVED EQUAL X2 DUAL FACED UNIVERSAL MOUNT LED EXIT SIGN WITH WHITE THERMOPLASTIC HOUSING, GREEN LETTERS, AND REMOVABLE CHEVRONS - 2 WATT LED 120 EVENLIGHT LIGHTING TLX AC GU W APPROVED EQUAL X3 SINGLE FACED UNIVERSAL MOUNT LED EXIT SIGN WITH WHITE THERMOPLASTIC HOUSING, GREEN LETTERS, AND REMOVABLE CHEVRONS. SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATION - 2 WATT LED 120 EVENLIGHT LIGHTING TWL AC G 1U W CW APPROVED EQUAL ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ITEM NO. NAME ROOM LOCATION HP KW PH VOLTS PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER CIRCUIT BREAKER WIRING FROM PANEL TO CONTROL UNIT WIRING FROM CONTROL UNIT TO EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT SWITCH DISCONNECT SWITCH MOTOR STARTER/ CONTROLLER NOTES CONTROLLER LOCATION NEMA RATING NOTESSWITCH AMPS FUSE SIZE 1 ELEV-1 ELEVATOR SHAFT 3 208 LVPEM 38,40,42 60A/3P SHUNT TRIP 3-#6, 1-#10EG IN 1”C 3-#6, 1-#10EG IN 1”C 60 60 10 AU 1 6 2 HW-3 MECH AND ELEC 010 0.6 1 120 LVPH1 43 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 3 HW-2 MECH AND ELEC 010 0.6 1 120 LVPH1 45 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 HW-1 MECH AND ELEC 010 0.6 1 120 LVPH1 46 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 5 HWRP-1 MECH AND ELEC 010 1 1 208 LVPH1 48,50 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 1 6 DOAS-1 ROOF 19.8 3 208 LVPH4 14,16,18 70A/3P 3-#4, 1-#8EG IN 1¼"C 3-#4, 1-#8EG IN 1¼"C 10, 14 AU 3R 3 7 ODU-1 ROOF 23.0 3 208 LVPH4 11,13,15 80A/3P 3-#4, 1-#8EG IN 1¼"C 3-#4, 1-#8EG IN 1¼"C 10 AU 3R 10 FCU-1 ELMSHADE OFFICES 006 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 40,42 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 11 FCU-2 SUPPORTING HOUSING OFF 002E 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 40,42 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 12 FCU-3 SHARED COPY/FILES 004 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 40,42 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 13 FCU-4 CORRIDOR 100C 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 39,41 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 14 FCU-5 LAUNDRY 017 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 40,42 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 15 FCU-6 LAUNDRY 017 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 39,41 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 16 FCU-7 STAFF BREAK RM 014 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 39,41 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 17 FCU-8 CORRIDOR 100C 0.5 1 208 LVPH1 39,41 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 18 FCU-9 CORRIDOR 200 0.5 1 208 LVPH4 7,9 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 19 FCU-11 CORRIDOR 300 0.5 1 208 LVPH4 7,9 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 20 FCU-12 CORRIDOR 400 0.5 1 208 LVPH4 10,12 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 21 FCU-10 CORRIDOR 500 0.5 1 208 LVPH4 10,12 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 30 BCC-1 MECH AND ELEC 010 0.1 1 208 LVPH1 39,41 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 31 BCC-2 MECH AND ELEC 010 0.1 1 208 LVPH1 40,42 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 32 BCC-3 CORRIDOR 300 0.1 1 208 LVPH4 7,9 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 33 BCC-4 CORRIDOR 500 0.1 1 208 LVPH4 10,12 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 5 40 EF-2 WOMENS TLT 015 0.02 1 120 LVPH1 33 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 2 41 EF-2 MENS TLT 016 0.02 1 120 LVPH1 33 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 2 42 EF-3 TRASH/RECYCLE 011 0.02 1 120 LVPH1 33 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 43 EF-3 TRASH/RECYCLE 215 0.02 1 120 LVPH1 33 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 44 EF-3 TRASH/RECYCLE 315 0.02 1 120 LVPH4 2 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 45 EF-3 TRASH/RECYCLE 415 0.02 1 120 LVPH4 2 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 46 EF-3 TRASH/RECYCLE 515 0.02 1 120 LVPH4 2 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 47 EF-2 STAFF TLT 005 0.02 1 120 LVPH1 33 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 2 48 EF-3 CUST 217 0.02 1 120 LVPH1 33 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 49 EF-3 CUST 317 0.02 1 120 LVPH4 2 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 50 EBB-4 CONFERENCE RM 018 1.0 1 208 LVPH1 35,37 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 51 EBB-4 CONFERENCE RM 018 1.0 1 208 LVPH1 35,37 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 52 EBB-4 CONFERENCE RM 018 1.0 1 208 LVPH1 35,37 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 53 EBB-4T COMMUNITY RM 012 1.0 1 208 LVPEM 23,25 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 54 EBB-4T COMMUNITY RM 012 1.0 1 208 LVPEM 23,25 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 55 EBB-4T COMMUNITY RM 012 1.0 1 208 LVPEM 23,25 20A/2P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 60 UH-1 MECH AND ELEC 010 5.0 3 208 LVPH1 52,54,56 20A/3P 3-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 3-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 61 ECUH-1 STAIR B B01 1.5 1 120 LVPH1 47 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 62 ECUH-1 VESTIBULE 001 1.5 1 120 LVPH1 51 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 63 ECUH-1 VESTIBULE 100D 1.5 1 120 LVPH1 49 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 10 AU 1 70 EF-3 CUST 417 0.02 1 120 LVPH4 2 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 71 EF-3 CUST 517 0.02 1 120 LVPH4 2 20A/1P 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 2-#12, 1-#12EG IN ½"C 1 AU 1 4 60 NF plan ARCHITECTURAL 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Architectural Studio, PC plan t. 585.454.4230 f. 585.454.4237 www.planpc.com STUDIO Notice: It is a violation of law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, to alter any item on this document in any way. Any licensee who alters this document is required by law to afix his/her seal and the notation 'altered by' followed by his/her signature and a specific description of alterations. © PLAN ARCHITECTURAL STUDIO, PC CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS TURNER E N G I N E E R I N G , P C One Woodbury Blvd. Rochester, NY 14604 585.381.3360 Tel Project No. 001.16.01.02 PLAN PROJECT No. DATE SHARS I.D. # 20186081 e802 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULESLAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 709 WEST COURT STREET, ITHACA, NEW YORK, 14850 17167 11.22.2019 Receptacle 21060 VA 50.00% 10530 VA Other 0 VA 0.00% 0 VA Motor 5276 VA 75.00% 3957 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 148 A Lighting 3144 VA 90.00% 2830 VA TOTAL CONN.: 221 A Heating 17791 VA 65.00% 11564 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 53475 VA Electric Range - 3.5 kW ... 8300 VA 80.00% 6640 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 79501 VA Electric Clothes Dryer 24000 VA 75.00% 18000 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 230 A 240 A 200 A TOTAL LOAD: 27169 VA 28313 VA 24033 VA 71 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 72 69 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 70 67 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 68 65 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 66 63 4.2 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 64 61 COMM KIT RANGE 50 A 2 4.2 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 62 59 COMM KIT MICROWAVE 20 A 1 1.0 0.2 1 20 A STAFF KIT REC 60 57 W TLT HAND DRYER 20 A 1 1.0 1.0 1 20 A ELMSHADE MED HD 58 55 M TLT HAND DRYER 20 A 1 1.0 1.7 56 53 STAFF TLT HAND DRYER 20 A 1 1.0 1.7 54 51 ECUH-1 VEST 001 20 A 1 1.5 1.7 3 20 A EUH 52 49 ECUH-1 VEST 100D 20 A 1 1.5 0.4 50 47 ECUH-1 STAIR B 20 A 1 1.5 0.4 2 20 A HWRP-1 48 45 HW-2 20 A 1 0.6 0.6 1 20 A HW-3 46 43 HW-1 20 A 1 0.6 0.0 1 20 A AQUASTAT, TIME SWITCH 44 41 0.9 1.2 42 39 BCC-1, FCU-4, 6, 7, 8 20 A 2 0.9 1.2 2 20 A BCC-2, FCU-1, 2, 3, 5 40 37 1.5 2.0 38 35 CONF RM BASEBOARD 20 A 2 1.5 2.0 2 30 A DRYER 36 33 EF-2(M),EF-2(W),1-2 EF-3 20 A 1 0.1 2.0 34 31 2.0 2.0 2 30 A DRYER 32 29 DRYER 30 A 2 2.0 2.0 30 27 2.0 2.0 2 30 A DRYER 28 25 DRYER 30 A 2 2.0 1.0 1 20 A WASHER REC 26 23 2.0 1.0 1 20 A WASHER REC 24 21 DRYER 30 A 2 2.0 1.0 1 20 A WASHER REC 22 19 WASHER REC 20 A 1 1.0 1.4 1 20 A 2ND FLR CORRIDOR REC 20 17 WASHER REC 20 A 1 1.0 1.0 1 20 A STAFF MICROWAVE 18 15 WASHER REC 20 A 1 1.0 0.9 1 20 A STAFF, COMM KIT REC 16 13 COMM KITCHEN REC 20 A 1 0.7 1.1 1 20 A CONFERENCE, LAUN REC 14 11 CORR, EXT, TRASH REC 20 A 1 1.4 0.9 1 20 A ELMSHADE OFF REC 12 9 RECEPTION OFF REC 20 A 1 1.3 0.9 1 20 A ELMSHADE OFF REC 10 7 ELMSHADE COPY REC 20 A 1 1.0 0.2 8 5 ELMSHADE MED, OFF REC 20 A 1 1.4 0.2 2 20 A SITE LIGHTING 6 3 PROG, BLDG MAIN REC 20 A 1 1.3 1.3 1 20 A 1ST, 2ND FLR CORR LTG 4 1 EXT, MECH, OFF REC 20 A 1 0.9 1.2 1 20 A OFF,CONF,BREAK LTG 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES A B C POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: PANEL IS 2 SECTION LVPH1 MECHANICAL AND... 225 A 3Ø, 4W 120/208 WYE SURFACE 22 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM X 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS X SPD SIZE: 60PANELBOARD SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS X INTEGRAL SPD X TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 35 A TOTAL CONN.: 62 A Receptacle 14728 VA 50.00% 7364 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 12698 VA Motor 4960 VA 75.00% 3720 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 22161 VA Heating 3000 VA 65.00% 1950 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 64 A 53 A 71 A TOTAL LOAD: 7549 VA 6327 VA 8316 VA 41 SPACE -- -- 0.0 1.0 42 39 SPACE -- -- 0.0 1.0 40 37 SPACE -- -- 0.0 1.0 3 60 A ELEVATOR 38 35 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 36 33 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 34 31 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 32 29 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 30 27 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 28 25 1.5 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 26 23 COMM RM BASEBOARD 20 A 2 1.5 1.0 1 20 A STAFF REF RECEPT 24 21 IT RM 516 REC 20 A 1 0.4 0.7 1 20 A IT RM 516 REC 22 19 IT RM 416 REC 20 A 1 0.4 0.7 1 20 A IT RM 416 REC 20 17 IT RM 316 REC 20 A 1 0.4 0.7 1 20 A IT RM 316 REC 18 15 IT RM 216 REC 20 A 1 0.4 0.7 1 20 A IT RM 216 REC 16 13 SERVER RM RECEPT 20 A 1 0.4 0.4 1 20 A SERVER RM RECEPT 14 11 5TH PANIC BUTTON REP 20 A 1 1.0 1.0 1 20 A VEST 100D DOOR OP 12 9 4TH PANIC BUTTON REP 20 A 1 1.0 1.0 1 20 A VEST 001 DOOR OP 10 7 3RD PANIC BUTTON REP 20 A 1 1.0 1.1 1 20 A COMMUNITY RM REC 8 5 2ND PANIC BUTTON REP 20 A 1 1.0 1.0 1 20 A COMM KIT REF REC 6 3 1ST PANIC BUTTON REP 20 A 1 1.0 0.2 1 20 A ELMSHADE UC REF REC 4 1 ELEV SUM PUMP 20 A 1 1.2 0.2 1 20 A HORIZON UC REF REC 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES A (kVA) B (kVA) C (kVA) POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LVPEM MECHANICAL AND... ATS-E 225 A 3Ø, 4W 120/208 WYE SURFACE 22 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM X 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:PANELBOARD SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 13 A Receptacle 540 VA 100.00% 540 VA TOTAL CONN.: 16 A Motor 1400 VA 75.00% 1050 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 4794 VA Lighting 3199 VA 90.00% 2879 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 5638 VA Heating 500 VA 65.00% 325 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 25 A 26 A 18 A TOTAL LOAD: 2947 VA 2975 VA 2217 VA 29 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.2 1 20 A GEN RECEPTACLE 30 27 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.5 1 20 A GEN BATTERY CHARGER 28 25 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.5 1 20 A GEN BLOCK HEATER 26 23 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 24 21 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 22 19 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 20 17 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 18 15 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 16 13 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 14 11 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 12 9 SMOKE DAMPERS 20 A 1 0.9 1.0 1 20 A LCP 10 7 COMMUNITY RM LTG 20 A 1 0.6 0.3 1 20 A EXTERIOR EM LTG 8 5 ELEVATOR CAB LTG 20 A 1 0.5 1.5 1 20 A 1ST FLR LIFE SAFETY LTG 6 3 ELEV SHAFT LTG, REC 20 A 1 0.4 0.2 1 20 A 2-5 FLR LIFE SAFETY LTG 4 1 FACP 20 A 1 1.5 0.0 1 20 A EXIT SIGNS 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES A B C POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LVPLS MECHANICAL AND... ATS-LS 100 A 3Ø, 4W 120/208 WYE SURFACE 22 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM X 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:PANELBOARD SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 19 A TOTAL CONN.: 21 A Receptacle 6040 VA 100.00% 6040 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 7003 VA Lighting 351 VA 90.00% 316 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 7387 VA Heating 1000 VA 65.00% 650 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 27 A 18 A 17 A TOTAL LOAD: 3248 VA 2160 VA 1980 VA 29 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 30 27 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 28 25 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 26 23 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 24 21 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 22 19 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 20 17 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 18 15 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 16 13 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 14 11 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 12 9 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 10 7 HORIZON DIR, MGR REC 20 A 1 0.9 1.0 1 20 A HORIZON HD 8 5 HORIZON OFF, WAIT REC 20 A 1 1.1 0.9 1 20 A HORIZON PROG, MED REC 6 3 SUPPORT HOUSE REC 20 A 1 0.9 1.3 1 20 A HORIZON OFF REC 4 1 HORIZON OFF LTG 20 A 1 0.4 1.0 1 20 A HORIZON COPY REC 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES A (kVA) B (kVA) C (kVA) POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LVPHZ SHARED COPY /... 225 A 3Ø, 4W 120/208 WYE FLUSH 22 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM X 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:PANELBOARD SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 69 A Receptacle 4780 VA 100.00% 4780 VA TOTAL CONN.: 81 A Motor 3494 VA 75.00% 2621 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 14278 VA Lighting 264 VA 90.00% 238 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 16838 VA Electric Range - 3.5 kW ... 8300 VA 80.00% 6640 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 82 A 79 A TOTAL LOAD: 8593 VA 8245 VA 23 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 24 21 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 22 19 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 20 17 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 18 15 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 16 13 1.4 0.0 -- -- SPACE 14 11 VRP-12K 20 A 2 1.4 0.0 -- -- SPACE 12 9 REF RECEPT 20 A 1 X 1.0 4.2 10 7 KIT REC, HOOD FAN/LTG 20 A 1 X 0.7 4.2 2 50 A RANGE RECEPT 8 5 BEDROOM RECEPT 20 A 1 X 0.9 0.5 X 1 20 A KITCHEN RECEPT 6 3 ENTRY, DINING RECEPT 20 A 1 X 0.9 1.1 X 1 20 A LIVING RM RECEPT 4 1 APARTMENT LTG 20 A 1 X 0.4 0.2 X 1 20 A BATHROOM RECEPT 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES AFCI A (kVA) B (kVA) AFCI POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LC214 (TYPE 3)... 100 A 1Ø, 3W 120/208... FLUSH 10 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:LOADCENTER SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 67 A Receptacle 4420 VA 100.00% 4420 VA TOTAL CONN.: 79 A Motor 3494 VA 75.00% 2621 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 13893 VA Lighting 236 VA 90.00% 212 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 16450 VA Electric Range - 3.5 kW ... 8300 VA 80.00% 6640 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 75 A 82 A TOTAL LOAD: 7805 VA 8645 VA 23 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 24 21 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 22 19 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 20 17 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 18 15 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 16 13 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 14 11 1.4 0.0 -- -- SPACE 12 9 VRP-12K 20 A 2 1.4 4.2 10 7 KITCHEN RECEPT 20 A 1 X 0.5 4.2 2 50 A RANGE RECEPT 8 5 KIT REC, HOOD FAN/LTG 20 A 1 X 0.7 1.0 X 1 20 A REF RECEPT 6 3 ENTRY, BEDRM RECEPT 20 A 1 X 1.3 1.3 X 1 20 A MECH, LIV, BEDRM REC 4 1 APARTMENT LTG 20 A 1 X 0.4 0.2 X 1 20 A BATHROOM RECEPT 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES AFCI A (kVA) B (kVA) AFCI POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LC213 (TYPE 4)... 100 A 1Ø, 3W 120/208... FLUSH 10 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:LOADCENTER SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 66 A Receptacle 4240 VA 100.00% 4240 VA TOTAL CONN.: 78 A Motor 3494 VA 75.00% 2621 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 13729 VA Lighting 254 VA 90.00% 229 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 16288 VA Electric Range - 3.5 kW ... 8300 VA 80.00% 6640 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 71 A 84 A TOTAL LOAD: 7363 VA 8925 VA 23 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 24 21 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 22 19 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 20 17 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 18 15 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 16 13 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 14 11 1.4 0.0 -- -- SPACE 12 9 VRP-12K 20 A 2 1.4 4.2 10 7 REF RECEPT 20 A 1 X 1.0 4.2 2 50 A RANGE RECEPT 8 5 KITCHEN RECEPT 20 A 1 X 0.5 0.7 X 1 20 A KIT REC, HOOD FAN/LTG 6 3 ENTRY, LIVING RECEPT 20 A 1 X 1.3 1.1 X 1 20 A BEDROOM RECEPT 4 1 APARTMENT LTG 20 A 1 X 0.4 0.2 X 1 20 A BATHROOM RECEPT 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES AFCI A (kVA) B (kVA) AFCI POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LC202 (TYPE 2)... 100 A 1Ø, 3W 120/208... FLUSH 10 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:LOADCENTER SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 113 A TOTAL CONN.: 145 A Receptacle 5760 VA 100.00% 5760 VA TOTAL EST. DEMAND: 40792 VA Motor 45276 VA 75.00% 33957 VA TOTAL CONN. LOAD: 52230 VA Lighting 1194 VA 90.00% 1075 VA LOAD CLASSIFICATION CONNECTED LOAD DEMAND FACTOR ESTIMATED DEMAND PANEL TOTALS TOTAL AMPS: 142 A 151 A 144 A TOTAL LOAD: 16992 VA 18103 VA 17208 VA 29 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 30 27 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 28 25 SPACE -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- SPACE 26 23 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 24 21 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 22 19 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 20 17 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 6.6 18 15 7.7 6.6 16 13 7.7 6.6 3 70 A DOAS-1 14 11 ODU-1 80 A 3 7.7 0.6 12 9 0.6 0.6 2 20 A BCC-4, FCU-10, FCU-12 10 7 BCC-3, FCU-9, FCU-11 20 A 2 0.6 0.5 1 20 A RADON FANS 8 5 5TH FLR CORR RECEPT 20 A 1 1.6 0.7 1 20 A RADON FANS 6 3 4TH FLR CORR RECEPT 20 A 1 1.4 1.2 1 20 A 3RD, 4TH, 5TH CORR LTG 4 1 3RD FLR CORR RECEPT 20 A 1 1.4 0.1 1 20 A 3RD-5TH FLR EF-3'S 2 CKT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TRIP POLES A B C POLES TRIP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CKT NOTES: LVPH4 I.T. CLOSET 216 225 A 3Ø, 4W 120/208 WYE SURFACE 10 QO TYPE 1 MCB MLO NAME LOCATION SOURCE RATING (AMPS) PHASE/WIRE VOLTAGE MOUNTING KAIC DESIGN MAKE NEMA TYPE HINGED TRIM X 200% NEUTRAL SUB-FEED LUGS SPD SIZE:PANELBOARD SCHEDULE SE RATED SUB-FEED BREAKER FEED-THRU LUGS INTEGRAL SPD METER CENTERMECH AND ELEC 010 METER CENTER METER CENTERMETER CENTERMETER CENTER SHUNT TRIP MECH AND ELEC 010 MECH AND ELEC 010 SHARED COPY/FILES 4TH FLR IT ROOM METER CENTER 2019.11.22-Lakeview-West End Heights-PERMIT SPECS.pdf Project Manual LAKEVIEW HEALTH SERVICES WEST END HEIGHTS 701 W. Court Street Ithaca, New York 14850 Plan Project No.: 001.16.01.02 SHARS I.D.: # 20186081 Architect PLAN Architectural Studio, P.C. 250 South Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, New York 14604 Phone: 585.454.4230 CONSTRUCTION PERMIT DOCUMENTS Date: November 22, 2019 Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 West End Heights SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 0 – GENERAL Section 003121 - Preconstruction Survey of Adjacent Buildings Section 003121.13 – Site Survey Monitoring DIVISION 1 – GENERAL Section 010000 – General Requirements Section 010100 – Instruction to Bidders Section 010150 – Supplementary Conditions Section 010200 – Allowances Section 011450 – Exterior Signage Section 014533 – Code Required Special Inspections and Testing Section 015700 – Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Section 016000 – Product Requirements Section 017000 – Closeout Procedures Section 017419 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal DIVISION 2 – SITE WORKS Refer to Division 31 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 033100 – Cast in Place Concrete Section 033500 – Concrete Sealer (Liquid Densifier) Section 034500 – Precast Architectural Concrete DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 042200 – Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 – METAL Section 051200 – Structural Steel Section 053113 - Fluted Steel Deck Section 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing Section 055000 – Metal Fabrications Section 055001 – Abrasive Stair Tread Nosings Section 055100 – Metal Stairs DIVISION 6 – WOOD Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry Section 061100 – Wood Framing Section 061200 – Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels Section 061713 – Laminated Veneer Lumber Section 061723 – Parallel Starnd Lumber (PSL) Section 061733 – Wood I-Joists Section 061736 – Wood Panel Product Sheathing Section 061743 – LSL Rim Boards Section 062000 – Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 071416 – Fluid-Applied Membrane Waterproofing Section 072100 – Building Insulation Section 072726 – Fluid-Applied Air & Vapor Barriers Section 074213 – Aluminum Composite Metal Wall Panels Section 074400 – Cementitious Panels Section 075500 – Fully-Adhered Membrane Roofing (EPDM) Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 West End Heights Section 077200 – Roof Accessories Section 077300 – Rooftop Support System Section 078100 – Spray-Applied Fire-Resistive Materials Section 078413 – Through-Penetration Firestop System Section 079200 – Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 081100 – Steel Doors & Frames Section 081416 – Flush Wood Doors Section 084113A – Aluminum-Framed Storefronts Section 084113B – Aluminum-Framed Entrances Section 084123 – Fire-Rated Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts Section 084413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Section 085213 – Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows Section 087100 – Door Hardware Section 087200 – Thermally-broken Thresholds Section 088000 – Glazing DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 092116 – Gypsum Board Sheathing Section 093000 – Floor Transitions Section 093013 – Ceramic & Porcelain Tile Section 095100 – Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Tile System Section 095426 – Panelized Linear Wood Ceiling Section 096513 – Resilient Wall Base & Accessories Section 096519 – Engineered Luxury Vinyl Plank Flooring Section 096520 – Reslient Hetorogeneous Sheet Flooring Section 096800 – Carpet Tile Section 098000 – Gypsum Cement Underlayment Section 099000 – Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 102000 – Interior Specialties Cabinetry Section 102800 – Toilet Room Accessories Section 104400 – Fire Protection Specialties Section 108150 – Integrated Pest Management DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 113000 – Appliances DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 122113 – Vinyl Window Blinds Section 122413 – Manual Clutch Window Shades Section 124813 – Recssed Walk-Off Mat Section 129300 – Site Furnishings DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 142123 – Electric Traction Passenger Elevators DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 210010 – Basic Fire Protection Requirements Section 210520 – Fire Protection Valves Section 211010 – Piping Systems & Accessories Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 West End Heights Section 211200 – Fire Standpipe System Section 211310 – Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 220010 – Basic Plumbing Requirements Section 220520 – Valves Section 220530 – Plumbing Identification Section 220550 – Adjusting And Balancing Section 220700 – Insulation Section 221010 – Piping Systems And Accessories Section 221030 – Pumps Section 221100 – Water Supply Section 221300 – Waste Water Systems Section 223010 – Equipment Section 223020 – Domestic Water Heaters Section 225000 – Plumbing Fixtures And Trim Section 227000 – Natural Gas Systems DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 230010 – Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 230030 – Electric Wiring Section 230040 – Painting Of Mechanical Work Section 230060 – Mechanical Identification Section 230500 – Motors Section 230750 – Insulation Section 230990 – Testing, Adjusting And Balancing Section 232110 – Piping Systems and Accessories Section 233100 – Sheet Metal And Ductwork Accessories Construction Section 233300 – Life Safety Dampers Section 233400 – Fans Section 233610 – Variable Refrigeratnt Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Section 233700 – Registers And Diffusers Section 235510 – Unit heaters and Cabinet Unit Heaters (Hydronic and Electric) Section 237433 – Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems Section 238160 – Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems Section 238236 – Electric Fin Tube Radiation DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 260010 – Basic Electrical Requirements Section 260100 – Basic Materials and Methods Section 260510 – Electircal Identification Section 260520 – Grounding Section 260530 – Low Voltage Conductors Section 260550 – Raceways Section 260560 – Underground Ductbank System Section 262410 – Low Voltage Power Distribution Equipment Section 262710 – Service Entrance Section 262720 – Wiring Devices Section 262910 – Motor Control Equipment Section 263200 – Power Generation Section 264300 – Surge Protection Devices Section 265100 – Interior Lighting Section 265600 – Exterior Lighting Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 West End Heights DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS Section 270100 – Cable Plant Overview Section 271100 – Communications Equipment Rooms And Spaces Section 271300 – Backbone Cabling Section 271500 – Horizontal Cabling Section 272000 – Testing, Identification, And Administration DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 281600 – Intrusion Detetction System Section 282000 – Access Control System Section 282300 – Digital CCTV System Section 283110 – Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System Section 283130 – Multiple Station Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Detection DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 310913 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring Section 310916 – Pile Load Tests Section 311000 – Site Clearing Section 312000 – Earth Moving Section 312113.13 – Radon Mitigation (ASSD System) Section 312333 – Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities Section 316216 – Steel Piles DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 321216 – Asphalt Paving Section 321313 – Concrete Paving Section 321400 – Unit Paving Section 321640 – Stone Curbs Section 323129 – Wood Fences and Gates Section 329113 – Soil Preparation Section 329200 – Turf and Grasses Section 329300 – Plants DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 331000 – Water Distribution Section 331300 – Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water System Section 333000 – Sanitary Sewerage Section 334000 – Storm Sewerage APPENDIXES Appendix – A Subsurface Investigation Report Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 West End Heights RELATED DOCUMENTS – CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS t001 Title Sheet t002 Building/Energy Code Information & General Notes t003 Fire-Rating Plans R1 Foundation ASSD System R2 First Floor ASSD System R3 Second Floor ASSD System R4 Third Floor ASSD System R5 Fourth Floor ASSD System R6 Fifth Floor ASSD System R7 Roof ASSD System c101 Existing Site Plan c102 Erosion & Sediment Control Plan c103 Utility Plan c104 Building Location Plan c201 Details c301 Maintenance and Protection of Traffic Plan c302 Maintenance and Protection of Traffic Plan c303 Maintenance and Protection of Traffic Plan c304 Maintenance and Protection of Traffic Plan L100 Staging Plan L101 Demolition L201 Layout Plan L301 Grading Plan L401 Plating Plan L402 Soils Plan L501 Site Details L502 Site Details L503 Site Details s001 General Notes and Schedules s100 Foundation Plan s101 Second Floor Framing Plan s102 Third, Fourth, and Fifth Floor Framing Plan s103 Roof Framing Plan s104 Enlarge Stair Framing Plans s300 Foundation Details s301 Foundation Details s302 Foundation Details s400 Masonry Details s500 Steel Framing Details s501 Column Schedule and Details s502 Braced Frame Elevations s503 Braced Frame Elevations s504 Braced Frame Elevations s505 Framing Details s506 Framing Details s600 Shear Wall Schedule, Elevations & Details s601 Structural Details s602 Framing Details s603 Framing Details Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 6 West End Heights a101 Ground Floor Plan a102 Second Floor Plan a103 Third Floor Plan a104 Fourth Floor Plan a105 Fifth Floor Plan a106 Roof Plan a201 Ground Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan a202 Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan a203 Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan a204 Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan a205 Fifth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan a301 Exterior Elevations a302 Exterior Elevations a303 Exterior Elevations a400 Building Sections a501 Wall Sections a502 Wall Sections a503 Details a504 Details a600 Enlarged Plans and Interior Elevations a601 Enlarged Plans and Interior Elevations (Unit Type 1) a602 Enlarged Plans and Interior Elevations (Unit Type 2) a603 Enlarged Plans and Interior Elevations (Unit Type 3) a604 Enlarged Plans and Interior Elevations (Unit Type 4) a605 Enlarged Plans and Inteior Elevations a606 Enlarged Stair Plans a610 Section Details a701 Ground Floor Finish Plans and Material Legend a702 Second Through Fifth Floor Finish Plans and Material Legend a800 Door Schedule a801 Storefront and Window Schedule a802 Curtain Wall Schedule h01 HVAC General Notes, Legends, and Equipment Schedules h101 Ground Floor Plan – HVAC h102 Typical Floors 2-5 – HVAC h103 Roof Plans - HVAC h601 Enlarged Plans - HVAC h602 Energy Star Qualified Homes Requirements h701 HVAC VRF System Diagrams h702 HVAC Details h703 HVAC Details p001 Plumbing General Notes Legends, Schedules p002 RPZ & RPDA p100 1/16” Floor Plans- Plumbing p101 Foundation Plan – Plumbing p102 Ground Floor Plan - Plumbing p103 Fifth Floor Plan - Plumbing p104 Roof Plans - Plumbing p601 Enlarged Plans – Plumbing p602 Plumbing – Riser Diagrams p701 Plumbing Details Lakeview Health Services TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 7 West End Heights fp001 Fire Protection General Notes, Legends, Details fp101 1/16” Floor Plans – Fire Protection e001 Electrical General Notes and Symbols e100 Site Plan - Electrical e101 Ground Floor Plan – Lighting e102 Ground Floor Plan – Power and Systems e103 Typical Floors 2-5 – Electrical e104 Roof Plan - Electrical e601 Enlarged Plans – Electrical e701 Electrical Details e702 Electrical Details e703 Electrical Wiring Diagrams e704 Electrical Wiring Diagrams e801 Electrical Schedules e802 Electrical Panel Schedules Lakeview Health Services PRECONSTRUCTOIN SURVEY 003121-1 West End Heights OF ADJACENT BUILDINGS SECTION 00 31 21 – PRECONSTRUCTION SURVEY OF ADJACENT BUILDINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The objective of the pre-construction survey is to assess the condition of the buildings within a 100’ distance from pile driving operations for the purpose of developing a preconstruction condition baseline 1.2 REFERENCES A. NYS DOT EI 05-044 Special Specification for Building Condition Survey and Vibration Monitoring (Non-Blasting). B. NYS DOT Item 634.9901 17 Building Condition Survey 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name and qualifications of the firm selected to conduct the Preconstruction Survey. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a firm capable of furnishing a New York State licensed Professional Engineer to conduct a condition survey of the existing buildings shown in Attachment A of this specification. This firm shall have been in business a minimum of 5 years and shall have completed similar pre-construction building surveys on a minimum of 3 previous projects. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTIONwes 3.1 BUILDING CONDITION SURVEYS A. Building Condition surveys shall identify and document the following for each property surveyed: 1. Photographic and videotape documentation of the interior and exterior condition of the building(s). Lakeview Health Services PRECONSTRUCTOIN SURVEY 003121-2 West End Heights OF ADJACENT BUILDINGS 2. Extent and location of existing signs of building distress such as cracks, spalling, signs of settlement, flooding, leaking, etc. B. Provide two copies of all documentation of each building condition survey. C. Information to be provided by the Owner – Consent and Release. 1. The Owner will furnish a list of the address of each property to be included in the Preconstruction Building Survey. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to contact these property owners and/or Occupants and to schedule a Building Condition Survey assessment with them for each property listed. 2. The Owner will provide a Consent Agreement to be signed by each Property Owner and/or Occupant prior to entering their property for the purpose of conducting the Preconstruction Building Condition Survey. 3. The Owner will provide a Release Agreement to be signed by each Property Owner and/or Occupant who declines to allow for the inspection of their property. END OF SECTION 00 31 21 Lakeview Health Services SITE SURVEY MONITORING 003121.13-1 West End Heights SECTION 00 31 21.13 – SITE SURVEY MONITORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Site Survey Monitoring shall consist of horizontal survey measurements taken periodically throughout demolition and construction at established monitoring points, accurate to at least 0.005 feet. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name and qualifications of the firm selected to conduct the Site Survey Monitoring. B. Submit a report of survey monitoring readings monthly and upon request. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a firm capable of furnishing a New York State licensed Surveyor to conduct periodic survey monitoring. This firm shall have been in business a minimum of 5 years and shall have completed similar Survey Monitoring on a minimum of 3 previous projects. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SITE SURVEY MONITORING A. Set a minimum of seven exterior monitoring points at locations agreed to by the Architect and Owner. These monitoring points shall be positioned at locations which will be accessible throughout construction and will not be disturbed by demolition or construction operations. B. Take initial elevation readings with respect to established benchmark (City of Ithaca or NAVD88), accurate to 0.005’. C. Resurvey monitoring points every two weeks during demolition, pile driving, and foundation construction. Resurvey monitoring points monthly from the completion of foundation construction through substantial completion. Lakeview Health Services SITE SURVEY MONITORING 003121.13-2 West End Heights D. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with the original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur. E. Submit a copy of the log to the Architect monthly or upon request. F. Resurvey schedule may be revised upon written approval of the Architect. END OF SECTION 00 31 21.13 Lakeview Health Services GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000-1 West End Heights PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract govern the work of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 WORK OF THIS SECTION A. The following items and such similar items as are indicated on the Drawings or can be reasonably inferred therefrom, constitute the work of this section and shall include all labor, materials, etc. necessary to produce the finished results indicated. 1. General Requrements as indicated below. PART 2 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 LOCATION A. The site location is 701 West Court Street in the City of Ithaca, New York. 2.2 SCOPE A. The work shall be done under one prime contract including: 1. Site Work and Utilities 2. General Construction 3. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection B. The General Contractor is to furnish all labor and materials for the satisfactory completion of all work whether shown or implied in the Construction Documents. C. The General Contractor shall provide all layouts of footings, stairs, ramps, and railings in the locations as called out on the Drawings. Each Contractor shall verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the Drawings as he/she shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the above immediately to the Architect before commencing work. D. All debris shall be removed daily from the building under construction, and the area shall be broom cleaned. E. The Contractor shall provide all necessary measures to protect health, welfare, and safety of the general public, to prevent accidents, to avoid unnecessary hazards and to protect the property to which the work under this contract pertains at all times during the duration of the contract period. 2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and thematerial manufacturer’s recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under that related section. B. Codes and Standards 1. Where described in other sections of the specification as “All Pertinent Codes and Regulations”, the following shall apply: a. The Building Code of New York State (IBC) b. The Energy Conservation Code of New York State (IECC) c. The Fire Code and Property Maintenance Code of New York State d. ICC A117.1 Accessibility Code e. All local community codes and regulations. Lakeview Health Services GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000-2 West End Heights C. Proprietary Products: 1. Unless otherwise specified herein, all proprietary products shall be installed, serviced, finished, and cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications, directions, & recommendations. 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. The Contractor shall clearly label all submitalls of material shop drawings, samples and manuals with the Contractor’s project name and specification number. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 14 days after award of the Contract along with samples and materials list for approval by the Architect before ordering or proceeding with work. C. Samples / Manufacturer’s Literature: 1. Along with shop drawings, samples and manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted within 14 days after award of the Contract for the approval of the Architect before ordering and/or proceeding with work. Size requirement as perspecifications. Minimum of five (5) copies are to be submitted to the Architect for review. 2. All samples shall be the precise article proposed to be furnished. D. Unless otherwise specified by the Architect, deliver five (5) of the samples/manufacturer’s literature or shop drawings to the Architect. E. All material must be clear, typewritten, and when produced by the manufacturer shall be an original document. F. Schedules: The Contractor shall submit to the Architect within 14 days after award of the Contract a projected construction schedule for the entire work. G. Cost Breakdown: Within 14 days after award of the Contract and before commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a detailed estimate breakdown of the Contract price. The estimate is to include, but not be limited to quantities, units of measures, labor and material breakdowns as per the Contract Documents, unit prices, and total prices. H. These requirements shall apply to all items described in the Specifications and Drawings as requiring “Architect’s approval”. 2.5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. The General Contractor shall provide all temporary partitions, barricades, construction stairs, construction office, storage shed for tools and equipment, scaffolding, outdoor toilet facilities and any other provisions necessary for the safe and expeditious process of the work. B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary utilities to complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. The General Contractor shall pay all costs therefore, including costs, fees, permits, etc., for electricity used during construction. If the Owner’s existing electrical power supply is used by the General Contractor, the General Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for electrical power used during the project. C. The General Contractor shall observe the following specific requirements: 1. Bulk storage of gasoline, fuel oil paints and solvents should be kept outside the building. 2. Temporary heating devices and fuel storage shall be approved by the Architect and the Owner in writing prior to its use. Temporary heat shall be provided for this project and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Portable fire extinguishers shall be readily available at the site. 4. No on-site burning shall be permitted. 5. Noise, odor and fumes shall be strictly controlled at all times. The Architect and Owner shall be notified at least four days in advance of any work which may involve harmful fumes or excessive odor or noise. D. Sanitary Regulations: 1. The Contractor shall prohibit and prevent the committing of a nuisance on the site of the work or adjoining property and shall discharge any employee who violates this rule. Toilet facilities shall be maintained in strict accordance with the law. The General Contractor is responsible for maintaining the toilet facilities in a clean and sanitary manner. Lakeview Health Services GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000-3 West End Heights E. Plumbing and Bailing: 1. From the commencement to the completion of the building operations, the General Contractor shall keep all parts of the site and building free from accumulation of water, no matter what the source or cause of water, and to this end, shall supply, maintain, and operate all plumbing and bailing equipment such as, containers, hose, piping, strainers, fuel, power, etc. F. Appearance of Job Site: 1. Resposibility of removing all rubbish and debris including that left by all trades shall be the sole responsibility of the General Contractor and part of the Base Bid. The General Contractor shall be responsible for general appearance and clearing off of the site. The General Contractor shall provide adequate receptacles in all locations and shall make daily disposal of all rubbish and discarded materials. G. The General Contractor shall maintain grounds around the building as found. Damage to the site caused by vehicular traffic or other shall be repaired by the General Contractor at no expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 010100-1 West End Heights 1.1 In case of the Bidder’s finding any discrepancies, errors or ommisions in the Specifications or other documents, or shall he/she be in doubt as to there meaning, he/she shall immediately notify the Architect/Engineer who will issue will issue an Addendum to all bidders clarifying the items in question. No oral interpretation will be given. Should any disagreement or difference arise as to the true meaning of the Specifications on any point concerning the character, acceptability, or nature of the several kinds of work or materials, or construction thereof, the decision of the Architect / Engineer shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all parties to the Contract. The Architect / Engineer shall decide all matters relating to the execution and progress of the Work and his/her decision thereon shall be final. 1.2 Where dimensions are given, they are to be followed in preference to measurements by scale. The larger scale drawings (details) shall take precedents over the smaller scale drawings. If the Contractor desires details of special work, he/she shall apply to the Architect / Engineer. All lettering on the Drawings is to be considered a part of the Drawings. 1.3 The Owner reserved the right to reject any or all Bids. Bids will not be accepted that are not in accordance with the Drawings and/or Specifications or are conditional. 1.4 The Bidders shall supply all requested Unit Prices and Alternates where applicable and these shall become a part of the Contract. 1.5 Each Contractor shall be held responsible for the prompt, faithful and efficient execution of the Work and must keep full control of all Subcontractors and Suppliers and be responsible for them and their work. 1.6 The submission of a Bid will be considered evidence that the Bidder has inspected the Specifications and the Project Site, and that he/she completely understands the conditions. 1.7 The Contractor’s Bid Prices shall be considered as valid for a period of ninety (90) days after receipt of Bids. Unless the Contractor notifies the Owner or the Architect / Engineer that his/her Bid is no longer valid at this time, it will be considered that his/her Bid will remain valid until such notification. 1.8 The General Contractor shall include any Allowances as called for in these Specifications. 1.9 All Bid Documents will be distributed directly to the Bidders in PDF format. Bidders shall be responsible for reproducing their own documents and distributing documents to their subcontractors and vendors. 1.10 Bidders are encouraged to inspect the site prior to submitting their Bid to determine the extent of the Scope of their Work. Questions should be directed to the office of PLAN Architectural Studio, attention Mark Pandolf (585) 454-4230. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 010150-1 West End Heights 1.1 Any items specified by the manufacturer will be provided as specified. Where the phrase “or equal” is used, it will be the option of the Architect / Engineer to determine whether a substitution or proposed substitution is equal to that specified. In no case shall a substitution be provided without the express consent of the Architect / Engineer. 1.2 Five (5) copies of all Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer for review. Note that these Shop Drawings processed by the Architect / Engineer do not supersede or modify the Drawings and Specifications. The purpose of Shop Drawings is to indicate the materials, fabrications, and equipment that the Contractor intends to furnish and install, and for his/her own use in fabricating and installing these items. Any deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between Shop Drawings and Drawings and Specifications discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing review by the Architect / Engineer shall be resolved so that the Architect / Engineer’s Drawings and Specifications control. 1.3 In no event shall any delays or extensions of time be construed as cause or justification for payment of extra compensation to the Contractor. 1.4 Progress payments shall be made on a monthly basis for 90% of the Work completed in that month. Final payment will be made thirty (30) days after satisfactory completion of the Work. Requisitions for the previous month must be submitted by the 10th of the month and will be expedited by the Architect / Engineer. Requisitions shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer on the approved breakdown form. 1.5 The building is designed to conform to the Building Code of New York State (IBC), and the Fire and Property Maintenance Code of New York State. All Work of the Contractor shall conform to this code and to any local ordinances and other applicable authorities. 1.6 The Contractor shall provide any necessary offices and storage sheds he/she may require with the prior approval of the Owner. Consult with the Architect / Engineer before locating these temporary buildings. Storage of materials will not be permitted inside the building. 1.7 The appropriate Contractor shall make application and pay for all permits, licenses and fees required for his/her portion of the Work. 1.8 Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a release of all liens and an affidavit stating that all Subcontractors and Suppliers have been paid in at least a percentage equal to that received by the general Contractor, and in the case of the final payment, these payments to Subcontractors and Suppliers must be for 100% of their Contracts. The above shall be submitted on AIA Documents G706, G706A, and G707. Final payment will not be issued until the above is submitted. 1.9 All mechanics employed on this Project will be persons skilled in the Work which they are to perform. All Work must comply with the quality of workmanship as called for in these Specifications. Any quality of Work not exactly defined in these Specifications shall be assumed to be the best standards of workmanship for that trade. The Architect / Engineer shall determine the acceptability of all workmanship. Any work that is not acceptable shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 1.10 The Architect / Engineer and the Owner’s Representative shall, at all times, have access to the Work and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for the inspection of the Work. The Contractor shall keep the Architect / Engineer informed of the progress of his/her Work. No Work shall be closed or covered until it has been inspected and approved. 1.11 When the Specifications require the Contractor to provide inspection service or tests, such inspection and test shall be made by a laboratory designated by the Architect / Engineer. 1.12 The Contractor shall have a competent Superintendent at the site when requested by the Architect / Engineer and when necessary. They shall at all times have a competent Foreman constantly at the site from the Lakeview Health Services SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 010150-2 West End Heights commencement of the Work of his Contract until the completion thereof. The Contractor’s Superintendent or Foreman shall represent the Contractor during his/her absence and all directions given to him/her shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 1.13 The General Contractor shall provide a sanitary, chemical type, temporary toilet in an agreed upon location acceptable to the Architect / Engineer and the New York State Department of Labor. The toilet shall be maintained by the General Contractor in a clean, sanitary condition for the duration of the Work. 1.14 The Contractor will provide and pay for water necessary for all construction work. The Contractor may use the permanent water service upon its completion, but the cost of this water until final project acceptance by the Owner shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.15 The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary power and lighting. The Contractor shall provide all necessary drop cords and extensions for their own use. The cost of power will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.16 The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any public or private utilities, or Work or others caused by him/herself, his/her employees, or Subcontractors. Damage shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect / Engineer at no cost to the Owner. 1.17 The Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall guarantee all portions of their work for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the Work, unless other wise indicated. The date of final acceptance shall be considered as the date of the check for final payment to the various Contractors. 1.18 The Contractor shall carry the following insurance and shall supply Certificates to that effect prior to commencing Work, in standard ACORD form. The receipt of these Certificates by the Architect / Engineer shall be a condition of the Contract. Any cancellation of insurance will require ten (10) days written notice to the recipients of the Certificates. The Owner and Architect shall be named as an additional insured on said insurance policies. The coverage afforded to Owner under the Contractor’s policies shall be primary to, and non-contributing with any other insurance, primary, excess, or umbrella available to the Owner. If the Contractor fails to procure insurance for the Owner as required, recoverable damages shall not be limited to the cost of premiums of such additional insurance, but shall include all sums expended, and damages incurred by Owner, and their respective insurers, which would have otherwise been paid by the Contractor’s required insurance. Please see the attached ACORD Sample Certificate of Liability Insurance for the required minimum amounts of the following: A. Worker’s Compensation Insurance with statutory limits and Employer’s Liability coverage. B. Commercial General Liability Insurance: C. Automobile Liability Insurance: Covering owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles D. Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance: E. Contractor’s liability insurance issued to and covering the liability for damage imposed by law upon each Subcontractor with respect to all Work performed by said Subcontractor under the agreement. F. Contractor’s protective liability insurance issued to and covering liability for damages imposed by law upon the Contractor with respect to all work under the agreement performed for the Contractor and Subcontractors. G. Completed operation liability insurance issued to and covering the liability for damages imposed by law upon the Contractor and each Subcontractor arising between the date of final cessation of the Work and the date of final acceptance thereof, out of that part of the Work performed by each. It is expressly understood that Work performed under the guarantee or the punch list is applicable under this paragraph. Lakeview Health Services SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 010150-3 West End Heights 1.19 The Owner reserves the right to use any portions of the building and to let other Contracts for work on the site. Such possession and use shall not constitute the acceptance of any portions taken and/or used. 1.20 No bills for extras will be allowed unless the work is ordered in writing. 1.21 Concrete tests shall be taken when and where directed by the Architect / Engineer and /or the Owner’s representative. It will be the duty of the Contractor to make the test cylinders in the standard manner and to deliver them to a laboratory as designated by the Architect / Engineer. The testing laboratory will be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall have a slump test cone on the premises end empty test cylinders. Test results shall be sent directly to the Architect / Engineer for review. 1.22 All sleeves, inserts, and other built-in items necessary for Work by any Contractor, Subcontractor, or other Prime Contractor, shall be installed by the appropriate Contractor ahead of the General Construction Work. It shall be the duty of these Contractors, Subcontractors, and other Prime Contractors to furnish locations, sleeves, and diagrams of chases in ample time to allow the General Contractor to build in these items, and to provide proper supervision to insure correct installation. 1.23 The Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall maintain a broom clean condition around the building at all times. No combustible materials, not to be incorporated in the building, shall be allowed to remain in, or in close proximity to, the building overnight. Upon completion the entire building and site shall be clean, including all surfaces and windows, and left in a broom clean condition. Remove all labels, tags, markings, etc. 1.24 Any pumping to keep the area free of accumulated water will be the responsibility of the General Contractor., including excavations by other Prime Contractors. 1.25 Note that the Contract between Owner and Contractor will be the AIA Document A101 “Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor” (latest edition). 1.26 Note that the AIA Conditions of the Contract, Articles 1-14 (AIA Document A201, latest edition) are a part of these Specifications, are to be included herein. Note that these conditions are applicable to the Contractor, all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all Work specified or indicated on the Drawings. 1.27 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to determine what portions of the Work are to be performed by the various Subcontractors, and the Specifications are intended to be only a guideline as to the Scope of the Work to be performed by each Subcontractor. 1.28 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with any weight that will endanger its safety, and shall be responsible for any damage caused by such action. Consult with the Architect / Engineer prior to storage of materials in the structure. 1.29 The Contractors may not display their firm name nor any advertising matter in or upon the site of the Work without the express permission of the Owner, or Architect. They shall enforce the Owner’s instructions regarding fires, smoking, and sanitation. 1.30 The General Contractor shall provide secure, weathertight temporary enclosures as necessary to protect all areas from weather and intrusion. 1.31 Upon completion, the General Contractor shall apply for and obtain a Certificate of Occupancy. Any fees required shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 1.32 It is emphasized that the occupants of the adjoining properties must continue operations during the construction. The Contractor shall not obstruct access to any portion of the adjoining properties except with Lakeview Health Services SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 010150-4 West End Heights the express consent of the Owner or occupants. Any adjacent property used to access this building must be protected from any damage. Any damage must be repaired at the expense of the Contractor. 1.33 The Contractors shall take special care to avoid fire hazards. Provide hoses, water containers, and fire extinguishers in appropriate locations to assure reasonable coverage. “Reasonable coverage” is defined as protection on each floor not more than two hundred (200) feet from all areas. The Contractors are encouraged to consult with the local Fire Marshal as to the best means of accomplishing this. Smoking in the building is expressly prohibited and the Contractors shall agree to remove any personnel from the project site who persist in violating this restriction. 1.34 The Contractors shall provide competent supervision for their work to the satisfaction of the Architect / Engineer. Any change in job supervision after the start of construction will require the approval of the Architect / Engineer. 1.35 In case of conflicts in equipment locations, in any areas of the building, the various contractors shall, prior to proceeding with their work, contact the Architect / Engineer to coordinate this work. Any conflicting work that is installed without consulting the Architect / Engineer will be at the risk of the contractor performing the work. 1.36 Claims for Damages: The Owner shall not be liable to any Contractor or Subcontractor for damages caused by any breach of Contract, delay in performance, labor dispute, or act of neglect by other Contractors or Subcontractors having contracts for the performance of any portion of the Work. 1.37 Materials Selection: It is the intent of the Owner to herein specify materials or products he/she believes will perform the necessary functions as required. All equipment and material used in the Work shall be new, not previously used (unless so specified) and of the type, grade, size, and characteristics as specified herein. Any material that this Contractor intends to use that is of a manufacturer not mentioned on the Drawings or Specifications must be submitted for approval, shall be subject to removal and replacement with approved materials without additional cost to the Owner. 1.38 Contractor’s Meeting: Contractors agree that when requested by the Architect / Engineer, they will attend and cause their Subcontractors to attend any and all such meetings called by the Architect / Engineer to discuss progress work, material fabrication, delivery status reports, and other project matters. 1.39 Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements for all phases of work at the site, as far in advance of required installation as possible. Verify measurements given on Architect / Engineer Drawings. Report promptly to the Architect / Engineer any variations or discrepancies or lack of progress in Work to any Contractor that will affect the Work or progress of the Project. 1.40 Maintenance Instruction: At completion of the Contract, deliver to the Architect / Engineer fastened in an appropriate binder, two copies of printed instruction, maintenance suggestions, operating instructions, or other technical data delivered with or available for equipment of finish material incorporated into the project. 1.41 Provide shoring, blocking, bracing, and the temporary support to protect all new, existing, and remaining Work. This is the responsibility of the General Contractor. 1.42 Each Contractor is responsible for obtaining and paying for permits, etc. required by the local authorities for use of sidewalks, and public property during construction. The General Contractor shall provide temporary protection for pedestrians, the public, vehicles, and occupants of the building. Comply with all local and State authorities’ requirements for access, public safety, etc. 1.43 The General Contractor shall provide and pay for Winter Conditions and temporary heat needed to complete Work in this Contract. All Winter Conditions materials, equipment, utilities, and labor shall be included in the Base Bid. There shall be no Change Orders for any Winter Conditions. Lakeview Health Services SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 010150-5 West End Heights 1.44 The Owner reserves the right to delete portions of the Contractor’s Work from the Contract, and perform the Work him/herself. 1.45 The General Contractor shall provide all hoisting, scaffolding, implements, trucking, tools, and equipment necessary for the satisfactory completion of the project. 1.46 It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to protect all materials from damage during shipment, storage, and installation by whatever means are necessary. 1.47 Any damage to lawn, landscaping, paved areas, or adjacent properties caused by Work under this Contract shall be repaired to its previously existing condition at the expense of the General Contractor. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ALLOWANCES 010200-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Selected materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum Allowances. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show the actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Include in the Base Bid, the sum of fifteen-thousand dollars ($ 15,000.) for materials and installation, for interior signage as required by code for room identification. Signage shall comply with current version of ICC 117.1 Accessibility Code, and 2015 International Building Code Section 1013.4, and Section 1023.9. B. Allowance No. 2: Include in the Base Bid, the sum of thirty-thousand dollars ($ 30,000.) for materials and installation, for cost of public utilities (water, fire-protection service, electric, natural gas, sanitary sewer, storm sewer) brought to the site property line. This is in addition to what is specified in the Construction Documents. C. Allowance No.3: Misc. Steel for storefront and curtain wall supports. Include in the Base Bid, the sum of ten-thousand dollars ($ 10,000.) for materials and installation, for cost of miscellaneous steel for aluminum storefront and curtain wall supports, in addition to what is currently specified in the Construction Documents. D. Allowance No.4: Maintenance Shed. Include in the Base Bid, the sum of twenty-thousand dollars ($ 20,000.) which is in addition to the credit associated with the reduction in size of the smoking shelter. The maintenance shed shall be constructed with CMU to match the base of the main apartment building with a wood framed and roof overhang. The 11’ x 12’ concrete pad and sidewalk at the far south end of the site shall be relocated to the location of the current smoking structure and used for the maintenance shed. Include low voltage power for lighting and receptacles. END OF SECTION 010200 Lakeview Health Services EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 011450-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL All projects receiving funding from New York State Homes and Community Renewal shall post a Project Sign at the project construction site(s). Sign graphics shall be in accordance with the Project Sign template posted on the NYS HCR website at: https://hcr.ny.gov/hcr-sign-specificati ons. All signs shall meet the following master specification: 1. Include the following text in this order in the middle white band: a. Project name b. Expected completion date c. Developer name (not borrowing entity) d. HCR mission statement as follows, “The mission of NYS Homes and Community Renewal is to build, preserve, and protect affordable housing and increase homeownership throughout New York State.” 2. The Project Sign shall be fabricated by a professional sign manufacturer, per the following specifications: a. Four feet by eight feet medium density overlay exterior grade plywood with grade B surface veneers (MDO B-B EXTAPA). i. Exterior grade printed signs, such as closed cell PVC foamboard, mounted on APA exterior grade sheets are acceptable. b. Lettering and striping shall be uniform with sharp, neat profiles. c. Size of text and logos to be proportional to that shown on the sign template. d. Font: Arial & Arial Bold e. Sign colors: see adjoining sign graphic template file. f. Include the logos for Fair Housing and Equal Opportunity as indicated on the sign template. Sign colors: see adjoining sign graphic template file. g. Projects with dwelling units that are Accessible or Adaptable to applicable building code or other Accessibility standards for mobility impaired individuals shall include the universal symbol of access. 3. A proof of the sign should be sent to your HCR project manager before fabrication and installation. 4. Sign Installation: a. Install sign within one week from commencement of work at the site. b. Submit a photograph of the installed sign to your HCR project manager. c. Install sign in accordance with all laws and codes having jurisdiction. d. Erect sign in a prominent location, secure from vandalism. e. Provide individual signs at noncontiguous scattered site projects. f. Maintain each sign plumb, level and in good condition for the duration of construction. g. Maintain each project sign at the property for 60 days after completion of the construction or initial occupancy, whichever duration is longer PART 2 - PRODUCTS Refer to following page for graphic representation of exterior (NYSHCR) sign required for this project. Lakeview Health Services EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 011450-2 West End Heights END OF SECTION 011450 Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-1 SECTION 01 45 33 – CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Special Inspections and Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the Building Code of New York State, adopted 2002. B. The program of Special Inspection and Testing is a Quality Assurance program intended to ensure that the work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. This Specification Section is intended to inform the Contractor of the Owner’s quality assurance program and the extent of the Contractor’s responsibilities. This Specification Section also serves to inform the Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents of their requirements and responsibilities. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Required inspections and tests are described in the Schedule at the end of this section. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Special Inspector shall have extensive experience in the building design and construction industry, be professionally trained in engineering, and be approved by the Design Professional in Responsible Charge and the Code Enforcement Official. B. The Inspection and Testing Agents, including testing laboratories, shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative and the Code Enforcement Official. C. The following specific requirements for Inspection and Testing Agents may be waived by the Code Enforcement Official. 1. Inspectors performing inspections of soils and foundations shall have an education and background in geotechnical engineering. 2. The testing laboratories shall maintain a full time licensed Professional Engineer on staff who shall certify all test reports. This Engineer shall be responsible for the training of the testing technicians and shall be in responsible charge of the field and laboratory testing operations. 3. Technicians performing sampling and testing of concrete shall be ACI certified Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-2 Concrete Field-Testing Technicians - Grade 1. 4. Inspectors performing inspections of concrete work such as inspections of concrete placement, batching, reinforcing placement, curing and protection, shall be ACI certified Concrete Construction Inspectors or ICBO certified Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector in lieu of being a licensed P.E. or EIT. 5. Inspectors performing inspections of masonry shall be ICBO certified Structural Masonry Special Inspectors. 6. Inspectors performing inspections of structural steel shall be individuals who are either licensed Professional Engineers (P.E.) or Engineers-In-Training (EIT) with an education and background in structural engineering, and ICBO certified as Structural Steel Special Inspectors. 7. Technicians performing visual inspection of welding shall be AWS Certified Welding Inspectors or ICBO certified Structural Steel and Welding Special Inspectors. Technicians performing non-destructive testing such as ultrasonic testing, radiographic testing, magnetic particle testing, or dye-penetrant testing shall be certified as an ASNT-TC Level II or Level III Technician. 8. Inspectors performing inspections of spray fireproofing shall be ICBO certified SprayApplied Fireproofing Special Inspectors. 9. Technicians performing standard tests described by specific ASTM Standards shall have training in the performance of such tests and must be able to demonstrate either by oral or written examination competence for the test to be conducted. They shall be under the supervision the Owner’s Representative and shall not be permitted to independently evaluate test results. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents shall submit to the Owner’s Representative and the Code Enforcement Official for review a copy of their qualifications which shall include the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests. B. The Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested. 1.6 PAYMENT A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents. Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-3 B. If any materials which require Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant which is not located within 100 miles of the project, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the Special Inspector or Inspection and Testing Agents. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or reinspection of work which fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and the Inspection and Testing Agents so that the Special Inspections and Testing may be performed without hindrance. B. The Contractor shall provide adequate OSHA-compliant access for the Special Inspector and the Inspection and Testing Agents, for them to perform their work. C. The Contractor shall review the Statement of Special Inspections and shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector or Inspection and Testing Agents at least 24 hours in advance of a required test, and 3 working days in advance of a required inspection. Uninspected work that required inspection may be rejected solely on that basis. D. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. E. The Contractor shall keep at the project site the latest set of construction drawings, field sketches, approved shop drawings, and specifications for use by the Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents. F. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. All work that is to be subjected to Special Inspection and Testing shall first be reviewed by the Contractor’s quality control personnel. G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety. 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspector or the Inspection and Testing Agents may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector and the Inspection and Testing Agents will not have control over the Contractor’s means and methods of construction. Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-4 C. The Special Inspector or the Inspection and Testing Agents shall not be responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspector or the Inspection and Testing Agents have no authority to stop the work. 1.9 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Statement of Special Inspections will be prepared by the Owner’s Engineer in Responsible Charge. B. The Statement of Special Inspections shall be submitted to the Code Enforcement Official with the application for Building Permit. 1.10 RECORDS AND REPORTS A. Inspection and Testing Agents shall prepare detailed daily reports of each inspection or test and submit to the Owner. Reports shall include: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Name of inspector or technician. 3. Location of specific areas tested or inspected. 4. Description of test or inspection and results. 5. Applicable ASTM standard. 6. Weather conditions (for site inspections or testing). 7. Signature of inspector, or of the individual overseeing the testing. B. The Special Inspector shall report any discrepancies from the Contract Documents found during an inspection. If the discrepancies are not corrected during the inspection, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner’s Representative and Code Enforcement Official. Reports shall document all discrepancies identified and the corrective action taken. C. The Testing Laboratory shall promptly notify the Special Inspector and the Owner’s Representative by telephone, fax or email of any test results which fail to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. The Inspection and Testing Agents shall submit reports to the Owner and Engineer-inCharge within 7 days of the inspection or test. Handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. E. At the completion of the work requiring Special Inspections, each Inspection and Testing Agent, including laboratories, shall provide a statement to the Special Inspector that all work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that all appropriate inspections and tests were performed. 1.11 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall be completed by the Special Inspector and Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-5 submitted to the Owner’s Representative and Code Enforcement Official prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. B. The Final Report of Special Inspections will certify that all required inspections have been performed and will itemize any discrepancies that were not corrected or resolved. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-6 PART 4 – SCHEDULE INSPECTION AND TESTING (Continuous & Periodic is as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED IDENTIFY SPEC SECTION AND PROVIDE CLARIFYING NOTES IF NECESSARY A. Steel Construction 1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and washers. X Applicable ASTM material specifications. AISC ASD, Section A3.4; AISC LRFD, Section A3.3 1704.3 √ Spec 051200 2. Inspection of highstrength bolting. X X AISC LRFD, Section M2.5 1704.3, 1704.3.3 √ Spec 051200 3. Material verification of structural steel. ASTM A 6 or A 568 1704.3, 1708.4 √ Spec 051200 4. Material verification of weld filler materials. AISC, ASD, Section A3.6; AISC LRFD, Section A3.5 1704.3 5. Inspection of welding: a. Structural steel √ Spec 051200 (1) Groove Welds X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 (2) MP Fillet Welds X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 (3) SP Fillet >5/16” X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 (4) SP Fillet <= 5/16” X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 √ Spec 051200 (5) Flr & Deck Welds X AWS D1.3 - b. Reinforcing steel X AWS D1.4 ACI 318: 3.5.2 1903.5.2 6. Inspection of steel frame joint details. X 1704.3.2 √ Spec 051200 B. Concrete Construction 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel, including prestressing tendons, and placement. X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.17.7 1704.4, 1903.5, 1907.1, 1907.7, 1914.4 √ Spec 033100 2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding. AWS D1.4; ACI 318: 3.5.2 1704.4, 1903.5.2 Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-7 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Continuous & Periodic is as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED IDENTIFY SPEC SECTION AND PROVIDE CLARIFYING NOTES IF NECESSARY 3. Inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement. X 1704.4, 1912.5 √ Spec 033100 4. Verify use of required design mix. X ACI 318: Ch. 4, 5.2-5.4 1704.4, 1904, 1905.21905.4, 1914.2, 1914.3 √ Spec 033100 5. Sampling fresh concrete: slump, air content, temperature, strength test specimens. X ASTM C 172, C 31; ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8 1704.4, 1905.6, 1914.10 √ Spec 033100 6. Inspection of placement for proper application techniques. X ACI, 318: 5.9, 5.10 1704.4, 1905.9, 1905.10, 1914.6, 1914.7, 1914.8 √ Spec 033100 7. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. X ACI, 318: 5.11, 5.13 1704.4, 1905.11, 1905.13, 1914.9 √ Spec 033100 8. Inspection of prestressed concrete. X ACI 318: 18.18, 18.164 1704.4 9. Erection of precast concrete members. X ACI 318: Ch. 16 1704.4 10. Verification of in-situ concrete strength prior to stressing of tendons and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. X SVI 318: 6.2 1704.4, 1906.2 Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-8 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Continuous & Periodic is as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED IDENTIFY SPEC SECTION AND PROVIDE CLARIFYING NOTES IF NECESSARY C. Masonry Construction L1 = Level 1 Inspection required for nonessential facilities. L2 = Level 2 Inspection required for essential facilities. In general, schools are not considered essential facilities unless they are a designated emergency shelter. ACI 530/ ASCE 5/TMS 402, Ch. 35 ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/TMS 602, Ch. 35 Masonry Work in this Project requires Level 1 inspection. 1. Verify to ensure compliance: √ Spec 042200 a. Proportions of site prepared mortar and grout. X L1 L2 2.6A 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 b. Placement of masonry units and construction of mortar joints. X L1 L2 3.3B 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 c. Location and placement of reinforcement, connectors, tendons, anchorages. X L1 L2 3.4, 3.6A 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 d. Prestressing technique and installation. X L1 L2 3.6A, 3.6B 1704.5 e. Grade and size of tendons and anchorages. X L1 L2 2.4B, 2.4H 1704.5 f. Grout specs prior to grouting. X L2 3.2D 1704.5 g. Placement of grout. X L2 3.5 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 h. Grouting of tendons. X L2 3.6C 1704.5 2. Inspection shall verify: 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 a. Size and location of structural elements. X L1 L2 3.3G 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 b. Type, size, and location of anchors. X L2 X L1 1.15.4, 2.1.1 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 c. Specified size, grade, and type of reinforcement. X L1 1012 2.4, 3.4 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-9 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Continuous & Periodic is as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED IDENTIFY SPEC SECTION AND PROVIDE CLARIFYING NOTES IF NECESSARY L2 d. Welding of reinforcing bars. X L1 L2 2.1.8.6, 2.1.8.6 1704.5, 2108.9.2.11 e. Cold/hot weather protection of masonry construction. X L1 L2 108 1704.5, 2104.3, 2104.4 √ Spec 042200 f. Prestressing force measurement and application. X L2 X L1 3.6B 1704.5 3. Inspection prior to grouting. X L1 L2 1.12 3.2D, 3.4, 2.6B, 3.3B 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 4. Grout placement. X L1 L2 3.5, 3.6C 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 5. Preparation of grout specimens, mortar specimens, and/or prisms. X L1 L2 1.4 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 6. Compliance with documents and submittals. X L1 L2 1.5 1704.5 √ Spec 042200 D. Wood Construction: Fabrication of wood structured elements and assemblies. X 1704.6, 1704.2 E. Soils 1. Site preparation. 1704.7.1 √ 2. During fill placement. X 1704.7.2 √ Spec 312000 3. Evaluation of in-place density. X 1704.7.3 √ Spec 312000 F. Pile Foundations: Installation and load tests. X 1704.8 √ Spec 31 09 16 & 316216 G. Pier Foundations: Seismic Design Category C, D, E. F. 1704.9, 1616.3 Lakeview Health Services CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTONS West End Heights & PROCEDURES 014533-10 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Continuous & Periodic is as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED IDENTIFY SPEC SECTION AND PROVIDE CLARIFYING NOTES IF NECESSARY H. Wall Panels and Veneers: Seismic Design Category E, F. 1704.10, 1616.3, 1704.5 I. Sprayed Fire Resistant Materials 1. Structural member surface conditions X 1704.11.1 √ Spec 078100 2. Application 3. Thickness X ASTM E605 1704.11.3 √ Spec 078100 4. Density X ASTM E605 1704.11.4 √ Spec 078100 5. Bond Strength X ASTM E736 1704.11.5 √ Spec 078100 END OF SECTION 014533 Lakeview Health Services STORMWATER POLLUTION 015700-1 West End Heights PREVENTION PLAN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) attached to this specification section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Owner has provided the attached Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for construction activities at the project site. The SWPPP includes a certification that the plan complies with applicable local, state and federal regulations for storm water pollution prevention. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Sections. B. Division 31 Section Site Clearing – Section 311000. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall abide by the terms and conditions of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan before initiating any site work. Contractor will be required to sign the certification forms included in the SWPPP. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS A. SWPPP and Erosion Control measures shall be maintained and modified as necessary throughout the course of site construction activities until satisfactory vegetative growth is established to return the site to preconstruction conditions and to prevent impairment of receiving waters, at which time the Contractor shall remove all remaining structures, and properly dispose of accumulated sediment. B. Drainage structures shall be constructed as soon as the necessary grades have been achieved. 1.6 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. At no time shall construction operations or any related disturbance of the site result in the impairment of local waterways. For the purpose of this Section, impairment shall mean either: 1. The release or entry into any receiving water of water more turbid than the receiving water; or 2. The deposition of visible sediment into such waters. B. Any impairment shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor to prevent further impairment. Contractor shall be at all times liable for any enforcement or legal action resulting from such impairment. C. In addition, and without notice to the Contractor, the Owner shall also have the right, based on the Owner’s independent assessment, to stop work or engage other contractor(s) to construct or correct such work as may be necessary to prevent such impairment, and to charge all costs related to such corrective or additional actions against the Contract. D. Reliance on the SWPPP does not in any way imply that the SWPPP will be adequate in preventing impairment of waters, or that maintenance and modification will not be necessary. Rather, acceptance of the Plan authorizes the Contractor to begin installation of the control measures under the assumption the appropriate maintenance and modification will be required throughout the life of the project to meet the project requirements. E. The Contractor’s responsibilities under this Section shall end upon final completion and payment of the Work of the entire Contract. 1.7 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT MEASURES A. As outlined in the SWPPP. 1.8 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES A. As outlined in the SWPPP. Lakeview Health Services STORMWATER POLLUTION 015700-2 West End Heights PREVENTION PLAN 1.9 SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES A. As outlined in the SWPPP. 1.10 INSPECTIONS A. As outlined in the SWPPP. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 015700 Lakeview Health Services PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Division 1 Specifications 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Typically, however, products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor, after the awarding of the contract. The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period and accepted prior to award of Contract. 2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. Compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. D. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. When the Contractor has the option of selecting between two or more products, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected. E. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach manufacturer’s nameplates or trademarks on surfaces exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. Lakeview Health Services PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-2 West End Heights 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 4. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 10 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A, or General Contractor’s equivalent form acceptable to Architect. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. F List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 days of receipt of request, or 5 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. Lakeview Health Services PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-3 West End Heights C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 10 days of receipt of request, or 5 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. Lakeview Health Services PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-4 West End Heights B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 1.8 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. Lakeview Health Services PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-5 West End Heights B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, as prescribed in this section. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, as prescribed in this section. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, as prescribed in this section. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, as prescribed in this section. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. Lakeview Health Services PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-6 West End Heights B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Requested substitution is directly related to an “or equal” clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 5. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 6. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 10. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of products. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017000- 1 West End Heights PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Adjust list below to suit Project. 2. Inspection procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Closeout procedures will be required for each project phase. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Delete items below not applicable or revise to suit Project. 2. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list) based upon the Architect’s Punch List, the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 5. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 8. Coordinate first subparagraph below with Division 08 door hardware Sections. Revise if Owner makes final changeover or if key-control system manufacturer delivers keys directly to Owner. 9. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 10. Complete startup testing of systems. 11. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 13. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 14. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 15. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 16. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 17. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 18. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 19. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Revise five subparagraphs below to match the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." Lakeview Health Services CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017000- 2 West End Heights 3. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 5. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 6. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 7. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 8. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect/Engineer for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. C. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. D. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. E. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS [IMPORTANT] 2.1 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Contractor shall submit quantity of full units equal to five (5) percent of the total amount of each material installed per the following materials as specified: 1. 093013 Ceramic & Porcelain Tile (Including Grout, Sealers, Cleaners, etc.) 2. 095100 Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Tile System 3. 096510 Flooring Thresholds & Transitions 4. 096513 Resilient Wall Base & Accessories 5. 096519 Engineered Luxury Vinyl Plank Flooring 6. 096800 Carpet 7. 099000 Painting 8. 122113 Vinyl Window Blinds 9. 122413 Manual Clutch Window Shades 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering material, contractor shall submit the following: 1. Schedule of Attic Stock Material including: a. Quantity of each material (Units, Cases, Boxes, Gallons, Pounds, Linear Feet, Square Feet, etc.) Lakeview Health Services CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017000- 3 West End Heights PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 FINAL CLEANING A. Cleaning provisions in the General Conditions are limited to rubbish removal and similar activities. B. Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. C. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 1. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. 2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 5. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. 6. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. 7. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 8. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 9. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 10. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 11. Remove labels that are not permanent. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 13. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 14. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 15. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 16. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 17. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 18. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 19. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 20. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 017419-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Construction waste management goals, plan, and records. 1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS A. Reuse, salvage, or recycle non-hazardous waste materials. B. Minimize waste sent to landfills and incinerators. C. Prioritize non-hazardous construction waste management in following order: 1. Reduce amount of waste generated. 2. Reuse material through on-site reuse or off-site salvaging, including sale or donation. 3. Recycle material including diverting materials for secondary uses whenever economically feasible. 4. Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit at landfill. D. Divert minimum 75 percent of construction waste by weight (in tons) or volume (in cubic yards) from landfills and incinerators. E. Calculations may be performed using weight or volume but must be consistent throughout Project. 1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Pro-actively manage construction and demolition waste: 1. Practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing products. 2. Use all reasonable means to divert construction [and demolition] waste from landfills and incinerators, and to facilitate recycling and reuse. 3. Return unused products and overages to supplier, or donate to non-profit group. 4. Carefully install products; avoid removal of ill-timed and poorly installed products. 5. Use centralized cutting areas to facilitate waste collection. 6. Deliver, store, and handle products to prevent damage. B. Require subcontractors and suppliers to participate in waste management efforts. C. Construction waste includes: 1. Excess and unusable construction products. 2. Packaging materials for construction products. 3. Other materials generated during construction process but not incorporated into the Work. D. Give consideration to: 1. Availability of viable recycling markets. 2. Condition of materials. 3. Ability to provide material in suitable condition and in quantities acceptable to available markets. 4. Time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. E. Be responsible for implementation of special programs involving rebates and similar incentives related to recycling of waste. F. Revenues and other savings obtained for salvage and recycling accrue to the Contractor/Construction Manager. G. Ensure that firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal have legal permits for intended uses. Lakeview Health Services CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 017419-2 West End Heights 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: 1. Submit waste management plan within ten days after award of Notice to Proceed and prior to initiating site preparation. 2. Include: a. Name of individual on Contractor’s/Construction Manager's staff responsible for waste prevention and management. b. Actions proposed to reduce solid waste generation and achieve waste management goal. c. Description of proposed methods for recycling and reuse of materials generated, including areas and equipment for processing, sorting, and temporary storage. d. Estimated types and quantities of waste to be generated. e. Name of landfills and incinerators to be used. f. Identification of local and regional reuse programs that will accept waste materials. g. List of waste materials to be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, or recycled. Identify recycling facilities to be used. h. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled or reused, with justification. 3. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format. 4. If required, revise and resubmit plan within ten days after receipt of comments. 5. Distribute copies of approved Waste Management Plan to concerned parties. 6. Update Waste Management Plan periodically through duration of Project to reflect changed conditions. B. Sustainable Design Record Documents: 1. Maintain records to document: a. Quantities of waste generated, in tons or cubic yards. b. Types and quantities of materials diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling, in tons or cubic yards, and diversion location. c. Quantities of waste sent to landfill or incinerator, in tons or cubic yards. 2. Submit summary of waste disposal and diversion to date along with each Application for Payment. 3. Submit hauling receipts or certificates for diverted and recycled materials including material description, hauler name and location, and quantity (by weight) of diverted and recycled materials. 4. Deliver final summary of solid waste disposal and diversion to Architect upon completion of project. 5. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Review and discuss waste management plan implementation and progress at Preconstruction Conference and Progress Meetings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Designate separate areas to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse and return. B. Clearly identify areas and receptacles. C. Keep storage areas and receptacles clean and orderly; prevent contamination of materials. D. Monitor storage areas; correct problems and implement preventative measures. Lakeview Health Services CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 017419-3 West End Heights 1.7 TRAINING A. Provide training of waste management methods to be used at appropriate stages of Project. B. Require participation of all subcontractors. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WASTE COLLECTION A. Provide containers and storage areas to facilitate waste management, clearly identified. B. Handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination by incompatible products and materials. C. Separate materials by: 1. Placing into marked separate containers, then transporting to recycling facility. 2. Placing into single container, then transporting to recycling facility for separation. 3.2 DISPOSAL A. Dispose of nonhazardous waste materials that cannot be reused, recycled, or salvaged at licensed landfill or incinerator. B. Handle, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes in accordance with applicable codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. END OF SECTION 017419 Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-1 West End Heights SECTION 033100 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Cast-in-place (CIP) structural concrete, including; 1. Concrete Formwork and Formwork Accessories 2. Concrete Mixtures and Admixtures 3. Steel Concrete Reinforcement and Accessories 4. Vapor Barrier under Slabs on Grade 5. Curing compounds 6. Grout 7. Crack repair and epoxy adhesives 8. Joint fillers and sealants 9. Waterstop 10. Handling, placing, and constructing 11. Lightweight Concrete composite deck fill. 12. Evaporation Reducer for Plastic Concrete for Elevated Slabs B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Dovetail slot anchors, inserts and reinforcing steel required for the attachment of masonry to concrete. Refer to Unit Masonry-Section 042000. 2. Anchor rods, leveling plates, railing sleeves, brackets, and other embedded items of steel, vinyl, plastic, or other materials. Refer to Structural SteelSection 051200, and Metal Fabrications –Section 055000 or other specification sections where the embedded item is described. 3. Sleeves for pipe, conduit and other items passing through or embedded in concrete. Refer to the specification section where the item is described. C. Related Sections. 1. Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures – Section 014533 2. Unit Masonry – Section 042000 3. Steel Piles – Section 316216 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ACI 301, Section 1.2 - Definitions: 1. Add the following definitions: Cementitious Material: Cementitious materials include cement, ground blast furnace slag and fly ash. Corrosion Inhibitor Admixture: A liquid admixture, calcium nitrite that inhibits corrosion of concrete-embedded steel in the presence of chloride ions. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-2 West End Heights Pumped Concrete: Concrete that is conveyed by pumping pressure through rigid pipe or flexible hose. Water-to-Cementitious Ratio (w/c): An equational value representing quantity in pounds of free moisture available for cement hydration divided by quantity of cementitious materials in pounds per cubic yard concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Work on this project shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301-05 published by the American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, Michigan, except as modified by these Contract Documents. B. Reference publications 1. ACI 301-10: Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 302.1R-15: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 304.2R-96: Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 4. ACI 305.1R-06: Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306R-10: Cold Weather Concreting . 6. ACI 308.1-11: Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 7. ACI 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 8. ASTM C 94/C 94M - 04: Standard Specification for Ready- Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C 494/C 494M - 04: Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 10. ASTM C 311-77 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans For Use As A Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 11. Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-1-01 of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 1.4 STANDARDS PRODUCING ORGANIZATIONS A. Refer to ACI 301-10 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Package: Submit product data for design mix(es) and materials for concrete specified below at the same time as a package. B. Product Data: 1. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete design mix(es) together with name and location of batching plant at least 28 days prior to the start of concrete work. a. Include test results of proposed concrete proportions based on previous field experience or laboratory trial batches in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4. b. Pumped Concrete: Include test results of proposed design mix(es) tested under actual field conditions with the maximum horizontal run and vertical lift required for this project. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-3 West End Heights 2. Portland Cement: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 3. Fly Ash: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers. 4. Air-entraining Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 5. Water-reducing Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 6. High Range Water-reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Brand and manufacturer’s name. 7. Accelerating Admixture (if used): Brand and manufacturer’s name. 8. Aggregates: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers. 9. Light Weight Aggregate: Name and location of supplier and DOT test numbers. 10. Bonding Agent (Adhesive): Brand and manufacturer’s name, and preparation and application instructions. 11. Contraction Joint Fillers: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 12. Waterstop: Brand and manufacturer’s name, and installation instructions. 13. Vapor Barrier: Brand and manufacturer’s name. C. Reinforcing Steel 1. Shop Drawings: Placing drawings for bar reinforcement. 2. Affidavit by the bar reinforcement manufacturer certifying that bar material meets the contract requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 014533-Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures, for Concrete Construction inspection and testing to be performed by the Owner’s Inspection and Testing Agency. B. Qualifications of Crew Pumping Concrete: Workers pumping concrete shall have had at least one year of experience pumping concrete. C. Concrete batching plants shall be currently approved as concrete suppliers by the New York State Department of Transportation. D. Truck mixers for concrete shall be currently approved by the New York State Department of Transportation. E. Pumping equipment for pumped concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. F. Fly ash supplier shall be on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List of Suppliers of Fly Ash”. G. Source Quality Control: The Owner reserves the right to inspect and approve the following items, at his own discretion, either with his own forces or with a designated inspection agency: 1. Batching and mixing facilities and equipment. 2. Sources of materials. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-4 West End Heights H. Pre-Construction Conference: Attend a Pre-Construction Conference at the job site conducted by the Architect’s Representative prior to the start of concrete placement for the purpose of reviewing the requirements and procedures of the Contract Documents. I. Field Quality Control 1. ACI 301, Section 1.6.4.2 - Testing Services: a. Add the following paragraph: 1.6.4.2.e Strength Tests for Pumped Concrete: Prepare strength test specimens and make strength tests from concrete samples obtained at the truck discharge chute and at the end of the pump delivery line in accordance with paragraph 16.3.4.4. 2. ACI 301, Section 1.6.3.3. a. Add the following paragraph: 1.6.3.3.c Make available to the Owner’s Inspections and Testing Agency whatever test samples are required to make tests. Furnish shipping boxes for compression test cylinders. 3. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect’s Representative before using in the work. 4. Test results will be reported by the Owner’s Testing Agency in writing to the Architect’s Representative and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28day tests. 5. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, Windsor probe, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 6. Additional Tests: The Architect shall require additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect’s Representative. The Owner’s Testing Agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified, including all inspection and Engineering fees when non-conforming work is verified. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-5 West End Heights 1.7 DELIVERY A. ASTM C 94/C 94M - 04, Article 13.1 - Batch Ticket Information: In addition to the information required by Paragraph 16.1, also include the following: 1. Type and brand, and amount of cement. 2. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates. 3. Class and brand, and amount of fly ash (if any). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II Portland cement. B. Water: Potable C. Air-entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”. D. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M - 04, Type A, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”. E. High Range Water-reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494/C 494M - 04, Type F, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”. F. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, Water-reducing and retarding, for use in hot weather concreting, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”. G. Accelerating Admixture: Non-corrosive admixture, containing no chloride, complying with ASTM C 494, Type C or E, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”. H. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, including Table 1 (except for footnote A), Class F except that loss on ignition shall not exceed 4.0 percent. I. ACI 301, Section 4.2.1.2 - Aggregates: 1. Add the following paragraph: Fine aggregate for pumped concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 33, except 15 to 30 percent shall pass the No. 50 sieve and 5 to 10 percent shall pass the No. 100 sieve. The fineness modulus of the fine aggregate for pumped concrete shall not vary more than 0.20 from the average value used in proportioning. 2. Add the following paragraph: Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-6 West End Heights Aggregates shall be taken from storage silos or other approved locations that have been tested and approved by the New York State Department of Transportation, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Add the following paragraph: Aggregates shall be listed on the NYS DOT web site as not being susceptible to Alkali Silica Reaction (ASR). https://www.dot.ny.gov/divisions/engineering/technical-services/materialsbureau/fine-coarse-aggregates 4. Lightweight Aggregate: Lightweight aggregate shall comply with ASTM C330. J. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or polyethylenecoated burlap complying with ASTM C 171. K. Chemical Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: ASTM C-309, Type 1D, Class B, with a minimum 18 percent total solids content. No thinning of material allowed. 1. SureCure Emulsion, Kaufman Products, Inc. 3811 Curtis Avenue, Baltimore, MD 21226, (800) 637-6372. 2. Cure & Seal by Symons Corp., 200 East Touhy Ave., PO Box 5018, Des Plaines, IL 60017-5018, (847) 298-3200. 3. Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn/ BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Dr., Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517. 4. Day-Chem Cure & Seal UV 26 percent (J-22 UV) by Dayton Superior Corp., 721 Richard St., Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700. 5. Acrylseal HS by Master Builders/ BASF Building Systems, 23700 Chagrin Blvd., Cleveland, OH 44122, (800) 628-9990. L. Joint Fillers and Sealants (Contraction Joints within the building and in the concrete entry slabs): 1. Elastomeric Polyurethane Joint Sealant a). Sikaflex-1cSL by Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Avenue, Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 b). Sonolastic® SL 2 by BASF Building Systems c). Eucolastic II, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company, 19218 Redwood Road, Cleveland, OH 44110 M. Epoxy Bonding Agent (Adhesive): 100 percent solids epoxy-resin-base bonding compound, complying with ASTM C 881, Types I, II, IV and V, Grade 2 (horizontal areas) or Grade 3 (overhead/vertical areas), and Class B (40-60 degrees Fahrenheit) or Class C (60 degree Fahrenheit and above). 1. SurePoxy HM Series by Kaufman Products, Inc., 3811 Curtis Avenue, Baltimore, MD 21226, (800) 637-6372. 2. Sikadur Hi-Mod 32 by Sika Corporation, 201 1682 Williamsport Road, Marion, OH, 43302 3. Epogrip by Sonneborn/-BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-7 West End Heights N. Waterstop: Water swelling sealant; minimum 3/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; minimum tensile strength (ASTM D 412) 100 psi minimum ultimate elongation (ASTM D 412) 500 percent. 1. MC-2010M by Adeka Ultra Seal Corporation, PO Box 459, Spearfish, SD 57783, (605) 642-3959. 2. Volclay Waterstop RX-101 by Colloid Environmental Technologies Company, Building Materials Division, 1350 W. Shure Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004, (708) 392-5800. O. Reinforcing Steel 1. Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars. 2. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat sheets unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bar Supports; Either of the Following Types: a. Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips. b. Insoluble plastic, with minimum 1,500 psi tensile strength and capable of retaining fabricated shape at temperatures between 5 degrees F and 170 degrees F. c. Solid concrete brick 4. Fabric Reinforcement Supports: a. Uni Zag by Universal Form Clamp, 840 South 25th Avenue, Bellwood, IL 60104, (800)728-1958. b. Continuous Support, “CS” by Dayton Superior, 721 Richard Street, Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700. c. Solid concrete brick 5. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. P. Under–Slab Vapor Retarder – 10 mil thick cross laminated polyethylene sheet vapor barrier complying with ASTM 1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs, Class A. Q. Evaporation Reducer for Plastic Concrete – to be used on all Elevated Composite Slabs. 1. E-CON by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE. 2.2 PROPORTIONING OF MIXES A. Normal weight concrete for concrete foundation pile caps, grade beams, piers and walls, and for all other concrete unless otherwise specified, shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. Slump: Maximum 4 inches; minimum 2 inches before the addition of any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing admixtures (superplasticizers) at the Site. This concrete does not require airentrainment. B. Normal weight concrete for interior slabs, ramps, stairs and footings shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. Slump: Maximum 3 inches; minimum 2 inches before the addition of any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-8 West End Heights reducing admixtures (superplasticizers) at the Site. This concrete does not require air-entrainment. C. Normal weight concrete for exterior slabs, ramps and stairs shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4500 psi. Slump: Maximum 3 inches; minimum 2 inches before the addition of any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing admixtures (superplasticizers) at the Site. This concrete shall be air-entrained. D. Light weight concrete for the elevated composite floor slabs shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi, and a maximum slump of 5 inches. This concrete does not require air-entrainment. Light weight concrete density shall not exceed 110 pcf. E. Fly ash shall be substituted for (Portland) cement in normal weight and lightweight concrete. Fly ash content shall be 30% percent by weight of the required minimum (Portland) cement. Design mix shall be properly adjusted to compensate for the use of fly ash as a partial replacement for (Portland) cement. 1. Adjustments shall include the required increase in air-entraining admixture to provide the specified air content. 2. Lower early strength of the concrete shall be considered in deciding when to remove formwork. E. Slump for Pumped Concrete: When a water-reducing admixture is not used, maximum slump shall be 4 inches. When a water-reducing admixture is used, maximum slump shall be 6 inches and when a high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizers) is used, maximum slump shall be 8 inches. F. Design Air Content: Design air content for concrete required to be air entrained (exterior concrete) shall be 6 percent by volume, with an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent for total air content, except as otherwise specified. Use air-entraining admixture, not air-entrained cement. Concrete to be air-entrained shall be exterior foundation walls and piers, and exterior slabs, ramps, and stairs. G. Water-Cement Ratio: Cast-in-place concrete shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.45. Interior slabs shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.50. H. ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.3: Change article to read as follows: 4.2.2.3 - Size of Coarse Aggregates: 4.2.2.3.a Normal Weight Concrete: Coarse aggregates shall conform to graduation requirements for various sizes as tabulated in Table No. 2 of ASTM C 33. The sizes of coarse aggregates for various classes of Work shall be as follows with all percentages being determined by weight. 4.2.2.3.d For concrete Work having a minimum cross-sectional dimension of not more than 6 inches, the coarse aggregate shall be a well graded mixture of No. 67 (3/4” to No. 4) and No. 57 (1” to No. 4), provided that not more than 50 percent nor less than 30 percent shall be Size No. 67 and not more than 70 percent nor less than 50 percent shall be Size No. 57. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-9 West End Heights 4.2.2.3.e For concrete Work having a minimum cross-sectional dimension greater than 6 inches and not more than 12 inches, excluding filling ICF walls, the coarse aggregate shall consist of a mixture of No. 67, No. 57 and No. 467 (1 ½” to No. 4), providing that not more than 25 percent nor less than 10 percent shall be Size No. 67 and not more than 40 percent shall be Size No. 467. 4.2.2.3.f For concrete Work having a minimum cross-sectional dimension of more than 12 inches, the coarse aggregate shall consist of a mixture of No. 67, No. 57 and No. 357 (2” to No. 4), providing not more than 25 percent nor less than 10 percent shall be Size No. 67 and not more than 40 percent shall be Size No. 357. 4.2.2.3.g. For Lightweight Concrete (1.5” concrete over 9/16” non-composite steel deck), maximum course aggregate shall be Size No. 8 (1/2”). I. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in concrete unless specified or approved in writing by the Architect. J. ACI 301, Section 4.1.2.1 - Mixture Proportions: 1. Add the following to paragraph 4.1.2.1: Proposed design mix(es) for pumped concrete and the pumping equipment shall have been tested under actual field conditions with the maximum horizontal run and vertical lift required for this project. 2.3 JOINTS A. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.6 - Construction joints and other bonded joints: 1. Delete the following subparagraphs: Use an acceptable surface retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations; Roughen the surface in an acceptable manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate, or damaged concrete at the surface; or B. ACI 301, Section 10.2.5 – Isolation-joint filler materials: 1. Add the following paragraphs: Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, expansion joints shall be as follows: In joints required to receive a sealant, the joint filler shall be 1/2 inch thick and recessed as required to form a caulking slot. In joints not required to receive a sealant, the joint filler shall be 1/2 inch thick and extend through the full cross-section of the concrete. Tool edges of concrete with 1/8 inch radius edging tool. 2.4 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE A. Provide ready-mixed concrete, either central-mixed or truck-mixed, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Architect. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-10 West End Heights B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.1 Weather considerations 1. Delete paragraph under 5.3.2.1.c - Hot Weather, and add the following: 5.3.2.1.c Provide adequate controls to insure that the temperature of the concrete when placed does not exceed 90 degrees F., and make every effort to place it at a lower temperature. The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not be so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. Ingredients may be cooled before mixing by shading the aggregates, fog spraying the coarse aggregate, chilling the mixing water or other approved means. Mixing water may be chilled with flake ice or wellcrushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing, providing the water equivalent of the ice is calculated into the total amount of mixing water. C. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placement and curing. 1. In cold weather, comply with ACI 306R. a. When air temperature is below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) heat the mixing water and, if necessary, the aggregates to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and not more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement. If the mixing water is heated, do not exceed a temperature of 140 degrees F at the time it is added to the cement and aggregates. 2. In hot weather, comply with ACI 305R. a. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C ) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not use items of aluminum for mixing, chuting, conveying, forming or finishing concrete, except magnesium alloy tools may be used for finishing. B. Check items of aluminum required to be embedded in the concrete and insure that they are coated, painted or otherwise isolated in an approved manner. C. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. D. Hardened concrete, reinforcement, forms, and earth which will be in contact with fresh concrete shall be free from frost at the time of concrete placement. E. Do not deposit concrete in water. Keep excavations free of water by pumping or by other approved methods. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-11 West End Heights F. Prior to placement of concrete, remove all hardened concrete spillage and foreign materials from the space to be occupied by the concrete. 3.2 ADMIXTURE ADDITIONS AT THE SITE A. Site additions shall be limited to high-range water-reducers, non-chloride accelerators, and corrosion inhibitors. Comply with manufacturers’ printed instructions for discharge of admixtures shall be furnished. B. High-Range Water-Reducers: 1. Concrete shall arrive at a slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm). Water additions at the Site shall be limited to comply with water-to-cementitious ratio requirements. 2. Following addition of high-range water-reduced concrete, a minimum of 70 revolutions or 5 minutes of mixing shall be completed to assure a consistent mixture. C. All concrete with other admixture additions shall mix a minimum of 70 revolutions or 5 minutes to assure a consistent mixture. 3.3 PLACING A. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.3 Conveying equipment: 1. Add the following paragraphs: 5.3.2.3.d When pumping concrete, the lubricating mortar for the delivery line shall not be discharged into an area of concrete placement. 5.3.2.3.e The inside diameter of the delivery lines for pumped concrete shall be the greater of either a minimum of 5 inches or 3 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate. B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.2 - Conveying: 1. Add the following paragraph: Operation of truck mixers and agitators and discharge limitations shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94. C. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.4 - Depositing: 1. Add the following paragraph: Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet. 3.4 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS A. ACI 301, Section 5.3,7 – Repair of surface defects: 1. Add the following paragraph: 5.3.7.1.a Finish patched areas to match the texture of the surrounding surface. B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.7.2 - Repair of tie holes: 1. Delete last paragraph in 5.3.7.2 and replace with the following: Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-12 West End Heights The patch mixture shall consist of a mixture of dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for placing and handling. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes below: 1. Rough Form Finish for concrete surfaces not exposed to view. 2. Smooth Form Finish for exterior concrete surfaces exposed to view. 3. Grout Cleaned Finish for interior concrete surfaces exposed to view. B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.3.3 - As-cast Finishes: 1. Add the following to paragraph 5.3.3.3: Fins shall be completely removed on surfaces to receive waterproofing. 3.6 SLABS A. Slabs On Grade: Provide saw-cut type joints unless otherwise shown, using the early entry dry saw-cut method. Saw-cut slabs within 4 hours of completion of final finish work. Cut slabs to ¼ of their depth. B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.4 – Finishing unformed surfaces: 1. Add the following paragraph to section 5.3.4.1 Placement: Provide monolithic finishes on concrete floors and slabs without the addition of mortar or other filler material. Finish surfaces in true planes, true to line, with particular care taken during screeding to maintain an excess of concrete in front of the screed so as to prevent low spots. Screed and darby concrete to true planes while plastic and before free water rises to the surface. Do not perform finishing operations during the time free water (bleeding) is on the surface. C. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes below: 1. Floated Finish for: a. Slabs and fill over which waterproofing, roofing, vapor barrier, insulation, terrazzo, or resin bound flooring is required. 2. Troweled Finish for: a. Interior slabs that are to be exposed to view. b. Slabs and fill over which resilient wood flooring, resilient tile or sheet flooring, carpet, or thin-film coating system is required. c. Slabs and fill over which thin-set ceramic tile is required, except fine-broom finished surface. Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-13 West End Heights d. Treads and platforms of interior steps and stairs. 3. Broom or Belt Finish for: a. Exterior slabs. b. Treads and platforms of exterior steps and stairs. Texture as approved by the Architect’s Representative. D. ACI 302 Chapter 8.2.8.2 - Tools for jointing; Saw-cutting. 1. Add the following paragraph: Early-entry dry-cut saws are preferred in place of conventional wet-cut saws. E. Floor flatness and levelness tolerances: For flatness and levelness tolerances of floor slabs refer to ACI 302 Chapter 8.15. Floor surface tolerances shall be 1/8 inch over a horizontal distance of 10 feet in any direction, unless otherwise specified by floor profile quality classifications in ACI 302.. 1. When flatness or levelness tolerances are not met then the floor shall be ground or scarified and repoured to meet specifications. F. Elevated composite slabs are to receive an evaporation reducer equal to E-Con by L&M Construction Chemicals to reduce surface crusting and plastic phase shrinkage cracks. Install E-Con at the proper dilution rate by spraying on the slab immediately after bull floating and during finishing operations. Do not puddle. E-Con is not a curing compound and does not replace proper slab curing. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Cure all exposed concrete using supervised wet cure or an approved curing compound. B. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305R whenever the atmospheric temperature or the form surface temperature is at or above 90 degrees F., or climatic conditions of wind and/or low humidity will cause premature drying of the concrete. C. Curing Temperature: Maintain the temperature of the concrete at 50 degrees F. or above during the curing period. Keep the concrete temperature as uniform as possible and protect from rapid atmospheric temperature changes. Avoid temperature changes in concrete which exceeds 5 degrees F. in any one hour and 50 degrees F. in any 24-hour period. D. Curing of Slabs to Receive Moisture-Sensitive Finish Flooring, including vinyl composition tile (VCT), rubber flooring, sheet vinyl, resilient tile, carpet, ceramic tile, wood flooring, and laminates: - Cure the slab by covering with a moisture retaining cover as defined above for a period of 7 days. - Do not add water (ponding or wet bulap) - Do not use curing compounds or cure-and-seal materials unless approved in writing by the Architect. Architect will require written approval from the adhesive Lakeview Health Services CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-14 West End Heights and floor covering manufacturer that the curing compound or cure-and-seal material will not compromise the adhesion of the floor covering to the concrete slab, and will not require removal of the curing compound or cure-and-seal material prior to placement of the finish floor covering. END OF SECTION 033100 Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE SEALER 033500-1 West End Heights (LIQUID DENSIFIER) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. 030000 Concrete 1.2 SUMMARY A. “Euco Diamond Hard” sealer is unique blend of silicate and siliconate polymers that penetrate concrete surfaces and chemically react to provide an increase in surface density, durability and abrasion resistance. 1.3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer: ISO 9001 quality certified as primary manufacturer of specified products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Euclid Chemical Co. 1. Mailing Address: 19215 Redwood Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44110 2. Phone: 1.800.321.7628 3. Website: euclidchemical.com 2.2 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Liquid Densifier Sealer: 1. Model: Euco Diamond Hard: High performance, deeply penetrating concrete densifier; odorless, colorless, VOC compliant, non-yellowing silicate and siliconate based solution designed to harden, dustproof and protect concrete floors and to resist black rubber tire marks. The compound must contain a minimum solids content of 20% of which 50% is siliconate. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to installation; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Product Material Safety and Data 2. Product Warranty 3. Manufacturer Certificate: Indicating products listed on Contractor's Product List are compatible and suitable for the specified application. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 PREPARATION A. When used on existing concrete, prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry and free of standing water. 2. Remove dirt, dust, oil, grease, sealers, and other materials that may prevent penetration liquid densifier sealer. 4.2 APPLICATION A. Apply Liquid Densifier Sealer in strict accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. Spray, squeegee or roll on liquid to clean, dry concrete surface at a rate no greater than 225 sq. ft. per gallon. The liquid shall be scrubbed into the surface with a mechanical scrubber. Keep the surface wet for a minimum of 30 minutes with the Liquid Densifier Sealer during the application process. When the product thickens, but not more than 60 minutes after initial application, the surface shall then be squeegeed or vacuumed to remove all excess liquid. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE SEALER 033500-2 West End Heights (LIQUID DENSIFIER) 1. Do not leave any residue on surface. 2. Do not track material on to untreated surfaces. 4.3 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL 034500-1 West End Heights CONCRETE Part 1 – GENERAL This section includes specification information for: A. Precast concrete sills. Refer to the Elevations and Wall Sections in Drawings for sill profile and additional information. 1.1 REFERENCES: A. Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 117 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" - 3rd Edition, primarily Appendix J. B. Prestressed Concrete Institute's "Architectural Precast Concrete Design Manual, 2nd Edition". C. ASTM standards as stated herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This specification covers all labor, materials and services for the furnishing and setting of the integrally colored architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the drawings and specifications herein. B. The Fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in fabrication of architectural precast concrete units, similar to units required for this project. Fabricator must be an APA (Architectural Precast Association) Certified Plant or a PCI (Prestressed/Precast Concrete Institute) certified Plant for category AT or A1 (Architectural Precast). Fabricator must adhere to procedures that are applicable to the manufacturing of Architectural Precast Concrete trim pieces as outlined in Appendix J of PCI MNL-117 (Latest Edition) and the PCI Design Manual (Latest Edition). 1. Qualified Fabricators: a. Steps Plus, Inc., 6375 Thompson Rd., Syracuse, NY 13206, web: steps-plus.com, ph.: 315-432-0806, fax: 315-432-0612. b. An architect approved fabricator that can submit all of the following: i. Proof of APA Plant Certification or proof of PCI Certification for category AT or A1. ii. Brochures or photos showing integrally colored precast from at least three previous projects that are of acceptable appearance in the opinion of the Architect. Names and locations of projects must be provided. iii. At least three test reports less than 12 months old showing that the 5000 psi compressive cylinder strength and absorption requirements (less than 5%) called for in this specification can be met. Tests must have been performed by a professional testing laboratory. iv. List of five successfully completed precast jobs at least five years old that include project name, location, General Contractor, and Architect. 2. Under no circumstances shall items labeled as precast concrete be cast in the field. C. The setting contractor shall unload, store, protect, and install as covered by this Specification and shall provide and install all anchors and accessories for same. The setting contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years successful experience in erection of architectural precast concrete units similar to units required for this project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. A. Fabricator information as listed above under section 1.2-B-1-b if the proposed fabricator is not listed as a qualified manufacturer. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Prepared by an experienced professional detailer showing complete information for fabrication and installation of precast concrete units. a. Show layout, dimensions, and identification of each precast unit corresponding to sequence and procedure of installation. b. Make design modifications only as necessary to meet field conditions and to ensure proper fitting of the work and only as acceptable to the Architect. Lakeview Health Services PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL 034500-2 West End Heights CONCRETE 2. The Fabricator shall submit the shop drawings to the General Contractor who shall verify all drawing dimensions and coordinate the shop drawings with field conditions and other trades. The General Contractor shall submit the shop drawings to the Architect for approval. The Fabricator shall not start production until the shop drawings are approved by the Architect and General Contractor in writing. C. Samples 1. Minimum size - 6" x 6" x 2" to illustrate the quality, color, and surface finish texture. 2. Color: Fabricator must develop a custom colored mix to match a colored sample provided by the Architect. The color sample to match would either be an earthtone color shade (such as: Grey Limestone, Indiana Limestone, off-white, buff, brown, brick orange, brick red, light gray, dark gray, dull yellow) or pure white. Painted, stained, or coated precast is not acceptable. Unless otherwise noted, all the precast units on the project will be the same color and of the same mix design. 3. Texture: Smooth, dense, fine-grained texture achieved by acid etching to thoroughly remove all surface cement paste. D. Sealer Product Data: If any of the precast includes exterior stair treads or other units that may come in contact with salt or other deicing compounds, those units, and only those units, must be sealed with a penetrating sealer after they are installed and cleaned. The installer shall submit product data on the proposed penetrating sealer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times to assure continuity of installation. Store units at project site to prevent cracking, distortion, warping, staining, or other physical damage and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points as shown on final shop drawings. Part 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or other acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces per the approved sample. Maintain form work to provide completed precast concrete trim units within specified fabrication tolerances. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. All precast concrete units shall be reinforced with new billet steel reinforcing bars, as necessary for safe handling, setting and structural stress, and the size of the reinforcing shall be specified with a minimum area of steel equal to one quarter of one percent of the cross section area. If the surfaces are to be exposed to the weather, the reinforcement shall be galvanized or epoxy coated when covered with less than 2 inches of material for bars larger than 5/8 inch and 1-1/2 inches for bars 5/8 inch or smaller. The material covering in all cases shall be at least twice the diameter of the bars. 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 2. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775. 3. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, Class II (2.0 oz. zinc psf), hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending. 4. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. B. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class I) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2). 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, Color to be white or gray as required to achieve proper color as determined by the Architect. Color shall be Steps Plus “Grey 50-50” or other color selected by architect from full range of available colors. Lakeview Health Services PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL 034500-3 West End Heights CONCRETE B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Color to be white. Darker aggregates may be used as long as the proper color mix is achieved as determined by the Architect. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Color to be white. Darker aggregates may be used as long as the proper color mix is achieved as determined by the Architect. D. Pigments: ASTM C 979; Inorganic, nonfading, resistant to lime and other alkalis. Pigments not to exceed 10% of the cement weight. E. Water: Drinkable, free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete or cast in steel. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Water-Reducing, Retarding, or Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, type as selected by Fabricator and containing not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. 2.4 CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Anchors - Non-corrosive; galvanized, brass or stainless steel type 304. B. Finish of Other Steel Units (Plates, braces, etc.): Units exposed to weather to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, ASTM A 153; Units not exposed to weather to be painted with one coat of rust-inhibitive primer; threaded inserts cast into precast units, hot-dip galvanized, electrogalvanized, or cadmium plated. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Unless otherwise noted, all the precast units on the project will be the same color and of the same mix design. Design mixes may be prepared by independent testing facility or by qualified precast manufacturing plant personnel, at precast fabricator's option. B. Mix Properties: Standard-weight concrete consisting of specified portland cement, aggregates, pigments, admixtures, and water to produce the following properties; 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 5000 psi at 28 days using 6" x 12" cylinders per ASTM C3986. 2. Total Air Content: Not less than 4% nor more than 7%. 3. Water Absorption: Not to exceed 5% by weight when tested per ASTM C 642. 4. Color: As selected by Architect per the approved precast concrete sample. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Tolerances of Finished Units: In accordance with Appendix J (Architectural Trim Requirements) in PCI MNL - 117 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" (3rd Edition) and PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete Design Manual, 2nd Edition". B. Fabricate units straight, smooth, and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and corners formed or stoned to a minimum radius unless otherwise indicated. C. Testing: Tests to be performed by a certified testing laboratory. Testing to be paid for by the Fabricator. Results to be kept on file for at least two years and submitted upon Architect's request. No testing is required on projects where the total volume of concrete is under 25 CF. 1. Perform one set of 6" x 12" cylinder tests for every 500 cubic feet of concrete placed. 2. Perform one absorption test for every 500 cubic feet of concrete placed. D. Curing: Cure units in a warm, moist, totally enclosed curing room for a minimum of 20 hours. E. Cast-In Items: Fabricator to provide reglets, slots, holes, inserts, and other accessories in units to receive dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, anchors and other similar work as indicated. F. Surface Finish: Remove all surface cement paste by means of acid etching to provide a smooth, dense, fine-grained texture with no streaks or blotches. Texture and quality of finish to be generally equal to the approved sample when viewed in direct daylight at a 10 foot distance. G. Color: The color shall be generally equal to the approved sample when viewed in direct daylight at a 10 foot distance. Color variation between pieces shall be minimal. Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Lakeview Health Services PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL 034500-4 West End Heights CONCRETE A. Anchorages: The Setting Contractor is to provide loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other miscellaneous loose steel shapes not provided by other trades, necessary for securing precast units to supporting and/or adjacent members. B. Do not install any precast units that have any defects that exceed the acceptable PCI MNL-117 tolerances for dimensions and color if installation would result in unsatisfactory performance or appearance in the opinion of the Architect. C. Install precast concrete members plumb, level, and in alignment in accordance with PCI MNL-117 erection tolerances and the contract documents. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as members are being permanently connected. D. Protect the precast units from discoloration and staining when washing down the surrounding masonry by covering the precast units with plastic sheeting and/or by thoroughly soaking them with clear water to prevent dirty washdown water from being absorbed into them. If dirty washdown water gets on the precast, hose it off immediately with clear water. E. Patching: The repair of chipped or damaged precast shall be done with materials and instructions furnished by the Fabricator. The precast shall show no obvious repairs or imperfections other than minimal color variations when viewed with the unaided eye under good typical day lighting at a 20 foot distance. F. Cleaning: Before pointing and/or caulking, the face of all precast shall be scrubbed with a fiber brush, using mild detergent and water and shall then be thoroughly rinsed with clean running water. Any mortar on the face of the precast shall be removed. No acids or prepared cleaners shall be used without the approval of the precast Fabricator. G. Sealing: Only exterior stair treads and other units that may come in contact with salt or other deicing compounds must be sealed with a penetrating sealer approved by the Architect. The sealer is to be applied in accordance with the sealer manufacturer's instructions after the units have been installed, cured, patched, and cleaned. Do not apply sealer before installation since it may prevent mortar, joint sealant and patches from adhering. 3.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable standards for inspection and quality control shall be Appendix J (Architectural Trim Requirements) in PCI MNL - 117 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" (3rd Edition) and PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete Design Manual, 2nd Edition". B. The Architectural Precast Concrete units shall show no obvious repairs or imperfections other than minimal color variations when viewed with the unaided eye at a 20 foot distance in good typical daylight illumination. C. Any unacceptable precast units that can not be repaired to the Architect's satisfaction in accordance with the aforementioned criteria are deemed unacceptable and are to be replaced by the Contractor. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Block enhancer / sealer. 9. Masonry control and expansion joints (see Division 7 for Sealants and Expansion Joints). B. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7 3. Expansion Joint Materials, furnished under Division 7 4. Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1. For all Load-Bearing Concrete Unit Masonry: f'm = 2000 psi (17.2 Map). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required. 2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. 2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-2 West End Heights a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. b. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 4. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 5. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 6. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory. G. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140. 2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C 1314. 3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270. 4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-3 West End Heights B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified: 1. Decorative CMU: Barnes & Cone Architectural Masonry, Syracuse, NY, 315.701.7717, sales representative Maryanne Cronin 315.701.7717. . 2. Standard CMU: Other Architect approved equivalent product Manufacturer / Supplier. B. Equivalent Product Prior Approval Option: As an option for Bidders, consideration of substitutions of equivalent products can be administered through the pre-bid approval process as follows: 1. Substitutions will be considered prior to the receipt of Bids with a written request for approval received by the Architect at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-4 West End Heights information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. 2. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to the receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for sills, lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, pilasters, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners. 3. Provide special shaped corner units for 4” width units. B. Concrete Masonry Units for Decorative Veneer CMU only: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2000 psi.. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 4 inches nominal: 3-5/8” actual as noted on drawings 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. 6. Provide all special shapes where required for lintels, jambs, corners, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 7. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description matching color, pattern, and texture of Architect's samples. Decorative block units to be incorporated into the design are manufactured by Barnes & Cone, Syracuse, NY. a. Normal-weight aggregate, ground-faced finish. 1) Provide units made with aggregate matching aggregate in Architect's sample. b. Normal-weight aggregate, decro-faced finish. 8. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture. a. Integral Water Repellent CMU shall comply with the spray bar performance criteria of the National Concrete Masonry Association’ Tek 19-7 “Characteristics of Concrete Masonry Units with Integral Water Repellent.” b. All Integral Water Repellent CMU delivered to the jobsite shall be labeled as Integral Water Repellent Units. c. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10. 2) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. 3) Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel. 4) ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc™ d. All Integral Water Repellent CMU shall be installed with the CMU manufacturer recommended Integral Water Repellent Mortar Admix. 9. Control Joints: Shall be installed according to NCMA Tek 10-2c. The Distance between control Joints should not exceed the lesser of 25 feet or a length to height ratio of 1-1/2 to 1. (Refer to Elevation Drawings for exact locations.) 10. Mortar: Provide mortar as follows: 1) Use ASTM C-270 Type S Mortar for foundations. Use ASTM C-270 Type N or Type S Mortar with 8” high units. Use ASTM C-270 Type N Mortar with 4” high units. 2) Mortar Color 012112 GALWAY GRAVEL shall be similar to color CMU mix design. 3) All mortar used with integral water repellent units shall contain the recommended amount of RainBloc Mortar additive. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-5 West End Heights 11. Sample Panel Mock-up: Construct a masonry sample panel per the “Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures”. All submittals should be approved before the sample panel is constructed. Materials used in the sample panel should be selected and supplied by the manufacturer using masonry units manufactured for this specific project so the full range of colors, textures and aggregate variegation for this project can be demonstrated in the panel. This shall include any special shapes (i.e. return blocks). Materials used in the sample panel should be selected and supplied by the manufacturer. Do not build a sample panel on the jobsite from one or two pallets of material after they have been delivered. This practice may show the range of those pallets, but does not demonstrate the full range of color, texture and aggregate variegation that will be seen on the project. The representative of the owner may choose to use more than one type of mortar joint color in the sample panel to help make final choices as to the finished appearance. After a cleaning procedure has been approved, it should be demonstrated on the sample panel. The sample panel shall be constructed by the mason contractor selected for the project before the masonry work begins and should not be removed or destroyed until all work has been accepted. The sample panel will be used to evaluate if the appearance and construction of the finished masonry work meets the requirements of the contract documents. 11. Cleaning: All exposed masonry surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all stains, efflorescence, mortar or grout droppings, and debris. As part of the submittal process include the manufacturer’s written cleaning recommendations for each type of masonry product to be used on the project, along with the cleaning materials and procedures you propose using on this project. After the cleaning materials and procedures have been approved, they should be demonstrated on the sample panel Care should be taken to keep the walls as clean as possible during construction to minimize the need to clean. When cleaning masonry try the gentlest possible means first. Be aware that improper execution of approved cleaning materials and methods can be unsuccessful or damage the masonry. In addition to the sample panel, test sections should be cleaned prior to attempting to clean the entire wall. Carefully monitor procedures and materials during the entire process to determine your success and prevent any damage to the masonry. D. Concrete Masonry Unit Schedule: 1. CMU-1: Non-decorative “Standard” CMU. Size/Profile: Per Drawings. Product/Manufacturer: Barnes & Cone, or architect approved equal. Finish / Color: Standard Grey. Locations: Stairwell Shafts, Elevator Shafts, and other areas as defined on the Drawings. Mortar Color: Standard Grey. Sales Representative: Maryanne Cronin, Barnes & Cone Architectural Masonry, Syracuse, NY, (315) 701-7717. 2. CMU-2: “Decorative” CMU - Ground-Face Block (Exterior: At Base of Building Perimeter per Exterior Elevations). Product/Manufacturer: Barnes & Cone Ground Face CMU. Size/Profile: Per Drawings. Note: Provide finished return block shapes at all openings (including, but not limited to: doors, windows, and etc.). This means that all exposed faces of cmu shall have a ground-face finish. The contractor shall provide an example of return block in their mock-up. Finish: Ground-Face with Phylon WB enhancing coating by Chemprobe This coating shall be sprayapplied per the manufacturer’s instructions (brush or roller application will not be acceptable). Color: Ground-Face Mix Design: “Limestone” or other architect selected mix design from full range of available mix designs. Locations: At Entire First Floor of the Building (refer to Exterior Elevations and Wall Sections for exact extent). Mortar Color: Custom Color Laticrete to match existing mortar as selected by Architect). Sales Representative: Maryanne Cronin, Barnes & Cone Architectural Masonry, Syracuse, NY, (315) 701-7717. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-6 West End Heights C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. G. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce the color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides or 2 percent for carbon black. 2. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. J. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. K. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, non-corrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. L. Water-Repellent Admixture: Provide a liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer, at all CMU at new exit stair addition. M. Water: Potable. N. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement. b. Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corporation. c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; Holnam, Inc. d. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation. e. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co. f. Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color; Riverton Corporation (The). 2. Mortar Cement: a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement. b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation. 3. Colored Mortar Cement: a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement. b. Refer to Concrete Masonry Unit Schedule above for additional mortar color information. 4. Mortar Pigments: a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors. b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation. c. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. 5. Cold-Weather Admixture: a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co. b. Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. c. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. 6. Water-Repellent Admixture: a. Mortar Tite; Addiment Inc. b. Dry-Block Mortar Admixture; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. c. Rheopel; Master Builders. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-7 West End Heights 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60. 2.5 JOINT REINFORCMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES A. Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other characteristics: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after prefabrication into units. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, Class 2 or ASTM A 635; hot dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153; Class B. B. Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10', with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods and Cross Rods: 0.1875" diameter. 3. For single-wythe masonry provide ladder design with cross rods not more than 16" o.c. with single pair of side rods. 4. For multi-wythe masonry provide ladder design with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. and number of side rods as follows: a. Number of Side Rods for Composite Construction: One side rod for each face shell of concrete masonry back-up and one rod for brick wythe. b. Number of Side Rods for Multiple-Wythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each face shell of concrete masonry back-up and of concrete masonry facing wythe. c. Number of Side Rods for Multiple-Wythe Brick Masonry: One side rod for each wythe. C. Flexible Anchors: Where flexible anchors are indicated for connecting masonry to structural framework, provide 2-piece anchors as described below which permit vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to, but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to, plane or wall. 1. For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section formed form 0.1046" (12 gauge) thick sheet metal and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to to accommodate rigid insulation board extend within 1" of masonry face. 2. For anchorage to steel framework provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 0.25" diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to to accommodate rigid insulation board extend within 1" of masonry face. 3. For anchorage to cold-formed metal framing, provide veneer achor equal to Hohmann & Barnard Thermal 2-Seal Wing Nut Anchors sized to accommodate rigid insulation board and extend within 1" of masonry face. 4. Wire Size: 0.25" diameter. D. Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Furnish cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated. E. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots, with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336" (22 gauge) sheet metal. F. Anchor Bolts: Provide steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM C 153, Class C, in sizes and configurations indicated. G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. National Wire Products Corp. 5. Architect/Engineer approved equal. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-8 West End Heights 2.6 CONCEALED FLASHING MATERIAL A. Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division7 section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" and below: 6. Copper: 10 oz. weight for fully concealed flashing, 16 oz. elsewhere. 7. Fabricate through-wall metal flashings with deformation in both directions for integral mechanical mortar bond. 8. Fabricate metal expansion joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to shape indicated. B. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashings: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of sheet copper of 7 oz. per sq. ft. coated with flexible fibrated asphalt. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division-7 section "Flashing and Sheet Metal". D. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: a. "Cop-A-Cote"; Afco Products Inc. b. Coated Copper Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. "Copperseal"; York Manufacturing, Inc. d. Architect/Engineer approved equal. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18. Shop fabricated reinforcement bars that are shown to be bent or hooked. B. Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade RE41E1, capable of compression up to 35%, of width and thickness indicated. C. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Designation PVC63506. D. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). E. Weepholes: Provide plastic tubing (medium density polyethylene) 3/8" outside diameter and 4" long. 2.8 INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid cellular polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV; 5-year aged r-value of 5 Btu/(hr x sf x F) at 75F (24C); in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths; thicknesses as indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Styrofoam SM/SB"; Dow Chemical USA. b. Architect/Engineer approved equal. B. Masonry Cell Insulation: 1. Provide masonry cell insulation as noted in the “Wall Schedule” of the Construction Drawings. Insulation equal to “Korfil” standard u-shaped insulation inserts. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following (verify acceptability for cleaning unit masonry and colored pigmented mortar with all manufacturers): a. "SureKlean" No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc. b. Architect/Engineer approved equal. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-9 West End Heights B. The masonry contractor shall be responsible to completely remove any/all discoloration and/or efflorescence from all exposed masonry surfaces without damaging or discoloring the masonry. This shall be completed prior to the application of sealants. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellant agents, anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Contractor may choose from the types specified below. Provide color samples for approval and continue to use the same mortar throughout the project. (Consult with Owner for amount of lime to be added to mix for all brickwork including pointing.) 1. Machine mixed in following parts by volume: a. One (1) part type 1 Portland cement b. One half (1/2) part hydrated lime c. Two and one-half (2-1/2) times the sum of the volumes of the cement and lime of damp loose sand d. Sufficient water to provide a plastic, workable mix D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Shall consist of the following proportions by volume: 1. One (1) part of Portland cement 2. One tenth (1/10) part of hydrated lime 3. Two and one-half (2-1/2) times the sum of the volume of the cement and lime of pea gravel aggregate 4. Grout shall have a slump of from eight (8) to ten (10) inches 5. Minimum grout compression strength = 2,000 psi. 6. Grout for CMU-1: Interior, Load-bearing, not colored, Type S mortar. 7. Grout for CMU-2: Exterior, Non-Loadbearing (veneer), Colored (per selection by Architect). 2.11 GROUND-FACE BLOCK ENHANCER / SEALER A. Exterior Ground Face CMU: Chemprobe Aqua-Seal (first) and Chemprobe Phylon WB Ground-Face Block Enhancer (second) shall be applied to all exposed surfaces of ground-face block and mortar joints in the field once the walls have been laid and thoroughly cleaned. Block Enhancer / Sealer shall be installed per manufacturer’s written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not wet concrete masonry units. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. C. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls, floors and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. D. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening. F. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. All masonry work to be straight, level, plumb, and true. Mortar joints to be uniform thickness. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-10 West End Heights A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate opening, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout three courses (24") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated or match existing joints. F. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units that have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. G. Collar Joints: After each course is laid, fill in vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly and with mortar for the following masonry work: 1. All exterior walls, except cavity walls, and interior walls and partitions. 2. Nonloadbearing interior walls or partitions where metal ties or horizontal reinforcing are indicated for structural bonding and nominal thickness of wall or partition is required to meet code requirements for height-to-thickness ratio. 3.5 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY A. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes. Install at not more than 16" o.c. vertically. B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. C. For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding. D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and spaces. Provide individual metal ties at not more than 24" o.c. vertically. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units. E. Non-Bearing Interior Partitions: Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise shown. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-11 West End Heights 1. Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavity flush. B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing, installed in mortar joints at not more than 16" o.c. vertically. C. Provide weep holes in exterior wythe of cavity wall located immediately above ledges and flashing, spaced 2'-0" o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cover cavity side of weep holes with copper or plastic insert screening before loose-fill masonry insulation is placed in cavity. 3.7 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" exterior side of walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6". B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted. D. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. E. Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows: 1. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For parapets, space reinforcement at 8" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. F. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in two horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints. In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the above. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK A. General: Provide anchor devices of type indicated. B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24" o.c. vertically and 36" o.c. horizontally. C. Anchor single wythe masonry veneer to metal studs with masonry veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to metal studs with two metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1" air space between back of masonry veneer wythe and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor section relative to course in which tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. 4. Provide one anchor for every two square feet of wall but not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 16" o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 1'-0" of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 3'-0". 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated on Drawings. Build-in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-12 West End Heights B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard block. D. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" for brick size units and 2'0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK A. General: Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at, or above, shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. B. Extend flashing the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2". At heads and sills turn up ends not less than 2" to form a pan. C. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by over-lapping deformations not less than 1" and seal lap with elastic sealant. D. Install flashing to comply with manufacturer's installation. E. Provide weep holes in the head joints of the first course of masonry immediately above concealed flashings. Space 24" o.c., unless otherwise indicated. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Placing Reinforcement: 1. General: Clean reinforcement loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. 2. Position reinforcing accurately at the spacing indicated. Support secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcing may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater). For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as indicated, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as indicated. 3. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. a. Provide not less than lap of twenty-four (24) diameters of bars, or as required by ACI code. 4. Weld splices where indicated. Comply with the requirements of AWS D1.4 for welding materials and procedures. 5. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. 6. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. Use Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-13 West End Heights prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. 7. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non-reinforced masonry where they intersect. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. General: 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. B. Walls: 1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special-shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. C. Columns, Piers and Pilasters: 1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown, use units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcement bars shown. 2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. 3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster units together to maximum pour height specified. D. Grouting: 1. Use Grout per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces in one or both horizontal directions. E. Low-Lift Grouting: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 ft. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5' height, or if bond beam occurs below 5' height stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 11/2" below top course of pour. 5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 6. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-14 West End Heights 7. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 8. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5'. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. 9. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 10. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Owner will employ separate testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. 3.14 PARGING A. Parge walls where indicated with Type S or N mortar, in thickness indicated. 1. Thickness: Not less than 1/2". B. Trowel finish to a smooth, dense surface. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Where parging is applied in two coats, roughen first coat when partially set, let harden for 24 hours and moisten prior to application of second coat. Damp cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect until cured. 3.15 REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleanness for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. D. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable to NCMA "Tek" bulletins. E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1 West End Heights SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural shapes. 2. Channels and angles. 3. Hollow structural sections. 4. Structural pipe. 5. Structural plates and bars. 6. Floor plates. 7. Bolts, connectors, and anchors. 8. Grout. 9. Shear Connectors for composite beams and girders 10. Prefabricated Fire-Proofed Steel Columns 11. Connection Design B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078443 – Joint Firestopping 2. Section 078100 – Applied Fire Proofing 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Structural Steel Connections shall be selected, completed or designed by the fabricator to withstand the design loads indicated. B. Delegated Engineering Responsibility. Structural Steel Connection Design is delegated by the Engineer of Record to a qualified licensed professional engineer retained by the structural steel fabricator. The connection design engineer retained by the fabricator shall prepare calculations, shop drawings, and other structural design details for submission to the Engineer of Record with the fabricator’s structural steel shop drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures – Section 014533 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete – Section 033100 C. Unit Masonry – Section 042000 D. Cold Formed Structural Metal Framing – Section 054000 E. Wood Framing – Section 061100 Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-2 West End Heights 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 19 - Standard Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 6. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 7. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 9. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. 10. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 11. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 12. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 13. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding. 14. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength CarbonManganese Steel of Structural Quality. 15. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 16. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. 17. ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100mm) Thick. 18. ASTM A618/A618M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. 19. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, LowAlloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-3 West End Heights 20. ASTM A847/A847M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. 21. ASTM A852/A852M - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi (485 MPa) Minimum Yield Strength to 4 in. (100 mm) Thick. 22. ASTM A913/A913M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and SelfTempering Process (QST). 23. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 24. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 25. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. 26. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 27. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 28. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination. 29. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. 30. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 31. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 32. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 33. ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for Twist-Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 34. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners. D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. E. California Department of Health Services: 1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. F. Green Seal: 1. GC-03-2nd Edition, January 7, 1997 - Anti-Corrosive Paints. G. Research Council on Structural Connections: 1. RCSC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. H. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-4 West End Heights 2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 4. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 012500 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and bolts. 2. Connections. Connections not detailed. 3. Cambers and loads. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 5. Indicate shear stud connectors for all composite beams and girders; size, location, number of studs, and spacing C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and nondestructive test analysis, and. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the Qualifications section documenting compliance with the specified requirements. G. Connection design calculations, stamped by a licensed NYS Professional Engineer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Structural Steel: AISC 303, ASIC 341 and AISC 360. 2. High Strength Bolted Connections: RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. B. Perform Work in accordance with 2010 Building Code of New York State. C. Maintain one copy of document on site. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-5 West End Heights 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience with any of the following current AISC Certification: 1. Standard Steel Building Structures (STD). 2. Conventional Steel Building Structures (SBD). 3. Complex Steel Building Structures (CBD). B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience with any of the following current AISC Certification: 1. Certified Steel Erector (CSE). 2. Advanced Certified Steel Erector (ACSE). C. Shop Painter: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience with any the following current AISC Certification: 1. Sophisticated Paint Endorsement - Enclosed (P1). 2. Sophisticated Paint Endorsement - Covered (P2). 3. Sophisticated Paint Endorsement - Outside (P3). D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Current active registration in New York State with experience with structural steel framing connection design similar to that indicated and shown in the contract drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. ASTM A572/A572M; Grade 50. ASTM A913/A913M; Grade 50. B. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W-shapes. C. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M. D. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. E. Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. F. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. G. Structural Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-6 West End Heights H. Floor Plates: ASTM A786/A786M raised pattern. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Bolts: Heavy hex, structural type. 1. ASTM A325; Type 1, plain, or hot dipped. B. Nuts: ASTM A563; heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Plain or Hot dipped galvanized. C. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, beveled. Furnish clipped washers where space limitations require. 1. Finish: Plain or Hot dipped galvanized. D. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959; Type 325. 1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized. E. Tension Control Assemblies: ASTM F1852; Type 1, heavy hex head, twist off type; complete with washers and heavy hex nuts. 1. Finish: Finish: Unfinished. F. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554; Grade 36. 1. Shape: Hooked or Straight. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M. 1. Finish: Hot dipped galvanized. H. Forged Structural Steel Hardware: 1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085. 2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM A108; Grade 1030. 3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018. 4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon steel. I. Shear Connectors. ASTM A108; headed, unfinished and in accordance with AWS D1.1; Type B 2.3 PREFABRICATED FIRE-PROOFED STEEL COLUMNS (Exterior V Columns) A. Core column to be a, A500 Grade B square hollow structural section of the size indicated in the column schedule. Core column to be filled with 5,000 psi concrete. B. Outer shell to be 12 ¾” OD, ¼” wall thickness, steel cover. Outer shell to be shop primed with a zinc rich primer and finish painted as specified below. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-7 West End Heights C. Column to be Fire-Proofed for a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL Design No. X104 and to have a U.L. Label affixed to the outer shell. D. Column to be pre-fabricated with base plate and cap plate as per drawing details. 1. Column to be equal to Fire-Trol Column Round Type OS by Dean Lally L.P. (www.deanlally.com). 2.4 WELDING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications. B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. C. Develop required camber for members where required. D. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until steel has been erected. E. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for structural steel. F. Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members as shown on shop drawings. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3. B. Shop prime structural steel members to a dry film thickness not less than 1.5 mils. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. 1. Primer: Fabricator’s standard lead, chromate, and asphalt free, rust inhibiting primer compatible with architectural finishes. C. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication. Exposed exterior steel (rooftop emergency generator support) and exterior masonry lintels are to be hot-dip galvanized. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-8 West End Heights D. Galvanizing for Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors: 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: a. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F2329. b. Connectors and Anchors: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum. E. Exposed Exterior Pre-engineered Fire-Proofed Steel Columns 1. Primer – Tnemec 90/97 Zinc Rich Primer or equal 2. Intermediate Coat – Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxoline Series 66 3. Top Coat – Tnemec Endura-Shield Series 75 (color by Architect) 4. Column base and base-plate prior to encasing in concrete – Tnemec Tnem-Tar field applied after installation. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. B. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. C. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 45 33 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests. C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-9 West End Heights C. Verify anchors rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct exposure for steel attachment. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation preparation. B. Furnish templates for installation of anchor rods and embedment in concrete and masonry work. 3.3 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. C. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer . E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer’s printed instructions. F. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes. 3.4 GROUT INSTALLATION A. Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound, clean concrete surface is achieved. B. Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout. C. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. D. Align, level and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted. E. Saturate concrete surfaces with clean water; remove excess water, leave none standing. F. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation as shown on drawings, snug tighten anchor bolts. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-10 West End Heights G. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air pockets. H. Moist cure grout. I. Remove forms after grout is set. Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed 45 degrees. J. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 45 33 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing. B. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC 303. 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections. 2. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959. Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2. D. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Visually inspect all welds. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full penetration welds. 4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 5. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709. 6. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. E. Correct defective bolted connections and welds. F. Shear Connectors. In addition to visual inspection, shear connectors may be inspected and tested according to the requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Lakeview Health Services STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-11 West End Heights 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to the requirements of AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 Lakeview Health Services STEEL FLOOR DECK 053113-1 West End Heights SECTION 053113 – STEEL FLOOR AND ROOF DECK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite steel floor deck B. Steel roof deck (canopy) C. Deck Accessories 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Structural Steel - Section 051200 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete (Lightweight) - Section 033100. C. Composite Steel Joists and Composite Steel Joist Girders – Section 052100 1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with the following reference standards unless otherwise shown or specified: 1. Design: "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI Specification). 2. Welding: "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel, AWS D 1.3", by the American Welding Society (AWS Code). 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): “Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks, Publication 26.” 4. ASTM A 611 “Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality.” 5. ASTM A 525 “Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, Galvanized by the Hot Dip Process.” 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show application to project. Prepare separate drawings, coordinated with, but not superimposed on, joist drawings or structural steel erection drawings. Show plan layout, deck span, support locations, edge of deck location of openings and reinforcing at openings, and attachment requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions. 1.05 HANDLING AND STORAGE Lakeview Health Services STEEL FLOOR DECK 053113-2 West End Heights A. Handle and stack materials carefully in order to prevent deformation or damage. During unloading and hoisting, take extra care to prevent damage to ends and sides of individual metal deck panels. Do no place panels in direct contact with the ground. Protect panels from the elements and keep panels dry. 1. If mud, dirt, or other foreign matter is accumulated on panels, remove such accumulation completely prior to installation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and erector to submit documentation showing a minimum of 5 years experience with project of similar size and scope. All welders to submit documentation showing current AWS certification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fluted Deck and Metal Accessories other: Sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 653 SQ Grade 33. Before fabrication, sheet steel shall receive ASTM A 525, Class G 90, hot dip zinc coating; Accessories shall be fabricated of not lighter than 26 US Standard Gage sheet steel. Deck standard of function and quality shall be as manufactured by Nucor Vulcraft Steel Roof & Floor Deck of the type, depth, and gauge shown on the drawings. B. Self-Drilling Fasteners: No. 12-14 x 3/4 inch, hex washer head, selfdrilling fastener with pilot point. C. Powder Driven Fasteners: Hilti X-EDN19 or equal. D. Touch-up primer for galvanized surfaces: SSPC 20, Type I- Inorganic. E. Accessories: Shop fabricated accessories, compatible with steel deck, as required to complete the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Sheet metal cants beneath flashings when required for roofing over steel deck. 2. Column closures, end closures, Z closures, and cover plates. 3. Pour stop at deck edges and openings. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Furnish units in lengths to be continuous over 3 spans wherever possible. B. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, fabricate deck for predetermined openings, and reinforce where required to maintain deck strength, alignment, and profile. Lakeview Health Services STEEL FLOOR DECK 053113-3 West End Heights 1. Small openings, as recommended by the deck manufacturer, may be field cut. C. Progress shop fabrication from "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" detail drawings only. 1. When detail drawings are "APPROVED AS NOTED", progress fabrication in strict accordance with notes thereon. 2. Fabrication progressed from "DISAPPROVED" or "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION" detail drawings will be rejected. The contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for any costs or delays due to rejection of items fabricated from "DISAPPROVED" or "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION" detail drawings. D. Fabricate deck units to provide a minimum of 2” lap over supports. Provide minimum of 1.5” bearing over steel supports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck. D. Do not start installation of metal deck until corresponding steel framework has been plumbed, aligned and completed and until temporary shoring, where required, has been installed. D. Steel surfaces to which materials, provided under this Section, are to be welded, shall be free of paint, ice, water, oil, dirt, rust and other materials detrimental to welding. E. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions except where shown or specified otherwise. 1. Welding shall comply with the AWS Code. 2. Perform welding free of sharp points. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on supporting members and flutes in straight and true alignment through entire length of run before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. Install temporary shoring before placing single span deck panels when required to meet manufacturer’s recommendations. Lakeview Health Services STEEL FLOOR DECK 053113-4 West End Heights C. End Bearing: Install deck units over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. Non-Composite Deck End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. 2. Composite Deck End Joints: Butted. D. Deck Fastening: Fasten deck units at perimeter supports with arc spot welds (puddle welds) not less than 3/4 inch diameter, at 6 inches on center, or mechanically fasten. At intermediate supports, fasten deck units with arc spot welds (puddle welds) not less than 3/4 inch diameter, at 12 inches on centers, along the supporting members, or mechanically fasten. Weld/fasten the first and last deck flutes. Use welding washers for all deck lighter than 20 gage. E. Side lap fastening: Fasten side laps at intervals not exceeding 24 inches with No. 10 diameter self-drilling carbon steel screws, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings or required by the fire resistance ratings indicated on the drawings. F. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components into position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating with touch-up prime paint. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Curtain Wall Support. B. Exterior wall framing. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 051223 - Structural Steel. B. Section 055000 - Metal fabrications. C. Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members. D. Section 072500 - Weather Barriers. E. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants. F. Section 092216 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Non-Structural Metal Framing. G. Section 095113 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971) B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011. D. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c. E. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. F. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with requirements. 1. Manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions for each type of metal framing and accessory, including data required to show compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. D. Calculations: Provide Cold Framed Structural Metal Framing Contractor’s Design Engineer’s calculations demonstrating that the cold formed framing system will comply with the performance requirements of this section and the contract drawings. Refer to loading information provided on Sheet S001 and in relevant plans and details. E. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Include the following in an early submission: a. Erection drawings indicating sizes and locations of all metal framing members. b. Anchor bolt plan showing anchor bolts, if any, to be placed in cast-in-place concrete Work. c. Show plans and elevations at not less than 1/4 inch to 1'-0” scale, and details at not less than 11/2 inch to 1'-0” scale. 2. Indicate ceiling joist layout and support. 3. Describe method for securing bearing and shear walls to floor joist framing, and floor joists framing to supporting structure. Lakeview Health Services COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-2 West End Heights 4. Provide design engineer's stamp (NY State Engineer) on shop drawings. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in New York State. B. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. F. Certification: Affidavit certifying that sheet steel complies with specified quality, grade, and zinc-coating. G. Fire Rated Construction: Wherever a fire resistance classification is indicated for metal framing components, provide framing and accessories which have been tested and classified or listed for the construction and rating shown. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal framing to the Site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, identified with brand, type, and gage. B. Protect metal framing from damage and rusting. Store off the ground in dry, ventilated space. C. Store and handle metal framing in a manner that will not cause distortion. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com. 3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 012500 – Substitution Procedures. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics: 1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for project conditions within required limits. 3. Design Loads: As indicated on the drawings. 4. Live load and wind load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated: a. Floor Joists: Maximum vertical deflection under design live load of 1/360 of span. b. Wall Studs: Maximum lateral deflection under wind load of 1/600 of span (brick exterior veneer). 5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. Lakeview Health Services COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-3 West End Heights 6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; Ushaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. a. Members of 12, 14, and 16 Gage Steel: Galvanized, structural quality sheet steel; ASTM A653, Grade D (minimum yield 50 ksi). b. Members of 18 and 20 Gage Steel: Galvanized, structural quality sheet steel; ASTM A653, Grade A (minimum yield 33 ksi). 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M G90/Z275 coating. 3. For exterior wall studs, provide studs with a minimum stud gauge of 16. B. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness. 2. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. a. Where top of non-bearing stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in manner allowing vertical movement without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch. b. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet. c. Acceptable Products: VertiClip(r) or DriftClip(tm) manufactured by The Steel Network Inc. 3. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners and for all bearing wall stud framing connections. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging, Strapping, Reinforcement, Stiffeners, Plates, Gussets, Clip Angles, and Hangers: Unless otherwise indicated, metal framing manufacturer's standard products formed from ASTM A653 galvanized, structural quality sheet steel. Thickness and grade shall be determined by application requirements, with a minimum thickness of 20 gage and a minimum yield of 33 ksi. B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: 1. Cadmium plated, No. 12-14 x 3/4 inch, hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping fastener with pilot point. B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated. 1. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Low velocity, powder activated, threaded studs complying with ASTM E 1190 and zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633, Type III, Classification 5. a. Minimum Stud Size: 1/4-20 thread, 0.145 inch dia shank, with 1/4-20 nut and 5/8 inch outside dia washer. b. Stud Material: ASTM A510 1060 or 1065 steel. c. Minimum Core Hardness: 51-56 Rockwell C. d. Minimum Tensile Strength: 285,000 psi. e. Minimum Shear Strength: 182,000 psi. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip process complying with ASTM A525, Coating Designation G 60. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible Lakeview Health Services COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-4 West End Heights with paints specified to be used over it. E. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated, Drilled expansion bolts, Screws with sleeves, or ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts. F. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal framing in accordance with “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” fabrication drawings only. B. Repairing Galvanizing: Clean shop welded and abraded surfaces, and repair them with a 2 mil (dry) minimum thick coating of galvanizing repair paint. Comply with paint manufacturer's application instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work. B. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces to receive metal framing for defects that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal framing and accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings, and with the metal framing manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Provide temporary bracing to ensure stability of the structure during construction. C. Repairing Galvanizing: Clean field welded and abraded surfaces, and repair them with a 2 mil (dry) minimum thick coating of galvanizing repair paint. Comply with paint manufacturer's application instructions. D. Tolerances: 1. Vertical Alignment (Plumbness) of Studs: Within 1/960th (1/8 inch in 10 feet) of the height. 2. Horizontal Alignment (Levelness) of Walls: Within 1/960th (1/8 inch in 10 feet) of their respective lengths. 3. Spacing of Studs: Not more than + 1/8 inch from the designed spacing, providing that the cumulative error does not exceed the requirements of the finishing materials. E. For metal framing indicated to receive insulation, install full width insulation in voids which will be inaccessible after erection. F. Installation of Runner Tracks: 1. Install continuous bottom and top tracks of size and gage shown. Align track accurately and, unless otherwise shown, attach to supporting structure with power-driven fasteners at 16 inches oc. Install fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. 2. At track butt joints, securely attach abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or splice them with a welded butt joint. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Set ceiling joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. 1. Install bridging at joist ends and at intermediate supports, unless joists are otherwise restrained from rotation. 2. Unless otherwise shown, install joists with a minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at end supports and 3-1/2 inches at intermediate supports. D. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points. E. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 West End Heights SECTION 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. List of Items: All work in this section shall be as indicated on the complete set of drawings and/or as listed herein. Note that this listing is primarily for the convenience of the Contractor and that all items shall be provided whether included in this listing or indicated on the plans. 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Ships ladders and alternating tread devices. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Steel weld plates and angles. 6. Miscellaneous steel trim. 7. Metal ladders. 8. Pipe bollards. 9. Elevator sill angles. 10. Loose steel lintels. 11. Elevator hoistway beams. 12. Steel framing to support mechanical/electrical equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Templates: For anchors and bolts. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 4. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Lakeview Health Services METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 West End Heights 6. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Products: a. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. b. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. d. Architect approved equal. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches o.c. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c. 2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. Lakeview Health Services METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 West End Heights D. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c. 1. Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. 2. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. E. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. F. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Galvanize. G. Metal Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Elevator Pit Ladders: Comply with ASME A17.1. 2. Space side rails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Steel Ladder Construction: Flat bar side rails, with 3/4-inch- diameter steel bar rungs fitted in centerline of side rails, plug-welded, and ground smooth on outer rail faces. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung. H. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 80 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate. 2. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Lakeview Health Services METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4 West End Heights B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 2. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 3. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 Lakeview Health Services ABRASIVE STAIR TREAD NOSINGS 055001-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Anti-slip Safety Stair Treads and Nosing’s for new construction and renovation, inside and outside stair applications including extruded aluminum and cast systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Div. 3 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Div. 5 – Metal Stairs 1.02 REFERENCES 1. American Disability Act (ADA) barrier-free code design 2. Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA) 3. International Building Code (IBC) 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1994 Luminous Egress Path Markings 5. ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades such as concrete and masonry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including detailed specification of construction, fabrication, and recommended installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated. 1. Construction details, sizes of metal sections, thicknesses of metals, profiles, attachments, dimensions and field joints, method of support from structure, finishes, and work to be built-in or provided by other Sections. 2. Welding: Indicate welded connections, both shop and field, using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Samples for selection and verification purposes. Manufacturer to provide upon request actual sections of stair tread and nosing in a convenient size approximately 6” in length to represent material adequately. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site ready use. B. Exercise proper care in handling of Work so as not to injure finished surfaces. Protect Work from damage after it is in place. C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty. Stair treads and nosings shall be free from manufacturing defects in materials, fabrication, and installation for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. B. Should a product fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Lakeview Health Services ABRASIVE STAIR TREAD NOSINGS 055001-2 West End Heights 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Nystrom 9300 73rd Avenue N Minneapolis, MN 55428 PH: (800) 547-2635 www.Nystrom.com 2.02 ABRASIVE METAL [NOSINGS] [TREADS] [AND] [THRESHOLDS] A. Extruded Units: Aluminum, with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Nystrom, Inc.; STSB or a comparable product 2. Provide ribbed bar units, with abrasive filler strips no less than flush with the aluminum extrusion. a. Abrasive Colors: Black. 3. Nosing Types: a. Short Tipped Nose 3 inches (75 mm) wide, with 1/4 inch (6 mm) lip for poured concrete steel pan applications. 1) Attachment Method: Cast-In, continuous extruded anchor]. 4. Finish: 6063-T5 aluminum, mill finish. 5. Options: a. Taped Top. b. Painted Undersides. 6. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. 7. Apply bituminous paint to conceal surfaces of cast-metal units. 8. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. Installer shall not proceed until conditions are acceptable. B. Verify tolerances and correct improper conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install stair treads and nosing’s in accordance with the governing regulations, the industry standards applicable to the work and the manufacturer’s written instructions B. Align work plumb, level and where required, flush with adjacent surfaced and rigidly anchored to the substrate. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Cover during wet-type operation including painting and decorating. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services METAL STAIRS 055100-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: 1. Drawings, general provisions of the Subcontract, and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes Delegated Design Work for the Following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads (Provide/Install from 1st Floor to 2nd Floor) 2. Steel tube handrails attached to walls. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: 1. Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of New York, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Stairs and handrails shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: 1. Uniform Live Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Live Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Deflection: Maximum L/360. C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Guardrails: 1. Uniform Load: Minimum live load of 50 plf in any direction in accordance with Section 4.5.1. of ASCE 7. 2. Concentrated Load: Concentrated Live Load of 200 Lbs in accordance with Section 4.5.1. of ASCE 7. D. Seismic Performance: 1. Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions. See structural drawings for Seismic Design parameters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit calculations, shop and erection drawings, signed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Clearly identify connections on Shop Drawings with complete details, to the extent that all connections can be made without further reference to the Contract Documents. 2. In addition to the information indicated on the weld symbols, clearly indicate joint preparation information such as degree of bevel, weld length, etc., on the Shop Drawing detail of each piece requiring joint preparation. Clearly indicate root openings, back-ups, fillers, runout tabs, etc. 3. Indicate changes from the Contract Documents on the Shop Drawings, clearly identified. Changes shall be acceptable contingent upon the Engineer of Record's approval. C. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Record Drawings: After work of this Section is completed correct or revise the shop drawings and erection diagrams to correspond to the changes made in the field, following which, one set of reproducible prints shall be delivered to the Project Manager. 2. Deliver the set prior to the sub-subcontractor for the work of this Section leaving the job site, and prior to acceptance of a final payment request for the Work. Lakeview Health Services METAL STAIRS 055100-2 West End Heights 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Detail in conformance with the AISC manual Structural Steel Detailing Steel Construction Manual, current edition, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Before starting work, verify measurements, lines, grades, elevations, locations and details of existing field conditions and be responsible for correctness, conformity, accuracy, and execution of steel stair work to conform to actual conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: 1. Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold Formed: ASTM A 283, Grade C. 3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. 4. Cold Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A 1O8, grade as selected by fabricator. 5. Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A 57O. 6. Cold Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366. 7. Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 446, Grade A, with ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating. 8. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. 9. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade as selected by fabricator. 10. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, type as selected, Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. C. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: 1. Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported material, unless otherwise indicated. D. Steel Finish: 1. Shop prime paint in accordance with the requirements of Division 09 Section "Painting". E. Expansive Grout: 1. Hallemite "Por-Rok Cement", Master Builders Co. "Embeco", or approved equal. 2.2 STEEL FRAMED STAIRS A. General: 1. Use welding for joining pieces together, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate units so that mechanical fasteners used do not appear on finished surfaces. Make joints true and tight, and make connections of parts "light proof" tight. All welds to be continuous, and ground smooth where exposed. 2. Construct stair units to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Provide metal framing, hangers, columns, railings, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components for the support of stairs and landings. Erect stair work to line, plumb, square, and true with runs registering level with floor and platform levels. Lakeview Health Services METAL STAIRS 055100-3 West End Heights 3. Provide brackets and bearing surfaces as detailed and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure. 4. Where masonry walls support the steel stair work, provide temporary supporting struts, designed for the erection of steel stair components before installation of masonry. B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, plates, or a combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. 2. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members, as indicated. Bolt or weld headers to stringers and newels. Bolt or weld framing members to stringers and headers. C. Metal Pan Units: 1. Form metal pans of 12 gauge galvanized structural steel. Shape pans to conform to the configuration indicated. 2. Construct risers and subtread metal pans with steel angle supporting brackets, of size shown, welded to stringers. Secure metal pans to brackets with rivets or by welding. Provide platforms of the same metal and gauge as specified for pans, unless otherwise shown. 3. Secure sub-platform metal pans to platform frames by welding. D. Steel Plate Treads and Platforms: 1. Provide raised pattern steel floor plate complying with Federal Specification QQ-F461, Class 1. Provide pattern shown, or if not shown, from manufacturer's standard patterns, as selected by Architect-Engineer. 2. Form treads of 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick steel floor plate with integral nosing and back edge stiffeners. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers, and treads to brackets. 3. Fabricate platforms of steel floor plate of the thickness shown. Provide nosing matching that on treads, at all landings. Secure floor plates to platform framing members by welding. 2.3 STAIR RAILINGS A. Stair Railings, Handrails and Guardrails: 1. Fabricate newels of steel tubing and provide gray iron newel caps, as indicated. 2. Provide steel pipe railings, consisting of top rail, intermediate rail, posts, and wall mounted rails. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate rails of 1-½ inch diameter pipe. 3. Non-welded connections: When acceptable to the Architect-Engineer, intermediate postto-rail connections may be made using internal pipe sleeve locks and Allen screw fasteners. Locking devices which do not produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints will not be acceptable. Weld other connections. 4. Welded connections: Cope intersections of rails and posts, weld joints, and grind smooth. Butt weld end-to-end joints of railings or use welding connectors. At connections to steel supports, weld post directly to steel support. 5. Railings may be bent at comers instead of joining, provided the bends are uniformly formed in jigs, with cylindrical cross section of the pipe maintained throughout the entire bend. 6. Adjust railings prior to securing in place to insure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Space posts at not more than 8 ft (2440) mm on centers, unless otherwise shown. Plumb post in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: a. Provide removable sections of railing where indicated. Furnish slip-fit metal socket or sleeve for casting into concrete. Accurately locate sleeves to match post spacing. Lakeview Health Services METAL STAIRS 055100-4 West End Heights 7. Secure handrails to walls with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide brackets of malleable iron castings, with not less than 3 inches (75 mm) clearance between face of wall and railing. Wall brackets and end plates shall be of the concealed fastener type, unless otherwise shown. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at not more than 8 ft (2.44 m) on center. 8. Provide wall return fitting of cast iron castings, flush type, with the same projection as that specified for wall brackets. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: a. For anchorage to concrete and solid grouted masonry walls, use anchor bolt expansion shields and lag bolts. b. For anchorage to hollow masonry walls, use toggle bolts having square heads. c. For stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood blocking between studs. Coordinate stud and blocking installation for accurate location of backing members. B. Finish: 1. Galvanize all exterior railings (handrails, guardrails, and infills) where identified as galvanized, pipe fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous metal components. Provide black steel pipe for interior railings not indicated to be galvanized. 2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS 1. See Section 055001 for Abrasive Nosing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install steel stair units in accordance with the approved Shop and Erection Drawings, and with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1 West End Heights SECTION 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. List of Items: All work in this section shall be as indicated on the complete set of drawings and/or as listed herein. Note that this listing is primarily for the convenience of the Contractor and that all items shall be provided whether included in this listing or indicated on the plans. 1. Wood framing, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. D. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities of treated materials. E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from one source and by a single manufacturer. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product from one source and by a single producer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING F. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials: a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. Lakeview Health Services ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 West End Heights c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corp. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc. 2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency. C. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. D. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.4 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. Minimum specifications: Fb = 850 psi; E = 1.4 x 10 to the 6th psi; Fv = 7.5 psi. 2.5 PRE-ENGINEERED LUMBER A. Framing for floors and roofs will be a combination of pre-engineered I-joists and dimensional lumber. All wood pre-engineered joists to be designed by the manufacturer according to the latest ICC ES ESR1153; ESR-1387 commercial standard. Submit design calculations, I-beam profiles, details, fasteners information, and plan layouts to Architect/Engineer for approval. All pre-engineered drawings/ submittals to be signed and sealed by a NYS Licensed Engineer. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Weyerhaeuser NR Company: “Truss Joist TJI Joists” 2. Georgia Pacific Wood Products: “Wood I-Beam Joists Lakeview Health Services ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 West End Heights 3. Architect/Engineer approved equal. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 3. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 4. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 5. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 6. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. Use 1/4" closed cell foam in lieu of glass fiber for sills within 3" of fin grade. B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propyny butyl carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. “Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction." F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Predrill as required. G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. Lakeview Health Services ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4 West End Heights 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services WOOD FRAMIMG 0610100-1 West End Heights SECTION 061100 – WOOD FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Framing Lumber - Sawn Dimension Lumber B. LSL Engineered Lumber Sill Plates for Stud Walls C. Preservative Treated Lumber D. Wood Connectors and Hangers E. Fasteners F. Wood nailers, curbs, and cant strips for items installed on roof. G. Wood blocking 1. 2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels – Section 061200 B. Laminated Veneer Lumber – Section 061713 C. PSL Lumber – Section 061723 D. Wood I-Joists – Section 061733 E. Rim Boards – Section 061743 F. Wood Panel Product Sheathing – Section 061736 1. 3 REFERENCES A. Standards: Comply with the following unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings: 1. Lumber: American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20 by the U.S. Department of Commerce. Comply with applicable provisions for each indicated use. 2. Plywood: Product Standard PS 1 for Softwood Plywood, Construction and Industrial by the U.S. Department of Commerce. 3. Plywood Installation: APA Design/Construction Guide, Residential & Commercial by the American Plywood Association (APA). 4. Grading Rules: a. Douglas Fir, Hem-Fir, Idaho White Pine, and other Western Woods: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) or West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). b. Southern Pine: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). c. Redwood: Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). d. Spruce-Pine-Fir: National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA). 5. Preservative Treatment: American Wood Preservers’ Association (AWPA) and American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB) Standards, quality control methods, and inspection requirements. 6. Fire-Retardant Treatment: American Wood Preservers’ Association (AWPA) Standards. 7. Framing Installation: American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA). Lakeview Health Services WOOD FRAMIMG 0610100-2 West End Heights 1. 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mill and Producers Mark: Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be grade-stamped indicating type, grade, mill, and grading agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee. Mark shall appear on unfinished surface, or ends of pieces with finished surfaces. 1. Pressure Preservative Treated Material: Accredited agency quality mark, on each piece of wood, indicating treatment. 2. Fire-Retardant Treated Material: Accredited testing agency mark, on each piece of wood, indicating compliance with the fire hazard classification. 1. 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials dry. Make provision for air circulation around and between stacks of wood products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 LUMBER A. General: Furnish seasoned dimension lumber dressed to nominal sizes indicated with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing, marked “S-DRY”. Comply with dry size requirements of PS 20. 1. Dress: Surfaced 4 sides (S4S) unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing Lumber: All exterior wall framing, interior bearing wall framing, and interior shear wall framing, other than engineered lumber products such as I-joist floor joists and LVL headers which are specified elsewhere, excluding sill plates: 1. From Second Floor Deck to and including Fourth Floor Deck Framing (Floor and Wall Framing). a. Min No. 2 southern yellow pine (SYP) or b. Min. No. 2 Doug Fir – Larch 2. Above the Fourth Floor Deck a. Lumber as per 2.1.B.1. above or b. Min No. 2 Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF) 3. All lumber required to be Preservative Treated Lumber a. Southern Yellow Pine (SYP), No.1 or No. 2 C. Exterior Wall, Interior Bearing Wall, and Interior Shear Wall Stud Wall top and bottom sill plates to be 1 ½” x 5 ½” Timberstrand LSL, 1.5E or 1.6E, Minimum Fc = 750 psi, 6% - 8% moisture content, as manufactured by Weyerhauser, or approved equal. D. Headers. Engineered lumber or Framing lumber as indicated in the Header Schedule in the Contract Drawings. If Framing Lumber, refer to Section 2.1.B. above. If Engineered lumber, refer to the appropriate specification section for LVL or PSL lumber. Lakeview Health Services WOOD FRAMIMG 0610100-3 West End Heights E. Interior non-bearing partition wall framing and Miscellaneous Lumber: Standard grade, No. 2 grade, or better grade of the following species unless otherwise indicated: 1. Non-bearing interior wall framing, nailers and blocking: Douglas Fir, Hem-Fir, Idaho White Pine, Southern Pine, or Spruce-Pine-Fir. 2. Furring: Spruce, Hem-Fir, or Spruce-Pine-Fir except Douglas Fir or Southern Pine for furring required to receive preservative treatment. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Treat lumber and plywood where indicated and as specified. Comply with applicable AWPA and AWPB Standards and quality control and inspection requirements. B. Complete fabrication of items to be treated to the greatest extent possible prior to treatment. Where items must be cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of the same chemical used for treatment or other solution recommended by AWPA Standards for the treatment. C. Pressure Treatment (Above Ground Use): Treat the following wood items with waterbourne preservatives for above ground use, complying with AWPB LP-2. Redry wood to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent after treatment. 1. Nailers, blocking, cants, shim stock, and similar members used in conjunction with roofing (including related flashings, trim and vapor barrier) and coping. 2. Nailers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with exterior masonry and concrete (including interior wythe of exterior walls). 3. Wood items indicated or scheduled on the Drawings to be preservative treated. D. Pressure Treatment (Ground Contact Use): Treat the following wood items with waterbourne preservatives for below ground use, complying with AWPB LP-22: 1. Wood members placed in the ground. 2. Wood members immersed in fresh water. 3. Wood members encased in concrete. 2.3 FASTENERS AND ANCHORING DEVICES A. Select and furnish items of type, size, style, grade, and class as required for secure installation of the Work. Items shall be hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and for use with treated wood. Unless shown or specified otherwise, comply with the following: 1. Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 2. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111. 3. Bolts and Studs: FS FF-B-575. 4. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 5. Washers: FS FF-W-92. 6. Lag Bolts or Lag Screws: FS FF-B-561. 7. Masonry Anchoring Devices: Expansion shields, masonry nails and drive Lakeview Health Services WOOD FRAMIMG 0610100-4 West End Heights screws: FS FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588. 9. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A575 carbon steel bars. 10. Wall Plugs: Corrugated type, galvanized steel, 24 USS gage min, not less than 2 inches wide x 2-1/2 inches deep. 11. Metal Hangers and Framing Anchors: Size and type for intended use and as indicated in drawings, galvanized finish, manufacturer’s recommended fasteners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION A. Wood Framing: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of the AFPA “Manual for Wood Frame Construction”, unless otherwise indicated. B. Nailers and Blocking: Attach to substrate as required to support applied loading. C. Wood Framing: Install true to lines within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Refer to drawing notes and details for specific fastener requirements. Where fastening is not shown in the drawings, refer to the 2015 New York State Building Code Fastening Schedule, Table 2304.10.1. D. Refer to the Shear Wall Schedule in the Contract Drawings for fastening of wood wall panel sheathing at Shear Walls. E. Treated Wood: Brush-coat field cut surfaces with same treatment material. END OF SECTION 061100 Lakeview Health Services PREFABRICATED WOOD WALL PANELS 061200-1 West End Heights SECTION 061200 – PREFABRICATED WOOD WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated interior and exterior wood framed wall panels. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wood Framing – 061100 B. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels - 061200 C. Laminated Veneer Lumber – Section 061713 D. Wood I-Joists – Section 061733 E. Rim Boards – Section 061743 1.3 WORK INCLUDES A. Furnish and install all pre-fabricated wall panels and accessories required to provide a complete framing package, including all splines, adhesives, fasteners, sill plates and miscellaneous blocking. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E72-98 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction, 2002. B. ASTM E119 – Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Refer to structural drawings and load tables for performance criteria. B. Shop fabricated wood wall panels shall meet or exceed the structural vertical and lateral safe load capacities of comparable site constructed wood framed wall panels. Connections between panels shall meet or exceed the structural capacity of site constructed and site sheathed wood framed wall panels. Lakeview Health Services PREFABRICATED WOOD WALL PANELS 061200-2 West End Heights 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for all materials and fasteners to be used in the construction of the shop fabricated wall panels including wood studs, plates, panel sheathing and fasteners. See also the specification sections referenced above for these materials. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings as follows: 1. Layout Drawings - minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’-0” showing the location and plan dimensions of each wall panel. 2. Individual Panel Drawings. Submit detailed dimensioned drawings of each wall panel showing wood framing member location and materials of construction including wood plates, wood sheathing for walls to receive shop applied sheathing, and blocking. Include fastener type and spacing. Include furnished wall components to be field installed. Show all window, door and other openings, and framing details at openings. C. Evidence of Manufacturer’s Qualifications as noted below. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Wall panel fabricator to have a minimum of 5 years documented experience and continuous operation producing wood framed and wood sheathed structural wall panels for buildings of similar size as this building. B. Make fabrication premises available for inspection of panel fabrication by Owner’s Representative, Architect, Engineer, or Owner’s Inspection and Testing Agency upon request. C. Prefabrication and/or pre-installation Meeting: Representatives from the panel fabricator and/or installer to attend a prefabrication and/or pre-installation meeting with Architect, Engineer, Owner Representative, and Construction Manager to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and details of panel construction and installation. 1.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Panels shall be of material specifically designed and specified for exterior and interior wall panels. Fabricated work surfaces shall comply with all current codes and regulations. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store Panels in a protected area and supported at least 6” above the ground prevent contact. B. Prior to installation, panels shall be covered and protected from exposure to sunlight and moisture. C. After installation, protect panels from excessive exposure to moisture and from damage. Lakeview Health Services PREFABRICATED WOOD WALL PANELS 061200-3 West End Heights 1.10 COORDINATION A. Field Measurements: Secure field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication for proper fabrication and installation of the panels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. S.R. Sloan, Inc., Whitesboro, NY. B. Substitutions: Alternate manufacturer’s, complying with the qualification and experience requirements of this section, may be submitted for consideration. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Refer to the appropriate specification section for each material to be used in the prefabricated wall panels. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall panels and accessory items in accordance with approved submittals and/or drawings. 1. Make panel lines, breaks and angles sharp and true. 2. Keep plane surfaces free from warp or buckle. B. Contractor to take field measurements prior to commencement of shop fabrication. 1. Field fabrication/adjustment is allowed to ensure proper fit. C. Fabricate panels to sizes indicated. D. Pan el Tolerance: 1. Squareness: Plus orminus 1/4 inmaximum. 2. Fabricated PanelLength: Plus or minus1/8 in 3. Fabricated Panel Width: Plus or minus 1/8 in maximum. E. Note the requirements in the contract drawings and details for exterior wall sheathing to lap over floor level plates and rim joists. Field install final sheathing as required to achieve the specified lap requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect conditions of substrate, grade and other conditions which may affect correct installation of panels. Examine alignment of foundations and structural frames prior to panel erection. Any adverse conditions are to be reported, in writing, to the Construction Manager and Architect. Do not proceed with installation until adverse conditions are corrected. Lakeview Health Services PREFABRICATED WOOD WALL PANELS 061200-4 West End Heights 3.2 ERECTION A. General: 1. Do not install wall panels until support structure for the floor below is fully complete and the supporting floor deck is sheathed. 2. Panels are to be installed as shown on drawings and as specified, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Panels are to be fastened to support structure as shown in the contract drawings. 4. Adjoining panels are to be connected so as to transfer shear loads through the panel connection. Shear transfer to be achieved by over-lapping wall sheathing on adjoining studs as for site-built construction, or by connecting the panels together through abutting studs using bolts or screws sized for the required shear load. 5. For double top wall plate locations, install the top plate after wall panels are fully installed. Lap the top plate over panel joints. 6. Abutting wall panels are to join tightly together without gaps or spaces exceeding 1/8”. 7. Provide temporary lateral bracing of wall panels during construction and until permanent bracing from adjoining wall panels and floor and/or roof diaphragms is securely installed. END OF SECTION 061200 Lakeview Health Services LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) 061713-1 West End Heights SECTION 061713 – LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL) for beams and headers as indicated in drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wood Framing – Section 061100 B. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels – Section 061200 C. Wood I-Joists – Section 061733 D. Rim Boards – Section 061743 E. Wood Panel Product Sheathing – Section 061736 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 1 Carefully unload lumber by lifting, using forklifts or cranes to avoid damage. Keep lumber stored in wrapped and strapped bundles stacked no more than 10 feet high. Support bundles to prevent excessive bowing. Support and separate bundles with 2 × 4 or larger dimension lumber spaced no more than 10 feet apart. Keep supports in line vertically. 2 Handle individual pieces in a manner to prevent physical damage during measuring, cutting and erection. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1 Keep lumber dry. 2 Store lumber on a hard, dry, level surface. 3 Do not store lumber in contact with the ground. 4 Do not allow lumber to have prolonged exposure to weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Lakeview Health Services LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) 061713-2 West End Heights 2.1 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) A. Design Requirements: Provide laminated veneer lumber with the following design properties: Minimum Allowable Stresses for Beams and Headers: a. Bending Flexural Stress (Fb): 2,600 psi. b. Tension Stress (Ft): 1,555 psi c. Modulus of Elasticity (×106): 1.9 psi. d. Compression (Parallel to Grain) (Fc): 2,510 psi. e. Compression (Perpendicular to Grain) (Fcp): 750 psi f. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 285 psi. g. Thickness: 1 ¾”. h. Depth: As per design drawings. B. Manufacturers 1. LP - Building Products. Contact: 414 Union St., Nashville, TN 37219; Telephone: (800) 999-9105, (910) 762-9878; Fax: (910) 763-8178; E-mail: customer.support@lpcorp.com; website: www.lpcorp.com. 2. Weyerhauser. Contact: PO Box 9777 CH 2C27, Federal Way, WA 98063. Toll Free: 1-888-453-8358. Website: http://www.woodbywy.com. 3. Other manufacturers may be acceptable contingent upon demonstration of equivalent products to those specified. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Framing Connectors – refer to Specification Section 061100 Wood Framing and design drawings and notes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the lumber manufacturer. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1 Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of lumber. 2 Do not proceed with installation of lumber until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install lumber in compliance with design drawings. B. Use manufacturer’s standard connection details and recommended fasteners unless otherwise detailed in design drawings. Lakeview Health Services LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) 061713-3 West End Heights C. Temporary Bracing: 1 LVL must be securely braced during construction. Temporary bracing must be anchored to the ground, foundation, a braced wall or other completed, stable section of the structure. 2. Remove temporary bracing after sheathing is attached. 3. Exercise caution when removing temporary bracing when applying sheathing where it is necessary to remove temporary bracing to install sheathing. 4. Impose no loads other than the weight of the erectors on the structure before it is permanently sheathed. D. All conditions requiring notched or drilled beams must be reviewed and approved by a licensed professional engineer. E. Conditions and Practices Not Permitted: 1 Do not place holes closer to supports than recommended by manufacturer. 2 Do not over cut holes. 3 Do not make holes not in compliance with allowable hole size and location recommendations of manufacturer or as approved by Engineer. 4 Do not install visibly damaged lumber. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION 061713 Lakeview Health Services PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL) 061723-1 West End Heights SECTION 061723 – PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL) for beams, headers, and columns as indicated in drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wood Framing – Section 061100 B. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels – Section 061200 C. Wood I-Joists – Section 061733 D. Rim Boards – Section 061743 E. Wood Panel Product Sheathing – Section 061736 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 1 Carefully unload lumber by lifting, using forklifts or cranes to avoid damage. Keep lumber stored in wrapped and strapped bundles stacked no more than 10 feet high. Support bundles to prevent excessive bowing. Support and separate bundles with 2 × 4 or larger dimension lumber spaced no more than 10 feet apart. Keep supports in line vertically. 2 Handle individual pieces in a manner to prevent physical damage during measuring, cutting and erection. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1 Keep lumber dry. 2 Store lumber on a hard, dry, level surface. 3 Do not store lumber in contact with the ground. 4 Do not allow lumber to have prolonged exposure to weather. Lakeview Health Services PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL) 061723-2 West End Heights PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL) A. Design Requirements: Provide parallel strand lumber with the following minimum design properties: Minimum Allowable Stresses for Beams and Headers: a. Bending Flexural Stress (Fb): 2,900 psi. b. Tension Stress (Ft): 2,025 psi c. Modulus of Elasticity (×106): 2.0 psi. d. Compression (Parallel to Grain) (Fc): 2,900 psi. e. Compression (Perpendicular to Grain) (Fcp): 750 psi f. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 290 psi. g. Thickness: As per design drawings. h. Depth: As per design drawings. B. Manufacturers 1. Weyerhauser. Contact: PO Box 9777 CH 2C27, Federal Way, WA 98063. Toll Free: 1-888-453-8358. Website: http://www.woodbywy.com. 2. Other manufacturers may be acceptable contingent upon demonstration of equivalent products to those specified. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Framing Connectors – refer to Specification Section 061100 Wood Framing and design drawings and notes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the lumber manufacturer. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1 Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of lumber. 2 Do not proceed with installation of lumber until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install lumber in compliance with design drawings. B. Use manufacturer’s standard connection details and recommended fasteners unless otherwise detailed in design drawings. C. Temporary Bracing: 1 PSL must be securely braced during construction. Temporary bracing must be Lakeview Health Services PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL) 061723-3 West End Heights anchored to the ground, foundation, a braced wall or other completed, stable section of the structure. 2. Remove temporary bracing after sheathing is attached. 3. Exercise caution when removing temporary bracing when applying sheathing where it is necessary to remove temporary bracing to install sheathing. 4. Impose no loads other than the weight of the erectors on the structure before it is permanently sheathed. D. All conditions requiring notched or drilled beams must be reviewed and approved by a licensed professional engineer. E. Conditions and Practices Not Permitted: 1 Do not place holes closer to supports than recommended by manufacturer. 2 Do not over cut holes. 3 Do not make holes not in compliance with allowable hole size and location recommendations of manufacturer or as approved by Engineer. 4 Do not install visibly damaged lumber. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION 061713 Lakeview Health Services WOOD I-JOISTS 061733-1 West End Heights SECTION 061733 – WOOD I-JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-Engineered Wood I-Joists B. Joist Hangers and Fasteners 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Wood Framing – Section 061100 B. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels – Section 061200 C. Laminated Veneer Lumber – Section 061713 D. Rim Boards – Section 061743 E. Wood Panel Product Sheathing – Section 061736 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM D5055 Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists. B. Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC): 1. CCMC Report Number 13323-R. C. National Institute of Standards & Technology: 1. Voluntary Product Standard PS 2 Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for specified products as follows: Lakeview Health Services WOOD I-JOISTS 061733-2 West End Heights 1. Manufacturer's product data, including descriptions of component materials, dimensions of specified products, design properties, allowable spans and construction details. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project. B. Layout Drawings, showing placement of I-joists on representative building floor plans of minimum scale 1/8” = 1’-0”, for each floor, partial floor, or roof where I-joists are to be installed. Drawings are to show typical installation details, required blocking, fastening, hangers, spacing, and bearing requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Unload material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from exposure to harmful environmental conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD I-JOISTS A. Provide pre-engineered wood I-Joists of the sizes indicated in the drawings and details. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Trus Joist by Weyerhaeuser, 1-888-453-8358, www.woodbywy.com. 2. Other manufacturers may be acceptable contingent upon demonstration of equivalent products to those specified. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Joist Hangers and Fasteners: Galvanized steel, selected and sized by the Joist Supplier to suit application. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Simpson Strong-Tie. b) USP Structural Connectors. Lakeview Health Services WOOD I-JOISTS 061733-3 West End Heights B. Refer also to Specification Section 061100 Wood Framing and design drawings and notes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to engineered wood I-joist installation. 1. Inform Owner of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. 2. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate I-joist installation with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. B. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions, for installation. C. Install I-joists plumb, level and as indicated. D. Fasten joists to supporting framing as recommended by the I-joist manufacturer and hanger manufacturer. E. Provide temporary bracing as recommended by the manufacturer to hold joists in position until permanently secured. F. Cut openings in joist webs only as allowed by the manufacturer. 3.3 SITE TOLERANCES A. Joists: Not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) from indicated position. END OF SECTION 061733 Lakeview Health Services WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061733-1 West End Heights WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061736 - 1 SECTION 061736 – WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Exterior Wall Sheathing. B. Interior Wall Sheathing for Shear Walls C. ¾” (nominal) Structural Floor Sheathing. D. ¾” (nominal) Roof Sheathing E. Miscellaneous Sheathing Related Materials 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Wood Framing – 061100 B. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels - 061200 C. Laminated Veneer Lumber – Section 061713 D. Wood I-Joists – Section 061733 E. Rim Boards – Section 061743 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details and instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Outdoor Storage: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations: 1. Set panel bundles on supports to keep off ground. 2. Cover panels loosely with waterproof protective material. 3. Anchor covers on top of stack, but keep away from sides and bottom to assure adequate air circulation. 4. When high moisture conditions exist, cut banding on panel stack to prevent edge damage. Lakeview Health Services WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061733-2 West End Heights WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061736 - 2 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of flooring and sheathing system that fail due to manufacturing defects within specified warranty period. 1. For subflooring and roof sheathing applications: a. Products must carry a limited lifetime warranty b. Warranty must include a 500-day non-sanding guarantee, that covers delamination and excessive swelling. c. The entire panel, including edges, shall maintain moisture resistance when cut into smaller panels. 2. Non-plywood, high performance structural roof sheathing panels, with an integrated moisture barrier that eliminates the need for roofing felt,will be acceptable if provided with a manufacturer’s 30-year system warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR SHEATHING (SUB FLOOR) A. Provide ¾” thickness (nominal) tongue and groove floor Structural 1 and Exposure 1 rated sheathing (subfloor) as indicated in the structural plans and details. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Advantech sheathing products manufactured by Huber Engineered Woods LLC, Charlotte NC; Phone: (800) 933-9220; Website: www.huberwood.com/advantech/home-adva ntech; Email: info@huber.com. b. See warranty requirements in Section 1.5 above. 2.2 ROOF SHEATHING A. Provide 3/4” thickness (nominal) square edge roof sheathing a. Basis-of-Design Product: Advantech sheathing products manufactured by Huber Engineered Woods LLC, Charlotte NC; Phone: (800) 933-9220; Website: www.huberwood.com/advantech/home-advantech; Email: info@huber.com. b. See warranty requirements in Section 1.5 above. Lakeview Health Services WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061733-3 West End Heights WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061736 - 3 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Exterior Wall Sheathing above the second-floor deck to be 5/8” ZIP System Structural 1 exterior wall sheathing by Huber Engineered Woods. 1) Include Zip System Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Tape. Provide a complete weather-barrier system. B. Interior wall sheathing at designated shear walls indicated in contract drawings. Provide 7/16” thickness square edge Oriented-Strand-Board Structural 1 OSB Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1. 1) Basis-of-Design Product: Weyerhauser OSB Sheathing 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Underlayment Patching Compound: Hardsetting, quicksetting type with latex or polyvinyl acetate binder. B. Asphalt Felt: Asphalt-saturated felt, No. 15, without perforations, complying with ASTM D 226. C. Rosin Paper: Commercial, rosin-sized building paper, 0.010 inch thick. D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Subfloor Panels to Framing: Polyurethane-based formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. E. Fasteners. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article by the authority having jurisdiction, International Building Code, Wood Frame Construction manual, and National Design Specification. Nails shall comply to the requirements of ASTM F 1667. See Section 061100, Wood Framing, for additional information on fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. Lakeview Health Services WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061733-4 West End Heights WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061736 - 4 C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated below, complying with the following: a. ICC-ES ESR-1539 or NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. a. Chapter 23 in ICC's "International Building Code." b. Table 2304.10.1 "Fastening Schedule”, New York State Building Code E. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. F. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in American Wood Council, “ASD/LRFD Manual for Engineered Wood Construction,” 2012 edition for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Structural Floor Sheathing: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Provide 2x blocking at unsupported panel edges. Unless otherwise indicated, nailing to be 10d common nails spaced at 6” on center at supported edges and 12” on center at intermediate supports. Field glue to joists using adhesives meeting APA specification AFT-01, applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. c. Space panels at edges and ends as per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Roof and Wall Sheathing: a. Install in accordance with product manufacturers written instructions and the APA Design/Construction Guide, Residential & Commercial, unless otherwise indicated. b. Fasten in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and fastener spacing provided below and, in the drawings, and details. c. Roof Sheathing: Use 2X blocking at unsupported edges between framing members. Nailing to be 8d common nails at 6” on center at supported panel edges and 12” on center at intermediate supports. Lakeview Health Services WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061733-5 West End Heights WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 061736 - 5 d. Wall Sheathing: Use 2X blocking at unsupported edges between framing members. Nailing to be 8d common nails at 6” on center at supported panel edges and 12” on center at intermediate supports. See additional nailing requirements at Shear Panels (reference Shear Wall Schedule in Drawings). e. All nailing shall be carefully driven and not over-driven. The use of staples is prohibited. f. Space panels at edges and ends as per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 4. Underlayment: a. Patch damaged areas and fill depressions with patching compound. Machine sand patched, filled, and rough areas smooth and sand uneven joints flush. END OF SECTION 061736 Lakeview Health Services RIM BOARDS 061743-1 West End Heights SECTION 061743 – RIM BOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1 1/4” Thick LSL Rim Boards 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wood Framing – Section 061100 B. Prefabricated Structural Wall Panels – Section 061200 C. Laminated Veneer Lumber – Section 061713 D. PSL Lumber – Section 061723 E. Wood I-Joists – Section 061733 F. Wood Panel Product Sheathing – Section 061736 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 1 Carefully unload lumber by lifting, using forklifts or cranes to avoid damage. Keep lumber stored in wrapped and strapped bundles stacked no more than 10 feet high. Support bundles to prevent excessive bowing. Support and separate bundles with 2 × 4 or larger dimension lumber spaced no more than 10 feet apart. Keep supports in line vertically. 2 Handle individual pieces in a manner to prevent physical damage during measuring, cutting and erection. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1 Keep lumber dry. 2 Store lumber on a hard, dry, level surface. 3 Do not store lumber in contact with the ground. 4 Do not allow lumber to have prolonged exposure to weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Lakeview Health Services RIM BOARDS 061743-2 West End Heights 2.1 RIM BOARDS A. Provide 1 1/4” thick LSL rim board of the depth equal to the I-Joist floor joists as shown in the drawings and details. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Trus Joist Timberstrand LSL 1 1/4” Rim Board by Weyerhaeuser. B. Manufacturers 1. LP - Building Products. Contact: 414 Union St., Nashville, TN 37219; Telephone: (800) 999-9105, (910) 762-9878; Fax: (910) 763-8178; E-mail: customer.support@lpcorp.com; website: www.lpcorp.com. 2. Weyerhauser. Contact: PO Box 9777 CH 2C27, Federal Way, WA 98063. Toll Free: 1-888-453-8358. Website: http://www.woodbywy.com. 3. Other manufacturers may be acceptable contingent upon demonstration of equivalent products to those specified. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Framing Connectors – refer to Specification Section 061100 Wood framing and design drawings and notes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the lumber manufacturer. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1 Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of lumber. 2 Do not proceed with installation of lumber until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install lumber in compliance with design drawings. B. Use manufacturer’s standard connection details and recommended fasteners unless otherwise detailed in design drawings. D. All conditions requiring notched or drilled beams must be reviewed and approved by a licensed professional engineer. E. Conditions and Practices Not Permitted: 1 Do not place holes closer to supports than recommended by manufacturer. 2 Do not over cut holes. 3 Do not make holes not in compliance with allowable hole size and location Lakeview Health Services RIM BOARDS 061743-3 West End Heights recommendations of manufacturer or as approved by Engineer. 4 Do not install visibly damaged lumber. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION 061743 Lakeview Health Services FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. Division 6 Rough Carpentry 1.2 SUMMARY A. The following items and such similar items as are indicated on the Drawings or can be reasonably inferred therefrom, constitute the work of this section and shall include all labor, materials, etc. necessary to produce the finished results indicated: 1. Interior stools and aprons at window openings 2. Interior sills at window openings 3. Closet rods and shelving PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR STOOLS, APRONS & SILLS AT WINDOW OPENINGS: A. Stools: 5/4” MDF boards w/ eased edges. Painted B. Aprons: 1x4 MDF boards with eased edges. Painted C. Sills at 1st Floor (all rooms except Apartments) Windows: 5/4” Quartz (Refer to Div. 10 - Interior Specialties Cabinetry for Quartz) D. Sills at 1st Floor Apartments and all 2nd Floor through 5th Floor Windows: 5/4” MDF boards w/ eased edges. Painted 2.2 CLOSET RODS AND SHELVING A. Provide the following at each apartment coat closet and bedroom closet: 1. Shelving: ¾” MDF boards, paint. 2. 1x solid wood Perimeter Blocking, paint OR 3. Shelf brackets: KV 1196 Heavy-Duty Series in Warm White color at 3’-0” o.c. max. B. Closet Rods: Stanley Hardware 1-5/16-inch diameter round, with #V8600 Heavy Duty Closet Flanges. White Finish C. At Accessible Apartments: low shelf and rod shall be removable. D. At all apartment unit linen closets, provide vinyl-coated 20-inch-deep close mesh wire shelving on fixed mount system as manufactured by Closetmaid. Minimum 3 shelves per linen closet. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies if each color sample. 3.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Division 1 Closeout Procedures for Extra Materials to be furnished by Contractor. Lakeview Health Services FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-2 West End Heights PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 4.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of construction period. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4.5 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting. 4.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails. 4.7 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. Lakeview Health Services FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-3 West End Heights 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4.8 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 4.9 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 4.10 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services COLD FLUID-APPLIED 071416-1 West End Heights WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: Installation of waterproofing membrane on all sub-grade surfaces and all other surfaces as indicated on the drawings, consisting of preparation of existing, repaired and new concrete surfaces, sealing of cracks and joints, and application of a thick reinforced fluid-applied waterproofing membrane. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 3 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Division 7 - Sealants. C. Division 15 - Floor Drains and Standpipes. D. Division 16 - Conduit and other Electrical. 1.3 REFERENCES ASTM C 836 100% Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for use with Separate Wearing Course. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Product provided by this Section is a coal-tar and solvent-free, single component, elastomeric liquid designed to create a seamless reinforced waterproofing membrane at 120 mil thickness. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions. C. Subcontractor’s approval by Manufacturer: Submit document stating manufacturer's acceptance of subcontractor as an Approved Applicator for the specified materials. D. Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions stated in Section 1.7. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator shall be experienced in applying the same or similar materials and shall be specifically approved in writing by the membrane system manufacturer. B. Pre-Application Conference: Prior to beginning work, convene a conference to review conditions, installation procedures, schedules and coordination with other work. 1.7 WARRANTY Upon completion and acceptance of the work required by this section, the manufacturer will issue a warranty agreeing to promptly replace defective materials. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original, factory-sealed, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and label intact and legible with following information. 1. Name of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Material safety data sheet. B. Recommended storage and application temperature is 75 degrees F. Store materials in protected and well-ventilated area. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply membrane if temperature is less than 40 degrees F., if precipitation is imminent or the surface is wet or has frost. Substrate may be saturated surface dry. B. Coordinate waterproofing work with other trades to ensure adequate illumination, ventilation, and dust-free environment during application and curing of membrane. The applicator shall have sole Lakeview Health Services COLD FLUID-APPLIED 071416-2 West End Heights WATERPROOFING right of access to the specified areas for the time needed to complete the application and allow the membrane to cure adequately. C. Protect adjoining surfaces not to be coated against damage or soiling. Protect plants, vegetation and animals which might be affected by waterproofing operations. D. Warn personnel against breathing of vapors and contact of material with skin or eyes. Wear applicable protective clothing and respiratory protection gear. E. Maintain work area in a neat and orderly condition, removing empty containers, rags, and rubbish daily from the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS Basis of Design: CCW-MIRASEAL Reinforced Liquid Applied Waterproofing Membrane at 120 mil thickness as supplied by 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Products: 1. CCW-MIRASEAL by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Incorporated, 900 Hensley Lane, Wylie, Texas 78098, Phone: (800) 527-7092 Fax: (972) 442-0076. 2. Aqua-Bloc WB Elastomeric Asphalt Emulsion Waterproofing by Henry Company, 999 N. Sepulveda, Ste. 800, El Segundo CA 90245 3. Hydrolastic 836 by W.R. Meadows, P.O. Box 338, Hampshire, IL 60140 4. TREMproof 201/60 by Tremco, 3735 Green Road, Beachwood, OH 44122 2.3 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS A. Surface Primer: is not required for concrete or wood all other surfaces as recommended by manufacturer for each surface encountered. B. Sealants: Shall be CCW-201 two-component Polyurethane Sealant. C. Backing Rod: Shall be closed-cell polyethylene foam rod. D. Flexible Flashing: Shall be as recommended and supplied by coating manufacturer. E. Protection Course: Provide protection board as indicated. F. Drainage Composite: As specified. G. Reinforcing: Shall be a reinforcing fabric as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Before any waterproofing work is started the waterproofing applicator shall thoroughly examine all surfaces for any deficiencies. Should any deficiencies exist, the architect, owner, or general contractor shall be notified in writing and corrections made. B. Condition of Concrete Surfaces: 1. The concrete surfaces shall be of sound structural grade, minimum of 2500 PSI compressive strength, and shall have a wood float or fine broom finish, free of fins, ridges, voids or entrained air holes. 2. Concrete shall be cured by water curing method. Curing compounds must be of the pure sodium silicate type and be approved by the Carlisle representative. 3. Concrete shall be cured at least three (3) days and shall be sloped for proper drainage. 4. Control joints and/or expansion joints shall have been properly installed at strategic points throughout the field of the deck to control cracking caused by deflection and shrinkage. 5. Any required crickets or drains should be installed at the time the main deck is poured. Deck should be monolithic. Lakeview Health Services COLD FLUID-APPLIED 071416-3 West End Heights WATERPROOFING 6. Voids, rock pockets and excessively rough surfaces shall be repaired with approved non-shrink grout or ground to match the unrepaired areas. 7. Two-stage drains shall have a minimum 3" flange and be installed with the flange flush and level with the concrete surface. 8. Surfaces at cold joints shall be on the same plane. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. The concrete surface must be thoroughly clean, dry and free from any surface contaminates or cleaning residue that may harmfully affect the adhesion of the membrane. B. Install a 1" face, 45 degree cant at all angle changes and inside corners including projections through the deck, walls, curbs, bumpers, etc. C. All cracks over 1/16" in width and all moving cracks under 1/16" in width shall be saw cut to 1/4" minimum in width and depth. Saw cut a 1/4" by 1/4" kerf around drain flanges. Clean, prime and fill saw cuts flush with polyurethane sealant. D. All moving cracks over 1/16" wide and all expansion joints less than 1" wide shall be cleaned, primed, fitted with a backing rod and caulked with polyurethane sealant. For larger joints, contact Carlisle representative. E. Allow all sealant to cure thoroughly. F. Apply a 6" wide, 45 mils thick stripe-coat of fluid-applied waterproofing centered over all sealed cracks, hairline cracks, joints, and outside corners. G. Apply a 45 mil thick stripe-coat of fluid-applied waterproofing over sealant cants and extending 4" onto the horizontal deck and up the vertical wall to the height called out on the drawings (minimum 8" recommended). H. Allow all detail work to cure overnight. I. All required metal shall be installed at this time. Apply a stripe coat of fluid-applied waterproofing, 45 mils thick, 6" wide, centered over all transitions from concrete to metal flashings and reinforce with reinforcing fabric. Allow the stripe coat to cure a minimum of three (3) hours to a firm consistency. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Priming: Primer is not required for adhesion to dry surfaces, non-porous concrete or wood. Consult manufacturer for other substrates. B. Apply the fluid-applied waterproofing in one uniform coat at the rate of one gallon minimum per 25 square feet or as needed in order to obtain a minimum thickness of 60 wet mils, including coverage of detail work. Use a ¼-inch notch squeegee to achieve a uniform thickness, then back roll to smooth coating. C. Immediately install manufacturer’s reinforcing fabric working the fabric into the wet fluid-applied waterproofing until fabric is saturated, avoiding trapped air, wrinkles and fishmouths. Cut and lay flat wrinkles and fishmouths. D. In the event the entire surface is not completed in one day and becomes contaminated, prior to beginning application clean an area 6" wide along the edge of the previously applied membrane with a cloth wet with xylene solvent. New work shall overlap the existing work by 6". E. Allow the first coat of fluid-applied waterproofing to cure three (3) hours minimum to a firm consistency. F. Apply the second coat of fluid-applied waterproofing at 25 sf/gallon in a uniform consistency of 60 mils over the first coat of fluid-applied waterproofing. Cover the reinforcing fabric for complete encapsulation. 3.4 FLOOD TEST A. Allow fluid-applied waterproofing Membrane to cure for at least 24 hours. Plug drains and provide barriers necessary to contain flood water. Lakeview Health Services COLD FLUID-APPLIED 071416-4 West End Heights WATERPROOFING B. Flood surface with 1" head of water for 24 hours. Inspect for leaks and repair membrane if leaks are found. Retest after making repairs. 3.5 PROTECTION COURSE Install protection boards immediately after flood testing on horizontal surfaces. If flood testing is delayed, install a temporary covering to protect the fluid-applied waterproofing membrane from damage by other trades. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services BUILDING INSULATION 072100-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Continuous rigid extruded polystyrene (XPS) on foundation walls (at entire perimeter of building, refer to the drawings for additional information). 2. Continuous rigid extruded polystyrene (XPS) on exterior perimeter walls (at entire perimeter of building, refer to the drawings for additional information). 3. Mineral wool batt insulation (in wall cavity of framed walls at entire perimeter of building, refer to the drawings for additional information). 4. Mineral wool batt sound attenuating insulation (at all interior walls, floors/ceilings/roofs, refer to the drawings for additional information). 5. Foam-in-place closed-cell insulation (at all rim joists and all other locations indicated, refer to the drawings for additional information). 6. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section Membrane Roofing or insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 2. Division 9 Section Gypsum Board Assemblies or installation in wood-framed and metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: 12”x12” units for each type of insulation indicated. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. Lakeview Health Services BUILDING INSULATION 072100-2 West End Heights PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board (XPS) Insulation: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Tenneco Building Product. 2. Glass/Mineral-Fiber (Mineral Wool) Insulation: a. Basis-of-Design: Owens Corning • Exterior Framed Walls: Thermafiber UltraBatt • Interior Framed Walls/Ceilings/Roof Assemblies: Thermafiber (SAFB Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket) b. Other manufactures: • CertainTeed Corporation. • Johns Manville Corporation. • Knauf Fiber Glass. • Roxul Inc. 3. Foam-in-place Insulation: a. BioBased Insulation b. Thermco Foam Insulation – Manufactured by Thermal Corporation of America c. Polyicynene Spray Insulation – Manufactured by Icynene®.. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: 1. Thicknesses and R-Valve: See Drawings. C. Glass/Mineral-Fiber (Mineral Wool) Insulation (sound-attenuating insulation): 1. Thicknesses and R-Value: See Drawings. D. Foam-in-place Insulation: 1. Thicknesses and R-Value: See Drawings 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. See Division 7 Fluid-Applied Membrane Waterproofing B. See Division 7 Fluid-Applied Air & Vapor Barriers 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Protection Board: Pre-molded, semi-rigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, formed under heat and pressure, of standard sizes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION Lakeview Health Services BUILDING INSULATION 072100-3 West End Heights A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of insulation. Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line. B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Install cavity wall insulation as follows: 1. Install rigid foam insulation with small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. a. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece all ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies.” b. Seal joints between Extruded polystyrene insulation units with vapor-resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-1 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. A fluid-applied membrane air & vapor barrier and accessory products. B. Materials and installation methods for an air & vapor barrier assembly for exterior wall assemblies as indicated on drawings including, but not limited to: 1. All exterior masonry walls in their entirety. C. Materials and installation to bridge and seal the following air leakage pathways and gaps: 1. Connections of the walls to the roof air barrier 2. Connections of the walls to the foundations 3. Seismic and expansion joints 4. Openings and penetrations of window frames, door frames, store front, curtain wall 5. Barrier pre-cast concrete and other envelope systems 6. Door frames Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations 7. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations 8. All other air leakage pathways through the opaque walls 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION: Flexible throughwall flashings to be built into masonry are furnished under Section 07 65 26 Self-Adhering Through-Wall Flashing or Section 07 65 23 EPDM Through-Wall Flashing. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 3 - Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Division 4 - Unit Masonry C. Division 7 - Sheet Waterproofing D. Division 7 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing E. Division 7 – Damp Proofing. F. Division 7 - Thermal Insulation G. Division 7 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing H. Division 7 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal through-wall flashings I. Division 7 – Flexible Flashings: Self-adhering and EPDM through-wall flashing J. Division 7 - Joint Protection: Joint sealant materials and installation. K. Division 8 - Metal Door Frames L. Division 8 – Storefronts M. Division 8 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies N. Division 8 - Metal Windows O. Division 8 - Gypsum Sheathing: Gypsum sheathing over metal studs. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants B. ASTM C 1305 Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of Liquid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane C. ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension D. ASTM D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel and Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds E. ASTM D 1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection F. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. G. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen H. ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for the Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Pressure Difference Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-2 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS I. ASTM E 331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure J. ASTM E 783 Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors K. ASTM E 1105 Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference L. ASTM E 2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Installed Product and Accessories constitute an air barrier assembly, which shall be airtight, durable and continuous, as described in Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code requirements: 780 CMR Chapter 13, Paragraphs 1304.3.1 Air Barriers and 1304.3.2 Air Barrier Penetrations. B. Installed Product and Accessories shall exhibit no visible water leakage when tested per ASTM E 331 and shall perform as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. C. Installed Product and Accessories shall exhibit an air leakage rate not exceeding 0.02 L/s*m2 at 75 Pa (0.004 CFM/ft2 at 1.57 PSF) according to ASTM E 283. Air leakage shall not exceed this rate while Product and Accessories remain soundly adhered after exposure to sustained and gust wind loading according to ASTM E 330. D. Installed Product and Accessories shall perform as a vapor barrier, installed on the predominantly warm side of the insulation. E. Product shall be solvent free, have VOC content of not more than 30 grams per liter and shall be free of noxious odors. F. Product, when applied at minimum 0.040 inch (40 mils) cured thickness, shall meet the following requirements: REQUIREMENT RESULT TEST METHOD Air Permeance Not more than 0.009 liters per second per square meter of area at 75 Pa pressure differential ASTM E-2178 modified, spray-applied over medium density concrete masonry unit (CMU) wall Water Vapor Permeance Not more than 0.02 Perm ASTM E-96, Method B Tensile Elongation Not less than 1,000 percent ASTM D-412 Low Temperature Flexibility No cracking at minus 25 degrees F ASTM D 1970 Low-Temperature Crack Bridging Pass at 0 degrees F ASTM C 1305 Peel Adhesion on HDPE Film Not less than 25 lb per inch of width ASTM D 903 Peel Adhesion on Concrete Not less than 19 lb per inch of width Peel Adhesion on Concrete Masonry Unit Not less than 22.5 lb per inch of width Peel Adhesion on Exterior Grade Gypsum Sheathing Substrate failure 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 B. At bid submission, provide evidence to the Architect of installer qualification by Manufacturer. Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-3 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS C. Shop drawings showing locations and extent of air & vapor barrier and details of typical conditions. D. Manufacturer's technical data sheets and material safety data sheets for Product and Accessories. E. Manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Manufacturer’s documentation of volatile organic compounds (VOC) content for Product and Accessories. G. Certification of compatibility by Manufacturer, listing all materials on the Project with which the Product and Accessories may come into contact. H. Samples, 3 inch by 4 inch minimum size, of cured Product and Transition Membrane. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be experienced in applying the same or similar materials and shall be specifically approved in writing by Manufacturer. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain Product and Accessories from single manufacturer. C. Product and Accessories shall comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). D. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing Work of this section, in accordance with Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings. E. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation on Project, apply Product and Accessories on mock-up to verify details under shop drawing submittals, to demonstrate tie-ins with adjoining construction and other termination conditions and to become familiar with properties of materials in application. 1. Construct typical exterior wall panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, incorporating backup wall, cladding, window and doorframe and sill, insulation, flashing, foundation wall and typical penetrations and gaps; illustrating interface of materials and seals. F. Allow full cure of Product on mock-up according to Manufacturer’s instructions before testing. Test mock-up in accordance with Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance and test in accordance with ASTM E 783 and ASTM E1105 for air and water infiltration G. Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner's inspection and testing agency. Do not cover any installed Product unless it has been inspected, tested and approved. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with Manufacturer's name, product name, lot number and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages in clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by Manufacturer. C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. Protect Product from freezing. Do not store cylinders of Aerosol Contact Adhesive above 110 degrees F. D. Avoid spillage. Immediately notify Owner and Architect if spillage occurs and start clean up procedures. Clean spills and leave area as it was prior to spill. 1.09 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL A. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. B. Ensure emptied containers are stored safely for disposal away from children. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Spray-Grade Product Application: Ambient temperature shall be above 20 degrees F. Maintain Product and the spray equipment above 50 degrees F during application. Do not spray during rain, accumulating snow fall or in windy conditions. Protect surfaces from overspray. B. Roller-Grade Product Application: Ambient temperature shall be above 40 degrees F. Do not apply during rain, if rain is expected in the next 24 hours or if the temperature is expected to drop below 32 degrees F in the next 24 hours. Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-4 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS C. Transition Membrane Application: Apply at ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F unless procedure for low temperature application is followed. Do not apply during rain. D. Low Temperature Application of Transition Membrane: Apply at ambient temperatures above 25 degrees F. Do not apply during rain or accumulating snowfall. Store in heated area until use. Use transition membrane labeled LT, designating low-temperature formula. E. Contact Adhesives: Maintain cylinders of Aerosol Spray Contact Adhesive above 60 degrees F during spray. Do not apply Water-Based Contact Adhesive at ambient temperatures below 40 degrees F. 1.11 WARRANTIES: Provide the Manufacturer’s minimum five year material warranty under provisions of Section 01 78 36 – Warranties. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS: Provide as manufactured by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Incorporated. 900 Hensley Lane, Wylie, TX 75098. Phone 1-800-527-7092. Website http://www.carlisle-ccw.com : A. Spray-Grade: Barriseal™-S pourable consistency, water-based, polymer-modified asphalt B. Roller-Grade: Barriseal™-R paste consistency, water-based, polymer-modified asphalt 2.02 ACCESSORIES: Provide as manufactured by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Incorporated: A. Co-Spray: Barricure™ chloride-free liquid concentrate diluted with tap water at 3:1 ratio by volume. B. Transition Membrane: 1. CCW-705 Air & Vapor Barrier Strips 2. CCW-705 LT Air & Vapor Barrier Strips C. Sheathing Joint Treatment: 1. 4 inch width Transition Membrane centered over joint and bonded to surface prepared with Contact Adhesive 2. Barritape™ centered over joint and bonded to surface prepared with Contact Adhesive. 3. AB-151 Scrim centered over joint with Barriseal™-R covering scrim and filling joint. D. Contact Adhesive 1. CCW-702 Solvent-Based 2. AWP Water-Based 3. CAV-GRIP™ Aerosol Spray E. Mastic 1. LM 800 XL solvent-based synthetic rubber 2. CCW-704 solvent-based rubber-modified asphalt F. Fill Compound 1. Barriseal-R Water-based, modified asphalt, 1-part 2. CCW-703 V Modified polyurethane, 2-part 3. LM 800 XL Solvent-based, synthetic rubber, 1-part 4. CCW-201 Polyurethane, 2-part G. Aerosol Insulation Adhesive 1. Drain-Grip™ standard product 2. CAV-GRIP™ low VOC product 2.03 RELATED MATERIALS BY OTHERS A. Joint Sealant: 1. CCW-201 non-sag, 2-part polyurethane 2. As approved by Manufacturer for compatibility with air & vapor barrier Products and Accessories. Shall conform to ASTM C 920 Type 1 or 2, Grade NS, Class 25 or 50. Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-5 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS B. Polyurethane Foam: Approved by Manufacturer for compatibility with air & vapor barrier Products and Accessories. C. Insulation Adhesive: Approved by Manufacturer for compatibility with Products and Accessories PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions affecting installation of Product and Accessories for compliance with requirements. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable prior to commencing Work of this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of seven days. C. Surfaces shall be sound, dry and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. D. Surfaces shall be supported and flush at joints without large voids or sharp protrusions. E. Masonry joints shall be tooled flush and completely filled with mortar. Mortar droppings shall be removed from masonry ties. F. Damaged sheathing corners shall be soundly anchored and filled with material approved by Manufacturer. G. Inform Architect [Consultant] [Owner] in writing of 1. Cracks in concrete and masonry. 2. Gaps or obstructions such as steel beams, angles, plates and projections which cannot be spanned or covered by Product or Accessories. 3. Anticipated problems applying Product and Accessories over substrate. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Concrete masonry unit (CMU) wall shall be prepared as follows to accept the air & vapor barrier: 1. Surfaces shall be free of contaminants such as grease, oil and wax on surfaces to receive membrane 2. The CMU surfaces shall be free from projections. 3. Strike mortar joints full and flush to face of concrete block. 4. Fill voids and holes greater than ½ inch across with mortar or non-shrink grout. 5. Fill cracks, gaps and joints exceeding ¼ inch width with mortar or non-shrink grout. 6. Grind flush or make smooth surface irregularities exceeding ¼ inch in height or sharp to touch. 7. Fill around penetrations with mortar, sealant or other approved fill material and strike flush. 8. If surfaces cannot be made smooth to the satisfaction of the Architect, it will be the responsibility of the trade to alternatively apply a parge coat (typically one part cement to three parts sand) over surface to receive fluid-applied membrane air barrier. 9. Remove mortar droppings on brick ties, shelf angles, brick shelves and other horizontal obstructions. B. Treat cracks in concrete and masonry exceeding 1/16 inch width and not exceeding ¼ inch width with one of these methods 1. Fill Compound struck flush 2. 4 inch width Transition Membrane centered over crack C. Fill cracks, gaps and joints exceeding ¼ inch width with tooled Joint Sealant over backer rod. D. Fill rough gaps around pipe, conduit and similar penetrations with mortar, non-shrink grout or Polyurethane Foam. Allow cure of fill in rough gap. Apply a minimum ½ inch tooled bead of Fill Compound around pipe, duct or conduit at wall surface. Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-6 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS E. Fill inside corners with minimum ½ inch tooled bead of Fill Compound F. Treat sheathing joints with either method below: 1. Sheathing Joint Treatment 2. Fill with Joint Sealant and strike flush G. Apply Transition Membrane over surface prepared with Contact Adhesive according to Manufacturer’s instructions in the following areas: 1. Outside corners: minimum 6 inch width 2. Openings for fenestration: Wrap opening. Extend into rough opening the full depth of fenestration and onto wall 3 inches minimum. 3. Top of wall: Minimum 12 inch width 4. Base of wall: Minimum 12 inch width, cover transition of base of wall to foundation. Extend minimum 8 inches onto wall. 5. Transitions: Such as wall assembly junctions, columns and beams. Extend 3 inches minimum onto either side of transition 6. Expansion and seismic joints exceeding 1 inch across: Cover with assembly consisting of minimum 12 inch width strip with 4 inch width strip centered along length and bonded to underside of wider strip. 7. Expansion and seismic joints not more than 1 inch across: Extend 3 inches minimum onto either side of joint. H. Lap adjacent pieces of Transition Membrane 2 inches minimum and sequence installation to provide shingled overlaps. Roll firmly to substrate with hand roller tool. Seal end laps, non-shingled laps and corner pinholes with Mastic. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Allow materials used Article 3.02 Surface Preparation to cure fully before applying Products. B. Spray-Grade Product: 1. Dispense in tandem with Co-Spray through spray equipment approved by Manufacturer. 2. Spray on walls working from bottom upward with overlapping passes. Keep spray streams perpendicular to wall. 3. Apply at 0.045 inch (45 mils) minimum wet thickness. 4. Apply full thickness in one application. If required thickness is not achieved in one coat, allow surface to dry to touch and apply additional coat(s). END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FLUID-APPLIED 072726-7 West End Heights AIR & VAPOR BARRIERS Roller-Grade Product: 5. Dispense with medium to long nap roller or trowel 6. Apply 0.030 inch (30 mils) minimum wet thickness coat. Allow to dry firm. Apply second coat at 0.030 inch (30 mils) minimum wet thickness. C. Provide complete coverage without pinholes or voids. Apply greater thickness of Product as necessary to provide continuous coating over rough surfaces and irregularities. D. Apply Product 2 inches minimum onto Transition Membrane details. E. Apply Product over Sheathing Joint Treatment and Fill Compound details. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Seal penetrations made through installed Product according to Article 3.02 Paragraph D. B. Through-wall flashing installed after Product, with brick veneer: 1. Self-adhering type in accordance with Division 7. 2. EPDM type in accordance with Division 7. C. Fenestration installed after Product: 1. Seal fenestration frame to Transition Membrane in rough opening with continuous Joint Sealant over backer rod or Polyurethane Foam. 2. Seal mounting flange of patio doors and windows along jambs and head with minimum 4 inch width Transition Membrane. Apply Transition Membrane according to Article 3.02 Paragraph H. D. Board insulation installed after Product: Attach with Aerosol Insulation Adhesive plus mechanical fasteners or with insulation adhesive by others. E. Roof air barrier: join to Product according to Manufacturer’s instructions and drawings. 3.05 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Protect from damage during application and remainder of construction period. B. Inspect before covering and make repairs as necessary. Remove damaged material and re-coat area with Product according to Article 3.03 Paragraph B or C. Overlap damage 2 inches minimum. C. Product and Accessories are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover with board insulation or exterior cladding as soon as schedule allows. D. Outdoor exposure of installed Transition Membrane shall not exceed 60 days E. Outdoor exposure of installed Product shall not exceed 30 days. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL 074213 West End Heights WALL PANELS Part 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. The extent of panel system work is indicated on the drawings and in these specifications. 2. Panel system requirements include the following components: a. Aluminum-faced composite panels with mounting system. Panel mounting system including anchorages, furring, shims, fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing adapters and masking for a complete installation. Note: Panels shall be Reynobond FR Colorweld 500 (Charcoal) and Reynobond FR Durogloss 5000 (Terra di Sienna). b. Panel manufacturer recommends that system should include shop-installed aluminum stiffeners on all panels of 20 square feet or larger. Minimum stiffener recommendation is one per 20 square feet of panel area. c. Parapet coping, column covers, soffits, sills, border and filler items may be indicated as integral components of the panels system or as designed. d. All flashing metal required shall be provided by the panel manufacturer. e. All panels shall be fabricated and installed per the manufacturer’s details. f. All outside corners, parapet copings, soffit edges, and similar conditions shall be return panels. No outside corner seams will be accepted. g. System to be fabricated and installed per local code requirements. B. Related documents: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions, division 1 specification sections and technical specification divisions 2 through 16, apply to this section. C. Related Sections 1. Div. 5 “Structural Steel Framing” 2. Div. 6 “Rough Carpentry” 3. Div. 7 “Thermal Insulation” 4. Div. 7 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” 5. Div. 7 “Joint Sealants” 6. Div. 7 “Gypsum Board” 1.2 Quality Assurance A. Composite panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years’ architectural experience in the manufacture of this product and be located within the continental USA. B. It is recommended that fabrication and installation of composite panels shall be from a single source. If not single source, both panel fabricator and the installer must show proof of past successful collaboration. C. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the contractor to avoid delay of work. D. Shop drawings shall show the preferred joint details providing a watertight and structurally sound wall panel system that allows no uncontrolled water penetration, on the inside face of the panel system as determined by ASTM E331. E. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 6 mm (1/4”) in 6 m (20’) non-accumulative. F. Panel fabricator and installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all components of the exterior panel system, including but not limited to, attachment to sub-construction, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery and joint seal associated with the panel system. 1.3 References A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 2. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 3. ASTM D1781: Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel Test for Adhesives. 4. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface-Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 6. ASTM D3363: Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL 074213 West End Heights WALL PANELS 7. ASTM D2794: Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). 8. ASTM D3359: Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 9. ASTM D2247: Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. 10. ASTM B117: Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 11. ASTM D822: Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. 12. ASTM D1308: Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 13. ASTM D1735: Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus. 14. ASTM D1929: Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics. 15. ASTM D635: Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in Horizontal Position. 1.4 Submittals A. Submittals shall be in conformance with Division 1. B. Samples 1. Panel assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly, 304 mm (12”) x 304 mm (12”) minimum. 2. Two samples of each color or finish selected, 76 mm (3”) x 102 mm (4”) minimum. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and anchoring methods; detail and location of joints, sealants and gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing; and accessories. Shop Drawings shall include elevation drawings with dimensions and colors of all panels for entire building. D. Fabrication Tickets: Submit fabrication drawings showing location and type of aluminumextruded stiffeners at typical panels and at corner panels, if required. E. Sample Panel Mock-up: Construct a metal panel sample panel for review and approval by the Architect. All submittals should be approved before the sample panel is constructed. Materials used in the sample panel should be selected and supplied by the manufacturer using metal panels, fasteners, reveals, etc., manufactured for this specific project so the full range of colors and conditions for this project can be demonstrated in the panel. This shall include any special shapes. Materials used in the sample panel should be selected and supplied by the manufacturer. The sample panel shall be constructed by the contractor selected for the project before the work begins and should not be removed or destroyed until all work has been accepted. The sample panel will be used to evaluate if the appearance and construction of the finished metal panel work meets the requirements of the contract documents. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and details are approved by Architect. 1.5 Warranty A. The fabricator and installer will warrant the wall system for a period of 1 year that the fabrication and installation workmanship will be free from defects. B. The aluminum composite material manufacturer shall warrant for a period of 30 years against Max 5 fade based on ASTM D2244 and Max 8 chalk based on ASTM D4212 and delamination of the paint finish. 1.6 Packaging, shipping and handling A. Follow Manufacturer’s Recommendations. B. Store Material in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 2 - Products 2.1 Panels A. Composite Panels Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL 074213 West End Heights WALL PANELS 1. Panels shall be Reynobond® Fire Resistant (FR) Aluminum Composite Materials Reynobond® (ACM) as manufactured by Arconic Architectural Products LLC (AAP), 50 Industrial Boulevard, Eastman, Georgia 31023. Contact Eastman plant at 1-800-841-7774 or 478-374-4746 or at www.reynobond.com B. Fire Resistant Core (FR) C. Panel Thickness: RB160FR (4 mm) = 0.157” D. Panel Weight: RB160FR (4 mm) = 1.53 lbs/sft E. Product Performance 1. Bond integrity When tested for bond integrity, in accordance with ASTM D1781 (simulating resistance to panel delamination), there shall not be an adhesive failure of the bond a) between the core and the skin or b) cohesive failure of the core itself below the following values. 2. Peel Strength 100 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb./in.) As manufactured 100 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb./in.) After 21 days soaking in water at 70°F 3. Fire Performance ASTM E84 – Passed Class A F. Panel Finishes Coil-coated Kynar 500®, Hylar 5000® based polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or Durogloss 5000 (Coil-coated BeckryTech® 5001 based on a particular very high durable polymeric resin. AAP shall be Duragloss® 5000. Performances are coming from a selective choice of pigments and from an exclusive high built primer. This coating offers large possibilities of colors and some others specific appearances as metallic effects). AAP shall be Colorweld® 500 a fluoropolymer coating utilizing 70% Kynar 500® resins. 1. Color: a. Panel Color 1: Reynobond – Colorweld 500 – ‘Charcoal’ b. Panel Color 2: Reynobond – Durogloss 5000 – ‘Terra di Sienna’ 2. Coating: Shall be factory applied on a continuous-process paint line. Coating shall consist of a 0.2 mil (approx.) prime coat and a 0.8 mil (approx.) finish coat containing 70% Kynar 500® resins. (If Colorweld® 500XL, coating shall consist of a 0.2 mil (approx.) barrier prime coat, a 0.80 mil (approx.) color coat, containing 70% Kynar 500® resins and a 0.5 mil (approx.) clear coat containing 70% Kynar 500® resins.) Nominal dry film thickness is 1.50 mils. 3. Gloss: : Reynobond – Colorweld 500: ASTM D523 standard at 60º shall be 25–30. Gloss: Reynobond – Durogloss 5000: ASTM D523 standard at 60º ranges from 20% to >80% 4. Pencil hardness: Reynobond – Colorweld 500: ASTM D3363 shall be F-2H minimum. Pencil hardness: Reynobond – Durogloss 5000: ASTM D3363 shall be F minimum 5. Flexibility T-Bend: ASTM D4145 shall be 0-2T-Bend; no pick-off. Flexibility T-Bend: ASTM D4145 shall be 0T-Bend for Colorweld® DL and HB-H for Duragloss® 5000. 6. Adhesion: ASTM D3359 reverse impact 1/16” crosshatch shall show no cracking or adhesion loss. 7. Reverse Impact: ASTM D2794 1500 x metal thickness aluminum shall show no cracking or adhesion loss. 8. Acid Resistance: ASTM D1308, 10% muriatic acid, 24 hrs, shall show no effect. 20% sulfuric acid, 18 hrs, shall show no effect. 9. Acid Rain Test: Kesternich SO2, DIN 500180, 10 cycles min. No objectionable color change. 10. Alkali Resistance: ASTM D1308, 10%, 25% NaOH, 1 hr., shall show no effect. 11. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B117, 5% salt fog at 95°F. Pass 4,000 hrs. less than 1/16” average creep from scribe; up to a few #8 blisters. 12. Humidity Resistance: ASTM D714 & ASTM D2247 100% relative humidity at 95ºF, shall pass 4,000 hrs, # 8 blisters. 13. Exterior Exposure: 10 years at 45º, South Florida. ASTM D2244 shall be Max. 5 fade and ASTM D4214 shall be Max. 8 chalk. 14. Paint system shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2605 specifications. 15.(FEVE) Megaflon®, Coraflon®, Valflon® or any Lumiflon®-based paint systems are not acceptable. 16. Paint system shall have more than 20 years of architectural field use. 2.2 Panel Fabrication A. Fire Resistant ACM is comprised of two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded thermoplastic material formed in a continuous process using no glues or adhesives between Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL 074213 West End Heights WALL PANELS dissimilar materials. The core shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed insulation materials. The bond between the core and the skins shall be a chemical bond. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable. B. Aluminum Face Sheets 1. Thickness: 0.020” 2. Aluminum alloy shall be 3000 series or equivalent. C. Tolerances 1. Panel Bow: Shall not exceed 0.8% of panel overall dimension in width or length. 2. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when possible. Panel dimensions shall be such that there will be an allowance for field adjustment and thermal movement. 3. Panel Lines: Breaks and curves shall be sharp and true, and surfaces free of warps or buckles. 4. Flatness: Panels shall be visually flat. 5. Panel Surfaces: Shall be free of scratches or marks caused during fabrication. D. System Characteristics 1. Plans, elevations, details, characteristics and other requirements indicated are based upon standards by one manufacturer. It is intended that other manufacturers, receiving prior approval, may be acceptable, provided their details and characteristics comply with size and profile requirements, and material/performance standards. 2. System must not generally have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat appearance (excludes face fastened solution) 3. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size and profile indicated on the drawings based on a design temperature of 68ºF (20ºC). 4. Fabricate panel system to avoid compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature changes and at all times remain air- and watertight. 5. The finish side of the panel shall have a removable protective film applied prior to fabrication, which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping and erection to protect the surface from damage. E. System Type (select from the following) 1. Rout-and-Return Dry System: Fabricator and installer must provide an engineered pressure relief system including extruded perimeter frame; drainage gutter; all extrusions, clips, fasteners, anchors, spacers, trim, flashings, gaskets, sealant, etc. F. System Performance 1. Composite panels shall be capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures based on the following test standards required by the architect and/or local building codes: a. Wind Load – If system tests are not available, under the direction of an independent thirdparty laboratory, mockups shall be constructed and tests performed to show compliance to the following minimum standards: i. Panels shall be designed to withstand the design wind load based upon the local building code, but in no case less than 20 pounds per square foot (psf) and 30 psf on parapet and corner panels. Wind-load testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E330 to obtain the following results. ii. Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the secured perimeterframing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4”, whichever is less. iii. Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not exceed L/60 of the full span. iv. Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16”. At 1 1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed l/100 of span length and components shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points of framing members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16”. b. Air/Water System Test – Without backup waterproof membrane. If system tests are not available, under the direction of an independent third-party laboratory, mockups shall be constructed and tests performed to show compliance to the following minimum standards: i. Air Infiltration – When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, air infiltration at 1.57 psf must not exceed 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot of wall area. ii. Water Infiltration – Water infiltration is defined as uncontrolled water leakage through the exterior face of the assembly. Systems not using a construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e., Dry Systems) shall be designed to drain any water leakage occurring at the Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL 074213 West End Heights WALL PANELS joints. No water infiltration shall occur in any system under a differential static pressure of 6.24 psf after 15 minutes of exposure in accordance with ASTM E331. c. Fire Performance: Where required by governing code, provide fire retardant MCM that has been evaluated and is in compliance with code requirements specified herein. Metal Construction Association Page www.architecturalproducts.com i. Fire Performance: Wall assemblies containing MCM System shall meet the requirements of the Intermediate Scale Multi-story test, NFPA 285, where required by code based for the design of this project. 2.3 Accessories A. Extrusions, formed members, sheet and plate shall conform with ASTM B209 and the recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Panel stiffeners, if required, shall be structurally fastened or restrained at the ends and shall be secured to the rear face of the composite panel with silicone of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel flatness. Stiffener material and/or finish shall be compatible with the silicone. C. Sealants and gaskets within the panel system shall be as per manufacturer’s standards to meet performance requirements. D. Fabricate flashing materials from 0.040” minimum thickness aluminum sheet provided by panel manufacturer to match the adjacent curtain wall/panel system where exposed. Post-painted spray-applied flashings are not acceptable. Provide a lap strap under the flashing at abutted conditions and seal lapped surfaces with a full bead of non-hardening sealant. E. Support clips/furring (and associated shims) by system fabricator and installer. F. Fasteners (concealed/non-corrosive): Fasteners (equal to #12 Dril-Flex Fasteners) as recommended by system fabricator and installer. G. Weather barriers shall provide water penetration, water vapor transmission, and air penetration resistance according to the local requirements. Seal any holes in the weather barrier with manufacturer approved materials and methods. PART 3 - Execution 3.1 Inspection A. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects detrimental to work. Notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be structurally sound as determined by a registered engineer. 3.2 Installation A. Erect panels plumb and level. B. Attachment system shall allow for the free vertical and horizontal thermal movement due to expansion and contraction for a material temperature range of -20ºF (-29ºC) to +180ºF (+82ºC). Buckling of panels, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement are not permitted. Fabrication, assembly and erection procedure shall account for the ambient temperature at the time of the respective operation. C. Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings. D. Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural support. E. Conform to panel fabricator’s instructions for installation of concealed fasteners. F. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, scraped and broken members. G. Do not cut, trim, weld or scrape component parts during erection in a manner that would damage the finish, decrease strength or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for refabrication, or for replacement with new parts. H. Separate dissimilar metals; use appropriate gaskets and fasteners to minimize corrosive or electrolytic action between metals. 3.3 Adjusting and Cleaning Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL 074213 West End Heights WALL PANELS A. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of panel installation. After installation, panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of the general contractor. B. Repair panels with minor damage. C. Remove masking film (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation shall become the responsibility of the general contractor. D. Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the general contractor to remove. E. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants. F. Final cleaning shall not be part of the work of this section. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services CEMENTITIOUS PANELS 074400-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Cementitious express/reveal jointed panel with accessories. (James Hardie HZ5 Reveal Panels with Reveal Recess Trim.) 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A.Div. 5 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. B. Div. 6 - Rough Carpentry. C. Div. 6 - Rough Carpentry. D. Div. 7 - Insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A.ASTM International (ASTM): 1.ASTM B136 - Standard Method for Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum. 2.ASTM B244 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with EddyCurrent Instruments. 3.ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 4.ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5.ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Sheets. 6.ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 7.ASTM D1117 - Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics. 8.ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 9.ASTM D1730 - Standard Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Surfaces for Painting. 10.ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). 11.ASTM D3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 12.ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test. 13.ASTM D4585 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled Condensation. 14.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 15.ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 16.ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 17.ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C. 18.ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure B.AATCC127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. C.TAPPI - T460 - Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Method). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.Installation instructions and recommendations. 2.Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3.Manufacturer's best practice guide. 4.Technical data sheet. 5.Standard CAD drawings C.Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of cladding junctions and penetrations which are outside the scope of the standard details and specifications provided by the manufacturer. Shop Drawings shall include elevation drawings with dimensions and colors of all Lakeview Health Services CEMENTITIOUS PANELS 074400-2 West End Heights panels for entire building. D.Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E.Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sample Panel Mock-up: Construct a panel sample panel for review and approval by the Architect. All submittals should be approved before the sample panel is constructed. Materials used in the sample panel should be selected and supplied by the manufacturer using panels, fasteners, reveals, etc., manufactured for this specific project so the full range of colors and conditions for this project can be demonstrated in the panel. This shall include any special shapes. Materials used in the sample panel should be selected and supplied by the manufacturer. The sample panel shall be constructed by the contractor selected for the project before the work begins and should not be removed or destroyed until all work has been accepted. The sample panel will be used to evaluate if the appearance and construction of the finished panel work meets the requirements of the contract documents. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and details are approved by Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B.Store siding flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. C.Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide Hardie HZ5 Reveal Panel Limited Product Warranty, with 30-year limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. 1.Application Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 CLADDING A.Cement Cladding Panels: Hardie Reveal Panel as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 7/16 inches thick, 3 feet 11.5 inches (1206 mm) wide by 7 feet 11.5 inches (2426 mm) long. Product shall be engineered for climate conditions. Exact panel sizes shall be per the Contract Documents. 1.Manufacturer's Climate Zone Product: HZ5 for freezing wet climates with a green tint primer. . B.Code Compliance Requirement for Siding Materials: 1.Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II. 2.Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E 136 as a noncombustible material. 3.Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index = 0, Smoke Developed Index = 5. 4.Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E 119 1 hour and 2-hour fire resistive assemblies listed with Warnock Hersey. 5.Fiber-cement siding, tested to ASTM E330 for Transverse Loads. Lakeview Health Services CEMENTITIOUS PANELS 074400-3 West End Heights 6.Intertek Warnock Hersey Product Listing. 7.Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet. 2.3 WEATHER BARRIER A.Weather Barrier: The weather barrier shall be integral with the sheathing system. 2.4 FURRING (STRAPPING) A.Rainscreen Cavity: Install Hardie Reveal Panels on a drained and vented rainscreen cavity, with a minimum 3/4 inch (19mm) air cavity. Selection of cavity vent materials shall be incorporated into the design to prevent insect and pest entry. 2.5 ACCESSORlES A.Trims: Reveal Trims manufactured by Custom Aluminum of Elgin, IL in the following profiles supplied by James Hardie. Aluminum alloy 6063-T5 with a minimum thickness of 0.050 inch. All reveal trims are 8 feet in length. 1.Recess horizontal trim. 2.Recess vertical trim. 3.Recess horizontal edge trim. 4.Recess vertical F-trim. 5.Recess outside corner trim. 6.Recess drainage flashing. B.Finishes of Reveal Trims: 1.Clear anodized; conforming to ASTM B244 and ASTM B136. 2.6 FASTENERS A.Fasteners: For attaching Hardie Reveal Panel direct to sheathing to a rain screen provide the following: 1.Wood Framing, Countersunk Screws: No 8 by 0.39 inch head diameter by 1-5/8 inch long 2.Steel Framing, Countersunk Screws: No. 8 by 0.39 inch head diameter by 1-5/8 inch long. 3.Fasteners shall be of high-quality stainless steel to ensure resistance to corrosion. For field painting, fasteners shall be treated to accept paint adhesion. a.Alternatives must be approved by the architect. e.g. decorative screws, nails, bugle head screws, and similar items. 2.7 FlNlSHES A.Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer. 1.Primer: Factory applied sealer/primer by James Hardie. Apply flat sheen finishes to panels. 2.Topcoat: Factory applied (or shop applied if approved by architect and all warranties are maintained) Refer to Div. 9 - Painting and Coating and Exterior Elevations. a. Colors: • Panel A: to match Sherwin Williams #SW7014 – Eider White (satin finish) • Panel B: to match Sherwin Williams #SW7015 – Repose Gray (satin finish) • Panel C: to match Sherwin Williams #SW7016 – Mindful Gray (satin finish) • Panel D: to match Sherwin Williams #SW7069 – Iron Ore (satin finish) B.Factory Finish for Trim: 1.Trim for Factory-Applied Finish and No Field-Applied Finish: Clear anodized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B.If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Lakeview Health Services CEMENTITIOUS PANELS 074400-4 West End Heights 3.2 PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B.Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C.Ensure that drainage plane in intact and all penetrations are sealed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Wood Framing: Nominal 2 inch by 4 inch (51 m by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1.Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2.Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3.Protect siding from other trades. B.Metal Framing: Minimum 20 gauge (33 mm) 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) C-Stud 16 inches maximum metal framing complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1.Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2.Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3.Protect siding from other trades. C.Furring: Install furring on a minimum 3/4 inch (19mm) rainscreen cavity, or in accordance with local building code for rainscreen requirements. D.Installation: Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.Fastening Method: Countersunk and filled. 2.Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch (9.5 mm) from panel edges and 2 inches (51 mm) from panel corners. 3.Use fasteners as specified in the James Hardie Tech Data sheet and in the Hardie Reveal Panel Installation Instruction. 4.Install panel using 1/2 inch (13 mm) spacers at horizontal joints. Leave bottom edge of panel above all horizontal trims exposed, no caulking shall be placed at this overlap of Horizontal Reveal Trim. Factory primed edge shall always be used. 5.Install a kickout flashing to deflect water away from the siding at the roof intersection. 6.Install a self-adhering membrane on the wall before the subfascia and trim boards are nailed in place, and then install the kickout. 7.Allow minimum vertical clearance between the bottom edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and as determined by James Hardie Zone. 8.Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. 9.Specific framing and fastener requirements - refer to the applicable building code compliance reports. 3.4 FINISHING A.Finish factory primed and factory finished siding with a minimum of three coats of high-quality 100 percent acrylic exterior grade paint with flat finish within 180 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. B.Field cut edges shall be coated during the installation process using an exterior grade primer/sealer that is compatible with the type of paint to used on project. 3.5 PROTECTION A.Protect installed products until completion of project. B.Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-1 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The project consists of installing Carlisle’s Sure-White Adhered Roofing System as outlined below: Mechanically fasten 5/8” Carlisle Securock as per FM1A-60 standards, but no less than 1 per 2 square feet. Prime the underlayment board with NYS VOC OTC compliant CCW CavGrip. Install CCW 725TR vapor retarder. Adhesively attach Carlisle Polyisocyanurate insulation and 3/8” Securock water resistant gypsum overlayment board with Carlisle Flexible Fast adhesive. Insulation must meet minimum R-30 to meet code. Fully adhere Carlisle .060 non-reinforced EPDM in accordance with current specifications and details. Provide owner with a 20 year, 72 MPH full system edge-to-edge warranty. 1.02 EXTENT OF WORK A. Provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of a Sure-White 60-mil thick EPDM membrane Fully Adhered Roofing System including flashings and insulation as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer’s most current specifications and details. B. The roofing contractor shall be fully knowledgeable of all requirements of the contract documents and shall make themselves aware of all job site conditions that will affect their work. C. The roofing contractor shall confirm all given information and advise the building owner, prior to bid, of any conflicts that will affect their cost proposal. D. Any contractor who intends to submit a bid using a roofing system other than the approved manufacturer must submit for pre-qualification in writing fourteen (14) days prior to the bid date. Any contractor who fails to submit all information as requested will be subject to rejection. Bids stating “as per plans and specs” will be unacceptable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting work, the roofing contractor must submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification of materials. 2. Sample of the manufacturer’s Total Systems Warranty covering all components of the roofing system. 3. Submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer which certifies the roofing contractor is authorized to install the manufacturer’s roofing system and lists foremen who have received training from the manufacturer along with the dates training was received. 4. Certification of the manufacturer’s warranty reserve. B. Upon completion of the installed work, submit copies of the manufacturer’s final inspection report to the specifier prior to the issuance of the manufacturer’s warranty. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or wrappings with the manufacturer’s name, brand name and installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption. B. Comply with the manufacturer’s written instructions for proper material storage. 1. Store materials between 60°F and 80°F in dry areas protected from water and direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60°F minimum temperature before using. 2. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life. C. Insulation and underlayment products must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof materials. Manufacturer’s wrap does not provide sufficient waterproofing. Insulation and underlayment products that become wet or saturated are to be discarded. D. Any materials which are found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced at the applicator’s expense. Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-2 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Care should be exercised to provide protection for the interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the membrane system. B. Do not disrupt activities in occupied spaces. 1.06 USE OF THE PREMISES A. Before beginning work, the roofing contractor must secure approval from the building owner’s representative for the following: 1. Areas permitted for personnel parking. 2. Access to the site. 3. Areas permitted for storage of materials and debris. 4. Areas permitted for the location of cranes, hoists and chutes for loading and unloading materials to and from the roof. B. Interior stairs or elevators may not be used for removing debris or delivering materials, except as authorized by the building superintendent. 1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS If discrepancies are discovered between the existing conditions and those noted on the drawings, immediately notify the owner’s representative by phone and solicit the manufacturer’s approval prior to commencing with the work. Necessary steps shall be taken to make the building watertight until the discrepancies are resolved. 1.08 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A pre-bid meeting will be held at the job site. Contact the owner’s representative if there are any questions. B. Prior to bid submittal, the roofing contractor should schedule a job site inspection to observe actual conditions and verify all dimensions on the roof. The job site inspection may occur on the day of the pre-bid meeting or prior to such a meeting. Should access to the roof be necessary before or after the pre-bid meeting, the contractor must contact the owner’s representative, to coordinate an appropriate time. C. Any conditions which are not shown on the shop drawings should be indicated on a copy of the shop drawing and included with bid submittal if necessary to clarify any conditions not shown. 1.09 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Water, power for construction purposes and lighting are available at the site and will be made available to the roofing contractor. 2. Provide all hoses, valves and connections for water from source designated by the owner when made available. 3. When available, electrical power should be extended as required from the source. Provide all trailers, connections and fused disconnects. B. Temporary Sanitary Facilities Sanitary facilities will not be available at the job site. The roofing contractor shall be responsible for the provision and maintenance of portable toilets or their equal. C. Building Site: 1. The roofing contractor shall use reasonable care and responsibility to protect the building and site against damages. The contractor shall be responsible for the correction of any damage incurred as a result of the performance of the contract. 2. The roofing contractor shall remove all construction debris from the job site in a timely and legally acceptable manner so as to not detract from the aesthetics or the functions of the building. D. Security: Obey the owner’s requirements for personnel identification, inspection and other security measures. 1.10 JOB SITE PROTECTION Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-3 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) A. The roofing contractor shall adequately protect building, paved areas, service drives, lawn, shrubs, trees, etc. from damage while performing the required work. Provide canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary for protection and remove protection material at completion. The contractor shall repair or be responsible for costs to repair all property damaged during the roofing application. B. During the roofing contractor’s performance of the work, the building owner will continue to occupy the existing building. The contractor shall take precautions to prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such material may sift into the building. The roofing contractor shall provide labor and materials to construct, maintain and remove necessary temporary enclosures to prevent dust or debris in the construction area(s) from entering the remainder of the building. C. Do not overload any portion of the building, either by use of or placement of equipment, storage of debris, or storage of materials. D. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers. E. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing application. Remove debris at the completion of each day’s work and clean drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain. F. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with waterproof coverings. G. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and return the job site to its original condition upon completion of the work. 1.11 SAFETY The roofing contractor shall be responsible for all means and methods as they relate to safety and shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal requirements that are safety related. Safety shall be the responsibility of the roofing contractor. All related personnel shall be instructed daily to be mindful of the full time requirement to maintain a safe environment for the facility’s occupants including staff, visitors, customers and the occurrence of the general public on or near the site. 1.12 WORKMANSHIP A. Applicators installing new roof, flashing and related work shall be factory trained and approved by the manufacturer they are representing. B. All work shall be of highest quality and in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published specifications and to the building owner’s satisfaction. C. There shall be a supervisor on the job site at all times while work is in progress. D. All field seams and flashing details are to be completed according to manufacturer’s specifications and details by the end of each work day. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Sure-White Roofing System must achieve a UL Class A. The specified roofing assembly must have been successfully tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the design uplift pressures calculated according to International Building Code (IBC) and American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) ANSI/SPRI WD-1 "Wind Design Standard Practice for Roofing Assemblies” B. The membrane must be manufactured by the material supplier. Manufacturer’s supplying membrane made by others are not acceptable. C. The manufacturer must have a minimum of 20 years experience in the manufacturing of vulcanized thermoset sheeting. OR The manufacturer shall have domestic manufacturing experience commensurate with the term of warranty coverage of the products supplied. D. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the roofing contractor must strictly comply with the manufacturer’s current specifications and details. Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-4 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) E. The roofing system must be installed by an applicator authorized and trained by the manufacturer in compliance with shop drawings as approved by the manufacturer. The roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon request be able to provide evidence of having at least ten (10) years successful experience installing single-ply EPDM roofing systems and having installed at least ten (10) EPDM roofing application or several similar systems of equal or greater size within one year. F. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified. Provide at least one thoroughly trained and experienced superintendent on the job at all times roofing work is in progress. G. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without the prior written approval of the specifier. Any deviation from the manufacturer’s installation procedures must be supported by a written certification on the manufacturer’s letterhead and presented for the specifier’s consideration. H. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a non-sales technical representative of the membrane manufacturer in order to identify any needed corrective repairs that will be required for warranty issuance. Notify the building owner seventytwo (72) hours prior to the manufacturer’s final inspection. I. Inspector shall be employed and trained by the manufacturer and have received product-specific training from the manufacturer of the products. J. The Sure-White EPDM membrane meets the CRRC (Cool Roof Rating Council) requirements for reflectance and emittance. When tested in accordance with ASTM C1549, the Sure-White material has an initial solar reflectance of .76 and a 3-year aged reflectance of .64. The material has also been tested for emittance in accordance with ASTM C1371; an initial emittance of .90 and a 3-year aged emittance of .87 were achieved. K. The Sure-White EPDM membrane meets the emittance requirements set forth by the USGBC (U. S. Green Building Council) for their LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) Program. The Sure-White material has an emittance of .91 (when tested in accordance with ASTM E408) and an SRI (solar reflectance index) of 105 (calculated using ASTM E 1980). L. The Sure-White EPDM Membrane exceeds 25,200 kJ/m2 under Xenon-Arc UV Light testing used for testing “Resistance to Outdoor (Ultraviolet) Weathering.” (ASTM D 4637 Specification requires a 7560 kJ/m2 minimum total radiant exposure at 70 W/m2 irradiance at 176oF black panel temperature to pass.)The membrane shows no visible signs of cracking or crazing. M. Sure-Seal, Sure-White, or Sure-Tough EPDM Membranes achieves a zero (no growth) rating in the ASTM G21 test for fungi growth. 1.14 JOB CONDITIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS Refer to Carlisle’s EPDM Roofing System specification for General Job Site Considerations. A. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) must be on location at all times during the transportation, storage and application of materials. B. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water. C. When loading materials onto the roof, the Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator must comply with the requirements of the building owner to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure. D. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the manufacturer’s recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. E. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible damage. F. Provide protection, such as 3/4 inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during construction. Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters. G. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and grease. H. New roofing shall be complete and weathertight at the end of the work day. Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-5 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) I. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be permitted to come in direct contact with the roofing membrane. An overlay of Epichlrohydrin membrane must be adhered around units which have the potential to emit solvents, grease or oil. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s 20 year Total System Warranty covering both labor and all materials with no dollar limitation. The maximum wind speed coverage shall be peak gusts of 72 measured at 10 meters above ground level. Certification is required with bid submittal indicating the manufacturer has reviewed and agreed to such wind coverage. B. Warranty shall also cover leaks caused by accidental punctures. C. Warranty shall also cover leaks caused by hail: 1. Hail up to 2” diameter when 60-mil Sure-White Carlisle over Securock adhered with Flexible FAST adhesive only. D. Pro-rated System Warranties shall not be accepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All components of the specified roofing system shall be products of Carlisle SynTec or accepted by Carlisle SynTec as compatible. B. Unless otherwise approved by the specifier and accepted by the membrane manufacturer, all products (including insulation, fasteners, fastening plates and edgings) must be manufactured and/or supplied by the roofing system manufacturer and covered by the warranty. 2.02 MEMBRANE Furnish Sure-White 60-mil thick EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer) in the largest sheet possible with 6” Factory-Applied Tape (FAT). The membrane shall conform to the minimum physical properties of ASTM D4637. When a 10 foot wide membrane is to be used, the membrane shall be manufactured in a single panel with no factory splices to reduce splice intersections. Sure-White EPDM shall be ENERGY STAR® - qualified. 2.03 INSULATION/UNDERLAYMENT/OVERLAYMENT BOARD A. When applicable, insulation shall be installed in multiple layers. The first and second layer of insulation shall be mechanically fastened or adhered to the substrate in accordance with the manufacturer’s published specifications. B. Insulation shall be Carlisle Insulbase Polyisocyanurate as supplied by Carlisle SynTec. Minimum R-value required is 30. (Note: The insulation must meet ASHRAE 90.1 minimums per IBCInternational Building Code.) 1. Carlisle Insulbase Polyisocyanurate – A foam core insulation board covered on both sides with a medium weight fiber-reinforced felt facer meeting ASTM C 1289-06, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi). The product is available in 4’ x 8’ standard size with a thickness from 1 to 4 inches. 4’ x 4’ tapered panels are also available. Flat Insulation areas shall be in 2 layers of 3 inch polyisocyanurate, R-17.4 for each layer, and the R-value as per 2014 ASTM C1289, (LTTR). Tapered Insulation and crickets shall be Sure-Seal Polyisocyanurate as supplied by Carlisle SynTec Incorporated as shown on drawings, with a minimum average R value of 34.8 as per 2014 ASTM C1289, (LTTR). 2. Securock Cover Board and Underlayment Board – A uniform composition of fiberreinforced with no facer for use as a cover board or a thermal barrier. Underlayment board to be ½” and overlayment board to be 3/8” and be in 4’ x 4’ or 4’ x 8’ size boards. Long uninterrupted runs (>200’) may require slight gapping due to thermal expansion. Boards shall be an impact resistant, non-structural, fiber reinforced gypsum panel manufactured with a 95% certified recycle content, with moisture and mold resistance throughout the panel core and surface, manufactured to conform to ASTM C1278. Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-6 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) 2.04 FASTENING COMPONENTS To be used for mechanical attachment of insulation and to provide additional membrane securement: A. Fasteners, Plates and Bars 1. HP- Fasteners: a threaded, #14 fastener with a #3 phillips drive used with steel and wood roof decks. 2. HP Term Bar Nail-Ins: A 1-1/4” long expansion anchor with a zinc plated steel drive pin used for fastening the Carlisle Termination Bar or Seam Fastening Plates to concrete, brick, or block walls. 3. Seam Fastening Plate: a 2” diameter metal fastening plate used in conjunction with RUSS or EPDM membrane for additional membrane securement. 4. Insulation Fastening Plates: a nominal 3 inch diameter plastic or metal plate used for insulation attachment. 5. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive RUSS (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip): a 6” wide, nominal 45-mil thick clean, cured, white reinforced EPDM membrane with 3” wide SecurTAPE laminated along one edge. Used on Sure-White Adhered Roofing Systems. B. Insulation Adhesives 1. Flexible FAST Adhesive: An elongating impact resistant two component insulating urethane adhesive used to attach insulation. Packaging formats include 50 and 15 gallon drums. a. Adhesive to provide 150% elongation in conjunction with fleece backed membrane – ASTM D412 b. MDI content of Part A material less than 25% 2.05 ADHESIVES, CLEANERS AND SEALANTS All products shall be furnished by Carlisle and specifically formulated for the intended purpose. A. Membrane Bonding Adhesive: A Low-VOC (volatile organic compound) bonding adhesive (less than 250 grams/liter) used for bonding Sure-Seal/Sure-White EPDM membranes to various surfaces. Adhesive is available in 5 gallon pails or CAV-Grip III. B. Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner: A clear, solvent-based cleaner used to loosen and remove dirt and other contaminants from the surface of exposed EPDM membrane (for repairs, etc.) prior to applying EPDM Primer. Weathered Membrane Cleaner can also be used when applying Splicing Cement. Available in 1 and 5-gallon pails. C. Sure-Seal/Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive SecurTAPE™ (Factory Applied): A 3" or 6" wide by 100' long splice tape used for splicing adjoining sections of EPDM membrane. Complies with the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168. D. Low-VOC EPDM Primer - A low VOC (volatile organic compound) primer (less than 250 grams/liter) for use with SecurTape or Pressure-Sensitive products. Available in 1 gallon pails. E. Lap Sealant: A heavy-bodied material used to seal the exposed edges of a membrane splice. Available in tubes. 1. Sure-Seal Lap Sealant is a black sealant for use with Sure-Seal (black) Roofing Systems. 2. Sure-White Lap Sealant is a white sealant for use with Sure-White (white-on-black) Roofing Systems. F. Water Cut-Off Mastic: A one-component, low viscosity, self wetting, Butyl blend mastic used to achieve a compression seal between the EPDM membrane or Elastoform Flashing and applicable substrates. Available in tubes. G. Pourable Sealer: A black, two-component, solvent-free, polyurethane based product used for tie-ins and as a sealant around hard-to-flash membrane penetrating objects such as clusters of pipes and for a daily seal when the completion of flashings and terminations cannot be completed by the end of each work day. H. One-Part Pourable Sealer: Available in black or white, a one-component, moisture curing, elastomeric polyether sealant used for attaching lightning rod bases and ground cable clips to the membrane surface and as a sealant around hard-to-flash penetrations such as clusters of pipes. I. Universal Single-Ply Sealant A one-part polyether, non-sagging sealant designed for sealing expansion joints, control joints and counterflashings. Available in white only. J. CAV-GRIP III Low-VOC Aerosol Contact Adhesive/Primer: a low-VOC, methylene chloride-free adhesive that can be used for a variety of applications including: enhancing the bond between Carlisle’s VapAir Seal 725TR and various substrates, priming unexposed asphalt prior to applying FAST Adhesive, adhering Sure-Seal EPDM, horizontally, for the field of the roof and for adhering Sure-Seal Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-7 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) FleeceBACK and Sure-Seal EPDM membrane to vertical walls. Coverage rate is approximately 2,0002,500 sq. ft. per 40 lb cylinder and 4,000-5,000 sq. ft. per 85 lb cylinder as a primer, in a single-sided application and 750 sq. ft. per 40 lb cylinder and 1,500 sq. ft. per 85 lb cylinder as an adhesive for vertical walls, in a double-sided application. 2.06 METAL EDGING AND MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS A. General: All metal edgings shall be tested and meet ANSI/SPRI ES-1 standards and comply with International Building Code. All metal work is to be supplied and warranted by the manufacturer. 1. SecurEdge 3000XT: a metal fascia system with an extruded aluminum retainer bar and .050” thick aluminum fascia. Metal fascia color shall be as designated by the Owner's Representative from manufacturer’s standard colors. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Certified and FM approved. B. Drip Edge: (If needed) a metal fascia/edge system with a 24 gauge continuous anchor cleat and .050 inch thick aluminum fascia. Metal fascia standard color shall be as designated by the Owner's Representative. C. Termination Bar: a 1” wide and .098” thick extruded aluminum bar pre-punched 6” on center; incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and provide increased stability for membrane terminations. 2.07 WALKWAYS Protective surfacing for roof traffic shall be Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive Walkway Pads (with FactoryApplied Tape on the underside of the walkway) adhered to the membrane surface in conjunction with SureSeal Primer. 2.08 OTHER MATERIALS A. Carlisle VapAir Seal 725TR Air & Vapor Barrier / Temporary Roof: 725TR is a 40-mil composite consisting of 35-mils of self-adhering rubberized asphalt factory laminated to a 5-mil polyethylene film with an adhesion textured surface. 725TR roll dimensions are 39” x 100’ and the product is applied after priming an acceptable substrate with CCW 702, 702-LV or Cav-Grip III primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with the manufacturer’s published instructions for the installation of the membrane roofing system including proper substrate preparation, jobsite considerations and weather restrictions. B. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the roof deck and shingle splices to avoid bucking water. 3.02 VAPOR RETARDERS A. VapAir Seal 725TR Installation: 1. Surface Preparation: The surface shall have a clean, dry, smooth finish and be free of voids, spalled areas, sharp protrusions, loose aggregate, latence and form release agents. In the event of rain, the substrate must be allowed to dry before primer is applied. 2. Primer: Surfaces to receive Carlisle VapAir Seal 725TR Air and Vapor Barrier must be clean and dry. Prime with Cav-Grip III Primer. Apply Primer by spray, brush or with a long nap roller at the applicable coverage rate noted above. At 75° F allow primer to dry 1 hour minimum. Primer has a satisfactory cure when it will not transfer when touched. Prime only areas to be waterproofed the same day. Re-prime if area becomes dirty. 3. Application: Apply Carlisle VapAir Seal 725TR Air and Vapor Barrier from low to high point, in a shingle fashion, so that laps will shed water. Overlap all edges at lease 2-1/2". End laps shall be staggered. Place membrane carefully so as to avoid wrinkles and fishmouths. Immediately after installation, roll with a 150 pound segmented steel roller. 3.03 UNDERLAYMENT/INSULATION/OVERLAYMENT BOARDS PLACEMENT A. Install underlayment boards over the substrate with boards with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-8 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) inch. Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided. Mechanically attach the 1/2” Carlisle Securock in accordance with FM1-60 standards, but no less than one fastener per 2 square feet in the field and perimeter of the roof system and 1 per 1 square foot in the corners B. Secure insulation to the vapor retarder substrate with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch with Carlisle Flexible FAST adhesive in beads 4” on center in the field, perimeters and corners. Allow the Flexible Fast adhesive to rise approximately 1/8”, and develop a string/body (approximately 1.52 min.). String time will vary based on environmental conditions like temperature and humidity. String time is measured by touching the adhesive with a splice wipe and looking for development of “strings” of adhesive as you pull the splice wipe out of the adhesive. Do not allow the adhesive to over-cure prior to setting the roof boards. C. Secure coverboard to the insulation substrate with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch with Carlisle Flexible FAST adhesive in beads 4” on center in the field, perimeters and corners. Allow the Flexible Fast adhesive to rise approximately 1/8”, and develop a string/body (approximately 1.52 min.). String time will vary based on environmental conditions like temperature and humidity. String time is measured by touching the adhesive with a splice wipe and looking for development of “strings” of adhesive as you pull the splice wipe out of the adhesive. Do not allow the adhesive to over-cure prior to setting the roof boards. 3.04 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND BONDING A. Unroll and position membrane without stretching. Allow the membrane to relax for approximately 1/2 hour before bonding. Fold the sheet back onto itself so half the underside of the membrane is exposed. B. Apply the Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions and coverage rates, to both the underside of the membrane and the substrate. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch. 1. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. Brush down the bonded half of the membrane sheet with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact. 2. Fold back the unbonded half of the membrane sheet and repeat the bonding procedure. C. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges approximately 4 inches. Do not apply bonding adhesive to the splice area. 3.05 MEMBRANE SPLICING A. Position membrane sheet to allow for required splice overlap. Mark the bottom sheets with an indelible marker approximately 1/4” to 1/2” from the top sheet edge. The pre-marked line on the membrane edge can also be used as a guide for positioning splice tape. B. When the membrane is contaminated with dirt, fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 6” wide) of both membrane sheets by scrubbing with clean natural fiber rags saturated with Sure-Seal Weathered Membrane Cleaner. C. Apply Low VOC EPDM Primer to splice area and permit to flash off. D. When adhering Factory Applied Tape (FAT), pull the poly backing from FAT beneath the top sheet and allow the top sheet to fall freely onto the exposed primed surface. Press top sheet on to the bottom sheet using firm even hand pressure across the splice towards the splice edge E. For end laps, apply 6” SecurTAPE to the primed membrane surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Remove the poly backing and roll the top sheet onto the mating surface. F. Tape splices must be a minimum of 5-1/2” wide using 6” wide SecurTAPE extending 1/8” minimum to 1/2” maximum beyond the splice edge. Field splices at roof drains must be located outside the drain sump. Note: For projects where a 60-mil membrane OR 20-year or longer System Warranty is specified, splice enhancements are required. Refer to Carlisle Sure-Seal/Sure-White Roofing System Specificaiton. G. Immediately roll the splice using positive pressure when using a 2” wide steel roller. Roll across the splice edge, not parallel to it. When FAT is used, Carlisle’s Stand-Up Seam Roller can be used to roll parallel to the splice edge. H. At all field splice intersections, apply Lap Sealant along the edge of all membrane and flashing Lakeview Health Services FULLY-ADHERED 075500-9 West End Heights MEMBRANE ROOFING (EPDM) splices. Install Carlisle’s Pressure-Sensitive 12 inch by 12 inch “T” joint Sure-White PressureSensitive Elastoform Flashing over the field splice intersection. 3.06 FLASHING A. Wall and curb flashing shall be cured EPDM membrane. Continue the deck membrane as wall flashing where practicable. Use Pressure-Sensitive Curb Wrap when possible to flash curb units. B. Follow manufacturer’s typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. 3.07 WALKWAYS A. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc.) and all locations as identified on the specifier’s drawing. B. Adhere walkways pads or rubber pavers to the EPDM membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. 3.08 DAILY SEAL A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed. 3.09 CLEAN UP A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner. B. Prior to the manufacturer’s inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking. END OF SPECIFICATION Lakeview Health Services ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. 061000 Rough Carpentry D. 072100 Building Insulation E. 077300 Rooftop Support System F. 075500 Membrane Roofing G. 099000 Painting 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal Ladders PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The BILCO Company 1. Mailing Address: P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505 2. Phone: 1.800.366.6530 3. Website: bilco.com B. O’Keeffe’s, Inc. 1. Mailing Address: 100 N Hill Drive, Suite 12, Brisbane, CA 94005 2. Phone: 1.888.653.3333 3. Website: okeeffes.com 2.3 METAL LADDER A. Model: O’Keefe, Model 502 – Tubular Rail Access Ladder with Roofover Rail Extensions. B. Finish: Mill finish. As extruded. C. Paint. Factory paint, urethane over chemically pretreated substrate. 1. Factory paint to match color finish of roof hatch/ceiling. D. Construction: A. Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4” in section and 18–3/8” long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides. 1. Rungs shall withstand a 1,500pound load without deformation or failure. B. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8” wall thickness by 3” wide. C. Walk-Through Rail and Roof Rail Extension: Not less than 3’-6” above the landing and shall be fitted with deeply serrated, square, tubular grab rails. D. Security Doors: Formed 1/8” thick aluminum sheet. Security panels shall extend on both sides, perpendicular to the door face, to within 2” of the wall. Security door shall be furnished with continuous aluminum piano hinge and heavy duty forged steel locking hasps. E. Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off. F. Rail and Harness Fall Arrest System: Supplied where specified as alternate to safety cage and landing platforms, in accordance with OSHA regulation 1910.27; permanently mounted to ladder rungs and complete with necessary components. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance Lakeview Health Services ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-2 West End Heights 4. Product Warranty 5. Shop Drawings showing locations, construction, accessories, and integration into roof/ceiling systems. 3.2 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of this Section for a period of 5 years commencing on the shipment date of the product against all the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies. 1. Defects in materials and workmanship. 2. Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum OSHA standards as certified by independent third party testing laboratory. Ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect excepted. 3. Within the warranty period, the manufacturer shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of defective ladder. B. Manufacturer shall be notified immediately of defective products, and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return. Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized repairs or labor. Manufacturer makes no other warranty, expressed or implied, to the merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, design, sale, installation, or use, of the ladder; and shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages, losses of or expenses, resulting from the use of ladder products. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those indicated for this Project. 1. Record of successful in-service performance. 2. Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to fabricate ladders in compliance with industry standards and local codes. B. Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance. C. Product Qualification: Product design shall comply with OSHA 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders. D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Install ladder in area designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and installation are approved by Architect. 3. Rework mock-up as required to produce acceptable work. 4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 4.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and anchorage structural loads for fastener resistance. C. Do not begin installation until supporting structure is complete and ladder installation will not interfere with supporting structure work. D. If supporting structure is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory supporting work before proceeding. 4.4 INSTALLATION Lakeview Health Services ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-3 West End Heights A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved. 2. Repair finishes damaged during installation. 3. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work.. 4.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer which will not damage finish. 4.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ROOFTOP SUPPORT SYSTEM 077300-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. Division 7 Building Insulation D. Division 7 Membrane Roofing 1.2 SUMMARY A. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct installation of recycled rubber pipe supports for mechanical piping systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653 G90 SS Gr. 33 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dipped Process B. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel C. ASTM C531 – Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfaces, and Polymer Concretes D. ASTM C642 – Test Method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete E. ASTM C672 – Test Methods for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals F. ASTM D412 – Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension G. ASTM D395 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property – Compression Set H. ASTM D573 – Test Method for Rubber – Deterioration in an Air Oven I. ASTM D746 – Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact J. ASTM D2240 – Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness K. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton 1. Mailing Address: 509 West Monroe Street, Highland, IL 62249 2. Phone: 1.800.851.74.15 3. Website: cooperindustries.com 2.2 ROOFTOP SUPPORT A. Model: DURA-BLOK™ DB10 Series design as supplied by B-Line [or engineer approved equal]. B. Materials: 1. Curb base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a uniform load capacity of 500 pounds per linear foot of support*. In addition, each base to have a reflective red stripe. (*See 4.1(C)) 2. Dimensions: 6 inches wide by 5-5/8 inches high by 72 inches long. 3. Steel frame: Steel, 12ga strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for bridge series. 4. Attaching hardware: Zinc-plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633. C. Any products claiming to be a similar, like, or equal must demonstrate (meet or exceed) the same physical and performance characteristics as specified on the following page: 1. Density: 0.52 oz/cu in ASTM C642 2. Durometer Hardness: 67.2A ± 1 ASTM D2240 3. Tensile Strength: 231 psi minimum ASTM D412 4. Compression Deformation: 5% at 70psi and 72ºF ASTM D395 5. Brittleness at Low Temp: -50ºF ASTM D746 6. Freeze and thaw when exposed to deicing chemicals: No loss after 50 cycles ASTM C672 7. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 8 x 10-6 in/in/ºF (min) ASTM C531 8. Weathering: 70 hours at 120ºF ASTM D573 Lakeview Health Services ROOFTOP SUPPORT SYSTEM 077300-2 West End Heights a. Hardness retained: 100% (±5%) b. Compressive strength: 100% (±5%) c. Tensile strength: 100% (±5%) d. Elongation retained: 100% (±5%) PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering MATERIAL; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Schedule of all rooftop equipment requiring rooftop support. 2. Shop Drawings of all rooftop support systems, showing locations, quantities, mounting blocks, support structure, load capacity, etc., for each device. 3. Product Data. 4. Installation Manuals. 5. Product Warranties. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. If gravel top roof, gravel must be removed around and under pipe support. C. Always consult roofing manufacturer for roof membrane compression capacities. If necessary, a compatible sheet of roofing material (rubber pad) may be installed under rooftop support to disperse concentrated loads and add further membrane protection. D. Gas pipe spacing subject to local gas authorities. E. Use properly sized clamps to suit pipe [conduit] sizes. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-1 West End Heights GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Note: Refer to Code Plans for required Fire Restive Ratings. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes Sprayed-Applied Fire-Resistive Materials (SFRMs). 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following: 1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from third party. D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. B. Mockups: Build mockups Indicate portion of Work represented by mockup on Drawings or draw mockup as separate element. 1. Build mockup of as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. It is recommended that industry guidelines as noted in National Fireproofing Contractors Association (NFCA) 100 – Standard Practice for the Application of Spray-Applied Fire Resistive Materials (SFRMs) be maintained on the project site. Lakeview Health Services SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-2 West End Heights 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on fireproofing. 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fireresistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F 4.4 deg C or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours prior to, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing a minimum 4 complete air exchanges per hour and according to manufacturer's written instructions until SprayApplied Fire Resistive Materials are dried and cured. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fireresistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source. C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119/UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. G. Products shall posses DECLARE Label 1. Declaration Status “LBC Red List Free” 2.2 SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Concealed/Commercial SFRMs: a. Isolatek International: CAFCO® 300 Series, CAFCO® BLAZE-SHIELD® II b. Physical Properties: 1) Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736. Lakeview Health Services SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-3 West End Heights 2) Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) as specified in the approved fireresistance design, according to ASTM E 605. 3) Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design. 4) Combustion Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 136 shall be noncombustible. 5) Surface-Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or CAN4-S102, the material shall exhibit the following surface burning characteristics: a) Flame Spread Index [10] or less b) Smoke Developed [10] or less 6) Compressive Strength: When tested in accordance with ASTM E761, the material shall not deform more than 10 percent when subjected to a crushing force of 1,440 psf (68.9 kPa). 7) Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 8) Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 9) Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760. 10) Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours according to ASTM E 859. 11) Fungal Resistance: When tested in accordance with ASTM G21, the material shall show resistance to mold growth for a minimum period of 28 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements: 1. Fireproofing manufacturer shall be contacted for procedures on handling primed/painted steel. 2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736. C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing. E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass or carbon fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fireresistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fireresistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment. G. Sealer: If required, a transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted protective coating as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CAFCO® BOND-SEAL or CAFCO® BOND-SEAL Type X" by Isolatek International. H. Topcoat: If required, a topcoat suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. 1. Cement-Based Topcoat: Factory-mixed, cementitious hard-coat formulation for trowel or spray application over SFRM. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CAFCO® FENDOLITE® MII/CAFCO® FENDOLITE® TG by Isolatek International. Lakeview Health Services SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-4 West End Heights 2. Water-Based Permeable Topcoat: Factory-mixed formulation for brush, roller, or spray application over applied SFRM. Provide application at a rate of [30 sq. ft./gal. (0.75 sq. m/L)] [60 sq. ft./gal. (1.5 sq. m/L)] [120 sq. ft./gal. (3 sq. m/L)]. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CAFCO® TOP-COTE by Isolatek International. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Clips, hangers, supports, sleeves and other attachments to the substrate are to be placed by others prior to the application of the fireproofing materials. 3. The installation of ducts, piping, conduit or other suspended equipment shall not take place until the application of the fireproofing is complete in an area. B. Fire protection shall not be applied to steel floor decks prior to the completion of concrete work on that deck. C. The application of fireproofing to the underside of roof deck shall not commence until the roof is completely installed and tight, all penthouses are complete, all mechanical units have been placed, and construction roof traffic has ceased. When roof traffic is anticipated, as in the case of periodic maintenance, roofing pavers shall be installed as a walkway to distribute loads. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. C. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. D. Metal Decks: 1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. 2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing. Lakeview Health Services SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-5 West End Heights 3. When roof traffic is anticipated, as in the case of periodic maintenance, roofing pavers shall be installed as a walkway to distribute loads. E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied. J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied. K. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups. L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray-applied with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture and neaten edges. 5. Skip-Troweled Finish with Corner Beads: Even, leveled surface produced by troweling sprayapplied finish to smooth out the texture, eliminate surface markings, and square off edges. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Test and inspect as required by Chapter 17 of the IBC. 2. For reference, utilize AWCI - Inspection Procedure for Field-Applied Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials, Technical Manual 12-A; an annotated guide. B. Test and inspect completed work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. C. Application will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Lakeview Health Services SPRAY-APPLIED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-6 West End Heights C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services THROUGH-PENETRATION 078413-1 West End Heights FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fireresistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Floors. 2. Roofs. 3. Walls and partitions. 4. Smoke barriers. 5. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas. 6. Refer to plans for a comprehensive fire rating plan. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 3. Fire-resistance-rated floor/ceiling assemblies. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 4. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 5. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 6. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 7. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 8. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 9. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 10. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating Lakeview Health Services THROUGH-PENETRATION 078413-2 West End Heights FIRESTOP SYSTEMS items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to throughpenetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) ITS in "Directory of Listed Products." Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Lakeview Health Services THROUGH-PENETRATION 078413-3 West End Heights FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. DAP Inc. 3. Firestop Systems Inc. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 6. Specified Technologies Inc. 7. 3M Fire Protection Products. 8. Tremco. 9. United States Gypsum Company. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of Lakeview Health Services THROUGH-PENETRATION 078413-4 West End Heights FIRESTOP SYSTEMS grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. Lakeview Health Services THROUGH-PENETRATION 078413-5 West End Heights FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetratio n Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1 West End Heights 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joint backup materials. 2. Joint sealers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Division 04: Concrete Masonry Units 3. Division 07: Sheet Metal 4. Division 07: Aluminum Composite Panel System 5. Division 07: Membrane Roofing 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C510 - Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or Multi-component Joint Sealants. 2. C719 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle). 3. C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds. 5. C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 6. C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 8. C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants. 9. C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. 10. C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints. 11. D2203 - Standard Test Method for Staining from Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Indicate sealers, primers, backup materials, bond breakers, and accessories proposed for use. 2. Samples: a. 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch long joint sealer samples [showing available colors.] [in specified colors.] b. 6 inch long joint backup material samples. 3. Warranty: Sample warranty form. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory Pre-Construction Testing: 1. Obtain representative samples of actual substrate materials. 2. Test sealers and accessories for following: a. Adhesion: Test to ASTM C794 and ASTM C719; determine surface preparation and required primer. b. Compatibility: Test to ASTM C1087; determine that materials in contact with sealers do not adversely affect sealant materials or sealant color. c. Staining: Test to ASTM D2203, ASTM C510, or ASTM C1248; determine that sealants will not stain joint substrates. d. Pre-construction testing is not required when sealant manufacturer furnishes data acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for materials matching those of this Project. 1.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS Lakeview Health Services JOINT SEALANTS 079200-2 West End Heights A. Do not apply sealers at temperatures below 40 degrees F unless approved by sealer manufacturer. 1.2 WARRANTIES A. Furnish manufacturer’s 10-year warranty providing coverage for exterior sealers and accessories that fail to provide air and water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. Warranty options: 20-year manufactures warranty (example DOWSIL 795, 790, 756) 5 year manufactures warranty (example DOWSIL CWS, CCS) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. BASF Building Systems. (www.buildingsystems.basf.com) 2. Dow Performances Silicones. (www.dow.com) 3. GE Silicones. (www.siliconeforbuilding.com) 4. Pecora Corp. (www.pecora.com) 5. Sika Corp. (www.sikausa.com) 6. Tremco, Inc. (www.tremcosealants.com) 2.2 MATERIALS A. Joint Sealer Type 1: 1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, single component Silicone polyurethane type, non-sag. 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent 3. Warranty: 20 years 4. Acceptable products: DOWSIL 795, 790 or 756 5. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. B. Joint Sealer Type 2: 1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, single component silicone type, nonstaining, non-sag. 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent. 3. Warranty: 5 year 4. Acceptable Products: DOWSIL Contractors Weatherproofing Sealant (CWS) or DOWSIL Contractors Concrete Sealants (CCS) 5. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. C. Joint Sealer Type 3: 1. ASTM C834, single component acrylic latex, non-sag. 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 15 percent. 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. D. Joint Sealer Type 4: 1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, single component silicone, non-sag, mildew resistant. 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent. 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. E. Joint Sealer Type 5: 1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, single component polyurethane type, non-sag, recommended by manufacturer for continuous water immersion. 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent. 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. F. Joint Sealer Type 6 1. ASTM C834, single component acrylic latex, non-sag, non-hardening, non-corrosive, recommended by manufacturer for acoustical applications. 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 15 percent. 3. Color: White. G. Joint Sealer Type 7 Lakeview Health Services JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3 West End Heights 1. Air/weather barrier sealant for adhere to air/water barrier systems – one part silicone 2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 25 percent. 3. Acceptable Products: DOWSIL 758 Weather Barrier Sealant 4. Color: White. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primers, Bondbreakers, and Solvents: As recommended by sealer manufacturer. B. Joint Backing: 1. Type A: a. ASTM C1330, closed cell polyethylene foam, preformed round joint filler, nonabsorbing, non staining, resilient, compatible with sealer and primer, recommended by sealer manufacturer for each sealer type. b. Size: Minimum 1.25 times joint width. 2. Type B: a. ASTM C1330 Type B, extruded polyethylene bi-cellular foam, preformed round joint filler, non-absorbing, non-staining, resilient, compatible with sealer and primer, recommended by sealer manufacturer for each sealer type. b. Size: Minimum 1.75 times joint width. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion. If surface has been subject to chemical contamination, contact sealer manufacturer for recommendation. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect adjacent surfaces with masking tape or protective coverings. D. Sealer Dimensions: 1. Minimum joint size: 1/4 x 1/4 inch. 2. Joints 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide: Depth equal to width. 3. Joints over 1/2 inch wide: Depth equal to one half of width. 4. Joints wider than 1” max sealant depth should be ½” 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install sealers and accessories in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install acoustical sealers and accessories in accordance with ASTM C919. D. Install joint backing to maintain required sealer dimensions. Compress backing approximately 25 – 75 percent (depending on joint & sealant type) without puncturing skin. Do not twist or stretch. E. Use bondbreaker tape where joint backing is not installed. F. Fill joints full without air pockets, embedded materials, ridges, and sags. G. Tool sealer to smooth profile. H. Apply sealer within manufacturer’s recommended temperature range. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove masking tape and protective coverings after sealer has cured. B. Clean adjacent surfaces. 3.4 SCHEDULE Lakeview Health Services JOINT SEALANTS 079200-4 West End Heights JOINT LOCATION OR TYPE SEALER TYPE Exterior Joints: Joints in above-grade surfaces 1, 2 Joints in below-grade surfaces (foundation penetrations) 5 Interior Joints: Joints in horizontal surfaces subject to pedestrian vehicular traffic 1 Joints in glazed assemblies 2 Joints in gypsum wall board assemblies 1 or 2 Joints in toilet rooms, countertops, kitchens & wet/damp areas 4 Joints in acoustical assemblies 6 Air/Water Barrier coatings or Membranes 7 END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel doors B. Steel frames C. Steel architectural stick systems 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Div. 8 - Wood Doors B. Div. 8 - Door Hardware C. Div. 8- Glazing D. Div. 9 - Paints and Coatings E. Div. 13 - Intrusion Detection: Security system F. Div. 13 - Building Automation and Control: Building monitoring system G. Div. 16 – Building Wire and Cable: Power supply to electric hardware devices H. Drawings: Refer to Door Schedule on the Drawings for Fire-Ratings and Additional Information. 1.03 REFERENCES It is the intent of this specification that all hollow metal and its application will comply or exceed the standards as listed. The latest published edition of each reference applies. A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 3. ASTM A 924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process. 4. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, High Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 5. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 6. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI A115.1 - Preparation for Mortise Locks for 1 3/4 Inch and 1 3/8 Inch Doors. 2. ANSI A115.2 - Preparation for Bored Locks for 1 3/4 Inch and 1 3/8 Inch Doors. 3. ANSI A156.7 - Hinge Template Dimensions. 4. ANSI A 250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI A250.4 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing. 6. ANSI A 250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 7. ANSI A 250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 8. ANSI/SDI 250.11 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 9. ANSI/DHI A 115 - Specifications for Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 10. ANSI/DHI A 115.IG - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. C. SDI - Steel Door Institute 1. SDI 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames. 2. SDI 111 – Recommended Details and Guidelines for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and Accessories. 3. SDI 111-H – High Frequency Hinge Preparation 4. SDI 112 – Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. SDI 117 – Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 6. SDI 118 – Basic Fire Door Requirements. Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-2 West End Heights 7. SDI 122 – Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 8. SDI 124 – Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. NAAMM/HMMA – Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 1. HMMA 840 – Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. HMMA 820 TN01-03 Grouting Hollow Metal Frames E. Building Code references 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 2. UL - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc 3. ANSI/UL 10C - Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 4. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 361 Guidelines 5. UBC 7-2-1997 - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. WH - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey International Inc. 7. NFPA 105 – Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives 8. UL 1784 – Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: A. Doors and frames to conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this specification that all hardware and its application comply or exceed the standards for labeled openings. In case of conflict between types required for fire protection, furnish type required by NFPA and UL. 1. Interior vertical stairwell doors will carry a minimum 250°F (121°C) temperature rise rating in addition to the required fire rating. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review six (6) complete copies of the hollow metal shop drawings covering complete identification of all items required for the project. Include manufacturer’s names and identification of product. Included six (6) complete copies of catalog cuts and/or technical data sheets and any other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. 1. The data on the Shop Drawing will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance, and design criteria, materials and similar data to enable the Architect to review the information as required. B. Indicate frames configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, to insure doors and frames are properly prepared and coordinated to receive C. Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for glass lites and louvers. D. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions, including a copy of ANSI A250.11-2001 as part of the shop drawing submittal. E. Shop drawings, product data, and samples to bear the Contractor’s stamp verifying they have been coordinated and reviewed for completeness and compliance with the contract documents. F. Shop drawings submitted without the above requirements will be considered incomplete, will NOT be reviewed, and will be returned directly to the Contractor. G. Follow the same procedures for re-submittal as the initial submittal with the appropriate dates revised. H. After approval of the hollow metal shop drawings this distributor to furnish four (4) complete sets of asbuilt documents with manufacturers’ warranties and product data. All information will be submitted bound in a schedule cover. I. Evidence of manufacturer's membership in the Steel Door Institute. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Select a qualified hollow metal distributor, who is a direct account of the manufacturer of the products furnished. In addition that distributor must have in their regular employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), a Certified Door Consultant (CDC) or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC), who will be available to consult with the Architect and Contractor regarding any matters affecting the door and frame opening. B. Furnish all work performed and all materials in conformity with the contract documents. Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-3 West End Heights C. Conform to requirements of the above reference standards. Submit test reports upon request by the Owner or Architect. D. Underwriters' Laboratories and Warnock Hersey, labeled fire doors and frames: 1. Label all fire doors and frames listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL10C, Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies and Uniform Building Code Standard 72, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of ANSI/NFPA 80. 3. Manufacture all Underwriters' Laboratories labeled doors and frames under the UL factory inspection program and in strict compliance to UL procedures, and provide the degree of fire protection, heat transmission and panic loading capability indicated by the opening class. 4. Manufacture all Warnock Hersey labeled doors and frames to meet the specific requirements of that labeling agency's current procedure for the tested hourly rating designated and inspected by representatives of the labeling agency. 5. Affixed physical label or approved marking to all fire doors and/or fire door frames, at an authorized facility as evidence of compliance with procedures of the labeling agency. Label embossment is not permitted. 6. Doors and frames will conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this specification that all hardware and its application comply or exceed the standards for labeled openings. In case of conflict between types required for fire protection, furnish type required by NFPA and UL. 7. Fire door assemblies in exit enclosures and exit passageways must have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250°F (121°C) above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of the standard fire test exposure. E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of the Steel Door Institute. F. Installer: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified in this Section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage of Doors 1. Store doors vertically in a dry area, under proper cover. Place the units on at least 4” high wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting. If the door becomes wet, or moisture appears, remove any protective wrapping immediately. Provide a ¼” space between the doors to permit air circulation. Proper storage is required to meet the requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10 and HMMA 840. B. Storage of Frames 1. Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost under cover on 4” wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting. Store assembled frames in a vertical position, five units maximum in a stack. Provide a ¼” space between frames to permit air circulation. 2. Providing proper storage for all doors and frames, to maintain the quality and integrity of the factory applied paint, and maintain the requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10 and HMMA 840. 3. Sand, touch up and clean prime painted surfaces prior to finish painting in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 1.08 COORDINATION 1. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal cutouts and reinforcement for door hardware, electric devices and recessed items. 2. Coordinate work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. 3. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware. 4. Verify field dimensions for factory assembled frames prior to fabrication. Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-4 West End Heights PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers for doors and frames specified are listed below. Only the products of the listed manufacturers will be accepted. No other approved alternates will be accepted. 1. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio 2. Curries, Mason City, Iowa B. Provide all steel doors and frames from a single manufacturer. 2.02 DOORS: A. Construct exterior and interior doors to the designs and gages as specified: 1. Exterior Doors: Hot-dip galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60, 14 gage hot dipped galvannealed steel, with closed tops. a. All galvannealed doors will include galvannealed components. b. Close tops of all exterior swing-out doors to eliminate moisture penetration. Galvannealed steel top caps are permitted. 2. Interior Doors: Cold-rolled steel, A 1008, 16 gage cold rolled or galvannealed steel. a. All galvannealed doors will include galvannealed components. 3. All factory prime painted doors. 4. Hardware Reinforcements: a. Hinge reinforcements for full mortise hinges: minimum 7 gage [0.180” (4.7mm)]. b. Lock reinforcements: minimum 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)]. c. Closer reinforcements: minimum 14 gage [0.067” (1.7mm)], 20” long. d. Galvannealed doors include galvanized hardware reinforcements. e. Projection welded hinge and lock reinforcements to the edge of the door. f. Provided adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required. B. Full Flush Type Doors Construction 1. Doors construction conforming to ANSI-A250.4 criteria and tested to 5,000,000 operating cycles. 2. Approved door core constructions: a. Steel Stiffened: Vertically stiffened with steel stiffeners and sound deadened with fiberglass batt insulation. Fabricate hat shaped stiffeners from 20 gage (.8 mm) steel located 6” (152 mm) on center, welded to the inside of the face sheets 4" (101.6 mm) on center. Weld the hat shape stiffeners together at the top and bottom of the door. Fill areas between stiffeners with fiberglass. Acceptable products: (i) Steelcraft: B (ii) Curries: 747D 3. Vertical edge seams: Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-locking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams, or a one piece full height 14 gage channel. Apply a continuous bead of structural epoxy in the internal vertical connection. a. Welded Vertical Edges (W): Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joint; edge seams welded, epoxy filled, and ground smooth. (i) Steelcraft LW edge option (ii) Curries: T edge option 4. Bevel all hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch in 2 inche. Square edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are not acceptable. 5. Reinforce top and bottom of doors with galvannealed 14 gage, welded to both panels. C. Electrical Requirements: 1. General: Coordination all electrical requirements for doors and frames. Make provisions for installation of electrical items arranged so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced. 2. Doors with Electric Hinges: a. General: Furnish metal conduit raceway to permit wiring from electric door hardware. b. Hinge Locations: Provide electric hinge at intermediate or center location. Top or bottom electric hinge locations are not acceptable. c. Refer to 08710 for electrified hardware items. Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-5 West End Heights 2.03 DOOR FRAMES: A. Construct exterior and metal door frames to the profiles, designs and gages as specified. 1. Exterior Frames: Hot-dip galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60, 14 gage [0.067”] hot dipped galvannealed steel, with closed tops. a. All galvannealed frames will include galvannealed components. 2. Interior Frames in Masonry: 16 gage [0.053”] cold rolled or galvannealed steel. a. All galvannealed frames will include galvannealed components. 3. Interior Frames in Drywall: 16 gage [0.053”] cold rolled. B. Flush Frames: knocked down for field assembly or set-up and arc-welded with temporary shipping bars. Factory die-mitered corner connections reinforced with four integral tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head. Unless otherwise indicated, frame will have 2” faces and 5/8” stops. Frame depths per the architectural door schedule 1. Provide frames with a minimum of six wall anchors and two adjustable base anchors of manufacturer’s standard design. Acceptable products: a. Steelcraft: F b. Curries: M C. Drywall Frames: same as flush frames, 16 gage except: 1. Form frames with double return backbends to prevent cutting into drywall surface. Design knock down frames to be securely installed in the rough opening after wallboard is applied. a. Drywall frames: knocked down for field assembly. Factory die-mitered corner connections reinforced at miters, including soffit tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head 2. Locate adjustable anchors in each jamb 4” from the top of the door opening to hold frame in rigid alignment. a. Provide security anchor at strike jambs on all frames 7’6” high and over. 3. Base anchor options: a. Weld-in base anchor attaching plate in each jamb for field installation of loose base anchors to allow proper anchoring at base of frame. Acceptable products: (i) Steelcraft: DW (ii) Curries: C with P0087 D. Prepare all frames to receive inserted type door silencers (3) per strike jamb on single doors, and (2) per head for pair of doors. Stick on silencers are not permitted. E. Frame Hardware Reinforcements: 1. Mortise hinge reinforcement: minimum 7 gage [0.180”]. a. Provide high frequency hinge reinforcement for top hinge on all exterior, cross corridor, and stairwell frames, in accordance with SDI 111-H, Example “A” Application, where full mortise hinges are specified. 2. Strike reinforcements: minimum 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)] and prepared for an ANSI-A115.1-2 strike. 3. Closer reinforcement: minimum 14 gage [0.067” (1.7mm)] steel. 4. Projection weld hinge and strike reinforcements to the door frame. 5. Provide metal plaster guards for all mortised cutouts. 6. Provide adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required. 7. Include galvanized hardware reinforcements in all galvannealed frames. F. Electrical Requirements: 1. General: Coordination all electrical requirements for doors and frames. Make provisions for installation of electrical items arranged so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced. a. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for metal door frame to accept all electric components. b. Frame with Electrical Hinges: Weld UL listed grout guard cover box welded over center hinge reinforcing. Top or bottom hinge locations are not permitted. Contractor to reference 3.01.D, for continuous hinges. c. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required to accept security system components. d. Refer to 08710 for electrified hardware items. 2. Provide mortar box, welded in head of door frame at all exterior frames for future door contact switch provided by owner. Size, type, location and conduit requirements to be provided by owner. Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-6 West End Heights 2.04 CONSTRUCTION OF ARCHITECTURAL STICK COMPONENTS: A. Fabricate architectural stick frame assemblies from standard frame components, fabricated from 14 gage galvanized steel A60 for exterior, and 16 gage cold rolled steel for interior. B. Construct architectural stick frame assemblies of standard frame components, fabricated as specified. 1. Exterior Frames: Hot-dip galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60, 14 gage [0.067”] hot dipped galvannealed steel, with closed tops. a. All galvannealed frames will include galvannealed components. 2. Interior Frames in Masonry: 16 gage [0.053”] cold rolled or galvannealed steel. a. All galvannealed frames will include galvannealed components. C. Frame component requirements: 1. Prepare required sticks at door openings and frame assemblies for hardware as specified. 2. Fabricate all frame assemblies from three basic components: a. Open Sections (perimeter members) identical in configuration to standard frames b. Closed sections (intermediate members) with identical jamb depth, face dimensions, and stops as open sections. Factory assemble closed sections include full-length internal reinforcement of 16 gage steel, factory spot welded to both soffits 8” on center c. Sill sections: Fabricated from galvanized steel, flush with both faces of adjacent vertical members. Cut individual components to length and notched to assure square joints and corners. 3. Welded and ground smooth all joints and corners of the frame assembly at the intersecting faces of the sections. Externally welded all face joints at meeting mullions or between mullions and other frame members on the face surfaces only. 4. Ship frame assemblies to the jobsite completely welded. Field joints will be permitted only with the size of the total assembly exceeds shipping limitations. 5. Field splice joins will be permitted when the fabricated frame assemblies if large openings are subject to shipping limitations. Oversized frames will be fabricated in sections designated for splicing in the field. Frames to be provided with joint reinforcements 14 gage, 8” long. Field weld joint reinforcement inside and tack weld outside joint at both faces, grind, and finish smooth and uniform in appearance, after installation. 6. Pierced and dimpled all glazing beads for use with manufacturers’ standard fasteners. 7. Provide all necessary anchors for jambs, heads, and sills of assemblies. D. Verification of field dimensions as required. Frame fabrication will not begin until these dimensions have been verified, submitted, and approved. 2.05 FABRICATION: A. Face Welded Frames: 1. Continuous face weld the joint between the head and jamb faces along their length either internally or externally. Grind, prime paint, and finish smooth all face joints with no visible face seams. 2. Externally weld, grind, prime paint, and finish smooth all face joints at meeting mullions or between mullions and other frame members as per ANSI/SDI A250.8 – 2003. 3. Provide two temporary steel spreaders (welded to the jambs at each rabbet of door openings) on welded frames during shipment. Remove all temporary steel spreaders prior to installation of the frame. 2.06 FINISH: A. Doors, frames and frame components are required to be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with one coat of baked-on rust inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the ANSI/SDI A250.10 “Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.” Lakeview Health Services STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-7 West End Heights PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install doors and frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute’s recommended erection instructions for steel frames ANSI A250.11. B. Install label doors and frames in accordance with NFPA-80. C. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, align and brace until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary wood spreaders. 1. Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings. Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on exposed faces. D. Provide full height 3/8” to 1-1/2” strip of polystyrene insulation at frames requiring grouting where continuous hinges are specified. Apply the strip to the back of the frame, where the hinge is to be installed, to allow for field drilling or tapping. E. Where grouting is required in masonry, provide and install temporary bottom and intermediate wood spreaders to maintain proper width and avoid bowing or deforming of frame members. Refer to ANSI A250.11-2001, Standard. 1. Hollow Metal Frames to receive grouting comply with ANSI/SDI Standard A250.8.2003, 4.2.2, whereby grout will be mixed to provide a 4” maximum slump consistency and hand troweled into place. Do not use grout mixed to a thinner, pumpable consistency is not recommended and not be used. Refer to HMMA 820 TN01-03 Grouting Hollow Metal Frames F. Provide a vertical wood brace during grouting of frame at openings over 4’0” wider, to prevent sagging of frame header. G. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers’ instructions and Section 08710 FINISH HARDWARE of these Specifications. Install all hardware with only factory provided fasteners. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 3.02 ADJUSTING: A. Final Adjustments: Adjust all operating doors and hardware items just prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Owner and Architect. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are damaged, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Provide protective measures required throughout the construction period to ensure that all door and frame units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES - Wood doors non-rated and fire-rated A. Solid core flush wood doors B. Solid core sound-retardant, fire-rated flush wood doors 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 06 - Finish Carpentry B. Division 08 - Metal doors and frames C. Division 08 - Finish hardware D. Division 08 – Glazing E. Drawings: Refer to Door Schedule on the Drawings for Fire-Ratings and Additional Information. 1.3 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests and Door Assemblies. B. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods for Fire Assemblies. C. UBC 7-2, 1997 D. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. E. Quality Standards: 1. WDMA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (Window and Door Manufacturers Association). AWI Quality Standards 7th Edition, Version 1.0 1997. 2. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. (American National Standard Institute) F. Labeling Agencies 1. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Shop drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, special beveling, blocking for hardware in mineral core doors, identify cutouts. C. Indicate compliance with positive pressure. D. Product Data: Indicate door core materials, thickness, construction, veneer species. E. Finish samples: A set of 3 illustrating the range of color and grain of the specified door face materials. F. Manufacturer’s full lifetime warranty 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meet or exceed WDMA I.S.1-A Premium Grade, AWI Version 7 Custom Grade Hot pressed. B. Labeled Doors: Listed and conform to the requirements of: 1. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH) 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING AND SITE CONDITIONS A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of WDMA, AWI, and manufacturer’s care and handling instructions. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer’s standard packaging. Inspect for damage. Do not store in damp or wet areas. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%. C. Certain wood species are light sensitive. Protect doors from exposure to natural and artificial light after delivery. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01620. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation with a pre-installation conference. Lakeview Health Services FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2 West End Heights 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term: 1. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Full Life of Original Installation" including rehang and refinish if door(s) do not comply with warranty tolerance standards. 2. Include coverage for delamination, warping, bow, cup and telegraphing of core construction beyond warranty tolerances. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER / MODEL A. Manufacturer: Masonite Architectural B. Model: Cendura Series Mohawk – Fire-Resistant Mineral Core 45-90 Min. / Bonded Construction – Wood Veneer C. Specific Requirements: 1. Thickness: 1 ¾” 2. Fire-Resistance Rating:45 Minute 3. Surface Material: Wood Veneer: Plain Sliced White Maple 4. Stain Finish: Saffron Stain, or other Architect selected finish from full range of stain options (stain shall to match existing doors) – Factory Finish 5. Crossbands: One Piece HDF 6. Core Construction: Mineral Core 7. STC Rating – Min. 38 (provide all required gaskets, seals, corner pads, etc. as required to achieve min. specified STC) 2.2 MATERIALS A. Workmanship 1. Comply with WDMA/AWI workmanship for veneer faces, vertical edges, crossbands, horizontal edges and dimensional tolerances. B. Door Construction Grade – 1. Except as may be otherwise shown on the drawings fabricate the work of this section to WDMA “Premium Grade” / AWI “Custom Grade.” All assembled door units shall be Hot-Pressed. C. Wood Door Facing 1. For transparent (stained) finish: Wood Veneer (5-Ply), WDMA/AWS “A” Grade, Plain Sliced Select Maple - Color to be Selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s finishes. 2. For opaque (painted) finish: Wood Veneer (5-ply): MDO with opaque finish to match Architect’s sample. D. Assembly of Sliced Veneer for transparent finish 1. Center Balance Match 2.3 FABRICATION A Door Construction 1. Fire-rated for transparent finish: Mohawk Cendura Fire-Rated STC Door (38 or better STC). Provide 45-minute fire-resistance-rated mineral acoustical core door. 2. Bond stiles and rails to core, abrasive sand core assembly to achieve uniform thickness. B. Vertical Edges (Stiles) 1. Mineral Core a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match face veneer over manufacturer’s edge for improved screw holding. (Neutral Pressure) b. As required by manufacturer to meet Positive Pressure Category A (Concealed intumescent) C. Horizontal Edges 1. Manufacturer’s standard. (No MDF top and bottom rails permitted) D. Adhesives 1. Face Adhesive: Type 1. E. Innerblocking for Mineral Core Fire Door Lakeview Health Services FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3 West End Heights 1. Supply innerblocking for all surface applied hardware F. Machining 1. Factory fit and machine doors for frame and finish hardware in accordance with hardware and NFPA 80 requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Apply appropriate fire labels. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops 1. Non-Rated: a. Wood, of the same species/compatible with door species. 2. Fire-Rated: a. Flush, wood veneer clad PVC, of same species as door facing. b. Fire-resistance-rated clear safety glazing in code compliant, approved framing system. 2.5 FACTORY FINISH A. Factory finish doors in accordance with WDMA G-17 Finish System Description or AWI Division 1500– S-4 – Finish System Standards. Factory finish to be water based stain and ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane to comply with EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Finish must meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. B. Factory finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and ready to receive this work. B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80, manufacturers’ instructions and to ITS-WH/UL requirements. B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum 3/4 inch . D. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. F. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided by hardware manufacturer. Use threaded throughbolts for half surface hinges. H. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware I. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. J. Install door louvers and light kits plumb and level. K. Reseal or refinish any doors that required site alteration. 3.3 WARRANTY TOLERANCES A. Conform to WDMA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and telegraphing. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113A-1 West End Heights STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units. 1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront Systems include: a. Exterior (and Interior Vestibule) Storefront Sections: Trifab® VG 451T Storefront System – 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) nominal dimension; Thermal; Front, Center, Back, Multi-Plane, Structural Silicone or Weatherseal Glazed (Type B); Screw Spline, Shear Block, Stick or Punched Opening Fabrication. b. Refer to Floor Plans and Storefront Schedule for Additional Information. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 “Air Barriers” for materials used to bridge between aluminum storefront system and building intersection. 2. Division 7 “Fire-Resistant Joint systems” for fire resistive material installed between aluminum storefront system and floor intersections. 3. Division 7 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum storefront system. 4. Division 7 “Aluminum Composite Panels” Division 8 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances” 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed 115 MPH b. Importance Factor II. c. Exposure Category B. B. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 18 lbs./sq. ft. inward and 25 lbs./sq. ft. outward. The design pressures are based on the Building Code of New York State; 2010 Edition. 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf (958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113A-2 West End Heights STOREFRONTS a. 0.27 (for 1” low-e glass with argon). 6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a. Glass to Exterior – 70frame and 69glass (low-e). b. Glass to Center – 62 frame and 68glass (low-e). c. Glass to Interior – 56 frame and 67 glass (low-e). 7. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): When tested to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: a. 42 (STC) min. and 33 (OITC) min. for 1” glass. b. 33 (STC) min. and 30 (OITC) min. for ¼” glass. 8. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886 and information in ASTM E 1996 and /or AAMA 506. a. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. b. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum frame storefront system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum framed storefront system and components required. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type of aluminum-framed storefront. F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12” (300 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. G. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum framed storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113A-3 West End Heights STOREFRONTS 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup for type(s) of storefront elevation(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings. F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." G. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and installation of structural-sealant-glazed systems. H. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufactures Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. Trifab® 451T (thermal) Storefront System as indicated on the Storefront Schedule on the Drawings. 3. 2” x 4-1/2” (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) System Dimensions 4. Glass: Center Glaze-Glazed as indicated on the Storefront Schedule on the Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070” wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. F. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Thermal Barrier (Trifab® VG 451T): Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113A-4 West End Heights STOREFRONTS 1. Kawneer IsoLock® Thermal Break with a 1/4" (6.4 mm) separation consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel. D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action E. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-g lazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: 1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black 2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. a. Color: Matching structural sealant. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: As specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances." B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 mil (0.762 mm) thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113A-5 West End Heights STOREFRONTS 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. C. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufactures standard installation instructions. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permacoat™ Coatings, AAMA 2604 – Color: #ORSL 71870 ‘Atlantic Gray’ or other Custom Color to Match the Aluminum Composite Panels (Reynobond – Colorweld 500 - Charcoal). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight framed aluminum storefront system installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum framed storefront system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Install aluminum framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113A-6 West End Heights STOREFRONTS 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 503, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater. b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of twothirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf (300 Pa). B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113B-1 West End Heights ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Kawneer Aluminum Entrances, glass and glazing, and door hardware and components. 1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Entrances include: 1. 500 Tuffline® Swing Door; Wide stile, 5" (and 10” base rail), vertical face dimension, 2" (51mm) depth, 3/16” (5mm) wall thickness door, high traffic and high abuse applications. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 “Air Barriers” for materials used to bridge between aluminum sliding glass door and building intersection 2. Division 7 “Fire-Resistant Joint systems” for fire resistive material installed between aluminum sliding door system and floor intersections 3. Division 7 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum sliding door system 4. Division 084113A "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts" 5. Division 8 "Hardware" 6. Division 8 "Glazing" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 1. Basic Wind Speed 115 MPH. 2. Importance Factor II. 3. Exposure Category B. B. Aluminum Framed Entrance Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 18 lbs./sq. ft. inward and 25 lbs./sq. ft. outward. The design pressures are based on the Building Code of New York State; 2010 Edition. 2. Air Infiltration: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa) for single doors and 1.567 psf for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" (915 mm x 2134 mm) entrance door and frame shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot. A pair of 6'0" x 7'0" (1830 mm x 2134mm) entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot. Structural Performance: Corner strength shall be tested per the Kawneer dual moment load test procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum-framed entrance door indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113B-2 West End Heights ENTRANCES C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For sliding aluminum-framed glass door and components required. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum-framed entrance doors. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. G. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizont al intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12” (300 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. H. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum-framed entrance doors and storefronts that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding aluminum-framed glass door through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum-framed glass entrance doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup for type(s) of swing entrance door(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings. F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of sliding aluminum-framed glass door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Product: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113B-3 West End Heights ENTRANCES 2. The door stile and rail face dimensions of the 500 Tuffline® entrance door will be as follows: Door Vertical Stile Top Rail Bottom Rail 500 Tuffline® 5" 5" 10" 3. Major portions of the door members to be 0.188” (4.8mm) nominal in thickness and glazing molding to be 0.05” (1.5mm) thick. 4. Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer. 5. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by sliding aluminum-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.090” wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with sliding aluminum-framed glass door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702. 2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Storefront Entrance Framing: Entrance framing to be 2” x 4-1/2” heavy duty framing. B. Non-Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel. D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action E. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely aluminum-framed entrance doors. B. Standard Tuffline® Entrance Hardware: 1. Weatherstripping: 1. Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal utilizing wool pile with polymeric fin. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113B-4 West End Heights ENTRANCES 2. The door weathering on a single acting offset pivot or butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be Kawneer Sealair® weathering. This is comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (Necessary to meet specified performance tests). 3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, with ribbed surface. 4. Continuous Geared Hinge. 5. Push/Pull: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 6. Exit Device: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 7. Closer: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 8. Security Lock/Dead Lock: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 9. Latch Handle: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 10. Cylinder(s)/Thumbturn Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 11. Electric Strike/Strike Keeper: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. C. Access Control Entrance Hardware: Refer to Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. B. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing. 1. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and 1-1/8" (29 mm) long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance. 3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. C. Weather Stripping: Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufactures drawings and details. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with AAMA-AFPA "Anodic Finishes/Painted Aluminum" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permacoat™ Coatings, AAMA 2604 – Color: #ORSL 71870 ‘Atlantic Gray’ or other Custom Color to Match the Aluminum Composite Panels (Reynobond – Colorweld 500 - Charcoal). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084113B-5 West End Heights ENTRANCES flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight sliding door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum swing entrance doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum swing entrance doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill threshold in bed of sealant, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-1 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fire-rated glazing (including aluminum-wrapped fire-rated infill panels) and framing systems for installation as storefront sections in interior openings. B. Related Sections: 1. Div. 5 “Structural Steel Framing:” Steel attachment members 2. Div. 5 “Metal Fabrications:” Steel attachment members inserts and anchors 3. Div. 7 “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other fire resistive assemblies. 4. Div. 7 – “Joint Sealants” for installation of joint sealants installed with steel fire-rated glazed curtain-wall systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section. 5. Div. 8 – “Metal Doors and Frames” for fire-rated doors. 6. Div. 8 – “Aluminum Entrance and Storefronts” for entrance [and storefront] systems installed with steel fire-rated glazed curtain-wall systems 7. Div. 8 “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the work of this section 8. Div. 8 “Glazing:” 9. Fire-Rated Aluminum Storefront Schedule on Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 1. AAMA 2603-2002 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 2. AAMA 2604 -2005 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. AAMA 2605 -2005 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. Fire safety related: a. ASTM E119: Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. Material related a. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2007. b. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2006b. 3. Exterior-related: a. ASTM E 283-04: Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen b. ASTM E 330-02: Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Procedure A c. ASTM E 331-04: Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference d. ASTM E 783-02: Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors e. ASTM E 1105-00: Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2007 D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-2 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 1. BHMA A156 - American National Standards for door hardware; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156). E. Canadian Standards 1. CAN-S101 Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2. CAN4-S104-M, “Fire Tests of Door Assemblies” 3. CAN4-S106-M, “Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass Block Assemblies” F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction & Materials 3. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 4. NFPA 257: Fire Test of Window Assemblies G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 1. UL 10 B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10 C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window & Door Assemblies 3. UL 263: Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials 4. UL-752 Ratings of Bullet-Resistant Materials H. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings I. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials J. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2005 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass, fabricated glass or framing as defined in referenced glazing publications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product descriptions, technical data, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listings and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations and details of product showing component dimensions; framing opening requirements, dimensions, tolerances, and attachment to structure D. Structural Calculations (optional): 1. Provide structural calculations sealed by a licensed professional engineer in the State in which the project is located; prepared in compliance with referenced documents and these specifications. E. Samples (optional). For following products: 1. Glass sample-as provided by manufacturer 2. Sample of frame 3. Verification of sample of selected finish F. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Include aluminum-wrapped fire-resistant infill panels. G. Warranties: Submit manufacturer’s warranty. H. Certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. 1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-3 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualifications according to 1. International Accreditation Service for a Type A Third-Party Inspection Body (Field Services ICC-ES Third-Party Inspections Standard Operating Procedures, 00-BL-S0400 and S0401) 2. International Accreditation Service for Testing Body-Building Materials and Systems a. Fire Testing 1) ASTM Standards E 119 2) CPSC Standards 16 CFR 1201 3) NFPA Standards 251, 252, 257 4) UL Standards 9, 10B, 10C, 1784, UL Subject 63 5) BS 476; Part 22: 1987 6) EN 1634-1 7) CAN Standards S 101, S 104, S 106 C. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are classified and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 and UL 9. D. Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies: Assemblies complying with ASTM E119 that are classified and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing in accordance with UL 263, ASTM E119. E. Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by Underwriters Laboratories® maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of other sections. 1. Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop drawings. B. Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to: other interior and/or exterior envelope components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide the Pilkington Pyrostop® and Fireframes® standard five-year manufacturer warranty. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - (ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS] A. Manufacturer Glazing Material: “Pilkington Pyrostop®” fire-rated glazing as manufactured by the Pilkington Group and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 phone (800.426.0279) fax (425.396.8300) e-mail sales@fireglass.com, web site http://www.fireglass.com B. Frame System: “Fireframes® Aluminum Series” fire-rated frame system as manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 phone (800.426.0279) fax (425.396.8300 e-mail sales@fireglass.com web site http://www.fireglass.com 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. System Description: 1. Steel fire-rated glazed wall and/or window system, dual aluminum cover cap format a. Face widths available: 1) 2” b. Duration – Windows Capable of providing a fire rating for 60 minutes. c. Duration – Walls: Capable of providing a fire rating for 60 minutes. B. Structural Performance Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-4 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 1. Design and size the system to withstand structural forces placed upon it without damage or permanent set when tested in accordance with ASTM E330 using load 1.5 times the design wind loads and of 10 seconds in duration. 2. Accommodate movement between storefront and adjoining systems C. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283; Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf. D. Water Resistance, (static): ASTM E 331; No leakage at a static air pressure differential of 15 psf as defined in AAMA 501. 2.3 MATERIALS - GLASS A. Fire Rated Glazing: Composed of multiple sheets of Pilkington Optiwhite™ high visible light transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer. B. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201(Cat. I and II). C. Properties Interior Glazing Fire-Rating 60 minute Manufacturer’s designation 60-101 Glazing type single Nominal Thickness 7/8” (23mm) Weight in lbs/sf 10.85 Daylight Transmission 87% Sound Transmission Coefficient 41dB D. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL), fire rating period, safety glazing standards, and date of manufacture. E. Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard compression gaskets, standoff, spacers, setting blocks and other accessories necessary for a complete installation. 2.4 MATERIALS –ALUMINUM FRAMES A. Aluminum Framing System [60 min.] 1. Steel Frame — The steel framing members are made of two halves, nom. 1.9 in. wide (48.3 mm) with a nom. minimum depth of 1.38 in. (35 mm) with lengths cut according to glazing size. 2. Aluminum Trim — Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. 2 in. (50.8 mm) wide with a nom. depth of 1.54 in. (39 mm) with lengths cut according to glazing size. 3. Stainless Steel Standoffs — Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter with a nom. minimum depth of 1 1/8 in. (28 mm) with depth adjusted to match Pilkington Pyrostop® Panel thickness. 4. Stainless Steel Moment and Connecting Braces: — Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom 3/8 in. (10 mm) thick with a nom. minimum depth of 1 1/8 in. (28 mm) with depth adjusted to match Pilkington Pyrostop® Panel thickness. 5. Framing Member Fasteners — Supplied with the steel framing members. Screws are M6 x16mm Button Head Socket Cap Screws for frame assembly and #6 x 1” Pan Head Sheet Metal Screws for door installation. 6. Glazing Gasket — a. Interior Gasketing-Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. 3/4 in. (19 mm) x 3/16 (4.5 mm) black applied to the steel framing members to cushion and seal the glazing material when installed. b. Exterior Gasketing- Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. 2 in. (50 mm) x 3/16 (4.5 mm) black applied to the steel framing members to cushion and seal the glazing material when installed. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-5 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS C. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 611. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 570/A 570M. D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Use fasteners fabricated from Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. B. Glazing Gaskets: 1. Glazing gaskets for interior or exterior applications: ASTM C 864 (extruded EPDM rubber that provides for silicone adhesion) or ASTM C1115 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories (extruded silicone). C. Intumescent Tape: As supplied by frame manufacturer. D. Setting Blocks: ¼” Calcium silicate. E. Perimeter Anchors: Steel. F. Flashings: As recommended by manufacturer; same material and finish as cover caps. G. Silicone Sealant: One-Part Low Modulus, neutral cure High Movement-Capable Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25 with additional movement capability of 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression (total 150 percent); Use (Exposure) NT; Uses (Substrates) M, G, A, and O as applicable. (Use-O joint substrates include: Metal factory-coated with a high-performance coating; galvanized steel; ceramic tile.) 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning 790, 795 - Dow Corning Corp. b. Momentive c. Tremco H. Intumescent Caulk: Single component, latex-based, intumescent caulk designed to stop passage of fire, smoke, and fumes through fire-rated separations; permanently flexible after cure; will not support mold growth; flame spread/smoke developed 10/10. 1. Available Products: a. 3M CP-25 WP+ 2.6 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning 3. Thermafiber. 4. Rockwool B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 0, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and of the following nominal density and thermal resistivity: 1. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m), Types IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 2. Fiber Color: Regular color, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Obtain reviewed shop drawings prior to fabrication. B. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate fire-rated assembly to field dimensions. Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-6 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS C. Factory prepared, fire-rated steel door assemblies by TGP to be prehung, prefinished with hardware preinstalled for field mounting. D. Field glaze door and frame assemblies. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish frames after assembly. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. 2.9 POWDERCOAT FINISHES A. Finish after fabrication. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in finish are not acceptable. C. Aluminum Finish 1. Powder-Coat Finish: Polyester Super Durable powder coating which meets AAMA 2604 for chalking and fading. Apply manufacturer's standard powder coating finish system applied to factory-assembled frames before shipping, complying with manufacturer's recommended instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. 2. Color: To Match Kawneer Permacoat™ Coatings, AAMA 2604 – Color: #ORSL 71870 ‘Atlantic Gray’ or other Custom Color to Match the Aluminum Composite Panels (Reynobond – Colorweld 500 - Charcoal). 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tiger Drylac b. Additional manufacturers as approved by TGP D. Aluminum Finishes 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. Color: To Match Kawneer Color: #ORSL 71870 ‘Atlantic Gray’ or other Custom Color to Match the Aluminum Composite Panels. Paragraph below references AAMA standard for superior performance organic coating on extrusions and panels. Revise if specific products are required. 3. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive curtain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances. B. Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall / door system. C. Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. See Fireframes Aluminum Series Installation Manual Lakeview Health Services FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM-FRAMED 084123-7 West End Heights ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 3.3 REPAIR AND TOUCH UP A. Anodized Finishes 1. Protect the anodized finish from harsh chemicals such as concrete/mortar or muriatic acid/brick wash. If reasonable care is taken during handling and high and low pH chemicals can be avoided, repair and/or touch-up of an anodize finish will not be needed. 2. Some rub marks on an anodized surface can be removed with a mild abrasive pad such as a Scotch-Brite pad prior to touch up painting. 3. Touch-up paint should be used even more sparingly over anodize. Only the visible raw aluminum in the scratch or gouge should be touched up with a matching paint. B. Powder Coated Finishes 1. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended products. 2. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view. 3. Repairs and touch-up not visible from a distance of 5 feet Owner and Architect to approve. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent. 2. Do not use any of the following: a. Steam jets b. Abrasives c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones, alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services GLAZED ALUMINUM 084413-1 West End Heights CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: Architectural Aluminum Curtain Wall Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of curtain wall framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08410 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" 2. Division 08710 "Hardware" 9. Division 08800 "Glazing" 1.02 References (Industry Standards) A. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 “Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors” 2. AAMA 502-02 "Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors" 3. AAMA 611-98 "Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum" 4. AAMA 701-00 "Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping" 5. AAMA 800-92 "Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants" 6. AAMA 902-99 “Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances” 7. AAMA 910-93 “Voluntary ‘Life Cycle’ Specifications and Test Methods for Architectural Grade Windows and Sliding Glass Doors” 8. AAMA 1503-98 "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections" 9. AAMA 2603-02 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels” 10. AAMA 2604-02 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels” 11. AAMA 2605-02 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels” 12. AAMA CW-10-97 "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site" B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM E 283-99 "Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors" 2. ASTM E 330-97 "Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" 3. ASTM E 331-00 "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" ASTM E 774-00 "Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units" . 1.03 System Description A. Curtain Wall System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide Curtain Wall system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures compliant with the Building Code of New York State. 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). Lakeview Health Services GLAZED ALUMINUM 084413-2 West End Heights CURTAIN WALLS 3. Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Water Resistance, (dynamic): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1. There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 5. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 40 psf (1915 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 6. Seismic: When tested to AAMA 501.4, system must meet design displacement of 0.010 x the story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement. 7. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: 0.66 (clear). 8. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than 66frame and 60glass (clear), or Condensation Index (I): when tested to CSA-A440-00, the Condensation Index shall not be less than 68frame and 54glass (clear).. 9. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: 0.27 (low-e). 10. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than 71frame and 71glass (low-e). 11. Sound Transmission Loss: When tested to ASTM E90 and ASTM E1425, the Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor/Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less than: STC 42 or OITC 26 based upon 1” insulating glass (1/4", 1/2" AS, 1/4"), 1.04 Submittals A. General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit specified submittals in accordance with Division 01000 “General Conditions”. Submittals Sections. Product data, shop drawings, samples, and similar submittals are defined in Division 01000 “General Conditions”. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics. 1.05 Warranty A. Project Warranty: Refer to “Conditions of the Contract” for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s warranty for curtain wall system as follows: 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing structural calculations, applicable independent product test reports, installation instructions, a review of the application method, customer approval and periodic field service representation during construction. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. Lakeview Health Services GLAZED ALUMINUM 084413-3 West End Heights CURTAIN WALLS B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after curtain wall installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers (Acceptable Manufacturers/Products) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Address: Kawneer Company, Inc. 555 Guthridge Court, Technology Park/Atlanta, Norcross, GA 30092 Telephone: 770 449 5555 Fax: 770 734 1560 2. Proprietary Product/System: Kawneer Aluminum Curtain Wall a. Series: 1600 Wall System®1 b. Finish/Color: (See 2.06 Finishes) c. Framing Member Profile: 2–1/2" x 6" (63.5 x 152.4) , outside glazed pressure plate format. 2.02 Materials A. Aluminum (Curtain Wall and Components): 1. Material Standard: Extruded Aluminum, ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper. 2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness sufficient to meet the specified structural requirements. 3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of curtain wall members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.03 Accessories A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be Stainless Steel. B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall comply with ASTM C 864 and be extruded of a silicone compatible EPDM rubber that provides for silicone adhesion. C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. D. Thermal Barrier: Thermal separator shall be extruded of a silicone compatible elastomer that provides for silicone adhesion. 2.04 Related Materials A. Sealants: Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. B. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section. 2.05 Fabrication A. General: 1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 2.06 Finishes A. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permacoat™ Coatings, AAMA 2604 – Color: #ORSL 71870 ‘Atlantic Gray’ or other Custom Color to Match the Aluminum Composite Panels (Reynobond – Colorweld 500 - Charcoal). Lakeview Health Services GLAZED ALUMINUM 084413-4 West End Heights CURTAIN WALLS 2.07 Source Quality Control A. Source Quality: Provide aluminum curtain walls specified herein from a single source. 1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum curtain wall are part of a building enclosure system, including entrances, entrance hardware, windows, storefront framing and related products, provide building enclosure system products from a single source manufacturer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive curtain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances. 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. . 3.02 Installation A. General: Install curtain wall systems plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames with manufacturer’s prescribed tolerances and installation instructions. Provide support and anchor in place. 1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. 2. Glazing: Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with extruded aluminum pressure plates anchored to the mullion using stainless steel fasteners spaced no greater than 9" on center. 3. Water Drainage: Each light of glass shall be compartmentalized using joint plugs and silicone sealant to divert water to the horizontal weep locations. Weep holes shall be located in the horizontal pressure plates and covers to divert water to the exterior of the building. B. Related Products Installation Requirements: 1. Sealants (Perimeter): Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. 2. Glass: Refer to Glazing Section. a. Reference: ANSI Z97.1, CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing Manual 3.03 Field Quality Control A. Field Tests: Architect shall select curtain wall units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed per AAMA 503 by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, which ever is greater. b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 8 psf (383 Pa). B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative. 3.04 Protection and Cleaning A. Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect aluminum curtain wall system from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. Lakeview Health Services GLAZED ALUMINUM 084413-5 West End Heights CURTAIN WALLS B. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 085213-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Clad Exterior / Wood Interior Double-Hung Windows with Hardware. 1) All windows shall be Double-Hung with fixed upper sash with disabled tilt. 2) All windows shall have Window Opening Control Device (WOCD) that comply with ASTM F2090. B. Glazing. C. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Div. 1 - Submittal Procedures. B. Div. 6 - Rough Carpentry. E. Div. 6- Finish Carpentry. F. Div. 7- Joint Protection. G. Div. 8 - Glazing. H. Div. 9 - Painting and Coating. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 2. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 3. ASTM D3656 – Standard Specification for Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven From VinylCoated Glass Yarns. 4. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 5. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 6. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. 7. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. 8. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window and Door Manufacturers Association/Canadian Standards Association (AAMA/WDMA/CSA): 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11/NAFS – North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window and Door Manufacturers Association/Canadian Standards Association (AAMA/WDMA/CSA): 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08/NAFS – North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. D. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): 1. WDMA I.S.2 – Hallmark Certification Program. 2. WDMA 4-05 - Industry Standard for Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork. E. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 2603 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 2. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. F. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 1. NFRC 102 - Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems. 2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 085213-2 West End Heights 3. NFRC 500 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation Resistance Values. 4. ENERGY STAR® Compliant Models available. G. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). H. Safety glass tested in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. I. Screen Manufacturers Association (SMA): 1. SMA-1201-2013 – Specifications for Insect Screens for Windows, Sliding Doors and Swinging Doors. J. Forest Stewardship Council® (FSC®): 1. FSC-STD-40-003 V1-0 – Standard for Multi-site Certification of Chain of Custody Operations. 2. FSC-STD-40-004 V2-1 – Standard for Chain of Custody Certification. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and performance requirements: 1. Double-hung tilt windows shall be Hallmark certified in compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11 and ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/A440-08: LC-PG50-H (T11–55-1/2”x95-1/2” jamb size tested 2. Vertical mull, mulled and applied rating: LC50. 3. Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/ft2 (1.5 L/s•m2) when tested at 1.57 psf [75 Pa] according to ASTM E283. 4. No water penetration when tested at the following pressure according to ASTM E547: LC-PG50-H – 7.50 psf (360 Pa) 5. Double-hung tilt windows must withstand the following positive/negative structural test pressure without damage when tested according to ASTM E330: LC-PG50-H – +75.0/-75.0 psf (+3600/-3600 Pa) 6. Double-hung tilt windows must pass a forced entry resistance test of at least Grade 10 to meet requirements set forth in ASTM F588. 1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Shop drawings: submit shop drawings according to Division 1 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Product data: submit manufacturer's product catalog data and installation guides. C. Samples: submit samples including the following: 1. Corner cutaway: submit corner cutaway, including glazing system, quality of construction and specified exterior/interior finishes. 2. Exterior: submit color samples of exterior color finishes. 3. Hardware: submit samples indicating typical hardware finishes. D. Quality control reporting: submit manufacturer’s test results reported by independent laboratory indicating compliance with specified performance and design requirements, as listed in 1.4 Performance Requirements, according to Section 01 33 26 – Source Quality Control Reporting. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility: except for hardware mechanisms, weather strip and aluminum extrusions, the window manufacturer is responsible for fabrication of all components and materials including treatment of wood with acceptable wood preservatives, millwork of sash and frame members, assembly of most insulating glass and manufacture of all sash and frames. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Emergency escape and rescue: comply with requirements for sleeping units of 2018 IRC International Residential Code with New York State Amendments. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the product delivery requirements specified in Division 1 - Product Delivery Requirements. 1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements for storage and handling of products as specified in Division 1 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 085213-3 West End Heights B. Store units in a dry location, off the ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Workmanship and materials: 20-year limited warranty. B. Wood rot: 30-year warranty. C. Insulating glass: 20-year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Weather Shield Premium Series™ 8109 Double-Hung Windows as manufactured by Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. of Medford, Wisconsin. 2.2 ALUMINUM CLAD EXTERIOR / WOOD INTERIOR DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOW MATERIALS A. Frame: 1. Exterior frame members milled from pine, kiln dried to a moisture content of 6-12% at the time of fabrication and treated with a water-repellent preservative. The frame includes solid one-piece jambs and applied inside sash stops at head, side jambs and sill. Frame corners shall be square cut, rabbeted at head, dadoed at sill, chemically and mechanically fastened. 2. Frame is clad with .050” [1.3mm] extruded aluminum, with an integral extruded nailing fin. Top corners shall be mitered, include internal aluminum corner keys, and be chemically and mechanically fastened. Sill shall include a .050” [1.3mm] tan vinyl thermal break sill riser that interlocks into extruded aluminum sill cover. 3. Interior frame materials to be milled from pine, kiln dried to a moisture content of 6-12% at the time of fabrication and treated with a water-repellent preservative. 4. Frame thickness shall be 1-1/4” [32mm] head, 9/16” [15mm] side jambs and 1” [26mm] sill, with 7 degree sill bevel. 5. Frame shall have standard 5-3/16” [148mm] overall jamb depth with 4-9/16” [116mm] from backside of nailing fin to interior of window. 6. Frame Option: frame provided with jamb extensions of approximately 6” overall jamb depth (verify exact dimensions with wall sections). Jamb extensions match interior frame finish. B. Sash: 1. Sash shall be composed of two materials, an extruded aluminum exterior of .050” [1.3mm] thickness, butt joined at corners, chemically and mechanically bonded to the interior wood substrate. Interior sash corners shall be mortised, tenoned and mechanically fastened. 2. Interior sash materials to be milled from pine, kiln dried to a moisture content of 6-12% at the time of fabrication and treated with a water-repellent preservative. 3. Bottom rail shall be 3-1/2” [89mm] tall. Top sash top rail shall be 2-3/4” [70mm] tall; stiles for both sash shall be 1-1/2” [38mm] wide. 4. Sash thickness 1-19/32” [40mm]. 5. Both top and bottom sash shall interlock together using extruded aluminum interlocking cladding at the meeting rail. 6. Top and bottom sash must tilt in from the inside for cleaning purposes without removal of screens (standard). Top sash stationary with non-tilting bottom sash with extended side sash stops when Class 5 balances are required. C. Finish: 1. Exterior aluminum finish: fluoropolymer-modified acrylic topcoat over fluoropolymer primer meets AAMA 2605 requirements. Colors: Custom color to match Kawneer Permacoat™ Coatings, AAMA 2604 – Color: #ORSL 71870 ‘Atlantic Gray’ or other Custom Color to Match the Aluminum Composite Panels (Reynobond – Colorweld 500 - Charcoal). 2. Interior finish: Primed (white) and Prefinished (white) to match interior walls. D. Glazing: select quality complying with ASTM C1036. Insulating glass IGCC certified to performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E2190. Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 085213-4 West End Heights 1. Glazing method: Insulated glass consisting of two lites of clear tempered glass. 2. Glass type: 3/4” Clear: Zo-e-shield 5 Extreme with Argon filled cavity (see glazing schedule and glazing specifications). 3. Insulated glass airspace: Argon/inert gas 4. Insulated glass shall be sealed with a a. black (standard) warm-edge spacer system with integrated edge seal and foil laminate moisture vapor barrier. b. black stainless steel spacer system with polyisobutylene edge seal. 5. Glass shall be silicone glazed at sash exterior to allow reglazing from the interior with square glazing bead. Back side of glazing bead to be finished black. E. Hardware: 1. Sash counter-balance system to be comprised of an inverted, constant-force, stainless steel coil system (standard) that is contained in pivot, locking shoe. Balance system must meet AAMA 90207 Class 3 requirements. Jamb liner shall be white vinyl extruded by window manufacturer. 2. Class 5 spiral rod balances with extended side sash stops and non-tilt bottom sash for heavier sash applications. Jamb liner shall be white vinyl extruded by window manufacturer with exterior aluminum jamb liner cover. 3. Locking mechanism is concealed tilt-release latch hardware with nylon tilt pins. Upper sash has two tan zinc die-cast flush-mounted tilt latches factory applied. 4. Sash locks shall be zinc die cast, recessed mounted at bottom sash check rail and factory applied. Sash lock/keeper finishes: brushed nickel. 5. Options: Sash lifts: Window Opening Control Device (WOCD) that comply with ASTM F2090. F. Weather stripping: 1. Black flexible dual-hollow, foam strip with slip coat at head and interlocking rails, beige vinyl coated foam at sill. 2. Polypropylene vertical weather strip at bottom sash stiles. 3. Nylon coated foam-filled vertical weather strips on each vinyl jamb liner (white on white exterior / beige on all other colors). “C” fold bronze shadow-line weather strip with durable covering applied to lower portion of the jamb liner. G. Screens: 1. Full screen consisting of .019” [0.5mm] thick formed aluminum frame with baked-on acrylic coating with injection molded vinyl corner keys, 20x20 high-visibility vinyl-coated charcoal fiberglass mesh. 2. Frame finish: matches exterior frame/sash. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM A. Interior installation clips shipped loose (standard). B. Aluminum drip cap: shipped loose. Color to match exterior frame. C. Provide all trim as required to seal window jambs, sill and head. See Wall Sections for Window Installation Details and Additional Information. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install windows according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop drawings to ensure proper installation and operation. B. Install window unit plumb, level and square with no distortion of frame members. C. Fill perimeter frame to wall opening cavity per manufacture’s installation instructions. D. Apply approved sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 00 – Joint Protection. E Do not puncture aluminum cladding. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Lakeview Health Services ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 085213-5 West End Heights A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and at the weather stripping for smooth operation. B. Remove excess sealant materials and visible labels from glass. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation. C. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure windows are in acceptable condition at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Electronic access control system components, including: a. Electronic access control devices. 3. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified. B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section. 3. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring. 4. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 West End Heights B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. 3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating: a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including: 1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. 2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers. 3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample of requested door hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. 4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include: a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening. c. Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 West End Heights j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include operational descriptions for: egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm connections. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 5. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled. b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. 6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product data for electrified door hardware: a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. 3. Certificates of Compliance: a. UL listings for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein. c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein. 4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. D. Closeout Submittals: Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 West End Heights 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service) d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. e. Parts list for each product. f. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. g. Final keying schedule h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature i. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. j. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 4. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements: 1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical engineers. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. D. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 West End Heights E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein. G. Keying Conference 1. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. H. Pre-installation Conference 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. I. Coordination Conferences: 1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging. C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Protection and Damage: 1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 West End Heights 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. F. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 25 years. b. Automatic Operators: LCN, 2 years. c. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. d. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. e. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty. f. Key Blanks: Lifetime 2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools: Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-7 West End Heights PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. C. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation. 1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material. 2.03 HINGES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, Stanley FBB Series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-8 West End Heights 3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 4. 2 inches or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. 6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins 8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 2.04 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Aluminum Geared 1. Manufacturers: a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Select, Stanley. 2. Requirements: a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1. b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum. c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation. d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles. e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. h. Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole pattern. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9 West End Heights 2.05 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER A. Manufacturers: a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin EPT-10. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH PT1000, Securitron CEPT-10. B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items. 2.06 FLUSH BOLTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless-steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2.07 COORDINATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head. 2. Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers, surface vertical rod exit device strikes or other stop mounted hardware. Factory-prepared coordinators for vertical rod devices as specified. 2.08 MORTISE LOCKS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Falcon MA series. B. Requirements: Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-10 West End Heights 1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 2. Provide locks manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 3. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 4. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. 5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles. a. Lever Design: Falcon DANE. 2.09 LOCKSETS – INTERCONNECTED TYPE A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Schlage CS210 series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide interlocked locksets conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.12 Series 5000, Grade 2 with simultaneous retraction of deadbolt and latch for single motion egress. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 2. Provide locks with 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) or 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, based on door detail, with 1/2 inch (13 mm) latch throw latchbolt and 1 inch (25 mm) throw deadbolt. 3. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 4. Provide manufacturers standard T-strike, unless extended lip strike is necessary to protect trim, and deadbolt strike. 5. Lever Design: Schlage Saturn (SAT). 2.10 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1 A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Falcon T series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 4. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 5. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 6. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 7. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts and wrought roses on both sides. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-11 West End Heights a. Lever Design: Falcon DANE. 2.11 TUBULAR LOCKS – GRADE 2 A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Schlage F series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide tubular locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2, Grade 2 and ANSI/BHMA A156.39 Residential Grade AAA, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) adjustable to 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with 1/2 inch (13 mm) latch throw. Provide 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) is required by door or frame detail, or noted otherwise. 4. Provide locksets that fit standard 2-1/8 inches (54 mm) diameter bore without use of thru-bolts. 5. Door Thickness: Locksets adjustable to fit in 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) or 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) door thickness. 6. Provide standard T-strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 7. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts and wrought roses on both sides. a. Lever Design: Schlage Elan (ELA) 2.12 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Falcon 24/25 series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads. 5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements. 6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices. 7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes. 8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 10. Provide cylinder or hex-key dogging as specified at non fire-rated openings. 11. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets. 12. Provide electrified options as scheduled. 13. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-12 West End Heights 2.13 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 6000 Series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Folger Adam 300 Series, HES 1006 Series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide electric strikes designed for use with type of locks shown at each opening. 2. Provide electric strikes UL Listed as burglary-resistant. 3. Where required, provide electric strikes UL Listed for fire doors and frames. 4. Provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as required. Verify voltage with electrical contractor. 2.14 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Schlage Everest 29 R. B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylinders/cores, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 2. Provide cylinders in the below-listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated. a. Conventional Patented Restricted Small Format: cylinder with small format interchangeable cores (SFIC) with restricted, patented keyway. 3. Patent Protection: Cylinders/cores requiring use of restricted, patented keys, patent-protected. 4. Nickel silver bottom pins. C. Construction Keying: 1. Replaceable Construction Cores. a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys. b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores. 2.15 KEYING A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. C. Requirements: Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-13 West End Heights 1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner. 2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Provide keys with the following features: a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) b. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by one or more utility patent(s). 4. Identification: a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection. d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner. 5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities. a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Permanent Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6. 2.16 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4050 series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast aluminum cylinder. 3. Closer Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 11/16 inch (17 mm) diameter heat-treated pinion journal and full complement bearings. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and all weather requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check. 7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-14 West End Heights 8. Provide stick on templates, special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.17 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: LCN 1450 series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast aluminum cylinder. 3. Closer Body: 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) diameter with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter pinion journal diameter heat-treated pinion journal and full complement bearings. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 7. Provide stick on and special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.18 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AUTOMATIC OPERATORS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: LCN Senior Swing. B. Requirements: 1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.19. a. Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears. b. Closing: Spring force. c. Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted. d. Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be manually operated with power on or off without damage to operator. Provide variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment. e. Cover: Aluminum. 2. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors. 3. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details. 4. Provide hard-wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches for operation as specified. Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-15 West End Heights 5. Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator as required for function as described in operation description of hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 6. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Sequence operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by Architect. Locate actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by Architect. 7. Provide units with inputs for smoke evacuation doors, where specified, which allow doors to power open upon fire alarm activation and hold open indefinitely or until fire alarm is reset, presence detector input, which prevents closed door from opening or door that is fully opened from closing, hold open toggle input, which allows remote activation for indefinite hold open and close second time input is activated, vestibule inputs, which allow sequencing operation of two units, and SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices. 2.19 DOOR TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model. 5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. 8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 2.20 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 2. Sizes of plates: Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-16 West End Heights a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs 2.21 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. 2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. 3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. 2.22 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Reese. B. Requirements: 1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 3. Size of thresholds: a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width 4. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 2.23 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-17 West End Heights 1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified. 2.24 DOOR VIEWERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Provide appropriate door viewer for door type and rating with minimum of 180-degree view area. 2.25 POCKET DOOR HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Hager. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Hardware, Stanley, KN Crowder. B. Requirements: 1. Provide complete sets of pocket door hardware as recommended by manufacturer for door type and weight. a. Include track, hangers, fasteners, guides, stops, and other hardware as required for complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-18 West End Heights 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. I. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. J. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. L. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. M. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. N. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage qualified manufacturer trained representative to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Representative will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-19 West End Heights 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.06 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. B. Hardware Sets: Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-20 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01 For use on Door #(s): 001.01 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-25-R-NL-OP 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 626 SCH 2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" STD 630-316 IVE 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) ANCLR LCN 1 EA WEATHER RING 8310-801 PLA LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-853 630 LCN 1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-867F 689 LCN 1 EA BOLLARD POST 8310-866 AL LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB MOUNT 8310-818 630 LCN 1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-819F PLA FAL 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 656A-223 A ZER 1 EA KEY SWITCH 653-04 NS L2 12/24 VDC 630 SCE NOTE: EXIT DEVICE TO NORMALLY BE DOGGED DOWN, ALLOWING FREE INGRESS/EGRESS. AUTO OPERATOR ACTIVATED BY PRESSING ACTUATOR ON EITHER SIDE OF OPENING. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01A For use on Door #(s): 100D.02 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 250DT 626 FAL 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" STD 630-316 IVE 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) ANCLR LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB MOUNT 8310-818 630 LCN 2 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-819F PLA FAL 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER NOTE: AUTO OPERATOR ACTIVATED BY PRESSING ACTUATOR ON EITHER SIDE OF OPENING. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-21 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02 For use on Door #(s): 001.02 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT US28 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE LMRX-EL-25-R-NL-OP 24 VDC 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 626 SCH 2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 626 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" STD 630-316 IVE 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) ANCLR LCN 1 EA BOLLARD POST 8310-866 AL LCN 1 EA WEATHER RING 8310-801 PLA LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-853 630 LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB MOUNT 8310-818 630 LCN 1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-867F 689 LCN 1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-819F PLA FAL 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 900-2RS VON NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. ONCE DOOR IS UNLOCKED, AUTO OPERATOR ACTIVATED FROM SECURED SIDE BY PRESSING ACTUATOR. PRESSING ACTUATOR ON EGRESS SIDE ALWAYS SENDS SIGNAL TO EXIT DEVICE TO RETRACT LATCH BOLTS AND THEN ACTIVATES AUTO OPERATOR. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-22 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02A For use on Door #(s): 100D.01 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT US28 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE LMRX-EL-25-R-NL-OP 24 VDC 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 626 SCH 2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" STD 630-316 IVE 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) ANCLR LCN 1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-867F 689 LCN 1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-819F PLA FAL 1 EA BOLLARD POST 8310-866 AL LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-853 630 LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB MOUNT 8310-818 630 LCN 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 656A-223 A ZER 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 900-2RS VON NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. ONCE DOOR IS UNLOCKED, AUTO OPERATOR ACTIVATED FROM SECURED SIDE BY PRESSING ACTUATOR. PRESSING ACTUATOR ON EGRESS SIDE ALWAYS SENDS SIGNAL TO EXIT DEVICE TO RETRACT LATCH BOLTS AND THEN ACTIVATES AUTO OPERATOR. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-23 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02B For use on Door #(s): 100C.01 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT US28 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-EL-25-R-NL-OP 24 VDC 626 FAL 2 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-159 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 626 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" STD 630-316 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 656A-223 A ZER 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 900-2RS VON NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03 For use on Door #(s): 002.01 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE DSLC 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 612 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-24 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03A For use on Door #(s): 018.01 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE DSLC 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 612 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 RW/PA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03B For use on Door #(s): 018.02 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE DSLC 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 612 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 RW/PA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-25 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04 For use on Door #(s): 002A.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE DSLC 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 612 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 CUSH STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04A For use on Door #(s): 006.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE DSLC 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 612 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 EDA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-26 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04B For use on Door #(s): 003.01 014.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE DSLC 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 612 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05 For use on Door #(s): 002B.01 007.02 013.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05A For use on Door #(s): 010.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 EDA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-27 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06 For use on Door #(s): 002C.01 002D.01 002E.01 006A.01 009.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRY / OFFICE LOCK T511BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07 For use on Door #(s): 004.01 004.02 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET T101S DANE 626 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07A For use on Door #(s): 017.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET T101S DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 CUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07B For use on Door #(s): 012.01 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-R-L-BE-DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 CUSH 689 LCN 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07C For use on Door #(s): 012.02 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD US28 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-R-L-BE-DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA GASKETING BY ALUM DR MFG B/O 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-28 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07D For use on Door #(s): 011.01 215.01 315.01 415.01 515.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET T101S DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 CUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08 For use on Door #(s): 005.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA RESTROOM LOCK MA451BDC OCCUPIED/VACANT DGM 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6216 FSE DSLC CON 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA CREDENTIAL READER SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD BLK SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE LGR SCE NOTE: OPERATION OF OPENING- DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. DOOR UNLOCKED BY PRESENTING VALID CREDENTIALS AT READER. THROWING DEADBOLT ENGAGES OCCUPIED INDICATOR, LOCKING OUT ALL OTHER KEYS AND CREDENTIALS EXCEPT EMERGENCY KEY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. UPON LOSS OF POWER, DOOR REMAINS LOCKED (FAIL SECURE). HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09 - Not Used Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-29 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10 For use on Door #(s): 008.01 Each To Have: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 CUSH STD 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 2 EA MEETING STILE 328AA-S AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11 For use on Door #(s): 015.01 016.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK MA311 OCCUPIED/VACANT DGM 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12 For use on Door #(s): 216.01 217.01 316.01 317.01 416.01 417.01 516.01 517.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 CUSH STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-30 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12A For use on Door #(s): 007.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BDC DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13 For use on Door #(s): A01.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-L-BE-DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 CUSH STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13A For use on Door #(s): A02.01 A03.01 A04.01 A05.01 A06.01 B01.01 B02.01 B03.01 B04.01 B05.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-L-BE-DANE 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 14 For use on Door #(s): B01.02 Each To Have: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD US28 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-25-R-EO 630 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 429AA-S AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 656A-223 A ZER Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-31 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. U01 For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.01 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210-B500BDCD SAT PLY 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 1 EA VIEWER U698 B26D IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. U01A For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.01A Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210-B500BDCD SAT PLY 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80-037 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA STD 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 2 EA VIEWER U698 B26D IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. U02 For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.02 TYPICAL.03 TYPICAL.07 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET F10 ELA 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE NOTE: SUBSTITUTE WALL STOP FOR HINGE PIN STOP WHERE NECESSARY DUE TO WALL CONDITIONS. Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-32 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. U03 For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.04 TYPICAL.06 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK F40 ELA 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE NOTE: SUBSTITUTE WALL STOP FOR HINGE PIN STOP WHERE NECESSARY DUE TO WALL CONDITIONS. HARDWARE GROUP NO. U04 For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.08 Each To Have: 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA SGL CYL DEADBOLT B60N 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE NOTE: SUBSTITUTE WALL STOP FOR HINGE PIN STOP WHERE NECESSARY DUE TO WALL CONDITIONS. HARDWARE GROUP NO. U05 For use on Door #(s): 101.03 205.03 213.07 214.07 305.03 313.07 314.07 405.03 413.07 414.07 505.03 513.07 514.07 Each To Have: 6 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 2 EA BALL CATCH 347 626 IVE 2 EA SINGLE DUMMY TRIM F170 ELA 626 SCH 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-33 West End Heights HARDWARE GROUP NO. U06 For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.05 Each To Have: 1 EA POCKET DOOR KIT 9628 BY HAGER HAG 1 EA DOOR EDGE PULL 230 626 IVE 2 EA FLUSH PULL 227 626 IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. U06A For use on Door #(s): TYPICAL.05A Each To Have: 1 EA POCKET DOOR KIT 9628 BY HAGER HAG 1 EA ADA POCKET DR PULL 1069 626 TRI Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-34 West End Heights Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-35 West End Heights DOOR INDEX Area Door Numbers HwSet# COMMON 001.01 01 001.02 02 002.01 03 002A.01 04 002B.01 05 002C.01 06 002D.01 06 002E.01 06 003.01 04B 004.01 07 004.02 07 005.01 08 006.01 04A 006A.01 06 007.01 12A 007.02 05 008.01 10 009.01 06 010.01 05A 011.01 07D 012.01 07B 012.02 07C 013.01 05 014.01 04B 015.01 11 016.01 11 017.01 07A 018.01 03A 018.02 03B 100C.01 02B 100D.01 02A 100D.02 01A 215.01 07D 216.01 12 217.01 12 315.01 07D 316.01 12 317.01 12 415.01 07D 416.01 12 417.01 12 515.01 07D 516.01 12 517.01 12 A01.01 13 A02.01 13A A03.01 13A A04.01 13A Lakeview Health Services DOOR HARDWARE 087100-36 West End Heights A05.01 13A A06.01 13A B01.01 13A B01.02 14 B02.01 13A B03.01 13A B04.01 13A B05.01 13A UNIT 101.03 U05 205.03 U05 213.07 U05 214.07 U05 305.03 U05 313.07 U05 314.07 U05 405.03 U05 413.07 U05 414.07 U05 505.03 U05 513.07 U05 514.07 U05 TYPICAL.01 U01 TYPICAL.01A U01A TYPICAL.02 U02 TYPICAL.03 U02 TYPICAL.04 U03 TYPICAL.05 U06 TYPICAL.05A U06A TYPICAL.06 U03 TYPICAL.07 U02 TYPICAL.08 U04 END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services THERMALLY-BROKEN THRESHOLDS 087200-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial Thresholds. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section(s): Steel Doors, Aluminum Frame Storefront Doors. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Provide threshold and seal products which have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to meet the following design criteria: 1. Performance obtained from test procedures UL 10B, UL 10C, ICC/ANSI A117.1. 2. Compliant with UL 410. 3. Compliant with ADA standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating required component locations, interface with adjacent materials, installation, anchorage, fastening and similar information. D. Samples: Submit one each of manufacturer’s standard selection samples. E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit Fire, Sound, & Durability test reports from recognized testing laboratory. 2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty documents specified herein. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 THRESHOLDS A. Acceptable manufactures for thresholds & weather-stripping are listed below. 1. Manufacturer: Pemko Manufacturing Company OR approved equal. Contact: PO Box 3780, 4226 Transport Street, Ventura, CA 93003 Telephone: (800) 283-9988, (805) 642-2600 Fax: (805) 642-4109 E-mail: pemkosales@pemko.com website: www.pemko.com Lakeview Health Services THERMALLY-BROKEN THRESHOLDS 087200-2 West End Heights 2.02 THERMAL BARRIER SADDLES – TH1 (See Material Legend) a. Material: Stainless Steel. b. Finish (ANSI/BHMA 156.18): #4, Brushed c. Thermal Break: Black rigid vinyl key with frost guard d. Manufacturer Model Number: Stainless Steel Thermal Barrier Threshold, similar to 252x3SSFG (verify width of wall in the field prior to ordering). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the threshold manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of thresholds. a. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for door and frame manufacturer’s installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction and other conditions affecting performance. 2. Do not proceed with installation of thresholds until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Location: Comply with drawings and approved shop drawings. B. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Perform adjustments required to ensure that thresholds function in compliance with manufacturer’s performance criteria prior to acceptance by Owner. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove any protective films and clean components as necessary following manufacturer’s recommended procedures. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services GLAZING 088000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass for other sections referencing this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Division 7: Joint Sealants. 3. Division 8: Aluminum Framed Storefronts, Aluminum Framed Entrances, Aluminum Curtainwall, Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows, Steel Doors and Frames, Flush Wood Doors 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 800 - Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. 2. C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3. C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 4. C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 6. C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT, Coated and Uncoated Glass. 7. C1115 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories. 8. C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 9. C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants. 10. C1281 - Standard Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. 11. C1294 - Standard Test Method for Compatibility of Insulating Glass Edge Sealants with Liquid-Applied Glazing Materials. 12. C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. 13. E119 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 14. E152 - Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Door Assemblies. 15. E163 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 16. E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 17. E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. 18. E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. 19. F1233 - Standard Specification for Security Glazing Materials and Systems. E. Glass Association of North America (GANA): 1. Engineering Standards Manual. 2. Glazing Manual. 3. Laminated Glass Design Guide. F. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA): 1. IGMA TB-3001 - Sloped Glazing Guidelines. 2. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. G. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 1. 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties. 2. 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence. 3. 300 - Procedures for Determining Solar Optical Properties of Simple Fenestration Products. H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 752 - Standard for Safety Bullet-Resisting Equipment. Lakeview Health Services GLAZING 088000-2 West End Heights 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass meeting specified performance properties, based on manufacturer's published test data for units of thickness indicated: 1. U-factor: Per NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/square foot x hour x degree F. 2. Solar heat gain coefficient: Per NFRC 200. 3. Solar optical properties: Per NFRC 300. 4. Refer to Drawings and Schedule below for Thermal Requirements. B. Acoustical Performance Properties: Provide glass meeting specified performance properties, based on manufacturer's published test data for units of thickness indicated: 1. Refer to Drawings and Schedule below for Acoustical Requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Descriptive data and performance attributes for insulated glass. 2. Samples: a. 12 x 12 inch glass samples for each type of glass. b. 1/4 x 1/4 x 3 inch long sealant and glazing compound samples showing available colors. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test Report: Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report from glazing sealant manufacturer, based on submitted samples or acceptable data from previous testing of current formulations with similar products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section. B. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F. B. Perform glazing on dry surfaces. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Insulating Glass Units: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty against material obstruction of vision through unit due to: 1. Intrusion of dust or moisture. 2. Internal condensation. 3. Film formation on internal glass surfaces caused by failure of hermetic seal except failure caused in whole or in part by breakage or fracturing of any portion of glass surface. B. Glass Coatings: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty against peeling, cracking, or deterioration of coating under normal conditions. C. Laminated Glass Units: Provide manufacturer’s 5 year warranty against manufacturing defects resulting in edge separation, delamination, or material obstruction of vision through glass surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Glass: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. (www.guardian.com) 2. ACH Glass Operations. (www.versaluxglass.com) 3. Pilkington Architectural. (www.pilkington.com) 4. PPG Industries, Inc. (www.ppgglazing.com) 5. Viracon, Inc. (www.viracon.com 6. TGP Glass Products (www.fireglass.com) Lakeview Health Services GLAZING 088000-3 West End Heights B. Equivalent Product Prior Approval Option: As an option for Bidders, consideration of substitutions of equivalent products can be administered through the pre-bid approval process as follows: 1. Substitutions will be considered prior to the receipt of Bids with a written request for approval received by the Architect at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. 2. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to the receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. 2.2 MATERIALS - GLASS A. SEE SCHEDULE BELOW. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone; 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. B. Spacers: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone; 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness. C. Glazing Gaskets: 1. Dense compression gaskets: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, molded or extruded shape to fit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 2. Soft compression gaskets: ASTM C509, Type II, black, molded or extruded, neoprene, EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; black color. D. Contact Sealant: 1. Type: Single component, medium modulus, neutral moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C1184 and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G and A. 2. Movement capability: 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Compatible with glass unit edge seals; tested to ASTM C1294. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. E. Weatherseal Sealant: 1. Type: Single component, low modulus, neutral moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G and A. 2. Movement capability: 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Compatible with glass unit edge seals; tested to ASTM C1294. 4. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. F. Butt Joint Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; single component silicone, low modulus type, non sag, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range. G. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; single component silicone, low modulus, non sag, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range. H. Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O, size and density to control glazing sealant depth and produce optimum glazing sealant performance. I. Primer: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer. J. Laminating Film: Polyvinyl butyral sheet, minimum 15mils thick, color to be clear. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Sealed Insulating Glass: 1. Comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Fabricate spacer bar frame of tubular aluminum filled with desiccant. 3. Bond spacer bar frame to glass panes with twin primary seals. 4. Fill space outside frame to glass edge with elastomeric sealant. Lakeview Health Services GLAZING 088000-4 West End Heights B. Laminated Glass: 1. Comply with ASTM C1172 and ANSI Z97.1. 2. Laminate glass with laminating film by manufacturer's standard heat and pressure process. 3. Cut glass to required size at factory. 4. Discard glass with voids, delamination, or entrapped dirt or foreign matter. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility testing: a. Perform adhesion test including ultraviolet exposure through glass on production samples of metals and glass in accordance with ASTM C794. b. Test glass units, glazing materials, and glass framing members with specified finish for sealant compatibility, priming, and preparation requirements for optimum adhesion and performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing rabbets; remove loose and foreign matter. B. Remove protective coatings on metal surfaces. C. Clean glass just prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended edge and face clearances between glass and frame members. 3.3 INSTALLATION - STRUCTURAL SILICONE GLAZING METHOD A. Mask aluminum and glass surfaces adjacent to sealant pockets. B. Install temporary glass retainers to align faces of glass. C. Apply contact sealant; completely fill pockets. Tool joints and remove masking tape before sealant skim cure begins. D. Allow sealant to cure minimum time required by manufacturer. E. Remove temporary glass retainers. F. Insert joint backing to fill void between glass unit edges and glass spacer. G. Mask both sides of glass for full length of joint. H. Apply weatherseal sealant; tool to smooth, slightly concave profile. 3.4 INSTALLATION - SILICONE GLAZING METHOD A. Mask both sides of joint for full length. B. Install temporary glass retainers to align faces of glass. C. Provide temporary joint backing for one side of joint. D. Apply sealant to completely fill spaces; tool to smooth, slightly concave surface. E. Allow sealant to cure minimum time required by manufacturer. Remove temporary backing and fill voids with additional sealant. 3.5 INSTALLATION - GASKET GLAZING METHOD A. Fabricate gaskets to fit openings; allow for stretching of gaskets during installation. B. Set soft compression gasket against fixed stop or frame with bonded miter cut joints at corners. C. Set glass centered in openings on setting blocks. D. Install removable stops and insert dense compression gaskets at corners, working toward centers of glass, compressing glass against soft compression gaskets to produce weathertight seal. E. Seal joints in gaskets. F. Allow gaskets to protrude past face of glazing stops. Lakeview Health Services GLAZING 088000-5 West End Heights 3.6 INSTALLATION - PRESSURE GLAZING METHOD A. Set glass unit in opening as recommended by system manufacturer. B. Tighten fasteners simultaneously at rate recommended by manufacturer to avoid unequal point pressures on glass. C. Torque fasteners to achieve required pressure against glass. Do not over tighten. 3.7 INSTALLATION - SEALANT GLAZING METHOD A. Apply sealant to full depth of permanent stops. B. Press glass into sealant with slight lateral movement to ensure adhesion. C. Apply sealant to full depth of removable stops. Secure stops in position, forcing contact with sealant bead and completely filling joint. 3.8 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark glass with an 'X' using removable plastic tape. 3.9 SCHEDULE A. GLASS TYPE 1: Laminated Glass - Clear. 1. Overall Thickness: 1/4”. 2. Lite: ¼” (clear) laminated glass. 3. U-factor: n/a 4. SHGC: n/a 5. STC: minimum 33. 6. Locations: All Interior Aluminum Storefront and Entrances, unless noted otherwise, refer to Aluminum Storefront Schedule. B. GLASS TYPE 2: 3/4” Insulated Glass – Clear: 1. WeatherShield Windows: Zo-e-shield 5 Extreme w/ Argon 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 3/4”. 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. U-factor: maximum 0.27 5. SHGC: 0.20 6. Transmittance: minimum 45%. 7. STC: minimum 28. OITC: minimum 24 8. Locations: All Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows, unless noted otherwise, refer to Window Schedule. C. GLASS TYPE 3: 1” Insulated Glass Panels - Clear: 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1”. 2. ½” Interspace Content: Argon. 3. Outer Lite: Guardian SunGuard “UltraClear” 68 on UltraClear 68” (or Architect approved equal): ¼” total thickness (clear) laminated glass. (with Low-E coating on #4 surface). 4. Inner Lite: Guardian “UltraClear 68 on UltraClear 68”: ¼” total thickness (clear) laminated glass. 5. U-factor: 0.23 (0.27 maximum) 6. SHGC: 0.38 7. Transmittance: minimum 68%. 8. Reflect Out: 11%. 9. Reflect In: 12%. 10. LSG: 1.79. 11. STC: minimum 42. OITC: minimum 33. 12. Locations: All Exterior Aluminum Storefront / Curtain Wall and Entrances, unless noted otherwise, refer to Aluminum Storefront and Curtain Wall Schedules. D. GLASS TYPE F: Fire-Rated, Safety-Rated - Clear. 1. FireLite Plus as manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Company, Ltd (or Pilkington Pyrostop). And distributed by Technical Glass Products, www.fireglass.com, or Manufacturer and Architect Approved Equal. 2. Overall Thickness: 7/8”. Lakeview Health Services GLAZING 088000-6 West End Heights 3 Lite: 7/8” (clear) glass. 4. Fire Rating: 60 minutes. Fire Rating: Fire rating classified and labeled by UL for fire rating scheduled at opening locations on drawings, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2010-01, NPFA 252 and NFPA 257, UL 9, UL 10B and UL 10C. 5. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I and II). 6. U-factor: n/a 7. SHGC: n/a 8. STC: minimum 38. 9. Surface Finish: a. Standard Grade is polished for a surface quality that is comparable to alternative fire-rated ceramics marketed as having a premium finish. 10. Positive Pressure Test: UL 10C; passes. 11. Labeling: Permanently label each piece of FireLite Plus® with the FireLite Plus® logo, UL logo and fire rating in sizes up to 3,325 sq. in., and with the FireLite Plus® label only for sizes that exceed the listing (as approved by the local authority having jurisdiction). 12. Accessory Materials and Installation: Provide all accessory and materials and installation per Manufacturer. 13. Locations: All Fire-Rated Storefront where indicated on the Storefront Schedules. E. PANEL TYPE P: Aluminum Insulated “Sandwich” Panel. 1. Overall Thickness: +/-4” (inside 4 ½” storefront framing). 2. Finish to match storefront framing. 3. Locations: Aluminum Storefront / Curtain Wall, refer to Storefront and Curtain Wall Schedules. F. PANEL TYPE FP: Fire-Rated Aluminum Insulated “Sandwich” Panel. 1. Overall Thickness: +/-4” (inside 4 ½” storefront framing). 2. Finish to match fire-rated storefront framing. 3. Aluminum Trim Cladding on Steel Frame with Fire-Rated Insulation in Core. 4. Locations: Fire-Rated Aluminum Storefront, refer to Fire-Rated Storefront Schedule. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services GYPSUM BOARD 092116-1 West End Heights SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION A. The following item and such similar items as are indicated on the drawings or can be reasonably inferred therefrom, constitute the work of this section and shall include all labor, materials, etc., necessary to produce the finished results indicated. 1. Gypsum board walls. 2. Gypsum board ceilings. 3. Gypsum board soffits. 4. Moisture-and-mold-resistant gypsum board as described in section 2.2. 5. Exterior gypsum sheathing for use at all exterior first floor walls on cold-formed metal framing (refer to wall sections on drawings for additional information). 1.2 GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD A. ASTM C 840, “Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. National Gypsum Company 2. United States Gypsum Company 3. Georgia-Pacific Company 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Exposed Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36 1. Provide 5/8” thick, National Gypsum “Gold Bond Fire-Shield” Type-X gypsum board on all walls, ceilings and soffits, unless otherwise noted. 2. Provide 5/8” thick, National Gypsum “Gold Bond eXP Interior Extreme” Type-X moisture and mold resistant gypsum board at all wet areas including, but not limited to: • Private and public toilet rooms (all walls and ceilings) • kitchens (all walls with cabinetry and appliances, and all ceilings) • community kitchen, break rooms and staff rooms (all walls with cabinetry and appliances, and all ceilings) • custodial rooms and mechanical rooms (all walls and ceilings) 3. Provide 5/8” thick exterior gypsum sheathing with integral water-resistance barrier (WRB) and air-barrier (AB), Georgia Pacific “DensElement Sheathing” and Georgia Pacific fluid applied flashing for complete Georgia Pacific “DensElement Barrier System” at all exterior walls with cold-formed metal framing on the first floor. • Install per manufacturer’s instructions. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer’s standard metal trim accessories, of the beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim beads, U-type trim beads, special L-kerf-type edge trim-beads, and one piece control beads. 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD FASTENERS A. Drywall screws of the type recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer 2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. As recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. Provide continuously at top and bottom of all wall assemblies 2.6 JOINT TAPE Lakeview Health Services GYPSUM BOARD 092116-2 West End Heights SHEATHING A. ASTM C 475, paper reinforcing tape. 2.7 JOINT COMPOUND A. ASTM C 475, of the type indicated. 1. Provide ready-mixed vinyl-type for interior work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION AND FINISHING A. Install gypsum boards in lengths and directions which minimize the number of end joints, and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings. Install walls and partitions with exposed gypsum boards vertical, with joints offset on opposite sides of partitions. Otherwise, install boards with edges perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered over supports, except where recommended in a different arrangement by manufacturer. B. Acoustical sealant: At partitions including sound attenuation insulation, apply continuous acoustical sealant along the top and bottom edges of the partition and at all penetrations. C. Isolate gypsum board work from abutting structural and masonry work; provide edge trim and acoustical sealant as recommended by manufacturer. D. Screw gypsum board to wood supports. E. Gypsum board finishing: Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint compound at joints (both directions) between gypsum boards. Apply compound at accessory flanges, penetrations, fastener heads and surface defects. 1. Install compound in 3 coats (plus prefill of cracks where recommended by manufacturer); sand after last two coats. 2. Treat joints, fastener heads, cut edges, and penetrations in water-resistant backing board using water-resistant joint compound manufacturer’s directions. 3. Treat joints, fastener heads, and cut edges to comply with board manufacturer’s directions. 4. Provide wall patches and fill in openings to match existing wall surfaces, so that new wall areas are not visible within existing wall areas. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FLOOR TRANSITIONS 093000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile and dimension stone B. Edge-protection and transition profiles for floors C. Setting materials: adhesives, mortars, grouts, and sealants 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 00 00 – Concrete B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: plywood subfloor and underlayment C. Section 09 28 13 - Gypsum Board: gypsum board and tile backer boards 1.03 REFERENCES A. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation B. American National Standard Specifications for the installation of ceramic tile A108 / A118 / A136.1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Schluter Systems, L.P. Address: 194 Pleasant Ridge Road, Plattsburgh, NY 12901-5841. Phone: 1(800) 472-4588. E-mail: info@schluter.com Website: www.schluter.com. 2.02 FLOOR TRANSISTION STRIP – TS1 (see Material Legend) A. Schluter®-RENO-U (AEU-80) B. Description: profile with sloped exposed surface, 5/32 inch (4 mm) tall leading edge, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. C. Material and Finish: AE - Satin Anodized Aluminum D. Height: #80 (5/16”), contractor shall verify height in field 2.03 FLOOR TRANSISTION STRIP – TS2 (see Material Legend) A. Schluter®-SCHIENE (AE-80) B. Description: profile with sloped exposed surface, 5/32 inch (4 mm) tall leading edge, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. C. Material and Finish: AE - Satin Anodized Aluminum D. Height: #80 (5/16”), contractor shall verify height in field 2.04 SETTING MATERIALS A. Setting materials shall be that of the associated flooring scheduled for installation; refer to the ‘Material Legend’, ‘Floor Finish Schedules’, & all associated flooring specifications for additional information. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Consult Schluter®-Systems’ current technical literature for proper design and installation instructions. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services CERAMIC & PORCELAIN TILE 093013- 1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. Division 9 Flooring Thresholds and Transitions 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic/Porcelain floor and wall tile 2. Crack isolation membrane for thin-set tile installations on existing concrete floor slabs. 3. Expansion joints, control, contraction, and isolation joints 4. Setting materials 5. Grouting 6. Elastomeric sealants PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Stonepeak Ceramics, Inc. 1. Mailing Address: 314 West Superior St., Chicago, IL 60654. 2. Phone: 1.312.506.2800 3. Website: stonepeakceramics.com B. American Olean 1. Distributor: Best Tile Distributors of Rochester 2. Mailing Address: 380 Empire Blvd., Rochester, NY, 14609 3. Phone: 1.585.482.1420 4. Website: americanolean.com C. Laticrete International, Inc. 1. Mailing Address: 1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 2. Phone: 1.800.243.4788, ext.235 3. Website: laticrete.com 2.2 PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE – FLT1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Stonepeak Ceramics: Materia 3D B. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacture’s full range of color finishes. Note: Multiple Tile Colors may be selected by the Architect within this Series for this project. C. Format: 6” x 24” x 5/16” Porcelain Tile, Honed D. Pattern: 1/3 running bond 2.3 CERAMIC TILE COVE BASE – (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: American Olean: Urban Canvas B. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacturer’s full range of color finishes. Note: Multiple Tile Colors may be selected by the Architect within this Series for this project. C. Format: 4-1/4” x 12-3/4” x 5/16” Ceramic Cove Base, Glazed D. Pattern: 1/2 offset 2.4 CERAMIC WALL TILE & TRIM – WT1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Series: American Olean: Urban Canvas B. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacturer’s full range of color finishes. Note: Multiple Tile Colors may be selected by the Architect within this Series for this project. C. Format: 4-1/4” x 12-3/4” x 5/16” Ceramic Tile, Glazed D. Pattern: 1/2 offset E. Trim: Lakeview Health Services CERAMIC & PORCELAIN TILE 093013- 2 West End Heights 1. Cove Base: 4-1/4” x 12-3/4” x 5/16” 2. Bullnose Top Edge: 4-1/4” x 12-3/4” x 5/16” 3. Bullnose Inside Corner: 4-1/4” x 12-3/4” x 5/16” 4. Bullnose Outside Corner: 4-1/4” x 12-3/4” x 5/16” 2.5 THRESHOLDS & TRANSITIONS A. See Specification Division 9 Flooring Thresholds and Transitions 2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS A. Model: Laticrete: Hydro Ban B. Format: Load bearing, waterproofing/crack isolation membrane C. Certifications: 1. ASTM C627 Robinson Floor Testing 2. IAPMO Certification 3. ICC Approval 4. ANSI A118.10 Waterproofing Qualification 5. Greenguard Certification 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS A. Model: Laticrete: 254 Platinum B. Format: Polymer fortified, thin-set mortar C. Certifications: 1. Greenguard Certification 2.8 GROUTING A. Model: Laticrete: 1500 Sanded Grout B. Format: Coordinate installation with tile manufacturer’s requirements C. Certifications: 1. Greenguard Certification 2.9 SEALANTS A. Model: Laticrete: Latasil B. Format: 100% Silicone, mold/mildew-resistant PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies if each color sample. 3.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Section 017000 Closeout Procedures for Extra Materials to be furnished by Contractor. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Lakeview Health Services CERAMIC & PORCELAIN TILE 093013- 3 West End Heights B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product when possible 4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 4.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. 4.5 PREPARATION A. Substrate Preparation: Prepare and clean substrate in accordance with installation standards and manufacturer's instructions, and as follows: 1. Remove protrusions, bumps and ridges by grinding or chipping. 2. Repair, fill, and level cracks, holes, depressions and rough or chipped areas in substrate using patching material recommended by setting materials manufacturer. 3. Slab to have light broom finish when tile is installed by thin-set method. 4. Ensure that the substrate is within the following tolerances: a. Horizontal surfaces (floors) - Maximum variation in substrate shall not exceed 1/4" in ten feet* from required plane, depending on substrate. b. Vertical surfaces (walls) - Maximum variation in substrate shall not exceed 1/4" in ten feet* from the required plane, depending on substrate. * When using tile larger than 12”x12” and a grout joint narrower than 1/4” is desired a more stringent tolerance (e.g.,1/8 ” in 10’), should be considered. B. Jobsite Blending: Blend tiles before installing in accordance with reference standards to produce an even range and distribution of color and finish. 4.6 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Floor Tile Installation per the Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Installation Details as follows: 1. TCNA Detail F113-16 a. For tile installation over slab-on-grade substrate b. Install tile with full coverage waterproofing/crack isolation membrane. Flash waterproofing up wall minimum six (6) inches. Lakeview Health Services CERAMIC & PORCELAIN TILE 093013- 4 West End Heights 2. TCNA Detail F180-16 a. For tile installation over poured gypsum underlayment b. Install tile with full coverage waterproofing/crack isolation membrane. Flash waterproofing up wall minimum six (6) inches. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors per the following: 1. Porcelain Floor Tile: 1/8” Joint Width C. Lay out tiles from marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than onethird of a tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tile per pattern indicated on Material Legend. 2. Lay tiles square with room axis as indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 4.7 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. TCNA Detail W247-16 1. For tile installation over fiber-reinforced gypsum board 2. Install tile with full coverage waterproofing. Extend waterproofing from floor up to top edge of wall tile (top course). B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint 1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8” 2. Quarry Tile: 3/8” C. Lay out tiles from marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than onehalf of a tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tile per pattern indicated on Material Legend. 2. Provide all trim including cove base & bullnose shapes, typical. 4.8 GENERAL TILE INSTALLATION A. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. B. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 4.9 FILL, LEVEL AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install fill and leveling compound, and crack isolation membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a level floor and isolation membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile over isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 4.10 GROUTING A. Install grout in accordance with ANSI A108.10, A108.6, A108.8, A108.9-1999 correlating to grout type chosen and manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Mix grout material in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. C. Apply grout to produce full, smooth grout joints of uniform width, and free of voids and gaps. D. Before grouting entire area do a test area to assure there will be no permanent staining or discoloration of the tile and to verify that the grout is easily removed from the surface. If necessary, pre-coat exposed surfaces of tile with a grout release as recommended by the manufacturer, as this will facilitate removal of the grout. E. Cure all setting and grouting materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. If one has been used, remove grout release and clean tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue and foreign matter, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If a grout haze or residue remains, use a suitable grout haze remover or cleaner and contact grout manufacturer for recommendations. Flush surface Lakeview Health Services CERAMIC & PORCELAIN TILE 093013- 5 West End Heights with clean water before and after cleaning. Do not use harsh hydrochloric, muriatic or sulfuric acid or acidbased cleaners to clean glazed tiles or tiles grouted with latex modified grout. B. When a heavy residue of Portland cement grout is present, acceptable tile cleaning acids may be used. However, the grout should be allowed to cure a minimum of 10 days before this aggressive cleaning method is employed. Tile and grout shall be soaked with water before cleaning. In the absence of a recommendation from the grout manufacturer, acid cleaning may be done with a saturated solution of phosphoric or sulfamic acid, mixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. After cleaning, provide protective covering and maintain conditions to protect tile work from damage or deterioration. Where tiled surfaces will be subject to equipment or wheel traffic or heavy construction traffic, and during move-in of furniture and equipment, cover protective covering with 1/4" hardboard, plywood or similar material. D. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. E. Consult most current tile manufacturer’s technical information for recommended post installation cleanup and routine maintenance F. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services SUSPENDED ACCOUSTICAL 095100-1 West End Heights CEILING TILE SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Acoustical ceiling panels. 2. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 1. Mailing Address: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 3001, Lancaster, PA 17604 2. Phone: 1.717.397.0611 3. Website: armstrongceilings.com 2.2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM – ACT1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Armstrong, Cortega #770. B. Finish: White C. Format: 1. Size: 24” x 24” x 5/8” 2. Edge Profile: 15/16” Square Lay-in 2.3 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM – ACT2 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Armstrong, Armatuff #861. B. Finish: White C. Format: 1. Size: 24” x 24” x 5/8” 2. Edge Profile: 15/16” Square Lay-in 2.4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM – ACT3 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Armstrong, Cirrus #534. B. Finish: White C. Format: 1. Size: 24” x 24” x 5/8” 2. Edge Profile: 15/16” Angled Tegular 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Model: Armstrong, 15/16” Prelude XL Exposed Tee B. Finish: White C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. Provide recessed aircraft cable suspension at all clouds so wires are not visible from floor. E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner. PART 3 SUBMITTALS Lakeview Health Services SUSPENDED ACCOUSTICAL 095100-2 West End Heights CEILING TILE SYSTEMS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies if each color sample. 3.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Section 017000 Closeout Procedures for Extra Materials to be furnished by Contractor. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: B. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or factory workmanship. C. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects D. Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive to the growth of microorganisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible sag and will resist the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing bacteria. E. Warranty Period Humiguard: F. Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. G. Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. H. Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max performance supplied by one source manufacturer is thirty (30) years from date of substantial completion. I. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. C. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. D. Flame Spread: 25 or less E. Smoke Developed: 50 or less F. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL Fire Resistance Directory, for types of assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire protective membrane and tested per ASTM E 119. G. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for rated assembly. H. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way. 4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way. Lakeview Health Services SUSPENDED ACCOUSTICAL 095100-3 West End Heights CEILING TILE SYSTEMS 4.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: All ceiling products and suspension systems must be installed and maintained in accordance with Armstrong written installation instructions for that product in effect at the time of installation and best industry practice. Prior to installation, the ceiling product must be kept clean and dry, in an environment that is between 32oF (0o C) and 120oF (49o C) and not subject to Abnormal Conditions. Abnormal conditions include exposure to chemical fumes, vibrations, moisture from conditions such as building leaks or condensation, excessive humidity, or excessive dirt or dust build-up B. HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Installation of the products shall be carried out where the temperature is between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F (49° C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry. The ceilings must be maintained to avoid excessive dirt or dust buildup that would provide a medium for microbial growth on ceiling panels. Microbial protection does not extend beyond the treated surface as received from the factory, and does not protect other materials that contact the treated surface such as supported insulation materials. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work (i.e. concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting) has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations. 4.5 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures. B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections. C. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. 4.6 INSTALLATION A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight. C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. D. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces. E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings. 4.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. D. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services PANELIZED LINEAR 095426-1 West End Heights WOOD CEILINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Concealed suspension system for Linear Wood Ceiling Panels. 2. Exterior-Grade Solid Maple Linear Wood Ceiling Panels for concealed suspension system. 3. Trim and accessories. 4. Seismic restraints for suspended ceiling system. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. Division 1 – “General Conditions” for substitution requests, submittals, etc. B. Division 16 – “Electrical” for light fixture coordination. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 1990. B. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1991. C. ASTM E 580: Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 1991. D. AWI (QSI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 2003. E. CISCA: Ceiling Systems Handbook. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer, approved by wood ceiling manufacturer, who has completed panel ceilings similar in species, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Inspection: All work must pass inspection and approval of architect, as well as the local codes and regulations or authorities having jurisdiction. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Wood Ceiling System: Obtain each type of Linear Wood Ceiling Panels from a single fabricator, with in-house Shop Drawing capabilities, in-house assembly and finishing capabilities, and with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the project. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying project. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: For each type of product specified. C. Samples: For verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the range of variations expected. 1. 12” x 18” samples of each panel type, pattern, and color. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS & COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings/Coordination Drawings for all ceilings, which should include RCP and product details. Coordinate Linear Wood ceiling panels layout and installation of wood panels and suspension system components with other construction elements that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC Lakeview Health Services PANELIZED LINEAR 095426-2 West End Heights WOOD CEILINGS equipment, fire-suppression system components, partition assemblies and all perimeter conditions. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wood panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery & Unloading: Coordinate crate sizes, weights, unloading options, and delivery schedule with manufacturer prior to fabrication. Deliver wood panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other mistreatment. B. Acclimatization: Before installing wood panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content (at least 72 hours) per AWI standards. C. Handling: Handle Linear Wood Ceiling Panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. D. Protection: 1. Personnel: Follow good safety and industrial hygiene practices during handling and installing of all products and systems, with personnel to take necessary precautions and wear appropriate protective equipment as needed. Read related literature for important information on products before installation. Contractor to be solely responsible for all personal safety issues during and subsequent to installation; architect, specifier, owner, and manufacturer will rely on contractor’s performance in such regard. 2. Existing completed work: Protect completed work above suspension system from damage during installation of suspension system components. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS/WARRANTIES A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Linear Wood Ceiling Panels: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. B. Warranties: Provide owner with a (1) year warranty for material and workmanship on all installed products. 1. Manufacturers: All materials, wood ceiling and grid, shall be warranted for (1) one year for material and workmanship. 2. Installer: All work shall be warranted for (1) year from final acceptance of substantial completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 LINEAR WOOD CEILING PANELS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. General: The following manufacturer is basis of design: 1. Norton Industries, Inc. (www.nortonceilings.com) 2.2 LINEAR WOOD CEILING PANELS Lakeview Health Services PANELIZED LINEAR 095426-3 West End Heights WOOD CEILINGS A. Norton Industries 1366 West 117th Street, Lakewood, Ohio. 888- 357-2345. www.nortonceilings.com 1. Wood Panels: 1) Style: Linear 2) Attachment: Suspended (per manufacturer’s details) 4) Species: Natural Maple (Solid Wood) 5) Grain: Solid, Clear, Mixed Grain 6) Site Application: Exterior (Note: installation of Exterior-Grade Wood shall be provided and installed at all interior and exterior locations.) 7) Member Size: 5 ¼” x ¾” (with standard lengths of 8’ long) 8) Member Configuration: Members shall be installed at a 1/3 offset, typical unless noted otherwise. Refer to Ceiling Plans. 8) Reveal: ¾” (both directions) 9) Assembly Style: ¼” x 1 ¼” Wood Cross Piece Backer (painted black) 10) Panel Sizes: Refer to Ceiling Plans. 11) Fire Rating: Class 1 (A) 12) Finish: Clear Exterior 13) Sheen: Satin 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Suspension and Ceiling Layout: The contractor shall install the suspension and wood ceiling in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and shop drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceilings attach or abut, with installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. B. Layout: Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of Linear Wood Ceiling Panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans in accordance with wood ceiling manufacturer’s approved Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install Panelized Linear Wood Ceilings to comply with manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Installation of Panelized Linear Wood Ceilings shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and in compliance with all local codes and regulations. Install with undamaged edges and fitted accurately to suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit, as required. E. Suspension Runners: Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Install number and use on-center spacing per wood ceiling manufacturer’s instructions, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings and in compliance with all local codes. 3.4 CLEANING Lakeview Health Services PANELIZED LINEAR 095426-4 West End Heights WOOD CEILINGS A. General: Clean exposed wood surfaces. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace wood ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services RESILIENT WALL BASE 096513-1 West End Heights & ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. 093000 Flooring Thresholds and Transitions 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Resilient wall base 2. Resilient Rubber Landings and Stair Tread with Riser (Provide/Install from 2nd Floor through Fifth Floor) 3. Low VOC adhesives PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Johnsonite 1. Mailing Address: 16910 Munn Road, Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023 2. Phone: 1.800.727.2037, ext.6062 3. Website: jonsonite.com 2.2 RUBBER WALL BASE (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Johnsonite: Traditional Wall Base B. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacturer’s full range of color finishes. C. Format: 4” High, Traditional Rubber Wall Base with integral Toe. Install preformed Corners at all inside and outside corners. D. Use Johnsonite Contact Bond Adhesive on non-porous surfaces (Adhesive must be low VOC). E. Use Johnsonite Acrylic Cove Base Adhesive on porous surfaces (Adhesive must be low VOC). 23 RUBBER STAIR TREAD/RISER & LANDINGS (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Johnsonite: Solid Color Rubber Landing and Integrated Stair Tread / Riser B. Manufactured from a homogeneous composition of 100% synthetic rubber. C. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 2169 Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads, Type TS, Class 1 and 2, Group 1 and 2. D. Hardness: ASTM D 2240 – Not less than 85 Shore A. E. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 3389 – less than 1 gram weight loss. F. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish- Coated Flooring of 0.6 or greater. G. ASTM E 648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater, Class I. H. Integrated tread and riser. I. Visually Impaired treads meet ADA and are California Title 24 Accessibility requirements. J. Visually Impaired treads will have 2" wide contrasting color grit tape insert. K. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacturer’s full range of color finishes. L. Use Johnsonite Contact Bond Adhesive on non-porous surfaces (Adhesive must be low VOC). M. Use Johnsonite Acrylic Cove Base Adhesive on porous surfaces (Adhesive must be low VOC). PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty Lakeview Health Services RESILIENT WALL BASE 096513-2 West End Heights & ACCESSORIES 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies if each color sample. 3.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Section 017000 Closeout Procedures for Extra Materials to be furnished by Contractor. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty against defects in manufacturing and workmanship of resilient flooring products. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10 years experience in the production of resilient flooring of types equivalent to those specified. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in the Section, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance requirements specified not less than 10 days prior to bid date. 1. Color Matching: Provide resilient flooring products, including wall base and accessories, from one manufacturer to ensure color matching. 2. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation. B. Installer's Qualifications: Installer experienced (minimum of 2 years) to perform work of this Section, who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to the product manufacturer. C. Materials: For each type of material required for the work of this Section, provide primary materials, which are the products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, which are acceptable to the manufacturer of the primary materials. Comply with applicable regulations regarding VOC (volatile organic compound) content of the adhesives. 4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations. B. Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to room temperature prior to installation. 4.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of 700 F (210 C) plus or minus 50 F (30 C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring products. Specified temperature shall be maintained at least 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after the installation. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Verify that spaces to receive resilient materials are suitable for installation. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations including the following: 1. Substrates shall be clean and dry. 2. Substrates shall be free of depressions, raised areas, or other defects which would telegraph through the installed resilient material. 3. Temperature of resilient materials and substrate shall be within specified tolerances. 4. Moisture condition and adhesive bond tests shall be performed as specified. B. For applications on concrete, verify curing, hardening, and sealing compounds have not been used. If there are any, do not proceed until compounds have been removed C. For applications on concrete slabs "on-grade or below grade", verify vapor barrier below slab was installed. If no vapor barrier was installed, do not proceed with work unless written acceptance of such conditions is received and submitted. Lakeview Health Services RESILIENT WALL BASE 096513-3 West End Heights & ACCESSORIES D. Perform moisture condition test in each major area. a minimum of 1 test per 1000 sq. ft. prior to installation. Moisture condition shall not exceed 3 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours in accordance with ASTM F-1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are acceptable. E. Perform adhesive bond test in each major area, minimum of 1 test per 1000 sq. ft., prior to installation. Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and no moisture is evident. Do not proceed with work until results of bond test are acceptable. 4.5 PREPERATION A. Comply with ASTM F-710 and manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation. Remove substances incompatible with resilient flooring adhesive by method acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Concrete floors with steel troweled (slick) finish shall be properly roughened or sanded to ensure suitable adhesion. 2. Concrete floors with curing, hardening, or sealing compounds shall be abraded by mechanical methods, i.e.: bead blast, to remove compounds. B. Fill all voids, cracks, and depressions with a trowel applied cementitious compound acceptable to the manufacturer. Remove projections and repair other defects to tolerances acceptable to the manufacturer C. Vacuum subfloors immediately prior to installation. 4.6 INSTALLATION A. General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 5. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 4.7 MAINTENANCE A. Do not perform manufacturer's recommended maintenance procedures until adhesive has fully cured, no sooner than 72 hours after installation. B. Use only cleaning products recommended by the manufacturer. C. Protect installed product from damage and construction operations and inspect immediately before final acceptance of project. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ENGINEERED LUXURY VINYL PLANK FLOORING 096519-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. Division 9 Flooring Thresholds and Transitions 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Engineered Vinyl Plank Flooring. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTTURES A. USF Contract 1. Mailing Address: 3580 Corporate Drive, Dalton, GA 30720 2. Phone: 1.877.292.4044 3. Website: usfcontract.com 2.2 ENGINEERED LUXURY VINYL FLOORING – EVP1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: USF Contract: Stratum B. Finish: 1. Endura EP Commercial Finish 2. Owner/Architect to select from Manufacture’s full range of color finishes. Note: Multiple Tile Colors may be selected by the Architect within this Series for this project. C Format: Wood Décor Plank 1. 7 1/8” x 48” x 6.5mm D. Construction: 1. 1.5mm Virgin PVC/20 mil wear surface 2. 5.0mm COREtec PLUS 3. Cork Underlayment E. Pattern: 1/3 running bond F. Certifications: 1. Greenguard Gold 2. IAQ Certified PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies if each color sample. 3.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Division 1 Closeout Procedures for Extra Materials to be furnished by Contractor. Lakeview Health Services ENGINEERED LUXURY VINYL PLANK FLOORING 096519-2 West End Heights PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. FOR BEST VISUAL REPRESENTATION OF YOUR FLOOR: This flooring replicates the look of a natural product which has natural variations in color, texture, and sheen/gloss. For best visual effect, shuffle planks or tiles from several cartons and do not install similar planks or tiles next to one another. B. ANGLE-TAP INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR STRATUM BRAND FLOORS: If the following instructions leave any unanswered questions or if additional information is required, please call USFContract toll free at 800-404-2675 (706-733-6120). C. FLOORING MATERIAL SHOULD BE INSPECTED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION: Responsibility for the suitability of USFContract® flooring and accompanying products for each individual installation cannot be assumed by USFContract, since USFContract has no control over the installer’s proper application. Should an individual plank or tile be doubtful as to appearance or dimension the installer should not use this piece. USFContract will send a replacement in a timely fashion. D. While Stratum™ is waterproof, it's not a moisture barrier. Concrete must be properly cured. For concrete floors with 8lbs and 88% RH cover with a minimum 6 mil polyfilm moisture barrier before installing product. Moisture won't damage Stratum™, but it can get in the walls and structure. USFContract recommends to leave a ¼” expansion gap between the perimeter walls and any adjacent flooring materials. Do not install Stratum floors as a floating floor where it will be exposed to temperatures greater than 140° F. In areas where the floor may be exposed to direct, intense sunlight resulting in excessive heat to the floor, use the glue down method. E. PRE-INSTALLATION JOBSITE REQUIREMENTS USFContract cannot be held responsible for site conditions. Carefully examine the flooring prior to installation for color, finish, sheen, and quality. Ensure adequate lighting for proper inspection. If flooring is not acceptable, contact your supplier immediately and arrange for a replacement. USFContract cannot accept responsibility for flooring installed with visible defects. Prior to installation of any flooring, the installer must ensure that the jobsite and subfloor meet the requirements of these instructions. USFContract is not responsible for flooring failure resulting from unsatisfactory jobsite and/or subfloor conditions. Flooring should be one of the last items installed in any new construction or remodel project. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services RESILIENT HETEROGENEOUS 096520-1 West End Heights SHEET FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient Sheet Flooring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation. D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A. Approved Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Inc., Phone: (800) 899-8916, 16910 Munn Road (440) 543-8916, Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023, Tech: Ext 9297, Web: www.tarkettna.com, Samples: Ext 9299, E-mail: info@johnsonite.com, Fax: (440) 543-8920 2.2 HETEROGENEOUS VINYL SHEET FLOORING A. ACCZENT WOOD 1. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1303 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering With Backing, Type I Grade 1, Class B. 2. Roll/Sheet Width: 6' 6" (2 m). 3. Wear layer/Overall thickness: .080" (2.0 mm). 4. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring of 0.3 or greater. 5. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – 175 PSI. Lakeview Health Services RESILIENT HETEROGENEOUS 096520-2 West End Heights SHEET FLOORING 6. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater, Class I. 7. Johnsonite offers a RESTART reclamation program for returning jobsite scrap. 8. Contains 30% pre-consumer recycled content. 9. 100% Recyclable. 10. SCS FloorScore Certified and meets California Specifications Section 01350. 11. Johnsonite facilities are ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 Certified. 12. LEED contributions for Johnsonite resilient sheet flooring include MR2, MR4, and EQ4.3. 13. Color Finish: To be selected from manufacturer’s full range of color finishes. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation. B. Adhesives: As recommended by Johnsonite to meet site conditions 1. Johnsonite #925 Resilient Flooring Adhesive 2. Johnsonite #975 Two-Part Urethane Adhesive 3. Johnsonite 130 SpraySmart Adhesive PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to Johnsonite written instructions to ensure adhesion of Resilient Sheet Flooring. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives or contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the resilient flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, paint, etc., must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could bleed through and stain the flooring material. 4. Prepare Substrates according to ASTM F 710 including the following: a. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. i. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Results must not exceed 5 lbs. Moisture Vapor Emission Rate per 1,000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.– or – ii. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Must not exceed 80%. b. A pH test for alkalinity must be conducted. Results should range between 7 and 9. If the test results are not within the acceptable range of 7 to 9, the installation must not proceed until the problem has been corrected. c. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 5. Wood subfloors must have a minimum 18" (45.7 cm) of cross-ventilated space beneath the bottom of the joist. a. The floor must be rigid, free of movement. Lakeview Health Services RESILIENT HETEROGENEOUS 096520-3 West End Heights SHEET FLOORING b. Single wood and tongue and groove subfloors should be covered with ¼" (6.4 mm) or ½" (12.7 mm) APA approved underlayment plywood. i. Use ¼" (6.4 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width of 3" (76 mm) or less. ii. Use ½" (12.7 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width wider than 3" (76 mm). c. Do not install over OSB (Oriented Strand Board), particle board, chipboard, lauan or composite type underlayments. B. Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate with good quality Portland cement-based underlayment leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient Sheet Flooring: 1. Install with Johnsonite adhesive specified for the site conditions and follow adhesive label for proper use. 2. Install rolls in sequential order following roll numbers on the labels. 3. Reverse sheets unless instructed otherwise in Johnsonite Installation Instructions. 4. Roll the flooring in both directions using a 100 pound three-section roller. 5. Vinyl sheet flooring must be welded. Note: It is recommended to heat weld seams to provide a more sterile and watertight seam. 6. Johnsonite Resilient Sheet Flooring may be flash coved. a. Use Johnsonite CFS-00-A Cove Filler Strip. b. Net fit flooring material into the appropriate Johnsonite cove cap. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 1. No traffic for 24 hours after installation. 2. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation. D. Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning. E. A regular maintenance program must be started after the initial cleaning. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services CARPET TILE 096800- 1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Interface 1. Mailing Address: 1503 Orchard Hill Road, LaGrange, Georgia 30240 2. Phone: 1.800.634.6032 3. Website: interface.com 2.2 CARPET TILE – CPT1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Carpet Tile, Plank Format 1. Model: Interface: Urban Retreat UR501 Colorline 2. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacture’s full range of color finishes. Note: Multiple Tile Colors may be selected by the Architect within this Series for this project. 3. Format: 25cm x 1m 4. Pattern: 1/3 running bond 4. Construction: Tufted Shear 5. Backing: GlasBac RE Tile 6. Indoor Air Quality: CRI Green Label Plus #GLP0820 PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering materials; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety & Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies of each color sample 3.2 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. C. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Section 017000 Closeout Procedures for Extra Materials to be furnished by Contractor. Lakeview Health Services CARPET TILE 096800- 2 West End Heights PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm whose carpet materials comply with the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development's (HUD) "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-44D" and are currently listed on HUD's "Certified Products Directory" and so identified by imprint on back of carpet. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single manufacturer. D. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. 2. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84 4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground. 4.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions." B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. C. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: 1. New concrete/gypcrete shall be cured, clean and dry. It shall be free of curing or parting agents that interfere with the bonding of the adhesive. 2. The General Contractor must submit flooring contractor and Architect a written report on the moisture and alkalinity condition of the slab to determine its suitability as a substrate for the material to be installed (ASTM F-1869). 3. Whenever a powdery or porous surface is encountered, a primer compatible with the adhesive shall be used to provide a suitable surface for the glue down installation. 4. Patching of cracks and depressions shall be made with a compatible latex patching compound. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations for patch thickness. Large patched areas must be primed. 5. Primers: The use of primers on floor surfaces is generally not necessary except for sanded, dusty, porous and acoustical surfaces. Priming cannot overcome moisture conditions and must not be used for that purpose. When used, primers must be thin and fast drying. They must be compatible with adhesives, which should be applied only after primer is dry. Lakeview Health Services CARPET TILE 096800- 3 West End Heights D. Moisture & Alkalinity in Concrete Sub-floors: To prevent glue-down installation failures due to moisture and alkalinity, the General Contractor shall be responsible for providing written moisture and alkali test results (ASTM F-1869) pertaining to the concrete slab prior to installation. Where lightweight or acoustical concrete is used, refer to the manufacturer’s recommendations for the proper primer to be used before carpet is installed. 1. Moisture: At least 90-120 days are to be allowed for a concrete slab to cure and reach an acceptable dryness. Appearance alone is not a reliable test. 2. Concrete floors, even with adequate cure time, can demonstrate an unacceptable moisture condition by allowing excessive amounts of moisture to pass through. This can be a problem even on suspended concrete floors. All concrete floors should be tested to determine the moisture emission rate by utilizing a calcium chloride moisture test kit available from installation supplies and accessories distributors. This is a very precise test and must be conducted carefully with strict attention to the test kit manufacturer’s instructions. Another method, less precise but acceptable for some carpet types, can be used to determine the presence of excessive on-site moisture. Place a hygrometer on the floor, cover with a sheet of clear plastic film about two feet (600mm) square, and seal with duct tape. A rough estimate may be obtained in 15 to 30 minutes; 24 hours is needed for an accurate check. Various locations in the area should be tested. Moisture tests on slabs below 55° F (13° C) may be inaccurate because moisture migration is retarded by low temperatures. 3. Since some floor covering products are less tolerant of moisture than others, consult the individual manufacturer to determine acceptable moisture emission rates for specific products. 4. The moisture emission rate of a concrete floor is expressed in lbs./square feet-24 hours. Because the test for emission rate requires 72 hours to conduct, proper installation planning is a must. As a general guideline, an emission rate of 3 lbs. or less is acceptable for most carpet. 5. Alkalinity: A pH range of 5-9 is satisfactory; however, a reading above 9 requires corrective measures. The pH on the surface of the concrete can be determined by slightly wetting the floor and applying pH test paper. Consult the adhesive manufacturer for recommended corrective procedures. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4.5 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. 4.6 INSTALLATION A. Direct Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue-Down." B. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10: "Attached Cushion." C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet floor, install carpet before installation of these items. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. Lakeview Health Services CARPET TILE 096800- 4 West End Heights F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 4.7 CLEANING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation. 1. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. 4.8 PROTECTION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 098000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. 061000 Rough Carpentry D. 093013 Ceramic & Porcelain Tile E. 096519 Engineered LuxuryVinyl Plank F. 096800 Carpet 1.2 REFERENCES A. Underwriters Laboratory: Fire Resistance Volume 1 www.ul.com B. GREENGUARD Certified GREENGUARD and GREENGUARD Gold Certified www.greenguard.org C. ASTM E336 and E1007 Field Sound Transmission Class (F-STC), Field Impact Insulation Class (F-IIC) D. ASTM E90 and E492 Sound Transmission Class (STC), Impact Insulation Class (IIC) E. ASTM C472M Compressive strength of gypsum concrete F. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slab G. ASTM F2419 Standard Test Method for Installation of Thick Poured Gypsum Concrete and Preparation of Surface to Receive Resilient Flooring H. ASTM F2678 Standard Practice for Preparing Panel Underlayments, Thick Poured Lightweight Cellular Concrete Underlayments, and Concrete Subfloors with Underlayment Patching Compounds to Receive Resilient Flooring I. TCNA Tile Council of North America Installation Handbook www.tileusa.com J. NWFA National Wood Flooring Association Instructions www.nwfa.org K. Finished Floor Goods Procedures Maxxon Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments www.maxxon.com PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Maxxon Corporation 1. Mailing Address: 920 Hamel Road, P.O. Box 253, Hamel, MN 55340 2. Phone: 1.800.356.7887 3. Online: maxxon.com 2.2 2.02 MATERIALS A. Proprietary products/systems: Poured flooring underlayment and topping products, including the following: 1. Gyp-Crete 2000/3.2K Floor Underlayment B. Maxxon® Floor Primer: 1. Material Standard: Comply with specifications outlined in manufacturer's Design and Installation Guide for wood. C. Mix Water: 1. Material Standard: Potable, free from impurities and from a domestic source. D. Sand Aggregate: 1. Sand shall meet Maxxon Sand Specification 101. E. Maxxon® Overspray Primer Sealer: 1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon® Overspray according to manufacturer's specifications. F. Maxxon® Acrylic Primer Sealer (Alternate to Overspray): 1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon® Acrylic according to manufacturer’s specifications. Lakeview Health Services GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 098000-2 West End Heights G. Maxxon Reinforcement or Maxxon CSM (Crack Suppression Mat): 1. Install approved reinforcement as per manufacturer recommendations. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Gyp-Crete sales sheet, Acousti-Mat Ultimate Sound Control Systems, Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments, and Maxxon’s Building Conditions Guide with project materials clearly identified for each required product or system. B. UL Directory Fire Resistance Volume 1 - Architect to utilize one or more of the following: refer to Contract Documents for fire-rated floor/ceiling assemblies. C. Acoustical Data: Submit sound tests according to IBC code criteria ASTM E492 (IIC) and ASTM E90 (STC) or ASTM E1007 (F-IIC) and E336 (F-IIC). D. Code Approvals: See www.maxxon.com for the current list of code approvals. E. Contractor shall submit testing reaults for compressive strength, sound transmission, and moisture content. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Special Inspections and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall hire a Third Party Testing Agency in order to test the Gyp-crete Floor Underlayment per following: a. Compressive Strenth b. Mositure Content c. Sound Transmission 2. All Testing results shall comply with the manufacturer’s requriements. Submit all testing results to Architect and Owner upon completion. Contractor shall not install any finish flooring materials over the gyp-crete floor underlayment until testing has been completed and approved. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment (Always a “Green” building material) a. Compressive strength up to 2,200 psi (up to 15 MPa) b. Density 110 pounds per cubic foot (1,762 kg/m3) 2. Sound Control – 2009 International Building Code: Section 1207.2 & .3 a. Minimum Sound Transmission Class, 50 STC (45 if field tested) – Section 1207.2 ASTM E90 and E336 b. Minimum Impact Insulation Class, 50 IIC (45 if field tested) – Section 1207.3 (1) ASTM E492 and E1007 4.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Standards: 1. All materials, unless otherwise indicated, shall be manufactured by Maxxon Corporation and shall be installed in accordance with its current printed directions and by a Maxxon Corporation Authorized Applicator. 2. Underlayment mix shall be tested for a slump using a 2" (i.d.) x 4" (50 mm x 101 mm) cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 1/2” (216 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) diameter. 3. Compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C 472M. 4.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and protected from damage and exposure from the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. 4.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Before, during and after installation of product, building interior shall be enclosed, with adequate ventilation and heat maintained at a temperature above 50 °F (10 °C) to allow for drying of product. Lakeview Health Services GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 098000-3 West End Heights 4.5 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Installation shall not begin until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, doors, and any other apertures. 2. Wood substrate shall be structurally sound, properly fastened, and dry. Contractor shall clean subfloor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminating factors before arrival of the authorized applicator. 3. Wood substrate: a. The wood subfloor must be adequate to withstand live and dead loads with a deflection limitation of L/360. b. Wood should be agency approved 23/32” (1.8 cm) T & G subfloor sheathing. 4.6 REQUIREMENTS A. Leak Prevention: 1. Fill cracks and voids in subfloor where leakage of slurry could occur. B. Priming subfloor: 1. Prime substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Application: 1. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions. 4.7 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Mixing Proportions: 1. General Requirements: Mix proportions and methods shall be in strict accordance with product manufacturer recommendations. B. Application: 1. (Optional) Acousti-Mat Installations: Install Acousti-Mat following manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. Acousti-Mat NOT REQUIRED ON THIS PROJECT. 2. Pour floor topping to recommended thickness. Immediately spread and screed product to a smooth surface. Expansion joints in all types of work shall be brought through the underlayment. a. Minimum Maxxon Underlayment Depth: 1. Substrate Depth of Pour 2. Wood ¾” (1.9 cm) 3. Acousti-Mat LPR ¾” (1.9 cm) 4. Acousti-Mat I ¾” (1.9 cm) 5. Acousti-Mat II 1” (2.5 cm) 6. Acousti-Mat II HP 1” (2.5 cm) 7. Enkasonic 1” (2.5 cm) 8. Enkasonic HP 1” (2.5 cm) 9. Acousti-Mat 3 1 ½” (3.8 cm) with Reinforcement or Maxxon CSM 10. Acousti-Mat 3 HP 1 ½” (3.8 cm) with Reinforcement or Maxxon CSM C. Drying: 1. The general contractor must provide and maintain correct environmental conditions to keep the building clean and dry, and protect against infestation of moisture from a variety of potential sources. The general contractor must supply mechanical ventilation and heat if necessary to remove moisture from the area until the Gyp-Crete 2000/3.2K is dry. 2. Protection from Heavy Loads: During construction, place temporary wood planking over Gyp-Crete 2000/3.2K wherever it will be subject to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads. Lakeview Health Services GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 098000-4 West End Heights 4.8 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF GLUE DOWN FLOOR GOODS A. Sealing: 1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray or Maxxon Acrylic according to the Maxxon Corporation's specifications. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations. 2. Maxxon UWR can be used over Maxxon underlayments in low traffic areas such as utility rooms, storage rooms and closets, as a protective surface. B. Moisture Testing: 1. Follow the respective floor goods manufacturers’ recommendations for relative humidity requirements. When manufacturer does not have a relative humidity requirement, refer to Maxxon’s Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments brochure. C. Finished Floor Goods: 1. There are many reference standards for the installation procedures and recommendations for finished flooring applications over gypsum underlayments. These include instructions of the manufacturers of the finished flooring, adhesives and thin-set as well as national agency reference standards. The national standards are listed below: a. Flooring Type Reference Standard b. Resilient ASTM F2419 c. Ceramic Tile TCNA Details (refer to Contract Document) d. Wood NWFA Instructions END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services PAINTING 099000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Interior paint and coatings systems B. Interior concrete sealer systems 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 050513 - Shop Applied Coatings for Metal B Section 060140 - Architectural Woodwork Refinishing 1.3 REFERENCES A SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning B SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning C SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning D SSPC-SP 13 / Nace No. 6 Surface Preparation for Concrete E EPA-Method 24 F GS-11, GC-03 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Submit under provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures. B Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each paint and coating product should include. 1 Product characteristics 2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations 3 Primer requirements and finish specification 4 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 5 Application methods 6. Cautions, VOC’S C Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of manufacturer’s color samples available. D Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, submit samples that represent actual product, color, and sheen. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer’s name, label, and the following list of information: 1. Product name, and type (description) 2. Application & use instructions 3. Surface preparation 4. VOC content 5. Environmental issues 6. Batch date 7. Color number/name B Storage: Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer’s instructions. Protect from freezing. C Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the coatings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. This specification does not take into consideration wet areas or areas needing high performance coatings. Lakeview Health Services PAINTING 099000-2 West End Heights PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The Sherwin-Williams Company 1. Mailing Address: 101 Prospect Avenue NW, Cleveland, OH 44115 2. Phone: 1.800.321.8194 3. Website: sherwin-williams.com 2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE A Use this article to define the scope of painting if not fully defined in a Finish Schedule or on the drawings. This article must be carefully edited to reflect the surfaces actually found on the project. In some cases, it may be enough to use the first paragraph that says, in effect, "paint everything" along with a list of items not to paint, without exhaustively defining all the different surfaces and items that must be painted. B If the project involves repainting some but not all existing painted surfaces, be sure to indicate the extent of the repainting. C The descriptions of each system can also be used to further refine the definition of what is to be painted, stained, or clear finished. D Surfaces To Be Coated: 1. Metal - (steel door frames, hollow metal doors, etc.) 2. Drywall 2.2 SCHEDULE A. METAL - (Doors, Door Frames, Structural Steel Columns, Joists, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous & Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal) 1. Latex Systems – Interior Locations a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Primer Universal Acrylic Primer (2-4 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 2. Acrylic Systems – Exterior Locations a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B65-720 Series (or equivalent product compatible with galvanized steel finish). 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series B. DRYWALL - (Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board, etc.) 1. Latex Systems – No VOC a. Eg-Shel / Satin Finish (Flat Finish at Ceilings) 1st Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) C. MASONRY - (CMU - Concrete, Split, Scored, Smooth, Fluted) 1. Latex Systems – Low Odor – Zero VOC a. Eg-Shel / Satin Finish 1st Coat: S-W PrepRite® Block Filler, B25W25 (75-125 sq ft/gal) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar™ 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Paints and Coatings - General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such a procedure is specifically described in Lakeview Health Services PAINTING 099000-3 West End Heights manufacturer's product instructions. VOC numbers used in this document need to be confirmed by using the products MSDS sheets. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A Coating Application Accessories: 1 Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer’s specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. B If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer; notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected and approved by all parties, otherwise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A Proper product selection, surface preparation, and application affect coating performance. Coating integrity and service life will be reduced because of improperly prepared surfaces. Selection and implementation of proper surface preparation ensures coating adhesion to the substrate and prolongs the service life of the coating system. B Selection of the proper method of surface preparation depends on the substrate, the environment, and the expected service life of the coating system. Economics, surface contamination, and the effect on the substrate will also influence the selection of surface preparation methods. C The surface must be dry and in sound condition. Remove oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint or other contamination to ensure good adhesion. D Remove mildew before painting by washing with a solution of one (1) part liquid household bleach and three (3) parts of warm water. Apply the solution and scrub the mildewed area. Allow the solution to remain on the surface for 10 minutes; however, do not allow the solution to dry on the surface. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow the surface to dry 48 hours before painting. Wear protective glasses or goggles, waterproof gloves, and protective clothing. Quickly wash off any of the mixture that comes in contact with your skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia to the bleach/water solution. E No painting should take place when the interior temperature is below 50°F unless the specified product is designed for the marginal conditions. F Methods 1 Aluminum: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning. 2 Block (Cinder and Concrete): Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 30 days at 75°F.The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9, and moisture content must be 15% or lower. On tilt-up and poured-in-place concrete, commercial detergents and abrasive blasting may be necessary to prepare the surface. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids with a cement patching compound. Masonry surfaces must be dry before priming. 3 Concrete, SSPC-SP13 or NACE 6: This standard gives requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical, chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded protective coating or lining systems. The requirements of this standard are applicable to all types of cementitious surfaces including cast-in-place concrete floors and walls, precast slabs, masonry walls, and shotcrete surfaces. An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free of contaminants, laitance, loosely adhering concrete, and dust, and should provide a sound, uniform substrate suitable for the application of protective coating or lining systems. 4 Cement Composition Siding/Panels: Remove all surface contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. Existing peeled or checked paint should be scraped and sanded to a sound surface. Pressure clean, if needed, with a minimum of 2100 psi pressure to remove Lakeview Health Services PAINTING 099000-4 West End Heights all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, laitance, foreign material, and peeling or defective coatings. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly. The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9, unless the products are designed to be used in high pH environments. 5 Drywall—Interior: Must be clean and dry. All nail heads must be set and spackled. Joints must be taped and covered with a joint compound. Spackled nail heads and tape joints must be sanded smooth and all dust removed prior to painting. 6 Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP1: Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants. Solvent cleaning does not remove rust or mill scale. Change rags and cleaning solution frequently so that deposits of oil and grease are not spread over additional areas in the cleaning process. Be sure to allow adequate ventilation. 7. Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP2: Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods 8 Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3: Power Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods. 9 Commercial Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3: A Commercial Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for staining. Staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent (33%) of each square inch of surface area and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods. 10 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal, SSPC-SP11: Metallic surfaces that are prepared according to this specification, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portions of pits if the original surface is pitted. Prior to power tool surface preparation, remove visible deposits of oil or grease by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or other agreed upon methods. 11 Water Blasting, NACE Standard RP-01-72: Removal of oil grease dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and loose paint by water at pressures of 2,000 to 2,500 psi at a flow of 4 to 14 gallons per minute. 3.3 INSTALLATION A Apply all coatings and materials with manufacturer’s specifications in mind. Mix and thin coatings according to manufacturer’s recommendation. B Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces. 1 Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or masonry. Or follow manufacturer’s procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days. 2 Test new concrete for moisture content. 3 Wait until wood is fully dry after rain or morning fog or dew. C Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer. D Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent sheen. E Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness. F Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. G Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the Architect or Engineer just prior to each coat. 3.4 PROTECTION A Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project. B Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacture's recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder the performance of the coatings. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services INTERIOR SEPCIALTIES CABINETRY 102000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. Division 6 Rough Carpentry 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Cabinetry & Countertops PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Kountry Wood Products 1. Mailing Address: 352 Shawnee Street, Nappanee, IN 46550 2. Phone: 1.574.773.5673 3. Website: kountrywood.com B. Wilsonart 1. Mailing Address: Wilsonart America, 2501 Wilsonart Drive, P.O. Box 6110, Temple, TX 76503 2. Phone: 1.800.433.3222 3. Website: wilsonart.com 2.2 WOOD CABINETRY – CAB1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Kountry Wood Products, Cabinetry 1. Traditional full frame construction 2. Glued and pinned tongue & groove construction 3. Full height drawer box 4. All plywood construction: a. 12” deep wall cabinets, 24” deep base cabinets b. 3/8” plywood sides with matching exterior laminate c. 3/8” plywood tops & bottoms with matching interior laminate d. 3/8” plywood backs with matching interior laminate e. 1/2” adjustable plywood shelves and plastic clips f. 1/2” thick hard maple dovetailed drawer box with 1/4” maple veneered plywood bottoms 5. 3/4” thick hard maple, doors and drawers a. Profile: Jamestown full overlay 6. Hardware: a. Stainless steel, full extension, under-mount, soft-closing drawer glides (minimum 75lbs. rating) b. Stainless steel, soft-closing hinges c. Richelieu BP9041195 Satin Chrome Knob 7. 4” High Toe-kick, finish to match cabinetry 8. Install solid maple quarter-round at full perimeter of cabinetry base, finish to match cabinetry 9. Upper cabinet shall be “boxed-in” at range hood: All range hoods ducted through the overhead wall cabinet shall have the duct “boxed-in” with wood panels to match cabinet frame materials and finish. Remainder of upper cabinet shall be usable. B. Finish: Factory applied stained finish, Owner/Architect to select from Manufacture’s full range of color finishes. Lakeview Health Services INTERIOR SEPCIALTIES CABINETRY 102000-2 West End Heights 2.3 HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS – CTR1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Wilsonart, High Pressure Laminate B. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacture’s full range of color finishes. C. Format: 1. 1-1/4” thick 2. 1-1/2” overhang from outside face of cabinet box D. Edge Condition: Double Round Over, 1” overhang, U.N.O. E. Back-splash: 4” high integral back-splash 2.4 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS – CTR2 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Wilsonart, Quartz Countertops B. Finish: Owner/Architect to select from Manufacture’s full range of color finishes. C. Format: 1. 1-1/4” thick 2. 1” overhang D. Edge condition: 1/8” radiused edges E. Back-Splash and Side-splashes: 4” high, finish to match countertop 2.5 CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOPS – CTR3 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. At Apartment Bathrooms Only: Provide cultured marble countertops with integral elliptical bowl sink. Actual color / texture to be selected by Architect from samples. B. Thickness: 1 ¼” thick C. Overhang: 1” overhang at edges, except at undermount sinks D. Edge condition: Provide 1/8” radiused edges E. Provide 4” high back and side splashes PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cabinetry shall be acclimated to field conditions for a minimum of 72 hours before installation commences B. Provide cutouts for undermount sinks C. Install cabinetry and countertops level, plumb, square, and true E. Provide continuous solid blocking in walls for cabinet installation F. Instalation shall comply with AWI, AWMAC, WI – Architectural Woodwork Standards, Current Edition END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. 016000 Product Requirements C. 061000 Rough Carpentry 1.2 SUMMARY A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the provision & installation of all toilet room accessories per this specification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick, Inc. 1. Mailing Address: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., 200 Commerce Drive, Clifton Park, NY 120651350 2. Phone: 518.877.7444 3. Website: bobrick.com 4. Sylvester & Associates, Ltd. (Architectural Representative) a. Contact: Gordon Cruickshank b. Address: 83 Woody Lane, Rochester, NY 14625 c. Phone: 585.381.0048 d. Website: sylvester-assoc.com B. Dyson, Inc. 1. Mailing Address: 600 West Chicago Ave., Suite 275, Chicago, IL 60654 2. Phone: 1.844.679.1647 3. Website: dyson.com C. Simplehuman 1. Mailing Address: 19850 Magellan Dr., Torrance, CA 90502 2. Phone: 877.988.7770 3. Website: simplehuman.com D. Broan-NuTone Storage Solutions, LP 1. Addrees: 501 South Wilhite St., Cleburne, TX 76031 2. Phone: 800.558.1711 3. Website: nutonestoragesolutions.com 2.2 GRAB BARS A. Toilet Rooms 005, 015 & 016: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-6806 Series 2. Quantity: a. Three (3), 18” Length Vertical Grab Bar, (one (1) per toilet room) b. Three (3), 24” Length Horizontal Grab Bar, (one (1) per toilet room) c. Three (3), 42” Length Horizontal Grab Bar, (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed B. Accessible Apartment Bathrooms: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-6806 Series 2. Quantity: a. Three (3), 18” Length Vertical Grab Bar, (one (1) per toilet room) b. Three (3), 36” Length Horizontal Grab Bar, (one (1) per toilet room) c. Three (3), 42” Length Horizontal Grab Bar, (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed C. Non-Accessible Apartment Bathrooms: Lakeview Health Services TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800-2 West End Heights 1. Contractor shall provide & install solid blocking to accommodate the future installation of grab bars at all non-accessible apartments as prescribed above (see Item C. Accessible Apartment Bathrooms). 2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Toilet Rooms 005, 015 & 016: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-6867 2. Quantity: Three (3), (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed B. Apartment Bathrooms: 1. Model: Bobrick #B6857 2. Quantity: Sixty (60), (one (1) per bathroom) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed 2.4 MIRRORS A. Toilet Rooms 005, 015 & 016: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-1659-2436 (24” Wide X 36” High) 2. Quantity: Three (3), (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: Polished Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed 5. Reflecting Surface: Laminated Glass A. Apartment Bathrooms: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-1659-2436 (24” Wide X 36” High) 2. Quantity: Sixty (60), (one (1) per bathroom) 3. Finish: Polished Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed 5. Reflecting Surface: Laminated Glass 2.5 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSERS A. Toilet Rooms 005 & 016: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-3706C Series (Semi-Recessed) 2. Quantity: Two (2), (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 2.6 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSALS A. Toilet Rooms 005 & 016: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-353 (Recessed) 2. Quantity: Two (2), (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 2.7 SOAP DISPENSER A. Toilet Rooms 005, 015 & 016 and Med. Rooms 02B & 007: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-2111 2. Quantity: Five (5), (one (1) per toilet room and med. room) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 2.8 TOWEL BARS A. Apartment Bathrooms: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-6737 2. Quantity: One-hundred-and-twenty (120), (two (2) per bathroom) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed 2.9 CLOTHES HOOKS Lakeview Health Services TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800-3 West End Heights A. Apartment Bathrooms: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-2116 2. Quantity: One-hundred-and-twenty (120), (two (2) per bathroom) 3. Finish: Satin Nickel 4. Hardware: Concealed 2.10 HAND DRYERS A. Toilet Rooms 005, 015 & 016: 1. Model: Dyson Airblad V 2. Quantity: Three (3), (one (1) per toilet room) 3. Finish: AB12 Sprayed Nickel 4. Electrical: Provide & install all power & associated cabling to accommodate electric hand dryers. General Contractor shall coordinate the provision & installation of all electric hand dryers with the Electrical Drawings & Specifications. 2.11 TRASH RECEPTACLE A. Toilet Rooms 005, 015 & 016: 1. Model: Simplehuman #CW1442 (55 Litre Swing Top Can) 2. Quantity: Three (3), (one (1) per toilet room) 2.12 SHOWER/BATHTUB CURTAIN ROD, CURTAIN HOOKS, AND CURTAIN A. Apartment Bathrooms: 1. Shower/Bathtub Curtain Rod, Curtain Hooks, and Curtain shall be provided & installed at all prefabricated Shower & Bathtub Assemblies per the shower/bathtub manufacturer/supplier. 2.13 SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS & HOOKS A. Custodial Rooms/Closets: 1. Model: Bobrick #B-239X34 2. Quantity: Five (5), (one (1) per custodial room/closet) 3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 4. Hardware: Concealed 2.14 MATERIALS A. Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise specified. B. Corrosion resistant fasteners, anchors, & fittings. 2.15 FABRICATION A. Devices shall be assembled neatly, rigidly, uniformly finished, and free from burrs & rough edges. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering Toilet Room Accessories; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Schedule of all Toilet Room Accessories showing quantities and locations for each device. 2. Shop Drawings of all Toilet Room Accessories showing mounting heights & blocking locations for each device. 3. Product Data for each device. 4. Installation Manuals for each device. 5. Product Warranties for all Toilet Room Accessories. 6. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies of each color sample. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 COORDINATION Lakeview Health Services TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800-4 West End Heights A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate installation of all accessories/devices with associated plumbing and electrical work as required. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall provide & install all accessories/devices as specified above, upon Architect’s approval (see Section 3.1 Submittals). Install all solid blocking as required to accommodate the installation of all accessories/devices, as required. All accessories/devices should be installed per manufacturer’s requirements. Upon project completion: all accessories/devices shall be clean & undamaged; turn over to Owner all Operations & Maintenance Manuals and Manufacturer’s Warranties. 4.3 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturers’ standard warranties for all accessories/devices prescribed herein. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. 016000 Product Requirements C. 061000 Rough Carpentry 1.2 SUMMARY A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the provision & installation of all fire protection specialties per this specification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Activar, Inc. / JL Industries 1. Mailing Address: 9702 Newton Avenue South, Bloomington, MN 55431 2. Phone: 1.800.554.6077 3. Website: activarcpg.com/jl-industries 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet, Semi-Recessed, 1-Hour Fire-Rated: 1. Model: JL Industries: Academy Aluminum FX2 Fire-Rated Extinguisher Cabinet #1027 2. Quantity: a. Ground Floor Corridor: Two (2), see Floor Plan b. First Floor Corridor: Three (3), see Floor Plan c. Second Floor Corridor: Three (3), see Floor Plan d. Third Floor Corridor: Two (2), see Floor Plan 3. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum 4. Door Style: Vertical Duo with SAF-T-LOK 5. Door Glazing: Laminated Safety Glass 6. Trim: Rolled Outside Edges 7. Features: a. ADA Flush Pull Handle b. Black Vertical Letters “Fire Extinguisher” (applied to center of glass) c. Red Vertical Decal (applied to upper corner of door, above handle) 8. Mounting: Semi-recessed, mounted at 48 inches A.F.F., measured to top of cabinet. 9. Construction: Cabinet shall be minimum 1-hour fire-rated (maintain fire-rating of wall) B. Fire Extinguisher 1. Model: Class A Rated per NFPA 10, (verify exact type & size with local Fire Marshal) 2. Quantity: Ten (10), (one (1) per cabinet) 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER MOUNTING BRACKET A. Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket 1. Model: JL Industries: #MB818C 2. Quantity: a. Mechanical Room 123: One (1), see Floor Plan 3. Finish: Black 4. Mounting: Wall-mounted at 48 inches A.F.F., measured to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire Extinguisher 1. Model: Class C Rated per NFPA 10, (verify exact type & size with local Fire Marshal) 2. Quantity: One (1) 2.4 MATERIALS A. All fire extinguisher cabinets shall be 1-hour fire-rated, maintain fire-rating of all walls. Lakeview Health Services FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-2 West End Heights 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets & Brackets shall be assembled neatly, rigidly, uniformly finished, and free from burrs & rough edges. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, & Brackets; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Schedule of all Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, & Brackets showing quantities and locations for each product. 2. Shop Drawings of all Fire Extinguisher Cabinets & Brackets showing mounting heights & blocking locations for each product. 3. Product Data for each product. 4. Installation Manuals for each product. 5. Product Warranties for all products. 6. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies of each color sample. PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 COORDINATION A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate all Fire Extinguishers’ Type, Size, and Location per the local Fire Marshal prior to ordering & installing material. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall provide & install all fire protection specialties as specified above, upon Architect’s approval (see Section 3.1 Submittals). Install all solid blocking as required to accommodate the installation of all fire protection specialties, as required. All fire protections specialties should be installed per manufacturer’s requirements. Upon project completion: all fire protection specialties shall be clean & undamaged; turn over to Owner all Operations & Maintenance Manuals and Manufacturer’s Warranties. B. Install Fire Extinguisher Cabinets at 48 inches above finished floor, measured to top of cabinet. C. Install Fire Extinguisher Bracket at 48 inches above finished floor, measured to top of fire extinguisher. 4.2 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturers’ standard warranties for all accessories/devices prescribed herein. END OF SECTION 10520 ST. BERNARD’S PARK INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT 108150-1 APARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Integrated Pest Management (IPM) to address the following pests: 1. Indoor populations of rodents, insects (including termites), arachnids, and other arthropods. 2. Outdoor populations of potentially indoor-infesting species that are within the property boundaries. 3. Nests of stinging insects within 20 (twenty) feet of the building and within the property boundaries. 4. Individuals of all excluded pest populations that are incidental invaders inside the building. a. Excluded Pest Populations: 1) Birds, bats, snakes, and all other vertebrates other than commensal rodents. 2) Pests that primarily feed on outdoor vegetation. B. Integrated Pest Management (IPM) shall include the following: 1. Initial building and site inspection. 2. Developing an IPM Plan appropriate to the building, site, and local ecosystems. 3. Implementing the approved IPM Plan. 4. Documenting IPM services C. Related Sections: 1. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities And Controls 2. Section 017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data 3. Section 01791100 – Environmental Demonstration & Training 4. Section 32 92 00 – Turf and Grasses 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E2114. B. Action Threshold: The level at which action is initiated as determined by how many pests can be tolerated. 1. The action threshold reflects the pest management objective for the site. The presence of some pests does not, in itself, necessarily require action. When pest populations exceed established action thresholds, action must be taken. C. Biological Control: The use of living organisms—parasites, predators, or pathogens—to maintain pest populations. D. Cultural Control: The manipulations of the site ecosystem that make it less friendly to the establishment and proliferation of pest populations. E. Exclusion: The practice of structural and procedural modifications to reduce access used by pests. F. Integrated Pest Management (IPM): An approach to pest management that uses current, comprehensive information on the life cycles of pests and their interactions with the environment to identify and implement effective methods of pest control with the least possible hazard to people, property, and the environment. G. Mechanical Control: The use of one or more physical components of the environment, such as temperature, humidity, or light, to the detriment of the pest. H. Phenology: The annual cycles of plants and animals and how they respond to seasonal changes in their environment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ST. BERNARD’S PARK INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT 108150-2 APARTMENTS A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Experience: Minimum of 3 (three) years of experience in performing the types of services specified herein. 2. Certification: a. Contractor personnel providing on-site pest control service must maintain certification as Commercial Pesticide Applicators in the category of Industrial, Institutional, Structural, and Health Related Pest Control. Uncertified individuals working under the supervision of a Certified Applicator will not be permitted to provide service under this contract. B. Pesticides: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for application of pesticides according to the label. 2. Regulatory compliance: a. All pesticides used by the Contractor must be registered with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and applicable jurisdictions. b. Transport, handling, and use of all pesticides shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s label instructions and all applicable laws and regulations. 3. Contractor shall not store any pesticide product in the project building(s) and site. 4. Prohibited Pesticides: a. Contractor shall not apply any pesticide product that has not been included in the approved IPM Plan or approved in writing by the Owner. 5. Minimization of Risk: a. When pesticide use is necessary, Contractor shall employ the least risk pesticide, most precise application technique, and minimum quantity of pesticide necessary to achieve control. b. Application of pesticides in any inside or outside area shall not occur unless visual inspection or monitoring devices indicate the presence of pests in that specific area. c. Recommendations for preventive pesticide treatments in areas where inspection indicates a potential insect or rodent infestation will be evaluated by the Owner on a case-by-case basis. Written approval must be granted by the Owner prior to any preventive pesticide application. d. Notification: Contractor shall notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of the application of any pesticide. Exceptions may be made for applications made for emergencies, where an imminent threat to health exists (e.g., stinging insects). For emergency applications, notification must be made as soon as practical. C. Key Pests and Action Thresholds: D. Coordination with construction operations: 1. Review Contractor’s Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan to verify moisture controls are appropriate to anticipated IPM Plan. 2. Review Contractor’s Waste Management Plan to verify sanitation levels are appropriate to anticipated IPM Plan. 3. Review Contractor’s progress cleaning methods to verify sanitation levels are appropriate to anticipated IPM Plan. E. Coordination with Owner’s operations: 1. Coordinate with Division 01 Operation and Maintenance Data. information consistent with approved IPM plan. 2. Coordinate with Division 32 Landscape maintenance program. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting with Owner and Architect to discuss the proposed IPM Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental protection. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Integrated Pest Management (IPM) Plan: Not less than 10days before the Preconstruction meeting, prepare and submit an IPM Plan including, but not limited to, the following 1. Verify key pests and action thresholds for each key pest are appropriate to project, local ST. BERNARD’S PARK INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT 108150-3 APARTMENTS ecosystem, and climate. 2. Proposed IPM Strategies: Provide for each key pest, appropriate to the building, site, and local ecosystems. a. Indicate strategies for inspection, prevention and for response to identified pest problems. 1) Inspection: Describe methods and procedures to be used for identifying sites of pest harborage and access, and for making objective assessments of pest population levels throughout the term of the contract. 2) Prevention: Describe methods and procedures recommended for prevention of pest harborage and access. 3) Response: Indicate prioritization of strategies such that nonchemical controls are utilized before chemical controls; and lesser risk options are used before resorting to actions with greater risk factors. 3. Proposed Materials and Equipment: a. Provide brand names of pesticide application equipment, rodent bait boxes, insect and rodent trapping devices, pest monitoring devices, pest detection equipment, and other pest control devices or equipment that may be used to provide service. b. Commercial Pesticide Applicator Certificates or Licenses: The Contractor shall provide photocopies of State-issued Commercial Pesticide Applicator Certificates or Licenses for every Contractor employee who will be performing on-site service under this contract. c. Pesticides: For all pesticides to be used, submit: 1) Product data indicating conformance to U.S. National Organics Program (NOP) Final Rule list. 2) Current EPA-registered label. 3) Material Safety Data Sheet. MSDSs shall be prepared/updated within the previous five years and shall include responses to Sections 1 –16 in accordance with ANSI Z400.1 and as follows: a) Section 11: Toxicological Information. Include data used to determine the hazards cited in Section 3. Identify acute data, carcinogenicity, reproductive effects, and target organ effects. b) Section 12: Ecological Information. Include data regarding environmental impacts in the event of an accidental release. c) Section 13: Disposal Considerations. Include data regarding the proper disposal of the chemical. Indicate whether or not the product is considered to be "hazardous waste" according the US EPA Hazardous Waste Regulations 40 CFR 261. d) Section 14: Transportation Information. Identify hazard class for shipping. e) Section 15: Regulatory Information. Identify federal, state, and local regulations applicable to the material. 4) Service Schedule: Provide a complete service schedule that includes weekly or monthly frequency of Contractor visits, specific day(s) of the week of Contractor visits, and approximate duration of each visit. a) Start of Service Schedule: Start of construction. 5) Revise and resubmit Plan as required by Owner. a) Approval of Contractor’s Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations. B. Baseline IPM Reports: Prior to beginning implementation of approved IPM Plan, submit the following: 1. Initial Building Inspection Report. Conduct a site visit to verify the pest control needs of all locations and identify problem areas and any equipment, structural features, or management practices that may contribute to pest infestations. ST. BERNARD’S PARK INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT 108150-4 APARTMENTS a. Submit Report summarizing observations. Indicate proposed revisions, if any, to approved IPM Plan that may be necessary based upon results of Initial Building Inspection. 2. Summary of Conventional Pest Management Controls for Key Pests: Submit summary of conventional pest management materials and methods that would be applicable to the building and site for key pests. Include the types of pesticide, application rates, estimated annual quantity required, and environmental issues of concern for each. C. Operations and Maintenance Information: Submit instructions for Owner’s personnel regarding Owner operations and maintenance procedures associated with Contractor provided IPM services. 1. Include overview of potential pest problems, conventional practices and environmental impacts, and IPM practices and environmental impacts. 2. Coordinate with landscaping maintenance program. 3. Coordinate with building cleaning and routine maintenance programs. D. Field Quality Control Documentation. 1. IPM Inspection Reports 2. IPM Deficiency Reports 3. IPM Log Book. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CHEMICAL CONTROLS A. Prohibited Pesticides: 1. Pesticides containing active ingredients classified as known, likely or probable carcinogens or reproductive toxins according to any of the following lists: State of California EPA List of Chemicals Known to Cause Cancer or Reproductive Toxicity, State of Illinois EPA List of Known Endocrine Disrupters, US EPA List of Chemicals Evaluated for Carcinogenic Potential. 2. Pesticides containing inert ingredients included on US EPA’s List 1: Inerts of Toxicological Concern. 3. Pesticide formulations and uses presenting a potential physical hazard or dust/powder inhalation hazard to building occupants. 4. Pesticides with label precautionary statements including “toxic” or “extremely toxic” to bees, birds, fish or wildlife. Does not apply to pesticides used as per label directions to control bird, fish, wildlife or stinging insect pests. 5. Pesticides with label precautionary statements including specific warnings regarding ground or surface water contamination. B. Lesser Risk Pesticides: Materials listed on the U.S. National Organic Program’s Final Rule, US Code of Federal Regulations 7CFR 205, list of acceptable materials and as follows: 1. Crawling insects: Boric acid based or plant based pesticides. a. Botanical pesticides: Pyrethrum, neem formulations, rotenone, and others as approved by Owner. 2. Rodents: Vitamin D3 (Cholecalciferol) or Quintox. 3. Weeds: Plant based pesticides and herbicides. Coordinate with Section 329000 – Planting. a. Botanical pesticides: Pyrethrum, neem formulations, rotenone, and others as approved by Owner. 4. Plant diseases: Plant based fertilizers. Coordinate with Section 329000 – Planting. a. Compost Teas: Verify that compost tea does not include invasive species, including seeds. Verify that compost tea does not include animal pathogens. C. Lesser Risk Pesticide Application Methodologies: ST. BERNARD’S PARK INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT 108150-5 APARTMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NON-CHEMICAL PEST MANAGEMENT A. Provide IPM in accordance with approved IPM Plan and as follows: 1. Cultural Controls: a. Sanitation and exclusion: Recommend structural and procedural modifications as appropriate to reduce food, water, harborage, and access used by pests. b. Soils: Maintain healthy, biologically active soils. c. Habitat for beneficial organisms: Recommend modifications as appropriate to promote healthy habitat for beneficial organisms. Habitat enhancement may include flowering annual or perennial plants that provide pollen and nectar needed during certain parts of the insect life cycle, overwintering sites, and wind protection. d. Phenology: Determine correlation with insect emergence and pest control. Develop recommendations as appropriate. 2. Mechanical Controls a. Traps: 1) Rodents: Trapping devices shall be the standard method for indoor rodent control. All such devices shall be concealed out of the general view and in protected areas so as not to be affected by routine cleaning and other operations. 2) Insects: Trapping devices shall be the standard method for indoor fly control. b. Vacuums: 1) Insects: Portable vacuums shall be the standard method for initial cleanouts of cockroach infestations, ants, termites, and for control of spiders in webs. c. Flame weeding: Unless otherwise approved by Owner, flame weeding shall not be permitted. d. Mulches, living or non-living: 1) Weeds: Mulch shall be used for suppression of weeds, insect pests, and plant diseases as appropriate. e. Boiling Water: 1) Fire Ants (exterior): Boiling water shall be the standard method for control of exterior fire ants. Use boiling water at a rate of approximately 3 gallons per mound. 3. Biological Controls: a. Lady bugs, nematodes, and other biological controls: Permitted only for control of exterior ants, aphids, and/or other insects as appropriate. b. Bats: Permitted only for control of exterior insects as appropriate. 3.2 CHEMICAL PEST MANAGEMENT A. Chemical Controls: Unless otherwise approved by Owner, Contractor shall use nonchemical methods of control. When pesticide use is necessary, the Contractor shall employ the least risk, NOP-listed pesticide; most precise application technique; and minimum quantity of pesticide necessary to achieve control. B. Baits Boxes: Bait boxes shall be maintained with an emphasis on the safety of non-target organisms. 1. Bait boxes shall be placed out of the general view, in locations where they will not be disturbed by routine operations. 2. Lids shall be securely locked or fastened shut. 3. Bait boxes shall be securely attached or anchored to floor, ground, wall, or other immovable surface, so that the box cannot be picked up or moved. 4. Bait shall be secured in the feeding chamber of the box and never placed in the runway or entryways of the box. 5. Bait boxes shall be labeled on the inside with the Contractor’s business name and address, and dated by the Contractor’s technician at the time of installation and each ST. BERNARD’S PARK INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT 108150-6 APARTMENTS servicing. 3.3 PEST REMOVAL A. Pest Removal: Remove traps, bait boxes, and their contents according to the approved IPM Plan and as requested by Owner. 3.4 SPECIAL REQUESTS AND EMERGENCY SERVICE A. On occasion, the Owner may request that the Contractor perform corrective, special, or emergency service(s) that are beyond routine service requests. The Contractor shall respond to these exceptional circumstances and complete the necessary work within three (3) hours after receipt of the request. 3.5 FIELD QUALITYCONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect building and site for pests and beneficials to gather information about the health of the landscaping and local ecosystem, pests, and natural enemies. 1. Methods: Use methods indicated in approved IPM Plan and as follows: a. Sweep nets, sticky traps, and pheromone traps maybe used to collect insects for both identification and population density information. b. Leaf counts may be used for recording plant growth stages. c. Square-foot or larger grids laid out in a field may provide a basis for comparative weed counts. d. Records of rainfall and temperature may be used to help predict the likelihood of disease infections. 2. Schedule: Inspect at regular intervals and at critical times in accordance with approved IPM Plan. 3. Reports: Document results of inspections. Submit using GSA Form 3638, Pest Control Work and Inspection Report. B. Recommendations: Throughout the term of this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for advising the Owner about any structural, sanitary, or procedural modifications that would reduce pest food, water, harborage, or access. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for adequately suppressing all pests included in this contract regardless of whether or not the suggested modifications are implemented. 2. The Contractor will not be held responsible for carrying out structural modifications as part of the pest control effort. However, minor applications of caulk and other sealing materials by the Contractor to eliminate pest harborage or access may be approved by the Owner on a case by case basis. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Owner prior to application of sealing material and other structural modification. C. Log Book: The Contractor shall maintain a pest control logbook or file. These records shall be kept on-site and maintained on each visit by the Contractor. Each logbook or file shall include: 1. IPM Plan: A copy of the approved IPM Plan. 2. IPM Contact List: Include contact information for Contractor and Owner contact. Indicate emergency contact information for Contractor. 3. Schedule: Contractor’s service schedule for the property. Identify IPM activity that has been performed. 4. Product Data: A list of all pesticides used on property and product data for each as follows: a. Product data indicating conformance to U.S. National Organics Program (NOP) Final Rule list. b. Current EPA-registered label. c. Material Safety Data Sheet. 5. IPM Inspection Reports and Deficiency Reports. 6. Pest Diagrams: Plans and site drawings noting the location of pest activity, including the location of all traps, trapping devices, and bait stations in or around the site. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services APPLIANCES 113000-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Documents B. Division 1 Specifications C. 061000 Rough Carpentry D. 102000 Interior Specialties – Wood Cabinetry 1.2 SUMMARY A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the provision & installation of all appliances per this specification. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the installation of all appliances with all other applicable trades (i.e., plumbing & electrical). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. GE Appliances 1. Mailing Address: GE Consumer Relations, PO Box 1780, Rapid City, SD 57709 2. Phone: 1.800.626.2005 3. Website: geappliances.com B. Maytag 1. Mailing Address: Maytag Customer Service, 553 Benson Road, Benton Harbor, MI 49022 2. Phone: 1.800.344.1274 3. Website: maytag.com C. StoveTop FireStop 1. Mailing Address: StoveTop FireStop, 200 Greenleaf Street, Fort Worth, TX 76107 2. Phone: 1.817.872.1500 3. Website: stovetopfirestop.com 2.2 REFRIGERATOR A. Community Kitchen 013 & Staff Break Room 014: 1. Model: GE #GTE21GSHSS 2. Quantity: Two (2), (One (1) per room) 3. Finish: Stainless Steel 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified B. Medication Rooms 002B & 007: 1. Model: GE # GE GCE06GSHSB; 5.6 cu.ft.; (undercounter) 2. Quantity: Two (2), (One (1) per room) 3. Finish: Black with Stainless Steel Door. 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified C. Apartment Kitchens: 1. Model: GE #GTE21GTHBB 2. Quantity: Sixty (60), (one (1) per apartment) 3. Finish: Black 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified Lakeview Health Services APPLIANCES 113000-2 West End Heights 2.3 RANGE A. Community Kitchen 013: 1. Model: GE #JB460DMBB 2. Quantity: One (1) 3. Finish: Black 4. Features: Self-cleaning 5. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant B. Apartment Kitchens: 1. Model: GE # JB460DMBB 2. Quantity: Sixty (60), (one (1) per apartment) 3. Finish: Black 4. Features: Self-cleaning 5. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant 2.4 RANGE HOOD A. Community Kitchen 013: 1. Model: Air King #ES308ADA 2. Quantity: One (1) 3. Finish: Stainless Steel 4. Features: Two Speed Fan & Cooktop Lighting (At Community Kitchen: install separate switches at ADA height for Range Hood Fan & Light, see Electrical Drawings). 5. Certifications: a. Energy Star Qualified B. Apartment Kitchens: 1. Model: Air King #ES308ADA 2. Quantity: Sixty (60), (one (1) per apartment) 3. Finish: Stainless Steel 4. Features: Two Speed Fan & Cooktop Lighting (At Accessible Apartments: install separate switches at ADA height for Range Hood Fan & Light, see Electrical Drawings). 5. Certifications: a. Energy Star Qualified 2.5 MICROWAVE OVEN – Countertop A. Community Kitchen 013 & Staff Break Room 014: 1. Model: GE #PEB9159DJSS 2. Quantity: Two (2), (one (1) per room) 3. Finish: Stainless Steel 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant B. Select Apartment Kitchens (exact locations to be determined by Owner): 1. Model: GE #PEM31DFBB 2. Quantity: Thirty-Eight (38), (one (1) per apartment at 38 apartment units selected by Owner) 3. Finish: Black 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant 2.6 WASHER A. Laundry 017: 1. Model: Maytag #MHW5630HW 2. Quantity: Six (6) 3. Finish: White 4. Pedestal: Maytag #XHP1000XW (10” Pedestal) - Quantity: Four (4) – One (1) on each of 4 NonAccessible Washers Lakeview Health Services APPLIANCES 113000-3 West End Heights 5. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified 2.7 DRYER A. Laundry 017: 1. Model: Maytag #MED8630HW (Gas) 2. Quantity: Six (6) 3. Finish: White 4. Pedestal: Maytag #XHP1000XW (10” Pedestal) - Quantity: Four (4) – One (1) on each of 4 NonAccessible Dryers 5. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified 2.8 RANGE HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION DEVICE – AUTOMATIC COOKTOP FIRE SUPPRESSION A. Community Kitchen 013: 1. Model: StoveTop FireStop - Rangehood (Automatic Cooktop Fire Suppression) 2. Quantity: Two (2), (two (2) per range hood) 3. Installation: Install at underside of range hood per manufacturer’s requirements. B. Apartment Kitchens: 1. Model: StoveTop FireStop - Rangehood (Automatic Cooktop Fire Suppression) 2. Quantity: One-hundred-and twenty (120), (two (2) per range hood) 3. Installation: Install at underside of range hood per manufacturer’s requirements. 2.9 DISHWASHER A. Community Kitchen 013: 1. GE Energy Star Dishwasher with Hidden Controls, Model No.GDT680SGHSS 2. Quantity: One (1) 3. Color: Stainless Steel. 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified B. Apartment Kitchens: 1. Frigidaire Model No.FDB2410HIB or equal. 2. Quantity: Sixty (60), (one (1) per apartment) 3. Color: Black. 4. Certifications: a. ADA Compliant b. Energy Star Qualified PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering Appliances; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Schedule of all Appliances showing quantities and locations for each device. 2. Shop Drawings of all Appliances showing mounting heights & blocking locations for each device. 3. Product Data for each Appliance. 4. Installation Manuals for each Appliance. 5. Product Warranties for all Appliances. 6. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies of each color sample. Lakeview Health Services APPLIANCES 113000-4 West End Heights PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall provide & install all appliances as specified above, upon Architect’s approval (see Section 3.1 Submittals). Coordinate installation of all appliances with associated cabinetry, plumbing, electrical, & HVAC work as required. Install all solid blocking as required to accommodate the installation of all appliances, as required. All appliances should be installed per manufacturer’s requirements. Upon project completion: all appliances shall be clean & undamaged; turn over to Owner all Operations & Maintenance Manuals and Manufacturer’s Warranties. 4.2 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturers’ standard warranties for all appliances prescribed herein. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services VINYL WINDOW BLINDS 122113-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. 2" Horizontal Vinyl Blinds 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s MSDS. B. Product Sample: Submit working hand sample or mock up blind as required. C. Color Sample: Submit two 6" samples of vinyl slat indicating color and dimensions. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product to be delivered in manufacturer’s original packaging. B. Products to be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating mechanisms. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat to prevent sagging and twisting of packaging. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Springs Window Fashions or approved equivalent. B. Substitutions Request: Submit for Architect review. 2.2 HORIZONTAL BLINDS A. Product: Graber 2” Horizontal Vinyl (PVC) Blinds B. Color: White C. Headrail: 1 5/8" high x 2 1/4" wide x .022” thick U-shaped steel with 1/8” light blocking lip on the bottom centerline. The steel finishing process includes phosphate treatment for corrosion resistance, a chrome-free sealer, a low HAP urethane primer and a topcoat with low HAP polyester baked enamel. D. Bottomrail: Shall be extruded foam PVC 3/4” high by 2” wide. E. Slats: Slats shall be rigid; UV stabilized crowned PVC, nominally 2”wide and .045”thick. Slat edges are straight cut. Slats meet the requirement of NFPA 701 Test Method 1-2004 edition. F. Wand tilter. Tilt cords shall be secured to pulley and treated with tassels at tilt end. G. Cord lock shall be metal of a snap-in design incorporating a floating shaft- type locking pin. Cord lock shall incorporate a crash proof safety-feature that will lock blind automatically upon release of cord. End of lift cords will be treated with plastic tassels. H. Braided ladder shall be made of 100% high tenacity polyester incorporating two extra strength rungs per ladder to support slats. Ladder will provide 44mm distance between slats. Options: Cloth Tape: White 2.3 FABRICATION A. Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by on-site measurement. Calculate blind dimensions to fit within specified tolerances. B. Fabricate blinds to fill openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb. Locate blind divisions at mullions. C. Blinds shall be fabricated according to specifications and accurate to tolerance established by SWF engineering standards. D. Fabricate blinds to fill all exterior window openings indicated on drawings. Refer to Window Schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that the area in which the blinds are to be installed is free of conditions that interfere with blind installation and operations. Begin blind installation only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions except as otherwise specified herein. B. Install blinds with adequate clearance to permit smooth operation of the blinds. C. Set tilt and lift controls. Demonstrate blinds to be in smooth, uniform working order. Lakeview Health Services VINYL WINDOW BLINDS 122113-2 West End Heights 3.3 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. Maintain and clean blinds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services MANUAL CLUTCH OPERATED 122413-1 West End Heights WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Manual clutch operated, roll-up fabric window shades including mounting and operating hardware. B. Related sections: 1. Division 8 – Windows, Storefront. 2. Division 9 - Gypsum Board Sheathing. 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: 1. List of proposed products and product data. 2. Shop drawings showing window openings, dimensions, and attachment method. 3. Samples [for selection by Architect]: a. Fabrics. b. Metal finishes. 4. Window Shade Schedule listing rooms, field verified window dimensions, quantities, type of shade, fabric, and color. 5. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver window shades until building is enclosed and construction within spaces where shades will be installed is substantially complete. B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact. C. Label containers and shades according to Window Shade Schedule. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Provide 10 years warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for the Rollease® clutch operating mechanism and a 1-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship on all other shade parts and fabric. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Drapery Industries Inc., 180 St. Paul St., Rochester, NY 14604, (585) 232-2080 B. Architect Approved Equal. 2.2 MANUAL CLUTCH OPERATED WINDOW SHADES A. Type: Manual clutch operated, vertical roll-up, fabric window shade with stainless steel bead chain and Rollease® clutch operating mechanism, mounting brackets, fasteners, and other components necessary for complete installation; Manual Clutch operated as manufactured by Drapery Industries, Inc. B. Method of installation: Mounted inside of window opening and extending from head to sill and jamb to jamb. C. Operation: Bead chain and clutch operating mechanism allowing shade to stop when chain is released. Designed never to need adjustment or lubrication. Provide preset limit stops to prevent shade from being raised or lowered too far. 1. Clutch mechanism: Fabricated from high carbon steel and molded fiberglass reinforced polyester or injected molded nylon. 2. Control loop: #10 Stainless steel bead chain hanging at side of window. 3. Chain location: Right hand side when facing window from interior, unless otherwise indicated. D. Shade size: See window schedule and interior elevations for locations and sizes. Lakeview Health Services MANUAL CLUTCH OPERATED 122413-2 West End Heights WINDOW SHADES E. Roller: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Diameter, wall thickness, and material selected by manufacturer to accommodate shade fabric, type and size. Interior wall of the extruded aluminum tube shall have a key-way that extends the entire length of the tube, and prevents the clutch mechanism from slipping. Provide roller idler assembly of molded nylon designed to cradle into zinc plated bracket with locking cam. K. Fabric shall be fastened to the roller with high-tensile strength, double-sided adhesive strip applied for exact and firm mounting of the fabric band. The fabric cloth band shall be cut a minimum of 16 inches greater than the opening and applied to the roller to cover the exposed aluminum roller tube and smooth out the starting seam. G. Brackets: Plated stamped steel suitable for mounting to ceiling, wall or jamb (attachment type shall be selected by Architect). Provide size compatible with roller size and with fasteners appropriate for installation conditions. I. Shade slat: Minimum 1/8 by 1 ½ inch (3.175 mm by 38 mm) aluminum slat encased in welded stitch-free seamed bottom hem. J. Metal valance: No valances will be required for this project. 2.3 FABRIC SELECTIONS A. Shade material: Solarweave vinyl coated(64%) fiberglass(36%) core cloth, fade and peel resistance. Fabric shall be inherently flame resistant (NFPA-701-99 & California U.S. Title #19). Colors shall be selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer's colors. Breaking strength to be 290# warp and 280# fill direction, with a finished weight of 12.7 oz. per square yard. a. Fabric shall be equal to 3G-Mermet Company, M-Screen #8503 window shade material, with a 3% openness factor (color as selected by Architect). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Field verify all window dimensions prior to fabrication. B. Coordinate requirements for blocking, construction of shade pockets, and structural supports to ensure adequate means for installation of window shades. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install window shades at locations indicated on Drawings (Window and Storefront Schedules) and approved Window Shade Schedule. B. Comply with shade manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate shade through complete cycle of lowering, stopping, and raising to ensure proper operation. Adjust as required for smooth operation. B. Clean shade assemblies and protect from damage from construction operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. 3.4 WINDOW SHADE SCHEDULE A. Provide shades at locations indicated on Window Schedule & Storefront Schedule. Refer to the Exterior Elevations, Sections, Window Schedule and Storefront Schedule for additional dimensional information. Lakeview Health Services MANUAL CLUTCH OPERATED 122413-3 West End Heights WINDOW SHADES END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services RECESSED WALK-OFF MAT 124813-1 West End Heights PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Construction Documents B. Division 3 Concrete. C. Division 6 Rough Carpentry 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes Recessed Grating System. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Babcock-Davis 1. Mailing Address: 9300 73rd Avenue North, Brooklyn Park, MN 55428 2. Phone: 1.888.412.3726 3. Website: babcokdavis.com 2.2 RECESSED WALK-OFF MAT – RCW1 (See Material Legend and Finish Schedules): A. Model: Babcock-Davis: GrateDesign Roll-up Grate 1. Entrance system floor grate a. Aluminum Rail: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6 b. Rail Finish: Rail finish shall be supplied in mill (standard) or one of 10 optional colors as offered by manufacturer. (Call factory for custom colors). c. Rail Spacing: 1-1/2" (38.1MM) on center. d. Construction: Hollow extrusion (not U shape) rails joined by low-density polyethylene (LDPE) hinge and cushion retained in "captive" aluminum tread port, with drainage holes to allow debris and moisture to flow through grate. Tread hinges to be secured with rigid PVC end cap. Fillers shall be serrated black vinyl for use for use in creating a snug fit for the grate. e. Rolling load: 1,000 lbs /wheel f. Uniform load performance is 80,000 lbs/sq ft. g. Tread Insert: 100% nylon fiber fusion bonded to backing and mechanically secured to tread rails h. Fasteners: Non-corrosive screws and anchors for securing frames together and to floors. i. Tread Inserts: GrateDesign® Roll-up Grate with recycled rubber tread insert: ECO Surfaces® Recycled Rubber - High slip resistant rubber (SC of 90) insert manufactured with recycled rubber and EPDM (64%-92% dependent on color chosen). j. Finish: Midnight Black. B. Entrance system grate frame 1. Aluminum Frame: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 2. Frame Finish: Finish shall be supplied in mill finish C. Mounting: 1. LBC, Level Bed, cast-in place frame, shall be shall 1 3/8” (34.9 mm) deep with 1/2" (12.7mm) exposed surface. PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to ordering any material; Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Material Safety Data 2. Product Data 3. Product Care & Maintenance 4. Product Warranty 5. Physical Samples of Color Finishes for Architect’s review. Please submit two (2) copies if each color sample. Lakeview Health Services RECESSED WALK-OFF MAT 124813-2 West End Heights PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor grates and frames from one source and from a single manufacturer. B. Rolling Load: 1,000 lbs/wheel C. Uniform load performance of 80,000 lbs/sq ft. 4.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. coordinate with concrete work so that products are available for placing integrally with floor slabs. 4.3 WARRANTY A. Floor mats and frames shall be fabricated free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, and the manufacturer shall offer a 2-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Products must be placed on a flat and level substrate. Substrate shall meet tolerance of 1/8" (3.2mm) over 10 feet (3.28M) in accordance with ACI 302. B. Examine the substrates and conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4.5 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, at locations shown and with top of products level with adjoining finished flooring where applicable. B. Coordinate top of product surfaces with swinging doors to provide under-door clearance. 1. Provide necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment of frames to concrete. 2. For installation in terrazzo flooring, contact manufacturer. 4.6 PROTECTION A. Upon completion of frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in grate recesses, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion. B. Install product when no further wheeled construction traffic will occur and wet type operations including painting and decorating are complete. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services SITE FURNISHINGS - 129300 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Bollards. 2. Bicycle racks. 3. Pergola structure B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete footings. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation for installation of concrete footings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Size: Not less than 6-inch- (152-mm-) long linear components and 4-inch- (102-mm-) square sheet components. D. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site furnishing(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following: 1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53, or electric-resistancewelded pipe complying with ASTM A 135. 3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500; zinc coated internally and externally. 5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. B. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following: 1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666. 2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M. 3. Tubing: ASTM A 554. C. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant. 1. Recycled Polyethylene: Fabricated from not less than 66 percent recycled postconsumer waste by weight and 23 percent recycled pre-consumer waste HDPE. D. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Stainless steel. Lakeview Health Services SITE FURNISHINGS - 129300 PAGE 2 West End Heights E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. F. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. G. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc coating applied to components after fabrication: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or ASTM A 924/A 924M. 2.2 BOLLARD A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer: Reliance Foundry 2. Product: R-1007-04 Steel Pipe Security Bollard 3. Material: ASTM 500 B Structural grade steel 4. Height: 84” 5. Diameter: 4.5” 6. Weight: 76 lbs. 7. Finish: Gray Primer 8. Installation: Footing and fill per manufacturer’s written instructions 2.3 BOLLARD COVER A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer: Reliance Foundry 2. Product: R-7301 Stainless Steel Bollard Cover 3. Material: 316 Grade Stainless Steel 4. Height: 36” 5. Diameter: 6.25” 6. Weight: 25 lbs. 7. Mounting: Cover Spray Foam per manufracture’s written instructions 8. Color: Stainless Steel - Brushed 2.4 BICYCLE RACKS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer: DuMor, Inc. 2. Product: Bike Rack 83 Series. a. Pre-consumer recycled content: 7.40% b. Post-consumer recycled content: 24.60% 3. Mounting: S-2 surface mount. 4. Finish: Galvanized and powder coated. 5. Color: Match Landscape Forms “Steel” or “Titanium.” 2.5 PERGOLA STRUCTURE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer: StreetLife 2. Model: Rough & Ready Shade 3. Modual Qty: Refer to Drawings 4. Dimensions: Refer to Drawings 5. Options: None 6. Shop Drawings: To be coordinated with StreetLife prior to submittal to Landscape Architect Lakeview Health Services SITE FURNISHINGS - 129300 PAGE 3 West End Heights 2.6 FABRICATION A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action. B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, fullpenetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped. E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed. C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing site furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component. END OF SECTION 129300 Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-1 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric traction passenger elevators. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Div. 3 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Elevator pits. B. Div. 4 – Masonry Units (Unit Masonry): Setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry for guide-rail brackets. C. Div. 5 – Metal Stairs Structural Steel (Structural Steel Framing): Support steel, divider beams, and hoist beams. D. Div. 6 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Temporary platform assembly. E. Div. 7 – Cementitious Waterproofing: Waterproofing of elevator pit. F. Div. 28 – Detection and Alarm (Fire Detection and Alarm): Heat, smoke, and products of combustion sensing devices, fire alarm signal lines to contacts in machine space. G. Div. 26 – Wiring Methods (Common Work Results for Electrical): Light outlets, convenience outlets, light switches, and conduits. H. Div. 26 – Switchboards, Panelboards, and Control Centers (Switchboards and Panelboards): Disconnect switches. I. Div. 26 – Lighting: Light fixtures. J. Div. 22 – Sump Pumps: For sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits. K. Div. 27 – Communications Horizontal Cabling: For Telephone service for elevators and for Internet connection to elevator controllers for remote monitoring. L. Div. 27 – Telephone and Intercommunication Equipment (Voice Communications): Telephone outlets and elevator telephones. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A17.1/CAN/CSA B44 – Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. B. ADAAG – Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. D. ANSI/NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows. E. ANSI/UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. CAN/CSA C22.1 – Canadian Electrical Code. G. Model and Local Building Codes H. ISO 9001: 2000 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Arrange elevator components in control closet or machinery space so equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced with minimal disturbance to other equipment and components. B. Where permitted by code, provide all elevator equipment including controls, drives, transformers, and rescue features within the elevator hoistway. C. Elevator shall meet the accessible means of egress requirements. Elevator shall comply with the emergency operation and signaling device requirements of Section 2.27 of ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer/installer’s product data, including, 1. Descriptive brochures or detail drawings of car and hall fixtures, cab ceilings, and product features. 2. Power Information: Horsepower, starting current, running current, machine and control heat release, and electrical requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer/installer’s shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating location of equipment, loads, dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, fabrication, fasteners, hardware, finish, options, accessories, and other information to render totally functional elevators. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer/installer’s samples of standard colors and finishes of finish materials. D. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer/installer’s operation and maintenance manual; including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions; trouble shooting guide; renewal parts catalogs; and electrical wiring diagrams. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer/installer’s standard warranty. Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-2 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Installer’s Qualifications: Specialize in manufacturing and installing elevator equipment, with a minimum of 10 years successful experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Elevator design, clearances, construction, workmanship, materials, and installation, unless specified otherwise, shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1, handicap accessibility, Americans with Disabilities Act, and other codes having legal jurisdiction. 2. ANSI/ASME A17.1 shall govern, except where codes having legal jurisdiction include more rigid requirements or conflict with ANSI/ASME A17.1. 3. Elevator shall follow design and manufacturing procedures certified in accordance with ISO 9001-2000 to meet product and service requirements for quality assurance for new products. 4. Where product is in variance to the published ANSI/ASME A17.1 model code, provide a 3rd party AECO certification demonstrating equivalent function, safety, and performance. C. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Convene pre-installation meeting before start of installation of elevators. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, and elevator manufacturer/installer. 3. Review examination, installation, field quality control, adjusting, cleaning, protection, and coordination with other work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer/installer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer/installer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer/installer’s instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Electrical Power: 1. Owner will arrange for temporary 220 VAC, single-phase, 60 Hz., GFCI-protected electricity to be available for installation of elevator components. 2. Comply with Section 015100 – Temporary Utilities. B. Installation of the Elevator: 1. General Contractor will provide permanent three-phase power prior to installation start. 2. General Contractor will provide clear, rollable access to a 20’ x 10’ secure and dry storage area prior to delivery. 3. General Contractor will provide a clean, dry, and complete hoistway along with temporary installation platform and all required OSHA-compliant barricades prior to delivery. C. Temporary Use of Elevator: 1. Owner will negotiate with manufacturer/installer for temporary use of elevator, if required. 2. Temporary use of elevator shall be in accordance with terms and conditions of manufacturer/installer’s temporary acceptance form. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer/installer shall guarantee materials and workmanship of equipment installed under these specifications and make good, defects not due to ordinary wear or to improper use, which may develop within 1 year after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Elevator maintenance service shall be performed by elevator manufacturer/installer. B. Elevators shall receive regular maintenance on each unit for period of 12 months after completion of work specified herein or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. C. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work including necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and replacing parts to keep elevators in operation, except parts that require Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-3 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS replacement because of accidents, vandalism, misuse, or negligence by parties other than manufacturer/installer. D. Manufacturer/installer shall perform all Work, except emergency minor adjustment call-back service, during regular working hours. Manufacturer/installer shall provide emergency minor adjustment callback service, during regular working hours. E. Should Owner request that examinations, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repairs, replacements, or emergency minor adjustment call-back service, unless specified herein, be performed on other than manufacturer/installer’s regular working hours of regular working days, manufacturer/installer shall absorb straight-time labor charges and Owner will compensate manufacturer/installer for overtime premium, travel time, and expense at normal billing rates. F. Elevator Control System: 1. Include built-in remote diagnostic module to relay constant status of elevators and control system to a 24-hour, 7-days-a-week central-monitoring facility. 2. Remote Monitoring Device: Transmit information on current status of elevators, including malfunctions, system errors, and shutdown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER A. Schindler Elevator Corporation, Website www.us.schindler.com. B. Elevator shall be installed by elevator manufacturer. 2.2 ELEVATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS A. Electric Traction Passenger Elevators: Basis of design is the Schindler 3300 Gearless Traction Elevator. B. Elevator Equipment Summary: 1. Application: Machine Room Less (MRL) 2. Counterweight Location: Side 3. Machine Location: Top of the hoistway mounted on car and counterweight guide rails 4. Control Space Location: Top landing entrance frame or entrance frame at one floor below the top landing 5. Service: General Purpose Passenger 6. Quantity: 1 Unit 7. Capacity: 3000 lbs 8. Speed: 150 fpm 9. Travel: 49' 4" (Verify in field) 10. Landings: 5 11. Front Openings: 5 12. Rear Openings: 0 13. Operation: Microprocessor Single Car Automatic Operation 14. Clear Inside Dimensions: 6'-9 3/8" Wide X 4'-4 4/8" Deep 15. Cab Height: 7' 9" 16. Guide Rails: Equivalent to 12 lb. per foot 17. Entrance Type and Width: Two Speed, Front and Back Opening 3' 6" Wide X 7' 0" High doors 18. Entrance Height: 7'-0" 19. Power Supply: 208 Volts 3 Phase 60 Hz C. Performance: 1. Car Speed: -10% to +5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of travel. 2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of rated load per code. D. Ride Quality: 1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 15 mg 3. Vertical Jerk (maximum): 2 ft/sec^3 4. Acceleration (maximum): 1.6 ft/sec^2 5. In Car Noise: 53-60 dB(A) 6. Stopping Accuracy: ±5mm 7. Starts per hour (maximum): 180 E. Elevator Operation: Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-4 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS 1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor based controller, operation shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. When all calls have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served. 2. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide reprogrammable group automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching algorithm designed to minimize passenger waiting time. F. Operating Features - Standard: 1. Door Light Curtain Protection 2. Static AC Drive 3. Phase Monitor Relay 4. Cab Overload with Indicator 5. Load-weighing 6. Central Alarm 7. Remote Monitoring 8. Firefighter’s Operation 9. Automatic Evacuation a. When the main line power is lost for longer than 5 seconds the emergency battery power supply provides power automatically to the elevator controller. If the car is at a floor when the power fails, it remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If the car is between floors, it is raised or lowered to the first available landing, opens its doors, and shuts down. 10. Independent Service G. Operating Features - Optional: 1. Shunt Trip Protection 2.3 EQUIPMENT: CONTROL COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SPACE A. Controller: Provide microprocessor based control system to perform all of the functions of safe elevator operation, as well as perform car and group operational control. 1. All high voltage (110v or above) contact points inside the inspection and test panel shall be protected from accidental contact in a situation where the access panels are open. 2. The controller shall be distributed throughout the elevator system located in the overhead, cab and inspection and test panel. The inverter will be mounted in the overhead adjacent to the hoist machine and an inspection and test panel will be located in the door jamb at the top floor or one floor below the top floor. No elevator equipment mechanical rooms or closets are required. 3. Provide multi-bus control architecture to reduce cabling, material and waste. B. Drive: Provide a Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC Closed Loop drive system. Provide stable start without high peak current, quickly reaching a low energy consumption level. C. Inspection and Test Panel: Integrated control equipment, main inspection and test panel in door frame at top level served or at one floor below the top level served. 2.4 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS A. Machine: 1. Gearless asynchronous AC motor with integral drive sheave, service and emergency brakes. 2. Design machine to enable direct power transfer, thereby avoiding loss of power. 3. Design machine to be compact, lightweight and durable to optimize material usage and save space. 4. Mount to structural support channels on top of guide rail system as applicable in hoistway overhead. B. Governor: 1. Tension type over-speed governor with remote manual reset. 2. Mount to structural support channels as applicable in hoistway overhead. C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Compression spring type buffers to meet code. D. Hoistway Operating Devices: 1. Emergency Stop switch in the pit. 2. Terminal stopping switches. 3. Emergency stop switch on the machine. E. Positioning System: System consisting of proximity sensors and door zone vanes. Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-5 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Provide Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners. Side counterweight arrangements shall have a dual purpose bracket that combines both counterweight guide rails, and one of the car guide rails to building fastening. G. Suspension System: Non circular Elastomeric coated suspension media with high tensile grade steel cords. H. Governor rope: Steel wire rope with 6 mm diameter. 2.5 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Doors and Frames: 1. UL rated with required fire rating. 2. Doors: Rigid flush panel construction with reinforcement ribs. 3. Frames: Securely fasten at corners to form unit frame. Frames shall be bolted. B. Finish: 1. Exposed Areas of Corridor Frames: Stainless Steel - All Floors 2. Doors: Stainless Steel - All Floors 3. Sills: Aluminum - All Floors C. Entrance Markings and Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile markings on both jambs, at all floors. Plate Mounting: Refer to manufacturer drawings. 2.6 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS A. Car Frame and Safety: Provide car frame with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. The safety shall be integral to the car frame and shall be flexible guide clamp type. B. Platform: Provide platform of steel construction with plywood subfloor and aluminum threshold. C. Car Guides: Provide sliding guide shoes mounted to top and bottom of both car and counterweight frame. Arrange each guide shoe assembly to maintain constant contact on the rail surfaces. Provide retainers in areas with Seismic design requirements. D. Provide central guiding system to reduce mechanical friction and energy consumption. E. Steel Cab: 1. Fire rating: Provide Class B fire rating for cab, or Class A fire rating where required by local Code. 2. Design cab to comply with LEED Indoor Environmental Quality requirements through use of Low-Emitting Materials on walls, ceiling and subflooring. 3. Car wall finish: Steel Plastic Laminate Finish selected from manufacturer’s standard selections. 4. Base and frieze: Aluminum. 5. Car front finish: Brushed stainless steel. 6. Car door finish: Brushed stainless steel. 7. Ceiling: Canopy ceiling, finished in Painted Silver Metallic With Compact Fluorescent Lighting. Provide lighting consisting of four compact fluorescent energy saving lights located in two semi-oval lateral cutouts located on the center-sides of the cab ceiling, Lexan lens cover. 8. Handrail: 1-3/8" Round And Curved Brushed Aluminum. Locate on Rear & Side Walls. 9. Flooring: By others. Not to exceed 3/8” finished depth. 10. Ventilation: Provide one-speed fan in canopy. 11. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide an emergency power unit employing a 12 volt sealed rechargeable battery and static circuits to illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure. 12. Emergency Siren: Provide siren mounted on top of the car that is activated when the Alarm button in the car operating panel is engaged. 13. Emergency Exit Switch: Provide an electrical contact to open the safety circuit when the emergency car top exit is opened. When the exit door is opened, the top exit switch shall signal the control and the car will be unable to move. 14. Emergency Exit Lock: Provide an emergency exit lock where required by local code. 15. Emergency Exit Guard: Provide emergency exit guard on top of car when required for hoistway wall to platform clearance exceeds 12” or for multiple cars in hoistway. 2.7 DOOR OPERATOR AND REOPENING DEVICES A. Door Operator: Provide a closed loop VVVF high performance door operator with frequency controlled drive for fast and reliable operation to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-6 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS B. In case of interruption or failure of electric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accordance with applicable code. Provide emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing as required by local code. C. Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the respective landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or immediately upon pressing of a car button. Provide door open button in the car operating panel. Momentary pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval. D. Provide door hangers and tracks for each car and hoistway door. Contour tracks to match the hanger sheaves. Design hangers for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed for life bearings. E. Electronic Door Safety Device: Equip car doors with concealed transmitter and receiver infrared beam devices to detect presence of object in process of passing through hoistway entrance and car doorway (light curtain device). 1. Use multi-beam scanning without moving parts to detect obstructions in door opening. 2. Detector Device: Prevent doors from closing, or if they have already started closing, cause doors to reopen and remain open while object is within detection zone. 3. Horizontal Beams: Minimum of 33 infra red beams to fill doorway from ground level to a height of 6 feet. 2.8 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES A. Elevator shall meet the accessible means of egress requirements. Elevator shall comply with the emergency operation and signaling device requirements of Section 2.27 of ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Car Operating Panel: Provide a car operating panel with all push buttons, key switches and message indicators for elevator operation. 1. Full height car operating panel shall be surface-mounted on front return. 2. Comply with handicap requirements. 3. Push Buttons: Mechanical, illuminating using long-lasting LEDs for each floor served. 4. Emergency Buttons: Provide in accordance with code. Emergency alarm button, door open and door close buttons. C. Features of the Car Operating Panel Shall Include: 1. Audible chime to signal that the car is either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator. 2. Raised markings and Braille provided to the left hand side of each push button. 3. Car Lantern: Provide LED illuminated car lantern with direction arrows to comply with local code when hall lanterns are not provided. 4. Door open and close push buttons. 5. Firefighter’s hat and Phase 2 Key-switch 6. Inspection key-switch. 7. Key-switch for optional Independent Service Operation 8. Illuminated alarm button with raised marking. 9. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number. 10. Help Button: Activation of help button will initiate two-way communication between car and a location inside the building, switching over to alternate location if call is unanswered, where personnel are available to take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement. 11. Certificate Frame. D. Hall Fixtures: Provide hall fixtures with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. 1. Push buttons: Metallic tactile push buttons, up button and down button at intermediate floors, single button at each terminal floor. 2. Height: Comply with handicap requirements. 3. Illumination: Illuminating using long-lasting low power LEDs. E. Hall Lanterns and Position Indicators. 1. LED illuminated direction arrows with audible and visible call acknowledgement. F. Hoistway access switches: Provide key-switch at top and/or bottom floor in entrance jamb as required by local code. G. Firefighter’s Phase 1 Service: Key switch in brushed stainless steel cover plate. Lakeview Health Services ELECTRIC TRACTION 142123-7 West End Heights PASSENGER ELEVATORS H. Fixture Cover Plates: For push buttons, hall lanterns and position indicators, resistant white backprinted glass, no screws required for mounting. Provide stainless steel cover plates for Firefighter's Phase I switch and hoistway access switches, with tamper resistant screws in same finish. I. Mounting: Mount hall fixtures in entrance frames. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, and pits before starting elevator installation. B. Verify hoistway, pit, overhead, and openings are of correct size, within tolerances, and are ready for work of this section. C. Verify walls are plumb where openings occur and ready for entrance sill installation. Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required. D. Verify hoistway is clear and plumb, with variations not to exceed -0 to +1 inch at any point. Verify projections greater than 4” must be beveled not less than 75 degrees from horizontal. No negative tolerance is permitted for minimum hoistway dimensions. E. Verify minimum 2-hour fire-resistance rating of hatch walls. F. Notify Architect in writing of dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to proper installation or performance of elevators. G. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to manufacturer/installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install elevators in accordance with manufacturer/installer’s instructions and ANSI/ASME A17.1. B. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings, and aligned with plumb hoistway lines. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests of elevator as required by ANSI/ASME A17.1 and governing codes. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust elevators for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer/installer’s instructions. B. Adjust elevators for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. C. Adjust doors to prevent opening of doors at landing on corridor side, unless car is at rest at that landing, or is in leveling zone and stopping at that landing. D. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to within 1/4 inch of landing. E. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer/installer’s instructions and as approved by Architect. F. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean elevators promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer/installer’s instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed elevators from damage during construction in accordance with the negotiated temporary use agreement between Owner and manufacturer’s installer. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 210010 – BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Instructions to Bidders apply to this section and all other sections of Division 21. 1.2 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES A. Electronic CAD Floor Plan Backgrounds 1. Turner Engineering, PC cannot provide architectural floor plan backgrounds. Contact the project architect to obtain CAD files of the building floor plans. B. Electronic Engineering CAD Files 1. If engineering CAD files are required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide these files at a cost of $50 per drawing. These files will be provided in .dwg or .dgn format, as requested. Title blocks and all reference to Turner Engineering, PC, the architect, or other design professionals will be removed from these electronic files. 2. To request these files, go to www.turnerengineering.com. There is an electronic request form under the “Contractor Requests” heading. Fill out this form and submit the form electronically. Send a check made out to “Turner Engineering, PC” for the proper amount. When we have received the completed form and the check, we will e-mail the electronic files to the e-mail address indicated on the form. 3. Turner Engineering, PC does not assume any responsibility for the electronic files, nor for the accuracy of the floor plans. C. Electronic Engineering Portable Document Files (pdf) 1. If Portable Document Files (.pdf) are required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide these files at a cost of $50 per drawing. 2. To request these files, please go to www.turnerengineering.com. There is an electronic request form under the “Contractor Requests” heading. Fill out this form and submit the form electronically. Send a check made out to “Turner Engineering, PC” for the proper amount. When we have received the completed form and the check, we will e-mail the electronic files to the e-mail address indicated on the form. 3. Turner Engineering, PC does not assume any responsibility for the electronic files, nor for the accuracy of the floor plans. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include in bid all labor, materials, tools, plant, transportation, excavation, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, taxes and all necessary and related items required to provide complete and operational systems shown and described. B. References to codes and Standards called for in the Contract Documents mean the latest edition, amendment and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of these Contract Documents. C. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this section: 1. Miscellaneous Supports 2. Access Doors and Panels 3. Fire Stopping 4. Flashing and Sealing 5. Cutting and Patching D. Contract shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Fire Protection (Sprinkler). a. New work. b. As part of the design process and prior to the start of the design, provide separate verification of water supply characteristics including the performance of flow tests. c. Coordination with the Architect and Owner on the location of connections, drains, valves or other system components. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-2 West End Heights 2 1.4 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. B. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project: 1. 2015 International Building Code 2. 2015 International Plumbing Code 3. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations 4. New York State Department of Health 5. New York State Homes and Community Renewal Design Handbook (2018) 6. ASHRAE Standard 62 7. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA 8. National Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 9. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 10. Local Codes and Ordinances for City of Ithaca 11. NEMA Standards 12. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 13. Factory Mutual and/or Owner’s Insurance Carrier 14. New York Board of Fire Underwriters 15. Combustion Toxicity Amendment to the New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code 16. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - All chapters 17. City of Ithaca Plumbing Department 1.5 LICENSING & PERMITS A. The Contractor shall hold a license to perform the work as issued by New York State. B. Apply for and obtain all required permits and inspections, include costs for all fees and charges within bid. C. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. 1.6 GLOSSARY ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AGA American Gas Association AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code AWWA American Water Works Association EIA Electronic Industries Association FCC Federal Communications Commission FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-3 West End Heights 3 ISO International Standards Organization NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental Conservation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SBI Steel Boiler Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association TIA Telecommunications Industry Association UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 1.7 DEFINITIONS Approved / Approval Written permission to use a material or system. As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution specified/shown in the contract documents. Code Requirements Minimum requirements. Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade. Design Equipment Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Design Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Equal or Equivalent Equally acceptable as determined by Owner’s Representative. Exposed Work not identified as concealed. Final Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certification by Owner's Representative. Furnish Supply and deliver to installation location. Furnished by Others Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install. Inspection Visual observations by Owner's Site Representative. Install Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use. Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency. Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Or Approved Equal Approved equal or equivalent as determined by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s Representative The Prime Professional Prime Professional Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-4 West End Heights 4 services. Provide Furnish, install and connect ready for use. Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test, and install ready for use. Replace Remove and provide new item. Review A general contractual conformance check of specified products. Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation. Satisfactory As specified in contract documents. Site Representative Construction Manager or Owner's Inspector at the work site. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional definitions. 1.8 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment". Other manufacturers are listed as acceptable, and may be submitted. If the Contractor elects to use one of the listed makes other than "design equipment," submit detailed drawings, indicating proposed installation of equipment. Show maintenance clearances, service removal space required, and other pertinent revisions to the design arrangement. If the submitted equipment is larger than the design make equipment, verify the equipment will physically fit in the space provided, and make all necessary modifications required to install the equipment. Make required changes in the work of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Provide larger electrical feeders, circuit breakers, equipment, additional control devices and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation, and assume responsibility for proper location of roughing and connections by other trades. Remove and replace door frames, access doors, walls ceilings or floors required to install other than design make equipment. If revised arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design equipment" item which conforms to contract documents. 1.9 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, and fixtures. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly and currently engaged in the production of equipment and accessories provided. The design and size of each item of equipment provided for this project needs to have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three (3) installations for not less than three (3) years. B. Suppliers of equipment must have factory trained and authorized personnel for the service of all equipment provided. C. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the contract documents shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for resolution. D. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for the installation and application of joint sealers, flashing, access panels, cutting and patching. E. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Materials That Meet the Following Minimum Requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-5 West End Heights 5 accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the N.E.C. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these requirements. 5. Communications equipment shall meet all FCC Regulations 6. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected. 7. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the Specifications. 8. Catalog numbers are sometimes listed in the specifications to aid selection of the equipment, and are for reference only. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of quality, function, dimensions and appearance that must be met by any proposed substitution. B. Proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each request shall include the name of the proposed material equipment being substituted, cut sheets, installation drawings, performance and test data and warranties. At that time the equipment or will be evaluated and if determined to be acceptable an Addendum will be issued to all bidders. C. Requests for substitution shall be made only by a Bidder. Requests for substitution from sales representatives, vendors or suppliers are not acceptable. 2.3 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements. B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies which include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit. 1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer. 2. Constituent parts which are alike shall be product of a single manufacturer. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service. 4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly. C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. D. Major items of equipment which serve the same function must be the same make and model. Exception will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met. 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals for all equipment and materials to be furnished and installed as part of this contract. B. Submittals shall be provided with a cover sheet indicating the date, project name, prime contractor; description of equipment submitted. C. All products specified in individual Division 26 section shall be submitted at the same time. Incomplete or un-organized submittals will not be accepted. Unreadable submittals will be rejected. D. Where equipment submitted deviates from the equipment specified, provide a letter listing all equipment deviations. E. The Contractor is responsible for confirming all quantities, electrical connections, working clearances, and dimensions, determining methods of construction, and coordinating the work with other trades. F. Corrections or comments made on the Submittals during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. 2.5 U.L. LISTING Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-6 West End Heights 6 A. Equipment shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), or other approved agency-listing/label. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with the National Electric Code and listed by U.L. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-7 West End Heights 7 2.6 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result. 2.7 SPECIAL TOOLS A. If any part of equipment requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment or maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on commercial tool market, it shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Steel access doors and Frames shall be factory fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush. B. Construction: 1. Frames: a. 16 gage steel with 1 inch wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable masonry anchors for units installed in masonry, pre-cast, cast in place concrete, ceramic tile b. 16-gage steel, perforated flanges with bead for gypsum or plaster wall board. c. 16-gage steel with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame for full bed plaster applications. 2. Access Doors: a. Provide 14 gage sheet steel flush panel doors with concealed continuous piano hinge factory installed, primed and painted, set to open 175 degrees. b. Provide fire rated, insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self closing mechanism rated for 1½ hour “B” labeled, in fire rated partitions. 3. Provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks on all access doors. 2.9 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4" high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout. 2.10 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Walls and Floor Assemblies shall be listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. Thomas & Betts - S-100 FS500/600, 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-8 West End Heights 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA/SAMPLES A. Submit Shop Drawings on all items of equipment and materials to be furnished and installed. Submission of Shop Drawings and samples shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter, stating name of project and contractor, number of drawings, titles, and other pertinent data called for in individual sections. Shop Drawings Shall Be Dated and Contain: Name of project; name of prime professional; name of prime contractor; description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. Incomplete submittals will not be accepted. All products specified in an individual Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28 section shall be submitted at the same time. Number each submittal. Indicate deviations from contract requirements on Letter of Transmittal. Corrections or comments made on the Shop Drawings during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. The Contractor is responsible for confirming and correcting all quantities; checking electrical characteristics and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 3.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Before construction work commences, Contractors for all trades shall submit Coordination Drawings in the form of electronic coordination drawings. Coordination Drawings are required throughout all areas for all trades. B. Mechanical Equipment Rooms and other critical spaces shall be drawn early in the Coordination Drawing process, simultaneous with all other congested areas. C. Coordination drawings shall identify and show resolutions of physical conflicts, including but not limited to service clearances, access paths, and clearance to combustibles. D. Prepare Coordination Drawings As Follows: 1. The Coordination Drawings base file shall consist of the 3-D architectural and structural models depicting all architectural and structural elements that require coordination. 2. The HVAC Contract shall create and prepare the base model file and then include all equipment, ductwork, piping, and diffusers, clearly indicating structure and equipment mounting heights and required working clearances. a. Submissions of HVAC Contract Documents with contractor title block shall be considered incomplete and will not be acceptable. b. The HVAC Contract shall visit the site to survey and record architectural and structural elements as required. 3. Upon completion of the HVAC Coordination Drawings file, the HVAC Contract shall provide an electronic 3-D model with hard copy prints to all major trades' Contractors. 4. The Fire Protection Contract shall then add all equipment, piping, and sprinkler heads, documenting any conflicts with HVAC ductwork and piping. The P/FP Coordination drawings shall indicate equipment mounting heights and all required pitch. 5. The Electrical Contract shall then add all switchgear, panels, motor control centers, luminaires, cable tray, feeders, and other large equipment, including working clearances that must be coordinated with the other trades. 6. Relocate ductwork, diffusers, and sprinklers as required to coordinate with the structure, ceiling grid, and luminaires. 7. Where conflicts occur, relocate equipment and provide offsets and transitions as required to permit equipment to fit in the space. Clearly document modifications on the drawings for review by the Architect and Engineer. As part of the Contract, relocate equipment, ductwork, piping, etc as required for proper coordination. 8. The Electrical and Fire Protection Contracts shall indicate areas of conflict and suggested resolutions. 9. Upon completion, submit Coordination Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review. Submission shall be in the form of color coded paper prints at a scale of not less than ¼”-1’. Prints shall contain the Contractor’s titleblock, date, and drawing number. a. The HVAC Contract shall review the project phasing plan produced by the Architect. The Coordination Drawings submittal shall be organized and submitted by Phase clearly indicating tie-in locations, valves, unions, flanges, dampers, and accessories required to accommodate system extension. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-9 West End Heights 9 3.3 ROUGH-IN A. Due to small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact location and elevations at work site prior to any rough in work. DO NOT SCALE PLANS. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or submittal information require a significant change to the original documents, contact the Owner’s Representative for approval before proceeding. B. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections. 1. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact routing of all duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural drawings. Verify with Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostats, fixture and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. 2. Mechanical and electrical drawings show general equipment arrangement for diffusers, grilles, registers, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers and other items. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for exact locations of mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment from the Architect and other contractors. Do not rough-in services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. Obtain written authorization from the Owner’s Representative or other contractor for any rough-ins that, due to project schedule, are required before approved coordination drawings are available. Any work installed without written authorization or approved coordination drawings, causing a conflict will be relocated by the contractor at no expense to the Owner. C. Provide code-required clearances at equipment, controllers, motor starters, valves, and equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Contractor shall relocate existing work in the way of new construction. Visit the site before bidding to determine scope of work. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. 3.4 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall assume responsibility for Construction Safety at all times and provide, as part of contract, all trench or building shoring, scaffolding, shielding, dust/fume protection, mechanical/electrical protection, special grounding, safety railings, barriers, and other safety feature required to provide safe conditions for all workmen and site visitors. 3.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Store Materials on dry base, at least 6" above-ground or floor. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace items stolen or damaged, at no cost to Owner. B. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction." 3.6 FREEZING AND WATER DAMAGE A. Take all necessary precautions with equipment, systems and building to prevent damage due to freezing and/or water damage. Repair or replace, at no change in contract, any such damage to equipment, systems and building. Perform first seasons winterizing in presence of Owner's operating staff. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each trade shall include their required cutting and patching work unless shown as part of the General Construction work on the architectural drawings. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," for additional requirements. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch, cut or abandoned holes left by removals of equipment or fixtures. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-10 West End Heights 10 3.8 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 3.9 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of "General Building Construction Plans and Specifications." Mechanical and Electrical Trades work shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2" above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. 3.10 FIRE-STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "ThroughPenetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Apply fire stopping within the temperature and humidity limits permitted by the manufacturer. 6. Provide rigid steel sleeves where non-armored cables pass through fire rated walls and barriers. 3.11 FLASHING AND SEALING A. Opening through roofs shall be flashed in manner not to affect roof guarantee or bond. Engage qualified Roofing Contractor licensed by the Roofing manufacturer, as part of contract. Provide non-ferrous flashing pieces, skirts, hoods and collars as required to make ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations watertight. Where curbs are called for with respect to rectangular openings in new roofs, flashing will be done by others unless specifically indicated otherwise. Caulk and waterproof with additional material so as to seal airtight and watertight. B. Apply all flashing and sealers within the temperature and humidity limits permitted by the manufacturer 3.12 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For Precast Panels/Planks and Metal Decks, support mechanical/electrical work as determined by manufacturer and Owner's Representative. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-11 West End Heights 11 3.13 GENERAL INSTALLATIONS REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed B. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment that must be installed prior to building enclosure. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. D. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. E. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. F. No equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s Representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. G. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. H. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. I. Provide independent supports for equipment or systems – do not support equipment or other systems from sprinkler, plumbing or other piping/supports. 3.14 PAINTING A. This Contract Includes the following: 1. Painting for all cut and patch work performed as part of Divisions 21 contract. 2. Painting required for touch-up of surfaces damaged due to the installation of Divisions 21 work. 3. Painting as required to repair finish of equipment furnished. 4. Painting as called for on Divisions 21 Drawings. 5. Painting of all surface mounted raceways in finished areas. 3.15 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES A. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and accessories furnished, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. B. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of Contractor's errors, omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expense in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. 3.16 ALL TRADES TEMPORARY HEAT A. Refer to the Standard General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Supplemental General Conditions. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-12 West End Heights 12 3.17 CLEANING A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to keep clean all equipment and fixtures provided under this contract for the duration of the project. Each trade shall keep the premises free from an accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his operations. The facilities require an environment of extreme cleanliness, and it is the Contractor's responsibility to adhere to the strict regulations regarding procedures on the existing premises. After all tests are made and installations completed satisfactorily: 1. Thoroughly clean entire installation, both exposed surfaces and interiors. 2. Remove all debris caused by work. 3. Remove tools, surplus, materials, when work is finally accepted. 3.18 FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete fire protection connections to all fire protection equipment. Provide control connections to equipment where indicated on the drawings. Provide valves on piping ahead of each piece of equipment. B. Provide all piping, trim, accessories and connections as required for proper equipment operation of Equipment provided by this contract, Owner-Furnished Equipment and Equipment furnished by other contracts, C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding and confirm prior to roughing. 3.19 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATIONS A. All installations shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate fire protection systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and locations necessitated by the equipment installed. 2. The Architect shall control the placement of all wall and ceiling mounted fire protection equipment and devices in all rooms with the exception of mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. When drawing details are not available, consult with the Architects representative for actual location. 3. Verify all dimensions with field measurements. 4. Arrange for all chases, slots and openings in other building components that are not indicated on drawings, to allow for plumbing installations. 5. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 6. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment that must be installed prior to building enclosure. 7. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 8. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer the conflict to the Architect. 9. Store Materials on dry base, at least 6" above-ground or floor. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace items stolen or damaged, at no cost to Owner. 10. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. 11. All tolerances in alignment and leveling, and the quality of workmanship for each stage of work shall be as required by the manufacturer and subject to approval by the Owner’s Representative. 12. All finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to “as new” condition by touch up or repainting. Any rust shall be removed and primed prior to repainting. 13. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. 14. No fire protection equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s Representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. 15. All fire protection work shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 16. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his approval. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 17. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Lakeview Health Services Basic Fire Protection Requirements 210010-13 West End Heights 13 3.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Include one copy each of approved Shop Drawings, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, spare parts lists, as-built drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Include typewritten instructions, describing equipment, starting/operating procedures, emergency operating instructions, seasonal changeover, freeze protection, precautions and recommended maintenance procedures. Include name, address, and telephone number of supplier manufacturer Representative and service agency for all major equipment items. Bind above items in a three ring binder with name of project on the cover. Deliver to Owner's Representative before request for acceptance. 3.21 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a clean set of marked up as-built documents on the job site, and document all variances from the contract documents. B. Prepare record documents in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION 210010 Lakeview Health Services Fire Protection Valves 210520-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 210520 – FIRE PROTECTION VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. All valves and accessories listed under “Part 2 – Products” of this Section. B. Provide valve cut sheets and component diagrams, specifications and dimensional drawings for all valves to be utilized on the project. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. General: All valves shall comply with and have following requirements: 1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies per MSS SP-25. 2. All stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line and shall be free of asbestos. B. Makes: 1. Gate and check valves: Milwaukee, Kennedy, Nibco, Watts. 2. Ball valves: Apollo (Conbraco), Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Watts. 3. Butterfly valves: Demco, DeZurik, Hammond, Keystone, Milwaukee, Watts, Tyco. 4. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs. C. Ball Valves: 1. 2 inches and under: Bronze body, two piece, 600 psi (WOG), full port openings, chrome plated steel ball and stem, teflon seats, end entrance. Screwed (threaded) ends, Watts FBV-3. Solder (sweat) ends, Watts FBVS3. D. Valves For Gauges And Instruments: 1. ¼ inch size: Brass bar stock for 1000 psi and 300°F; Trerice No. 735 needle valve. E. Fire Protection Valves: 1. General: UL listed and FM approved and labeled for intended fire protection service. Sprinkler systems 175 psi wwp; stamped/cast on body. 2. Gate Valves: OS&Y pattern. IBBT, flanged ends, 200 psi wwp, resilient wedge disc 2½ inches and larger; bronze body, threaded ends 2 in. and smaller. a. Stockham #B-133 (2 inch and smaller). b. Stockham #G-610 (2½ inches and larger). c. Make: Kennedy, Mueller, Stockham 3. Butterfly/Ball Control Valves with Provision Tamper Switch: Iron or bronze body: a. Milwaukee "Butterball" (2 inches and smaller). b. Grinnell #770FP or Gruvlok (2½” inches and larger). c. Make: Grinnell, Kennedy, Milwaukee, Stockham, Victaulic. Lakeview Health Services Fire Protection Valves 210520-2 West End Heights 2 4. Check Valves: Swing type rubber faced, IBBM, flanged/water/grooved ends 2½ inches and larger; bronze body, threaded ends 2 inches and smaller. a. Grinnell #3315 (2 inches and smaller). b. Grinnell #780FP (2½ inches and larger). c. Make: Grinnell, Kennedy, Stockham. 5. Trim, Drain and Test Valves: Ball, plug, angle or globe type, bronze body, threaded ends, UL listed. F. Hose Thread Drain Valves: 1. Bronze body with interchangeable solid bronze wedge and screwed-in bonnet, with hose thread end, brass cap and chain, 600 psi WOG, 200 psi, Milwaukee BA-100H FNPT X Male Hose or BA-150H soldered X male hose. Ball valve with brass cap and chain on hose end. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide valves of type called for and where required to service equipment and fixtures. 2. Use extreme care and caution when soldering valve connections to piping to prevent valve seat damage. Apply heat with the flame directed away from the center of the valve body. Inspect all valves after soldering, tighten valve packing nut and make adjustments if required to ensure valve operates properly. 3. Provide at all major building and all systems sections and where noted on the Drawings. 4. Provide tamper switches on all valves. 5. Locate valves with stems at or above horizontal positions and swing check valves in horizontal position only. 6. Butterfly valves may be used for sprinkler service 4 inches and greater unless otherwise noted. END OF SECTION 210520 Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 211010 – PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of all pipe materials, fittings and connections to be utilized on this Project. B. Provide submittal information for all pipe, fittings and connections to be utilized on this project. C. Submit shop drawings and descriptive literature, showing dimensions, joint and other details for each type and class of pipe, fitting and restraint system to be furnished for the project. All materials furnished under the Contract shall be manufactured only in accordance with the specifications. Submittals shall include material information, dimensions, pipe class information, weights, coating and lining system data. D. Submit manufacturer’s Certificates of Compliance with these specifications and certification that the ductile iron pipe fittings have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA/ANSI specifications. E. Submit a detailed description of proposed testing, flushing and disinfection procedures to be used for this project. The description shall contain the name of the person responsible for the testing, flushing and disinfection work, equipment to be used, chemical to be used, method of measuring flow during flushing procedures and the name of the laboratory to be used for analysis. Review of the description shall not be construed as approval of any methods to be used; the Contractor shall be fully responsible for achieving the specified test results. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All piping and fittings used on this Project shall be new and marked with manufacturer's name; and shall comply with all applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40, or extra strong (Schedule 80) weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding, threaded for screwed (threaded) connections or roll-grooved for grooved mechanical connections. Pipe used for all fire protection systems shall be UL listed and FM approved. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets," "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples and job fabricated reductions not acceptable. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Screwed fittings: Malleable iron, black or galvanized finish as called for; drainage type where called for; fittings shall be UL listed and FM approved for all fire protection systems. C. Joints and Connections: 1. Screwed (threaded) connections: a. Unions: ASA malleable cast iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. b. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. 2. Welded connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not to be provided except where called for and shall not be provided in conjunction with butterfly valves. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-2 West End Heights 2 3. Grooved mechanical connections: a. Couplings of malleable iron (ASTM A470) or ductile iron (ASTM A536) with painted coating, designed for roll-grooved piping. b. Gaskets suitable for water service -30oF to 230oF of EPDM, Grade E. c. Bolts and nuts: Heat treated, hex head carbon steel (ASTM A183) cadmium plated or zinc electroplated. d. Fittings: Elbows, tees, laterals, reducers, adapters as required. Same construction as couplings. e. Design equipment: Victaulic, rigid system, Style 07 couplings. f. Fire protection systems: UL listed and FM approved; 250 psi wwp; use a gasket and coupling system similar to Victaulic Flush-Seal for all dry type systems; follow all terms of listings/approvals. D. Makes: Conac, Grinnell or Victaulic. E. Gauge And Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.3 THINWALL STEEL PIPE A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or A135, with wall thickness of .120 in. for 2-1/2 in. through 4 in.; .134 in. for 5 in. through 6 in.; and .188 in. for 8 in; Black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or roll grooved for mechanical grooved connection. 2.4 CPVC PIPE A. Pipe: ASTM F442/F442M and UL 1821, SDR 13.5. for 175 psig rated pressure at 150°F, with plain ends. Include “LISTED” and “CPVC SPRINKLER PIPE” markings. B. Fittings: UL listed and FM approved for 175 psig rated pressure at 150°F, socket type. Include “LISTED” and “CPVC SPRINKLER FITTING” markings. 1. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2: ASTM F438 and UL 1821, Schedule 40, socket type. 2. NPS 2 to NPS 3: ASTM F439 ad UL 1821, Schedule 80, socket type. 3. CPVC-to-Metal Transition: CPVC, one piece with dimensions equivalent to pipe; one end with threaded brass insert, and one socket end. C. Joints: 1. Solvent Cement: ASTM F493, solvent cement recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer, and made for joining CPVC sprinkler pipe and fittings. Include cleaner or primer recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer. a. Use solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 650 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (WATER SERVICE) A. Ductile iron pipe shall be that of a United States manufacturer who can demonstrate at lease five years of successful experience in manufacturing ductile iron pipe. The pipe shall be equipped with push-on type, restrained joint, or mechanical joints, as required and called for. B. All ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.50 (1976) (AWWA C150) and ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151). C. The ductile iron pipe shall be Class 52 and furnished in nominal 18-foot lengths, with Push-on or Mechanical Joints as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Griffin Pipe Company, Clow Corporation, or equal with gaskets conforming to AWWA C111 ANSI A21.11 “Rubber Gasket Joints.” D. The ductile iron pipe shall be double cement lined inside and then asphalt seal coated on the outside and inside approximately 1 mil. Thick. The cement lining shall conform to AWWA C104 ANSI A21.4. The pipe shall be furnished along with necessary materials and equipment recommended by the manufacturer for use in joining pipe lengths and fittings. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-3 West End Heights 3 E. Fittings shall be compact ductile iron Class 52 Mechanical Joint, conforming to ANSI Specification A21.53 (AWWA C153), latest edition, for pipe sizes 16-inches and smaller and Class 52 standard Mechanical Joint fittings conforming to AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10, latest edition except as specified, for pipe sizes 16 through 24-inches, unless specifically stated otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings. Fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Fittings shall be of the same material and have the same lining and coating as the pipe specified above. All fittings shall be marked with the weight and shall have distinctly cast upon them the pressure rating, the manufacturer’s identification, nominal diameter of openings and the number of degrees or fraction of the circle on all bends. 1. Hydrant tees shall be anchoring type, Clow F-1217 or approved equal. 2. Caps and plugs installed in all new work as indicated on the drawings shall be provided with a threaded corporation or bleeder valve so that air and water pressure can be relieved prior to future connection. F. Provide all bell push-on or mechanical-joint fittings unless otherwise indicated or specified. G. Furnish and install adaptors for all joining pipe of different types, unless solid sleeves indicated. 1. Provide ends conforming to above specifications for appropriate type of joint, to receive adjoining pipe. 2. Joining two classes of pipe may be of lighter class provided annular space in bell-and-spigot type joints sufficient for jointing. H. Provide mechanical joint or push-on joint pipe with necessary accessories, conforming to ANSI A21.11. 1. Provide gasket composition suitable for exposure to potable water (Water System). 2. Provide serrated brass wedges for push-on joints to provide electrical continuity; two per joint for pipe 12-in. and smaller and four per joint for larger pipe. I. Provide pipe flanges and accessories conforming to ANSI A21.15. J. Restrained joints shall be furnished for installation on all fittings, sleeves, hydrants and valves. Restraints for mechanical joints shall be Megalug as manufactured by EBAA Iron Company, Uni-flanged Series 1400 Mechanical Joint Restraint or equal. Restraints for push-on joints shall Be Series 1390 as manufactured by Uni-Flange, or Series 800 Coverall as manufactured by EBAA Iron Company. K. Sleeve Type Couplings: 1. Furnished by pipe supplier. 2. Pressure rating a least equal to that of related pipeline with a minimum rating of 150 psig. 3. Manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division, Bradford, PA; Rockwell International, Municipal and Utility Division, Pittsburgh, PA; R.H. Baker and Company, Inc., Los Angeles, CA, or acceptable equivalent product. 4. Couplings for buried pipe: Cast iron sleeve or steel sleeve and retainer with fusion bonded epoxy coating, Dresser Style 53 or 153, Rockwell Style 431, Baker Series 228, or acceptable equivalent product. Provide couplings with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 5. Couplings for exposed pipe: Steel; Dresser Style 38, Rockwell Style 411, Baker Series 200, or acceptable equivalent product. Provide couplings with steel bolts and nuts. 6. Furnish with pipe stop removed. 7. Provide with gaskets of composition suitable for exposure to liquid within pipe. 2.6 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Copper To Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only. 2. Dielectric pipe fittings. B. Steel To Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). 2.7 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Tensile strength, ASME B16.8, union 250 psi, or flange design, 175 psi, pressure rating, at 210oF, threaded or solder joint, constructed to prevent gasket from squeezing into internal opening. B. Make: Epco, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-4 West End Heights 4 2.8 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: Carpenter & Patterson, Central Iron, B-Line, ITT, Grinnell. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium (0.005 in. minimum) finish. C. Hanger Spacing Schedule: PIPING MATERIAL MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL SPACING (FEET) MAXIMUM VERTICAL SPACING (FEET) Cast Iron Pipea 5 15 Steel Pipe 12 15 CPVC 3 10 a. The maximum horizontal spacing of cast iron pipe hangers shall be increased to 10 feet where 10-foot lengths of pipe are installed. D. Piping systems with material not listed above, supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Inserts: Design equipment Grinnell Fig. #281, maximum loading 1000 lbs., galvanized finish and Fig. #285, maximum loading 400 lbs. Make: Globestrut, Grinnell, Unistrut, B-Line. F. Supports: 1. For weights under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts equal to Phillips "Red Head" "U" Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 2. For weights above 1000 lbs.: Drill through floor slabs and provide flat flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional "Drill-In" inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. 3. For metal decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use Phillips "Red Head" devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. G. Hangers for fire protection piping are as above and in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hangers and building attachments shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For plumbing systems only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or straps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. 5. Make: Globestrut, Kindorf, Unistrut, B-Line. 2.9 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast iron polished chrome, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures. B. Cleanout plugs, bushings, nipples, required for instruments and gauges to be brass. C. Pipe Roll Stand: Cast iron roll stand. Make: Advanced Thermal Systems, Carpenter and Patterson, ITT Grinnell, Pipe Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-5 West End Heights 5 Shields. 2.10 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, for structural surfaces. 2. Sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18 gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. 2.11 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Waterproof Type: 1. Exterior walls, below grade and above basement or vault floor: Synthetic rubber material with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac. 2.12 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.13 WATER MAIN CONNECTIONS – TAPPED A. Provide watertight joint with adequate strength against pullout. Use only tapered thread taps. B. Maximum size of taps or fittings without bosses not to exceed that listed in appropriate table of Appendix to ANSI A21.51 based on: 1. Three full threads for gray iron. 2. Two full threads for ductile iron. C. Where size of connection exceeds that given above for pipe, provide boss on pipe barrel or use tapping saddle. Make tap in flat part of intersection of run and branch of tee or cross, or connect by means for tapped tee, branch fitting and tapped plug or reducing flange, or tapping tee and tapping valve, as indicated or permitted. 2.14 STACK SLEEVE A. With flashing clamp and threaded pipe sleeve extension. B. Design Equipment: Jay R. Smith Series 1720 with caulking recess and flashing clamp. C. Make: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Zurn, Wade. 2.15 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A," "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-6 West End Heights 6 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other Work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping, nor by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing, using proper diameter rod for pipe size. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic pipe per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible; "C" type not permitted on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed. 3.3 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. B. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Protect fittings from excessive heat. C. Grooved Mechanical Joints: Lubricate and install gasket and couplings. Follow Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded piping fabricated by qualified welder. Use certified welder where specifically required by code or insurance company. If indicated and permitted for fire protection systems, all provisions for welded pipe shall additionally be in accordance with NFPA Standard 13. Use full length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe with inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slip-on flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors which are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains, use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal Void Space At Sleeves As Follows: 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior walls above grade: Use sealing element. 3. Exterior walls below grade and above basement or vault floors: Use link-seal. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-7 West End Heights 7 4. Cored holes: Use sealing element. 5. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. 6. Waterproofed floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Refer to other Sections for testing of Fire Protection Systems. 3.9 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. 3.10 HANDLING PIPE – WATER A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall take care not to damage pipe by impact, bending, compression, or abrasion during handling and installation. Joint ends of pipe especially shall be kept clean. B. Pipe shall be stored above ground at a height no greater than 5 feet and with even support for the pipe barrel. C. Only nylon-protected sings shall be used for handling the pipe. No hooks or bare cables will be permitted. D. Gaskets shall be shipped in cartons and stored in a clean area, away from grease, oil, heat, direct sunlight and ozone producing electric motors. 3.11 ALIGNMENT, INSTALLATION AND PLACEMENT OF PIPE – DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Mechanical joints shall be installed with Mega-Lug, Uni-Flange or MJR restraints. Restraints shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. All bolt heads on Mega-Lugs or Uni-Flange shall be tightened sufficiently so that they shear off to provide indication that proper tightening torque was achieved. MJR systems shall be installed with ductile iron locking ring, tapered MJ gland and a symmetrical locking ring. B. Restrained push on joints shall be installed with specified joint restraints. Restraints shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. C. Ductile iron pipe installed near cathodically protected gas lines or within areas subject to corrosive soils or waters shall be fully encased with polyethylene material. D. Solid sleeves shall be used to joint plain ends on ductile iron pipe. Mechanical joints shall be installed with Mega-Lug, Uni-Flange or MJR restraints, as specified hereinbefore. E. Piping Support: 1. Furnish and install supports to hold piping at lines and grades indicated or specified. 2. Support pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment to prevent any strain imposed on equipment. 3. Support piping within buildings and structures from floors, walls, ceilings or beams. For floor support, use saddle stands or concrete or brick piers as indicated or permitted. Shape pipe saddles to fit pipe and be capable of screw adjustment. Construct brick and concrete piers to conform accurately to the bottom one-third to one-half of pipe. Support piping along walls by wall brackets with attached pipe rolls, saddles or with adjustable hanger rods. Support piping from ceilings with rod hangers of type capable of screw adjustment and with adjustable concrete inserts or beam clamps. 4. Use hangers and supports conforming to MSS-SP-58. 5. Place supports to provide uniform slopes without sagging. Locate per MSS-SP-69 with at least two hangers for each pipe section. Locate hangers adjacent to joints, direction changes and branch connections. F. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Remove and replace defective pieces. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-8 West End Heights 8 2. Clear of all debris and dirt before installing and keep clean until accepted. 3. Lay accurately to lines and grades indicated or required. Provide accurate alignment, both horizontally and vertically. 4. Provide firm bearing along entire length of buried pipelines. G. Temporary Plugs: When pipe laying not in progress, close open ends of pipe with temporary watertight plugs. If water in trench, do not remove plug until danger of water entering pipe passed. H. Socket Pipe Clamps: Tierods and Bridles: Where indicated or necessary to prevent joints or sleeve couplings from pulling apart under pressure, provide suitable socket pipe clamps, tierods and bridles. Use bridles and tierod at least ¾ inches in diameter, except where they replace flange bolts of smaller size with nut on each side of flange pairs. Coat clamps and tierods or bridles with two coats of bituminous coating after assembly and allow to dry before backfilling. I. Appurtenances: Set valves, fittings and appurtenances as indicated. J. Bolted Joints: 1. Remove rust-preventative coatings from machined surfaces. 2. Clean pipe ends, sockets, sleeves, housings and gaskets and smooth all burns and other defects. 3. Use torque wrench to tighten to correct range of torque not to exceed values specified below: TORQUE RANGE VALUES Nominal pipe size, in Bolt diameter, in Range of torque, ft-lb 3 5/8 40-60 4-24, incl. ¾ 75-90 30, 36 1 100-120 42, 48 1-1/4 120-150 K. Flanged Joint: 1. Make up tight. 2. Do not put strain on nozzles, valves and other equipment. 3. In sludge digestion tank: Take care torque used to tighten bolts not to exceed values specified for size bolts as specified above. Support piping to minimize strain on joints. Coat exterior surfaces, including bolts and nuts with two coats of acceptable heavy-bodied bituminous mastic. L. Mechanical Joints: 1. Wire brush surfaces in contact with gasket and clean gasket. 2. Lubricate gasket, bell and spigot with soapy water. 3. Slip gland and gasket over spigot and insert spigot into bell until seated. 4. Seat gasket and press gland firmly against gasket. 5. After bolts inserted and nuts made finger-tight, tighten diametrically opposite nuts progressively and uniformly around joint by torque wrench. Torque bolts to values specified above. M. Tapped Connection: 1. Drill and tap normal to longitudinal axis. 2. Drilled by skilled mechanics using proper tools. 3. Use only tapered threads. N. Clean off all dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign material before conducting pressure and leakage tests. O. Disinfect potable water lines using procedures and materials conforming to AWWA C651. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 211010-9 West End Heights 9 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (FIRE PROTECTION) Service Pipe Materials Fittings Connections Sprinkler (wet) Schedule 40, black steel 2" and smaller Schedule 10, black steel 2½" and larger CPVC Malleable or ductile iron Malleable or ductile iron CPVC Threaded Roll grooved mechanical type couplings Socket END OF SECTION 211010 Lakeview Health Services Fire Standpipe Systems 211200-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 211200 - FIRE STANDPIPE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements B. Excavation and Backfill C. Piping and Accessories D. Valves E. Water Supply F. Fire Protection Pump Systems 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices to comply with the following latest editions of the publications, codes, standards and listings/approvals: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 14: Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. b. NFPA 25: Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. c. NFPA 1961: Standard on Fire Hose. d. NFPA 24: Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. e. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations. 2. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): a. Approval Guide with Supplements. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1990 Fire Protection Equipment Directory with Supplement. 4. 1984 New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code, as amended. 5. OSHA Rules and Regulations. 6. All requirements of insurance and other authorities having jurisdiction. B. Equipment, devices, hangers and components shall be UL listed and FM approved and labeled for the intended fire protection service. C. Fire protection work shall be performed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection standpipe systems. D. The requirements of this Project’s Contract Documents may meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA and other Codes and Standards listed by this Section. The Fire Protection Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Project Documents in such cases. In situations where NFPA may allow several different methods for sprinkler and fire protection related work and hydraulics, ultimately the method utilized for this project will be determined by these Contract Documents and the Project Engineer. Verify all such situations prior to the bid date. Lakeview Health Services Fire Standpipe Systems 211200-2 West End Heights 2 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire system shall be a manual wet, Class I standpipe system. 1. System shall be arranged: a. With the supply valves open and water pressure maintained at all times. B. Water supply shall be from the municipal water main located in North Meadow Street. Calculated water supply data at the municipal main indicates the following: 1. 89 psi static. 2. 51 psi residual. 3. 1,800 GPM flow rate during test. 4. Calculated flow at 20 psi equals 2,497 GPM. C. Fire department connections shall be provided to allow the servicing fire department to augment the system's normal automatic water supply. 1. The system shall not be required to maintain the 65 psi minimum residual pressure requirements of NFPA 14. This will be provided by the servicing fire department mobile pumps via fire department connections. D. Water supply control valves shall be electrically supervised and mechanically locked for proper position. Waterflow and supervisory circuits shall be in accordance with the requirements of electrical specifications. Electric connections to standpipe equipment shall be by Division 26 this Contractor. Furnish wiring diagrams for all equipment. E. Provide 3/16 inch x 1 inch cadmium plated carbon steel chains and master keyed all brass case hardened padlocks to lock water supply valves in the proper position. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cut, specifications and installation instructions for each item or component of fire protection system. Clearly indicate pertinent information such as, but not limited to: a. Manufacturer, model number. b. Materials, size and type connection. c. Pressure ratings of components. d. FM approval/UL listing. B. Drawings: 1. Submit complete drawings, calculations, water supply data and equipment schedule for the system to the Engineer, Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other authorities having jurisdiction. C. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings, Test Reports and NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificates to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Mixing of manufacturers or models of the same or similar component will not be acceptable. 2.2 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. General: Cast brass; straight or angle body as required; two-way lug swivel inlets with individual drop clappers; cast brass, raised letter escutcheon labeled automatic sprinkler; matching brass plugs and chains. 1. 2½ in. x 2½ in. x 4 in. Lakeview Health Services Fire Standpipe Systems 211200-3 West End Heights 3 2. 2½ in. NST hose threads shall match those in use by the Utica Fire Department. 3. Polished brass chrome plated escutcheon, inlets, plugs and chains. 4. Design equipment: Elkhart model numbers are included for reference. 5. Manufacturers: Badger-Powhatan, Croker-Standard, Elkhart, or approved equal. a. Horizontal Flush Wall Type: Elkhart #166. b. Projecting Wall Type: Elkhart #156. c. Free Standing Sidewalk Type: Elkhart #15. d. 18 in. long brass cover sleeve with matching finish. 2.3 ALARM EQUIPMENT A. Electric Waterflow: 1. Pressure switches: At main riser to indicate waterflow condition. a. Case: Drip-proof. b. Service and range: As required for air or water service. c. Adjustable differential. d. S.P.D.T. contacts. e. 24 VDC. f. Design equipment: Potter Electric, Autocall, or approved equal. 2. Paddle type waterflow indicators: a. Dual S.P.D.T. contacts. b. 24 VDC. c. Design equipment: Autocall WF-5, Potter Electric VSR-D or VSR-T, or approved equal. B. Electric Tamper Switches: Supervise valves controlling water supplies in the open/proper position. Integral with the valve or separate with provisions to actuate a supervisory alarm upon valve movement and upon removal of the device cover. With mounting brackets and hardware. 1. 24 VDC, S.P.D.T. contacts. 2. Make: Potter Electric Model OSYSU-A for OS&Y valves and Model PIVSU-A for post indicator and butterfly valves. 2.4 GAUGES A. Accuracy: ANSI B40.1 Grade B, +2% of span; 0 to 300 psi standard range. 1. Case: Anodized aluminum, glass lens; copper alloy tube, tip and socket; brass movement. 2. Connection: 1/4 inch NPT male bottom connection. 2.5 HOSE VALVES, HOSE RACK ASSEMBLIES AND CABINETS A. Make: Badger-Powhatan, Croker-Standard, Elkhart, Potter-Roemer (Numbers are included for reference), or approved equal. B. Hose Valves: Brass angle body, spoked wheel handle, 300 psi wwp, polished brass, threads shall conform to requirements of City of Ithaca Fire Department. 1. 2-1/2 inch fire department valve: 2-1/2 inch female inlet by 2-1/2 inch NST male outlet with matching finish, lugged, 2-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch NST brass reducer and 1-1/2 inch NST lugged brass cap and chain. a. Design equipment: Potter-Roemer Fig. 4065. 2.6 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. Control, drain and sectional valves shall be provided with permanently marked identification signs of baked enamel substantial metal construction. The signs shall be permanently mounted on the piping or wall at the valve, or on the valve, but shall not be hung on the valve with wires or chains which permits easy removal of the sign. Lakeview Health Services Fire Standpipe Systems 211200-4 West End Heights 4 B. The sign shall clearly indicate the valve's purpose and what portion of the structure it serves. C. Provide additional signs as required such as for fire department use only, manual wet standpipe for fire department use only, etc. and decals identifying contents of each cabinet assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The nature of the work requires coordination with other trades. Shop fabrication shall be done at the Contractor's risk. Relocation of piping and components to avoid obstructions may be necessary. Relocation, if required, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. B. The installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative and in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's printed installation instructions and submitted and Owner's Representative reviewed drawings. 1. Piping shall be installed concealed above finish ceiling areas and in fire rated stair enclosures. 2. Install hose valves to provide a minimum 3 inches clearance around the entire threaded connection to facilitate hose connection. 3. Install 2-1/2 inch fire department valves at 4 feet AFF in stair towers and 3 feet AFF at other locations. For valves in cabinets, install with valve discharge straight out of cabinet or out and down towards floor at about 45 degrees. 4. Install hose rack assemblies with top of valve 5 feet AFF. 5. Pipe ball drip valves to discharge at a floor drain or to the exterior. Pipe 2 inch main drains and water motor gong drains to discharge to the exterior at approximately 24 inches above finished grade. 6. Provide an accessible pressure gauge near the topmost outlet of each standpipe arranged to drain. 7. Piping from the main standpipe to hose valves shall be at least the size of the valve and serve only one valve per connection to the main standpipe. 8. Exposed pipe shall be left clean for painting. C. A standpipe system shall be provided for use by the City of Ithaca Fire Department at all times during construction. Follow all requirements of the City of Ithaca Fire Department, OSHA and Contract Documents. 1. Provide 18 inch x 18 inch, NFPA 178 style, reflective finish signs identifying duplex fire department connections during construction. 2. Provide the system with temporary 1-1/2 inch listed lined hose reel or rack assemblies and water supply so not more than 100 feet of hose covers all portions of any floor during construction. 3. Notify the City of Ithaca Fire Department in writing that the temporary standpipe is in service, the locations of fire department connections and 2-1/2 inch hose valves and hose threads utilized. Obtain and deliver a copy of the fire department's written acknowledgement to the Owner's Representative. D. Coordinate and activate the system to operational status as soon as possible. 3.2 PIPING, VALVES, HANGERS, ETC. A. Refer to other applicable sections. B. Run slightly off level to low points, provide drain valves arranged per Contract Documents. 3.3 TESTS A. General: 1. Pipe installation shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior to being covered by building construction or backfill. 2. Give the Owner's Representative, advance notice of final tests. Perform tests in a safe manner. Provide written certification that tests have been successfully completed. 3. Correct system leaks prior to final test. Do not utilize water additives, caulking, etc. to correct leaks. Provide appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel. B. Flushing: Follow Contract Documents and utilize open end pipe sections, if possible. Lakeview Health Services Fire Standpipe Systems 211200-5 West End Heights 5 C. Pressure Tests: 1. Hydrostatic tests: Minimum 200 psi and in accordance with NFPA 14 for two hours. a. Air test not accepted as final test. 2. Air test: Minimum 40 psi for 24 hours with loss not to exceed 1.5 psi within the 24 hour duration. D. Alarm Tests: 1. Demonstrate activation of alarms. E. Flow Tests: Give advance notice to the City of Ithaca Fire Department so they may be present if they desire. 1. Flow 500 gpm from the topmost outlet of the most remote standpipe. 2. Concurrently flow 250 gpm from the topmost outlet of each of the other standpipes for a total flow not to exceed 500 gpm. 3. Record the residual pressures and flows at the topmost outlet of each standpipe during the test. 3.4 SYSTEM TURNOVER A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct the Owner's Representative and City of Ithaca Fire Department in the proper operation, maintenance, testing, inspection and emergency procedures for all systems furnished, for a period of time as needed. B. Provide one new original pamphlet of NFPA 14 and NFPA 25 to the Owner's Representative and indicate maintenance inspection and testing provisions to comply with local fire codes. C. Notify City of Ithaca Fire Department in writing the permanent system is operational. END OF SECTION 211200 Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 211310 – WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements B. Excavation and Backfill C. Piping and Accessories D. Valves E. Water Supply 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices to comply with the latest edition of the following publications, codes, standards and listings/approvals: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. b. NFPA 25: Recommended Practice for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. c. NFPA 291: Recommended Practice for Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants. d. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations. 2. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): a. Approval Guide with Supplements. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment Directory with Supplement. 4. New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code, as amended. 5. OSHA Rules and Regulations. 6. Requirements of insurance and other authorities having jurisdiction. B. Equipment, devices, hangers and components shall be UL listed and or FM approved and labeled for the intended fire protection service. C. The fire protection work shall be performed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection sprinkler systems. D. The requirements of this Project’s Contract Documents may meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA and other Codes and Standards listed by this Section. The Fire Protection Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Project Documents in such cases. In situations where NFPA may allow several different methods for sprinkler and fire protection related work and hydraulics, ultimately the method utilized for this project will be determined by these Contract Documents and the Project Engineer. Verify all such situations prior to the bid date. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire protection system shall be a wet pipe automatic sprinkler system arranged to properly protect all spaces as indicated. Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-2 West End Heights 2 B. Water supply shall be from the municipal water main located in North Meadow Street. Calculated water supply data at the municipal main indicates the following: 1. 89 psi static. 2. 51 psi residual. 3. 1,800 GPM flow rate during test. 4. Calculated flow at 20 psi equals 2,497 GPM. C. Fire department connections shall be provided to allow the servicing fire department to augment the system's normal automatic water supply. D. The system shall be hydraulically calculated as a light/ordinary hazard system in accordance with all provisions of the Contract Documents and any other authority having jurisdiction. E. Use of the room design method will not be permitted. Calculations shall be based upon the specific hazard for the areas being protected. See drawings for minimum requirements. F. Maximum coverage for any sprinkler head shall not exceed NFPA requirements. G. A minimum 10 psi safety factor shall be provided between the available municipal water supply curve and the total system demand point. The total system demand point shall be at the municipal water main and include the calculated sprinkler and interior hose stream demands plus the exterior hose stream demand at the residual pressure required for proper system operation. H. The maximum velocity of flow shall not exceed 20 ft. per second in above ground piping except as resulting from throttling of flow in sprinkler riser/drop nipples or 15 ft. per second in pipe segments which contain paddle type waterflow indicators. I. Include allowances in hydraulic calculations for head losses through paddle type flow switches and roll grooved pipe segments. J. Water supply control valves shall be electrically supervised and mechanically locked for proper position. Waterflow and supervisory circuits shall be in accordance with the requirements of electrical specifications. Electric connections to sprinkler system equipment shall be by Division 26. Furnish wiring diagrams for all equipment. K. Provide 3/16 in. x 1 in. cadmium plated carbon steel chains and master keyed all brass case hardened padlocks to lock water supply valves in the proper position. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cut, specifications and installation instructions for each item or component of fire protection system. Clearly indicate pertinent information such as, but not limited to: a. Manufacturer, model number. b. Materials, size and type connection. c. Pressure ratings of components. d. FM approval/UL listing. B. Samples: 1. If requested, submit sample of sprinklers for finished ceiling areas. C. Drawings: 1. Submit complete NFPA 13 drawings hydraulic calculations with cross reference to applicable drawings, water supply data and equipment schedule with ratings including those of fire and jockey pumps, controllers and all components, for the system to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other authorities having jurisdiction including: a. Hydraulic calculations shall be submitted for each design density/remote area with items in NFPA 13 incorporated including sketches to indicate flow quantities, sprinklers operating and direction of flow for Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-3 West End Heights 3 pipes in looped and gridded systems. D. Record Drawings: 1. Submit Record Drawings, hydraulic calculations, test reports and NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificates to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Mixing of manufacturers or models of the same or similar component will not be acceptable. 2.2 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. General: Cast brass; straight or angle body as required; two-way lug swivel inlets with individual drop clappers; cast brass, raised letter escutcheon labeled automatic sprinkler; matching brass plugs and chains. 1. 2½ in. x 2½ in. x 4 in. 2. 2½ in. NST hose threads shall match those in use by the Utica Fire Department. 3. Polished brass chrome plated escutcheon, inlets, plugs and chains. 4. Design equipment: Elkhart model numbers are included for reference. 5. Manufacturers: Badger-Powhatan, Croker-Standard, Elkhart, or approved equal. a. Horizontal Flush Wall Type: Elkhart #166. b. Projecting Wall Type: Elkhart #156. c. Free Standing Sidewalk Type: Elkhart #15. d. 18 in. long brass cover sleeve with matching finish. 2.3 GAUGES A. Accuracy: ANSI B40.1 Grade B, 2% of span; 0 to 300 psi standard range. 1. Case: Anodized aluminum, glass lens; copper alloy tube, tip and socket; brass movement. 2. Connection: 1/4 in. NPT male bottom connection. 2.4 SPRINKLER EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: Gem, Reliable, Viking, or approved equal. B. Alarm Check Valve: Vertical riser manifold with test and drain. 1. Trim: a. Main drain and valve. b. Gauges. c. Flow switch. d. Electric motor gong. 2. Flanged inlet with grooved or flanged outlet. 3. Design equipment: Tyco Model 513 Riser Manifold, Victaulic FireLock Series 717R, Viking EasyPac Commerical Riser Manifold or approved equal. C. Sprinklers: Brass or bronze ½ in. orifice, ½ in. NPT. 165OF ordinary temperature classification for light hazards and 212oF for ordinary hazards. Use 286oF sprinklers in Mechanical, Electrical and Elevator Rooms; in vicinity of heat equipment/sources; and in accordance with Contract Documents. 1. Finished ceiling areas: Chrome plated finish sidewall or semi-recessed sprinklers. Semi-recessed shall have matching two piece adjustable deep two piece adjustable semi-recessed, equal to Viking E-1/F-1. Escutcheon for all areas name specific areas. Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-4 West End Heights 4 2. Unfinished ceiling areas: Natural brass/bronze finish pendent or upright sprinklers as required. 3. Sprinklers shall not have any portion of the fusible/frangible element recessed or covered. Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-5 West End Heights 5 4. Types and design equipment. a. SSP and SSU: Gem F950, Reliable Model G, Viking Model M. b. Horizontal sidewall: Gem F950/Q-46, Reliable Model G/HSW-1, Viking Model M. c. Quick response UL 199 listed: Gem FR-1 Aquarius F995 pendent and F996 sidewall; Central Omega C-1 pendent and HEC-12 sidewall; Reliable Model GFR ZX-1 Viking Model M Microfast H Horizon. d. Residential UL 1626 listed: Gem F954 pendent and F958 sidewall Reliable Model A ZX-RES; Viking, Model M Microfast H Horizon. e. Dry pendent/sidewall: Gem Issue C solder type, Central H-1, Reliable G3, Viking Model C. f. Corrosion resistant: Factory applied lead, wax or other coatings and not disrupted during installation. Gem issue D, Reliable F1, Viking Model M. g. Institutional: Grunau Model PH-2 Style A B h. Intermediate level: Gem F950, Reliable Model G, Viking Model M with Model B-1 guard. D. Mechanical Guards For Sprinklers: 1. Design equipment: Gem F774, Viking Model A-1, or approved equal. E. Sprinkler Cabinets And Spare Sprinklers: 1. Steel or aluminum construction with shelves and shelf holes to accommodate spare sprinklers. 2. Red with hinged front door and label. 3. With sprinkler wrenches compatible for each type used. 4. Provide a stock of 12 spare sprinklers for each system, of the type and proportion to those used in each system. 5. Design equipment: Gem F740, Reliable Model A1, Viking, or approved equal. 2.5 ALARM EQUIPMENT A. Electric Alarm: Electric alarm system with red horn/strobe device located directly above fire department connection location and connections. 1. Design equipment: Reliable Model C, Viking Model FPPI, or approved equal. B. Electric Waterflow: 1. Pressure switches: At main riser to indicate waterflow condition. a. Case: Drip-proof. b. Service and range: As required for air or water service. c. Adjustable differential. d. S.P.D.T. contacts. e. 24 VDC. f. Design equipment: Potter Electric, Autocall, or approved equal. 2. Paddle type waterflow indicators: a. Dual S.P.D.T. contacts. b. 24 VDC. c. Design equipment: Autocall WF-5, Potter Electric VSR-D or VSR-T, or approved equal. C. Electric Tamper Switches: Supervise valves controlling water supplies in the open/proper position. Integral with the valve or separate with provisions to actuate a supervisory alarm upon valve movement and upon removal of the device cover, with mounting brackets and hardware. 1. 24 VDC, S.P.D.T contacts. 2. Design equipment: Potter Electric Model OSYSU-A for OS&Y valves and Model PIVSU-A for post indicator and butterfly valves. Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-6 West End Heights 6 2.6 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. Control, drain and test valves shall be provided with permanently marked identification signs of baked enamel substantial metal construction. The signs shall be permanently mounted on the piping or wall at the valve, or on the valve, but shall not be hung on the valve with wires or chains which permits easy removal of the sign. The sign shall clearly indicate the valve's purpose and what portion of the structure it serves. Additional signs, shall be provided at each valve to clearly indicate hydraulic calculation data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The nature of the work requires coordination with other trades. Shop fabrication shall be done at the Contractor's risk. Relocation of piping and components to avoid obstructions may be necessary. Relocation, if required, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. The installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative and in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's printed installation instructions and submitted and Owner's Representative reviewed drawings. B. Piping shall not pass directly over electric panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers and similar electric and telephone equipment. However, protection for these spaces shall be provided. C. Piping shall be installed concealed above finish ceiling area with sprinklers located in the center quarter points of ceiling tiles where ceiling tiles are used. D. Provide a readily removable flushing connection consisting of a cap at each end of cross mains. E. Provide mechanical guards for heads in mechanical and storage spaces, less than 8 ft. above finished floor subject to mechanical damage. F. Pipe ball drip valves to discharge at a floor drain or to the exterior. Pipe 2 in. main drains to discharge to the exterior at approximately 18 in. above finished grade. G. Securely install the spare sprinkler cabinets to the building wall at the main riser. H. Inspector's test valves shall be installed 7 ft. or less above the finished floor. I. Fire department connections shall be installed 30 inches above finished grade and electric alarm bell approximately 10 ft. above finished grade. J. Upright sprinklers directly on branch lines shall be installed with their frame parallel to the piping. K. Provide sprinkler protection under ductwork, groups of ductwork and other obstructions to water spray and distribution. Use intermediate level sprinklers if subject to water spray from above. L. Exposed pipe shall be left clean for painting. M. Coordinate and activate the systems or portions of the system to operational status as soon as possible. 3.2 PIPING, VALVES, HANGERS, ETC. A. Refer to other applicable sections. Run slightly off level to low points; provide drain valves arranged per Contract Documents. 3.3 ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AND MECHANICAL SPRINKLER GUARDS A. Include an allowance for providing 12 additional sprinklers and 12 additional mechanical sprinkler guards installed at locations where job conditions or equipment selections may require. Provide a credit for sprinklers and guards not installed. Lakeview Health Services Wet Fire Sprinkler Systems 211310-7 West End Heights 7 3.4 TESTS A. General: 1. Pipe installation shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior to being covered by building construction or backfill. 2. Give the Owner's Representative advance notice of final tests. Perform tests in a safe manner. Provide written certification that tests have been successfully completed. Use NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificate Forms. 3. Correct system leaks prior to final test. Do not utilize water additives, caulking, etc., to correct leaks. Provide appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel. 4. Flushing: Follow Contract Documents and utilize open end pipe sections if possible. B. Pressure Tests: 1. Hydrostatic tests: Minimum 200 psi and in accordance with NFPA 13 for two hours. a. Air test not accepted as final test. 2. Do not subject existing systems to excess pressures. C. Alarm Tests: 1. Demonstrate activation of alarms by use of Inspector's test valve. 3.5 SYSTEM TURNOVER A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct the Owner's Representative in the proper operation, maintenance, testing, inspection and emergency procedures for all systems furnished, for a period of time as needed. Provide one new original pamphlet of NFPA 25. Indicate in writing to the Owner's Representative the provisions for proper maintenance, testing and inspection of the systems as required by local fire codes. END OF SECTION 211310 Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 220010 – BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Instructions to Bidders apply to this section and all other sections of Division 22. 1.2 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES A. Electronic CAD Floor Plan Backgrounds 1. Turner Engineering, PC cannot provide architectural floor plan backgrounds. Contact the project architect to obtain CAD files of the building floor plans. B. Electronic Engineering CAD Files 1. If engineering CAD files are required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide these files at a cost of $50 per drawing. These files will be provided in .dwg or .dgn format, as requested. Title blocks and all reference to Turner Engineering, PC, the architect, or other design professionals will be removed from these electronic files. 2. To request these files, go to www.turnerengineering.com. There is an electronic request form under the “Contractor Requests” heading. Fill out this form and submit the form electronically. Send a check made out to “Turner Engineering, PC” for the proper amount. When we have received the completed form and the check, we will e-mail the electronic files to the e-mail address indicated on the form. 3. Turner Engineering, PC does not assume any responsibility for the electronic files, nor for the accuracy of the floor plans. C. Electronic Engineering Portable Document Files (pdf) 1. If Portable Document Files (.pdf) are required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide these files at a cost of $50 per drawing. 2. To request these files, please go to www.turnerengineering.com. There is an electronic request form under the “Contractor Requests” heading. Fill out this form and submit the form electronically. Send a check made out to “Turner Engineering, PC” for the proper amount. When we have received the completed form and the check, we will e-mail the electronic files to the e-mail address indicated on the form. 3. Turner Engineering, PC does not assume any responsibility for the electronic files, nor for the accuracy of the floor plans. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include in bid all labor, materials, tools, plant, transportation, excavation, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, taxes and all necessary and related items required to provide complete and operational systems shown and described. B. References to codes and Standards called for in the Contract Documents mean the latest edition, amendment and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of these Contract Documents. C. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this section: 1. Miscellaneous Supports 2. Access Doors and Panels 3. Fire Stopping 4. Flashing and Sealing 5. Cutting and Patching D. Contract shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Plumbing. 1.4 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-2 West End Heights 2 B. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project: 1. 2015 International Building Code 2. 2015 International Plumbing Code 3. 2015 International Fuel Gas Code 4. 2015 International Energy Conservation Code 5. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations 6. New York State Department of Health 7. New York State Homes and Community Renewal Design Handbook (2014) 8. ASHRAE Standard 62 9. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA 10. National Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 11. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 12. Local Codes and Ordinances for the City of Ithaca. 13. NEMA Standards 14. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 15. Factory Mutual and/or Owner’s Insurance Carrier 16. New York Board of Fire Underwriters 17. City of Ithaca Bureau of Buildings and Zoning 18. Combustion Toxicity Amendment to the New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code 19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - All chapters 20. New York State Education Department - “Manual of Planning Standards” 21. City of Ithaca Plumbing Department 22. Fire Marshall's Office Guidelines and Fire Code Considerations 1.5 LICENSING & PERMITS A. The Contractor shall hold a license to perform the work as issued by the City of Utica. B. Apply for and obtain all required permits and inspections, include costs for all fees and charges within bid. C. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. 1.6 GLOSSARY ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AGA American Gas Association AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code AWWA American Water Works Association EIA Electronic Industries Association FCC Federal Communications Commission FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO International Standards Organization NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental Conservation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SBI Steel Boiler Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association TIA Telecommunications Industry Association UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-3 West End Heights 3 1.7 DEFINITIONS Approved / Approval Written permission to use a material or system. As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution specified/shown in the contract documents. Code Requirements Minimum requirements. Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade. Design Equipment Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Design Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Equal or Equivalent Equally acceptable as determined by Owner’s Representative. Exposed Work not identified as concealed. Final Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certification by Owner's Representative. Furnish Supply and deliver to installation location. Furnished by Others Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install. Inspection Visual observations by Owner's Site Representative. Install Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use. Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency. Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Or Approved Equal Approved equal or equivalent as determined by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s Representative The Prime Professional Prime Professional Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional services. Provide Furnish, install and connect ready for use. Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test, and install ready for use. Replace Remove and provide new item. Review A general contractual conformance check of specified products. Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation. Satisfactory As specified in contract documents. Site Representative Construction Manager or Owner's Inspector at the work site. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional definitions. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-4 West End Heights 4 1.8 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment". Other manufacturers are listed as acceptable, and may be submitted. If the Contractor elects to use one of the listed makes other than "design equipment," submit detailed drawings, indicating proposed installation of equipment. Show maintenance clearances, service removal space required, and other pertinent revisions to the design arrangement. If the submitted equipment is larger than the design make equipment, verify the equipment will physically fit in the space provided, and make all necessary modifications required to install the equipment. Make required changes in the work of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Provide larger electrical feeders, circuit breakers, equipment, additional control devices and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation, and assume responsibility for proper location of roughing and connections by other trades. Remove and replace door frames, access doors, walls ceilings or floors required to install other than design make equipment. If revised arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design equipment" item which conforms to contract documents. 1.9 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, and fixtures. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly and currently engaged in the production of equipment and accessories provided. The design and size of each item of equipment provided for this project needs to have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three (3) installations for not less than three (3) years. B. Suppliers of equipment must have factory trained and authorized personnel for the service of all equipment provided. C. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the contract documents shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for resolution. D. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for the installation and application of joint sealers, flashing, access panels, cutting and patching. E. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Materials That Meet the Following Minimum Requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the N.E.C. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these requirements. 6. Communications equipment shall meet all FCC Regulations 7. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected. 8. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the Specifications. 9. Catalog numbers are sometimes listed in the specifications to aid selection of the equipment, and are for reference only. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of quality, function, dimensions and appearance that must be met by any proposed substitution. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-5 West End Heights 5 B. Proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each request shall include the name of the proposed material equipment being substituted, cut sheets, installation drawings, performance and test data and warranties. At that time the equipment or will be evaluated and if determined to be acceptable an Addendum will be issued to all bidders. C. Requests for substitution shall be made only by a Bidder. Requests for substitution from sales representatives, vendors or suppliers are not acceptable. 2.3 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements. B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies which include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit. 1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer. 2. Constituent parts which are alike shall be product of a single manufacturer. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service. 4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly. C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. D. Major items of equipment which serve the same function must be the same make and model. Exception will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met. 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals for all equipment and materials to be furnished and installed as part of this contract. B. Submittals shall be provided with a cover sheet indicating the date, project name, prime contractor; description of equipment submitted. C. All products specified in individual Division 22 section shall be submitted at the same time. Incomplete or un-organized submittals will not be accepted. Unreadable submittals will be rejected. D. Where equipment submitted deviates from the equipment specified, provide a letter listing all equipment deviations. E. The Contractor is responsible for confirming all quantities, electrical connections, working clearances, and dimensions, determining methods of construction, and coordinating the work with other trades. F. Corrections or comments made on the Submittals during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. 2.5 U.L. LISTING A. Equipment shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), or other approved agency-listing/label. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with the National Electric Code and listed by U.L. 2.6 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result. 2.7 SPECIAL TOOLS A. If any part of equipment requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment or maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on commercial tool market, it shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Steel access doors and Frames shall be factory fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-6 West End Heights 6 B. Construction: 1. Frames: a. 16 gage steel with 1 inch wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable masonry anchors for units installed in masonry, pre-cast, cast in place concrete, ceramic tile b. 16-gage steel, perforated flanges with bead for gypsum or plaster wall board. c. 16-gage steel with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame for full bed plaster applications. 2. Access Doors: a. Provide 14 gage sheet steel flush panel doors with concealed continuous piano hinge factory installed, primed and painted, set to open 175 degrees. b. Provide fire rated, insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self closing mechanism rated for 1½ hour “B” labeled, in fire rated partitions. 3. Provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks on all access doors. 2.9 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4" high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout. 2.10 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Walls and Floor Assemblies shall be listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. Thomas & Betts - S-100 FS500/600, 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA/SAMPLES A. Submit Shop Drawings on all items of equipment and materials to be furnished and installed. Submission of Shop Drawings and samples shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter, stating name of project and contractor, number of drawings, titles, and other pertinent data called for in individual sections. Shop Drawings Shall Be Dated and Contain: Name of project; name of prime professional; name of prime contractor; description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. Incomplete submittals will not be accepted. All products specified in an individual Division 22 section shall be submitted at the same time. Number each submittal. Indicate deviations from contract requirements on Letter of Transmittal. Corrections or comments made on the Shop Drawings during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. The Contractor is responsible for confirming and correcting all quantities; checking electrical characteristics and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 3.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Before construction work commences, Contractors for all trades shall submit Coordination Drawings in the form of electronic coordination drawings. Coordination Drawings are required throughout all areas for all trades. B. Mechanical Equipment Rooms and other critical spaces shall be drawn early in the Coordination Drawing process, simultaneous with all other congested areas. C. Coordination drawings shall identify and show resolutions of physical conflicts, including but not limited to service clearances, access paths, and clearance to combustibles. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-7 West End Heights 7 D. Prepare Coordination Drawings As Follows: 1. The Coordination Drawings base file shall consist of the 3-D architectural and structural models depicting all architectural and structural elements that require coordination. 2. The HVAC Contract shall create and prepare the base model file and then include all equipment, ductwork, piping, and diffusers, clearly indicating structure and equipment mounting heights and required working clearances. a. Submissions of HVAC Contract Documents with contractor title block shall be considered incomplete and will not be acceptable. b. The HVAC Contract shall visit the site to survey and record architectural and structural elements as required. 3. Upon completion of the HVAC Coordination Drawings file, the HVAC Contract shall provide an electronic 3-D model with hard copy prints to all major trades' Contractors. 4. The Plumbing Contract shall then add all equipment, piping, and sprinkler heads, documenting any conflicts with HVAC ductwork and piping. The P/FP Coordination drawings shall indicate equipment mounting heights and all required pitch. 5. The Electrical Contract shall then add all switchgear, panels, motor control centers, luminaires, cable tray, feeders, and other large equipment, including working clearances that must be coordinated with the other trades. 6. Relocate ductwork, diffusers, and sprinklers as required to coordinate with the structure, ceiling grid, and luminaires. 7. Where conflicts occur, relocate equipment and provide offsets and transitions as required to permit equipment to fit in the space. Clearly document modifications on the drawings for review by the Architect and Engineer. As part of the Contract, relocate equipment, ductwork, piping, etc as required for proper coordination. 8. The Electrical, Plumbing Contract shall indicate areas of conflict and suggested resolutions. 9. Upon completion, submit Coordination Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review. Submission shall be in the form of color coded paper prints at a scale of not less than ¼”-1’. Prints shall contain the Contractor’s titleblock, date, and drawing number. a. The HVAC Contract shall review the project phasing plan produced by the Architect. The Coordination Drawings submittal shall be organized and submitted by Phase clearly indicating tie-in locations, valves, unions, flanges, dampers, and accessories required to accommodate system extension. 3.3 ROUGH-IN A. Due to small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact location and elevations at work site prior to any rough in work. DO NOT SCALE PLANS. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or submittal information require a significant change to the original documents, contact the Owner’s Representative for approval before proceeding. B. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections. 1. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact routing of all duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural drawings. Verify with Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostats, fixture and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. 2. Mechanical and electrical drawings show general equipment arrangement for diffusers, grilles, registers, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers and other items. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for exact locations of mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment from the Architect and other contractors. Do not rough-in services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. Obtain written authorization from the Owner’s Representative or other contractor for any rough-ins that, due to project schedule, are required before approved coordination drawings are available. Any work installed without written authorization or approved coordination drawings, causing a conflict will be relocated by the contractor at no expense to the Owner. C. Provide code-required clearances at equipment, controllers, motor starters, valves, and equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Contractor shall relocate existing work in the way of new construction. Visit the site before bidding to determine scope of work. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-8 West End Heights 8 3.4 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall assume responsibility for Construction Safety at all times and provide, as part of contract, all trench or building shoring, scaffolding, shielding, dust/fume protection, mechanical/electrical protection, special grounding, safety railings, barriers, and other safety feature required to provide safe conditions for all workmen and site visitors. 3.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Store Materials on dry base, at least 6" above-ground or floor. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace items stolen or damaged, at no cost to Owner. B. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction." 3.6 FREEZING AND WATER DAMAGE A. Take all necessary precautions with equipment, systems and building to prevent damage due to freezing and/or water damage. Repair or replace, at no change in contract, any such damage to equipment, systems and building. Perform first seasons winterizing in presence of Owner's operating staff. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each trade shall include their required cutting and patching work unless shown as part of the General Construction work on the architectural drawings. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," for additional requirements. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch, cut or abandoned holes left by removals of equipment or fixtures. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.8 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 3.9 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of "General Building Construction Plans and Specifications." Mechanical and Electrical Trades work shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2" above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. 3.10 FIRE-STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "ThroughPenetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-9 West End Heights 9 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Apply fire stopping within the temperature and humidity limits permitted by the manufacturer. 6. Provide rigid steel sleeves where non-armored cables pass through fire rated walls and barriers. 3.11 FLASHING AND SEALING A. Opening through roofs shall be flashed in manner not to affect roof guarantee or bond. Engage qualified Roofing Contractor licensed by the Roofing manufacturer, as part of contract. Provide non-ferrous flashing pieces, skirts, hoods and collars as required to make ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations watertight. Where curbs are called for with respect to rectangular openings in new roofs, flashing will be done by others unless specifically indicated otherwise. Caulk and waterproof with additional material so as to seal airtight and watertight. B. Apply all flashing and sealers within the temperature and humidity limits permitted by the manufacturer. 3.12 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For Precast Panels/Planks and Metal Decks, support mechanical/electrical work as determined by manufacturer and Owner's Representative. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. 3.13 GENERAL INSTALLATIONS REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed B. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment that must be installed prior to building enclosure. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. D. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. E. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. F. No equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s Representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. G. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. H. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. I. Provide wraps meeting ADA//code requirements on all accessible fixtures and equipment. J. Provide independent supports for equipment or systems – do not support equipment or other systems from sprinkler, plumbing or other piping/supports. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-10 West End Heights 10 3.14 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICES A. Make arrangements with NYSEG for gas service to the Owner's distribution equipment. Provide underground gas service as called for and all pads, valves, regulators and fencing as required by the Utility Company. Coordinate all activities between the Owner and Utility Company. The installation of the electric service shall comply with the published Utility Company standards. PAY ALL UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES; INCLUDE CHARGES IN THE BASE BID. 3.15 PAINTING A. This Contract Includes the following: 1. Painting for all cut and patch work performed as part of Division 22 contract. 2. Painting required for touch-up of surfaces damaged due to the installation of Division22, work. 3. Painting as required to repair finish of equipment furnished. 4. Painting as called for on Division 22 drawings. 5. Painting of all surface mounted raceways in finished areas. 3.16 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES A. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and accessories furnished, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. B. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of Contractor's errors, omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expense in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. 3.17 ALL TRADES TEMPORARY HEAT A. Refer to the Standard General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Supplemental General Conditions. 3.18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to the standard General Conditions of the contract for Construction and Supplemental General Conditions. 1. Continuity of operation of existing facilities will require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping. 2. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. 3. Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining pressurized. 3.19 CLEANING A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to keep clean all equipment and fixtures provided under this contract for the duration of the project. Each trade shall keep the premises free from an accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his operations. The facilities require an environment of extreme cleanliness, and it is the Contractor's responsibility to adhere to the strict regulations regarding procedures on the existing premises. After all tests are made and installations completed satisfactorily: 1. Thoroughly clean entire installation, both exposed surfaces and interiors. 2. Remove all debris caused by work. 3. Remove tools, surplus, materials, when work is finally accepted. 3.20 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide final condensate, drain, vent and gas connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-11 West End Heights 11 trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and rail connections extended to floor drains. B. Provide As Part of Plumbing Work valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. C. Provide for Owner Furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of medical equipment, laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 3.21 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete plumbing connections to all plumbing equipment. Provide control connections to equipment where indicated on the drawings. Provide valves on piping ahead of each piece of equipment. B. Provide all piping, trim, accessories and connections as required for proper equipment operation of Equipment provided by this contract, Owner-Furnished Equipment and Equipment furnished by other contracts, C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifica tions for requirements of special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding and confirm prior to roughing. 3.22 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS A. All installations shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate plumbing systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and locations necessitated by the equipment installed. 2. The Architect shall control the placement of all wall and ceiling mounted plumbing equipment and devices in all rooms with the exception of mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. When drawing details are not available, consult with the Architects representative for actual location. 3. Verify all dimensions with field measurements. 4. Arrange for all chases, slots and openings in other building components that are not indicated on drawings, to allow for plumbing installations. 5. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 6. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment that must be installed prior to building enclosure. 7. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 8. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer the conflict to the Architect. 9. Store Materials on dry base, at least 6" above-ground or floor. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace items stolen or damaged, at no cost to Owner. 10. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. 11. All tolerances in alignment and leveling, and the quality of workmanship for each stage of work shall be as required by the manufacturer and subject to approval by the Owner’s Representative. 12. All finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to “as new” condition by touch up or repainting. Any rust shall be removed and primed prior to repainting. 13. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. 14. No plumbing equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s Representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. 15. All plumbing work shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 16. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his approval. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 17. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Lakeview Health Services Basic Plumbing Requirements 220010-12 West End Heights 12 3.23 START UP AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Before acceptance of the work, furnish necessary skilled labor to operate all systems by seasons. Instruct the Owner’s designated personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Obtain written acknowledgment from person instructed prior to acceptance repeat the instructions if asked to do so. Contractor is fully responsible for systems until acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Provide operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by the Owner for operating systems and equipment. Mount the instruction in clear plastic holder on or adjacent to the equipment. B. Where supervision by a manufacturer is called for, provide manufacturer’s certified technician or engineer to supervise the startup, testing and adjustment of the equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturers are involved (i.e. variable frequency drive and air handling unit) both manufacturers shall be present at start up. The manufacturer shall provide a written report detailing the testing and start-up including problems that occurred and their method of resolution. 3.24 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Include one copy each of approved Shop Drawings, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, spare parts lists, as-built drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Include typewritten instructions, describing equipment, starting/operating procedures, emergency operating instructions, seasonal changeover, freeze protection, precautions and recommended maintenance procedures. Include name, address, and telephone number of supplier manufacturer Representative and service agency for all major equipment items. Bind above items in a three ring binder with name of project on the cover. Deliver to Owner's Representative before request for acceptance. 3.25 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a clean set of marked up as-built documents on the job site, and document all variances from the contract documents. B. Prepare record documents in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION 220010 Lakeview Health Services Valves 220520-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 220520 – VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. All valves and accessories listed under “Part 2 – Products” of this Section. B. Provide valve cut sheets and component diagrams, specifications and dimensional drawings for all valves to be utilized on the project. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. General: All valves shall comply with and have following requirements: 1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies per MSS SP-25. 2. All stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line and shall be free of asbestos. B. Makes: 1. Gate, globe and check valves: Milwaukee, Hammond, Nibco, Watts. 2. Ball valves: Apollo (Conbraco), Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Watts. 3. Butterfly valves: Demco, DeZurik, Hammond, Keystone, Milwaukee, Watts. 4. Balance valves: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco. 5. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs. C. Gate Valves: 1. 2½ inches and larger: IBBT, solid or double wedge disc, OS&Y flanged, 125 swp, Milwaukee F-2885. D. Globe valves: 1. 2½ inches and larger: IBBT, renewable seat and disc, OS&Y, 125 swp, flanged, Milwaukee F-2981. 2. 2 inches and smaller: Bronze, renewable composition or PTFE disc, union bonnet, rising stem, 150 swp. Screwed ends, Milwaukee 590T or 595T. Solder ends, Milwaukee 1590T. E. Check Valves: 1. 2½ inches and larger: IBBT, renewable seat and disc, bolted flange cap, flanged ends, 125 swp, Milwaukee F2974. Provide in horizontal position only. 2. 2 inches and smaller: Bronze, swing check, 125 swp. Screwed ends, Milwaukee 509. Solder ends, Milwaukee 1509. Provide in horizontal position only. 3. 2 inches and smaller: Bronze, lift check, 400 psi wog, PTFE seat, stainless steel guide rod and stainless steel spring. Screwed ends, Watts 600 series. Solder ends, Watts 601S Series. Provide in vertical or horizontal positions. 4. Silent check valves: Globe type, semi-steel body with bronze trim and stainless steel spring, 250 lb. ASA, Milwaukee Series 1400. F. Ball Valves: 1. 2 inches and under: Bronze body, two piece, 600 psi (WOG), full port openings, chrome plated steel ball and stem, teflon seats, end entrance. Screwed (threaded) ends, Watts FBV-3. Solder (sweat) ends, Watts FBVS3. Lakeview Health Services Valves 220520-2 West End Heights 2 G. Balance Valves: 1. Calibrated balance valve with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter suitable as a service valve. Meter connections to have built-in check valves. An integral pointer shall register degree of valve openings. Valve shall have internal seals. 2. Balance valves sizes shall be based upon gpm range rather than pipe size. Balance Valve Size GPM Range ½” up to 2.5 ¾” 2.5 - 4.5 1” 4.5 - 10 1¼” 10 - 15 1½” 15 - 30 2” 30 - 60 2½” 60 – 100 3. Design equipment: Armstrong CBV Series. H. Valves For Gauges And Instruments: 1. ¼ inch size: Brass bar stock for 1000 psi and 300°F; Trerice No. 735 needle valve. I. Butterfly Valves For Water Service: 1. 100% bubble-tight shutoff against listed working pressure of 200 psi. Milwaukee "C" Series. 2. Body: Lug type, ductile iron ASTM A536 or cast iron ASTM A126B. 3. Disc: Aluminum bronze or bronze. 4. Seat: Replaceable, EPDM, reinforced resilient seat, for water temperatures up to 250oF at 150 psi. 5. Shaft: 316 or 416 stainless steel, mounted within corrosion resistant bearings, of the two piece type. 6. Operators: Valves up to 6 in. with lever operators; valves 8 in. and larger with heavy duty manual gear actuators. 7. Valves shall be capable of Bi-Directional Flow and have extended neck which can accommodate 2 inches of pipe insulation. 8. Valves are to conform to MSS-SP-67. J. Gas Valves and Regulators: 1. Valves 2½ inches and larger: Manual actuated with lever actuators bolted gland type, short pattern, lubricated plug type, 175 lb. WOG, flanged, UL listed. Makes: Homestead, Milliken or approved equal 2. Valves 2 inches and smaller: Bronze body, screwed ends, AGA approved and UL listed. Milwaukee BB2-100. K. Underground Valves: 1. Curb Valves 2 inches and smaller: a. Mueller H-15201, 175 lb. w.p. brass plug valve, one quarter turn with check, solid teehead "O" ring seal, flared copper ends - AWWA C800-66 threads. 2. Gate Valves 3 inches and larger: a. Iron body inside screw-in bronze trim; wedge disc; resilient seat; "O" ring seals; 175 psi wwp; open counter-clockwise; 2 inch square wrench nut; mechanical joint ends; AWWA C509. Water service: Kennedy Ken-Seal Fig. 1571X. Fire protection service: UL listed and FM approved; Kennedy KenSeal Fig. 1071X with adjustable indicator post, wrench, case-hardened brass padlock and keys. 3. Curb Boxes: a. Cast iron with adjustable steel riser, stationary rod and cover extended from the valve to finish grade. Provide with each curb valve. Lakeview Health Services Valves 220520-3 West End Heights 3 4. Valve Boxes: a. Cast iron adjustable screw type box and cover extending from the valve to finish grade. Cast arrow and lettering on cover of box denoting direction of valve opening and service. Provide with each gate valve. 5. Valve Key: a. Steel socket key for gate valve or curb valve. L. Hose Thread Drain Valves: 1. Bronze body with interchangeable solid bronze wedge and screwed-in bonnet, with hose thread end, brass cap and chain, 600 psi WOG, 200 psi, Milwaukee BA-100H FNPT X Male Hose or BA-150H soldered X male hose. Ball valve with brass cap and chain on hose end. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide valves of type called for and where required to service equipment and fixtures. 2. Use extreme care and caution when soldering valve connections to piping to prevent valve seat damage. Apply heat with the flame directed away from the center of the valve body. Inspect all valves after soldering, tighten valve packing nut and make adjustments if required to ensure valve operates properly. 3. Provide at all major building and all systems sections and where noted on the Drawings. 4. Provide chain wheels, guides and chain loops for valves, where called for. 5. Locate valves with stems at or above horizontal positions and swing check valves in horizontal position only. 6. Butterfly valves may be used for water service over 4 inches unless otherwise noted. 7. Ball valves shall be used for all domestic water service unless otherwise noted. 8. Provide hose threaded drain valves at all low points, strainers, equipment and as called for. Provide hose threaded drain valves at all system low points, at all elevation changes and at all building intersections for all plumbing and fire protection systems. In addition to these requirements, provide drains where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 9. Provide balance valves as recommended by the manufacturer; provide all required and recommended pipe diameter clearances upstream and downstream from each balance valve provided. 10. For underground valves: Valve boxes shall be placed vertically over each valve and the top of the box adjusted to proper grade and the valve and box immediately backfilled with crushed stone carefully tamped into place. Valves shall be checked for proper operation before installation and, unless otherwise instructed are to be left in the open position. All valves to open counter-clockwise. END OF SECTION 220520 Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Identification 220530-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 220530 – PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each identification material and device and for all items specified under “Part 2 - Products” of this Section. B. Submit valve schedule for all piping systems typewritten on 8½ inch x 11 inch paper, indicating code number, location and valve function. C. Submit schedule of piping, equipment and valve identification for review before labeling. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Allen Systems, Inc., W.H. Brady Co., Calpico, Craftmark Identification Systems or Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's products of categories and types required for each application. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Pipe Labels (Inside buildings): 1. Piping/Insulation with outside diameter of 5 7/8 inches and less: Provide acrylic plastic wrap-around type markers with directional flow arrows, UV resistance and legend printed four (4) times for 360 degree visibility. Make: Seton “Setmark” snap-on wrap around type pipe markers. 2. Piping/Insulation with outside diameter of 6 inches and greater: Provide acrylic plastic strap-on type markers with directional flow arrows, UV resistance and legend printed two (2) times minimum. Make: Seton “Setmark” strap-on wrap around type pipe markers. Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Identification 220530-2 West End Heights 2 B. Pipe labels shall conform to the following identification table: PIPE SERVICE IDENTIFICATION / LABEL Domestic Cold Water DOMESTIC COLD WATER Domestic Hot Water DOMESTIC HOT WATER Domestic Hot Water Re-circulation DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN Natural Gas NATURAL GAS Sanitary and / or Waste SANITARY DRAIN Plumbing Vent SANITARY VENT Storm STORM DRAIN Indirect Waste INDIRECT WASTE Fire Protection - Mains FIRE PROTECTION WATER Fire Protection - Wet Sprinkler SPRINKLER - WATER Fire Protection – Standpipes STANDPIPE – MANUAL WET C. Underground Pipe Identification and Detection Marking: 1. Provide Metallic Detection Tape for all underground storm and sanitary sewers, natural gas lines and water piping. Provide 2” wide tape, 0.035”. Make: Seton style 37000 series 2 inch tape for burial 4 inches to 6 inches below surface, Style 37000 series 6 inch tape for burial deeper than 6 inches. 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2" diameter with ½" high numerals. Identify all plumbing services with 1/4" letters above the valve number (“PLBG.”). Attach to valves using brass “jack” chain and brass “S” hook. Make: Seton Style No. M4507 tags, Style No. 16182 chain and Style No. 16195, 6 and 7 No. hooks. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves provided as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Hang in Mechanical Room or in location as directed by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project. Provide a valve tag chart for all valves provided on the project. B. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project. END OF SECTION 220530 Lakeview Health Services Adjusting and Balancing 220530-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 220530 – ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents. B. Provide labor, material, equipment and services to perform verification of main water service. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide information in report form listing items required by the Project specifications. Report shall be typed and three copies submitted for review. Results shall be guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative. B. Report format shall consist of the following: 1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following: 1. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Maintain qualified person at project for system operation, trouble shooting and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure. C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB. 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before concealment of systems visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balancing facilities. B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition. 1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession. 2. Prior to balancing adjust balancing devices for full flow; fill, vent and clean plumbing systems, replace temporary strainers. 3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the Engineer, to satisfy job conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers, anemometers, inclined gauge manometers, magnehelic gauges, amprobes, voltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required. Instruments used shall be accurately calibrated as per AABC or NEBB requirements. B. Verification of main water service – provide a means to test and measure water flow from zero to the design flow rate of the backflow preventer(s) as a way to verify that the main water service is capable of providing the pressure/flow needed for the facility. Measure and record the static pressure (at zero flow) as well as the residual pressure and flow rate. Compare results to those expected on the backflow preventer report. Lakeview Health Services Adjusting and Balancing 220530-2 West End Heights 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine Bid Documents and notify Owner's Representative of any questions regarding balancing, within thirty days after receipt of bid and prior to starting work. 3.2 WATER SIDE A. Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Hot Water Re-circulating and Circulation Pumps: a. Check rotation b. GPM c. Running suction pressure d. Running discharge pressure e. Running load amps f. RPM - motor g. Complete nameplate motor and pump 2. Domestic Hot Water Re-circulation System Balancing Valves: a. Balance every valve to GPM noted on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 220550 Lakeview Health Services Insulation 220700-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 220700 – INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer data. Schedule of insulation applications. 1. Submission shall include the Manufacturer’s Health Product Declaration fro all products being submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesives and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facings for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ducts, pipes and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials not permitted. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID TYPE) A. Preformed rigid sectional pipe covering, 4 lb. nominal density fiberglass. Maximum thermal conductivity (k), on a flat surface, shall be 0.25 Btu/sq. ft. hr. oF/in. at 75oF mean temperature. White Kraft outer surface bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiberglass yarn. All fiberglass insulation shall provide formaldehyde free glass binder 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (FLEXIBLE TYPE) A. Flexible, unicellular elastomeric foam type, fire retardant insulation. 2.4 METAL JACKETING A. Aluminum, .016 in. thick, Z-joint longitudinal joint. Transverse closure strip with weatherproof sealing method. 2.5 PLASTIC JACKETING A. PVC jacket, UV resistant, 20 mill thickness. Solvent adhesive welded joints. 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Certainteed, Knauf, Manville, Owens-Corning, or approved equal. B. Flexible Elastomeric: Armstrong, Manville, Rubatex, or approved equal. C. Adhesives: Benjamin Foster (BF), Mono-Eco, Tremco; numbers designate quality of adhesive. 2.7 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 220700-2 West End Heights 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Thermal Insulation: 1. Insulation is required on piping and equipment unless otherwise called for. 2. Only on clean, dry surfaces and after work has been tested. 3. On cold surfaces with continuous unbroken vapor seal. 4. Exposed surfaces shall be white. 5. Pipes individually insulated. B. Do not cover inspection stampings, openings, petcocks, handholes, manholes, access doors, plugged outlets, air vents, plugged openings or petcocks. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed. B. Piping In Exterior Walls, Spaces, Overhangs, Attics, Or Where Subject To Freezing: Insulate pipe with double the thickness called for. Piping In Wall Chases: In addition to the above, pack chase with loose glass fiber insulation. C. Plumbing Equipment: 1. Install insulation on exposed hot and cold plumbing piping to within 18 in. of fixture or equipment connection. 2. Insulate exposed domestic hot water and waste piping for plumbing fixtures designated for use by the handicapped. D. Joints In Section Pipe Covering Made As Follows: 1. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with BF 85-20 or factory applied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. Stapled with outward clinching staples. 2. Vapor barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white BF 85-20. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges and fittings with white BF 85-20. E. Fittings, Valves And Flanges: 1. Hot and cold water: a. Concealed: Insulating cement of the same thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. Cold water to be vapor sealed with BF 30-36 "Seal-Fas". b. Exposed: Premolded fitting covers of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation and finished with glass cloth applied and coated with BF 30-36 "Seal-Fas." 2. Optional: In lieu of the standard method above, the Contractor has the option of using Zeston, Ceel-Tite System, or Proto. Tape all joints at covers. F. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or ells may be continuous. 3. Where exposed, apply white paint as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Equipment insulation surfaces shall be a hard, smooth, uniform finish. Install Work ready for painting. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 220700-3 West End Heights 3 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS (Notes are at end of Exhibit I) SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Domestic cold water Glass fiber 1½ " and larger ............ 1" 1-1/4" and smaller ........ ½” Domestic hot and circulation water (up to 140o) Glass fiber 1-1/2" and larger………..1-1/2" 1-1/4" and less ............. 1" AC unit drains and overflows Glass fiber Flexible All sizes ........................ ½" SEE NOTE #2 Roof conductor lines Glass fiber All sizes ....................... .1" Insulate body of drain and conductor piping, horizontal and vertical, down to connection below ground floor slab or in crawl space NOTES FOR EXHIBIT I NOTE 1: Exposed insulation at laundry equipment shall be covered with PVC jacket. NOTE 2: Flexible allowed in ½ in. thickness only. END OF SECTION 220700 Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 221010 – PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of all pipe materials, fittings and connections to be utilized on this Project. B. Provide submittal information for all pipe, fittings and connections to be utilized on this project. C. Submit shop drawings and descriptive literature, showing dimensions, joint and other details for each type and class of pipe, fitting and restraint system to be furnished for the project. All materials furnished under the Contract shall be manufactured only in accordance with the specifications. Submittals shall include material information, dimensions, pipe class information, weights, coating and lining system data. D. Submit manufacturer’s Certificates of Compliance with these specifications and certification that the ductile iron pipe fittings have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA/ANSI specifications. E. Submit a detailed description of proposed testing, flushing and disinfection procedures to be used for this project. The description shall contain the name of the person responsible for the testing, flushing and disinfection work, equipment to be used, chemical to be used, method of measuring flow during flushing procedures and the name of the laboratory to be used for analysis. Review of the description shall not be construed as approval of any methods to be used; the Contractor shall be fully responsible for achieving the specified test results. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All piping and fittings used on this Project shall be new and marked with manufacturer's name; and shall comply with all applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS – NATURAL GAS (BELOW GROUND) A. Pipe: API 5L ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 weight; black factory coated finish, welded. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. Field coated and wrapped. Wrap shall be scotch wrap #50, 12” wide, 75% overlap. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. 2.3 POLYETHYLENE UNDERGROUND GAS PIPE AND FITTINGS (NATURAL GAS) A. Piping: Pipe ASTM D 3261, 2513, 2683, PE 3408 EHMW, Polyethylene (PE) pipe and fittings. Pipe shall have SDR 13.5 for 6” and SDR 11 for 3” and 4”. B. Tracer Wire: #12 HMW-PE yellow jacket, 45 mil solid copper. Wire shall be installed to enable electronic locating of the utility. C. Warning Tape: 1. Yellow plastic, 6” wide and 4 mils thick, Acid- and alkali- resistant Polyethylene film Warning Tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities. Tape shall be continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. Installed 12 to 18 inches above the Gas line, but no less than 6” inches below grade. D. Make: Plexco “Yellowstripe”, PE3408 or approved equal. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-2 West End Heights 2 1. Follow all manufacturers’ installation instructions. 2.4 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40, or extra strong (Schedule 80) weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding, threaded for screwed (threaded) connections or roll-grooved for grooved mechanical connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets," "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples and job fabricated reductions not acceptable. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Screwed fittings: Malleable iron, black or galvanized finish as called for; drainage type where called for. C. Joints and Connections: 1. Screwed (threaded) connections: a. Unions: ASA malleable cast iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. b. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. 2. Welded connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not to be provided except where called for and shall not be provided in conjunction with butterfly valves. 3. Grooved mechanical connections: a. Couplings of malleable iron (ASTM A470) or ductile iron (ASTM A536) with painted coating, designed for roll-grooved piping. b. Gaskets suitable for water service -30oF to 230oF of EPDM, Grade E. c. Bolts and nuts: Heat treated, hex head carbon steel (ASTM A183) cadmium plated or zinc electroplated. d. Fittings: Elbows, tees, laterals, reducers, adapters as required. Same construction as couplings. e. Design equipment: Victaulic, rigid system, Style 07 couplings. D. Makes: Conac, Grinnell or Victaulic. E. Gauge And Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.5 COPPER PIPE AND SOLDER FITTINGS A. Pipe: Above ground - hard temper, ASTM B88; Type K, L, M, or DWV, as called for. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Below ground - Soft temper, ASTM B88; Type K. C. Copper is not allowed for urinal waste (above or below ground). D. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought copper; solder end connections; ASTM B62, ASTM B16.22. E. Unions And Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, wrought copper, ground joint, 150 lb. swp; 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, wrought copper, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. F. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. G. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Englehart "Silverbright 100", Willard Industries "Solder Safe (silver bearing), Canfield "Watersafe". Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-3 West End Heights 3 2.6 COPPER PIPE AND BRAZED FITTINGS A. Pipe: Type K or L. B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Cast bronze ASTM B62, ANSI B16.22. C. Unions And Flanges: Unions for 2 in. and smaller. Brazed type cast bronze ground joint, 150 lb. swp; flanged for 2-1/2 in. and larger, brazed type, cast bronze, companion type, gasketed and bolted, ASME drilled 150 lb. swp. D. Brazing Materials: Silver brazing alloy, Airco Sil-45 or "Sil-Fos". 2.7 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (WATER SERVICE) A. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 for thickness Class 52. Fittings shall meet ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. Pipe and fittings shall have cement mortar lining, ASA A21.4-90 (AWWA-C104-90). Pipe and fittings shall have a coating of coal tar pitch varnish on the outside. Joints shall be ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Joints shall be push-on type with a single groove and rubber gasket, with follower gland for each joint. There shall be two bronze wedges supplies for each joint of pipe, gasket and lubricant. Provide tapping sleeves saddle and all equipment required to connect to existing main. B. Ductile iron pipe shall be that of a United States manufacturer who can demonstrate at lease five years of successful experience in manufacturing ductile iron pipe. The pipe shall be equipped with push-on type, restrained joint, or mechanical joints, as required and called for. C. All ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.50 (1976) (AWWA C150) and ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151). D. The ductile iron pipe shall be Class 52 and furnished in nominal 18-foot lengths, with Push-on or Mechanical Joints as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Griffin Pipe Company, Clow Corporation, or equal with gaskets conforming to AWWA C111 ANSI A21.11 “Rubber Gasket Joints.” E. The ductile iron pipe shall be double cement lined inside and then asphalt seal coated on the outside and inside approximately 1 mil. Thick. The cement lining shall conform to AWWA C104 ANSI A21.4. The pipe shall be furnished along with necessary materials and equipment recommended by the manufacturer for use in joining pipe lengths and fittings. F. Fittings shall be compact ductile iron Class 52 Mechanical Joint, conforming to ANSI Specification A21.53 (AWWA C153), latest edition, for pipe sizes 16-inches and smaller and Class 52 standard Mechanical Joint fittings conforming to AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10, latest edition except as specified, for pipe sizes 16 through 24-inches, unless specifically stated otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings. Fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Fittings shall be of the same material and have the same lining and coating as the pipe specified above. All fittings shall be marked with the weight and shall have distinctly cast upon them the pressure rating, the manufacturer’s identification, nominal diameter of openings and the number of degrees or fraction of the circle on all bends. 1. Hydrant tees shall be anchoring type, Clow F-1217 or approved equal. 2. Caps and plugs installed in all new work as indicated on the drawings shall be provided with a threaded corporation or bleeder valve so that air and water pressure can be relieved prior to future connection. G. Provide all bell push-on or mechanical-joint fittings unless otherwise indicated or specified. H. Furnish and install adaptors for all joining pipe of different types, unless solid sleeves indicated. 1. Provide ends conforming to above specifications for appropriate type of joint, to receive adjoining pipe. 2. Joining two classes of pipe may be of lighter class provided annular space in bell-and-spigot type joints sufficient for jointing. I. Provide mechanical joint or push-on joint pipe with necessary accessories, conforming to ANSI A21.11. 1. Provide gasket composition suitable for exposure to potable water (Water System). 2. Provide serrated brass wedges for push-on joints to provide electrical continuity; two per joint for pipe 12-in. and smaller and four per joint for larger pipe. J. Provide pipe flanges and accessories conforming to ANSI A21.15. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-4 West End Heights 4 K. Restrained joints shall be furnished for installation on all fittings, sleeves, hydrants and valves. Restraints for mechanical joints shall be Megalug as manufactured by EBAA Iron Company, Uni-flanged Series 1400 Mechanical Joint Restraint or equal. Restraints for push-on joints shall Be Series 1390 as manufactured by Uni-Flange, or Series 800 Coverall as manufactured by EBAA Iron Company. L. Sleeve Type Couplings: 1. Furnished by pipe supplier. 2. Pressure rating a least equal to that of related pipeline with a minimum rating of 150 psig. 3. Manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division, Bradford, PA; Rockwell International, Municipal and Utility Division, Pittsburgh, PA; R.H. Baker and Company, Inc., Los Angeles, CA, or acceptable equivalent product. 4. Couplings for buried pipe: Cast iron sleeve or steel sleeve and retainer with fusion bonded epoxy coating, Dresser Style 53 or 153, Rockwell Style 431, Baker Series 228, or acceptable equivalent product. Provide couplings with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 5. Couplings for exposed pipe: Steel; Dresser Style 38, Rockwell Style 411, Baker Series 200, or acceptable equivalent product. Provide couplings with steel bolts and nuts. 6. Furnish with pipe stop removed. 7. Provide with gaskets of composition suitable for exposure to liquid within pipe. 2.8 SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS (CAST IRON) A. Below ground pipe: ASTM A74 service weight cast iron, coated. B. Below ground fittings: Service weight cast iron, hub and spigot type with “push-on” type fittings with ASTM C564 extra heavy neoprene gaskets of same manufacturer as piping. C. Above ground pipe: ASTM A74 service weight cast iron, coated. D. Above ground fittings, no-hub: PERMISSIBLE FOR ABOVE GRADE AND ABOVE FLOORS ONLY. Cast iron no-hub pattern with neoprene gasket and 24 gauge, Type 304, 18-8 stainless steel. Acceptable couplings are: 1. Clamp-All “High-Torq 80”. 2. Tyler “Wide Body” (Note: Tyler standard couplings are not acceptable and will not be allowed). 3. Husky SD-4000. 2.9 THERMOPLASTIC (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS (DRAINAGE) A. Interior Thermoplastic Sewer (PVC): 1. Pipe: ASTM D1784 material manufactured to ASTM D1785 Standards. Seamless Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Type 1, Grade 1. Socket type weld couplings ASTM D2466, DR with integral bell end for solvent cementing ASTM D2672. Solvent cement - ASTM D2564. 2. Fittings: Socket type cement weld fittings of same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. ASTM D2466. 2.10 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS (DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY BRANCHES ONLY) A. PEX Distributions System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing with multilayered, closed-celled, crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) foam insulation with a thermal conductivity of 0.25 BTU in./sq, ft./hour/°F, a vapor permeability of 0.1g/100 sq. in./day, and a corrugated, seamless high-density polyethylene (HPDE); UV protected jacket. B. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal insert type with copper or stainless steel crimp rings matching PEX tube dimensions. C. Manifold: Multiple outlet plastic or corrosion resistant metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877: with plastic or corrosion resistant metal valve for each outlet. 2.11 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BLDG. (UNDERGROUND STORM AND SANITARY ONLY) A. Pipe and fittings shall have integral wall bell and spigot rubber ring joints with a minimum wall thickness of SDR-35. Pipe shall meet ASTM D-3034, joints ASTM D3212 and fittings ASTM D-1784 including any later revisions thereto. Wye branch shall conform to the same material and strength classification. Fittings shall be push-on type with neoprene gasket (bell and spigot). Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-5 West End Heights 5 B. The polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings, including those required for stubs, shall conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for Type PSM PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, Designation ASTM D3034, latest revision, for sizes 4” – 15” and ASTM F679, latest revision, for sizes 18” – 27”. The pipe shall have a maximum pipe diameter to wall thickness ratio SDR of 35. The pipe shall be tested by the flat plate deflection method at a minimum of 45 psi at 5 percent deflection in accordance with ASTM D 2412. Standard laying lengths shall be either 13 feet or 20 feet. C. Specials, if required, shall conform to the Specifications for straight pipe insofar as applicable and to the details indicated on the drawings or bound into the back to the specifications. D. Joints for the polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be push-on bell and spigot joints using elastomeric ring gaskets. The gaskets shall be securely fixed into place in the bells so that they cannot be dislodged during joint assembly. The gaskets shall be of a composition and texture, which is resistant to common ingredients of sewage and industrial wastes, we well as petroleum (oil, gasoline, etc.) and groundwater and which will endure permanently under the conditions of the proposed use. The joints shall conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals, Designation D3212. E. All pipe delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by test reports certifying that the pipe and fittings conform to the above-mentioned ASTM Specifications. In addition, the pipe shall be subject to thorough inspection and tests, the right being reserved for the Engineer to apply such tests as he deems necessary. F. All tests shall be made in accordance with the methods prescribed by the above mentioned ASTM Specifications and the acceptance or rejection shall be based on the test results. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all labor to assist the Engineer in inspecting the pipe. Pipe will be inspected upon delivery and such as does not conform to the requirements of this contract shall be rejected and shall immediately be removed from the project site by the Contractor. H. All pipe shall be stored at the site until installation in a manner which will keep the pipe at ambient outdoor temperatures. Temporary shading shall be provided as required to meet this requirement. Simply covering the pipe, which allows temperature build-up with exposed to direct sunlight, will not be permitted. I. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the pipe and fittings. 2.12 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Copper To Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter. B. Copper To Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only. 2. Dielectric pipe fittings. C. Steel To Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). D. No-Hub, Cast Iron: Proper adapter to piping being connected. 2.13 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND STEEL PIPING A. Provide cathodic protection for underground piping and systems. The cathodic protection system shall provide a flow of direct current from sacrificial anodes to the outer surface of the piping. B. Materials: 1. Anodes shall be cast zinc or magnesium alloy anodes with 10 ft. long No. 12 Type TW lead wires silver soldered to a galvanized steel core. Anodes shall have sufficient number of lead wires to allow electrical connection from anode to each pipe. Anodes shall come packaged in a permeable cloth bag with prepared backfill consisting of 75% Gypsum, 20% Bentanite and 5% Sodium Sulphate. Weight of anode: 17 lbs. each. 2. Coating: Coating shall be Scotchkote or Scotchwrap. 3. Reference cell: Provide a portable copper-sulfate reference electrode for testing effectiveness of cathodic protection system. 4. Test station: Cast iron manhole, 12 in. diameter; OPW #104A-12. 5. Make: Harco Corporation, Corrco. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-6 West End Heights 6 2.14 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Tensile strength, ASME B16.8, union 250 psi, or flange design, 175 psi, pressure rating, at 210oF, threaded or solder joint, constructed to prevent gasket from squeezing into internal opening. B. Make: Epco, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts. 2.15 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: Carpenter & Patterson, Central Iron, B-Line, ITT, Grinnell. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Cadmium plated or galvanized for exterior. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium (0.005 in. minimum) finish. C. Hanger Spacing Schedule: PIPING MATERIAL MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL SPACING (FEET) MAXIMUM VERTICAL SPACING (FEET) Cast Iron Pipea 5 15 Copper or Copper-Alloy Pipe 12 10 Copper or Copper-Alloy Tubing, 1-1/4 inch Diameter and Smaller 6 10 Copper or Copper-Alloy Tubing, 1-1/2 inch Diameter and Larger 10 10 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) 2.67 (32 inches) 10b Cross-linked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) Pipe 2-2/3 (32 inches) 4 Steel Pipe 12 15 PVC Pipe 4 10b a. The maximum horizontal spacing of cast iron pipe hangers shall be increased to 10 feet where 10-foot lengths of pipe are installed. b. Midstory guide for sizes 2 inches and smaller. D. Cast Iron No-Hub Supports: 1. In accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 2. Vertical piping supported at each stack base and at each floor. Freestanding vertical pipe should be adequately staked or braced during construction to maintain alignment. Bases of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick laid in cement mortar, metal brackets attached to the building construction or by other methods approved by the Owner's Representative. 3. Horizontal piping supported within 24 in. each side of the coupling joint at 10 ft. intervals for 10 ft. pipe lengths and at 5 ft. intervals for 5 ft. pipe lengths. Supports or hangers placed to maintain alignment and grade with provision made to prevent shear. Greater than 3 in. diameter pipe braced at changes of direction to prevent horizontal movement. E. Piping systems with material not listed above, supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-7 West End Heights 7 recommendations. F. Inserts: Design equipment Grinnell Fig. #281, maximum loading 1000 lbs., galvanized finish and Fig. #285, maximum loading 400 lbs. Make: Globestrut, Grinnell, Unistrut, B-Line. G. Supports: 1. For weights under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts equal to Phillips "Red Head" "U" Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 2. For weights above 1000 lbs.: Drill through floor slabs and provide flat flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional "Drill-In" inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. 3. For metal decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use Phillips "Red Head" devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. H. Hangers for fire protection piping are as above and in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hangers and building attachments shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. I. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For plumbing systems only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or straps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. 5. Make: Globestrut, Kindorf, Unistrut, B-Line. 2.16 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast iron polished chrome, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures. B. Cleanout plugs, bushings, nipples, required for instruments and gauges to be brass. C. Pipe Roll Stand: Cast iron roll stand. Make: Advanced Thermal Systems, Carpenter and Patterson, ITT Grinnell, Pipe Shields. 2.17 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, for structural surfaces. 2. Sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18 gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. 2.18 PIPE SHIELDS A. Provide pipe shields on all insulated piping between insulation and each hanger. 1. Make: Michigan, B-Line or approved equal. 2.19 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Waterproof Type: 1. Exterior walls, below grade and above basement or vault floor: Synthetic rubber material with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac. 2.20 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-8 West End Heights 8 floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.21 WATER MAIN CONNECTIONS – TAPPED A. Provide watertight joint with adequate strength against pullout. Use only tapered thread taps. B. Maximum size of taps or fittings without bosses not to exceed that listed in appropriate table of Appendix to ANSI A21.51 based on: 1. Three full threads for gray iron. 2. Two full threads for ductile iron. C. Where size of connection exceeds that given above for pipe, provide boss on pipe barrel or use tapping saddle. Make tap in flat part of intersection of run and branch of tee or cross, or connect by means for tapped tee, branch fitting and tapped plug or reducing flange, or tapping tee and tapping valve, as indicated or permitted. 2.22 STACK SLEEVE A. With flashing clamp and threaded pipe sleeve extension. B. Design Equipment: Jay R. Smith Series 1720 with caulking recess and flashing clamp. C. Make: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Zurn, Wade. 2.23 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A," "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for Plumbing piping. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other Work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping, nor by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing, using proper diameter rod for pipe size. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic pipe per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible; "C" type not permitted on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed. 3.3 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. No-Lead Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-9 West End Heights 9 working parts of valves before applying heat. C. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. D. Solvent-cemented joints for PVC pipe: Follow ASTM D2855 for making joints, and ASTM F402 for safe handling of cements and primers. E. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Protect fittings from excessive heat. 3.4 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded piping fabricated by qualified welder. Use certified welder where specifically required by code or insurance company. If indicated and permitted for fire protection systems, all provisions for welded pipe shall additionally be in accordance with NFPA Standard 13. Use full length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe with inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slip-on flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe. B. When welding galvanized pipe, apply cold galvanizing on joint following welding. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors which are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains, use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal Void Space At Sleeves As Follows: 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior walls above grade: Use sealing element. 3. Exterior walls below grade and above basement or vault floors: Use link-seal. 4. Cored holes: Use sealing element. 5. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. 6. Waterproofed floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Refer to other Sections for testing of Plumbing and Fire Protection Systems. 3.9 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. 3.10 HANDLING PIPE – SITE SANITARY, WATER AND NATURAL GAS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall take care not to damage pipe by impact, bending, compression, or abrasion during handling and installation. Joint ends of pipe especially shall be kept clean. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-10 West End Heights 10 B. Pipe shall be stored above ground at a height no greater than 5 feet and with even support for the pipe barrel. C. Only nylon-protected sings shall be used for handling the pipe. No hooks or bare cables will be permitted. D. Gaskets shall be shipped in cartons and stored in a clean area, away from grease, oil, heat, direct sunlight and ozone producing electric motors. 3.11 ALIGNMENT, INSTALLATION AND PLACEMENT OF PIPE – DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Jointing of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be done in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer and as specified. The last 8 inches of the outside of the spigot end of pipe and the inside of the bell end of pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned. The joint surfaces and the gasket shall be painted with a lubricant just prior to making up the joint. The spigot end shall then be gently pushed home into the bell. The position of the gasket shall be checked to insure that the joint has been properly made and is watertight. Care shall be taken not to exceed the manufacturer’s recommended maximum deflection allowed for each joint. B. Installation and jointing of push-on ductile iron pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C600 Sections 9b and 9c, latest revision, as applicable. C. Mechanical joints shall be installed with Mega-Lug, Uni-Flange or MJR restraints. Restraints shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. All bolt heads on Mega-Lugs or Uni-Flange shall be tightened sufficiently so that they shear off to provide indication that proper tightening torque was achieved. MJR systems shall be installed with ductile iron locking ring, tapered MJ gland and a symmetrical locking ring. D. Restrained push on joints shall be installed with specified joint restraints. Restraints shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. E. Ductile iron pipe installed near cathodically protected gas lines or within areas subject to corrosive soils or waters shall be fully encased with polyethylene material. F. Solid sleeves shall be used to joint plain ends on ductile iron pipe. Mechanical joints shall be installed with Mega-Lug, Uni-Flange or MJR restraints, as specified hereinbefore. G. Piping Support: 1. Furnish and install supports to hold piping at lines and grades indicated or specified. 2. Support pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment to prevent any strain imposed on equipment. 3. Support piping within buildings and structures from floors, walls, ceilings or beams. For floor support, use saddle stands or concrete or brick piers as indicated or permitted. Shape pipe saddles to fit pipe and be capable of screw adjustment. Construct brick and concrete piers to conform accurately to the bottom one-third to one-half of pipe. Support piping along walls by wall brackets with attached pipe rolls, saddles or with adjustable hanger rods. Support piping from ceilings with rod hangers of type capable of screw adjustment and with adjustable concrete inserts or beam clamps. 4. Use hangers and supports conforming to MSS-SP-58. 5. Place supports to provide uniform slopes without sagging. Locate per MSS-SP-69 with at least two hangers for each pipe section. Locate hangers adjacent to joints, direction changes and branch connections. H. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Remove and replace defective pieces. 2. Clear of all debris and dirt before installing and keep clean until accepted. 3. Lay accurately to lines and grades indicated or required. Provide accurate alignment, both horizontally and vertically. 4. Provide firm bearing along entire length of buried pipelines. I. Temporary Plugs: When pipe laying not in progress, close open ends of pipe with temporary watertight plugs. If water in trench, do not remove plug until danger of water entering pipe passed. J. Socket Pipe Clamps: Tierods and Bridles: Where indicated or necessary to prevent joints or sleeve couplings from pulling apart under pressure, provide suitable socket pipe clamps, tierods and bridles. Use bridles and tierod at least ¾ inches in diameter, except where they replace flange bolts of smaller size with nut on each side of flange pairs. Coat clamps and tierods or bridles with two coats of bituminous coating after assembly and allow to dry before backfilling. K. Appurtenances: Set valves, fittings and appurtenances as indicated. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-11 West End Heights 11 L. Push-on Joints: 1. Insert gasket into groove bell. Apply thin film of nontoxic gasket lubricant over inner surface of gasket in contact with spigot end. 2. Insert chamfered end into gasket. Force pipe past it until it seats against socket bottom. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-12 West End Heights 12 M. Bolted Joints: 1. Remove rust-preventative coatings from machined surfaces. 2. Clean pipe ends, sockets, sleeves, housings and gaskets and smooth all burns and other defects. 3. Use torque wrench to tighten to correct range of torque not to exceed values specified below: TORQUE RANGE VALUES Nominal pipe size, in Bolt diameter, in Range of torque, ft-lb 3 5/8 40-60 4-24, incl. ¾ 75-90 30, 36 1 100-120 42, 48 1-1/4 120-150 N. Flanged Joint: 1. Make up tight. 2. Do not put strain on nozzles, valves and other equipment. 3. In sludge digestion tank: Take care torque used to tighten bolts not to exceed values specified for size bolts as specified above. Support piping to minimize strain on joints. Coat exterior surfaces, including bolts and nuts with two coats of acceptable heavy-bodied bituminous mastic. O. Mechanical Joints: 1. Wire brush surfaces in contact with gasket and clean gasket. 2. Lubricate gasket, bell and spigot with soapy water. 3. Slip gland and gasket over spigot and insert spigot into bell until seated. 4. Seat gasket and press gland firmly against gasket. 5. After bolts inserted and nuts made finger-tight, tighten diametrically opposite nuts progressively and uniformly around joint by torque wrench. Torque bolts to values specified above. P. Sleeve-Type Coupling: 1. Clean pipe ends for distance of 8 in. 2. Use soapy water as gasket lubricant. 3. Slip follower and gasket over each pipe to a distance of 6 in. from end and place middle ring on pipe end until centered over joint. 4. Insert other pipe end into middle ring and bring to proper position in relation to pipe laid. 5. Press gaskets and followers into middle ring flares. 6. After bolts inserted and nuts made fingertight, tighten diametrically opposite nuts by use of torque wrench of size and torque specified below: TORQUE Nominal pipe size, in Bolt diameter, in Range of torque, ft-lb 3-24 5/8 75 30-36 (1/2 in. mid ring) 5/8 65 30-36 (3/8 in. mid ring) 5/8 70 30-48 ¾ 80 Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-13 West End Heights 13 TORQUE Nominal pipe size, in Bolt diameter, in Range of torque, ft-lb 48-72 ¾ 70 7. After assembly and inspection and before backfill, coat exterior surfaces of buried couplings with heavy-bodied bituminous mastic. Q. Tapped Connection: 1. Drill and tap normal to longitudinal axis. 2. Drilled by skilled mechanics using proper tools. 3. Use only tapered threads. R. Clean off all dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign material before conducting pressure and leakage tests. S. Disinfect potable water lines using procedures and materials conforming to AWWA C651. 3.12 INSTALLATION – PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BUILDING (SANITARY ONLY) A. Each pipe unit shall be inspected before being installed. No single piece of pipe shall be laid unless it is generally straight. The centerline of the pipe shall not deviate from a straight line drawn between the centers of the openings at the ends of the pipe by more than 1/16-inch per foot of length. If a piece of pipe fails to meet this requirement for straightness, it shall be rejected and removed from the site. Any pipe unit or fitting discovered to be defective either before or after installation shall be removed or replaced with a sound unit. B. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking or stones. Crushed stone and sand shall be as specified in Section 220540. C. Suitable bell holes shall be provided, so that after placement, only the barrel of the pipe receives bearing pressure from the supporting material. Special care shall be taken to hold the trench width at the crown of the pipe to the maximum width indicating in the Trench Detail on the Contract Drawings. D. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of all debris, dirt, etc., before being installed and shall be kept clean until accepted in the completed work. E. Pipe and fittings shall be installed to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings. Care shall be taken to ensure true alignments and gradients. F. Before any joint is made, the previously installed unit shall be checked to assure that a close joint with the adjoining unit has been maintained and that the inverts are matched and conform to the required grade. The pipe shall not be driven down to the required grade by striking it with a shovel handle, timber or other unyielding object. G. All joint surfaces shall be cleaned. Immediately before jointing the pipe, the bell or groove shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. Each pipe unit shall then be carefully pushed into place without damage to pipe or gasket. Suitable devices shall be used to force the pipe units together so that they will fit with minimum open recess inside and outside and have tightly sealed joints. Care shall be taken not to use such force as to wedge apart and split the bell or groove ends. H. Joints shall not be “pulled” or “cramped” unless permitted by the Engineer. I. Where any two pipe units do not fit each other closely enough to enable them to be properly jointed, they shall be removed and replaced with suitable units and new gaskets. J. Details of gasket installation and joint assembly shall follow the directions of the manufacturers of the joint materials and of the pipe, all subject to review by the Engineer. The resulting joints shall be watertight and flexible. K. All premolded gasket joint polyvinyl chloride pipe of a particular manufacturer may be rejected if there are more than five unsatisfactory joint assembly operations or “bell breaks” in 100 consecutive joints, even though the pipe and joint conform to the appropriate ASTM Specifications as hereinbefore specified. If the pipe is unsatisfactory, as determined above, the Contractor shall, if required, remove all pipe of that manufacturer of the same shipment from the work and Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-14 West End Heights 14 shall furnish pipe from another manufacturer, which will conform, to all of the requirements of these specifications. L. Open ends or pipe and branches shall be closed with polyvinyl chloride stoppers secured in place in an acceptable manner. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-15 West End Heights 15 M. After each pipe has been properly bedded, enough bedding material shall be placed between the pipe and the sides of the trench and thoroughly compacted, to hold the pipe in correct alignment. Bell holes, provided for jointing, shall be filled with bedding material and compacted and then bedding material shall be placed and compacted to complete the pipe bedding. N. The Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent flotation of the pipe in the trench. O. At all times pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed with temporary watertight plugs, or by other acceptable means. P. If water is in the trench when work is to be resumed, the plug shall not be removed until suitable provisions have been made to prevent water, earth or other substances from entering the pipe. Q. Pipelines shall no be used as conductors for trench drainage during construction. R. During backfilling operations, a brightly colored polyethylene tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines shall be buried 2 feet below the ground surface along the entire length of the pipe from the pumping station to the point of discharge. Tape shall be provided in rolls, 6-inches minimum width, color coded for intended service with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall be “CAUTION BURIED SEWAGE PIPE BELOW” or similar wording. Code and letter coloring shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture and other substances contained the trench backfill material. 3.13 ALLOWABLE PIPE DEFLECTION – PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BUILDING (SANITARY ONLY) A. Pipe provided under this Specification shall be so installed as to not exceed a maximum deflection of 5.0 percent. Such deflection shall be computed by multiplying the amount of deflection (nominal diameter less minimum diameter when measured) by 100 and dividing by the nominal diameter of the pipe. B. Upon completion of a section of pipe, including placement and compaction of backfill, the Contractor shall measure the amount of deflection by pulling a specially designed gage assembly through the completed section. The gage assembly shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer and be reviewed by the Engineer. The section of pipe must be placed and backfilled for a minimum of 90 days before the deflection can be measured. C. Should the installed pipe fail to meet this requirement, the Contractor shall do all work to correct the problem without additional compensation. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems And Accessories 221010-16 West End Heights 16 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (PLUMBING) (Notes at end of Exhibit "A") Service Pipe Materials Fittings Connections Water service Ductile iron with cement liningBell & Spigot Mechanical or with grooved rubber gasket Domestic water interior/hot and cold (above ground) Type L copper (mains and branches) PEX (branches only) Wrought copper PEX No-lead solder Crimp ring See note 4 Sanitary, sanitary vent and storm (buried) Service weight cast iron soil pipe PVC Cast iron hub and spigot PVC Neoprene gasket compression type SEE NOTE 2 Solvent cement See Note 4 Sanitary and sanitary vent and storm (not buried) Service weight cast iron soil pipe PVC Cast iron hub and spigot PVC No-hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Solvent cement See Note 4 Indirect waste Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Natural gas (exterior above grade) SEE NOTE 1 Schedule 40, steel, paint with three coats Butt welded, paint with three coats Welded SEE NOTE 1 Natural gas (interior), natural gas vent Schedule 40, black steel 2" and smaller malleable 2½" and over butt welded Screwed (threaded) and welded Natural gas (underground) Schedule 40, black steel factory coated Butt welded Welded SEE NOTE 3 Natural gas (exterior below grade) Polyethylene Polyethylene Thermal Fused NOTES FOR EXHIBIT A: NOTE 1: Exposed exterior natural gas: For all steel pipe, one coat of alkyd primer and two coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel. Color as selected by project Architect. NOTE 2: Sanitary and storm outside building shall be PVC, SDR-35, with push-on gasketed bell and spigot joints unless otherwise indicated on site drawings or specifications. NOTE 3: On buried coated steel pipe, tape all joints and entire length of piping with Scotchwrap #50, 2 in. wide, 50% overlap. NOTE 4: Where used in return air plenum must meet requirements for plenum or be wrapped to achieve plenum rating. END OF SECTION 221010 Lakeview Health Services Pumps 221030-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 221030 – PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. All items specified under “Part 2 - Products” of this Section. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM RE-CIRCULATION PUMP (HWRP) A. HWRP-1 1. Pump shall have a capacity of 30 gpm at a TDH of 50 ft. with a 1 hp, single phase, 208 volt, 3.5 amp motor. Motor shall have built-in thermal overload protection. 2. Make: Bell & Gossett ecocirc XL N 65-130. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell and Gosset, Goulds Pumps, Grundfos or Taco. 4. Pump shall have the following features and accessories: a. Time clock with “skip-a-day” feature. Make: General Electric, Paragon, Sangamo, Tork. b. Aquastat controller: Johnson Controls Model A19ABC-39 (40° - 180°F). c. Provide all control wiring for pump and accessories. d. Stainless steel body construction. 5. Quantity for this project: 1. 2.2 SUMP PUMPS A. Each pump to be submersible type of cast iron construction rated at 50 gpm at 10 TDH, with a 3/4 hp, 115 volt, single phase motor, 10.4 amps. B. Provide automatic diaphragm pressure switch controller for pump operation. Pump to have automatic thermal overload protection. C. Make: Liberty Pumps Model 291-2. D. Provide high water alarm with for sump pump with panel and float switch. E. Acceptable manufacturers: Goulds Pumps, Grundfos, Hydromatic, Myers, Little Giant or Weil. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Install in horizontal position. B. Install gate valve in pump inlet and check and balancing valve and pressure gauge in outlet. END OF SECTION 221030 Lakeview Health Services Water Supply 221100-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 221100 – WATER SUPPLY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices of the following publications, codes, standards and listings: 1. AWWA / ANSI C600: American Water Works Association - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 2. NFPA 24-1987: National Fire Protection Association - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. 3. New York State Health Department: Cross Connection Control Manual 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All items specified under “Part 2 - Products” of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM PIPING A. Refer to Section 221010 - “Piping Systems and Accessories” for piping materials. 2.2 WATER METER A. Provide Compound: Disc: type water meter manufactured by Badger, Hersey, Sensus, Neptune-Trident, or approved equal. Make: Tru/Flo. Provide the following the devices and accessories on the water service meter arrangement: 1. Bypass with valves (OS & Y or ball type), as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Isolation valves (OS & Y or ball type) and unions or flanges on each side of meter. 3. Strainer on inlet side of meter (type as noted on Contract Drawings). 4. Pressure gauge on downstream side of meter and bypass. 5. Thermometer on downstream side of meter and bypass. 6. Concrete pad under meter, for support. Size of pad as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS A. Provide Where Indicated: 1. Reduced pressure zone (RPZ) type: a. Approved for use and listed as an acceptable device by the New York State Department of Health. Relief air shall not enter the same opening in the device as the relief water discharge. b. Sizes ½ inch through 2 inches: All bronze body construction. Sizes 2½ and larger: Cast iron body with epoxy coating. All devices shall have stainless steel nuts and bolts and stainless steel internal parts. c. Easily removed from line for service; flanges or unions on each side of device. d. Four test cocks, strainer and isolation resilient wedge valves. Provide one test cock on the inlet side of the upstream valve. e. Provide drain assembly from each device with air gap fitting and full size indirect waste line to the nearest floor drain or to the exterior. f. Provide Type D shock absorber on outlet side of device (refer to Section 223010). g. Make: Watts LF909-OSY. h. Provide Watts Series 909AG air gap device or approved equal. i. By-passes around backflow preventers are prohibited. Lakeview Health Services Water Supply 221100-2 West End Heights 2 2. In-line continuous pressure type (vacuum breakers): No back-pressure: a. Watts No. N9C with polished chrome finish. 1/4” and 3/8” sizes only - for shampoo sink hoses, etc. b. Watts Series 800M4QT, ½” through 2”. Consider spillage - if a factor use 008QT 3. Reduced pressure detector (RPDA) type: a. Approved for fire service use. b. Cast iron body with epoxy coating. All devices shall have stainless steel nuts and bolts and stainless steel internal parts. c. UL listed and FM approved with four test cocks. Provide one test cock on the inlet side of the upstream valve. Device shall have resilient wedge gate OS & Y valves. d. Device shall be the same size as fire service and shall have a meter for detection of unauthorized use and / or leakage (meter to read in gallons per minute). e. Make: Watts 909-RPDA-OSY. f. Provide Watts Series 909AG air gap device or approved equal. 4. Atmospheric type (vacuum breakers): use only when not under pressure a. Watts Series 288A, brass. ¼” - 3”, use for dispensers, tanks, etc. 2.4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (PRV) A. Provide where indicated on the Contract Drawings: 1. Standard capacity, all bronze body, renewable stainless steel seat, stainless steel strainer and thermal expansion bypass feature. 2. Valve parts shall be replaceable without dismantling or removing the valve from the line being served. 3. Valve shall be rated for a maximum temperature of 160 degrees Fahrenheit and be rated for an initial pressure of 300 pounds maximum. The adjustable pressure range shall be from 25 psi to 75 psi. 4. Provide 160 pound gauge and tapping on valve body. 5. Provide isolation valves on each side of PRV as indicated by the Contract Drawings. 6. Make: Watts U5B-GG or approved equal. 7. Provide where indicated on the Contract Drawings: 8. Consider other types as required for higher flows and pressures, etc., i.e. Watts N223S or ACV series. Write special. 2.5 UNDERGROUND VALVES (BURIED) A. Refer to Section 220520 - “Valves”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation shall conform to Article 1.2 of this section and shall be provided in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Specifications. 3.2 WATER SERVICE A. Install all water piping on a firm bed, using caution where piping passes over all excavations. Install concrete thrust blocks at all changes in direction and where indicated on the Contract Documents (not required for type K copper installations). Provide mechanical joint retainer glands for all water piping joints unless otherwise noted. Coat all clamps, rods, nuts, etc., with two coats bitumastic coal tar type coating. B. Minimum cover for any water or fire service shall be 5 feet - 0 inches unless otherwise noted. C. Where an underground water or fire main crosses (over or under) a sanitary or storm sewer and is within 1 foot - 6 inches vertical distance from the sewer, encase the main in a 4 inch thick concrete casing for a distance of 10 foot - 0 inch on each side of the crossing. Provide curb valve and box. D. Provide curb valves and boxes where noted. Refer to Section 220520. Lakeview Health Services Water Supply 221100-3 West End Heights 3 E. Provide polyethylene encasement of all piping and appurtenances in accordance with ANSI / AWWA C105/A21.5. 3.3 WATER METER A. Verify all water meter requirements with local water authority before ordering equipment. 3.4 PIPING A. Run all water piping slightly off level to low points. Provide drain valves and caps at all low points in the domestic water system. B. Provide water hammer arrestors where shown or specified. Provide water hammer arrestors where solenoid or quick closing valves are installed. C. Branch headers serving flush valves and fixtures shall be run full size to the last fixture being served unless otherwise noted. D. All exposed water piping in kitchens shall be chrome plated brass from insulation to fixture or equipment connection. E. All exposed water piping under fixtures shall be chrome plated brass. F. Provide dielectric pipe fittings when connecting systems of dissimilar metals. Refer to Section 221010. G. Supply piping to all fixtures, faucets, shower accessories, hydrants and flush valves shall be anchored to prevent movement. Provide additional structural members and supports as required. 3.5 ARRANGEMENTS A. Provide for application to and approval of Mohawk Valley Water Authority for connection to municipal systems; pay all costs for same. 3.6 STERILIZATION A. Provide sterilization of water and fire piping in accordance with all requirements of the New York State Health Department, Public Water Supply Guides, Division of Sanitary Engineering, Bureau of Public Water Supply. 3.7 TESTS AND FLUSHING A. Provide all necessary items to complete proper testing of all domestic and fire protection water piping. Isolate existing systems as required. B. Flush all water and fire protection piping to remove debris, sediment, dirt, rust, corrosion and other foreign material. Flush all piping before connecting to fixture faucet and flush valves. Utilize open pipe ends wherever possible. C. Piping Supplying Domestic Water Only - Test at 125 psi hydrostatic pressure for two hours. All tests shall be witnessed by Engineer or Owner’s Representative. D. Piping Supplying Fire Protection Water Only - Test at 200 psi hydrostatic for two hours. All tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer or the Owner’s Representative. E. For all Exterior Piping: 1. Joints in pipelines shall not be covered with backfill until after successful completion of leakage tests and observance of the tests by the Engineer or the Owner’s Representative. F. A successful air test is not acceptable as the final test, however, the Division 22 contractor shall provide interim air testing of piping as construction progresses. G. Make all leaks tight. No caulking of leaks shall be permitted. Remove and replace all defective fittings, piping and connections. Lakeview Health Services Water Supply 221100-4 West End Heights 4 H. Pay all costs of tests. Perform all tests in a safe manner. Remove all discharged water resulting from testing procedures. I. Certify in writing that all required domestic and fire protection water tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Use Material and Test Certificates of NFPA 24 format for fire protection piping systems. Submit all certifications to the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 221100 Lakeview Health Services Waste Water Systems 221300-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 221300 – WASTE WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all items specified under “Part 2 - Products” of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Refer to Section 221010 - “Piping Systems and Accessories” for piping materials. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall verify all inverts and locations. Any discrepancy between the plans and field conditions shall be reported in writing to the Owner and Engineer within three (3) days of discovery. No work shall start until all discrepancies have been resolved. All costs related to Contractor's failure to verify and/or report discrepancies or problems will be borne by the Contractor. 3.2 FLASHING A. For all Roof Drains (RD), Vents Through Roof (VTR) and Floor Drains (FD): 1. Cooperate closely with the General or Construction Contractor (GC or CC). 2. Division 22 Contractor responsible for tightness. a. Roof drains: Provide with sump receiver, held by clamping ring; set slightly lower than roof to insure being at low point. B. Singly Ply Roofs: 1. Roof drains: To be clamped into single ply membrane. 2. Vent piping: Extend vent a minimum of 24 inches above top of roof membrane or ballast, or as shown. Provide vent cap (refer to Section 223010 - “Equipment”). 3. Vent piping: Provide elastomeric cone with stainless steel clamp of same manufacturer as single ply membrane. 4. Floor drains: 9 inch diameter held by clamping ring. No flashing required for floor drains in slabs on grade. Coordinate location of toilet room floor drains with partition layout. Coordinate location of drains for equipment with locations of pads, equipment and machinery. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Minimum Pitch: Piping 3 inches and under - 1/4 inch per foot, 4 inches and larger - 1/8 inch per foot, unless noted otherwise. B. Paint exposed waste and vent piping 2 inches and over with chromium paint. Lakeview Health Services Waste Water Systems 221300-2 West End Heights 2 C. Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe: 1. Protect plastic pipes passing through concrete floors with one half inch (½ in.) of insulation material inside sleeve. 2. Fire walls shall not be penetrated by plastic pipe. 3. Pipe shall not be installed when the temperature is below 20°F. 4. Install pipe on firm, stable and uniform trench bottom and compacted to a point three pipe diameters above the bottom of the pipe. Backfill to a depth of 1 ft. - 0 in. above the top of the pipe shall be free of stones greater than 1 in. diameter. 5. When used for inside rain leader piping, a five foot minimum horizontal offset made at a 90° angle shall be installed between the roof drain and the vertical rain leader. 3.4 EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Minimum Pitch: Maximum grade between manholes; verify all inverts given. B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Remove all defective piping from the site. C. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. D. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. E. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. 1. Place temporary plugs in the ends of all pipes at end of each work day or whenever work stops. 2. Flush all lines between manholes to remove collected debris. F. Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 1. Make inspections after lines between manholes, or manhole locations, have been installed and approximately 2 ft. of backfill is in place and again at completion of project. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or other defects, correct such defects and re-inspect. G. Thermoplastic Pipe: Pipe shall not be installed within 4 ft. of finished grade or when the temperature is below 20oF. 3.5 ARRANGEMENTS A. Provide for application to and approval of local sewer departments for connections made to municipal sewer services. Pay all costs for same. 3.6 TESTING A. Provide necessary items to complete proper testing of Work. 1. Test all sections of storm, sanitary, waste and vent piping installed by this Project. Test existing piping as called for. 2. Maintain 10 feet head of water above highest point of section being tested for six hours. 3. For interior piping, leaks of any volume detected in sewers or in floors or walls of appurtenant structures shall be permanently stopped. Should any leaks, defective joints or defective construction be found they shall be promptly made good. Should any defective pipes or specials be discovered they shall be removed and replaced with sound pipes or specials in a satisfactory manner at the Contractor's expense. 4. Air test not acceptable as final test. 5. Pay all costs of test. 6. Provide written certification that tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit to Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 221300 Lakeview Health Services Equipment 223010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 223010 – EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all items specified under “Part 2 - Products” of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR DRAINS (FD) A. Type FD-A: 1. Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, vandal-proof secured 7 inch diameter strainer composed of polished nickel bronze, flashing clamp and collar and drain weepholes. Verify type of outlet required on a per location basis before ordering drains. Make: Jay R Smith 2005C. B. Acceptable floor drain manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade and Zurn. All drains shall be of one manufacturer. 2.2 ROOF DRAINS (RD) A. Type RD-A: 1. Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination membrane flashing clamp ring and V-notched gravel guard, low silhouette aluminum vandal-proof locking dome, under-deck clamp and sump receiver. Verify type of outlet required on a per location basis before ordering drains. Make: Zurn Model Z100-C-EA. B. Type RD-B: 1. Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination membrane flashing clamp ring and V-notched gravel guard, low silhouette aluminum vandal-proof locking dome, 2 inch internal water dam, under-deck clamp and sump receiver. Verify type of outlet required on a per location basis before ordering drains. Make: Zurn Model Z100-C-EA-W2. a. Provide Zurn Model ZS199-DC stainless steel, perforated, hinged downspout cover. C. Acceptable roof drain manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade or Zurn. All roof drains shall be of one manufacturer. D. Vertical Expansion Joints: 1. Coated cast iron body with polished bronze sleeve, silicone bronze sleeve, pre-formed neoprene packing gasket, packing gland and bolted pressure ring. Verify type of inlet and outlet on a per location basis before ordering expansion joints. Make: Zurn Model ZRB-190. E. Acceptable Expansion Joint manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade and Zurn. All expansion joints shall be of one manufacturer. 2.3 CLEANOUTS (CO, WPCO, DPCO) A. Deck Plate Cleanout (DPCO) - floors: Coated cast iron body with round scoriated and polished nickel bronze top, vandal-proof feature, adjustable leveling feature, bronze plug and flashing clamp, carpet marker or tile cover as required and anchor flange with clamp collar. All connections and fittings to be gas and water tight. Make: Jay R Smith 4023. Lakeview Health Services Equipment 223010-2 West End Heights 2 B. Wall Plate Cleanout (WPCO) - walls: Coated cast iron ferrule with bronze plug and stainless steel smooth access cover with securing screw, vandal-proof. 1. Horizontal: Zurn Model Z-1441-BP-VP. 2. Vertical: Zurn Model Z-1468-BP-VP. C. Grade Cleanout: Heavy duty coated cast iron body with cast iron tractor cover, bronze plug and vandal-proof screws. Make: Jay R. Smith Series 4246-C-U. D. Acceptable cleanout manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade or Zurn. 2.4 WALL HYDRANTS (WH) A. Hydrants shall be approved by ASSE Standard 1019-B and be listed by IAPMO B. Hydrants shall be a 3/4 inch male hose thread, cast brass non-freeze type with polished brass face, galvanized wall sleeve, integral vacuum breaker, loose key control and adjustable wall clamp. Make: Jay R Smith 5560QT. C. Acceptable wall hydrant manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade, Woodford or Zurn. 2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS / SHOCK ABSORBERS (SA) A. Devices shall meet or exceed requirements of the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI - WH 201 and ASSE Standard 1010. B. Types of devices listed by the Contract Documents shall be based on the P.D.I. system corresponding to the following N.Y.S. water fixture unit ranges: 1. Type A - 1 through 11 fixture units. 2. Type B - 12 through 32 fixture units. 3. Type C - 33 though 60 fixture units. 4. Type D - 61 through 113 fixture units. 5. Type E - 114 through 154 fixture units. 6. Type F - 155 through 330 fixture units. C. Make: Zurn “Shoktrol”, Z-1700 Series. D. Acceptable Water Hammer Arrestor / Shock Absorber manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Precision Plumbing Products, Wade or Zurn. 2.6 THERMOMETERS - DOMESTIC WATER (T) A. Adjustable multi-angle type, 9” scale size, 3½ inch stem length, brass well, scale calibrated in 2o divisions from 30o F to 240o F for domestic hot water, 0o F to 120o F for domestic cold water. Make: Weksler Thermometer Cat. No. AA5H-9. B. Acceptable thermometer manufacturers: American, Ashcroft, Weiss or Weksler. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES - DOMESTIC WATER (P) A. 4½ inch diameter dial pressure gauge with stainless steel case and plastic lens, range: 0 to 160 psi. Provide bar stock needle valve inline ahead of gauge. Make: Weksler Type EA14. B. Acceptable pressure gauge manufacturers: American, Ashcroft, Weiss or Weksler 2.8 TRAP PRIMER (TP) A. Provide flexible trap seals in lieu of a trap primer. Lakeview Health Services Equipment 223010-3 West End Heights 3 2.9 TEMPERATURE MIXING VALVE A. Modify this article as required: 1. Control Valve Mixing 120oF Hot With 40oF Cold Water To Obtain A Tempered Outlet Temperature Of 90oF, With Cold Water Bypass, Recessed Stainless Steel Cabinet And With The Following: a. Thermostatic mixing valve with 2” inlet and outlet. b. Combination strainer check stops with union inlet. c. Two volume control/shutoff valves, horizontal stem dial thermometer, fittings, nipples and escutcheon plates. d. Chrome plated mixing valve and trim. e. Fully recessed stainless steel cabinet with No. 4 finish, 16 gauge body and 14 gauge door with cylinder lock. Turn keys over to Owner. B. Make: Leonard, Powers Series, Symmons or approved equal. 2.10 VENT CAPS A. Coated cast iron vandal-proof vent cap, hooded dome type. Secure to vent stack termination above roof with set screws. Make: Zurn Z-193 or approved equal. B. Acceptable makes: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade, Zurn. 2.11 EYEWASH (EEW) A. TYPE: EEW-A: 1. Eyewash/drench hose unit, wall mounted, with backflow preventer. 2. DH-13* - Wall mounted, hand-held drench hose/eye wash with ½” IPS U.S. made chrome plated brass squeeze valve with renewable stainless steel seat and locking clip, stainless steel handle with plastic cover, insulator handle, powder coated wall bracket, and 8ft. PVC hose. Unit shall have (2) polypropylene ‘GS Plus’ spray heads with integral “flip-top” dust covers, filters and 1.8-GPM flow control orifices mounted on a chrome plated brass eyewash assembly. Unit shall include ANSI compliant sign. 3. Performance: Unit shall be fully factory assembled and hydrostatically tested to meet or exceed ANSI Z358.1 – 2009, and come with a full 2-year warranty. 4. Fixture: Guardian Equipment G5026BP OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2.12 LINT INTERCEPTOR (LT-A) A. Fabricated steel with gray Duco lining, stainless steel primary and secondary screens, 3/16” diamond plate (gasketed and secured) cover, threaded inlet and outlet, 100 GPM flow rate: Basis of design: Jay R Smith 8910-100. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancon, Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zurn, or approved equal. 2.13 WASHING MACHINE BOX (WMF-A) A. IPS Corporation FRM12 white powder coated metal fire resistant washer box using plastic piping. B. Guy Gray Models 82567 to 82599 with 2” drain outlet in PVC, ABS or metallic. C. Rated for 1-hour or 2-hour firewall construction with screw and/or nailing flange and intumescent pad. D. Provide individual shutoff valve option with hammer arresters. Lakeview Health Services Equipment 223010-4 West End Heights 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Plumbing Contractor Shall: 1. Provide all roughing and final water, waste, vent, gas, air, vacuum, diesel and / or oxygen connections to all fixtures and equipment requiring same as called for by the Contract Documents. 2. Refer to the Contract Documents for roughing schedules, equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. 3. Provide loose key stops, traps (“P”, etc.), tailpieces, adapters, gas or air cocks and all necessary piping, fittings and connections from roughing point to fixtures and equipment. 4. Provide for installation of sinks, faucets, outlets, traps, tailpieces, etc. furnished by an Equipment or Casework Contractor. These items shall be delivered in easily identified cartons, to the proper room for the Division 22 Contractor's installation. 5. Install controls and devices furnished by others as noted on the Construction Documents. 6. Provide cold water line with reduced pressure zone backflow prevention devices at locations noted on the Construction Documents. Continuation of piping downstream from devices by others when noted. 7. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves to floor drains, mop service sinks or exterior. 8. Provide for Owner furnished equipment: a. Connect complete and ready for use, including all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, etc., as required by Owner and as called for on the Construction Documents. Verify all equipment requirements before submitting bid. b. Refer to manufacturer Drawings and Specifications for requirements of medical, laboratory and other special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 3.2 EXPANSION JOINTS FOR ROOF DRAINS A. Provide expansion joints for all roof drains located more than 25 feet - 0 inches above the finished floor of area being served. 3.3 CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts out of traffic patterns; provide offset as required from sanitary line being served. Do not locate cleanouts under doors or under lockers. Distance between cleanouts on piping 4 inches and smaller - 50 feet; piping over 4 inches - 100 feet. Provide cleanouts at all changes in direction of piping greater than 45o. Provide cleanouts at base of soil, waste and vent stacks and roof conductors. Provide additional cleanouts where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Cleanouts: Same nominal size as pipe, but not larger than 4 in. 3.4 WALL HYDRANTS A. Provide wall hydrants at a minimum of 24 inches above grade. 3.5 HOSE BIBBS A. Provide hose bibbs at low points of piping systems. 3.6 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Provide shock absorbers in the vertical position. B. Provide a ball valve between each shock absorber and the line being served. 3.7 THERMOMETERS A. Provide where called for and where shown. Adjust each thermometer so face is easily visible. 3.8 PRESSURE GAUGES Lakeview Health Services Equipment 223010-5 West End Heights 5 A. Provide where called for and where water service enters building. Provide bar stock needle valve on each gauge line. 3.9 TEMPERATURE MIXING VALVE A. Provide where called for. Provide 2 foot - 0 inch deep heat trap on hot water supply line ahead of connection to mixing valve. Refer to detail on Construction Documents. END OF SECTION 223010 Lakeview Health Services Domestic Water Heaters 223020-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 223020 – DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all items specified under “Part 2 - Products” of this Section. B. Submit the following information relating to water heating equipment: 1. Instruction and maintenance manuals for all water heaters. 2. Warrantees for all water heating equipment. 3. Tank and lining instruction manuals, guarantee and warranty. 4. Wiring diagrams for water heating equipment and all related controls (aquastats, flow switches, pumps, etc.). 5. Maintenance instructions for all related pumps serving water heating systems. 6. All storage tanks, heaters, expansion tanks and related devices shall be ASME rated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Gas Fired Storage Type, High Efficiency 1. Water heater shall be Model BTHL-150A, Cyclone LV as manufactured by A.O. Smith. Water heater shall be of seamless glass-lined design, and gas fired, equipped to burn natural gas and design certified by the latest ANSI standard by the AGA. Heater shall have an input rating of 150,000 Btuh and a recovery rating of 175 GPH at a temperature rise of 100°F with a storage capacity of 250 gallons. 2. Heater shall be equipped with 1 ½” water inlet and outlet openings, and shall have a maximum working pressure of 160 psi. 3. Water heater shall be quipped with an integrated control system consisting of a 180°F adjustable thermostat with upper and lower sensing bulbs, which average the water temperatures at the top and bottom of the tank for maximum water temperature control. 4. Heater shall be provided with a manual reset gas shutoff device, a gas pressure regulator set for the type of gas supplied, coated steel burners, an approved draft diverter, anodes for cathodic protection, flue damper and IID system. A.G.A. pressure and temperature relief valve shall be furnished and installed by the factory. The heater shall be insulated with foam insulation or equal. The outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish over a bonderized undercoating. 5. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be glass-lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition that has been fused-to-steel by firing at a temperature range of 1400°F to 1600°F. 6. Heater tank shall have a 3 year limited warranty against corrosion or sediment buildup as outlined in the written warranty. 7. Fully illustrated instruction manual to be included. (Furnish with O & M manuals). 8. Provide re-circulation pump, aquastat and accessories as noted on Drawings. Pump shall be Bell & Gossett ecocirc XL N 65-130. Provide all wiring required for pump, controls and heater. 9. Provide sealed direct vent system with sidewall vents, provide 4” PVC intake and exhaust. 2.2 WATER HEATER PROTECTIVE VALVES A. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Each heater: Watts Model 174A (125 PSI relief). 2. Tank: Watts Model 340X-8. 2.3 DOMESTIC WATER HEATING SYSTEM EXPANSION TANK A. 53 gallon tank volume, 0.66 maximum acceptance factor, floor mounted. Make: Amtrol ST-80VC. ASME rated. Lakeview Health Services Domestic Water Heaters 223020-2 West End Heights 2 2.4 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. 2 inch bronze flange sets on pumps, heater and tank. B. Johnson Control Model A19ABC-39 aquastat controller for control of each pump (total of 1 aquastat). C. Thermometers (4) – Weksler Model AA5-H-9 with well. D. Flow Switches (2) – Johnson Model F61KB-11. E. Provide all control wiring and 120 volt circuits for heater and system control and operation. Provide all control wiring for aquastats, flow switches and domestic hot water system control devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Pipe all devices full size to nearest floor drain. 3.2 SYSTEM START UP A. Provide start up services of factory trained technician to inspect installation based on factory recommendations. Inspect installation for correct piping configuration, venting and fuel supply. B. Start up technician to adjust controls and safety devices for proper operation of system, and balance water flow through heater(s) for proper temperature differential based on manufacturer’s recommendations. Verify proper pump size and pump operation for heater(s) and circulation pump(s). C. Start up report, in writing, shall be submitted to the engineer with the minimum following information: 1. Temperature differential across heater(s) 2. Stack temperature 3. Combustion efficiency 4. Gas pressure at control string inlet 5. Gas pressure at burner 6. Temperature setting – storage tank 7. Temperature setting – high limit 8. Temperature setting – return line aquastat 9. Mixed outlet temperature, if applicable 10. Supply voltage 11. Water hardness 12. Static pressure 13. Proper air charge at thermal expansion tank, if applicable 14. Relief valve settings and type at heater(s) and tank(s) F. Advise, in writing, any deficiencies in the installation, and/or operation of the system. END OF SECTION 223020 Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 225000-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 225000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all items specified under “Part 2 - Products" of this Section. B. Submit wiring diagrams and manufacturer’s electrical requirements for all electronically operated fixtures and trim. C. Submit manufacturer’s color charts for cabinet finishes and fixture colors. D. Submit operations and maintenance information for each fixture, faucet, shower and trim piece. Include this information in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF FIXTURES A. All fixtures, trim and fixture accessories shall be similar and equal to the manufacturer’s plate numbers specified in this section. All fixtures and supply trim shall meet the requirements of the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation and shall be listed by that Agency. All exposed parts of fixture trim shall have a polished chrome finish. All tubular drainage products (“P” traps, nipples, etc.) for sinks, electric water coolers, drinking fountains and lavatories shall be 17 gauge brass. B. All fixtures, trim and fixture accessories shall be subject to compliance with the specified requirements and shall be manufactured by the following: 1. Water Closets, Urinals and Lavatories: American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Kohler, Mansfield, Universal Rundle. 2. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just. 3. Mop Service Sinks: Fiat, Mustee, Stern-Williams. 4. Faucets: Chicago, Symmons, T&S Brass. 5. Flush Valves: Delany, Sloan “Regal”, Zurn. 6. Water Closet Seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church, Olsonite, Sperzel. 7. Electric Water Coolers: EBCO, Elkay, Halsey-Taylor, Haws, Sunroc. 8. Fixture Supports and Carriers: Jay R. Smith, Josam, Wade, Zurn. 9. Shower Brass and Trim: Powers, Speakman, Symmons. 10. Stainless Steel Fixtures: Acorn, Bradley, Metcraft, Willoughby. 11. Shower: Aker, Universal Rundle, Clarion. 12. Lavatory, Sink and Water Cooler Trim: Brass-Craft, Cambridge, EBCO, McGuire. 13. Bathtubs: Universal Rundle, Clarion, Aquarius. C. Fixture Cuts: Submit shop drawings in folders with cuts of all fixtures, brass trim and accessories before placing order for fixtures. Provide roughing sheets for all fixtures. Provide dimensions for all fixtures, trim and accessories. D. Samples: Submit fixture and accessory samples when requested by Owner and/or Owner’s Representative. E. Roughing Sheets: Submit roughing sheets in duplicate for each type of fixture when requested. F. Provide the Owner with special wrenches, tools and devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and trim in a quantity of one device for each 5 (five) fixtures (provide a minimum of one device if fixture quantity is less than five) Provide the Owner with shower and faucet repair kits complete with all parts in a quantity of 1 (one) kit for each 20 (twenty) faucets and showers (provide a minimum of one kit for each faucet and shower if fixture quantity is less than twenty). Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 225000-2 West End Heights 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER CLOSETS (WC) A. Type WC-A: 1. American Standard No. 221AB.104 “Colony”, vitreous china, fully glazed trapway, elongated, 1.28 gallons per flush, floor mount water closet with tank, fitted with following: a. American Standard #5324.019, white solid plastic open front closet seat with combination selfsustaining and external check holds/hinges, with cover. 2.2 LAVATORIES (LAV) A. Type LAV-A: 1. American Standard #0495.300, “Ovalyn”, under-mount, 17 inches x 14 inches vitreous china front overflow lavatory and fitted with following: a. Delta “Classic” #2523LF deck mounted faucet. 4 inch centerset, slow closing with temperature limit stop, time limit stop and aerator outlet with 1205 GPM. b. McGuire No. 155-WC chrome plated P.O. plug with open grid strainer and offset 1-1/4 inch, 17 gauge tailpiece. c. McGuire No. 8902 chrome plated, 17 gauge, 1-1/4 inch x 1½ inch "P" trap with cleanout plug and metal, chrome plated set screw wall escutcheon. d. McGuire #167LK, 3/8 in. chrome plated wall supplies with loose key angle stops, cast brass set screw escutcheons and 12 in. long flexible risers. e. American Standard 047194-0070A mounting kit. B. Type LAV-B: 1. American Standard #0355.012 “Lucerne”, 20 inch x 18 inch with faucet holes on 4 inch centers, vitreous china front overflow with self-draining deck, punchings for concealed arm carriers and fitted with the following: a. Delta “Classic” #2503LF deck mounted faucet. 4 inch centerset, slow closing with temperature limit stop and aerator outlet with 1.20 GPM. b. McGuire No. 155-WC chrome plated P.O. plug with open grid strainer and offset 1-1/4 inch, 17 gauge tailpiece c. McGuire No. 8902 chrome plated, 17 gauge, 1-1/4 inch x 1½ inch "P" trap with cleanout plug and metal, chrome plated set screw wall escutcheon. d. McGuire #167LK, 3/8 in. chrome plated wall supplies with loose key angle stops, cast brass set screw escutcheons and 12 in. long flexible risers. e. Provide Brocar 500R insulated coverings on waste and supply piping, (trap wrap kit) 2.3 SINKS A. Type SINK-A (SK-A): 1. Elkay Lustertone LRAD252155 nickel bearing type 304 stainless steel single bowl sink, 3 faucet holes, 18 gauge, self-rimming, for countertop installation, fitted with the following: a. Moen “Arbor” #7594 deck mounted faucet with gooseneck spout, single handle and 1.50 GPM aerator. b. McGuire #151A stainless steel strainer with removable cup, 1½ inch tailpiece. c. McGuire #8912 Semi-cast brass adjustable "P" trap, 1½ inch x 1½ inch, with cleanout plug. d. McGuire #2167, ½ in. supplies with 3/8 in. flexible risers, loose key stops and metal, chrome plated escutcheons. B. Type Sink B (SK-B): 1. Elkay Gourmet LR2522, 304 stainless steel single bowl sink, 3 faucet holes, 18 gauge, self-rimming, for countertop installation, fitted with the following: a. Moen “Arbor” #7594 deck mounted faucet with gooseneck spout, single handle and 1.50 GPM aerator. b. McGuire #151A stainless steel strainer with removable cup, 1½ inch tailpiece. Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 225000-3 West End Heights 3 c. McGuire #8912 Semi-cast brass adjustable "P" trap, 1½ inch x 1½ inch, with cleanout plug. d. McGuire #2167, ½ in. supplies with 3/8 in. flexible risers, loose key stops and metal, chrome plated escutcheons. C. Type Sink C (SK-C): 1. Mustee Model 18F, white, one-piece molded fiberglass composite 18 gallon capacity single bowl sink, 4” centers, heavy gauge steel legs with adjustable levelers, leak-proof integral molded-in drain with stopper, fitted with the following: a. Delta #2131LF deck mounted faucet with high spout, two handle and hose threaded spout. b. McGuire #151A stainless steel strainer with removable cup, 1½ inch tailpiece. c. McGuire #8912 Semi-cast brass adjustable "P" trap, 1½ inch x 1½ inch, with cleanout plug. d. McGuire #2167, ½ in. supplies with 3/8 in. flexible risers, loose key stops and metal, chrome plated escutcheons. 2.4 MOP SERVICE SINK (MSS) A. Type MSS-A: 1. Mustee Model No. 63M, 24 inch x 24 inch x 10 inch deep, floor mounted fiberglass resin mop service sink, fitted with the following: a. Chicago No. 897-MPRCF service sink faucet with vacuum breaker, pail hook, adjustable stop arms and ¾ inch hose thread outlet. b. 3 inch brass drain assembly - chrome plated brass drain body, chrome plated cast brass lock-nut, neoprene sealing washers, flat strainer and stainless steel screws. c. Mustee No. PN-65.7 Hose and hose bracket. d. Mustee No. PN-65.6 Mop hanger. e. Mustee No.PN-63-401 Rigid vinyl bumper guards. Provide on all sides of sink not adjacent to walls. 2.5 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (EWC) A. Type EWC-A: 1. Elkay Model Number LZSTL8WS(VR)K lead free, high low, self-closing electric water cooler with one piece stainless steel basin and backsplash, flexible safety bubbler, with bottle filling station, non-pressurized tank, vandal-proof pushbars on three sides and mounting hangers. a. Fountain Top: 18-8 type 302 stainless steel, polished satin finish. b. Self-closing, vandalproof, hand operated stops with automatic stream regulator located inside of cabinet. c. Surfaces and materials in contact with water to be certified lead free per EPA regulations. d. Compressor: Hermetically sealed, 1/5 hp, 120 volts, 60 Hz. single phase. e. Capacity: 7.0 GPH at 80oF water inlet, 50oF water outlet with room temperature at 90oF. f. Provide floor mounted carrier for each electric water cooler. Jay R. Smith Series 0823. 2.6 SHOWERS (SH) A. Type SHR-A: 1. Clarion “Independence” MP6333 one piece seamless, gelcoated, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin shower module with integral mounting flange. Shower inside dimensions shall be 63 inch width by 33 inch depth by 78 inch high, 3/4 inch curb, with a slip-resistant floor. Shower shall be fitted with the following: a. All shower controls shall be provided and installed per ANSI A117.1-2009. b. Provide grab bars as shown on Architectural Drawings and Specifications. c. Provide soap dish integral to the construction of the shower module. d. Fold down teakwood seat with stainless steel frame. e. Symmons Safetymix Model 9605-PLR which includes a pressure balancing mixing valve with all working parts constructed of brass, bronze and stainless steel, with adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn, hand lever diverter with volume control, model super shower head with arm and flange, hand held shower on 30 inch slide bar, flexible metal hose, in-line vacuum breaker, wall connection and flange. Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 225000-4 West End Heights 4 e. Mount shower controls on the opposite wall of the seat. f. Mount all hardware and controls as directed by the Architect. Provide fixture in compliance with all ADA required clearances and dimensions. 2.7 BATHING TUBS (BT) A. Type BT-A: 1. Clarion “Independence” MP7911 combination tub/shower, gel-coated, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin module with integral mounting flange. Unit inside dimensions shall be 56 inch width by 32 inch depth by 76 inch high, 18 inch deep tub. Unit shall be fitted with the following: a. Provide grab bars as shown on Architectural Drawings and Specifications. b. Provide soap dish integral to the construction of the tub/shower module. c. Symmons Safetymix Model 9605-PLR which includes a pressure balancing mixing valve with all working parts constructed of brass, bronze and stainless steel, with adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn, hand lever diverter with volume control, model super shower head with arm and flange, hand held shower on 30 inch slide bar, flexible metal hose, in-line vacuum breaker, wall connection and flange. d. Mount all hardware and controls as directed by the Architect. Provide fixture in compliance with all ADA required clearances and dimensions. 2.8 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. B. Characteristics: Non-shrink: recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install fixtures, trim, accessories, equipment and systems as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein in accordance with the provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications and in compliance with all Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction. 1. Provide wraps meeting ADA//code requirements on all accessible fixtures and equipment. 3.2 FIXTURES A. Install all fixtures on chair carriers except as specified. Vitreous china to be fired before and after glaze is applied (twice fired) and shall be without decoration unless otherwise noted. B. Chromium Plating: 1. All supply and drainage trim and accessories shall have a minimum thickness of 0.002 inch chromium applied over a nickel plating having a minimum thickness of 0.0002 inch. C. Screws, Bolts and Nuts: 1. All screws, nuts and bolts shall be of size, type and finish to fit requirements and to harmonize with adjacent material. 2. Nut and bolt heads exposed at fixtures shall be hexagon with bonnet cap and chromium plated brass. D. Erection: 1. Properly install fixtures and associated supply and drainage piping and securely support. Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 225000-5 West End Heights 5 2. Carefully drill holes for thru-bolts to avoid chipping blocks or plaster where required over plates. 3. Except where chair carriers are specified, attach fixtures with hangers or brackets. Attach to walls as follows: a. Masonry construction: 1) Secure fixture hangers to partition by thru-bolts extending through a steel plate on opposite side of partition. 2) Carefully drill holes to avoid chipping. 3) Obtain Owner's Representative's approval prior to work. Lakeview Health Services Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 225000-6 West End Heights 6 b. Metal stud construction: 1) Anchor backing for fixtures or equipment to 1/8 inch x 12 inch steel plate bolted or riveted to at least three studs. 2) Obtain Owner's Representative's approval prior to work. E. Protection: Immediately after installation, thoroughly cover metal trimmings and fixture to prevent damage or scratches. Condition of all fixtures is the responsibility of the Division 22 contractor until the Owner takes final possession of the Project. F. Cleaning: At completion of Work, clean all fixtures complete with their trimmings; put in working order and in first-class condition and appearance. G. Installation: 1. Exact mounting height to be determined by Owner's Representative, Architectural Drawings and (where applicable) all ADA requirements. 2. Perimeter of fixtures in contact with wall to be caulked with DAP white flexible "Kwik-Seal" tub and tile caulk. Caulk shall be non-shrinking type. 3. Countertop sinks and lavatories: Set countertop mounted sinks and lavatories in a bed of approved setting compound, which will cover the entire perimeter of the sink or lavatory that comes in contact with the countertop. 4. Chair carriers: a. Anchor chair carriers to concrete floor with ½ inch x 3 inch anchors or thru-bolts and washers. Quantity of anchors: Water Closets - 4, Lavatories and Urinals - 8. Provide for drilling of floor and installation of expansion shields. b. Use thru-bolts to attach fixtures to wooden floors (where applicable). H. Floor Mounted Water Closets: Set floor mounted water closets in a bed of approved setting compound which will cover the entire perimeter of the water closet that comes in contact with the floor. Setting compound shall be equal to "Black Swan," "S.O.S." plasti-putti bowl setting compound. END OF SECTION 225000 Lakeview Health Services Natural Gas Systems 227000-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 227000 – NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Work In Compliance With: 1. 2015 International Fuel Gas Code 2. National Fuel Gas Code NFPA 54, ANSI Z223.1. 3. New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code. 4. American Gas Association (AGA). 5. Local utility company – NYSEG. 6. Local Building Code – City of Ithaca. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings on items specified in this section under Part 2, "Products." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SERVICE A. Installation by local utility company. 2.2 PIPING A. Interior: 1. Refer to Section "Piping Systems and Accessories," Exhibit "A", for piping materials. B. Exterior: 1. Exposed above ground: Provide one coat of alkyd primer and two coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel, color as selected by the Owner. 2.3 GAS COCKS A. Refer to Section "Valves". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GAS PIPING A. General: 1. Make arrangements with gas company for service, and pay all costs. 2. Pipe joining qualifications: Welded piping fabricated by approved welder. Welder to be certified under ASME or API Code III. B. Interior: Pitch up in direction of flow, install 6 in. long drip legs at low points. Lakeview Health Services Natural Gas Systems 227000-2 West End Heights 2 3.2 ARRANGEMENTS A. Provide for application to and approval from NYSEG for connection to gas main, and pay costs. B. Building Service load 1,573,000 Btuh. C. Provide sleeves where required by gas service. Coordinate with utility company. D. Provide 6 in. deep concrete pad on 12 in. gravel base, length and width as required by utility company. E. Maximum gas pressure inside building: 1/2 lb. 3.3 GAS PIPING TESTS A. Provide necessary items to complete proper testing of natural gas piping. B. Perform tests as required by gas company. Tests to be witnessed by gas company. Make arrangements and pay costs. 1. 25 psi air pressure for two hours. 2. Tests to be performed before connection to equipment with regulators. 3. Provide written certification that tests have conducted and satisfactorily completed. Submit to Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 227000 Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections, and Instructions to Bidders apply to this section and all other sections of Division 23. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include in bid all labor, materials, tools, plant, transportation, excavation, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, taxes and all necessary and related items required to provide complete and operational systems shown and described. B. References to codes and Standards called for in the Contract Documents mean the latest edition, amendment and revisions to the codes and standards in effect on the date of these Contract Documents. Compliance with the applicable codes and standards is required. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-2 West End Heights 2 C. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this section: 1. Miscellaneous Supports 2. Access Doors and Panels 3. Fire Stopping 4. Flashing and Sealing 5. Cutting and Patching D. Contract shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning systems including, but not limited to: Equipment, Distribution Systems, Controls, Testing, and Commissioning. 1.3 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. B. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project: 1. International Building Code 2. International Mechanical Code 3. International Energy Conservation Code 4. ASHRAE Standard 62 5. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA 6. National Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 7. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 8. NEMA Standards 9. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 10. Factory Mutual and/or Owner’s Insurance Carrier 11. New York Board of Fire Underwriters 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - All chapters 1.4 LICENSING & PERMITS A. Apply for and obtain all required permits and inspections, include costs for all fees and charges within bid. B. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. 1.5 GLOSSARY ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AGA American Gas Association AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code AWWA American Water Works Association Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-3 West End Heights 3 EIA Electronic Industries Association FCC Federal Communications Commission FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO International Standards Organization NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental Conservation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SBI Steel Boiler Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association TIA Telecommunications Industry Association UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 1.6 DEFINITIONS Approved / Approval Written permission to use a material or system. As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution specified/shown in the contract documents. Code Requirements Minimum requirements. Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade. Design Equipment Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Design Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Equal or Equivalent Equally acceptable as determined by Owner’s Representative. Exposed Work not identified as concealed. Final Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certification by Owner's Representative. Furnish Supply and deliver to installation location. Furnished by Others Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install. Inspection Visual observations by Owner's Site Representative. Install Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use. Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-4 West End Heights 4 Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Or Approved Equal Approved equal or equivalent as determined by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s Representative The Prime Professional. Prime Professional Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional services. Provide Furnish, install and connect ready for use. Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test, and install ready for use. Replace Remove and provide new item. Review A general contractual conformance check of specified products. Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation. Satisfactory As specified in contract documents. Site Representative Construction Manager or Owner's Inspector at the work site. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional definitions. 1.7 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment". Other manufacturers are listed as acceptable, and may be submitted. If the Contractor elects to use one of the listed makes other than "design equipment," submit detailed drawings, indicating proposed installation of equipment. Show maintenance clearances, service removal space required, and other pertinent revisions to the design arrangement. If the submitted equipment is larger or a different configuration than the design make equipment, verify the equipment will physically fit in the space provided, and make all necessary modifications required to install the equipment at no additional cost to the contract. Make required changes in the work of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Provide larger electrical feeders, circuit breakers, equipment, additional control devices and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation, and assume responsibility for proper location of rough-in and connections by other trades. Remove and replace door frames, access doors, walls ceilings or floors required to install other than design make equipment. If revised arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design equipment" item which conforms to contract documents. 1.8 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, and fixtures. Coordination with existing structure and systems as well as other trades involved with the project is the responsibility of the installing contractor. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. If compliance with two or more project documents is specified and the documents establish different or conflicting requirements, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding B. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly and currently engaged in the production of equipment and accessories provided. The design and size of each item of equipment provided for this project needs to have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three (3) installations for not less than three (3) years. C. Suppliers of equipment must have factory trained and authorized personnel for the service of all equipment provided. D. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the contract documents shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for resolution. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-5 West End Heights 5 E. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for the installation and application of joint sealers, flashing, access panels, cutting and patching. F. All work shall be performed by trained mechanics of a particular trade involved, and shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. G. Manufacturers, where specifically called for, shall provide factory tests, unit installation observations, unit start-up and tests, etc., as specified, and submit signed reports to the Engineer upon completion of these services. Subletting of these services shall not be permitted. Shop drawing submittals shall be accompanied with a letter of certification by the manufacturer that the specified services shall be provided. Failure to do so shall be cause to reject the shop drawing submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Materials That Meet the Following Minimum Requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the N.E.C. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these requirements. 6. Communications equipment shall meet all FCC Regulations 7. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected. 8. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the Specifications. 9. Catalog numbers are sometimes listed in the specifications to aid selection of the equipment, and are for reference only. All equipment must meet the written description of the specification and drawing schedule. Errors in the catalog numbers do not alleviate the responsibility of providing the proper equipment required for the installation and field conditions. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of quality, function, dimensions and appearance that must be met by any proposed substitution. B. Proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each request shall include the name of the proposed material equipment being substituted, cut sheets, installation drawings, performance and test data and warranties. At that time the equipment or will be evaluated and if determined to be acceptable an Addendum will be issued to all bidders. C. Requests for substitution shall be made only by a Bidder. Requests for substitution from sales representatives, vendors or suppliers are not acceptable. 2.3 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements. B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies which include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit. 1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer. 2. Constituent parts which are alike shall be product of a single manufacturer. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service. 4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-6 West End Heights 6 C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. D. Major items of equipment which serve the same function must be the same make and model. Exception will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met. 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals for all equipment and materials to be furnished and installed as part of this contract. B. Submittals shall be provided with a cover sheet indicating the date, project name, Turner project number, prime contractor; description of equipment submitted and relevant equipment tag information. C. All products specified in individual Division 23 section shall be submitted at the same time. Incomplete or un-organized submittals will not be accepted. Unreadable submittals will be rejected. D. Where equipment submitted deviates from the equipment specified, provide a letter listing all equipment deviations. E. The Contractor is responsible for confirming all quantities, electrical connections, working clearances, and dimensions, determining methods of construction, and coordinating the work with other trades. F. Corrections or comments made on the Submittals during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. 2.5 U.L. LISTING A. Where required, equipment shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), or other approved agency-listing/label. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with the National Electric Code and listed by U.L. 2.6 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result. 2.7 SPECIAL TOOLS A. If any part of equipment requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment or maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on commercial tool market, it shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2.8 SAFETY GUARDS A. Provide guards on all shafts and couplings and all V-belt and sheave assemblies to prevent damage to equipment and injury to personnel. 2.9 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Steel access doors and Frames shall be factory fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush. B. Minimum access panel sizes are as follows: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-7 West End Heights 7 C. Construction: 1. Frames: a. 16 gauge steel with 1 inch wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable masonry anchors for units installed in masonry, pre-cast, cast in place concrete, ceramic tile b. 16-gauge steel, perforated flanges with bead for gypsum or plaster wall board. c. 16-gauge steel with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame for full bed plaster applications. 2. Access Doors: a. Provide 14 gauge sheet steel flush panel doors with concealed continuous piano hinge factory installed, primed and painted, set to open 175 degrees. b. Provide fire rated, insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self closing mechanism rated for 1½ hour “B” labeled, in fire rated partitions. 3. Provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks on all access doors. 2.10 FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS A. All floor and wall penetrations must be sleeved. Provide sleeve sealant in compliance with the section on Fire Stopping, where required, otherwise provide, at minimum, acoustic sealant for cavity between duct or pipe and penetration sleeve. B. Sleeve materials and installation to meet the requirements in the associated specification sections for either Sheet Metal, for ductwork, or Piping Systems, for HVAC Piping. C. Regardless of any other specification provisions, floor penetrations must have a minimum of 2” of sleeve exposed above finished floor elevation and be sealed with water proof sealant on the finished floor side of the penetration. 2.11 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4" high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring and after anchoring and leveling, fill equipment bases with grout. 2.12 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for openings through Fire and Smoke rated walls and floor assemblies shall be listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. Thomas & Betts - S-100 FS500/600, 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. HILTI CFS-S SIL GG Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-8 West End Heights 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS/PRODUCT DATA/SAMPLES A. Submit Shop Drawings on all items of equipment and materials to be furnished and installed. Submission of Shop Drawings and samples shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter, stating name of project and contractor, number of drawings, titles, and other pertinent data called for in individual sections. Shop drawings shall be dated and contain: Name of project; name of prime professional; name of prime contractor; description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. Incomplete submittals will not be accepted. All products specified in an individual Divisions 23 specification section shall be submitted at the same time. Number each submittal. Indicate deviations from contract requirements on Letter of Transmittal. Corrections or comments made on the Shop Drawings during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. The Contractor is responsible for confirming and correcting all quantities; checking electrical characteristics and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 3.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Before construction work commences, Contractors for all trades shall submit Coordination Drawings in the form of electronic coordination drawings. Coordination Drawings are required throughout all areas for all trades. B. Mechanical Equipment Rooms and other critical spaces shall be drawn early in the Coordination Drawing process, simultaneous with all other congested areas. C. Coordination drawings shall identify and show resolutions of physical conflicts, including but not limited to service clearances, access paths, and clearance to combustibles. D. Prepare Coordination Drawings As Follows: 1. The Coordination Drawings base file shall consist of the 3-D architectural and structural models depicting all architectural and structural elements that require coordination. 2. The HVAC Contract shall create and prepare the base model file and then include all equipment, ductwork, piping, and diffusers, clearly indicating structure and equipment mounting heights and required working clearances. a. Submissions of HVAC Contract Documents with contractor title block shall be considered incomplete and will not be acceptable. b. The HVAC Contract shall visit the site to survey and record architectural and structural elements as required. 3. Upon completion of the HVAC Coordination Drawings file, the HVAC Contract shall provide an electronic 3-D model with hard copy prints to all major trades' Contractors. 4. The Plumbing and Fire Protection Contracts shall then add all equipment, piping, and sprinkler heads, documenting any conflicts with HVAC ductwork and piping. The P/FP Coordination drawings shall indicate equipment mounting heights and all required pitch. 5. The Electrical Contract shall then add all switchgear, panels, motor control centers, luminaires, cable tray, feeders, and other large equipment, including working clearances that must be coordinated with the other trades. 6. Relocate ductwork, diffusers, and sprinklers as required to coordinate with the structure, ceiling grid, and luminaires. 7. Where conflicts occur, relocate equipment and provide offsets and transitions as required to permit equipment to fit in the space. Clearly document modifications on the drawings for review by the Architect and Engineer. As part of the Contract, relocate equipment, ductwork, piping, etc as required for proper coordination. 8. The Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Contracts shall indicate areas of conflict and suggested resolutions. 9. Upon completion, submit Coordination Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review. Submission shall be in the form of color coded paper prints at a scale of not less than ¼”-1’. Prints shall contain the Contractor’s titleblock, date, and drawing number. 10. Project Phasing: a. If required, the HVAC Contract shall review the project phasing plan produced by the Architect. The Coordination Drawings submittal shall be organized and submitted by Phase clearly indicating tie-in locations, valves, unions, flanges, dampers, and accessories required to accommodate system extension. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-9 West End Heights 9 3.3 ROUGH-IN AND HOOKUPS A. Due to small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for rough-ins and hookups with field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact location and elevations at work site prior to any rough-in or hookup work. DO NOT SCALE PLANS. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or submittal information require a significant change to the original documents, contact the Owner’s Representative for approval before proceeding. B. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections. 1. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact routing of all duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural drawings. Verify with Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostats, fixture and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. 2. Mechanical and electrical drawings show general equipment arrangement for diffusers, grilles, registers, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers and other items. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for exact locations of mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment from the Architect and other contractors. Do not rough-in services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. Obtain written authorization from the Owner’s Representative or other contractor for any rough-ins that, due to project schedule, are required before approved coordination drawings are available. Any work installed without written authorization or approved coordination drawings, causing a conflict will be relocated by the contractor at no expense to the Owner. C. Provide code-required clearances at equipment, controllers, motor starters, valves, and equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Contractor shall relocate existing work in the way of new construction. Visit the site before bidding to determine scope of work. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Work in cooperation with all other trades to fit piping, ductwork, and equipment into the structure as project conditions demand. 1. Work shall be performed in cooperation with all other trades and scheduled to allow timely and efficient completion of work. 2. Furnish information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for work in advance to other trades. Furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit other trades affected to install their work properly without delay. 3.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS AND CONDITIONS A. Prior to beginning work, inspect and test all existing HVAC systems that will be affected by the work in this contract. Provide a report to the Owner indicating any problems or defects found. If no problems or system defects are submitted, the contractor shall be responsible for correcting problems found at the completion of the project that are determined to be caused by the work of this contract. B. Inspect the entire work area for defects in the existing construction such as scratches, holes etc. Submit a complete list with photographs of existing damage to the Owner prior to beginning work. If existing damage is not documented, the contractor may be required to repair all damage to like new condition. 3.5 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall assume responsibility for Construction Safety at all times and provide, as part of contract, all trench or building shoring, scaffolding, shielding, dust/fume protection, mechanical/electrical protection, special grounding, safety railings, barriers, and other safety feature required to provide safe conditions for all workmen and site visitors. 3.6 ASBESTOS RECOGNITION AND PRECAUTIONS A. The contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all required removal work, coring, cutting and patching with the Owners asbestos management plan. Prior to performing such work identify areas containing asbestos. Notify the Owner so that they may make arrangements for abatement and/or containment prior to work proceeding. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all areas where asbestos is released due to the failure to coordinate with the asbestos management plan. Refer to Division 01 sections for further requirements. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-10 West End Heights 10 B. The disturbance or dislocation of asbestos-containing materials causes asbestos fibers to be released into the building's atmosphere, thereby creating a health hazard to workmen and building occupants. Consistent with Industrial Code Rule 56 and the content of recognized asbestos-control work, the Contractor shall apprise all of his workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors, Owner and Consultants who will be at the job site of the seriousness of the hazard and of proper safeguards and work procedures which must be followed, as described in New York State Department of Labor Industrial Code Rule 56. C. Refer to Division 02 sections for further requirements. 3.7 REMOVALS A. Where existing equipment removals are called for, submit complete list to Owner's Representative. All items that Owner wishes to retain that do not contain asbestos or PCB Material shall be delivered to location directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of. Removal and disposal of material containing asbestos and/or PCB's shall be in accordance with Federal, State and Local law requirements. Where equipment is called for to be relocated. Contractor shall carefully remove, clean and recondition, then reinstall. Remove all abandoned piping, wiring, equipment, lighting, ductwork, tubing, supports, fixtures, etc. Visit each room, crawl space and roof to determine total Scope of Work. B. Assume all fluorescent lamps contain Mercury materials unless labeled otherwise or test samples to show materials do not contain Mercury and submit test report. Remove all lamps from existing light fixtures indicated on contract documents. Dispose of all lamps which do not have non-Mercury labels in compliance with the requirements of the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation and all applicable Federal Laws. Follow all regulations for transporting materials. Provide Certificate of Disposal and all associated paperwork to Owner’s Representative. C. Completely remove all piping, conduit, controls, and other devices associated with the equipment not to be reused in the new work. This includes all pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, conduit, panels, and all hangers, including the top connection and any fastenings to building structural systems. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, conduits and other penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the architectural, structural, mechanical, site, and electrical drawings and specifications for additional facilities to be demolished or handled. 3.8 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Store Materials on dry base, at least 6" above-ground or floor. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace items in this scope of work stolen or damaged, at no cost to Owner. B. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction." 3.9 FREEZING AND WATER DAMAGE A. Take all necessary precautions with equipment, systems and building to prevent damage due to freezing and/or water damage. Repair or replace, at no change in contract, any such damage to equipment, systems and building. Perform first seasons winterizing in presence of Owner's operating staff. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each trade shall include their required cutting and patching work unless shown as part of the General Construction work on the architectural drawings. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," for additional requirements. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch, cut or abandoned holes left by removals of equipment or fixtures. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.11 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-11 West End Heights 11 3.12 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, soffits, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of "General Building Construction Plans and Specifications." Mechanical and Electrical Trades work shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2" above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1" properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6" or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2" above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire-stopping similar to that for floor openings. 3.13 FIRE-STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "ThroughPenetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Apply fire stopping within the temperature and humidity limits permitted by the manufacturer. 6. Provide rigid steel sleeves where non-armored cables pass through fire rated walls and barriers. 3.14 FLASHING AND SEALING A. Opening through roofs shall be flashed in manner not to affect roof guarantee or bond. Engage qualified Roofing Contractor licensed by the Roofing manufacturer, as part of contract. Provide non-ferrous flashing pieces, skirts, hoods and collars as required to make ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations watertight. Where curbs are called for with respect to rectangular openings in new roofs, flashing will be done by others unless specifically indicated otherwise. Caulk and waterproof with additional material so as to seal airtight and watertight. B. Apply all flashing and sealers within the temperature and humidity limits permitted by the manufacturer. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-12 West End Heights 12 3.15 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For Precast Panels/Planks and Metal Decks, support mechanical/electrical work as determined by manufacturer and Owner's Representative. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. B. HVAC Equipment, Piping and Ductwork must be hung from building structure not existing or new piping and conduit supplied by other trades. 3.16 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed B. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment that must be installed prior to building enclosure. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Control devices: Mounting height for all room thermostats, humidistats or sensors with user accessible controls shall be 48” to the top of the cover. D. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. E. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. F. No equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s Representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. G. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. H. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. I. Electrical Coordination: 1. All control wiring, safety interlock wiring, and temperature control system wiring required shall be furnished and installed as indicated within these specifications. The control wiring shall include the furnishing and installation of all conduit boxes, fittings, devices, accessories, wire, and connections required for complete and properly functioning systems. All mechanical equipment room wiring shall be installed in conduit, and all splices and connections shall be made in approved type enclosures or boxes. Low voltage control wiring in mechanical plenums to be run with plenum rated cable with dedicated bridle rings. 2. If motors or controls are not shown on the Electrical Drawings, it has been assumed that these motors and controls have been wired as part of a piece of packaged equipment, or that control wiring will be provided by the Contractor. 3.17 PAINTING A. This Contract Includes the following: 1. Painting for all cut and patch work performed as part of Division 23 contract. 2. Painting required for touch-up of surfaces damaged due to the installation of Division 23 work. 3. Painting as required to repair finish of equipment furnished. 4. Painting as called for on Division 23 Drawings and Specifications. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-13 West End Heights 13 3.18 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES A. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and accessories furnished, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. B. In the event that the Consultant is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of Contractor's errors, omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or if the Consultant is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Consultant's expense in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. 3.19 ALL TRADES TEMPORARY HEAT A. Refer to the Standard General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Supplemental General Conditions. 3.20 HVAC MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS DURING TEMPORARY USE PERIODS A. Provide each air handling system with a set of prefilters in addition to the permanent filters. Furnish four sets of prefilters for each system for use when system is operated for temporary heating or cooling. During such use, change prefilters as often as directed by Owner's Representative. Provide necessary temporary throwaway filters in all return openings to keep dust out of ductwork. Change as often as necessary. Remove all such temporary filters upon completion. Use supply units only. Do not operate return fans. B. Blank-off outside air intake opening during temporary heating period. Install first set of permanent filters and prefilters. C. Adjust dampers on supply system. D. Set all heating coil control valves for manual operation. E. Do not install any grilles or diffusers at room terminal ends of ducts until permission is given. F. Assume responsibility for systems and equipment at all times, even though used for temporary heat or ventilating. Should damage occur to any apparatus prior to final acceptance: G. Repair or replace all dented, scratched or damaged parts of systems. H. Remove concrete, rust, paint spots, other blemishes, then clean. I. Just prior to final acceptance, remove used final filter. Deliver all unused sets of prefilters to the Owner and obtain written receipt. Properly lubricate system bearings before and during temporary use. Maintain thermostats, freeze stats, fire stats, overload devices, and all other safety controls in operating condition. 3.21 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to the standard General Conditions of the contract for Construction and Supplemental General Conditions. 1. Continuity of operation of existing facilities will require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping. 2. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. 3. Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining pressurized. Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-14 West End Heights 14 3.22 CLEANING A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to keep clean all equipment and fixtures provided under this contract for the duration of the project. Each trade shall keep the premises free from an accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his operations. The facilities require an environment of extreme cleanliness, and it is the Contractor's responsibility to adhere to the strict regulations regarding procedures on the existing premises. After all tests are made and installations completed satisfactorily: 1. Thoroughly clean entire installation, both exposed surfaces and interiors. 2. Remove all debris caused by work. 3. Remove tools, surplus, materials, when work is finally accepted. B. Cleanliness of construction shall extend to include the interior and exterior surfaces of all equipment and systems provided under this contract. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Unitary equipment exposed to occupant use (cabinet heaters, baseboard systems, etc.) Shall be thoroughly cleaned for final use both inside and out prior to project completion. 2. Equipment located in mechanical spaces shall be cleaned on the exterior such that no significant accumulation of debris or dirt is evident. 3. Interiors of all air handling equipment (rooftop systems, air handlers, etc.) shall be thoroughly cleaned such that no evidence of dust, dirt or debris remains prior to project turnover. 4. Ductwork systems – Ductwork shall be delivered to the job site with ends capped or covered to eliminate contamination during transportation and site storage. All open ends shall remain covered during the entire course of the construction process. Ductwork with evidence of dust, dirt or debris shall be thoroughly cleaned by an approved method prior project turnover. 3.23 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide final refrigerant and drain connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide as part of plumbing work equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. B. Provide for Contractor Furnished Equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. 3.24 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Maintain existing systems in operation within all rooms of building as required. Refer to "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" for temporary facilities for additional contract requirements. Schedules for various phases of contract work shall be coordinated with all other trades and with Owner's Representative. Provide, as part of contract, temporary plumbing and fire protection, mechanical and electrical connections and relocation as required to accomplish the above. Obtain approval in writing as to date, time, and location for shut-down of existing mechanical/electrical facilities or services. 3.25 START UP AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Before acceptance of the work, furnish necessary skilled labor to operate all systems by seasons. Instruct the Owner’s designated personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Obtain written acknowledgment from person instructed prior to acceptance repeat the instructions if asked to do so. Contractor is fully responsible for systems until acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Provide operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by the Owner for operating systems and equipment. Mount the instruction in clear plastic holder on or adjacent to the equipment. B. Where supervision by a manufacturer is called for, provide manufacturer’s certified technician or engineer to supervise the startup, testing and adjustment of the equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturers are involved (i.e. variable frequency drive and air handling unit) both manufacturers shall be present at start up. The manufacturer shall provide a written report detailing the testing and start-up including problems that occurred and their method of resolution. C. Refer to Section 01650 - Starting of systems and Section 01700 - Contract Closeout for additional requirements. 3.26 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Include one copy each of approved Shop Drawings, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, spare parts lists, as-built drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Include typewritten instructions, Lakeview Health Services Basic Mechanical Requirements 230010-15 West End Heights 15 describing equipment, starting/operating procedures, emergency operating instructions, seasonal changeover, freeze protection, precautions and recommended maintenance procedures. Include name, address, and telephone number of supplier manufacturer Representative and service agency for all major equipment items. Bind above items in a three ring binder with name of project on the cover. Deliver to Owner's Representative before request for acceptance. 3.27 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare and provide record documents in accordance with contract specifications. Record documents shall be scale electronic drawings and hardcopy plans, certified by the contractor and turned over to Project Engineer. In addition to those requirements provide the following: 1. Utilities below floors, slabs and grade: During construction, maintain accurate records of all final locations and inverts for all services inside and outside of the buildings, beneath grade and below floors. 2. Take dimensions from a given fixed bench mark, such as the corner of a building, and neatly and clearly indicate same on reproducible prints. 3. Provide Record Drawings for all Contract Work. Document the routing of all piping systems, locations of valves, etc. 4. Pay all costs of electronic document and printing generation and make required corrections. B. Incorporate all field changes, change orders and other modifications into the final Record Drawings. END OF SECTION 230010 Lakeview Health Services Electric Wiring 230030-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230030 - ELECTRIC WIRING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services for the complete installation of motor and comfort control wiring as required in Contract Documents. Provide wiring and conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of or adjunctive to the HVAC equipment and for building management and motor control regardless of the source of supply. Control wiring includes 120 volt and lower voltage wiring for control signals directing equipment operation. Dedicated, independent, control circuits shall be 120 volt maximum. Provide wiring in accordance with requirements specified in Division 26, "Electrical" and the National Electrical Code. Provide devices required for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, disconnect switches, relays, and circuit breaker protection. B. Coordinate all work with Division 26, "Electrical". 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Power wiring for motors, motor starters and associated starting and control equipment, as well as the motor starters (except in the case of equipment specified to have packaged controls/starters), are included in Division 26, "Electrical," unless otherwise called for. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Wiring installed in compliance with all requirements of Division 26, "Electrical." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete wiring diagrams for equipment and systems. Deliver wiring diagrams to proper trades in time for roughing of conduit, equipment connections, and avoid delay in construction schedule. Wiring diagrams and roughing information to be wired as part of the Work of Division 26, "Electrical," shall be clearly indicated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Division 26 specifications for required wiring materials. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Check electrical wiring pertaining to equipment for completeness and correctness of connections. Correct any misapplied motor and/or motor starter, improper thermal overload device, or device which fails to function and resultant damage, whether due to incorrect connections or improper information on wiring diagrams. 3.2 WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Provide motor control, temperature control and instrumentation wiring for equipment. B. Do not attach directly to hot surfaces, piping, or ductwork. C. Control Wiring in Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 1. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 260100 for type of conduit to be used in specific applications. Provide 18 in. length flexible conduit at motors and devices subject to vibration. Conduit supported on 5 ft. centers. Control wiring shall be in separate conduit from all other wiring. Lakeview Health Services Electric Wiring 230030-2 West End Heights 2 D. Low Voltage Control Wiring in Mechanical Plenums: 1. Plenum rated cable suspended in dedicated bridle rings. E. Provide green grounding wire circuited from starter, and run ground wire through conduit to each remote auxiliary relay, pushbutton station, remote panel heating device, thermostat, or device with potentials in excess of 50 volts. Size ground wire as required by NEC. F. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, selector switches, auxiliary starter contacts, and other devices required to provide specified functions as indicated in the design documents. G. Where allowable by Code and contract documents, temperature control wiring may be installed without conduit. Installation and wire insulation types shall be as described by NEC, Article 725. All low voltage wiring circuits 50V and under shall: 1. When installed horizontally above ceilings and at mechanical room ceilings, low voltage wiring may be run without conduit. Cables shall be supported using bridle rings attached to building structure. 2. All exposed wiring in occupied spaces shall be run in wall cavity or wiremold where no access is available to wall cavity. 3. When installed vertically in Mechanical Rooms from panels and devices up to ceiling shall be installed in conduit. 4. In locations where control wiring is being run to wall mounted sensors, the conduit within the stud wall, as well as the junction box, shall be of non-metallic construction. Carlon Flex-Plus Blue Electrical Non-metallic Tubing and Accessories, or equal. 5. All cases not specifically covered by the above cases shall be run in conduit. 3.3 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide power and control wiring between sections of electric radiation units, between shipping splits, and between remote panels, thermostats, sensors, disconnect switches, and their respective units as required. Provide control wiring from control systems, to each respective electric heat coil, reheat coil or motor. Properly mount control package. Power wiring to and including disconnect switch shall be by Division 26 "Electrical". 3.4 FIELD WIRING IN STARTERS, CONTROLLERS, AND PANELS A. Wiring within starters, controllers, and temperature control panels, shall be routed neatly in gutter space, away from moving and/or heat producing parts. Provide 30 ampere, 600 volt rated terminal blocks. Do not place more than two wire connections on pilot device or relay terminal. Where more than two circuit connections are required, use terminal blocks. Provide nylon self-insulated, locking type spade lugs for all control wires. Cables and wires shall be neatly bundled and lashed with nylon cable straps. END OF SECTION 230030 Lakeview Health Services Painting of Mechanical Work 230040-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230040 - PAINTING OF MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Types of painting of mechanical related work specified in this section include the following: 1. Exposed piping systems 2. Exposed ductwork systems 3. Exposed mechanical insulation 4. Exposed mechanical equipment 5. Color-coded work 6. Steel supports, hangers and rods 7. Access Doors 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver painting materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label showing the following information: 1. Name and title of material 2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture 3. Contents by volume, for major pigments and vehicles 4. Thinning instructions 5. Application instructions 6. Color name and number B. Store materials in approved five-safe location with adequate ventilation. Area must be kept clean. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule of colors for each application for review. B. Paint product data sheets. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PAINTING PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Painting products based on a system by Rust-Oleum. Other equivalent systems may be approved. B. Steel surfaces – normal temperatures: 1. First Coat – Rust-Oleum #769 Red Primer. 2. Second Coat – Rust-Oleum #960 Zinc Chromate. 3. Third Coat – Rust-Oleum finish color as directed. C. Steel surfaces – elevated temperatures above 150 degrees F. 1. First Coat – Rust-Oleum #819 heat resistant primer. 2. Second Coat – Rust-Oleum #55 heat resistant aluminum. 3. Machinery, equipment and apparatus having factory applied prime coat shall be painted as specified above except omit first coat. D. Exposed canvas on pipe and equipment insulation: 1. First Coat – Primer, Rust-Oleum #473 aluminum primer. 2. Second Coat – Rust-Oleum #2790 semi-gloss or pastel. 3. Third Coat – Colors as directed. Lakeview Health Services Painting of Mechanical Work 230040-2 West End Heights 2 E. Vehicles and thinners: Comply with governing regulations and recognized safe practices in handling, use and drying of paint vehicles and thinners. Compatibility of paint products is the Contactor’s exclusive responsibility. Select paint products to ensure freedom from problems relating to vehicles and thinners of type and within limits recommended by paint manufacturer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Clean surfaces before applying paint products. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Comply with paint products manufacturer’s instructions for surface cleaning and preparation. Remove surface applied accessories which are not to be painted, and reinstall after completion of painting. Protect non-removable items not to be painted, by covering with paper or plastic film. B. Ferrous metal surfaces: Remove mill scale and loose rust on surfaces which are not zinc coated or shop/factory prime coated. 1. Clean shop applied prime coats on metal surfaces, and repair (touch-up) prime coats wherever abraded or otherwise damaged, prior to application of paint system. 2. Zinc coated surfaces: Clean with non-petroleum based solvent. Wash with copper sulfate solution and flush with water, unless surface has been pre-treated, or unless treatment is not recommended by manufacturer of prime coat. 3.2 PAINT SYSTEM APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for mixing or stirring paint products immediately before application. B. Application limitations: Paint every accessible surface of each unit of work indicated to be painted, regardless of whether in location recognized as “concealed” or “exposed” except as otherwise indicated. 1. Omit painting of ductwork and insulated piping above removable ceilings, but apply paint system to pipe hangers, duct hangers and similar unprotected ferrous materials. 2. Omit painting on machined sliding surfaces and rotating shafts of equipment, and on nonferrous finished metals including chrome plate, stainless steel, special anodized aluminum, brass/bronze and copper, and on plastics and similar finished materials, except where specifically indicated to be color-coded by painting. 3. Omit painting on required name plates, labels, identification tags, signs, markers, printed instructions, performance ratings, flow diagrams and similar test and graphics, located within the scope of work indicated to receive paint application. 4. Omit specified prime coat of paint system for metal surfaces where surface has shop applied prime coat of equivalent quality. Apply prime coat on other surfaces to be painted, comply with paint manufacturer’s instructions for prime coating where not otherwise indicated. Apply additional prime coats where suction spots or unsealed areas appear. C. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Apply paint at edges, corners, joints, welds and exposed fasteners in manner which will ensure dry-film thickness equal to that of flat surfaces. Allow sufficient time between successive coats for proper drying (comply with manufacturer’s drying instructions). 1. Number of coats: Number indicated is minimum number; apply as many coats as are necessary to cover. 2. Coating thickness: Apply paint in uniform coats without thinning in application thickness recommended by manufacturer for each coat. 3. Apply paint in smooth finish without noticeable texture, cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ripples, ropiness and other surface imperfections. 3.3 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION, PAINTING A. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. Do not leave in paint storage area. B. Spattered Surfaces: Upon completion of painting work, clean paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. Lakeview Health Services Painting of Mechanical Work 230040-3 West End Heights 3 C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting work. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting as directed. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings installed for protection of work not to be painted, after completion of painting operations. At completion of work by other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 230040 Lakeview Health Services Mechanical Identification 230060-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230060 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. X 11 in. (minimum), indicating code number, location and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc., Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div., Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc., Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where there is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Snap-on type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semirigid snap-on, color coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Pressure sensitive type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. 3. Stencil paint: Apply black or yellow stencil paint directly to covering or bare pipe; color to contrast with background. Stencil as follows: Pipe or Covering Size Stencil Letter ½”, ¾” , 1", 1-1/4" ½” 1-½”, 2” ¾” 2-½” and over 1” Lakeview Health Services Mechanical Identification 230060-2 West End Heights 2 B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: Pipe Function Identification Refrigerant Piping RP 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: 1. Provide engraved vinyl plates for each major piece of mechanical equipment provided. 2. Nameplates: 3/4" x 2-1/2" equal to Seton Cat. #2060-20. 3. Provide for the following equipment, as required: a. Dedicated Outside Air Units (DOAS) b. Fan Coil Units (FCU) c. Outdoor VRF Equipment (HRU, ODU…) d. Variable Refrigerant Packaged Terminal Heat Pumps (VRP) e. Unit Heaters Lakeview Health Services Mechanical Identification 230060-3 West End Heights 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide equipment tags for all equipment listed in Section 2.3 above. B. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project. Minimum every 20'-0". For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION 230060 Lakeview Health Services Motors 230500-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230500 - MOTORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Any Variable Frequency Drives supplied as part of Division 23 work shall comply with Specification Section 262920- Variable Frequency Drives. C. This section shall apply to all motors supplied as part of the Division 23 scope of work in addition to the requirements listed in the individual specification sections. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. General Requirements: 1. Motors built for 60 Hz operation, three phase for 1/2 hp and larger; single phase for 1/3 hp and smaller. In compliance with NEMA Standards, wound specifically for nameplate voltage and selected for appropriate duty and environment. 1.15 minimum service factor at rated voltage and frequency. Bearings rated 20,000 life hours. V-belt connected motors with adjustable slide rail bases and pulleys. Motors shall have Class F insulation system, with Class B temperature rise. Maximum allowable motor temperature rise for open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type at 1.15 service factor shall be 80oC above 40oC ambient up to 300 hp. NEMA locked rotor KVA code as required to match unit equipment torque characteristics. 2. Single-phase motors shall be capacitor start, induction run, or split phase type. Polyphase motors shall be constant speed, squirrel cage, unless otherwise called for. Motors for solid state driven variable speed, fans or AHU units shall be designed for definite purpose energy efficient drive control. 3. Motors designed to be controlled by variable frequency drives shall be NEMA MG-1 type and equipped with a shaft grounding ring to prevent motor damage caused by stray electrical currents. 4. Motors rated 1 hp and greater shall be special design, high efficiency, energy-saver type with a guaranteed NEMA nominal full-load efficiency, by IEEE Standard 112 Test Method "B". Efficiency rating shall appear on nameplate and shall be not less than the New York State Energy Code requirements as follows: MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD MOTOR EFFICIENCY HP (ODP) OPEN DRIP-PROOF MOTORS (RPM) (TEFC) ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED MOTORS (RPM) 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800 3600 1.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 1.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 84.0 2.0 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3.0 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 Lakeview Health Services Motors 230500-2 West End Heights 2 MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD MOTOR EFFICIENCY HP (ODP) OPEN DRIP-PROOF MOTORS (RPM) (TEFC) ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED MOTORS (RPM) 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800 3600 7.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0 25 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 30 93.6 94.1 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 40 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4 50 94.1 94.5 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.0 60 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 75 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6 100 95.0 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1 125 95.0 95.4 94.1 95.0 95.4 95.0 5. Nominal Motor Voltage Table: Nominal System Voltage Motor Nameplate 480V - 3 phase 460 volt 240V - 1 phase and 3 phase 230 volt 208V - 1 phase and 3 phase 200 volt 120V - 1 phase 115 volt Lakeview Health Services Motors 230500-3 West End Heights 3 6. Motor Application: Environment/Location Motor Enclosure Type General Purpose Open drip-proof, TEFC, or encapsulated Outdoors, below grade or high humidity TEFC Hazardous Explosion-proof Packaged Refrigeration Compressors Hermetic or semi-hermetic 7. Make: Need not be all of same make, but one of the following: Baldor, General Electric, Gould, Reliance, Westinghouse. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 MOTORS A. Furnished by equipment manufacturer and especially manufactured and/or selected, mounted and installed for intended use. Install motors accessible for maintenance and belt adjustment. END OF SECTION 230500 Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230750 - INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. B. Install products per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit a single complete insulation schedule including all insulation applications applicable to this contract. B. Submittals without complete schedule of application and complete manufacturer data will be considered incomplete. C. Manufacturer data. 1. Submittals shall include the following minimum performance criteria for each application as indicated in the Exhibits at the end of this section applicable to this project: a. Nominal thickness and installed thickness (in.) b. Thermal conductivity (Btu•in/h•ft2•°F) c. Vapor transmission rate (perms) d. Jacket material- both factory and field applied e. Nominal R value and installed R value. f. Manufacturer’s Health Product Declaration, if available g. Insulation Density (pcf) 2. Insulation Jacket product data. 3. All submittals shall include ratings for combustibility, smoke developed index, and flame spread index as tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 using the specimen preparation and mounting procedures of ASTM E 2231. Submittals without this information will be rejected. 4. For installations within plenum ceilings, all material submittals shall include information as to their compliance with NFPA Standard 90A-1999. All materials shall be noncombustible or limited combustible. Noncombustible materials shall be reported as passing ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C. Limited combustible materials shall have a potential heat value not exceeding 3500 Btu/lb where tested in accordance with NFPA 259, Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials, and comply with (a) or (b): (a) Materials having a structural base of noncombustible material, with a surfacing not exceeding a thickness of 1/8 in., that has a flame spread index of not greater than 50; (b) Materials, in the form and thickness used, other than as described in (a), having neither a flame spread index greater than 25 nor evidence of continued progressive combustion, and of such composition that surfaces that would be exposed by cutting through the material on any plane would have neither a flame spread index of greater than 25 no evidence of continued progressive combustion. Materials subject to increase in combustibility or flame spread index beyond the limits herein established through the effects of age, moisture, or other atmospheric condition shall be considered combustible. 1.3 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of insulation materials and packaging as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-2 West End Heights 2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, Jackets, Adhesives And Coatings, Shall Comply With The Following: 1. The New York State Mechanical Code. 2. Treatment of jackets or facings for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water soluble treatments not permitted. 3. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ducts, pipes and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 4. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. 5. Latest edition of the Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 6. Duct coverings and linings shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411 at the temperature to which they are exposed in service. 7. Flexible duct insulation coverings shall be tested and compliant with UL 181 and bear the seal of compliance on the product. 8. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. 9. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. 10. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. 11. External duct insulation shall be legibly printed or identified at intervals not greater than 36 inches with the name of the manufacturer, the thermal resistance R value at the specified installed thickness and the flame spread and smoke-developed indexes of the composite materials. 12. All duct insulation R values shall be based on insulation only, excluding air films, vapor retarders or other duct components, and shall be based on tested C-values at 75°F mean temperature at the installed thickness, in accordance with recognized industry procedures. 13. The installed thickness of duct insulation used to determine its R value shall be determined as follows: a. For duct board, duct liner, and factory made rigid ducts not normally subject to compression, the nominal insulation thickness shall be used. b. For duct wrap, the installed thickness shall be 75 percent of the nominal thickness. 14. For requirements for factory insulated flexible ductwork, refer to Specification Section 233100 - Sheetmetal and Accessories. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Rigid Type - Preformed rigid sectional pipe covering, 4 lb. nominal density fiberglass. Maximum thermal conductivity (k), on a flat surface, shall be 0.23 Btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 75°F mean temperature. ASJ: white kraft outer surface bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiberglass yarn, compliance with ASTM 1136, Type I. B. Flexible Elastomeric Type - flexible closed-cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet form. In accordance with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials. Closed cell structure to prevent moisture from wicking. Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s, or HCFC’s. Material shall be formaldehyde free, low VOC, fiber free, dust free and resist mold and mildew. Maximum k value of 0.27 Btu•in/h•ft2•°F. at 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. Water vapor permeability- laminate 0.0, foam 0.05 Perms as determined in accordance with ASTM E 96. Insulation shall pass UL 181 for mold growth, fungi resistance, and bacterial resistance. C. CALCIUM SILICATE - Asbestos free, hydrous calcium silicate, 12 lbs/cu. ft. density minimum. Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be 0.42 Btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 200°F. 2.3 DUCT INSULATION A. All supply and return air ducts and plenums shall be insulated with a minimum of R-6 insulation when located in unconditioned spaces and with a minimum of R-12 insulation when located outside the building. When located within a building envelope assembly, the duct or plenum shall be separated from the building exterior or unconditioned spaces by a minimum of R-12 insulation. Provide with formaldehyde free glass binder. 1. In accordance with the National Insulation Association, the R value is equal to the thickness divided by the k value. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-3 West End Heights 3 B. Conductivity: Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be as required to provide the scheduled installed R-value at the submitted insulation thickness at a mean temperature of 100°F (i.e. k=0.285 Btu•in/h•ft2•°F to achieve R-7 for 2” compressed insulation thickness, excluding air film at 100°F mean temperature). C. Vapor Retarder: FSK jacket with aluminum foil face and fiberglass reinforced scrim with kraft paper or polyethylene backing. Maximum permanence of 0.05 perm or aluminum foil having a minimum thickness of 2 mils. Insulation systems having a permeance of 0.05 perm or less shall not be required to be covered. D. Rigid Board Type - Concealed: 3 lb/ft3 minimum density, glass fiberboard, 1 in. minimum thickness. Factory applied vapor barrier finish consisting of aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn; seams and joints taped. Provide with formaldehyde free glass binder. E. Rigid Board Type - Exposed: 6 lb/ft3 minimum density, glass fiberboard, 1 in. minimum thickness. Factory applied white Kraft outer surface bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiberglass yarn joints finished with corner beading and fiberglass tape. Provide with formaldehyde free glass binder. F. Flexible Blanket Type: Long glass fiber blanket, factory applied, fiberglass yarn, reinforced aluminum foil faced vapor seal. Provide with formaldehyde free glass binder. G. Flexible Elastomeric Type: flexible closed-cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet form. In accordance with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials. Closed cell structure to prevent moisture from wicking. Insulation material shall be manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s, or HCFC’s. Material shall be formaldehyde free, low VOC, fiber free, dust free and resist mold and mildew. Maximum k value of 0.27 Btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. Water vapor permeability- laminate 0.0, foam 0.05 Perms as determined in accordance with ASTM E 96. Insulation shall pass UL 181 for mold growth, fungi resistance, and bacterial resistance. 2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Segmented board, sheets, blocks, size, shape and material as called for. B. Flexible Elastomeric Type 2.5 MAKES A. Fiberglass: Certainteed, Knauf, Johns Manville, Owens-Corning. B. Calcium Silicate: Manville, Owens-Corning. C. Flexible Elastomeric: Aeroflex USA INC, Armacell LLC, K-Flex USA. D. Adhesives: Benjamin Foster; (BF) numbers designate quality of adhesive or as directed by the manufacturer of the insulation system. 2.6 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION JACKET A. Duct Insulation: 1. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: Aluminum jacket product consisting of a composite membrane constructed of a multi-ply embossed UV-resistant aluminum foil/polymer laminate to which is applied a layer of rubberized asphalt specifically formulated for use on insulated duct and piping installations. a. Product Thickness: 55-60 mils. b. Product Weight: 0.3 lb/ft2 c. Rated for 0.0 water vapor transmission and 0.0 permeance in accordance with ASTM E 96-00. d. Manufacturer guaranteed 10 year warranty to be free from leaks caused by defects in materials of manufacturing. e. Basis of Design: Alumaguard as manufactured by Polyguard or approved equal. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-4 West End Heights 4 2. Rigid Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing, or Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules or as follows: Aluminum, Smooth or Stucco Embossed: 0.024 inch thick minimum. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5mil- thick polysurlyn. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn. B. Pipe Insulation: 1. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 20 mils thick. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. Minimum 0.024 inch thick. 3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M. 0.020 inch thick. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45° and 90°, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. 2.7 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Thermal Insulation: 1. Insulation is required on all HVAC systems as called for in the Exhibits located at the end of this Section. 2. Install insulation only on clean, dry surfaces, and only after the associated system has been tested. 3. Continuous through hangers, openings and sleeves on cold water, chilled water, heating water, refrigerant, low and high pressure steam and low and high pressure condensate piping, as required. 4. On cold surfaces with continuous unbroken vapor seal. Do not cover inspection stampings, openings, petcocks, handholes, manholes, access doors, plugged outlets, air vents, plugged openings or petcocks. All joints and seams shall be sealed to maintain the continuity of the vapor retarder. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed except within radiation enclosures. B. Piping in exterior walls, spaces, overhangs, attics, or where subject to freezing. Insulate pipe with double the thickness called for. Piping in wall chases: In addition to the above, pack chase with loose glass fiber insulation. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section "Piping Systems and Accessories." 1. Pre-insulated type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field insulated type: Provide 1-1/2" calcium silicate insulation between pipe and shield. D. Joints In Section Pipe Covering Made As Follows: 1. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with BF 85-20, or factory applied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. 2. Vapor barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white BF 85-20. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges and fittings with white BF 85-20. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-5 West End Heights 5 E. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or ells may be continuous. 3. Where exposed outdoors, apply UV resistant coating as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Service openings shall not be concealed by duct coverings unless the exact location of the opening is properly identified. B. Duct coverings shall not penetrate a wall or floor required to have a fire resistance rating or required to be fireblocked. C. Provide external thermal insulation for duct. Not required where ducts have internal acoustical insulation and are located inside the conditioned space. Make special provisions at dampers, damper motors, thermometers, instruments and access doors. Apply as follows: 1. Rigid board type: Impale board over mechanical fasteners, welded pins or adhered clips, 12 in. to 18 in. centers; minimum of two rows per side. Secure insulation with washers on clips. Seal breaks and joints in vapor barrier with 4 in. wide matching tape or 4 in. glass-fab applied with BF 35-00. Apply tape over corner beading where exposed. 2. Flexible blanket type: Joints and seams made with 2 in. lap of vapor barrier. Round ducts: Apply BF 85-20 adhesive to ducts in 6 in. brush widths at 1 ft. intervals and at each facing edge. Square ducts: Fasten by impaling insulation on adhered or welded clips. Secure insulation with washers on clips. Seal joints and breaks with 4 in. wide matching tape or 4 in. glass-fab applied with BF 35-00. 3. Flexible elastomeric type: install per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.4 OUTDOOR INSULATION A. Insulation installed on exterior ductwork and piping shall be protected with an aluminum jacket in accordance with Part 2 of this section. Jacket shall include an approved, UV resistant, weatherproof barrier. Install jacketing per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide cold weather treatment and air release valve accessories as required. Ensure that all ductwork is sealed to SMACNA Duct Seal Class A. B. Top surface of jacked duct insulation shall be pitched a minimum of 2” rise on 12” horizontal to reduce ponding. Provide sheet metal standoff or tapered insulation as required to achieve required pitch. C. Install insulation per manufacturer’s installation requirements. Provide mastic, sealants, and tape as required. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Equipment insulation surfaces shall be a hard, smooth, uniform finish. Install Work ready for painting. 3.6 RECOVERING A. Field apply 6 oz. white glass cloth, cemented and applied over standard jacket. Properly cut at fittings to avoid wrinkles and coat with BF 30-36. Leave ready for painting. EXHIBIT I - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-6 West End Heights 6 SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL PIPE SIZE MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS REMARKS Refrigeration, VRF systems, or hot gas bypass (max 140°) Glass fiber 1-1/4 in. and larger 1 in. and smaller 1-1/2 in. 1-1/2 in. SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 2 Refrigeration (Opt.) VRF systems or hot gas bypass (max 140°) Flexible 1-1/2 in. and larger Under 1-1/2 in. 1-1/2 in. 1 in. SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 2 AC unit drains and overflows Glass fiber Flexible All sizes 1/2 in. NOTES FOR EXHIBIT I: NOTE 1: Outdoor use all types – provide two layers of flexible elastomeric insulation 1-1/2 in. thick with two coats of recommended finish. Cover with insulation jacket and seal watertight. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. NOTE 2: VRF Systems: all refrigerant lines are to be insulated. EXHIBIT II - DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS REMARKS Supply Air all locations, Return and Room Neutral Ventilation Air in unconditioned spaces Exposed: Rigid fiberglass or flexible elastomeric Concealed: Flexible fiberglass R-6: typically 1.5 in. R-6: typically 2.2 in. SEE NOTE 1 Supply Air, Ventilation Air, Return Air in spaces outside the building thermal envelope Exposed: Rigid fiberglass or flexible elastomeric Concealed: Flexible fiberglass R-12: typically 3 in. R-12: typically 4.4 in. SEE NOTE 1 Air conditioning supply (insulated double wall) Exterior insulation not required Room Neutral Ventilation in conditioned spaces Not insulated Outside air ducts, plenum boxes, and mixing boxes Rigid fiberglass 2 in. Provide neat fit at intake plenum Exhaust, relief, or vent ducts and plenums Exposed: Rigid fiberglass Concealed: Flexible fiberglass 1 in. 1 in. Insulate 15 ft. from exterior opening and plenums Ducts located outside and weatherproofed Flexible elastomeric or rigid board with insulation jacket R-12: typically 2 in. SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 3 NOTES FOR EXHIBIT II: NOTE 1: Ductwork indicated to be lined shall not be insulated. Lakeview Health Services Insulation 230750-7 West End Heights 7 NOTE 2: Provide with duct insulation jacket NOTE 3: Refer to Section 2.3 DUCT INSULATION - Part A for Code required minimum R value performance criteria. END OF SECTION 230750 Lakeview Health Services Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230990-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 230990 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting and balancing work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide information in report form detailing the results of testing and balancing services required by specifications. Report shall be printed and three copies submitted for review. Results shall be guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative. B. Prior to Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) activities the following must be submitted for approval: 1. Sample report forms for all types of TAB work to be performed for the project. 2. TAB strategies and procedures plan listing step by step procedures for all TAB activities. 3. TAB contractor qualifications. 4. Up to date instrument calibration reports as described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5. C. Report format shall consist of the following at minimum: 1. Title sheet with job name, Contractor, Engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name. Include signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 2. Individual test sheets for all HVAC equipment in TAB scope, including, but not limited to: air handlers, terminal units, air distribution (RG&D), exhaust fans, duct traverses, pumps, hydronic distribution, air handling coils, reheat coils, radiation, convectors, cabinet unit heaters and unit ventilators. 3. Manufacturers pump and fan curves for equipment installed with design and actual operating conditions indicated. 4. One complete set of record floor plans marked up with terminal unit numbers, room numbers, test port locations, register, grille and diffuser numbers that correlate with test sheets (number the air outlets by room number). Data shall be provided with reports. 5. Provide written narrative commentary on installed system with respect to deviations from Contract Documents required system performance and craftsmanship of the installation. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Maintain qualified person at project for system operation, equipment and controls trouble shooting, change pulleys and to perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure. C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB (or approved by the Engineer). 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform TAB services after leakage and air pressure tests on air and hydronic systems have been satisfactorily completed. B. Balance systems to the settings specified in the design documents. Setting tolerance is +10%/-0% of design value, within calibration accuracy of measuring instruments, unless otherwise instructed by engineers. C. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition. 1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession. 2. Prior to balancing adjust balancing devices for full flow; fill, vent and clean hydronic systems, replace temporary filters and strainers. Lakeview Health Services Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230990-2 West End Heights 2 3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for, or as directed by the engineer, to satisfy job conditions. 4. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished under appropriate outdoor temperature conditions. All outdoor conditions (DB, WB and a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing shall be documented in the report. 5. Adjust and align pulleys and sheaves as required to meet system performance requirements. Provide new pulleys, sheaves, drives, and belts as required to meet system performance requirements. 6. Replace any adjustable sheaves with permanent style after balancing is complete for all motors supplied with adjustable type sheaves. 7. Replace balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 8. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 9. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have been set (A sum of room RG&D airflow is not acceptable). Record and compare this airflow value to sum of associated terminals to determine duct leakage percentage. If duct leakage percentage exceeds 10%, or if overall system cannot be adjusted to meet design requirements, address with engineer and mechanical contractor for resolution. D. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. After testing patch probe holes and restore insulation, as required. E. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. F. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. G. The contractor shall return to the site as many times as necessary to achieve the minimum required airflow rates as required by Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers, anemometers, Pitot tubes, inclined gauge manometers, magnehelic gauges, amprobes, voltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required. Instruments used shall be accurately calibrated as per AABC or NEBB requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine project documentation (including Bid Documents and equipment submittals) and notify Owner's Representative of any questions regarding balancing, within thirty days after receipt of bid and prior to starting work. B. Before concealment of systems visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices, access panels, and test points. Confirm changes are made as required to allow proper balancing of the facility. C. Examine pre-functional and functional test reports and confirm that systems are ready for TAB efforts. D. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. E. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. F. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. Lakeview Health Services Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230990-3 West End Heights 3 5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.2 AIR SIDE A. General Procedures for Balancing Air Systems: 1. Prepare test reports for both fans and terminals. Obtain manufacturer's terminal outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of measured RG&D outlet volumes with associated fan volumes. 2. Check for airflow blockages. 3. Review and verify that fans are rotating in the correct direction. 4. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. 5. Check airflow patterns to/from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers, return- and exhaust-air dampers, and supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. 6. Check condensate drains for proper connections, trap seal and function. 7. Identify and record air leakage in air side equipment. B. Procedures for Constant Volume Air Systems 1. Set all systems dampers to full open and adjust fan sections to deliver indicated airflow at maximum fan RPM as listed by fan manufacturer. 2. Measure and record fan airflow via duct traverse whenever possible. Perform duct traverse in sections of main duct with fully developed airflow. 3. Measure and record fan total static pressure using differential measurements at the inlet and outlet of fan sections. 4. Measure static pressure loss across all sections of each air handling unit (include fan-coil and blower coil units). 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fanspeed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. Air systems shall be balanced in a manner to first minimize throttling losses then, for fans with system power of greater than 1hp, fan speed shall be adjusted to meet design flow conditions 6. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Where possible utilize duct traverse measurements to determine airflow. Remeasure each submain and branch after all dampers have been adjusted and repeat as necessary to achieve airflow within tolerances. 7. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. a. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. 8. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals whenever possible. 9. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 10. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. C. Test, adjust and record design and actual values for the following Air Side elements: 1. All Motors: a. Nameplate RPM b. For motors with variable speed control capability, measure and record actual RPM. c. Motor Voltage and Full load amps for each phase (utilize to calculate motor BHP) d. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts e. Complete nameplate data 2. Fans: a. CFM b. RPM c. Suction static pressure d. Discharge static pressure Lakeview Health Services Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230990-4 West End Heights 4 e. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts, key sizes, shaft, diameter f. Complete nameplate data g. Sketch of system's inlet and outlet connections h. Location of test port 3. Duct: Traverse Zones for mains, submains and branches: a. Duct interior size b. CFM c. Static pressure 4. Packaged Units: Single Packaged Vertical Heat Pumps, Dedicated Outside Air Units, Fan coil units, heat pumps, etc., as required a. Outdoor air CFM b. Total discharge, exhaust/relief and return CFM c. Static profile thru unit d. Complete nameplate data e. Motor, Fan, and coil information per subject sections 5. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: a. Design and Actual CFM (within specified tolerances) b. Set, adjust and record air flow pattern 6. Filter Banks: a. Nameplate data b. Static pressure drop END OF SECTION 230990 Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems and Accessories 232110-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 232110 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. B. Provide all chemical treatment required for piping systems each time an individual system is drained and then refilled as a result of work performed under this contract. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of pipe materials, fittings and branch connections for all applications on the project. B. Refrigerant piping diagram. C. Anchors, sleeves, hanger shields, guides PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings new and marked with manufacturer's name; complying with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. 2.2 COPPER PIPE AND SOLDER FITTINGS A. Pipe: Hard temper, ASTM B88; Type K, L, M, or DWV, as called for. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought copper or cast bronze; solder end connections; ASTM B62, ANSI B16.22. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp; 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Make: Harris "Stay-Brite", Sil-Fos "Silvabrite 100", Canfield "100% Watersafe". 2.3 THERMOPLASTIC (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS - DRAINAGE A. Interior Thermoplastic Sewer (PVC): 1. Pipe: ASTM D1784 material manufactured to ASTM D1785 standards. Seamless Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Type 1, Grade 1. Socket type weld couplings ASTM D2466, DR with integral bell end for solvent cementing ASTM D2672. Solvent cement - ASTM D2564. 2. Fittings: Socket type cement weld fittings of same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. ASTM D2466. 2.4 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Type “ACR” seamless copper tube shall meet the standard, ASTM B 280, Type “ACR” seamless copper tube for airconditioning and refrigeration field service. Tubing shall be precleaned, nitrogen charged and sealed. B. Refrigerant grade wrought copper fittings. Long radius elbows. C. Factory made suction traps, Melco Type PT. D. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Mechanical Refrigeration Safety Code, ANSI B9.1. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems and Accessories 232110-2 West End Heights 2 E. Brazing Materials: 15% Silver Alloy, Airco Sil-4S, Sil-Fos, or Harris Dynaflow. F. Make: Alco, Detroit, Henry, Mueller, Sporlan. 2.5 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: Carpenter and Patterson, Central Iron, Fee and Mason, ITT Grinnell. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Cadmium plated or galvanized for exterior. 2. Adjustable ring type or clevis where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger and where insulation passes through hanger. 4. Hangers sized to permit passage of insulation through the hanger for refrigerant piping. 5. Nuts and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium (0.005 in. minimum) finish. C. Hanger Shields: 1. For closed cell elastomeric foam applications: CFC-free PUR/PIR load-bearing segments embedded in closed cell insulation with outer shell of 30-mil thick painted aluminum. Single-piece construction, self-adhesive closure, foam-to-foam bond. Available in ¾” ID to 8” IPS sizes. Armafix manufactured by Armacell or approved equal. 2. Field-insulated type: a. #18 USSG, galvanized steel shields, minimum 120° arc. Provide temporary blocking between pipe and hanger to maintain proper spacing for insulation. Provide at all support points. 3. Shield Sizing: Pipe Size Shield Length Minimum Gauge to 3-1/2" 12 in. 18 to 4” 12 in. 16 to 6" 12 in. 14 to 14" 24 in. 12 to 24" 24 in. 10 a. Hanger shield gauges listed are for use with band type hangers only. For point loading (roller support), increase shield thickness by one gauge and length by 50%. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems and Accessories 232110-3 West End Heights 3 4. Spacing Schedule: Pipe Size Steel PVC Copper Plastic Rod Size ½ to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 1 ¼ to 2 in. 10 ft. 8 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 2 ½ to 4 in. 14 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 1/2 in. 5 and 6 in. 14 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 5/8 in. 8 in. 14 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 3/4 in. Over 8 in. To suit loading conditions D. Inserts: ITT Grinnell Fig. #281, maximum loading 1000 lbs., galvanized finish and Fig. #285, maximum loading 400 lbs. Make: Globestrut, Grinnell, Unistrut. E. Supports: 1. For weights under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts equivalent to Phillips "Red Head," "U-Channel," "Unistrut," beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The safety factor shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 2. For weights above 1000 lbs.: Drill through floor slabs and provide flat flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional "Drill-In" inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. The safety factor shall be at least four. 3. For metal decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use Phillips "Red Head" devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 4. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on minimum safety factor of four. 5. Make: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head", or approved equal. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, for structural surfaces. 2. Schedule 40, PVC sleeves or sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18 gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems and Accessories 232110-4 West End Heights 4 B. Pre-Insulated Type: 1. Adjustable or fixed length metal cans, 24 gauge minimum, sized for 1 in. spacing between insulation and can. Insulation shall consist of a 360° waterproofed calcium silicate insert sized to extend 1 in. beyond wall or floor penetration. Calcium silicate insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Spacing between shield and can packed at each end with double neoprene coated rope positively fastened. 2.7 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Waterproof Type: 1. Exterior walls, below grade, above floor: Synthetic rubber material with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. 2.8 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire-resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.9 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A," "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (HVAC) piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Equipment and systems in accordance with laws, codes and provisions of each applicable section of these specifications. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Provide trap seal of adequate depth on drain pans. 3.2 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Fittings brazed with silver brazing alloy. Guarantee refrigerant charge for one year from date of final acceptance. Provide for flexibility at compressor connections. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Mechanical Refrigeration Safety Code, ANSI B9.1. Clean piping, then pump-down and evacuate systems with high grade vacuum pump. Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, evacuate system to 0.1 in. VAC break vacuum with dry nitrogen and re-evacuate to 0.1 in. VAC and hold for four hours; then charge system. Charge with refrigerant as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping, nor by vertical expansion bolts. Support each pipe with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location. Trapeze hangers are acceptable for racking of multiple pipes of 1-1/2" or less in size. Provide roller supports where required by thermal expansion. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size as called for, using four nuts per rod. Provide additional rustproofed structural steel members, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible; "C" type not permitted on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems and Accessories 232110-5 West End Heights 5 B. Do not support piping from equipment. C. Max horizontal spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed 6’ 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat. "Walseal" fittings may be used; if insufficient alloy is showing, face braze such joints. C. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specific for each application. 3.5 HANGER SHIELDS A. Pre-insulated type or field-insulated type at Contractor's option. B. Provide for all chilled water and all "non-direct" connection supports. 3.6 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors which are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. B. Pre-insulated type: Required for refrigerant piping. C. Standard type: Provide for piping, except as called for. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade mechanical and other areas with floor drains; use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing walls, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.7 ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. Provide piping system anchors and guides as shown on the plans and as recommended by the expansion joint/loop manufacturer. Where an anchor is shown at a change in piping direction, it shall fully control movement in both directions. In lieu of a single anchor fabricated for two directional control, two (2) individual anchors may be provided. 3.8 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal Void Space at Sleeves as Follows: 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior walls and below grade cored holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device, or compound. 3.9 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon plates for exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.10 TESTS A. Test piping and accessories before insulation or concealment. Repeat as many times as necessary to prove tight system. Notify Owner's Representative at least seven days in advance of each test. Isolate valves and equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Remove and replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Furnish necessary pumps, gauges, equipment, piping, valving, power and labor for testing. Certify that test have been successfully completed. Lakeview Health Services Piping Systems and Accessories 232110-6 West End Heights 6 B. Schedule of Test Requirements: 1. Refrigeration: a. Clean piping, then pump-down and evacuate systems with high grade vacuum pump. Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, evacuate system to 0.1 in. VAC break vacuum with dry nitrogen and re-evacuate to 0.1 in. VAC and hold for four hours; then charge system 2. Tests: No change in pressure under stable temperature conditions. 3. Equipment: Test at working pressures. 3.11 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (HVAC) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Refrigerant Type ACR drawn, refrigerant grade tubing copper Wrought copper, solder end Sil-Flo "5" silver brazing Vent, overflow, drain Schedule 40, galvanized steel or Type M copper Cast iron drainage type or wrought copper Threaded or solder Coil condensate drain (Optional) Schedule 40, PVC Socket type PVC Socket weld cement END OF SECTION 232110 Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 233100 - SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ductwork Shall Be Fabricated and Installed in Compliance with Latest Edition of The Following Standards: 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible Ductwork. 2. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard. 3. NFPA Standards, Bulletin 90A, 96, 101. 4. Plans and Specifications which exceed the requirements in any of the referenced standards. B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed by an experienced Contractor specializing in this type of Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Of all sheet metal ductwork and equipment being provided. Floor plans for each area under construction indicating ductwork in two-line format with duct dimensions, changes of elevation, structural penetrations and equipment connections identified. 2. Submit a complete shop standard manual including construction details for all shop fabricated materials, duct hanger schedule, duct thickness, reinforcement and construction schedule for all duct systems included in the project. 3. Ductwork Detail Drawings for branch connections and changes in direction. 4. Custom fabricated sheet metal components including exhaust and kitchen hood details. B. Product Data: 1. Ductwork construction standards for all fittings, joints and seams, mastics and sealants, elbow turning vanes, duct liners, duct hangers, duct materials, dampers, and ductwork accessories to be utilized. C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 1.4 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION A. Duct Systems Are Classified and Constructed Per the SMACNA Velocity-Pressure Classification as Follows: 1. All ductwork shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of +/- 2 in. WG unless stated otherwise. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-2 West End Heights 2 1.5 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare Minimum 1/4 in. Scale Drawings: 1. Constructed from actual field inspections and measurements so as to assure a complete job. 2. Incorporating dimensions of actual equipment proposed for use on the project. 3. Showing adequate sections, elevations, and plan views and indicating the bottom of ductwork elevations from the finished floor. 4. Indicating all volume dampers, damper access doors, air balance test plugs, and other accessories required for a complete project. B. Call to the attention of the Engineers, immediately, any Major Deviations from the Contract Drawings which must be made. All deviations shall be documented in writing. C. Submit roof, wall and floor opening dimensions and locations shown on shop drawings. D. Submit prints to each Contractor of other trades for review for interferences and coordination with their work. 1.6 DAMPERS A. Provide volume dampers at all air branch connections, outlets, diffusers, grilles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise called for, provide materials in accordance with Exhibit I at the end of this section. B. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. C. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. 2.2 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Transverse and longitudinal duct seams reinforcement shall conform to appropriate tables and figures per SMACNA Velocity -Pressure Classification for duct construction. 1. Transverse joints shall be sealed with duct joint sealants. "Ductmate" or "Nexus" 4-bolt connection systems may be used in lieu of standard construction. 2. Field assembled longitudinal seams shall be sealed with duct sealant. Factory or shop fabricated rolled or machine pressed longitudinal seams does not require sealant. B. Corner closures shall be required as described and illustrated by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. C. Throat radius on all elbows shall not be less than dimension of duct in plane of radius. Where this cannot be maintained, use shorter radius with internal guide vanes, or square elbow with turning vanes. D. Rectangular branch taps shall be made with 45° shoes mechanically bonded and sealed to the duct mains. E. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards for size and system class of ductwork being used. F. Any transformations shall not reduce the ductwork cross-sectional area. Maximum angle in straight duct, 20° for diverging flow and 30° for contraction flow. Transformation from square to round or flat oval seams welded or brazed. 2.3 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTWORK Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-3 West End Heights 3 A. Round Ductwork: 1. Manufactured of galvanized steel ASTM A527, gauges per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, spiral lockseam or longitudinal fusion-welded, as called for in Exhibit I. 2. All spiral duct shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate leakage under pressure for which this system has been designed. Longitudinal seams duct shall have fusion-welded butt seams. No stovepipe will be allowed. 3. Round ductwork fittings: a. All fittings fabricated Per SMACNA Standards for round and flat-oval ductwork. b. Fittings shall have continuous, welded seams. c. 90° tees shall be conical type. 90° tees and 45° laterals up to and including 12 in. diameter tap size shall have a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of any restrictions. d. Round taps off the bottom of rectangular ducts down to diffusers shall be made with a 45° square to round shoe-tap. e. Provide Flexmaster STO series style side takeoff fittings at duct mains for round duct takeoffs. 4. Elbows: a. Diameters 3 in. through 8 in.: Two-section stamped and continuously welded elbows. b. Over 8 in.: Gored construction with seams continuous welded. Less than 35° - two gores, 36° to 71° - three gores, over 71° - five gores. c. Fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter. d. Adjustable elbows may be used for round duct up to 12 in. diameter in Velocity-Pressure Classes 2 in. WG and below. Seal adjustable joints airtight after installation. 5. Joints: a. Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads. b. Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by slip-fit of projecting collar of the fitting into the pipe. c. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar shall be 2 in. up to 36 in. diameter and 4 in. above 36 in. diameter. 2.4 DOMESTIC DRYER VENT A. Aluminum construction of minimum 0.013 inches thickness or 26 ga. Shall meet the requirements of SMACNA’s HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible. B. Minimum 4” diameter with smooth interior finish. C. Flexible connection to dryer shall be UL 2158A Listed and labeled. Connection shall be made with worm drive clamp. Maximum length is 8’-0”. D. Joints shall be sealed with pressure sensitive tape listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181 or UL 181-B FX or mastic listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181 B-M. E. 90° elbows shall be “Dryer-Ell” as manufactured by In-O-Vate Technologies or similar. F. Termination types: 1. Wall- backdraft damper, no screen, pest proof, 22 gage galvanized steel, powder coat. Color selected and approved by Architect. a. Basis of Design: DryerWallVent as manufactured by In-O-Vate Technologies Inc. 2. Roof- non-restrictive airflow design, 28 gage galvanized steel, pest proof, no screen, backdraft damper. Color and finish selected and approved by Architect. a. Basis of Design: DryerJack Model DJK486 as manufactured by In-O-Vate technologies Inc. G. Fire rated enclosure system Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-4 West End Heights 4 1. Dryer vent ductwork that penetrates any fire rated assembly shall be provided with a fire rated ductwork enclosure system in accordance with an appropriate Through Penetration Fire Stop System as allowed by the assembly’s UL Classification. Duct wrap shall provide an F and T rating not less than the Assembly. Wrap shall be UL Listed for the application in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479. 2. Basis of Design: FireMaster DryerWrap as manufactured by Morgan Thermal Ceramics. 2.5 DUCTWORK SEALING A. SMACNA Duct Sealing Classification Shall Be Used for Duct Systems Using the Following Criteria: 1. Seal Class A, shall include transverse and longitudinal joints and grommets at damper shafts Velocity-Pressure Classes above 2 in. WG 2. Seal Class B, shall include transverse and field constructed longitudinal joints - Velocity-Pressure Classes 2 in. WG and below. B. All Ductwork Sealant shall be Hardcast "Iron Grip" for square and rectangular duct. Sealant shall be Hardcast "DT5300" with "RTA-50" for round and rectangular duct. 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Standard Type: 1. Provided in all square or rectangular elbows as shown on contract drawings and details. Vanes for ducts with areas greater than 100 sq. in. shall be "double" type having dimensions and spacing as detailed. 2. Make: Elgen, or contractor fabricated. 2.7 DAMPERS IN DUCTWORK A. Manual Volume Dampers: Constructed per SMACNA, one gauge heavier than duct material, securely fastened to 3/8 in. sq., cold rolled steel operator rod. Provide multiblade dampers above 12 in. duct diameter in width or depth. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Pottorff. e. Ruskin Company. B. Life Safety Dampers: See "Life Safety Dampers" Section. C. Automatic Air Dampers: Low-leakage rating and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. Multiple blade with opposed blade configuration. Blade axles ½” diameter. Blade edging shall be closed cell neoprene. Damper construction shall be equal to or better than the parent ductwork 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Pottorff d. Ruskin Company D. Self-Operating Backdraft: 26 gauge aluminum blades with felted edges and adjustable counterweight. Substantial steel frameworks, 0.05 in. WG maximum pressure drop at rated cfm, guaranteed not to rattle. 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Shall be Constructed In Compliance With NFPA Bulletin 90A, And UL Standard 181, Class I Air Duct: 1. Consisting of corrosion resistant galvanized steel helix mechanically locked to fabric. Fabric to be a trilaminate of aluminum foil, fiberglass and aluminized polyester. 2. Factory applied, 1 in. fiberglass exterior insulation, sheathed in a seamless reinforced exterior vapor barrier jacket. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-5 West End Heights 5 3. Flexible ductwork shall be rated for 12 in. WG positive pressure, 5500 fpm, operating temperature range – 20°F to 250°F. B. Design Equipment: Flexmaster Type 3 (insulated), Flexmaster Type N1-35 (uninsulated). C. Make: Clevaflex, Flexmaster, Genflex, Thermaflex. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO FANS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials for Flexible Connections Shall Be Fire Retardant, Water and Mildew Resistant, and Comply with UL Standard 214: 1. Systems up to 2 in. WG s.p.: approximately 20 oz. of fabric per sq. yd. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventfab". 2. Systems greater than 2 in. WG s.p., and watertight systems: Of heavy glass fabric, double neoprene coated, approximately 30 oz. per sq. yd. Ventfabrics Inc., "Ventglas". 2.10 ACCESS DOORS A. In Ductwork: Shall be double panel construction, 1 in. rigid insulation when in insulated ducts; SMACNA construction, hinged type. Double cam type only acceptable where hinged type will not fit and if approved by engineer. Same metal as duct, or factory fabricated. Doors airtight to fit system static pressure, minimum size 16 in. x 12 in. in ducts 16 in. and wider, duct width x 12 in. for ducts 15 in. wide and smaller. B. When Installed in Kitchen Hood Exhaust Systems: Shall be in accordance with NFPA 96, latest edition, grease tight bolted and flanged. C. When installed in intake or exhaust plenums, access doors will be sized to allow for full access to plenum. D. Door Hardware: 1. Hinges: Minimum of two per door, at least 1-1/2 in. long by 1/8 in. thick, spaced no more than 2 ft. apart and no more than 1/4 of the door size from top to bottom of door. Maximum 4 in. length, 6 ft. door, for larger doors, length equal to 1/12 door height. 2. Latches: As manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc. or equivalent. Metal window sash latch not acceptable. a. Access doors up to 2 in. WG: Ventlok #100/#102. b. Walk-in doors up to 2 in. WG: Ventlok #260. c. Access or walk-in above 2 in. WG: Ventlok #310. E. Make: Air Balance, Ruskin, Ventlok, Elgen. 2.11 INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES A. Suitable For Insertion Pitot Tubes And Other Test Instruments: B. Fabricated with heavy screw cap and gasket. C. With sufficient extension to accommodate exterior insulation where required. D. Make: Ventlok #699. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with project documents, local and state codes and regulations having jurisdiction. B. Install all ductwork concealed and tight to the structure above unless noted otherwise on shop drawings. Fabricate only after the approval of shop drawings, and in locations to avoid interference. Ductwork installed without approved shop drawings, which requires removal/modification and/or reinstallation due to conflicts or improper installation shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-6 West End Heights 6 C. Sizes given on contract drawings are inside dimensions. D. Duct systems shall be free of construction debris. Duct systems shall comply with level “B,” the Intermediate Level, of SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines. The area provided for storage shall be clean, dry, and exposure to dust minimized. The working area shall be clean and dry and protected from the elements. The internal surfaces of the ductwork shall be wiped to remove excess dust immediately prior to installation. Open ends on stored ductwork, completed ductwork, and overnight work-in-progress ductwork shall be sealed. The permanent HVAC systems shall not be operated unless protection from contamination of the air distribution system is provided. E. Provide sheet metal sleeves at each floor and wall duct opening. F. Extend access openings, damper rods and levers, to outside of external insulation make systems airtight. G. No piping, conduit or other obstruction to airflow is permitted in ductwork, except where shown on reviewed shop drawings. Provide with airtight streamlined sleeve, soldered or brazed joint between sleeve and ductwork. Increase size of ductwork to maintain proper cross-sectional area. H. Provide necessary openings, sleeves, hanger inserts, framing, chases, recesses, not provided by other trades. I. Exposed exhaust or return registers and grilles shall be flush with face of duct; exposed supply registers and grilles shall be mounted outside airstream with 45° shoe-tap extension collars or adjustable air extractor. J. Provide sleeves for ducts passing through walls or floors. Use 14 gauge sleeve with framing through structural surfaces; 18 gauge sheet metal for other cases. Set sleeves 4 in. above finished floor in Mechanical Rooms, seal watertight to floor. 3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide Flexible Connections for the Intake and Discharge Connections of Duct Connected to Fans and Air Handling Equipment: 1. Round connections made with adhesive and metal drawbands with ends tightly bolted. 2. Rectangular connections made with material securely held in grooved seam between flanges, tightly clipped or riveted on 6 in. centers. B. Connections made with a minimum of 2 in. space between duct and equipment collars, installed in line, and with 1 in. excess material folded so as not to interfere with airflow through connection. 3.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Use for supply duct only, duct under negative pressure (return and exhaust) shall not be ducted using flexible ductwork. B. No joints in flexible ductwork are permitted. C. Duct slid on depth of collar and 2 in. on duct end and secured with sheet metal screws and drawband, Wraplock 5900. D. For round-to-oval connections, provide round-oval flexible adapter. E. Maximum length 48 in. F. Maximum one 90° angle bend from ductwork to outlet. Remove excess lengths of flexible ductwork. G. Duct slid on depth of collar and 2 in. on duct end and secured with sheet metal screws and drawband, Wraplock 5900. 3.4 TURNING VANES A. Install in square or rectangular elbows. B. Use large size vanes, 2-1/4 in. spacing when ducts are 20 in. or wider. C. Secure vane runners to duct with spot welding, riveting or sheet metal screws. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-7 West End Heights 7 D. When Installing In Ductwork With Internal Insulation: 1. Install runners in ductwork inside insulation and bolt through insulation and duct sides, welding bolts to insure rigid installation. Provide build-outs for duct Velocity-Pressure classes above 2 in. WG 3.5 INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES A. Locate in The Following Locations: 1. Downstream of fan discharge 2. Downstream of ventilation duct balancing damper 3. Upstream of fan inlet. 3.6 CLEANING DUCTWORK AFTER INSTALLATION A. Clean rubbish and dirt from system before fans are turned on. B. Keep openings closed during this construction period. C. Pay damages resulting from dirt blown on painted or other finished surfaces. D. Repair or replace damaged fan wheels, dampers, or other system parts damaged as a result of dirt. E. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt-free. 3.7 INSTALLATION ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTWORK A. Use factory fabricated couplings for joints. B. After the joint is slipped together, sheet metal screws are placed 1/2 in. from the joint bead for mechanical strength. C. Sealer is applied to the outside of the joint and covering the screw heads. D. Flanged joints shall be made with neoprene rubber gaskets. E. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt-free. F. Ensure that ductwork is installed and cleaned in accordance with SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines Level B- Intermediate Level. 3.8 TEST OF DUCTWORK A. Conduct duct leakage tests per SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual", latest edition. When leakage above stated limits occurs, ascertain location of leaks and repair as required. Repeat tests as required to obtain allowable leakage rates. Prepare a report similar to that suggested by SMACNA and submit for review. Duct testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner's Representative. The following ductwork shall be tested. 1. Ventilation system supply ductwork from unit discharge to FCU inlet. B. Ductwork not formally tested for leakage shall be checked and guaranteed to meet standards of SMACNA Seal and Leakage Classifications (seal Class A- 2 in. WG and above, seal Class B - up to 2 in. WG). Air balancing and testing shall be used to determine satisfactory operation of duct systems. Balancing reports indicating excessive leakage amounts shall be required to rebuild, repair or seal ductwork having excessive leakage. 3.9 DAMPERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide dampers necessary to permit proper balancing of air quantities. Comply with code requirements for smoke and fire control. Prevent introduction of uncontrolled outside air into building through roof and wall openings. B. Provide manual dampers with handle actuator standoffs to clear and duct insulation. Dampers must be able to operate without damaging duct insulation. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-8 West End Heights 8 C. When dampers are installed in acoustically lined ductwork, install with insulated "build-outs" per SMACNA. D. Install life safety dampers in accordance with "Life Safety Dampers" Section and applicable codes. E. Install automatic air dampers and gravity backdraft dampers per the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install dampers in an accessible location. F. Adjust backdraft damper counter weights as required given field conditions. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-9 West End Heights 9 3.10 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide as required for maintenance and service access at: 1. Control dampers 2. Damper motors 3. Fire dampers for replacement of fire damper link 4. Smoke detectors 5. Control instruments 6. Fan bearings 7. Both inlet and outlet of terminal heating and/or cooling coils 8. Intake or exhaust plenums 9. Any other equipment requiring periodic inspection or service, complete with angle iron frame. B. Provide service openings in accordance and as required by NFPA 96 at 20 ft. intervals along horizontal ducts and at each vertical riser for kitchen hood exhaust. 3.11 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide per SMACNA, same material as duct. Hanger bands to extend down sides and turn under bottom 2 in. Minimum two metal screws per hanger. Angle iron on larger duct. Spaced per building structural system but not greater than 8 ft. Provide extra support angles as required. 3.12 AIR AND WATERTIGHT METAL WORK A. Where water or snow may accumulate and ductwork or where odors or corrosive gasses may collect, ductwork and plenums shall be made watertight by soldering, brazing or welding of joints. Grade ducts down toward waste points and/or toward louvers. Provide valve and drain piping from low point to waste point. 1. VRP and DOAS unit intake and exhaust plenums. 2. Dryer exhaust ductwork. B. Test for Watertightness: Before concealment, apply water by hose to check for leaks, witnessed by Owner's Representative. 3.13 ACOUSTIC-THERMAL DUCT LINING A. Where called for, increase metal duct dimensions to accommodate lining. Adhere lining to interior sides of duct; minimum 50% coverage of Benjamin Foster 85-20 fire retardant adhesive, UL approved. Stapling method of attaching will not be permitted. Mechanical fasteners shall not pierce the sheet metal. Install fasteners with spacing as per SMACNA Standards. B. Abutting edges of acoustic linings shall be sealed with a fire-resistant neoprene coating, and exposed edges of acoustic linings shall be installed with sheet metal nosings to prevent erosion. C. Lining shall not impart odor to the air, delaminate or be loosened by the airstream under normal operating conditions. Lining that is damaged during fabrication or shipment shall not be installed. D. Duct linings shall be interrupted at the area of operation of a fire damper at a minimum of 6 inches upstream and a minimum of 6 inches downstream of electric resistance and fuel burning heaters in a duct system. E. Where a duct liner has been interrupted, a duct covering of equal thermal performance shall be installed. 3.14 SMOKE DETECTION A. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division 26 "Electrical". This Contractor shall install detectors located in ductwork. Clearly indicate locations of smoke detectors on the sheet metal shop drawings. B. Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate minimum duct size required with Division 26 "Electrical". Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-10 West End Heights 10 3.15 DOMESTIC DRYER VENT A. Dryer vents shall be installed in strict conformance with the requirements of Section 504 Clothes Dryer Exhaust of the Mechanical Code of New York State. B. Utilize extra-long radius 90° elbows wherever possible to allow for proper air venting. C. The entire exhaust system shall be supported and secured in place. D. The maximum length of a clothes dryer exhaust duct shall not exceed 25 feet (7620 mm) from the dryer location to the outlet terminal. The maximum length of the duct shall be reduced 21/2 feet (762 mm) for each 45° (0.79 rad) bend and 5 feet (1524 mm) for each 90° (1.6 rad) bend. The maximum length of the exhaust duct does not include the transition duct. E. The male end of the duct at overlapped duct joints shall extend in the direction of airflow. F. Each vertical riser shall be provided with a means for cleanout. G. Install tape and mastic per the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with the UL Listing. H. Ducts that exhaust clothes dryers shall not penetrate or be located within any fireblocking, draftstopping or any wall, floor/ceiling or other assembly required by the Building Code of New York State to be fire-resistance rated, unless such duct is constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum of the thickness specified in Section 603.4 and the fire-resistance rating is maintained in accordance with the Building Code of New York State. Fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers and any similar devices that will obstruct the exhaust flow, shall be prohibited in clothes dryer exhaust ducts. I. Install fire rated duct wrap in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Coordinate this work with the requirements of the UL Assembly and the Through Penetration Fire Stop System. Provide all tape, mastic, sealants, fire rated caulking per the manufacturer’s installation instructions. J. Provide flexible transition duct at connection to dryer. Coordinate installation of dryer with General Contractor. Dryer equipment shall be by others. HVAC Contractor to provide final connection to equipment. K. All roof and wall terminations shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. Coordinate cutting, patching, flashing, and weather-proofing requirements. Coordinate exact location of building penetrations with General Contractor prior to work. Lakeview Health Services Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction 233100-11 West End Heights 11 EXHIBIT I - DUCTWORK MATERIALS SERVICE MATERIAL SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Supply, return, vent, relief, and exhaust Lock forming quality, galvanized steel ASTM 525 Joints and features as called for. Domestic Dryer Vent Aluminum No sheet metal screws Air plenums at wall, intake or exhaust Type 304 stainless steel or galvanized steel Silicon seal, braze or weld water and air tight. SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 2 Accessories, dampers and air turns Same or better as parent duct Field constructed apparatus casings Galvanized steel ASTM 525 NOTES FOR EXHIBIT I: NOTE 1: Wall plenums that are likely to see moisture collection due to rain or snow are to be provided with a sloped floor and trapped drain to indirect waste connection. NOTE 2: Wall plenums greater than 4 feet wide are to have 16 gauge floor, reinforced to support maintenance or service personnel. END OF SECTION 233100 Lakeview Health Services Life Safety Dampers 233300-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 233300 – LIFE SAFETY DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Types, schedule of sizes, locations, and installation arrangements of all dampers. B. Manufacturer’s UL listed installation details for each mounting arrangement. C. Schedule of duct connection types for each installation. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Manual for each type of damper and installation application. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide Work in accordance with latest requirements of the New York State Building Code, NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, NFPA 101 and UL 555 (Latest Edition), UL 555S (Latest Edition), UL 555C (Latest Edition). B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. C. All dampers shall be Underwriter's Laboratories classified. D. All Dampers shall be rated for protection at 350°F. and shall be Leakage Class I, unless specifically stated otherwise. E. Smoke dampers and operator assemblies shall be Underwriter's Laboratories classified as an assembly. F. Ceiling radiation dampers shall be listed in accordance with the architects rated assembly (UL 555C unless otherwise indicated) and installed per manufacturer’s installation requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE DAMPERS A. Type “B” or “C” curtain type damper of galvanized steel (stainless steel for corrosive fume exhaust) construction with fusible link, roll formed frame and stainless steel spring negator. UL listed and labeled. 1. 80% free area for velocities up to 2000 fpm; 100% free area with welded head for velocities above 2000 fpm. 2. Square, rectangular, round or oval duct connection as required by duct connections. 3. 1-1/2 hour rated dampers for two-hour rated walls. Three-hour rated dampers for three and 4 hour walls. 4. Equipped with sleeve and slip joint connection or field installed sleeve and slip joint connection. See detail sheet on Contract Drawings. 5. Static damper for systems in which fan will turn off during fire (i.e. automatic fan shutdown). Dynamic damper for systems in which fan continues to operate during fire. 6. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. B. Design Equipment: Pottorff Model VFD-10-B or VFD-10-C (static) Pottorff Model VFD-10D-B or VFD-10D-C (dynamic) C. Make: Greenheck, Nailor, Pottorff, Ruskin. Lakeview Health Services Life Safety Dampers 233300-2 West End Heights 2 2.2 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Airfoil multi-blade type damper of galvanized steel construction suitable for installation in air systems up to 3000 fpm and 4 in. s.p. Silicone blade end seals and stainless steel bearings. UL 555S listed and labeled. Frame thickness 13 gauge minimum. 1. UL listed 120 volt electric motor operator. Operator to be mounted outside of the air stream. 2. Square or rectangular as required. Duct transitions for dampers in round or oval ducts. 3. Class I leak rating of 8.0 cfm/ft2 at 4 in. w.g. 4. Maximum temperature: 350 deg F. B. Design Equipment: Pottorff SD-151. C. Make: Greenheck, Pottorff, Ruskin. 2.3 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Airfoil multi-blade type damper of aluminum construction suitable for installation in air systems up to 3,000 fpm and 4 in. s.p. UL listed fusible link. Frame thickness 13 gauge minimum. 1. UL listed 120 volt electric motor operator. Operator to be mounted outside of the air stream. 2. 1 ½ hour minimum fire resistance rating. 3. Square, rectangular or round as required. Duct transitions for dampers in oval ducts. 4. Class I leak rating of 4.0 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. w.g. B. Design Equipment: Pottorff FSD-151. C. Make: Greenheck, Pottorff, Ruskin. 2.4 FIRE DOORS A. Fire doors shall be designed specifically for application in ducts or in fire wall openings for air handling systems and shall bear an Underwriters' Laboratories fire door label for a three-hour rating (Class A opening). B. Design Equipment: Air Balance "Fire/Seal Type 319." C. Make: Air Balance, Duro, Pottorff, Prefco, Cesco. 2.5 CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS A. General Requirements: 1. Labeled according to UL 555C by an NRTL. 2. Comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." B. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction. C. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation. D. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated; fusible links. E. Damper shall match specific horizontal assembly system. F. Fire Rating: 1 hour. G. Design Equipment: As required by the listing of the UL Assembly. No exceptions. If assembly listing does not call for specific make and model then provide damper with UL 555C listing and label to comply with the 2010 Mechanical Code of New York State. H. Make: Greenheck, Nailor, Pottorff, Ruskin. Lakeview Health Services Life Safety Dampers 233300-3 West End Heights 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS A. Provide fire dampers in floor openings, openings in 2-hour fire partitions and barriers, and penetrations of one-hour rated walls which are used for air transfer only, and not ducted, and as required by envelope penetrations to UL listed construction assemblies. B. Provide fire dampers as required by the 2016 Mechanical Code of New York State Section 607.5. C. Provide smoke dampers as called for in penetrations of smoke barriers. D. Provide ceiling radiation dampers as called for in Membrane Penetrations as allowed by Section 607.6.2 of the 2016 Mechanical Code of New York State. E. Provide ceiling radiation dampers as called for by 1-hour fire rated horizontal assembly listings. A. Provide fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire-smoke dampers, or ceiling radiation dampers where additionally called for on drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide sleeves, angles, and access doors for installation in accordance requirements of NFPA, UL, and damper manufacturer. Provide sheet metal access doors in ductwork for dampers and accessories. Provide ceiling or wall access doors for dampers and accessories as required to allow for required access to the damper. B. Provide fire caulk around smoke dampers as required by Specification Section 230010- Basic Mechanical Requirements. C. Do not install intumescent fire caulk around fire dampers. The expansion of the caulk can rack the damper and prevent proper operation. D. Division 26 "Electric" will provide signal wiring and power wiring for smoke dampers. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division 26 "Electric". Install detectors located in ductwork. Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. E. Coordinate minimum duct size and length required with Division 26 "Electric". F. Provide insulation end seal fittings for double wall ductwork where same connects to damper assembly. G. Provide thermal blanket in accordance to NFPA requirements at diffusers, register and grille penetrations of fire rated ceilings where fire dampers are required. H. Access doors shall be installed in the ductwork to provide access to the fusible link for servicing and/or replacement. Install in accordance with UL and the manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall certify that dampers are accessible for servicing, are installed properly, and are operational. Submit three copies of signed certification to the Owner's Representative for review. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide damper tags and chart. 1. Fasten tag to ductwork adjacent to the dampers. 2. Number each damper and make chart listing. a. Number b. Location c. Air system in which they are installed. 3. Submit three copies of chart to the Owner's Representative for review. Lakeview Health Services Life Safety Dampers 233300-4 West End Heights 4 3.5 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals for owner use. B. Furnish fusible links, quantity equal to 10% of amount installed. END OF SECTION 233300 Lakeview Health Services Fans 233400-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 233400 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include all fans, motors, drives, outlet terminations, speed controllers, and accessories. B. Include all fan curves and fan operating point. C. Include certified fan sound power ratings. D. Warranty information. E. Include wiring diagrams and controls connections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Capacity, size and arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component parts and accessories shall be provided as called for or scheduled. B. All ratings shall be made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Guaranteed full capacity delivery through duct systems finally installed and under conditions listed. Fans shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. Fans shall comply with UL 705. Fans for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762. D. The manufacturer shall guarantee sound-power level ratings not exceeding those of the design equipment. All equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced to acceptable tolerances with weights permanently fastened. Fan wheels shall be rebalanced in the field, if necessary. E. Pressure Classification: Maximum Total Sp Class Up to 3-3/4 in. WG-STD I Up to 6-3/4 in. WG-STD II Up to 12-3/4 in. WG-STD III F. Motors: 1. Motors shall be furnished with each fan of sizes scheduled. All belt-driven fan motors shall be mounted on either an adjustable slide base or a pivoting base. G. Drive Systems: 1. Provide fans with belt or direct drive systems as scheduled. V-belt drives as recommended by drive manufacturer, unless otherwise specified or scheduled. a. Size drive for 200% of motor rating, when motor is 10 hp and larger, 150% of motor horsepower, other applications. b. Motors 5 hp and larger shall be provided with a minimum of two matched belts. All belt sets shall be matched. c. Cast iron or cast steel pulleys. d. Provide a belt and shaft guards for each driven device. Provide openings in both the motor and fan sections of the guard so that the motor and fan speeds can be checked without removing the belt guard. H. Motor Pulleys: Lakeview Health Services Fans 233400-2 West End Heights 2 1. Adjustable type to produce 15% speed change above and below scheduled fan speed. 2. 5 hp and smaller: "A" section, 2.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. 3. 7-1/2 hp to 20 hp: "B" section, 4.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. 4. 25 hp and larger: "C" section, 7.0 in. minimum pitch diameter. 5. Drive ratio not over 4:1. 6. Vibration isolation for units shall be furnished by fan manufacturer unless otherwise noted. Where spring vibration isolators are used, they shall be guided spring type. I. EC Motors: 1. Electronically Commutated Motor a. Motor enclosures: Open type b. Motor to be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Examples of unacceptable motors are: Shaded Pole, Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC), Split Phase, Capacitor Start and 3 phase induction type motors. c. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and prewired to the specific voltage and phase. d. Internal motor circuitry to convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the motor e. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal. f. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. The warranty of this equipment is to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at the Manufacturers option when returned to Manufacturer, transportation prepaid 2. Motor Warranty is warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by us prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Acoustically insulated housing constructed of heavy gauge steel, phosphatized and finished with baked enamel. Provide with adjustable mounting brackets. Permanently lubricated motor mounted on resilient rubber. Integral junction box with factory wired disconnect switch. B. Backdraft damper at fan discharge. C. Aluminum or plastic inlet grille. D. Straight through airflow, with inlet and outlet duct collars (without ceiling inlet grille) where called for or shown on Contract Drawings. E. Provide with factory mounted and wired variable speed control switch. F. Wall cap air terminal and LED light accessory as called for. G. Design Equipment: Panasonic. H. Acceptable Make: Delta Breez, Greenheck, Panasonic, Twin City. Lakeview Health Services Fans 233400-3 West End Heights 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All fans shall meet the intent of the system performance requirements. C. Provide necessary supporting ironwork for equipment as detailed on the contract drawings. D. Provide field wiring for motorized dampers. E. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. G. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230060 "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Disable automatic control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 7. Verify proper fan wheel rotation. 8. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic control operators. 9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. C. Adjust fan speed controller as required to achieve design airflow. D. Lubricate bearings as required. Lakeview Health Services Fans 233400-4 West End Heights 4 END OF SECTION 233400 Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Packaged Terminal Heat Pump 233610-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 233610 – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Packaged terminal heat pump units, louvers, plenums, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, including attachments to other work, flashing, and sealant installation. B. Detail assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of exterior wall openings. C. Include full-size isometric details of exterior louver face, showing the following: 1. Anchorage 2. Flashing and drainage 3. Louver interfaces with exterior materials. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Shall comply with New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. AHRI Standard 210/240 tested and labeled. ETL tested and labeled. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide minimum 1 year parts warranty. B. Provide minimum 5 year refrigeration system warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT PACKAGED VERTICAL TERMINAL HEAT PUMP A. General Construction: 1. Factory assembled, piped, wired, and fully charged with R410A. 2. Designed to be inserted into factory supplied weather-resistant adjustable wall plenum. Plenum shall be black in color. Plenum shall be shipped with protective weatherboard for use prior to final installation of unit and louver. 3. Powder coated cabinet made of minimum 20 gauge steel cabinet with ¼ inch closed cell flexible elastomeric foam insulation in the evaporator section and glass fiber insulation in the condenser section. 4. Gasket joint between wall plenum and unit. B. Architectural Louvers: 1. Shipped separately 2. Fabricated from extruded anodized aluminum. 3. Horizontal blade louvers in 30 degree blade angle. 4. Custom colors and finishes shall be selected and approved by architect. C. Refrigerant System: 1. Hermetically sealed. 2. DC inverter variable speed compressor. 3. External rubber in shear vibration isolators. 4. Coils copper tubes and aluminum fins. 5. Secondary overflow to the outside of building. Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Packaged Terminal Heat Pump 233610-2 West End Heights 2 6. Suction line insulation. D. Air handling section: 1. ECM fan motor. 2. Backward inclined fan wheel 3. Vertical airflow 4. Rectangular duct collar. E. Fans: 1. Polymeric fan, fan shroud. F. Ventilation: 1. Unit shall have capability to provide 35-70 CFM of conditioned outdoor air to the space continuously. 2. Auxiliary fans to ensure positive ventilation. 3. MERV 8 outdoor air filters. G. Controls: 1. Controlled by manufacturer supplied wall-mounted controller. 2. Upon unit failure, unit shall operate autonomously to factory default settings. 3. Unit shall modulate compressor capacity and fan speed to optimally match space load. 4. Wall control shall measure space humidity and temperature, and then configure unit to maintain space temperature and humidity. 5. Unit shall be provided with permanently wired with a quick disconnect supplied by the installing contractor. 6. Emergency heat override switch is provided to enable resistance strip heaters in case of heat pump failure. 7. Provide unit with diagnostic tools for service. H. Corrosion protection 1. Corrosion resistant coatings 2. Outside coil coating shall consist of hydrophilic-coated fins. I. Accessories: 1. Fused disconnect switch. 2. MERV 8 filters. 3. Architectural grille. 4. Hard wire kit. 5. Drain kit. 6. Subbase. 7. Wall sleeve. 8. Wall controller 9. Sound dampening return access panel and hinge. 10. Electric heating coil. J. Design Equipment: Friedrich. K. Make: Friedrich, Carrier, McQuay, Trane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS A. Install in strict accordance to manufacturer's instructions. B. Complete service shall be supplied for one year from date of final acceptance including trouble shooting, parts and labor. C. Mount at height as called for; provide additional support to assure rigid installation. Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Packaged Terminal Heat Pump 233610-3 West End Heights 3 D. Field Wiring: 1. Provide necessary field wiring in accordance with NEC. E. Provide insulation in wall sections around sleeve. F. Seal and caulk around entire perimeter both inside and out between wall sleeve and wall section to meet or exceed EnergyStar testing standards. END OF SECTION 233610 Lakeview Health Services Registers and Diffusers 233700-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 233700 - REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers. Submit room schedule listing size, throw, direction of throw, Noise Criteria (NC) value, accessories, finish, material type, and color chart. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Each manufacturer shall check noise level ratings for registers and diffusers to ensure that the sizes selected will not exceed an NC value of 25; notify Owner's Representative of problems prior to shop drawing submittal. B. Pressure drop, air flow and noise criteria selection are based on design equipment. Manufacturers not submitting design equipment must provide written certification in the front of submittal that equipment submitted has been checked against and performs equal to the design equipment. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. General: 1. A register is defined as a grille plus a volume damper. 2. Registers shall be installed "sight-proof" where possible, i.e., high wall register with horizontal blades inclined up, or along a wall with blades facing the wall. 3. Borders and frames shall be of same material as register face unless specified otherwise. B. Mounting Frames: 1. Provide with screw holes in register face punched and countersunk at factory, and mounting frame drilled and tapped to suit. Sponge rubber gasket between frame and wall or ceiling for all surface mounted frames. 2. Frame shall be overlap type and shall be suitable for type of ceiling where register is to be installed. C. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart) etched and lacquer, natural anodized, as scheduled. D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted. E. Make: Anemostat, Krueger, Titus, Price 1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR DIFFUSERS A. General: 1. Provide four-way blow unless otherwise noted. 2. Where manufacturer's size recommendations require duct sizes or connections differing from design Contractor shall provide at no change in Contract price. 3. Suitable for recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide square to round neck transitions as required. 5. Provide sponge rubber gasket for all surface mounted frames. B. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart), etched and lacquer, natural anodized, as scheduled. 2. Frame style shall be suitable for type of ceiling in which diffuser is to be installed. Lakeview Health Services Registers and Diffusers 233700-2 West End Heights 2 C. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted D. Make: Anemostat, Krueger, Titus, Price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AS SCHEDULED. 2.2 REGISTER AND GRILLE TYPES A. Type A - (exhaust and return registers): 1. Steel construction with 18 gauge frame and blades, with horizontal bars on a 3/4 in. spacing set at 35o fixed deflection. 2. Key operated opposed blade damper. 3. 1-1/4 in. wide flange. 4. The blades shall be parallel to long dimension. 5. Model: Titus 350-RL. 2.3 DIFFUSER TYPES A. Type 1 - (square face type): 1. Steel 22 gauge construction with round neck. 2. Directional flow pattern as indicated. 3. Frame suitable for ceiling type. 4. 1-3/4 in. deep inlet collar for duct connection. 5. Panel size 24" x 24". 6. Model: Titus TMS. B. Type 2 - (supply air register): 1. Steel 20 gauge frame construction with double deflection capability and the front blades shall be parallel to the long dimension. Solid extruded aluminum air foil blades mounted in friction pivots for individual blade adjustment, spaced on 3/4 in. centers. 2. Key operated opposed blade damper which shall assure even air distribution of air across the grille face as well as volume control. 3. 1-1/4 in. wide flange with sponge rubber gasket. 4. Model: Titus 300-RL. C. Type 3 & 4 - (linear diffuser): 1. Adjustable 180o pattern controllers to change both direction and volume at discharge air. 2. Multiple 1 in. slots and lengths as scheduled. 3. Border types shall be suitable for ceiling. 4. Extruded aluminum frames with black 16 gauge steel pattern controllers. 5. Provide uninsulated plenum. 6. Model: Titus TBD-80 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rough-in or install per reflected ceiling plan or in locations instructed by Owner's Representative. B. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. C. When registers, grilles, and diffusers are installed prior to the completion protect inlet and outlets with plastic shrink wrap to prevent damage and dust intrusion into the ductwork systems. Lakeview Health Services Registers and Diffusers 233700-3 West End Heights 3 D. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in layin ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location E. For units indicated to be installed in Drywall, provide accessories such as mud/trim ring for proper installation as required. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions. F. Provide approved air extractors behind all duct mounted supply registers in exposed ductwork. G. When the final connection to an exhaust or return grille is made, a 12 in. minimum height plenum box must be supplied to all grilles. Plenum dimensions shall match grille size. H. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. I. Clean all registers, grilles, and diffusers immediately prior to turn over of HVAC systems. END OF SECTION 233700 Lakeview Health Services Unit Heaters and Cabinet Unit Heaters (Hydronic and Electric) 235510-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 235510 - UNIT HEATERS AND CABINET UNIT HEATERS (HYDRONIC AND ELECTRIC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation and related work as shown on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Free from expansion and contraction noises and strains. Fan speed shown on Schedule shall not be exceeded. Each equipment factory-boxed and tagged by room number. Cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters shall have baked enamel finish with color selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Rating in accordance with standard test codes adopted jointly by IUGA and ASHRAE. 2.2 UNIT HEATERS A. General: 1. Wall hung or ceiling suspended. 2. Access for servicing the heating element, motors, and controls. 3. Horizontal discharge units with adjustable horizontal and/or vertical outlet vanes. 4. Vertical units with adjustable outlet louvers or diffusers. B. Fan And Motor: 1. Statically and dynamically balanced. 2. Motor shall be totally enclosed and designed for continuous operation. Lubrication shall be sealed-in, permanent type. 3. Wall mounted line voltage thermostat. C. Heating Element (Electric): 1. Nickel-chrome wire embedded in refractory encased in steel sheath with spiral wound steel fins. 2. Each element protected from overheating with high temperature limit switch of automatic reset, snap-action thermostat type. 3. Supporting brackets attached to back to provide longitudinal movement for expansion and contraction. 4. Magnetic contactors and other control devices to operate at 120 volt line voltage. Include manual disconnect switch, and transformer to provide 120 volt for controls and if necessary, for fan motor. 5. Fan delay switch to dissipate coil heat after element de-energized. D. Electric: 1. Design Equipment: Q-Mark. 2. Acceptable Makes: Berko, Markel, Q-Mark. 2.3 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. General: 1. Rough-in dimensions must not exceed those of design equipment. Lakeview Health Services Unit Heaters and Cabinet Unit Heaters (Hydronic and Electric) 235510-2 West End Heights 2 B. Cabinet: 1. Front and exposed parts, 16 gauge furniture steel, all others, 18 gauge steel. 2. Fronts shall be removable for access to interior parts. 3. Recessed or semi-recessed equipment to have four-side overlap, trim strips not acceptable. C. Fan And Motor: 1. Fans, forward curved, centrifugal type, direct drive from motor shafts. 2. Driven by totally enclosed motor with overload protection and lifetime lubrication. a. Integral manual motor starter. 3. Shall be quiet in operation, not to exceed 45 db measured 5 ft. away, at high speed. 4. Three speed accessible fan selector switch. 5. Integral line voltage thermostats. 6. Permanent filter. D. Heating Element (Electric): 1. Nickel-chrome steel resistance wire embedded in refractory enclosed in steel sheath with spiral wound fins. 2. High limit automatic reset cutout switch wired in series with each element to protect from overheating and located in discharge airstream. 3. Fan delay switch to keep fan in operation until heat in element is dissipated after element is de-energized. 4. Built-in transformer to convert line voltage current to fan, and control voltage if different from line voltage. E. Electric: 1. Design equipment: Q-Mark. 2. Make: Airtherm, Berko, Markel, Q-Mark, Trane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Report untrue walls before installation. Report cases where clearance below suspended heaters is less than 7-1/2 ft. Provide clearance for piping and conduit. Support units independent of piping. Support units from building structure, with screws or bolts, no nailing allowed. Be responsible for proper location and size of recesses. Coordinate installation of recessed or semi-recessed equipment in recesses. Provide framing in recess and shims. Use sponge rubber gasket air-seal between front enclosure and wall. END OF SECTION 235510 Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 233743 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Packaged rooftop unit and accessories. Complete installation drawings, installation and start-up instructions, wiring diagrams, and instruction manuals from manufacturer of equipment. B. Fan curves. C. Energy recovery wheel performance data. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions and details. E. Roof curb product data. F. Discharge Air Temperature Controller product data. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Complete unit and accessories shall comply with the New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236, Safety Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment. B. Unit and refrigeration system shall comply with ASHRAE 15, Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. Unit shall be certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47b/CSA 2.3b and ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6, Safety Standard Gas-Fired Furnaces. D. Unit Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) shall be equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. E. Unit shall be safety certified by ETL and be ETL US and ETL Canada listed. Unit nameplate shall include the ETL/ETL Canada label. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a “parts only” warranty for a period of 12 months from the date of equipment startup or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever is less. Warranty shall cover material and workmanship that prove defective, within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer’s written instructions for installation, operation and maintenance have been followed. Warranty excludes parts associated with routine maintenance, such as belts and air filters. B. Inverter duty or digital scroll compressor shall come standard with a 5 year non-prorated warranty C. Stainless steel heat exchanger shall have a minimum 15 year non-prorated warranty D. Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product. Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-2 West End Heights 2 B. Startup must be done by trained personnel experienced with rooftop equipment. C. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters and remote controls are in place, bearings lubricated, and manufacturers’ installation instructions have been followed. 1.7 CLARIFICATIONS A. Digital scroll compressors are acceptable alternatives to inverter duty compressors. B. Factory supplied variable frequency drives are acceptable alternatives to EC fan motors. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT A. General: 1. Each unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application and include a weatherproof cabinet. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one piece. Packaged units shall be shipped fully charged with R-410A Refrigerant and oil. 2. Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coil, filters, supply fan, dampers, air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, gas heaters, exhaust fan, energy recovery wheel, and unit controls. 3. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the controls compartment’s literature pocket. 4. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel. 5. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system components and electrical and controls components. 6. Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet. 7. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit. 8. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. 9. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. B. Construction: 1. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall galvanized steel, impact resistant, insulated with core of rigid polyurethane foam. 2. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 7. Foam insulation shall have a minimum thickness of 1” and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F. 3. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel. 4. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Cabinet leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. Continuous sealing shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air leakage. Refrigerant piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to reduce air leakage. 5. Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall have rain break overhangs above access doors. 6. Service doors shall be provided on the fan section, filter section, control panel section, and heating vestibule in order to provide user access to unit components. All service access doors shall be mounted on multiple, stainless steel hinges and shall be secured by a latch system. Removable service panels secured by multiple mechanical fasteners are not acceptable. 7. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 750 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117 test procedure. 8. The unit base shall overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and shall seat on the roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weather tight seal. Lifting brackets shall be provided on the unit base to accept cable or chain hooks for rigging the equipment. Fork lift slots shall be provided in the unit base. Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-3 West End Heights 3 C. Supply Fan Section: 1. Supply fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. 2. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with aluminum fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The supply fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. 3. Fan assembly shall be a slide out assembly for servicing and maintenance. 4. All fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a final trim balance, prior to shipment. 5. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency. 6. The supply fan shall be capable of airflow modulation from 30% to 100% of the scheduled designed airflow. The fan shall not operate in a state of surge at any point within the modulation range. D. Relief Air Section: 1. Provide with barometric damper for building air pressure control. E. Heating Section: 1. Natural Gas Heat: a. The rooftop unit shall include a natural gas heating section. The gas furnace design shall be a natural gas fired heating module factory installed downstream of the supply air fan in the heat section. The indirect fired heating module shall be a tubular design with in-shot gas burners. b. The heat exchanger tubes shall be stainless steel. The module shall be complete with a furnace controller and control valve capable of 5:1 modulation. c. The module shall have an induced draft fan that will maintain a negative pressure in the heat exchanger tubes for the removal of the flue gases. d. Each burner module shall have two flame roll-out safety protection switches and a high temperature limit switch that will shut the gas valve off upon detection of improper burner manifold operation. The induced draft fan shall have an airflow safety switch that will prevent the heating module from turning on in the event of no airflow in the flue chamber. e. The factory-installed unit control system shall control the gas heat module. Field installed heating modules shall require a field ETL certification. The manufacturer’s rooftop unit ETL certification shall cover the complete unit including the gas heating modules. f. Gas train in compliance with IRI requirements. Suitable for 7 in. w.c. gas pressure upstream of the regulator. F. DX Cooling Coil Section: 1. Compressors: a. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit(s) which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity. b. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with a 5 minute off, delay timer to prevent compressor short cycling. c. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with an adjustable, 20 second delay timer to prevent multiple capacity stages from starting all at once. d. The unit shall have scroll compressors. One of the compressors shall be an inverter compressor providing proportional control. The unit controller shall control the speed and staging of the compressors to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. e. Pressure transducers shall be provided for the suction pressure and head pressure. Temperature sensor shall be provided for the suction temperature and the refrigerant discharge temperature of the compressors. All of the above devices shall be an input to the unit controller and the values be displayed at the unit controller. 2. Condensers: a. Outdoor coils shall have seamless copper tubes, mechanically bonded into aluminum plate-type fins. The fins shall have fully drawn collars to completely cover the tubes. A sub-cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main outdoor air coil. Each outdoor air coil shall be factory leak tested with highpressure air under water. b. Outdoor coils shall be protected from incidental contact to coil fins by a coil guard. Coil guard shall be constructed of cross wire welded steel with PVC coating Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-4 West End Heights 4 c. Fan motors shall be an ECM, Electronically Commutated Motor for proportional control. The unit controller shall proportionally control the speed of the condenser fan motors to maintain proper head pressure of the refrigerant circuit from ambient condition of 0~125°F. Mechanical cooling shall be provided to 0º F. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. d. Each circuit shall be dehydrated and factory charged with Refrigerant R-410A and oil. G. Controls: 1. Provide a complete integrated microprocessor based control system to control all unit functions including temperature and dehumidification control, scheduling, monitoring, unit safety protection, including compressor minimum run and minimum off times, and diagnostics. This system shall consist of all required temperature and humidity sensors, pressure sensors, controller and keypad/display operator interface. All MCBs and sensors shall be factory mounted, wired and tested. 2. The stand-alone controllers shall not be dependent on communications with any on-site or remote PC or master control panel for proper unit operation. The microprocessor shall maintain existing set points and operate standalone if the unit loses either direct connect or network communications. The microprocessor memory shall be protected from voltage fluctuations as well as any extended power failures. All factory and user set schedules and control points shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even during extended power shutdowns. 3. The control system shall permit starting and stopping of the unit locally or remotely. The control system shall be capable of providing a remote alarm indication. The unit control system shall provide for outside air damper actuation, emergency shutdown, remote heat enable/disable, remote cool enable/disable, heat indication, cool indication, and fan operation. 4. All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from transients or incorrect voltages. All field wiring shall be terminated at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip. 5. The controller shall have a built-in time schedule. The schedule shall be programmable from the unit keypad interface. The schedule shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to insure that it is not lost during a power failure. There shall be one start/stop per day and a separate holiday schedule. The controller shall accept up to sixteen holidays each with up to a 5-day duration. 6. The keypad interface shall allow convenient navigation and access to all control functions. The unit keypad/display character format shall be 4 lines x 20 characters. All control settings shall be password protected against unauthorized changes. For ease of service, the display format shall be English language readout. Coded formats with look-up tables will not be accepted. The user interaction with the display shall provide the following information as a minimum: a. Discharge air temperature b. Outdoor air temperature c. Compressor suction temperature and pressure d. Compressor head pressure and temperature e. Expansion valve position f. Condenser fan speed g. Inverter compressor speed h. Dirty filter indication i. Airflow verification j. Cooling status k. Cooling status/capacity l. Unit status m. All time schedules n. Active alarms w/time and date o. Previous alarms with time and date p. Supply fan speed q. System operating hours: 1) Fan 2) Cooling 3) Individual compressor 4) Heating 7. The user interaction with the keypad shall provide the following: a. Controls mode: 1) Off manual 2) Auto 3) Heat/cool Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-5 West End Heights 5 4) Dehumidify and reheat 5) Fan only b. Occupancy mode: 1) Auto 2) Occupied 3) Unoccupied c. Cooling and heating change-over temperature with deadband d. Supply air discharge air temperature (DAT) e. Relief Air Dehumidification setpoint f. Temperature alarm limits 1) High supply air temperature 2) Low supply air temperature 3) High return air temperature g. Lockout control for compressors h. Compressor interstage timers i. Current time and date j. Occupied/unoccupied time schedule k. Adjustable set points H. Filters: 1. Unit shall be provided with a draw-through filter section. The filter rack shall be designed to accept a 2” pre-filter and a 4” final filter. The unit design shall have a hinged access door for the filter section. The manufacturer shall ship the rooftop unit with 2” construction filters. The contractor shall furnish and install, at building occupancy, the final set of filters per the contract documents. a. MERV Rating for pre-Filters: 6 b. MERV Rating for final filters: 8 I. Hot Gas Reheat: 1. Unit shall be equipped with a fully modulating hot gas reheat coil with hot gas coming from the unit condenser. 2. Hot gas reheat coil shall be a Micro Channel design. The aluminum tube shall be a micro channel design with high efficiency aluminum fins. Fins shall be brazed to the tubing for a direct bond. The capacity of the reheat coil shall allow for a 20°F temperature rise at all operating conditions. 3. The modulating hot gas reheat systems shall allow for independent control of the cooling coil leaving air temperature and the reheat coil leaving air temperature. The cooling coil and reheat coil leaving air temperature set points shall be adjustable through the unit controller. During the dehumidification cycle the unit shall be capable of 100% of the cooling capacity. The hot gas reheat coil shall provide discharge temperature control within +/- 2°F. 4. Each coil shall be factory leak tested with high-pressure air under water. J. Electrical: 1. Unit wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electrical components provided with the unit shall be number and color-coded and labeled according to the electrical diagram provided for easy identification. The unit shall be provided with a factory wired weatherproof control panel. Unit shall have a single point power terminal block for main power connection. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Branch short circuit protection, 115-volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system switches, and a high temperature sensor shall also be provided with the unit. Each compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and inherent thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance. Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-6 West End Heights 6 K. Accessories: 1. Variable Air Volume Unit Control: a. The unit controller shall proportionally control the Electronically Commutated Motor (ECM) on the supply fans. The supply fan shall be manually set during balancing to provide the required ventilation airflow 2. Roof Curb: Prefabricated 14-gauge galvanized steel, roof mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly on the roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The curb shall be a minimum of 14" high and include a nominal 2" x 4" wood nailing strip. Gaskets shall be provided for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb. 3. A single non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided for disconnecting electrical power at the unit. Disconnect switches shall be mounted internally to the control panel and operated by an externally mounted handle. 4. A field wired GFI receptacle shall be unit mounted in the factory. 5. Unit shall include supply air smoke detectors, photoelectric type factory mounted. Wire to shut down the control circuit thus shutting the unit off. Relay contacts shall be provided to interface the detectors with the fire alarm system. Restart of the unit shall be manual. L. Design Equipment: Mammoth YMDA. M. Make: AAON, Daikin, Greenheck, Mammoth, Trane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: 1. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. 2. Accept products on site and inspect for damage. 3. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. B. Examination: 1. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of DOAS. 2. Examine roughing-in for DOAS to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation. 3. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where DOAS will be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. General: 1. Install discharge air controller in ventilation supply air drop and associated wiring. 2. Provide for wall and/or roof openings and framing as called for. Set and secure curb to pan, and unit to curb. Shim roof curb level. 3. Install unit in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Connections: 1. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with p-trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain. 2. Install piping adjacent to DOAS to allow service and maintenance. 3. Gas Piping: Coordinate gas piping connections with the Division 22 Contractor. 4. Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: a. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. b. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. c. Connect supply ducts to DOAS with flexible duct connectors. Lakeview Health Services Packaged Rooftop Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems 233743-7 West End Heights 7 d. Install relief-air duct continuously through roof structure. 5. Provide all inter-connecting control wiring. E. Start-Up: 1. Arrange to have equipment manufacturer's technician to verify installation for compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Arrange to have equipment manufacturer's technician perform start-up of equipment, instruct Owner's Representative in the proper operation of the equipment. F. Owner Training: 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DOAS. G. Cleaning and Adjusting: 1. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during otherthan-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 2. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing DOAS and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. Furnish a spare set of new filter to owner at time of turnover. END OF SECTION 237433 Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems 238160-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 238160 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Variable refrigerant volume inverter heat pump air conditioning system and accessories. B. Job specific manufacturers wiring diagrams. C. Manufacturer's refrigerant piping diagrams showing all REFNET joints, pipe sizes and accessories. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide units to fit intended use and location as indicated: 1. Capacity, size and arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component parts and accessories as scheduled and/or as necessary to obtain required results and allow for proper maintenance. 2. Each size fan to be supplied shall be tested in the manufacturer's laboratory under simulated installation conditions. Ratings based on test, not on interpolated or extrapolated calculation. 3. Guaranteed sound-power level ratings not exceeding those of design equipment. B. Motors: 1. Furnished by equipment manufacturer. 2. Horsepower as scheduled and type as required for each location and service. 1.4 WARRANTY A. The units shall have a manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The units shall have a limited labor warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The compressors shall have a warranty of six (6) years from date of installation. During the stated period, should any part fail due to defects in material and workmanship, it shall be repaired or replaced at the discretion of Manufacturer according to Manufacturer’s Terms and Conditions. B. Installation Requirements: 1. The system must be installed by a factory trained contractor/dealer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTDOOR UNIT A. General: The outdoor unit is designed specifically for use with VRF series components. The operating range in cooling will be 23°F DB ~ 115°F DB. The operating range in heating will be 0°F DB – 64°F DB / -5°F WB – 60°F WB. 1. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of a scroll compressor, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valve, solenoid valves, 4 way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports, liquid receivers and accumulators. 2. Both liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units. 3. The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from left, right, rear or bottom. 4. The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit will be 50% to 130%. 5. The sound pressure dB(A) at rated conditions shall be a value of 58 decibels at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at further reduced noise during night time. 6. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for re-programming. Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems 238160-2 West End Heights 2 7. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side installation with minimum spacing. 8. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various fan coil units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 1 hour after start of operation and then every 6 hours of operation. 9. The outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. The outdoor unit shall be completely weather proof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish. C. Fan: 1. The condensing unit shall consist of one propeller type, direct-drive fan 750 W motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC inverter. 2. The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG with available by field setting switch to a maximum 0.24 in. WG pressure. 3. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with an air flow of 7,400 cfm. 4. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted. 5. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts. D. Condenser Coil: 1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchanger, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coils shall be complete with corrosion treatment of an acrylic resin type. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns. E. Compressor: 1. The scroll compressor shall be variable speed (PAM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. 2. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly efficient reluctance DC, hermetically sealed scroll type with a maximum speed of 6,480 rpm. 3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start. 4. The capacity control range shall be 14% to 100%, with 29 individual capacity steps. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type. 5. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector. 6. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an oil balancing circuit. 7. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. F. Electrical: 1. The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a voltage range from 187 volts to 253 volts. 2. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be 16VDC non-shielded 2 conductor cable. 3. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring operation. Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems 238160-3 West End Heights 3 4. The control wiring lengths are: Outdoor to Indoor Unit Outdoor to Central Controller Indoor Unit to Remote Control Control Wiring Length 6,665 3,330 1,665 Wire Type 2 wire, non-polarity, non-shielded G. Control: 1. Unit shall be capable of interfacing with connection to building energy management system. Provide with BACnet interface gateway. 2.2 INDOOR UNITS A. General: Indoor units shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, or ceiling mounted cassette type operable with R410A refrigerant and equipped with an electronic expansion valve. The unit shall be constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available from 12,000 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h capacities. Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain room temperature within 1°F. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while inhibiting changes in room temperature when used with remote control BRC1C71. Included as standard equipment, a long-life filter that is mold resistant and a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 9-13/16" from the drain pipe opening. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 35 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed 5 feet below the suction grille. B. Indoor Unit: 1. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable external static pressure switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 9-13/16” of lift. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60H z. 7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. 8. Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service and maintenance. C. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. D. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.07 to 0.30 HP. 3. The air flow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. E. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by a fiberglass pleated MERV 6 air filter. Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems 238160-4 West End Heights 4 F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 9-13/16” lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by the manufacturer to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2.3 CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS A. Individual Zone Controller: 1. The controller shall be able to control 1 group (maximum of 16 fan coil units) and shall be able to function as follows: a. The controller shall have a self diagnosis function that constantly monitors the system for malfunctions (total of 80 components). b. The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and condition. c. An LCD digital display will allow the temperature to be set in 1°F units. d. The controller shall be equipped with a thermostat sensor in the remote controller making possible more comfortable room temperature control. e. The controller shall monitor room temperature and preset temperature by microcomputer and can select cool/heat operation mode automatically. f. The controller shall allow the user to select cool / heat / fan operation mode with indoor remote controller of choice without using the cool / heat selector. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Outdoor unit multiconnection piping kit, if applicable. B. REFNET branch piping kits. C. Seven day programmable controllers 2.5 DESIGN EQUIPMENT A. LG MultiV 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MAKE A. Mitsubishi, Fujitsu, LG. Lakeview Health Services Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems 238160-5 West End Heights 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and so as to be compatible with intent of the respective system performance requirements. B. Hang indoor fan coil units from spring type vibration isolators in strict accordance with manufacturer's instruction. C. Provide non-invasive rooftop support stand of sufficient size for outdoor condensing unit. D. Pipe coil indirect waste to nearest floor drain and/or as indicated on Plans. Equip with P-trap, if applicable. E. Provide refrigerant piping, REFNET branch joints, and accessories to outdoor heat recovery unit, indoor fan coils and branch boxes as recommended by equipment manufacturer and in accordance with specifications for piping systems and accessories. F. Provide all interconnecting control wiring between outdoor condensing unit, indoor fan coil units, central system controller, branch boxes, and wired remote controllers. END OF SECTION 238160 Lakeview Health Services Electric Fin Radiation 238236-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 238236 – ELECTRIC FIN TUBE RADIATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings on fin tube radiators and accessories with color selection chart. Clearly indicate which equipment is being submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment shall be free from expansion, noises and strains. Exposed parts to be cleaned and parkerized or phosphate coated before prime coating or baked enameling. Finish colors as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors during the submittal process. Factory-boxed and tagged by room numbers. Verify at site, the space available for each piece of equipment. Top of heating unit enclosures shall be at least 1 in. below top of windowsill. Bottom of heating unit enclosures, unless otherwise called for, approximately 6 in. above floor and above the base molding. Refer to Owner's representative at once, any correction, discrepancy or suggested change in size or location. This Contractor responsible for proper location and size of recesses. Coordinate dimensions from floor to bottom of recess with other trades. Provide framing in recess and shims, if required. B. Units shall be UL labeled. 2.2 FIN RADIATION A. General Requirements: 1. Complete enclosure, continuous supporting channel backplate, heating element, hangers and accessories, as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Enclosures to run from wall-to-wall unless otherwise called. Provide necessary corner pieces, end caps, column enclosures, butt trims, wall sleeves, with access doors. Do not leave any enclosure installed without an end trim piece. B. Heating Element: 1. Steel sheath covering electrical resistance heating element with aluminum fins. 2. Tube mechanically expanded to fin collars for permanent metal to metal contact. C. Enclosures: 1. Front Cover a. Minimum 14 gauge one piece construction of steel or extruded aluminum. b. Sloping top with stamped grille. c. Edges and corners rounded. Individual sections not over 6 ft. No exposed areas shall have sharp edges. d. Mechanically fastened to wall bracket. e. Continuous interlocking slip joint fit between adjoining covers. Finish shall match enclosure fronts along entire male and female sides. f. Enclosure accessories shall fit tight to wall at sides, in back plate at top and extend back and mechanically screw to wall at bottom. 2. Support channel full backplate and supports: a. Minimum 14 gauge securely fasten to wall. b. No sheet metal screws or other fastening devices shall be visible. 3. Top of cover rest on backplate only and not between wall and backplate. Lakeview Health Services Electric Fin Radiation 238236-2 West End Heights 2 4. Accessories: a. Integral disconnect switch b. Integral line voltage thermostat or 24 V interface relay, as scheduled D. Design Equipment: Qmark. E. Make: Chromalox, Indeeco, Markel, Qmark, or Vulcan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Each unit isolated with rated disconnect switch to permit servicing. B. Contractor responsible for correct end connections and arrangements. C. Enclosures fastened to structure with screws or bolts, no nailing allowed. D. Install units level and plumb E. Joins sections with splice plates or filler pieces where required to provide continuous enclosure. END OF SECTION 238290 Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections and Instructions to Bidders apply to this section and all other sections of Division 26. 1.2 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES A. Electronic CAD Floor Plan Backgrounds 1. Turner Engineering, PC cannot provide architectural floor plan backgrounds. Contact the project architect to obtain CAD files of the building floor plans. B. Electronic Engineering CAD Files 1. If engineering CAD files are required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide these files at a cost of $50 per drawing. These files will be provided in .dwg or .dgn format, as requested. Title blocks and all reference to Turner Engineering, PC, the architect, or other design professionals will be removed from these electronic files. 2. If the engineering REVIT model is required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide this file at a cost of $50. The REVIT model will be provide in our current version of REVIT Turner Engineering is using. Title blocks and all reference to Turner Engineering, PC, the architect, or other design professionals shall be removed from the electronic REVIT model. 3. To request these files, go to www.turnerengineering.com. There is an electronic request form under the “Contractor Requests” heading. Fill out this form and submit the form electronically. Send a check made out to “Turner Engineering, PC” for the proper amount. When we have received the completed form and the check, we will e-mail the electronic files to the e-mail address indicated on the form. 4. Turner Engineering, PC does not assume any responsibility for the electronic files, nor for the accuracy of the floor plans. C. Electronic Engineering Portable Document Files (pdf) 1. If Portable Document Files (.pdf) are required, Turner Engineering, PC can provide these files at a cost of $50 per drawing. 2. To request these files, please go to www.turnerengineering.com. There is an electronic request form under the “Contractor Requests” heading. Fill out this form and submit the form electronically. Send a check made out to “Turner Engineering, PC” for the proper amount. When we have received the completed form and the check, we will e-mail the electronic files to the e-mail address indicated on the form. 3. Turner Engineering, PC does not assume any responsibility for the electronic files, nor for the accuracy of the floor plans. 1.3 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the 2014 National Electric Code and with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. B. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project: 1. Building Code of New York State 2. New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. 3. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations. 4. New York State Department of Health. 5. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act - OSHA. 6. Life Safety Codes, NFPA 101. 7. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. 8. Local Codes and Ordinances for the City of Ithaca 9. NEMA Standards. 10. Underwriters Laboratory. 11. Factory Mutual or other Insurance Carrier. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-2 West End Heights 2 1.4 LICENSING & PERMITS A. The Contractor shall hold a license to perform the work as issued by the City of Ithaca 1. Apply for and obtain all required permits and inspections, include costs for all fees and charges. B. Provide certificate of inspection from New York Board of Fire Underwriters for all electrical work prior to acceptance of each phase. C. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. 1.5 GLOSSARY ACI American Concrete Institute ADA American Disabilities Act AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental Conservation UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration ISO International Standards Organization 1.6 DEFINITIONS As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution specified/shown in the contract documents. Code Requirements Minimum requirements. Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade. Design Equipment Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Design Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Exposed Work not identified as concealed. Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certification by Owner's Representative. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-3 West End Heights 3 Furnished by Others Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install. Inspection Visual observations by Owner's Site Representative. Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency. Make Refer to the article, BASIS OF DESIGN. Provide Furnish and install Relocate Disassemble, disconnect and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test and install ready for use. Replace Remove and provide new item. Review A general contractual conformance check of specified products. Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation. Satisfactory As specified in contract documents. Site Representative Construction Manager or Owner's Inspector at the work site. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional definitions. 1.7 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment". Other manufacturers are listed as acceptable and may be submitted. If the Contractor elects to use one of the listed makes other than "design equipment," submit detailed drawings, indicating proposed installation of equipment. Show maintenance clearances, service removal space required and other pertinent revisions to the design arrangement. If the submitted equipment is larger than the design make equipment, verify the equipment will physically fit in the space provided and make all necessary modifications required to install the equipment. Make required changes in the work of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Provide larger electrical feeders, circuit breakers, equipment, additional control devices and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation and assume responsibility for proper location of roughing and connections by other trades. Remove and replace door frames, access doors, walls ceilings or floors required to install other than design make equipment. If revised arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design equipment" item which conforms to contract documents. 1.8 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors and the panelboard or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly engaged in the production of factory fabricated systems and equipment whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. B. Suppliers of equipment must have factory trained and authorized personnel for the service of all equipment provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of quality, function, dimensions and appearance that must be met by any proposed substitution. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-4 West End Heights 4 B. Proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each request shall include the name of the proposed material equipment being substituted, cut sheets, installation drawings, performance and test data and warranties. At that time the equipment or will be evaluated and if determined to be acceptable an Addendum will be issued to all bidders. C. Requests for substitution shall be made only by a Bidder. Requests for substitution from sales representatives, vendors or suppliers are not acceptable. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected. B. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the specifications. C. Catalog numbers are sometimes listed in the specifications to aid selection of the equipment and are for reference only. All equipment must meet the written description of the specification, including all required accessories, power supplies, hardware, etc, regardless of the listed catalog number. Errors in the catalog number do not alleviate the responsibility of providing the proper equipment required for the installation and field conditions. 2.3 U.L. LISTING A. Equipment shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), or other approved agency-listing/label. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with the National Electric Code and listed by U.L. 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals for all equipment and materials to be furnished and installed as part of this contract. B. Submittals shall be provided with a cover sheet indicating the date, project name, prime contractor; description of equipment submitted. C. All products specified in individual Division 26 section shall be submitted at the same time. Incomplete or un-organized submittals will not be accepted. Unreadable submittals will be rejected. D. Where equipment submitted deviates from the equipment specified, provide a letter listing all equipment deviations. E. The Contractor is responsible for confirming all quantities, electrical connections, working clearances and dimensions, determining methods of construction and coordinating the work with other trades. F. Corrections or comments made on the Submittals during the review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Before construction work commences, Contractors for all trades shall submit Coordination Drawings in the form of electronic coordination drawings. Coordination Drawings are required throughout all areas for all trades. B. Mechanical Equipment Rooms and other critical spaces shall be drawn early in the Coordination Drawing process, simultaneous with all other congested areas. C. Coordination drawings shall identify and show resolutions of physical conflicts, including but not limited to service clearances, access paths, and clearance to combustibles. D. Prepare Coordination Drawings As Follows: 1. The Coordination Drawings base file shall consist of the 3-D architectural and structural models depicting all architectural and structural elements that require coordination. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-5 West End Heights 5 2. The HVAC Contract shall create and prepare the base model file and then include all equipment, ductwork, piping, and diffusers, clearly indicating structure and equipment mounting heights and required working clearances. a. Submissions of HVAC Contract Documents with contractor title block shall be considered incomplete and will not be acceptable. b. The HVAC Contract shall visit the site to survey and record architectural and structural elements as required. 3. The HVAC Contract shall coordinate with the building owner’s shell contractor to obtain locations of the new roof drain piping for Phase 1. The HVAC contract shall coordinate with the building owner’s contractors to obtain required information and make modifications as required. 4. Upon completion of the HVAC Coordination Drawings file, the HVAC Contract shall provide an electronic 3-D model with hard copy prints to all major trades' Contractors. 5. The Plumbing and Fire Protection Contracts shall then add all equipment, piping, and sprinkler heads, documenting any conflicts with HVAC ductwork and piping. The P/FP Coordination drawings shall indicate equipment mounting heights and all required pitch. 6. The Electrical Contract shall then add all switchgear, panels, motor control centers, luminaires, cable tray, feeders, and other large equipment, including working clearances that must be coordinated with the other trades. 7. Relocate ductwork, diffusers, and sprinklers as required to coordinate with the structure, ceiling grid, and luminaires. 8. Where conflicts occur, relocate equipment and provide offsets and transitions as required to permit equipment to fit in the space. Clearly document modifications on the drawings for review by the Architect and Engineer. As part of the Contract, relocate equipment, ductwork, piping, etc as required for proper coordination. 9. The Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Contracts shall indicate areas of conflict and suggested resolutions. 10. Upon completion, submit Coordination Drawings to the Architect and Engineer for review. Submission shall be in the form of color coded paper prints at a scale of not less than ¼”-1’. Prints shall contain the Contractor’s titleblock, date, and drawing number. a. The HVAC Contract shall review the project phasing plan produced by the Architect. The Coordination Drawings submittal shall be organized and submitted by Phase clearly indicating tie-in locations, valves, unions, flanges, dampers, and accessories required to accommodate system extension. 3.2 ROUGH-IN A. Due to small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact location and elevations at work site prior to any rough in work. DO NOT SCALE PLANS. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or submittal information require a significant change to the original documents, contact the Owner’s Representative for approval before proceeding. B. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections. 1. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact routing of all duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural drawings. Verify with Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostats, fixture and switch mounting heights and equipment mounting heights. 2. Mechanical and electrical drawings show general equipment arrangement for diffusers, grilles, registers, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers and other items. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for exact locations of mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment from the Architect and other contractors. Do not rough-in services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. Obtain written authorization from the Owner’s Representative or other contractor for any rough-ins that, due to project schedule, are required before approved coordination drawings are available. Any work installed without written authorization or approved coordination drawings, causing a conflict will be relocated by the contractor at no expense to the Owner. C. Provide code-required clearances at equipment, controllers, motor starters, valves and equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Contractor shall relocate existing work in the way of new construction. Visit the site before bidding to determine scope of work. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-6 West End Heights 6 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment and materials installation with other building components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and locations necessitated by the equipment installed. B. The architect shall control the placement of all wall and ceiling mounted electrical equipment and devices in all rooms, with the exception of mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. When drawing details are not available, consult with the Architects representative for actual location. C. Verify all dimensions with field measurements. D. Arrange for all chases, slots and openings in other building components that are not indicated on drawings, to allow for electrical installations. E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. F. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. H. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer the conflict to the Architect. I. Store materials on dry base, at least 6" above grade. Store so as not to interfere with other work or obstruct access to buildings or facilities. Provide waterproof/windproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Protect against theft or damage from any cause. Replace any items stolen or damaged at no cost to Owner, until substantial completion has been signed off. J. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. K. All tolerances in alignment and leveling and the quality of workmanship for each stage of work shall be as required by the manufacturer and subject to approval by the Owner’s Representative. L. All finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to “as new” condition by touch up or repainting. Any rust shall be removed and primed prior to repainting. M. Workmanship shall be as defined in the “Standard of Installation” published by the National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA). N. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. O. No electrical equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Owner’s Representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. P. All electrical work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. Q. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his approval. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. R. Install access panel or door where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-7 West End Heights 7 3.4 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICES A. Make arrangements with New York State Electric and Gas for electric service to the Owner's distribution equipment. Provide underground electric service as called for and transformers, meter sockets or meter compartments as required by the Utility Company. Coordinate all activities between the Owner and Utility Company. The installation of the electric service shall comply with the published Utility Company standards. PAY ALL UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES. INCLUDE CHARGES IN THE BASE BID. B. Make arrangements with Frontier for telephone service to the Owner's distribution system. Provide services to the buildings as required by the Utility Company. Coordinate all activities between the Owner and Utility Company. The installation of the telephone service shall comply with the published Utility Company standards. PAY ALL UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES. INCLUDE CHARGES IN THE BASE BID. C. Make arrangements with Spectrum for cable television service to the Owner's distribution system. Provide services to the buildings as required by the Utility Company. Coordinate all activities between the Owner and Utility Company. The installation of the CATV service shall comply with the published Utility Company standards. PAY ALL UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES. INCLUDE CHARGES IN THE BASE BID. 3.5 PAINTING A. Provide painting for all cut and patch work required and performed as part of the Division 26 contract that is required in areas outside the area of the painting contract, or for work performed after the painting contract is complete. B. Provide painting required for touch-up of surfaces damaged due to the installation of electrical work. C. Provide painting to repair finish of all electrical equipment damaged during installation. 3.6 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete electrical and control wiring and connections to all electrical equipment. Provide disconnect switch ahead of each piece of equipment as required by the NEC. Ground all equipment in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code. B. Provide all electrical and control wiring, electric equipment, switches, lights, receptacles and connections as required for proper equipment operation of Owner furnished equipment and equipment furnished by other contracts. C. Refer to the manufacturer's drawings and specifications for requirements of special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding and confirm prior to roughing. 3.7 JOBSITE CLEANING A. Maintain a clean job site. Remove all cardboard, packing material, scrap material, etc on a daily basis. B. Provide a dumpster for disposal of all trash generated by the electrical contract. Properly recycle all cardboard. It is acceptable to share a dumpster with other trades. C. Legally dispose of all trash created by the electrical contract. D. At the end of each day, sweep the area where work was performed. 3.8 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove all cardboard and packing material from the site and dispose in dumpsters. B. Thoroughly clean entire installation, including surfaces, panel and switchgear interiors, wiring devices and luminaire interiors, louvers and lenses. C. Remove all protective covers and bags from luminaires and smoke detectors. D. Remove all debris created during construction. E. Remove tools, gang boxes and surplus materials upon substantial completion. Lakeview Health Services Basic Electrical Requirements 260010-8 West End Heights 8 3.9 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to the front-end specifications for the requirements for temporary facilities. 3.10 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. The building will be in use during construction operations. Maintain existing systems in operation within all rooms of building at all times. Refer to the General Conditions for temporary facilities for additional contract requirements. Schedules for various phases of contract work shall be coordinated with all other trades and with Owner's Representative. B. Provide, as part of contract, temporary electrical connections and relocations as required to accomplish the contract work. C. Coordinate all shutdowns with the Owner, Architect and other trades. Provide minimum 5 working days notice of any required shutdowns. Obtain approval in writing from the Owner indicating the date, time, system and location for shutdown of existing electrical facilities or services. 3.11 START UP AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Before acceptance of the work, commission all systems utilizing labor trained in the proper operation of the equipment. Instruct the Owner’s designated personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. B. Obtain written acknowledgment from person instructed. Repeat the instructions as required until the Owner’s Representative is comfortable operating and maintaining the equipment. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for systems until acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. D. Provide operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by the Owner for operating systems and equipment. Mount the instruction in clear plastic holder on or adjacent to the equipment. E. Where supervision by a manufacturer is called for, provide manufacturer’s certified technician or engineer to supervise the startup, testing and adjustment of the equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturers are involved (i.e., variable frequency drive and air handling unit), both manufacturers shall be present at start up. The manufacturer shall provide a written report detailing the testing and start-up including problems that occurred and their method of resolution. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Include one copy each of approved Submittal, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, spare parts lists, as-built drawings and manufacturers instructions. Include typewritten instructions describing equipment, starting/operating procedures, emergency operating instructions, seasonal changeover, freeze protection, precautions and recommended maintenance procedures. Include name, address and telephone number of supplier or manufacturers representative and service agency for all major equipment items. Bind above items in a three ring binder with name of project on the cover. Deliver to Owner's Representative before request for acceptance. 3.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a clean set of marked up as-built documents on the job site and document all variances from the contract documents. B. Prepare record documents in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION 260010 Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this section: 1. Photocells 2. Lighting Control Panel 3. Doorbell System 4. Door Entry System 5. Area of Refuge Intercom 6. Miscellaneous Supports 7. Access Doors and Panels 8. Fire Stopping 9. Boxes and Cabinets 10. Equipment Pads, Bases and Supporting Devices 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for: 1. Photocells 2. Lighting Control Panel 3. Doorbell Systems 4. Door Entry System 5. Area of Refuge Intercom 6. Access Doors and Panels 7. Fire Stopping 8. Boxes and Cabinets 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for the installation and application of joint sealers, flashing, access panels, and cutting and patching. B. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction and details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOCELLS A. 2-wire outdoor photosensor for Blue Box LT Panels B. Operating range 0-1000 fc C. Temperature range: -40-140F D. Mounting 1.2” knockout E. Design Make: Acuity Controls PCELL 2WO BB 2.2 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL A. The lighting control panel interior shall consist of a minimum of four and maximum of sixteen relays, digital time clock, override pushbuttons, and programming pushbuttons. Relays shall be mounted on DIN rails. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-2 West End Heights 2 B. Contactors shall be rated for 480 volts, 20 amperes. C. Clock shall be digital with backlit LCD display, user keypad, and shall provide a minimum of eight channels of time or astronomic control. The time clock shall have the following features: 1. Scheduled On/Off 2. Manual On/Scheduled Off 3. Astronomic or photocell On/Off 4. Astronomic or photocell control with scheduled On/Off 5. Capabilities of programming up to 42 holidays 6. Automatic daylight savings time adjustment 7. Non-volatile memory D. The panel shall accept a minimum of eight low voltage input controls. E. The control panel shall permit interior lights to blink 5 minutes prior to shutting off. F. Enclosure shall be a NEMA 1 enclosure with hinged and lockable cover. G. Panel interior shall be barriered to separate the line voltage and low voltage connections. H. Provide with automatic control switch to remotely override the control panel. I. Design Make: Acuity Controls Blue Box LTD. 2.3 DOORBELL SYSTEM A. Audible Doorbell: 1. Pushbutton: a. Nominal 1 ¼” x 3 ½” pushbutton. b. Surface mounted enclosure, white in color. c. Lighted pushbutton with light source rated for 20,000 hours at 18 volts. d. Screw contacts. e. Design Make: Nutone Model No. RCPB723. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Nutone 2) Broan 3) Approved Equal 2. Chime: a. Nominal 8” x 5 ½” x 2”. b. Two note chime for front door. c. Single note chime for second door. d. 16 VAC. e. White in color. f. Design Make: Nutone Model No. LB12WW. g. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Nutone 2) Broan 3) Approved Equal 3. Transformer: a. 120 volt primary. b. 16 volt secondary. c. 30 VA rated. d. Integral thermal cut-off switch. e. Provide with #22 AWG twin lead chime wire. f. Design Make: Nutone Model No. C907. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-3 West End Heights 3 g. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Nutone 2) Broan 3) Approved Equal B. Audible/Visual Doorbell (For Hearing Impaired Rooms): 1. Pushbutton: a. Low voltage, panel mounted pushbutton with large terminals. b. Provide with illuminated pushbutton. c. 5/8” diameter mounting hole. d. Polished chrome trim. e. Normally open, momentary contacts rated for 0.67 amperes at 24 VAC. f. Provide with stainless steel, pre-drilled cover plate. g. Provide label reading “Hold pushbutton for 5 seconds”. h. Design Make: Edwards Catalog No. 620. Coverplate shall be Edwards Catalog No 147-1. 2. Hearing Impaired Chime/Strobe: a. Wall mounted horn/strobe with high intensity flashing light. b. Horn shall be rated for 82 dBA at 10 feet. c. Strobe shall be rated for 50 candela. d. 175 ma draw at 24 VAC. e. Provide with 2-gang outlet box for installation. f. White in color. g. Flashes for 15 seconds upon activation. h. Design Make: System Sensor Catalog No CHSWL. 3. Transformer: a. 120 VAC primary. b. 24 VAC secondary. c. 30 VA rated. d. Install in a separate outlet box. 2.4 DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS A. Video Entrance Station: 1. Video Entrance Station shall be push to talk, release to listen, with hands free response from the called station. 2. Programmable with alpha-numeric room numbers or names. 3. Panel can store up to 500 tenant names and apartment numbers. 4. Direct digit dialing, alphabetical scrolling, or jump scrolling. 5. Integral camera to show person calling to tenant. 6. Programmable scrolling welcome message, up to 160 characters. 7. 3.5” color LCD screen. 8. Motion sensor to activate LCD screen. 9. Stainless Steel, weather resistant construction. 10. Design Make: Aiphone GT-DM. B. Tenant Station: 1. 3.5” LCD color monitor 2. Pushbutton to initiate speech path. 3. Hands free communication. 4. Wall mount. 5. PTZ control of speaker in the video entrance station. 6. Brightness Control 7. Door release capability. 8. Integral speaker. 9. Call tone volume control 10. Communication volume control 11. White ABS plastic housing. 12. Nominal dimensions: 7.5”w x 5.5“h x 1.25”d. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-4 West End Heights 4 13. Design Make: Aiphone GT-1C. C. Concierge Station 1. Handset for private communication 2. Standard and emergency calls 3. Communicate to Entry and Tenant stations. 4. Visitor Screening 5. Caller ID with Call Back 6. Input for optional doorbell button 7. Wall or desk mount. Wall mount attached to a single gang box. 8. Design Make: Aiphone GT-MK D. Telephone Line Interface 1. Interconnects to the GT series Tenant Station and provides automatic telephone dialing when the tenant is called. 2. Programmed to directly dial a telephone number when called from the GT series Entrance Panel 3. Allows ability to answer Door Entry Calls from the telephone. 4. Allows release of the door through the telephone line. 5. Design Make: Aiphone GT-TLI E. Door Release Relay: 1. Selectively releases one or more doors 2. Relay switching capacity = 1A @ 24V DC or .3A @ 240V AC 3. Nominal Dimensions : 2 ⅛H x 2 ¼”W x 7/8”D 4. Design Make: Aiphone RY-PA F. Power Supplies: 1. Power Source : AC 100V – 240V, 50/60 Hz 2. Nominal Dimensions : 6 9/16”H x 3 9/16”W x 2”D 3. Design Make: Aiphone PS-1820UL a. Output : 18V DC @ 2A 4. Design Make Aiphone PS-1225UL a. Output : 12V DC @ 2.5A 2.5 AREA OF REFUGE INTERCOM A. General 1. Provide an Area of Refuge Intercom system. Call boxes shall be located on each level of each stair tower that does not exit to grade. The base station shall be located in the Manager’s Office. 2. System shall be UL Listed, and meet the requirements of NFPA 101 and the ADAAG. 3. Provide wiring as required by the manufacturer. 4. Provide 3 year parts and labor warrantee. B. Base Station 1. Base station shall be suitable to receive calls from five individual call boxes. 2. Flush mounted enclosure with powder coated finish, hinged cover, and lockable hasp. 3. LED’s to indicate call status. 4. Audible alert tone. 5. Provide with 120 volt power supply with integral battery backup. 6. Design Make: Rath Model 2500-105FM, or approved equal. C. Call Box 1. Flush mounted enclosure with tamper resistant fasteners. 2. Integral mushroom call button and speaker Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-5 West End Heights 5 3. Programmable with up to five emergency numbers. 4. Hands free operation 5. Integral signage 6. Design Make: Rath Model 2100-956SRM, or approved equal D. Power Supply 1. 120 volt input, 24 VAC output, 100 VA. 2. 9 outputs, with up to five call boxes installed per output. 3. Integral surge protection. 4. Integral battery backup. 5. UL Listed. 6. LED power indication 7. Design Make: Rath Model 2500-PWR24 E. Signage 1. Provide all required signage. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide hot-dipped galvanized channel support for support of panels, equipment cabinets, and conduit racks. Provide factory installed mounting holes in the face and sides of the channel as required. B. Provide riser clamps, conduit clamps, clevis hangers, C-clamps, beam clamps, wall brackets, and angle brackets as required. All miscellaneous fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized and designed for use with the channel support system. C. Provide threaded rods as required for installation of channel supports. Provide threaded rods suitable for the loads carried. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube 2. American Electric 3. B-Line 4. Unistrut Diversified Products 5. Cooper Industries 6. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. 7. O/Z Gedney 8. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation 2.7 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Steel access doors and frames shall be factory fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel. Grind all welds smooth. B. Access door frames shall be as follows: 1. 16-gauge steel with 1” wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable masonry anchors for units installed in masonry, pre-cast, and cast-in-place concrete. 2. 16-gauge steel, perforated flanges with bead for gypsum or plaster wall board. 3. 16-gauge steel with galvanized expanded metal lathe and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame for full bed plaster applications. C. Access doors shall be as follows: 1. Provide 14-gauge sheet steel flush panel doors with continuous piano hinge, primed and painted. 2. In fire rated partitions, provide 1 ½ hour rated insulated flush panel doors with continuous piano hinge and self closing mechanism. D. Provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks on all access doors. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-6 West End Heights 6 2.8 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire stopping for openings through fire and smoke rated walls and floor assemblies shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. B. Fire-stopping shall be intumescent to fill any voids created as insulation melts. C. All fire stopping shall be designed for use in the particular application. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. Thomas & Betts - S-100 FS500/600 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty 5. Hilti Firestop Systems 2.9 BOXES AND CABINETS A. Outlet Boxes and Covers: 1. Shall be galvanized steel, not less than 1-1/2" deep, single-gang, two-gang square or octagonal, with knockouts. 2. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. 3. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in Article 370 of the National Electrical Code for the conductors and devices installed. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Steel City b. Raco c. Appleton d. Crouse Hinds B. Non-metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Shall be impact-resistant fiberglass, not less than 1-1/2" deep, single-gang, 2-gang, square or octagonal, with wire entry clamps. 2. UL listed for installation in 2-hour rated walls or ceilings. 3. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in Article 370 of the National Electrical Code for the conductors and devices installed. 4. Design Make: Allied Fiberglassbox Series C. Flush Floor Outlet Boxes: 1. Single Service Floor Boxes: a. Provide flush floor box for power or communications as called for. Boxes shall be suitable for carpet or tile applications. b. Boxes shall be concrete tight galvanized stamped steel, and fully adjustable with interior and exterior leveling screws and with ½”, ¾” and 1" knockouts. c. Provide with cap to prevent ingress of concrete during pour. d. Provide polished brass carpet trim ring. e. Design Make: Hubble f. Box - 3SFBSS g. Carpet Plate – 3SFBCRA (color by Architect) h. Receptacle Faceplate – 3SFBRP 2. Triple Service Floor Boxes: a. Provide flush floor box for power, communications, and data. Box shall be suitable for carpet or tile applications. b. Boxes shall be concrete tight galvanized stamped steel, and fully adjustable with interior and exterior leveling screws and ½”, ¾” and 1” knockouts. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-7 West End Heights 7 c. Provide with cap to prevent ingress of concrete during pour. d. Hinged cover to permit devices to be connected with the cover in the flush position. e. Provide polished brass carpet trim ring. f. Provide with one duplex receptacle and one communications faceplate suitable for voice, data, and sound outlets. g. Design Make: Hubble h. Box - HBLAFB301BASE - (nominal 4" deep) i. Carpet Plate - HBLTCGNT (color by Architect) j. Receptacle Faceplate - HBLST302SGY. k. Device Plate – HBL317SGY D. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. 2. Provide screw-on type covers. 3. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. 4. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, Article 370. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Hoffman b. Keystone c. Or equivalent E. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets: 1. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel with removable endwalls. 2. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, flush or surface type (as indicated) with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges, flush lock, and gray baked enamel finish. 3. Boxes and front shall be U.L. listed and sized for the equipment installed. 4. Provide insulated backboard mounted on inside back wall of cabinet for mounting equipment. 5. Design Make: Square D "Mono-Flat", or approved equal. 2.10 EQUIPMENT PADS, BASES AND SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for floor mounted transformers, switchboards, and switchgear. B. Concrete pads shall be constructed as follows: 1. Scarify existing floor to ensure proper adhesion. 2. Minimum 4” high. 3. Minimum 6” larger than the equipment served in all directions. 4. Minimum 2,500-pound compressive strength at 28 days. 5. Provide 6” square welded wire mesh in the concrete. 6. Trowel concrete smooth and provide broom finish. 7. Provide 1” wide, 45º chamfer on all edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PHOTOCELLS A. Provide photocells as indicated on the plans. B. Wherever possible, install photocell under an eave on the north side of the building, away from sources of artificial light. C. Adjust photocell to turn on and off as directed by the Owner. 3.2 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL A. Install lighting control panel in the location shown on the plans. B. Provide 120 volt control power to the control panel. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-8 West End Heights 8 C. Provide power wiring to the control panel as called for on the plans. D. Provide input devices such as photocells or automatic control switches as required. E. Meet with the owner and review the control system requirements. Provide all required programming of the control system. F. Provide initial system startup and programming. G. Provide a minimum of two hours of training on the use and programming of the lighting control system. 3.3 DOORBELL SYSTEMS A. Install door bell pushbutton on the latch side of the door. Rough in all wiring prior to installation of the final door trim. B. Install the transformer in a metal outlet box. Install in a concealed but accessible location. C. Provide 120 volt wiring to the transformer. D. Provide low voltage wiring from the transformer to the pushbutton and the chime. E. Install hearing impaired strobe in location shown on the plans. Provide all required wiring. Install with center of strobe at 80” AFF. 3.4 DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS A. Install all devices at ADA accessible height. B. Provide all required wiring. Wiring shall be plenum rated or installed in conduit. C. Provide all required hardware, mounting pieces, etc for a complete installation. 3.5 AREA OF REFUGE INTECOM A. Install devices generally where called for. Install at ADA accessible height. B. Provide wiring and telephone cabling as required by the manufacturer. Wiring shall be plenum rated or installed in conduit. C. Provide power supply as required. Coordinate exact location with the owner. D. Provide all required hardware, mounting pieces, etc for a complete installation. 3.6 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Install access doors, sized to permit complete access for any concealed and/or inaccessible junction boxes, control and monitoring devices, duct mounted fire alarm detectors and other electrical equipment requiring access for maintenance or operation. B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 3.7 FIRE STOPPING A. Installation of fire-stopping for openings through fire and smoke rated walls and floor assemblies shall be as follows: 1. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways, cables, wires, and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for dry wall construction. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-9 West End Heights 9 2. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 3. The firestopping used shall permit easy removal or addition of conduits and cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 3.8 BOXES AND CABINETS A. Locations of outlets shown on drawings as approximate. Study architectural, mechanical, plumbing, structural, and submittal drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet to coordinate with all proposed millwork, cabinets, and equipment. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation. B. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed within the same stud cavity without the approval of the Owner's Representative. C. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring devices to be installed. D. Provide mud rings on all flush mounted devices. E. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed with extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2" deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. F. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes having threaded or compression type threadless hubs. G. Exterior boxes shall be cast type with threaded hubs and gasketed cover plates secured by non-ferrous screws. H. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor. Adjust level and tilt as required. Provide floor box trim ring designed for specified floor finish material. I. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, and ductwork. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as required by the National Electrical Code. 3.9 OUTLET BOX ROUGH-IN HEIGHTS: A. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to top of device or outlet box as follows: 1. Toggle switches..................................................................... ..........................................................................48" 2. Receptacle outlets.................................................................................................... .......................................18" 3. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters....................... ...........................................30" 4. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas, mechanical rooms, garages.................................................................48" 5. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, above-grade...............................................................................................24" 6. Telephone outlets, desk top........................ .....................................................................................................18" 7. Telephone outlets, wall mounted............................................................ .........................................................48" 8. T.V. outlet............................................................................................................................ ............................18" 9. Voice/Data outlets……………………………………………………………... ......................................................18” 10. Fire alarm manual station................................ ................................................................................................48" 11. Fire alarm audio/visual........................................................................ .............................................................80" 12. Apartment Loadcenters, to top of the highest circuit breaker...................................................................... .....48" 13. Branch circuit panelboards, to top of backbox.................................................................................................72" 14. Distribution panelboards, to top of backbox.....................................................................................................72" 15. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets..................................... ............................................................................72" 16. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers..................................................... ..................60" 17. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. 3.10 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide steel channels, angles and other materials necessary for the proper support of conduit runs, panelboards, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers, motor starters, pendant-mounted lighting fixtures, etc. Lakeview Health Services Basic Materials and Methods 260100-10 West End Heights 10 B. Panelboards, cabinets, pull boxes, and starters shall be secured to the wall or floor slab. Do not support from conduits. Racks for support of conduit and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by structural supports. 3.11 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide concrete bases for all floor-mounted equipment. B. Concrete shall have 2,500-pound compressive strength. Provide trowel finish and chamfer edges. C. Securely bond pad to floor by scarifying the slab and coating with cement grout. D. Set equipment anchor bolts before pouring concrete. 3.12 FLASHING AND SEALING A. Opening through roofs shall be flashed in manner not to affect roof guarantee or bond. Engage qualified Roofing Contractor, licensed by the Roofing Manufacturer, as part of contract. Provide non-ferrous flashing pieces, skirts, hoods and collars as required to make ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations watertight. Where curbs are required in new roofs, flashing will be done by others. 3.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching required for the installation of electrical equipment as follows: 1. To uncover work for installation of poorly coordinated or ill-timed electrical work. 2. To remove and replace defective work. 3. To remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. To install equipment and materials in existing structures. B. Cut, remove and legally dispose of all electrical equipment, components, and materials as called for and all other items not indicated on plans but made obsolete by the installation of new work. C. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not being removed and maintain temporary. END OF SECTION 260100 Lakeview Health Services Electrical Identification 260510-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260510 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Electrical Tape 2. Thermal Transfer Tape Labels 3. Snap-Around Labels 4. Engraved Labels 5. Warning Signs 6. Underground Utility Warning Tape 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL TAPE A. Colored, adhesive vinyl tape, 3 mil thick, by 1” wide. B. Suitable for electrically insulating live electrical wiring. C. Colored as called for in the specifications, to indicate the conductor voltage and phase. 2.2 THERMAL TRANSFER TAPE LABELS A. Vinyl, self-adhesive labels, created from a hand-held label-making machine with letter and number keys. B. Labels shall be used to label the panel and circuit number on receptacles and switches. C. Lettering shall be minimum 10 point. 2.3 WRITE-ON TAGS A. Polyester tag, minimum 0.015” thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and nylon tie for attachment to a feeder or cable. B. Tag shall be able to be written on with a fine tipped permanent marker. 2.4 SNAP-AROUND LABEL A. Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves. B. Sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable installed upon and to stay in place through friction. 2.5 ENGRAVED LABELS A. Melamine plastic laminate stock, used for panel and equipment labels. B. Engraving stock shall be 3-ply sheet laminated to a contrasting colored Phenolic core. Lakeview Health Services Electrical Identification 260510-2 West End Heights 2 C. Label color-coding shall be as follows: 1. Black label with white letters – Equipment fed from normal power. 2. Red label with white letters – Equipment fed from emergency power. D. Minimum 1/16” thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8” in any direction. E. Minimum 1/8” thick for signs over 20 square inches or 8” in any direction. F. Provide double-backed tape or pop-rivits to secure labels. 2.6 WARNING SIGNS A. Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 1mm galvanized steel backing. B. Provide with colors, legends and letter sizing as required. C. Nominal size: 10” x 14”. D. Grommetted corners for mounting to equipment. 2.7 UNDERGROUND UTILITY WARNING TAPE A. Bright colored, continuously printed, polyethylene tape. B. Minimum 4” wide by 4 mils thick. C. Suitable for direct burial installation. D. Embedded continuous metal strip. E. Printed legend and tape color shall match site utility standards and shall indicate the type of underground utility. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Panelboard Schedules: 1. Provide typed panelboard schedules in all panels, listing the loads connected to each receptacle. 2. Where existing panelboards are modified, update the existing panelboard schedules to reflect the changes. Provide new typed schedules where required. B. Outlet Boxes and Pull Boxes 1. Label the cover of all outlet and pullboxes indicating the panel and circuit breaker fed from. Label all covers with a wide tipped, indelible black marker. 3.2 ELECTRICAL TAPE A. Provide color-coded electrical tape on all branch circuit and feeder conductors. B. Label all conductors at each termination point and in each pullbox, manhole, or vault. C. Electrical tape shall not be necessary where the conductor insulation is continuously colored. D. Refer to Specification Sections 260530 for conductor color coding. Lakeview Health Services Electrical Identification 260510-3 West End Heights 3 3.3 WRITE-ON TAGS A. Provide write-on tags on all feeders, indicating the feeder source, load and feeder name, as indicated on the feeder schedule. 3.4 THERMAL TRANSFER TAPE LABELS A. Provide thermal transfer tape labels on the outside of all receptacle and switch cover plates. Labels shall indicate the panel and circuit breaker the device is fed from. 3.5 SNAP-AROUND LABELS A. Provide snap-around labels on all conduit and cable runs indicating the voltage and type of service. 3.6 ENGRAVED LABELS A. Provide engraved labels on the following equipment: 1. Panelboards 2. Transfer Switches 3. Disconnect Switches 4. Motor Starters and Controllers 5. Power and Lighting Contactors 6. Special Systems Equipment Cabinets (Fire Alarm, etc). B. Engraved, lamicoid labels shall indicate the following; 1. Equipment name 2. Voltage and Phase 3. Source of power, including panel and circuit 4. Branch of power C. Refer to the Panelboard, Electric Equipment and Control, and Feeder Schedules for equipment names. D. Engraved text shall be font type “Helvetica”, with Font height as follows: 1. 3/8” lettering for equipment name designations 2. 3/16” lettering for additional equipment description 3. 1/8” lettering for signs and instructions E. Review draft labels with owner for approval prior to engraving. 3.7 WARNING SIGNS A. Provide warning signs on all low and medium voltage switchgear, transformers, feeders and pullboxes. B. Warning signs shall indicate the voltage and read as directed by the equipment manufacturer, OSHA and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY WARNING TAPE A. Provide underground utility warning tape along the entire run of all underground electrical, telephone, fiberoptic and cable TV ductbanks. B. Install warning tape at 6” below finished grade. END OF SECTION 260510 Lakeview Health Services Grounding 260520-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260520 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a complete grounding system meeting or exceeding the requirements of Article 250 of the latest National Electrical Code. Install all raceway systems, including metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, bus ducts, enclosures and motors, to provide a continuous ground path with the lowest possible impedance. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Conductors 2. Ground Rods 3. Molded Fusion Welds 4. Grounding Bus 5. Hardware 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All grounding systems shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. B. Materials specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. The National Electrical Code, Article 250. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Exposed grounding conductors such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless otherwise called for. B. Conductors shall be copper, as called for in Specification Sections 260530 - Conductors. C. Provide conductors with THHN/THWN insulation. Sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be green in color. Conductor sizes #8 AWG and larger may have green taped bands at each end and in all pullboxes. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Same as for 600-volt conductors. 2.2 GROUND RODS A. Solid copper or copper clad steel cylindrical rods, 5/8 in. minimum diameter, minimum 8 ft. long. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Copperweld or approved equal Lakeview Health Services Grounding 260520-2 West End Heights 2 2.3 CONNECTORS, CLAMPS, TERMINALS A. Provide bronze mechanical connectors and clamps. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Burndy b. Anderson c. T & B d. Penn-Union 2.4 MOLDED FUSION WELDS A. Provide fusion welds designed for size and type of cable, rods, or assembly. Solder prohibited for connections. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Cadweld b. Metalweld c. Thermoweld 2.5 GROUNDING BUS A. Tin Plated Copper Bare annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section. B. Meets standards of TIA/EIA 607. C. Provide insulated stand-offs for busbar isolation. D. Stainless Steel Brackets and fasteners. E. Provide hole pattern as specified on drawings. F. UL and cUL Listed to UL467 and C22.2. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eritech 2. Newton Instruments PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Service Entrance: 1. Solidly ground the electrical service at the service entrance. Provide a grounding electrode conductor from the service entrance ground bus to a minimum of two (2) grounding electrodes, as follows: a. Metal water pipe, ahead of the meter. b. Building steel c. Made grounding electrode grid. 2. For a grounded electric service, solidly connect the grounded (neutral) conductor to the service entrance ground bus. Do NOT make any grounding connections to any grounded conductors on the load side of the service disconnecting means. 3. Provide a bare, copper, #4/0 bonding jumper across the water meter. Lakeview Health Services Grounding 260520-3 West End Heights 3 B. Raceway Systems: 1. All metal supports, cable trays, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panelboards, switchboards, switches, enclosures, starters, controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system. Size the bonding conductor in accordance with NEC Article 250, Table 250-122. 2. Terminate rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets and enclosures tightly with two locknuts and a bushing. 3. Conduit which runs to or from all boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, Table 250-122. Connect the bonding jumper between a grounding type bushing on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure. 4. Provide bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, Table 250-122 for all conduit expansion joints. 5. Provide a grounding conductor in all flexible metallic conduit and liquid-tight conduit, sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, Table 250-122. 6. Provide a grounding conductor in all nonmetallic runs of conduit and raceway, sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, Table 250-122. 7. Provide isolated ground conductors of systems as called for on the plans. C. Ground Grid: 1. Provide 3 ground rods, 8 feet long, driven on 10-foot centers, with top of rod 12 inches below finished grade and located as called for on plans. Refer to the "Made Grounding Electrode Ground Grid" detail on the drawings. 2. Connect with size #4/0 AWG copper conductors as called for. 3. Connecting conductors shall be located within 6 inches of the top of the ground rod. 4. Provide two size #4/0 AWG grounding conductors from the ground grid to the service entrance ground bus. 5. Provide one size #4/0 AWG grounding conductor from the ground grid or service entrance ground bus to the service side of nearest metallic cold water and/or sprinkler main. 6. Provide one size #4/0 AWG grounding conductor from the ground grid or service entrance ground bus to building steel. 7. Provide molded fusion welds for all below grade connections. Molds shall be new, unused and shall be replaced when worn or broken. D. Secondary Electrical Systems: 1. Solidly ground all transformer neutral conductors and enclosures to building steel, or a cold water pipe 1” or larger in size as called for in Table 250-122 of the National Electrical Code. 2. Provide an equipment grounding conductor from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the serving panelboard, switchboard, or transformer. Do not splice equipment grounding conductors. 3. Provide an equipment grounding conductors from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the serving panelboard, switchboard, transformer, or switchgear. 4. The grounding conductors contained in the interstices of interlocked armor cable shall be connected to the ground bus at every equipment termination point and to each other and to system ground; ground at every splice location. E. Communications and Equipment Rooms: 1. Provide pre-drilled tin plated copper bus bar, with standard NEMA 2-bolt hole sizing and spacing for connectors being used, in all communication equipment rooms. 2. All connectors and clamps shall be mechanical type made of silicon bronze. 3. Terminals shall be solderless compression type, copper long-barrel NEMA two bolt. 4. Provide #6 AWG conductor from the bus bar to the electrical system equipment ground. 5. Bond the ground bar in the main communication equipment room to dedicated communications equipment panelboard where applicable. 6. Bond metallic equipment racks and cabinets to the ground bar. 7. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the ground bar in communications rooms and spaces. F. Power Company Requirements: 1. Size #4/0 grounding conductor from service entrance equipment to meter panel. 2. One 5/8” diameter by 8 long ground rod and size #4/0 AWG grounding conductor at each riser pole. 3. Meet power company requirements. G. Emergency Generators: Lakeview Health Services Grounding 260520-4 West End Heights 4 1. Do NOT ground the generator neutral conductor at the generator. 2. Circuit the generator neutral to the secondary electrical distribution system neutral. 3. Connect the generator neutral system neutral so as not to negate any ground fault protective equipment applied to distribution system. 4. Connect the generator frames to system ground with conductor as sized in accordance with NEC Table 250122. END OF SECTION 260520 Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Conductors 260530-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260530 – LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Low Voltage Conductors 2. Type AC Armored Cable 3. Type MC Metal Clad Cable 4. Type NM and NMC Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable 5. Type SE Service Entrance Cable 6. Low Voltage Connectors and Terminations 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS A. Feeder, branch circuit, and control wiring: 1. Annealed Copper, 98% conductivity. 2. Minimum wire size: a. #12 AWG for branch circuits b. #14 AWG for control and signal circuits 3. All wire shall be stranded. 4. 600-volt insulation rating. 5. Insulation shall be dual rated THHN/THWN, thermal plastic with nylon jacket, suitable for wet or dry locations. 6. 90 C maximum operating temperature rating. B. Flexible cords and cables shall be Type "SO" or "SJO". C. Color Coding: 1. All wiring shall be color coded according to the following schedule: VOLTAGE PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C PHASE NEUTRAL 208Y/120 3 Black Red Blue White 2. All grounding conductors shall be green. 3. #6 AWG and smaller shall have insulation continuously colored as called for above. 4. #4 AWG and larger may by identified using a minimum 3” tape band. 5. Color-code all conductors at all pullboxes, enclosures and terminations. 6. Switched legs shall be identified with the same color insulation as the phase leg. 7. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Cablec b. Southwire c. Okonite d. Rome Cable Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Conductors 260530-2 West End Heights 2 e. Pirelli 2.2 TYPE AC ARMORED CABLE A. Stranded or solid copper conductors, each individually insulated and individually wrapped with paper, with an overall armored metal jacket. B. Provide with a copper or aluminum bonding strip in contact with the armor for the entire length, making the metal jacket suitable as an equipment grounding means. C. Provide insulated bushing at each cut end of the cable. D. Suitable for dry locations only. E. Suitable for cable tray installations. F. Manufactured and installed in accordance with NEC Article 320. G. In health care facilities, as required by code, provide Type AC cable listed for this use. H. Provide color coding on armored jacket to identify cable type. I. Make: Same as building wire. 2.3 TYPE MC METAL CLAD CABLE A. Stranded or solid copper conductors, each individually insulated. Conductors shall be wrapped in plastic and enclosed in an armored metal jacket. B. Suitable for wet or dry locations. C. Suitable for cable tray installations. D. Provide with separate integral grounding conductor. E. In Health Care Facilities, provide MC cable listed for this use. F. Provide color coding on armored jacket to identify cable type. G. Manufactured and installed in accordance with NEC Article 330. H. Make: Same as building wire. 2.4 TYPE NM, NMC NON-METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE A. Two or three stranded or solid copper conductors, each individually insulated, enclosed in an overall PVC covering. B. Type NM shall be suitable for concealed or exposed installations in dry locations. C. Type NMC shall be suitable for concealed or exposed installations in dry or damp locations. D. Where installed in wood stud partitions, provide a steel plate over the wire to protect against nails and screws. E. Do not install in plaster, concrete, hazardous locations, battery rooms, or in the presence of corrosive vapors. F. Provide with integral bare grounding conductor. G. Manufactured and installed in accordance with NEC Article 334. H. Make: Same as building wire. Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Conductors 260530-3 West End Heights 3 2.5 TYPE SE SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE A. Stranded or solid copper conductors, each individually insulated, in an overall PVC cover. B. For Type SE cables, the PVC jacket shall be flame retardant and moisture and sunlight resistant. C. Type SE shall be suitable for use as an above ground service entrance conductor. D. Provide with and insulated grounded conductor, which shall also serve as the grounding conductor for services. E. Manufactured and installed in accordance with NEC Article 338. F. Make: Same as building wire. 2.6 LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS A. Straight Splices, #26 AWG To #10 AWG: 1. Nylon Insulated compression butt-splices. 2. 600 volt, 90C rated. 3. Make: Burndy “Insulink”, T&B “Sta-Kon”, or approved equal B. Straight Splices, #8 AWG and Larger: 1. Two way, long barrel, compression type, copper. 2. Provide heat shrink tubing over splice. 3. 600 volt rated. 4. Make: Burndy “Hylink”, T&N 54800 Series, or approved equal. C. Pigtail Splices, #26 AWG to #10 AWG: 1. Twist type pressure connector. 2. 600 volt, 105C rated. 3. Size as required for number and size of conductors used. 4. Make: T&B Scotchlock, or approved equal D. Three Way Splices, #8 AWG and Larger: 1. Three way, long barrel, compression type, copper. 2. Provide tape or heat shrink tubing over splice. 3. 600 volt rated. 4. Make: Burndy “Hylink”, T&B 54700 Series, or approved equal. E. Lug Terminations for Control and Signal Wiring: 1. Nylon insulated fork with compression termination of #26 AWG to #10 AWG. 2. Nylon insulated ring with compression termination for #8 AWG and larger. 3. 300 volt rated. 4. Make: Burndy “Insulug”, T&B “Sta-Kon”, or approved equal. F. Lug Terminations for Power Wiring: 1. Long barrel, compression type, copper body, on hole for #8 AWG to #2/0 AWG. 2. Long barrel, compression type, copper body, two hole, for #3/0 AWG and larger. 3. 600 volt rated. 4. Make: a. One-hole lug: Burndy “Hylug”, T&B 54900 Series, or approved equal. b. Two-hole lug: Burndy “Hylug”, T&B 54800 Series, or approved equal. Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Conductors 260530-4 West End Heights 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE A. General: 1. Install cables in raceway as called for after the entire raceway system has been completed. 2. Install splices and connections in accessible outlet, pull and junction boxes. 3. Insulate all splices and connections with UL listed plastic tape, heat shrink tubing, or plastic molded caps. 4. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. 5. Provide insulated green grounding conductor in each raceway and insulated neutral conductor for each multiwire branch circuit. 6. Install a maximum of three phase conductors, one neutral conductor and one grounding conductor in each ¾” home run. Obtain approval for additional conductor fill where field conditions require. Adhere to NEC de-rating requirements. 7. Provide a dedicated neutral for each branch circuit. 8. Provide stranded wire to motors, transformers, equipment and vibrating machinery. 9. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination without splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors. 10. Where multiple conductors are installed in a common raceway they shall be pulled simultaneously. 11. Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope and basket type grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Use approved mechanical pullers for feeders and branch circuits as required for #6 AWG cable and larger. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller. 12. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "Ty-Raps" or equivalent. 13. Reconnect branch circuit wiring at panelboards as required to balance the loads on the feeders. 14. Color code branch circuits and feeders in all outlet boxes, junction boxes and panelboards. 15. Provide conduit seals in explosion proof areas as called for on the plans and as required by the National Electrical Code. 3.2 TYPE AC ARMORED CABLE A. Type AC cable shall be permitted for use in metal stud partitions, or for 6’ fixture whips from junction boxes to luminaires. B. Type AC cable may be installed horizontally in wall cavities. C. Type AC cable shall be used only in areas permitted in the NEC. D. Do not use Type AC cable for feeders or branch circuit home runs to panelboards. E. Do not install direct buried, in concrete, hoistways, battery rooms, hazardous locations, or in the presence of corrosive vapors. F. Support cable at intervals not exceeding 4½ feet and within 1 foot of the outlet box. G. Bend radius shall not be less than five times the cable diameter and shall not damage the metal cable sheath. H. Provide insulating bushing at all termination points between the armored sheath and outlet or junction box. I. Type AC cable shall not be installed exposed with the exception of fixture drops in mechanical or equipment rooms. Secure the cable to fixture hangers using nylon or plastic ties. 3.3 TYPE MC METAL CLAD CABLE A. Type MC cable shall be permitted for use in metal stud partitions, or for 6’ fixture whips from junction boxes to luminaires. B. Type MC cable may be installed horizontally in wall cavities. C. Type MC cable shall be used only in areas permitted in the NEC. Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Conductors 260530-5 West End Heights 5 D. Do not use Type MC cable for feeders or branch circuit home runs to panelboards. E. Do not install direct buried, in concrete, or in the presence of corrosive vapors. F. Support cable at intervals not exceeding 6 feet and within 1 foot of the outlet box. G. Bending radius shall comply with Article 330 of the NEC. H. Provide insulating bushing at all termination points between the metal sheath and outlet or junction box. I. Type MC cable shall not be installed exposed with the exception of fixture drops in mechanical or equipment rooms. Secure the cable to fixture hangers using nylon or plastic ties. 3.4 TYPE NM/NMC NON-METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE A. Type NM/NMC cable shall be permitted for use in wood stud partitions. Do not install in metal stud partitions. B. Type NM/NMC cable shall be used only in areas permitted in the NEC. C. Do not install Type NM/NMC in concrete block partitions. D. Do not install Type NM/NMC in Commercial spaces or in Areas of Assemblies. E. Support cable at intervals not exceeding 4 ½ feet and within 1 foot of the outlet box. F. Provide steel nailing plates over cables to prevent damage to cables by nails. 3.5 TYPE SE SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE A. The bending radius shall not be less than five times the cable diameter. B. Support cable at intervals not exceeding 4 ½ feet and within 1 foot of the outlet box. 3.6 LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS A. Cover un-insulated splices, joints and free ends of conductors with rubber friction tape or PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. 3.7 CABLE PROOF TESTING A. After low voltage feeders are pulled in and before being connected, test feeders with a 500 or 1000-volt, insulation resistance tester (Megger) for one minute to determine that the conductor insulation to ground is greater than that recommended by the manufacturer. Any readings of less than 50 megohms may have potential insulation damage and shall be reported to the engineer. END OF SECTION 260530 Lakeview Health Services Raceways 260550-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260550 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 3. Flexible Metal Conduit 4. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit 5. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit 6. Fittings and Conduit Bodies 7. Expansion Fittings 8. Wireway 9. Cable Hangers 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All raceways shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: 1. Heavy wall, rigid steel conduit. 2. All terminations and fittings shall be threaded. 3. All raceways shall be hot-dip galvanized after cutting and threading. 4. Suitable for use as an equipment grounding conductor. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allied Tube and Conduit b. Triangle c. Conduit and Pipe Products d. Western Conduit and Tube Company e. Wheatland Tube Company B. Electrical Metallic Tubing: 1. Thin wall, rigid steel tubing. 2. All raceway shall be cut smooth and hot-dip galvanized. 3. Suitable for use as an equipment grounding conductor. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allied Tube and Conduit b. Triangle c. Conduit and Pipe Products Lakeview Health Services Raceways 260550-2 West End Heights 2 d. Western Conduit and Tube Company e. Wheatland Tube Company C. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Constructed of a continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked, zinc coated strip steel. 2. Interior surface shall be free from burrs or sharp edges. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Anamet/Anaconda b. Electri-Flex c. O-Z/Gedney d. Thomas and Betts D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Constructed of a continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked, zinc coated strip steel. 2. Interior surface shall be free from burrs or sharp edges. 3. Provide with a liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Anamet/Anaconda b. Electri-Flex c. O-Z/Gedney d. Thomas and Betts E. Rigid, Non-Metallic PVC Conduit: 1. Extra-Heavy wall conduit: Schedule 80, constructed of polyvinyl chloride, rated for use with 90C conductors and UL listed for direct burial and normal above ground use. 2. Heavy wall conduit: Schedule 40, constructed of polyvinyl chloride, rated for use with 90 C conductors and UL listed for direct burial and normal above ground use. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Carlon b. National Pipe and Plastics c. PW Pipe d. Picoma Conduit and PVC Fittings F. Fittings: 1. Rigid galvanized steel fittings shall be hot-dip galvanized after construction. 2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be stamped steel, with single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2" and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2" and larger. 3. Fittings for flexible metal conduit shall be center stopped, insulated throat, U.L. E-11852 listed. 4. Fittings for liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall have zinc plated steel ferrule, compression type with sealing ring. 5. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Connectors shall have insulated throat up to and including 1" size. For sizes 1-1/4" and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. 7. Die-cast or pressure cast fittings are not permitted. 8. Provide conduit bodies, types, shapes and sizes as required to suit application and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws. 9. Acceptable manufacturers: To match the raceway manufacturer. G. Expansion Fittings: 1. Galvanized steel expansion joints for RGS or EMT conduit, PVC for PVC conduit. 2. Minimum 4” movement in either direction. 3. Weatherproof for outdoor applications. 4. At expansion joints in concrete pours, provide Deflection/Expansion fittings capable of movement of ¾” in all directions from the normal. 5. Design Make: O.Z./Gedney, Type "AX" (exposed), “DX” (Concrete Pour) 6. Acceptable manufacturers: Lakeview Health Services Raceways 260550-3 West End Heights 3 a. O.Z./Gedney b. Crouse-Hinds c. Appleton H. Underground Ductbank Materials: 1. Refer to Specification Section 260560 for Underground Ductbank Materials. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireway shall be enclosed stamped steel with knockouts, size to meet NEC fill requirements or as indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Provide hinged or screw cover to suit the installation. Provide gasketing as required. C. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, etc., to meet installation requirements. D. Finish with gray powder coat paint. E. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Square D "Square Duct" 2. General Electric 3. Hoffman 2.3 LADDER RACK A. Provide cable racks sized as shown on plans. B. Provide all required connecting and support hardware to suit the installation. C. Rack shall have solid side bar nominally 3/8” thick by 1½” high. Provide rungs 9” on center. D. Provide bonding jumper at expansion joints, crossovers and all other locations where tray continuity is interrupted. E. Side bars shall be painted gray. F. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Newton 2. Homaco 2.4 CABLE HANGERS A. Provide prefabricated, zinc coated, carbon steel hangers designed specifically for Category 5 and Optical Fiber cable installations. B. Hangers shall have open top, rolled edges and a 2” diameter loop. C. Provide beam clamps, rod fasteners, flange clips and brackets as job conditions require. D. Design Make: Caddy “CableCat Clip” series. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Size raceways as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, type and insulation of conductors to be installed. Lakeview Health Services Raceways 260550-4 West End Heights 4 B. Minimum 1/2" trade size for branch circuit and fire alarm wiring. C. Minimum 3/4" trade size for voice/data outlets, television outlets and branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. D. Support raceways from building construction. Do not support raceways from ductwork, piping, or equipment hangers. E. Support outlet, pull and junction boxes independently from building construction. Do not support from raceways. F. Install raceways parallel or perpendicular to building walls, floors and ceilings. G. Install raceways concealed except in the following areas: 1. Mechanical Rooms 2. Electric Rooms H. Provide a code compliant ground path between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. I. Cut raceways square, ream ends to remove burrs and bush where necessary. J. Coordinate all raceway runs with other trades. K. Do not install raceways adjacent to hot surfaces or in wet areas. L. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints. M. Do not install conduit horizontally in concrete block partitions. N. Arrange neatly to permit access to the raceway, outlet, pull and junction boxes and work installed by other trades. O. Core drill, sleeve and fire stop all penetrations through floors. P. Support all raceways with steel straps or pipe clamps. In exterior or wet locations, provide minimum ¼” air space between raceway and wall. Secure raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Q. Provide green ground wire in all EMT, flexible conduit and non-metallic conduit. 3.2 CONDUIT A. Install with a minimum of bends and offsets. Bends shall not kink or destroy the interior cross section of the raceway. Factory made bends shall be used for raceways 1" trade size and larger. B. Provide at least one junction or pullbox for each 360 degrees of bends. C. Plug the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. D. Provide U.L. approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. E. Secure within three feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. F. Provide a #14 AWG fish wire in all "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. G. Install raceways in concrete floor slabs as follows: 1. All conduit in concrete floor slabs shall be rigid galvanized steel with concrete tight threaded fittings or PVC conduit with solvent fittings. 2. Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints. 3. Install conduit below the reinforcing mesh. Tie conduit to mesh. 4. Locate conduits to provide a minimum of 1” of concrete around conduit. 5. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing conduit larger than 1" trade size in concrete slabs. Lakeview Health Services Raceways 260550-5 West End Heights 5 H. Provide conduit supports based on the following table: Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet ½”, 3/4" Concealed 7 10 1”, 1-1/4" Concealed 8 10 1-1/2” and larger Concealed 10 10 1/2”, 3/4" Exposed 5 7 1”, 1-1/4" Exposed 7 8 1-1/2” and larger Exposed 10 10 I. Where conduits puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. J. Provide (5) spare ¾” and (1) spare 2” conduits from each flush mounted panelboard or cabinet to an area above the nearest accessible ceiling space. Make 90o turn above the ceiling, arranged for further continuation of raceway and cap. K. Conduit System Installation: 1. Wiring above 600 volts in below grade locations: a. PVC, Schedule 40, concrete encased b. PVC, Schedule 80, direct buried. 2. Wiring below 600 volts, interior locations: a. Electrical Metallic Tubing b. Type NM wiring 3. Wiring below 600 volts in exterior, above grade locations: a. Rigid Galvanized Steel 4. Wiring below 600 volts in below grade locations: a. PVC, Schedule 40, concrete encased b. PVC, Schedule 80, direct buried. 3.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Provide flexible metal conduit for connection of vibrating equipment such as motors and transformers. B. Flexible metal conduit may be used for fixture whips from an outlet box to a luminaire. Maximum length shall be 6’. C. Flexible metal conduit may be used to fish existing walls. D. Provide a green ground wire in all flexible metal conduit. 3.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection to vibrating equipment in wet and damp areas. Lakeview Health Services Raceways 260550-6 West End Heights 6 B. Maximum length of liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be 6’. C. Do not install liquidtight flexible metal conduit in plenum spaces. D. Provide a green ground wire in all flexible metal conduit. 3.5 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT A. Provide solvent sealed fittings for all rigid non-metallic conduit. B. For direct buried raceways, provide non-metallic cradles to support the conduit. C. Where PVC conduit is installed outdoors in above grade installations, install conduit in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Provide an expansion joint for every 100’ of raceway to accommodate for thermal expansion and contraction. 3.6 WIREWAY A. Install wireways where shown on plans and where required for installation of feeders and wiring. B. Provide code required clearances. C. Size raceway to accommodate the quantity of wire installed, taking into account all splices, taps, cable bending radii, etc. 3.7 CABLE HANGERS A. Install cable hangers as shown on plans and as required. B. Install on maximum 5’ centers. C. Coordinate location of hangers with other trades. Do not install hangers prior to ductwork and piping. END OF SECTION 260550 Lakeview Health Services Underground Ductbank System 260560-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 260560 - UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Minimum requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this section: 1. Excavation and Backfilling 2. Crushed Stone 3. Concrete 4. Conduit Supports 5. Sealing Elements 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. None required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for all excavation, backfill and concrete work. B. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction and details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain and protect existing building services that cross the excavation area. B. Protect utilities, sidewalks, structures, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by settling, lateral movements, undermining, washouts and other hazards created by excavation work. C. Locate and verify existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations. D. Verify subsurface conditions prior to excavation work. E. Provide a compaction test prior to starting work. Compact backfill in 6” lifts to match the surrounding soil conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTBANK MATERIALS A. Raceways: 1. Refer to Specification Section 260550 – Raceways. 2. Typical ductbank materials: a. Direct Buried Ductbanks: PVC Schedule 80. b. Concrete Encased Ductbanks: PVC Schedule 40. c. Elbows for medium voltage or communications raceways: Wide Sweep Galvanized Rigid Steel. d. Elbows for low voltage power raceways: Standard Sweep Galvanized Rigid Steel. e. Conduit rise into buildings or stubs at utility poles: Wide Sweep Galvanized Rigid Steel Lakeview Health Services Underground Ductbank System 260560-2 West End Heights 2 B. Ordinary Fill: 1. Well-graded, natural inorganic soil, meeting the following requirements: a. Free of cinders, ash, refuse, debris, organic or frozen materials and of stones larger than 4 in. maximum dimension. b. Be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities. c. Free of highly plastic clays, of materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and of cinders, ash and other corrosive materials. d. Maximum dry density of not less than 115 lbs. per cu. ft. e. Material from excavation on the site may be used as ordinary fill if it meets the above requirements. C. Sand: 1. Clean, coarse and free of organic materials D. Crushed Stone 1. Crusher Run: #2 crushed stone, clean and free of organic materials 2. Pea Gravel: Rounded stone, 3/4 in. maximum diameter and 1/8 in. minimum diameter. E. Concrete: 1. Minimum 2000 psi. 2. Free of large aggregate. 3. Use of fiberglass shavings to increase the strength is acceptable. 2.2 CONDUIT SPACERS A. Interlocking plastic duct spacers to provide stability and consistent separation of ducts. B. Spacers shall be designed to provide minimum of 3” spacing between the bottom of the ductbank and the bottom of the conduit and 7.5” between conduit centerlines in both the horizontal and vertical directions. C. Interlocking reducers to permit installation of 1” and 2” conduits. D. Snap-in rebar holder. E. Design Make: Carlon Snap-Loc, or approved equal. 2.3 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Waterproof Type. B. Exterior walls, below grade and above basement or vault floor: Synthetic rubber material with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac. 2.4 REBAR A. #4 steel rebar, treated to prevent corrosion. 2.5 WIRE MESH A. 6” x 6”, #10 welded wire mesh. 2.6 CONDUIT BELL ENDS A. Provide end bells on all conduit ends at manholes, pullboxes and building entrances. Bells shall be flush with walls or slightly depressed into wall. B. Design make, Non-metallic: Carlon E997x Series. Lakeview Health Services Underground Ductbank System 260560-3 West End Heights 3 C. Design make, Metallic: OZ Gedney TNS Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STAKEOUT A. A minimum of two days prior to excavation, contact Dig Safely New York, Inc (1-800-962-7962) and obtain a stakeout of all public and private utilities located in the area of excavation. B. Verify exact location and depths of all existing utilities. Hand excavate around existing utilities as required. C. Notify utility companies, municipalities and other involved jurisdictions when excavation occurs within the vicinity of existing underground service such as sewer, water, electric, gas, telephone and cable TV, including such services privately owned. Coordinate any work in or through existing easements with proper municipality and associated utility companies. D. Where existing utility lines and structures are encountered during excavation, properly support the utilities and protect from damage. E. Comply with Section 1918 of Penal Law of State of New York with regard to work in vicinity of combustible gas piping. F. Immediately report damage or injury to utility lines to Owner's Representative and the associated utility company. Repair or replace utility lines damaged or injured as directed and approved by the utility or the Owner’s Representative. G. Comply with New York Code Rule 753. 3.2 GENERAL A. Install conduits in straight lines. Separate conduits a minimum of 7 ½”, center-to-center, in both the horizontal and vertical direction. B. Seal all conduit couplings and terminations watertight. C. Where the ductbank changes direction, provide galvanized rigid steel elbows. D. Where conduit rises out of the floor or stubs up a utility pole, transition to wide sweep galvanized rigid steel elbows and conduit to the termination point. Do not install PVC conduit above the finished floor to panelboards or equipment, or above finished grade. E. Provide galvanized rigid steel conduit at building foundations and manholes to prevent shearing of conduit. F. Slope all conduits a minimum of 1/8” per foot away from buildings. G. Where conduits penetrate building walls, provide sealing elements (Link-Seals) to prevent ingress of moisture. H. Provide bell ends at each end of all conduits. Provide grounding bushings for all galvanized rigid steel conduits. I. For cold weather installations, follow the manufacturer’s low temperature installation procedures. J. Repair or replace all existing utilities and facilities damaged, due to ductbank installation, as part of contract. K. Provide pullstrings in all spare conduits. L. Provide acrylic tag indicating source and load on each raceway. M. Cap all spare conduits to prevent ingress of moisture. Lakeview Health Services Underground Ductbank System 260560-4 West End Heights 4 3.3 TRENCHING, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Preparatory Work: 1. Examine existing area and conditions to determine ductbank routing and to coordinate with existing utilities, obstructions and other trades. 2. Locate and stake each new run for its entire length. 3. Verify final grade prior to excavating. 4. Furnish schedule of operations to Owner and each trade. B. Protection: 1. Prior to starting work, take photographs to document existing conditions. Identify and date photographs and submit copies to the Owner’s Representative. 2. Provide bracing, shoring, sheathing and other work for protection of personnel, the contract work, excavations, trees, shrubs, existing structures and surrounding properties. 3. Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs, flags and lights to provide protection for work, workmen, public and property. 4. Slope sides of excavations to comply with OSHA and local codes. Plank walks. 5. Restore, repair, rebuild or replace any such items damaged or destroyed to condition equal to that existing before such damage occurred. 6. Protect all trees, shrubs and surrounding vegetation. C. Cutting and Patching: 1. Before starting work, obtain necessary permits and pay all fees and charges. Saw-cut paved or concrete areas as called for, perpendicular to surface and in straight saw-cut lines. Replace pavements, roadways, streets, curbs, blacktop areas and walks disturbed by excavating operations with materials equal to adjacent pavements. Grade all replacement pavements away from buildings. D. Excavation: 1. Provide for buried work in the contract both inside and outside of the building. Excavate to proper depth and width as called for. Comply with rules set forth by New York State Department of Labor/OSHA. 2. Remove from the site all non-suitable material, including rock, rubble, brickwork, concrete, debris, abandoned pipe and tile. This material is not suitable for backfill. Provide legal disposal of all excess or non-suitable excavated materials. 3. Excavate the trench to proper depth and width, no more than 100 feet in advance of the utility being installed. During the excavation, make allowances for form work, sand and gravel bases, manholes and work space. 4. Should trench bottom be wet, unstable and/or otherwise incapable of supporting the contract work, immediately contact the Owner's Representative. Should it be deemed unsuitable, excavate to depth as directed and back fill with gravel to trench depth. 5. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6 in. deeper and fill space between trench bottom and pipe with coarse sand, well tamped to form firm bed. E. Shoring, Bracing, Sheathing: 1. In addition to governing codes, protect sides of excavations with sheeting and bracing where necessary to prevent sliding or caving of banks and to protect adjacent structures. Remove as back fill is placed. 2. Provide at locations adjacent to existing manholes, hydrants and similar items. F. Backfill: 1. Provide sand bed or concrete around ductbank as indicated above. Have work inspected prior to backfill. 2. In paved areas, backfill with #2 crusher run in 6” lifts. Compact stone after each lift. a. Compact to not less than 95% density compared to maximum laboratory tests by weight under slab on grade, roadways, drives and other paved areas and 85% for general grading. Submit certified results of tests by an approved soil testing laboratory. 3. In grass areas, backfill with ordinary fill in 6” lifts. Compact after each lift. Utilize clean native fill if deemed acceptable by the Owner’s Representative. Do not use frozen material. a. Compact to not less than 85% for general grading. Submit certified results of tests by an approved soil testing laboratory. Lakeview Health Services Underground Ductbank System 260560-5 West End Heights 5 G. Removal of Water: 1. Provide pumps, hoses, pipe, labor and fuel necessary to keep excavations free of water accumulation. Operate and maintain equipment. Discharge water in manner not interfering with any trade's work and not to undermine or disturb existing or adjacent structures or land. Grade to prevent surface water from flowing into all excavations and trenches. Do not discharge dirt, backfill, debris, into sanitary or storm drainage systems. H. Rock Excavation: 1. Rock Excavation defined as: a. Ledge rock requiring blasting or air hammer for removal. b. Boulders in excess of 1-1/2 cu. yards in size. Demonstrate that material in question cannot be removed with a 1-1/2 yd. backhoe or shovel. 2. Procedure: a. Should rock be encountered, remove only upon written order of the Owner’s Representative. b. Measurement of rock excavation, for purpose of payment to Contractor, will be taken 1 ft. wider than ductbank, manhole, pipe or conduit being installed. No allowance made for additional rock taken out accidentally or for convenience of Contractor beyond amount required for installation of work. Rock excavation claimed must be measured each day and verified by Owner's Representative. Maintain daily accounting. No claim for extra compensation honored except through procedures outlined above. 3.4 DIRECT BURIED DUCTBANKS A. Provide PVC Schedule 80, direct buried. B. Support raceways minimum 3” above the bottom of the trench. C. Provide conduit spacers on 10’ centers to support raceways. Install raceways parallel, with a minimum separation of 7 ½” center-to-center in the horizontal and vertical directions. Stagger couplings and secure raceways to prevent movement. D. Depth to top of conduit shall be as indicated on the plans. E. Provide sand bed envelope a minimum of 3” all around the raceways. F. After the ductbank is installed, pull a cylindrical wire brush through the raceway as required to remove all dirt. G. Backfill with ordinary fill as specified above and repair finished grade to match existing conditions. H. For buried electric lines, provide a red caution tape reading “Caution – Buried Electric Lines”. Install at 6” below grade. I. For buried communications lines, provide an orange caution tape reading “Caution – Buried Telephone Fiberoptic CATV Signal lines. Install at 6” below grade. 3.5 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTBANKS A. Provide PVC Schedule 40, concrete encased. B. Support raceways minimum 3” above the bottom of the trench. C. Provide conduit spacers on 10’ centers to support raceways. Install raceways parallel, with a minimum separation of 7.5” center-to-center in the horizontal and vertical directions. Stagger couplings and secure raceways to prevent floatout. D. Depth to top of conduit shall be as indicated on the plans. E. After the ductbank is installed, an iron-shod mandrel to remove concrete and other obstructions. Pull a cylindrical wire brush through the raceway as required to remove all dirt. F. Prior to installing concrete, open the trench for the entire length and complete all conduit installations. Lakeview Health Services Underground Ductbank System 260560-6 West End Heights 6 G. Where non-metallic conduit is used, provide continuous runs of #4 deformed reinforcing rods on 6” centers along the top and bottom of the concrete ductbank. H. Provide concrete a minimum of 3” all around ductbank. Gently vibrate concrete to remove voids. I. After the concrete has cured sufficiently, backfill with ordinary fill as specified above and repair finished grade to match existing conditions. J. For buried electric lines, provide a red caution tape reading “Caution – Buried Electric Lines”. Install at 6” below grade. K. For buried communications lines, provide an orange caution tape reading “Caution – Buried Telephone Fiberoptic CATV Signal lines. Install at 6” below grade. 3.6 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of the work, clean the entire site; remove surplus fill, large stones and debris to a legal off-site disposal. Remove tools and equipment and leave the entire area in a neat condition. B. Rough grade to 6 in. below finished grade. Scarify subsoil to depth of 2 In. to achieve bond between topsoil and subsoil. C. Repave, reseed and completely restore the area to the condition prior to the start of excavation and trenching work. D. If soil/concrete sidewalks/asphalt settles within one year, re-grade the trench and provide new seed, or repair the concrete or asphalt. END OF SECTION 260560 Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Power Distribution Equipment 262410-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 262410 - LOW VOLTAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Circuit Breakers 2. Branch Circuit Panelboards 3. Meter Centers 4. Disconnect Switches 5. Low Voltage Fuses 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All low voltage power distribution equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data including voltage, current, interrupting rating, and enclosure type for the following: 1. Thermal Magnetic Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. Branch Circuit Panelboards 3. Distribution Panelboards 4. Meter Centers 5. Disconnect switches. 6. Low voltage fuses. 1.5 MINOR MODIFICATIONS A. Provide modifications to CT ratios, circuit breaker rating plug, fuse sizes, lug sizes, circuit breaker trip rating within the frame size at no additional cost, until shop drawings are reviewed and submitted. 1.6 FIELD SUPERVISION A. Provide field supervision and start-up by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. Provide certification that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. 1.7 INSTRUCTION BOOKS A. Provide (3) copies of instruction books for all switchboards. Include in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals required in this Specification. Instruction books shall include the following: 1. Blow-up diagrams of equipment with a listing of components. 2. Description of available accessories. 3. Recommended spare parts list. 4. Directions for receiving, installation, care and maintenance of equipment. Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Power Distribution Equipment 262410-2 West End Heights 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall be constructed of a glass reinforced insulating material. All current carrying components shall be completely insulated and isolated from the outside of the circuit breaker. 2. Provide an over-center, trip-free handle to provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. 3. Provide multi-pole breakers with common trip. 4. When the circuit breaker has tripped, the handle shall move to a position between the “on” and “off” positions. Provide a visual indication that the circuit breaker has tripped. 5. The ampere rating shall be clearly marked on the face of the circuit breaker. 6. Any series rated fuse/circuit breaker installations shall be UL listed as recognized component combinations. Provide a label at the Series-rated device reading “Caution - Series Rated System. ___________A available”. Provide identical replacement of equipment”. 7. Make provisions to add circuit breaker handle locks. 8. Circuit breakers shall have voltage, ampere, and interrupting ratings as called for on the Panelboard Schedule. B. Thermal Magnetic Molded Case Branch Circuit Breakers 1. Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements. 2. Thermal trip unit shall be long-time, non-adjustable, thermal overload trip. 3. Magnetic trip unit shall be instantaneous, electro-magnetic trip. Magnetic trip unit shall be adjustable for all frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. 4. Interchangeable rating plugs shall be provided for all frame sizes 400 amperes and larger. 5. 60C terminal temperature rating for circuit breakers rated 125 amperes or below. 6. 75C terminal temperature rating for circuit breakers rated above 125 amperes. 7. All 20 and 30 ampere, single pole circuit breakers shall be UL listed for switching duty. 8. Circuit breakers shall be plug-on. I-Line type distribution circuit breakers are acceptable. 9. Circuit breakers rated 250 amperes and below shall be UL listed HACR type. 10. Where ground fault circuit breakers are required, provide a shunt trip circuit breaker with a zero sequence sensing ground fault module. 11. Design Make: Square D QO, QOB (250 volt), EH, EHB (480 volt), I-Line style (600 volt) 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Square D b. General Electric c. Cutler Hammer d. Siemens ITE e. Square D 2.2 240 VOLT BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. 240 Volt rated, maximum 400 amperes. B. Aluminum bus bars with high dielectric thermoplastic insulators. C. Provide continuous current ratings, short circuit current ratings, branch circuit breakers, main circuit breaker or main lugs, and flush or surface trims as called for on the Panelboard schedule. D. Provide nameplate on each panelboard indicating voltage, current, phase, wire, and short circuit rating. E. 100% rated neutral of the same material as the main bus. F. Provide ground bus of the same material as the main bus. G. Interior trim shall be dead front construction, with pre-formed metal twist-outs covering unused mounting space. H. Enclosures shall be nominal 20” wide by 6” deep, galvanized steel construction with removable endwalls and knockouts. I. Fronts Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Power Distribution Equipment 262410-3 West End Heights 3 1. Surface or flush mounted as called for on the Panelboard Schedule. 2. ANSI 49 gray electrodeposited enamel. 3. Fronts shall be one piece with door, and hinged to the enclosure. 4. Provide cylindrical tumbler type lock with catch and spring loaded stainless steel door pull. All locks shall be keyed alike. 5. Provide a clear plastic directory cardholder on the inside of the door. J. Design Make: Square D “NQOD” K. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Square D “NQOD” 2. General Electric “A” Series 3. Cutler Hammer “CH” 4. Siemens ITE “Sentron S1” 2.3 METER CENTERS A. General 1. UL listed for service entrance equipment B. Main Circuit Breaker 1. Provide with wall mounted, service entrance rated main circuit breaker. 2. Three phase service entrance. 3. Bus connected to the adjacent meter center section. C. Enclosure 1. Enclosures shall be constructed of formed and welded galvanealed steel with gray baked electrodeposited enamel finish. 2. Enclosures shall be minimum 16 gauge steel. 3. NEMA 3R construction 4. No device disassembly is to be required before mounting. 5. All devices must be bonded together with bolted connections. 6. All compartments containing unmetered circuits shall be provided with a sealing means. 7. Provide a 7/8” knockout in the cover for installation of a utility barrel lock seal. D. Interior Construction 1. All components shall be factory assembled and all current carrying parts shall be plated bus bars. 2. Individual units shall be constructed with an integral sliding one bolt joint-pak assembly for a completely bussed meter center. This single bolt is to be a VISI-TITE bolt for tightening without a torque wrench. E. Meter Sockets 1. Ringless design. 2. Meter socket jaw assemblies shall permit the use of “mylar plastic disconnect sleeves” being applied over the blades of the watt-hour meter without damaging the insulation of the plastic insulator material. 3. The neutral conductor shall be bonded to the meter enclosure. 4. The temperature rating shall be a minimum of 75ºC. 5. Sockets shall be 4-Jaw for 240/120 volt, single phase, three wire services. 6. Sockets shall be 5-Jaw for 208/120 or 480/277 volt, single phase services. 7. Sockets shall be 7-Jaw for 208/120 or 480/277 volt, three phase services. 8. For commercial services, provide with lever operated bypass mechanism suitable for installing or removing a Type HQ meter socket. 9. Sockets shall be rated 100A or 200A as shown on the drawings. 10. Each position of a ganged meter socket (five position maximum) shall be continuous duty rated as a minimum of 100 amperes (residential) or 200 amperes (commercial). F. Molded Case Branch Circuit Breakers 1. Provide with integral main circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be as specified in this section. Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Power Distribution Equipment 262410-4 West End Heights 4 G. Design Make: Square D E-Z Meter Pak H. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Cutler Hammer 4. Siemens ITE 2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Three pole, single throw, or as called for on the drawings. B. Quick-make, quick-break switch operating mechanism. C. Heavy-duty, current rating as called for on the drawings, voltage rating as required by the equipment served. D. All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion. E. Lugs shall be removable and rated for 75C temperature rating. F. Switch blades shall be visible when the switch is in the open position and the door is open. G. Switch shall be padlockable in the OFF and ON positions. H. Provide fusible switches with rejection type fuse holders and fuses as indicated on the plans or as per equipment requirements. I. Provisions for a field-installable electrical interlock. J. Provide external override mechanism to open the disconnect switch door without opening the disconnect switch. K. Enclosure shall be steel with gray baked enamel paint. L. Provide NEMA type enclosures as called for on the drawings. M. NEMA type 1 enclosures shall be equipped with knockouts. N. Design Make: Square D O. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Cutler Hammer 4. Siemens ITE 2.5 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES A. All fuses rated 600 volts and below shall be rejection type dual-element, time-delay type. Provide one complete sets of fuses for all fusible disconnect switches, plus 3 spare fuses of each size. Deliver spare fuses to the Owner and obtain receipt. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Fuses 600 amperes and below: Bussman Type FRN-R (300 volts), Type FRS-R (600 volts) or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide identification for all equipment and devices as indicated in Section 260100. Lakeview Health Services Low Voltage Power Distribution Equipment 262410-5 West End Heights 5 B. Provide miscellaneous bolts, washers, nuts, clips, lockwashers, hardware, etc. as required to install equipment. C. Unload, move, handle, set in place, install, erect, assemble, connect, and test all items as required. D. Provide minimum NEC working clearance for all equipment. E. Verify cable/lug sizes for terminations. 3.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Install circuit breakers in panelboards and switchboards as called for on the plans and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Securely support all panelboard enclosures to walls. Install true and level. C. Install panelboards with top of the highest circuit breaker handle no more than 6’-6” to the centerline. D. Provide five empty ¾” conduits and one empty 1 ½” conduit from each flush mounted panelboard backbox to the accessible ceiling space. E. Make all branch circuit and feeder connections. F. Provide channel support between the wall and backbox for panelboards installed on outside walls. G. Tighten all bolt and lug connections using a torque wrench or screwdriver per the manufacturer’s recommendations. H. Measure steady state load currents on each panelboard feeder. Rearrange branch circuits in the panelboard to balance the load within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing. I. Provide identification as required per Section 260510. J. Apartment load centers shall be mounted at handicapped accessible heights, 48” to highest circuit breaker. 3.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install disconnect switches in locations shown on plans. Install true and level. B. Tighten all bolt and lug connections using a torque wrench or screwdriver per the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Provide identification as required per Section 260510. D. Provide fuses in all fusible switches. 3.4 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES A. Install low voltage fuses in disconnect switches as called for on the plans. B. Turn all spare fuses over to the Owner and obtain receipt. END OF SECTION 262410 Lakeview Health Services Service Entrance 262710-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 262710 - SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. B. The utility company is New York State Electric and Gas. C. Pay all utility company fees as part of the Contract. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Low voltage underground service from a utility owned pad mounted transformer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The service entrance equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative and the utility company. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. All materials and methods of installation shall comply with the requirements of the utility company. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for the following: 1. Underground ductbank materials. 2. Utility instrument transformer enclosure. 3. Meter channel. B. Send three copies of shop drawings of all medium voltage equipment to the utility company for review. Include one utility company approved copy with submittals for review. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 UTILITY COMPANY COSTS A. During bidding, obtain the utility company costs from the utility company. INCLUDE ALL UTILITY COSTS IN THE BASE BID. 2.2 GENERAL A. Review all utility requirements and install the electric service to meet these requirements. B. Coordinate the installation of the entire service with a utility representative prior to starting work. C. Where electrical service conduits are installed in a common utility trench, maintain a minimum of 12” between the electrical conduit and any communication, CATV or gas line. D. Do not install sewer, drainage, or water lines in the same trench as the electric service. Maintain a minimum of 8’ later separation and 2’ vertical separation from these utilities. Lakeview Health Services Service Entrance 262710-2 West End Heights 2 2.3 GROUNDING A. At each electric meter, provide a 5/8” x 8’ ground rod. Provide 1-#4 AWG stranded, insulated, copper grounding conductor from the meter channel to the driven ground rod. 2.4 ELECTRIC SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS A. 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four wire, grounded wye connected, 60 Hz. 2.5 LOW VOLTAGE METERING REQUIREMENTS A. Install all electric meters in a readily accessible location inside the building. Properly ground the meter channel. 1. All meters and metering transformers shall be furnished by the utility company and installed by the electrical contractor. 2. Provide ¾” thick plywood backboard, sized per utility and painted gray, for utility meters. Install meter furnished by utility. 3. Where PVC conduit is provided to the meter in exterior locations, provide an expansion joint in the raceway between grade and the meter channel. 4. Provide minimum 4’ clearance in front of the utility meter. 5. Provide minimum 2’ clearance to the gas meter set. 2.6 SECONDARY SERVICE FROM UTILITY PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER A. Primary Raceway Requirements: 1. The existing primary conduit and cable is existing, and terminates at the existing transformer pad. This cable, raceway, and transformer pad will be utilized to serve the building. B. Transformer Pad: 1. Provide vault type transformer pad with curb and crushed stone as detailed on the drawings and required by the utility. 2. Locate transformer pad as shown on the site plan. a. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 15’ from any non-combustible building or overhang. b. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 25’ from any combustible building or overhang, or any door or window opening. c. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 15’ from the property line. d. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 15’ from any source of fuel, including emergency generators and gas meters. e. Install pad to provide a minimum of 10’ of clearance at the front of the transformer. 3. The conduit shall enter the transformer vault pad with end bells for 4” conduit. 4. Where the transformer is installed near vehicular traffic, provide 6” diameter steel fender posts on 3’ centers around the transformer pad. Bury post 4’ in the ground, and extend minimum 42” above ground. Fill post with concrete and provide a rounded cap. 5. Install conduits in the pad such that the transformer doors will be facing the street. C. Secondary Service Entrance Feeder: 1. Provide type and quantity of conduits from the transformer pad to the service entrance equipment as called for on the drawings. 2. Provide conduit bells on all non-metallic conduit. 3. Provide conductors from the utility transformer to the service entrance equipment as called for on the drawings. 4. Terminate conduit and conductors at the transformer and service entrance as required by the utility. 5. At the transformer end of the service entrance feeder, provide Burndy Type YA NEMA 2-hole, stainless steel or bronze lugs. Provide all required bolts, washers, nuts, and hardware. 6. Install metering transformers in the metering section of the metal enclosed Lakeview Health Services Service Entrance 262710-3 West End Heights 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate new service installation with the utility prior to the bid. Make adjustments to plans as required to meet all utility requirements. Include all associated utility costs as part of the bid. B. Prior to installation of the electric service, coordinate the requirements of the service with the utility. Include the following: 1. Utility pole utilized to provide the service. 2. Conduit stub-up requirements at the utility pole. 3. Transformer pad location and specification requirements. 4. Meter channel location and specification requirements. 5. Primary conduit requirements. 6. Secondary conduit requirements. 7. Secondary cable installation and termination requirements. 8. Metering transformer installation requirements. 9. Conduit and wiring requirements from the metering transformers to the meter channel. C. Prior to excavating for the service entrance equipment, obtain a stakeout to locate all existing utilities. D. Coordinate the location of all manholes, handholes, transformer vaults, and ductbank routings with the existing site utilities and all other contractors. 3.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS A. Provide ductbank materials, transformer vaults, manholes, and handholes as specified in Section 260550 – Raceways and Section 260560 – Underground Ductbank Systems. B. Provide conductors as specified in Sections 260530 END OF SECTION 262710 Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 262720 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Switches 2. Dimmer Switches 3. Occupancy Sensors 4. Receptacles 5. Coverplates 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All wiring devices shall be installed neatly. Recessed devices shall be flush with the face of the wall. Provide extension rings on outlet boxes as required. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for all wiring devices and cover plates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Wiring devices shall be construction grade as a minimum. B. Wiring device color shall be light almond. C. Suitable for installation in a 2-1/2” deep outlet box. D. All wiring devices shall be from the same manufacturer. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand 3. Arrow Hart 4. Bryant 5. General Electric 6. Leviton 2.2 SWITCHES A. 277 VAC, 20 ampere rated. B. Maintained contact, single pole, three-way and four-way, or double pole as called for on the plans. C. Urea base material with nylon toggle. Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 262720 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Switches 2. Dimmer Switches 3. Occupancy Sensors 4. Receptacles 5. Coverplates 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All wiring devices shall be installed neatly. Recessed devices shall be flush with the face of the wall. Provide extension rings on outlet boxes as required. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for all wiring devices and cover plates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Wiring devices shall be construction grade as a minimum. B. Wiring device color shall be light almond. C. Suitable for installation in a 2-1/2” deep outlet box. D. All wiring devices shall be from the same manufacturer. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand 3. Arrow Hart 4. Bryant 5. General Electric 6. Leviton 2.2 SWITCHES A. 277 VAC, 20 ampere rated. B. Maintained contact, single pole, three-way and four-way, or double pole as called for on the plans. C. Urea base material with nylon toggle. D. Silver cadmium oxide contacts. Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-2 West End Heights 2 E. Brass terminals and movable contact arm. F. Steel mounting strap. G. Side and back wired. H. Quiet operation. I. Rated for minimum 50,000 operations. J. Design Make: 1. Single pole: Hubbell Catalog No. CS1221 2. Three-way: Hubbell Catalog No. CS1223 3. Four-way: Hubbell Catalog No. CS1224 4. Double Pole: Hubbell Catalog No. CS1222 2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall mounted Sensors: 1. Switchbox type (single or dual circuit): a. 900 sq. ft. of coverage, 180 degree viewing angle. b. Dual Technology: Passive infrared and Microphonics. c. Auto-On or Vacancy, factory set for Vacancy. d. Single or dual relay operation e. Max load: 800 watts at 120 volts or 1200 watts at 277 volts. f. Adjustable time delay from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. g. Adjustable sensitivity from 20% to 100%. h. Manual off switch. i. Decorator style, color to match wiring devices j. Install in single gang switch box. k. Design Make: Acuity Controls nWSX PDT LV or approved equal. 2. Switchbox type (dimmer): a. Integral Dual Technology: Passive infrared and Microphonics. b. On-Off with Raise-Lower pushbuttons c. 0-10V operation d. Decorator style, color to match wiring devices e. Auto-On or Vacancy, factory set for Vacancy. f. Install in a single-gang switch box. g. Size dimmers to 150% of load being controlled. h. Contractor to verify dimming technology of LED fixture controlled. i. Max load: 800 watts at 120 volts or 1200 watts at 277 volts. j. Design Make: Acuity Controls nWSX PDT LV DX or approved equal. 3. Switchbox type (dimmer with adaptive daylight harvesting): a. Integral Dual Technology: Passive infrared and Microphonics. b. On-Off with Raise-Lower pushbuttons c. 0-10V operation d. Decorator style, color to match wiring devices e. Auto-On or Vacancy, factory set for Vacancy. f. Integrated photocell with adaptive daylight harvesting. g. Install in a single-gang switch box. h. Size dimmers to 150% of load being controlled. i. Contractor to verify dimming technology of LED fixture controlled. j. Max load: 800 watts at 120 volts or 1200 watts at 277 volts. k. Design Make: Acuity Controls nWSX PDT LV DX or approved equal. B. Ceiling Mounted Sensors: 1. Type OS-A: Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-3 West End Heights 3 a. Minimum 12’ radial coverage mounted at 9’. b. Suitable for small motion pickup. c. Dual technology: Ultrasonic and Microphonics. d. Adjustable time delay from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. e. Adjustable sensitivity. f. Install surface mounted in single gang switch box located above the ceiling. g. Integral relay with one set of Normally Open/Normally Closed (Form C) contacts for control of HVAC or an additional lighting load. h. Provide with relay power packs for control of loads. Provide quantity of power packs as required to switch luminaires as shown on the plans. i. Design make: Acuity Controls nCM PDT 9 or approved equal. 2. Type OS-B: a. Minimum 28’ radial coverage mounted at 9’. b. Dual technology: Ultrasonic and Microphonics. c. Adjustable time delay from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. d. Adjustable sensitivity. e. Install surface mounted in single gang switch box located above the ceiling. f. Integral relay with one set of Normally Open/Normally Closed (Form C) contacts for control of HVAC or an additional lighting load. g. Provide with relay power packs for control of loads. Provide quantity of power packs as required to switch luminaires as shown on the plans. h. Design make: Acuity Controls nCM PDT10 or approved equal. 2.4 DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. 125 volt, 20 ampere, two pole, three wire, grounding, straight blade, NEMA 5-20R. B. Heavy-duty Construction grade. C. Grooved face. D. Side and back wiring. E. 0.31” thick phosphor bronze three-prong power contacts. F. 0.40” galvanized steel mounting strap. G. Center assembly rivet material: 0.40” galvanized steel staple. H. Solid brass grounding system. I. Nickel-plated brass terminal screws. J. Nylon face with reinforced PET back material. K. UL94V-2 Flame rating. L. 2000V withstand rating. M. Design Make: Hubbell Catalog No. CR5362 2.5 TAMPER RESISTANT DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. 125 volt, 20 ampere, two pole, three wire, grounding, straight blade, NEMA 5-20R. B. Heavy-duty specification grade. C. Grooved face. D. Side and back wiring. Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-4 West End Heights 4 E. 0.37” thick brass three prong power contacts. F. 0.050” brass mounting strap. G. Brass center rivet. H. Solid brass grounding system. I. Silicon bronze terminal screws. J. Nylon face with reinforced PET back material. K. UL94V-2 Flame rating. L. 2000V withstand rating. M. Design Make: Hubbell Catalog No. BR20TR 2.6 WEATHER RESISTANT DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. 125 volt, 20 ampere, two pole, three wire, grounding, straight blade, NEMA 5-20R. B. Heavy-duty specification grade. C. Grooved face. D. Side and back wiring. E. 0.37” thick brass three prong power contacts. F. 0.050” brass mounting strap. G. Brass center rivet. H. Solid brass grounding system. I. Silicon bronze terminal screws. J. Nylon face with reinforced PET back material. K. UL94V-2 Flame rating. L. 2000V withstand rating. M. Design Make: Hubbell Catalog No. BR20WR 2.7 GFI RECEPTACLES A. 125 volt, 20 ampere, two pole, three wire, grounding, straight blade, NEMA 5-20R. B. Heavy-duty specification grade. Provide hospital grade as called for on plans and as required by code. C. GFI protected. Trip level shall be 4-6 mA. Trip time shall be 0.025 seconds. D. Grooved face. E. Side wiring. F. Suitable for feed-through protection. G. 0.37” thick brass three prong power contacts. Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-5 West End Heights 5 H. 0.050” brass mounting strap. I. Brass center rivet. J. Solid brass grounding system. K. Brass terminal screws. L. Nylon face and back. M. UL94V-2 flame rating. N. 2000V withstand rating. O. Design Make: Hubbell Catalog No. GF5362 (Specification Grade); Hubbell Catalog No. GF8300 (Hospital Grade). 2.8 SPECIAL RECEPTACLES A. 250 volt, 20 ampere, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding. NEMA 6-20R. B. 250 volt, 30 ampere, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding. NEMA 6-30R. C. 125/250 volt, 30 ampere, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding. NEMA 14-30R (Dryer receptacle). D. 125/250 volt, 50 ampere, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding. NEMA 14-50R (Range receptacle). E. 125 volt, 20 ampere, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, twistlock. NEMA L5-20R. F. 125 volt, 30 ampere, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, twistlock. NEMA L5-30R. G. 250 volt, 20 ampere, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, twistlock. NEMA L6-20R. H. 250 volt, 50 ampere, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, twistlock. NEMA L6-30R. I. Design Make: Hubbell. 2.9 COVERPLATES A. Provide utility cover plates for surface mounted devices in mechanical rooms. B. Provide high impact, thermoplastic coverplates, color to match devices. C. Provide watertight enclosure as specified below for all devices in wet areas designated “WP”. 2.10 WEATHERPROOF COVERS A. Impact resistant transparent polycarbonate, NEMA 3R construction. B. UL listed as a weatherproof enclosure with the receptacle in use. C. Hinged, latching cover with an opening at the bottom for a cord to exit the device. D. Padlockable in the closed position. E. Suitable for installation of a GFI protected duplex receptacle. F. Design Make: Hubbell Catalog No. WP826M. PART 3 - EXECUTION Lakeview Health Services Wiring Devices 262720-6 West End Heights 6 3.1 GENERAL A. Install devices generally where called for. B. Provide thermal transfer tape labels identifying the panel and circuit number on all receptacle coverplates. C. Coordinate exact locations of all devices with equipment, millwork, counters, fin radiation, windows, etc and adjust locations as required as part of this contract. D. Provide steel box for all devices. E. Install receptacles and switches vertical, with the grounding pin up and the toggle up in the on position. F. Install all switches on the strike side of the door, with the edge of the outlet box approximately 5” from the door frame. G. Provide plaster rings on all outlet boxes to permit flush installation of devices. H. In all wet or damp areas, provide a weatherproof enclosure that will permit the device to be protected while the device is in use. I. Prior to installation and as part of the contract, relocate any device a distance of 5 feet in any direction at the request of the Owner. 3.2 RECEPTACLES A. Install receptacles with the ground pin up or to the right. B. Provide weather resistant receptacles for all exterior devices. Provide with weatherproof cover. C. Provide tamperproof receptacles in the following locations: 1. Waiting room 2. Child care areas 3. All receptacles in dwelling units of residential facilities (Type R occupancies). 3.3 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS: A. Refer to Specification Section 260100 – Basic Materials and Methods for mounting heights. 3.4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Provide all necessary mounting brackets, wiring, low voltage transformers and control relays required to provide control of areas indicated. B. Set the initial time delay and sensitivity adjustments as directed by the Owner’s Representative. 3.5 TESTING A. Test all receptacles for proper voltage, polarity and grounding. B. Test all GFI receptacles for proper voltage, polarity, grounding, and verify the receptacle trips at 6 milliamperes or less. C. Rewire receptacles as required until receptacles test properly. END OF SECTION 262720 Lakeview Health Services Motor Control Equipment 262910-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 262910 - MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Motor Rated Switches 2. Manual Motor Starters 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All motor control equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data including voltage, current, interrupting rating, and enclosure type for the following: 1. Motor Rated Switches 2. Manual Motor Starters 1.5 FIELD SUPERVISION A. Provide field supervision and start-up by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. Provide certification that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Provide motor starters, disconnect switches, etc., as listed on the Electric Equipment and Control Schedule on the drawings. 2. Motor controllers shall comply with NEMA standards having general purpose NEMA 1 or 1B enclosure unless otherwise called for. Provide explosion proof, weather resistant or watertight construction as required. 3. Starters shall be minimum NEMA size 0 with overloads in each phase sized per NEC, nameplate motor full load amperage, service factor, and motor operating conditions. 4. Pad lock arrangements shall be provided to lock the disconnecting device in the "off" position. 5. Provide normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts as required to perform all required automatic control functions specified. Coordinate with the mechanical contractor. 6. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, devices, relays, transformers, selector switches, and electric thermostats as required for functions called for. B. Motor Rated Switches: 1. Manually operated, full voltage controller. 2. Rated for 2 HP at 240 VAC, single phase and 3 HP at 480 VAC, single phase. 3. No integral overload protection. 4. NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure, as called for on the plans. 5. Pilot light. 6. Handle lock-out device. 7. Design Make: Square D Class 2510 Lakeview Health Services Motor Control Equipment 262910-2 West End Heights 2 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Square D b. GE c. Siemens d. Cutler Hammer e. Allen Bradley C. Manual Motor Starter: 1. Manually operated, full voltage controller. 2. Rated for 2 HP at 120/240 VAC, single phase and 3 HP at 480 VAC, single phase. 3. One overload protection device per phase. 4. Non-reversing, Reversing, or Two-Speed as called for on the plans. 5. Surface mounted NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure, as called for on the plans. 6. Integral pilot light. 7. Handle lock-out device. 8. Where called for on the Electric Equipment and Control Schedule, provide the following for remote control by the Building Temperature Control System: a. Oversized/duplex enclosure b. H-O-A Selector Switch c. Relay with 30 ampere, horsepower rated contacts and coil voltage to match the Temperature Control System control voltage. Provide with NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure, as called for on the plans. 9. Design Make: Square D Class 2510 with Class 8501 relay. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Square D b. GE c. Siemens d. Cutler Hammer e. Allen Bradley f. Allen Bradley D. Packaged Control Unit: 1. The packaged control unit shall be provided by the Division 23 Contractor/Equipment Vendor and connected by Electrical Contractor. 2. A package control unit generally consists of pre-wired disconnect switches, starters, control devices and starters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Clearly identify all motor control equipment indicating the name of the equipment served, and the panel or motor control center is fed from. B. Coordinate all controller requirements, coil voltages, overload sizes, and mounting locations with the Division 23 Contractor. C. Provide ¾” plywood backboards for mounting all equipment. Paint gray. D. Install all motor controllers true and level. E. Maximum height to the operating handle shall be 5’-0”. F. Provide enclosures with NEMA rating as required for the installation. G. Provide weathertight hubs on all NEMA 3R enclosures. Install NEMA 3R enclosures a minimum of 0.25” off the back wall to prevent condensation and rust. Lakeview Health Services Motor Control Equipment 262910-3 West End Heights 3 H. Provide miscellaneous bolts, washers, nuts, clips, lockwashers, hardware, etc. as required to install equipment. I. Unload, move, handle, set in place, install, erect, assemble, connect, and test all items as required. J. Provide minimum NEC working clearance for all equipment. K. Verify cable/lug sizes for terminations. 3.2 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Provide overloads and fuses. Coordinate sizes with Division 23 contractor. B. Coordinate all control wiring and conduit with the Division 23 contractor. C. Prior to releasing the motor controller submittals, the Division 26 contractor shall obtain verification in writing from the Division 23 contractor that all starter and disconnect sizes and types are correct. The Division 26 contractor shall bear all cost if written approval is not obtained prior to releasing the order and size changes are required. END OF SECTION 262910 Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 263200 - POWER GENERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. B. The electrical contractor shall provide a complete and operative natural gas, emergency generator set, fully enclosed in a weather protective housing, with all components being factory assembled and ready for use as a complete package. C. Power generation includes but is not limited to the following work: 1. Engine-Generators 2. Transfer switches 3. Cooling system 4. Exhaust system 5. Any general contracting work required for proper installation (e.g., wall cuts, roof penetrations, patching, etc.) 6. Weatherproof Enclosure 7. Control/alarm panel at generator and transfer switch 8. Remote control/alarm panel 9. Feeders and overcurrent protection 10. Performance Testing 11. Training 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of all equipment in the complete system shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacture of engine driven standby generator systems, of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. The System Supplier shall meet the following: 1. Be a firm that has been engaged in supervising installation of and servicing engine generator sets for a minimum of 10 years. 2. Maintain a factory authorized service organization with factory trained service technicians. 3. Be located and have a full service branch within a 60 mile radius of the project. 4. Maintain a stock of standard spare parts and offer 24 hour service availability, 7 days a week. The supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to maintain over the counter availability of at least 90% of any required parts. The generator set supplier shall guarantee 100% parts availability within 48 hours from the time an order is entered with the dealer. 5. Own a fleet of trailer mounted generator sets with units comparable one being supplied, available for use by the Owner to prevent extended down time. C. The system installer shall be qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with engine generator system installation work similar to that required for project. D. All materials and parts comprising the unit shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and free from all defects or imperfections affecting performance. E. The following testing shall have been conducted on a separate, representative, preproduction prototype model of the generator set specified. 1. Complete thermal evaluation of all electrical parts must include actual measurement by thermocouples of all internal generator and exciter hot spot temperatures. No position measured any place in the windings must exceed the temperature rise limits of NEMA for the particular type of insulation system used. These tests must be performed on a prototype generator and prime mover combination. Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-2 West End Heights 2 2. With the system operating at rated volts, amps, power factor and speed, the prototype generator terminals must be short circuited ten times on all three phases for a duration of ten seconds. Generator set must build up and perform normally without manual intervention of any kind such as resetting of circuit breakers or other tripping devices, when short circuit is removed. 3. With the prototype generator set operating at no load, rated speed and voltage, the AC sensing circuit to the regulator must be disconnected and remain disconnected for a period of at least one hour. The generator set must be fully operative after the test and without evidence of any kind of damage. 4. Torsional fatigue tests must be performed on the complete prototype generator set. Calculations based on engine and generator data separately are not acceptable. 5. The prototype generator, exciter and voltage regulator characteristic must be matched to the torque curve of the prime mover. a. With the generator set operating at rated speed, voltage and load, reduce speed to half rated by manually overriding the governor control. Generator set must recover to full speed with the rated load connected when the governor control is returned to its normal mode. b. Calculations must demonstrate that the exciter and voltage regulator will permit utilization of at least 80% of maximum available prime mover torque at all speeds between 50% and rated speed and with rated load connected to its terminals, will provide fast and positive recovery from transient disturbances. 6. Endurance testing of at least 500 hours at rated load and speed is required without damage or failures of electrical or mechanical components occurring to the prototype generator set. 7. The prototype generator must sustain at least 90% of no load voltage for ten seconds with 250% of rated load at zero power factor connected to its terminals. 8. Temperature rise tests must be performed on all components of the cooling system. All shutdown devices must be tested by actually simulating cooling or oil system malfunctions. Simulating failure conditions by shorting or opening sensing circuits only, is not acceptable. F. The system shall conform to the following standards: 1. Applicable articles of the 2014 NFPA 70 National Electric Code 2. Applicable articles of the 2014 NFPA 37 3. UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches". 4. All standby generator system components, including automatic transfer switches, which are UL listed and labeled. 5. The system shall comply with applicable portions of IEEE Standard 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to standby power. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION A. The generator set start-stop sequence shall be initiated manually or automatically from a transfer switch auxiliary contact. The control system shall automatically engage the cranking motor, sense engine starting speed, disengage the motor and arm the engine protection circuit. B. The generator set shall immediately shut down in the event of overspeed, low oil pressure, high water temperature and overcrank. Cause of shutdown shall be indicated by a light annunciator. System logic shall prevent restart until fault is cleared. There shall be a provision for manual and emergency shutdown. C. The generator set shall automatically start upon failure of normal source voltage. Provide a field adjustable from 3 to 30 seconds delay time control between normal source failure and engine starting. D. The system shall transfer loads from normal source power to emergency source when engine-generator reaches 90% of its rated voltage. E. The system shall retransfer emergency loads from the emergency generator to the normal source a field adjustable ten minutes after normal source has reached 90% or more of normal voltage. Provide a 5 to 25 minute adjustable timer. If emergency generator fails while supplying load, retransfer emergency loads from emergency generator to normal source instantaneously when normal source has 90% or more of normal voltage. F. The system shall run the engine for a period of five minutes after retransfer of emergency loads to normal source. The engine-generator will then shut down, automatically resetting and leaving all controls ready for the next emergency start condition. G. The system shall use a time clock to automatically exercise engine once each week. The time clock contacts shall simulate loss of normal voltage, start engine and shut engine down after fifteen minutes of operation. The Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-3 West End Heights 3 load shall not transfer to the emergency source during the exercise time. Provide a selector switch to permit cycling engine-generator under load or no-load conditions. H. Motors shall be started across-the-line unless otherwise called for. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit six copies of shop drawings on equipment and accessories. Include the following: 1. Engine-generator set, including engine, radiator, alternator, circuit protection, fuel consumption, performance ratings, thermal ratings, heat generation. 2. Engine controls, including starting controls. 3. Generator instrumentation and controls. 4. Catalog cuts, bill of materials, description data and spare parts list for specified equipment. 5. Mounting arrangement, floor plans, elevations, overall dimensions including accessories, foundation, bedrail and/or bolts, power and control conduit entrance space. 6. Equipment pad details approved by the engine-generator manufacturers. 7. Battery charger and regulator. 8. Batteries, mounting rack, accessories. 9. Automatic transfer switch and accessories. 10. Exhaust equipment, flexible pipe, including method of mounting and overall height above floor. 11. Cooling system piping arrangement. 12. Wiring diagrams of all equipment, external and internal connections and interconnections. 13. Tests and field supervision reports as called for. 14. Load analysis to demonstrate generator system will start and operate loads, within generator ratings. 15. Record Drawings: a. Provide record copies of all drawings, revised to reflect changes, corrections, modifications, etc., made to equipment prior to shipment or installed in the field. b. Drawings shall accurately cover equipment at time of project closeout. c. Submit at least five copies of record drawings. 16. Instruction Books: a. Provide at least five copies of composite instruction books covering this equipment. b. Composite Instruction Books Shall Include As A Minimum The Following: 1) Instructions covering overall equipment. 2) Instructions covering all major and serviceable components and accessories. 3) Recommended spare parts with current prices. 4) Complete renewal parts information. 5) Instructions, both individually and collectively, shall adequately describe receipt, handling, care, inspection, installation, operation and maintenance of equipment. 6) Instruction books shall be used for equipment installation and submitted prior to project closeout. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGINE-GENERATOR A. Engine - Natural Gas Fuel: 1. Single fuel carburetion for natural gas. 2. Minimum six cylinder, four cycle, 1800 rpm, per manufacturer's standard. 3. Engine block shall be a single casting. 4. Continuous stand-by rating shall be adequate to provide maximum kW output of generator under full load and motor starting kVA requirements. 5. Dual-fuel carburetor, secondary gas regulator, electric solenoid shutoff valve, strainer (fuel filter), gas shutoff cock. 6. Fuel, lubrication oil and intake air filters. 7. Provide primary gas regulator if required by characteristics of local utility gas supply. 8. Full pressure lubrication system with gear type oil pump, full flow oil filter with replaceable filter element, equipped with spring-loaded bypass valve as an insurance against stoppage of lubricating oil in the event filter becomes clogged; watercooled oil cooler and thermostat. 9. One or more oil or dry type air cleaners of sufficient capacity to protect engine working parts from dust and dirt. Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-4 West End Heights 4 10. Provide 50/50 solution of ethylene glycol for engine closed loop cooling system. 11. Radiator coolant shall have a minimum expected life of 6,000 hours or 6 years. The coolant shall contain no phosphates or silicates and shall be recyclable. 12. Provide water jacket heater, thermostat and wiring, rated for 120 volt, single phase operation. 13. Water cooled with fresh water type radiator, belt-driven pusher fan, centrifugal water circulating pump, thermostat temperature control, liquid-cooled exhaust manifolds. Provide radiator duct connection flange. 14. Provide a 120 volt, single phase space heater in the alternator enclosure. The space heater shall be designed to minimize condensation on the alternator. 15. 12, 24 or 32 volt starting system per manufacturer's standard. 16. Woodward, electronic governor for maximum of 2% frequency regulation no load to full load. 17. Emissions Regulation Compliance: The proposed generator set shall be EPA Tier 4 Certified and in compliance with the State of New York Emission regulations at the time of installation/commissioning. Actual engine emissions values must be in compliance with EPA Tier 4 emissions standards per ISO 8178-D2 Emissions Cycle at specified ekW/bHP rating. Utilization of the “Transition Program for Equipment Manufacturers” also know as “Flex Credits” to achieve Tier 4 certification is not acceptable. a. USEPA Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engine RICE) regulations at 40 CFR 63 ZZZZ. B. Generator: 1. 120/208 volts, three phase, four wire, wye connected, 60 Hz. a. 75 kVA, 60kW continuous stand-by rating at 0.8 power factor. b. Four or six pole compatible with engine rpm, revolving field, amortisseur winding, static exciter, solid state voltage regulator. c. Temperature compensated V/F voltage regulator and a permanent magnet type excitation system capable of 300% rated current for 10 seconds. The generator shall be directly connected to the engine flywheel housing and the rotor shall be driven through a semi-flexible flange to ensure alignment. The insulation system shall be Class H as defined by NEMA MG1. Temperature rise shall be within NEMA MGI-22.40 definition. Temperature rise shall not exceed 90 degrees C. d. Voltage regulation shall be within + -0.5% of rated voltage at 60 Hz from no load to full load. Instantaneous voltage dip no greater than 20% of rated voltage when full load at rated power factor is applied to generator. Recovery to stable operation shall occur within 7 seconds. A rheostat shall provide a minimum of 5% voltage adjustment from rated value. e. Sealed, prelubricated ball bearings. f. Direct-driven generator cooling blower. g. Provide extra large terminal box for cable connection to generator leads. h. Provide adequate wiring space for conduits. Power cables shall exit the bottom of the generator. i. Connection to engine shall be direct, through steel disc type flexible coupling; single bearing construction to eliminate dangers of field misalignment. C. Engine/Generator Controls: 1. Provide generator output molded case circuit breaker, three pole, common trip, thermal magnetic with a solid state trip unit, to completely protect the generator from overloads; frame size as called for, otherwise, size according to NEC. Circuit breaker shall be mounted and connected in a guarded drip proof enclosure meeting NEMA 1, IP 22 and IEC 144. Provide mechanical lugs on the load side of the circuit breaker. Connect the circuit breaker to the engine/generator shut down circuits. a. The generator set shall contain a complete solid state start/stop control which starts the engine on closing contact and stops the engine on opening start circuit after eight attempts to start the engine have failed. Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-5 West End Heights 5 b. Provide a generator set control panel meeting the following: 1) The panel shall control, protect, meter and annunciate all functions necessary to confirm the operational status of the generator set. 2) It shall be designed and built by the engine - generator manufacturer, mounted on the generator with options of facing each side or rear. 3) Incorporate 100% solid state microprocessor based control circuitry, with circuitry, keypad controls and digital metering. 4) Annunciation shall include individual alarm lights which will allow fault identification while retaining a view of generator operating parameters and a silenceable audible alarm. 5) Fault condition set points shall be verified without exposing the generator set to the actual condition. 6) Engine governing and overspeed fault circuitry shall utilize individual circuitry to assure speed control protection. 7) Governor, voltage regulator, or complete panel shall be capable of mounting remotely and shall be compatible with controls of various manufacturers. 8) Circuitry shall be sealed in a dust tight and watertight module with sealed wire entries into the enclosure. Control panel shall not require panel heaters in outdoor or humid environments. Internal terminal strips shall be both crimped and soldered to assure circuit integrity. 9) Panel module shall comply with IP 64 and NEMA 4 for environmental protection, while the total panel shall qualify for IEC 144, IP 22 and NEMA 12. Panel functions shall be identified by ISO labels. 10) LCD read out for Fuel pressure, lubricating oil pressure, coolant temperature, battery charge rate ammeter, engine rpm, engine running hours, system diagnostic codes, generator AC Volts, Amperes and Frequency c. Provide output terminal voltage adjustment rheostat. d. Provide a solid state 24 volt DC microprocessor alarm module mounted in the panel and including red and yellow flashing LEDs and silenceable alarm horn to annunciate alarm conditions for high and low coolant temperature, low oil pressure, low DC voltage and system not in automatic. The horn shall resound on subsequent alarms after silencing/acknowledgment, with the flashing LED displaying a solid light until the condition is corrected. Low fuel level alarm and two spare LEDs shall be available to accept remote switch inputs e. Provide oil-tight heavy duty type control switches and pushbuttons f. High water temperature, overspeed and low lubricating oil pressure shutdown contacts. g. Bell alarm for engine shutdown or overcranking. h. Switch for selecting hand or automatic operation mounted on instrument panel. i. Run-off-auto selector switch mounted on generator instrument panel. j. Provide remote manual shutdown pushbutton to meet NFPA 110. k. Provision for a remote communication module (CCM) shall allow distant computer control (via telephone line) of up to eight (8) paralleled generator sets, including start/stop operation and viewing all system parameters available from the control panel. The CCM module shall be capable of remote mounting at least 300 m (1000 ft) from the control panel. l. Provide remote annunciation solid state panel which includes red and yellow indicating lights and silenceable alarm horn for low oil pressure shutdown, low coolant temperature alarm, high coolant temperature shutdown, overcrank, overspeed shutdown, low fuel level alarm, battery charger malfunction (via charger switch), generator on load. D. Engine-Generator Plant Mounting: 1. Provide welded, self-supporting, structural steel frame subbase. 2. Pre-drill subbase and provide all mounting hardware and anchors to floor supports. 3. Vibration isolators shall isolate the engine and generator from the base to allow fast trouble free installation while providing at least 95% linear vibration. The isolators shall consist of a highly resilient rubber compound resistant to weather, heat and age and impervious to oil, water, antifreeze and diesel fuel. The isolator shall incorporate a duel spring rate for non-abrupt displacement and shall comply with Uniform Building Code (UBC) Seismic Zone 4 requirements. 4. All oil and water shall be valved and piped to outside of skid 5. All engine wiring shall be marked with specific wire number every six inches and encased in a sealed loom. E. Design Equipment: 1. Natural Gas, 130 kW and Below: Generac 2. Diesel, 600 kW and Below: Generac Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-6 West End Heights 6 3. Diesel, Above 600 kW: Caterpillar F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Generac 2. Caterpillar 3. Cummins/Onan 4. Kohler 5. Detroit Diesel 6. Approved equal 2.2 STARTING CONTROLS A. Provide Engine Automatic Starting Control As Follows: 1. Starting cycle initiated by auxiliary contact in automatic transfer switch panel. 2. Open fuel pump and cooling water supply solenoid valves. 3. Synchronous motor-driven or pneumatic timer providing adjustable number of cranking cycles (1 to 4) of ten seconds crank and ten seconds rest, or continuous cranking cycle of up to 75 seconds. 4. Positive cranking disconnect relay preventing cranking after engine fires. 5. Automatic engine shutdown. 6. Close fuel pump and cooling water supply solenoid valves. 7. If high water temperature, overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, or engine overcranking lockout contacts operate, one audible alarm must operate and there must be visual indication of particular contact that operated; reset button. 8. Common fault contacts, 10 ampere contact rating, number as required, wired to terminal board for remote alarm signal. 9. Incorporate in engine-generator control cabinet. 2.3 SAFETY SHUTDOWN AND ALARM CIRCUITS A. Provide safety shutdown circuits with common reset switch, individual fault-lamp relay, indicating lamps, auxiliary relays and common fault contacts for local and remote alarm functions wired to terminal boards; fault indication as follows: 1. Shut down conditions: a. Overspeed. b. Low lube oil pressure. c. High water temperature and low water temperature d. Overcranking. 2. Alarm conditions: a. AC battery charger failure. b. DC battery charger failure. c. Overload (circuit breaker trip). B. Provide remote emergency stop pushbutton. 1. Emergency Stop Break Glass Operator Pushbutton a. 30.5mm operator b. NEMA Type 4X c. Enclosure minimum 3.88” W x 4” H x 3” D d. Label: “EMERGENCY GENERATOR STOP”. e. Label shall be white lettering on a red background. f. Pushbutton shall be located outside the room housing the generator. For systems located outdoors, the pushbutton shall be located external to the weatherproof enclosure. 2. Design Equipment: a. Pilla 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-7 West End Heights 7 a. Pilla b. Eaton c. Schneider Electric d. Dayton e. Approved equal 2.4 BATTERY CHARGER A. Provide Battery Charger And Regulator As Follows: 1. Automatic battery charge sensing device. 2. Automatic charging at rate necessary to maintain battery at full charge; with full charge in 24 hours after 5 minutes of cranking. 3. Automatically disconnects from battery during engine starting. 4. Test switch to allow manual sensing of battery charge 5. Alarm relays for low DC voltage, high DC voltage, AC power failure and a summary contact for charger failure. 6. Sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure for wall mounting. Battery charger shall be mounted and wired inside enclosure. 7. Charger shall operate on 120 volts AC. 8. Design equipment: LaMarche 9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Exide, LaMarche, or approved equal. 2.5 BATTERIES A. Provide Batteries as Follows: 1. Lead acid type. 2. Shipped dry, with electrolyte in separate container. 3. Provide corrosion-resistant battery mounting rack, battery interconnecting cables and terminals, hydrometer, etc. 2.6 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Muffler: 1. Quiet, spark arrester, Critical (25 dB(a) attenuation) classification. Size as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Provide four bracket supports welded to sides of muffler for horizontal installations. 3. Stainless flexible exhaust connector. 4. Design equipment: Maxim 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burgess, Maxim or approved equal. B. Exhaust Piping: Sections of seamless, stainless steel flexible exhaust piping between engine and muffler. 2.7 WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE A. Provide a weather protected generator set enclosure. The enclosure shall be accurately dimensioned to provide ease of maintenance and proper operation of the diesel generator set while under load conditions. B. Level 1 Sound Attenuation. C. The weather protected enclosure shall be a steel frame with prepainted exterior panel construction as required to house the generator and its auxiliary items. The design and construction shall be modular. The roof shall be strengthened to support the critical grade exhaust silencer as recommended by the engine manufacturer for this application as well as snow loads. D. All louvers to be designed to prevent the entrance of driving rainwater, but to have sufficient free area to allow for 120% of the total engine-generator cooling air requirements used in this application. All louvers shall include birdscreens to prevent the entrance of foreign objects. E. The critical grade exhaust silencer specified shall be horizontally mounted and all piping to be complete. Roof penetrations for piping shall be absolutely weatherproofed. The design shall prevent the entrance of rain and allow for thermal expansion and vibration of the exhaust piping without chafing or stress to the exhaust system. Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-8 West End Heights 8 F. The enclosure shall be mounted directly to the engine base or a heavy duty subbase containing both the engine-generator package and the enclosure. The engine-generator-enclosure package shall be delivered to the jobsite in one piece. Drop over enclosures shipped to the jobsite separately are not acceptable. G. A 90 degree elbow with flipper cap will be provided to direct the exhaust discharge upwards. A skirt will be provided to prevent rain and snow from entering the enclosure. The skirt will be provided at all roof penetrations. H. The enclosure shall utilize all hinged side access doors. A minimum of (2) doors per side and (1) rear door shall be provided. Door hinges and pins shall be of stainless steel. I. The enclosure shall be equipped with single entry point for commercial power supply circuits and wiring by the Contractor for the battery charger, jacket water heater and battery pad heaters. The box shall be mounted within the enclosure and allow for site condition conduit entry. All internal wiring and runs to the auxiliary equipment supplied with the package shall be pre-wired at the factory by the manufacturer in conduit or sealtight. J. Generator to be placed on concrete pad as dimensioned on drawings. Electrical conduits and conductors shall be roughed to generator within enclosure. K. Provide flexible connections to all components field mounted to the generator. 2.8 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Description: 1. Constructed in accordance with UL Standard 1008. 2. Double throw, mechanically and electrically interlocked. 3. Operated by momentary energization of a single coil or double coil with mechanical latching in both normal and emergency positions. 4. Operating voltage for transfer obtained from source to which load is to be transferred. 5. Three phase, three wire, three pole, solid neutral 250 volt normal and emergency power source contacts. 6. Ampere rating as called for. 7. Provide magnetic blowout coils and arc barriers on each pole. 8. Provide voltage supervisory relays on each phase, such that transfer and engine start is affected should any one phase of the three phase supply be below 70% of normal voltage. 9. Minimum 3 cycle short circuit and withstand ratings, in rms symmetrical amperes, shall be as follows: Switch Ampere Rating Closing and Withstand Rating 100 – 400 42,000 10. Terminals front connected. 11. Provide dual transfer switch operator with adjustable time delay 1-300 seconds set at 3 seconds to allow motor loads to be demagnetized between the time that the closed source is opened and the open source closed. B. Provide pilot lights as follows: 1. Oil-tight, transformer operated, six volt long life bulb. 2. Green, indicating normal switch position. 3. Red, indicating emergency switch position. 4. Fuse for each light. C. Provide the following accessory features: 1. Adjustable time delay before engine starting. 2. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal field adjustable 0 to 25 minutes, with five minute engine unloaded running time. 3. Oil-tight test switch, engine start and transfer, key pad operated. 4. Oil-tight pilot lights. 5. Time clock exerciser with transfer. Retransfer shall be automatic at end of exercise period, unless Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-9 West End Heights 9 bypass switch is pressed. 6. Auxiliary contacts on shaft. No common wires for auxiliary contacts. Bring wires to terminal block, suitably labeled. 7. Provide any other accessories as may be required to achieve operation as described in this specification. 8. Provide box of spare fuses and lamps for pilot lights. 9. Provide NEMA 1 sheet metal enclosure for wall mounting, front door hinged. 10. All time delay relays shall be microprocessor based and shall be field adjustable and shall show the actual setting time in minutes or seconds. 11. A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all three separate phase to phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and emergency source. 12. A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for both normal and emergency source. 13. An LCD readout display shall display normal source and emergency source availability. 14. Design Equipment: Russelectric. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Asco 2. Onan 3. Generac 4. Cutler Hammer 5. Approved Equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Completely coordinate installation, assure that elements of the system are compatible, operational and correct. B. Provide rigging to unload, move and set in place engine-generator. The generator is located on the roof. Provide a crane as required to set in place. C. Provide rigging to unload, move and set in place engine-generator. Field verify, before bidding, rigging method to be used to install generator in building. Provide all necessary cutting and patching of existing walls to rig generator into building. If necessary provide factory authorized representative to disassemble and reassemble generator to rig unit into building. D. Coordinate installation of the emergency generator with the General Contractor, the Structural Steel SubContractor, and the Roofing Sub-Contractor. E. Provide miscellaneous bolts, washers, nuts, clips, lockwashers, small hardware, etc., of durium or equal rust resistant material, to make installation complete. F. Fill cooling system with 50 percent glycol (anti-freeze) solution, per manufacturer's recommendations. G. Refer to "Grounding" section of specifications. H. Install equipment plumb, level and true. I. Leave maximum space available in front, along side, etc., all items of equipment, to allow easy access and servicing of serviceable components. Meet NEC requirements. 3.2 FIELD SUPERVISION A. Provide field supervision/service at no additional cost to cover inspection, test and start-up of this equipment. B. Submittal shall state the amount of field supervision/service recommended by vendor to cover critical points of installation, inspection, test and start-up. C. The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational compliance by a representative of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer. The engine lubricating oil and antifreeze, as recommended Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-10 West End Heights 10 by the system manufacturer, shall be provided by the generator set dealer. If switchgear and generator sets are furnished by different manufacturers, technical representatives of both manufacturers' authorized dealers shall verify the installation meets requirements. Any deficiencies shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor. D. The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the Contractor during start-up, systems check, adjusting and any site testing required after the installation is complete. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Standby electric generating system components, complete electric plant and controls shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials and factory workmanship for a period of (2) years. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at manufacturer’s option, free of charge for a period of (2) years with travel time and mileage free of charge for the first year of operation. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed in service. 3.4 INSTRUCTION & TRAINING A. Provide verbal and written instructions to Owner appointed personnel in the proper and safe manner of operating equipment. B. Instruction shall include proper maintenance, testing and trouble shooting techniques and methods. C. Instruction shall be given by a manufacturer certified technicians or mechanics. D. Provide representatives for each piece of equipment in the system. 3.5 LOAD COORDINATION A. Generator ratings specified are minimum acceptable capacity. Vendor shall provide larger size set if required to properly operate the load. B. Provide load analysis demonstrating generator set will properly start, operate and carry on a standby basis, all loads called to receive emergency power. 3.6 The DDC system provided by the Division 23 contractor will provide sequenced or delayed start for certain loads. The system supplier shall coordinate delayed start requirements with the Division 23 contractor and Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-11 West End Heights 11 3.7 WIRING A. Install power and control wiring between engine-generator set, transfer switch, battery charger, louvers, dampers, controls, coolers, batteries, day tank and all other various and related equipment. B. Comply with Manufacturer's Instruction Books. C. Maintain phasing standards as called for. D. Color code and identify control and power wires and cables as called for. E. Provide copper, 600 volt insulation minimum, control wiring; do not splice. F. Provide "crimp-on" type terminals for control wire terminations, as called for. G. Provide liquid-tight jacketed flexible conduit for all connections to engine, generator and to day tank. H. Provide green ground conductor in each conduit run. 3.8 ENGINE-GENERATOR INSTALLATION A. Install where shown on plans. Provide a concrete equipment pad. The approximate pad dimensions are shown on the plans. The contractor shall obtain the approval of the engine-generator manufacturer for the pad prior to installation. B. Provide necessary anchor bolts at proper locations, place by templates if required, for proper setting of enginegenerator. C. Perform full operational test of complete system at full connected load. Provide notification of tests to be conducted in presence of Owner's Representative, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Entire system shall be complete and operational and shall be test operated, including simulated loss of normal power, all control devices shall be operated to test their function. E. Determine exact requirements, verify locations and comply with applicable regulations in installing equipment. F. Provide the services of the manufacturer's representative to check out the system and instruct the Owner in the operation of the system. Furnish written statement to the Owner's Representative that the check-out and instruction service has been provided. Include statement that system operates properly, as called for. Submit statement as a submittal for review. 3.9 FUEL PIPING A. Plumbing trade shall provide complete fuel piping to engine-generator and make final connection. B. Furnish fuel filter, fuel solenoid valve, secondary regulator, gas shutoff cock, flexible fuel piping and fuel piping diagram. C. Coordinate fuel piping size with these items. The Division 26 contractor and system manufacturer are responsible for determining the final size of the fuel piping. D. Coordinate all work 3.10 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Provide complete exhaust piping system, including stack supports to floor or structure, except flexible connection at engine and muffler. B. Provide mufflers, flexible exhaust connections and provide condensate trap with valve on exhaust piping system and on muffler, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide necessary insulation, wall and/or roof thimbles, including openings, flashing, etc., where exhaust Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-12 West End Heights 12 system penetrates roof. D. Install thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. E. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. F. Do not apply insulation to hot equipment. G. Apply insulation using the staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately. H. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities. I. Cover insulated surfaces with aluminum jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at least two inches. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. J. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. K. Protection - insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period to avoid damage and deterioration. 3.11 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for system components as indicated. Refer to Section 260520 - Grounding for additional requirements. 3.12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Provide repair or replacement for all damage and defacement, whether functional or nonfunctional, to all equipment from the time it is unloaded, during installation and during period of beneficial use and until installation is accepted. 3.13 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. After substantial completion punch list items have been finished, the contractor and manufacturers representative will provide the following tests, in the presence of the Owner's head of facilities and engineer: 1. Prestart Checks: a. Oil level b. Water level c. Battery connection and charge condition d. Air start supply pressure (if so equipped) e. Engine to control interconnects f. Engine generator intake/exhaust obstructions g. Engine room ventilation obstructions h. Removal of all packing materials Lakeview Health Services Power Generation 263200-13 West End Heights 13 2. Operation tests: a. Load - One-hour operation at 80% of full load rating. Two hours operation at 100% of full load rating. After the first half-hour stabilization period at full load, the following shall be recorded at fifteen minute intervals: 1) Voltage and amperage (3 phase), frequency 2) Fuel pressure, oil pressure and water temperature 3) Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet, ambient temperature. 4) Kilowatts, Power Factor, Kvars 5) Generator Temperature 6) Proper operation of controls, engine shutdown and safety devices shall be demonstrated. 7) The manufacturer's representative shall provide inductive load banks and field engineer for the test. Building load shall not be used. 8) Should these tests indicate that the equipment does not meet the specified performance requirements, National Electric Code and Local codes, the cost of all corrective measures shall be borne by the contractor? 3.14 OWNER TRAINING A. The system manufacturer's representative(s) shall provide a complete orientation for the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include both classroom and hands-on instruction of a total of not less than 4 hours. Topics covered shall include control operation, schematics, wiring diagrams, meters, indicators, warning lights, shutdown system and routine maintenance. B. This training shall include all system components provide manufactures representatives from all components in the complete emergency power system. C. Provide an additional four (4) hours of training six (6) months after the system acceptance. END OF SECTION 263200 Lakeview Health Services Surge Protective Devices 264300-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 264300 – SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work as called for in the contract documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Service Entrance SPD 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals with wiring diagrams, installation information, testing and maintenance procedures, and operational information for the transient protection system. B. Provide the following test data submittals: 1. Manufacturer will provide UL-1449, Third Edition data card showing the Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) and “Engineering Considerations” for the specific catalog number submitted. “Typical” UL 1449, Third Edition data is not acceptable. 2. Per the requirements of NEC Article 285.6, the devices shall be marked with the short circuit current rating. This rating shall meet or exceed the available fault current. Test data shall be provided to demonstrate the short circuit current rating has been tested on a complete device. 3. Submit test report data clearly demonstrating the maximum surge current rating has been tested on a complete SPD unit, including all necessary fusing/overcurrent protection, thermal disconnects, integral disconnects and monitoring systems. 4. Submit data demonstrating that the SPD unit is capable of surviving the specified minimum repetitive surge current rating. The rating is based on surviving a specified number of ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10kA) impulses without failure or degradation in performance characteristics of more than 10%. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All SPD units shall meet the requirements of the following standards: 1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1, C62.41.2, C62.45, AND C62.72 2. UL 1449, Third Edition 3. UL 1283 4. NEC – NFPA 70 5. NFPA 6. OSHA 7. IEEE Std. 1100 B. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction and details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. 1.5 INSTRUCTION BOOKS A. Provide three copies of all product literature to the Owner. Include with the Operations and Maintenance Manuals furnished at the end of the project. Instruction books shall include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of the firm servicing the equipment. 2. Description of warrantee. 3. Blow-up diagrams of equipment with listing of components. 4. Description of available accessories 5. Recommended spare parts list 6. Directions for receiving, installation, care, and maintenance of equipment. Lakeview Health Services Surge Protective Devices 264300-2 West End Heights 2 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a 5 year product warranty. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of system protection modules, and shall also include labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE A. General: 1. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. System shall be suitable for use in computer rooms without interfering with data equipment. 2. Operating conditions of 30-130º F and 15-85% humidity, non condensing. 3. Heavy duty, NEMA 12 dust-tight enclosure. 4. Each surge suppression element (metal oxide varister, or MOV) shall be individually fused such that a failure of one element or fuse shall not affect other surge suppression elements. 5. Surge suppression modules shall be individually replaceable. 6. Solid-state, long life, externally mounted LED visual status indicators that indicate the on-line status and operation integrity of each phase of the unit. 7. Built-in, push-to-test feature to test the integrity of all modules, MOV’s, and fuses in the system. 8. One (1) Form C alarm output contact rated for 1 ampere at 120VAC for remote annunciation of SPD status. 9. Listed per UL 1449, Third Edition. B. Ratings: 1. 208Y/120 volts as required, 60 hertz, three phase, four wire. 2. Surge current rating of 250,000 amperes per phase, 125,000 amperes L-N, 125,000 amperes L-G, and 125,000 amperes N-G, based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 standard 8 by 20 microsecond current waveform. 3. 200,000 AIC short circuit rating. 4. Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) shall be as follows: Protection Mode 208Y/120V System L-N 330V L-G 400V N-G 400V L-L 600V 5. Capable of surviving 12,000 ANSI/IEEE, Category C3 (10kA) impulses without failure or degradation of original performance characteristics of more than 10%. C. Options: 1. Integral, non-fused disconnect switch in the cover of the unit. 2. Audible alarm tone to annunciate alarms. Provide with silence switch and push-to-test switch. 3. Resettable counter to totalize transient voltage surges in both normal and common mode. Readout shall be a six digit LCD display, located in the unit front cover. Provide with 10 year battery backup. 4. A UL 1283 approved high frequency extended range tracking filter for reduction of fast rise-time, high frequency transients and line noise. D. Design Make: Current Technology TransGuard E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Transtector 2. Square D 3. Eaton 4. Siemens 5. General Electric 6. Approved equal Lakeview Health Services Surge Protective Devices 264300-3 West End Heights 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. Contractor shall install suppression system immediately next to or on top of the distribution equipment. 2. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment to the distribution equipment shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturers shop drawings. 3. Conductor lengths shall be as short as possible, and shall not exceed 18”. 4. Conductors shall be twisted. 5. Install all conductors in conduit. B. Ground the SPD unit to the equipment grounding conductor and the service entrance ground. C. Connect SPD unit in parallel with the equipment being served. Connect to distribution equipment via a circuit breaker or disconnect switch to permit isolation. END OF SECTION 264300 Lakeview Health Services Interior Lighting 265100-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide complete lighting systems, including fixtures, mounting brackets, hangers, supports, fittings, lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents. Types of interior fixtures in this section include LED. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Lighting fixture shop drawings shall include photometric data for each fixture utilizing the specified lamp, ballast, reflector, and lens or louver. All luminaires shall be submitted in a single complete brochure. The brochure shall be a soft cover binder with each fixture separated by an identified index tab. Information on each fixture shall include: 1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number 2. Dimensioned Construction Drawing(s) 3. Standard Catalog "Cut" Sheet 4. Photometrics 5. Lens/Louver Type 6. LED Driver Type and Rating 7. Socket Type 8. Lamp Type 9. Maintenance Data 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lighting fixtures shall be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific type lighting fixtures specified and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. B. Verify the availability of all fixtures proposed to be used in the execution of the work prior to submitting for approval. The discontinuance of production of any fixture after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved fixture of comparable quality and design at no additional cost. C. Lighting fixtures shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule." Luminaire types, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the first manufacturer, and associated catalog number, listed in the "Luminaire Schedule." Provide a sample fixture from the factory for any products not listed as acceptable for approval. The Owner's Representative reserves the right to disapprove any fixture type submitted which is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the fixture specified. D. All luminaires shall meet the Total Luminaire Efficiency (TLE) requirements of the New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMPS A. General: 1. Unless specifically called for, all lamps shall be of a similar color as specified in the “Luminaire Schedule”. B. LED Retrofit lamps: 1. LED retrofit lamps shall be dimmable to 1%. 2. Color temperature shall match that of project luminaires. 3. Minimum 85 CRI. 4. Minimum 15,000 hour rated (L70). 5. Ambient temperature to be 25 degrees C. 6. Dimming driver to be 0 – 10V DC and compatible with luminaire. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lakeview Health Services Interior Lighting 265100-2 West End Heights 2 a. Philips b. General Electric c. Osram Sylvania 2.2 EMERGENCY LED INTEGRATED BATTERY PACK A. Switched and un-switched inputs to the driver allows the driver to switch to battery operation upon loss of line voltage, while permitting the luminaire to be switched by means of conventional light switches and occupancy sensors. Upon loss of un-switched line voltage, the driver shall automatically switch to battery backup. B. Upon restoration of power, the driver shall automatically switch back to utility power, and begin re-charging the battery. C. Suitable for use with 13 – 55 watt LED lamps and drivers. D. The battery and electronics shall be enclosed in a steel enclosure and installed within the luminaire housing. Provide remote mounting of the emergency ballast where required. E. Self-testing electronic circuitry shall automatically test the emergency lighting system for 30 seconds every 30 days, and for 90 minutes once per year. Failure of the system during a test shall cause an audible and visual alarm. F. The self-testing and self-diagnostics shall meet the requirements of NFPA 101 for periodic testing of emergency egress lighting equipment. G. Provide test switch and indicator light for each emergency ballast. H. The battery shall be maintenance free with a rated life of 7 – 10 years. Battery shall be sized to carry the rated load for a minimum of 90 minutes. Battery shall be sized for minimum 19.2 watt-hours. I. Provide with 5-year warrantee from the date of purchase 2.3 LED Driver A. Driver to be compatible with LED luminaire or lamp. B. Power factor shall be 0.9. C. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) to be 20%. D. Efficiency between 80% – 85%. E. Install remote driver within manufacturer specified allowable distance from luminaire. 2.4 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE A. The Luminaire Schedule is found on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Refer to the reflected ceiling plan for each area. Reflected ceiling plans indicate proper luminaire location and ceiling fitting type for recessed luminaires. Coordinate the proper arrangement with all other ceiling mounted devices. Contract Documents indicate luminaire type, quality, and quantity. Verify with the ceiling supplier design of actual ceiling installed in each area and coordinate compatible fixture ceiling fittings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's 'Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices. Lakeview Health Services Interior Lighting 265100-3 West End Heights 3 B. Provide fixtures and outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight. C. Verify ceiling type prior to ordering luminaires. Order luminaires with the appropriate trim fittings to match the ceiling type. Provide flange fittings for all luminaires installed in drywall ceilings. D. All luminaires shall be supported in accordance with the requirements dictated by the published local seismic zones. E. Where continuous, pendant mounted luminaires are specified, field measure all lengths. Order luminaires in sections as long as practical to minimize joints. Where joints are required, provide pre-wired quick connect terminations to wire between sections. 1. Install pendant mounted luminaires true and level. Provide adjustable aircraft hanger wire and fittings to facilitate level installation. F. Where luminaires are installed in recessed ceilings, independently support luminaires from the structure using minimum #12 AWG luminaire mounting wire at a minimum of two points. Do not support luminaires from the ceiling grid. G. All luminaires shall be free of finger marks, flaws, scratches, dents or other imperfections. 3.3 WIRING A. Lighting branch circuit wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit from the panel to an outlet box adjacent the luminaires in each space. B. Provide flexible metal whips from the outlet box to the first luminaire in the space. Luminaires may be connected in a “daisy-chain” configuration. 3.4 LAMPS A. Provide lamps in all luminaires. B. Replace any lamp whose color is determined to be unsatisfactory, or does not match other lamps. C. Replace all lamps that failed during the 1-year warranty period. D. All lamps shall be new and unused. If permanent lighting system is used for temporary construction lighting, lamps shall be replaced upon turn over to Owner. E. Furnish replacement lamps amounting to 15%, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner. 3.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lighting fixtures and equipment shall be delivered with UL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible in factoryfabricated containers. B. Fixtures and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Fixtures shall be protected from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Fixtures shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction. C. Handle interior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Replace all damaged fixtures or components. 3.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with other work including ceiling type, wires/cables, electrical boxes, fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of luminaires with other trades. 3.7 REUSE AND REPAIR OF EXISTING LUMINAIRES A. Reuse existing luminaires as called for on the plans. Lakeview Health Services Interior Lighting 265100-4 West End Heights 4 B. Replace broken, damaged, or worn lamp sockets. C. Replace lenses and louvers damaged during construction. D. Provide new lamps in existing luminaires. E. Clean lens, reflector, and interior of all luminaires. 3.8 FINAL CLEANING A. Prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, and lenses of all fixtures. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, and finger marks. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components. END OF SECTION 265100 Lakeview Health Services Exterior Lighting 265600-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 265600 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide complete lighting systems, including fixtures, poles, bases, mounting brackets, hangers, supports, fittings, lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents. Types of exterior fixtures in this section include LED. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Lighting fixture shop drawings shall include photometric data for each fixture utilizing the specified lamp, ballast, reflector, and lens or louver. All luminaires shall be submitted in a single complete brochure. The brochure shall be a soft cover binder with each fixture separated by an identified index tab. Information on each fixture shall include: 1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number 2. Dimensioned Construction Drawing(s) 3. Standard Catalog "Cut" Sheet 4. Photometrics 5. Lens/Louver Type 6. LED Driver Type and Rating 7. Socket Type 8. Maintenance Data 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lighting fixtures shall be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific type lighting fixtures specified and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, the engineer shall determine if the submitted equipment is equal to the design make. B. Verify the availability of all fixtures proposed to be used in the execution of the work prior to submitting for approval. The discontinuance of production of any fixture after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved fixture of comparable quality and design at no additional cost. C. Lighting fixtures shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule." Luminaire types, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the first manufacturer, and associated catalog number, listed in the "Luminaire Schedule." Provide a sample fixture from the factory for any products not listed as acceptable for approval. The Owner's Representative reserves the right to disapprove any fixture type submitted which is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the fixture specified. D. All luminaires shall meet the Total Luminaire Efficiency (TLE) requirements of the New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMPS A. General: 1. Unless specifically called for, all lamps shall be of a similar color. Provide incandescent and metal halide lamps to match the fluorescent colors specified. 2. Provide fluorescent lamps to match the existing lamp color within the facility. B. LED: 1. LED retrofit lamps and luminaires shall be IP65 rated. 2. Ambient temperature to be 25 degrees C. 3. Operating temperature rating shall be between -40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) and 50 degrees C (120 degrees F). 4. Minimum 50,000 hours operating life. Lakeview Health Services Exterior Lighting 265600-2 West End Heights 2 5. LED engine output based on IES LM-79 for photometric performance and life based on IES LM-80 lumen maintenance testing methods. 6. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 20% 7. Power factor of 0.9. 8. Color Rendering Index (CRI): 85. 2.2 LED Driver A. Driver to be compatible with LED luminaire or lamp. B. Power factor shall be 0.9. C. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) to be 20%. D. Efficiency between 80% – 85%. E. Install remote driver within manufacturer specified allowable distance from luminaire. 2.3 POLES A. Steel construction, round or square as indicated on the schedule. B. Durable powder coat finish. C. Provide straight poles for all poles 30’ and below. D. Provide tapered poles for all poles above 30’ E. Provide with anodized aluminum base cover. F. Provide poles pre-drilled for luminaire bracket arms. G. Poles shall be suitable for a 100 mph wind with a 140% gust factor, rated at the EPA of the luminaire combination on the pole. H. Provide 11-gauge steel for all poles below 25’ in height. I. Provide 7-gauge steel for all poles 25’ and higher. J. Provide with watertight handhole at the base of the pole. K. Provide with anchor bolts as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.4 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE A. The Luminaire Schedule is found on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's 'Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices. B. Provide fixtures and outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight. C. Verify ceiling type prior to ordering luminaires. Order luminaires with the appropriate trim fittings to match the ceiling type. Provide flange fittings for all luminaires installed in drywall ceilings. D. All luminaires shall be supported in accordance with the requirements dictated by the published local seismic zones. Lakeview Health Services Exterior Lighting 265600-3 West End Heights 3 E. Where continuous, pendant mounted luminaires are specified, field measure all lengths. Order luminaires in sections as long as practical to minimize joints. Where joints are required, provide pre-wired quick connect terminations to wire between sections. 1. Install pendant mounted luminaires true and level. Provide adjustable aircraft hanger wire and fittings to facilitate level installation. F. Where luminaires are installed in recessed ceilings, independently support luminaires from the structure using minimum #12 AWG luminaire mounting wire at a minimum of two points. Do not support luminaires from the ceiling grid. G. All luminaires shall be free of finger marks, flaws, scratches, dents or other imperfections. 3.2 LAMPS A. Provide lamps in all luminaires. B. Replace any lamp whose color is determined to be unsatisfactory, or does not match other lamps. C. Replace all lamps that failed during the 1-year warranty period. D. All lamps shall be new and unused. If permanent lighting system is used for temporary construction lighting, lamps shall be replaced upon turn over to Owner. E. Furnish replacement lamps amounting to 15%, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner. 3.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lighting fixtures and equipment shall be delivered with UL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible in factoryfabricated containers. B. Fixtures and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Fixtures shall be protected from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Fixtures shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction. C. Handle interior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Replace all damaged fixtures or components. 3.4 POLES A. Receive, protect, and store light poles. B. Provide pole bases as detailed on the drawings. C. Obtain anchor bolt schematics from the luminaire manufacturer prior to pouring pole bases. D. Set all pole bases true and level and at the proper height. E. Take care to install all pole bases such that square poles will sit at right angles to the parking lot and the overall space. F. Set all poles true and level. Install tenon brackets, mounting arms, and luminaires as called for. Double nut the pole to the anchor bolts. G. Install the base cover to protect anchor bolts from the weather. H. Provide a ground rod at each pole base. Terminate raceway ground conductor, pole, and all luminaires at the ground wire. 3.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Lakeview Health Services Exterior Lighting 265600-4 West End Heights 4 A. Coordinate with other work including ceiling type, wires/cables, electrical boxes, fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of luminaires with other trades. 3.6 FINAL CLEANING A. Prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, and lenses of all fixtures. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, and finger marks. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components. END OF SECTION 265600 Lakeview Health Services Cable Plant Overview 270100-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 270100 - CABLE PLANT OVERVIEW PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. Work shall include the following: 1. Interior pathways above accessible ceilings. 2. Data and telephone devices, faceplates, and connecting hardware. 3. Backboards and punchdown blocks. 4. Firestopping of all sleeves after cable installation is complete. 5. Data cable plant. 6. Voice cable plant. 7. Video cable plant. 8. Equipment racks, ladder racks, cabinets and cable management. 9. Grounding for all communication equipment racks. 10. Testing, labeling, and documentation of all voice, data, and video cables. 11. Coordination of CATV and telephone service cable with the local utility companies. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction and details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. Work that is deemed unacceptable by the Owner’s Representative shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The installer shall comply with all “Quality Assurance” requirements of all 26000 sections. D. The prime contractor is responsible for employing qualified sub-contractors to complete the work where the quality assurance requirements cannot be met by the prime contractor’s full time employees. E. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 4. TIA/EIA-607 5. Underwriters Laboratory 6. Federal Communications Commission 7. ISO/IEC 11801 8. NESC – National Electrical Safety Code 9. BICSI “Customer Owned Outside Plant Manual” 10. BICSI “Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual” 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor’s qualifications and references. B. Signed Warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS A. All products must meet the minimum requirements described in the specific specifications sections. B. Refer to Section 260010 for submittal and substitution requirements. Lakeview Health Services Cable Plant Overview 270100-2 West End Heights 2 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 WARRANTY A. Provide a 15 year warranty guaranteeing the specified performance of the optical fiber and copper cable plants. The optical fiber cable plant shall be warranted for performance up to Gigabit Ethernet speeds with the terminations installed in this contract. The copper cable shall be warranted for up to 1000 Mbps speeds with cable and jacks used in this contract. The warranty shall cover end to end performance including connectors and patch cables. The contractor and all component manufacturers shall back the warranty. The warranty shall include all parts and labor to replace the existing cable, termination and re-testing if the performance is required is not achieved. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The cable plant shall be subject to all the applicable requirements and practices of EIA/TIA, BICSI, U.L., NEMA, F.C.C. and the manufacturers published recommended installation procedures even if they are not specifically described in the specifications. END OF SECTION 270100 Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND SPACES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. This work is part of the electrical contract. B. This section includes the minimum requirements for equipment and cable installations in communication equipment rooms (CERs). The following equipment is described in this section: 1. Floor Mounted Racks 2. Wall Mounted Cabinets 3. Rack Mounted UTP Patch Panels 4. Fiber Patch Panels 5. Cable Management 6. Ground Bar 7. Ladder Rack 8. Back Boards 9. Cable Supports 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment rooms shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owners representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based on the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified, and subject to approval B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 4. TIA/EIA-607 5. Underwriters Laboratory 6. Federal Communications Commission 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for the following: 1. Floor Mounted Racks 2. Wall Mounted Cabinets 3. Rack Mounted Patch Panels 4. Fiber Patch Panels 5. Cable Management 6. Ground Bar 7. Ladder Rack 8. Back Boards 9. Cable Supports PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TWO POST FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS A. Racks shall meet the following physical specifications: 1. Two post, floor mounted 2. 19” wide, 7 foot high, 45U mounting space 3. Lightweight aluminum construction with self squaring design. 4. Black polyurethane finish. 5. 15” deep base with four (4) ¾” bolt down holes. Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-2 West End Heights 2 B. Rack shall have double sided 12/24 tapped holes with ½” standard EIA hole pattern. C. Provide one TVSS Protected Power Distribution Unit (PDU) with each rack, as follows: 1. 1U dimension, installs horizontally in the rack. 2. 120 volt, 15 ampere input, with a 12’ cord length. 3. 15A-1P input circuit breaker 4. Integral surge protection and filtering. 5. (9) NEMA 5-15R receptacles. D. Design Make: APC NetShelterModel AR201 with NET9RMBLK PDU E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. APC 2. Chatsworth 3. Ortronics 4. Panduit 5. Hubbell 2.2 FOUR POST FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS A. Racks shall meet the following physical specifications: 1. Four post, floor mounted 2. 19” wide, 7 foot high, 30” deep, with 43U mounting space 3. Lightweight aluminum construction with self-squaring design. 4. Black polyurethane finish. 5. 15” deep base with four (4) ¾” bolt down holes. B. Rack shall have square holes with threaded mounting hardware. C. Provide one TVSS Protected Power Distribution Unit (PDU) with each rack, as follows: 1. 1U dimension, installs horizontally in the rack. 2. 120 volt, 15 ampere input, with a 12’ cord length. 3. 15A-1P input circuit breaker 4. Integral surge protection and filtering. 5. (9) NEMA 5-15R receptacles. D. Design Make: APC NetShelter Model AR203 with NET9RMBLK PDU E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. APC 2. Chatsworth 3. Ortronics 4. Panduit 5. Hubbell 2.3 WALL MOUNTED CABINETS A. Wall mounted cabinets shall meet the following specifications: 1. Aluminum construction with black finish. 2. 26”H x 23”W x 24.5”D. 3. Universal vertical mounting rails with threaded holes. 4. EIA standard hole pattern. 5. Venting on top and bottom. 6. Rated for up to 200 lbs. of equipment. B. Racks shall have a two hinge design for front and rear access, louvered sides for ventilation, knockouts in top and bottom for cable access and a vented front door. Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-3 West End Heights 3 C. Both front and rear access shall be lockable. D. Provide one TVSS Protected Power Distribution Unit (PDU) with each rack, as follows: 1. 1U dimension, installs horizontally in the rack. 2. 120 volt, 15 ampere input, with a 12’ cord length. 3. 15A-1P input circuit breaker 4. Integral surge protection and filtering. 5. (9) NEMA 5-15R receptacles. E. Design Make: 1. APC NetShelter WX Model AR100HD with NET9RMBLK PDU F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. APC 2. Chatsworth 3. Ortronics 4. Panduit 5. Hubbell 2.4 RACK MOUNTED UTP PATCH PANELS A. Shall meet or exceed all published specifications for Category 6 UTP terminations. B. Rack mounted, utilizing 2U mounting space C. Terminated in accordance with T568B Pin Configuration. D. Provide only 48 port patch panels. E. Maximum length from the termination to the first twist shall be ½”. F. Provide (1) 2U horizontal wire management assembly above and below each patch panel. G. Design Make: 1. Category 5e: Hubbell Speedgain 5e series 2. Category 6: Hubbell Next Speed 6 H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. APC 2. Chatsworth 3. Ortronics 4. Panduit 5. Hubbell 2.5 APARTMENT WALL MOUNTED UTP PATCH PANELS A. Shall meet or exceed all published specifications for Category 6 UTP terminations. B. Wall mounted C. Terminated in accordance with T568B Pin Configuration. D. 12 port patch panel. E. Maximum length from the termination to the first twist shall be ½”. F. Design Make: D Shot, or approved equal Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-4 West End Heights 4 2.6 FIBER PATCH PANEL A. Rack mounted, 1U space requirement B. Constructed with 16 gauge steel with black powder coat finish C. 24 port unit with a full complement of duplex SC couplers. D. Rack mounted housings shall have a hinged splice organizer drawers to permit access to the fiberoptic cables. E. Organizer drawers shall be provided with routing rings for cable management and cable tie-down bars for support of main cable. F. Design Make: Hubbell FPR024SCM. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. AMP 3. Siecor 4. Leviton 2.7 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. Provide rack mounted horizontal and vertical cable management for all horizontal, backbone and patch cables. B. Horizontal cable management 1. 2U mounting height 2. Cable management panels shall be plastic and have integral wire retaining fingers. 3. 4 integrated hoops for horizontal routing and 24 hoops for vertical routing. 4. Panels shall have front and back channels with removable covers. 5. Management panels shall mount to any standard 19” rack and include all required mounting brackets and screws. C. Vertical cable management 1. Provide 3” wide vertical cable management on the ends of rack lineups 2. Provide 6” wide vertical cable management between racks 3. Cable management shall run the entire length of the rack. 4. Provide with minimum of six pass through holes for wire management. D. Design Make: 1. Vertical: APC Model AR8440 (3” wide) or Model AR8441 (6” wide). 2. Horizontal: APC Model AR8427 E. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. APC 2. Chatsworth 3. Ortronics 4. Panduit 5. Hubbell 2.8 GROUND BAR A. Service Entrance/MDF Closet 1. Nominal 4” x 12” x ¼” 2. Solid copper, minimum 24 pairs of 7/16”, universal lug holes, NEMA 2-hole configuration. 3. Provide with two mounting brackets and stand-off insulators. 4. Provide with all mounting and attachment hardware. Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-5 West End Heights 5 5. Design Make: Tessco Model No. 449419 or approved equal. B. IDF Closet 1. Nominal 2” x 10” x ¼” 2. Solid copper, minimum 10 pairs of 7/16”, universal lug holes, NEMA 2-hole configuration. 3. Provide with two mounting brackets and stand-off insulators. 4. Provide with all mounting and attachment hardware. 5. Design Make: Tessco Model No. 442460 or approved equal. 2.9 LADDER RACK A. Provide ladder rack from wall to rack for horizontal cable support. B. Provide ladder rack from all sleeves to the equipment racks for horizontal and backbone cable support inside the communication equipment room. C. Racks shall have solid side bars nominally 1/4” thick by 1 ½“ high with rungs 9” on center. D. Include all hardware for securing trays to each other, to the rack and to the wall. E. Racks shall be black. F. Bond all racks to the CER ground point. G. Design make: Homaco “Cable Runway” System. H. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Chatsworth 2. B-Line 3. Newton 2.10 BACK BOARDS A. 4’x8’x ¾” CDX, fire rated plywood. B. Paint with gray, acrylic, interior, fire, retardant paint. Manufacturer: Pratt & Lambert “Stormy Sea #2233. 2.11 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide wall mounted “D” rings for wall mounted vertical and horizontal cable management. B. Design Make: Senior Industries SI-4754 for cross connect wiring and SI-4755 for Vertical and Horizontal UTP cable, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS A. All racks shall be anchored to the floor. B. Provide vertical and horizontal cable management in the front and back. C. Mount rack a minimum of 36” from wall when orientated parallel to wall and tight to wall when perpendicular to wall. D. Ground the rack to the equipment ground bar with a #6 copper wire. 3.2 WALL MOUNTED CABINETS Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-6 West End Heights 6 A. Secure wall mounted cabinets to building structure with approved anchoring means. B. Verify all existing wall construction and submit proposed anchoring methods for approval. C. Provide vertical and horizontal cable management both front and rear. 3.3 FIBER AND UTP PATCH PANELS A. Provide rear wire manager near the top of panel. B. Route cables from the back of patch panel through coupler openings and attach cable to the wire manager with cable ties. C. Do not untwist cable more than 0.5 in. when terminating. 3.4 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. Provide one racked mounted 2U horizontal cable managers at the top of each rack. Also, provide two 3” vertical cable managers for each rack installed. If two or more racks are installed side by side, install one 6” vertical cable manager between the racks. B. Provide one 2U horizontal cable manager above and below each 48 UTP port panel and fiber patch panel installed. 3.5 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide “D” rings 2 ft. on center for all exposed vertical cable runs. B. Provide split rings 4 ft. on center for all exposed horizontal cable runs. C. Keep horizontal wall mounted cable runs to a minimum. In general horizontal runs shall be in wall mounted ladder rack. D. Provide cable brackets 4’ on center supported to building structure for all cable runs above ceilings where cable tray is not called for. 3.6 LADDER RACK A. Install as shown on the drawings. B. Secure rack to walls and to the top of the equipment racks. 3.7 BACK BOARDS A. Linear wall space used for anchoring equipment shall be lined for the full closet width with fire treated CDX grade exterior plywood 3/4" and 8' high. B. Plywood for mounting termination equipment on shall be installed vertically and side-by-side, a minimum of 6" above finished floor. Mounting of plywood shall be sufficient to support the equipment. C. Plywood for supporting riser cables shall be installed vertically resting directly on the finished floor. Anchoring and mounting techniques of plywood used to support backbone riser cables shall be sufficient to support a minimum of 1500 pounds of weight. D. In no cases shall the heads of mounting screws protrude past the face of the plywood. E. Contractor shall install distribution rings for the cross-connect fields above all wall mounted blocks. Provide two rings per vertical row. Score with copper tubing cutters to eliminate ¾ of one of the mounting legs. Snap off and debur. Mount rings with two hex head screws per ring. 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Ladder Rack from overhead sleeve locations in closets to equipment racks and punch down block locations. Lakeview Health Services Communication Equipment Rooms and Spaces 271100-7 West End Heights 7 B. Provide nylon cable ties with Velcro fastening means for organizing all patch and loose cable. C. All cables shall be neatly “dressed out” in equipment rooms. D. Provide all sleeves through rated partitions. E. Fire Stop all sleeves and conduit openings after the cable installation is complete. 3.9 PUNCH DOWN BLOCKS A. Installed on plywood backboard so that top of block is 5’6” AFF. B. GROUNDING AND BONDING C. Provide pre-drilled tin plated copper bus bar, with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for connectors being used, in all communication equipment rooms. D. All connectors and clamps shall be mechanical type made of silicon bronze. E. Terminals shall be solderless compression type, copper long-barrel NEMA two-bolt. F. Provide #6 AWG conductor from the bus bar to the electrical system equipment ground. G. Bond the ground bar in the main communication equipment room to dedicated communications equipment panelboard where applicable. H. Bond metallic equipment racks and cabinets to the ground bar. I. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the ground bar in communications rooms and spaces. 3.10 CROSS CONNECT A. Shall be color-coded with industry standard coded field as follows: Description Color Wiring to work Station Blue Backbone Cable White Tie Lines Gray Misc. Connections (Alarm & Security) Yellow B. Provide a description of color coding and labeling on the wall adjacent to the punch down blocks. END OF SECTION 271100 Lakeview Health Services Backbone Cabling 271300-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 271300 - BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents 1.2 SCOPE A. Backbone cabling includes optical fiber, coaxial and copper cable from the utility demarcation to the communication equipment room (CER), cabling between multiple CERs in a building, video trunk cable, and optical fiber and copper cable between buildings on the campus. B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Interior Optical Fiber Cable and Terminations 2. Coaxial Trunk Cable and Connectors 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568A 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 569 3. NFPA 70 - 1996 4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 5. FCC 47 CFR 68 6. NEMA - 250 7. NEC - Articles 725,760, 770 and 800 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA - TSB 72 9. ISO/IEC 11801 C. The optical fiber cable plant shall be used to support 622 Mbps ATM and Gigabit Ethernet networks. At the time of installation all optical fiber products shall support the latest draft or formal specification released by the ATM Forum Technical Committee and the IEEE 802.3z committee. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all cable, connecting hardware and patch cables. B. Termination details for all cable types. C. List of three installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. Include names and phone numbers of references. D. Cable Test Reports (at substantial completion). E. Cable tension reports for optical fiber pulls. Lakeview Health Services Backbone Cabling 271300-2 West End Heights 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GRADE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE FOR BUILDING BACKBONES A. Cable shall be plenum rated and meet the requirements Flame Test: UL 910 (NFPA 262-1994). B. Fiber Characteristics: 1. All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required specifications. 2. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification. 3. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad design. 4. All optical fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi. 5. The fiber shall be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective coating. The coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface. 6. The coated fiber shall have a layer of Teflon placed between the dual layer acrylate coating of the optical fiber and the thermoplastic buffer. The diameter of the thermoplastic buffer coating shall be 900 ± 50 m. 7. The fiber coating and buffer shall be removable with commercially available stripping tools in a single pass. 8. The multimode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-1989, "Detail Specification for 62.5 m Core Diameter/125 m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers." a. Core diameter: 62.5 ± 3.0 m. b. Cladding diameter: 125.0 ± 2.0 m. c. Core-to-Cladding Offset: 3.0 m. d. Cladding non-circularity: 2.0 %. e. Core non-circularity: 6.0 %. f. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10 m g. Graded index h. Numerical Aperture: 0.275 ± 0.015. i. Attenuation Uniformity: There shall be no point discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at either 850 nm or 1300 nm. 9. The non-dispersion shifted single-mode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall conform to the following specifications: a. Typical Core Diameter: 8.3 m. b. Cladding Diameter: 125.0 ± 1.0 m. c. Core-to-Cladding Offset: 0.6 m. d. Cladding Non-Circularity: 1.0%. e. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10 m. f. Attenuation Uniformity- No point discontinuity greater than 0.1 dB at either 1310 nm or 1550 nm. g. Attenuation at the Water Peak- The attenuation at 1383 ± 3 nm shall not exceed 2.1 dB/km. h. Cutoff Wavelength- The cabled fiber cutoff wavelength shall be < 1260 nm. i. Mode Field Diameter: 9.30 ± 0.50 m at 1310 nm ± 1.00 m at 1550 nm j. Zero Dispersion Wavelength ( o)- 1301.5 nm o 1321.5 nm. k. Zero Dispersion Slope (So)- 0.092 ps/(nm² km). l. Fiber Curl: > 4.0 m radius of curvature. C. Fiber Parameters: 1. All fibers in the cable shall meet the requirements of this specification. 2. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum attenuation for each fiber at 23 5C. 3. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.1 dB at 1310 nm/1550 nm (single-mode) or 0.2 dB at 850 nm/1300 nm (multimode) in any one kilometer length of fiber. D. Physical Characteristics: 1. Plenum Cables up to 24 Fibers: a. The fibers may be stranded around a dielectric central member and surrounded by layered aramid yarns. The aramid yarns shall serve as the tensile strength member of the cable. Lakeview Health Services Backbone Cabling 271300-3 West End Heights 3 b. A ripcord shall be applied between the aramid yarns and the outer jacket to facilitate jacket removal. 2. The outer jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns for physical and environmental protection. E. Plenum Cables with 24 to 72 Fibers: 1. The buffered fibers shall be grouped in six fiber subunits. In each subunit, the individual fibers shall be stranded around a dielectric central member and surrounded by layered aramid yarns. 2. A ripcord shall be incorporated in the subunit design to facilitate access to the individual fibers. 3. The subunit jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns for additional physical and environmental protection. 4. The subunits shall be stranded around a dielectric central member. 5. A ripcord shall be inserted beneath the outer jacket to facilitate jacket removal. 6. The outer jacket shall be extruded around the units for physical and environmental protection. 7. Strength Members: a. The strength member shall be a high modulus aramid yarn. b. The aramid yarns shall be helically stranded around the buffered fibers. c. A non-toxic, non-irritant talc shall be applied to the yarn to allow the yarns to be easily separated from the fibers and the jacket. F. Cable Jacket: 1. The jacket shall be continuous, free from pinholes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections. 2. The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness; jackets extruded under high pressure are not acceptable. 3. The jacket shall be smooth, as is consistent with the best commercial practice. 4. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible, protective coating, able to withstand the stresses expected in normal installation and service. a. The cable and subunit jacket color shall be orange for cables containing multimode fibers. The cable and subunit jacket color shall be yellow for cables containing single-mode fibers. b. For cables with more than two fibers, the cable jacket shall be designed for easy removal without damage to the optical fibers by incorporating a ripcord under each cable jacket. A non-toxic, nonirritant talc shall be applied to the aramid yarns to allow the yarns to be easily separated from the fibers and the jacket. c. The nominal thickness of the cable outer jacket shall be sufficient to provide adequate cable protection while meeting the mechanical, flammability, and environmental test requirements of this document over the life of the cable. d. The cable shall be all-dielectric. G. Identification: 1. The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The optical fiber color coding shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA-598, "Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables." The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration, and shall not affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers. Color coded buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another. When fibers are grouped into individual units, each unit shall be numbered on the unit jacket for identification. The number shall be repeated at regular intervals. 2. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, listing mark, and sequential length markings every two feet. The marking shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket. H. Additional Requirements: 1. The storage temperature range for the cable on the original shipping reel shall be -40 C to +70 C. The installation/operating temperature range for plenum cables shall be 0 C to +70 C. Testing shall be in accordance with FOTP-3. 2. Crush Resistance - The cable shall withstand a minimum compressive load of 89 N/cm (50 lbf/in) applied uniformly over the length of the compression plate. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables." While under compressive load, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.4 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.6 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). After the compressive load is removed, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). 3. Impact Resistance - The cable shall withstand a minimum of 20 impact cycles. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies." The Lakeview Health Services Backbone Cabling 271300-4 West End Heights 4 fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). 4. Cyclic Flexing - The cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles at a rate of 30 ± 1 cycles per minute. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). 5. Flammability - All cables shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 770. Plenum cables (OFNP) shall pass UL-910. I. Design Make: Siecor “MIC” Series. J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Berk-Tek 2. AMP 3. Optical Cable Corporation 2.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE CONNECTORS A. Backbone optical fiber connectors shall be SC type. B. The terminations shall comply with the following standards: 1. EIA/TIA-4750000B - Generic Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors 2. EIA/TIA-455-A - Standard Test Procedures for Optical Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fiber Optic Components (FOTPs) 3. TIA/EIA-604-3 - Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, FOCIS-3 (Type SC) C. Connector Characteristics: 1. Strain relief: The connector shall provide a strain relief mechanism for installation on a single fiber cable that contains strength elements. The fiber within the body of the connector shall be isolated mechanically from cable tension, bending and twisting. 2. Intermateability: The connector shall be designed in compliance with the appropriate TIA FOCIS document. 3. Installation rate: The connector shall be installable on 900 µm buffered fiber in 1 minute or less total time. 4. Installation polishing: The connector shall not require polishing of the endface in the field. Connectors shall have a factory-polished fiber stub in the connector ferrule. 5. Installation type: The connector installation shall not require the use of epoxies. 6. Fiber protection: The connector crimp-on mechanism shall protect the bare fiber from the ingress of air or waterborne contaminants and shall secure the fiber in the ferrule micro-hole. D. Design Make: Siecor “Unicam” E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Amp 2. Leviton 3. Panduit 2.3 OPTICAL FIBER SPLICES A. Splices are not allowed should fiber be broken during installation the entire run shall be replaced. 2.4 COAXIAL CABLE A. Cable shall be quad shield RG11/U. B. Cable shall be UL listed NEC Type CLR or CATV, constructed in accordance with UL Standard 13, complying with UL 1581 vertical tray flame test. C. Construction: 1. 14 AWG solid bare copper conductor. 2. .280 inch foam polyethylene insulation. Lakeview Health Services Backbone Cabling 271300-5 West End Heights 5 3. 2 Aluminum polyester tapes around 100% of cable. 4. 2 Aluminum braids covering 65% of cable. 5. .380 inch diameter PVC plenum rated jacket. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. West Penn 2. Commscope 3. Belden 4. Berk-Tek 2.5 COAXIAL CONNECTORS A. Backbone Cable: 1. Provide one piece “type F” male crimp type connectors with hex crimping on all backbone cables. a. Connectors shall include internal reduction of the center conductor. b. Cadmium plated brass construction. c. Use parallel jaw type crimping tool for all connections. B. Design Make: Thomas & Betts “PL-11QS” Series. 2.6 COAXIAL TAPS A. Provide two and four port tap offs as required for the installation. B. Tap offs shall be optimized for 600 MHz operation and meet CATV requirements for RF shielding. C. Shall have a mounting bracket built-in. D. 22dB isolation tap-tap @ 5-10 and 550-600 MHz. E. Design Make: Blonder Tongue CRT-2A and CRT-4A. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Optical Fiber Cable: 1. General: a. Interior cable installed in accessible ceilings shall be installed in open top cable hangers 4 foot on center or in cable tray. Install the cables as close to the ceiling deck as possible in a segregated pathway. Do not install with UTP or coax cables. b. Provide tie wraps to close top of cable hangers after installation is complete c. Interior cables installed in crawl spaces, basements or attics shall be installed in PVC type innerduct. d. Exterior cable shall be installed in multi-cell duct. e. Maintain polarization for entire system as described in ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A section 12.7.1. f. Cable shall be continuous. Splices are not allowed. 2. Cable Pulling: a. Adhere to all manufacturer’s requirements regarding pulling tension, allowable lubricants and bending radius. b. Provide cable pullers designed to suit field conditions. (i.e. horizontal vault pulls, vertical pulls and 45 degree pulls) c. Use cable guides with aluminum adapters sized for the 1 ¼” cells. Provide extensions, sheaves and adapters as required by the installation conditions. d. Use directional pulling swivels as conditions require. e. Use Line Tension meter during cable pull to provide accurate measurements of the force exerted on a Lakeview Health Services Backbone Cabling 271300-6 West End Heights 6 cable as it is installed. The meter shall have a programmable overload set point with an audible and visual indication of an overload condition. The meter shall have controls to disengage the cable puller if an overload occurs. Provide chart recorded documentation of the cable pull for the Owner's records. f. Provide cable racks in manholes to support cable. B. UTP Cable: 1. UTP backbone cables may be installed in conduit, cable tray, or in cable hangers 4’ on center. 2. Placement of underground cables shall conform to REA 644 Cable Standards. 3. Cables above drywall ceilings shall be installed in conduit. Cables in exposed areas other than communications equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit or surface raceway. 4. Install category 3 UTP in a separate open cable hanger segment. Do not install with optical fiber cable or any other cable type. If cables have more than 12” of sag, install more hangers. 5. Do not tie-rap cable to a perpendicular support. Tie-raps shall be used to secure cables to other like cables or to an approved tie mount. Do not over tighten cable ties. 6. Provide cable management as called for in Section 271100. 7. Label MDF termination blocks with a permanent fine point pen such as a Pilot ultra fine point. Stencil every fifth pair of each termination block with the appropriate cable count. 8. The contractor shall replace the cable if damaged during installation. 9. Test all riser cable pairs. Multi-pair cables shall be replaced if they contain more than 1% bad pairs. 10. Cross connect hardware shall be color-coded with industry standard coded fields as follows: Description Color C.O. Circuits Green PBX Circuits Purple Auxiliary Circuits Yellow Wiring to Work Station Blue Back Bone Cable White Wiring from MUX Orange Concentrators, etc. on a Fiber Or UTP Backbone Tie Lines Grey 11. Unless otherwise specified, noted UTP backbone cables shall be sized based on two pairs/connected voice jack. Round up to the next audible pair sizing when doing calculations. 12. Where UTP backbone cable incorporates a campus system (i.e., multiple buildings connected to the backbone), all cable shall be installed with gas tube or solid state protection devices at both ends. C. Coaxial Cable: 1. The system supplier is responsible for calculations and design. A proposed solution is shown on the plans. Submit logical system drawings indicating cable sizes, amplifiers, tap-offs, etc., for approval. 2. Make all terminations using approved crimping tools. Crimping tools shall be approved by the manufacturer for use with connectors being used. 3. Do not tie-rap cable to a perpendicular support. Tie-raps shall be used to secure cables to other like cables or to an approved tie mount. Do not over tighten cable ties. 4. All coaxial cable insulation and core removal shall be accomplished using an approved coaxial cable striping tool to prevent any damage to shield or center conductor. 5. Avoid unnecessary bends in coaxial cabling, do not exceed manufacturers recommended bending radius. 6. Install coaxial cable in a separate open cable hanger segment. Do not install with UTP, optical fiber cable, or any other cable type. If cables have more than 12” of sag, install more hangers. 7. Do not tie-rap cable to a perpendicular support. Tie-raps shall be used to secure cables to other like cables or to an approved tie mount. Do not over tighten cable ties. 8. All tap-offs shall be fastened to building structure, cable tray or steel support using bolts, screws or toggles. END OF SECTION 271300 Lakeview Health Services Horizontal Cabling 271500-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 271500 - HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. Unless noted otherwise all work included in this section is included in the data cable contract. 1.2 SCOPE A. Horizontal cabling includes Category 6 UTP from the communications equipment room (CER) to the voice/data station outlets, and coaxial cable from the broadband trunk to the multi-media outlet and wall mounted television outlet. B. Voice and Data Station outlet locations and jack quantities are shown on the plans. C. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. UTP Cable and Terminations 2. UTP Patch Cables 3. Video Drop Cables 4. Connecting Hardware 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. Strictly adhere to all Category 6 installation practices when installing UTP cabling. C. Provide with the submittals, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating that the complete assembly including cable and termination hardware has been tested and meets the performance criteria called for. D. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568A 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 569 3. NFPA 70 - 1996 4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 5. FCC 47 CFR 68 6. NEMA - 250 7. NEC - Articles 770 and 800 8. Americans with Disabilities Act 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all cable, connecting hardware and patch cables. B. Termination details for all cable types. C. List of three installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. Include names and phone numbers of references at the site of installation. D. Cable Test Reports (prior to hardware/software installation). Lakeview Health Services Horizontal Cabling 271500-2 West End Heights 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CATEGORY 6 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE (UTP) A. Provide Category 6 type cable meeting requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 Category 6 B. Physical Characteristics: 1. Plenum rated 2. 23 AWG, bare copper wire insulated with FEP. 3. Outer jacket shall be white. 4. Shall be enhanced type cable optimized to frequencies up to 1.0 GHz. 5. Shall consist of (4) 24 AWG twisted pairs. 6. The color coding of pairs shall be: a. Pair 1 - W-BL ; BL b. Pair 2 - W-O; O c. Pair 3 - W-G; G d. Pair 4 - W-BR; BR 7. The ultimate breaking strength measured in accordance with ASTM D 4565 shall be 400 N minimum 8. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1 inch at -20 degrees Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking C. Transmission Characteristics: 1. DC resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 9.38 Ohms per 100m at 20oC, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566. 2. The mutual capacitance of any pair at 1 kHz for 100m of cable shall not exceed 5.6 nF. 3. DC resistance unbalance between any two conductors of any pair shall not exceed 5% when measured at or corrected to 20oC in accordance with ASTM D 4566 4. The capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair shall not exceed 330 pF per 100m 5. The propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz shall not exceed 5.7ns/m D. Design Make: 1. Category 6: Hubbell “NextSpeed” E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Berk-Tek 3. Belden 4. General Cable 5. Commscope 2.2 PATCH CABLES A. Patch cables shall consist of the same cable and connectors as the drop cables. B. Provide patch cables as required to provide all cross connects to the equipment. 2.3 CATEGORY 6 CONNECTING HARDWARE A. Physical Characteristics: 1. Insulation displacement contact (IDC) type. 2. Functional from -10 degrees F to 140 degrees F. 3. Tested in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6. B. Transmission Characteristics (as tested in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6. 1. Category 6 outlet assemblies with internal conductor paths of >6 in. shall have a minimum return loss of 23 dB at frequencies of between 1 and 20 MHz and a minimum return loss of 14 dB (or greater) at frequencies that Lakeview Health Services Horizontal Cabling 271500-3 West End Heights 3 range between 20 and 100 MHz). 2. The dc resistance between the input and output connections of the connecting hardware shall be 0.3 ohm maximum. 3. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements of the cable being terminated. C. Shall be modular RJ45 jacks that snap into user configurable faceplates and jack frames meeting durability requirements specified in IEC 603-7. D. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb. E. Jacks shall be wired in accordance with EIA/TIA T568B polarization sequence. F. Jack color shall be white. G. Design Make: Hubbell “Xcelerator” H. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Amp 4. Panduit 2.4 FACEPLATES A. Voice/Data faceplates shall be high impact 94 V-0 rated thermoplastic. B. Faceplates for wall mounted telephones shall be stainless steel type with 1 telco Ivory 8 position jack. C. Data face plates shall have (2) slots per single gang for EIA/TIA labels. D. Each contact surface shall have a minimum of 50 micron hard gold and a minimum contact force of 100g. E. Design Make: 1. Data jacks: Hubbell HD5e Series 2. Voice Faceplates (wall mounted telephones): Hubbell 630 wall plates F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. AMP 3. Panduit 2.5 COAXIAL CABLE A. UL listed NEC type CLR or CATV, constructed in accordance with UL Standard 13, complies with UL 181 vertical tray fume test. B. Provide RG-6/U cable from backbone trunk tap to wall mounted outlet. C. Physical Characteristics: 1. 18 AWG copper conductor. 2. 100% aluminum polyester tapes. 3. 1.65% aluminum braids. 4. Overall plenum rated jacket. 5. Suitable for -20C to 75C temperatures. D. Transmission Characteristics: 1. Nominal Capacitance: 17 pf/ft Lakeview Health Services Horizontal Cabling 271500-4 West End Heights 4 2. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohm. 2.6 COAXIAL CONNECTORS A. Drop Cables: 1. Provide one piece “type F” male crimp type connectors with hex crimping on all drop cables. 2. Cadmium plated brass construction. 3. Use parallel jaw type crimping tool for all connections. 4. Design Make: Thomas & Betts “PL-56QS” Series. B. Station Outlets: 1. Provide female/female bulkhead mount F connector in snap in fitting. 2. Design Make: Hubbell part no. SFFW PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. UTP Cable: 1. All wiring concealed in new walls or soffits shall be installed in metal conduits. 2. Wiring in existing walls with hollow cavities may be installed loose. 3. All exposed wiring shall be installed in surface metal raceway. 4. All wiring above ceilings shall be installed in cable tray or open top cable hangers and brackets. 5. Cable hangers above accessible ceilings shall be installed 4' on center attached to building structure. If cables have more than 12” of sag, install more hangers. 6. Do not untwist cable pairs more than 0.5 in. when terminating. 7. The contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 8. Maximum length shall be 90 meters. 9. Cable shall have no physical defects such as cuts, tears or bulges in the outer jacket. Cables with defects shall be replaced. 10. Install cable in neat and workmanlike manner. Neatly bundle and tie all cable in closets. Leave sufficient cable for 90o sweeps at all vertical drops. 11. Do not tie-rap cable to a perpendicular support. Tie-raps shall be used to secure cables to other like cables or to an approved tie mount. Do not over tighten cable ties. 12. Maintain the following clearances from EMI sources: a. Power cable: 6 in. b. Fluorescent Lights: 12 in. c. Transformers: 36 in. 13. Install cables in a separate open cable hanger segment. Do not install with coaxial, optical fiber cable or any other cable type. If cables have more than 12” of sag, install more hangers. 14. Do not install cables with more than 110N (25 lbs) pull force, as specified in EIA/TIA and BICSII TDDM practices. Utilize appropriate cable lubricant in sufficient quantity to reduce pulling friction to acceptable levels on long pulls inside conduit, pulls of multiple cables into a single small bore conduit, on conduit runs greater than 100 lineal feet with bends of opposing directions, and in conduit runs that exceed 180 degrees of accumulated bends. Use of tensile rated cords (i.e. fishing line) should be used for difficult or questionable pulls - to judge to go/no-go condition of the conduit and pulling setup. 15. Care must be taken so that the cable does not bend at any location to a radius less than ten times the diameter of the cable. A cable feeder guide of suitable dimensions should be used between the cable reel and the face of the duct to protect the cable and guide it into the duct as it is payed off the reel. 16. As the cable is payed off the reel, watch and inspect cable for sheath defects. If defects are noticed, the pulling operation should be stopped immediately and the Engineer promptly notified of the defect. Kinks and/or other irregularities in the cable sheath should be removed or corrected as directed by the engineer. B. UTP Station Outlets: 1. All cables shall be terminated with modular jacks that snap into a faceplate mounted on a wall outlet box, surface raceways or power pole. Outlet boxes shall be secured to building with mechanical fasteners. Adhesive fasteners are not allowed. Lakeview Health Services Horizontal Cabling 271500-5 West End Heights 5 2. All extra openings to be filled with blank inserts. 3. Terminate cable per EIA/TIA T568B standard pin assignments. C. Fire Stoppings and Penetrations: 1. Provide firestopping as called for in 16010. D. Coaxial Cable: 1. Provide crimp type connections using crimping tool approved by the manufacturer. 2. Install coaxial cable in a separate open cable hanger segment. Do not install with category 5, optical fiber cable or any other cable type. If cables have more than 12” of sag, install more hangers. 3. Do not over tighten cable ties. 4. The crimping tool shall crimp the insulation and the conductor shield to ensure proper mechanical and electrical connections. 5. All coaxial cable insulation and core removal shall be accomplished using an approved coaxial cable striping tool to prevent any damage to shield or center conductor. 6. Provide impact resistant faceplates with F type bulkhead connector. 7. Secure horizontal cable within 3 ft. of the tapoff from the main trunk. 8. In areas of new construction, terminate all cables in 4” square box with single or two gang ring as called for on drawings. Provide ring to suit wall material. END OF SECTION 271500 Lakeview Health Services Testing, identification and Administration 272000-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 272000 - TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes the minimum requirements for the testing, certification administration and identification of backbone and horizontal cabling. B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. UTP testing 2. Optical fiber testing 3. Labels and labeling 4. Documentation 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All testing procedures and testers shall comply with applicable requirements of: 1. TIA/EIA TSB-67 Field Testing of UTP 2. TIA/EIA 568-A Annex H B. Identification and administration work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568A 4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Sample documentation from previous job for administration, test results and as-built drawings. B. Test reports (submit prior to substantial completion punch list is performed). C. Three (3) copies of a Binder and CD-R(s) containing all spreadsheets end to end reports and as built drawings called for at the completion of job. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 LABELS A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969. B. Shall be preprinted or laser printed type. C. Where used for cable marking provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area and a clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable. D. Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label. E. Provide plastic tape 6 inches wide continuously printed and bright colored 18” above all direct buried services. Lakeview Health Services Testing, identification and Administration 272000-2 West End Heights 2 F. Provide engraved plastic laminated labels, signs and instruction plates. Labels shall be made of engraving stock melamine plastic laminate. Use 1/16” minimum for signs up to 20 square inches or 8 inches in length. Use 1/8” thick for larger sizes. All labels shall be punched for mechanical fastening. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady 2. Panduit 3. Ideal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING A. Backbone Cable: 1. Test the cable on the reel for continuity before installing it, to insure no damage was done in shipment from the manufacturer to the job site. 2. After installation and termination, test each segment of the cable plant individually as it is installed, to insure each connector and cable is good. 3. Link attenuation is the only required field test except for the patched runs in the campus backbone system where an OTDR test will be required. Use launch cables at each end and provide print outs showing all connectors. OTDR will also be required to determine bad connections or damage when the link attenuation test fails. 4. Maximum localized attenuation allowed is 2dB. 5. Backbone multimode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 850nm and 1300 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A method B. 6. Backbone single mode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 1310nm and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A method A.1. 7. Multimode fiber shall conform to the following: 850 nm: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 3.5 1000 5.5 1500 7.5 2000 9.0 1300 nm: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 2.2 1000 3.0 1500 3.8 2000 4.5 8. Lakeview Health Services Testing, identification and Administration 272000-3 West End Heights 3 9. Single Mode Fiber shall conform to the following: (Note: Taken at 1550 nm) Inside: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 2.0 1000 2.5 1500 3.0 2000 3.5 2500 4.0 3000 4.5 Outside: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 1.8 1000 2.0 1500 2.2 2000 2.5 2500 2.8 3000 3.0 B. Documentation: 1. Provide attenuation and cable length test results for all installed cable pairs. 3.2 100 OHM UTP CABLE TESTING A. The testing parameters called for in this section shall apply for up to 90 meters of horizontal cable, a work area equipment cord, an RJ45 outlet and 2 cross connect connections in the closet. B. The test parameters shall include Wire Map, Length, Attenuation and NEXT. C. Wire Map: 1. The wire map test shall verify pair to pin termination at each end and check for connectivity errors. The wire map shall indicate the following for each of the eight conductors: a. Continuity to the remote end b. Shorts between any two or more conductors c. Crossed pairs d. Reversed pairs e. Split pairs f. Any other miswiring Lakeview Health Services Testing, identification and Administration 272000-4 West End Heights 4 D. Cable Length: 1. The maximum length of the test link including the test equipment cords shall be 94 meters. 2. The link attenuation and NEXT of all cables shall be tested. The link is the sum of the attenuation of all connecting hardware, 10 meters of patch and equipment cords and 90 meters of cable. E. Data Reporting and Accuracy: 1. General: a Pass or Fail result for each parameter shall be determined by the allowable limits for each parameter. If the test result of a parameter is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the tester it shall be marked with an asterisk. Data at all measured points shall be uploaded to a P.C. and printed on a laser printer. 2. Wire Map: Wire map tests shall be marked “Pass” if wiring is determined correct. 3. Length: Test results shall be provided in meters and marked “Pass or Fail” based on the length vs. allowable length. 4. Attenuation: Report the attenuation value and the frequency at point of failure or the highest frequency passed. Measured attenuation values lower than 3dB used for a pass/fail determination. Report the attenuation per unit length for links longer than 15 meters. Attenuation shall be measured from 1 MHz to 350 Mhz (Category 5e) or 550 Mhz (Category 6) in 1 MHz steps. 5. NEXT: Report the NEXT value and “pass or fail”. 6. Submit the test results to the engineer in a spiral binder and CD prior to substantial completion punch list. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION & RECORDS A. Cables: 1. Cables shall be marked at each endpoint and at all intermediate pull or junction boxes. Provide label on the cable and on the faceplate. 2. Provide written records in computer generated, table format for all cables, with the as-built drawings. The table shall include the following information: a. Cable Identifier b. Cable type c. No. of strands (optical fiber) or pairs (UTP) d. Length e. Room number or Station outlet B. Optical Fiber: 1. Provide laser printed label for each fiber pair. 2. The label shall be identical at both ends. C. Station Outlets: 1. Provide insert with clear plastic label cover on faceplates. 2. Provide a laser printed label in the insert. 3. Provide laser printed adhesive labels on station outlets in surface metal raceway. D. Patch Panels: 1. Label patch panels with laser printed adhesive markers 2. Each panel shall be labeled using a Letter designation (A,B,C etc.) 3.4 END -TO - END REPORTS A. Provide computer generated spread sheet (Lotus, Excel or Quattro Pro) that details each communication outlet from work area connection to patch panel. The spread sheet shall have columns identifying the station outlet and cable ID room number , pathway ID(s), cable type, and length. 3.5 CROSS CONNECT REPORT A. Provide computer generated spread sheet (Lotus, Excel or Quattro Pro) that identifies the patch panel port, type of patch (FO or UTP) and the hub or switch port. Lakeview Health Services Testing, identification and Administration 272000-5 West End Heights 5 3.6 AS - BUILT DRAWINGS A. Provide as-built drawings showing all, station outlets, equipment rooms and entrance facilities on 1/8 scale floor plans. B. Provide rack elevations for all equipment cabinets and racks indicating rack, patch panels and hardware identifiers. C. The as-builts shall indicate all identifiers on pathways, closets and station outlets and be provided in a dwg format. END OF SECTION 272000 Lakeview Health Services Intrusion Detection System 281600-1 West End Heights SECTION 281600 - INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Intrusion detection control panel. 2. Key pad. 3. Wireless transmitters. 4. Door/window contacts. 1.1 DESIGN MAKE A. The Design make Equipment is Sonitrol. B. Coordinate all equipment requirements, wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, and installation with the equipment supplier. C. The preferred Manufacturer’s Representative is: Matthew Miles Sonitrol Security Systems of Western NY 2020 West Henrietta Road, Suite 6A Rochester, NY 14623 585-292-0600 mmiles@sonitrolwny.com 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All Intrusion Detection system devices shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner’s Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. Materials specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. The following Articles of the National Fire Protection Agency: a. NFPA 71 - Central Station b. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for the following: 1. Intrusion Detection Control Panel. 2. Key pad 3. Wireless Transmitters PART 2 - PRODUCTS Lakeview Health Services Intrusion Detection System 281600-2 West End Heights 2.1 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL A. System Description: 1. The system shall include a control panel with telephone line monitor, memory logger, real time clock, calendar, test timer, battery charger, battery, diagnostics display time/event based scheduling system and surge suppression. 2. System devices shall be point addressable. 3. Programmable to separate points into a minimum of 8 independent zones. 4. Capable of reporting alarm and trouble conditions to a UL listed central station via dial-up telephone line. 5. Detection loops and power supplies shall be electrically supervised. 6. The control panel shall be programmable locally or remotely, via a portable programmer or a P.C. 7. The control panel shall annunciate alarm and trouble messages in English on the display. 8. Shall be capable of executing diagnostics and testing functions locally or remotely. 9. The control panel shall be capable of activating a minimum of 96 output relays. 10. Shall be capable of controlling relays and automatically executing system functions based on a time/event scheduling program. The following functions may be executed. a. Arm / Disarm a specific area. b. Bypass / Unbypass a point. c. Activate / Deactivate a relay. d. Send a test report. e. Adjust system clock for daylight savings time. B. System Features/Capabilities 1. Minimum of 8 points. Each of the addressable points shall be capable of supporting “group zoning”. Group zoning refers to the combining of sensors into a separately identifiable and separately annunciated area. 2. Programming Point Functionality: Each point in the system shall provide for the following type of response in the system. a. Always on (24 hour response) b. On when the system is Master Armed c. Only on when the system is Perimeter Armed d. Displays / Does Not Display at the annunciator panel when the point is activated. e. Provides / Does Not Provide entry warning tone f. Sounds / Does Not Sound audible alarm indication. g. The Point is bypassable / not bypassable h. Alarm Verification with programmable verification time. i. Summary Relay activation by Point. 3. The control panel shall support 8 independent zones. Each of the eight zones shall have custom text associated with the armed state, disarmed state and point off normal state. Additionally, the control panel shall be capable of assigning up to eight zone identifiers to the areas depending on the distribution of areas per zone. 4. Any zone shall be configurable to allow arming by specific users when a programmable number of devices are faulted or bypassed. 5. Areas shall be independently controlled by their corresponding keypad. Each keypad can be designated to control a specific area, or group of areas, or all areas in the system. 6. Independent control or relay functions by area shall be possible through programming assignments. 7. System shall be capable of supporting a minimum of eight keypads. 8. System shall support up to 99 different passcodes. Each passcode shall be variable from three to six digits. Passcodes shall be enabled or disabled by area(s) and shall be assigned one of ten different authority levels to carry out functions such as the activation of relays from the keypad. 9. Testing, Diagnostic, and Programming Facilities: Automatic test reports and remote system access for diagnostics, programming, and log (Logger) uploads shall also be supported via a remote central station computer. 10. The system shall be capable of logging up to 100 events indicating time, date, type of event, account number, zone number, user ID, point text, and primary/secondary telephone number called for each event. Logs shall be viewed locally at the keypad or remotely via a computer. C. The control panel shall support two telephone lines that are to be alternated for the transmission of consecutive events. The control panel shall have the capability of communicating with up to two different central stations. Lakeview Health Services Intrusion Detection System 281600-3 West End Heights D. The control panel shall have three different output tones, Steady, Pulsed, and Temporal Code 3. E. The Control Panel shall check the point sensor loops once every 0.5 seconds. The point response time is programmable over a range of 0.5 to 4.5 seconds. F. The Control Panel shall provide a “user-friendly” interface for programming/customizing the system. These system features shall have restrictions based on 10 individually programmable levels of passcode authority which can be assigned to system users. The user’s passcode shall have the capability of being assigned a different authority level in each of the eight zones. User programmable/activated functions include: 1. Arming the system. 2. Disarming the system. 3. Viewing system status. 4. Implementation functions. 5. Testing the system. 6. Change system parameters. 7. Extend the closing time of system. 8. Transmitting special alerts and activating audible and visible signals. 9. Editing of time/event based scheduling program from the keypad. G. Electrical Requirements: 1. System shall be rated to accept a 120 volt branch circuit. 2. When the primary power source fails, the system can be configured to report an “AC Fail” message to a central station. The transmission delay of this message is programmable from one to 90 seconds. 3. Secondary power (standby battery): The Contractor shall provide adequate battery power to operate the system for 24 hours, and then sound all alarms for five minutes. 4. Provide plenum rated wiring as recommended by the manufacturer. H. Materials: 1. System Hardware Description: a. The Intrusion Detection System shall be provided with the following components. Additional accessories shall be provided based on the quantities and features required for the application. 1) Enclosure. 2) Lock and key. 3) Faceplate shield. 4) Power transformer. 2. Design Make: Sonitrol FlexIP, or approved equal. 2.2 KEYPADS A. Digital user interface station to arming, disarming, and control of up to eight zones in the system. B. 16 character English language display. C. Real time clock display. D. Can be used for adding, deleting, or changing passwords. E. Suitable for semi-flush mounting in wall. F. Design Make: Sonitrol, or approved equal. 2.3 WIRELESS TRANSMITTERS A. Two button wireless transmitter for panic notification Lakeview Health Services Intrusion Detection System 281600-4 West End Heights B. Belt clip. C. Flashing LED on all transmissions. D. Provide four wireless transmitters for owner use. E. Design Make: Sonitrol Model EN1235D, or approved equal 2.4 DOOR CONTACTS A. Button type magnetic contact: 1. 0.75” diameter magnetic door contacts. Magnet installs in door, contact installs in door frame. 2. Provide single pole, double throw contact with 1’ long #22 AWG leads brought out. 3. Maximum 1” gap. 4. Provide contact that will not affect the fire integrity of U.L. listed fire rated doors. 5. Design Make: Bosch Catalog No. ISN-CTC75 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INTRUSION DETECTION CONTROL SYSTEM A. Installation: 1. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Programming of the system shall include the following tasks: 1. Programming system configuration parameters (hardware and software, zone/circuit numbers, communication parameters). 2. Programming operational parameters such as opening/closing reports and windows, system response text (custom English) displays of events, activation of relays that drive auxiliary devices, and identifying types of zones/loops. 3. Programming passcodes according to the authorities and functions defined by the Owner. 4. Other system programming tasks required by the Owner. These additional programming requirements shall be coordinated between the Owner and the contractor. C. Testing: 1. Operational Testing: The contractor shall perform thorough operational testing and verify that all system components re fully operational. 2. Hard-copy System Printout: The contractor shall submit a hard-copy system printout of all components tested and certify 100 percent operation indicating all devices/panels/units have passed the test criteria set forth by the manufacturer. 3.2 MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACTS A. Install magnetic contacts in locations shown on plans. B. Provide conduit or surface metal raceway from the accessible ceiling space to the door contact. Install conduit concealed wherever possible. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. The contractor shall certify completion in wiring and schedule the commissioning walk-through. The contractor shall provide all the tools and personnel needed to conduct an efficient commissioning process. END OF SECTION 281600 Lakeview Health Services Access Control System 282000-1 West End Heights SECTION 282000 – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required for the installation of a complete and functioning access control system as shown on the drawing and described in this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. The following equipment is included as part of this section: 1. Network Controller 2. Input/Output Modules 3. Card Readers 4. Door Release Pushbutton 5. Request-To-Exit Motion Sensor 6. Door Contacts 7. FOB’s 8. Batteries 9. Management Software 10. Wiring 11. Programming 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide catalog cut sheets on all equipment, devices, hardware, etc. B. Provide wiring diagram for connection of all components. 1.4 DESIGN MAKE A. The Design make Equipment is Sonitrol. B. Coordinate all equipment requirements, wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, and installation with the equipment supplier. C. The preferred Manufacturer’s Representative is: Matthew Miles Sonitrol Security Systems of Western NY 2020 West Henrietta Road, Suite 6A Rochester, NY 14623 585-292-0600 mmiles@sonitrolwny.com 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The access control system shall consist of a central control panel that controls access to all doors in the system. B. Provide network controller cards in the control panel as required to accommodate the work called for on the plans. C. Provide 2-#14 from the access control system panel to each door strike for power. D. Provide 6/C #22 AWG cable with shield and drain from the access control system panel to each card reader for control. E. Provide 4/C #22 AWG cable to each door contact for control and status wiring. F. Provide all required system programming, terminations, testing, and start-up. G. Coordinate with the general contractor to provide wiring as required to the door strikes and card readers. Lakeview Health Services Access Control System 282000-2 West End Heights PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NETWORK CONTROLLER A. Capable of monitoring card readers, door contacts and HVAC systems. B. Modular CPU for monitoring and control of I/O modules. C. Minimum 8 inputs (two card readers), and 4 outputs. D. Four programmable communications ports. E. Din Rail mounted. F. 8MB DRAM, 4 MB flash and a math co-processor. G. History logging capabilities. H. Local and remote alarming. I. Communicates with up to 32 I/O modules. J. Ethernet TCP/IP for interfacing to a wide area network. K. Plain English programming. L. Ability to permit or deny access within 0.5 seconds. M. Integral battery backup, with 60 hours of battery life. N. Design Make: Sonitrol or approved equal. 2.2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. Security management system communicating through a TCP/IP protocol. B. Ability to interface with several different sites and provide overall control. C. Graphic display. D. Ability to input and manage personnel data. E. Ability to create and modify schedules. F. Ability to create reports. G. Ability to log and manage alarms. Alarms can be sent via e-mails and paging systems. H. Design Make: Sonitrol, or approved equal. 2.3 DIGITAL INPUT MODULES A. Eight digital input ports. B. Digital or counter inputs, software selectable. C. Suitable for use with contact closure or 0-5 volt. D. Din Rail mounted. Lakeview Health Services Access Control System 282000-3 West End Heights E. Design Make: Sonitrol or approved equal. 2.4 I/O MODULES A. Supports Wiegand/Prox card readers. B. 24 VDC input power. C. Each I/O module shall control one card reader. D. (2) 5A, Form C relays. E. Up to three supervised alarm inputs can be used. F. Din Rail mounted. G. Design Make: Sonitrol or approved equal. 2.5 CARD READER A. Mullion mounted. B. 6-8” reading range. C. Suitable for exterior environments. D. LED for visual indication. E. UL 294 Listed. F. Design Make: HID RP10 or approved equal. 2.6 FOB’S A. Provide (200) fobs, suitable for use with the Wiegand proximity sensor. 2.7 DOOR CONTACT A. Connect Door Contacts furnished by the Door Hardware Sub-Contractor. Coordinate with General Contractor and Door Hardware Sub-Contractor. 2.8 DOOR RELEASE PUSHBUTTON A. Provide (1) momentary contact pushbutton at each door equipped with an electromagnetic lock to override the lock. 2.9 REQUEST-TO-EXIT MOTION SENSOR A. Connect Request-To-Exit Motion Sensors furnished by the Door Hardware Sub-Contractor. Coordinate with General Contractor and Door Hardware Sub-Contractor. B. Design Make: Honeywell IS310 or approved equal. 2.10 POWER SUPPLIES A. Provide power supplies as required by the manufacturer. B. Design Make: Altronix eFlow 4N /6N Series. Lakeview Health Services Access Control System 282000-4 West End Heights PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate all work with the General Contractor, including door strike voltages, door frame rough-in methods, location of card readers, location of surface metal raceway, etc. B. Obtain certified wiring diagrams from the equipment provider. C. Install all wiring concealed wherever possible. Provide surface metal raceway inside the building where required. Do not install surface metal raceway on the exterior of the building. D. Provide all terminations, testing, programming, and functional testing to ensure the system is in working order. E. Meet with the owner to obtain all personnel data, calendar schedules and control functions. Provide programming of the system to meet the owner’s requirements. Provide a minimum of three programming modifications as part of the base bid. 3.2 TRAINING A. Provide two 2-hour training sessions to the owner. Provide one training session at turnover, the second training session after the owner has worked with the system for one month. B. Train the owner in the methods of programming the system, including creating FOB’s, inputting personnel data, and creating and modifying schedules. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty on all parts and labor. B. The warranty shall take effect after the Owner has accepted the system. END OF SECTION 282000 Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-1 West End Heights SECTION 282300 - DIGITAL CCTV SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary to provide a complete and operating Digital CCTV System as shown on the drawings and described herein. B. The following system components are specified in this section 1. CCTV Cameras 2. 24 VAC power supplies 3. CCTV Camera Housings and enclosures 4. Digital Video Server/Recorder (DVR) 5. Monitors 6. Equipment enclosures and mounting hardware 7. Cable as required by the system manufacturer C. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, cabling, software and programming as required for a complete operational system providing the functionality called for. All required component specifications might not be included in the specification however they must be provided. D. Provide all required digital pan-tilt-zoom controllers, power supplies, software licenses, cabling, testing, terminations, and labeling required for a complete project. 1.2 DESIGN MAKE A. The Design make Equipment is Vigil. B. Coordinate all equipment requirements, wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, and installation with the equipment supplier. C. The preferred Manufacturer’s Representative is: Matthew Miles Sonitrol Security Systems of Western NY 2020 West Henrietta Road, Suite 6A Rochester, NY 14623 585-292-0600 mmiles@sonitrolwny.com 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Basic System Characteristics: 1. Digital Video Recorder (DVR) allows the recording, live viewing, and playback of recorded video for periods of up to two months without the need for offline storage to digital tape. DVR performs all viewing, playback, and video storage functions simultaneously. 2. DVR recorders are rack-mountable boxes equipped with a digital multiplexer. Video is displayed on a standard flatscreen monitor, and configuration is performed through a standard mouse and keyboard interface. 3. DVR is configured with control software and can record video continuously, only during alarm events, or only while activity is present. Each camera can record in different modes and on different schedules, or they can be configured the same. a. Control software allows for search and retrieval of video. User-defined parameters allow searches based on the time and date the video was captured, whether alarm or motion events occurred, and which camera captured the video. The software also permits full video storage management, hardware control, alarm configuration, and export of video and individual frames. 4. System shall have the ability to use remote viewing software with the ability of viewing live or recorded video over standard network or modem connections. This software shall be available at no cost to the user and shall be downloadable using standard internet connections. 5. The system shall be web enabled for remote viewing. Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-2 West End Heights 6. The system shall be provided with an application to allow viewing from a smartphone. B. CCTV System Components: 1. The control system shall include the following components a. Digital Video Recorder/Server. b. Cameras. c. Camera housings and mounting hardware. d. Power supplies, monitors and other miscellaneous components. e. Wiring, cables and connectors. C. System Operation: 1. Video Surveillance a. Surveillance cameras will be located within buildings and on building exteriors to monitor selected parking lots, entrances and secluded areas. b. Cameras will be field selectable for activation on motion within the cameras viewing range, to be permanently on, to be activated by external alarms, or to be scheduled on. c. All cameras that are activated shall be recording digital video to the server. The system will be programmed to automatically overwrite the oldest video images when drive space is low. d. The owner will be able to view camera output on monitors in the main office and on local monitors connected directly to a specific camera(s) as called for on the drawings. e. The output to the monitors may be configured for full or split screen or for random scan of all cameras. f. The video will be viewable from any PC equipped with the client remote viewing software. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Design and operation of the Digital CCTV System shall conform to the following referenced codes, regulations and standards as applicable: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. UL 294 Access Control Systems 3. UL 1076 Line Supervision 4. FCC Rules and Regulations 5. Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. Applicable Federal, State and Local laws, regulations, codes 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Manufacturers shall have been in business for a minimum of five years and must guarantee that spare parts will be carried for a minimum of 10 years. B. The installer must be a company specializing in CCTV Systems with a minimum of five years experience. The installer must have personnel authorized by the system manufacturers. The installer may be a sub contractor to the electrical contractor. C. If the installer is a sub-contractor, the wiring and physical equipment installation may be done by the electrical contractor, under the supervision of the qualified sub-contractor. All system programming, configuration, testing and commissioning must be done by the qualified installer’s manufacturer certified personnel. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit all items in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010. Submittals, and shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Model numbers of all components furnished on the job 2. Manufacturer’s catalog data sheets for all components 3. Complete engineered drawings indicating: a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all devices. b. Termination details for all devices. Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-3 West End Heights c. Single-line system schematic representing the entire system. 4. The Contractor shall submit a paragraph, item-by-item statement of compliance with this specification. The statement of compliance shall consist of a list of all paragraphs starting at Section 1. a. Where the proposed system complies fully, such shall be indicated by placing the word “comply” opposite the paragraph number. b. Where the proposed system does not comply, but accomplishes the stated function in a manner different from that described, such shall be indicated by placing the words “comply with intent” opposite the paragraph number, followed by a full description of the deviation. Where a full description of the deviation is not provided, it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not comply with the paragraph in question and an “exception” is taken. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all labor, workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. Should a failure occur within the first year to the access control system, the Contractor shall provide all labor and materials necessary to restore the system to a complete operating condition, at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DIGITAL VIDEO SERVER/RECORDER (DVR) A. General System Overview: 1. Cameras are connected to DVR via 24 port, Category 6 Power-Over-Ethernet (PoE) network Switches. The DVR shall be a 19-inch-wide rack-mountable box that terminates the video inputs and time-base corrects the video signals for the compression channel. 2. DVR shall be capable of connecting a minimum of 48 cameras. 3. DVR captures video at 60 fields per second NTSC (50 PAL). The rate of image capture and the size of individual images can be controlled separately for each camera input. 4. DVR shall store video in segments directly on its internal hard drive. The user shall have the ability to configure newly captured video to automatically begin replacing the oldest video stored on the disk when the disk's capacity is reached. 5. DVR shall have the ability to be configured to record video only while activity is occurring in the camera’s view. Users define the DVR’s level of motion sensitivity and configure DVR to ignore subtle changes in light level. Motion masks eliminate areas of the camera view where motion events should not trigger recording. 6. The DVR shall accept external alarms connected to DVR via a contact trigger block located on DVR. DVR shall accept up to 16 alarms. 7. DVR shall record in four user selectable modes: Motion mode (records activity only); Alarm mode (records alarm events only); both mode (records activity and alarm events only); and Free mode (records continually). 8. DVR shall record information about the time, date, and source of all video for easy search and retrieval. The status of all alarm inputs is recorded with each stored image. 9. Live video can be viewed in 2x2, 3x3, and 4x4 modes during recording. Depending on the number of cameras connected, the update rate for the live video windows varies. 10. Video can be transferred from DVR to an external monitor. DVR shall contain a minimum of five switched outputs (including two with onscreen display). 11. Video review and retrieval: a. DVR allows searches based on a time frame, one or more video sources, and types of events (motion, alarm, etc.). b. Video Results: Search results are listed with the following information: source camera; time and date captured; whether motion or alarm events occurred; number of frames in the segment; and location (disk or tape). Results are sortable. c. User Interface: Search results are played back with full VCR control (play, fast forward, rewind, pause, step forward, etc.). d. Image Export: Individual images can be exported to other disks in standard Windows image file formats. 12. Remote review of video: a. Live and recorded video on a DVR system can be viewed remotely via a remote viewing software. DVR operates as a server, allowing users to download recorded or live video over a network or modem connection. b. Recorded video can be downloaded from DVR through any remote client provided the client can access the DVR via a network or modem connection and has the remote viewing software installed. c. Live video can be downloaded from DVR through a remote client. DVR can transfer live images across a network as they are recorded. Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-4 West End Heights d. DVR operates as a server for live and recorded video. It requires the RemoteView Server application to be running on the DVR platform. e. The software shall be provided with an application that permits viewing of the DVR data on a smart phone. B. System Control Software: 1. The control software shall allow for the full control of video viewing, alarm configuration, scheduling, search and playback, hardware setup, and user administration. Control Software is controlled using a mouse and keyboard. The main screen includes indicators for the current date and time, the recording status of each camera input, disk usage, and the amount of recording time available at the current hardware settings. 2. The user interface allows control of the contrast, brightness, sharpness, hue, and saturation of video. Each camera shall be individually configurable. 3. A schedule page shall be a graphical representation of the DVR recording schedule. Recording modes shall be colorcoded. Control Software allows scheduling of all cameras to record in the same mode for 24 hours a day or for recording segments to be drawn on a timeline. Each camera can be scheduled to record in unlimited combinations of recording modes and schedules. 4. The control software shall allow for the user to view live video from four inputs configured 2x2, nine inputs configured 3x3, or from 16 inputs configured 4x4. The user decides which camera is displayed in which window. In all modes, motion and alarm events trigger a visual feedback mechanism, calling attention to the appropriate view screen with a brightly colored border. 5. The control software shall allow for the user to control which cameras should record video during an alarm event. Up to 16 alarms can be connected to DVR. Each alarm can trigger up to four cameras, and each camera can be triggered by any number of alarms. Alarms are individually configurable as normally open or normally closed. DVR 32000 can also record a limited portion of an alarm event, preventing additional storage requirements. 6. The control software shall allow for the complete control of user access. Users must enter a password to use DVR and are granted one of three levels of permissions. Non-administrators can be prevented from accessing other portions of DVR. Control Software shall provides contingencies for improper shutdown that automatically resume recording without user intervention. 7. The control software shall allow for the full control of video compression. Images can be captured at sizes from 7KB to 40KB. Each camera can be configured independently. 8. The control software shall provide complete disk management. The user determines which disks video is stored on and limits the amount of video each disk can hold. Video is stored in one-minute segments, alternating among each available disk (except for the system disk). 9. The control software shall allow for the reduction of frame rate for each camera. By default, video is captured at one frame per second per camera. DVR can also record video at the maximum potential frame rate or record one frame every two, four, or eight seconds per camera. 10. The control software shall have the ability to use motion masks to eliminate areas of a camera's view from activity detection. Masks can be created in any detailed pattern to prevent the unwanted recording of anticipated activity. The resolution of this motion mask is 23 blocks horizontal by 16 blocks vertical (23x18 PAL). 11. Software shall operate on the Windows 7 Professional 64 bit. C. The digital video server/recorder shall meet the following minimum hardware specifications: 1. Processor – Intel i3-3220 2. 256 L2 cache 3. Memory – 4 GB DDR3 UDIMM 4. 19" rack mount chassis 5. Hard Drive – 3.0 TB 6. 10/100TX NIC 7. 8 external USB2.0 ports D. Minimum 48 camera inputs with 60 fps recording. E. Provide with PS/2 keyboard and Microsoft IntelliMouse (wheelmouse). F. Provide with Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 64 bit software. G. Provide client software to allow remote access server recording and play back features over an IP network. H. Provide cabinet, rack mounting hardware, mouse, keyboard. I. Provide a total of three (3) 20.5” flatscreen color monitors for display. J. Provide UPS with 4 hour back up. Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-5 West End Heights K. Provide 24 port PoE switches as required. L. Design Make: Vigil Model V7300. M. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Integral Technologies 2. Philips 3. Lenel 4. Peace of Mind Technologies 5. Approved Equal 2.2 DIGITAL INTERIOR/EXTERIOR MINI DOME CAMERA WITH DAY/NIGHT FUNCTION A. Digital mini-dome camera, 4 MP B. High resolution Color 1/3” C. 2.5 – 6 mm varifocal lens D. Weather and vandal resistant. E. Nominal 7” diameter x 5” high. F. Digital pan/tilt/zoom G. SMPTE Compliant HDTV 1080p video H. IR Illumination for increased sensitivity in low light situations. I. PoE, 7.5 watt J. 30 fps. K. Minimum resolution: 2688 H x 1520 V pixel array at 30 fps. L. Minimum illumination 0.12 lux, f1.2 M. Automatic/Manual gain control N. Internal/line lock sync O. RJ45 connectors P. Aluminum housing with polycarbonate dome. Q. Provide mounting brackets as required. R. Environmental Conditions: 1. -40C to 50C 2. 30-90% Humidity non-condensing 3. Provide necessary enclosure options required to maintain proper camera environmental operating conditions at ambient temperatures of -20F to 122F. S. Day/Night Function: 1. The camera shall have day/night function in which the image reproduction will convert from color to black & white when the video level drops below 20-30IRE or 40-50IRE. T. Design Make: Visix V-Series, or approved equal. Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-6 West End Heights 2.3 DIGITAL SURROUND VIDEO CAMERA WITH DAY/NIGHT FUNCTION A. Digital mini-dome camera with multiple lenses for surround view of 180 degrees or 360 degrees. B. Four cameras at 3MP each for 12 MP total. C. High resolution Color 1/3” D. 2.5 – 6 mm varifocal lens E. Weather and vandal resistant. F. Nominal 7” diameter x 5” high. G. Digital pan/tilt/zoom H. SMPTE Compliant HDTV 1080p video I. IR Illumination for increased sensitivity in low light situations. J. PoE, 7.5 watt K. 30 fps. L. Minimum resolution: 2688 H x 1520 V pixel array at 30 fps. M. Minimum illumination 0.12 lux, f1.2 N. Automatic/Manual gain control O. Internal/line lock sync P. RJ45 connectors Q. Aluminum housing with polycarbonate dome. R. Provide mounting brackets as required. S. Environmental Conditions: 1. -40C to 50C 2. 30-90% Humidity non-condensing 3. Provide necessary enclosure options required to maintain proper camera environmental operating conditions at ambient temperatures of -20F to 122F. T. Day/Night Function: 1. The camera shall have day/night function in which the image reproduction will convert from color to black & white when the video level drops below 20-30IRE or 40-50IRE. U. Design Make: Visix V-Series, or approved equal. 2.4 CAMERA AND ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLIES A. UL listed for commercial CCTV equipment. Unit shall maintain camera synchronization. Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-7 West End Heights B. 120 volt AC 60 Hz, input power with fuse protection, on/off switch, LED power on indication and surge suppression. C. 24 volt ac class 2 limited power outputs rated at 2.5 amps each. Provide number of output circuits as required. D. Screw cover NEMA 1 enclosure. E. Design Make: Altronix ALTV series F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Altronix 2. Approved Equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRAMMING A. The system installer shall meet with the owner as many times as necessary to finalize system programming. The installer shall review the owner’s security plans and policies and make programming decisions based on that plan. B. The system installer shall provide a word document that describes the complete operation of the system as decided on during the programming meeting(s). The owner will sign off on the sequence of operation prior to the system programming commencing. C. Provide initial setup and programming of remote viewing software for (3) owner furnished workstations connected to the owners LAN. D. The installer shall make changes to the initial system programming for up to 90 days after the initial installation at no additional cost. 3.2 WIRING, CONDUIT AND CABLE A. All wiring (high voltage, 50 volts and greater) and conduit is to be installed in accordance with local and national electrical codes. B. All cable less than 50 volts shall to be considered low voltage. C. All low voltage cable is to be run in conduit in any non-accessible concealed space and up to 10 ft. above floor level within mechanical rooms. Wiring within accessible unfinished areas (ceilings, crawl spaces) may be run exposed with proper support with bridle rings. Bridle rings shall be installed a minimum of 4 ft on center. D. Provide plenum rated cable where installed above the lay-in ceilings. E. Wiring shall be run parallel and perpendicular to building lines in a neat and workmanlike manner and bundled with nylon tie wraps. F. Conduit sleeves shall be run through any concrete or block walls for low voltage cable to be run through such walls. G. All low voltage cable shall be run separate from high voltage cable. All microprocessor communications cable shall be run separate from any low or high voltage cable. H. Any cable running in plenum rated areas shall be plenum rated cable. I. Coaxial cable shall conform to RG62 or RG59 rating. Provide plenum rated coaxial cable when running in return air plenums. J. Wires shall be installed a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate piping. K. A true earth ground shall be available in the building. Ground shall be run from the source electrical panel ground to each controller. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-8 West End Heights A. Installation of the digital CCTV system shall include the appropriate equipment and shall be performed by a factory-trained Installer. The installation shall be completed to meet the requirements of this specification and the project drawings. The installation shall include the following: 1. Site planning and system configuration of field hardware. 2. Complete hardware setup of all system Workstations and peripherals. 3. Setup of specific network software configuration requirements. 4. Complete system diagnostics verification. 5. Complete system operation verification. B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of product in the applications indicated. Anchor products securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work. C. The Contractor is responsible to remedy defects due to faulty workmanship and materials that appear within one year from the date of acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions, unless Specifications specify a different duration. 3.4 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST A. Provide demonstration, in the presents of the owners representatives, showing the complete operation of entire system functionality. 3.5 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION A. Complete documentation shall be provided with the system. The documentation shall completely describe all operations, each program, data sets and the hardware and peripherals. All updates, addendum and adjustments to the documentation shall be provided at no additional charge, in the same quantities as originally required. B. System Administrator Manual - Overview and step by step guide and instructions detailing all System Administrator responsibility and authority. C. User Manual - Step by step guide and instructions detailing all system user functions and responsibilities. D. Technical Maintenance Manual - Shall be a comprehensive and detailed document providing all maintenance action, system testing schedules, troubleshooting flowcharts, functional system layout and block diagrams and schematic diagrams of all system wiring. 3.6 DIGITAL VIDEO SERVER/RECORDER A. Connect all CCTV cameras to the server. B. Provide all software required for a complete video monitoring and archiving system over the owner’s Ethernet LAN. Configure the monitoring software on client workstations with a desktop icon for each CCTV camera. 3.7 CCTV POWER SUPPLIES A. Provide all 24VAC external power supplies sized for cameras and all accessories on the exterior cameras 3.8 CAMERAS A. The final aiming, focusing and lens selection of cameras shall be done in conjunction with the owner’s representative. B. Aim and focus cameras initially and test the system. Re-aim and focus the cameras as necessary to the owner’s satisfaction. C. Field verify all camera housing locations in interior spaces prior to ordering the housing. Make changes to the type of housing as required to satisfy the owner’s requirements. D. Field verify all camera housing locations in exterior locations prior to ordering the housing. Provide all required housing options needed to maintain camera operating parameters. Make changes to the type of housing as required to satisfy the owner’s requirements. 3.9 SYSTEM TRAINING A. Provide owners representatives with a course that details recording, playback, archiving features of the software package and Lakeview Health Services Digital CCTV System 282300-9 West End Heights trouble shooting of the CCTV cameras and recording equipment. END OF SECTION 282300 Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 283110 - ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, hardware, software, and programming required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panel 2. Manual Pull Stations 3. Analog Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Sensor 4. Fixed Temperature Heat Detector 5. Duct Type Smoke Detector 6. Addressable Monitor Module 7. Control Relay Module 8. Visual Notification Appliance 9. Audible-Visual Notification Appliance 10. Low Frequency Audible-Visual Notification Appliance 11. Carbon Monoxide Audible-Visual Notification Appliance 12. Remote Annunciator Panel 13. Carbon Monoxide Detector 14. Carbon Monoxide Visual Notification Appliance 15. Digital Communicator 16. Batteries and Charger 17. Notification Appliance Power Panel (NAPP) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fire alarm system components, devices, outlet boxes, wiring, and raceways shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. All fire alarm devices shall be installed in accordance with the following codes and guidelines: 1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code 2. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 5. New York State Building Code 6. Americans with Disabilities Act. C. All equipment and systems provided shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of UL 864 9th edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide standard product data for all equipment indicating the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, and listing of the equipment. B. Provide calculations for sizing all batteries and power supplies. C. Provide standard wiring diagrams for all devices. D. Provide a complete riser diagram indicating types of devices, number of initiation and signal loop circuits, class of wiring system, and type of wiring. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-2 West End Heights 2 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide three sets of Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with section 260010 upon completion of the project. B. O&M Manuals may be provided in compact disc format. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire alarm system shall be analog addressable, with manual and automatic initiation devices and notification appliances. B. System shall be supervised to continuously monitor the integrity of the circuit conductors and power supplies. C. The fire alarm system shall utilize two wire circuits. Wiring shall be in accordance with Class B, Style 4 operation for Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) and Class B, Style Y operation for Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). D. The fire alarm control panel shall permit on-site programming to accommodate facility expansions, renovations, or fire alarm system modifications. All memory shall be non-volatile. Printed circuit boards that must be “burned-in” at the factory will not be permitted. E. The control panel shall have 24 VDC output power supplies for notification appliance circuits and for control circuits such as elevator capture, fire alarm fan shutdown, and electro-magnetic door holdopen operation. System shall be capable of controlling additional remote notification appliance power. F. Summary Reports: 1. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be capable of displaying and printing summary reports. The summary reports shall include: a. A list of all alarm points not in their normal state. b. A list of all points in the system, including their current status. c. A list of data for all control-by-event programs. d. A list of data for all time-initiated programs. G. Alarm Priority: 1. Alarms shall be processed at three levels of priority: a. Fire alarms shall have the highest priority. b. Other alarms that require interaction by the attendant shall have the second level of priority. c. Monitored points that do not require interaction by the attendant shall be the lowest level of priority. H. System Access: 1. Access to the system shall be controlled by at least three levels of security to prevent programming modifications by unauthorized personnel. a. The lowest level of access shall permit the attendant to view the system display, print alarms and perform life safety control-by-event functions. The Attendant has minimal access to the system functions. b. The mid-level access shall permit the attendant to change user programmable parameters. c. The highest level of access shall permit the modification of system software. Only a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer shall access this level. 1.7 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Upon an abnormal condition on the fire alarm system, the appropriate LED (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) shall flash. The panel audible alarm shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble or supervisory conditions. All abnormal events shall be logged into the database, along with the date and time. B. Operation of any automatic or manual alarm initiating device shall cause the following to happen: Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-3 West End Heights 3 1. Sound all alarm signals throughout the building in a Temporal Code. 2. Activate all visual strobe lights throughout the building. 3. Display the points in alarm on the LCD display at the fire alarm control panel and at all remote alarm annunciator panels and print at all system printers. The visual indication shall remain until the alarm condition is reset. 4. Notify the UL listed central station via the dial up digital communicator. 5. Operate alarm relay contacts to shut down all supply fans in the system. All smoke dampers shall close 30 seconds after their respective fan systems have shut down. 6. Operate alarm relay contacts to initiate the elevator capture sequence. 7. Operate alarm relay contacts to release all magnetically held doors throughout the building. 8. Operate solenoid valves for operation of any fire suppression systems. 9. Subsequent initiating alarms shall repeat the respective sequence of operations. C. Operation of any sprinkler system supervisory device (tamper or pressure switch) shall cause the following to happen: 1. Sound a district pulsed audible alarm at the fire alarm control panel. 2. Flash the yellow common supervisory LED. 3. Display the points in alarm on the LCD display at the fire alarm control panel and at all remote alarm annunciator panels and print at all system printers. The visual indication shall remain until the alarm condition is reset. 4. Notify the UL listed central station via the dial up digital communicator. 5. Subsequent supervisory alarms shall repeat the respective sequence of operations. D. The Fire Alarm System wiring and power supplies shall be electrically supervised and report trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, shorts or grounds on the system wiring shall cause the following to happen: 1. Sound a distinct pulsed audible alarm at the fire alarm control panel. 2. Flash the yellow common trouble LED. 3. Display the points in alarm on the LCD display at the fire alarm control panel and at all remote alarm annunciator panels and point at all system printers. The visual indication shall remain until the alarm condition is reset. 4. Notify the UL listed Central Station via the dial up digital communicator. 5. Subsequent trouble alarms shall repeat the respective Sequence of Operation. E. Alarm Silencing: 1. Pressing the “Alarm Silence” button shall cause all notification appliances to be deactivated. A yellow LED located in the fire alarm control panel shall illuminate to indicate the alarm has been silenced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. FCI (Fire Control Instruments) B. EST by GE C. Simplex 2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Modular in construction to allow easy expandability. B. Enclosure: 1. Surface mounted, steel with enamel finish. 2. Hinged, lockable door with viewing window. 3. Sized to house power supplies, batteries, and charger. C. Controls shall provide switches to reset, lamp test, walk test, drill, and silence alarm and trouble signals. D. Indicators shall include power on, system trouble, zone disabled, alarm silenced, alarm, ground fault, and indicating appliance circuit trouble. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-4 West End Heights 4 E. LCD Display: 1. Membrane construction with four line by 20 character LCD display. 2. 40 characters reserved for user programmable messages. 3. Four pairs of display keys for selection of event display by type (alarm, supervisory, trouble, or monitor) and forward/backward scrolling through event listing. F. Control panels shall be capable of receiving firmware upgrades via a laptop computer, without the need to replace printed circuit boards. G. All system memory shall be non-volatile. H. The control panel shall be equipped with two Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). Each SLC shall be capable of supporting up to 99 analog addressable detectors and 98 addressable modules, for a total of 394 addressable points per control panel (node). 1. Signaling Line Circuits shall be wired for two-wire, Class B, Style 4. I. All initiation device and notification appliance circuits shall be continuously supervised. Any interruption in the continuity of the circuits shall cause a trouble alarm at the control panel. J. The system shall utilize digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement, correct location, and proper operation. K. The system shall support distributed processor detectors with the following attributes: 1. Automatic device mapping 2. Electronic addressing 3. Environmental compensation 4. Pre-alarm for dirty detectors 5. Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment L. Output Power Supplies: 1. Power supplies shall be switched mode type and shall monitor the incoming line. Upon power outage or brownout conditions, the power supplies shall automatically switch to batteries. 2. Each control panels shall be equipped with two independent, power limited, output circuits, each rated for 1.5 amperes at 24 VDC. Each circuit shall be provided with overcurrent protection, and shall be capable of being wired for two wire Class B, Style Y circuits. 3. Power supplies shall provide internal power to the control panel, and shall provide output power to notification appliances, door holdopens, and system control relays used for control-by-event functions such as elevator capture and fan shutdown. M. System circuits shall be configured as follows: 1. Analog addressable circuits: Class B, Style 4 2. Initiating device circuits: Class B, Style 4 3. Notification Appliance Circuits: Class B, Style Y N. Capable of performing a U.L. listed detector sensitivity test. O. Provide with integral or remote dial-up Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT), also known as a Digital Communicator. The Digital Communicator specification is found in this section. P. Network operation: 1. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of operating in a true peer-to-peer token ring network, with capacity of up to 64 nodes. 2. The network shall operate at a minimum of 625 kbaud, and shall by wired utilizing Style 4, 6, or 7 wiring. 3. The network shall operate over twisted pair or fiberoptic cable. 4. Each node shall be capable of being programmed off line. 5. The software at any node shall be capable of being downloaded from any other node in the system. 6. Each node shall be capable of being grouped with any other number of nodes to operate as a “region” Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-5 West End Heights 5 Q. The control panel shall be equipped with a RS-232 serial port for communicating with printers, video terminals, and laptop computers. R. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments 7100. 2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Addressable, semi-flush, double-action. B. Constructed of red lexan with raised white lettering reading “Fire”. C. Device shall have molded lettering and Braille text in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act. D. Upon activation, handle shall lock in the alarm condition. A key shall be required to reset the manual pull station. Cylinders shall be keyed to match the fire alarm control panel. E. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model MS7-AF. 2.4 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE SENSOR A. Low profile, with five sensitivity settings. B. Detector shall operate on a light scattering principal. The detector shall have a photo-optic chamber with an infrared light emitting diode and a high-speed light sensing photo diode. Capable of sensing visible products of combustion. C. The detector shall be continuously monitored to verify it is receiving power and communications from the fire alarm control panel. D. Alarm conditions shall be indicated by a steady red glow from the LED mounted on the sensor. E. Sensor shall be microprocessor based, with electronic point addressing to indicate to the system which device is in alarm. F. Each sensor shall be periodically monitored for sensitivity. If a sensor alarm threshold sensitivity has changed due to aging or dust accumulation, the system shall automatically adjust for this change (drift compensation). G. Capable of automatic and manual sensitivity and performance tests without the need for generating smoke. This test shall verify all sensor circuitry and provide a “failed test” indication upon abnormal results. H. Sensor shall be capable of automatic device mapping and day/night sensitivity adjustment. I. Sensors shall be twistlock mounted to a separate base provided with screw terminals for field wiring. The detector shall be tamper resistant and shall be removable only with a special tool. The system shall recognize when an improper device is installed on a device base. J. Provide wire guards as shown on plans. K. Provide auxiliary relays and 24 VDC power for elevator capture or smoke evacuation control where indicated. L. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model ASD-PL. 2.5 FIXED TEMPERATURE HEAT DETECTOR A. Addressable head. B. 135F fixed temperature sensor. C. The detector shall be continuously monitored to verify it is receiving power and communications from the fire alarm control panel. D. Alarm conditions shall be indicated by a steady red glow from the LED mounted on the sensor. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-6 West End Heights 6 E. Sensors shall be twistlock mounted to a separate base provided with screw terminals for field wiring. The detector shall be tamper resistant and shall be removable only with a special tool. The system shall recognize when an improper device is installed on a device base. F. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model ATD-L2F. 2.6 DUCT TYPE SMOKE DETECTORS A. Detector shall operate on a light scattering principal. The detector shall have a photo-optic chamber with an infrared light emitting diode and a high-speed light sensing photo diode. Capable of sensing visible products of combustion. B. Capable of detecting both visible and non-visible products of combustion. C. Self-compensating circuitry to provide stability against aging and dust. D. Field adjustable sensitivity, pre-set in the factory. E. Enclosure suitable for mounting on an air duct, with a sampling tube that extends into the duct air stream. F. Suitable for installation within an air-duct system with air velocities from 300-4,000 feet per minute. G. Provide a remote LED alarm and key operated test switch for each duct smoke detector. Install remote test switches in visible and accessible locations adjacent each duct smoke detector. H. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model ADFP. 2.7 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE A. Addressable device for providing an address to a non-addressable fire alarm device. B. Wired for two-wire, Class B, Style B wiring, equipped with an end-of-line resistor. C. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model AMM-2F. 2.8 CONTROL RELAY MODULE A. Addressable device with a two sets of form “C” relay contacts used to control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers etc. B. Relay contact rating: 1. 24 VDC = 2amps (pilot duty) 2. 120 Vac = .5 amps C. Status LED installed on the module. D. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model AOM-2RF. 2.9 VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A. Provide backbox for recessed installations except for installations on existing walls. B. 24 VDC. C. Visual strobe shall have the following characteristics: 1. ADA compliant. 2. White light output of 75 candela for public areas and 110 candela for sleeping areas 3. Nominal 1 Hz flash rate. 4. Pulse duration of 0.2 seconds. 5. Reflector and lexan lens with the word “Fire” imprinted. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-7 West End Heights 7 D. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments “Spectralert Advanced”. 2.10 AUDIO-VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A. Provide backbox for recessed installations except for installations on existing walls. B. 24 VDC. C. Horn shall be rated for 85 dB at 10’. D. Visual strobe shall have the following characteristics: 1. ADA compliant. 2. White light output of 75 candela for public areas and 110 candela for sleeping areas 3. Nominal 1 Hz flash rate. 4. Pulse duration of 0.2 seconds. 5. Reflector and lexan lens with the word “Fire” imprinted. 2.11 LOW FREQUENCY AUDIO-VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICE A. Provide backbox for recessed installations except for installations on existing walls. B. 24 VDC. C. 520 Hz +/- 10% square wave tone. D. Field selectable Continuous or Temporal Sound Output. E. Visual strobe shall have the following characteristics: 1. ADA compliant. 2. White light with field selectable output of 135,0150, 177, or 185 candela for sleeping areas 3. Nominal 1 Hz flash rate. 4. Pulse duration of 0.2 seconds. 5. Reflector and lexan lens with the word “Fire” imprinted. F. Design Make: System Sensor. 2.12 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A. Flush mounted annunciator panel with a back-lit, alpha-numeric display, minimum 4 lines of 20 characters each. B. Minimum 50 user definable messages for each annunciator. C. Communications between annunciators utilizing RS-485 port at minimum 19.2 kbps. D. Annunciator shall be equipped with the following function keys. 1. Alarm Acknowledge 2. Trouble Acknowledge 3. Signal Silence 4. System Reset/Lamp Test 5. System Drill Test E. The annunciator shall be equipped with the following LED’s: 1. Alarm 2. Supervisory 3. System Trouble 4. Power Fault 5. System Silenced 6. NAC #1 Silenced 7. NAC#2 Silenced Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-8 West End Heights 8 F. Provide with necessary flush or surface mounted backboxes. G. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model No. LCD-7100. 2.13 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR A. Meets UL Standard 2075 for carbon monoxide detectors. B. 24 VDC C. Installs on a single gang outlet box for surface mounting, and a two-gang outlet box for flush mounting. D. Green and red LED status displays. E. Single pole, double throw relay. F. Provide with addressable monitor module for connection to the fire alarm control panel. G. Design Make: Macurco, Inc, Model No CM-15. 2.14 CARBON MONOXIDE AUDIBLE VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A. Provide backbox for recessed installations except for installations on existing walls. B. 24 VDC. C. Horn shall be rated for 85 dB at 10’. D. Visual strobe shall have the following characteristics: 1. ADA compliant. 2. Yellow light output of 75 candela for public areas and 110 candela for sleeping areas 3. Nominal 1 Hz flash rate. 4. Pulse duration of 0.2 seconds. 5. Reflector and lexan lens with the word “ALERT” imprinted. E. Design Make: System Sensor SWL-ALERT 2.15 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Magnetic door holders shall be furnished and installed as part of the hardware specifications. B. Electrical Contractor shall connect all magnetic door holders. 2.16 DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR A. Dual telephone line interface, electronically supervised. B. Reports in 15 selectable transmission formats. C. Auxiliary relay, programmable to indicate trouble or alarm. D. Automatic 24 hour test. E. Transmitter shall be new long-distance Carrier Access Code Compliant. F. UL recognized “dialer runaway” prevention feature. G. Provide all required programming required to communicate with the central station chosen by the Owner. H. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments 411 Series. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-9 West End Heights 9 2.17 BATTERIES AND CHARGER A. Provide battery and charger to provide 24 VDC standby power for the fire alarm system. B. If the battery experiences a loss of line voltage, a system trouble alarm shall occur. C. Provide lead-calcium, maintenance-free batteries. Size batteries to permit 4 hours under supervisory condition, and then sound all alarms for 5 minutes. D. Cell reversal protection. E. 10 year minimum life expectancy. F. Battery charger shall be self-regulating, solid state type, capable of full charging a deleted battery within five hours. G. Install battery charger within the fire alarm control panel. H. Install batteries within the fire alarm control panel, or in a vented enclosure located adjacent to the fire alarm control panel. I. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments. 2.18 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE POWER PANEL A. Remote notification appliance power supply panel for providing power to notification appliances. B. Equipped with (2) Class A, Style Z or (4) Class B, Style Y notification appliance circuits, for a total output of 9 amperes at 24 VDC. C. Coded or non-coded operation. Non-coded output shall be Temporal. D. Automatic strobe synchronization for all strobes powered from the panel. E. Integral set of batteries, sized for the load. F. One set of Form C trouble contacts, rated 2.5 amperes at 24 VDC. G. Controlled via an input from an existing notification appliance circuit. H. Design Make: Fire Control Instruments Model SNAC-9. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of work. All fire alarm installers shall possess a state license for installation of fire alarm systems where required. B. All wiring shall conform to NEC Articles 725 and 760, and to NFPA-72, "National Fire Alarm Code". C. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide minimum dual #18 AWG twisted pair for MUX trunk cable. E. Provide minimum #16 AWG for station circuits, minimum #14 AWG for signal and detector circuits and minimum #12 AWG for power supply circuits. F. Wiring to all initiation and notification appliance circuits shall be two-wire class B. A fault on a circuit loop shall cause a trouble alarm at the fire alarm control panel and shall indicate the approximate location of the fault. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-10 West End Heights 10 G. All open wiring shall be plenum rated. Installed in a separate and segregated bridle ring raceway system, located on 5’ centers. H. Install all exposed wiring in conduit or surface raceway. Existing conduit may be reused where possible. Plenum rated cable may be run exposed in crawl spaces, unfinished areas, and above accessible ceilings. 3.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CABINETS A. Install fire alarm control panels, notification appliance power panels, and voice evacuation panels at working height with adequate working clearance. Securely anchor to the wall and mount true and level. B. Provide 120-volt power to all cabinets as required and as shown on the plans. Provide power from an emergency panel where one exists. C. All wiring in and out of control panels shall be installed in EMT conduit, unless noted otherwise. Do not install open wiring directly into panelboards. 3.3 ALARM INITIATION DEVICES A. Install all alarm initiation devices on an outlet box. Independently support all outlet boxes from building construction. Do not support outlet boxes from raceways alone. B. Locate devices generally where shown on the plans. Coordinate the exact device location with the reflected ceiling plans. C. Install manual pull stations at 48” to the top of the box. D. Furnish duct smoke detectors for installation by Division 23. Provide all required wiring. Install duct detector test switches in an accessible location adjacent the detector. 3.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Install all visual notification appliances such that the entire lens is located a minimum of 80” above the floor. Install on a flush mounted outlet box wherever possible. B. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special surface backbox furnished by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth, and have no protrusions. Backbox shall be red in color. 3.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE POWER PANELS (NAPP) A. Provide notification appliance power panels as required to provide power to all notification appliance power panels. B. Provide a 120 volt branch circuit and a notification appliance signal circuit to each Notification Appliance Power Panels C. Notification Appliance Power Panels are not shown on the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and Equipment Supplier to determine the quantity and location of Notification Appliance Power Panels. 3.6 FLOW, TAMPER, AND PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Provide an addressable monitor module at each flow, tamper, or pressure switch. B. Flow switches shall annunciate at the fire alarm control panel as an alarm condition. C. Tamper and pressure switches shall annunciate at the fire alarm control panel as a supervisory alarm condition. D. Coordinate all device locations with the fire protection contractor. 3.7 ELEVATOR CAPTURE A. Provide a smoke detector at each elevator lobby, in the elevator machine room, and at the top and bottom of the elevator shaft. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-11 West End Heights 11 B. Provide a control module and wire into the elevator capture circuit in the elevator controller. If any of the lobby, machine room, or shaft smoke detectors go into alarm, the elevator car shall automatically return to the ground level floor and open the doors. If the ground level lobby smoke detector goes into alarm, the elevator shall return to an alternate level floor and open the doors. C. If the building is sprinkled, provide a heat detector in the elevator machine room and at the top and bottom of the elevator shaft. Provide a control module and wire into the elevator shunt trip circuit breaker control circuit. If a heat detector in the machine room or the elevator shaft goes into alarm, the control module (relay) shall close and the shunt trip circuit breaker feeding the elevator shall open. Provide a monitor module to monitor the control power to the elevator shunt trip circuit breaker, and provide a trouble alarm upon loss of control power. D. Provide the following Elevator Recall Modules: 1. Primary Recall 2. Alternate Floor Recall 3. Shunt Trip 4. Flashing Fire Hat (for smoke detectors in the elevator lobbies and shaft). 3.8 ELEVATOR SHUTDOWN A. If the elevator shaft and machine room are sprinkled, the elevator electric service must be disconnected prior to the release of the sprinklers. This shall be accomplished as follows: 1. Provide a shunt trip circuit breaker as indicated on the plans in the elevator motor circuit. The circuit breaker shunt trip shall be equipped with a 120 volt coil. 2. Provide a heat detector in the elevator machine room and the top and bottom of each elevator shaft. Install the heat detector within 2’ or the associated sprinkler head. 3. Provide wiring such that if any of these heat detectors goes into alarm, the shunt trip circuit breaker shall open. 4. Provide a monitor module to monitor the control power to the elevator shunt trip circuit breaker, and provide a trouble alarm upon loss of control power. 3.9 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDOPENS A. Provide 24VDC power from the fire alarm control panel to the electro-magnetic door holdopens provided by the general contractor. Wire via a control module such that the door holdopens release upon activation of the fire alarm system. B. Coordinate all voltage and wiring requirements with the general contractor. 3.10 FAN SHUTDOWN A. At each ventilation fan (supply, return, or exhaust), except unit ventilators, provide a fire alarm fan shutdown relay and wire into the fan control circuit. Wire such that the fans shut down upon activation of an automatic or manual fire alarm initiation device. 3.11 SMOKE DAMPER OPERATION A. Provide duct smoke detectors at each duct penetrating smoke partitions. B. Provide a control module at each smoke damper. Provide 120-volt power to each smoke damper provided by Division 23. Connect the smoke damper via the control module. C. Upon activation of the duct smoke detector, the associated ventilation fans shall shut down (if they are still operating), and the smoke dampers will close. Provide a minimum of 30 seconds from the time the fans shut down until the smoke dampers close. 3.12 FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANELS A. Provide fire alarm remote annunciator panels in the locations shown on the plans. B. Provide outlet boxes as required. C. Provide wiring back to the fire alarm control panel. Lakeview Health Services Analog Addressable Fire Alarm System 283110-12 West End Heights 12 3.13 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION A. The complete fire protection system shall be fully tested and guaranteed for a period of one year after Owner's Representative written acceptance. The fire alarm system test shall be as follows: 1. The electrical contractor, a manufacturer’s equipment representative, an Owner’s representative, and a fire department representative, as required, shall operate every installed device to verify proper operation and correct annunciation at the control panel. 2. At least one half of all tests shall be performed on battery power. 3. All signaling line circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be opened in at least two locations to verify the supervision. 4. When the testing has been completed and approved, a notarized letter signed by all attesting to the satisfactory completion of the test shall be forwarded to the owner and the fire department. B. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. C. Provide 3 sets of keys to all panels, manual stations, etc., to the Owner's Representative. 3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prior to request for final payment submit a quantity of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. O&M Manuals may be submitted in compact disk format. O&M manuals shall include as a minimum: 1. Bill of Material. 2. Manufacturer's equipment description for each piece of equipment, each device and each initiation and control module type used. 3. Record Drawings for fire alarm wiring diagrams showing typical connection diagrams for each type of device and a complete riser diagram showing all devices, zones, and wiring requirements. Record Drawings for fire alarm wiring diagram shall show all terminal connections at all panels. 4. Instruction report stating when instruction was given and who was in attendance, signed by the Owner's Representative. 5. Submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that each device and overall system operation has been 100% tested and approved. (Both new and existing systems). 6. Certificate of Completion as described in NFPA-72, Section 1-7.2. END OF SECTION 283110 Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-1 West End Heights 1 SECTION 283130 - MULTIPLE STATION SMOKE AND CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and hardware required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Photoelectric Smoke Alarm 2. Carbon Monoxide Alarm 3. Combination Photoelectric Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarm 4. Visual Notification Appliance (Strobe) 5. 120VAC Relay 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All multiple station detection system components, devices, outlet boxes, wiring, and raceways shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. All multiple station detection devices shall be installed in accordance with the following codes and guidelines: 1. NFPA 72 - National Multiple Station Détection Code 2. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 5. New York State Building Code 6. Americans with Disabilities Act C. All equipment and systems provided shall be UL listed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide standard product data for all equipment indicating the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, and listing of the equipment. B. Provide standard wiring diagrams for all devices. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide three sets of Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 260010 upon completion of the project. B. O&M Manuals may be provided in compact disc format. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The multiple station detection system shall be conventional, with automatic initiation devices and notification appliances. B. The multiple station detection system shall require no programming to accommodate facility expansions, renovations, or multiple station detection system modifications. 1.7 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-2 West End Heights 2 A. An abnormal condition on the multiple station detection system, shall be indicated at the affected device only. B. Operation of any automatic smoke detector shall sound all audible and visual alarm signals within the associated dwelling unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE ALARM A. Photoelectric smoke alarm. B. Multiple Station C. Self restoring. D. Screened sensing chamber. E. Powered by 120V AC, 60Hz and have a monitored 9V battery backup. Battery shall have a minimum of a 10 year life expectancy. F. A green LED power-on indicator shall confirm unit is receiving power and a red LED power-on indicator shall confirm unit is working properly. G. The smoke detector shall have a test button to check all alarm functions by stimulating the chamber to simulate a smoke condition, causing the unit to alarm. H. A solid state piezo horn rated at 85dB minimum at 10 ft shall be integral to the unit. I. The device shall be capable of operating between 40°F (4°C) and 100°F (38°C) and relative humidity between 10% and 90%. J. Mounting shall be accomplished by attaching to any standard electrical junction box up to 4 inches octagonal without screw removal and shall be listed for wall or ceiling mounting. K. The unit shall have a locking mechanism. L. The unit shall have a gasketless base for easy installation and be capable of keeping alarm secure over a wide rotation range. M. The unit shall have a plug in connector and be capable of interconnection of up to 18 alarms, 12 of which may be smoke alarms. N. The unit shall meet the requirements of UL217, CSFM, NFPA72, NFPA 101, ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI and CABO. O. Provide wire guards as shown on plans. P. Provide auxiliary relays and for strobe control where indicated. Q. Design Make: Kidde Model P12040 R. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Gentex 2. System Sensor 3. Kidde 4. Notifier 2.2 COMBINATION PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE ALARM AND VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A. Photoelectric smoke alarm. Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-3 West End Heights 3 B. Multiple Station C. The unit shall have a 177candela integral xenon strobe. D. Screened sensing chamber. E. Powered by 120V AC, 60Hz and have a monitored 9V battery backup. Battery shall have a minimum of a 10 year life expectancy. F. A green LED power-on indicator shall confirm unit is receiving power and a red LED power-on indicator shall confirm unit is working properly. G. The smoke detector shall have a test button to check all alarm functions by stimulating the chamber to simulate a smoke condition, causing the unit to alarm. H. A solid state piezo horn rated at 85dB minimum at 10 ft shall be integral to the unit. I. The device shall be capable of operating between 40°F (4°C) and 100°F (38°C) and relative humidity between 10% and 90%. J. Mounting shall be accomplished by attaching to any standard electrical junction box up to 4 inches octagonal without screw removal and shall be listed for wall or ceiling mounting. K. The unit shall have a locking mechanism. L. The unit shall have a gasketless base for easy installation and be capable of keeping alarm secure over a wide rotation range. M. The unit shall have a plug in connector and be capable of interconnection of up to 18 alarms, 12 of which may be smoke alarms. N. The unit shall meet the requirements of UL217, CSFM, NFPA72, NFPA 101, ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI and CABO. O. Provide wire guards as shown on plans. P. Provide auxiliary relays and for strobe control where indicated. Q. Design Make: Kidde Model. R. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Gentex 2. System Sensor 3. Kidde 4. Notifier 2.3 CARBON MONOXIDE ALARM A. The unit shall be powered by 120V AC, 60Hz and have a monitored 9V battery backup. Battery shall have a minimum of a 10 year life expectancy. B. In battery backup mode, the battery shall last for 8 hours minimum in standby, 12 hours minimum in alarm, and 7 days trouble. C. A red LED power-on indicator to confirm unit is receiving power and to confirm unit has switched to battery backup mode. D. The sensor shall not detect CO levels below 30 PPM and will not alarm when exposed to constant levels of 30 PPM for 30 days. It shall alarm at the following levels under 30% to 70% relative humidity: 400 PPM CO between 4 and 15 minutes, 150 PPM CO between 10 and 50 minutes and 70 PPM CO between 60 and 240 minutes. E. A test/silence button shall be provided to check all detector functions and to silence any unwanted alarms. In addition, the unit shall have a low battery silence feature to quiet the low battery chirps for up to 8 hours. Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-4 West End Heights 4 F. The unit shall perform self diagnostic tests every second and issue an audible malfunction warning (three rapid chirps) if the unit malfunctions. G. A solid state piezo horn rated at 85dB at 10 ft. that provides a repeating horn pattern: 4 beeps, pause, 4 beeps, pause. H. A “Smart Interconnect” feature allows the unit to be interconnected to BRK smoke alarms. If there is a smoke event, the CO5120BN horn pattern shall emit the same sound as the smoke alarm, that is 3 beeps, pause, 3 beeps, pause. If there is a CO event, the interconnected CO alarms shall sound their normal horn pattern. I. The unit shall be capable of operating between 40ºF (4ºC) and 100ºF (38ºC) and relative humidity between 10% and 90%. J. The unit shall center mount to any standard electrical junction box up to 4” size without screw removal and shall be listed for wall or ceiling mounting. K. The unit shall have a locking mechanism. L. The unit shall have a plug in connector and be capable of interconnection of up to 18 alarms. M. The unit shall meet the requirements of UL2034, NFPA 720, ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI, CABO N. Detector characteristics: 1. 5 5/8" diameter 2. 1 13/16" high 3. weight .7 lbs O. Design Make: Kidde Model KN-COB-IC. P. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Gentex 2. System Sensor 3. Kidde 4. Notifier 2.4 COMBINATION PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE AND CARBON MONOXIDE ALARM A. Photoelectric smoke alarm. B. Multiple Station C. Self restoring. D. Screened sensing chamber. E. Powered by 120V AC, 60Hz and have a monitored 9V battery backup. F. A green LED power-on indicator shall confirm unit is receiving power and a red LED power-on indicator shall confirm unit is working properly. G. The smoke detector shall have a test button to check all alarm functions by stimulating the chamber to simulate a smoke condition, causing the unit to alarm. H. A solid state piezo horn rated at 85dB minimum at 10 ft shall be integral to the unit for the smoke alarm. For the CO alarm, the alarm shall be a repeating horn pattern: 4 beeps, pause, 4 beeps, pause. I. The device shall be capable of operating between 40°F (4°C) and 100°F (38°C) and relative humidity between 10% and 90%. J. Mounting shall be accomplished by attaching to any standard electrical junction box up to 4 inches octagonal without screw removal and shall be listed for wall or ceiling mounting. Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-5 West End Heights 5 K. The unit shall have a locking mechanism. L. The unit shall have a gasketless base for easy installation and be capable of keeping alarm secure over a wide rotation range. M. The unit shall have a plug in connector and be capable of interconnection of up to 18 alarms, 12 of which may be smoke alarms. N. The unit shall meet the requirements of UL217, CSFM, NFPA72, NFPA 101, ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI and CABO. O. Provide wire guards as shown on plans. P. The sensor shall not detect CO levels below 30 PPM and will not alarm when exposed to constant levels of 30 PPM for 30 days. It shall alarm at the following levels under 30% to 70% relative humidity: 400 PPM CO between 4 and 15 minutes, 150 PPM CO between 10 and 50 minutes and 70 PPM CO between 60 and 240 minutes. Q. The unit shall perform self diagnostic tests every second and issue an audible malfunction warning (three rapid chirps) if the unit malfunctions. R. Provide auxiliary relays and for strobe control where indicated. S. Design Make: Kidde Model KN-COSM-IB T. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Gentex 2. System Sensor 3. Kidde 4. Notifier 2.5 VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A. Provide backbox for recessed installations except for installations on existing walls. B. 120 VAC. C. When triggered by a smoke alarm, it shall produce a steady warning flash. D. When triggered by a carbon monoxide alarm, it shall produce an intermittent warning flash. E. Design Make: Kidde Model SL177i F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. BRK 2. System Sensor 3. Kidde 4. Notifier 2.6 120 VAC RELAY A. Relay shall be designed be used to activate auxiliary devices such as bells, lights, door closers, etc., when used with compatible 120VAC powered smoke and carbon monoxide alarms. The relay contacts will activate whenever the detector sounds an alarm and will automatically deactivate when the detector stops alarming. B. Relay shall be rated for 120vac @ 15Amps. C. Relay shall fit in any size junction box. D. Design Make: Kidde Model SM120X for smoke alarms and CO120X for CO alarms. 1. Gentex Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-6 West End Heights 6 2. System Sensor 3. Kidde 4. Notifier PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of work. All multiple station detection installers shall possess a state license for installation of multiple station detection systems where required. B. All wiring shall conform to NEC Articles 725 and 760, and to NFPA-72, "National fire alarm Code". C. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide minimum #12 AWG for power supply circuits. E. All open wiring shall be plenum rated. Installed in a separate and segregated bridle ring raceway system, located on 5’ centers. F. Install all exposed wiring in conduit or surface raceway. Existing conduit may be reused where possible. Plenum rated cable may be run exposed in crawl spaces, unfinished areas, and above accessible ceilings. 3.2 ALARM INITIATION DEVICES A. Install all alarm initiation devices on an outlet box. Independently support all outlet boxes from building construction. Do not support outlet boxes from raceways alone. B. Locate devices generally where shown on the plans. Coordinate the exact device location with the reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Install all visual notification appliances such that the entire lens is located a minimum of 80” above the floor. Install on a flush mounted outlet box wherever possible. B. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special surface backbox furnished by the multiple station detection equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth, and have no protrusions. Backbox shall be red in color. 3.4 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION A. The complete fire protection system shall be fully tested and guaranteed for a period of one year after Owner's Representative written acceptance. The multiple station detection system test shall be as follows: 1. The electrical contractor, a manufacturer’s equipment representative, an Owner’s representative, and a fire department representative, as required, shall operate every installed device to verify proper operation and correct annunciation. 2. When the testing has been completed and approved, a notarized letter signed by all attesting to the satisfactory completion of the test shall be forwarded to the owner and the fire department. B. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Lakeview Health Services Multiple Station Smoke And Carbon Monoxide Detection 283130-7 West End Heights 7 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prior to request for final payment submit a quantity of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. O&M Manuals may be submitted in compact disk format. O&M manuals shall include as a minimum: 1. Bill of Material. 2. Manufacturer's equipment description for each piece of equipment used. 3. Record Drawings for multiple station detection wiring diagrams showing typical connection diagrams for each type of device and a complete riser diagram showing all devices, zones, and wiring requirements. Record Drawings for multiple station detection wiring diagram shall show all terminal connections. 4. Instruction report stating when instruction was given and who was in attendance, signed by the Owner's Representative. 5. Certificate of Completion as described in NFPA-72, Section 1-7.2. END OF SECTION 283130 Lakeview Health Services GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION 310916-1 West End Heights AND MONITORING SECTION 31 09 13 – GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included in this section shall consist of installing, maintaining and monitoring specialized vibration monitoring equipment (seismographs) to determine peak particle velocities prior to and throughout Pile Driving activities. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NYS DOT EI 05-044 Special Specification for Building Condition Survey and Vibration Monitoring (Non-Blasting). B. NYS DOT Item 634.9902 17 Vibration Monitoring (Nonblasting) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name and qualifications of the firm selected to perform Vibration Monitoring. B. Submit to the Engineer a written Vibration Monitoring Plan a minimum of 10 work days prior to the start of pile driving operations. See below for minimum requirements of the Vibration Monitoring Plan. C. Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s literature on the required 3-component seismographs, capable of measuring particle velocity in three mutually perpendicular directions, including the manufacturer’s name, model number, and documentation of factory calibration performed within the previous 12 month period. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Vibration Monitoring Consultant who has performed Vibration Monitoring Services on a minimum of two projects in the past five years, where the Vibration Monitoring Consultant has satisfactorily monitored construction operations by recording maximum peak particle velocities (PPV’s). Include contact information for each reference. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Vibration monitoring equipment shall be capable of recording measured vibration levels and real-time notification to a minimum of 5 people via cell phone texts, email messages, and/or cell phone calls each time the “Alert” PPV level is reached. Lakeview Health Services GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION 310916-2 West End Heights AND MONITORING 1. Safeguard Seismic Unit (SSU) 3000 series microprocessor-controlled ground vibration and air overpressure recorder by Geosonics, Warrendale, PA or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 VIBRATION MONITORING PLAN A. The Vibration Monitoring Plan shall include but not be limited to the following items: 1. The scheduled start date and length of construction operations which require vibration monitoring 2. Locations for the vibration monitoring devices. Required protection for the devices and source of power. Appropriate details for anchoring and security. 3. The procedure for tracking PPV throughout Pile Driving Operations, and for correlating PPV with Pile Driving Operations. 4. Persons or companies responsible for initial set-up and ongoing maintenance of the monitoring devices. 5. Procedures to be used for ongoing remote monitoring and notification when established thresholds are reached, including an approved list of person’s to be notified when the “Alert” level is reached. 6. Procedures to be used for recording and periodic reporting of vibration monitoring. B. Methods and Procedures 1. The Engineer, Contractor’s on-site Superintendent, and other person’s as identified in the approved Vibration Monitoring Plan shall be notified via cell phone texts, email messages, and/or cell phone calls each time the “Alert” PPV level is reached. a. The Alert level is to be set at 0.2”/s measured no closer than 25’ from the closest pile driver. b. If PPV levels exceed .5”/sec at 25’ for transient vibrations (duration < 1 second), and 0.3”/sec for steady state vibrations (duration >1 second), Contractor is to cease pile driving operations. Adjustments to Pile Driving Procedures may be required. Pile Driving Operations shall not continue without the approval of the Engineer of Record. c. At the completion of the work, the Vibration Monitoring Consultant shall submit to the Engineer a written report documenting and summarizing the recorded Vibration (PPV) levels over the duration of Pile Driving operations. END OF SECTION 31 09 13 Lakeview Health Services PILE LOAD TESTS 310916-1 West End Heights PILE LOAD TESTS 31 09 16- 1 SECTION 31 09 16 - PILE LOAD TESTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel Pipe Pile load testing. 2. Documented test results. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 45 33 – Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving. 3. Section 31 62 23 - Steel Piles 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D4945- Standard Test Method for High-Strain Dynamic Testing of Piles 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate test method and equipment, load type, calibration equipment. B. Submit name and qualifications of pile load testing company. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Compressive Load Tests: ASTM D4945 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Testing shall be performed by a qualified third party testing company, employed by the contractor, experienced in dynamic steel pile testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment Type, Load Carrying Device, Load, and Instrumentation: Conform to ASTM D4945 of same type as will be used for pile placement of the Work. Lakeview Health Services PILE LOAD TESTS 310916-2 West End Heights PILE LOAD TESTS 31 09 16- 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Establish stable working elevation for test equipment. 3.2 TESTING A. Perform load tests. B. Load Test The Following: 1. 8 test piles; selected with the approval of the Engineer. C. Subject piles to 2 times design load. D. Acceptable Permanent Set of Piles After Load Testing: ¼” E. When tested piles do not conform to requirements, perform additional testing of other piles. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND DOCUMENTATION A. Notify Engineer with minimum 3 days advance notice of the first pile testing to be done to observe test method and results. B. Document test equipment used, method of calibration and recording, test results, recommendations or modification of piling method used. C. Accurately record actual dimensions and locations of tested piles and movement or distortion caused by testing. D. Provide verbal notification of test results to Engineer upon completion of testing and submit a written report of test results as described above to Engineer of Record within two weeks following the completion of pile testing activities. 3.4 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL A. Remove test and temporary load equipment from site. END OF SECTION 31 09 16 Lakeview Health Services SITE CLEARING - 311000 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees to remain. 2. Removing existing trees. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place and removing site utilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. 2. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 4. Division 32 Section “Soil Preparation” for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Lakeview Health Services SITE CLEARING - 311000 PAGE 2 West End Heights 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate with air spade to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. Lakeview Health Services SITE CLEARING - 311000 PAGE 3 West End Heights 3.4 UTILITIES A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 311000 Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 312000 – EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the earthwork as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Laying out and staking all lines and levels. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, building foundations, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 3. Base course for pavements. 4. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls. 5. Dewatering. 6. Structural Soil. 7. Pneumatic trenching (air spade) within drip line of trees to remain. 8. Separation and filter fabrics. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section “Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan” for stormwater discharge permit requirements. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 3. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities” for trenching and backfilling utilities. 4. Division 31 Section “Lightweight Aggregate Structural Fill” for raising grades under slabs at the multi-family building. 5. Division 32 Section "Soil Preparation" for finish grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and planting soil for lawns. 6. Division 32 Section “Plants" for planting bed establishment and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting. 7. Division 32 Section “Turf & Grasses” for lawn establishment. 8. Division 33 Sections “Storm Sewerage”, “Sanitary Sewerage” and “Water Distribution” for utility improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over excavated subgrade in a trench before laying a pipe. C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. D. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Landscape Architect. Additional excavation and replacement will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 2 West End Heights 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Landscape Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Landscape Architect, shall be without additional compensation. F. Fill: Soils materials used to raise existing grades. G. Rock: Rock materials in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or ¾ cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch (1065 mm) wide, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp (89 kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf (111 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210 hp (157 kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000 lbf (200 kN) breakout force; measured according to SAE J-732. H. Structures: Building, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subbase course: Course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete or hot mix asphalt pavement. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, cables, and appurtenant structures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Subbase (with sieve analysis) 2. Bedding Course (with sieve analysis) 3. Structural Fill (with sieve analysis) 4. Separation fabric. 5. Filter fabric. 6. Material submittals shall include NYSDOT approved source numbers, gradations, proctors and soundness test results. Testing to be done within 3 months of the submittal date. B. Samples: 1. 12-by-12 inch (300-by-300 mm) sample of separation fabric. 2. 12-by-12 inch (300-by-300 mm) sample of filter fabric. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.” 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities servicing facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative’s written permission. 2. Contact Dig Safely New York at 1-800-962-7962 before starting site clearing or excavation operations. 3. Coordinate with Owner and utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 4. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 3 West End Heights utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of utility owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available for excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM or a combination of these groups symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen material, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. On Site Material: All on-site material to be used as fill shall be soil or soil-rock mixture which is free from organic matter and other deleterious substances. It shall contain no rocks or lumps over 4 inches in greatest dimension. E. Imported Fill Material: Imported fill material shall consist of clean, well-graded sand and/or gravel containing less than 15 percent by weight of materials passing a No. 200 sieve and a maximum particle size of 4 inches. F. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. G. Structural Fill: NYS DOT Type 2 or Type 4 subbase course complying with the requirements of NYS DOT 304-2. H. Drainage Stone: Clean, sound, durable, sharp-angled fragments of rock of uniform quality and conforming to NYSDOT Material Designation 703-0201, Size Designation No. 2. I. Subbase: NYSDOT Type 2, Crushed stone, consisting of crushed ledgerock exhibiting 100% fractured faces, adapted from NYSDOT Standard Specifications, Section 304-2.02 Subbase Course items. J. Slab Subbase: AASHTO #57 stone with 95-100% passing a 1” sieve, 25-60% passing a ½” sieve, and less than 10% passing a No. 4 sieve K. Structural Soil: A mixture of crushed stone, clay loam, hydrogel and amendments meeting the requirements of “CU Structural Soil®” patented by Cornell University (Patent #5,849,069) also known as “CU SoilTM”. Material shall meet the requirements of NYSDOT Item 610.14000011 Structural Soil Mix 1. The material shall be obtained from a Producer sublicensed by Amereq, the exclusive Licensee of Cornell University for CU-Structural Soil®. Proof of such sub-licensing shall be submitted to the Engineer along with a sample of the finished mix, prior to delivery to the site. For a list of licensed CU Soil™ producers, call AMEREQ, Inc. @ 1-800-832-8788. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from plyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 120 lbf (0.5 kN); ASTM D 4632. 3. Tear Strength: 50 lbf (0.2 kN); ASTM D 4533. 4. Puncture Resistance: 65 lbf (0.3 kN); ASTM D 6241. 5. Water Flow Rate: 135 gpm per sq. ft. (5500 l/min per sq. m); ASTM D 4491. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 (0.212 mm); ASTM D 4751.1. B. Separation Fabric: The geotextile fabric for pavement stabilization shall be Mirafi 500X as manufactured by Mirafi, AMOCO 2002, Synthetic Industries 200ST or approved equal. The geotextile fabric shall be woven fabric of only continuous chain polymeric filaments or yarns of Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 4 West End Heights polyester. The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals, hydrocarbons, mildew, and rot resistant. The fabric shall be UV stabilized with the following properties: Acceptable Value Test Method 1. Grab Tensile Strength, kN (lbs) 0.9 (200) ASTM D4632 2. Elongation at Failure, % MD/ CD 15/ 10 ASTM D4632 3. Mullen Burst Strength, kPa (psi) 2756 (400) ASTM D3786 4. Trapezoidal Tear Strength, kN (lbs) 0.33 (75) ASTM D4533 5. Puncture Strength, kN (lbs) 0.40 (90) ASTM D4833 6. Apparent Opening Size (AOS) 50 US Std. Sieve 0.30 mm ASTM D4751 7. Permittivity, sec-1 0.05 ASTM D4491 8. Flow Rate, l/min/m2 (gal/min/sf) 200 (5.0) ASTM D4491 9. UV Resistance after 500 hrs, % strength 70 ASTM D4355 2.3 PNEUMATIC EXCAVATION (AIR SPADE) A. Pneumatic Excavating Tool: Excavation within drip line of trees to remain shall be performed through the use of a pneumatic excavation tool with the following requirements: 1. The high air velocity excavation tool shall be specifically designed to fracture, pulverize, and displace porous and semi-porous soils without harming or causing damage to tree roots, existing subsurface utilities or other non-porous objects. The Contractor shall submit catalog cuts from the manufacturer verifying that the pneumatic excavation tool meets the following criteria: a. Rated Operating Pressure 6.2 - 7.0 bar b. Air Stream Velocity at Cutting Head 2,200 – 2,500 km/hr c. Air Displacement 4,000 – 5,000 L/min B. Air Compressor: The air compressor may be either a portable or truck-mounted unit and shall be adequately sized as required to power the pneumatic excavation tool in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the pneumatic excavating tool. C. Vacuum Truck: A vacuum truck should be used to collect excavated spoil directly from the trench or pit. D. Containment Structure: To prevent the spread of excavated soil onto adjacent roadways and areas beyond the designated work zone limits, the Contractor shall provide a mobile structure or barrier to contain the material dislodged by the pneumatic excavation tool from the trench or pit. Timber or corrugated metal shields, tents supported on tubular frames, or other structures as approved by Landscape Architect may be used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where earthwork is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge or soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 5 West End Heights 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water from excavations. Maintain water levels below base of excavation to control hydrostatic pressure on subgrade soils. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversion outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3. Do not discharge sediment laden water into the adjoining storm or sanitary sewer system or open swales. Pump sediment laden water from excavations into a portable sediment tank or a high-strength, non-woven geotextile fabric bag. Size portable sediment tanks in accordance with the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system as needed to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.4 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.5 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. B. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. C. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials not re-used. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross section, elevations, and grades. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Geotechnical Engineer who will make an inspection of conditions. Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 6 West End Heights B. If Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proof-rolling is to be done in the presence of the project Geotechnical Engineer after excavation to required subgrade elevations. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a self propelled roller in non-vibratory mode weighing at least 14,000 lbs. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted structural fill as directed. D. Additional Excavation: 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. Excavation of unsuitable material must extend laterally beyond the edge of the footing or slab for a distance equal to or greater than the required depth of the excavation. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. 3. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimension without specific direction of Geotechnical Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Geotechnical Engineer, shall be at Contractor’s expense. B. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavation under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Geotechnical Engineer. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 2. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. B. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. C. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 18 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs 3.12 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 7 West End Heights C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under base course for walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under footings and foundations, use Granular Base NYSDOT Type 2. Under footings and foundations, use Structural Fill to existing grade elevation. All fill placed above existing grade elevation is to be Lightweight Structural Fill. Reference Specification Section 312353, Lightweight Aggregate Structural Fill. 3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.14 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent of Modified Proctor at +/- 2% optimum moisture content.. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.15 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (13 mm). 3.16 SUBBASE COURSES A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place subbase course material over subgrade under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 5. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 8 West End Heights 6. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.17 STRUCTURAL SOIL SUBBASE COURSES A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any subsurface conditions which may affect the Contractor’s ability to install the Structural Soil Mix. If subsurface drain lines are included, they shall be installed prior to placement of the mix. B. The Structural Soil Mix shall not be worked when frozen, excessively wet, or under otherwise unsatisfactory conditions nor shall it be placed on frozen, wet or muddy sites. The Mix must not be excessively or incorrectly handled to the point of separation of the clay loam soil from the crushed stones. C. Structural Soil Mix shall be placed in 6 inch lifts, each compacted to at least 95% Proctor Density. If compaction moisture content exceeds the optimum per AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698), delay compaction and protect Mix until sufficiently dry to compact. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Geotechnical Engineer. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed as the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 200 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 3. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 4. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly grades areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Landscape Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Lakeview Health Services EARTH MOVING - 312000 PAGE 9 West End Heights 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthworks operations. 3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner’s property END OF SECTION 312000 Lakeview Health Services ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION SYSTEM 312113.13-1 West End Heights PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 PURPOSE A. This section governs the supply, installation, and testing of all components of an Active Sub-Slab Depressurization (ASSD) System. Construction techniques are to control Radon and Soil Vapor Intrusion and prepare the building for post-construction soil vapor mitigation. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The ASSD System shall be built and monitored in accordance with the most recent NYSDOH guidance document, “Guidance for Evaluating Soil Vapor Intrusion in the State of New York” and the USEPA “Model Standards and Techniques for Control of Radon in New Residential Building” (EPA 402-R-94009). B. See also the construction methods listed in ASTM Standard Guide, E-1465-92. C. Systems shall be installed by a qualified contractor experienced in the construction of these systems or under the supervision of a qualified professional. A qualified Contractor shall meet a minimum of one of the qualifiers listed below: 1. System installer shall be certified as a Residential Mitigation Provider or Multifamily Mitigation Provider by the National Radon Proficiency Program (NRPP), or 2. System installer shall be certified as a radon Mitigation Specialist (RRS) by the National Radon Safety Board (NRSB), or 3. The system shall be installed by a service provider found through the State Radon Coordinator of the New York State Department of Health, Radiological health/Radon, or 4. System installer shall be listed under the EPA Directory of Builders Using Radon-Resistant New Construction (RRNC). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractors shall submit three (3) hard copies or one electronic version of the following to the Engineer for review: 1. Clean aggregate used for gas permeable layer 2. 6-mil polyethylene or equivalent flexible sheeting 3. Elastomeric joint sealant, as defined in ASTM C920-87 4. 4-inch Schedule 40 cement welded PVC pipe 5. Labels reading “Sub-Slab Depressurization System DO NOT ALTER OR DISCONNECT” for exposed pipe locations 6. Radon mitigation fan and appurtenances as specified including manufacturers installation manual and operation and maintenance manual. 7. Pressure/Flow sensor device including installation manual and the operation and maintenance manual. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 RADON MITIGATION FAN A. The ASSD System fan shall be an inline fan, model number Rn 4EC-4 as manufactured by Fantech, or approved equal. 2.2 SYSTEM FAILURE ALARM A. The ASSD System shall be equipped with a manometer to allow for easy visual verification that the system is operating properly. The ASSD System shall be equipped with a differential pressure system failure alarm/switch series BDPA as manufactured by Dwyer Instruments, Inc installed in a location which is Lakeview Health Services ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION SYSTEM 312113.13-1 West End Heights easily visible and audible. The differential pressure alarm/switch shall be capable of being wired to a remote alarm system located in an easily visible and audible location. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FOUNDATIONS AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. A layer of gas permeable material shall be placed under all concrete slabs and other floor systems that directly contact the ground and are within the walls of the living spaces of the building, to facilitate installation of a sub-slab depressurization system, as needed. Alternatives for creating the gas permeable layer include: 1. A uniform layer of clean aggregate, a minimum of 12 inches thick. The aggregate shall consist of material that will pass through a 2-inch sieve and be retained by a 1/4-inch sieve. 2. A uniform layer of sand, a minimum of 12 inches thick, overlain by a layer or strips of geotextile drainage matting designed to allow the lateral flow of soil gases. 3. Alternative materials, systems, or floor designs with demonstrated capability to permit depressurization across the entire subfloor area may be allowable with Engineer’s approval. B. A minimum 6-mil (or 3-mil cross laminated) polyethylene or equivalent flexible sheeting material shall be placed on top of the gas permeable layer prior to pouring the slab or placing the floor assembly to serve as a soil-gas-retarder by bridging any cracks that develop in the slab or floor assembly and to prevent concrete from entering the void spaces in aggregate base material. The sheeting shall cover the entire floor area, and separate sections of sheeting shall be overlapped at least 12 inches. The sheeting shall fit closely around any pipe, wire or other penetrations of the material. All punctures or tears in the material shall be sealed or covered with additional sheeting. C. All concrete floor slabs shall be designed, mixed, placed, reinforced, consolidated, finished, and cured in accordance with standards set forth in the Model Building Codes. The American Concrete Institute publications, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction," ACI 302.1R, "Guide to Residential Castin-Place Concrete Construction," ACI 332R, or the Post Tensioning Institute Manual, "Design and Construction of Post-Tensioned Slabs on Ground" are references that provide additional information on construction of concrete floor slabs. D. Floor assemblies in contact with the soil and constructed of materials other than concrete shall be sealed to minimize soil gas transport into the conditioned spaces of the building. A soil-gas-retarder shall be installed beneath the entire floor assembly in accordance with paragraph 3.1(B). Such alternative systems shall be approved by the Engineer. E. Large openings through concrete slabs, wood, and other floor assemblies in contact with the soil, such as spaces around bathtub, shower, or toilet drains, shall be filled or closed with materials that provide a permanent airtight seal such as non-shrink mortar, grouts, expanding foam, or similar materials designed for such application. F. Smaller gaps around all pipe, wire, or other objects that penetrate concrete slabs or other floor assemblies shall be made air tight with an elastomeric joint sealant, as defined in ASTM C920-87, and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. All control joints, isolation joints, construction joints, and any other joints in concrete slabs or between slabs and foundation walls shall be sealed. A continuous formed gap (for example, a "tooled edge") which allows the application of a sealant that will provide a continuous, airtight seal shall be created along all joints. When the slab has cured, the gap shall be cleared of loose material and filled with an elastomeric joint sealant, as defined in ASTM C920-97, and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Channel type (French) drains are not recommended. However, if used, such drains shall be sealed with backer rods and an elastomeric joint sealant in a manner that retains the channel feature and does not interfere with the effectiveness of the drain as a water control system. Lakeview Health Services ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION SYSTEM 312113.13-1 West End Heights I. Floor drains and air conditioning condensate drains that discharge directly into the soil below the slab or into crawlspaces shall be avoided. If installed, these drains shall be routed through solid pipe to daylight or through a trap approved for use in floor drains by local plumbing codes. J. Sumps open to soil or serving as the termination point for sub-slab or exterior drain tile loops shall be covered with a gasketed or otherwise sealed lid to retard soil gas entry. (Note: If the sump is to be used as the suction point in an active sub-slab depressurization system, the lid shall be designed to accommodate the vent pipe. If also intended as a floor drain, the lid shall also be equipped with a trapped inlet to handle any surface water on the slab.) K. Concrete masonry foundation walls below the ground surface shall be constructed to minimize the transport of soil gas from the soil into the building. Hollow block masonry walls shall be sealed at the top to prevent passage of air from the interior of the wall into the living space. At least one continuous course of solid masonry, one course of masonry grouted solid or a poured concrete beam at or above finished ground surface level shall be used for this purpose. Where a brick veneer or other masonry ledge is installed, the course immediately below that ledge shall also be sealed. L. Pressure treated wood foundations shall be constructed and installed as described in the National Forest Products Association (NFPA) Manual, "Permanent Wood Foundation System - Basic Requirements, Technical Report No. 7." In addition, NFPA publication, "Radon Reduction in Wood Floor and Wood Foundation Systems" provides more detailed information on construction of radon-resistant wood floors and foundations. M. Joints, cracks, or other openings around all penetrations of both exterior and interior surfaces of masonry block or wood foundation walls below the ground surface shall be sealed with an elastomeric sealant that provides an air-tight seal. Penetrations of poured concrete walls shall also be sealed on the exterior surface. This includes sealing of wall tie penetrations. N. Exterior surfaces of portions of poured concrete and masonry block walls below the ground surface shall be constructed in accordance with water proofing procedures outlined in the Model Building Codes. O. Placing air handling ducts in or beneath a concrete slab floor or in other areas below grade and exposed to earth is not recommended unless the air handling system is designed to maintain continuous positive pressure within such ducting. If ductwork does pass through a crawlspace or beneath a slab, it shall be of seamless material. Where joints in such ductwork are unavoidable, they shall be sealed with materials that prevent air leakage. P. Placing air handling units in crawlspaces, or in other areas below grade and exposed to soil-gas, is not recommended. However, if such units are installed in crawlspaces or in other areas below grade and exposed to soil gas, they shall be designed or otherwise sealed in a durable manner that prevents air surrounding the unit from being drawn into the unit. Q. Openings around all penetrations through floors above crawlspaces shall be sealed with materials that prevent air leakage. R. Access doors and other openings or penetrations between basements and adjoining crawlspaces shall be closed, gasketed or otherwise sealed with materials that prevent air leakage. 3.2 PIPING AND FAN ASSEMBLY A. In basement or slab-on-grade buildings the following components of a sub-slab depressurization system shall be installed during construction. 1. A minimum 4-inch diameter Schedule 40 cement welded PVC or other gas-tight pipe shall be embedded vertically into the sub-slab aggregate or other permeable material before the slab is poured. A "T" fitting or other support on the bottom of the pipe shall be used and, at a minimum, 10 linear feet of horizontal perforated pipe shall be connected to the “T” in both directions as shown on Detail A. If Contract Drawings are provided, piping shall be installed in accordance with the Contract Drawings. Lakeview Health Services ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION SYSTEM 312113.13-1 West End Heights 2. If there is an existing concrete slab where the ASSD System is to be placed, enough concrete shall be removed to provide sufficient room to install the below slab piping for the ASSD System. After the ASSD System is installed, new concrete shall be installed meeting the requirements above. All other system requirements as described above shall apply. 3. Locations of the vertical risers are shown on the contract drawings. The gas tight pipe shall be extended vertically through the building floors, terminate at least 12 inches above the surface of the roof, in a location at least 10 feet away from any window or other opening into the conditioned spaces of the building that is less than 2 feet below the exhaust point, and 10 feet from any adjoining or adjacent buildings (Detail B). In buildings designed with interior footings (that is, footings located inside the overall perimeter footprint of the building) or other barriers to lateral flow of sub-slab soil gas, radon vent pipes shall be installed in each isolated, non-connected floor area. If multiple suction points are used in non-connected floor areas, vent pipes are permitted to be manifolded in the basement or attic into a single vent that could be activated using a single fan. 4. Internal sub-slab or external footing drain tile loops that terminate in a covered and sealed sump, or internal drain tile loops that are stubbed up through the slab are also permitted to provide a roughed-in sub-slab depressurization capability. The sump or stubbed up pipe shall be connected to a vent pipe that extends vertically through the building floors, terminates at least 12 inches above the surface of the roof, in a location at least 10 feet away from any window or other opening into the conditioned spaces of the building that is less than 2 feet below the exhaust point, and 10 feet from any adjoining or adjacent buildings. 5. All exposed and visible interior ASSD vent piping shall be identified with at least one label on each floor level. The label shall read: " Sub-Slab Depressurization System DO NOT ALTER OR DISCONNECT " 6. In combination basement/crawlspace or slab-on-grade/crawlspace buildings, the sub-membrane vent described in paragraph 3.2(A)(4) may be tied into the sub-slab depressurization vent to permit use of a single fan for suction. 7. The ASSD System shall be equipped with a fan to draw soil vapor from beneath the slab. Each suction fan shall be rated for not less than 275 cfm air flow at 1-inch of water column as specified by the Rn 4EC-4 Inline Radon Fan manufactured by Fantech. a.The fan in the vent pipe and all positively pressurized portions of the vent pipe shall be located outside the habitable space of the building (Detail B). b. The ASSD System fan shall be an inline fan, model number Rn 4EC-4 as manufactured by Fantech, or approved equal. c.To facilitate installation of an active sub-slab depressurization system, electrical junction boxes shall be installed during construction in proximity to the anticipated locations of vent pipe fans and system failure alarms. Each location requires a dedicated single phase, 15 Amp, 120 V power supply circuit. 8. The ASSD System shall be equipped with a manometer to allow for easy visual verification that the system is operating properly. 9. The ASSD System shall be equipped with a differential pressure system failure alarm/switch series BDPA as manufactured by Dwyer Instruments, Inc, as well as in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The differential pressure alarm/switch shall be capable of being wired to a remote alarm system located in an easily visible and audible location. 3.3 FLOOR ASSEMBLIES FOR BUILDINGS WITH CRAWLSPACE FOUNDATIONS A. In buildings with crawlspace foundations, the following components of the ASSD System shall be installed during construction: (Exception: Where local codes permit mechanical crawlspace ventilation or other effective ventilation systems, and such systems are operated or proven to be effective year-round, the submembrane depressurization system components are not required.) Lakeview Health Services ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION SYSTEM 312113.13-1 West End Heights 1. The soil in both vented and non-vented crawlspaces shall be covered with a continuous layer of minimum 6-mil thick polyethylene sheeting or equivalent membrane material. The sheeting shall be sealed at seams and penetrations, around the perimeter of interior piers, and to the foundation walls. Following installation of underlayment, flooring, plumbing, wiring, or other construction activity in or over the crawlspace, the membrane material shall be inspected for holes, tears, or other damage, and for continued adhesion to walls and piers. Repairs shall be made as necessary. 2. A length of 4-inch diameter perforated pipe or a strip of geotextile drainage matting shall be inserted horizontally beneath the sheeting and connected to a 4-inch diameter "T" fitting with a vertical standpipe installed through the sheeting. The standpipe shall be extended vertically through the building floors, terminate at least 12 inches above the surface of the roof, in a location at least 10 feet away from any window or other opening into the conditioned spaces of the building that is less than 2 feet below the exhaust point, and 10 feet from any adjoining or adjacent buildings. 3. All exposed and visible interior radon vent pipes shall be identified with at least one label on each floor level. The label shall read: "Sub-Slab Depressurization System DO NOT ALTER OR DISCONNECT" 4. To facilitate installation of an active sub-slab depressurization system, electrical junction boxes shall be installed during construction in proximity to the anticipated locations of vent pipe fans and system failure alarms. 3.4 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. Visual inspections of completed system components shall be conduct by the Engineer at the following stages of completion outlined in Section 3.4(B). The Contractor shall give the Architect of Record and the Engineer no less than a 48-hour notification of the availability of each component for inspection. All postmitigation testing activities shall be documented and reported as required. B. The ASSD System shall be inspected at the following stages of completion. 1. Upon completion of the installation of sub-slab piping but before vapor barrier and backfilling. 2. Upon completion of the installation of vapor barriers but prior to pouring concrete flooring. 3. Upon completion of riser installation and roof penetrations but prior to piping being closed in. 4. Upon completion of all system components. C. The Engineer shall prepare a written report and notify the Owner’s Representative and the Contractor of any project components that do not generally conform to contract specifications and drawings. Corrective measures shall be implemented and inspected by the Engineer before work can progress. D. Upon completion of the ASSD System, the party that installed the system shall conduct post-mitigation testing witnessed by engineer/architect. All post-mitigation testing activities shall be documented and reported as required. E. The ASSD System shall be tested as follows: 1. Post-mitigation testing shall be conducted no sooner than 30 days after installing a depressurization system. 2. With the depressurization system operating, smoke shall be used to check for leaks through concrete cracks, floor joints, and at the suction point. Any leaks identified shall be re-sealed until smoke is no longer observed flowing through the opening. 3. Once a depressurization system is installed, its operation may compete with the proper venting of fireplaces, wood stoves and other combustion or vented appliances (e.g., furnaces, clothes dryers, and water heaters), resulting in the accumulation of exhaust gases in the building and the potential for carbon monoxide poisoning. Therefore, in buildings with natural draft combustion appliances, the building shall be tested for backdrafting of the appliances. Backdrafting conditions shall be corrected before the depressurization system is placed in operation. Lakeview Health Services ACTIVE SUB-SLAB DEPRESSURIZATION SYSTEM 312113.13-1 West End Heights 4. Following satisfactory completion of items 1-3 above, a Field Extension Test shall be performed to confirm the presence of a vacuum. a.A ¼” diameter hole shall be drilled through the concrete slab into the permeable layer by the party that installed the system. The hole shall be located a minimum of 10 feet from the end of the sub-slab piping or at the furthest distance from the piping achievable if a distance of 10 feet is not possible. b. The Field Extension Test shall be performed by the party that installed the system with the presence of the Engineer as witness by pouring smoke in the area of the hole to confirm the presence of a vacuum. c.Following the smoke testing, the vacuum shall be measured using applicable minimanometer gauge. The system shall measure not less than 0.004 inches/water of vacuum. d. After completion of the Field Extension Test, the hole in the concrete slab shall be sealed in accordance with Section 3.1 above by the party that installed the system. 3.5 ASSD SYSTEM INFORMATION A. Upon completion of testing but before acceptance of system by the owner, a building and information package shall be provided to the building's owner and tenants, if applicable, to facilitate their understanding of the system's operation, maintenance and monitoring. This package shall include the following: 1. A description of the mitigation system installed and its basic operating principles; 2. How the owner or tenant can check that the system is operating properly; 3. How the system will be maintained and monitored and by whom; 4. A list of appropriate actions for the owner or tenant to take if the system's warning device or indicator (e.g., pressure gauge, alarm, etc.) indicates system degradation or failure; and 5. Contact information (e.g., names, telephone numbers, etc.) if the owner or tenant has questions, comments or concerns. B. The building's owner shall also receive the following information: 1. Any building permits required by local codes; 2. Copies of contracts and warranties; and 3. A description of the proper operating procedures of any mechanical or electrical system installed, including manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions and warranties. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-1 West End Heights FOR SITE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Excavating trenches for utilities outside building. 2. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations. 3. Backfilling and compaction. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Sections. 2. Earth Moving – Section 312000. 3. Water Distribution – Section 331000. 4. Sanitary Sewerage – Section 333000. 5. Storm Sewerage – Section 334000. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and a pavement, walk or structure. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over excavated subgrade in a trench before laying a pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill when sufficient approved on-site soil material is not available from excavations. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. Fill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 2. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Architect determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, manholes, catch basins, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of undisturbed earth remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a compacted fill or backfill immediately below base course, pipe bedding, lined channel or topsoil materials. I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, and appurtenant structures, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with the following with requirements indicated: Lakeview Health Services TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-2 West End Heights FOR SITE UTILITIES 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 3. Sieve analysis results for pipe bedding and base course materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect’s written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. 4. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 5. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of utility owner. B. Use of explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthworks operations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Bedding Stone: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. F. Drainage Stone: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. Lakeview Health Services TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-3 West End Heights FOR SITE UTILITIES G. Structural Fill: Well-graded sand and gravel or crushed rock product which is capable of being compacted to required density at the proper moisture content and which is free of deleterious materials, trash, roots, debris, frozen material and organic or other foreign matter. Fill material shall be accepted on the basis of gradation, soundness, plasticity index, and a well-defined moisture-Density Relationship Test (ASTM 1557, Modified Proctor). Soundness shall be less than 30% loss based on a four-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness test. Plasticity Index of that portion of fill material passing the No. 40 mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0. Gradation of the materials shall be within the following limits: PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT SIEVE SIZE 100 4 inch 90-100 2 inch 30-65 ¼ inch 5-40 No. 40 0-10 No. 200 H. Cushion Sand: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, free from lumps of clay and all deleterious substances conforming to the following limits of gradation when dry: PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT SIEVE SIZE 100 ¼ inch 0-35 No. 50 0-10 No. 100 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; similar to Mirafi 140N; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following certifiable property values: Property Minimum Value Test Method CBR Puncture Strength 310 lbs. ASTM D6241 Trapezoid Tear Strength 50 lbs. ASTM D4533 Grab Tensile Strength 120 lbs. ASTM D4632 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) Flow Rate 70 US Sieve 135 gal/min/ft2 ASTM D4751 ASTM D4491 B. Warning Tape: Acid and alkali resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6-inches wide and 4-mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam 3. Orange: Telephone and other Communications 4. Blue: Water 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect sub grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Lakeview Health Services TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-4 West End Heights FOR SITE UTILITIES C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared sub grades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of subgrade material, undercutting pavement, and soil changes detrimental to stability of sub grades and structures. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Saturated, unstable soil conditions are not suitable for sub grades under structures. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage swales and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Provide temporary erosion and sediment control. 3. Do not discharge sediment laden water into the adjoining storm or sanitary sewer system or open swales. Pump sediment laden water from excavations into a portable sediment tank or a high-strength, non-woven geotextile fabric bag. Size portable sediment tanks in accordance with the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY STRUCTURES A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, and other construction and for inspection. 1. Excavations for utility structures: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final subgrade just before base material is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 12 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. B. Excavate trenches and conduit to subgrade depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations. Lakeview Health Services TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-5 West End Heights FOR SITE UTILITIES 1. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of pipe bedding material prior to installation of pipe. 2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on pipe bedding material. 3. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size excavate to required subgrade and provide pipe bedding material at indicated thickness. 3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundation or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL A. Place soil material in compacted layers to required subgrade elevations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 2. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 3. Removing trash and debris. 4. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. C. Place and compact initial backfill of bedding material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Backfill excavated areas under existing and proposed pavements, including driveways and sidewalks, to subgrade elevations with structural fill. Place backfill from top of bedding material to pavement subgrade in maximum 8-inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 95 percent maximum density. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing are removed. Lakeview Health Services TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-6 West End Heights FOR SITE UTILITIES G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may engage a testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. B. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests may be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. C. When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompose and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory excavated material, demolished pavements, excess soil, cobbles, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner’s property. END OF SECTION 312333 Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-1 West End Heights SECTION 31 62 16 - STEEL PILES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rolled steel section piles. 2. Engineered design of steel piles by a licensed New York State Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor to achieve the minimum working loads provided in the Contract Documents. 3. Pile Installation 4. Pile Testing to verify required capacities are achieved B. Related Sections: 1. 00 31 21 - Preconstruction Survey of Adjacent Buildings 2. 00 31 32 - Geotechnical Report and Soil Borings 3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete requirements for placement of pile caps and grade beams. 4. Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring 5. Section 31 09 16 - Pile Load Tests: Requirements for pile load tests. 6. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation: Excavating to working level. C. Work Included: 1. The Work of this section consists of furnishing all engineering design, labor, equipment, materials and performing all operations necessary to install driven steel pipe piles for foundation support at the locations shown and to the minimum load bearing capacities given on the Contract Drawings. 2. Steel pipe piles shall consist of a minimum 12 ¾” OD close-ended steel pipe pile, driven to a minimum depth as required to achieve the required pile capacity. Steel sections shall have a minimum wall thickness of 1/4 inch, a fully welded minimum 3/4” thick bottom plate, and shall be min ASTM A252 Grade 2 or Grade 3 (45 ksi) steel. Steel pipe piles may be filled with minimum 3,000 psi concrete or left unfilled according to the Pile Contractor’s Engineered Design. Steel piles shall have a ½” thick welded steel cap plate. The upper 15’ of each pile are to be fusion bond epoxy coated for corrosion. 3. Pile Driving work also includes Load Testing (reference Section 31 09 16) and Vibration Monitoring (reference Section 31 09 13). 4. Provide all surveying required for field stake-out and documentation of asbuilt conditions of piles. 5. Comply with the City of Ithaca Noise Ordinance. Pile Driving Operations shall only be permitted Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 am and 4:00 pm in accordance with the City ordinance. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-2 West End Heights 2. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A588 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100-mm) Thick. 4. ASTM A690/A690M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel, Copper, Phosphorus Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance for Use in Marine Environments. 5. ASTM A913/A913M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and SelfTempering Process (QST). 6. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. B. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS D1.5 - Bridge Welding Code. C. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 2. SSPC SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Piles are to be driven to the working load supporting capacity as indicated on Drawings, as determined by pile load testing (reference specification section 31 09 16). B. Piles shall develop an ultimate load capacity of at least twice the required design working load capacity provided in the Contract Drawings. C. Baseline pile depth: Expected depth to competent sand and gravel layer based on soil borings is anticipated to be between 55’ and 75’. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Contractor shall submit the following information: 1. Design submittal computations including WEAP analysis documenting that the proposed pile installation will achieve the required safe working loads. Computations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York: 2. Pile Details including, but not limited to, nominal diameter, length, pile tips, and pumping pressures (if concrete filled). 3. Details of equipment and procedures for pile installation including, but not limited to, the type, size and configuration of the driving hammer, helmet, and cushion to be used, consecutive steps and the approximate time required for each step. Acceptance of the pile driving equipment will not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility for properly installing piles, in satisfactory condition, to the driving criteria indicated. Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-3 West End Heights 4. Procedures for advancing through debris, timber, boulders, and other obstructions. 5. Methods to be used to control and verify pile position and alignment. 6. Procedures for control and removal of all spoil. 7. Procedures and equipment for placing concrete, if piles are to be concrete filled. 8. Pile identification plan showing the pile type, pile numbering, and proposed sequence of pile installation. 9. Specifications and procedure on proposed pile splices, if necessary, including welder’s certifications. No more than one (1) splice per pile shall be permitted. 10. Certified mill test reports properly marked for the steel pile and indicating: ultimate strength, elongation and material properties composition. 11. Concrete mix design, including documentation of test results from an independent laboratory, and procedures for placing concrete, if piles are to be filled. C. Work shall not begin until these Submittals have been received, reviewed and approved in writing by the Engineer. Contractor shall allow the Engineer 10 working days to review the shop drawing submittal after a complete set has been received. 1.5 PILE INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Contractor shall maintain and submit to the Engineer a Pile Driving Log which provides as a minimum the following information. 1. Pile Number/Location. 2. Pile length in Leads for each pile section. 3. Splice type. 4. Total installed length 5. Blow Counts per foot and blow counts per inch for the last foot. 6. Identify piles which required drilling, including hole diameters. 7. Concrete quantities pumped, if piles are filled. 8. Periodic Noise decibel readings. 9. Other notes on pile driving including indication of excessive vibration from installed seismic monitors and any anomalies. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Monitor pile driving operations by Special Inspector or designated representative. B. Pile Driver, construction manager, or special inspector (to be determined by Owner), to maintain a pile driving log to include as a minimum the required Pile Installation Documentation information noted above. Pile Drivers Log to be available on-site for review by Engineer upon request. Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-4 West End Heights 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Pile contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions prior to the start of pile driving operations. All nearby existing buildings and utilities shall be inspected by the Contractor for interference with delivery and installation. See also Section 00 31 21 – Preconstruction Survey of Adjacent Buildings. C. Piles shall be stored in orderly groups above ground sufficiently blocked to minimize bending stresses and safely secured. Piles exhibiting variations including permanent distortions beyond specified limits will be considered distorted and shall not be used in the Work. D. The Contractor shall investigate the conditions of public thoroughfares and roads as to availability, clearances, loads, limits, restrictions and other limitations affecting transportation to, ingress and egress of the site of the Work. The Contractor shall conform to all New York State, Federal and local regulations in regard to the transportation of materials to and from and at the job site and shall secure in advance such permits as may be required. 1.10 SCHEDULING A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Schedule Work to perform driving during the hours of 8:00 am and 4:00 pm Monday through Friday. C. Schedule test piles. D. Do not drive piles until excavation or filling of area surrounding piles is completed to design grades indicated on Drawings. Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-5 West End Heights E. Do not drive piles until mud-line is clear of debris or other material interfering with pile driving. F. No concrete shall be placed until all pile driving has been completed within a radius of 15’, or until the concrete in the last pile (if filled) has set for at least two days. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Piles: ASTM A252 Grade 2 or 3. Minimum fy = 45 ksi. Pipe piles shall have a minimum diameter of 12 ¾” OD, a minimum wall thickness of 1/4”, a welded bottom plate minimum thickness of ¾”, and a welded top cap plate thickness of ½”. 1. The top 15’ of each pile shall be fusion bond epoxy coated (3M Scotchkote or equal) for corrosion protection. B. Lengths of pile to be spliced shall be secured in proper alignment prior to welding and in such a manner that no eccentricity between the axis of the two lengths to be spliced, or angle between them, results. Sections of pipe shall be spliced to develop the full strength of the section. C. Accessories: Points, driving cap; to suit pile shape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures including overhead and buried utilities near the Work, from damage. B. Prepare to place piles from excavated working elevation. C. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative and Geotechnical Engineer at least 72 hours prior to each day of pile driving to allow for the appropriate personnel to be on site. D. Do not commence pile driving operations without verifying that the vibration monitoring equipment is operational (reference 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring). E. The Contractor shall perform the Work so as not to cause harmful effects to any adjacent structures and utilities. Should damage to adjacent structures and utilities occur, all costs in connection with the repair of such damage and restoration of Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-6 West End Heights damaged construction to its original condition shall be borne by the Contractor. Reference Sections 00 31 21 – Preconstruction Survey of Adjacent Buildings, and 31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring. F. The Contractor shall lay-out the pile locations referencing the pre-approved plan. Engage the services of a licensed land surveyor registered in the State of New York. G. Pile Length Markings: Mark each pile’s length by painting a horizontal line, at 1’-0” intervals. Mark the number of feet from the pile point in 5’ intervals. Mark piles at 1” intervals for the last 5’ of driving. H. The Contractor shall be prepared to spud and/or pre-drill through obstructions to facilitate subsequent pile installation. 3.3 TEST PILES – LOAD TESTING A. The Ultimate Pile Capacity of piles shall be verified with an impact hammer of suitable energy to measure the ultimate pile capacity before driving the remaining piles. See 31 09 16 Pile Loads Tests for dynamic pile testing. 3.4 INSTALLATION – PILE DRIVING A. Notify Geotechnical/Struc tural Engineer Prior to the start of Pile Driving Operations. B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide pile driving methods and equipment capable of attaining the required pile depth and capacity without exceeding the maximum allowable vibration level. C. The vibration level induced by the Pile Driving Operation must not exceed the vibration levels as defined in Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation & Monitoring. If excessive vibration levels are reached, immediately discontinue Pile Driving Operations. Modifications to Pile Driving Procedures may be required. D. Use rigid frame, fixed lead type driving equipment capable of supporting pile firmly in vertical position or to required batter. E. Where groups of piles are required, drive center pile of group first and then drive remaining piles in group progressing outward from center. F. Continuously drive piles to minimum tip penetration and to driving resistance indicated on Drawings. Take corrective action, when required, to prevent observable impact bowing of pile at final driving resistance. G. When driving resistance prohibits advancing pile to required minimum tip penetration, spud, jet, jet and drive, or use other means as necessary to advance pile to required minimum tip penetration. Then drive pile to required resistance indicated on Drawings. After jetting pile, re-drive adjacent piles to required resistance. Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-7 West End Heights H. Pre-drilling or pre-augering hole of maximum diameter 2 inches smaller than pile flange dimension may be used to advance pile to penetration no deeper than required minimum tip penetration. Then drive pile to required resistance indicated on Drawings. In granular soils below ground water level, stabilize hole by use of drilling fluids. I. Protect pile head during driving, using cap-block cushion consisting of alternate plates of phenolic laminate and aluminum designed to prevent damage to piles while transmitting required hammer energy to pile top as indicated on Drawings, with full bearing on pile butt for even distribution of hammer blow. J. Deliver hammer blows to central axis of pile. K. When driving is interrupted before refusal, drive an additional 12 inches before resuming recording of performance data. L. Re-drive piles which have lifted due to driving adjacent piles, or by soil uplift. M. Do not damage piles during driving operations. N. Cut off tops of piles to elevations indicated and prepare pile top to receive pile caps and grade beams. O. The Contractor shall not demobilize his equipment from the Project site until all piles are installed and accepted, or until directed to do so by the Owner. 3.5 WELDING AND SPLICING A. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 for shielded metal arc welding. B. Only use welders qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. C. Reinforce pile tips, as indicated in the Specification. D. Splice pile sections with one of the following: 1. Complete penetration butt weld. 2. ASTM A36 Steel Splicer Sleeve. E. Use jig or alignment device during welding to maintain required specified. F. For splices made during pile installation, rigid frame pile leads may be used as jig. G. Use only butt weld splices within 20 feet from pile cut-off elevation or design grade, whichever is lower. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. Lakeview Health Services STEEL PILES 316216-8 West End Heights B. Maximum Variation from Vertical for Plumb Piles: 1 in 48. C. Maximum Variation from Required Angle for Batter Piles: 1 in 24. D. Maximum Variation from Pile Cut-Off Elevation: 2 inches. E. Maximum Out-of-Position: 2 inches. F. Maximum Variation in Centerline after Splicing: 3/8 inch in 40 feet for undriven portion. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 45 33 – Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures B. Perform load tests to requirements of Section 31 09 16. C. Test Piles: Same diameter and type as specified for other piling, placed in same manner. D. Accepted test piles may be used in the Work. E. Unacceptable Piles: Piles that fail tests, are placed out of position, are below cut-off elevations, or are damaged. The Contractor shall repair the damaged piles (deemed allowable by the Engineer), or shall install replacement piles to replace the unacceptable piles at his own cost. The costs of inspection during pile repair, or replacement of pile installation and redesign and enlargement of pile caps resulting from the unacceptable piles shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. If any previously driven piles have heaved or lifted, then they shall be re-driven to the required load bearing capacity with additional cost. F. Piles rejected after driving may be withdrawn or abandoned and cut-off. Fill any abandoned pile piles or holes left in the ground with cohesionless soil material, such as gravel, sand, or gravel-sand mixtures. Place and compact throughout the length of the space. G. Drive additional piles where the centerline deviation exceeds 2 inches and an analytical determination indicates the load on any pile exceeds 110% of the design load. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services ASPHALT PAVING - 321216 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 321216 – ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 2. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 3. Pavement-marking paint. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase course and for aggregate pavement shoulders. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. B. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and Installer. C. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For each paving material. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by NYSDOT. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of NYSDOT for asphalt paving work. 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt. b. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period. d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. e. Review inspection and testing requirements, governing regulations, and proposed installation procedures. Lakeview Health Services ASPHALT PAVING - 321216 PAGE 2 West End Heights f. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time of placement. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 55 deg F (12.8 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a, PG 64-22. B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. C. Water: Potable. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint. 1. Color: As indicated. B. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive strength, size as indicated. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter, 10-inch (254-mm) minimum length. 2.4 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Comply with requirements of NYSDOT Standard Specifications 401-2.01 through 401-2.06 for the material and composition of the following courses: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Binder Course: Type 3 asphalt concrete. 3. Surface Course: Type 7 asphalt concrete. Lakeview Health Services ASPHALT PAVING - 321216 PAGE 3 West End Heights PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving. B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Verify that utilities and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt. 3.2 PATCHING A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 3.3 REPAIRS A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements. 1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick. B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm). 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt binder course in a single lift to thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). Lakeview Health Services ASPHALT PAVING - 321216 PAGE 4 West End Heights 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of oneway slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.6 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 3.7 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C). B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Binder Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm)]. Lakeview Health Services ASPHALT PAVING - 321216 PAGE 5 West End Heights 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. 1. Parking stall stripes shall be 4 inches wide. 2. ADA symbols shall be white on a blue background. 3. Bicycle lane symbols shall be white. 4. Traffic lane markings shall be per NYSDOT requirements. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 3.10 WHEEL STOPS A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. B. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications. 2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. E. Water/flooding test to be performed by testing agency to verify proper drainage of all paved surfaces. F. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken. G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 3.12 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site. END OF SECTION 321216 Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 321313 – CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Concrete paving. 2. Integrally colored concrete paving. 3. Concrete curbs. 4. ADA detectable warning plates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for general building applications of concrete. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 3. Division 32 Section “Precast Concrete Curbs” for precast concrete curbs for around planting beds. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 6. Joint fillers. 7. Colored Concrete Pigments. 8. Detectable warning plates. 9. Joint sealants. F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 2 West End Heights 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." 2. Comply with ACI and NYSDOT requirements for manufacturers of ready-mix concrete products. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. a. For integrally colored concrete, provide up to (3) different mockups including different color tints. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. 5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Architect. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete producer. d. Concrete pavement subcontractor. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 3 West End Heights B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. D. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain steel bars. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. F. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid two-part epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement. G. Dowel alignment system: 1. Speed Load two component dowel alignment system by Greenstreak Inc, 800-325-9504, or approved equal. 2. Available Sleeves and Bases: a. PSD12/#4TX for 5/8" Smooth or #4 Rebar X 24", base PSD/#4BX 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Davis Colors. b. Increte Systems Inc. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 4 West End Heights c. Scofield, L. M. Company. d. Solomon Colors. e. Approved equivalent. 2. Color: TBD 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 1. Available Products: a. BurLene, by Max Katz Bag Company, Inc., http://www.maxkatzbag.com b. UltraCure DOTTM Disposable Wet Cure Blanket, as provided by McTech Group, Inc., http://www.mctechgroup.com c. conKure X80W Wet Curing Blanket, by Raven Industries, www.ravenefd.com. d. Approved equivalent. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound, for Colored Concrete Only: 1. Curing compound shall comply with ASTM C309 and be approved for use with exposed aggregate materials. a. Color Seal II, by Davis Colors, Inc. b. Approved equivalent. D. Evaporation Retarder: NOT PERMITTED E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: NOT PERMITTED F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: NOT PERMITTED 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Sealer: Transparent Acrylic Water-Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing compound. 1. Available Products: a. Masterkure N Seal W by Kure-N-Seal W by Sonneborn/BASF. b. Kure-N-Seal WB. c. Approved equivalent. 2.8 ADA DETECTABLE WARNING PLATES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. East Jordan Iron Works. 2. Neenah Foundry. 3. Ironped, Inc. B. Product: 1. ADA compliant, slip resistant detectable warning plates. a. Size: 24” x 30” or as needed to provide minimum width required. b. Provide radius plates as required. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normalweight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete in accordance with the following: 1. NYSDOT Standard Specifications Section 500, Table 501-3: a. Class C: Pavements. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 5 West End Heights D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.15] [0.30] percent by weight of cement. E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows: 1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For concrete mixes of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For concrete mixes larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added. 2.11 INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE MIXING A. Add integral colored admixture to concrete mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not add water to the mix in the field. C. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration. D. Supplemental admixtures shall not be used unless approved by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 6 West End Heights 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. F. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap of adjacent mats. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and alignment sleeve assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm)] radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 7 West End Heights 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and alignment sleeve assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. 1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. L. Curbs: When automatic machine placement is used for curb placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. M. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength. N. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. O. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 8 West End Heights 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moist curing or moist curing with curing and sealing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moist Curing with Curing and Sealing Compound: Prior to moist curing per the above, apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3. Curing Methods for Colored Concrete Pavement: Apply curing compound for colored concrete in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply curing compound at consistent time for each pour to maintain close color consistency. 3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s Representative's approval. B. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than ½ inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brushcoat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 9 West End Heights area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Owner’s Representative. C. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Owner’s Representative's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. D. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Owner’s Representative's approval 3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm). 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressivestrength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of Lakeview Health Services CONCRETE PAVING - 321313 PAGE 10 West End Heights concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNING PLATES A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install detectable warning plates flush with adjacent concrete, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings. D. After completing detectable warning plate installation, remove spots, dirt, and debris. 3.13 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 321313 Lakeview Health Services UNIT PAVING - 321400 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 321400 – UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete pavers set on concrete base. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, compacted subgrade, and filter fabric for weep holes. 2. Division 32 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete base under unit pavers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pavers. 2. Polymeric joint sand. 3. Sand setting bed. B. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. 2. Joint materials. 1.4 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete pavers set on concrete base. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, compacted subgrade, filter fabric for weep holes, and granular base. 2. Division 32 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete base under unit pavers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to include Owner, Landscape Architect, General Contractor and Concrete Subcontractor. 1. Layout and pattern of pavers shall be reviewed prior to execution. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. C. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing. Lakeview Health Services UNIT PAVING - 321400 PAGE 2 West End Heights 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. B. Weather Limitations for Polymeric Sand: 1. Install polymeric sand only when ambient temperature is above 32 deg F and when paver surface is dry. 2. Do not apply when 24 hours free of precipitation cannot be guaranteed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates. 1. Paver Band Unit Pavers a. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for concrete pavers is based on Belgard Unit Pavers. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1) Belgard Pavers. 2) Approved equal b. Color: Belgard Pavers – Great Lakes Blend c. Size: 8” x 4” x 2 5/8” d. Finish: Natural e. Edge Style: Natural Beveled 2.2 SAND FOR JOINTS A. Provide HP Polymeric Sand by Techni-Seal, or approved equivalent. 1. Color: Gray. 2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. Sieve Size Percent Passing 9.52 mm (3/8”) 100 4.75 mm (No. 4) 95-100 2.36 mm (No. 8) 80-100 1.18 mm (No. 16) 50-85 600 um (No. 30) 25-60 300 um (No. 50) 20-30 150 um (No. 100) 5-15 75 um (No. 200) 0-10 B. The bedding sand shall be dry, sharp and free of organics and deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. The sand shall be uniform moisture content when screeded and shall be protected against rain when stockpiled on site prior to screeding. C. The moisture content shall be in the range of 4-8%. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand: ASTM C 144. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144. E. Latex Additive: Acrylic-resin water emulsion recommended by additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed. Lakeview Health Services UNIT PAVING - 321400 PAGE 3 West End Heights F. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. Provide products by one of the following: G. Water: Potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. D. Joint Pattern: As indicated. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. 3.4 SAND SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS A. Place drainage geotextile over weep holes in concrete base. B. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. C. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. D. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. E. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover pavers that have not been compacted, and leveling course on which pavers have not been placed, with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain. 3.5 JOINT FILLING APPLICATIONS A. Conditions: Temperature shall be above 32 degrees Fahrenheit, and there shall be no precipitation for 24 hours after application. B. Ensure that paver surface is dry and free of debris. C. Spread polymeric sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled. D. Compact with mechanical or manual means, remove excess sand with broom and leaf blower. Lakeview Health Services UNIT PAVING - 321400 PAGE 4 West End Heights E. Moisten sand joints to 1-1/2” depth. F. Spread polymeric sand and fill joints again, remove excess and with broom and leaf blower. G. Allow sand joints to dry for 24 hours before exposure to water. H. Utilize manufacturer’s prescribed installation method if process differs from above. I. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. 3.6 REPLACEMENT UNITS A. Provide the owner with one pallet of replacement units in the color/size ratio shown for the installed unit pavers. 3.7 REPAIRING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: Remove excess polymeric sand from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean. END OF SECTION Lakeview Health Services STONE CURBS - 321640 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 321640 – STONE CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes placing and backfilling new stone curbing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for trenching, bedding, and backfilling. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Provide stone curbing according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT) Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed stone curbing installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain stone curbing from a single source with resources to provide products and materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect stone curbing during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials. B. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location or waterproof container. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey and layout for curbing. Verify that straight length, radius, and drop curbing sections may be installed in compliance with drawings and referenced standards. B. Weather Limitations: Protect mortar material against freezing when ambient air temperature is 40 degrees F and falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed joints. C. Sequencing and Scheduling: Coordinate stone curbing work with location and alignment of roadways, parking lot entrances, traffic islands, walks, and drainage inlets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE CURBING A. Roadway Curb: Granite, complying with the requirements of NYSDOT Specifications 714-01 for Type C curb: 1. Size: 5 inches wide by 16 inches deep. 2. Finish: Sawn top, split face battered front. 3. For radii less than 100 feet, radiused curb shall be provided B. Flush Curb: Granite, complying with the requirements of NYSDOT Specifications 714-01: 1. Size: 5 inches wide by 12 inches deep. 2. Finish: Sawn top and sides 3. For radii less than 100 feet, radiused curb shall be provided C. Concrete Backing and Bedding: Portland cement concrete, 3,000 psi mix. D. Mortar: Cement mortar complying with the requirements of NYSDOT Specification 705-21 for Type M mortar. Lakeview Health Services STONE CURBS - 321640 PAGE 2 West End Heights E. Stainless Steel Pins: ASTM A276, Type 304. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not use stone curbing with cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible in the finished work. B. Place stone curbing on a continuous concrete backing in accordance with NYSDOT Specifications 609-3.01. C. Set stone curb on true line and grade to provide a minimum 4- inch and maximum 6-inch reveal above final pavement elevations, and fit no closer than 1/4 inch at the aris line. D. Fill all joints solid with cement mortar, and remove excess mortar from exposed faces of stone curbing. E. Backfill, after cement has properly set, with material indicated for applicable pavement section. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Provide completed stone curbing installation that does not exceed the following deviations from specifications and alignments indicated: 1. Curb Reveal: Plus or minus 3/8 inch. 2. Curb Grade: 1/4 inch per 10 feet. 3. Horizontal Alignment: Within 2 inches. 4. Elevation: Within ½ inch at any point. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Remove any visible stains and excess mortar from exposed surfaces, wash and scrub clean. B. Protect the installed curbing from chipping, staining, displacement or other damage during backfilling and paving operations. END OF SECTION 321640 Lakeview Health Services WOOD FENCES AND GATES - 323129 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 323129 – WOOD FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood Fences and Gates. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for trenching, bedding, and backfilling. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): B. ASTM A36 “Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel” C. ASTM A123 “Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products’ D. ASTM A500 "Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes" E. American Welding Society (AWS) 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 4. Product Data and manufacturer’s written instructions for care, installation and maintenance. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show Dimensions, fencing layout, finish, weight and size of members, methods of fastening, and installation details of fence and gates. Provide coordination drawings where inserts or sleeves are required. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fence posts shall be located with dimension tolerances as follows: 1. Deviation from designated location (if any): ± 3” 2. Deviation from straight lines or even curves: ± 1” Lakeview Health Services WOOD FENCES AND GATES - 323129 PAGE 2 West End Heights 3. Misalignment from plumb: 3/8” in 4’. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Do not install materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Lumber: Micronized copper quaternary treatment (MCQ), AWPA Use Category UC4A Ground Contact; No. 2 Grade and Better; size and location as indicated on Drawings. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. SCS certified as Environmentally Preferable. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 5. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: All posts. 2.3 WOOD FENCES AND GATES A. Wood Materials: Western Red Cedar; WRCLA. 1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Fence (Slats) Boards and Trim: Surfaced Both Sides, Two Edges (S2S2E); Standard Grade and Better; size and location as indicated on Drawings. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1. For face-fastening, provide stainless steel ringed-shank nails. Lakeview Health Services WOOD FENCES AND GATES - 323129 PAGE 3 West End Heights 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for all other applications. B. Gate Hardware: 1. As shown on drawings. 2.5 WOOD SEALER A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. SuperDeck 2600 Series Clear Wood Finish, Duckback Products. 2.6 Green Screen A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenscreen (1-800-450-3494) B. Size: 1. As indicated on drawings C. Finishes: 1. Metal components (except fasteners) shall be factory finished after fabrication. 2. Finish System: pretreat with general purpose, alkaline, water based cleaner / degreaser applied at 240 degrees F. prime with zinc-rich epoxy powder coat. Topcoat with polyester or polyester-urethane powder coat. 3. Salt Spray Resistance: Finish shall remain rust free when tested 1680 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. 4. Color and Finish: Silver 5. Touch-Up Paint: Provide high quality, exterior-grade spray paint suitable for conditions of use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts. B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to dimensions shown on plans. C. Construct plumb, square, level and anchored securely with smooth miters and field cuts after joining. Provide adequate support for anchoring. D. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. E. Fit lumber fencing and gates by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 1. Machine sand exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, finishing with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 3. Where treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. F. Install steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as required to secure fencing and gates. G. Wood fence and gate panels shall be through bolted to posts with galvanized steel through bolts. 1. Anchors shall be powder coated finished to match painted finish. Lakeview Health Services WOOD FENCES AND GATES - 323129 PAGE 4 West End Heights H. Wood to Wood Connections: Provide galvanized steel wood screws, minimum 2” long for connecting wood members to wood members. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean exterior surfaces. B. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. C. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. END OF SECTION 323129 Lakeview Health Services SOIL PREPARATION - 329113 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 329113 – SOIL PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for planting soil including, but not limited to the following: 1. Soil preparation for imported soils including testing for conformance. 2. Soil preparation for reuse of existing suitable soils (Contractor’s Option). 3. Soil amendments. 4. Installation and placement of soils. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 01 Section “Temporary Tree Protection” for protection of existing trees, soils and planting. 2. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing” for stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 3. Division 32 Section “Earth Moving” for excavation, filling, rough grading, and backfill. 4. Division 32 Section “Turf and Grasses” for planting soil mix placement. 5. Division 32 Section “Plants” for planting soil mix placement. C. Coordinate activities with other project contractors so that there is no soil disturbance from traffic or other construction activities subsequent to placement. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. B. AOAC: Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. C. ASA: American Society of Agronomy. D. ASTM: American Society for Testing Materials. E. USDA Soil Texture System of Classification. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Planting Soil: Stockpiled or imported topsoil and/or subsoil mixed with soil amendments for planting trees, shrubs, ground covers and lawn. D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill. E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the site soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. Subsoil is unsuitable for plant growth unless amended as specified. F. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Sources for Soil Components and Planting Soil Mixes: Submit information identifying sources for all soil components and the firm responsible for mixing of planting soil mixes. 1. Landscape Architect shall reserve the right to reject any soil supplier and any soil mix. 2. Soil mix supplier shall have a minimum of five years’ experience at supplying custom planting soil mixes. Lakeview Health Services SOIL PREPARATION - 329113 PAGE 2 West End Heights 3. Submit supplier name, address, telephone and fax numbers and contact name. 4. Submit certification that accepted supplier is able to provide sufficient quantities of materials and mixes for the entire project. B. Samples: Prior to installing soil mixes, submit representative samples to Landscape Architect for approval. Do not place any soil mixes until Landscape Architect’s approval has been obtained. 1. Imported sandy loam soil mix. 2. Amended on-site soil mix, if selected by Contractor. C. Compost: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including source. 2. Certificates: Provide certificates required by authorities having jurisdiction, especially for any composted materials containing sewage sludge. Approval as EPA Type 1 “exceptional quality” is required as well as that of the State of New York. 3. Testing: As described in Quality Assurance. D. All Other Amendments: Product Data. E. Subgrade Testing: 1. Field percolation test results as described in Part 3 Execution. Percolation tests shall be measured in inches per hour of drainage. F. Imported Planting Soil Mixes: The following testing is required of all soil mixes comprised of imported soil materials: 1. Particle Size Analysis: Include sand, silt and clay, sand size distribution, sand particle shape, pH, uniformity coefficient by hydrometer method (ASTM D-422-63). 2. Organic Matter: Percent organic matter by combustion (ASTM F-1647, Method 1). 3. Report suitability of soil mixes for turf and plant growth. Verify compliance with recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. 4. Test results for soil mixes must be accepted prior to placement. G. Should Contractor select to reuse any existing soil, it shall be tested and amendment to meet all requirements of specified planting soil mix. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Topsoil and Planting Soil Mix: Obtain all topsoil and/or planting soil mix through one source that has been tested according to the requirements below. If there are any additional proposed sources, Contractor must provide topsoil analysis and testing for each source as described below. B. Sources for Soil Components and Planting Soil Mixes: Submit information identifying sources for all soil components and the firm responsible for mixing of planting soil mixes. 1. Landscape Architect shall have the right to reject any soil supplier. 2. Soil mix supplier shall have a minimum of five years’ experience at supplying custom planting soil mixes. 3. Submit supplier name, address, telephone and fax numbers and contact name. C. Submit certification that accepted supplier is able to provide sufficient quantities of materials and mixes for the entire project. D. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: The Contractor shall engage an independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. The following firms are acceptable testing agencies for the various components: 1. A. McNitt & SerenSoil Testing, LLC 1338 Deerfield Drive State College, PA 16803 Tel: 610.360.5985 andy@turfsoiltesting.com 2. Turf & Soil Diagnostics - NY 35 King Street Trumansburg, NY 14886 855-769-4231 Lakeview Health Services SOIL PREPARATION - 329113 PAGE 3 West End Heights lab@turfdiag.com 3. Turf & Soil Diagnostics - KS 613 E. 1st Street Linwood, KS 66052 855-769-4231 lab@turfdiag.com E. Percolation Testing of Subgrade: Prior to placement of the planting soil, test the subgrade as described in this Section. Coordinate the testing of the subgrade for percolation with the Sitework Contractor, Soil Scientist, and Landscape Architect 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Material should not be handled or hauled, placed or compacted when it is wet as after a heavy rainfall or is frozen. Soil should be handled only when the moisture content is less than at field capacity. The Landscape Architect shall be consulted to determine if the soil is too wet to handle. B. Store and handle packaged materials in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect all materials from weather, damage, injury and theft. C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delay. On-site storage space is permissible only with written notice from Construction Manager. Deliver materials only after preparations for placement of planting soil have been completed. D. Prohibit vehicular and pedestrian traffic on or around stockpiled planting soil. E. Soil that is to be stockpiled longer than two weeks, whether on or off site, shall be placed in mounds less than six feet high. If soil stockpiles greater than six feet high are present longer than two weeks then the contractor shall break down and disperse soil so that mounds do not exceed the six foot height restriction for longer than two weeks. 1. Provide silt fencing around topsoil mounds, and/or as directed in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). F. Vehicular access to the site is restricted. Before construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval a plan showing proposed routing for deliveries and site access. G. Soil materials shall not be handled or hauled, placed or compacted when it is wet, as after a heavy rain, nor when frozen. Soil shall be handled only when the moisture content is less than field capacity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; clean and screened free of deleterious materials and weeds, including but not limited to any plant listed by NYSDEC or other authority as invasive, nuisance or noxious weed species; and free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources only if required due to deficit of existing soil materials. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. B. On-Site Soils: Should suitable soils be available on site, Contractor may choose the following option to amend and reuse as planting mix. 1. Suitable soils may include subsoils provided they are tested and free of all materials harmful to plant growth. 2. Screen soil free of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 3. Amend as required to achieve the same requirements as imported planting soil 2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. The compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant growth with appropriate management practices in conjunction with addition of fertilizer and other amendments as applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory tests. Lakeview Health Services SOIL PREPARATION - 329113 PAGE 4 West End Heights Debris such as metal, glass, plastic, wood (other than residual chips), asphalt or masonry shall not be visible and shall not exceed one percent dry weight. 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. (ASTM F-1647, Method 1). 2. The ratio of carbon to nitrogen shall be in the range of 10:1 to 25:1. 3. One hundred percent of the material shall pass a 3/8-inch (or smaller) screen. (ASTM D-42263). 4. pH: The pH shall be between 5.5 to 7.5 as determined from a 1:1 soil-distilled water suspension using a glass electrode pH meter. (American Society of Agronomy Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 2, 1986). 5. Salinity: Electrical conductivity of a one to two soil to water ratio extract shall not exceed 4.0 mmhos/cm (dS/m). 6. Heavy metal contents shall conform to state and federal regulations. 7. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or sourceseparated or compostable mixed solid waste. B. Compost may be obtained at one of the following sources, provided that the test requirements are met: 1. WeCare Compost by We Care Organics, Jordan, New York, 315-689-1937 2. Cayuga Compost (fine) by P&S Excavating, Trumansburg, New York, 607-387-6826 3. Cornell Farm Services, Ithaca, NY: 607-257-2235 4. CJ Krantz Organics, Clarence Center, NY, 716-741-3850 5. Fessenden Farms, King Ferry, NY, 877-767-7280 6. Approved equivalent. 2.3 FERTILIZER A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. 2.4 IMPORTED PLANTING SOIL MIX A. Planting soil mix shall be a sandy loam as defined by USDA Soil Texture System of Classification created from combination of accepted sand, topsoil, and compost meeting the following criteria: 1. Free of stones over 1/2”, stumps, roots or other woody material over 2” in diameter 2. Free of brush and seeds from noxious weeds. 3. Sand content 35% to 60% by volume 4. Silt 30% to 55% by volume 5. Clay content < 25% by volume 6. Permeability >1” inch per hour 7. pH 5.5 to 7.2 8. Organic Matter Minimum 5.0% 9. Magnesium 35 lbs.s per acre, minimum 10. Phosphorus (P2O5) 75 lbs. per acre, minimum 11. Potassium (K2O) 85 lbs. per acre, minimum 12. Soluble salts <500 ppm B. Provide test results from a certified soil scientist confirming that soil mix conforms to the characteristics as outlined above. Lakeview Health Services SOIL PREPARATION - 329113 PAGE 5 West End Heights C. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): As recommended by manufacturer, based on rates supplied by Soil Scientist. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Pre-Installation Examination Required: The Contractor shall examine previous work, related work, and conditions under which this work is to be performed and shall notify Landscape Architect in writing of all deficiencies and conditions detrimental to the proper completion of this work. Beginning work means Contractor accepts substrates, previous work, and conditions. The Contractor shall not place any planting or turf soil mix until all work in adjacent areas is complete and approved by the Landscape Architect. B. Examination of Subgrade: The subgrade shall be inspected prior to the start of soil placement for conformance with the Drawings for elevations of subgrade relative to finish grade. Subgrade shall be graded smooth and parallel to the finish grades unless otherwise noted in the Drawings. C. Pre-Grading Inspection: Prior to the commencement of Work, contact the Landscape Architect to provide an inspection to verify the delineation areas on the Soils Management Plan and proposed location(s) for topsoil and material stockpiling. Make corrections and adjustments as directed by the Landscape Architect prior to commencing any work. 3.2 SUBGRADE DRAINAGE TESTING A. Perform subgrade percolation testing at a frequency of one percolation test for every 1,000 sq. ft. of installed topsoil area and at all bioretention planting beds. Percolation tests shall be performed on a minimum of 10% of tree pits and 20% of shrub beds, and on any areas of questionable drainage or as required by Landscape Architect. Contact Landscape Architect and conduct percolation tests in his or her presence. Percolation tests shall be measured in inches per hour of drainage at the base of the plant root level. 1. Excavate test pits 36” by 36” by 18” deep. 2. Fill test pit with 12” minimum depth water and allow water to naturally drain out. When water has drained out, fill excavation again with 12” minimum depth water and measure rate of drainage. Drainage rate should be a minimum of 1” per hour (1 inch drop in water elevation per hour test pit). 3. Should any planting areas yield a percolation test result of less than 1” of drainage per hour, stop work on these areas and obtain direction from Landscape Architect prior to installation of planting mixes and amendments. 3.3 MIXING OF SOIL MIXES A. General Soil Mix Preparation: Examine soil and remove foreign materials, stones over 1/2”, and organic debris over 2” in length. All preparation and mixing shall be accomplished when the soil moisture content is less than field capacity. B. Adequate quantities of mixed planting soil materials shall be provided to attain, after compaction and natural settlement, all design finish grades. 1. Minimum depths of mixed soils must be achieved per planting details. Contractor shall remove excess soils from site as needed at no additional cost. C. Soil mixes shall be produced with equipment that blends together each component in a thorough and uniform manner. 1. Soil mixing can occur in-place or off-site. 3.4 SOIL PREPARATION TECHNIQUES A. Import topsoil and amend to achieve a sandy loam as defined by the USDA Soil Texture System of Classification. 1. Applicability: All areas designated for lawns and planting beds that need additional material to achieve finish grades. 2. Contractor shall manufacture planting soil mix as follows: a. Contractor shall procure all soil component materials. Lakeview Health Services SOIL PREPARATION - 329113 PAGE 6 West End Heights b. Contractor shall obtain laboratory testing services to determine percentages of soil component materials required to manufacture planting soil mix. c. Mix in fertilizers and amendments as recommended by soil testing laboratory and as approved by the Landscape Architect. If lime is to be added, it shall be mixed with dry soil before fertilizer is added and mixed. d. After component percentages are determined by the Soil Scientist, each planting soil mix shall be tested for physical and chemical analysis. e. Retest mixed planting soil and adjust mix as necessary to meet project requirements. 3. Placement: Scarify or till subgrade to depth needed to achieve required depth of planting or turf soil mix after amending. Entire surface shall be disturbed by scarification. Do not scarify within drip line of existing trees. 4. Rake beds to fine grade and remove surface rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter. 1) In turf areas, roll to compact soil to 85% of maximum density and remove rocks and debris greater than 1 inch in diameter. B. Amend in-place soils and subsoils as follows: 1. Applicability: All areas designated for lawns and planting beds that have been rough graded and/or backfilled shall be treated as follows: a. Scarify or till subgrade to depth needed to achieve required depth of loose soil mix after amending. Entire surface shall be disturbed by scarification. Do not scarify within drip line of existing trees. b. Place approved compost directly on existing soil and rototill to thoroughly incorporate at the following ratio: 1) 1/2” of compost for every inch of existing soil (50% by volume). 2) Confirm that depth of loose amended soil meets specified design depths per landscape plan and details. 3) Alternatively, it is the Contractor’s option to amend and thoroughly mix excavated existing soils off site and reinstall after scarifying and tilling existing subgrade. c. Rake beds to fine grade and remove surface rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter. 1) In turf areas, roll to compact soil to 85% of maximum density and remove rocks and debris greater than 1 inch in diameter. 3.5 COORDINATION AND EXCESS MATERIALS A. Coordinate activities with other project contractors so that there is no soil disturbance from traffic or other construction activities subsequent to soil placement. B. Excess Soil Materials: Remove the excess soil materials from the site at no additional cost to the Owner unless otherwise requested. 1. Owner shall reserve right of first refusal on all amended soil mixes. s 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Post-Installation Inspection: Prior to planting, contact the Landscape Architect to provide an inspection verify that the placement of amendments and soil preparation is consistent with the Soil Management Plan. 1. Contractor and Landscape Architect shall verify depth of imported planting soil placement and/or rototilled amended soil depth prior to installation of plants. 2. If required depth is not achieved, Contractor shall provide additional rototilling, mixing and compost to achieve specified depth at no cost to the Owner END OF SECTION 329113 Lakeview Health Services TURF AND GRASSES - 329200 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 329200 – TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Lawn renovation. 3. Erosion-control materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Division 32 Section “Soil Preparation” for preparation of soil mixes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Final Acceptance: At the end of the Maintenance Period, Landscape Architect shall reinspect all lawns and meadows to determine whether Satisfactory Lawn has been achieved. C. Initial Acceptance: Completion of seeding or sodding, with adequacy determined by Landscape Architect. Maintenance period shall commence for 60 days after initial acceptance, and continue until Final Acceptance. D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. F. Turf Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful lawn establishment. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. Lakeview Health Services TURF AND GRASSES - 329200 PAGE 2 West End Heights 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion. 1. Spring Planting: April 1 to June 30. 2. Fall Planting: September 1 to November 15. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Lawn Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of planting completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Summer Green Supreme Drought & Wear Mix, by Preferred Seed, or approved equivalent: 1) 20% Rebounder Tall Fescue 2) 20% 4th Millennium SRP Tall Fescue 3) 20% Cochise IV Tall Fescue 4) 15% Essential Tall Fescue 5) 10% Palmetto Turf Type Annual Ryegrass 6) 10% Green Supreme Perennial Ryegrass 7) 5% SR2100 Kentucky Bluegrass 8) Seeding Rate: 8 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2. Overseeding Mix: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. 100 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). 1) Seeding Rate: 3.5 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2.2 FERTILIZER A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. Lakeview Health Services TURF AND GRASSES - 329200 PAGE 3 West End Heights 2.3 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. B. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5. C. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors. D. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors. 2.4 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT WITH SOIL DECOMPACTION A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Subgrade Preparation: 1. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 2. Apply 3” of compost onto loosened subgrade and till into 12” of subsoil. 3. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. D. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. E. Before planting, restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Lawn Preparation" Article. B. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. C. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. Lakeview Health Services TURF AND GRASSES - 329200 PAGE 4 West End Heights 3.5 SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 5 to 8 lb/1000 sq. ft. (2.3 to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq. m). C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion-control blankets and 1:6 with erosioncontrol fiber mesh installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where shown, installed and anchored according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. G. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm), and roll surface smooth. 3.6 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre (15.6-kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. 3.7 LAWN MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. B. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water lawn with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1. Mow grass to a height of 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 mm). D. Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 3.8 SATISFACTORY LAWNS A. Lawn installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm). Lakeview Health Services TURF AND GRASSES - 329200 PAGE 5 West End Heights B. Use specified materials to reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 1. Overseed all bare patches exceeding 5 by 5 inches with overseeding seed mix at specified rates. 2. Contractor shall include watering until satisfactory lawns are achieved, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris, created by lawn work, from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period END OF SECTION 329200 Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 1 West End Heights SECTION 329300 – PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections of Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby made a part of the Specification. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Plants. 4. Edgings. 5. Gravel mulch. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 3. Division 32 Section “Soil Preparation” for preparation of soil mixes. 4. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for lawn and meadow planting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Clump: Where three or more young trees were planted in a group and have grown together as a single tree having three or more main stems or trunks. D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required. E. Final Acceptance: At the end of the Maintenance Period, Landscape Architect shall reinspect all plantings to determine satisfactory plant establishment. F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. G. Initial Acceptance: Completion of planting, with adequacy determined by Landscape Architect. Maintenance period shall commence for 60 days after initial acceptance, and continue until Final Acceptance. H. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. I. Multi-Stem: Where three or more main stems arise from the ground from a single root crown or at a point right above the root crown. J. Planting/Turf Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. L. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 2 West End Heights 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. 5 lb (2.2 kg) of gravel mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled plastic bags. 2. Edging materials and accessories, of manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. E. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. G. Warranty: Description of warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants. B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." 1. Selection of exterior plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. C. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip. D. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug. 1. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery and handling. C. Handle planting stock by root ball. D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants and trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 3. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 3 West End Heights 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: April 1 to June 30. 2. Fall Planting: September 1 to November 15. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Initial Acceptance: a. Trees and Shrubs: One year. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 60 days from date of Initial Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Provide trees and shrubs of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. E. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 4 West End Heights F. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting. 2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. 1. Provide balled and burlapped trees. 2. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of tree height. B. Small Upright Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as indicated. 2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS A. Form and Size: Shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. 1. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning. 2.4 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1. 2.5 GROUND COVER PLANTS A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1. 2.6 PLANTS A. Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed, complying with requirements in ANSI Z60.1. C. Vines: Provide vines of species indicated complying with requirements in ANSI Z60.1 as follows: 1. Two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than 3 runners 18 inches (450 mm) or more in length, and with a vigorous well-developed root system. 2. Provide field-grown vines. Vines grown in pots or other containers of adequate size and acclimated to outside conditions will also be acceptable. 2.7 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. 2.8 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 5 West End Heights 1. Type: Natural color, double ground hardwood mulch. B. Gravel Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color: 1. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone. 2. Size Range: 4 inches maximum, 2 minimum. 3. Color: Range of greys. C. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Border Concepts, Inc. b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc. c. Russell, J. D. Company (The). d. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation. 2. Edging Size: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 16” long. 4. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 5. Finish: Standard paint. 6. Paint Color: Black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. E. Trunk Wrapping: Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping. Wrap trees of 2-inch (50-mm) caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. F. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. G. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock. B. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill. Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 6 West End Heights C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes, 24 inches (600 mm) apart, into freedraining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix. C. Set balled and container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix. D. Organic Mulching: Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems. 3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Architect. C. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. 3.6 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging. 3.7 PLANTING BED MULCHING A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated. Provide mulch ring around trees in lawn areas. 1. Organic Mulch: Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems. 3.8 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Tree and Shrub Maintenance: Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. Lakeview Health Services PLANTS - 329300 PAGE 7 West End Heights B. Ground Cover and Plant Maintenance: Maintain and establish plantings by watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. 3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. 3.10 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property END OF SECTION 329300 Lakeview Health Services WATER DISTRIBUTION 331000-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings and accessories for below grade domestic water mains. B. Pipe bedding. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Sections B. Earthwork – Section 310000. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/AWWA C104 - Cement-mortar Lining for Ductile-iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. B. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber-gasket Joints for Ductile-iron and Gray-iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. C. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile-iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-lined Molds, for Water and Other Liquids. D. ANSI/AWWA C153 - Ductile-iron Compact Fittings. E. ANSI/AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-iron Water Mains and Appurtenances. F. NSF/ANSI 61 - Annex G and Annex F for lead-free requirements 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit to City of Ithaca, Owner and Engineer prior to final payment. B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, fittings, and invert elevations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Water system installation to be in accordance with City of Ithaca rules and regulations. B. Pipe and Fittings: Marked with manufacturer’s name, nominal diameter of openings, pressure rating, class or thickness, linings, material, date and country of manufacture. Submit manufacturer’s certificate. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Lead-free Requirements: Comply with the lead-free requirements as defined by the 2014 provisions of the Safe Drinking Water Act per NSF 372. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on piping, fittings, pipe restraints, couplings, and polyethylene wrap. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Push-on and mechanical joint pipe, Class 52, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151; pipe and fittings with double cement lining in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104. B. Fittings: Ductile iron, compact mechanical joint, working pressure of 350 psi in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153. Rubber gaskets for joints in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111. C. Mechanical Joint Pipe Restraint: Ductile iron wedge action retainer gland with auto-torque wedge bolts. Lakeview Health Services WATER DISTRIBUTION 331000-2 West End Heights 1. Manufacturers: Ebba Iron, Inc; Star; Romac Industries or equal a. Ductile Iron Pipe: Megalug Series 1104; Stargrip 3000; RomaGrip. b. PVC Pipe: Megalug Series 2000PV; Stargrip 4000;RomaGrip. D. Polyethylene Encasement: ANSI/AWWA C105 for polyethylene film, tube form, Class A (natural color), 8 mil nominal thickness. 2.2 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: For all excavation conditions pipe bedded in Bedding Stone, as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide 4,000 psi concrete for thrust blocking and pipe encasement. B. Joint accessories, including lubricant, for push-on, and mechanical joint pipe and fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that water main size, location and elevation are as shown on the drawings. B. Thoroughly clean inside of pipe and fittings before installation. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Schedule work involving disruption of water service between the hours of 11:00 PM and 7:00 AM. Do not interrupt existing service without authorization from the City of Ithaca. 3.3 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for work of this section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that a minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe and the bottom quadrant of the pipe will be below the level surface of the bedding material each side of the pipe barrel. C. Shape the bed to receive the pipe. Work bedding material under the pipe to provide continuous support. 3.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Maintain minimum 10 feet horizontal separation, unless shown otherwise, of water main from sanitary sewer mains and storm piping. Maintain minimum 18-inch vertical separation of water main and sanitary sewer mains and storm piping at crossings. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 3 inches. B. Install ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. Lay piping with bells facing the direction in which the work is progressing. C. Install polyethylene encasement on ductile iron pipe, fittings and valves at locations shown on the Drawings and in accordance with AWWA C105, Method A or Method B. D. Lay pipe flat or slope up to building. Do not create high points in the main. E. Route pipe in direct route between fittings. F. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks against solid rock or undisturbed earth at each bend or change of direction of pipe main. Leave all mechanical joint nuts and bolts accessible after form work has been removed. G. Establish elevations of buried pipe and pipe bored or jacked under highways, to ensure not less than 5.0 feet of cover, unless shown otherwise. H. Close all open ends or fittings at the end of each construction day with watertight expandable plugs. Do not use plywood, burlap, plastic or any other non-watertight covers. Lakeview Health Services WATER DISTRIBUTION 331000-3 West End Heights I. Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 3.5 PROTECTIVE WARNING TAPE AND TRACER WIRE A. Conductive Water Pipe: Install continuous warning tape at 18 inches below final grade. 3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS A. Flush, and swab all water pipe in accordance with City of Ithaca regulations. END OF SECTION 331000 Lakeview Health Services HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND 331300-1 West End Heights DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hydrostatic testing and disinfection of water system. B. Testing and reporting results. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Sections. B. Water Distribution – Section 331000. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/AWWA B301 - Standard for Liquid Chlorine. B. ANSI/AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-iron Water Mains and their appurtenances. C. ANSI/AWWA C651 - Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements. B. Certificate: Certify that integrity and cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Pressure and Leakage Report: 1. Time, date and location of testing point. 2. Length and diameter of pipe tested. 3. Average test pressure during the leakage test in pounds per square inch. 4. Actual leakage in gallons per hour. B. Disinfection Report; Record: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. C. Bacteriological Report; Record: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of N.Y.S.D.O.H. 8. Bacteriologist’s signature and authority. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform hydrostatic testing in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. Lakeview Health Services HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND 331300-2 West End Heights DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM B. Perform disinfection in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing potable water systems, certified by the State of New York. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable City of Ithaca rules and regulations for performing the work of this section. B. Provide certificate of compliance from City of Ithaca indicating approval of water system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: ANSI/AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify restraint of all joints and fittings before conducting hydrostatic testing. B. Verify scheduling of hydrostatic testing and disinfection activities with Owner and City of Ithaca. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Hydrostatic Testing: 1. Provide and attach required equipment and materials, including water, to perform testing. 2. Slowly fill valved sections of the main through a 1-inch connection to the existing system. 3. Expel air from the line through taps made at the high points. 4. Maintain an average test pressure for combined fire service and domestic mains of 150 psi for not less than two hours. Maintain an average test pressure for dedicated fire mains of 200 psi for not less than two hours. Measure test pressures at the highest point along the test section. 5. Examine mains for visible leaks or pipe movement and correct obvious defects before the leakage test is made. 6. Conduct leakage test concurrently with pressure test. Leakage is the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been filled with water. Leakage shall not be measured by a drop-in pressure in a test section over a period of time. No installation will be accepted until the leakage is less than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula: L = SD(P)½ 133,200 in which L equals the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe tested in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches; and P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. B. Disinfection: 1. Provide and attach required equipment and materials, including sampling taps and tapped plugs, to perform flushing and disinfection. 2. Flush all mains prior to disinfection at a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second. 3. Inject chlorine solution into system using a continuous feed method. Proportion the rate of chlorine solution application to maintain a minimum concentration of 100 mg/1 of available chlorine. Lakeview Health Services HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND 331300-3 West End Heights DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 4. Continue chlorine application until entire main is filled with chlorine solution. Measure and confirm concentration with a colorimetric testing device. 5. Maintain chlorinated water in main for a minimum 24 hours. Operate all valves and hydrants for their disinfection. 6. Chlorine concentration at the end of the 24-hour period to be at least 24 mg/l. 7. Furnish and monitor equipment used to neutralize heavily chlorinated water flushed from the mains to below 0.05 mg/l. Acceptable neutralizing chemicals are identified in Appendix C of AWWA 651. 8. Flush mains until the chlorine concentration leaving the mains is no higher than that generally in the system or less than 1.0 mg/l. 9. Make provisions for City of Ithaca staff to collect samples for water analyses. 10. Owner will pay the costs of a testing firm to determine via water analyses that the system is potable in accordance with NYSDOH requirements. 11. Remove all temporary sampling taps and install threaded brass plugs. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not place water distribution system in service until test results indicate that the system is bacteriologically safe. END OF SECTION 331300 Lakeview Health Services SANITARY SEWERAGE 333000-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, and accessories for sanitary sewer mains. B. Cleanout access. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Sections B. Earthwork – Section 310000. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM F1417-92(1998) Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air. B. ANSI/ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM D2241 - Standard specification for poly vinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR). D. ASTM A536 – Ductile Iron Castings 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for sewer pipe, fittings house traps and cleanout covers. B. Record Drawings: Locate pipe and fittings before backfilling. Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground connections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual location of pipe runs, fittings, termination of laterals, couplings, lateral connections to the main, and invert elevations. B. Submit to Owner and Engineer prior to final payment. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research Owner’s utility records, and verify existing utility locations. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt public utilities unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission. 3. Coordinate work with the location, alignment and elevation of water mains and storm sewers. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe and Fittings: All plastic sewer pipe and fittings marked with manufacturer’s name, nominal diameter of opening, material designation “PVC”, the legend “Type PSM SDR 35”, identity of standard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Gravity Lines: Lakeview Health Services SANITARY SEWERAGE 333000-2 West End Heights 1. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material, SDR 35; nominal diameter as shown on the drawings; bell-and- spigot style rubber-ring sealed gasket joint. 2.2 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined, for non-pressure joints. B. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. C. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. D. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. E. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. F. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert. 2.3 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings: All pipe and fittings bedded and encased in bedding stone, as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify main size, location and elevations of connection to existing system are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that intended locations and elevations of pipe runs shown on Drawings, will not conflict with storm sewerage, gas and water mains. C. Verify minimum separation requirements at crossings with other utilities. 3.2 BEDDING A. Excavate in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that a minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe. C. Shape the bed to receive the pipe, Work bedding material under the pipe to provide continuous support. 3.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Maintain minimum 10 feet horizontal separation of sewer main from water mains. Maintain minimum 18-inch vertical separation of sewer main and water main at crossings. B. Install plastic sewer pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer’s instructions. C. Install pipe in straight line between fittings to grades indicated on drawings with unbroken continuity of invert. Horizontal dimensions indicated for piping are to centerline of fittings. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Lift or roll pipe into position, do not drop or drag pipe over prepared bedding material. F. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. G. Shore pipe to required position and retain in place until after placing and compacting of adjacent backfill. Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope. Lakeview Health Services SANITARY SEWERAGE 333000-3 West End Heights H. Close all open pipe ends and fittings at the end of each construction day with watertight expandable plugs. Do not use plywood, burlap, plastic and other non-watertight covers. I. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 4.0 feet of cover, unless shown otherwise. J. Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clear interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. B. If testing and inspection indicate defects, correct such defects and retest. END OF SECTION 333000 Lakeview Health Services STORM SEWERAGE 334000-1 West End Heights PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm sewer piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Underdrain systems. C. Pre-cast concrete drainage inlets and frames, grates and covers. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Sections. B. Earthwork – Section 310000. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A536 – Ductile Iron Castings B. ANSI/ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC), SDR 35, Solid and Perforated Sewer Pipe. C. ASTM F405 - Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings. D. New York State Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials, latest edition. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, fittings, connections, drainage structures, and invert elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with location of building drains, site drain inlets and alignment of curbing. B. Coordinate work with location and alignment of existing drainage structures. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for storm sewer pipe, tubing, structures, and cleanouts. B. Materials Source: Submit name and address of imported aggregate materials suppliers. Provide materials from same source throughout the Work. Change of source requires Engineer approval. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details and attachments for precast concrete structures including flow inverts, frames, covers and grates. D. Record Drawings: Showing structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. Lakeview Health Services STORM SEWERAGE 334000-2 West End Heights PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM SEWER PIPE AND ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) material, SDR 35; nominal diameter as shown on the drawings; and bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed gasket joint. B. Underdrain Pipe and Fittings: 1. ASTM 3350 with strength requirements of AASHTO M252, Type C; solid and perforated corrugated polyethylene pipe, with synthetic filter wrap; heavy duty. Sizes and lengths as shown on Drawings. 2. Internal or external couplers, or coupling bands same material as pipe. 2.2 DRAINAGE INLETS A. Reinforced pre-cast concrete drainage inlets in accordance with ASTM C478. AASHTO HS-20-44 design loading. Shape and inside dimensions in accordance with requirements shown on Drawings. Base and riser sections to have a minimum 6-inch thickness and lengths as necessary to meet invert and rim elevations. B. Heavy Duty Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48, Grade 35B, gray iron. Uniform quality, close grained, free from blow holes, shrinkage, cracks and other defects. Plugging of defective castings not permitted. Grates to seat in any position without rocking. Grates and covers as specified on Drawings. C. Grade Rings: Pre-cast concrete only. 2.3 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Storm Sewer Pipe: All storm sewer pipe bedded and encased in bedding stone as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. B. Underdrain Pipe: All underdrain pipe bedded and encased in drainage stone, as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 2.4 COUPLINGS AND SLEEVES A. Coupling: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. B. Sleeves: ASTM C425, rubber for vitrified clay pipe; ASTM C443, rubber for concrete pipe; ASTM C564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe; and ASTM F477, elastomeric seal for plastic pipe. Sleeves for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials to be joined. C. Bands and Clamp Housing: 301 stainless steel, one at each pipe insert. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that inside dimensions of drainage inlets, pipe slopes and invert elevations are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that existing underdrain systems are correctly reconnected to the storm sewer system. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Excavate for trenches and structures in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earthwork”. 3.3 BEDDING A. For storm sewer pipe, place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that a minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe. B. For underdrain tubing, place a minimum of 4 inches of drainage stone beneath the invert. Place balance of aggregate encasement to depth and width shown on the Drawings. Lakeview Health Services STORM SEWERAGE 334000-3 West End Heights 3.4 PIPE AND TUBING A. Install corrugated polyethylene plastic pipe and couplings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install plastic perforated pipe, in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer’s instructions. C. Lift or roll pipe in position. Do not drop or drag pipe over prepared bedding. Lay pipe at down-stream end and progress upstream. Begin work at existing catch basin. D. Shore pipe to required position; retain in place until after compaction of adjacent fills. Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope. E. Lay pipe to invert elevations shown on Drawings. F. Refer to Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for backfill requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. 3.5 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Place pre-cast concrete structures on leveled bedding stone and at required elevation to maintain pipe invert elevations shown on Drawings. B. Install pipe flush with the inside face of structure wall. Seal voids between pipe and knockout with cement grout inside and outside of structure. C. Do not begin backfilling until cement grout seal is completely set. D. Maintain drainage by installing frame and grate flush with temporary finished grade and bring to final elevation at time of paving with pre-cast concrete grade ring and grout frame permanently in place. E. Mount frame level in grout to required elevations and secured to top of structure. Align inlet frames to match the line of curbing. Set grate in frame and correct deficiency in casting such that grate will seat in position without rocking. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Intended Elevation of Culvert Invert: 1/2 inch. B. Maximum Offset of Pipe from True Alignment: 3 inches. C. Maximum Variation in Profile of Structure from Intended Position: 1/8 percent. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of pipe to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Make inspection after pipe has been installed and backfill is in place, and again at completion of work. B. If inspection indicates poor alignment, displaced or collapsed pipe, or other defect, correct such defect and reinspect. END OF SECTION 334000 & Elwyn Palmer Consulting Engineers, PLLC Subsurface Investigation Report for Proposed Lakeview Housing Project 709-713 W. Court Street Ithaca, NY Prepared for: Mr. Mark Pandolf, AIA, LEED AP PLAN Architectural Studio, PC 250 S. Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, NY 14604 Provided By: Elwyn & Palmer Consulting Engineers PLLC 213 E. Seneca Street Ithaca, New York 14850 Phone 607.272.5060 Fax 607.272.5065 www.ElwynPalmer.com October 2017 & 213 E. Seneca Street, Ithaca, NY 14850 Elwyn Palmer Consulting Engineers, PLLC 607.272.5060 T 607.272.5065 F www.ElwynPalmer.com Page 1 of 6 October 4, 2017 Mr. Mark Pandolf, AIA, LEED AP PLAN Architectural Studio, PC 250 S. Avenue, Suite 100 Rochester, NY 14604 Re: Subsurface Investigation Report 709 W. Court Street Ithaca, NY Dear Mark: This report will summarize the findings of a subsurface investigation that was performed at the site during the period of August 10 through August 14, 2017. This report includes a description of the work performed, a discussion of the findings, and our recommendations for foundation and pavement design. A. SCOPE OF WORK The scope of work included advancing 2 soil borings at the site. Both borings were advanced to a depth of 100 ft. The original intent was to advance more borings but the presence of existing buildings on the site that are to be razed as part of the proposed project prevented this. A site plan showing the location of the borings is attached in the Appendix. Logs of each boring are included in the Appendix. The findings of the subsurface investigation and our recommendations for foundation and pavement design will be discussed in this report. B. SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION The project involves construction of a five-story mixed use building with adjacent at-grade parking to be constructed on the south side of Court Street west of Meadow Street The first story will be a non-combustible steel frame structure with a 2 hour rated concrete podium second floor slab supporting four stories of wood framed apartments above. The project site is flat with virtually no grade change in the proposed construction area. C. SUBSURFACE FINDINGS Soil borings were advanced using hollow stem augers. Split-spoon soil samples were taken in accordance with ASTM D1586. A site plan showing the boring locations is attached. Boring logs for each of the borings are attached. Boring B1 was advanced from approximately the center of the proposed building. The boring encountered 2.5 inches of asphalt pavement underlain by typical urban fill consisting of sand, gravel, coal ash, and glass to a depth of 3 ft. Below 3 ft the natural material was encountered. It consisted of soft, compressible silts and clays with significant layers of peat and traces of marl. & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com Page 2 of 6 At 74.5 ft the boring encountered a dense sand and gravel layer that extended to approximately 82.7 ft. Below this depth the boring encountered saturated loose fine sand and soft clay and silt to the bottom of the boring at 100 ft. The log for boring B1 indicated the soil encountered was wet and saturated beginning at a depth of 7 ft. Standing groundwater was measured at 8.1 ft when the boring was at a depth of 16 ft and as shallow as 10.1 ft when the boring depth was 90 ft. Boring B2 was advanced near the western edge of the proposed new building. The boring encountered fill consisting of sand and gravel to a depth of 3.5 ft. Below this level the natural material encountered was similar to that found in boring B1 to a depth of 10.5 ft. A decision was made to save cost and time by not sampling through the thick deposit of soft material. The driller was instructed to auger through this soft material until he reached something substantial and then sample from there. Medium dense sand was encountered beginning at approximately 73 ft. The sand began getting loose again at approximately 82.5 ft. Below this elevation the boring encountered loose wet sand and soft silt and clay to the bottom of boring at 100 ft. The log for boring B2 indicated the soil encountered was wet and saturated beginning at a depth of 8.5 ft. Standing groundwater was measured at 10.7 ft when the boring was at a depth of 15 ft and 17.5 ft when the boring depth was 100 ft. D. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS We have completed an analysis of the soils at the site for the proposed building construction. Based on the proposed development we believe the proposed structure must be supported on deep foundations. Due to the thick deep deposits of very soft and compressible soils at the site conventional shallow foundations and concrete slabs-on-grade would not be structurally sound and would lead to significant settlement of the proposed new building. A deep foundation system could consist of end bearing steel piles that would be embedded into the medium dense sand layer that was encountered between approximately 73 ft and 82.5 ft below grade. It is important to note that due to the relatively thin thickness of this bearing layer care will be required during pile driving operations to prevent driving through this layer and into the underlying soft material. This type of foundation would result in virtually zero post-construction settlement due to its characteristics and its bearing layer. However, since this type of foundation is costly, as part of our analysis we considered an alternative type of deep foundation system. Recently some local projects situated in areas with problematic soils have been supported on shallower lightly loaded timber piles. These piles would typically extend to 40 ft below grade and rely on skin friction between the pile and the soil for support. These piles would be much more lightly loaded than the steel piles resulting in a greater number of timber piles. However, these piles are considerably less expensive and can be installed very quickly. As part of preparing this report we discussed this option with Ed Isabel from J&E Pile Driving from Syracuse. He is also a licensed professional engineer and believes this system can work and result in significant cost savings. However, he would want to perform a test pile program & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com Page 3 of 6 where 3-5 timber piles would be installed at the site to the design depth and then tested for capacity. The estimated cost for this program would be approximately $25,000. Both systems will require pile caps and concrete grade beams that span between the pile caps to support the wall foundations and first floor slab. Both options should be considered based on overall cost, construction expediency, and suitability for the site. We recommend that the deep foundation design for the project be a delegated design so that the prospective bidders can provide the most economical design based on their particular expertise. Based on the measured groundwater levels we do not anticipate groundwater being a large scale problem during construction. However, some perched groundwater may be present so dewatering of the site may be required to maintain a dry working area during construction of the foundations. E. SEISMIC DESIGN Based on the soils encountered in the borings, the project site can be classified as Seismic Site Class E according to the current edition of the Building Code of New York State. The site is classified as Class E due to the thick deposits of soft low strength material. The subsurface exploration did not reveal soils vulnerable to liquefaction or collapse under seismic loading. Based on the location of the site and the site class, we determined a value for the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration for short periods, (SMS) of 0.314g, and at 1-second period (SM1) of 0.197g. A USGS seismic analysis of the site is included in the Appendix F. PAVEMENT DESIGN As part of our pavement design process we are providing two pavement sections; one standard duty and one heavy duty. The designs were developed based on the results of the subsurface investigation and anticipated traffic loading for this type of facility. The heavy duty section should be used in areas subjected to repeated truck traffic. The standard duty section can be used in areas designated for car parking. Since having standing water immediately below a pavement structure will greatly reduce the lifespan of the pavement, we recommend addition of underdrains beneath the new pavement to eliminate this problem and to route any groundwater away from the pavement and to a proper drainage structure. We have provided recommendations for preparation of the subgrade that are important. The subgrade must be sloped at a pitch at least equal to the pavement surface slope to promote drainage to low points and to prevent water accumulation on the subgrade. We recommend that underdrains be installed at all low points to convey this water to appropriate drainage. & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com Page 4 of 6 We recommend the following pavement sections: Standard Section Top 1.5 inches Binder 2 inches Subbase 8 inches Mirafi 600X geotextile Heavy Duty Section Top 1.5 inches Binder 3 inches Subbase 12 inches Mirafi 600X geotextile The top and binder courses should conform to NYSDOT specifications for Type 6 top and Type 3 binder, respectively. The subbase material should conform to NYSDOT specification 304.14 and 733.0404 Subbase Course, Type 4. Subbase material should be placed in lifts and compacted to 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. Prior to placement of the subbase layer the subgrade should be proofrolled in the presence of a qualified observer using a self-propelled roller weighing at least 30,000 lbs. Soft or uncompactable areas should be over-excavated and replaced with approved select fill material. Due to the silty and clayey nature of the subgrade material, excavation and proof rolling should take place in relatively dry conditions. Underdrains shall be located to convey water away from pavements and into drainage structures or ditches. We recommend 4 inch diameter perforated drains be placed in 2 ft square trenches that are filled with drainage stone and wrapped in filter fabric and located to pick up any water that is moving along the interface between the subgrade and subbase layers. Underdrains should be located at all valleys, low or flat points, and along any curbed edge. These are all areas where water could collect and both soften the subgrade and contribute to frost action. G. RECOMMENDATIONS Based on the results of the subsurface investigation and engineering analyses, we have the following recommendations: Site Preparation and Excavation 1. Clear, grub, and strip topsoil and remove significant root structures within new construction areas. Remove all remnants of any razed structures from within the new footprint. 2. In areas where fill is required, proofroll subgrade before placing fill by making at least 4 overlapping passes in perpendicular directions with a self-propelled roller weighing at least 30,000 lbs. Soft or uncompactable areas should be excavated and replaced with & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com Page 5 of 6 granular structural fill approved by the Engineer. The structural fill should be placed to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. 3. All excavation should be performed in accordance with all OSHA and other applicable safety standards. 4. Any necessary dewatering operations should be configured to route surface runoff and groundwater away from site and out of the excavation. Operations shall conform to applicable environmental regulations. Foundation Design and Construction 1. The recommended foundation for the proposed structure based on the subsurface soils encountered during our investigation is a deep foundation system bearing on dense layers below the compressible material. This type of foundation would result in effectively zero settlement. On this site, that would most likely involve steel piles bearing between 73 ft and 83 ft below grade. As an alternate we have suggested a deep foundation system consisting of shallower timber piles that would likely be less expensive and quicker to install but would require a test pile program costing approximately $25,000. 2. Exterior wall foundations spanning between pile caps should extend to 4 ft below grade for frost protection. Foundation subgrade to be free of loose or disturbed material and to be approved at the time of construction by the Engineer’s representative. 3. The first floor slab should be supported on grade beams that span between pile caps. Pavement Recommendations 1. Pavement subgrade to be proofrolled in the presence of the Engineer’s representative as described above. 2. Proofrolling to consist of at least 4 passes in each of two perpendicular directions. Proofrolling will compact and seal the subgrade and identify areas of soft or uncompactable subgrade requiring repair prior to placing subbase. 3. Repair unstable areas identified by proofrolling by over-excavating and replacing with compacted, stable subbase material. 4. Recommended pavement sections were provided previously in this report. H. CLOSING Elwyn & Palmer has prepared this report based on our interpretation of the subsurface conditions at the project site and our understanding of the proposed project. Changes in scope, location, structure type, or loads should be brought to our attention for review to allow us to make changes as necessary to the recommendations provided. Elwyn & Palmer has performed these services in a manner consistent with the standard methods and level of care exercised by members of the geotechnical engineering profession. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made in connection with the providing of geotechnical engineering services. & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com Page 6 of 6 We appreciate the opportunity to be of service on this project. Please call if you have any questions or require additional information. Sincerely, ELWYN & PALMER CONSULTING ENGINEERS PLLC Michael C. Palmer, PhD, PE Partner Attachments & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com APPENDIX & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com BORING LOCATION PLAN Elwyn Palmer & Ithaca, New York www.ElwynPalmer.com607.272.5060 S1 SOIL BORING LOCATION PLAN SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION LAKEVIEW HOUSING PROJECT 709 -713 W COURT ST ITHACA, NY 8/24/17 25005 N SOIL BORING LOCATION PLAN & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com BORING LOGS & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com General Information and Key to Subsurface Logs The subsurface logs attached to this report present the observations and mechanical data collected by the driller at the site, supplemented by classification of the material removed from the boring as determined through visual identification by technicians in the laboratory. It is cautioned that the materials removed form the borings represent only a fraction of the total volume of the deposits at the site and may not necessarily be representative of the subsurface conditions between adjacent borings or between sampled intervals. The data presented on the subsurface logs together with the recovered samples will provide basis for evaluating the character of the subsurface conditions relative to the project. The evaluation must consider all the recorded details and their significance relative to each other. Often analyses of standard boring data indicate the need for additional testing or sampling procedures to more accurately evaluate the subsurface conditions. Any evaluation of the contents of this report and the recovered samples must be performed by Professionals. The information presented in the following list defines some of the procedures and terms used on the subsurface logs to describe the conditions encountered. 1. The figures in the depth column define the scale of the subsurface log. 2. The sample column shows the depth range from which the sample was recovered. The sample type column will show an “S” for split spoon sample, a “T” for a tube sample and a “C” for a rock core sample. 3. The sample number is used for identification o n sample containers and in laboratory reports. 4. The Blows on Sampler column shows results of the Standard Penetration Tests and indicates the number of blows required to drive a split spoon sampler into the soil. The number of blows required for each six inches of penetration is recorded. The first six inches of penetration is considered the seating drive. The number of blows required for the second and third six inches of penetration is termed the penetration resistance, N. The sampler diameter, hammer weight, and length of drop are noted on the log. 5. All recovered soil samples are reviewed in the laboratory by an engineering technician, geologist, or geotechnical engineer unless noted otherwise. The visual descriptions are made on the basis of a combination of the driller’s field descriptions and observations and the sample as viewed in the laboratory. The method of visual classification is based primarily on the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487) with regard to particle size and plasticity. The relative portion by weight by weight of tow or more soil types is described for granular soils in accordance with “Suggested Methods of Test for Identification of Soils” by D.M. Burmister (ASTM Special Technical Publication No. 479, June 1970). The description of relative soil density or consistency is based on Penetration Test results. The description of soil moisture is based upon relative wetness of the soil as recovered and is described as dry, damp, moist, wet, and saturated. The presence of boulders and large gravel is sometimes, but not necessarily, detected by an evaluation of sampler blows or the behavior of the drill rig. 6. The description of rock is based on the recovered rock core and the driller’s observations. 7. The stratification lines present the approximate boundary between soil types. Actual boundaries may vary between sampling intervals and the transition may be gradual. Solid stratification lines are based on the driller’s field observations. 8. Miscellaneous observations and procedures noted by the driller are shown on the logs, including water level observations. It is important to realize the reliability of the water level observations depends upon the soil type (water does not readily stabilize in a hole through fine grained soils) and that drill water used to advance the boring may influence the observations. The groundwater level typically will fluctuate seasonally. One or more perched or trapped water levels may exist in the ground seasonally. All the available readings should be evaluated. If definite conclusion cannot be made, it may be necessary to examine the conditions more thoroughly through test pit excavations or observation wells. 9. The length of rock core run is defined as the length of penetration of the core barrel. Core recovery is the length of core recovered divided by the core run. The RQD (Rock Quality Designation) is the total pieces of NX core exceeding 4 inches in length divided by the core run. Fresh, irregular or drilling induced breaks are ignored and the pieces counted as intact lengths. RQD values are valid only for NX size cores (2.125” diameter). The barrel size is noted in the logs. & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com Definition of Descriptors used in Boring Logs Soil Type and Particle Size Soil Type Proportions Type Size Term Percent of Sample Boulder >12” “and” 35-50 Cobble 12”-3” “some” 20-35 Gravel “little” 10-20 Coarse 3”- ¾” “trace” 1-10 Fine ¾”-#4 Sand Coarse #4-#10 Medium #10-#40 Fine #40-#200 Silt <#200 Clay <#200 Relative Compactness or Consistency Granular Soils Fine Grained Soils Descriptor Blows/ft (N) Descriptor Blows/ft (N) Loose <11 Very Soft 0-2 Med-Dense 11-30 Soft 2-4 Dense 31-50 Medium 4-8 Very Dense >51 Stiff 8-15 Very Stiff 15-30 Hard >30 Stratification Description Varved – Horizontal uniform layers or seams Layer – Soil deposit more than 6” thick Seam – Soil deposit less than 6” thick Parting – Soil deposit less than 1/8” thick Rock Classification Terms Quality Terms Definition Hardness Soft Scratched by fingernail Medium hard Scratched easily by penknife Hard Scratched with difficulty by penknife Very hard Cannot be scratched with penknife Weathering Very weathered Judged by the relative amounts of disintegration, iron staining, Weathered core recovery, clay seams, etc. Sound Bedding Laminated/Fissile Less than 0.08” Thinly bedded ½” to 2” Medium bedded 2” to 2ft Thickly bedded 2 ft to 4 ft Massive More than 6 ft Boring No. Project No. LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet of Date Started BORING LOG Date Completed Driller lb. Fall in. lb. Fall in. 1 S 0.7 2 S 0.7 3 S 1.4 4 S 0.9 5 S 1.0 6 S 0.9 7 S 1.1 8 S 1.9 9 S 1.8 10 S 1.7 11 S 1.9 12 S 1.6 13 S 1.5 MOIST BROWN SOFT SILT. SOME FINE SAND WITH COAL ASH. TRACE GLASS (FILL) SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND. LITTLE PEAT. TRACE SILT 30.5 19.5 1.0'/1.5' WET GREY SOFT CLAY. LITTLE SILT. TRACE FINE SAND LENSES MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 7.0 Depth of Change BLACKTOP 0.2 3 52 2 8 Sample Recovery Client ELWYN PALMER Casing Hammer: Wt. Sample Hammer: Wt. % RQD SOIL Blows on Sampler Ft. 1.5'/2.0' Rock Recovery Weather Conditions: Casing Project LIVING FACILITY Location 709 W COURT ST, ITHACA, NY Sample Number Depth 2 MOIST BROWN LOOSE COARSE TO FINE SAND AND 1WOH WOH 2 2 251.0 1 2 1 WOH46.0 WOH WOH 4 1 41.0 1 WOH 1 WOH 1 1 1WOH31.0 WOR 1 1 1 321 11 2 2 3 316.0 1 WOH10.0 WOH WOH 1 21 1 1 2 3 6.0 2 5 3 8.0 5 6 6 2 3 2.5 4.0 21.0 26.0 7426 SHACKHAM ROAD TULLY, N.Y. 40 35 45 50 2 36.034.0 44.0 39.0 49.0 30 24.0 29.0 25 5 0.5 20 2.5 4.0 6.0 19.0 14.0 15 10 8.0 To (Ft) 0'/0.5' N Sample Type 0.5'/1.0' Sample Depth From (Ft) 30 16.0 Soil Sampler Other: Rock Sampler: CME 55 3 1/4" I.D. HOLLOW STEM AUGERS Drill Rig PHONE (607)842-6580 8.1 REMARKS 10:45 AM SATURATED GREY SOFT CLAY. LITTLE SILT 22.0 23.0SATURATED GREY SOFT CLAY. LITTLE SILT Water atDate Ground Water Observations 08/10/17 Time2" SPLIT SPOON 140 13.5 Casing at Hole at 08/10/17 Boring Location Surface Elevation 08/10/17 HARRY LYON AS STAKED, BY CLIENT 13.0 SATURATED BROWN SOFT PEAT 17.0 TRACE PEAT SATURATED BROWN SOFT ORGANIC SILT TRACE PEAT 32.0 B1 1 2 80 SUNNY CONSULTING ENGINEERS PROPOSED ASSISTED 3.0 1.0FINE GRAVEL (FILL) MOIST GREY SOFT CLAY. SOME SILT SATURATED BROWN SOFT ORGANIC SILT WITH SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND. TRACE SILT PEAT. TRACE MARL SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND. SOME SILT 45.0 47.0TRACE PEAT SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND 45.7 Boring No. Project No. LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet of Date Started BORING LOG Date Completed Driller lb. Fall in. lb. Fall in. 14 S 1.4 15 S 2.0 16 S 1.7 17 S 1.8 18 S 1.6 19 S 1.5 20 S 1.3 21 S 1.4 22 S 1.0 23 S 1.0 24 S 1.1 25 S 1.7 26 S 1.5 SATURATED GREY SOFT ORGANIC SILT. LITTLE COBBLE AT 81.5 SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND GRADES TO SATURATED GREY COMPACT COARSE 76.0 SATURATED GREY COMPACT COARSE TO FINE SAND AND FINE GRAVEL. TRACE SILT 78.0TO FINE SAND AND FINE GRAVEL SATURATED GREY FIRM FINE SAND. SOME 1.0'/1.5' SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND SATURATED GREY SOFT SILT. SOME FINE SAND MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 57.0 Depth of Change Sample Recovery Client ELWYN PALMER Casing Hammer: Wt. Sample Hammer: Wt. % RQD SOIL Blows on Sampler Ft. 1.5'/2.0' Rock Recovery Weather Conditions: Casing Project LIVING FACILITY Location 709 W COURT ST, ITHACA, NY Sample Number Depth 42 S#17 TRACE ROOTS 2 3 5100.0 2 3 1 196.0 WOR 1 2 92.0 1 1 3 2 2 87.0 WOR 2 4 62 285.0 4 4 7 23 9 50/.3 1481.8 26% 15 37 4 10 9 11.0 78.0 20 27 17 80.0 28 20 52244 3 6WOR 3 3 6 1067.5 5 461.0 1 2 2 52 5 22 1 456.0 70.0 76.0 7426 SHACKHAM ROAD TULLY, N.Y. 90 85 95 100 2 85.0 94.0 90.0 98.0 80 74.0 76.0 83.0 80.0 78.0 75 55 70 54.0 68.0 65.5 65 60 59.0 To (Ft) 0'/0.5' N Sample Type 0.5'/1.0' Sample Depth From (Ft) 30 11:15 AM 92.0 Soil Sampler Other: 90.0 100.0 84.0Rock Sampler: 08/10/17 97.0 CME 55 3 1/4" I.D. HOLLOW STEM AUGERS Drill Rig PHONE (607)842-6580 14.3 10.1 15.5 REMARKS 7:30 PM 74.5 Water atDate Ground Water Observations 08/10/17 Time2" SPLIT SPOON 140 89.5 Casing at Hole at 08/10/17 Boring Location Surface Elevation 08/10/17 HARRY LYON AS STAKED, BY CLIENT 82.7COARSE SAND TO FINE GRAVEL SATURATED GREY SOFT SILT. LITTLE FINE SAND 85.5 B1 2 2 80 SUNNY CONSULTING ENGINEERS PROPOSED ASSISTED 55.5 60.0 CLAY. TRACE MARL 9:10 AM 08/10/17 TRACE CLAY 76.5 SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND. LITTLE SILT 93.0 SATURATED GREY SOFT CLAY AND SILT WITH OCCASIONAL RED BROWN CLAY SEAMS UP TO 1" THICK TRACE CLAY LENSES BORING TERMINATED AT 100.0 97.0 SATURATED GREY SOFT SILT. SOME FINE SAND AUGERS EASILY 74.5 - THIS MATERIAL Boring No. Project No. LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet of Date Started BORING LOG Date Completed Driller lb. Fall in. lb. Fall in. 1 S 1.2 2 S 1.1 3 S 1.4 4 S 1.0 5 S 1.0 6 S 1.3 B2 1 2 74 HAZY GRADES TO SATURATED GREY SOFT SILT. SOME CONSULTING ENGINEERS PROPOSED ASSISTED 10.5SAND. TRACE DECOMPOSED ROOT FIBERS 3.5 MOIST BROWN FIRM COARSE TO FINE SAND AND 8.5 4.5WITH ROOT FIBERS 6:00 PM 08/14/17 08/14/17 Boring Location Surface Elevation 08/14/17 HARRY LYON AS STAKED, BY CLIENT CLAY. TRACE FINE SAND Water atDate Ground Water Observations 08/14/17 Time2" SPLIT SPOON 140 13.5 Casing at Hole at CME 55 3 1/4" I.D. HOLLOW STEM AUGERS Drill Rig PHONE (607)842-6580 10.7 17.5 29.0 REMARKS 11:00 AM30 7:30 PM 15.0 Soil Sampler Other: 100.0 56.5 97.5Rock Sampler: 08/14/17 OUT To (Ft) 0'/0.5' N Sample Type 0.5'/1.0' Sample Depth From (Ft) 5 0.0 20 10.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 15 10 8.0 30 25 7426 SHACKHAM ROAD TULLY, N.Y. 40 35 45 50 2 11 7 12 6 6 2.0 4.0 2 3 3 6.0 4 6 3 8.0 12.0 1 1 2110.0 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 9 5 TO FINE SAND (FILL) 0.6 Client ELWYN PALMER Casing Hammer: Wt. Sample Hammer: Wt. % RQD SOIL Blows on Sampler Ft. 1.5'/2.0' Rock Recovery Weather Conditions: Casing Project LIVING FACILITY Location 709 W COURT ST, ITHACA, NY Sample Number Depth 1.0'/1.5' SOME CLAY. TRACE FINE SAND WET GREY SOFT SILT. LITTLE CLAY. TRACE FINE MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Depth of Change MOIST BROWN FIRM FINE GRAVEL AND COARSE 3 63 10 21 Sample Recovery FINE GRAVEL (FILL) MOIST BROWN SOFT SILT. LITTLE FINE SAND GRADES TO MOIST BROWN GREY MEDIUM SILT Boring No. Project No. LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet of Date Started BORING LOG Date Completed Driller lb. Fall in. lb. Fall in. 7 S 1.7 8 S 1.9 9 S 1.7 10 S 1.7 11 S 1.3 12 S 1.0 13 S 1.4 14 S 1.2 15 S 1.1 16 S 1.3 17 S 1.6 18 S 1.5 19 S 1.9 SAND AND FINE GRAVEL NO WOOD OBSERVED 1.0'/1.5' SATURATED GREY SOFT SILT. SOME FINE SAND MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Depth of Change Sample Recovery Client ELWYN PALMER Casing Hammer: Wt. Sample Hammer: Wt. % RQD SOIL Blows on Sampler Ft. 1.5'/2.0' Rock Recovery Weather Conditions: Casing Project LIVING FACILITY Location 709 W COURT ST, ITHACA, NY Sample Number Depth 33 2 6 5 WOR100.0 WOR WOR WOR 196.0 WOR WOR 91.0 1 WOR 3 3 2 5 1114 584.0 14 30 15 16 1582.0 7% 14 19 17 19 7 12.0 78.0 24 40 21 80.0 17 22 2412 32 1 7 12 12 104 66 1514 72.0 3 366.0 3 261.0 2 1 2 2WOR 1 72.0 74.0 76.0 7426 SHACKHAM ROAD TULLY, N.Y. 90 85 95 100 WOR 86.084.0 94.0 89.0 98.0 80 74.0 76.0 80.0 82.0 78.0 75 55 70 70.0 64.0 65 60 59.0 To (Ft) 0'/0.5' N Sample Type 0.5'/1.0' Sample Depth From (Ft) 30 Soil Sampler Other: Rock Sampler: CME 55 3 1/4" I.D. HOLLOW STEM AUGERS Drill Rig PHONE (607)842-6580 BELOW 60.0' REMARKS 73.5SOME SILT SATURATED GREY COMPACT COARSE TO FINE 70.5 Water atDate Ground Water Observations Time2" SPLIT SPOON 140 Casing at Hole at 08/14/17 Boring Location Surface Elevation 08/14/17 HARRY LYON AS STAKED, BY CLIENT 82.5 SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND AND SILT 83.5 B2 2 2 CONSULTING ENGINEERS PROPOSED ASSISTED TRACE WOOD 59.5 SATURATED GREY VARVED SOFT SILT. SOME GRADES TO SATURATED GREY LOOSE FINE SAND 84.0CLAY. TRACE FINE SAND SATURATED GREY SOFT SILT. SOME FINE SAND 87.0 TRACE RED BROWN CLAY SATURATED GREY VARVED SOFT SILT. SOME FINE SAND. TRACE CLAY BORING TERMINATED AT 100.0 & E P www.ElwynPalmer.com SEISMIC DESIGN REPORT Design Maps Summary Report Report Title Building Code Reference Document Site Coordinates Site Soil Classification Risk Category User–Specified Input Lakeview Housing Project Thu August 24, 2017 17:10:50 UTC 2012/2015 International Building Code (which utilizes USGS hazard data available in 2008) 42.44222°N, 76.50917°W Site Class E – “Soft Clay Soil” I/II/III USGS–Provided Output SS = 0.126 g SMS = 0.314 g SDS = 0.209 g S1 = 0.056 g SM1 = 0.197 g SD1 = 0.131 g For information on how the SS and S1 values above have been calculated from probabilistic (risk-targeted) and deterministic ground motions in the direction of maximum horizontal response, please return to the application and select the “2009 NEHRP” building code reference document. Although this information is a product of the U.S. Geological Survey, we provide no warranty, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy of the data contained therein. This tool is not a substitute for technical subject-matter knowledge. Design Maps Summary Report https://earthquake.usgs.gov/cn2/designmaps/us/summary.php?template=... 1 of 1 8/24/17, 1:19 PM